Nea Sub-Station Nepal

NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY
(An Undertaking of Government of Nepal)
TRANSMISSION DIRECTORATE
KOSHI CORRIDOR 220 kV TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT
BIDDING DOCUMENT
FOR
Procurement of Plant Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and

Commissioning of 220 kV Basantapur ( Terhathum District)-
Dhungesangu ( Taplejung District) Double circuit Transmission Line
and 132/33 kV Substation in Dhungesangu Sangu (Taplejung District)
Single-Stage, Two-Envelope Bidding Procedure
Section 6- Employer’s Requirement

Issued on: ………………….
Issued to:
Invitation for Bids No.: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3
Employer: Nepal Electricity Authority
Country: Nepal
PART-II OF III
Package-KC3
Koshi Corridor 220kV Double Circuit Transmission Line Project
Part II-Section 6: Employer’s Requirements
Contents
Koshi Corridor 220kV Transmission Line Project, Nepal
Package- KC3: Construction of 220 kV Double Circuit Transmission Line from
Basantapur– Dhunge Sangu and 132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge Sangu
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Part II :Section 6: Employer's Requirement
PACKAGE-KC3
KOSHI CORRIDOR 220 KV PROJECT
BASANTAPUR-DHUNGESANGU 220 KV TRANSMISSION LINE
AND
DHUNGESANGU 132/33 KV SUBSTATION
PART II-SECTION 6: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS
CONTENTS
Sl.no. Description
1. Section-I General Information and Scope
2. Section-II General Technical Requirement

Section II-A Transmission Line
Section II-B Substation
3. Section-III Specific Technical Requirement

Section III-A Transmission Line
Section III-B Substation
4. Section-IV Technical Specifications

Section IV-A Technical Specifications for Transmission Lines
Chapter-1 Towers and Accessories
Design, Fabrication, Assembly, Testing and Supply of
Galvanised Steel Towers including Tower Accessories
and Design of Foundation
Chapter-2 Detailed Survey
Part II-Section 6 Contents Page 1 of 2

Chapter-3 Cadastral Survey, Check Survey, Soil Investigation,

Foundation & Civil works, Erection, Stringing, Testing
& Commissioning
Chapter-4 Special Towers
Chapter-5 Conductor, Ground wire, OPGW & Accessories
Chapter-6 Insulators and Insulator’s Hardware
Section IV-B Technical Specifications for Substations

Chapter-1 Surge Arrestors
Chapter-2 Capacitive Voltage Transformers/Voltage
Transformers
Chapter-3 Current Transformer
Chapter-4 145/36 kV Isolator And Isolator With Earth Switch
Chapter-5 145/36kv SF6 (Gas) Circuit Breakers For Outdoor
Application
Chapter-6 Power Transformers
Chapter-7 Earthing System
Chapter-8 Lightning Protection
Chapter-9 Substation Automation and Control System
Chapter-10 Control and Relay Panels
Chapter-11 Fibre Optics Terminal Equipment
Chapter-12 A.C Distribution Board
Chapter-13 D.C. Battery, Battery Charger & DC Distribution Board
Chapter-14 Power and Control Cables
Chapter-15 Illumination/Lighting System
Chapter-16 Civil Works
Chapter-17 Substation Structures
Chapter-18 Miscellaneous Items For Sub-Stations

Chapter-19 Erection, Testing And Commissioning of Electrical

Equipment
Chapter-20 Station Transformers
Chapter-21 100 KVA, 415 V Diesel Generator Sets
Chapter-22 CCTV System
Chapter-23 Mandatory Spares, Tools & Testing Equipment
5. Section V Guaranteed Technical Particulars

Section V-A Transmission Line
Section V-B Substation
6. Section VI Drawings

Package-KC3
Section-I General Information and Scope

IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Part II:Section 6 : Employer's Requirement
SECTION I
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SCOPE
CONTENTS
S.NO DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
1.0 INTRODUCTION 1
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK 3
1.3 ACCESS & GENERAL INFORMATION 14
1.4 CONNECTIVITY AND ROAD CONDITIONS 17
1.5 SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES 19
1.6 BASIC REFERENCE DRAWINGS 20
1.7 SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLE 20
1.8 ALTITUDE FACTOR CONSIDERATION 21
1.9 OPENING OF SITE OFFICE 21
1.10 COMPLETION SCHEDULE 21
Section I Contents
SECTION I
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SCOPE
1.0. INTRODUCTION
Nepal has large hydro-power potential of about 83290 MW, out of which a meager of less than
1000 MW has been developed so far leading to chronic shortage of power in Nepal. To address
the problem of acute shortage of power, numbers of hydro power projects are proposed to be
developed by Govt. of Nepal in Koshi and Mechi Zones by 2020-25 and 2025-2035. To
evacuate power from these hydro power projects, NEA has planned a transmission system
namely Koshi Corridor 220kV Transmission System which inter-alia comprises the following
components:
(i) 220 kV D/C Transmission line from Tumlingtar to Basantapur with Twin moose ACSR
conductor with loop in and loop out of its one circuit at Baneshwar Substation.
(ii) 220 kV D/C Transmission line from Dhungesangu to Basantapur with Twin moose ACSR
conductor.
(iii) 220 kV D/C Transmission Line from Basantapur to Inaruwa to with Quad moose ACSR
conductor.
(iv) 220/132/33 kV Sub-station at Tumlingtar.
(v) 220/33 kV Sub-station at Baneshwar.
(vi) 220/132/33 kV Sub-station at Dhungesangu.
(vii) 220/132/33 kV Sub-station at Basantapur.
(viii) 2 Nos. of 220 kV Line Bays at Inaruwa Substation.
A separate 400 kV transmission system comprising 400KV D/C Transmission Line from Inaruwa
to Hetauda via Dhalkebar and three Substations at Inaruwa, Dhalkebar and Hetauda is
presently under execution by Govt. of Nepal which would be operated initially at 220 kV
voltage level and the said system is being connected to Indian System at Muzzaffarpur
Section I Page 1 of 22
Substation in Bihar through a 400 kV transmission line link from Dhalkebar Substation. The
proposed Koshi Corridor 220 kV transmission system would be integrated with aforesaid
400KV transmission system through a 220kV D/C transmission line from Basantapur to
Inaruwa.
The locations of substations have been so chosen by NEA so that power from hydro power
projects could be evacuated through proposed 220 kV System. The power which would be
available at the proposed Substations by 2025 and 2035 for evacuation is as under:
Sl.No. Name of Substation Power from IPP's to be evacuated

through each substation
(MW)
By 2025 By 2035
1 Basantapur 220/132/33 kV 19.1 311.1
2 Baneshwar 220/33 kV 52.22 52.22
3 Tumlingtar 220/132/33 kV 505.6 905.6
4 Dhungesangu 220/132/33 kV 121 686.5
Initially to be constructed at 132/33 kV
voltage level and to be upgraded to 220 kV
level in future)
Total 697.92 1955.42
The voltage levels at each substation have been decided based on the voltage at which power
from hydro power projects would be received and the volume of power which is required to
be evacuated from each substation.
Government of Nepal has signed a DOLLAR CREDIT LINE AGREEMENT (CREDIT AGREEMENT)
with Export-Import Bank of India for the purpose of financing infrastructure projects such as
roads and power transmission in Nepal. Nepal Electricity Authority (A Government of Nepal
Undertaking) is one of the beneficiary of aforesaid DOLLAR CREDIT LINE and part of funds are
proposed to be utilized for the construction of power transmission lines. NEA intends to
utilizea portion of this fund for payments under the Contract for the construction of Koshi
Corridor 220 KV Transmission Line and associated substations.
Under this package (i.e. Package KC-3), the construction of a new 220 kV Double Circuit
Transmission Line from Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung District) to Basantapur (Terhathum District)
and 220/132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung District) have been included. The
line shall be designed and constructed for 220 kV voltage level with single circuit stinging but it
is presently planned to be charged and operated at 132 kV level. The Substation in Dhunge
Sangu shall be planned as a 220/132/33 kV substation but the construction at present shall be
limited to 132/33 kV voltage level and it shall be upgraded to 220 kV voltage level in future by
keeping space provision in the layout for necessary 220 kV bays as shown in attached drawings
of SLD, Layout plan and Sections drawings in Section-6. The proposed transmission line and
substation shall help in evacuating power from the candidate hydropower projects in the
Mechi Zone of Nepal that are likely to come up by 2025 & 2035. The detailed Scope of work
under this package is given below:
1.1. SCOPE OF WORK
1.1.1 BASANTAPUR (TERHATHUM DISTRICT) - DHUNGE SANGU (TAPLEJUNG DISTRICT) 220 KV

DOUBLE CIRCUIT TRANSMISSION LINE:
1.1.1.1 General:
A. Approximate Transmission line length from Basantapur- Dhunge Sangu is 35 km.

B. Tower Configuration: Double Circuit Vertical Configuration Galvanized Steel Towers
with twin peak.
C. Stringing: Initially only one circuit will be strung with twin ACSR conductor with first
peak (i.e. with OPGW)
D. Twin ACSR “Moose” Conductor designed for maximum operating temperature of 85
Deg C. for the first circuit
E. Optical fiber Ground Wire (OPGW) Single Mode 24 core for the first circuit
F. Galvanized steel Earth wire for the second circuit (will be strung after allocation of
more fund in later stage)
G. Insulator and Hardware fittings for the first circuit Stringing with ACSR Moose
conductor with first peak i.e. with OPGW
H. All Erection Works i.e. Detailed Survey, Check Survey, Cadastral Survey, Casting of
Foundation, erection of Towers, stringing of first Conductor & its peak with OPGW,
hoisting of insulators and installation of their accessories etc.
However, Basantapur (Terhathum District) - Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung District) 220 kV Double
Circuit transmission linewill be initially charged to 132 kV with respect to the involved scope of
work of substations.
NEA will likely to arrange more funds for extensions of involved Substations, stringing of
second circuit of the transmission lines, its peak with Galvanized Steel Earthwire, hoisting of its
Insulators, Hardwares and other accessories etc separately. The scope for the second circuit
stringing for Basantapur (Terhathum District) - Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung District) 220 kV
Transmission Lineshall cover the following:
(i) Approximate Transmission line length from Basantapur – Dhunge Sangu is

35km.
(ii) Twin ACSR “Moose” Conductor designed for maximum operating
temperature of 85 Deg C. for the second circuit
(iii) Galvanized steel Earth wire for the peak on the second circuit
(iv) Insulator and Hardware fittings for the second circuit Stringing with Twin
ACSR Moose conductor with second peak i.e. with Galvanized Steel
Earthwire
(v) Stringing of second circuit with Conductor Twin ACSR “Moose” Conductor
along with second peak (i.e. with Galvanized Steel Earthwire) including
hoisting of insulators etc.
However, Depending upon the arrangement and availability of additional funds, within
the framework of Employer’s rules and regulation, the employer at his own discretion
may direct the stringing of second circuit at any point of time during the period of
contract at the same prices/item rates of both supply and erection applicable in the
contract with price variation clause as per the relevant formula given and terms&
conditions of the contract remaining the same. However, quantities specified in the
price schedules are only for Supply, Erection and Stringing of Material related to
first/single circuit stringing only.
1.1.1.2 The above said Transmission Line specification covers the following items:
a) The fabrication including supply of steel (including angle sections, plates, cleats
including other necessary accessories) for which NEA will provide the Structural
Drawings/Shop drawing/Bill of Materials of already designed and tested towers
DB, DC & DD type of towers for use as DB(0°-10°), DC(10°-20°), DD(20°-50°) and
DE(50°-70°)/Dead-End type towers with extensions thereof, Galvanizing, packing,
supply and delivery CIP Sites, storage and transportation of material to work sites
including head load carriage of 220 kV Double Circuit Transmission Line Towers,
tower accessories complete in all respects including bolts, nuts and washers,
strain plates and hangers, erection, testing, and commissioning of following
transmission line is included in the scope of the Contractor for this Package.
b) Design, fabrication, supply, erection of Special tower, if any, with AACSR
Conductors, Triple insulator and corresponding hardware fittings including
foundation design.
c) Detailed survey including route alignment, profiling, tower spotting, optimization of
tower locations, soil resistivity measurement & geotechnical investigation
(including special foundation locations, viz. pile/well foundation
locations),geological stability and slope stability studies for tower
locations/sections.
d) Line design using all 3-D Tower modelling with PLS-Tower in PLS-Cadd (full version
with saps) with the survey data obtained during detailed survey and further refine
during check survey at all or any tower locations or section thereof as would be
requiring during different stage of the project implementation as per direction of

NEA.
e) Detailed design for 3-D analysis of Towers. The detailed design includes:
 Modification of electrical clearance diagram.
 Design of reinforced cross arm and body.
 Design/modeling of different combination of leg and body extensions using the
available designs.
 Wire clearance diagram for gantry take off tower.
 Design of jumpering/ jumper drop for actual span and profile.
 Design of new foundation w.r.t different soil parameters and actual/prescribed
loading.
 Hill side leg extension (positive and negative) and Truncations proposed.
 Line schedule and Insulator/Jumper swing calculations.
f) Check survey, Cadastral Survey and Tree Enumeration in the forest,

g) Fabrication and supply of all type 220 kV transmission line towers, including River
crossing towers (wherever applicable) including fasteners, step bolts, hangers, D-
shackles etc.
h) All types of tower accessories like phase plate, circuit plate, number plate, danger
plate, anti-climbing device, Bird guard fasteners, anti-theft fasteners, step bolts,
hangers, D-shackles, aviation signal etc. (wherever applicable)
i) Bidder shall also indicate in the offer, the sources from where they propose to
procure the fasteners, anti-theft fasteners, step bolts, hangers, D-shackles etc.,
tower accessories, aviation signal etc.
j) All the raw materials such as steel, zinc for galvanising, reinforcement steel,
cement, coarse and fine aggregates for tower foundation, coke and salt for tower
earthing etc. are included in the Contractor’s scope of supply.
k) Bidder shall quote the unit rates for various items of towers and foundations as per
item units mentioned in appropriate schedule of BDS. However, payment of these
items identified in the schedule of prices shall be made as follows:
A) TOWER
i) Supply items On supply of respective plant and equipments using
the rate/s quoted by the bidder

ii) Erection items On erection of respective tower materials including
accessories using the rate quoted by the bidder
B) Foundation items: On completion of respective foundation in
all respect using the rate quoted by the bidder for the
cum volume for excavations and concreting and
tonnage for reinforcement provided
The payment to be made for towers/foundations shall be worked out based on the
unit rates quoted by the Contractor and approved Bill of Materials (BOM) for
towers and quantities/volumes as per approved tower foundation drawings which
will be provided by NEA upon successful award of the bid as detailed in the
respective chapters of the technical specifications herein.
l) The design and casting of special pile/well foundations, wherever required shall be
in the scope of the Bidder. The design shall be done by the contractor. If the bidder
does not have necessary experience, bidder may engage some other agencies
having the adequate experience for the casting of pile/well foundations.
m) Design and drawing of foundations for different soil conditions and classification
of foundation for different type of towers vizDB, DC & DD type of towers for use
as DB(0°-10°), DC(10°-20°) & DD(20°-50°) and DE(50°-70°)/Dead-End type towers
with extensions thereof, shall be provided by NEA for Normal Dry Soil, Wet Soil,
Partially submerged soil, Fully submerged soil, Dry and Wet fissured rock, Hard
rock type of soils for normal as well as body and leg extension families . however
should the requirement arises based on the actual condition as per geotechnical
investigation results, the design shall be within the scope of contractor for which
necessary design parameters and loading shall be provided to the contractor and
casting of foundation for(special foundation locations, viz. pile/well foundation
locations) for tower footings;
n) erection of towers, tightening and punching of bolts and nuts including supply and
application of anti-theft bolts, tower earthing, fixing of insulator strings, stringing of
conductors, earth wire, OPGW along with all necessary line accessories,
o) Painting of towers & supply and erection of span markers, obstruction lights
(wherever applicable) for aviation requirements (as required)
p) This specification also includes the supply of Conductor, Insulators, OPGW,
hardware fittings and all type of accessories for conductor and OPGW as detailed in
the specification. Contractor shall clearly indicate in their offer, the sources from
where they propose to procure these materials in appropriate Schedule of BPS. The
technical description of these items is given in relevant section of this Volume of
the bidding documents.
q) Testing and commissioning of the erected transmission lines and
r) Other items not specifically mentioned in this Specification and / or BPS but are
required for the successful commissioning of the transmission line, unless
specifically excluded in the Specification.
1.1.1.3 Stringing
a) For transmission line with Bundle Conductor per phase:

The entire stringing work of conductor and OPGW shall be carried out by tension
stringing technique. The bidder shall indicate in their offer, the sets of tension stringing
equipment he is having in his possession and the sets of stringing equipment he would
deploy exclusively for each package which under no circumstance shall be less than the
number and capacity requirement indicated in Qualifying Requirements for Bidder.
However, the Bidder having requisite experience has freedom to use helicopter for
stringing. The Bidder intending to use helicopter shall furnish detailed description of
the procedure, type & number of helicopter & accessories etc., to be deployed for
stringing operation.
b) In hilly/mountainous terrain and thick forest or area with site constraints, where
deployment of tension stringing machine is not possible, manual stringing may be
adopted after getting approval of owner’s site Engineer. The contractor shall deploy
appropriate tools / equipments / machinery to ensure that the stringing operation is

carried out without causing damage to conductor / earth wire and conductor / earth
wire is installed at the prescribed sag-tension as per the approved stringing charts.
1.1.1.4 The provisional quantities/tonnage of fabricated & galvanised steel towers as per
specifications requirement, foundation type and their volumes/tonnage for reinforcement,
quantity of various line materials and other items are given in appropriate Price Schedule in
Part-I of the bid documents. However, the work shall be executed as per approved
construction drawings and project requirement.
1.1.1.5 The various item of work is described very briefly in the appropriate Price Schedule. The
various items of the Price Schedule shall be read in conjunction with the corresponding
sections in the Technical Specifications including amendments and, additions, if any. The
Bidder’s rates shall be based on the description of activities in the Price Schedule as well as
necessary operations detailed in these Technical Specifications.
1.1.1.6 The Unit rates quoted shall include minor details which are obviously and fairly intended, and
which may not have been included in these documents but are essential for the satisfactory
completion of the various works.
1.1.1.7 The unit rate quoted shall be inclusive of all plant equipment, men, material skilled and
unskilled labor etc. essential for satisfactory completion of various works.
1.1.1.8 All measurements for payment shall be in S.I. units, lengths shall be measured in meters
corrected to two decimal places. Areas shall be computed in square meters & volume in cubic
meters rounded off to two decimals.
1.1.1.9 For detailed scope the stipulation given in each Chapter shall be applicable and governing.
1.1.2 132/33 KV SUBSTATION IN DHUNGE SANGU

1.1.2.1 General:
The Substation scope of Work includes Design, Supply, Erection, Testing and Commissioning of
all electrical equipments including execution of all necessary Civil works at aforesaid substation
on turnkey basis.The breakdown of scope of work is as under:
A. Topographical survey and preparation of Contour maps of the substation site on 1:1000
scale with contour interval of 0.5m covering an area 100 m beyond substation boundary
as well as all other adjoining important features like existing roads & pathways, power
lines, rivers, streams, villages etc;
B. Geo-technical Investigation at the substation site for determining engineering properties

of soil required for the design of foundations, measurement of Soil Resistivity for earth
mat etc;
C. Since site located on a hill slope, scope shall also include site development works for the
whole 220/132/33 kV substation including present as well as future scope (i.e. 132 kV
and 33 kV yards in present scope and 220 kV yard to be constructed in future) and it shall
include formation of terraces of required sizes at the substation site for locating 220 kV,
132 kV and 33 kV yards and various other facilities like control room building, D.G. Set
Room, Staff Quarters etc. by cutting, filling, compacting, leveling, and providing slope
protection works and earth retaining structures like breast walls, retaining walls etc as
per site requirements including disposal of excess earth, if any;
D. Supply of all electrical equipment including Power Transformers, Circuit Breakers,

Isolators,Lightning Arresters, CTs/PTs/CVTs, Battery & Battery charger, ACDB & DCDB,
DGs, Bus Bar & Shielding materials, Conductors, Insulators, Power and Control Cables,
Control and Relay Panels, Optical Fiber Termination Equipment, Substation Automation
System, Lighting and Fixtures, Earthing materials, Fire-fighting Equipments etc.complete
as per specification and as required for successful commissioning of substation and line;
E. Supply of Galvanized Steel structures comprising Gantry towers and beams, supporting
structuresfor equipment, Lighting/Lightning masts, any other structure required for
substation or line termination etc;
F. Construction of Foundations for Gantry towers, Equipment supporting structures,

Lighting mast, Transformers etc;
G. Construction of Control Room-cum-Administrative Building with provision for office

space& stores, conference room, including all finishes, water supply and sanitary fittings
and fixtures, air conditioning, Lighting, Ventilation etc;
H. Construction of D.G. Set room including all finishes, lighting, ventilation etc.
I. Construction of Fencing around Substation plot periphery, Staff quarters, Store building,
Guard Room, Car Parking Shed etc.
J. Design of earthing and providing the earth mat in the substation area etc.
K. Providing drainage including disposal of surface runoff water from substation to nearest
natural drain etc.
L. Construction of Cable trenches with precast R.C.C. covers and necessary steel
embedment for supporting cables/cable trays and edge protection etc;
M. Erection of all Gantry and equipment&cable supporting structures etc.;
N. Construction of all internal roads, road-cum- rail track, fencing for switchyard and switch
yard gates etc.
O. Supply and installation of complete lighting and fixtures for illumination of outdoor
switchyard, internal roads, boundary wall etc. and also internal & exterior lighting of
Control Room-cum-Administrative Building, D.G. Set Room Building, staff quarters,
security post, Car parking shed etc.
P. Design, Supply and Installation of Bus Post Insulators , insulator strings and hardware,
clamps & connectors, Equipment terminal connectors, Conductors, Aluminum Tubes Bus
bar, earthing materials, Bay marshalling kiosk, spacers, Cable trays, Junction boxes,
buried cables .
Q. Design, Supply and Installation of SCADA and complete substation automation including
hardware and software for remote control station (based on IEC 61850) along with
associated equipments.
R. Design, Supply, Installation of Communication system consisting of optical line terminal

equipment (OLTE) of SDH-STM-4 technology, MUX, tele protection signaling equipment,
optical distribution frame (ODF) , Optical approach cable, OPGW, and new telephone
exchange system.
S. Supply and Installation of fire protection System.
T. Erection of all electrical equipment and panels including laying of power and control
cables;
U. Testing and Commissioning of all electrical equipment, Control and Relay panels and
Lighting (External and Internal);
V. Finishing of outdoor switchyard area by providing a layer of coarse sand and stone metal;
W. Landscaping of whole substation area within boundary wall to give a pleasant

appearance to substation and its surrounding; and
X. Any other work or equipment or material not specified above but required for successful
commissioning of substations shall also be in the scope of work.
Above scope of work shall be read in conjunction with scope specified in more detail in
relevant chapters of specification. All works shall be carried out as per specifications, relevant
Indian/Nepalese Standards and as per directions of Employer/PMC.
1.1.2.2 The main components of 132/33 kV Dhunge Sangu substation under present scope are as
under:
A. 132 kV Side:
i. Bus bar Scheme: Double bus with bypass isolator.
ii. 1 No. of 132 kV outgoing line bay with full equipment for Dhungesangu -
Basantapur Single Circuit Line on 220 kV D/C tower. (This line bay shall be
planned and developed in such a manner so that it could be converted to
transformer bay in future as and when 220 kV yard comes up.)
iii. 1 No. of Bus Coupler Bay.
iv. 2 Nos. of Transformer bay for 15 MVA, 132/33 kV Transformer with full
equipment.
v. 7 Nos. (6 Nos. +1 No. Spare) of 5 MVA, 132/33kV Single phase Power

Transformer Bank (each Bank having 15 MVA capacity) with full equipment.
B. 33 kV Side:
i. Bus bar scheme: Single Bus.
ii. 2 Nos. of 33kV Transformer bay for 132/33kV transformer with full
equipment.
iii. 1No. of 33 kV Line Bay for NEA use.
iv. 1 Nos. of 33 kV outgoing feeders.
v. 1 No. of 33 kV Station transformer bay.
vi. 1No. 400 KVA, 33/0.4kV Three Phase Station Transformer.
C. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system and Substation

Automation System based on IEC 61850.
D. Communication system consisting of optical line terminal equipment (OLTE) of

SDH-STM-4 technology, MUX, tele protection signaling equipment, optical
distribution frame (ODF) and new telephone exchange system.
E. Foundations for gantries, equipment supporting structures, transformers and

other equipment including construction of internal roads, road-cum-rail track,
R.C.C. cable trenches, drainage of rain water, staff quarters, car parking shed,
guard room, boundary wall of whole substation plot and all other necessary civil
works in substation.
NOTE:
1. Site Development works for the complete 220/132/33 kV substation site, comprising of
present scope of work as mentioned above and also future scope which includes 220 kV
yard and all associated 220kV, 132 kV and 33 kV line and Transformer bays, in line with
Single line diagram and Plot Layout Plan of Substation included in Section-6: Drawings.
2. The contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the successful bidder of Package-
KC2 for the termination and protection coordination of the proposed 220 kV line at
Basantapur substation.
1.2. SCHEME
Network Diagram for the proposed Koshi Corridor 220 kV Transmission System is enclosed in
Part-II Employers Requirements, Section-VI Drawings.
1.3. ACCESS AND GENERAL INFORMATION
The other general information about the Project site is given below for information of Bidders:
1.3.1. DETAILS OF SUBSTATION SITE:
A. Location and Topography

The- Dhunge Sangu substation Site is located in Tellabung, Dhungesangu VDC of Taplejung
District. The general topography of project site is hilly/mountainous in nature. The altitude of
Dhunge Sangu substation site varies from about MSL +1300 m to MSL +1390m.
The site is primarily agricultural land located on a relatively mild slope of a hill. One earthen
road is located on the hill side periphery of the site and a deep valley on the Tamor river side.
A natural stream is running on the right hand side boundary of the site. There are terraces at
various levels on which cultivation is being undertaken. The creation of two or three terraces
would be necessary to accommodate the substation and its other facilities at this site.
B. Approach
The site can be approached from East-West highway of Nepal from Charali town through
Charali-Ilam-Phidim-Taplejung Mechi highway. An earthen road takes off from Mechi highway
at a distance of about 6-7 km from Taplejung town connecting Mechi highway to a suspension
foot over bridge over river Tamor. The length of this earthen road is about 8-10 km. After
reaching river Tamor, one is required to cross river Tamor and Maya Khola (a small tributary of
river Tamor) through pedestrian suspension bridges to reach the project site. After crossing
Maya Khola, there are two options available to reach the project site. There is a foot track of
about 4.0 - 5.0 km length in hilly topography which can be used to reach the site. It takes
about two and half to three hours to reach the site by this foot track. One road after Maya
Khola is being constructed under ADB funding which passes by the side of substation site. Only
formation cutting of this road up to project site is complete at present. The distance of project
site from Maya Khola through this road is about 10 km.
A steel bridge over river Tamor, about 50 m upstream of existing suspension bridge, is
presently in advance stage of construction. A bridge over Maya Khola is also under
construction. These two under construction bridges and earthen road are vital for
transportation of materials and equipment to proposed substation site. However, the
employer does not take any responsibility or gives any commitment about completion of
above under construction bridges and roads. The bidders shall themselves ascertain in Pre-
bid site visit and from concerned department of Nepal the transportation limitations of
these under construction bridges/road as well as of all other bridges/culverts located on
East-West and Mechi highways enroute to project site. Bidders shall be required to make
their own arrangement for transportation of all equipment and materialsthrough existing
road conditions to the project site taking into account the transportation limitations with
respect to both size wise and weight wise and quote their rates accordingly.
1.3.2. DETAILS OF TRANSMISSION LINE:
A. Routes and Terrain

The route alignment has been identified and studied by the by the Employer in year 2013. The
alignment for package KC 3 starts from Basantapur in Terhathum District and ends at Dhunge
Sangu in Taplejung district. The line originates from the proposed substation at Basantapur in
Tehrathum district which is awarded to a different contractor already with another proposed
substation in Dhunge Sangu in Taplejung District which is within the scope of present KC3
package. The route alignment passes through the high hill region of Koshi zone and Mechi
zone of eastern development region. The alignment from Basantapur to Gupha (from AP-0 to
AP-19 and elevation range is between 2452m and up to 3000 m above msl) passes through
mountain ridges. From Gupha, Taplejung district begins and the alignment goes down upto
Dhunge Sangu (1370 m above msl). For some practical reasons such as change in topography
due to construction of the new objects in the line route, to avoid deforestation or to avoid
abolishment of the houses under the line in some sections of line route, some
modification/diversion may require to be undertaken. The successful bidder is required to
carry out detailed survey including profiling, tower spotting, optimization of tower locations
and line designing with 3-D analysis with PLS-cadd and PLS-tower etc. Bidders may however
visit the line route to acquaint themselves with terrain conditions and associated details of the
proposed transmission lines especially the existing road conditions.
B. Location Details and Terminal Points

The transmission line from the Basantapur Substation to Dhunge Sangu Substation shall be
passing through the rolling hills, sparse settlements and forest.
The Contractor shall have to construct this transmission line completely up to dead end towers
in the proposed switchyard at Basantapur and Dhunge Sangu substations. Stringing shall also
be carried out from dead end tower to terminal arrangements/gantry points.
C. Access to the Line and Right of Way

Right of way shall be arranged by the Employer in accordance with work schedules. The
responsibility of the Employer shall be limited to securing ROW (15 m either side of the centre
line of the transmission line. However for detailed surveying purpose 20 m either side of the
center line shall be considered. The details of the ROW including tower pads and tree
enumeration details shall be prepared by the Contractor. The details of Access and ROW have
been described in Chapter 3. The bidder may note that the employer may offer RoW clearance
in parts or in section instead of the entire line as a whole for the construction work.
1.4. CONNECTIVITY AND ROAD CONDITIONS
1.4.1 Connectivity of Substation Site from Nepal & India
Dhungesangu Substation Site is connected to East-West Highway through Mechi highway of

Nepal. Mechi highway meets East-West Highway at Charali town. The nearest airport in India
from Charali town is Bagdogra near Siliguri in West Bengal at a distance of about 40 km via
Kakarbita /Pani Tanki boarder. Nearest Rail head from Charali is around at 115km in Jogbani,
Bihar. Jogbani is located at Indo-Nepal boarder and nearest town in Nepal is Biratnagar, at a
distance of about 5 km from Jogbani. Biratnagar is an industrial town and the second largest
town of Nepal after Kathmandu and it is connected by Air from Kathmandu through regular
flights. Jogbani is connected by rail through broad gauge rail line to main rail route from Delhi
to Guwahati. Taplejung is connected by Air from Kathmandu. Nearest domestic airport to
Charali in Nepal is Bhadharpur at a distance of about 15 km from Charali.
Basantapur substation from where transmission line starts, can be approached through Koshi
Rajmarg of Nepal which runs from Dharan to Khandbari. Dharan is located a distance of about
20 km from Itahari, a town located on East West highway. Dharan is at a distance of about 45
km from Biratnagar via Itahari.
1.4.2 Road Conditions
East–West Highway and Mechi Highway from Charali to Taplejung via Phidim are all weather
roads. East–West Highway is running parallel to Indo-Nepal boarder (West Bengal-Bihar-Uttar
Pradesh). The road connecting Biratnagar crosses the East-West Highway at Itahari and it is
also all weather road and mostly passes through plain terrain.The Koshi Highway from Inaruwa
town to Basantapur passes initially through plane terrain for 20km till Dharan then it is
completely hilly terrain all alone till Basantapur.
The Mechi Highway from Charali town to Taplejung passes through hilly terrain all alone.
Highway crosses many rivers, Kholas, Streams etc in its route. The major river en-route to
Dhungesangu is Tamor river which is one of the main tributary of river Koshi.
These are briefly described below for the information of Bidders:
i) The stretch of earthen roadfrom Taplejung of Mechi highway leading to a bridge across
Tamor river and another Earthen road connected from another bridge across Maya
Khola river in bad shape. During monsoon period from July to September, it may not be
possible to travel by motor vehicle on this stretch.
ii) In case of incompletion of bridge over river Maya Khola, discharge of it during lean
season is not very high and it may be possible to cross it by having some temporary
arrangements even without a bridge.
The bidders are advised to visit the transmission line route as well as substation sites and
acquaint themselves with the topography, infrastructure and also the design philosophy.
Before proceeding with the construction work of the Substation, the Contractor shall fully
familiarize himself with the site conditions and General arrangements & scheme etc. Though
the Employer/PMC shall endeavor to provide the information, it shall not be binding for the
Employer/PMC to provide the same. The bidder shall be fully responsible for providing all
equipment, materials, system and services specified or otherwise which are required to
complete the construction and successful commissioning, operation & maintenance of the
substation in all respects. All materials required for the Civil and construction/installation work
shall be supplied by the Contractor.
The complete design (unless specified otherwise in specification elsewhere) and detailed
engineering shall be done by the Contractor based on conceptual tender drawings. Drawings
for civil works enclosed with tender drawings are for information only. However civil drawings
shall be developed by the contractor as per his design.
1.4.3 The Contractor shall also be responsible for the overall co-ordination with internal/external
agencies;project management, training of Employer’s manpower, loading, unloading, handling,
moving to final destination for successful erection, testing and commissioning of the
substation at Dhunge Sangu and Basantapur to Dhunge Sangu transmission line etc.
1.4.4 Design of substation and its associated electrical & mechanical auxiliaries systems includes
preparation of single line diagrams and electrical layouts including layout arrangement for
transformers, foundation layout, cable trench layout, earthmat layout, erection key diagrams,
electrical and physical clearance diagrams, design calculations for earthing and lightening
protection system (including Direct Stroke Lighting Protection), control and protection
schematics, wiring and termination schedules, civil designs and drawings, design of fire fighting
system and air conditioning system, indoor/outdoor lighting/illumination and other relevant
drawings & documents required for engineering of all facilities within the fencing to be
provided under this contract, are covered under the scope of the Contractor.
1.4.5 Any other items not specifically mentioned in the specification but which are required for
erection, testing and commissioning and satisfactory operation of the substation are deemed
to be included in the scope of the specification unless specifically excluded.
1.5. SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES
The requirement of various items/equipment and civil works are indicated in Schedules of
Rates and Prices.
All equipment/items and civil works for which bill of quantity has been indicated in Schedules
of Rates and Prices) shall be payable on unit rate basis/quoted rate basis. During actual
execution, the actual and any variation in such quantities shall be payable as per the quoted
rate.
Wherever the quantities of items/works are not indicated and quantified, the bidder is
required to estimate the quantity required for entire execution and completion of works and
incorporate their price by lumping in respective Schedules of Rates and Prices under
contractor assessed quantities. For erection hardware items, Bidders shall estimate the total
requirement of the works and indicate module-wise lump sum price bay wise and include the
same in relevant Schedules of Rates and Prices. For module identification, Bidder may refer
typical drawings enclosed with the specifications. Any material/works for the modules not
specifically mentioned in the description in Schedules of rates and prices, as may be required
shall be deemed to be included in the module itself.
The quantities specified in the Schedules of Rates and Prices are only estimates. As soon as
practicable, the Contractor shall complete all survey, design and investigation works and
accordingly submit the revised actual Bill of Quantities based on the unit/lump sum prices
quoted in the Schedules of rates and Prices to complete the Facilities in accordance with the
Technical Specifications and submit for Employer's approval.
Bidder should include all such items in the bid proposal sheets, which are not specifically
mentioned but are essential for the execution of the contract. Item which explicitly may not
appear in various schedules and required for successful commissioning of substation shall be
considered included in the bid price and shall be provided at no extra cost to Employer.
1.6. BASIC REFERENCE DRAWINGS
Basic Reference drawings are enclosed with the bid documents in Section 6 of Part-II
Employer’s requirements for reference, which shall be further engineered by the bidder in
detail.
All the drawings, layout, dimensions, clearances/height shown in the drawings are indicative
and for tender purpose only. A successful bidder is required to develop all the designs and
drawings during detail engineering phase.
1.7. SPECIAL TOOLS AND TACKLE
The bidder shall include in his proposal the deployment of all special tools and tackles required
for operation and maintenance of equipment. The special tools and tackles shall only cover
items which are specifically required for the equipment offered and are proprietary in nature.
The Contractor shall furnish a list of special tools and tackles for the various equipment in a
manner to be referred by the Employer during the operation of these equipment. The scope of
special tools and tackles are to be decided during detail engineering and the list of special tools
and tackles, if any shall be finalized.
Transmission line side insulator String (including Hardware) i.e. tension insulator on the line
side of the takeoff gantry for 132kV &33kV lines termination is under the present scope of
specification. Also the Supply and installation of ACSR Moose conductor, OPGW and Approach
cable and all associated hardware on line side of take-off gantry is also under the present
scope of specification.
1.8. ALTITUDE FACTOR CONSIDERATION
The altitude along the Transmission Line varies approximately from 1300m to 3000m. Thus
Transmission Line is proposed to be executed for highest altitude i.e. 3000m.
For equipment in the substation including Transformers, all design parameter including air
clearances, insulation coordination shall be corresponding to altitude of 1390 m for
Dhungesangu Substation accordance to relevant IEC.
1.9. OPENING OF SITE OFFICE
The contractor within the 30 days from the contract effectiveness shall open and maintain
atleast two nos. site office and 2 nos. of stores. The Contractor shall depute the qualified
manpower in each office to carry out the job as per Contract.
1.10. COMPLETION SCHEDULE
The complete work i.e. design, manufacture, testing, supply of tower parts and accessories,
conductor & OPGW and their accessories, insulator strings with hardware fittings, Substation
Equipments, erection, testing and commissioning of 220 kV Transmission Line (Dhungesangu -
Basantapur) and 132/33 kV Dhungesangu substation, including all site development and civil
works of the substation shall be completed on turnkey basis within 30 (Thirty) months from
date of Contract Effectiveness. The Bidder shall submit master work schedule along with his
Bid schedule for completion of entire work covered in the scope of this specification indicating
commencement and completion of each activity for the Transmission Line and Substation
separately considering zero date as the date on which Contract becomes effective. The said
schedule shall be in the form of bar chart or shall be prepared using any other appropriate
program like MS Project etc. Further, the schedule of supply of the Equipment shall
commensurate with the actual progress in the field. The Bidder shall also indicate the number
of independent gangs/groups intended by him to be deployed for execution of the work.
Precommissioning, Commissioning, Trial-Run & Completion
As soon as the Facilities covered by these specifications are physically completed in all
respects, the Pre-commissioning, Commissioning, Trial-run and Completion of the Facilities, as
mentioned below, shall be attained in accordance with the procedure given in the Conditions
of Contract, Vol.-I of the Bidding Documents.
(i) Pre commissioning : As per relevant Chapters
(ii) Commissioning : Charging of the Facilities at rated voltage.
Further, whereverappearing in these specifications, the words – ‘commissioning

checks’, ‘installation checks’, ‘site tests’, ‘performance guarantee tests for fire
protection system’ are to be considered as ‘pre-commissioning checks’.
(iii) Trial-run :Operation of the Facilities or any part thereof by the
Contractorimmediately after the Commissioning for a continuous period of 72(Seventy

two) hours. In case of interruption due to problem / failure in the respective
equipment, the contractor shall rectify the problem and after rectification, continuous
72(Seventy two) hours period starts after such rectification.
(iv) Completion : Upon successful completion of Trial-run.
‘Guarantee Test(s)’ and/or ‘Functional Guarantees’ are applicable only for Substation
Automation System as specified in relevant chapter -
‘Substation Automation System.’
Package-KC3
Section-II
General Technical Requirements
Package-KC3
Section-II-A
General Technical Requirements- Transmission Line
Package KC3: Basantapur (Terhathum District)- Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung
District) Transmission Line and 132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge Sangu
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Part II-Section 6 : Employer’s Requirements
SECTION II-A
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT -TRANSMISSION LINES
CONTENTS
1.0 General 1
1.1 Engineering Data 1
1.2 Climatic & Meteorological Conditions 1
1.3 System Particulars 3

1.4 Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees etc 3
1.5 Drawings 5
1.6 Design Improvements 8
1.7 Design Co-ordination 8
1.8 Design Review Meeting 8
1.9 Quality Assurance, Inspection & Testing 8
1.10 Inspections and Tests 10
1.11 Packing 14
1.12 Employer‘s Environment and Social Policy and its Implementation 14
1.13 Codes and Standards 16
Section II-A Contents

SECTION II-A
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT-TRANSMISSION LINES
1.0 General
The following provisions shall supplement all the detailed technical specifications and
requirements brought out herein. The contractor’s proposal shall be based on the use of
materials complying fully with the requirements specified herein.
1.1 Engineering Data

1.1.1 The furnishing of engineering data by the Contractor shall be in accordance with the
Schedule as specified in the Bidding Document. The review of these data by the Employer
will cover only general conformance of the data to the specifications and not a thorough
review of all dimensions, quantities and details of the materials, or items indicated or the
accuracy of the information submitted. This review by the Employer shall not be
considered by the Contractor, as limiting any of his responsibilities and liabilities for
mistakes and deviations from the requirements, specified under these specifications.
1.1.2 All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after review by the Employer shall form
part of the contract document.
1.2 Climatic & Meteorological Conditions

The transmission line under the scope traverses through undulating landscapes. The
variation of altitudes ranges from 1300 m above MSL to approximately 3000 m above
MSL. Therefore the climate of the project also changes along with the altitude. The
project area has extremely cold to humid, subtropical climate, warm in winter and hot
and normal cold in summer. The monsoon period of torrential rain last from mid-June to
mid-September. Almost 80% rainfall occurs during the monsoon period.
All plants and equipments of the transmission line shall be entirely suitable for the
climatic conditions prevailing at site.
Following climatic condition shall be considered for the design of 220 kV transmission
line.
Section II-A Page 1 of 17

S.No. Description Unit Value

1 Maximum Temperature
a) Conductor ACSR “MOOSE” Deg.C 85
b) Galvanized Steel Groundwire & OPGW Deg.C 53
2 i) Minimum Temperature Deg.C -5
ii) Max. ambient temperature Deg.C 34
iii) Mean annual / every day temperature Deg.C 32
3 Basic wind speed m/s 47
4 Maximum monthly Rainfall (Max.) mm 195 -1000
a) Rainy months June-August
b) Rainy days in a year (days) NA
5 Average number of thunder storm (days) per 30-130
annum
6 Basic Seismic Co-efficient
a. Horizontal 0.36 z
b. Vertical 0.18 z
7 Altitude varying from sea level m 1300 m to 3000 m
above MSL
8 Max. snow days in a month Nos. 10
9 Max. snow days in a year mm 15
10 Radial thickness of Ice mm 10
11 Atmospheric Pollution Light
12 Pollution Contamination Severity mm/kV 34.7
Note: The information given in the above table are solely for the general assistance to
Bidders. No responsibility for it will be accepted, nor will any claim based on this clasue
be considered.
The Bidders are advised to survey the sites covered under the Bid to acquaint him with
site conditions.
1.3 System Particulars
S.No Description Unit 220 kV Line

1 Line Voltage kV 220
2 Highest System Voltage kV 245
3 Number of Circuits Nos. 2
4 No. of Sub-conductors Nos. 2
Spacing of Sub-conductors mm 450
5 Frequency Hz 50
6 Neutral Effectively
Earthed
7 Basic Insulation level* kV 1440
8 Power Frequency withstand voltage* kV
(peak) 860
(rms)
9 Short circuit level KA 40kA for 1 sec
10 Right of way m 30
1.4 Clearance from Ground, Building, Trees etc.

Clearance from ground, buildings, trees and telephone lines shall be provided in
conformity with the Nepal Electricity Rules or Indian standard 5613 Part-2 Section-1 and
CBIP Transmission line Manual as amended up to date.
Clearances for 220 kV Transmission line

S. Name of spanned section Minimum vertical Remarks
No. distance (m)
1. Residential area to ground * 7.01 for up At maximum operating
to 1000 m & temperature and Nil Wind
9.0 for up to 3000
meter altitude

2. Non-residential area to ground* 7.00 At maximum operating

temperature and Nil Wind
3. Highway 8.84 At maximum operating
4. Railway (above track) At maximum operating
a) Electrified (1500 V dc) 15.11 temperature and Nil Wind
b) Electrified (25 KV AC) 18.63
c) Non-Electrified 11.89
5. Railway (over crane) 3.50 At maximum operating
6. River & sea crossing above To be fixed by At maximum operating
maximum flood level Navigation/Port temperature and Nil Wind
Authority
8. Electrical Line Crossing 4.58 At maximum operating
9. River Crossing/ Lakes At maximum operating
(i) Navigable To be fixed by temperature and Nil Wind
Navigation/Port
Authority
(ii) Non – Navigable (above HFL) 5.10
(iii) Accessible Frozen lakes/ rivers 7.00
10. Communication telephone At maximum operating
power line & LV line temperature and Nil Wind
11. Tree (vertical distance) At maximum operating
12. Houses & buildings At maximum operating

* Extra ground clearance allowance shall be made for altitude factor for spotting
requirement, creep allowance, uneven terrain, possibility for land profile change due to
habitation, forestry etc. The advantage of hills and valley shall be considered for allowing
additional ground clearance during spotting of towers.
Design Data:
Maximum Ambient Temperature: 34 Deg C
Minimum ambient temperature: -5 Deg C
Maximum Temperature of the Conductor: 85 Deg C
Everyday Temperature of the conductor: 32 Deg c
1.5 Drawings
In addition to those stipulated in clause regarding drawings in GCC/PC, the following also
shall apply in respect of Contractor Drawings.
1.5.1 All drawings submitted by the Contractor including those submitted at the time of Bid
shall be with sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement, dimensions,
material description, Bill of Materials, weight of each component break-up for packing
and shipment, fixing arrangement required, the dimensions required for installation and
any other information specifically requested in these specifications.
1.5.2 Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the name of the
Employer, the specification/Contract title, the specification/Contract number and the
name of the Project. All titles, noting, markings and writings on the drawing shall be in
English. All the dimensions should be to the scale and in S.I. units.
1.5.3 The drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be reviewed by the Employer as far as
practicable within 21 days and shall be modified by the Contractor if any modifications
and/or corrections are required by the Employer. The Contractor shall incorporate such
modifications and/or corrections and submit the final drawings for approval. Any delays

arising out of failure by the Contractor to rectify the drawings in good time shall not alter
the contract completion date.
1.5.4 The drawings submitted for approval to the Employer shall be of three copies. One print
of such drawings shall be returned to the Contractor by the Employer marked
“approved/approved with corrections”. The contractor shall there upon furnish the
Employer additional prints at least 6 copies as may be required along with one
reproducible in original of the drawings after incorporating all corrections.
1.5.5 The work shall be performed by the Contractor strictly in accordance with these drawings
and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the Employer, if so
required.
1.5.6 All manufacturing, fabrication and erection work under the scope of Contractor, prior to
the approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractor’s risk. The contractor may
incorporate any changes in the design, which are necessary to conform to the provisions
and intent of the contract, and such changes will again be subject to approval by the
Employer.
1.5.7 The approval of the documents and drawings by the Employer shall mean that the
Employer is satisfied that:
(a) The Contractor has completed the part of the Works covered by the subject
document (i.e. confirmation of progress of work).
(b) The Works appear to comply with requirements of Specifications.
In no case the approval by the Employer of any document does imply compliance
with all technical requirements or the absence of errors in such documents.
If errors are discovered any time during the validity of the contract, then the
Contractor shall be responsible for consequences.
1.5.8 All drawings shall be prepared using software AutoCAD 2007 (version 17.0) or later only.
Drawings, which are not compatible to AutoCAD software version 2000 or later, shall not

be accepted. After final approval all the drawings (structural drawings, BOMs, shop
sketches and tower accessories drawings) in editable format as well as in PDF format
shall be submitted to the Employer in CDs.
A copy of each drawing reviewed will be returned to the Contractor as stipulated herein.
1.5.9 Copies of drawings returned to the Contractor will be in the form of a print with the
Employer’s marking, or a print made from a microfilm of the marked up drawing.
1.5.10 The following is the general list of the documents and drawings that are to be approved
by the Employer.
a) Work Schedule (Master Network) Plan.
b) Detailed survey report and profile drawings showing ground clearance and the
owner locations (as applicable).
c) Tower schedule and foundation classification for individual tower locations.
d) Design Criteria, Loading calc, Tower Design including sag-tension calc, structural
drawing and bill of materials. Tower testing document.
e) Soil Investigation report.
f) Foundation working drawings/excavation Plan.
g) Tower footing earthing drawing.
h) Stub and stub-setting template drawings. Foundation designs.
i) Stringing procedure, stringing chart
j) Tower accessories drawings like danger plate, name plate etc.
k) Quality plans for fabrication and site activities including Quality System.
l) Sub-vendors approval, etc.
m) Line material drawings.
n) Type test report for line materials.
o) Any other drawings that transpires during the design and execution phase of the
project
1.5.12 The drawings should be submitted on cloth lined paper or Laminated Sheets.
1.5.13 In order to facilitate approval process, contractor shall submit all drawings and
documents to Consultant (in 2 sets) & Employer (in 2 sets). Employer shall forward

consolidate comments/approval to the contractor. After the incorporation of

comments, the contractor shall submit six set of drawings for the final approval.
1.5.14 All rights of the design/drawing for all types of towers and foundations shall be strictly
reserved with the Employer only and any designs/drawings/data sheets submitted by the
contractor from time to time shall become the property of the Employer. Under no
circumstances, the Contractor shall be allowed to user/offer above
designs/drawings/data sheets to any other authority without prior written permission of
the Employer. Any deviation to above is not acceptable and may be a cause for rejection
of the bid.
1.6 Design Improvements
1.6.1 The Employer or the Contractor may propose changes in the specification and if the
parties agree upon any such changes and the cost implication, the specification shall be
modified accordingly.
1.7 Design Co-ordination

Wherever, the design is in the scope of Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible
for the selection and design of appropriate material/item to provide the best
coordinated performance of the entire system. The basic design requirements are
detailed out in this Specification. The design of various components, sub-assemblies and
assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance.
1.8 Design Review Meeting

The contractor will be called upon to attend design review meetings with the Employer,
and the Project Management Consultants of the Employer during the period of Contract.
The contractor shall attend such meetings at his own cost at the Corporate Office of the
Employer or at mutually agreed venue as and when required. Such review meeting will
be held generally four times in a year or as and when required.
1.9 Quality Assurance, Inspection & Testing

1.9.1 Quality Assurance

To ensure that the supply and services under the scope of this Contract whether
manufactured or performed within the Contractor’s works or at his Sub-Contractor’s
premises or at site or at any other place of work are in accordance with the
specifications. The Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance programme to
control such activities at all points necessary. Such programme shall be broadly outlined
by the Contractor and shall be finalised after discussions before the award of Contract.
The detailed programme shall be submitted by the contractor after the award of contract
and finally accepted by the Employer after discussion. A quality assurance programme of
the Contractor shall generally cover but not limited to the following:
(a) His organization structure for the management and implementation of the
proposed quality assurance programme.
(b) Documentation control System.
(c) Qualification data for Contractor’s key personnel.
(d) The procedure for purchase of materials, parts components and selection of sub-
Contractor’s services including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw
material inspection, verification of material purchases etc.
(e) System for shop manufacturing including process controls and fabrication and
assembly controls.
(f) Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective action.
(g) Control of calibration and testing of measuring and testing equipments.
(h) Inspection and test procedure for manufacture.
(i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status.
(j) System for quality audits.
(k) System for authorizing release of manufactured product to the Employer.
(l) System for maintenance of records.
(m) System for handling storage and delivery and

(n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control procedure adopted for
controlling the quality characteristics relevant to critical and important items of
supply.
The Quality plan shall be mutually discussed and approved by the Employer after
incorporating necessary corrections by the Contractor as may be required.
1.9.1.1 Quality Assurance Documents

The Contractor shall be required to submit all the Quality Assurance Documents as
stipulated in the Quality Plan at the time of Employer 's inspection of
equipment/material.
1.9.1.2 The Employer or his duly authorized representatives reserves the right to carry out
Quality Audit and quality surveillance of the systems and procedures of the
Contractor's/his vendor's Quality Management and Control Activities.
1.9.2 Employer’s Supervision
1.9.2.1 To eliminate delays and avoid disputes and litigation to the Contract, all matters and
questions shall be resolved in accordance with the provisions of this document.
1.9.2.2 The manufacturing of the product shall be carried out in accordance with the
specifications. The scope of the duties of the Employer, pursuant to the contract, will
include but not be limited to the following:
a) Interpretation of all the terms and conditions of these Documents and Specifications.
b) Review and interpretation of all the Contractor's drawings, engineering data etc.
c) Witness or authorize his representative to witness tests at the manufacturer's works
or at site, or at any place where work is performed under the contract.
d) Inspect, accept or reject any equipment, material and work under the Contract, in
accordance with the Specifications.
e) Issue certificate of acceptance and/or progressive payment and final payment
certificate.
f) Review and suggest modification and improvement in completion schedules from time
to time, and

g) Supervise the Quality Assurance Programme implementation at all stages of the

works.
1.10 Inspection and Tests

1.10.1 Inspection
1.10.1.1 The Employer, his duly authorized representative and/or outside inspection agency
acting on behalf of the Employer shall have, at all reasonable times, access to the
premises and /or works of the contractor and/or their sub-contractor(s)/sub-vendors and
shall have the right, at all reasonable times, to inspect and examine the materials and
workmanship of the product during its manufacture.
1.10.1.2 The Contractor shall give the Employer’s Inspector fifteen (15) days (in case of domestic
testing and thirty (30) days (in case of foreign testing), as the case may be, written notice
of any material being ready for testing. In case of turnkey contract, the turnkey
contractor shall give the notice for inspection and shall associate in the inspection with
Employee’s inspector. All such inspections shall be to the Contractor's account except for
the expenses of the Employer’s inspector. The Employer’s inspector, unless witnessing of
the tests is virtually waived, will attend such tests within fifteen (15) days (in case of
domestic testing) and thirty (30) days in (in case of foreign testing) of the date of which
the equipment is notified as being ready for test/inspection or on a mutually agreed
date, failing which the Contractor may proceed with the test in accordance with the
technical specification after informing the Employer’s in writing and he shall forthwith
forward to the inspector duly certified copies of test reports / certificates in triplicate.
1.10.1.3 The Employer’s Inspector shall, within fifteen (15) days from the date of inspection, give
notice in writing to the Contractor, of any objection to any drawings and all or any
equipment and workmanship which in his opinion is not in accordance with the Contract.
The Contractor shall give due consideration to such objections and shall make the
modifications that may be necessary to meet the said objections.
1.10.1.4 When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractor’s or Sub-Contractor’s
works, the Employer’s inspector shall issue a certificate to this effect within fifteen (15)

days after completion of tests but if the tests are not witnessed by the Employer’s
inspector, the certificate shall be issued within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the
Contractor’s Test Certificate by the Employer’ Inspector. The completion of these tests or
the issue of the certificate shall not bind the Employer’s to accept the equipment should
it, on further tests after erection, be found not to comply with the Contract.
1.10.1.5 In all cases where the Contract provides for test whether at the premises or works of, the
Contractor or of any Sub-Contractor, the Contractor except where otherwise specified
shall provide free of charge such item as labour, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores.
Apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably demanded by the Employer’s inspector
or his authorised representative to carry out effectively such tests of the equipment in
accordance with the Contract and shall give facilities to the Employer’s Inspector or to his
authorised representative to accomplish testing.
1.10.1.6 The inspection by Employer and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon shall in no way limit
the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect of the agreed Quality
Assurance Programme forming a part of the Contract.
1.10.1.7 a) The Contractor shall keep the Employer informed in advance about the time of
starting and of the progress of manufacture and fabrication of various tower parts
at various stages, so that arrangements could be made for inspection.
b) The acceptance of any part of items shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any
part of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the Specification.
1.10.1.8 The Employer or his representative shall have free access at all reasonable times to those
parts of the Contractor’s works which are concerned with the fabrication of the
Employer’s material for satisfying himself that the fabrication is being done in
accordance with the provisions of the Specification.
1.10.1.9 Unless specified otherwise, inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to
dispatch and shall be concluded so as not to interfere unnecessarily with the operation of
the work.
1.10.1.10 Should any member of the structure be found not to comply with the supplied design, it
shall be liable to rejection. No member once rejected shall be resubmitted for

inspection, except in cases where the Employer or his authorized representative

considers that the defects can be rectified.
1.10.1.11 Defect which may appear during fabrication shall be made good with the consent of, and
according to the procedure proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Employer.
1.10.1.12 All gauges and templates necessary to satisfy the Employer shall be supplied by the
contractor.
1.10.1.13 The specified grade and quality of steel shall be used by the Contractor. To ascertain the
quality of steel used, the inspector may at his discretion get the material tested at an
approved laboratory.
1.10.2 Tests
1.10.2.1 The type, acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture shall be carried-out
on the material and shall mean as follows:
1.10.2.2 Type Tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried out to prove the process of
manufacture and general conformity of the material to this Specification. These tests
shall be carried out on samples prior to commencement of commercial production
against the order. The Bidder shall indicate his schedule for carrying out these tests.
1.10.2.3 Acceptance Tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried out on samples taken
from each lot offered for pre-dispatch inspection, for the purposes of acceptance of that
lot.
1.10.2.4 Routine Tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on the material to
check requirements which are likely to vary during production.
1.10.2.5 Tests During Manufacture shall mean those tests, which are to be
carried out during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the Contractor to
ensure the desired quality of the end product to be supplied by him.
1.10.2.6 The norms and procedure of sampling for these tests will be as per the Quality Assurance
Programme to be mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Employer.
1.10.2.7 The standards and norms to which these tests will be carried out are listed against them.
Where a particular test is a specific requirement of this Specification, the norms and

procedure of the test shall be as specified in Annexure-A or as mutually agreed to

between the Contractor and the Employer in the Quality Assurance Programme.
1.10.2.8 For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be the values specified in
this Specification or guaranteed by the Bidder, as applicable.
1.10.3 Type-tested items

The Bidders shall offer the type tested following items
a) ACSR Moose Conductor
b) Optical Ground Wire ( OPGW)
c) Galvanized Steel Earthwire
d) Antifog Porcelein Insulator
e) Insulator’s Hardwares, OPGW Hardwares and accessories for conductor, OPGW and GSW
The Type Test must have been carried out within 5 years prior to the date of bid opening
and type test must have been carried out the recognized national/international
accredited laboratory. If the type test reports are older than 5 years or insufficient, the
bidders shall undertake to repeat the same to the satisfaction of the Employer at their
own cost. The cost in connection of the visit of the Employer’s representative to witness
the type test shall also be borne by the Contractor.
1.11 Packing
1.11.1 All the materials shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and crated to
prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage at Site till the time
of erection. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage during
transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing.
1.11.2 The Contractor shall include and provide for securely protecting and packing the
materials so as to avoid loss or damage during transport by air, sea, rail and road.
1.11.3 All packing shall allow for easy removal and checking at site. Wherever necessary, proper
arrangement for attaching slings for lifting shall be provided. All packages shall be clearly
marked for with signs showing ‘up’ and ‘down’ on the sides of boxes, and handling and

unpacking instructions as considered necessary. Special precaution shall be taken to

prevent rusting of steel and iron parts during transit by sea.
1.11.4 The cases containing easily damageable material shall be very carefully packed and
marked with appropriate caution symbols, i.e. fragile, handle with care, use no hook etc.
wherever applicable.
1.11.5 Each package shall be legibly marked by the Contractor at his expenses showing the
details such as description and quantity of contents, the name of the consignee and
address, the gross and net weights of the package, the name of the Contractor etc.
1.11.6 Angle section shall be wire bundled.
1.11.7 Cleat angles, gusset plates, brackets, fillet plate, hanger and similar loose pieces shall be
tested and bolted together in multiples or securely wired through holes.
1.11.8 Bolts, nuts washers and other attachments shall be packed in double gunny bags
accurately tagged in accordance with the contents.
1.11.9 The packing shall be properly done to avoid losses & damages during transit. Each
bundle or package shall be appropriately marked.
1.12 Employer‘s Environment and Social Policy and its Implementation

1.12.1 Development and growth of mankind through Industrialization and unwarranted use of
natural resources has inflicted considerable impact on Environment and Society. As a
result, Environmental and Social issues have emerged as the focal point of global debate.
Employer’s activities by their inherent nature and flexibility have negligible impacts on
environmental and social attributes. In order to address these issues and to match the
rising expectations of a cleaner, safer and healthier environment, the following key
principles of Environmental and Social Policy shall be noted by the contractor:
i) Avoidance of environmentally and socially sensitive areas while planning project
activities.
ii) Minimization of impacts when project activities occur in environmentally and
socially sensitive areas.
iii) Mitigation of any unavoidable adverse impacts arising out of its projects.

1.12.2 Basic issues to be kept in mind while carrying out construction activities are to
i) Avoid socially sensitive areas with regard to human habitations and areas of
cultural significance.
ii) Secure the interest of people affected by Employer’s projects.
iii) Involve local people (Workers and labours) affected by transmission line projects
as per requirement and suitability. The Contractor shall not employ the child
labour in construction.
iv) Consult affected people in decisions having implication to them if considered
necessary.
v) Apply, efficient and safe technology/practices.
vi) Keep abreast of all potential dangers to people’s health, occupational safety and
safety of environment and the respective mitigatory measures.
vii) Establish preventive mechanisms to guarantee safety.
viii) Mitigation measures in case of accidents.
ix) Avoid unwarranted cutting of trees in forest area.
1.12.3 While constructing the lines through forest stretches the contractor will provide
alternate fuel to its employee e.g. working labours/supervisors etc. in order to avoid
cutting of forest woods.
1.12.4 Contractor will ensure safety to the wild life, during working/camping near to the
National park/forest. The Contractor shall provide appropriate trainijg in handling the
equipment and machinery to the workers and laborers before contraction. All workers
employed by the Contrctors shall be insured against accident.
1.12.5 Contractor during construction of lines in agricultural fields will ensure minimum
damages to the crops, trees, bunds, irrigation etc. The Contractor shall make
compensation to the loss of standing crop due to his activities. However, the unavoidable
loss of standing crops in the right of the line shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
in which case bidders shall assist the employer for the assessment of such loss .

1.12.6 The waste/excess material/debris should be removed from the construction site
including agricultural field, forest stretches, river etc. immediately after construction
work.
1.12.7 Discharge of cement slurry, garbage and other solid wastes generated by the
construction activities and work force should be avoided where possible.
1.12.8 The Contractor will have to negotiate with the owner of the property for the use of their
premises for the stockpiling of the construction materials even if it is for the short period.
1.12.9 Chemical and other hazardous materials should be dumped safely far away from the
water bodies.
1.12.10 The Contractor will ensure least disturbance to the hill slope and natural drainage so as
to avoid soil erosion. Natural drainage in plain area if disturbed is to be trained to the
satisfaction of Engineer- in-charge.
1.12.11 As far as possible existing path/kutchcha road/approach shall be used for the
construction.
1.12.12 The Contractor will ensure supply of stone chips/sand from authorized/approved quarry
areas.
1.12.13 Proper documentation of above, if any.
1.12.14 The Initial Environmental Examination (IEE) report of the project is available at the office
of the Employer, which shall be referred by the Bidder for further information.
1.13 Codes and Standards

All Equipments, materials, fabrications and tests under these specifications shall conform
to the latest applicable standards, manuals and specifications as mentioned in the
relevant chapters of Specifications. Any details not specifically covered by these
standards and Specifications shall be subject to approval by the Employer.

Package-KC3
Section-II-B
General Technical Requirements- Substation
SECTION II-B
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT - SUBSTATION
CONTENTS
2.0 Foreword 1
2.1 General Requirements 1
2.2 Standards 1
2.3 Service to be performed by the Equipments being furnished 2
2.4 Engineering data and drawing 5
2.5 Drawings 5
2.6 Approval Procedure 6
2.7 Material/Workmanship 8
2.8 Provisions for Exposure to Hot and Humid climate 9
2.9 Space Heaters 10
2.10 Fungi Static Varnish 10
2.11 Ventilation Opening 10
2.12 Degree of Protection 10
2.13 Rating Plates, Name Plates and Labels 11
2.14 First Fill of Consumables, Oil and Lubricants 11
2.15 Design Improvements/Coordination 11
2.16 Quality Assurance Program 12
2.17 Quality Assurance Documents 13
Type Testing, Routine Testing Inspection (Including Acceptance
2.18 14
Test), Testing & Inspection Certificate
2.19 Tests 17
2.20 Packaging & Protection 17
Section II-B Contents

2.21 Finishing of Metal Surfaces 18

2.22 Hot Dip Galvanizing 18
2.23 Painting 19
2.24 Handling, Storing and Installation 20
2.25 Tools and Tackles 23
2.26 Auxiliary Supply 23
2.27 Equipment Supporting Structure 24
2.28 Clamps and Connectors including Terminal Connectors 24
Control Cabinets , Junction boxes, Terminal boxes & Marshalling

2.29
boxes for outdoor equipment 26
2.30 Terminal Blocks and Wiring 28
2.31 Lamps & Sockets 30
2.32 Switches and Fuses 30
2.33 Bushings, Hollow Column Insulators, Support Insulators 30
2.34 Motors 31
2.35 Technical Requirement of Equipments 34
Annexure-A 36
Annexure-B 50
Section II-B Contents

Package- KC3: Construction of 220 kV Double Circuit Transmission Line from Basantapur–
Dhunge Sangu and 132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge Sangu
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Part II: Section VI: Employer's Requirement
SECTION II-B
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT - SUBSTATION
2.0. FOREWORD
The provisions under this chapter are intended to supplement Employer’s requirements for the
materials, equipment and services covered under all the chapters of tender documents and are
not exclusive.
2.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENT

a) The contractor shall furnish catalogues, engineering data, technical information, design
documents, drawings etc., fully in conformity with the technical specification during detailed
engineering.
b) Equipment furnished shall be complete in every respect with all mountings, fittings, fixtures
and standard accessories normally provided with such equipment and/or needed for erection,
testing and commissioning and safe operation of the equipment as required by applicable
codes though they may not have been specifically detailed in the Technical Specifications
unless included in the list of exclusions. Materials and components not specifically stated in the
specification and bid price schedule but which are necessary for successful erection, testing
and commissioning and satisfactory operation of the substation unless specifically excluded
shall be deemed to be included in the scope of the specification and shall be supplied without
any extra cost. All similar standard components/parts of similar standard equipment provided,
shall be inter-changeable with one another.
2.2. STANDARDS
a) The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered, manufactured, built,
tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules, Laws and Regulations of
Nepal, relevant IEC standards, Indian Standard Codes any other equivalent neutrally
acceptable International Standards.
Section II-B Page 1 of 51

b) The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest issue with
all amendments (as on the date of bid opening) of standard specified under Annexure-A of
this chapter, unless specifically mentioned in the specification.
c) The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification are not mutually
exclusive or complete in themselves, but intended to complement each other.
d) The Contractor shall also note that list of standards presented in this specification is not
complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in conjunction
with specific IEC or equivalent international standard.
e) When the specific requirements stipulated in the specifications exceed or differ than those
required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take
precedence.
f) Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better performance

than that specified in the standards specified under Annexure-A / individual chapters for
specification shall also, be accepted by the bidders, however the salient points of
difference shall be clearly brought out in the Additional Information Schedule of the bid
along with English language version of such standards. The equipment conforming to
standards other than specified under Annexure-A/ individual chapters of specification shall
be subject to Employer’s approval.
2.3. SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED
The equipment furnished under this specification shall perform all its intended functions and
operate satisfactorily without showing undue strain, restrike etc under such over voltage
conditions.
All equipments shall also perform satisfactorily under various electrical, electro-mechanical and
meteorological conditions of the site of installation.
a) All equipment shall be able to withstand all external and internal mechanical, thermal and
electromechanical forces due to various factors like wind load, temperature variation, ice &
snow, (wherever applicable) short circuit etc for the equipment.

b) The bidder shall design terminal connectors of the equipment taking into account various
forces that are required to be withstand.
c) The equipment shall also comply with the following:
i) To facilitate erection of equipment, all items to be assembled at site shall be “match

marked”.
ii) All piping, if any between equipment control cabinet/operating mechanism to marshalling
box of the equipment, shall bear proper identification to facilitate the connection at site.
d) Equipments and system shall be designed to meet the following climatic conditions and major
technical requirements.
2.3.1. Climatic Condition
1) Ambient air temperature: 34oC (Max) and -5oC(Min)
2) Elevation above mean sea level
a) Dhungesangu: 1390 meter
System Parameters
S.No. Parameter Unit 132 kV 33 kV

1. Nominal Rated Voltage kVrms 132 33
2. Highest system voltage kVrms 145 36
3. Phase 3 3
4. Rated frequency Hz 50 50
5. Nominal Creepage Distance mm/ kV 25 25
6. Rated fault current kA 31.5 for 1 sec 25 for 3 sec
7. Minimum corona extinction kVrms 105 -
voltage
8. Maximum radio interference µV 500 at 92 kVrms -
voltage for frequency between
0.5 to 2 MHz

9. System Neutral earthing

10. Auxiliary ac supply 3ph,4 wire V 400±10% 400±10%
50Hz
11. a)Auxiliary DC supply V 110±10% 110±10%
2 wire ungrounded
12. Minimum clearances
i. Phase to phase mm 1300 320
ii. Phase to ground mm 1300 320
iii. Sectional Clearance mm 3800 3000
iv. Ground clearance for mm 4800 3700
live conductor
v. Height of insulator bottom mm 2500 2500
from ground
Note:
The above parameters and minimum safety clearances are applicable for installations up to an
altitude of 1000m above mean sea level. For Dhungesaghu (1350 MSL) where altitude is exceeding
1000m, an altitude correction factor of 1.25% per 100m or as recommended by relevant IS/IEC or
part thereof shall be applied.
2.3.2. Technical Parameters of Bushings, hollow insulators and support insulators:
S.No Parameter Unit 132 kV 33 kV

.
1. Full wave Impulse Withstand Voltage kVp 650 170
(1.2/50 micro. Sec)
2. Power frequency withstand voltage kV rms 275 70

2.4. ENGINEERING DATA AND DRAWINGS
a) The list of drawings/documents which are to be submitted to the Employer shall be discussed
and finalized by the Employer at the time of award.
The Contractor shall necessarily submit all the drawings/ documents unless anything is waived.
b) The Contractor shall submit 4 (four) sets of drawings/ design documents / data sheets /
detailed bill of quantity and 2 (two) set of test reports for the approval of the Employer. The
contractor shall also submit the softcopy of the above documents in addition to hardcopy.
2.5. DRAWINGS
a) All drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the type, size,
arrangement, material description, Bill of Materials, weight of each component, break-up for
packing and shipment, dimensions, internal & the external connections, fixing arrangement
required and any other information specifically requested in the specifications or desired by
the Employer.
b) Drawings submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the name of the Employer,
the unit designation, the specifications title, the specification number and the name of the
Project. Distribution copies of standard drawings/documents shall be submitted as per
provision of the contract. All titles, noting, markings and writings on the drawing shall be in
English. All the dimensions shall be in SI units.
c) The review of these data by the Employer shall cover only general conformance of the data to
the specifications and documents interfaces with the equipment provided under the
specifications, external connections and of the dimensions which might affect substation
layout. This review by the Employer may not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions,
quantities and details of the equipment, materials, any devices or items indicated or the
accuracy of the information submitted. This review and/or approval by the Employer shall not
be considered by the Contractor, as limiting any of his responsibilities and liabilities for
mistakes and deviations from the requirements, specified under these specifications.

d) All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval
of the drawings shall be at the Contractor’s risk. The Contractor may make any changes in the
design which are necessary to make the equipment conform to the provisions and intent of the
Contract and such changes shall again be subject to approval by the Employer. Approval of
Contractor’s drawing or work by the Employer shall not relieve the contractor of any of his
responsibilities and liabilities under the Contract.
e) All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after final process including review and
approval by the Employer shall form part of the Contract Document and the entire works
performed under these specifications shall be performed in strict conformity with contract,
unless otherwise expressly requested by the Employer in writing.
2.6. APPROVAL PROCEDURE
The scheduled dates for the submission of the designs & drawings as well as for, any
data/information to be furnished by the contractor would be discussed and finalized at the
time of award. The following schedule shall be generally followed for approval and for
providing final documentation.
Approval/comments As per agreed schedule

Resubmission (Whenever required) Within 2 (Two) weeks from date of
comments
Approval or comments Within 2 (two) weeks of receipt of
resubmission
Furnishing of distribution 2 weeks from the date of approval
Copies (5 hard copies per
Substation and one soft
Copy in pdf and in editable format)
Furnishing of distribution
Copies of test reports
(a) Type test reports 2 weeks from the date of final approval.

(Softcopy in pdf format per substation plus

one for corporate centre & two
hardcopy per substation)
(b) Routine Test Reports(two copy for each -do-
substation)
Furnishing of instruction/operation As per agreed schedule

manuals(2 copies per substation and one
softcopy in pdf and in editable format)
As built drawings (three sets of On completion of entire works
hardcopy per substation plus one
set for corporate centre and & softcopy in
pdf as well as in editable format )
NOTE :
(1) The contractor may please note that all resubmissions must incorporate all comments given
in the earlier submission by the Employer or adequate justification for not incorporating the
same must be submitted failing which the submission of documents is likely to be returned.
(2) All drawings should be submitted in softcopy form, however substation design drawings like
SLD, GA, all layouts etc. shall also be submitted in AutoCAD Version. SLD, GA & layout
drawings shall be submitted for the entire substation in case of substation extension also.
(3) The instruction Manuals shall contain full details of drawings of all equipment being supplied
under this contract, their exploded diagrams with complete instructions for storage, handling,
erection, testing, commissioning, operation, trouble shooting, servicing and overhauling
procedures.
(4) If after the commissioning and initial operation of the substation, the instruction manuals
require any modifications/ additions/changes, the same shall be incorporated and the
updated final instruction manuals shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Employer.

(5) The Contractor shall furnish to the Employer catalogues of spare parts.
(6) All As-built drawings/documents shall be certified by site in charge/PMC indicating the
changes before final submission.
2.7. MATERIAL/WORKMANSHIP
General Requirement
a) Where the specification does not contain references to workmanship, equipment, materials
and components of the covered equipment, it is essential that the same must be new, of
highest grade of the best quality of their kind, conforming to best engineering practice and
suitable for the purpose for which they are intended.
b) Incase where the equipment, materials or components are indicated in the specification as
“similar” to any special standard, the Employer shall decide upon the question of similarity.
When required by the specification or when required by the Employer, the Contractor shall
submit, for approval, all the information concerning the materials or components to be used in
manufacture. Machinery, equipment, materials and components supplied, installed or used
without such approval shall run the risk of subsequent rejection and the cost as well as the
time delay associated with the rejection shall be borne by the Contractor.
c) The design of the Works shall be such that installation, future expansions, replacements and
general maintenance may be undertaken with a minimum of time and expenses. Each
component shall be designed to be consistent with its duty and suitable factors of safety,
subject to mutual agreements. All joints and fastenings shall be devised, constructed and
documented so that the component parts shall be accurately positioned and restrained to
fulfill their intended functions. In general, screw threads shall be standard metric threads. The
use of other thread forms shall only be permitted when prior approval has been obtained from
the Employer.
d) Whenever possible, all similar part of the Works shall be made to gauge and shall also be made
interchangeable with similar parts. All spare parts shall also be interchangeable and shall be
made of the same materials specifications and workmanship as the corresponding parts of the

Equipment supplied under the Specification. Where feasible, common component units shall
be employed in different pieces of equipment in order to minimize spare parts stocking
requirements. All equipment of the same type and rating shall be physically and electrically
interchangeable.
e) All materials and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation(s) and this specification workmanship. Only first-class work in accordance
with the best modern practices shall be accepted. Installation shall be considered as being the
erection of equipment at its permanent location. This, unless otherwise specified, it shall
include unpacking, cleaning and lifting into position, grouting, levelling, aligning, coupling of or
bolting down to previously installed equipment bases/foundations, performing the alignment
check and final adjustment prior to initial operation, testing and commissioning in accordance
with the manufacturer’s tolerances, Employer’s instructions and the Specification. All factory
assembled rotating machinery shall be checked for alignment and adjustments made as
necessary to re-establish the manufacturer’s limits suitable guards shall be provided for the
protection of personnel on all exposed rotating and / or moving machine parts and shall be
designed for easy installation and removal for maintenance purposes. The spare equipment(s)
shall be installed at designated locations and tested for healthiness.
f) The Contractor shall apply oil and grease of the proper specification to suit the machinery, as is
necessary for the installation of the equipment. Lubricants used for installation purposes shall
be drained out and the system flushed through where necessary for applying the lubricant
required for operation. The Contractor shall apply all operational lubricants to the equipment
installed by him.
2.8. PROVISIONS FOR EXPOSURE TO HOT AND HUMID CLIMATE
Outdoor equipment supplied under the specification shall be suitable for service and storage
under tropical conditions of high temperature, high humidity, heavy rainfall and environment
favourable to the growth of fungi and mildew. The indoor equipments located in non-air
conditioned areas shall also be of same type.

2.9. SPACE HEATERS
a) Suitable anti condensation heaters with the provision of thermostat shall be provided.
b) The heaters shall be suitable for continuous operation at 230V as supply voltage. ON-OFF
switch and fuse shall be provided.
c) One or more adequately rated thermostatically connected heaters shall be supplied to prevent
condensation in any compartment. The heaters shall be installed in the compartment and
electrical connections shall be made sufficiently away from below the heaters to minimize
deterioration of supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be suitable to maintain the
compartment temperature to prevent condensation.
2.10. FUNGI STATIC VARNISH
Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant varnish shall be applied on
parts which may be subjected or predisposed to the formation of fungi due to the presence or
deposit of nutrient substances. The varnish shall not be applied to any surface of part where
the treatment shall interfere with the operation or performance of the equipment. Such
surfaces or parts shall be protected against the application of the varnish.
2.11. VENTILATION OPENING
Wherever ventilation is provided, the compartments shall have ventilation openings with fine
wire mesh of brass to prevent the entry of insects and to reduce to a minimum the entry of dirt
and dust. Outdoor compartment openings shall be provided with shutter type blinds and
suitable provision shall be made so as to avoid any communication of air / dust with any part in
the enclosures of the Control Cabinets, Junction boxes and Marshalling Boxes, panels etc.
2.12. DEGREE OF PROTECTION
The enclosures of the Control Cabinets, Junction boxes and Marshalling Boxes, panels etc. to be
installed shall provide degree of protection as detailed here under:
a) Installed outdoor: IP- 55
b) Installed indoor in air conditioned area: IP-31

c) Installed in covered area: IP-52
d) Installed indoor in non air conditioned area where possibility of entry of water is limited: IP-
41.
e) For LT Switchgear (AC & DC distribution Boards): IP-52
The degree of protection shall be in accordance with IEC-60947 (Part-I) / IEC-60529. Type test
report for degree of protection test, shall be submitted for approval.
2.13. RATING PLATES, NAME PLATES AND LABELS
a) Each main and auxiliary item of substation shall have permanently attached to it, a rating plate
of non-corrosive material in a conspicuous position upon which shall be engraved
manufacturer’s name, year of manufacture, equipment name, type or serial number together
with details of the loading conditions under which the item of substation in question has been
designed to operate, and such diagram plates as may be required by the Employer. The rating
plate of each equipment shall be according to IEC requirement.
b) All such nameplates, instruction plates, rating plates of transformers, reactors, CB, CT, CVT, SA,
Isolators, C & R panels and PLCC equipments shall be provided with English inscriptions.
2.14. FIRST FILL OF CONSUMABLES, OIL AND LUBRICANTS
All the first fill of consumables such as oils, lubricants, filling compounds, touch up paints,
soldering/brazing material for all copper piping of circuit breakers and essential chemicals etc.
Which shall be required to put the equipment covered under the scope of their specifications,
into successful Operation, shall be furnished by the Contractor unless specifically excluded
under the exclusions in these specifications and documents.
2.15. DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS/COORDINATION
a) The bidder shall note that the equipment offered by him in the bid only shall be accepted
for supply. However, the Employer or the Contractor may propose changes in the
specification of the equipment or quality thereof and if the Employer & contractor agree

upon any such changes, the specification shall be modified accordingly during execution
without any financial implication.
b) The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of appropriate equipments
to provide the best co-ordinated performance of the entire system. The basic design
requirements are detailed out in this Specification. The design of various components, sub-
assemblies and assemblies shall be so done that it facilitates easy field assembly and
maintenance.
d) The Contractor shall coordinate designs and terminations with the agencies (if any) who are
Consultants/Contractor for the Employer. The names of agencies shall be intimated to the
successful bidders.
e) The Contractor will be called upon to attend design co-ordination meetings with the
Engineer, other Contractors and the Consultants of the Employer (if any) during the period
of Contract. The Contractor shall attend such meetings at his own cost at Employer’s
Corporate Centre/Site office, Nepal or at mutually agreed venue as and when required and
fully cooperate with such persons and agencies involved during those discussions.
2.16. QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this Contract whether
manufactured or performed within the Contractor’s Works or at his Sub-contractor’s premises
or at the Employer’s site or at any other place of Work are in accordance with the technical
specifications, the Contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance programme to control such
activities at all points necessary. Such programme shall be broadly outlined by the contractor
and finalized after discussions before the award of contract. The detailed programme shall be
submitted by the contractor after the award for reference. A quality assurance programme of
the contractor shall generally cover but not limited to the following:
(a) His organization structure for the management and implementation of the proposed
quality assurance programme:
(b) Documentation control system;

(c) Qualification data of contractor’s key personnel;
(d) The procedure for purchases of materials, parts components and selection of sub-
Contractor’s services including vendor analysis, source inspection, incoming raw material
inspection, verification of material purchases etc.
(e) System for shop manufacturing and site erection controls including process controls and
fabrication and assembly control;
(f) Control of non-conforming items and system for corrective actions;
(g) Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities.
(h) Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field activities;
(i) System for indication and appraisal of inspection status;
(j) System for quality audits;
(k) System for authorizing release of manufactured product to the Purchaser.
(l) System for maintenance of records;
(m) System for handling storage and delivery; and
(n) A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures and procedures adopted
for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to each item of equipment furnished and/or
services rendered.
The Employer or his duly authorized representative reserves the right to carry out quality audit
and quality surveillance of the system and procedure of the Contractor/his vendor’s quality
management and control activities.
2.17. QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS
The contractor shall be required to submit all the Quality Assurance Documents as stipulated in
the Quality Plan at the time of Employer’s inspection of equipment/material

2.18. TEST AND INSPECTION

2.18.1. All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests including additional type tests as per
technical specification and shall be subject to routine tests in accordance with requirements
stipulated under respective Chapters. Employer reserves the right to witness any or all the
tests.
2.18.2. The reports for all type tests and additional type tests as per technical specification shall be
furnished by the successful bidder (Contractor) along with equipment / material drawings for
all the major materials like Transformer , Circuit Breaker, Isolator with earth and without earth
switch, Surge Arrestor, SAS, Control & Protection Panel, Optical Fiber Communication Terminal
Equipment , DC Battery & Battery Charger, ACDB / DCDB, Insulators, Insulator’s Hardware,
Power and Control cables etc. supplied against this specification.
2.18.3. The test reports submitted shall be of the tests conducted within last 10 (Ten) years prior to
the originally Scheduled date of bid Opening unless otherwise mentioned in the respective
chapters of Technical Specifications of Bidding documents.. In case, the test reports are of the
test conducted earlier than the above mentioned period prior to the Bid Opening, the
Contractor shall repeat these tests at no extra cost to the Employer.
In case of instrument transformers, the following type tests should have been conducted
within 10 (Ten) years prior to the originally Scheduled date of bid opening.
i) Lightning Impulse Test
ii) Switching Impulse Test
iii) Multiple Chopped Impulse Test (For CT)
iv) Chopped Impulse Test (For CVT )
Further, In the event of any discrepancy in the test reports i.e. any test report not acceptable
due to any design / manufacturing changes (including substitution of components) or due to
non-compliance with the requirement stipulated in the Technical Specification or any/all
additional type tests not carried out, same shall be carried out without any additional cost
implication to the Employer.

The Contractor shall intimate the Employer the detailed program about the tests atleast two
(2) weeks in advance in case of domestic supplies & six (6) weeks in advance in case of foreign
supplies.
Further, in case type tests are required to be conducted/repeated and the deputation of
Inspector/Employer’s representative is required, then all the expenses shall be borne by the
contractor.
2.18.4. The Employer, his duly authorized representative and/or outside inspection agency acting on
behalf of the Purchaser shall have at all reasonable times free access to the Contractor’s/sub-
vendors premises or Works and shall have the power at all reasonable times to inspect and
examine the materials and workmanship of the Works during its manufacture or erection if
part of the Works is being manufactured or assembled at other premises or works, the
Contractor shall obtain for the Engineer and for his duly authorized representative permission
to inspect as if the works were manufactured or assembled on the Contractor’s own premises
or works. Inspection may be made at any stage of manufacture, dispatch or at site at the
option of the Purchaser and the equipment if found unsatisfactory due to bad workmanship or
quality, material is liable to be rejected.
2.18.5. The Contractor shall give the Employer /Inspector fifteen (15) days written notice for on-shore
and six (6) weeks’ notice for off-shore material being ready for joint testing including contractor
and Employer. Such tests shall be to the Contractor’s account except for the expenses of the
Inspector. The Employer /inspector, unless witnessing of the tests is virtually waived, will
attend such tests within fifteen (15) days of the date of which the equipment is notified as
being ready for test/inspection, failing which the Contractor may proceed alone with the test
which shall be deemed to have been made in the Inspector’s presence and he shall forthwith
forward to the Inspector duly certified copies of tests in triplicate.
2.18.6. The Employer shall, within fifteen (15) days from the date of inspection as defined herein give
notice in writing to the Contractor, of any objection to any drawings and all or any equipment
and workmanship which in his opinion is not in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor
shall give due consideration to such objections and shall either make the modifications that
may be necessary to meet the said objections or shall confirm in writing to the Purchaser

/Inspector giving reasons therein, that no modifications are necessary to comply with the
Contract.
2.18.7. When the factory tests have been completed at the Contractor’s or Sub-Contractor’s works, the
Purchaser/inspector shall issue a certificate to this effect within fifteen (15) days after
completion of tests but if the tests are not witnessed by the Purchaser /Inspector, the
certificate shall be issued within fifteen (15) days of receipt of the Contractor’s Test certificate
by the Engineer/Inspector. Failure of the Purchaser /Inspector to issue such a certificate shall
not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the Works. The completion of these tests or
the issue of the certificate shall not bind the Employer to accept the equipment should, it, on
further tests after erection, be found not to comply with the Contract. The equipment shall be
dispatched to site only after approval of test reports and issuance of CIP by the Employer.
2.18.8. In all cases where the Contract provides for tests whether at the premises or at the works of
the Contractor or of any Sub-Contractor, the Contractor except where otherwise specified shall
provide free of charge such items as labour, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus
and instruments as may be reasonably demanded by the Employer /Inspector or his authorized
representative to carry out effectively such tests of the equipment in accordance with the
Contract and shall give facilities to the Employer /Inspector or to his authorized representative
to accomplish testing.
2.18.9. The inspection by Employer and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon shall in no way limit the
liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect of the agreed quality assurance
programme forming a part of the Contract.
2.18.10. The Employer will have the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of reasonable
nature carried out at Contractor’s premises or at site or in any other place in addition of
aforesaid type and routine tests, to satisfy that the material comply with the specification.
2.18.11. The Employer reserves the right for getting any field tests not specified in respective chapters
of the technical specification conducted on the completely assembled equipment at site. The
testing equipments for these tests shall be provided by the Purchaser.
2.18.12. Please also Technical Specifications of Part II

2.19. TESTS
a) Pre-commissioning Tests
On completion of erection of the equipment and before charging, each item of the equipment
shall be thoroughly cleaned and then inspected jointly by the Employer and the Contractor for
correctness and completeness of installation and acceptability for charging, leading to initial
pre-commissioning tests at Site. The lists of pre-commissioning tests to be performed are as
per IEC/IS Standards and shall be included in the Contractor’s quality assurance programme.
b) Commissioning Tests
The available instrumentation and control equipment to be used during such tests, the
Employer shall calibrate all such measuring equipment and devices as far as practicable.
i) Any special equipment, tools and tackles required for the successful completion of the
Commissioning Tests shall be provided by the Contractor, free of cost.
ii) The specific tests required on equipment have been brought out in the respective chapters of
the technical specification.
iii) The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances from the concerned
authorities for commissioning the equipment and the switchyard. However, necessary fee if
charged by concerned authorities shall be reimbursed on production of requisite documents.
2.20. PACKAGING & PROTECTION
a) All the equipment shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxed and crated to prevent
damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage at Site till the time of erection. On
request of the Employer, the Contractor shall also submit packing details/associated drawing
for any equipment/material under his scope of supply, to facilitate the Employer to repack any
equipment/material at a later date, in case the need arises. While packing all the materials, the
limitation from the point of view of availability of Railway wagon sizes or Road trailer size &
capacity including transportation limitations both in tones of weight and size shall be taken into
account. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage during transportation,
handling and storage due to improper packing. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such

charges claimed by the transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor.
Employer takes no responsibility of the availability of the Railway wagons.
b) All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact, discoloration and any other
damages. All exposed threaded portions shall be suitably protected with either a metallic or a
non-metallic protecting device. All ends of valves and pipings and conduit equipment
connections shall be properly sealed with suitable devices to protect them from damage.
2.21. FINISHING OF METAL SURFACES
All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti-corrosion protection. All ferrous
surfaces for external use unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the specification or specifically
agreed between Employer & contractor, shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. High
tensile steel nuts & bolts and spring washers shall be electro galvanized to service condition 4.
All steel conductors including those used for earthing/grounding (above ground level) shall also
be galvanized according to Equivalent International Standards.
2.22. HOT DIP GALVANIZING
a) The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq.m and minimum average thickness
of coating shall be 86 microns unless otherwise mentioned in the specification for all items
having thickness 6mm and above. For items lower than 6mm thickness requirement of coating
thickness shall be as per relevant ASTM. For surface which shall be embedded in concrete, the
zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq. m minimum unless otherwise mentioned in the specification.
b) The galvanized surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniform thick coating of zinc, firmly
adhering to the surface of steel. The finished surface shall be clean and smooth and shall be
free from defects like discolored patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter which is
loosely attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered surface, flaking or peeling off,
etc. The presence of any of these defects noticed on visual or microscopic inspection shall
render the material liable to rejection.

c) After galvanizing, no drilling or welding shall be performed on the galvanized parts of the
equipment except that nuts may be threaded after galvanizing. Sodium dichromate treatment
shall be provided to avoid formation of white rust after hot dip galvanization.
d) The galvanized steel shall be subjected to one minute dip test in copper sulphate solution as
per IEC.
e) Sharp edges with radii less than 2.5 mm shall be able to withstand four immersions of the
Standard Preece test. All other coatings shall withstand six immersions. The following
galvanizing tests shall be performed as per relevant International Standards.
- Coating thickness
- Uniformity of zinc coating
- Adhesion test
- Mass of zinc coating
f) Galvanized material must be transported properly to ensure that galvanized surfaces are not
damaged during transit. Application of zinc rich paint at site shall not be allowed.
2.23. PAINTING
A) All steel sheet work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated in accordance with the relevant
international standard. All surfaces, which shall not be easily accessible for repainting after
shop assembly, shall beforehand be treated and protected against corrosion for the life of the
equipment. The metal surfaces, which are to be finished painted after installation or require
corrosion protection until installation, shall be shop painted with at least two coats of red oxide
primer. Oil, grease, dirt and swaf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning. Rust and
scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running water,
rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.
b) After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by final
rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying. The phosphate coating shall be sealed

with application of two coats of ready mixed, stoving type zinc chromate primer. The first coat
may be “flash dried” while the second coat shall be stoved.
c) After application of the primer, the surface shall be finished by applying two coats of synthetic
enamel paint, each coat followed by stoving. The second coat of paint shall be applied after
inspection of first coat of painting.
d) The exterior and interior colour of the paint in case of new substations shall preferably be RAL
7032 for all equipment, marshalling boxes, junction boxes, control cabinets, panels etc. unless
specifically mentioned under respective chapters of the equipments. Glossy white colour inside
the equipments/boards/panels/junction boxes is also acceptable. The exterior colour for
panels shall match with the colour of existing panels in case of extension of a substation. Each
coat of primer and finishing paint shall be of slightly different shade to enable inspection of the
painting. A small quantity of finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at
site after installation of the equipments.
e) In case, the Bidder proposes to follow his own standard surface finish and protection
procedures or any other established painting procedures, like electrostatic painting etc., the
procedure shall be submitted along with the Bids for Employer’s review & approval.
f) For aluminium casted surfaces, the surface shall have smooth finish. Further, in case of
aluminium enclosures the surface shall be powder coated with coating thickness of not less
than 60 microns after surface preparation as per relevant Indian/International codes.
2.24. HANDLING, STORING AND INSTALLATION
a) In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on manufacturer’s drawings

or as directed by the Employer or his representative, the Contractor shall unload, store, erect,
install, wire, test and place into commercial use all the equipment included in the contract.
Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner so that it is level, plumb, square
and properly aligned and oriented. Commercial use of substation equipment means successful
completion of all site tests specified and energisation at rated voltage.

b) Contractor may engage manufacturer’s Engineers to supervise the unloading, transportation to

site, storing, testing and commissioning of the various equipment being procured by him
separately. Contractor shall unload, transport, store, erect, test and commission the equipment
as per instructions of the manufacturer’s supervisory Engineer(s).
c) The contractor shall ensure that the indoor and outdoor storage areas are in place prior to
commencement of delivery of material at site. Contractor shall also ensure availability of
proper unloading and material handling equipment like cranes etc. and polyester/nylon ropes
of suitable capacity to avoid damage during unloading and handling of material at site. All
indoor equipments shall be stored indoors. Outdoor equipment may be stored outdoors but on
a hard, flat and raised area and properly covered with waterproof and dustproof covers to
protect them against water seepage and moisture ingress. However, all associated control
panels, marshalling boxes, operating boxes etc. of outdoor equipments are to be stored
indoors only.
Storage of equipment on top of another one shall not be permitted if the wooden packing is
used. Material opened for joint inspection shall be repacked properly as per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
During storage of material, regular periodic monitoring of important parameters like oil level /
leakage, SF6 / Nitrogen pressure etc. shall be ensured by the contractor.
d) In case of any doubt as to the correct interpretation of manufacturer’s drawings or

instructions, necessary clarifications shall be obtained by the contractor from the
Manufacturer. Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to the equipment
consequent to not following manufacturer’s drawings/instructions correctly.
e) Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section, Contractor shall make all necessary
mechanical and electrical connections between sections including the connection between
buses. Contractor shall also carryout necessary adjustments/alignments for proper operation
of circuit breakers, isolators and their operating mechanisms. All components shall be
protected against damage during unloading, transportation, storage, installation, testing and

commissioning. Any equipment damaged due to negligence or carelessness of contractor or

otherwise shall be replaced by him at his own expense.
f) Contractor shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the Employer
immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc. for the purpose of Employer’s
information only. The Contractor shall submit to the Employer every week a report detailing
out all the receipts during the week. However, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for
any shortages or damages in transit, handling and/or in storage and erection of the equipment
at Site. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the transporters, railways
etc. shall be to the account of the Contractor.
g) The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment/material until the same is handed
over to the Employer in an operating condition after commissioning. Contractor shall be
responsible for the maintenance of the equipment/material while in storage as well as after
erection until taken over by Employer, as well as protection of the same against theft, elements
of nature, corrosion, damages etc.
h) Where material / equipment is unloaded by Employer before the Contractor arrives at site or
even when he is at site, Employer by right can hand over the same to Contractor and there
upon it shall be the responsibility of Contractor to store the material in an orderly and proper
manner.
i) The Contractor shall be responsible for constructing suitable indoor storage facilities at his own
cost, to store all equipment which requires indoor storage.
j) The words ‘erection’ and ‘installation’ used in the specification are synonymous.
k) Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the requirements of
electrical and other statutory safety codes.
l) The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering practices to
ensure satisfactory performance throughout the service life. If at any stage during the
execution of the contract, it is observed that the erected equipment(s) do not meet the above

minimum clearances as given in clause 1.3.2 the Contractor shall immediately proceed to
correct the discrepancy at his risks and cost.
m) Equipment Bases
A welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating equipment which are to be installed
on a concrete base unless otherwise agreed to by the Employer. Each base plate shall support
the unit and its drive assembly, shall be of a neat design with pads for anchoring the units, shall
have a raised lip all around, and shall have threaded drain connections.
2.25. TOOLS AND TACKLES
The Contractor shall supply with the equipment one complete set of all special tools and
tackles for the erection, assembly, dis-assembly and maintenance of the equipment. However,
these tools and tackles shall be separately, packed and brought to Site.
2.26. AUXILIARY SUPPLY
The sub-station auxiliary supply is normally met through a system having the parameters given
in table below. The auxiliary power for station supply, including the equipment drive, cooling
system of any equipment, air-conditioning, lighting etc shall be designed for the specified
Parameters as under. The DC supply for the instrumentation and OPGW system shall also
conform the parameters as indicated in the following.
Normal Variation in Phase/W Neutral connection

Voltage Voltage ire
400V AC + 10 % 3/4 Wire Solidly Earthed.
230V AC + 10 % 1/2 Wire Solidly Earthed.
110V DC + 10 % _ Isolated 2 wire System
48V DC _ _ 2 wire
system (+) earthed

2.27. EQUIPMENT SUPPORTING STRUCTURES
a) All equipment supporting structures shall be supplied along with brackets, angles, stools etc.
for attaching the operating mechanism, control cabinets & marshalling box (wherever
applicable) etc.
b) Equipment supporting structure shall meet the following mandatory requirements:
The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part of the bushing,
porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the bottom of the equipment base, where it
rests on the foundation pad shall be 2.5 meters.
2.28. CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS INCLUDING TERMINAL CONNECTORS
a) All power clamps and connectors shall conform to ANSI/NEMA CC1/ Equivalent International
standard and shall be made of materials listed below:
I. For connecting ACSR conductors, Aluminum alloy casting conforming to BS:1490/

Equivalent International Standard
II. For connecting equipment terminal made of copper with ACSR conductors, Bimetallic
connectors made from aluminum alloy casting conforming to BS: 1490/ Equivalent
International Standard with 2mm thick bimetallic liner.
III. For connecting GI Galvanized mild shield wire
 Bolts nuts and plain washers Electrogalvanised for sizes Plain, washers below M12,
shall be hot dip galvanized.
 Spring washers Electrogalvanised mild steel
b) Necessary clamps and connectors shall be supplied for all equipment and connections. The
requirement regarding external corona and RIV as specified for any equipment shall include its
terminal fittings. If corona rings are required to meet these requirements, they shall be
considered as part of that equipment and included in the scope of work and no separate
payment shall be made for this.

c) Where copper to aluminum connections are required, bi-metallic clamps shall be used, which
shall be properly designed to ensure that any deterioration of the connection is kept to a
minimum and restricted to parts which are not current carrying or subjected to stress.
d) Low voltage connectors, grounding connectors and accessories for grounding all equipment as
specified in each particular case, also included in the scope of Work.
e) No current carrying part of any clamp shall be less than 10 mm thick. All ferrous parts shall be
hot dip galvanized. Copper alloy liner of minimum 2 mm thickness shall be cast integral with
aluminum body or 2 mm thick bi-metallic strips shall be provided for Bi-metallic clamps.
f) All casting shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp edges
and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
g) Flexible connectors, braids or laminated straps made for the terminal clamps for bus posts shall
be suitable for both expansion or through (fixed/sliding) type connection of 4" IPS aluminium.
tube as required. In both the cases, the clamp height (top of the mounting pad to centre line of
the tube) should be same.
h) Clamp shall be designed to carry the same current as the conductor and the temperature rise
shall be equal or less than that of the conductor at the specified ambient temperature. The
rated current for which the clamp/connector is designed with respect to the specified
reference ambient temperature, shall also be indelibly marked on each component of the
clamp/connector, except on the hardware.
i) All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum contact
resistance.
j) Clamps and connectors shall be designed to be corona controlled.
TESTS
Clamps and connectors should be type tested as per NEMA CC1/ Equivalent International
Standard and shall also be subjected to routine tests as per NEMA CC1/ Equivalent
International Standard. Following type test reports shall be submitted for approval as per

clause 9.2 above except for sl. no.(ii) & (iii) for which type test once conducted shall be
applicable (i.e. the requirement of test conducted within last ten years shall not be applicable).
a) Temperature rise test (maximum temperature rise allowed is 35°C over 34°C ambient)
b) Short time current test
c) Resistance test and tensile test
2.29. CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, TERMINAL BOXES & MARSHALLING BOXES FOR
OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
a) All types of boxes, cabinets etc. shall generally conform to & be tested in accordance with IEC-
60439, as applicable, and the clauses given below:
b) Control cabinets, junction boxes, Marshalling boxes & terminal boxes shall be made of steel
sheet or aluminum and shall be dust, water and vermin proof. Steel sheet used shall be atleast
2.0 mm thick cold rolled or 2.5 mm thick hot rolled or alternately 1.6 mm thick stainless steel
can also be used. The cabinets & box shall be properly braced to prevent wobbling. There shall
be sufficient reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance to vibrations and rigidity
during transportation and installation. In case of aluminum box, the thickness of aluminum
shall be such that it provides adequate rigidity and long life as comparable with steel sheet of
specified thickness.
c) A canopy and sealing arrangements for operating rods shall be provided in marshalling boxes /
Control cabinets to prevent ingress of rain water.
d) Cabinet/boxes shall be provided with double hinged doors with padlocking arrangements. The
distance between two hinges shall be such so as to ensure uniform sealing pressure against
atmosphere. The quality of the gasket shall be such that it does not get damaged/cracked
during the operation of the equipment.
e) All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around with suitably profiled
EPDM/Neoprene gaskets. The gasket shall be tested in accordance with approved quality plan,
BS: 4255/ Equivalent International Standard. Ventilating Louvers, if provided, shall have screen
and filters. The screen shall be fine wire mesh made of brass.

f) All boxes/cabinets shall be designed for the entry of cables from bottom by means of weather
proof and dust-proof connections. Boxes and cabinets shall be designed with generous
clearances to avoid interference between the wiring entering from below and any terminal
blocks or accessories mounted within the box or cabinet. Suitable cable gland plate above the
base of the marshalling kiosk/box shall be provided for this purpose along with the proper
blanking plates. Necessary number of cable glands shall be supplied and fitted on this gland
plate. Gland plate shall have provision for some future glands to be provided later, if required.
The Nickel plated glands shall be dust proof, screw on & double compression type and made of
brass. The gland shall have provision for securing armour of the cable separately and shall be
provided with earthing tag. The glands shall conform to BS: 6121.
g) A 230V, single phase, 50 Hz, 5/15 amp AC plug and socket shall be provided in the cabinet with
ON-OFF switch for connection of hand lamps. Plug and socket shall be of industrial grade.
h) For illumination, 7 W LED with a MCB shall be provided. The switching of the fittings shall be
controlled by the door switch. .
For junction boxes of smaller sizes such as lighting junction box, manual operated earth switch
mechanism box etc., plug socket, heater and illumination is not required to be provided.
i) All control switches shall be of MCB/rotary switch type. Toggle/piano switches shall not be
accepted.
j) Positive earthing of the cabinet shall be ensured by providing two separate earthing pads. The
earth wire shall be terminated on to the earthing pad and secured by the use of self etching
washer. Earthing of hinged door shall be done by using a separate earth wire.
k) The bay marshalling kiosks shall be provided with danger plate and a diagram showing the
numbering/connection/feruling by pasting the same on the inside of the door.
i) The following routine tests along with the routine tests as per IEC 60529/ Equivalent
International Standard shall also be conducted:
a) Check for wiring
b) Visual and dimension check

ii) The enclosure of bay marshalling kiosk, junction box, terminal box shall conform to IP-55 as
per IEC 60529/ Equivalent International Standard including application of, 2.0 KV rms for 1
(one) minute, insulation resistance and functional test after IP-55 test.
2.30. TERMINAL BLOCKS AND WIRING
a) Control and instrument leads from the switchboards or from other equipment shall be brought
to terminal boxes or control cabinets in conduits. All inter phase and external connections to
equipment or to control cubicles shall be made through terminal blocks.
b) Terminal blocks shall be 650V grade and have continuous rating to carry the maximum
expected current on the terminals and non breakable type. These shall be of moulded piece,
complete with insulated barriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Screw
clamp, overall insulated, insertion type, rail mounted terminals can be used in place of stud
type terminals. But preferably the terminal blocks shall be non-disconnecting stud type of
Elmex or Phoenix or Wago or equivalent make.
c) Terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary leads shall be
provided with test links and isolating facilities. The current transformer secondary leads shall
also be provided with short circuiting and earthing facilities.
d) The terminal shall be such that maximum contact area is achieved when a cable is terminated.
The terminal shall have a locking characteristic to prevent cable from escaping from the
terminal clamp unless it is done intentionally.
e) The conducting part in contact with cable shall preferably be tinned or silver plated. However,
Nickel plated copper or zinc plated steel shall also be acceptable.
f) The terminal blocks shall be of extensible design.
g) The terminal blocks shall have locking arrangement to prevent its escape from the mounting
rails.
h) The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of transparent, non-
deteriorating type plastic material. Insulating barriers shall be provided between the terminal

blocks. These barriers shall not hinder the operator from carrying out the wiring without
removing the barriers.
i) Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the following
conductors on each side.
a) All circuits except Minimum of two of 2.5 sq mm
CT circuits copper flexible.
b) All CT circuits Minimum of 4 nos. of 2.5 sq mm
copper flexible.
j) The arrangements shall be in such a manner so that it is possible to safely connect or

disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse links when the cabinet is live.
k) At least 20 % spare terminals shall be provided on each panel/cubicle/box and these spare
terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminals rows.
l) There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the First/bottom row of terminal
block and the associated cable gland plate for outdoor ground mounted marshalling box and
the clearance between two rows of terminal blocks shall be a minimum of 150 mm.
m) The Contractor shall furnish all wire, conduits and terminals for the necessary inter phase
electrical connections (where applicable) as well as between phases and common terminal
boxes or control cabinets.
n) All input and output terminals of each control cubicle shall be tested for surge withstand
capability in accordance with the relevant IEC Publications, in both longitudinal and transverse
modes. The Contractor shall also provide all necessary filtering, surge protection, interface
relays and any other measures necessary to achieve an impulse withstand level at the cable
interfaces of the equipment.

2.31. LAMPS & SOCKETS
a) Sockets
All sockets (convenience outlets) shall be suitable to accept both 5 Amp & 15 Amp pin round
plug as per Nepalese Standard. They shall be switched sockets with shutters.
b) Hand Lamp:
A 230 Volts, single Phase, 50 Hz AC plug point shall be provided in the interior of each cubicle
with ON-OFF Switch for connection of hand lamps.
2.32. SWITCHES AND FUSES:
Each panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for receiving, distributing, isolating
and fusing of DC and AC supplies for various control, signaling, lighting and space heater
circuits. The incoming and sub-circuits shall be separately provided with miniature circuit
breaker / switch fuse units. Selection of the main and Sub-circuit fuse ratings shall be such as
to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. Potential circuits for relaying and metering
shall be protected by HRC fuses. All fuses shall be of HRC cartridge type conforming to relevant
International Standard mounted on plug-in type fuse bases. Miniature circuit breakers with
thermal protection and alarm contacts shall also be accepted. All accessible live connection to
fuse bases shall be adequately shrouded. Fuses shall have operation indicators for indicating
blown fuse condition. Fuse carrier base shall have imprints of the fuse rating and voltage.
2.33. BUSHINGS, HOLLOW COLUMN INSULATORS, SUPPORT INSULATORS:
a) Bushings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC-60137 while hollow column
insulators shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IEC-62155.The support
insulators shall be manufactured and tested as per IEC-60168 and IEC-60273. The insulators
shall also conform to IEC-60815 as applicable. The bidder may also offer composite hollow
insulators, conforming to IEC-61462.
b) Support insulators, bushings and hollow column insulators shall be manufactured from high
quality porcelain. Porcelain used shall be homogeneous, free from laminations, cavities and

other flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be
thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture.
c) Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown in colour, free from blisters, burrs and similar
other defects. Support insulators/ bushings/ hollow column insulators shall be designed to
have ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for the conditions under which they
shall be used.
d) When operating at normal rated voltage, there shall be no electric discharge between the
conductors and bushing which would cause corrosion or injury to conductors, insulators or
supports by the formation of substances produced by chemical action. No radio interference
shall be caused by the insulators/bushings when operating at the normal rated voltage.
e) Bushing porcelain shall be robust and capable of withstanding the internal pressures likely to
occur in service. The design and location of clamps and the shape and the strength of the
porcelain flange securing the bushing to the tank shall be such that there is no risk of fracture.
All portions of the assembled porcelain enclosures and supports other than gaskets, which may
in any way be exposed to the atmosphere shall be composed of completely non hygroscopic
material such as metal or glazed porcelain.
f) All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanized and all joints shall be air tight. Surface of joints shall
be trued up porcelain parts by grinding and metal parts by machining. Insulator/bushing
design shall be such as to ensure a uniform compressive pressure on the joints.
g) Tests
In bushing, hollow column insulators and support insulators shall conform to type tests and
shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with relevant international standard.
2.34. MOTORS
Motors shall be “Squirrel Cage” three phase induction motors of sufficient size capable of
satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for the driven equipment and
shall be subjected to routine tests as per applicable standards. The motors shall be of approved
make.

2.34.1. ENCLOSURES
a) Motors to be installed outdoor without enclosure shall have hose proof enclosure
equivalent to IP-55 as per IEC 60529/ Equivalent International Standard. For motors to be
installed indoor i.e. inside a box, the motor enclosure shall be dust proof equivalent to IP-44 as
per relevant International Standard.
b) Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of the motor for
bolted connection of earthing conductor.
c) Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they shall drain water resulting from
condensation or other causes from all pockets in the motor casing.
d) Motors weighing more than 25 Kg. shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs or other means to
facilitate lifting.
2.34.2. OPERATIONAL FEATURES
a) Continuous motor rating (name plate rating) shall be at least ten (10) percent above the
maximum load demand of the driven equipment at design duty point and the motor shall not
be over loaded at any operating point of driven equipment that shall rise in service.
b) Motor shall be capable at giving rated output without reduction in the expected life span when
operated continuously in the system having the particulars as given in Clause 15.0 of this
Chapter.
2.34.3. STARTING REQUIREMENTS:
a) All induction motors shall be suitable for full voltage direct-on-line starting. These shall be
capable of starting and accelerating to the rated speed along with the driven equipment
without exceeding the acceptable winding temperature even when the supply voltage drops
down to 80% of the rated voltage.
b) Motors shall be capable of withstanding the electrodynamic stresses and heating imposed if it
is started at a voltage of 110% of the rated value.

c) The locked rotor current shall not exceed six (6) times the rated full load current for all motors,
subject to tolerance as given in relevant International Standard.
d) Motors when started with the driven equipment imposing full starting torque under the supply
voltage conditions specified under Clause 15.0 shall be capable of withstanding atleast two
successive starts from cold condition at room temperature and one start from hot condition
without injurious heating of winding. The motors shall also be suitable for three equally spread
starts per hour under the above referred supply condition.
e) The locked rotor withstand time under hot condition at 110% of rated voltage shall be more
than starting time with the driven equipment of minimum permissible voltage by at least two
seconds or 15% of the accelerating time whichever is greater. In case, it is not possible to meet
the above requirement, the Bidder shall offer centrifugal type speed switch mounted on the
motor shaft which shall remain closed for speed lower than 19% and open for speeds above
19% of the rated speed. The speed switch shall be capable of withstanding 120% of the rated
speed in either direction of rotation.
2.34.4. RUNNING REQUIREMENTS:
a) The maximum permissible temperature rise over the ambient temperature of 50 degree C shall
be within the limits specified in relevant International Standard (for 3 - phase induction motors)
after adjustment due to increased ambient temperature specified.
b) The double amplitude of motor vibration shall be within the limits specified in relevant
International Standard. Vibration shall also be within the limits specified by the relevant
standard for the driven equipment when measured at the motor bearings.
c) All the induction motors shall be capable of running at 80% of rated voltage for a period of 5
minutes with rated load commencing from hot condition.
2.34.5. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
An indicative list of tests is given below. Contractor shall perform any additional test based on
specialties of the items as per the field Q.P./Instructions of the equipment Supplier or
Employer without any extra cost to the Employer. The Contractor shall arrange all instruments

required for conducting these tests alongwith calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of
instruments to the Employer for approval.
(a) Insulation resistance.
(b) Phase sequence and proper direction of rotation.
(c) Any motor operating incorrectly shall be checked to determine the cause and the
conditions corrected.
2.35. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT OF EQUIPMENTS

2.35.1. 1.1 KV Grade Power & Control Cables
2.35.1.1. Applicable for PVC Control Cable
The manufacturers, whose PVC control cables are offered, should have designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract at least 100 Kms of 1.1 KV grade PVC
insulated control cables as on the date of bid opening. Further the manufacturer should also
have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 19C x 2.5 Sq.mm or higher
size as on the originally Scheduled date of bid opening.
2.35.1.2. Applicable for PVC Power Cable
The manufacturer, whose PVC Power Cables are offered, should have designed, manufactured,
tested and supplied in a single contract at least 100 Kms of 1.1 KV or higher grade PVC
insulated power cables as on the date of bid opening. Further, the manufacturer should also
have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 3.5C x 400 Sq. mm or higher
size as on the originally Scheduled date of bid opening.
2.35.1.3. Applicable for 33 kV XLPE Power Cables

The Manufacturer, whose XLPE Power cables are offered, should have designed,
manufactured, tested and supplied in a single contract at least 25 Kms of 33 KV or higher grade
XLPE insulated power cables as on the date of bid opening. Further, the manufacturer should
also have designed, manufactured, tested and supplied at least 1 km of 1C x 240 Sq. mm or
higher size as on the originally Scheduled date of bid opening.
2.35.2. LT Switchgear

a) The Manufacturer whose LT Switchgear are offered, should be a manufacturer of LT

Switchboards of the type and rating being offered. He should have designed, manufactured,
tested and supplied at least 50 nos. draw out circuit breaker panels, out of which at least 5 nos.
should have been with relay and protection schemes with current transformer. He should have
also manufactured at least 50 nos MCC panels comprising of MCCBs (i.e. Moulded Case Circuit
Breakers) modules of the type offered which should be in successful operation as on originally
Scheduled date of bid opening.
b) The Switchgear items (such as circuit breakers, fuse switch units, contactors etc.), may be of his
own make or shall be procured from reputed manufacturers and of proven design. At least one
hundred circuit breakers of the make and type being offered shall be operating satisfactory as
on originally Scheduled date of bid opening.

ANNEXURE - A
LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL STANDARDS AND CODES : The following standards or equivalent Indian standards shall be
considered for concerned equipment:
IEC-60060 (Part 1 to P4) - High Voltage Test Techniques
IEC 60068 - Environmental Test
IEC-60117 - Graphical Symbols
IEC-60156 - Method for the Determination of the Electrical Strength of Insulation Oils.
IEC-60270 - Partial Discharge Measurements.
IEC-60376 - Specification and Acceptance of New Sulphur Hexafloride
IEC-60437 - Radio Interference Test on High Voltage Insulators.
IEC-60507 - Artificial Pollution Tests on High Voltage Insulators to be used on AC Systems.
IEC-62271-1 - Common Specification for High Voltage Switchgear & Controlgear Standards.
IEC-60815 - Guide for the Selection of Insulators in respect of Polluted Conditions.
IEC-60865 (P1 & P2) - Short Circuit Current - Calculation of effects.
ANSI-C.1/NFPA.70 - National Electrical Code
ANSI-C37.90A - Guide for Surge Withstand Capability (SWC) Tests
ANSI-C63.21, - Specification for Electromagnetic Noise and
C63.3 - Field Strength Instrumentation 10 KHz to 1 GHZ
C36.4ANSI-C68.1 - Techniquest for Dielectric Tests
ANSI-C76.1/EEE21 - Standard General Requirements and Test Procedure for Outdoor Apparatus
Bushings.
ANSI-SI-4 - Specification for Sound Level Metres

ANSI-Y32-2/C337.2 - Drawing Symbols
ANSI-Z55.11 - Gray Finishes for Industrial Apparatus and Equipment No. 61 Light Gray
NEMA-107T - Methods of Measurements of RIV of High Voltage Apparatus
NEMA-ICS-II - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems Part ICSI-109
CISPR-1 - Specification for CISPR Radio Interference Measuring Apparatus for the
frequency range 0.15 MHz to 30 MHz
CSA-Z299.1-1978h - Quality Assurance Program Requirements
CSA-Z299.2-1979h - Quality Control Program Requirements
CSA-Z299.3-1979h - Quality Verification Program Requirements
CSA-Z299.4-1979h - Inspection Program Requirements
TRANSFORMERS AND REACTORS
IEC-60076 (Part 1 to 5) - Power Transformers
IEC-60214 - On-Load Tap-Changers.
IEC-60289 - Reactors.
IEC- 60354 - Loading Guide for Oil - Immersed power transformers
IEC-60076-10 - Determination of Transformer and Reactor Sound Levels
ANSI-C571280 - General requirements for Distribution, Power and Regulating Transformers
ANSI-C571290 - Test Code for Distribution, Power and Regulation Transformers
ANSI-C5716 - Terminology & Test Code for Current Limiting Reactors
ANSI-C5721 - Requirements, Terminology and Test Code for Shunt Reactors Rated Over 500
KVA
ANSI-C5792 - Guide for Loading Oil-Immersed Power Transformers upto and including 100
MVA with 55 deg C or 65 deg C Winding Rise

ANSI-CG, 1EEE-4 - Standard Techniques for High Voltage Testing
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
IEC-62271-100 - High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 100: Alternating current circuit-
breakers
IEC-62271-101 - High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 101: Synthetic testing
IEC-62155 - Hollow pressurized and unpressurized ceramic and glass insulators for use in
electrical equipment with rated voltages greater than 1 000 V
IEC-62271-110 - High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 110: Inductive load switching
IEC-62271-109 - High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 110: Inductive load switching
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND COUPLING CAPACITOR VOLTAGE

TRANSFORMERS
IEC-60044-1 - Current transformers.
IEC-60044-2 - Inductive Voltage Transformers.
IEC-60044-5 - Instrument transformers - Part 5: Capacitor voltage transformers
IEC-60358 - Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers.
IEC-60044-4 - Instrument Transformes : Measurement of Partial Discharges
IEC-60481 - Coupling Devices for power Line Carrier Systems.
ANSI-C5713 - Requirements for Instrument transformers
ANSIC92.2 - Power Line Coupling voltage Transformers
ANSI-C93.1 - Requirements for Power Line Carrier Coupling Capacitors

BUSHING
IEC-60137 - Insulated Bushings for Alternating Voltages above 1000V
SURGE ARRESTERS
IEC-60099-4 - Metal oxide surge arrestors without gaps
IEC-60099-5 - Selection and application recommendation
ANSI-C62.1 - IEE Standards for S A for AC Power Circuits
NEMA-LA 1 - Surge Arresters
CUBICLES AND PANELS & OTHER RELATED EQUIPMENTS
IEC-60068.2.2 - Basic environmental testing procedures Part 2: Test B: Dry heat
IEC-60529 - Degree of Protection provided by enclosures.
IEC-60947-4-1 - Low voltage switchgear and control gear.
IEC-61095 - Electromechanical Contactors for household and similar purposes.
IEC-60439 (P1 & 2) - Low Voltage Switchgear and control gear assemblies
ANSI-C37.19 - Switchgear Assemblies, including metal enclosed bus.
ANSI-C37.50 - Test Procedures for Low Voltage Alternating Current Power Circuit Breakers
ANSI-C39 - Electric Measuring instrument
ANSI-C83 - Components for Electric Equipment
NEMA-AB - Moulded Case Circuit and Systems
NEMA-CS - Industrial Controls and Systems
NEMA-PB-1 - Panel Boards
NEMA-SG-5 - Low voltage Power Circuit breakers

NEMA-SG-3 - Power Switchgear Assemblies
NEMA-SG-6 - Power switching Equipment
NEMA-5E-3 - Motor Control Centers
1248 (P1 to P9) - Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring instruments & their
accessories.
DISCONNECTING SWITCHES
IEC-62271-102 - High-voltage switchgear and control gear - Part 102: Alternating current
disconnectors and earthing switches
IEC-60265 (Part 1 & 2) - High Voltage switches
ANSI-C37.32 - Schedule of preferred Ratings, Manufacturing Specifications and Application

Guide for high voltage Air Switches, Bus supports and switch accessories
ANSI-C37.34 - Test Code for high voltage air switches
NEMA-SG6 - Power switching equipment
PLCC AND LINE TRAPS
IEC-60353 - Line traps for A.C. power systems.
IEC-60481 - Coupling Devices for power line carrier systems.
IEC-60495 - Single sideboard power line carrier terminals
IEC-60683 - Planning of (single Side-Band) power line carrier systems.
CIGRE - Teleprotection report by Committee 34 & 35.
CIGRE - Guide on power line carrier 1979.
CCIR - International Radio Consultative Committee
CCITT - International Telegraph & Telephone Consultative Committee

EIA - Electric Industries Association
PROTECTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
IEC-60051: (P1 to P9) - Recommendations for Direct Acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
instruments and their accessories.
IEC-60255 (Part 1 to 23) - Electrical relays.
IEC-60297 (P1 to P4) - Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6mm (19 inches) series.
IEC-60359 - Expression of the performance of electrical & electronic measuring equipment.
IEC-60387 - Symbols for Alternating-Current Electricity meters.
IEC-60447 - Man machine interface (MMI) - Actuating principles.
IEC-60521 - Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating current watt hour metres
IEC-60547 - Modular plug-in Unit and standard 19-inch rack mounting unit based on NIM
Standard (for electronic nuclear instruments)
ANSI-81 - Screw threads
ANSI-B18 - Bolts and Nuts
ANSI-C37.1 - Relays, Station Controls etc.
ANSI-C37.2 - Manual and automatic station control, supervisory and associated telemetering
equipment
ANSI-C37.2 - Relays and relay systems associated with electric power apparatus
ANSI-C39.1 - Requirements for electrical analog indicating instruments
MOTORS
IEC-60034 (P1 to P19) - Rotating electrical machines
IEC-Document 2 - Three phase induction motors

(Central Office) NEMA-MGI Motors and Generators
ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT AND COMPONENTS
MIL-21B, MIL-833 & MIL-2750
IEC-60068 (P1 to P5) - Environmental testing
IEC-60326 (P1 to P2) - Printed boards
Material and workmanship standards
ASTM - Specification and tests for materials
CLAMPS & CONNECTORS
NEMA-CC1 - Electric Power connectors for sub station
NEMA-CC 3 - Connectors for Use between aluminium or aluminum-Copper Overhead

Conductors
BUS HARDWARE AND INSULATORS
IEC-60120 - Dimensions of Ball and Socket Couplings of string insulator units.
IEC-60137 - Insulated bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V.
IEC-60168 - Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material or glass for Systems
with Nominal Voltages Greater than 1000 V.
IEC-62155 - Hollow pressurized and unpressurized ceramic and glass insulators for use in electrical
equipment with rated voltages greater than 1 000 V
IEC-60273 - Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with nominal
voltages greater than 1000V.

IEC-61462 - Pressurized and un-pressurized insulator for use in electrical equipment with rated
voltage greater than 1000V – Definitions, Test methods, acceptance criteria and
design recommendations
IEC-60305 - Insulators for overhead lines with nominal voltage above 1000V-ceramic or glass
insulator units for a.c. systems Characteristics of String Insulator Units of the cap and
pin type.
IEC-60372 (1984) - Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of string insulator units :
dimensions and tests.
IEC-60383 (P1 and P2) - Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V.
IEC-60433 - Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod type.
IEC-60471 - Dimensions of Clevis and tongue couplings of string insulator units.
ANSI-C29 - Wet process porcelain insulators
ANSI-C29.1 - Test methods for electrical power insulators
ANSI-C92.2 - For insulators, wet-process porcelain and toughened glass suspension type
ANSI-C29.8 - For wet-process porcelain insulators apparatus, post-type
ANSI-G.8 - Iron and steel hardware
CISPR-7B - Recommendations of the CISPR, tolerances of form and of Position, Part 1
ASTM A-153 - Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on iron and steel hardware
STRAIN AND RIGID BUS-CONDUCTOR
ASTM-B 230-82 - Aluminum 1350 H19 Wire for electrical purposes
ASTM-B 231-81 - Concentric - lay - stranded, aluminum 1350 conductors
ASTM-B 221 - Aluminum - Alloy extruded bar, road, wire, shape
ASTM-B 236-83 - Aluminum bars for electrical purpose (Bus-bars)

ASTM-B 317-83 - Aluminum-Alloy extruded bar, rod, pipe and structural shapes for
electrical purposes (Bus Conductors)
BATTERIES AND BATTERIES CHARGER
Battery
IEC:60896-21&22 - Lead Acid Batteries Valve Regulated types – Methods of Tests & Requirements
IEC: 60623 - Vented type nickel Cadmium Batteries
IEC:60622 - Secondary Cells & Batteries – Sealed Ni-Cd rechargeable single cell
IEC:60623 - Secondary Cells & Batteries – Vented Ni-Cd rechargeable single cell
IEC:60896-11 - Stationary Lead Acid Batteries – Vented Type – General requirements & method of
tests
IEEE-485 - Recommended practices for sizing of Lead Acid Batteries
IEEE-1115 - Sizing of Ni-Cd Batteries
IEEE-1187 - Recommended practices for design & installation of VRLA Batteries
IEEE-1188 - Recommended practices for design & installation of VRLA Batteries
IEEE-1189 - Guide for selection of VRLA Batteries
Battery Charger
IEEE-484 - Recommended Design for installation design and installation of large lead storage
batteries for generating stations and substations.
IEEE-485 - Sizing large lead storage batteries for generating stations and substations
WIRES AND CABLES
ASTMD-2863 - Measuring the minimum oxygen concentration to support candle like combustion of
plastics (oxygen index)

IEC-60096 (P0 to P4) - Radio Frequency cables.
IEC-60183 - Guide to the Selection of High Voltage Cables.
IEC-60189 (P1 to P7) - Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC sheath.
IEC-60227 (P1 to P7) - Polyvinyl Chloride insulated cables of rated voltages up to and including
450/750V.
IEC-60228 - Conductors of insulated cables
IEC-60230 - Impulse tests on cables and their accessories.
IEC-60287 (P1 to P3) - Calculation of the continuous current rating of cables (100% load factor).
IEC-60304 - Standard colours for insulation for low-frequency cables and wires.
IEC-60331 - Fire resisting characteristics of Electric cables.
IEC-60332 (P1 to P3) - Tests on electric cables under fire conditions.
IEC-60502 - Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cables for rated voltages from 1 kV upto to
30 kV
IEC-754 (P1 and P2) - Tests on gases evolved during combustion of electric cables.
PAINTING
ANSI-Z551 - Gray finishes for industrial apparatus and equipment
SSPEC - Steel structure painting council
HORIZONTAL CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
API-610 - Centrifugal pumps for general services
- Hydraulic Institutes Standards

BS:599 - Methods of testing pumps
PTC-8.2 - Power Test Codes - Centrifugal pumps
DIESEL ENGINES
ASME Power Test Code - Internal combustion engine PTC-17
- Codes of Diesel Engine Manufacturer’s Association, USA
PIPING VALVES & SPECIALITIES
BS:5150 - Specification for cast iron gate valves
PG Test Procedures
NFPA-13 - Standard for the installation of sprinkler system
NFPA-15 - Standard for water spray fixed system for the fire protection
NFPA-12A - Standard for Halong 1301 Fire Extinguishing System
NFPA-72E - Standard on Antomatic Fire Detectors
NFPA-12 - Standard on Carbon dioxide extinguisher systems
ELECTRICAL GENERATING AND DISTRIBUTING STATIONS CODE OF PRACTICE
Steel structures
ANSI-B18.2.1 - Inch series square and Hexagonal bolts and screws
ANSI-B18.2.2 - Square and hexagonal nuts
ANSI-G8.14 - Round head bolts
ASTM-A6 - Specification for General Requirements for rolled steel plates, shapes, sheet
piling and bars of structural use

ASTM-A36 - Specifications of structural steel
ASTM-A47 - Specification for malleable iron castings
ASTM-A143 - Practice for safeguarding against embilement of Hot Galvanized structural

steel products and procedure for detaching embrilement
ASTM-A242 - Specification for high strength low alloy structural steel
ASTM-A283 - Specification for low and intermediate tensile strength carbon steel plates of
structural quality
ASTM-A394 - Specification for Galvanized steel transmission tower bolts and nuts
ASTM-441 - Specification for High strength low alloy structural manganese vanadium steel.
ASTM-A572 - Specification for High strength low alloy colombium-Vanadium steel of

structural quality
AWS D1-0 - Code for welding in building construction welding inspection
AWS D1-1 - Structural welding code
AISC - American institute of steel construction
NEMA-CG1 - Manufactured graphite electrodes
Piping and pressure vessels
ASME - Boiler and pressure vessel code
ASTM-A120 - Specification for pipe steel, black and hot dipped, zinc-coated (Galvanized) welded
and seamless steel pipe for ordinary use
ASTM-A53 - Specification for pipe, steel, black, and hot-dipped, zinc coated welded and
seamless
ASTM-A106 - Seamless carbon steel pipe for high temperature service

ASTM-A284 - Low and intermediate tensile strength carbon-silicon steel plates for machine parts
and general construction.
ASTM-A234 - Pipe fittings of wrought carbon steel and alloy steel for moderate and elevated
temperatures
ASTM-S181 - Specification for forgings, carbon steel for general purpose piping
ASTM-A105 - Forgings, carbon steel for piping components
ASTM-A307 - Carbon steel externally treated standard fasteners
ASTM-A193 - Alloy steel and stainless steel bolting materials for high temperature service
ASTM-A345 - Flat rolled electrical steel for magnetic applications
ASTM-A197 - Cupola malleable iron
ANSI-B2.1 - Pipe threads (Except dry seal)
ANSI-B16.1 - Cast iron pipe flanges and glanged fitting. Class 25, 125, 250 and 800
ANSI-B16.1 - Malleable iron threaded fittings, class 150 and 300
ANSI-B16.5 - Pipe flanges and flanged fittings, steel nickel alloy and other special alloys
ANSI-B16.9 - Factory-made wrought steel butt welding fittings
ANSI-B16.11 - Forged steel fittings, socket-welding and threaded
ANSI-B16.14 - Ferrous pipe plug, bushings and locknuts with piplethreads
ANSI-B16.25 - Butt welding ends
ANSI-B18.1.1 - Fire hose couplings screw thread.
ANSI-B18.2.1 - Inch series square and hexagonal bolts and screws
ANSI-B18.2.2 - Square and hexagonal nuts
NSI-B18.21.1 - Lock washers
ANSI-B18.21.2 - Plain washers

ANSI-B31.1 - Power piping
ANSI-B36.10 - Welded and seamless wrought steel pipe
ANSI-B36.9 - Stainless steel pipe
ACSR MOOSE CONDUCTOR
IEC:437-1973 Test on High Voltage Insulators NEMA:107-1964
CISPR
Part - V Overhead Transmission Purposes
BS:215(Part-II) Aluminium Conductors galvanized IEC:209-1966 steel reinforced extra high
BS:215(Part-II) voltage (400 kV and above)
GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE
P5:1992 - Overhead Transmission Purposes.

ANNEXURE - B
Sl. No. LIST OF DRAWINGS/DOCUMENTS
1 Single Line Diagram
2 Electrical Layout – Plan and Sections
3 Tower, Equipment & cable trench layout drawing
4 Earthing system design calculation & layout drawing
5 Lightening protection system design & drawings
6 Structure Layout (Plan & Section) drawing
7 Cantilever Strength calculations (if applicable)
8 Design calculation for Sag – Tension stringing chart
9 GTP and drawings for Bus-Post Insulator
10 Tension/suspension string insulator and Hardware Assembly GTP and drawing
11 Soil Investigation Report (if applicable)
12 Circuit Breakers (220kV, 132kV, 33 kV- As applicable)
Drawing, GTP, Type test Reports
13 CTs & CVTs (220kV, 132 kV, 33kV- As applicable)
14 Surge Arrestors (216kV, 120kV, 30kV- As applicable)
15 Isolators (220kV, 132kV, 33 kV- As applicable)
16 Control, Relay Panels and Substation Automation system
Drawings, GTP, technical literature, type test reports

17 Civil Works (as applicable)
a) Control Room Building, Structure Design, Foundation Design & Drg., Plinth Beam Design &
Drg. and column Design & Drg. upto G.F. Level
b) Auto transformer foundation design/drawings
c) Reactor foundation design/drawings
d) 220/132/33kV Tower, structure & foundation design/drawings.
e) 220/132/33kV Equipment support structure & foundation design/drawing
NOTE:
The above list of drawing/document is only illustrative and not exhaustive. The contractor
shall submit drawings/documents as per requirement of Technical specification.

Package-KC3
Section-III
Specific Technical Requirements
Package-KC3
Section-III-A
Specific Technical Requirements- Transmission Line
SECTION III-A
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS-TRANSMISSION LINES
CONTENTS
1.0 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 1
1.1 TOWERS AND ACCESSORIES 1
1.2 CONDUCTOR 4
1.3 GALVANIZED STEEL EARTH-WIRE 11
1.4 OPGW 16
1.5 POWER CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES 17
1.6 EARTHWIRE ACCESSORIES 25
1.7 DETAILS OF LINE MATERIALS 33
1.8 INSULATOR DISCS AND STRINGS 35
1.9 INSULATOR HARDWARES 37
1.10 FOUNDATION 45
1.11 GROUNDING OF TOWERS 47
1.12 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 48
Section III-A Contents

SECTION III-A
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS-TRANSMISSION LINES
1.0 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
The Standard Technical Particulars of the various items are given below and in the relevant
schedule/chapters of Specifications. The Bidders are required to comply with the same.
1.1 Line Data:
1.1.1 Electrical System Data
1 Nominal Voltage kV 220
2 Maximum system voltage kV 245
3 BIL (Impulse) kV 1425
4 Power Frequency withstand voltage kV 460
(Wet)
5 Minimum Corona Extinction Voltage kV 154 (Min)
6 RIV at 1 MHz for phase to earth Micro V 1000 (Max)
Voltage 154 kV dry
1.1.2 Service condition

Maximum Ambient 45 degree C
Minimum Ambient -5 deg C
Maximum Altitude 3000 m
Basic Wind speed as per IS 802 47 m/s
Isoceraunic level 60 days
Relative humidity (% range) 10-100
1.1 TOWERS AND ACCESSORIES

TABLE-1.1
S.No. Description Unit 220 kV Line
Section III-A Page 1 of 48

1 Configuration Double Circuit (vertical)

2 Normal Span meter 350
A) Wind and Weight Span for 220 kV Double Circuit Transmission Line:
TABLE-1.2 (a) – For Plain Terrain
Type of Tower Design Permissible Weight Span (Meters)
Span Normal Condition Broken wire condition
(meter) Max (M) Min (M) Max (M) Min (M)
Suspension 350 525 210 315 100
Small/Medium 350 525 0 315 -200
Large Angle 350 525 0 315 -300
TABLE-1.2 (b) – For Hilly Terrain

Type of Tower Design Permissible Weight Span (Meters)
Span Normal Condition Broken wire condition

Small/Medium 350 1000 -1000 600 -600
Large Angle 350 1000 -1000 600 -600
B) Wind Span for 220 kV Double Circuit Transmission Line for Hilly Terrain:
TABLE-1.3
1 Normal condition M 525
2 Broken Wire Condition M 315
Note: The wind span is the sum of two half spans adjacent to the support under
condition. For Normal Horizontal span is equals to Normal ruling span.

C) Shielding angle
TABLE-1.4
1 Shielding angle deg 20
D) Tower footing resistance

TABLE-1.5
1 Tower footing resistance ohms less than 10
E) Clearances
TABLE-1.6
Minimum ground clearances from lowest point mm 7.01*
1
of power conductor
2 Provision for ground undulation and sag error mm 150
Minimum vertical mid-span clearance between mm 8500
3
power conductor and groundwire in still air
Minimum clearance for crossing over Electric mm 4580
4
Power lines (any voltage level upto 220kV)
Minimum clearance for crossing over tele- mm 3050
5
Communication lines
Min Phase-Phase clearance:
6 Horizontal mm 8400
Vertical mm 4900
7 Minimum Highway Crossing mm 8840
 The minimum ground clearance is at 85 degree C however, extra clearances shall be
provided on account of hilly terrain type and to into account of altitude factor during
spotting of towers.

F) Swing angles and minimum clearance from live parts to tower body and cross arms.
i) Single Suspension Insulator string
TABLE-1.7
Swing Angle Min. Electrical Clearance (mm)
(Deg) 220 kV Line
0 2663
15 2475
30 2288
45 2094
60 -
ii) Double Suspension and Double string

TABLE-1.8
(Deg) 220 kV Line
0 2663
iii) Jumper Swings

TABLE-1.9
(Deg) 220 kV Line
0 2663
10 2663
20 2094
30 -
In case of a pilot string, the swing angle shall be considered with pilot insulator string as 15
degree.
The arcing gap distance for insulator strings shall be 2600 mm as provided in the
insulator chapters.

The bidders may note the subzero service condition and altitude range therefore all the
materials shall be guaranteed to perform satisfactorily. The grade of steel for tower
materials shall be as per IS 2062 quality C for all the steel products. Alternatively similar
grade like J20 as per BSEN 10056 shall also be acceptable.
1.2 CONDUCTOR:
1.2.1 ACSR “MOOSE” (54/3.53 mm ALUMINIUM + 7/3.53 mm STEEL)
TABLE-1.10
S.No Description Particulars
1 Conductor ACSR “MOOSE” 54/3.53 mm
Aluminum + 7/3.53 mm steel
2 Standard applicable IS-398 (part-V)-1996 or ASTM or IEC
or equivalent
3 Wire diameter
Aluminium 3.53 mm± 2mm
Steel 3.53 mm ± 7mm
4 Number of strands per layers
a) Steel
Steel Core 1
1st Steel Layer 6
b) Aluminium
1st Layer 12
2nd Layer 18
3rd Layer 24
5 Sectional Area (Approx.)
Total conductor 597.00 mm2
Total Aluminium 528.5 mm2
Cross sectional area of nominal 9.787 sq. mm
diameter wire (Steel or Aluminium)

6 Overall diameter 31.77 mm

7 Approximate mass:
Overall conductor 2004 kg/km
Aluminium Wire (per wire) 26.45 kg/km
Steel Wire (per wire) 76.34 kg/km
8 a. Maximum D.C. resistance of 0.05552  /km
conductor at 20 degrees C,
b. Maximum D.C. resistance of each 2.921  /km
Aluminum wire at 20 degrees C,
9 Ultimate Tensile strength 161.20 kN
10 Breaking Load of Wires (min):
a) Aluminium (per wire)
Before Stranding 1.57 kN or 160kg
After Stranding 1.49 kN or 152 kg
b) Steel (per wire)
Before Stranding 12.86 kN or 1311 kg
11 Final modulus of elasticity 0.703 x 106 kg/cm2
12 Coefficient of Linear expansion (per 19.35 x 10-6
0C)
13 a. Direction of Lay Outermost Layer shall be Right hand

with inner successive layers having
opposite directions to lay.
b. Lay Ratio Maximum Minimum
Steel core 6 wire layer 18 16
Aluminium
1st Layer (12 wire) 14 12
2nd Layer (18 wire) 13 11

3rd Layer (24 wire) 12 10

14 Zinc coating of steel core
a) Number of 1 minute dips 3
b) Number of half minute dips -
c) Minimum weight of Zinc Coating 260 g/m2
d) Process of Galvanizing Hot Dip Galvanization
e) Quality of Zinc (min.) Electrolyte High Grade 99.95%
15 Joints in strands
a) Steel Not permitted
b) Aluminium No Joints shall be permitted in the
Outermost layer. Joints in the
individual aluminium wires in
intermediate layers are permitted in
addition to those made in the base
rod or wire before final drawing, but
no two such joints shall be less than
15 m apart in the complete stranded
conductor.
c) Method of making joint Joints shall be made by the cold
pressure butt-welding.
d) Ultimate tensile strength of joint 14.67 kg/sq. mm
16 Minimum Number of twists to be 18 (Before Stranding)
withstood in torsion test when tested
on a gauge length of 100 times 16 (After Stranding)
diameter of wire
17 Minimum Percentage of Elongation 4% (Before stranding)
during testing for Elongation Test on
an original gauge length of 200 mm. 3.5% (After Stranding)
18 Chemical composition of high carbon

steel wire
Element
a) Carbon 0.50 to 0.85 %
b) Manganese 0.50 to 1.10 %
c) Phosphorus Not more than 0.035 %
d) Sulphur Not more than 0.045 %
e) Silicon 0.10 to 0.35 %
19 Standard Supply length 1500 meter
20 Packing (Wooden Drums) IS 1778 : 1980 or latest edition
1.2.2 AACSR “MOOSE” (54/3.53 mm Al-Alloy + 7/3.53 mm Steel):

Table 1.11
S.No Description Unit Specific Technical
Values
1.0. Raw Materials
1.1. Aluminium Alloy
a. Silicon % 0.5-0.9
b. Magnesium % 0.6-0.9
c. Ferrous % 0.5 (Max)
d. Copper % 0.1 (Max)
e. Manganese % 0.03 (Max)
f. Chromium % 0.03 (Max)
g. Zinc % 0.10 (Max)
h. Boron % 0.06 (Max)
i. Other Elements (each) % 0.03 (Max)
j. Other elements (total) % 0.1 (Max)
k. Aluminium % Reminder
1.2. Steel Wire / Rods

a. Carbon % 0.50 to 0.85

b. Manganese % 0.50 to 1.10
c. Phosphorous % Not more than 0.035
d. Sulphur % Not more than 0.045
e. Silicon % 0.10 to 0.35 (Max.)
1.3. Zinc
a. Minimum purity of Zinc % Electrolyte High Grade 99.95%
2.0. Aluminum Alloy strands after

stranding
2.1. Diameter
a. Nominal mm 3.53
b. Maximum mm 3.55
c. Minimum mm 3.51
2.2. Minimum breaking load of strand
a. Before stranding kN 3.02
b. After stranding kN 2.867
2.3. Maximum resistance of 1 m Ω 0.003388
length of strand at 20 deg. C
3.0. Steel strand after stranding
3.1. Diameter
a. Nominal mm 3.53
b. Maximum mm 3.59
c. Minimum mm 3.47
3.3. Galvanising

a. Minimum weight of zinc coating gm 260

per sq.m.
b. Minimum number of dips that the Nos. 3 dips of one minute
galvanised strand can withstand in
the standard preece test
c. Min. No. of twists in guage length Nos. 18 (Before Stranding)
equal 100 times the dia. of wire
which the strand can withstand in 16 (After Stranding)
the torsion test
d. Process of Galvanizing Hot Dip Galvanization
4.0. Stranded Conductor
4.1. UTS of the conductor 224.64 (Min.)
4.2. Lay Ratio Max Min
a. Outer Steel layer mm 18 16
b. 12 wire Aluminium Alloy layer mm 14 12
c. 18 wire Aluminium Alloy layer mm 13 11
d. 24 wire Alumimium Alloy Layer mm 12 10
4.3. DC resistance of the conductor at Ω/k 0.0624
20°C m
4.4. Minimum corona Extinction kV 154
Voltage (line to phase) under Dry (rms
condition )
4.5. RIV at 1 MHz at 156 kV (line to Micr Below 1000
phase) under Dry condition o
Volts
4.6. Standard length of the conductor m 1800
4.7. Tolerance on Standard length % ±5
4.8. Direction of lay of outer layer Right Hand

4.9. Linear mass of the conductor

a. Standard Kg/k 1996
m
b. Minimum Kg/k 1963
m
c. Maximum Kg/k 2032
m
4.10. Sectional Area (Approx.)
a. Total mm2 597.00
b. Aluminium mm2 528.5
c. Overall diameter mm 31.77
d. Minimum Percentage of 4% (Before stranding)
Elongation during testing for
Elongation Test on an original 3.5% (After Stranding)
gauge length of 200 mm.
5.0. Joints in strands
5.1. Steel Not permitted
5.2. Aluminium No Joints shall be permitted in
the Outermost layer. Joints in
the individual aluminium wires
in intermediate layers are
permitted in addition to those
made in the base rod or wire
before final drawing, but no
two such joints shall be less
than 15 m apart in the
complete stranded conductor.
5.3. Method of making joint Joints shall be made by the cold
pressure butt-welding.

5.4. Ultimate tensile strength of joint kg/s 14.67

q.
mm
6.0. Standard Supply length 1500 meter
6.1. Packing (Wooden Drums) IS 1778 : 1980
7.0. Standard applicable IS-398 (part-IV)-1996, IS-398
(part-V)-1996 or ASTM or IEC
or equivalent
1.3 Galvanized steel Earth-wire

i) 7 / 3.66 mm Galvanised Stranded Steel Earth wire:
TABLE-1.12
1.0 Material & it’s purity Steel
1.1 Chemical composition of high carbon

steel wire
Element % Composition
i) Carbon Not more than 0.55
ii) Manganese 0.4 to 0.9
iii) Phosphorus Not more than 0.04
iv) Sulphur Not more than 0.04
v) Silicon 0.15 to 0.35
3. Stranding and wire nominal diameter 7/3.66 mm
4. Number of strands
a) Total 7
b) Inner Core 1
c) Outer Core 6
5. Single wire before stranding (mm)

a) Nominal Diameter 3.66

b) Minimum Diameter 3.64
c) Maximum Diameter 3.68
d) Minimum breaking strength 1000 Kg
e) Minimum tensile strength 95 Kg/sq mm
f) D.C. resistance at 20 degC 17.15 ohms/Km
6. Stranded wire
a) Length of lay
Maximum 198mm
Minimum 165mm
b) Minimum breaking load 6972 Kg or 68.4 KN.
c) Overall diameter 10.98 mm
d) Modulus of elasticity 1.933 x 106 Kg/cm2
e) Coefficient of linear expansion 11.50 x 10-6 per deg C.
f) D.C. resistance at 20 degC 2.51 ohms/km
g) Total sectional area 73.65 mm2
7. Minimum Elongation of wire (on 200
mm gauge length) in percentage
a) Before Stranding 4
b) After Stranding 3.5
8. Zinc Coating on wire
a) Minimum Amount of Coating
(g/m2)
Before Stranding 275
After Stranding 238
b) Minimum Uniformity of
Coating
Before Stranding 3 Dips of 1 minute and 1 Dip of half min

After Stranding 2 Dips of 1 minute and 1 dip of half

minute
c) Quality of Zinc Zn 98 to IS: 209-1966/ Latest revision.
d) Process of galvanization Hot Dip
9. Joints There shall be no joint in any of the wire
constituting the ground wire.
10. Oiling The galvanised ground wire shall be
dipped in boiled linseed oil.
11. Standard length Standard length shall be one specific
length of 2000 meters.
12. Random length Not less than 70% of the standard
length and the total quantity of random
lengths shall not be more than 10% of
the total qty ordered
13. Direction of Lay of wire Right Hand
14. Approximate Mass of Galvanized Steel 583
Earth Strand (Kg/Km)
ii) 7
/ 4.5 mm Galvanised Stranded Steel Earth wire:
TABLE-1.13
1.0. Raw Material

1.1. Material & its Chemical composition Steel
Element % Composition
i) Carbon Not more than 0.55
ii) Manganese 0.4 to 0.9
iii) Phosphorus Not more than 0.04
iv) Sulphur Not more than 0.04
v) Silicon 0.15 to 0.35

1.2. Zinc
i) Minimum purity of Zinc 99.95 %
2.0 Steel strands 7/4.5 mm
d) Total 7
e) Inner Core 1
f) Outer Core 6
2.1 Diameter
i) Nominal 4.5mm
ii) Maximum 4.58mm
iii) Minimum 4.42 mm
2.2. Minimum breaking load of strand 16.49 kN
after stranding
2.3. Galvanising
i) Minimum weight of zinc coating per 290 gms
sq.m. after stranding
ii) Minimum number of dips that the 3 dips of 1 minute and one dip of ½
galvanized strand can withstand in minute
the standard preece test
iii) Minimum number of twists in a gauge 18
length equal to 100 times diameter of
wire which the strand can withstand
in the torsion test, after stranding
3.0 Stranded Earth wire
3.1. UTS of Earth wire 106.2 kN (min.)
3.2. Lay length of outer steel layer
Standard 230 mm
Maximum 243 mm
3.3. Minimum 216 mm

3.4. Maximum DC resistance of earth 1.66 ohms/km

wire at 200 C
3.5. Standard length of earth wire 2000 m
3.6. Tolerance on standard length ±5%
3.7. Direction of lay for outside layer Right hand
3.8. Linear mass
Standard 882 kg/km
Maximum 851 kg/km
Minimum 913 kg/km
4. Modulus of elasticity 1.933 x 106 Kg/cm2
5. Coefficient of linear expansion 11.50 x 10-6 per deg C.
6. Minimum Elongation of wire (on 200
mm gauge length) in percentage
a. Before Stranding 4
b. After Stranding 3.5
7. Zinc Coating on wire
a. Minimum Amount of Coating
(g/m2)
Before Stranding 275
After Stranding 238
b. Minimum Uniformity of Coating
Before Stranding 3 Dips of 1 minute and 1 Dip of half
min
After Stranding 2 Dips of 1 minute and 1 dip of half
minute
c. Quality of Zinc Zn 98 to IS : 209-1966/ Latest revision.
d. Process of galvanization Hot Dip
8. Joints There shall be no joint in any of the

wire constituting the ground wire.

9. Oiling The galvanised ground wire shall be
dipped in boiled linseed oil.
10. Standard length Standard length shall be one specific
length of 2000 meters.
11. Random length Not less than 70% of the standard
1.4 O length and the total quantity of
P random lengths shall not be more than
T 10% of the total qty ordered
I
CAL FIBER GROUND WIRE (OPGW)
TABLE-1.14
No of Fibers 24
Code Name/Size 24 fiber, OPGW, The design will be similar to GS
Steel Earth wire of 95 kg/mm2 quality.
Cross Sectional Area 102.30 sq. mm
Overall diameter 13.4 mm
Minimum breaking load 102.1 kN
Unit mass 646 kg/km
D.C. Resistance at 200 C < 1.0 ohm/Km
Short Circuit current ≥ 6.32 KA for 1.0 Second
Modulus of Elasticity 14800 kg/Sq. mm
Coefficient of Linear Expansion 13.6 x 10-6
Standards & class IEC 61232 or equivalent
Al Clad Steel 20SA
Conductivity Grade 20.3 %
Aluminum Clad steel wire 86 mm2
Operating Wave Length 1100-1330 nm
Attenuation Coefficient@ 1310 nm ≤0.40 dB/km

Attenuation Coefficient@ 1550 nm ≤0.25 dB/km

Strand 8/3.7 mm
Diameter 13.4 mm
Ultimate Tensile Strength 102.10 KN
Weight 646 kg/km (Approx.)
Diameter of Al core 1/6.00 mm
Colour Coding of Individual Optical As per IEEE 1138-1994/ or ANSI/EIA 359-A-1-1988
Fibre or equivalent international standard and the
colour coding shall be mutually agreed between
employer and manufacturer.
Filling compound If required, the interstices of the fiber optic unit
shall be filled with a suitable compound to prohibit
any moisture ingress from outside or any water
migration along the fiber optic unit. The filling
compound used shall be compatible with all the
components it may come in contact with and shall
absorb and/or inhibit generation of hydrogen
within the cable.
Number of Joints in furnished No
length of wire for supply
1.5 POWER CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES

1.5.1 MID SPAN COMPRESSION JOINT FOR ACSR “MOOSE” and AACSR “MOOSE”
TABLE-1.15
1. Type compression
2. Material
Outer sleeve Aluminium (Al) /Al - Alloy of purity not
less than 99.5%

Tapered plug for outer sleeve Aluminium rod of 99.5% purity
Inner sleeve Extruded tube mild steel hot-dip

galvanized
3. Brinnel hardness of steel sleeve Shall not exceed 200
4. Shape of Cross Section

Before Compression Round
After Compression Hexagonal
5. Dimensions and Dimensional Before Compression After

Tolerances for Mid Span Compression
compression joint for 'Moose'
Conductors ( ACSR & AACSR)
a) Aluminium/ Aluminium Alloy sleeve:
Inner dia (mm) 34 ± 0.5
Outer dia (mm) 54 ± 1 53 ± 0.5

(Corner to
Corner)
46 ± 0.5
(Face to face)
Length (mm) 735 ± 5 785 ± 5
b) Steel Sleeve:
Outer dia (mm) 21 ± 0.5 20.2 ± 0.5

(Corner to
corner)

17.5 ± 0.5
(face to face)
Length (mm) 250 ± 5 285 ± 5
5. Minimum Failing Load, (KN) 153.2 KN
6. Electrical resistance of the joint after 75% of measured resistance of the

installation equivalent length of conductor
7. Radio Interference at Phase to 1000 micro volts
ground voltage of 154 kV (rms) dry
and frequency 1MHz.
8. Corona Extinction voltage (KV rms) 154
1.5.2 REPAIR SLEEVE for ACSR “MOOSE” and AACSR “MOOSE”

TABLE-1.16
1. Type Compression type in two parts with provision
of seat for sliding of keeper piece.
2. Application To be used only for not more than two
strands broken in the outer layer.
3. Material Aluminium/Al-Alloy (Extruded Tube) of 99.5%
purity.
4. Shape of cross section
Before compression Generally Round
After compression Hexagonal
5. Minimum Failing load 154 kN
6. Electrical resistance of the 75% of measured resistance of the equivalent

Repaired Portion length of the conductor.
7. Radio Interference at Phase to 1000 micro volts
ground voltage of 156 kV (rms)

dry and frequency 1MHz.
8. Corona Extinction voltage (KV 154

rms)
9 Dimensions and Dimensional Before Compression After Compression
Tolerances
Outer dia (mm) 54 ± 1 53 ± 0.5

(Corner to Corner)
46 ± 0.5
(Face to face)
Length (mm) 305 ± 5 330 ± 5
1.5.3 ARMOUR RODS:

TABLE-1.17
1. Type preformed/formed
2. Material Heat treated aluminium alloys as per

designation HE-30 specified in IS-733
3. Minimum ultimate strength 35
(kg/sq. mm.)
4. Conductivity Not less than 40% of IACS International
Annealed copper Standard
5. Direction of lay Right hand
6. Shape of end Parrot bill
7. No. of armour rods in each set Twelve (12)
8. Radio Interference at phase to 1000 micro volts

ground voltage of 154 KV (rms) dry

and frequency 1 MHz

9 Corona extinction voltage (kV) 154
(rms)
10 Marking Centre line to be marked with indelible black
paint.
11 Dimensions and Dimensional
Tolerances
Length of each rod(mm) 2540 ± 25
Diameter of each rod(mm) 9.27 ± 0.1
Tolerance in length of between Not more than 13 mm the longest and the
complete set (longest and shortest shortest rod in a set.
length)
1.5.4 VIBRATION DAMPERS

TABLE-1.18
S. DESCRIPTION Specific Technical Particulars
NO.
I. Type Stockbridge
II. Material:
Clamp Aluminium alloy
Messenger Cable High strength steel wire of strength not
less than the strength of steel core of
'Moose' conductor (preferably 135 kg/sq.
mm.)
Weights Hot dip galvanised mild steel/Cast Iron
III. Galvanization
Spring washers Electro-galvanised as per IS:1573-1970
Other ferrous parts Hot dip galvanized

Castings As per BS:729-1961

Wires As per IS:4826-1968
Bolts and Nuts As per IS:5358-1969
IV. Slip strength of clamp (a)Not less than 255 kg when an
untested Vibration damper is installed at
the recommended bolt torque on the
conductor.
(b) Not less than 204 kg without retightening
the bolts, after conducting the fatigue test.
V. Maximum permissible Dynamic 150 micro strains
Strain on Conductor with damper
VI. Minimum no. of cycles for fatigue Ten (10) million
performance.
VII. Amplitude for fatigue test 25 / F, where F is the highest resonant
frequency in Hz
VIII. Radio Interference at phase to 1000 microvolts
ground voltage of 154 kV (rms) dry
and frequency 1 MHz
IX. corona extinction voltage (kv rms) 154
X. Magnetic Power Loss The damper shall not have a magnetic
power loss of more than 1.0 W for current
500A/conductor for 220 kV and 600
A/Conductor for 400 kV and above.
1.5.5 SPACERS/SPACER DAMPERS FOR ACSR “MOOSE” and AACSR “MOOSE”

TABLE-1.19
S. Description Specific Technical Particulars

No.

1. Type Twin Bundle

2. Sub-conductor spacing 450 mm
3. Arrangement of Sub- Horizontal
Conductor in the Bundle
4. Galvanization of Spring Electro-Galvanized
Washers
Other Ferrous Parts Hot-Dip Galvanization
5. Elastomer i) If used, shall have a good mechanical
strength, adequate resistance to the effect of
ozone, UV radiation, conductor temperature
upto 85 degree C and atmospheric
contamination under the service conditions.
The elastomer shall be electrically
conducting.
ii) In case of open elastomer clamps,
helical/preformed retaining rods shall be
used which terminates within the bundle
area. The rods shall be meet electrical
requirements of spacer assembly with
mechanical properties as per Nepal/ Indian/
International Standard.
6. Clamp Bolt Strength The clamp bolt shall be capable of withstanding
a torque upto 150% of the recommended bolt
torque without failure of component parts of
the spacer/ spacer damper assembly.
7. Short Circuit Rating 25 kA
8. Equivalent Compressive and 1500 kg (Compressive)
Tensile Strength Requirement 750 kg (Tensile)
9. Slip Strength of Clamp (Both i) Not less than 255 kg when an untested

for Bolted and Rubber spacer/spacers damper is installed at the

Surfaced type) recommended bolt torque on the
“MOOSE” conductor.
ii) Not less than 204 kg without retightening
the bolts, after conducting the fatigue test.
10. Aeolian Vibrations Spacer dampers shall be capable to damp out
Aeolian vibrations, as well as sub-conductor
oscillations within acceptable limits.
11. Location of spacers Bundle Spacers shall be designed for 50 meter
in-span maximum separation. Rigid Spacers
shall not be used except for jumpers. Rigid
spacers for jumpers shall meet all the
requirements of spacer used on line except its
performance for vibration, movements and
short – circuit tests.
12. Allowable Mechanical
Movement
a) Longitudinal movement ± 50 mm (minimum)
parallel to conductor
b) Vertical movement in a ± 25 mm (minimum)
vertical direction at right angle
to conductor
c) Torsional/Angular movement ± 5 (minimum)
in a vertical plane parallel to
conductor
13. Vibration Requirement Spacer/Spacer damper shall be capable of
withstanding all the external forces, due to wind
or otherwise, including sub span oscillations.
Spacer damper shall also be capable of damping

out the Aeolian vibrations to a dynamic strain

level not exceeding 150 micro-strains.
14. Radio Interference voltage 1000 micro volts
at phase to ground Voltage of
154 kV (rms) dry and
frequency 1MHz
15. Corona extinction voltage kV 154
(rms)

1.6 EARTHWIRE ACCESSORIES

i) For 7/3.66 mm:
1.6.1 Mid Span Compression Joints
TABLE-1.20
S. No. For 7/3.66 mm; Galvanized iron steel wire
1. Type For 95 kgf/sq. mm. quality ground wire
Compression
2. Material Malleable cast iron/forged steel hot dip
galvanised or high strength steel.
3. Minimum failing load (kg) 6624
4. Electrical resistance of the Shall not exceed 75% of measured resistance of
joint after installation the equivalent length of earthwire.
5 Dimensions Before compression After compression
Internal dia (mm) 11.5 +/- 1 -----
External dia (mm) 20 +/- 1 20 +/- 1
(corner to corner)
17.5 +/- 1
(flat to flat)
Length (mm) 230 +/-5 252 +/- 5
1.6.2 SUSPENSION CLAMPS

TABLE-1.21
S. NO. for 95 kgf/sq. mm, quality groundwire
1. Type Conventional
2. Material MCI/Forged steel
3. Slip strength (kg) Slip strength not less than 15 kN & not
more than 17 kN.
4. Minimum failing load (Kg) 6972
5. Galvanization spring washers Electrogalvanised

6. Other ferrous parts Hot-dip galvanised

7. Electrical resistance of the joint Shall not exceed 75% of measured
after repair resistance of the equivalent length of
earthwire.
1.6.3 TENSION CLAMPS

TABLE-1.22
S. NO. DESCRIPTION SPECIFIC TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
1. Type Compression
2. Material:
a) Body Forged steel
b) Bolts & Nuts Galvanised steel
3. Minimum failing load (kg) 6624
4. Minimum slip strength(kg) 6275
5. Galvanization
a) Spring washers Electro-galvanized
b) Other ferrous parts hot-dip galvanized
1.6.4 FLEXIBLE COPPER BONDS

TABLE-1.23
1. Material Tinned Copper
2. Strand & Wire diameter 37/7/0.417mm
3. Length 500 mm (approx.)
4. Equivalent Copper Area (Min.) 35 mm2
5. Minimum Slip Strength (kN) 30
6. Connecting lugs suitable for 16 mm dia hole on both ends
One for 12mm dia bolt and other for 16mm

dia bolt
7. HRH MS bolt hot-dip galvanised 16mm dia and 40mm long
with nut & lock washer

TABLE-1.24
1. Type 4R stockbridge
2. Material
a) Clamp Aluminium alloy
b) Messenger cable High strength steel strand with strength not
less than 135 kg/sq mm
c) Weights Hot dip galvanised mild steel/ Cast iron.
3. Galvanization
a) Spring washers Electro galvanized as per IS:1573-1970
b) Other ferrous parts Hot-dip galvanised
c) Castings As per BS:729-1961
d) Wires As per IS:4826-1968
e) Bolts & Nuts As per IS:5358-1969
4. Maximum permissible +/-300 micro strains
dynamic strain on the
groundwire with the
damper
5. Minimum no. of cycles Ten million for fatigue performance.
6. Amplitude for fatigue 25/f, where f is the highest test resonant
frequency in Hz.

ii) For 7/4.5 mm:

1.6.6 MID SPAN COMPRESSION JOINT FOR 7/4.5 mm GS EARTHWIRE
TABLE-1.25
S. No. For 7/4.5 mm; Galvanized iron steel wire
Particulars Unit Aluminium / Aluminium Steel Sleeve
Filler Sleeve Filler Sleeve
1 Material of Joint Aluminium Aluminium Mild
of of Steel (Fe-410,
minimum minimum IS:2062)
purity 99.5% purity
99.5%
2 Range of Hardness of BHN From 100 to 200
the steel sleeve (Brinnel
hardness)
3 Dimension of sleeve Aluminium Aluminium Steel Sleeve
Before compression Sleeve Filler Sleeve
a Inside diameter mm 27.0 ± 0.5 14.5 ± 0.2 14.5 ± 0.2
b Outside diameter mm 38.0 ± 1 25.0 ± 0.5 25.0 ± 0.5
c Length mm 530 ± 5 350 ± 5 60 ± 5
4 Dimensions of Sleeve Aluminium Steel Sleeve
after compression Sleeve
a Outside dimension mm 37.0 ± 0.5 24.7 ± 0.5
(Corner to Corner)
b Outside dimension (face mm 32.0 ± 0.5 21.4 ± 0.5
to face)
c Length mm 565 (approx) 400 (approx)
5 Slip strength kN 101
6 Maximum resistance of % 75

the compressed unit

expressed, as
percentage of the
resistance of equivalent
length of bare Earthwire
7 Galvanising
a Minimum weight of Zinc Gm/ 600
coating for steel parts m2
b Purity of Zinc used for % 99.95 (IS 209) or 98.5(IS 13229)
galvanizing
c Min. No. of dips in Nos. 6 dips of 1 minute
standard preece test the
ferrous parts can
withstand.
1.6.7 FLEXIBLE COPPER BOND FOR 7/4.5 mm GS EARTHWIRE

TABLE-1.26
S.no. Particular Unit Specific Technical Value
1. Stranding 37/7/0.417
2. Cross sectional area Sq. 35.4
mm
3. Minimum copper Sq. 34
equivalent area mm
4. Length of copper cable mm 500 + 5
5. Material of lugs Tinned copper
6. Bolt Size
a Diameter mm 16
b Length mm 40
7. Slip Strength kN 3

1.6.8 VIBRATION DAMPER FOR 7/4.5 mm GS EARTHWIRE

TABLE-1.27
1. Type of Damper 4R-Stockbridge type
2. Materials of components
a Damper masses Cast iron/mild steel/Zinc alloy duly hop dip
galvanised
b Clamp Aluminum alloy 4600
c Messenger cable High tensile strength galvanized steel
3. Number of strands in Nos 19
stranded messenger cable
4. Minimum ultimate tensile Kg/ 135
strength of stranded mm2
messenger cable
5. Slip strength of stranded kN 2.5
messenger cable (mass
pull off)
6. Slipping strength of
damper clamp
a Before fatigue test kN 2.5
b After fatigue test kN 2
7. Resonance frequencies Hz 10 to 60
range
8. Percentage variation in % +/-40 (Maximum)
reactance after fatigue
test in comparison with
that before fatigue test
9. Percentage variation in % +/-40 (Maximum)

power dissipation after

fatigue test in comparison
with that before fatigue
test
10. Galvanising
a Minimum weight of Zinc gm/m2 600
coating for steel parts
galvanizing
c Min. No. of dips in Nos. a) Fasteners: 4 dips of 1 minute
standard preece test the b) Spring washers: 3 dips of 1 minute
ferrous parts can c) all others: 6 dips of 1 minute
withstand
1.6.9 SUSPENSION CLAMP FOR 7/4.5 mm GS EARTHWIRE

TABLE-1.28
1. Material of components
a Shackle Forged Steel
b Clamp Body & Keeper Malleable cast iron / SGI / Al Alloy 4600
c U- Bolt Mild Steel
2. Total Drop (Maximum) mm 150
3. Breaking Strength kN 25
(Minimum)
4. Slipping Strength kN 19 to 27
5. Galvanising
a Minimum weight of Zinc gm/ 600
coating for steel parts mm2


galvanizing
c Min. No. of dips in standard Nos. 99.95 (IS 209) or 98.5(IS 13229)
preece test the ferrous parts
can withstand
1.6.10 TENSION CLAMP FOR 7/4.5 mm GS EARTHWIRE

TABLE-1.29
1. Material of components
a Anchor Shackle Forged Steel
b Compression Clamp
i) Steel Sleeve Mild Steel
ii) Aluminium sleeve Aluminium of purity 99.5%
iii) Aluminium Filler sleeve Aluminium of purity 99.5%
2. Range of Hardness of the BHN 120-200
steel sleeve (Brinnel
hardness)
3. Dimension of sleeve Aluminium Aluminium Steel Sleeve
Before compression Sleeve Filler Sleeve
a Inside diameter mm 27.0 ± 0.5 14.5 ± 0.2 14.5 ± 0.2
b Outside diameter mm 38.0 ± 1 25.0 ± 0.5 25.0 ± 0.5
c Length mm 530 ± 5 230 ± 5 60 ± 5
4. Dimension of sleeve after Aluminium Steel Sleeve
compression Sleeve
a Outside diameter (Corner mm 37.0 ± 0.5 24.7 ± 0.5
to Corner)
b Outside diameter (Face to mm 32.0 ± 0.5 21.4 ± 0.5
face)

5. Slip strength kN 101

6. Minimum Breaking kN 106
strength of assembly
(excluding clamp)
Compression Pressure Ton 100
7. Galvanising
a Minimum weight of Zinc gm/ 600
coating for steel Parts m2
galvanizing
c Min. No. of dips in Nos. a) Fasteners: 4 dips of 1 minute
standard preece test the b) Spring washers: 3 dips of 1 minute
ferrous parts can c) all others: 6 dips of 1 minute
withstand.
1.7 DETAILS OF LINE MATERIALS:

1.7.1 CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE
1.7.1.1 Conductor and earthwire for 220 kV line for Normal Section
TABLE-1.30
S.no. Description Conductor Earthwire OPGW
1. Name & Type ACSR ‘MOOSE’ 7/3.66mm GS 24 fibre OPGW
conductor Earthwire
2. Size (mm) 54/3.53 Al + 7/3.66 Sl 13.5
7/3.53 Sl
3. Conductor per phase 2 &4 NA NA
(nos)
4. Spacing between 450mm NA NA
conductor of same
phase(sub conductor

spacing)(mm)
5. Configuration Vertical (for One One
D/C with 8000 continuously continuously
mm min. inter to run to run on top of
phase spacing) horizontally on the towers and
top of the conductors
towers and
conductors
6. Overall Diameter (mm) 31.77 10.98 13.5
7. Unit mass (kg/km) 2004 583 530
8. Min. UTS (kN) 161.6 68.4 Equivalent to
earthwire
9. Ruling Design Span 350 350 350
(mtrs)
1.7.1.2 Conductor and earthwire for 220 kV line for Long Valleys Crossing Section
TABLE-1.31
S.no. Description Conductor Earthwire OPGW
1. Name & Type AACSR ‘MOOSE’ Galvanised 24, OPGW
conductor steel
2. Stranding and wire
diameter
Aluminium 54/3.53 Al Alloy ---- ------
Steel + 7/3.53 Sl 7/4.5 Sl -----
3. Conductor per phase 2 &4 NA NA
(nos)
4. Spacing between 450mm NA NA
conductor of same
phase(sub conductor

spacing)(mm)
5. Configuration Vertical (for D/C One One
with 8000 continuously continuously
mm min. inter to run to run on top of
phase spacing) horizontally the towers and
on top of the conductors
towers and
conductors
6. Overall Diameter 31.77 13.50 13.50
(mm)
7. Unit mass (kg/km) 1996 882 882
8. Min. UTS (kN) 224.46 106.2 Equivalent to
earthwire
1.8 OPGW HARDWARES

1.8.1 SUSPENSION CLAMPS
TABLE-1.32
S.no. Particulars Specific Technical Particulars
1. Type Performed Armour Grip Suspension Clamps
2. Material for Armour rods Aluminium Alloy
3. Slip strength Not less than 12 kN and not more than 17 kN
4. Minimum failing load 25 kN
5. Galvanization Electro galvanised
(spring washers)
6. Other ferrous parts Hot dip galvanized
1.8.2 DEAD END ASSEMBLY

TABLE-1.33

1. Type Bolted type/ helical preformed type

2. Material
a. Body Forged steel
b. Bolts & Nuts Galvanised steel
3. Minimum Slip strength Not less than 0.95 times the OPGW rated tensile
strength
4. Galvanization
a spring washers Electro galvanised
b Other ferrous parts Hot dip galvanized
1.8.3 GROUNDING WIRE FOR CLAMPS

TABLE-1.34
1. Material All Aluminium / Aluminum Alloy Conductor
2. Wire diameter Equivalent size of OPGW
3. Length 1500mm Long
4. Connecting lugs suitable One for 12mm dia bolt and other for 16mm dia
for bolt
1.8.4 STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT CLAMP ASSEMBLIES

No. of Grooves: 2 (One on either side of connecting bolts and suitable for locating OPGW
on inside of the tower).
Galvanising:
a) Spring washers : Electrogalvanised
b) Other ferrous parts : Hot dip Galvanised

TABLE-1.35
S.no. Particular Specific Technical Value

1. Type of Damper 4R-Stockbridge type

2. Materials of components
a Clamp Aluminium alloy
b Messenger cable High strength Galvanised steel or stainless steel
with a minimum strength not less than 135 kg/sq
mm.
c Weights Hot dip galvanized mild steel/ Cast Iron
3. Galvanisation
a Spring washers Electrogalvanised as per IS: 1573-1970
b Other ferrous parts Hot-dip galvanized
c Castings As per BS: 729-1961
d Wires As per IS: 4826-1968
e Bolts & Nuts As per IS: 5358-1969
4. Maximum permissible +/-150 micro strains
dynamic strain on
the groundwire with
the damper
5. Minimum no. of cycles for Ten Million
fatigue performance
6. Amplitude for fatigue test 25/f, where f is the highest resonant frequency in
Hz
1.8.6 SHIED WIRE JOINT BOXES

a) Sturdy, all-water proof units
b) Complete with all necessary hardware to retain, terminate, protect and splice the
fibers.
c) Suitable clamps for fixing to the tower without drilling holes in tower structure.
1.9 INSULATOR DISCS AND STRINGS

1.9.1 DISC INSULATOR UNIT

1.9.1.1 Physical Characteristics
TABLE-1.36
a. Type Ball and Socket Type Anti-Fog
insulator with Zinc sleeve
b. Colour Brown
(Porcelain insulator)
c. Surface Glazed
d. Locking device R type security clip
e. Diameter (mm)
Suspension insulator 255 mm
Tension insulator 280 mm
Tension insulator for Long Valleys Crossing 305mm
Section
f. Spacing (mm)
i) Suspension insulator 170 mm
ii) Tension insulator 170 mm
iii)Tension insulator for Long Valleys 170 mm
Crossing Section
g. Size and designation of pin ball shank (mm)
i) Suspension insulator 16/20
ii) Tension insulator 20
h. Minimum creepage distance (mm)
i) Suspension insulator 430
ii) Tension insulator 430
i. Minimum Electro-mechanical strength (KN)
a) Suspension insulator(Pilot) 160 KN
b) Tension insulator 160 KN

c)Tension insulator for Long Valleys Crossing 210 kN

Section
1.9.1.2 Electrical characteristics
TABLE-1.37
S.no. Particular 160 kN 160 kN 210kN
Insulator Insulator Insulator
a. Minimum impulse dry withstand 120 120 140
test voltage (+Ve Wave) KV (peak)
b. Minimum power frequency 140 140 140
puncture withstand test voltage KV
(rms)
c. Minimum power frequency one
minute withstand voltage
Dry-kV (rms) 85 85 100
Wet-kV (rms) 50 50 55
d. Minimum visible discharge test 18 kV 18 kV 18kV
voltage KV (rms)
e. Maximum RIV at 10 KV (rms) (in 50 50 50
microvolts)
1.9.1.3 Complete insulator strings

TABLE-1.38
S.no. Particular Suspension Tension
i) Number of Insulator discs -
a. Double suspension string -
b. Single suspension ’I’ pilot string 1 x 17
c. Double suspension ’II’ pilot string -
d. Double tension string 2 x 18

e. Triple Tension String 3 X 18

ii) Corona extinction voltage KV (rms) 154 154
iii) RIV at 1 MHZ for complete string i.e, including 1000 1000
grading/corona rings, arcing horns, clamps etc.,
at 154 KV (rms) (in micro-volts)(not exceeding)
iv) Mechanical failing load (kg)
Single Suspension ‘I’Pilot 1 x 160 kN
Double Tension 2 x 160kN
Double Tension for Long Valleys Crossing 2 x 210kN
Section
Triple Tension String 3 x 160 kN
v) Total creepage distance (mm) for altitude upto 17x 18 x 430mm
3000m above msl 430mm
vi) Tension strings from tower attachment point to As per Drg.
jumper take off point(approx.) Enclosed
Double Tension
vii) Maximum voltage across any disc Not more Not more
than 9% than 10%
viii) Minimum dry Impulse withstand Voltage test 1440 kV
voltage (+Ve Wave) KV (peak)
ix) Minimum power frequency one minute 460 kV
withstand test voltage KV (rms)
x) Minimum visible discharge test voltage KV (rms) 154 kV
1.9.2 INSULATOR STRINGS:

1.9.2.1 Insulator Strings for Normal Section
TABLE-1.39
Particulars Twin Moose Single “I” /Double “II” Triple Tension

Double Tension Suspension Pilot String Twin Moose

String Insulator String
1. No. of standard 2x18 1x17 (twin moose) 3x18
Discs
2. Size of disc-mm 280x170 280x170 (twin moose) 280x170
and and
305x170 305x170
(for special (for special Towers)
Towers)
3. E&M Strength 2x160 kN 1x160 kN (twin moose) 3x160 kN
of each string and and
2x210kN (for 3x210kN (for special
special towers) towers)
4. Ball and socket 20 20 20
Designation
(mm)
5. Minimum 430 430 430
and and
Creepage
545mm (for 545mm (for special
distance of special Towers) Towers)
each disc (mm)
1.9.2.2 Insulator Strings for Long Valleys Crossing Section

TABLE-1.40
1. No. of standard insulator Discs
For twin moose D/c Transmission line 2x18 (Double Tension)
2. Size of disc-mm 330x170
3. E&M Strength of each string 210 kN

4. Ball and socket Designation (mm) 20

5. Creepage distance of each disc (mm) 545mm

6. Pollution Medium polluted IEC 60815
1.9.3 INSULATOR HARDWARES
1.9.3.1 For Suspension Clamp
TABLE-1.41
S. Free centre type Material Process of Reference
No. Suspension clamp treatment Standard
1. Clamp Body/ keeper High strength Al. Casted or IS:617 OR ASTM-
piece Alloy 4600 LM-6 forged & Heat B429
OR 6061/65032 treated
2. Cotter bolts Hangers Mild Steel Hot dip IS:226-1975/
Shackles Brackets galvanised IS:2062-1992
3. U Bolts Stainless Steel or Forged & Heat AISI 302 OR 304-
High Stren- gth treated L,ASTM B429
Al. alloy
6061/6063 or
65032/63400
4. Preformed Armour Rods High Strength Al. Heat ASTM-B429
(Min. tensile strength of alloy type Treatment
35 kg/mm2.) 6061/65032 during
manufacturing
5. AGS Clamp High strength Cast/forged IS:617
a) Supporting House Corrosion heat treated ASTM-B429
resistant Al. alloy
LM6 4600 or
6061/65032
b) Al. Insert & retaining High Strength Al. forged & heat ASTM-B429
strap alloy of type treated
6061/65032

c) Elastomer Cushion Moulded on Al

reinforcement
1.9.3.2 for Tension Clamp
1. Tension Clamp
TABLE-1.42
a Type Compression
b Material
i. Outer sleeve EC Grade Aluminium tube formed by extrusion
process.
ii. Inner sleeve Galvanised low carbon forged steel.
c Minimum failing (No 95% of the breaking load of load conductor.
deformation)
2. Arcing Horns
TABLE-1.43
a Type Loop or ball ended (on tower side)
b Material Galvanised mild steel tube/rod hot dip
galvanised As per IS-226
3. Grading/Corona Ring
TABLE-1.44
a Material High strength heat treated As per ASTM B-429
aluminium alloy tube. (6061
/6063/1100 type or
65032/63400 type)
b Capacity to 150 Kg.
withstand
load for
one minute
c Supporting High strength heat treated Al. As per IS:226 OR IS-2062-1992

Brackets alloy 6061/6063/1100/65032 or ASTM-B 429

and /63400 type or Mild steel hot
Mounting dip galvanised
Bolts
4. Other String Hardwares

TABLE-1.45
a Socket Forged steel/Malleable cast As per ASTM B-429
ended items iron hot-dip galvanised.
b Sag High Quality Mild Steel or High As per IS:226-1975/ IS:2062-
Adjustment Tensile steel, Hot dip 1992
device galvanized
c Ball ended Drop forged steel, Hot dip As per IS:2004 -1978
components galvanized
U-clevis and
chain link
d Yoke plates Mild steel hot-dip galvanised As per IS-226-1975/ IS-2062-
1992
5. Security Clips
TABLE-1.46
1 Type R-type
2 Material Phosphor bronze or nonmagnetic stainless steel.
3 Rated The load carrying hardware should develop minimum strengths
Strength of as indicated in drawing attached without visual deformation.
fittings
1.10 FOUNDATION
a. Type of Soils

i) Normal soil
ii) Sandy soil
iii) Soft/disintegrated rock
iv) Hard Rock
Depending on the location of sub soil water the foundation in each type of soil shall be
further categorized as under:-
i) Dry
ii) Wet
iii) Partially Submerged (PS)
iv) Fissured Rock(FR)
b. Limiting bearing capacity

TABLE-1.47
S.no. Type of Soil Limiting Bearing Capacity (KG/SQ.M)
(Dry Foundations) (Wet, PS &FS Foundation)
1 Normal soil 26,500 13,250
2 Sandy soil 26,500 13,250
3 Soft, disintegrated 60,000 60,000
4 Hard Rock 1,20,000 1,20,000
c. Angle of internal friction of soil

TABLE-1.48
S.no. Type of Soil Angle of internal friction of soil in deg.
1 Normal soil 30 15
2 Sandy soil 20 10

3 Soft, disintegrated 20 10
4 Hard Rock
d. Unit weight of soil

TABLE-1.49
S.no. Type of Soil Unit weight of soil (KG/cu.M)

1 Normal soil 1440 940
2 Sandy soil 1440 940
3 Soft, disintegrated 1440 940
4 Hard Rock 2200 1200
e. Concrete Mix
TABLE-1.50
i) RCC Slab and Pads: M-20 Gr. conforming to IS:456-1978 with 20 mm
nominal size aggregate.
ii) Pyramid: M-20 Gr. conforming to IS:456-1978 with20mm
nominal size aggregate.
iii) Chimney: M-20 Gr. Concrete conforming to IS:456-1978 with
20 mm nominal size aggregate.
iv) Lean concrete sub M-10(1:3:6) concrete conforming to IS: 456-1978
base with 40mm nominal size aggregate.
v) For Pile Foundation M-25 Gr. Confirming to design mix as per IS 456:
2000 shall be used
f. Weight of Concrete:
TABLE-1.51

S.no. Type of concrete Dry Wet

1 Plain 2240 kg/cum 1240kg/cum
2 RCC 2400 kg/cum 1400kg/cum
g. Partial Safety Factors for Foundation Design:

a) Towers upto angle of deviation of 15 deg. : 1.1
b) Towers with angle of deviation above 15 deg. : 1.2
c) For pile foundation, an overload factor of 1.1 for compression and 1.0 for uplift.
The stability of the foundation against sliding and overturning shall be checked and the
factor of safety shall confirm to the IS 1904-1986.
1.11 GROUNDING OF TOWERS

i) Maximum tower footing resistance (ohms) 10
ii) Length of the conductors of counterpoise per leg. 30 metres, 45 m & 60
m respectively (approx)
iii) Two number of legs for pipe type earthing per tower
1.12 Specific Technical Technical Particulars

1.12.1 The Specific Technical Technical Particulars of the various items shall be furnished by the
Bidders in one original and two (2) copies in the prescribed schedules of the
Specifications. The Bidder shall also furnish any other information as in their opinion is
needed to give full description and details to judge the item(s) offered by them
1.12.2 The data furnished in Specific Technical Technical Particulars should be
the minimum or maximum value (whichever is ruling condition as per the requirement of
the specification) required. A Bidder may guarantee a value more stringent than the
specification requirement. However, for testing purpose or from performance point of
view, the material shall be considered performed successfully if it achieves the minimum /
maximum value required, whichever is ruling condition, as per the Technical Specification.

No preference what so ever shall be given to the bidder offering better/more stringent
values than those required as per specification except where stated otherwise.

Package-KC3
Section-III-B
Specific Technical Requirements- Substation
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Part II: Section 6: Employer's Requirement
SECTION III-B
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS - SUBSTATION
CONTENTS
PAGE
S.NO DESCRIPTION
N
1.0 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 1 O
.
1.1 SURGE ARRESTORS 1
CAPACITIVE VOLTAGETRANSFOR MERS/VOLTAGE 2

1.2
TRANSFORMERS
1.3 CURRENT TRANSFORMER 4
1.4 145/36 kV ISOLATOR AND ISOLATOR WITH EARTH SWITCH 10

145/36 kV SF6 (GAS) CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR OUTDOOR 14
1.5
APPLICATION
1.6 POWER TRANSFORMERS 19
1.7 EARTHING SYSTEM 23
1.8 FIBER OPTICS TERMINAL EQUIPMENT 23
1.9 A.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD 24
1.10 D.C. BATTERY, BATTERY CHARGER & DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD 26
1.11 POWER AND CONTROL CABLES 28
1.12 ILLUMINATION/LIGHTING SYSTEM 29
1.13 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS FOR SUB-STATIONS 30
1.14 STATION TRANSFORMERS 33
1.15 100 KVA, 415 V DIESEL GENERATOR SETS 34
Section III-B Contents

SECTION III-B
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
The Standard Technical Particulars of the various items are given below and in the relevant
schedule/chapters of Specifications. The Bidders are required to comply with the same.
1.1 SURGE ARRESTORS
TABLE-1.1(a) Surge Arrestor Technical Particulars for 132/33 kV Substations
i. Type Heavy duty, station class, Gapless

Metal oxide, outdoor
ii. Arrestor rating (kV rms) 120 30
iii. Maximum Continuous Operating voltage 102 25
(kV rms)
iv. Standard Nominal Discharge Current 10 kA (8/20 micro impulse shape)
v. Line discharge class Class-3
vi. Degree of protection IP 55
vii. Max. Steep current impulse residual 380 95
voltage at 10 kA (kVp)
viii. Max. Lightening Impulse residual 340 85
ix. Max. switching surge residual voltage at 272 68
1 kA (kVp)
x. Partial discharge at 1.05 COV not less than 10pC
greater than
xi. Max. discharge capability 5Kj/kV
corresponding to rated voltage
xii. Low current long duration test value Current: 600 A; Duration:2400 µs
xiii. High current short duration test value 100kA
(4/10 µ second wave)
Section III-B Page 1 of 38

xiv. Minimum Corona Extinction Voltage 105 NA

(kVrms)
xv. Maximum partial discharge at less than 10pC
1.05*Continuous Over Voltage(COV)
xvi. Prospective symmetrical fault current 31.5 25
for pressure relief test for (0.2 sec) kA
TABLE-1.1(b) Insulator Housing

Power frequency withstand test voltage (wet) (kV rms) 275 70
Lightning impulse withstand/tests voltage (kVp) 650 170
Pressure Relief Class Class À’
Creepage distance not less than (mm) 3625 900
Cantilever Strength (Kg) 350 350
1.2 CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS/VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

TABLE-1.2 (a) 132kV, 33kV CVT/VT TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
SL.NO DESCTIPTION
(i) Rated voltage kV (rms) 132 33
(ii) Max System Voltage kV (rms) 145 36
(iii) Rated frequency 50(Hz)
(iv) System Earthing Solidly Earthed
(v) Short circuit level for one second kA 31.5 kA 25 kA
(rms)
(vi) Rated primary operating voltage 132/3 (kV) 33/3 (kV)
(vii) Rated secondary voltage

 Winding No.1 110/3 V
 Winding No. 2 110/3 V

(viii) Class of accuracy of Each secondary

winding
 Winding No.1 3P
 Winding No.2 0.2
 Winding No.3 3P
(ix) Temperature rise As per IS 3156 & IEC 60044-2& 60044-5
(x) Voltage factor 1.5 for 30 sec. , 1.2 Continuous
(xi) Rated Insulation level
a) Rated voltage kV 132 33
b) 1.2 /50 micro sec. impulse 650 170
withstand voltage (kV peak)
c) One minute dry power frequency 275 70
Withstand voltage (kV peak)
(xii) Rated burden (VA)
 Wdg I 50
 Wdg II 30
 Wdg III 50
(xiii) Standards reference range Of frequency 96 % to 102 % for protection and 99 % to
for which the Accuracy’s are valid 101 % for measurement
(xiv) One minute power frequency test 3
Withstand voltage for secondary
winding (kV rms)
(xv) Partial discharge level (Pico coulombs ) <10
(xvi) Rated Capacitance (picco-farad) 4400 NA
(+10%to -5%)
(xvii) Minimum Corona extinction Voltage 105
(kVrms)
(xviii) Maximum Radio interference voltage 500
for frequency between 0.5 to 2 MHz (at

156 kVrms)
(xix) Equivalent resistance over entire carrier < 40
frequency range (ohms) for CVT < 40
TABLE-1.2 (b) Insulator Housing

Voltage Level (kV) 132 33
1.3 CURRENT TRANSFORMER

TABLE-1.3 (a) 132 kV CT TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
i. Rated Voltage 132 kV
ii. Rated frequency 50 Hz.
iii. System neutral earthing Solidly Earthed
iv. Installation Outdoor
v. Current rating(A) 1200-600-300/1-1-1-1-1
vi. a). Rated short circuit current for 1 second (kA) 31.5
b). Rated dynamic short circuit current (kA) 78.75

vii. Rated insulation level (Standard Values)

a) Lightening Impulse withstand voltage (Peak) 650
kV
b) One minute power frequency withstand 275
voltage (kV rms)
viii. Type of insulation Class A
ix. Rated continuous thermal current 120% of the rated current
x. Accuracy Class of CT cores
xi. 1. core-1 PS
2. core-2 PS
3. core-3 0.2
4. core-4 PS
5. core-5 PS
xii. Maximum temperature rise over maximum As per IS:2705
ambient temperature of 370C
xiii. ISF for metering core <5
xiv. Power frequency withstand voltage for 5 kV

secondary winding for 1 minute
xv. Max. Corona excitation voltage (kV rms) 105
xvi. Max.RIV for frequency between 0.5 to 2 MHz 500 µV at 92kV
xvii. Cantilever Strength 350 Kg
xviii. Max. Partial discharge level (pC) 10

TABLE-1.3 (b) 132 kV CT TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR TRANSFORMER BAY
v. Current rating(A) 600-300/1-1-1-1-1

kV
voltage (kV rms)
xi. 1. core-1 PS
2. core-2 PS
3. core-3 0.2
4. core-4 PS

5. core-5 PS


xvi. Max.RIV for frequency between 0.5 to 2 MHz 500 at 92kV
TABLE-1.3 (c) 33 kV CT TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

v. Current rating(A) 600-300/1-1-1-1
vi. a). Rated short circuit current for 1 second (kA) 25

a) Impulse withstand voltage (Peak) kV 170
voltage (kVrms)

x. Accuracy Class of CT cores Feeder Bay Transformer

Bay
xi. 1. core-1 PS PS
2. core-2 0.2 0.2
3. core-3 5P20 5P20
4. core-4 5P20 5P20
xii. Maximum temperature rise over maximum As per IEC
ambient temperature.

xv. Max. Partial discharge level (pC) 10
xvi. Max. Cantilever Strength (Kg) 350
TABLE-1.3 (D) 33 kV NCT TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

v. Current rating(A) 50-100/1-1A


voltage (kVrms)

Bay
xi. 1. core-1 PS PS
2. core-2 5P20 5P20


TABLE-1.3 (e) Insulator Housing
Voltage Level(kV) 132 33

Power frequency withstand test voltage (wet) (kV 275 70
rms)


1.4 145/36 kV ISOLATOR AND ISOLATOR WITH EARTH SWITCH

TABLE-1.4 (a) 145 kV ISOLATOR TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
S.No. Description Parameter

1. Rated voltage kV (r.ms)/highest 132/145
System Voltage kV
2. Rated frequency (Hz) 50
3. System neutral earthing Solidly Earthed
4. Number of poles 3
5. Installation Outdoor
Type Three phase, centre break, triple pole, single throw,
gang operated, with one control cabinet
with/without earth switch.
6. Rated current (Amp.) 1250
7. Rated lightning impulse

withstand voltage
a) Between the terminals 650
and ground [
kV(peak)]
b) Between the terminals 750
with contacts open
8. One min. power frequency
withstand voltage in kV (rms)

315
a) Across the isolating
distance kV (rms) 275
b) Between the terminals
and ground
9. Rated short circuit current rating 31.5
for 1 sec (kA)
10. Rated dynamic short circuit 78.75

current (kA)
11. Temperature rise As per IS: 9921(part II)-1982,IEC 694
12. Rated mechanical load As per IS: 9921/IEC
13. Operating mechanism of
I. Mode of operation of A.C Motor operated

isolator
415V AC Manual
II. Operating motor voltage
III. Mode of operation of
earthing switch
Manual
14. Operating time 12 Sec. or less
15. Number of auxiliary contact of 12NO + 12 NC for Isolator and 2 pairs to make
each isolator before breakcontact
8 NO + 8 NC for Earth Switch

16. Phase to phase spacing Minimum 3000 mm
17. Metal for rotating blade Aluminium
Material for fixed contact HDE copper

18. D.C. Supply voltage for Interlocks 110 V
volts

19. No. of terminal in control All contacts and control circuits are to be wired up
cabinet(including inter pole to control cabinet plus 24 spare terminals evenly
cabinet) distributed.
20. Minimum Corona extinction 105
Voltage in open and close
position (kVrms)
21. Maximum RIV for frequency 500 at 92 kV rms
between 0.5 to 2 MHz in close
and open position (micro volt)
22. Mechanical Endurance Class M2 for isolator , M0 for Earth Switch
TABLE-1.4 (b) 36 kV ISOLATOR TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

1. Rated voltage kV (r.ms)/Highest 33/36
System Voltage kV
Type Three phase, centre break, triple pole, single
throw, gang operated, with one control cabinet
7. Rated lightning impulse withstand

voltage
a) Across isolating distance 195
[kV(peak)]
b) Between terminals and 170

ground
8. One min. power frequency withstand
voltage in kV (rms)
a) Across the isolating distance 80

kV (rms)
ground
9. Short circuit current rating for 1 sec 25
(kA)
10. Rated dynamic short circuit current 62.5

(kA)
I.Mode of operation of isolator A.C Motor operated
ii. Operating motor voltage

415V AC
iii. Mode of operation of earthing
switch Manual
15. Number of auxiliary contact of each 10 NO + 10 NC for Isolator and 2 pairs to
isolator make before breakcontact8 NO + 8 NC for
Earth Switch
Material for fixed contact HDE Copper

19. No. of terminal in control All contacts and control circuits are to be wired

cabinet(including inter pole cabinet) up to control cabinet plus 24 spare terminals

evenly distributed.
20. Endurance Class M2 for isolator and M0 for earth switch
1.5 145/36 kV SF6 (GAS) CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR OUTDOOR APPLICATION

TABLE-1.5 (a) 145 kV SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKERS TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
S.No Parameters/Standards For 132 kV
1. Rated Voltage (kV rms) 132/145
4. Type of arc quenching medium SF6 (Gas)
5. Number of poles 1 pole/phase
6. Rated normal current (A) 1250
8. Rated short circuit current breaking 31.5
capacity at rated voltage (kA rms)
9. Rated short circuit making current (kA 78.5
rms)
10. Rated short circuit current duration 1
(seconds)
11. First pole to clear factor 1.3
12. a) Total break time for any current 65
upto the rated breaking current with
limiting conditions of operating &
quenching media pressure (ms)
b) Rated Break time (ms) 60
13. Closing time (ms) 100
14. Standard value of rated transient As per IEC


recovery voltage for terminal fault
15. Rated operating duty cycle 0-0.3 sec-CO-3 Min-CO
16. Auto reclosing Three phase auto reclosing.
17. Rated insulation level
a) 1.2/50 micro second lightning 650
impulse withstand voltage
between
line terminals and ground
between terminals with contact
open
b) One minute power frequency 275
withstand voltage between line
terminals and ground and
ground between terminals with
contact open (kV rms)
18. Minimum corona extinction voltage in 105
open and close position (kV rms)
19. Maximum radio interference voltage 500 at 92 kV rms
for frequency between 0.5 to 2 MHz in
open and close position (micro volt)
20. Maximum line charging current (rms) 50 Amps

21. Rated cable charging breaking current 160 Amps
capacity (rms)
22. Difference in instants of
closing/opening of contacts
a) Within a pole(ms) 2.5
b) Between poles for opening(ms) 3.3


c) Between poles for closing(ms) 5
23. Maximum noise level up to 50 m 140
distance from the base of CB (dB)
24. Temperature rise As per limits specified in IEC
25. Set of trip coils 2
26. Operating mechanism

a) Type Spring
b) Charging Motor charging & manual charging
c) Max. actuating force required Not to exceed 250 N

for manual charging of spring
d) Supply voltage 110 V DC supply
27. Permissible supply tolerance variation 70%-110% of rated supply
in case of motor charging
28. a) Type of tripping Trip free
b) No. of Auxiliary contacts 10 No. and 10 NC on each pole

c) Number of auxiliary contacts 10NO & 10 NC
(Over and above for
Control/Supervision)
29. Minimum Creepage distance (mm) 3625+7%
30. Control circuit voltage 110V DC
31. Circuit breaker class C2, M2 as per IEC 62271-100
32. CLEARANCES
a) Phase to Phase spacing in the 3000

switchyard i.e. available interpole
spacing for breaker (mm)

TABLE-1.5 (b) 33 kV VACUUM SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKERS TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

S.No Parameters/Standards For 33kV
6. Rated normal current (A) 630A
8. Rated short circuit current breaking 25
rms)
10. Rated short circuit current duration 3 sec
(seconds)
12. a) Total break time for any current upto 105
the rated breaking current with limiting
conditions of operating & quenching
media pressure (ms).
b) Rated break time (ms) 100
between line terminals and


contact open

terminals and ground and ground
open (kV rms)
18. Minimum corona extinction voltage in NA
19. Maximum radio interference voltage for NA
frequency between 0.5 to 2 MHz in open
and close position (micro volt)

capacity (rms)
22. Difference in instants of closing/opening
of contacts
a) Within a pole(ms) NA
b) Between poles for opening(ms)
c) Between poles for closing(ms)

a) Type Spring


c) Max. actuating force required for Not to exceed 250 N

manual charging of spring
27. Permissible supply tolerance variation in 70%-110% of rated supply
case of motor charging
b) No. of Auxiliary contacts 8 NO. and 8 NC
c) Number of auxiliary contacts 10 NO &10 NC
(Over and above for
32. CLERANCES
a) Phase to Phase spacing in the switchyard 1500

i.e available inter-pole spacing for
breaker (mm)
1.6 POWER TRANSFORMERS

TABLE-1.6 (a)
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 132/33kV 5 MVA 1- PHASE POWER TRANSFORMER
BANK
(i) Rated MVA 5 MVA ONAN/ONAF
(ii) Type of installation Outdoor
(iii) Service Continuous
(iv) Frequency 50 Hz 3%
(v) Cooling medium Mineral oil
(vi) Rated Voltage

High voltage side 132 kV

Low Voltage side 33 kV
(vii) Highest Continuous System
Voltage :
High voltage (HV) 145 kV
Low Voltage (LV) 36 kV
(viii) Method of system Neutral terminal- Solidly earthed

earthing:
(ix) Type of tap changer OLTC
(x) Range of tapping Plus 5% to minus 15% with sixteen (16) equal steps
of 1.25%. Tapping shall be located at the neutral
end of the HV
(xi) Tap Control Full capacity - on load tap changer suitable for
group / independent, remote / local electrical and
local manual operation and bi-directional power
flow
(xii) Impedance at rated MVA 7.15 %
and on principal/ tap
(xiii) Type of insulation & 132 kV 33 kV
insulation level for winding:
a) Type of insulation: Graded Uniform
b) One minute power 270 70kV
frequency withstand test
voltage (kV RMS)
c) Lighting Impulse 650 170kV
withstand test voltage
(kVp):
(xiv) Material Copper Copper
(xv) Type of cooling ONAN /ONAF

(xvi) Maximum Flux Density (Bm) 1.6 wb/m2

in core & yoke at normal
voltage & frequency
(xvii) Short circuit level of the 31.5 kA for HV for one sec and 25 KA for LV side
system to which for three sec.
Transformer is to be
connected
(xviii) Short circuit withstand 31.5 kA for HV for one sec and 25 KA for LV side
capacity for three sec.
(xix) Terminal details
a) 132 kV Twin ACSR “Moose” conductor for connecting to
Termination bushing terminals.
b) 33 kV Termination Twin ACSR “Moose” conductor for connecting to
bushing terminals.
(xx) Ten delta of winding Less than 0.005 at 20 deg C
(xxi) Maximum Temperature

Rise for various types of
cooling over an ambient of
34 deg C
a) Temperature rise of top
oil(Measured by 500 C
Thermometer)
b) Temperature rise of 550 C
winding(Measured by
resistance)
Note: The allowable temp rise during testing shall be reduced by 10K for every 250m
above 1000m as per IS 2026 part II.
(xxii) Overload Capacity As per IEC 60076-7 or IS: 6600

(xxiii) Noise Level at Rated Less than 75db for ONAN

Voltage & Frequency Less than 80db at full load
(xxiv) Transformer Bushings
Type HV- Oil Impregnated Paper (OIP) condenser type

LV- Porcelain and oil communicating type
Neutral- Porcelain and oil communicating type
HV LV Neutral
Rated Voltage 145kV 36kV 36kV
1. Rated current 250A 250A 250A
Lighting Impulse withstand 650 kV 170 kV 170 kV

voltage (kVp)
One minute power 275 kV 70 kV 70 kV
frequency withstand
voltage (kV RMS)
Minimum creepage distance 3625mm 900mm 900mm
Corona Extinction voltage NA
Ten Delta Less than 0.004 at 200 C
Note: The arcing distance of the busing shall be increased by 1.25 % per 100 metres to
account for the high altitude as per IEC 60137-2003.
(xxv) Transformer Oil As per IS:335 (latest edition), with pouring
temperature -100 C
(xxvi) Maximum partial discharge 100 pico-coulomb
level at 1.5 pu
1.7 EARTHING SYSTEM

TABLE-1.7 (a) TENTATIVE SIZE OF THE FLATS TO BE USED
S.No. Item Specification
a. Control room MS flat 50 x 10 mm2

b. Outdoor yard MS flat 50 x 10 mm2

c. Riser 50 x 6 mm2
d. Earthing electrodes 3 m long x 40 mm dia MS rod
e. Earthing Electrode for treated earthing pits 40 mm dia x 3 meter long G.I pipe
TABLE-1.7 (b) TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

S.No. Item Description
a. 50 x 10 mm2 MS flat for earthing mat As per drawing prepared by the Contractor
for each sub – station with complete BOQ
b. Equipment earthing with 50 x 6 mm2 --- do ---
MS flat complete with clamps
accessories
c. 40 mm dia. G.I pipe, 3 meter long with ---do---
suitable arrangements for fixing earth
strip
d. 40 mm dia. MS rod ,3 meter long with ---do---
suitable arrangements for fixing earth
strip
1.8 FIBER OPTICS TERMINAL EQUIPMENT

TABLE 1.8 (a) OPTICAL WAVELENGTH AND OPTICAL UNIT OPTIONS
WAVELENGTH OPTION
1310 nm High Power (Laser Version)
1310 nm Low Power (LED Version) when available from the Fiber Optic terminal
Equipment Manufacturer

1.9 A.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD

TABLE 1.9 (a) TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
1. AC SYSTEM 3 phase, 4 wire, solidly earthed

a. Voltage 400 volts- 15 % to +10 %
b. Frequency 50 Hz + 3 %
c. Combined variation in - 10 % to + 10 % Absolute sum
voltage & frequency
d. Fault level 10 kA (rms)
2. BUS BAR
a. Continuous 630 A Aluminum
b. Short time ( 1 Sec) 10 kA rms
3. ONE MINUTE POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND VOLTAGE
a. Power circuits 2.5 kV (rms)
b. Control circuits 2.5 kV (rms)
4. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
a. Voltage AC 3- phases –415 V (-15 to + 10 % )
b. Frequency 50 Hz
c. Short circuit Performance 10 kA (rms)
d. Making capacity 2.5 times breaking capacity
e. Operating Mechanism Manual , trip free
f. Temperature rise As per IS: 2516
g. Mechanical rise As per IS: 2516
h. Auxiliary contacts 4 No., 4 NC
5. METERS
a. Accuracy class 1.0 or better
b. one minute power 2 .5 kV (rms)
frequency withstand
voltage

6. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
a. Type Cast resin, Bar primary
b. Secondary circuit 1 Amp.
c. Voltage class and 1100 V, 50 Hz
Frequency
d. Class of insulation E or better
e. Accuracy
I. Accuracy class Class 1, 10 VA
metering CT
II. Accuracy class 5p 10 , 15 VA
protection CT
f. Short time current rating 10 kA (rms) for 1 sec.
g. one minute power 2.5 kV (rms)
frequency withstand
voltage
7. VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
I. Type Cast resin
II. Rated voltage 415 V±10%
a. Primary 415 V /√3
b. Secondary 110V/√3
III. Accuracy class and VA
burden
a. Metering 1.0, 10 VA
b. Protection 3 p, 50 VA
IV. Method of connection
a. Primary Star
b. Secondary Star
V. Rated voltage factor 1.1 continuous , 1.5 for 3 sec.
VI. Class of insulation E or better

VII. One minute power 2.5 kV (rms)

frequency withstand
voltage
8. RELAY
a. One minute power 2.0 kV (rms)
frequency withstand
voltage
9. CUBICLE COLOUR FINISH
a. Interior Glossy white
b. Exterior Decided during detailed engineering
10. ACCESSORIES
a. Plug point with switch fuse.
b. Space heater with
thermostat
c. Name plate on front of rear
d. Danger plate
1.10 D.C. BATTERY, BATTERY CHARGER & DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD

A D.C. Battery For Station Battery For Communication
I. Type Nickel-Cadmium completely sealed, maintenance

free stationary, normal discharge performance
type suitable for application in sub stations having
life of not less than Ten years on float operation
II. Ambient temperature
a. Max. 37.50 C …. Do…
b. Min. -5 0 C …. Do…

c. No. of cells As per Req. As per Req.

d. Rated voltage 110 V 48 V
III. Minimum capacity for: 250 AH 100AH
10 hr. Discharge rate
to end voltage V/cell
at 270 C
IV. Capacity of the one 20 AH 10 AH
hour discharge rate to
end voltage V/cell at
270 C
V. Float voltage 1.4 to 1.42 V/cell 1.4 to 1.42 V/cell
VI. Optimum float voltage To be specified by To be specified by the
the manufacturer manufacturer
VII. Boost voltage 1.53 to 1.7 V/Cell 1.53 to 1.7 V/Cell
VIII. Ampere-Hour Not less than 90% Not less than 90%
efficiency
IX. Watt-Hour efficiency Not less than 75% Not less than 75%
X. Self-discharge < 0.5% per week < 0.5 % per week
XI. Life >10 Years >10 Years
B. Battery Charger Float-cum-Boost Charger.
I. Type Solid state, full wave Solid state, full wave
controlled bridge controlled bridge
rectifier (preferably rectifier (preferably half
half controlled type) controlled type)
II. A.C. Input
a. Supply 400 V, 3 phase, 4 400 V, 3 phase, 4 wire
wire
b. Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz
c. Input voltage -15% to +10% -15% to +10%

variation
d. Frequency variation +5% +5%
e. Combined voltage & -15% to +10% -15% to +10%
frequency variation
f. System Earthing Effectively earthed Effectively earthed
III. D.C. Output For Station Battery For Station Battery
a. Continuous D.C. load To charge as well as To charge as well as
supply DC load supply DC load
b. Output voltage range 0- 150 V 0-65 V
c. For D.C. load +1% (digitally +1% (digitally
variation from 0 to controlled) controlled)
100% output Voltage
stable within
d. Continuous Current 100% (digitally 100% (digitally
settings controlled) controlled)
e. Ripple content Less than 2% Less than 2%
IV. AC input /DC output (to be controlled by for both float-cum-boost)
MCCB/MCB & with links to isolate circuits)
1.11 POWER AND CONTROL CABLES

1. L.T. POWER & CONTROL CABLES Description

(a) Size of Cable As per requirement (given in the Bid Price
Schedule)
(b) Voltage rating 650/1100 V
(c ) Short circuit withstand for 1 sec. 13 kA/system requirement
(d) Conductor for LT power cable Aluminium
(e) Conductor for control cable Copper

1.12 ILLUMINATION/LIGHTING SYSTEM

a. Supply voltage 230 V
b. Frequency 50 Hz
c. Variation of voltage  10%
d. Variation of frequency  5%
e. Combined voltage & frequency variation  10%
f. Type of internal lighting wires Copper wiring, P.V.C. insulated 1100 V

grade.
g. Conduit 14 mm, 25mm, 32mm and 63 mm PVC
medium duty pipe
h. Earthing wire
i. Material Copper
ii. Size 8 SWG GI
iii. Light Points 16 SWG (stranded) with green colour
insulation
iv. Power Points 14 SWG (stranded) with green colour
insulation
i. Temperature rise As per IS:10322 (Pt-4)
j. Lighting fixtures & accessories As per IS:8623 (Part-1)
panel

1.13 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS FOR SUB-STATIONS

TABLE 1.13 (a) Aluminium Tube particulars for 132 kV & 33 kV Bus Bars
Sl. Item 132 kV Bus Bar 33 kV Bus Bar

No.
a. Material Aluminium Aluminium
b. Diameter 100 mm 75 mm
c. Maximum Span 12000 mm 6000 mm
TABLE 1.13 (b) Physical Properties of Conductor
a. Type ACSR “Moose”

b. Overall Diameter 31.77 mm
c. Cross Sectional Area 597 mm2
d. Stranding (nos./mm) 54+7/3.53mm
e. Mass 2004 kg/km
f. Ultimate Strength 16275 kg (159.60 kN)
g. Rated DC resistance at 20oC 0.05596 Ω/km
TABLE 1.13 (c) Conductor accessories

Sl. no Item 132kV Level 33kV Level
i) Type Anti-fog type, Outdoor Anti-fog type, Outdoor Ball

Ball and Socket complying and Socket complying with IS
with IS 731 & IS 2486 731 & IS 2486 (Part-II)/ IEC
(Part-II)/ IEC 61109-2008 61109-2008
ii) Size of Disc 254x146 mm2 254x146 mm2
iii) Rated Voltage 11 kV 11 kV
iv) No. of Disc. Unit per
string

a. Suspension 11 3
(S/S)
b. Tension (S/T) 12 3
v) Minimum failing load
a. Suspension 120 kN 120 kN
b. Tension 120 kN 120 kN

vi) Creepage Distance of 320 mm 320 mm
insulator
vii) Power Frequency 38 kV 38 kV
(wet) withstand
voltage
viii) Power Frequency 1.3 times the dry flashover 1.3 times the dry flashover
(puncture) withstand voltage of the unit voltage of the unit
voltage of single disk
ix) Impulse withstand 75 kV 75 kV
voltage of the disk
TABLE 1.13 (d) Technical Parameters of Bus Post Insulators

Sl. No Description 132 kV 33KV
a) Type Solid Core Solid Core

b) Voltage Class (kV) 145 36 kV
c) Dry and wet one minute power 290 75
frequency withstand voltage(kV rms)
d) Dry lightning impulse withstand 675 170
Voltage (kVp)
e) Radio interference voltage (Micro volt >500 NA
at 1 MHz) at a system voltage of 156
kV.

g) Corona extinction voltage (kV rms) 105 NA

(min.)
h) Cantilever Strength
(i) Total minimum cantilever strength (Kg) 600 450
(ii) Total minimum breaking strength (Kg) 720 -
i) Minimum torsional moment As per IEC-273 As per IEC-273
k) P.C.D Top (mm) 127 127
Bottom (mm) 254 254
l) No. of bolts
Top 4 4
Bottom 8 8
m) Diameter of bolt/holes (mm)
Bolt dia M16 M16
Hole dia 18 18
o) Minimum total creepage distance for 3625 900
Heavy Pollution (mm)
TABLE 1.13 (e) Earth Wire

a. Material G.S. Wire
b. Size 7/4.115 mm
c. Ultimate Tensile Strength 10300 kg
d. Overall diameter 12.35 mm
e. Modulus of Elasticity 149000 MPA
f. Co-efficient of linear expansion 12.9x10-6 per degree C
g. Weight (kg/km) 619
h. Cross sectional Area 77.89 mm2

1.14 STATION TRANSFORMERS

TABLE 1.14 (a) SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 400KVA TRANSFORMER
(i) Rated KVA of the Transformer 400 KVA ONAN

(iii) Frequency 50 Hz  3%
(iv) Cooling medium Mineral oil
(v) Rated Voltage

a) High voltage side 33 kV
b) Low voltage side 0.4 kV
(vi) Highest Continuous System Voltage :
a) High voltage (HV) 36 kV

b) Low Voltage (LV) 0.4 kV
(vii) Method of system earthing:
a) High voltage (HV) Solidly earthed
b) Low Voltage (IV) Solidly earthed
(viii) Type of tap changer Off load Tap changer
(ix) Range of tapping Plus 5% to minus 10% with six (6) equal
steps of 2.5%
(x) Impedance at rated MVA Base on 4.5 %
Principal tap
(xi) Type of insulation & insulation level 33 kV 0.4 kV
for winding:
a) Type of insulation: Uniform Uniform
b) One minute power frequency 70 28
withstand test voltage (kV RMS)
c) Lightening Impulse withstand test 170 75

voltage (kVp):
(xii) Winding connection Delta (HV) Star (LV)
Material Copper Copper
(xiii) Vector group: Dyn1
(xiv) Type of cooling ONAN

(xv) Maximum Flux Density (Bm) in core & 1.6 wb/m2
yoke at normal voltage & frequency
(xvi) Short circuit level of the system to 25 kA for one sec.
which Transformer is to be
connected
(xvii) Maximum Temperature Rise for
various types of cooling over an
ambient of 40 deg C
a) Temperature rise of top oil 500 C
(Measured by Thermometer)
b) Temperature rise of winding 550 C
(Measured by resistance)
Note: The allowable temp rise during testing shall be reduced by 1 0K for every 250m
(xviii) Noise Level at Rated Voltage & Less than 75db for ONAN
Frequency Less than 80db at full load
(xix) Transformer Oil As per IS:335 (latest edition), with pouring
temperature -100 C
1.15 100 KVA, 415 V DIESEL GENERATOR SETS

TABLE 1.15 (a) Technical Particulars Alternator
S.No. Item Quantity
a. Alternator net continuous output at site conditions, after 100 kVA

deducting power requirement of auxiliaries

b. Power factor 0.8 lagging
c. Overload capacity for one (1) hour in twelve consecutive 10%
hours of operation
d. Rated voltage 415 V
e. Rated Frequency 50 Hz
f. Number of phases Three (3)
g. Winding connections Star (Y)
h. Design max ambient temperature 40 Deg. C
i. Type of insulation
a. Armature winding Class H
b. Field winding Class H
c. Connections Class H
d. Core connections Class H
e. Type of enclosure Screen
protected
IP 23
j. Permissible voltage variation for satisfactory operation at ±10%
rated KVA
k. Permissible frequency variation ± 5%
l. Permissible combined voltage and frequency variation 10%
(Absolute sum)
m. Method of Neutral grounding Solidly earthed
n. Efficiency Better than
90%

TABLE 1.15 (b) TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
a. Type Cast resin insulated bar or wound type
b. Specification & standards As specified herein and as per IS: 2705
c. Number of phases Single Phase
d. Secondary CT 5 Amp.
e. Rated Burden 15 VA for metering & 15 VA for Protection
f. Accuracy Class 1 (Metering)
5P10 ( Protection)
g. Rated continuous thermal Same as rated primary current
Current at specified ambient

temperature
h. Rated short time thermal current 25 KA for (1) one second or the maximum let
through current of the previous (upstream)
protective devise.
i. Rated dynamic current 65 KA (peak) or the maximum current of the

previous (upstream) protective device.
j. Class of insulation Class ‘H’
k. One (1) minute power frequency

withstand voltage
i) Between all terminals 2 kV

connected together and all
parts to be earthed
ii) Between contacts terminal
with contacts closed and all 2 kV
remaining terminals

connected together
TABLE 1.15 (c) TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF THE RELAYS

a. Type Flush mounted, tropicalised drawout.
b. Specifications and standards As specified herein and as per IS:3231
c. Current coil rated current 5 A, AC
d. Potential coil rated voltage 110 V AC/ 24 V DC
e. Operating time class As needed for instantaneous relay
f. Control supply 24 V DC
g. Class of insulation ‘H’
h. One (I) minute power frequency tests
voltage
i) Between all terminals connected 2 kV
together and all parts to be earthed
ii) Between contacts terminal with 2 kV
contacts closed and all remaining
terminals connected together
iii) Between circuits to be connected in 2 kV
use
iv) Between contacts in open position 1 kV
TABLE 1.15 (c) TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF THE INDICATING INSTRUMENTS
a. Type Flush mounted,
b. Specifications and standards As specified herein and as per IS: 1248
c. Accuracy ± 1 percent

d. Size 96 mm x 96 mm
e. Finish Parallax free dull black with white dial and black
markings
f. 1 (One) minute power 2 kV

frequency test voltage

Package-KC3
Section-IV Technical Specifications

Package-KC3
Section-IV-A
Technical Specifications-Transmission Line
Package-KC3

Section-IV-A
Chapter 1- Towers and Accessories
District) Transmission Line and 132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge SanguPart II-
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Section 6: Employer’s Requirements
SECTION IV A
CHAPTER – 1
TOWERS AND ACCESSORIES--
DESIGN, FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY, TESTING AND SUPPLY OF GALVANISED STEEL
TOWERS INCLUDING TOWER ACCESSORIES AND DESIGN OF FOUNDATION
CONTENTS
1.0 SCOPE 1
1.1 STANDARDS 1
1.2 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 5
1.3 TYPE OF TOWERS 6
1.4 EXTENSIONS 8
1.5 CONFIGURATION AND TYPE OF TOWERS 9
1.6 CLEARANCES AND CROSSINGS 9
1.7 TOWER DESIGN 12
1.8 BROKEN WIRE CONDITIONS 25
1.9 STRENGTH FACTORS RELATED TO QUALITY 26
1.10 TOWER STEEL SECTIONS 27
1.11 THICKNESS OF MEMBERS 28
1.12 ALLOWABLE STRESS 28
1.13 SLENDERNESS RATIO 31
1.14 QUANTITIES AND WEIGHTS 32
1.15 ERECTION STRESS 33
1.16 FABRICATION 34
FASTENERS: BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS INCLUDING ANTI-THEFT BOLTS &
1.17 36
NUTS
Section IV-A - Chapter 1 Contents

1.18 ERECTION MARK 39
1.19 NUMBER OF PARTS 39

1.20 GALVANIZING 40
1.21 STUB SETTING TEMPLATES 40
1.22 INSULATOR STRINGS AND EARTH WIRE/OPGW CLAMP ATTACHMENTS 41
1.23 TESTING OF TOWERS 41
1.24 CHECK ASSEMBLY OF TOWERS 46
1.25 GROUNDING OF TOWERS 46
1.26 TOWER ACCESSORIES 47
1.27 DESIGN OF FOUNDATION 49
1.28 CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS 50
1.29 DRAWINGS AND BILL OF MATERIALS 58
1.30 PACKINGS 62
1.31 MARKING OF PACKINGS 62
1.32 PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND MANPOWER 63
1.33 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 63
1.34 SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS AND DESIRED DELIVERY 63
1.35 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN 63
1.36 SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS / VARIATIONS 63
1.37 PAYMENTS 64
Section IV-A - Chapter 1 Contents

SECTION 4
CHAPTER – 1
TOWERS AND ACCESSORIES
DESIGN, FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY, TESTING AND SUPPLY OF GALVANISED STEEL
TOWERS INCLUDING TOWER ACCESSORIES AND DESIGN OF FOUNDATION
1.0 SCOPE
This part of the specification covers design, fabrication including supply of steel(including
angle sections, plates, cleats including other necessary accessories), proto type testing,
Galvanizing, Testing of tower at test bed before dispatch, packing, supply and delivery CIP
site/store, storage and transportation of material to work sites including head load carriage
of 220 kV Double Circuit Transmission Line Towers, tower accessories complete in all
respects including bolts, nuts and washers, strain plates and hangers, erection, testing, and
commissioning of following transmission line:
Package-KC3: Construction of 220 kV Double Circuit Transmission Line from Basantapur
(Terhathum District) – Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung District)
The 220 kV Transmission line will, however, initially be charged at 132 kV level and thus will be
originating from 132 kV bay at Basantapur and terminating thereof at 132 kV bay atDhunge
Sangu. However, in future since the line will be charged to originally planned 220 kV level, at
both Basantapur and Dhunge Sangu provision of an additional two or three towers including
dead-end towers shall be kept within the scope with necessary arrangement thereof which is
within the scope of this package KC3. The total number of towers shall be inclusive of this
provision. The proposed dead-end towers at both Basantapur and Dhunge Sangu substation
end will likely to be dismantled in future. The design scheme of this terminating arrangement
keeping in view of the future provision shall be submitted by the successful bidder to NEA for
approval.
The scope also covers design of foundations for all type of towers, in different types of soils.
Section IV-A - Chapter 1 Page 1 of 67

1.1 STANDARDS
1.1.1 The Nepali and Indian Standard Specification (IS) or equivalent to IEC and other International
standards mentioned below Table 1.1 as amended up to date shall be applicable to the
materials and process used in the manufacture of towers and tower accessories,
foundations, conductor, conductor accessories, earth wire/OPGW accessories and
construction code of practice. Codes as existing one month prior to the date of submission of
the bid.
TABLE 1.1
LIST OF STANDARDS
S.NO. STANDARDS TITLE
1 IS 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values
2 IS 209-1979 Specification for Zinc ingots
3 IS 269-1989 33 grade ordinary Portland Cement.
4 IS 278-1978 Specification for Galvanized steel barbed wire for
fencing.
5 IS 383-1990 Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources of
concrete.
6 IS 398(part-4) Aluminum conductors for overhead transmission
purposes.
7 IS 432-1982 Mild steel & Medium tensile steel bars & hard drawn
steel wire for concrete Reinforcement
8 IS 456 - 1978 Code of practice for plain & Reinforced concrete
9 IS 516-1959 Indian Standard for Methods of Tests for Strength of

Concrete
10 IS 800 - 1991 Code of practice for general construction in steel.
11 IS 802 (Part-1) Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead

transmission line Towers : Material, Loads and
permissible stresses

Section-1-2015 Materials & Loads

Section-2-1992 Permissible stress
12 IS 802 -(Part II)- Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead
Latest Edition transmission line : Fabrication, galvanizing, inspection
and packing
13 IS 802-(Part-III) Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead
Latest Edition transmission line : Testing
14 IS 808-1976 Specification for hot rolled steel beams, channels &
Angle sections
Part-V Equal Leg angles
Part-VI Unequal Leg angles
15 IS 1080-1985 Design and Construction of Shallow Foundations in
Soils (Other than Raft, Ring and Shell )
16 IS-1199-1999 Method of sampling and analysis of concrete
17 IS 1200-1974 Method of measurement of Building and civil works
18 IS 1344 - 1981 Specification for Calcined Clay Pozzolana

19 IS 1367-1967 Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners
20 IS 1489-1991 Specification for Portland Pozzolana Cement (Fly Ash

(Part - 1) Based)
21 (Part – 2) Specification for Portland Pozzolana Cement (Calcined
Clay Based)
22 IS 1573-1986 Specification for Electroplated coatings for zinc on iron
and steel
23 IS 1730-1989 Indian Standard for Steel Plates, Sheets, Strips and
Flats for Structural and General Engineering Purposes-
Dimensions
24 IS 1786-2008 High strength deformed steel bars and wires for
concrete reinforcement.

25 IS 1893-1975 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures
26 IS 1904-1986 General Requirements for Design and Construction of

Foundations in Soils
27 IS 1977-1996 Low tensile structural steels
28 IS 2016-1967 Specification for Plain washers
29 IS 2062-2006 Specification for Hot Rolled Low, Medium and High
Tensile Structural Steel
30 IS 2116-1998 Sand for Masonry mortars.
31 IS 2121 (Part-1 to Part-4) Fittings for ACSR Conductors and earth wire/OPGW
for Overhead lines
32 IS 2386 (Part-1 to Part-8) Methods of test for aggregates for concrete.
33 IS 2551-1982 Danger Notice plates
34 IS 2629-1966 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of iron
and steel
35 IS 2633-1972 Method of testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated
articles
36 IS 2911-part I Pile foundation design and construction – Code of
to IV/ Section I practice.
37 IS 3043-1991 Code of practice for Earthing.
38 IS 3063-1972 Specification for Single coil rectangular section spring
washers for bolts, nuts and screws
39 IS 3757-1985 High strength structural bolts
40 IS 3812 – Part-2 (2003) Specification for Pulverized Fuel Ash for use as
Admixture in Cement Mortar and Concrete
41 IS 3812 – 2013 Specification for Pulverized Fuel Ash
Part-1 For use as Pozzolana in Cement, Cement Mortar and
Concrete
Part-2 For use as Admixture in Cement Mortar and Concrete

42 IS 4091-1979 Code of practice for design and construction of

foundations for transmission line towers and poles
43 IS 4759-1984 Specification for Hot dip zinc coating on structural
steel and other allied products
44 Is 5358-1969 Specification for Hot dip galvanized coating on
fasteners
45 Is 5613-1985 Code of practice for design, installation and
(Part-2/Sec-1) maintenance of overhead power Lines : Designs
46 IS 5613-1985 Code of practice for design, installation and
(Part-2/Sec-2) maintenance of overhead power Lines : Installation
and maintenance
47 IS 6610-1972 Specification for Heavy washers for steel structures
48 IS 6745-1972 Specification for Methods for determination of weight
of zinc coating of zinc coated iron and steel articles
49 IS 7215-1974 Specification for Tolerance for Fabrication of steel
structures
50 IS 8112-2013 Specification for Ordinary Portland Cement (43 Grade)
51 IS 10238-1982 Step bolts for steel structures
52 IS 12269 - 2013 Specification for Ordinary Portland Cement (53 Grade)
53 IS 12427-1988 Transmission tower bolts
55 IS 12776-2002 Specification for Galvanized Strand for Earthing
56 Nepal Electricity Rules, 2050 BS
57 Publication Regulation for electrical crossings for Railway tracks.
No.19/N/700/1963
58 CBI&P Publication No. 290 Manual on Design of Long Span River Crossing Towers.
59 IEC 61773/BS EN 61773 Overhead lines-testing of foundations of structures
60 IS 10136-1982 Code of practice for selection of disc insulator fittings
for highest system voltage of 72.5 kV and above

61 SP-16 Design Aids for Reinforcement Concrete to IS 456
1.2 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

All materials used in the manufacture of the tower and tower accessories shall be conforming
to latest addition of relevant standards given in Clause 1.1 and workmanship shall be of
highest order to meet the relevant IS standard or any other international standards that
ensure equivalent or better quality for materials.
1.3 TYPE OF TOWERS

The towers shall be of types 220 kV DB(t), DC(t), DD(t) &DE(t) & Special towers fully described
under Table-1.2(a) are given below:
TABLE- 1.2 (a)
220 kV DOUBLE-CIRCUIT TOWERS WITH TWIN ACSR MOOSE CONDUCTOR
Type of Tower Designation Type of string Typical use
of towers
Small Angle DB(t) Tension To be used for line deviation from 0 to
Tower/Section 10 deg.
Tower
(0-10 deg.)
Medium DC(t) Tension To be used for line deviation from 10
Angle to 20 deg.
Tower
(10-20 deg.)
Large Angle (20-50 DD(t) Tension To be used for line deviation from 20
deg. & Dead End) to 50 deg. or for dead end.
Largest Angle & DE(t)/Dead To be used for line deviation from 50

dead end tower End(t) to 70 deg. And/or for dead end for an
altitude of upto 3000 meter.

Special Towers These may be required for major river

crossings or for very long valley spans.
For special requirements of these
structures refer Chapter-4.
Note: The angles of line deviation specified above are for the design span. The span may,
however, be increased up to an optimum limit with reduced angle of line deviation, if
adequate ground and phase clearances are available. The bidder shall indicate
optimum limit of spans for each type of above-mentioned towers with reducing angle
of deviation with supporting calculations. The slack span will be required from the
substation gantry to the first dead end tower at a maximum possible design angle.
The tower shall also be designed for first circuit stringing at either right hand or left
hand side with only OPGW strung on one of the two peaks. The necessary load cases
in addition to the double circuit Towers applicable shall be submitted with the Detail
Design of all type of Towers. Negative wind shall be considered for line designing
stage.
The design of existing towers which is NEA’s proprietary and will be provided to contractor
during execution stage have been taken into consideration of above design assumptions and
testing accordingly.
1.4 EXTENSIONS
Should the circumstance arise , the DE/Dead End Tower shall be designed so as to be suitable
for adding 3m, 6m, 9m,body extensions for maintaining adequate ground clearance. The
strength of tower members for all loading cases shall be adequate with and without
extensions up to 9m. The Contractor shall have to indicate/recommend suitable spans when
towers with such extensions are used.
To spot the tower in the hilly terrain/semi hilly terrain, the Bidder shall have to design leg
extensions/hill side Extensions of +1.5m, +3m & +4.5mas well as leg truncations of -1.5m, -
3m &-4.5m for all types of towers up-to plus 9m extension to be fitted to normal towers.
Based on the available designs, the contractor can however choose different combinations of

body and leg extensions and truncations to suit the requirement at site owing to the steps
and undulations encountered at site. These shall require to ratify in line design stage for
validation of strength.
1.5 CONFIGURATION AND TYPE OF TOWERS
1.5.1 The tower shall be of vertical configuration with Twin Peak (Galvanised Steel Earth wire &
OPGW Peak).
1.5.2 All member connections used in the tower and extensions shall be of bolted type.The
standard tower and tower with extensions should have K-bracings along with plan bracings
in the lowest panel.
1.6 CLEARANCES AND CROSSINGS

1.6.1 Ground Clearance
1.6.1.1 The minimum ground clearance from the lowest conductor shall be considered 7.0 meters
for 220 kV Transmission line at 85 degree C temperature. The contractor shall make a
provision of additional minimum clearance due to creep also in conductor and altitude
factors during spotting stage.
1.6.1.2 The following provision is made for the requirement considering the ground undulations,
errors in stringing:
 150 mm towards ground undulation and errors in stringing.
The bidder shall make necessary provision to cater for the above requirement.
The tension towers shall include the necessary back mark (BM) tolerance for considering the
vertical clearance and height of tower.
1.6.2 CLEARANCES OF LIVE PARTS TO TOWER MEMBERS
1.6.2.1 The minimum clearances between the live parts, tower and cross-arm members have been
given in Section-3. Whenever necessary the jumper loops at tension towers may be weighed
with the approval of the Employer with suitable weights to reduce the angles of swing and
provide necessary air clearances under wind conditions. Pilot suspension strings to restrict
the jumper swings can be used on heavy angle towers. For the purpose of computing the
clearances, the dimensions of insulator discs as given in Section-3 of this specification may

be assumed together with standard arcing horns and other parts of the string. The design of
the towers shall be such that it would satisfy all the above conditions when clearances are
measured from any live point of the strings.
1.6.2.2 The clearances at all the cross-arms for specified swing angles of the insulator strings shall
also be checked for suspension/tension insulator strings.
1.6.3 MIDSPAN CLEARANCE

1.6.3.1 The minimum vertical mid-span clearance between G.S. earth wire/OPGW and the nearest
power conductor shall not be less than 8.5 mtr. as the value specified in Section-3. The
minimum vertical mid-span clearance shall mean the vertical clearance between G.S. earth
wire/OPGW and the nearest conductor under all temperatures conditions and still air in the
normal ruling span. The G.S. earth wire/OPGW sag shall be not more than 90 per cent of the
corresponding sag of power conductor under still air conditions for the entire specified
temperature range.
1.6.3.2 The successful bidder in consultation with the Employer/ insulator and insulator hardware
suppliers shall verify the string length and ensure that the specified clearances and other
relevant requirements are fully met and submit the final clearance diagrams based on the
exact lengths of insulator strings for approval of the Employer.
1.6.3.3 Shielding Angle
The angle of shielding is defined as the angle formed by the line joining the centre lines of
the earth wire/OPGW and top most outer power conductor, in still air, at tower, to the
vertical line through the centre line of the earth wire/OPGW. The angle of shielding to be
maintained for the design of transmission lines under the project has been specified in
Section-3. The drop of 150 mm on account of earth wire/OPGW suspension assembly shall
be considered while calculating the maximum angle of shielding i.e. 20 degree.
1.6.4 Road Crossing

At Road crossings, the towers shall be fitted with normal Double suspension/double tension
insulator strings as required so that ground clearances at the highest point of the road at

maximum temperature in still air is not less than the specified values. The effects of
conductor creep and broken conductor in the adjacent span is also to be taken into account
in addition to above ground clearance as per relevant Indian standard/Local Nepal Standards
applicable.
1.6.5 Power Line Crossings
Where the line has to cross over another line of the same voltage or lower voltage,
suspension/tension towers with suitable extensions shall be used. Where long shut-downs
are envisaged it would be preferable to undertake power line crossings on suspension
towers followed by angle towers suitably guyed as per relevant Indian standard/Local Nepal
Standards applicable.Any other arrangements proposed by the EPC contractor other than
suspension/tension towers for crossing power lines, the same shall be approved in advance
from the Employer/PMC. The quoted unit rates per metric tonne shall be applicable on this
arrangement also. The unit rate per metric tonne for supply shall be derived from the
corresponding composite rates of tower super structure.
1.6.6 Tele-Communication Line Crossings

The crossings shall be designed in such a manner that the clearance between conductors of
the power line and the telecommunication wires is not less than specified value given in
Section-3.
1.6.7 Deep Valley & River Crossings

In case of major river crossing, towers shall be of suspension type using double suspension
strings and the anchor towers on either side of the main river crossings shall be DC type
tower. Clearance required by navigation authority shall be provided if any. For navigable
/non navigable river, clearance shall be reckoned with respect to highest flood level (HFL). In
case of deep valley crossing spans the towers shall be of Tension/Dead end tower. The
design of towers for river and deep valley crossing spans shall be as per requirement laid
down in Chapter4 of this Section of the specifications and as per relevant Indian
standard/Local Nepal Standards applicable.

1.6.8 Railway Crossings

Railway crossings if any shall be supported on dead end type towers on either side,
depending on the merits of each case and shall be constructed in conformity with the
specification laid down by the concerned authority of Nepal and as per relevant Nepal
Standards.
1.7 TOWER AND LINE DESIGN

1.7.1 The bidder shall indicate the method intended to be deployed for the design of towers for
transmission lines covered under this specification, in the bid for basically line design
purpose. The final design of tower (soft copy), however, shall be done, analyzed and
submitted in PLS-Tower software during the line design stage.The design of tower type DB,
DC & DD with upto 9 meter extensions shall be provided by NEA which is their proprietary.
The 3-D model of the tower for all type of body as well as leg extensions shall also be
imported into PLS-Cadd by the contractor for the line designing, checking the strength of all
the spotted towers based on the survey data. While the tower shall be tested for +9 meter
extension for the respective type of towers, design shall be submitted for normal, +3 m, +6
m extensions as well for approval. The contractor can recommend other combinations of
body and legs as per available designs after obtaining from NEA during execution stage. The
design shall also be submitted for higher body extension like +18 m/+ 25 m if required. The
contractor shall also submit the type of analysis performed explaining the assumptions and
reasons thereof.
The bidder shall note that the NEA shall provide the design of Tower type DB(t), DC(t) &
DD(t) & DE(t) with body extensions +3m, +6 m & +9 m as well as +1.5m, +3m & +4.5 m leg
extensions respectively. However, the line designing shall be within the scope of successful
bidder using all type 3-D Tower models including body as well as leg extensions as applicable
post-detailed survey activity is completed.
However the bidder has to carry out detailed design for 3-D analysis of Towers. The detailed
design includes:
a) Modification of electrical clearance diagram.

b) Design of reinforced cross arm and body.

c) Design/modeling of different combination of leg and body extensions using the
available designs.
d) Wire clearance diagram for gantry take off tower.
e) Design of jumpering/ jumper drop for actual span and profile.
f) Design of new foundation w.r.t different soil parameters and actual/prescribed loading.
g) Hill side leg extension ( positive and negative) proposed.
h) Line schedule and Insulator/Jumper swing calculations.
The leg extensions quantifications shall be carried out based on the contouring data collected
from site for the tower locations. The line designing shall also be revised based on the check
survey and any other spotting requirement as per site activity process.
Cross arm projections for Dead end towers shall be fixed in such a way that it can
accommodate a condition of 15 degree deviation of conductors towards tower at both Left
and Right side cross arms on slack span side and 0-15 degrees deviation on line side.
The bidder shall provide a line designing price in the price schedule. Based on the line
design assessment/quantification for the weight span exceeding the limit regime shall also
be analyzed for strengthening of body and cross-arm.
1.7.1.1 Only the design require for line design purpose in general will be into the scope of
contractor. It is NEA’s prerogative to provide other type of design including that of special
type of towers depending upon the detailed survey should a requirement arises during
execution stage. In case NEA does not have in its library the design of special tower, the
design and testing of such tower shall be in the scope of the contractor.
1.7.1.2 The design of towers shall generally be based on the procedure and guide lines as laid in IS-
802 (part-1/Section-1)2015 and as here under as also parameters given in the specific
technical requirement Section-3 of this specification.
1.7.1.3 If there are any deviations between the stipulation of this specification and IS: 802 (Part-
1/Section-1) 2015 the stipulations laid down in this specification/ISS for worst condition of
loading shall prevail. The procedure given here for the design of towers is based on
probabilistic approach. For 220 kV Double Circuit lines covered in this specification, the
relevant parameters for design of towers are as given in Table 1.3.

1. Basic wind speed “Vb” = 47 m/s (peak gust velocity averaged over a short time interval
of about 3 seconds, corresponds to mean heights above ground level in an open
terrain ( Category 2 )and have been worked out for a 50 years return period).
2. Reference Wind Speed “VR” (extreme value of wind speed over an averaging a period
of 10 minutes duration) = Vb/Ko, where Ko is a factor to convert 3 seconds peak gust
into average speed of wind during 10 minute period at a level of 10 metres above
ground. Ko may be taken as 1.375.
Therefore, VR = 34.18 m/s
3. Design Wind Speed “Vd” = VR x K1 x K2, Where K1 = 1 (Risk coefficient, Reliability level
1) & K2 = 1 (Terrain roughness coefficient, Terrain category 2)
Table 1.3: Wind speed on tower
Description/item Value
Towers 220 kV D/C with two peaks
Wind Zone (as per IS 802) 4
Design wind speed “Vd”( m/s) =(47/1.375) x 1 x 1 = 34.18 m/s
The design wind pressure (Pd) is to be calculated as per above inputs and considering all the
factors as per IS 802. However, In any case the Design Wind Pressure (P d) is not to be less
than the value calculated below:
Pd = 0.6 x (Vd)2
= 0.6 x 34.182 = 701 N/m2
Where, Pd = Design Wind Pressure in N/m2
Vd = Design Wind Speed in m/s
The terrain roughness factor for terrain category 2,however, shall be increased to next higher
value i.e. 1.08 as per IS 802-Part 1-Sec 1.
1.7.2 Statutory Requirements
Statutory requirements as laid down in the Electricity Regulations of Nepal, 2050 as
amended and other local rules and regulations to such structures shall be satisfied/observed.
1.7.3 Wind Load on Tower

1.7.3.1 In order to determine the wind load on tower, the tower is divided into different panels
having a height “h”. These panels should normally be taken between the intersections of the
legs and bracings. For a lattice tower of square cross section, the resultant wind load Fwt in
Newton’s, for wind normal to a longitudinal face of tower, on a panel height “h” applied at
the center of gravity of this panel is:
Fwt = Pd x Cdt x Ae x Gt
Where Pd = Design wind pressure in N/sqm
Cdt = Drag coefficient for panel under consideration against which the wind is blowing. Value
of Cdt for the different solidity ratio are given in Table 1.4.
1.7.3.2 Solidity ratio is equal to the effective area (projected area of all the individual elements) of a
frame normal to the wind direction divided by the area enclosed by the boundary of the
frame normal to the wind direction.
1.7.3.3 Ae = Total net surface area of the legs, bracings, cross-arm and secondary members of the
panel projected normally to the face in sq m. (The projections of the bracings of the adjacent
faces and of the plan and hip bracings may be neglected while determining the projected
surface of a face).
1.7.3.4 Gt = Gust response factor, peculiar to the ground roughness and depends on the height
above ground. Values of Gt for 220 kV towers are given in Table 1.4.
TABLE –1.4
DRAG COEFFICIENT, Cdt FOR TOWERS
Solidity Ratio Drag coefficient, Cdt
Upto 0.05 3.6
0.1 3.4
0.2 2.9
0.3 2.5
0.4 2.2
0.5 and above 2.0

NOTE:-
1. Intermediate values may be linearly interpolated.
2. Drag coefficient takes into account the shielding effect of wind on the Leeward face of
the tower. However, in case the bracing on the Leeward face is not shielded from the
windward face, then the projected area of the Leeward face of the bracing should also
be taken into consideration.
3. Solidity ratio is equal to the effective area (projected area of all the individual
elements) of a frame normal to the wind directions divided by the area enclosed by the
boundary of the frame normal to the wind direction.
TABLE – 1.5
GUST RESPONSE FACTOR FOR TOWERS (Gt)
AND INSULATORS (Gi)
Height above Values of Gt and Gi for 220 kV towers
Ground, m Terrain Cetagory 1 Terrain Cetagory 2 Terrain Cetagory 3
10 1.7 1.92 2.55
20 1.85 2.20 2.82
30 1.96 2.30 2.98
40 2.07 2.4 3.12
50 2.13 2.48 3.24
60 2.20 2.55 3.34
70 2.26 2.63 3.46
80 2.31 2.69 3.58
Note: -
(i) Intermediate values may be linearly interpolated.
(ii) In case of multi-string including V-string, no masking Effects shall be considered.

(iii) The total effect of wind on multiple strings set shall be taken equal to sum of the wind
load on the individual insulator strings.
1.7.4 Wind Load on Conductor and Groundwire
The load due to wind on each conductor and earth wire/OPGW , Fwc in Newtons applied at
supporting point normal to the line shall be determined by the following expression:
Fwc = Pd x Cdc x L x d x Gc
Where:
Pd = Design wind pressure, in N/sqm:
Cdc = Drag coefficient, taken as: 1.0 for conductor and 1.2 for earth wire/OPGW
L = Wind span, being sum of half the spans on either side of supporting
structures, in meters
d = Diameter of conductor / earth wire/OPGW , in meters
Gc = Gust response factor, takes into account the turbulence of the wind and the
dynamic response of the conductor. Values of Gc are given in Table 1.6 for 220 kV towers for
the average height of the conductor/ earth wire/OPGW above the ground.
Note: The average height of conductor shall be taken up to clamping point of top conductor on
tower less two-third sag at minimum temperature and no wind. The average height of the
groundwire is clamping point of groundwire less two-third sag at minimum temperature and
nil wind.
TABLE – 1.6
VALUES OF GUST RESPONSE FACTOR Gc FOR CONDUCTOR AND EARTH WIRE/OPGW
Terrain Height above

Values of Gc for Ruling Span in Meter Upto
category ground mts
200 300 400 500 600 700 800 and
Above
1 upto 10 1.70 1.65 1.60 1.56 1.53 1.50 1.47
20 1.90 1.87 1.83 1.79 1.75 1.70 1.66
40 2.10 2.04 2.00 1.95 1.90 1.85 1.80

60 2.24 2.18 2.12 2.07 2.02 1.96 1.90

N 80 2.35 2.25 2.18 2.13 2.10 2.06 2.03
O 2upto 10 1.83 1.78 1.73 1.69 1.65 1.60 1.55
T 20 2.12 2.04 1.95 1.88 1.84 1.80 1.80
E 40 2.34 2.27 2.20 2.13 2.08 2.05 2.02
: 60 2.55 2.46 2.37 2.28 2.23 2.20 2.17
80 2.69 2.56 2.48 2.41 2.36 2.32 2.28
- 3upto 10 2.05 1.98 1.93 1.88 1.83 1.77 1.73
20 2.44 2.35 2.25 2.15 2.10 2.06 2.03
I 40 2.76 2.67 2.58 2.49 2.42 2.38 2.34
N 60 2.97 2.87 2.77 2.67 2.60 2.56 2.52
T 80 3.19 3.04 2.93 2.85 2.78 2.73 2.69
E
RMEDIATE VALUES MAY BE LINEARLY INTERPOLATED.
1.7.5 Wind Load on Insulator Strings

Wind load on insulator strings “Fwi” shall be determined on Insulator length from the
attachment point to the center line of the conductor in case of suspension tower and up to
the end of clamp in case of tension tower, in the direction of the wind as follows:
Fwi = Cdi x Pd x Ai x Gi
Where,
Cdi = Drag coefficient of insulators taken as 1.2
Pd = Design wind pressure in N/sq. m;
Ai = Area of insulator string projected horizontally on a vertical plane parallel to the axis of
the string. In the absence of actual value it may be taken as half of the gross projected area
of the cylinder with diameter equal to that of the insulator skirt. For the purpose of bid
design, the value of Ai may be calculated in accordance with the stipulations in IS: 802 code
based on string lengths shown in Section 6 for references vide Drawing No.
WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/04enclosed with the specification.

Gi = Gust response factor, peculiar to the ground roughness and depends on the height of
insulator attachment point above ground. Values of Gi are given in Table (2).
1.7.6 Sag Tension Calculation

1.7.6.1 Sag tension calculations for conductor and earth wire/OPGW shall be made for the following
combinations.
i) Every day temperature, nil wind (initial condition)
ii) Full design wind pressure on conductor / earth wire/OPGW at everyday temperature of
32 degree C
iii) Thirty Six (36) per cent Full Design Wind Pressure on conductor / earth wire/OPGW at
Minimum Temperature of -5 degree C.
iv) 10mm radial thickness of ice on conductor and earthwire at -5 degree C temperature
and nil wind. Ice unit weight is to be considered as 916.8 kg/m2.
v) Twenty Eight (28) per cent Full Design Wind Pressure on conductor / earth wire/OPGW
and 5 mm of radial thickness of ice at Minimum Temperature of -5 degree C.
vi) 75% Full design wind pressure on conductor /earth wire/OPGW at every day
temperature for Tangent towers under broken wire condition.
vii) Nil wind on conductor at 85 degree C temperature
viii) Nil wind on earth wire/OPGW / at 53 deg C temperature
ix) Nil Wind at Minimum Temperature of -5 degree C.
x) Nil Wind at 0 degree C Temparature
The sag-tension values for conductor, opgw and earthwire has been provided in the drawing section
of this document which shall be followed for line designing purpose.
1.7.7 Climatic Loads
Climatic loads are related to reliability requirements:
These are random loads imposed on tower; conductor, insulator strings and earth
wire/OPGW due to action of wind on transmission line and do not act continuously. Climatic
loads shall be determined either of the following climatic conditions whichever is more
stringent.

(i) 32 degree C Everyday temperature and full design wind pressure.

Or
(ii) -5 degree C Minimum temperature with 0.28 times design wind pressure and 5 mm of
radial thickness of ice
OR
(iii) 10 mm radial thickness of ice on conductor and earthwire/OPGW at -5 degree C
temperature and nil wind. Ice unit weight is to be considered as 916.8 kg/m2.
The ice shedding condition at -50 C and 28% full wind pressure with 10mm ice on one span
and nil ice on the other span shall also be checked.
1.7.8 Failure Containment Loads

Failure containment loads are related to Security Requirements.
These loads comprise of:
i) Anti-cascading loads, and
ii) Torsional and longitudinal loads
1.7.9.1 Anti-cascading Loads
Cascade failure may be caused by failure of small items such as insulators, hardware, joints,
and failures of major elements such as towers, foundations, conductor due to defective
material or workmanship or from climatic overloads or sometimes from casual events such
as misdirected aircraft, avalanches, sabotage etc. The security measures adopted for
containing cascade failures in the line is to provide angle towers at specific intervals which
shall be checked for anti-cascading loads (see Cl.No. 1.7.13).
1.7.9.2 Torsional and Longitudinal Loads

a) These loads are caused by breakage of conductors or earth wire/OPGW. All the towers
shall be designed for these loads for the number of conductors considered broken
according to (Cl. No. 1.8).
b) The mechanical tension of conductor and earth wire/OPGW is the tension
corresponding to most stringent combination of loads as per clause 1.7.6 and 1.7.7.

1.7.10 Safety Requirements (Construction and Maintenance)

These loads are related to the safety requirement of the working personnel on the line.
These are loads imposed on tower during construction and maintenance of transmission
lines. All the towers shall be design for these loads according to clause no 1.7.12.
1.7.11 Span
a) Normal Span
The normal span of the transmission lines shall be 350 meters for 220 kV D/C
Transmission Line.
b) Wind Span
The wind span is the sum of the two half spans adjacent to the support under
consideration. For Normal Horizontal span this equals to Normal span.
For 220 kV lines the wind span shall be considered as 350 meters and 210 meters for
broken wire condition for plain terrain and 525 meter and 315 meter for broken wire
conditions in Hilly terrain.
c) Weight Span
The weight span is the horizontal distance between the lowest points of the conductors
on the two spans adjacent to the tower. For design of structures, the span limits given
shall prevail.
The weight span and wind span of tower is as given in Table 1.7 below:
Table 1.7: Weight span for tower
Hilly Terrain Wind Span Permissible Weight Span (Meters)

Normal Condition Broken wire condition
Small/Medium 350 1000 -1000 600 -600
Large Angle 350 1000 -1000 600 -600

Note: Towers to be spotted in hilly terrain shall be checked for higher values of weight span as
per the route profiling and tower spotting. The tower members of cross arms and body
require strengthening shall be identified and submitted for approval to Employer.
1.7.12 Computations of Loads

1.7.12.1 Transverse Loads
Transverse loads shall be computed for reliability, security and safety requirements.
A) Reliability Requirements(As per IS 802/Part I/Section 1/1995 Clause 12.1.1)
These loads shall be calculated as follows, for the climatic conditions specified in Clause
1.7.7.
i) Wind action on tower structures, conductors, earth wire/OPGW and insulator
strings computed according to 1.7.3, 1.7.4 and 1.7.5 respectively.
ii) Component of Deviation loads (Fwd) due to mechanical tension of conductor and
earth wire/OPGW due to wind shall be determined a) everyday temperature and
full design wind pressure or b) minimum temperature and 0.36 times the design
wind pressure for climatic conditions specified in Clause No. 1.7.7.
Total transverse Load = (i) + (ii) = Fwt+Fwc+Fwi+Fwd
Where "Fwc", "Fwi" and "Fwd" are to be applied on all conductors/ earth
wire/OPGW points and "Fwt" to be applied on tower, at peak, cross arm level and
at any one convenient level between bottom cross arms and ground level for
normal towers. In case of towers with extensions, one more application level shall
be taken at top end of extension.
B) Security Requirements(As per IS 802/Part I/Section 1/1995 Clause 12.1.2)

Transverse loads for security requirements (broken wire conditions) shall be taken as
under:
i) Wind action on tower structures, conductors and earth wire/OPGW and insulator is
to be computed as per 1.7.12.1. A) except that 60% wind span shall be considered
for broken wire condition and 100% wind span for intact span conditions.

ii) Component of mechanical tension computed as :

a) For tension towers, it is component of 75% mechanical tension of conductor
and earth wire/OPGW at i) everyday temperature and design wind pressure or
(ii) minimum temperature and 0.36 times the design wind pressure whichever
is more stringent as provided in the revised version of IS 802-Part 1 –Sec 1-
2015.
C) Safety Requirements (Construction and Maintenance)
Transverse loads for safety requirements are horizontal loads due to mechanical
tensions of conductors and earth wire/OPGW at everyday temperature and no wind,
on account of line deviation for both normal and broken wire condition.
1.7.12.2 Vertical Loads

Vertical loads shall be computed for reliability, security and safety requirements.
A) Reliability Requirements
i) Loads due to weight of conductor/earth wire/OPGW based on design weight span,
weight of insulator strings and accessories, and
ii) Self-weight of tower structure up to point/level under consideration.
B) Security Requirements
These shall be taken as:
i) Same as in 1.7.11.2 A) i) except for broken wire condition (broken span) where the
load due to weight of conductor/earth wire/OPGW shall be considered 60% of
weight span, and
ii) Same as in 1.7.11.2 A) ii).
C) Safety Requirements (Construction and Maintenance)
i) Normal conditions:-
a) Weight of conductor/earth wire/OPGW based on weight span, weight of
insulator strings and accessories multiplied by an over load factor of 2.0.

b) Self-weight of tower up to point/level under consideration.

c) Load of 1500 N shall be considered acting at each cross arm tip, as a
provision of weight of lineman with tools.
d) Load of 3500 N to be considered acting at the tip of cross arms for 220 kV
lines for design of cross arms.
ii) Broken wire condition:-
Same as under Normal condition considering 60% weight span for broken
span(s) and 100% for intact spans.
1.7.12.3 Longitudinal Loads
Longitudinal Loads shall be computed for reliability, security and safety requirements.
A) Reliability Requirements
These loads shall be taken as:
i) No longitudinal loads for suspension and tension towers.
ii) Longitudinal loads which might be caused on tension towers by adjacent spans
of unequal lengths can be neglected in most cases, as the strength of the
supports for longitudinal loads is checked for security requirement and for
construction and maintenance requirements.
iii) Longitudinal load for dead-end towers to be considered corresponding to
mechanical tension of conductors and earth wire/OPGW at a) everyday
temperature and full design wind pressure or (b) minimum temperature and
0.36 times the design wind pressure whichever is more stringent.
B) Security Requirements (Broken Wire Condition)
These loads shall be taken as under:-
i) Suspension Tower :
Longitudinal loads equal to component of 50% of mechanical tension of
conductor and 100% mechanical tension of earth wire/OPGW at every day
temperature and no-wind condition.
ii) Tension Towers :

Horizontal loads in longitudinal direction due to mechanical tension of

conductors and earth wire/OPGW corresponding to tension at everyday
temperature and full design wind pressure (combination - 1) and 0.36 times
design wind pressure at minimum temperature (combination -2)
iii) Dead End Towers :
Horizontal loads in longitudinal direction equal to mechanical tension of
conductor and earth wire/OPGW at everyday temperature and full design wind
pressure (combination - 1) and 0.36 times design wind pressure at minimum
temperature (combination -2).
C) Safety Requirements: These loads shall be taken as under

i) Normal condition
a) Suspension Tower:- Nil
b) Tension Tower :- Nil
c) Dead end Towers: - Longitudinal load equal to mechanical tension of
conductor/earth wire/OPGW at every day temperature and no wind.
Longitudinal loads due to unequal spans may be neglected.
ii) Broken Wire Condition

a) Suspension Towers:-
Longitudinal loads per conductor and earth wire/OPGW shall be considered
as 10,000 N and 5,000 N respectively.
b) Tension Towers :-
Load equal to twice the sagging tension (sagging tension is equal to 50% of
tension at every day temperature and no wind) for wire under stringing and
1.5 times the sagging tension for all intact wires (stringing completed).
c) Dead End Towers: Intact conductors same as under normal condition and nil
for broken conductors.

1.7.13 Anti Cascading Checks

All angle towers shall be checked for the following anti-cascading conditions without any
over load factors with all conductors and earth wire/OPGW intact only on one side of the
tower.
a) Transverse loads
This shall be taken as under no wind condition, at every day temperature.
b) Vertical loads
The vertical loads shall be the sum of weight of conductor/earth wire/OPGW intact
only on one side of tower, weight of insulator strings and accessories and self-weight of
tower.
c) Longitudinal loads
The longitudinal loads shall be the pull of conductor/earth wire/OPGW at every day
temperature and no wind applied simultaneously at all points on one side with zero
degree line deviation.
1.7.14 Tension Limits

Conductor/earth wire/OPGW tension at everyday temperature and without external load,
should not exceed the following percentage of the ultimate tensile strength of the
conductor:
Initial unloaded tension 35 percent
Final unloaded tension for Conductor 25 percent
Final unloaded tension for Ground wire 25 percent
Provided that the ultimate tension under everyday temperature and 100% design wind
pressure or minimum temperature and 36% design wind pressure and any other condition
with or without ice does not exceed 70 percent of the ultimate tensile strength of the
conductor/earth wire/OPGW.
1.8 BROKEN WIRE CONDITIONS

The following broken wire conditions shall be assumed in the design of towers as given in
Table 1.8: Broken Wire conditions:
Table 1.8
Broken wire conditions:
S.No. Type of Tower Broken wire conditions to be adopted
Single circuit towers
1) All type of towers Any one phase or grounds wire is broken whichever is
more stringent for a particular member.
S.No. Type of Tower Broken wire conditions to be adopted
Double circuit towers
1) Tangent Towers Any one phase or earth wire broken, whichever is
more stringent for a particular member.
2) Medium Angle Tower Any two phases broken on the same side and same
span or anyone phase and one earth wire broken on
the same side and same span which ever combination
is more
3) Large Angle tension Any three phases broken on the same side and same
towers/Dead end towers span or any two phases and one earth wire broken on
the same side and same span, which ever combination
constitutes the most stringent condition for a
particular member.
The Single circuit Broken-wire conditions shall be applicable for designing the Towers with
First circuit (either right or left) stringing on the double circuit towers with only OPGW strung
on one of the two corresponding peaks.
1.9 STRENGTH FACTORS RELATED TO QUALITY
The design of tower shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions covered in IS: 802
(Part-1/Section 2):1992. However, to account for the reduction in strength due to
dimensional tolerance of the structural sections, yield strength of steel used, the following
strength factors shall be considered:

i) If steel with minimum guaranteed yield strength is used for fabrication of tower, the
estimated loads shall be increased by a factor of 1.02, to account for dimensional
tolerances.
ii) If steel of minimum guaranteed yield strength is not used for fabrication of tower, the
estimated loads shall be increased by a factor of 1.05, in addition to that mentioned in (i)
above.
1.10 TOWER STEEL SECTIONS

1.10.1 Steel sections in conformity to IS: 808-1976 is to be used in towers, extensions and stub
setting templates and shall be of tested quality conforming to IS: 2062-2006, grade E250 C or
E350 C. No individual members shall be longer than 6000 mm. IS Steel Sections of tested
quality of conformity with IS 2062:2006, gradeE250 (Designated Yield Strength 250 MPa)
and/ or grade 350 (Designated Yield Strength 350 MPa) are to be used in towers, extensions,
stubs and stub setting templates. The Contractor can use other equivalent grade of
structural steel angle sections and plates conforming to latest International Standards.
However, use of steel grade having designated yield strength more than that of EN 10025
grade S355 J20 (designated yield strength 355 MPa) is not permitted, unless otherwise
indicated in this specification.
Steel plates below 6mm size exclusively used for packing plates/packing washers produced
as per IS 1079 -1994 (Grade -0) are also acceptable. However, if below 6mm size plate are
used as load bearing plates viz gusset plates , joint splices etc. the same shall conform to IS
2062 or equivalent standard meeting mechanical strength/metallurgical properties
corresponding to grade E250 or grade E350 (designated yield strength not more than
355MPa), depending upon the type of grade incorporated into design. Flats of equivalent
grade meeting mechanical strength/ metallurgical properties may also be used in place of
plates for packing plates/ packing washers. The chequered plates shall conform to IS 3502
SAILMA 350HI grade plate can also be accepted in place of HT plates (EN 10025 grade S355
J20 / IS 2062:2006, Grade Quality C as applicable) provide SAILMA 350HI grade plate meet all

the mechanical properties of plate as per EN 10025 grade S355 J20 (designated yield
strength 355 MPa) / IS 2062:2006, grade E350 quality C.
1.10.2 The steel sections as per any other International standards, if used shall be of equal or
superior quality with corresponding Indian Standards. For designing of towers, only
rationalized steel sections shall be used. During execution of the project, if any particular
section is not available, the same shall be substituted by higher section at no extra cost to
the Employer. However, design approval for such substitution shall be obtained from the
Employer.
1.10.3 Steel shall be purchased from manufacturer directly. In case of sections lower than 8 mm it
can be purchased from re-rollers provided it is from tested billets satisfying conditions stated
in section-I of Volume-II of the bidding documents.
1.11 Redundant Design
1.11.1 All redundant in the tower are to be triangulated.
1.11 THICKNESS OF MEMBERS

1.11.1 The minimum thickness of angle section used in the design of towers, unless otherwise
specified elsewhere in this specification, shall be kept not less than the following values:
a) Main corner leg members including the earth wire/OPGW 5 mm
peak and lower members of cross arm in compression
b) For all other members 4 mm
1.12 ALLOWABLE STRESS

Structural steel angle section manufactured according to the latest IS:808-1976 (Part V and
VI) and tested according to the latest edition of IS:2062-2006 or any other equivalent or
superior International Standards will be used in the fabrication of the towers having its yield
strength not less than 250 N/sq.mm. and stress value of high tensile steel (Fe 490- High
Tensile and Fe 540-High Tensile) grade according to IS:2062-2006.
1.12.1 Axial Stress in Tension

The estimated tensile stress on the net effective sectional area in various members, shall not
exceed 250 N/sq.mm for mild steel or the specified yield stress of the High tensile steel
sections if proposed to be used in the fabrication of towers as per stresses value of high
tensile steel according to IS: 2062-2006 or any other equivalent to International Standards.
1.12.2 Axial Stress in Compression

1.12.2.1 The estimated compressive stress in various members shall not exceed the value given by
the formulae specified in Clause 5.2 of IS:802 (Part-I/Section 2) revision. The provisions are
reproduced for reference.
1.12.2.2 The allowable unit stress Fa, in Mpa on the gross cross sectional area of the axially loaded
compression members shall be :
𝐾𝑙⁄𝑟 2
a) 𝐹𝑎 =[1 − 1⁄2 ( ) ] × 𝐹𝑦
𝐶𝑐
Where 𝐾𝑙⁄ ≤ 𝐶
𝑟 𝑐
and,
𝜋2 ×𝐸
b) 𝐹𝑎 =
𝐾𝑙⁄ 2
𝑟
When 𝐾𝑙⁄ ˃𝐶
𝑟 𝑐
Where,
Cc = π× √2𝐸
𝐹𝑦
𝐹𝑦 = minimum guaranteed yield stress of the material, Mpa

E = modulus of elasticity of steel that is 2x105Mpa,
𝐾𝑙⁄ = largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced segment of the
𝑟
member,
L = unbraced length of the compression member in cm, and
r = appropriate radius of gyration in cm.

1.14.2.3 The formulae given in 1.13.2.2 are applicable provided the largest width thickness ratio b/t is
not more than the limiting value given by:
𝑏
( )Lim = (210⁄ )
𝑡 √𝐹𝑦
Where
b = distance from edge of fillet to the extreme fibre in mm, and
t = thickness of flange in mm.
1.14.2.4 Where the width thickness ratio exceeds the limits given in 1.13.2.2.1, the formulae given in
1.13.2.2 shall be used substituting for Fy the value Fcr given by:
6.77× 𝑏⁄𝑡×𝐹𝑦
a) 𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 1.677 — 𝑏⁄
𝑡𝑙𝑖𝑚
𝑏⁄ 𝑏
When 𝑡𝑙𝑖𝑚 ≤ ⁄𝑡 ≤ 378/√𝐹𝑦
And,
2
b) 𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 65550𝑏⁄𝑡
When 𝑏⁄ > 378/√𝐹

𝑡 𝑦
Note: The maximum permissible value of b/t for any type of steel shall not exceed 25.
1.12.3 The redundant members shall be checked individually for 2.5 percent of axial load carried by
the member to whom it supports.
1.12.4 Stresses in Bolts

The estimated stresses in bolts shall not exceed the values given in Table (1) of IS: 802-Part-
1/ Section (2) 3rd revision. Table-1.9 is reproduced.
TABLE 1.9
ULTIMATE STRESSES IN BOLTS, MPa
Nature of stress Permissible Stress For Remarks
Bolts of Property class

Shear 5.6
Shear stress on gross 310 For bolts in double shear the
Area of bolts area to be assumed shall be
twice the area defined. For
gross area of bolts refer item
(a) below.
Bearing
Bearing stress ongross 620 for the bolt are in bearing see
diameter of bolts item (b) below
Tension
Axial tensile stress 250
a. Gross area of Bolt: - For the purpose of calculating the shear stress, the gross area of
bolts shall be taken as the nominal area of the bolt.
b. Bearing Area of Bolt: - Shall be taken as dxt, where “d” is the nominal diameter of the
bolt and “t” the thickness of the thinner of the parts jointed.
c. Where the material of bolt and the structural members are of different grades, the
bearing strength of the joint shall be governed by the lower of two.
1.13 SLENDERNESS RATIO
1.13.1 Slenderness ratios of compression and redundant members shall be computed in accordance
with clause 6 of IS: 802 (Part1/ section 2) 3rd revision. Provisions reproduced for reference
as in Table 1.10.
Table 1.10
Slenderness ratio
Type of Members Value of KL/r
a) Compression Members
i) Leg sections or joint members bolted in both faces at L/r
connections for ) 0 < L/r ≤120

ii) Members with concentric loading at both ends of the L/r

unsupported panel for 0 < L/r ≤120
iii) Member with concentric loading at one end and normal 30+0.75 L/r
framing eccentricity at the other end of the
unsupported panel for 0 < L/r ≤ 120
iv) Member with normal framing eccentricities at both 60+0.50 L/r
ends of the un-supported panel for 0 < L/r ≤ 120
v) Member unrestrained against rotation at both ends of L/r
the unsupported panel for 120 ≤ L/r ≤ 200
vi) Member partially restrained against rotation at one end 28.6+0.762 L/r
of the unsupported panel for 120 < L/r <225
vii) Member partially restrained against rotation at both 46.2+0.615 L/r
ends of the unsupported panel for 120 < L/r < 250
b) Redundant Members
i) For) 0< L/r < 250 L/r
Note: The values of KL/r corresponding to (a) (vi) and (a) (vii), the following evaluation is suggested:
1) The restrained member must be connected to the restraining member with at least two
bolts.
2) The restraining member must have a stiffness factor I/L in the stress plane (I=Moment
of inertia and L=Length) that equals or exceeds the sum of the stiffness factors in the
stress plane of the restrained members that are connected to it.
3) Angle members connected by one leg should have the holes located as close to the
outstanding leg as feasible. Normal framing eccentricities at load transfer connection
imply that connection holes are located between the heel of the angle and the centre
line of the framing leg.
1.13.2 In calculating the slenderness ratio of the members, the Length L should be the distance
between the intersections of the center of gravity lines at each end of the member.

1.13.3 The following maximum limit of the effective slenderness ratio i.e. the ratio of unsupported
length of the section in any plane to the appropriate radius of gyration shall not exceed value
specified here under.
a. For main corner leg members including the corner members of earth wire/OPGW
peak and the lower members of the cross-arms in compression 120
b. For the members having computed stresses 200
c. For redundant members 250
d. For members having axial tensile stress only 400
1.13.3 Strain Plate: Strain Plate shall be designed for dead load of conductor, insulator string, other
hardware as well as wind loads and deviation loads. The combined stresses in strain plate
due to axial force and bending moments in vertical and horizontal planes shall be within
permissible limit. Strain plate alone shall be structurally adequate for aforesaid loads. The
design of strain plates shall be submitted for review/approval of Employer/PMC.
1.14 QUANTITIES AND WEIGHTS
1.14.1 The quantities stated in the schedule are provisional. Final quantities shall be determined
after completion and approval of the detail survey, tower spotting & check survey. The final
quantities of tower shall be confirmed by the Employer based on the required quantities of
various towers & extensions furnished by the Contractor after completion of final tower
spotting & check survey. Hence it will be responsibility of the Contractor to intimate the
exact requirements of all towers and various line materials required for line immediately
after the tower spotting & check survey.
The Employer reserves the right to order the final quantities including reasonable quantities
of spares for which the rates quoted in the Bid shall be valid. Regarding quantity variation
the provisions of relevant clauses of PC shall apply.
1.14.2 The Contractor, while designing towers, shall use only such sizes of steel structures which are
easily procurable. If for any reason, the sections approved are not easily procurable, it is the
Contractor’s responsibility to procure the alternative sizes which are satisfactory from the
point of view of design, fabrication, and galvanization and supply the same at no additional
cost to the Employer.

1.15 ERECTION STRESS

Where erection stresses combined with other possible co-existent stresses could produce a
working stress in any member appreciably above the permissible stress, such additional
strengthening of the member shall be effected or such other provision made as is necessary
to bring the working stress within the permissible limit.
1.16 FABRICATION
1.16.1 The fabrication of towers shall be in accordance with the provisions made in the following
sub-clauses.
1.16.1.1 Except where here-in-after modified, details of fabrication shall conform to the relevant
clauses of IS: 802(Part -II) - latest edition.
1.16.1.2 The Contractor during fabrication of tower members shall ensure that mild steel and high
tensile steel do not get mixed up during fabrication and as such identification mark shall be
embossed on each and every H.T. Steel section at the time of shearing of members . The
bidder in his bid shall clearly bring out the means adopted to identify the mild steel and high
tensile steel sections during fabrication.
1.16.1.3 All parts of the towers shall be cut to correct lengths and fabricated in accordance with the
shop drawings approved by the Employer. Welding of two or more pieces to obtain the
length of member specified will not be allowed. Members shall be straight to the
permissible tolerances or better when required to ensure proper fit before being laid off or
worked and after galvanizing.
1.16.1.4 Normally butt splices shall be used. The splicing of members of equal leg size shall always be
provided with butt joint. Lap splices may be used for connecting members of unequal sizes.
The components constituting the joint shall have a total strength greater than the heavier of
the members connected The inside angle of lap splice shall be ground at the heel to fit the
fillet of the outside angle. All splices shall develop full strength of the members connected
through bolts. Lap splices shall be made above and as close to the main panel points as
possible.

1.16.1.5 Joints shall be so designed and detailed as to avoid eccentricity as far as possible. However,
where the connections are such that the elimination of gusset plates would result into
eccentric joints gusset plates and spacer plates may be used in conformity with modern
practices. The thickness of gusset plates shall not be less than 6 mm. Where a gusset plate is
required to transmit stress, its thickness shall be at least 2.0mm more than the thickness of
the thickest connected bracing members but in no case not less than 6 mm.
1.16.1.6 The use of fillers in the connections shall be avoided as far as possible. The diagonal web
members in tension may be connected entirely to the gusset plate where necessary to avoid
the use of fillers. Each diagonal member shall be in one piece without splices or centre
gusset, and it shall be connected at the point of intersection by one or more bolts.
1.16.1.7 The tower members shall be accurately fabricated to bolt together easily at site without any
undue strain on them or the bolts.
1. 16.1.8 No angle member shall have the two leg flanges brought together by closing the angle.
1. 16.1.9 All parts of the towers shall be accessible for inspection and cleaning. Drain holes shall be
provided at all points where pockets or depressions are likely to hold water.
1.16.1.10 All similar parts shall be made strictly interchangeable. No rough edges shall be permitted
any where throughout the work.
1. 16.2 Straightening
Straightening shall be so done that it does not injure the material. Hammering shall not be
permitted for straightening / or flattening of members. Sharp bends shall be a cause for
rejection.
1. 16.3 Cutting
The cut surfaces shall be clean, smooth, reasonably square and free from any distortion.
1. 16.4 Bending
Mild steel angle sections upto 75x75mm (thickness up to and including 6mm) shall be bent
cold up to and including bend angles of 10 deg. Mild steel angle sections above 75x75mm
(thickness upto and including 6mm) and upto and including 100x100mm (thickness upto
8mm) may also be bent cold upto bend angles of 5 deg. All other angle sections and bend

angles not covered above shall be bent hot. All plates upto 12mm thickness shall be cold
worked upto a maximum bend angle of 15deg. Hot bending shall be employed for greater
bend angles and thicker plates. All hot bent material shall be air-cooled. The bends shall be
of even profile and free from any surface damages. Bends on all high tensile steel sections
shall be done hot
1. 16.5 Holing
Holes in the members shall either be drilled or punched to jig and shall not be formed by
flame cutting process. All burrs left by punching or drilling shall be completely removed.
Punching may be adopted for M.S. sections with thickness upto 16mm. For thicker sections,
drilling shall be done. The holes near the bend line of a bent member on both sides of bend
line should be punched/drilled after bending and relative positions of those holes shall be
maintained with the use of proper templates/jigs and fixtures. The limit of punching for H.T.
Steel section may be indicated in the bid.
1.17 FASTENERS: BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS INCLUDING ANTI-THEFT BOLTS & NUTS
1.17.1 All tower members shall be joined together with Bolts and nuts. All hexagonal bolts and nuts
shall conform toIS-12427and IS 1367. The steel used in manufacturing of all the fasteners
shall confirm to Charpy V-notch Impact Energy Test at temp -20 degree C. They shall have
hexagonal head and nuts, the heads being forged out of the solid, truly concentric, and
square with the shank, which must be perfectly straight.All bolts and nuts shall be galvanized
as per IS 1367 (Part-13)/IS 2629.Ultimate stresses in the bolts shall be as given in table - I of
cl. 5.4.1 of IS 802 (part I /Section 2) 3rd revision.
1.17.2 The bolt shall be of 16/20/24 mm diameter (preferably 16 mm and same type for all towers)
and of property class 5.6 as specified in IS 1367 (Part-III) and matching nut of property class
5.0 as specified in IS 1367 (Part-VI). Bolts of other grades as per IS 12427 and nuts as per IS
14394 are also permitted.
1.17.3 Bolts up to M16 and having length up to 10 times the diameter of the bolt should be
manufactured by cold forging and thread rolling process to obtain good and reliable
mechanical properties and effective dimensional control. The shear strength of bolts for 5.6

grade should be 310 MPa minimum as per IS 12427. Bolts should be provided with washer
face in accordance with IS 1363 (Part-I) to ensure proper bearing.
1.17.4 Nuts for hexagonal bolts should be double chamfered as per the requirement of IS 1363
Part-III. It should be ensured by the manufacturer that nuts should not be over tapped
beyond 0.4mm oversize on effective diameter for size up to M16.Nuts for anti-theft bolts
should be round tapered with hexagonal shear nuts. The hexagonal portion of shear nuts
shall break away at specified torque recommended by the supplier to ensure proper
tightening of members and the fasteners shall not be opened subsequently with tools. The
tightening torque and shearing of anti-theft nuts shall be verified during proto-assembly.
1.17.5 Fully threaded bolts shall not be used. The length of bolts shall be such that the threaded
portion will not extend into the place of contact of the members.
1.17.6 All bolts shall be threaded to take the full depth of the nuts and threaded for enough to
permit firm gripping of the members, but not further. It shall be ensured that the threaded
portion of each bolt protrudes not less than 3mm and not more than 8mm when fully
tightened. All nuts shall fit tight to the point where the shank of the bolt connects to the
thread.
Anti-theft type of bolts and nuts along with spring washers shall be used for all redundant
members of tower bottom portion for 5 meter from the ground/first two panels whereas
balance joints shall be connected with hexagonal bolts. Antitheft bolts and nuts shall have
round tapered head with hexagonal shear nuts conforming to IS 12427 and IS 1367 for
property class 5.6/5. All bolts shall be galvanized as per IS 1367 (part 13)/ IS 2629.
1.17.7 Flat and tapered washers shall be provided wherever necessary. Spring washers designated
as B-16 as per IS:3063 Electro galvanized shall be provided for insertion under all nuts. These
washers shall be of steel and electro-galvanized, conforming to IS:1573 -1986 and positive
lock type and 3.5 mm in thickness for 16 mm dia. bolt and 4mm for 20mm dia. bolt and
4.5mm for 24mm bolt as per IS:3063-1972.
1.17.8 To avoid bending stress in bolts or to reduce it to minimum, no bolt shall connect aggregate
thickness of members more than three (3) times its diameter.

1.17.9 The bolt positions in assembled towers shall be as per IS: 5613(Part-3/Section-2)-1989. The
structural drawing is enclosed in Section 6 as reference.Bolts at the joints shall be so
staggered that nuts shall be tightened with spanners without fouling.
1.17.10 To ensure effective in-process Quality control it is desirable that the manufacturer should
have in house testing facility for all tests like weight of zinc coating, shear strength and other
tests etc. The manufacturer should also have proper Quality Assurance System which should
be in line with the requirement of this specification and IS: 14000 series Quality System
Standard.
1.17.11 The Contractor shall furnish bolt schedules giving thickness of members connected, the nut
and the washer and the length of shank and the threaded portion of bolts and sizes of holes
and other special detail of this nature.
1.17.12 To obviate bending stress in bolts or to reduce to minimum, no bolt shall connect aggregate
thickness of more than (3) times the bolt diameter and also the number of members
carrying stresses to be connected by a single bolt shall not generally exceed three ( excluding
gusset and packing).
1.17.13 Spacing of Bolts and Edge Distance:
The minimum spacing of bolts and edge distances shall be as given below Table 1.11:
Table 1.11
Spacing of bolts and edge distance
Bolt Hole Minimum Minimum edge Hole Distance (mm)
diameter diameter bolt spacing centre to rolled or Hole centre to
(mm) (mm) (mm) sawn edge sheared or flame
cut edge
16 17.5 40 20 23
20 21.5 48 25 28
24 25.5 60 33 38
1.17.14 Locking Devices

Electro-galvanized/hot dip galvanized spring washers of type B of thickness indicated below

Table 1.12 corresponding to bolt diameter shall be provided for insertion under all nuts.
Table 1.12
Diameter of bolt and thickness of spring washer
Bolt Diameter (mm) Thickness of spring washer (mm)
16 3.5
20 4.0
24 4.5
1.17.15 The gap between the ends of two connected members in a butt shall not be more than 6 mm
and less than 4 mm.
1.17.16 Tolerances
1.17.16.1 The fabrication tolerances in general shall conform to IS:802(Part-II) and IS: 7215-1974
unless otherwise specified here-in-under:
1.17.16.2 The maximum allowable differences in diameter of the holes on the two sides of the plate
or angle shall be 0.8mm i.e. the allowable taper in a punched hole shall not exceed 0.8 mm
on diameter.
1.17.16.3 Tolerance cumulative and between consecutive holes shall be within + 1.6mm.
1.17.16.4 Tolerance on gauge distance shall be within +0.5mm.
1.17.17 Minimum Thickness

1.17.17.1 The minimum thickness of galvanized members shall be as follows:
a) Leg member, Ground Wire Peak members & Lower members of Cross Arms in
Compression shall have a minimum thickness of 5 mm atleast.
b) Other members of tower shall have a minimum thickness of 4 mm atleast.
c) Minimum thickness of Gusset plate shall be 2 mm more than the lattice it connected on
the gusset outside the leg member. In no case the gusset shall be less than 6.0 mm in
thickness.

1.18 ERECTION MARK

1.18.1 Each individual member shall have erection mark conforming to the component number
given to it in the fabrication drawings. This mark shall be punched with marking dies of 16
mm size before galvanizing and shall be legible after galvanizing.
1.18.2 Erection Mark shall be A-BB-CC-DDD

A = Employer's code assigned to the contractors-Alphabet.
BB = Contractor's Mark-Numerical
CC = Tower Type-Alphabet
DDD = Number mark to be assigned by Contractor-Numerical.
1.19 NUMBER OF PARTS

Tower members shall be so fabricated as to be bolted together easily at site. Preference will
be given to the design with least number of parts and the one which offers best facilities for
transport, erection and maintenance. In designing towers, for a minimum number of parts,
the Contractor shall not, however, employ parts of such dimensions as will prove difficult to
handle. The length of the longest piece shall not exceed 6 meters.
1.20 GALVANIZING
1.20.1 All tower members and stubs shall be fully galvanized. Galvanizing of the member of the
towers and stubs shall conform to IS: 2629-1966 and IS: 4759-1968. Mass of zinc coating on
tower members (angles, plates etc.) shall not be less than 610 gram per Sq.m. All galvanized
members shall withstand tests as per IS: 2633-1972. For fasteners, the galvanizing shall
conform to IS: 5358-1969. The Galvanizing shall be done after all fabrication work is
completed, except that the nuts may be tapped or re-run after galvanizing. Threads of bolts
and nuts shall have a neat fit and shall be such that they can be turned with finger
throughout the length of the threads of bolts and they shall be capable of developing full
strength of the bolts. Spring washers shall be electro-galvanized as per Grade 4 of IS: 1573-
1970.

1.20.2 The finished materials shall be dipped into the solution of dichromate after galvanizing or
treated with approved inhibitor (the details of which shall be given in the bid) for protection
against white rust formation during sea transportation.
1.21 STUB SETTING TEMPLATES

Stub templates shall be designed, fabricated and supplied by the contractor for all types of
tower with or without extensions and also for leg extension. Stub templates suitable for
standard towers and tower with body extension of +3 meter, +6 meter, and +9 meter and leg
extensions of +1.5m, +3.0m and +4.5m and corresponding negative leg extensions shall be of
adjustable type. The stub templates shall be painted with anticorrosive paints. The number
of templates of each type of tower is to be arranged by the contractor to the satisfaction of
the Employer for timely completion of line. The quantities of templates indicated in the
Schedule are required by the Employer for keeping in stores. Prop setting arrangement is
also allowed subject to submission of necessary drawings and their review/scrutiny/approval
byEmployer/PMC.
1.21.1 Thickness of Stubs:

The thickness of stub-section shallbe kept 2.0 mm more than the thickness of the last leg
members connected to the stub.
However, the structural adequacy of stub shall be checked for combined stresses due to axial
loads (compression/tension) and bending moments due to transverse & longitudinal side
thrusts/shears caused by unsupported length of stub above concrete level and up to the
point where bottom most bracing is connected to stub. In case, the higher thickness of stub
becomes necessary than stipulated above, the same shall be provided.
1.22 INSULATOR STRINGS AND EARTH WIRE/OPGW CLAMP ATTACHMENTS

a) For the attachment of “I” type Pilot suspension insulator strings a suitable swinging
hanger/Anchor shackle/Hole arrangement on the tower shall be provided so as to
obtain requisite clearance under extreme swinging conditions and free swinging of the

string. The hanger shall be designed to withstand highest possible load which may be
imposed on it. A typical outline drawing of the hanger/anchor shackle arrangement is
enclosed in Section 6 for references Drawing No. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/04
b) Earth wire/OPGW suspension clamps will be supplied by the Contractor, the reference
Section 6 for references vide Drawing No. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/08 for the
same is enclosed with the specification. Earth wire/OPGW peaks / cross arms are to be
suitably designed to accommodate the shackle of the suspension clamp. Earth
wire/OPGW tension clamps will be supplied by the Contractor; the reference Section 6
for references Drawing No.WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/08 for the same is
enclosed with the specification. Earth wire/OPGW peaks / cross arms are to be
suitably designed to accommodate the tension clamp.
c) At tension towers strain plates of suitable dimensions on the underside of the each
cross-arm tip and at the top of Earth wire/OPGW peak, should be provided for taking
the D-shackles of the tension insulator strings or Earth wire/OPGW tension clamps as
the case may be. Earth wire/OPGW tension clamp should be as per Section 6 for
references Drawing No. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/08. Full details of the
attachments shall be submitted by the Contractor for Employer's approval before
starting the mass fabrication.
d) The bidder shall check the compatibility of strain plate/earthwire plate hole dia and
arrangement prior to place order for supply of insulator/OPGW/Earthwrie fittings
strings.
1.23 TESTING OF TOWERS – Not Applicable

1.23.1 All standard tests, including quality control tests in accordance with relevant Indian
Standards shall be carried out.
1.23.2 An un-galvanized (black) tower of DE(t)/Dead-End Type of Towercomplete with +9m
extension shall be subjected to design and destruction tests by first applying test loads
equivalent to the specified ultimate tower loadings and applied in a manner approved by the
Employer. The tower shall withstand these tests without showing any sign of failure or

permanent distortion in any part. Thereafter the tower shall be subjected to destruction by
increasing the loads further in an approved manner till it fails. The tower shall be tested for
all the conditions considered for the design of tower.
The successful Bidder shall submit to the Employer, for approval, the detailed programme
and proposal for testing the towers showing the methods of carrying out the tests and
manner of applying the loads.
After the Employer has approved the test procedures and programmes the contractor will
intimate the Employer about carrying out of the tests at least 15 days in advance of the
scheduled date of tests during which the Employer will arrange to depute his Consultant's /
representatives to be present at the time of carrying out of the tests. Six copies of the test
reports shall be submitted.
The Contractor shall submit one set of shop drawings along with the bill of materials at the
time of prototype tower testing for checking the tower material. Further at the time of
submitting test report, the contractor has to submit the final tracings of shop drawings and
Bill of materials for Employer's reference and record.
1.23.3 In case of premature failure the tower shall be retested and steel already used in the earlier
test shall not be used again. However, in case of minor failures, the contractor can replace
the members with higher section and carry out the testing. The Contractor shall provide
facilities to the Employer or their representatives for inspection of materials during
manufacturing stage and also during testing of the same.
1.23.4 In case of any premature failure even during waiting period, the tower is to be retested
with rectified members. However, if the failures are major in nature and considerable
portion of tower is to be re-erected, in such cases all the tests which have been carried out
earlier to be re-conducted again to the entire satisfaction of Employer.
1.23.5 No part of any tower subject to test shall be allowed to be used on the line. The price will be
quoted after allowing rebate for the scrap value of the tower material which will be retained
by the successful Bidder.
1.23.6 The Contractor shall ensure that the specification of materials and workmanship of all
towers actually supplied conform strictly to the towers which have successfully under gone

the tests. In case any deviation is detected the Contractor shall replace such defective
towers free of cost to the Employer.
All expenditure incurred in erection, to and fro transportation, any other expenditure or
losses incurred by the Employer on this account shall be fully borne by the successful Bidder.
No extension in completion time shall be allowed on this account.
The Employer, however, reserves the right to waive off the testing of the towers, provided
the successful Bidder had earlier successfully tested, erected and commissioned same
towers and certificate for such tests carried out earlier are furnished duly certified by that
Employer and are found acceptable.
1.23.7 Each type of tower to be tested shall be a full scale prototype black tower and shall be
erected vertically on rigid foundation and the stub protruding above ground level as
provided in the design drawing between ground level and concrete level. This portion of the
stub shall be kept un-braced while testing. The tower erected on test bed shall not be out of
plumb by more than 1 in 360.
1.23.8 All the measuring instruments shall be calibrated in systematic approved manner with the
help of standard weight/device. Calibration shall be done before commencing the test of
each tower up-to 20% above maximum anticipated loads and 200% above for the
destruction loading to be applied during testing.
1.23.9 The sequence of testing shall be at the discretion of the Employer.
1.23.10 The Employer may decide to carry out the tensile test, bend test etc. as per relevant IS on
few members of the test tower after completion of the test. The decision of the Employer's
representative regarding which member and number of members to be tested is final and
binding. The successful bidder shall make suitable arrangement for the same.
1.23.11 Prefix 'T' shall be marked on all members of test tower in addition to the mark no. already
provided.
1.23.12 Calibration of Measuring Instruments
All measuring instruments shall be calibrated at least 20% above the maximum anticipated
load and 200% above for the destruction loading to be applied during testing with the help
of standard weights. The test loads shall be corrected with the help of calibration curves.

1.23.13 The test load cases shall be prepared for both first circuit strung condition as well as double
circuit towers for the testing purpose and will be submitted to Employer/PMC for approval.
1.23.13 Tests
The procedure for conducting the tower test shall be as specified in IS: 802 (Part - III)
(latest edition). The load cases shall be selected for both First/single circuit strung and
double circuit strung towers for the testing purpose. The test charges shall include all these
testing.
1.23.13.1 Bolt Slip Test

The test loads shall be gradually applied up-to the design loads according to rigging
diagram, kept constant for two (2) minutes at the design loads and then released gradually.
The initial and final readings on the scales before application and after the release of loads
respectively shall be taken with the help of theodolite and the bolt slip shall be determined
from the readings so obtained.
1.23.13.2 Normal Load/Broken Wire Load tests

All the loads shall be applied gradually upto the ultimate design loads in the following steps
and shall be released in a similar manner:
50 percent
75 percent
90 percent
95 percent; and
100 percent.
Under normal and broken wire load tests, the tower shall be kept under observation for
any sign of failure for two minutes (excluding the time for adjustment of loads) for all
intermediate steps of loading up-to and including 95% of ultimate design loads. For normal
as well as broken-wire tests, the tower shall be kept under observation for five minutes
with 100% ultimate design load applied to it.

While the loading operations are in progress, the tower shall be constantly watched and if
it shows any tendency of failure anywhere, the loading shall be immediately stopped,
released and then the entire tower shall be inspected. The re-loading shall be started only
after corrective measures are taken. The deflection of the tower shall be recorded at each
intermediate and final stage of normal load/ broken - wire load test by means of a
theodolite and graduated scales fitted on the tower. These deflection values recorded shall
be checked against calculated deflection value from the tower design. The structures shall
be considered to be satisfactory if it is able to support the specific ultimate load for five (5)
minutes with no visible deformation after unloading (such as bowing, buckling) and no
breakage of elements or constituent parts. Ovalization of holes and permanent
deformation of bolts shall not be considered as failure.
1.23.13.3 Destruction Tests
If desired by the Employer, all types of towers shall be tested to destruction. The test shall
be carried out under normal condition OR Broken wire condition. All the provisions as
stated in clause 1.35.13.2 shall be applicable to destruction test. However, the loads shall
be increased in steps of 5% after the ultimate design loads have been reached.
1.23.13.4 Material Test
In case of failure of towers after retest, coupons shall be cut from test tower members and
tested in a laboratory to ascertain conformity of the material to the governing standard.
1.23.14 Retests
1.23.14.1 In the event of premature failure of tower, the part that has failed may be replaced by
another with a greater mechanical strength. The modified structure shall be required to
pass the test for the specified ultimate load values (100% steps). The failure analysis shall
be perform with or without the help of any relevant finite element software and
rectification should be submitted to the client/Consultant.
1.23.14.2 In case of failure of tower during testing, and retest is to be conducted at a later date, all
the expenses for witnessing of test, by the representative of the Employer, shall be borne
by the Contractor.

1.24 CHECK ASSEMBLY OF TOWERS

1.24.1 Before proceeding with the bulk fabrication of any type of tower, the Contractor shall
fabricate and assemble in his works for inspection by the Employer or his authorized
representative, one tower of each type as finally approved by the Employer for checking the
fabrication accuracy and workmanship. The check assembly shall be in a horizontal position.
Proto assembly made on ground in horizontal position shall be adequately supported to
prevent distortion and overstressing of members to ensure proper fit and shall be
accomplished without extraordinary effort to align bolt holes or to force pieces into position.
For the check assembly, bolts and nuts shall be not more than finger tight.
1.25 GROUNDING OF TOWERS

1.25.1 Grounding of towers shall be done in accordance with IS: 5613 (Part 2/Section 2) -1985 or
the latest edition of IS.
1.25.2 The angle of shielding is defined as the angle formed by the line joining the centre lines of
the earth wire/OPGW and top most outer power conductor, in still air, at tower, to the
vertical line through the centre line of the earth wire/OPGW. The angle of shielding to be
maintained for the design of transmission lines under the project has been specified in
Section-3. The drop of 150 mm on account of earth wire/OPGW suspension assembly shall
be considered while calculating the maximum angle of shielding i.e. 20 degree.
1.25.3 Two 17.5 mm dia. holes shall be drilled about 50 mm apart on all stubs such that the lower
hole is about 350 mm above the ground level, clear of the concrete muffing, for connecting
the earth strip.
1.25.4 The provisional quantities for pipe type earthings and counterpoise earthing are furnished in
the Price Schedule. The bidders are required to quote unit rates for the same in appropriate
Price Schedule. The quoted price shall include fabrication, supply and installation of earthing
material including supply of coke, salt etc. In case of counterpoise type earthing, the
quotation shall be based on 120 meters, 180 metres & 240 metres of wire per tower.The
bidder shall quote for the supply of grounding materials complete with galvanized mild steel

strip, necessary bolts, nuts, counter poise wires and washers required for connecting the
strip to the tower.
1.25.5 Pipe Type and Counterpoise earths, where necessary, shall be provided by the Contractor in
accordance with IS: 5613 (Part-2/Section-2)-1985.
1.25.6 The Contractor shall measure the tower footing resistance (TFR) of each tower after it has
been erected and before the stringing of the earth wire during dry weather. Each tower shall
be earthed. The tower footing resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms
1.25.7 For counterpoise type earthing the earthing will vary depending on soil resistivity. For soil
resistivity less than 1500 ohms-meter, earthing shall be established by providing 4 lengths of
15m, 30m, 45 m, 60 mcounterpoise wire. Otherwise, for soil resistivity greater than 1500
ohms meter earthing shall be established by providing 4 length of 60m counterpoise wire. In
case resistivity does not come down less than 10 ohms even after providing 60 m
counterpoise wire, Contractor shall submit a statement in this regard to Employer to know
further course of action.
1.25.8 Earthing for River Crossing Towers /Pile foundation

Galvanised earthing strip of flat 50 x 6 mm is to be provided in two legs of tower for each
location with proper arrangement of connecting these strips by 16mm bolts shall be
provided in the stubs. For pile foundation, the strip has to be taken up to scour level along
the concrete of pile foundations. Only bolted connections are allowed for connecting this
strip to achieve desired length. Contractor shall submit the detailed drawing for approval of
Owner before installations.
1.26 TOWER ACCESSORIES

Arrangement shall be provided for fixing of all tower accessories to the tower, at a height
between 2.5 meters and 3.5 meters above the ground level.
1.26.1 Step Bolts & Ladders

Each tower shall be provided with step bolts which shall conform to IS: 5613 Part-2/Section-
1-1985. The reference drawing is enclosed in Section 6. The contractor shall submit
distribution copies of the same endorsing the package details (i.e. line name, NOA No. etc).
The step bolts conforming to IS 10238 of not less than 16mm diameter and 175 mm long,
spaced not more than 450 mm apart and extending from 3.5 meters above the ground level
to the top of the tower. Bolt holes shall be provided below 3.5 m level and step bolts will not
be filled but the same will be handed over to the Employer. However, the head diameter
shall be 50mm as indicated in the enclosed drawing. For Single circuit tower the step bolt
shall be fixed on one leg up to waist level and on two diagonally opposite legs above waist
level up to top of the towers. For double circuit tower the step bolt shall be fixed on two
diagonally opposite legs up to top of the towers. Each step bolt shall be provided with two
nuts on one end to fasten the bolt securely to the tower and button head at the other end to
prevent the feet from slipping away. The step bolts shall be capable of withstanding a
vertical load not less than 1.5 KN. For special towers, where the height of the super
structure exceeds 50 meters, ladders along with protection rings as per the Owner approved
design shall be provided in continuation of the step bolts on one face of the tower from 30
meters above ground level to the top of the special structure. From 2.5m to 30m height of
super structure step bolts shall be provided. Suitable platform using 6mm thick perforated
chequered plates along with suitable railing for access from step bolts to the ladder and from
the ladder to each cross-arm tip and the ground wire support shall also to be provided. The
platform shall be fixed on tower by using counter-sunk bolts.
1.26.2 DANGER BOARDS, NUMBER, PHASE PLATES AND CIRCUIT PLATE

1.26.2.1 Bidder shall supply& Install approved danger plates, number plates, phase plates & circuit
plates for all towers as shown in Section 6 for references Drawing No.
WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/05
1.26.2.2 Danger plates shall conform to IS: 2551-1982.

1.26.2.3 The number, circuit and phase plates shall conform to IS: 5613 (Part-2/Section-1)-1985.The
language of number plate, danger plate, phase plate and circuit plate may be English /local
Nepali language.
1.26.3 ANTI-CLIMBING DEVICE
1.26.3.1 Towers shall be fitted with anti-climbing devices which shall be as per Section 6 for
references Drawing No. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/14 and conform to IS: 5613 (Part-
2/Section-1)-1985. Anti-climbing devices shall be installed on the tower at the height duly
approved by the Employer.
1.26.3.2 Necessary holes shall be provided on the tower members for installation of the anti-climbing
device.
1.26.3.3 The bidder shall quote unit rate for anti-climbing device inclusive of structures and barbed
wire.
1.26.4 BIRD GUARDS

1.27.4.1 The bird guards for suspension towers shall be made of galvanized iron sheet and shall
conform to IS: 5613 (Part-2/Section-1)-1985.
1.27.4.2 Necessary holes shall be provided on the cross arm of the suspension towers for fixing the
bird guards.
1.27 DESIGN OF FOUNDATION

1.27.1 Scope
1.27.1.1 This section covers the design requirements of plain cement concrete and reinforced cement
concrete foundations of self-supporting galvanized lattice towers for 220 kV D/C
Transmission Lines under the scope of this bid. The foundation of varies type of tower shall
be standard Chimney and slab (R.C.C.) type stepped foundation or pile foundation,
depending upon the soil characteristics and underwater table at each tower location. NEA
shall provide design and drawings of Stubs and foundations for DB(t), DC(t), DD(t)& DE(t)
type of towers with up to +9 meter body extension thereof and leg extensions of
+1.5m,+3.0m and 4,5m leg extensions for the successful bidder to carry out the execution.

1.27.1.2 The design of foundation have been developed as per soil properties given in the section-3 of
the specification. However, during execution, if different type of soil (other than specified in
Section-III) is encountered at any location, the design of foundations for such soils shall also
be in the scope of this work, the bidder will require to quote a rate for this foundation
design, should a requirement arises thereof.
1.28 CLASSIFICATION OF SOILS

1.28.1 Type of soil to be encountered enroute proposed Transmission Lines shall generally be hard /
dense soil, Disintegrated/soft rock, wet soil and hard rock. The physical properties of soils,
which shall be required for the design of foundations, are given in Section-III. Bidder shall
confirm that in case the types of soils, encountered at any location is other than soil given in
Section-III, he shall develop the designs of foundations for such soils as per site conditions.
The rates quoted by him foundation work viz., excavation, concrete, reinforcement etc. shall
also be applicable for such foundations.
The relevant characteristics of the various types of soils are given in Section-3 of this
specification. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to draw the attention and obtain
approval of the Employer for the departures necessitated in these design data, should he
find it necessary based on his inspection of the site conditions, results of trial pits etc.
1.28.2 Grouping of Foundations

1.28.2.1 The foundations for normal towers and normal towers with extensions shall be grouped as
under:
a) Normal Towers and their +1.5m, +3.0 m & +4.5 m leg extensions;
b) Normal Towers with +3.0m, +6.0m, +9.0mbody extensions and their +1.5m, +3m & +4.5
m leg extensions;
c) Normal Towers with +18m and +25m body extensions (If required).
1.28.2.2 The design of foundation shall be developed based on critical loading in a group and the same
design shall be adopted for all towers in that group. However, the said design shall be

checked for its adequacy and safety for other towers in that group. Only one type of
foundation design shall be adopted for each group for a particular type of soil.
Foundation for special type of tower: The foundation for special type of tower shall be based
on soil investigations and either conventional pad and chimney type or pile foundations, The
design and construction of foundations shall be carried out in accordance with theses
specifications, IS:4091, IS:456-2000 and CBIP Manual on Transmission Line Towers of July,
2014 etc.
1.28.3 Classification of Foundations
1.28.3.1 Depending on the type of soil, location of water table, and the presence of surface water,
seven types of foundation designs shall be used for each type of tower for locations classified
in the following manner:
i. Normal Dry Soil Type – To be used at the locations where normal dry cohesive or non-
cohesive soil is met with in full depth and water table is below foundation level.
ii. Wet Soil Type – To be used for locations where normal cohesive or non-cohesive soil is
met with in full depth and
a) Where water table is above foundation level and up to 1.5 m below the ground
level; or
b) Which have standing surface water for long period with water penetration not
exceeding one meter below the ground level e.g., the paddy fields.
c) In black cotton soil (including clay type, not necessarily black which shrinks when
dry & swells when wet).
iii. Partially Submerged Type: To be used at locations where normal cohesive or non-
cohesive soil is met with in full depth and water table is at a depth between 0.75 m to
1.5 m below the ground level.
iv. Fully Submerged Type: To be used at locations where normal dry cohesive or non-
cohesive soil is met with in full depth and water table is within 0.75 m from the ground
level.
v. Dry Fissured Rock Type: To be used at locations where dry decomposed/fissured rock is
met with and water table is below foundation level. Undercut type of foundation to be

used at these locations. The design of undercut type of foundations shall be strictly as
per CPIB Manual on Transmission Lines;
vi. Wet Fissured Rock Type: To be used at locations where decomposed/fissured rock is
met with and where water table is above foundation level and up-to 1.5 m below the
ground level. Undercut type of foundation to be used at these locations; The design of
undercut type of foundations shall be strictly as per CPIB Manual on Transmission
Lines;
vii. Hard Rock Type: To be used at locations where hard rock is met with requiring
chiseling, drilling and blasting for excavation and where the bond strength between the
rock and concrete will be very high.
viii. Pile Type Foundation – To be used at locations where the top 3.0 to 4.0 m soil layer is
weak/water logged/marshy having insufficient bearing capacity or at river crossing
locations having scour-able soil strataand where conventional foundations are not
found feasible from techno-economical considerations. A Pile foundation may be
required at normal locations where ‘N’ value is less than 10 and shear strength is less
than 35 kN/sq.m. The pile foundation shall be Reinforced Cement Concrete In-situ
Bored Pile type. The detailed foundation design shall be submitted by the contractor
based on the soil investigation report.
ix. In addition to the above, depending on the site conditions more varieties of
foundations may be introduced, in case there is a requirement for suitable
intermediate conditions under the above classifications to effect economy.
1.28.3.2 The relevant characteristics of the various types of soils are given in Section-II of this
specification. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to draw the attention and obtain
approval of the Employer for the departures necessitated in these design data, should he
find it necessary based on his inspection of the site conditions, results ofsoil investigations,
trial pits etc.
1.28.4 Forces for Design of Foundations

1.28.4.1 The following forces/loads transmitted to foundation by superstructure due to the action of
wind, conductor tension, temperature, earthquake etc. acting thereon shall be considered in
the design of foundation:
I) Maximum Tension/Uplift Force.
II) Maximum Compression Force/Down Thrust, along leg slope.
III) Maximum horizontal shears/side thrusts in longitudinal and transverse directions.
IV) Additional forces due to eccentricities in the foundation system (if any).
V) Any other critical load combination of axial forces and side thrusts.
1.28.5 Partial Safety Factors on Loads
For the design of foundation under most critical loading, the partial factor of safety on loads
shall be as under:
a) Towers up to angle of deviation of 0-100 (i.e. tangent & small angle towers): 1.10;
b) Towers with angle of deviations above 100(i.e. medium & large angle towers and dead
end towers): 1.20 and
c) For pile foundation: 1.1.
factor of safety shall be greater than 1.0.
factor of safety shall confirm to the IS 1904-1986.
1.28.6 Stability of Foundation

1.28.6.1 The foundation shall be designed to withstand the most critical combinations of forces for
forces specified in clause 1.28.4 multiplied by relevant partial factor of safeties specified in
clause 1.28.5. The stability of foundation, in general, shall be checked for the following
aspects:
1. Stability against Uplift;
2. Stability against Bearing Capacity of Soil;
3. Stability against Side Thrust;

4. Stability against Overturning; and

5. Stability against Sliding.
1.28.6.2 The types of soil resistances to be considered for balancing the various imposed forces by
the superstructure on the foundation shall be considered as under:
a) Resistance against uplift forces
The uplift force shall be assumed to be resisted by the buoyant weight of foundation
and the weight of earth contained in an inverted frustum of a conical pyramid of earth
on the foundation pad with the sides of the pyramidal cone of earth making at an
angle equal to the angle of repose of the soil with vertical. The weight of concrete
including reinforcement shall also be considered for resisting the uplift. In case, the
frustums of earth pyramid of two legs overlap each other, the earth frustum shall be
assumed truncated by a vertical plane passing through the centre line of the tower
base. The angle of repose and density of various types of soils and the properties of
concrete are given in Section-II of the Specification.
b) Resistance against compression force/down thrust

The total compression force/down thrust load including addition effective weight of
concrete/R.C.C and weight of embedded steel parts shall be resisted by bearing
capacity of the soil assumed to be acting on the total contact soil area under the
footing. The limiting bearing capacities for various types of soil enroute the 220 kV D/C
line is given in Section-III.
c) Resistance against the side thrust:

The horizontal shears / side thrusts shall be assumed to be resisted by the passive
pressure of soil around the footing. The passive resistance of the soil shall be
calculated as per Rankine’s formula. In case, complete side thrust is not balanced by
available passive resistance of soil, unbalanced part of the side thrusts shall be
balanced by bearing pressure of soil under the footing and friction force between soil

& footing base. The coefficient of friction between soil and foundation concrete varies
from 0.3 to 0.5 for normal soil and dry fissured rock.
1.28.7 Structural Design of Foundation

1.28.7.1 Isolated identical footings shall be provided for each leg of the tower.
1.28.7.2 Depending on soil conditions and loading, the foundation of tower shall be one of the
following types:
a) Pad/Slab-Chimney Type Stepped R.C.C. Footing;
b) Under Cut Type R.C.C. Stepped Footing (For Soft Rock Only); and
c) Rock Anchor Type (For Hard Rock Only).
The necessary sketch for each type of foundation is enclosed for guidance. Bidders are
supposed to design and quote for the foundations accordingly”.
1.28.7.3 Slab type R.C.C. isolated footings shall be provided,
1.29.7.4 Seismic Forces: Design of foundations for towers against seismic forces shall conform to IS:
1893-2002/relevant Nepalese Code and other International Practices. As per Seismic Zone
Map in IS: 1893, Nepal falls in Seismic Zone V. The important factor to be considered in the
calculation of seismic forces shall be 1.5 and other factors shall be as per above code. In the
event of award of contract, detailed supporting design calculations regarding adequacy and
safety of foundations against seismic forces shall be furnished by the contractor.
1.28.7.5 All foundations shall be designed so as to satisfy and meet the following requirements:
a) The chimney of the foundation shall at least be 300 mm square providing a minimum
clear concrete cover of not less than 100 mm over any part of the stub angle in case of
dry foundations and at least 450 mm square with minimum clear concrete cover of not
less than 150 mm over any part of the stub angle in case wet, partially submerged and
fully submerged foundations.
b) The chimney top shall extend 300 mm (Minimum) above ground level and coping shall
be up to 50 mm below the joint between the bottom bracing and the leg members.
c) In all foundations, a lean concrete sub-base having a thickness of 100 mm and of size
equal the concrete pyramid base/R.C.C. slab shall be provided under structural

concrete. The lean concrete shall be of grade M-10 (1:3:6) conforming to IS: 456-2000.
The lean concrete sub-base provided under the footings shall not be considered in the
structural calculations.
d) The embedded end of the stub angle shall have a 150 mm thick clear concrete cover up
to the top of the lean concrete sub-base in the case of dry foundations and a 200 mm
thick clear concrete cover in the case of wet, partially submerged and fully submerged
foundations.
e) The minimum length of stub encased in concrete below the ground level shall not be
less than 1.5 meters. However, the stub shall extend up to the bottom of foundation
having a clear concrete cover as specified in Para (d) above.
f) The depth of foundation below ground level shall not be less than3.0m.
g) The joints between the tower stubs and the superstructure bracing members shall be at
least 350 mm above ground level.
h) The centroidal axis of the stub shall coincide with axis of the chimney and pass through
the center of the footing base. The design of the foundation shall take into account the
additional forces resulting from eccentricity introduced due to non-compliance of above
requirements.
i) The chimney shall be designed as a composite member for combined action of axial
forces, both compression & tension, and bending moments about longitudinal and
transverse axis. The maximum compression/tension force along with moments in both
the directions due to horizontal shears viz. transverse and longitudinal shall be
considered in the design of chimney.
j) The adequacy of chimney section shall be checked as per above considering the stub as
a reinforcement placed at the centre of chimney and necessary reinforcement in
chimney shall be provided as per design requirement i.e. The chimney shall be designed
as a composite section consisting of concrete, steel stub and reinforcement bars. The
design shall be carried out as per limit state method of design in accordance with IS:
456-2000 and CBIP Manual on Transmission Lines of July, 2014. Irrespective of design
requirements, minimum reinforcement consisting of 0.15% of the cross sectional area of

the chimney or 4 nos. of 12mm dia. reinforcement bars, whichever is more, shall be
provided in the chimney. The diameter of longitudinal bars in chimney shall not less
than 12mm and spacing not more than 300mm to meet the requirements specified in
IS:456. The arrangement and other requirements except minimum requirement of
reinforcement as specified in clause 26.5.3 of IS: 456-2000 shall be complied with.
k) The diameter of reinforcement bars in foundations shall not be less than 12 mm. The
clear concrete cover to reinforcement in footing i.e. base slab and chimney, shall not be
less than 50 mm.
l) During designing of foundation, the possibility of top soil erosion may also to be
considered as per site conditions and design of foundation is to be done accordingly.
m) The settlement of foundation shall be calculated as per IS: 8009-1976 (Part-1) and IS:
8009-1980 (Part-2), whichever is applicable.
1.28.7.6 Pyramid Type Plain Cement Concrete Foundations:The pyramid type of isolated foundations
shall also satisfy and meet the following requirements:
a) The slope of concrete pyramid shall be limited to 45deg. with respect to vertical.
b) The minimum thickness of the concrete pyramid base slab shall be 100 mm in case of
dry foundations and 200 mm in case of wet, partially submerged and fully submerged
foundations.
c) The portion of stub and the angel cleats in the pyramid portion only shall be capable of
developing the required bond strength to take full down thrust or uplift load.
d) The design of chimney shall be carried out as detailed under clause 1.28.7.5 above.
The bidder must furnish supporting calculations, for uprooting of stub along with foundation
design.
1.28.7.7 Pad/Slab - Chimney Type R.C.C. Stepped Foundations: These types of foundations shall
satisfy and meet the following requirements:
a) The structural design of foundations shall be strictly in accordance with IS: 456-2000 and
other relevant I.S. codes.

b) The design of R.C.C. foundations shall be carried out by limit state method of design in
accordance with IS: 456-2000, using partially safety factors as given in the clause 1.28.5.
c) The minimum thickness of footing base slab shall not be less than 250 mm in case of dry
locations and 300 mm in case of wet/partially submerged/fully submerged locations.
d) The minimum thickness of footing base slab at the edges shall not be less than 150 mm
as specified in IS: 456-2000.
e) In case of two stepped foundations, (i) the width of upper slab shall not be less than the
width of chimney plus twice the thickness of footing at the face of chimney and 200mm;
and (ii) the reinforcement at top face of each step i.e. the lower & upper slabs shall be
separately provided. The reinforcement from one slab/step to another slab/step at top
face of the footings shall not be permitted.
f) In the design of footing slabs, actual soil pressure under the footing shall be considered
to calculate the maximum moments and shears at various sections. The design of base
slab shall be carried out as per clause 34 of IS: 456-2000 and latest version of CBIP’s
Manual on Transmission Lines. The critical sections for moments and shears shall be as
specified in Clause 34.2 of IS: 456-2000. The reinforcement in the footings shall be
accordingly calculated and provided.
g) The diameter of reinforcement bars in footing pad/slab shall not be less than 12 mm
and spacing not less than 100 mm and not more than 250 mm.
h)
i) The design of chimney shall be carried out as detailed under clause 1.28.7.5 above.
1.28.7.8 Hard Rock Type Foundation: All the tower locations where hard rock is encountered either
at surface or at some depth below ground level, rock anchor type of foundation shall be
provided. However, in case, the thickness of hard rock layer is less than two meters, either
soft rock type of foundation or normal foundation as per site conditions and as per the
instructions of the Employer shall be provided. In case of hard rock foundations, the holes of
the required diameter as per the design shall be drilled in an approved manner so as to
eliminate the possibility of cracking of rock. The concrete footing shall be secured in the rock

with the help of adequate number of rock anchors of appropriate diameter grouted with
cement-cement mortar of proportion 1:2 (1 Cement: 2 Sand). Suitable non-shrinkage
admixture of approved make shall be mixed in grout mix as per recommendations of
manufacturer. At selected locations, the contractor shall be required to verify the strength
of rock anchor by conducting in-situ pull out test on rock anchors. No separate payment for
testing of rock anchors shall be payable and same shall be deemed to be inclusive in the rate
of the foundation.
1.28.7.9 Full particulars of foundations along with guaranteed/ceiling volumes of excavation,
concrete and reinforcement for all types of towers and soils shall be given in the bid as per
Schedule.
1.28.7.10 Under-reamed pile type foundations may have to be provided in case black cotton soil is
encountered at any location and if found necessary by Employer. The design of under-
reamed pile foundation shall be in accordance with IS: 2911(Part -III). Bored cast in-situ
reinforced concrete pile shall be provided for river crossing towers if found necessary. These
piles shall be designed in accordance with IS: 2911(Part-1/Section-2)-2010.
1.28.7.11 Pile foundations shall be designed for compression, uplift, lateral forces, driving stress (if
any).
1.28.7.12 Design of Pile foundation shall be validated by pile test as per IS: 2911(Part-IV)/IEC:61773/
BSEN:61773-1997. The pile test shall be conducted under both compression and uplift in
accordance with IS: 2911(Part-IV). For similar terrain and sub-soil conditions, if a number of
pile foundations are to be adopted, a sample pile test each under compression and tension
shall be conducted. If pile foundations are to be adopted in different areas having
dissimilar sub-soil conditions, at least one pile test each under compression and tension is
recommended which shall be finalized after submission of pile test proposal by the
contractor and approval by the Employer/PMC
1.28.7.13 Design of Stub against uprooting/punching

The uprooting/punching of stub shall be checked. The stub shall develop full anchorage
in foundation pad/slab against uprooting/punching. Required nos. of angle cleats shall

be provided and connected to stub with required nos. of bolts to develop required
anchorage. The arrangement of cleats on stub shall be symmetrical i.e. each leg of stub
angle shall have same nos. of cleats( implying that nos. of cleats to be provided for each
stub shall be a even number i.e. 2 or 4 or 6 or 8 etc.). The complete design of stub shall
be submitted for review/approval of Employer/PMC.
1.28.7.14 Properties of Concrete
The cement concrete used for foundation shall be of grade M-20 design mix concrete
corresponding to 1:1.5:3 (1 Cement : 1.5 Fine Aggregates : 3 Coarse Aggregates) nominal
mix proportion with 20 mm nominal size coarse aggregates.. All the properties of concrete
including workmanship shall conform to IS: 456-2000. The grade of lean concrete shall be
M-10 corresponding to 1:3:6 (1 Cement : 3 Fine Aggregates : 6 Coarse Aggregates) nominal
mix proportion with 40 mm nominal size coarse aggrerates.
For pile foundation minimum M-25 grade design mix concrete shall be used. In case of
design mix grade, the contractor shall submit the same for approval to Employer/PMC.
1.29 DRAWINGS AND BILL OF MATERIALS

1.29.1 The following technical drawings and documents are to be submitted along with the bid
without which the bid is liable to be rejected:-
 Outline drawings with dimensions and clearance diagrams for all tower Types for +9
mtr.body extensions.
 Loading diagrams for all tower types.
 Technical data for all the structural steel proposed for tower members and bolts, nuts
and washers.
 Detailed design calculations including stress tables, member & bolt sizes, foundation
load etc. for tangent tower(s).
 Drawings and /or catalogues of bidder's equipment.
 Out line drawings and designs of foundations of each type which are proposed with
typical design calculation.
 Final conductor and earth wire/OPGW sag/tension charts.

 Full description of the proposed method of tension stringing.
1.29.2 The bidders shall furnish the following designs and drawings after award of 6 numbers of
Hard Copies in well binding format as well as soft copies etc.:
 Fully dimensioned drawing for each standard type of tower complete with cross arms
showing sizes of all steel sections, fittings, bolts, attachments etc. and clearance
diagrams.
 Dimensioned drawings for extensions with sizes of steel sections employed.
 Dimensioned drawings for stubs.
 Dimensioned drawings for stub setting templates.
 Dimensioned drawings for anti-climbing device.
 Loading diagram for all towers under different working conditions.
 Stress diagrams for all towers inclusive of 3-metre, 6- meter and 9-metre extensions
and cross- arms.
 Tabulation of stresses under different design assumptions, permissible stresses for
various members employed in the towers, extensions, and cross- arms complete with
the following information :
- Member reference for identification on stress-diagrams.
- Individual loads, due to transverse, longitudinal vertical, torsional load, etc.
under normal and broken wire conditions.
- Aggregate loads compressive and tensile based on loadings specified under
different conditions.
- Measured unsupported lengths.
- Effective unsupported lengths.
- Appropriate radii of gyration
- Sizes of members proposed.
- Slenderness ratios.
- Permissible crippling stresses.
- Gross areas of sections.

- Permissible crippling loads.

- Number and size of bolts provided.
- Net areas of sections.
- Permissible tensile loads.
- Aggregate cross-sectional area of bolt.
- Shearing stress on bolts.
- Aggregate bearing areas of bolts.
- Bearing stress on bolts.
- Calculated weight of each member.
 Dimensioned drawings for foundations for each type of standard tower, and tower
with 3 meter, 6 meter & 9 meter extensions with detailed design calculations
considering most critical combinations of uplift, down thrust and side thrusts.
Drawings of foundations shall show all details of foundations, reinforcement, cleat
angles, stub, bar bending schedule, quantities of excavation, lean concrete, structural
concrete & reinforcement steel etc.
 For foundations of each type of towers, the drawings shall furnish the following
information:-
(i) All dimensions of foundation including C/C distance of foundation of a tower;
(ii) Volume of excavation per leg.
(iii) Volume of lean and structural concrete.
(iv) Quantity of reinforcement steel;
 The capacity charts for all types of towers to be used for smaller angles and longer
spans shall be furnished after award of Contract.
The Employer/PMC may ask to submit any other calculations wherever required and
the contractor is responsible to submit these without any additional payment than that
in the price schedule.
Award of contract: - After award of contract, the contractor shall submit detailed designs of
tower, extension, along with stress diagram/computer output together
with sample calculations for few critical members etc. Hard copies of

the Tower designs along with soft copy of input files of the computer
software used for analysis of various types of towers shall be submitted
by the contractor.
1.29.3 The design and drawings as covered in clause 1.29.2 and clause 1.29.3 above shall be
examined and approved/commented by the Employer/PMC as the case may be within thirty
(30) days of receipt of designs/ drawings in Project Manager’s office so as to ensure
compliance to contract specifications and codal provisions. If the designs/drawings are
commented by the owner, the contractor shall submit revised designs/drawings duly
incorporating all comments within fifteen (15) days of date of issue of comments.
1.29.4 The Contractor shall furnish to the Employer for approval the various contract drawings, bills
of materials, bolt and washer schedules loading/rigging arrangements for tower testing etc.
as called for in the various clauses of this specification. These shall include, but shall not be
limited to the followings:-
a) Design Calculations and drawings: All design drawings and calculations listed in clause
1.29.1 & clause 1.29.2given above.
b) Shop Drawing: Shop drawings shall list in a space above the title, the part number and
required quantity of each member detailed on the drawing. Members may be detailed
separately or in places in any assembly.
c) Erection Drawings: Erection drawings shall be furnished for each type of tower
body/hill side leg extensions and shall show assembly diagram of structures clearly
indicating the position of each member and the position of each member and the
quantity and size of bolts for each joint.
d) Bill of Materials: A complete bill of material for each type of tower shall be submitted
with the erection drawings indicating each part number, required quantities for one
tower member length, calculated weight and relevant design drawing reference.
e) Bolts, Nuts and washer Schedule: Bolts, nuts and washers schedules shall list the
number of bolts and washers required per tower along with the sizes and lengths of

bolts and number, type and size of washers. The shank length and length of threaded
portion of various types of bolts shall be indicated in drawing / table.
WARNING: DESIGNS AND DRAWINGS OF TOWERS AND FOUNDATIONS ARE PROPRIETORY ITEMS
AND DESIGN RIGHT IS STRICTLY RESERVED WITH NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY (NEA). UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES THESE DESIGNS AND DRAWING SHALL BE USED BY ANYBODY WITHOUT PRIOR
PERMISSION FROM NEA IN WRITING.
1.30 PACKINGS
1.30.1 The material shall be boxed or bundled for transport in the following manner:-
1.30.2 Angles shall be packed in bundles securely wrapped four times around at each end and at
every meter with No.9 gauge galvanized steel wire with ends twisted tightly. Gross weight of
any bundle shall not exceed approximately 450 kg.
1.30.3 Cleat angles, brackets , fillet plates and similar small loose pieces shall be nested and bolted
together in multiples , and securely wired together through holes, wrapped round at least
four times with No.9 gauge galvanized steel wire and ends twisted tightly. Gross weight of
each bundle shall not exceed approximately 70kg.
1.30.4 The correct number of bolts, nuts and washers to be packed in heavy gunny bags accurately
tagged in accordance with the contents and a number of bags packed in a solid box of 22mm
thick lumber with paneled ends to be securely nailed and further reinforced with 22mm x
No. 18 gauge iron band stretched entirely around the batons with ends over lapping at least
150mm. Gross weight of each box shall not exceed approximately 70kg.
1.30.5 All packing shall be subject to the approval of the Employer, or his appointed
representatives. The packing shall be carried out with caution to protect the material from
moisture, salt or any impurities which may cause rust or harmful effects. The packages
shall be new and sufficiently sturdy in construction to withstand normal service incident to
shipping and field handling.
1.31 MARKING OF PACKINGS

Each bundle or package shall have the following marks:

1. 31.1 The contract/purchase order no. and date, the name or designation of the consignee (to be
furnished by the Employer).
1. 31.2 Ultimate destination (as required by the Employer).
Detailed dispatch instruction shall be asked for by the contractor from the Employer at least
4 weeks ahead of the scheduled date of dispatch. All packages shall be marked with the
standard packing mark as desired by the Employer.
1.32 PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND MANPOWER

The bidder or its proposed manufacturer must have established steel fabrication facilities in
his works or at the works of his Associates/proposed manufacturers. The manufacturer of
the tower shall hold valid ISO 9000 quality certification. The galvanizing bath plant &
equipment available for fabrication, testing facilities available in their works and other
Institution which they intend to make use of shall be stated in the bid and shall not be
changed without the approval of the Employer. The bidder shall also submit the details of
manpower available with his Manufacturer indicating clearly the number of persons engaged
in the design, fabrication of supporting structures and for erection/construction of the
transmission lines. The bidder shall give a brief profile of the manufacturer(s).
1.33 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The bidder shall fill in the guaranteed technical particulars in the section-IV of this
Specification and submit the same with bid.
1.34 SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS AND DESIRED DELIVERY

The schedule of Completion of the project shall be submitted through pert chart indicating
delivery, erection, testing and commissioning.
1.35 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

A Quality Assurance Plan including customer hold points covering the manufacturing
activities of the material shall be required to be submitted by the bidder to the Employer
along with the bid. The Quality Assurance Plan after the same is found acceptable will be
approved by the Employer. The Contractor shall follow the approved Quality Assurance plan
in true spirit. If desired by the Employer, he shall give access to all the documents and
materials to satisfy the Employer that the Quality Assurance Plan is being properly followed.
1.36 SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS / VARIATIONS

If the bidder has any exceptions to any of the clause/s laid down in this specification, these
should be clearly stated in the schedule of deviations/variations, (technical or commercial)
otherwise it shall be presumed that the bidder agrees to the provision/s of this specification
and same shall be included in the contract document and the contract in case of successful
bidders.
1.37 PAYMENTS
The payments towards supply of tower part shall be in accordance with the section
Condition of Contract and of section Particular Conditions (PC) of PartIII of BiddingDocument
and the rates applicable in the price schedule.

Package-KC3

Section-IV-A
Chapter 2- Detailed Survey
Package KC3: Basantapur (Terhathum District)- DhungeSangu (Taplejung
District) Transmission Line and 132/33 kV Substation in DhungeSangu
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Part II-Section 6: Employer’s Requirements
SECTION IV-A
CHAPTER 2
DETAIL SURVEY
CONTENTS
2.1 SCOPE 1
2.2 TRANSMISSION LINE ROUTE 1
2.3 DETAILED SURVEY 6
2.4 TOWER LOCATION 8
2.5 CLEARANCE FROM GROUND, BUILDING, TREES ETC. 11
2.6 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE 13
2.7 PROFILE PLOTTING AND TOWER SPOTTING 13
2.8 CONTOURING AT HILLY/UNDULATED LOCATIONS 14
2.9 SURVEY METHODOLOGY & PRECISION 15
2.10 SURVEY REPORT 15
2.11 CHECK SURVEY OF TOWER LOCATION 17
2.12 TREE ENUMERATION AND CUTTING 17
2.13 SOIL INVESTIGATIONS 19
2.14 TESTING OF SOIL 19
2.15 STABILITY OF SLOPE 19
2.16 GEOLOGICAL STABILITY OF SLOPE 19
2.17 CADASTRAL SURVEY, RIGHT-OF -WAY, ETC. 19
Section IV-A – Chapter 2 Contents

SECTION IV-A
CHAPTER-2
DETAIL SURVEY
2.1 SCOPE
2.1.1 This chapter covers finalization of route alignment of the transmission line, detailed
survey, route profile, tower spotting, optimization of locations, contouring and soil
testing for determining the characteristics of soils at selected locations for design of
foundation along the transmission line route.
2.2 TRANSMISSION LINE ROUTE

2.2.1 The route alignment has been identified and studied by the Employer in year 2010. The
Proposed route alignment passes through undulating hilly landscapes of Terhthum and
Taplejungwith the variation of the altitude of the terrain ranging from 1300 m
toupto3000 m above MSL. For some practical reasons such as change in topography due
to construction of the new objects in the line route, to avoid deforestation or to avoid
abolishment of the houses under the line in some sections of line route, some
modification/diversion may require to be undertaken.
This route alignment shall be carried out by the Contractor with the help of Differential
Global Positioning System (DGPS) and Total station. No extra cost shall be payable to the
contractor in such case. Therefore the bidders are strongly recommended to make a site
visit before submitting their bid. The summary of angle points as per the route
alignment survey by Employer is as given below in Table 2.1. However, the Dead End
Towers near substation ends are likely to change depending on the final substation
layouts during execution stage. Based on the location of Gantry location in final
substation layout Dead End Tower location is to be fixed on either ends.
Section IV-A – Chapter 2 Page 1 of 18

Table 2.1
Summary of Angle points for Tr. Line from Basantapur- DhungeSangu
S. Angle X- Easting Y- Northing RL (m) Line Angle Remarks
No. points (deg)
1 AP 0 540605.55 3004212.001 2452.02 0
2 AP 1 540758.73 3004703.69 2499.21 0.4995
3 AP 2 540860.2 3005019.67 2546.93 11.0286
4 AP 3 541133.32 3005515.82 2612.2 16.229
5 AP 4 542070.89 3006451.4 2773.72 29.0332
6 AP 5 542477.379 3006567.286 2811.397 0
7 AP 6 543187.85 3007040.663 2923.51 0
8 AP 7 543576.62 3006977.93 2916.21 -13.5829
9 AP 8 544429.9 3007043.44 2940.53 -46.9827
10 AP 9 545101.56 3007884 2587.96 -4.5315
11 AP 10 546110.29 3009374.14 2657.22 -27.609
12 AP 11 546320.59 3011221.933 2761.27 0
13 AP 12 546843.64 3011919.06 2678.76 -3.3254
14 AP 13 547713.79 3013230.96 2729.95 -15.4108
15 AP 14 548433.22 3015426.28 2827.02 -2.2111
16 AP 15 548616.68 3016068.9 2901.29 -15.3574
17 AP 16 548622.29 3016626.93 2956.11 41.8447
18 AP 17 549041.06 3017085.21 2953.77 -3.4671
19 AP 18 549763.58 3017978.93 2982.49 -12.1397
20 AP 19 550284.03 3019008.63 2903.83 39.8728
21 AP 20 552226.11 3019845.56 2937.35 1.3542
22 AP 21 553885.624 3020514.817 2815.333 0
23 AP 22 554505.1 3021245.69 2568.03 24.0015

24 AP 23 555860.23 3021898.29 2256.45 -18.2436

25 AP 24 557186.71 3023177.38 2048.6 -24.7484
26 AP 25 557843.21 3024861.77 1919.47 33.8983
27 AP 26 558647.35 3025420.83 1873.77 8.3533
28 AP 27 558888.57 3025540.86 1800.85 -4.0892
29 AP 28 559481.05 3025890.47 1579.73 -19.0088
30 AP 29 559892.7 3026373.35 1348.76 18.3835
31 AP 30 560046.91 3026466.63 1328.11 -12.1433
2.2.2 The Contractor has to carry out Detailed Survey by using Differential Global Positioning
System (DGPS) and Total station along the fixed transmission line route as in 2.2.1.
2.2.3 The majority of the line routes KC-3 pass through hilly/mountainous terrain in
Himalayan slope and all the towers in the hilly terrain are angle towers from small,
medium and large angle of deviations along the alignment.
2.2.4 In case the re-alignment is required, the transmission line shall be economical from the
point of view of construction and maintenance. The Contractor shall identify and
examine alternative route alignments and suggest to Employer the optimal route
alignment. However, the towers being in hilly terrain and all the towers in these terrains
are angle towers, these may be used with the maximum allowed angle of deviations, in
case of diversion is required for any location or section thereof. The attempt will be
made to adjust these angle of deviations within the next angle points ensuring minimum
deviation from the approved alignment. The detailed survey check format shall be
prepared indicating these and submitted along with the route profiling to the employer
for approval.
2.2.5 In case, National or Reserved Forest is encountered along the transmission line route
and, re-routing/alignment of transmission line is required to be done keeping in view of
the overall economy, rerouting shall be carried out in such a manner that the
transmission line route length shall be minimum. For examination of the alternative
route and identification of the most appropriate route besides making use of

information from Topo Sheets, the Contractor shall also have to carry out
reconnaissance/preliminary survey as may be required for verification. Initially, re-
routing/alignment proposal is to be submitted by contractor to employer on Topo sheet
of scale at least 1:25,000.
2.2.6 Pursuant to clause 2.2.5, The Contractor shall submit the preliminary
observation/suggestion along with various information collected as marked with topo
sheets of scale at least 1:25000 (covering features such as road, river, canals,
vegetation, forest area, monuments etc). The final evaluation of the alternative route
shall be conducted by the Contractor in construction under presence of Employer’s
representatives and optimal route alignment shall be proposed by the Contractor. For
the proposed route alignment Joint site visit and field verification shall be conducted.
Alignment/Re-alignment survey shall be conducted keeping in view the following:
a) The lines are near to and along the available roads in the area.
b) The transmission line route should be as short and as straight as possible.
c) The number of angle towers should be minimum and within these the number of
heavier angle towers shall be as small as possible.
d) Good farming areas, uneven terrain, religious places, civil and Defence
installations, industries, aerodromes and their approach and take-off funnels,
public and private premises, ponds, tanks, lakes, gardens and plantations should
be avoided as far as practicable.
e) Costs of securing and clearing right-of-way (ROW), making access roads and the
time required for these works should be minimum.
f) The line should be away from the telecommunication lines and in case crossing is
encountered, the crossing shall be near to 90 as possible.
g) Crossing with permanent objects such as railway lines & Roads should be minimum
and preferably at right angles.
h) Difficult and unsafe approaches should be avoided.
i) Detour in the transmission line route is preferable so that it should be capable of
taking care of future load developments without major modifications.

j) The line should be away from the buildings containing explosives, bulk storage oil
tanks, and oil or gas pipelines.
k) Masonry land enroute to be avoided wherever possible.
2.3 DETAILED SURVEY

2.3.1 The Contractor shall submit the detailed transmission line route survey based on the
approved route alignment. The Contractor shall finalize and submit the detailed survey
report including profiling and tower spotting, contouring for the entire alignment and
also for all obligatory points within three () months from the date of effectiveness of
contract. These obligatory points shall include all the River crossings, Railway Crossings,
air-ways clearance, Power Line Crossings, telecommunication line crossing or any other
important crossings encountered in the transmission line route. The following schedule
shall be adhered to in this respect:
Table-2.3
Submission of Detail Survey 2 months from the date of contract
Report/proposal and profile to effectiveness
Employer/PMC
Submission of soil/Geotechnical 1 month from the date of approval of
investigation Report profile.
2.3.2 The Bidder should note that Employer/PMC will not furnish the topographical maps but
will make available any assistance that may be required in obtaining the topographical
maps.
2.3.3 The detailed survey shall be made along the identified alignment using modern
surveying technique and with the help of Total station and DGPS. Detailed Surveying
with conventional equipment like ordinary theodolite, dumpy level shall not be
permitted for the purpose of detailed survey. All surveyed points shall be termed in
terms of XYZ co-ordinate with respect to standard bench-mark of Nepal/UTM grid/WGS
84 Codes. Recording of level/elevation of ground points shall be done for a central

corridor of at each less than 20 meters across the alignment and at every less than 10
meter point along the alignment and for all noticeable features of the stipulated right-
of-way of the 220 kV transmission line. The side profile both at right and left shall be
marked and plotted. These cluster ground points/features of systematic recorded data
shall be used for a TIN modeling of alignment in PLS-CADD software for tower spotting
purpose. All the angle tower positions on ground identified shall be recorded with at
least 20mx20m grid so as to finalize the cutting/filling of earth/hillside leg extension, if
any. These data shall also be imported into PLS-CADD for calculating cutting/filling of
earth/leg-extension finalization by creating a TIN (Triangular Irregular Network)
modeling. All the tower positions finalized and approved shall be converted into GPS co-
ordinates and submitted to Employer/PMC. A Google-pro version of surveyed alignment
shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Employer/PMC.
2.3.4 The Contractor shall quote unit price for the detailed survey accordingly and after
preferably site visit before submission of tender. The Provisional quantities for the
scope of work are indicated in the relevant Price Schedule. The Final quantities for route
alignment & detailed survey (quantities in Km) shall be the route length along the
approved route alignment.
2.3.5 Route Marking
At the starting point of the commencement of route survey, an angle iron spike of
65x65x6 mm section and 1000 mm long shall be driven firmly into the ground to project
only 150 mm above the ground level. A punch mark on the top section of the angle iron
shall be made to indicate location of the survey instrument. Teak wood peg 50x50x650
mm size shall be driven at prominent positions at intervals of not more than 750 meter
along the transmission line to be surveyed up to the next angle point. Nails of 100 mm
wire should be fixed on the top of these pegs to show the location of instrument. The
pegs shall be driven firmly into the ground to project 100 mm only above ground level.
At angle position, stone/concrete pillar of size (1000 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm) with
NEA, Nepal marked on them shall be put firmly on the ground for easy identification.

Paint mark in white lead paint shall be put in about 300 mm squares with a direction
indication on nearby boulders rocks, trees along the complete alignment.
2.4 TOWER LOCATION

2.4.1 Sag Template
Sag template drawing will be prepared and submitted by the Contractor at the time of
detailed survey for approval of the EMPLOYER/PMC. Based on the above drawing, the
Contractor has to prepare sag template on rigid transparent plastic sheet and provide
two sets of the same to Employer/PMC for checking purpose at site during construction
for supervision by the Employer/PMC’s representatives. The Contractor shall also
prepare the Sag-tension characteristics of the conductor, Earthwire/OPGW as well as
tower spotting data.
2.4.2 Tower Spotting
With the help of sag template and tower spotting data enclosed with specification,
tower locations shall be marked on the profiles. While locating the towers on the profile
sheet, the following shall be borne in mind:
a) Span
The number of consecutive spans between the section points shall not be more
than 15 spans or 5 km in plain and 10 spans or 3 km in hilly terrain. A section point
shall comprise of tension point with DB type or DC type or DD type towers.
However, all towers,the terrain being the hilly terrain shall be tension type of
tower with or without any angle thereof.
b) Extension
An individual span shall be as near to the normal design span as possible. In case
an individual span becomes too short with normal supports on account of
undulations in ground profile, one or both the supports of the span may be
extended or truncated by inserting/re-designing standard body and leg ( positive

and negative) extension designed for the purpose according to technical

specification. Similarly, the design of
c) Loading
There shall not be any upward force on suspension towers under normal working
conditions and the suspension towers shall support at least the minimum weight
span as provided in the designs. In case, uplift is unavoidable, it shall be examined
if the same can be overcome by adding standard body extension to the towers
failing which tension towers designed for the purpose shall be employed at such
positions.
d) Road Crossing
At all important road crossings, the towers shall be fitted with normal suspension
or tension insulator strings depending on the type of towers but the ground
clearance at the roads under maximum temperature and in still air shall be such
that even with conductor broken in adjacent span, ground clearance of the
conductor from the road surfaces will not be less than 8.84 meters for major
road/highway crossing, however, more clearance are recommended for
maintaining highway clearance using higher extensions of towers. At all national
highways, tension towers shall be used. The crossing span however will not
exceed 250 meters in any case.
e) Railway Crossings
All the Railway crossings if any coming en-route the transmission line shall be
supported on DB type or DC type towers on either side, depending on the merits
of each case and shall be constructed in conformity with the specification laid
down by the Railway Authorities. Necessary copies of tracings and prints of plan,
profile etc., required for the approval of railway crossings shall be supplied by the
Contractor to the Employer/PMC free of cost.In case of rail crossing the minimum
height above rail level of the lowest portion of any conductor under condition of
maximum sag, in accordance with the regulation for Electrical Crossing of Railway
track as prevailing at the time of construction of line shall be applicable. The

minimum clearance that is required to be maintained between the lowest point of

the 220 kV line conductor and the rail level, is stipulated as 15.11 meters.
f) Power Line Crossings
Where this line is to cross over another line of the same voltage or lower voltage,
DA/DD type tower with suitable extensions shall be used. Provision to prevent the
possibility of its coming into contact with other overhead lines shall be made in
accordance with the Electrical Power Technical Standard of the Nepal. In order to
reduce the height of the crossing towers, it may be advantageous to remove the
ground-wire of the line to be crossed (if this is possible and permitted by the
Employer/PMC of the line to be crossed). All the works related to the above
proposal shall be deemed to be included in the scope of the Contractor without
any extra cost to the Employer/PMC.
g) Telecommunication Line Crossing

The angle of crossing shall be as near to 900 as possible. However, deviation to
the extent of 300 may be permitted under exceptionally difficult situations. When
the angle of crossing has to be below 60o, the matter will be referred to the
authority in charge of the telecommunication system. On a request from the
Contractor, the permission of the telecommunication authority will be obtained by
the Employer/PMC. Also in the crossing span, power line support will be as near
the telecommunication line as possible, to obtain increased vertical clearance
between the wires.
h) Details Enroute
All topographical details, permanent features, such as trees, building etc., 20 m on
either side of the alignment shall be detailed on the profile plan.
2.5 CLEARANCE FROM GROUND, BUILDING, TREES ETC.

2.5.1 Clearance from ground, buildings, trees and telephone lines shall be provided in
conformity with the Nepal Electricity Rules or Indian standard 5613 Part-2 Section-1 and
CBIP Transmission line Manual as amended up to date.
Table 2.3
Clearances for 220 kV Transmission line
S. Name of spanned section Minimum vertical Remarks
No. distance (m)
1. 7.01 for upto 1000 m
At maximum operating
Residential area to ground * and 9.0 m for upto
3000 m altitude
2. Non-residential area to ground 7.01 for upto 1000 m At maximum operating
* and 9.0 m for upto temperature and Nil Wind
3. At maximum operating
Highway 9m
4. Railway (above track)
a) Electrified (1500 V dc) 15.11 At maximum operating
b) Electrified (25 KV AC) 18.63 temperature and Nil Wind
c) Non-Electrified 11.89
Railway (over crane) 3.50
6. To be fixed by At maximum operating
River & sea crossing above
Navigation/Port temperature and Nil Wind
maximum flood level
Authority
7. To water level of flood once in At maximum operating
-
five years temperature and Nil Wind
8. Electrical Line Crossing At maximum operating
This clearance data shall be 4.58 temperature and Nil Wind
multiplied by an altitude factor

of 1.25% for every 100 meter

increase in elevation above
1000 meter from msl
9. River Crossing/ Lakes
(i) To be fixed by
Navigable Navigation/Port At maximum operating
Authority temperature and Nil Wind
(ii) Non – Navigable (above HFL) 5.10
(iii) Accessible Frozen lakes/ rivers 7.00
10. Communication telephone At maximum operating
power line & LV line temperature and Nil Wind
Tree (vertical distance)
Houses & buildings
*Extra ground clearance allowance shall be made for altitude factor during spotting of
towers, creep allowance, uneven terrain, possibility for land profile change due to
habitation, forestry etc. The advantage of type of terrain shall be taken into
consideration of spotting requirement.
2.6 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE

The profile sheets, duly spotted, along with preliminary schedules indicating type of
towers, type of foundations, wind span, weight span, angle of deviation, river or road
crossing and other important details shall be submitted for the approval of the
Employer/PMC. After approval, the Contractor shall submit six more sets of the
approved reports along with one set of reproducible of final profile drawings to the
Employer/PMC for record purpose.

2.6.1 The Contractor shall quote unit price for the detailed survey accordingly and after
preferably site visit before submission of Bid. The Provisional quantities for the scope of
work are indicated in the relevant Price Schedule. The Final quantities for route
alignment & detailed survey (quantities in Km) shall be the route length along the
approved route alignment.
2.7 PROFILE PLOTTING AND TOWER SPOTTING

2.7.1 From the field book entries, the route plan with reroute details and level profile shall be
plotted and prepared to scales of 1 : 2000 horizontal & 1 : 200 vertical on 1.0, 10 mm
squared paper as per approved procedure. Reference levels at every 20 meters along
the profile are also to be indicated on the profile besides, R/Ls at undulations. Areas
along the profile which, in the view of the Contractors, are not suitable for tower
spotting shall also be clearly marked on the profile plots. If the difference in levels be
too high the chart may be broken up according to requirement. A 10 mm overlap shall
be shown on each following sheet. The chart shall progress from left to right. Sheet
shall be 594 mm wide in accordance with the IS Standard. For as built profiles these
shall be in A-1 size. All the tower positions shall be marked with XYZ co-ordinates. The
computerized PLS-CADD output profile shall show the maximum Sag, hot curve, cold
curve, ground clearance curve, weight span, wind span, adjacent span, centre peg
setting down, if necessary and any other features deemed appropriate.
2.7.2 The complete profiling details shall be digitized and the data shall be prepared & stored
in the format compatible to computer aided tower spotting software.
2.7.3 A printed/plotted output of the digitized profiling as well as digital and *.bak file shall be
submitted by the Contractor to the Employer/PMC’s site-in-charge for review before
taking up computer aided tower spotting.
2.7.4 Optimization of Tower Location/Tower spotting
2.7.4.1 Spotting of tower and Optimization of tower locations shall be done by the Contractor
using computer aided tower spotting software PLS-CADD latest version. In order to
verify the result of computer aided tower spotting, the Contractor shall furnish sample

calculations and manual tower spotting drawings for some typical sections. The tower
shall be spotted with the help of these PLS –Software and strength analysis for the line
shall be performed.
2.7.4.2 Tower locations where weight span exceeding the limits shall be identified based on the
detailed survey, route profile and tower schedule. The tower design done in PLS-Tower
as in clause 1.7, chapter 1 shall be used for checking the tower strength pertaining to all
weather and load cases including uplift check at minimum temperature and nil wind.
Based on this exercise, suitable design validation/reinforcement of tower shall be
undertaken at these locations.
2.7.5 Line Designing

The approved tower designs, which NEA shall make available to the successful bidders,
except DE/Dead-End Type of Tower which is in the scope of the successful bidder should
a requirement arises, shall be used for supporting purpose on the route profile. The line
design shall be done in conjunction with the tested tower design done in 3D PLS Tower
model and the route profile obtained by detailed survey in PLS-CADD for accessing the
actual loading arises due to spotting of towers. As stated in the chapter 1, the tower
type DB(0°-10°), DC(10°-20°), DD(20°-50°) and DE(50°-70°) type of tower shall be used
for this purpose.
2.8 CONTOURING AT HILLY/UNDULATED LOCATIONS

2.8.1 The levels up or down of each pit centre with respect to centre of tower location shall
be recorded at intervals of 2m using total stations/GPS/digital theodolite and digitized
contour plans shall be made. Based on the digitized elevation plans, the quantities of
benching & protection work vis-à-vis possible unequal leg extensions shall be optimized
using suitable computer-aided techniques/software. Required tower and foundation
details for comparative evaluation for benching & protection work vis-à-vis unequal leg
extensions shall be provided by the Employer to the Contractor during execution stage.

2.8.2 The changes desired by the Employer in the preliminary tower schedule or as may be
required based on detailed survey of tower locations & contouring by the contractor,
shall be carried out by the contractor and the final tower schedule shall be submitted
for approval of Employer. The tower schedule shall show position of all type of towers,
span length, type of foundation for each tower, benching & revetment requirement,
unequal leg extensions, deviation at all angles, crossings & other details etc.
2.9 SURVEY METHODOLOGY & PRECISION

2.9.1 All elevations shall be referenced to benchmarks established by the survey of India.
Survey operations shall begin and end at benchmarks approved by the Employer.
2.9.2 During the leveling of the profile, check surveys will be effected at intervals not
exceeding 50 Kms. with benchmarks of known elevations. The difference in elevations
as surveyed by thecontractor and as declared by Survey of India for these benchmarks
shall not exceed the precisionrequired for 3rd order surveys e ≤ 24k where k is the
distance betweenbenchmarks in km and eis the difference between elevations in mm.
2.9.3 In the absence of suitable benchmarks the leveling shall be done by twoindependent
leveling parties working in opposite directions along the sameline. The difference in
elevations between the two surveys shall not exceedthe precision required for 3rd order
surveys as stated above.
2.9.4 All important objects and features along the transmission line centerline(railways,
highways, roads, canals, rivers, transmission lines, distributionlines, telephone lines etc.)
shall be surveyed and located with a positionalaccuracy of 1:2000 between points of
known horizontal position.
2.10 SURVEY REPORT

2.10.1 Complete BOQ of the Transmission lines shall be furnished in the surveyreport by the
contractor.
2.10.2 Each angle point locations shall be shown with detailed sketches showingexisting close
by permanent land marks such as specific tree(s), cattle shed,homes, tube wells,

temples, electric pole/tower, telephone pole, canal,roads, railway lines etc. The relative
distance of land marks from the anglepoints and their bearings shall be indicated in the
sketch. These details shallbe included in the survey report.
2.10.3 Information w.r.t infrastructure details available en-route, identificationand explanation
of route constraints, etc shall also be furnished in theSurvey report and shall inter-alia
include the following:
2.10.4 Information regarding infrastructural facilities available along the finalroute alignment
like access to roads, railway stations, construction materialsources (like quarry points
for stone, sand and availability of constructionwater), labour, existing transport
facilities, fuel availability etc. shall befurnished in the survey report.
2.10.5 All observations which the Contractor thinks would be useful to theconstruction of the
transmission lines mentioned under scope of work areto be reported.
2.10.6 Suggestions regarding the number of convenient zones (line segments /portions) in
which the entire alignment can be divided keeping in view theconvenience of
corporation are to be given.
2.10.7 Suggestions regarding location for setting up stores during lineconstruction in
consultation with Employer’s representative shall also beprovided by the contractor.
2.10.8 Working months available during various seasons along the final routealignment, with
period, time of sowing & harvesting of different type ofcrops and the importance
attached to the crops particularly in the context ofway leave problems and
compensation payable shall be stated by theContractor.
2.10.9 Availability of labour of various categories and contractors of civil worksshall also be
reported.
2.10.10 Some portions of the line may require clearance from various authorities.The Contractor
shall indicate the portion of the line so affected, the natureof clearance required and
the name of concerned organizations such aslocal bodies, municipalities, P&T (name of
circle), Inland navigation,Irrigation Department, Power Utilities and Divisional Forest/
wild lifeAuthorities etc.

2.10.11 All safety regulation i.e. statuary requirement of Govt. of Nepalshall be complied by the
contractor during routing/ survey/construction ofline through patches of dense
forest/wild life.
2.10.12 All the requisite data for processing the case for statutory clearances shall be provided
along with the report.
2.10.13 The Contractor shall also collect & report (as per format enclosed atAnnexure B) details
pertaining to pollution levels envisaged along thetransmission line.
2.10.14 Six copies of survey reports shall be furnished by the contractor to theEmployer.
2.10.15 The contractor shall also submit a Geo-Technical Hazard Identification report
mentioning all Geological, Topographical, Hydrological, Geo-morphological,
Environmental and Land use along the Transmission Line route which will form the basis
of Soil-Investigation and Geo-Technical Studies as given Appendix-I of Chapter-3 of this
specification.
2.11 CHECK SURVEY OF TOWER LOCATION

The check survey is within the scope of the contractor and details given in Chapter 3.
2.12 TREE ENUMERATION AND CUTTING

2.12.1 Tree-enumeration i.e the evaluation and tabulation of the trees and bushes coming
within 15m on either side of the center line alignment (danger tree locator) shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor including for that required during survey. However the
felling of tress in forest land shall be the responsibility of the Employer however, all
trees in private lands wherever required are that of the contractor. The Contractor shall
count, mark and put proper numbers with water proof paint at his own cost on all the
trees that are to be cut at the time of actual execution of the work as detailed below for
the approval of appropriate government authority of Nepal. Contractor may please note
that Employer/PMC shall not pay any compensation for any loss or damage to the
properties due to Contractors work.

2.12.2 To evaluate and tabulate the trees and bushes coming within 30 meters for 220 kV line
and 1.5 meters (also danger tree locator) for line on either side of the central line
alignment, the trees will be numbered and marked with quality paint serially from angle
point 1(i) onwards and the corresponding number will be painted on the stem of the
trees at a height of 1 meter above ground level. The trees list should contain the
following:
a) Approximate height of the tree with an accuracy of + 2 meters.
b) Girth (Circumference) measured at a height of 1 meter from the ground level.
c) Name of the type of species/tree
d) The bushy and undergrowth encountered in the 35 meters belt should also be
evaluated with its type, height and area in square meters, clearly indicating the
growth in tree/bush statement.
e) No. of Trees differentiated by girth of <5 m and >5 m.
2.12.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for tree enumeration for the purpose of initiating
proposal for obtaining forest clearance from Ministry of Environment & Forest,
government of Nepal. The tree enumeration shall be done in presence of official of the
District/Sector forest office and representatives of Community forest user groups and
the contractor is required to coordinate with the concerned officials. All the cost in this
connection shall be included in the contractor’s price. The Contractor shall submit 10
copies of the complete forest clearance proposal on the prescribed format as per
requirement of Ministry of Environment and Forest duly completed in all respects to be
moved for forest clearance to the satisfaction of the Project Manager and District Forest
Officer.
2.12.4 Tree enumeration should be started along with Detail and Check survey as appropriate.
Clearing of obstructions falling in the right -of way during detailed survey and lopping or
trimming of the portion of the trees falling within the minimum electrical clearance zone
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Also, any lopping or trimming of tree
branches obstructing the line of sight during check survey shall be the responsibility of
the Erection Contractor. Any avoidable or deliberate damage done to standing crop or

private property by the Erection Contractor's laborers shall be the Contractor's

responsibility.
Payment: Payment tree enumeration shall be done as per the quantity of number of trees
irrespective of any species as given in the price schedule. The provisional quantities are given in
price schedule and the actual will be finalized after the tree enumeration activity.
2.13 SOIL INVESTIGATIONS:
The soil investigations for the number of locations as given in the price schedule is in the
scope of the contractor and the details are given in chapter 3.
2.14 TESTING OF SOIL
The soil investigations for the number of locations as given in the price schedule is in the
2.15 STABILITY OF SLOPE
The Stability of Slope for the number of locations as given in the price schedule is in the
2.16 GEOLOGICAL STABILITY
The Geological Stability for the number of locations as given in the price schedule is in
the scope of the contractor and the details are given in chapter 3.
2.17 CADASTRAL SURVEY, RIGHT-OF -WAY, ETC.
The Cadastral survey is in the scope of the contractor and the details are given in chapter
3.

Package-KC3

Section- IV-A
Chapter 3- Cadastral Survey, Check Survey, Soil Investigation,
Foundation & Civil works, Erection, Stringing, Testing &
Commissioning
District) Transmission Line and 132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge Sangu Part II-
SECTION IV-A
CHAPTER – 3
CADASTRAL SURVEY, CHECK SURVEY, SOIL INVESTIGATION, FOUNDATION & CIVIL
WORKS, ERECTION, STRINGING, TESTING & COMMISSIONING
CONTENTS
PAGE
S.NO DESCRIPTION
NO.
3.0 SCOPE 1
3.1 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 1
3.2 STANDARDS 1
3.3 COMMUNICATION AND TRANSPORT 2
3.4 MATERIAL HANDLING AND ACCOUNTING 3
3.5 ERECTION LOSSES AND GENERAL STORAGE OF MATERIAL 3
3.6 CADASTRAL SURVEY, RIGHT-OF -WAY, CUTTING OF TREES, ETC. 4
3.7 CHECK SURVEY OF TOWER LOCATION 6
ROADS, RIVER, STREAM, POWER, TELE COMMUNICATION LINE AND
3.8 7
RAILWAY CROSSINGS.
3.9 CROSSING OF PUBLIC UTILITIES 8
3.10 ERECTION TOOLS AND PLANTS 8
3.11 EXECUTION OF WORKS 11
3.12 SOIL INVESTIGATIONS 13
3.13 CONSTRUCTION OF TOWER FOOTINGS 47
3.14 SETTING OF STUBS 48
3.15 EXCAVATION 48
3.16 EXCAVATION FOR TOWER SITES, DRAINAGE AND LINE CLEARANCE: 51
3.17 EXCAVATION FOR TOWER'S FOOTINGS 52
3.18 EXCAVATION OF BORROWED EARTH FOR BACKFILL 54

3.19 BACKFILLING 55

3.20 FORM WORK 56

3.21 REINFORCEMENT 57
3.22 CONCRETE 58
3.23 PROTECTION OF TOWER FOOTINGS 73
3.24 GROUNDING 73
3.25 HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION OF STEEL 75
3.26 TOWER ERECTION 75
3.27 TOWER ACCESSORIES 76
3.28 PAYMENTS FOR ERECTION 77
3.29 INSULATOR HOISTING 77
3.30 HANDLING OF CONDUCTOR AND GROUND WIRE/OPGW 78
3.31 STRINGING OF CONDUCTOR AND GROUND WIRE/OPGW 80
3.32 JOINTING 81
3.33 SAGGING-IN-OPERATION 82
3.34 TENSIONING AND SAGGING OF CONDUCTORS AND GROUNDWIRE/OPGW 83
3.35 CLIPPING IN 83
3.36 FIXING OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE/OPGW ACCESSORIES 84
3.37 REPLACEMENT 84
3.38 FINAL CHECKING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 84
3.39 PAYMENTS 86
3.40 ERECTION SCHEDULE 86
3.41 PROGRESS REPORT 86
3.42 BENCHING 86
3.43 PROTECTION OF TOWER AND TOWER FOOTING 87
3.44 FIELD QUALITY PLAN 91

Appendix I – Geotechnical hazard identification 92
Appendix II Pre-commissioning procedures 95
Annex I Field Quality Plan 113

SECTION IV-A
CHAPTER - 3
CADASTRAL SURVEY,CHECK SURVEY, SOIL INVESTIGATION, FOUNDATION & CIVIL
WORKS, ERECTION, STRINGING, TESTING & COMMISSIONING
3.0 SCOPE
3.0.1 This chapter covers Construction of Tower Foundations, check survey, tower erection,
Stringing of conductor, OPGW/Earthwire, testing and commissioning of the transmission
lines enumerated in this Specification. The successful bidder shall on its own cost,
transport the construction materials for different types of foundations, tower members,
tower accessories and other line materials such as conductor, OPGW/Earthwire,
Insulators and Hardwares etc to the work sites by following means of transport i.e.
tractors, trucks, Animal drivers cart and or manual labors depending upon site
condition.
3.0.2 The above work shall also include the cost of labour, all tools and plants including
tension stringing equipment and all other incidental expenses in connection with
accomplishing the complete work.

3.1.1 Transmission Line Route
The route as defined in Chapter 2 is the responsibility of the contractor
3.1.1.2 The General Information & Scope,General &specific technical requirements for
Construction of Tower foundations, tower erection, stringing, testing and
commissioning of the line and the particulars of the line, completion program etc. are
specified in Section 1 , Section 2 and Section 3 respectively.
3.2 STANDARDS
3.2.1 Except where otherwise specified or implied the erection, testing and commissioning
shall conform to the provisions of IS: 5613 (part 2 / Section-2) -1985 (as amended up to
date).

3.2.2 The Nepali Standard or Indian Standard or equivalent international standard

Specifications mentioned below shall be applicable to the materials and processes used
in executing the work.
TABLE-3.0
IS: 383-1970 Course and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources for
1.
Concrete.
IS: 456-2000 Code of Practice for plain and Reinforcement
2.
Concrete.
3. IS 516-1959 Method of Tests for Strength of Concrete
IS: 1200 Method of Measurement of Building and Civil
Engineering Works
4. Part I-1974 Earthwork
Part-II-1974 Concrete Works
Part-V-1982 Formworks
IS: 2502-1963 Code of Practice for Bending and fixing of bars for
5.
concrete reinforcement.
6. IS: 3043-1966 Code of Practice for Earthing.

7. IS: 3764-1966 Safety Code for Excavation Work
IS: 4081-1967 Safety Code for Blasting and related drilling
8.
operation.
IS: 4091-1967 Code of Practice for Design and Construction of
9.
foundations for Transmission Line Towers and Poles.
IS:5613 Code of Practice for Design Installation, and

10.
(Part2-1985/1989) Maintenance of overhead power lines.
Section - 1: Design
Section - 2: Installation and Maintenance.
11. Electrical Power technical standards of Nepal.
3.3 COMMUNICATION AND TRANSPORT
The information about the existing communication and transport facilities may be
verified from the concerned authorities before submitting his offer.

3.4 MATERIAL HANDLING AND ACCOUNTING

3.4.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for timely delivery of tower materialand accessories,
Line materials and foundation material to the site and its storage etc. In case of
loss/damage of the material, the Contractor shall be responsible for making good the
shortages/damages within the period specified by the Employer. Any demurrage and
wharf age incurred on the material due to Contractor's carelessness shall be to his
account.
3.4.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for safe transportation of conductor, Earth wire,
OPGW, insulators, etc. to the work of site. He shall be responsible for proper
distribution of the Conductor and Earth wire/OPGW drums so that the numbers and
lengths of cut pieces are minimum.
3.4.3 No separate charges shall be paid for head loading of materials, tools and tackles. The
tenderers shall inspect the line route before submitting their tenders.
3.5 ERECTION LOSSES AND GENERAL STORAGE OF MATERIAL

3.5.1 ERECTION LOSSES
Any loss or damage of materials, public property shall be the responsibility of the
contractor.
3.5.2 GENERAL STORAGE OF MATERIAL

The contractor shall have to arrange at least two site store offices at different
convenient places along the transmission line route. They shall also have to arrange
appropriate watch and ward over the day and night, water/sanitation etc.
3.5.2.1 Cement of approved quality shall be arranged by Contractor. The Contractor shall store
the cement in suitable weather proof, properly ventilated buildings with dry floors or
wooden planks so as to prevent deterioration.
3.5.2.2 The Contractor shall stack the fabricated steel members in separate piles member - wise
and tower - wise. These shall be stacked clear off the ground with their heels upwards

in order to avoid entrapping of water between the angle-sections. The reinforcement

bars shall also be stored in separate piles in a suitable manner to minimize corrosion.
Other line material shall be stocked properly with a view of ease of handling, issue,
accounting minimum exposure to inclement weather etc.
3.5.2.3 The Contractor shall store the aggregates on hard smooth and clean surfaces so that
there is no possibility of intrusion of any foreign materials. Aggregates of different
grades shall be stored in separate piles which shall be spaced well apart to prevent their
intermixing.
3.5.2.4 Employer/PMC shall have the right of exercising inspection of Contractor's stores at any
time to ensure no damages to the material.
3.6 CADASTRAL SURVEY, RIGHT-OF -WAY, CUTTING OF TREES, ETC.

3.6.1 Right of Way and Access
The necessary right of way shall be arranged by the Employer. It may be noted that
obtaining right of way is a continuous process and entire right of way cannot be
obtained at one time. Therefore, Employer may grant the partial right of way in order to
start the work. Where partial right of way is granted, the contractor shall program his
activities accordingly. Contractor shall also note that the foundation sites cleared for
construction by the Employer may not be in the continuous stretch. The provision of this
clause shall be read in conjunction with the Chapter 2
The Contractor shall make all the necessary arrangements for the access road with the
land Employer/PMCs before going on to private land, but if any difficulty should arise,
the Contractor shall promptly inform the Employer. The Contractor shall arrange all
proposed point of access for the settlement of the Way leave arrangements; any
damage made to standing crops during building of the temporary access roads shall be
the responsibility of the contractor.
3.6.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for clearing for foundation site. Clearing shall
include removal and disposal of all trees, bushes, down timber, tree roots, debris,

indicated structures and other obstructions from the areas to be occupied by

permanent works of the Contract as directed by the Employer at tower foundation sites
and the access. The Contractor shall also be responsible for removing of creeping vines
and all vegetations on all towers from the base to the top. The Cost of the entire work
shall be included in the Bid Price.
Contractor shall make all reasonable precautions to avoid damage to land, property,
roads, crops, fences, walls, gates, etc and shall ensure the work is adequately supervised
so that unavoidable damage is reduced to minimum. The contractor shall be liable for all
damage arising by or in consequences of the works except unavoidable damage to
standing crops in the right of way of the transmission line corridor. However, the
damage to standing crops and other properties due to Contractor’s activities in the
access road to foundation site shall be the liability of the Contractor. The Contractor
shall remove all soil and surplus materials after erection.
The Contractor shall notify the Employer of all the instances of damage to crops in the
right of the way which in the opinion of the Contractor are unavoidable. In the event of
such notification not being received by the Employer, Employer may its discretion refuse
to consider any claim by the Contractor for compensation resulting there from.
No Separate Payment shall be made for clearing the foundation site and access road the
cost of which is deemed to have been covered in the unit rate of construction of
foundation and stringing or tower erection
3.6.3 As per Land Acquisition Act 2034 (1977), the government is authorized to acquire land
for public purposes by providing compensation to the private landEmployer/PMCs. Cash
compensation through Compensation Fixation Committee comprises of CDO, Chief
District Land Administration and Revenue Office, Project Chief or an officer designated
by CDO and the representative of the DDC, is assumed to be paid to the
landEmployer/PMCs and as per this act, it is mandatory to acquire the land prior to the

implementation of the project. While the substation sites have been selected and
identified, however, this is for the transmission line is expected to start only after the
detailed survey. The forest lands will be acquired by taking approval from the
government. The contractor with the support of NEA shall carry out the cadastral survey
for the purpose of obtaining Row clearance by NEA, liaison with CDO office and other
departments as necessary for estimating crop compensation and providing for all the
locations of the proposed transmission lines.
The Employer will arrange the right of way including forest clearance from
Nepal/relevant department. Any avoidable or deliberate damage done to standing crop
or private property by the Erection Contractor's laborers shall be the Erection
Contractor's responsibility.
3.6.4 The Employer will acquire only such piece of land as is actually required for each tower
foundation and protection of tower foundation only. Any extra land required by the
Erection Contractor temporarily for dumping of the construction material etc shall be
the responsibility of the Erection Contractor and but consequent damage to crops along
the ROW and access roads, the compensation will be paid by NEA.The Employer shall
also not be responsible for arranging access roads/right - of - way for transport of
material from road side to work sites. If the Erection Contractor has to adopt any such
arrangements, he may do so with the consent of the property Employer/PMCs and any
compensation in that respect will be his responsibility. The Erection Contractor shall
take all reasonable steps for preventing damage to crops during execution of the
contract work.
3.6.5 Tree enumeration and preparation of proposal for the forest clearance for purpose of
clearing right of way shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Tree enumeration
should be started along with detailed survey. Clearing of obstructions falling in the right
-of way as per IS: 5613 (part-2/ section 2)-1985 and lopping or trimming of the portion
of the trees falling within the minimum electrical clearance zone shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. However, any lopping or trimming of tree branches

obstructing the line of sight during check survey shall be the responsibility of the
Erection Contractor. Only the cutting of trees in the forest as per approved forest
clearance proposal shall be the responsibility of the Employer
3.7 CHECK SURVEY OF TOWER LOCATION

3.7.1 The Check Survey shall be conducted to locate tower locations on ground and shall be
based on the duly approved profile sheets and tower schedules prepared on the basis of
detailed survey. A preliminary tower schedule based on the check survey will be
submitted by the Contractor. The locations of towers so marked shall be got inspected
from the authorized representative of the Employer. The changes desired by the
Employer in the preliminary tower schedule shall be carried out by the Contractor who
shall thereafter submit a final tower schedule for the approval of the Employer. The
tower schedule submitted for approval shall show position and types of towers, wind
spans, weight spans, adjacent span, angle of deviations, individual and cumulative
chainage, type of foundations, Type of Soil, height difference, power line, telecom line,
river or road crossings, important ground feature etc.
3.7.2 During check survey the tower locations shall be fixed on ground with the help of
Differential Global Positioning System (DGPS) for Suspension type tower (Centre point
and any one edge point of 20m x 20 m grid) and Tension Type tower (Centre point, any
one edge point of 20m x 20 m grid & transmission line direction in grid) . On tower
locations having undulations, levels shall be taken at every 2 meter along the diagonals
of tower in area of 20mx20m; profile of the ground along the diagonal shall be plotted
and submitted to the Employer.
3.7.3 Tower erection schedules shall be made in convenient construction lengths and work
shall not be started in any length until the schedule has been approved by Employer in
writing.
3.7.4 The Contractor shall then be responsible for correct setting of towers as per approved
profiles. If tower, after erection, are found to be out of approved alignment, Contractor

shall dismantle and re-erect them correctly at his own cost and without extension of
time.
3.8 ROADS, RIVER, STREAM, POWER AND TELE COMMUNICATION LINE AND
RAILWAY CROSSINGS.
3.8.1 The crossings of roads, river, small streams, power and telecommunication lines, and
railway tracks falling in the line route shall be carried out with the types of structures
and at angles as indicated in the approved profile sheets and tower schedules , ensuring
that the minimum clearances at maximum temperature in still wind condition, after
taking the effect of conductor creep and slack caused by the broken conductor in the
adjoining span are not less than the relevant clearances specified in Section -3 of this
specification.
3.8.2 The crossings of railway tracks if any, telecommunication lines and erection of lines in
the vicinity of aerodromes shall in addition to meet the requirements of the Electricity
regulations of Nepal / or the rules laid down by any other concerned agency, Govt. of
Nepal
3.9 CROSSING OF PUBLIC UTILITIES

3.9.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for giving requisite notice to the appropriate
authorities and intimate them the date and time when he proposes to carry out erection
of the conductors and earth wire/OPGW along or across power lines or
telecommunication lines, public roads, water ways, railways etc. Lowering of the
conductors, earth wire/OPGW etc. of the existing power lines and its restringing and
taking all necessary precautions to avoid damage to the existing lines shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. Any guying, temporary reinforcement required for the
existing structures shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor.
3.9.2 Where other authorities or public undertakings affected, deem it necessary for the
protection of their employees, property, public or for the assistance of traffic to provide
flagmen or watchmen, the cost of such provision shall be borne by the Contractor.

3.9.3 Where it is necessary to provide scaffolding over roads, power lines or

telecommunication lines this shall be carried out by the Contractor at such times as may
be convenient to the requisite Authority and such work shall be deemed to be covered
in the rates. Flagmen and approved types of danger or warning notices shall be provided
by the Contractor to ensure safety of the public. The time taken to affect the crossing
shall be kept to the minimum.
3.10 ERECTION TOOLS AND PLANTS
3.10.1 The Contractor shall provide at his own expenses all necessary erection tools and plants
such as surveying instruments, tackles, spanners, wrenches, pumps, timbering,
scaffoldings, jacks, winches, ropes and all construction machinery such as tractors, bull
dozers, hydraulic compressors and dies, dynamometers, come along clamps, tension
stringing equipments, camping requisites etc. Erection contractor shall also provide at
his own expenses all necessary tools and plants such as tools for excavation, blasting
rocks, concrete mixture (diesel operated), needle vibrator (Petrol operated) required for
construction of foundation.
3.10.2 ELECTRIC POWER AND WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements and provide all necessary electric
power and Water for construction purposes at his own cost. In case the power is
available with the Employer, the same shall be supplied at the prevailing tariff rates.
3.10.3 As per Land Acquisition Act 2034 (1977), the government is authorized to acquire
land for public purposes by providing compensation to the private landEmployer/PMCs.
While the land required for the tower footing shall be permanently acquired, the private
land falling along the right of Way i.e 15 m on either side of the center line of the
transmission line shall be partly compensated as per the Electricity Rules of Nepal. The
land required for the transmission line is expected to start only after the detailed and
Check survey. The forest lands shall be acquired by taking approval from the
government. The contractor with the support of NEA shall carry out the cadastral survey
for the purpose of obtaining Row clearance by NEA, liaison with, office of Chief District

Officer, District Survey office and District Land management and revenue office and
other departments as necessary for identifying the land parcel and permanent structure
owned by public as well as private individuals on the Right of Way of the Transmission
Line for estimating compensation. The Contractor shall mark the tower locations
showing its boundary covering all four foundation pads and submit the details of
affected Land Parcel numbers along with their areas for all tower locations to the
Employer after the approval of check survey. The detail of which should include land
plot number, and Employer/PMCs name and address as obtained from the records of
Land revenue Office (Maalpot) and Survey Division (Naapi Sakha) of the concerned
districts. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to hire the Land Surveyors (Amin)
and other required manpower, survey instruments & accessories, cadastral maps and
collect the required information (including but not limited to the Map Number of each
cadastral map), as mentioned herein above.
3.10.4 The Contractor is also required to identify the land parcel, and its Employer/PMCs along
with the detail of area of the land required for the foundation footing and submit the
report to the Employer for the Purpose of permanent acquisition of land. The area of
land required for permanent acquisition shall be based on the designed area of the
foundation footing.
3.10.5 The Employer shall initiate the process for acquiring the ROW of Transmission Line as
well as permanent land acquisition for plot of land area required for foundation footing
after verification of the Contractors report. However, if any error is identified in the
information submitted by the contractor needing re-identification of land plot and its
Employer/PMC’s names, the Contractor shall immediately mobilize the crews to rectify
error and resubmit the report at no extra cost.
3.10.6 The Employer, at the request of the Contractor shall request the various Organizations
or Offices of the Government of Nepal and local bodies to provide the necessary

information to the Contractor. The Bidders are requested to familiarize themselves with
the government rules & regulations and processes in the acquisition of land.
3.10.7 All cost incurred in this connection shall be included in Check Survey work. However, the
compensation cost of land and permanent structures along the ROW and land costs for
permanent acquisition of land for tower pads shall be borne by the Employer. Any
avoidable or deliberate damage done to standing crop or private property by the
Contractor's laborers shall be the Contractor's responsibility.
3.10.8 The Employer shall acquire only such piece of land as is actually required for each tower
foundation and protection of tower foundation only. Any extra land required by the
Erection Contractor temporarily for dumping of the construction material etc shall be
the responsibility of the Erection Contractor and but consequent damage to crops along
the ROW and access roads, the compensation shall be paid by NEA.The Employer shall
also not be responsible for arranging access roads/right - of - way for transport of
material from road side to work sites. If the Contractor has to adopt any such
arrangements, he may do so with the consent of the property Employer/PMCs and any
compensation in that respect shall be his responsibility. The Contractor shall take all
reasonable steps for preventing damage to crops during execution of the contract work.
3.11 EXECUTION OF WORKS

3.11.1 The Check Survey shall be conducted to locate tower locations on ground and shall be
based on the duly approved profile sheets and tower schedules prepared on the basis of
detailed survey. A preliminary tower schedule based on the check survey shall be
submitted by the Contractor. The locations of towers so marked shall be got inspected
from the authorized representative of the Employer. The changes desired by the
Employer in the preliminary tower schedule shall be carried out by the Contractor who
shall thereafter submit a final tower schedule for the approval of the Employer. The
tower schedule submitted for approval shall show position and types of towers, wind

spans, weight spans, adjacent span, angle of deviations, individual and cumulative
chainage, type of foundations, Type of Soil, height difference, power line, telecom line,
river or road crossings, important ground feature etc.
3.11.2 During check survey the tower locations shall be fixed on ground with the help of
one edge point of 20m x 20 m grid & transmission line direction in grid) . On tower
locations having undulations, levels shall be taken at every 2 meter along the diagonals
of tower in area of 20mx20m; profile of the ground along the diagonal shall be plotted
and submitted to the Employer.
3.11.3 Tower erection schedules shall be made in convenient construction lengths and work
writing.
3.11.4 The Contractor shall then be responsible for correct setting of towers as per approved
profiles. If tower, after erection, are foundto be out of approved alignment, Contractor
time.
3.11.5 Setting out and Check Survey

3.11.5.1 Check Survey shall be based on the duly approved profile sheets and tower schedules
prepared on the basis of detailed survey. A preliminary tower schedule based on the
check survey shall be submitted by the Contractor. The locations of towers so marked
shall be got inspected from the authorized representative of the Employer. The changes
desired by the Employer in the preliminary tower schedule shall be carried out by the
Contractor who shall thereafter submit a final tower schedule for the approval of the
Employer. The tower schedule submitted for approval shall show position and types of
towers, wind spans, weight spans, adjacent span, angle of deviations, individual and
cumulative chainage, type of foundations, Type of Soil, height difference, power line,
telecom line, river or road crossings, important ground feature etc.

3.11.5.2 During check survey the tower locations shall be fixed on ground with the help of
one edge point of 20m x 20 m grid & transmission line direction in grid)
3.11.5.3 Tower erection schedules shall be made in convenient construction lengths and work
writing.
3.11.5.4 The Contractor shall then be responsible for correct setting of towers as per approved
profiles. If tower, after erection, are foundto be out of approved alignment, Contractor
time.
3.12 SOIL INVESTIGATIONS

3.12.1 Geotechnical Investigations
3.12.1.1 General
3.12.1.1.1 Employer/PMC requires that a detailed Geotechnical investigation be carried out at

various tower locations to provide the designer with sufficiently accurate information,
both general and specific, about the substrata profile and engineering properties of
soil including soft fissured and hard rock at site on the basis of which the foundation
of transmission line towers can be classified and designed rationally.
3.12.1.1.2 These specifications provide general guidelines for geotechnical investigation of

normal soils soft/fissured rock and hard rock. Cases of marshy locations and locations
affected by salt water or saltpeter which may require special foundations shall be
treated as special locations and geotechnical investigation at such locations shall be
carried out in accordance with relevant clauses of these shall be treated as special
locations and in these specifications. Any other information required for such
locations shall be obtained by Contractor and furnished to Employer/PMC.
3.12.1.2 Scope
3.12.1.2.1 The scope of work includes detail soil investigations at tower locations upto a depth of
12m below ground level or 1.5 times the width of foundation below foundation level
whichever is more at locations requiring normal foundations and upto a depth of 40m
below ground level at locations requiring special foundation such as pile etc. by drilling
bore holes, conducting SPT and or Vane Shear tests, collection of disturbed &
undisturbed soil/rock samples from various depths for conducting all necessary
laboratory tests for determining various engineering properties of soil/rock required
for classification and design of tower foundations. The scope also includes preparation
of geotechnical investigation report of each tower location where soil investigation
has been carried out a geotechnical report giving bore log data and the following and
any other engineering properties of soil/rock required for classification and design of
tower foundations:
(a) Soil/Rock profile along the depth of bore hole;

(b) Grain size distribution and classification of Soil/rock;
(c) Atterberg’s limits;
(d) Specific Gravity, Bulk Unit Weight; Moisture Content, Dry Unit Weight;
(e) Shear Parameters i.e. Cohesion ‘C’ & Angle of Friction ‘ø’, of Soil/Rock;
(f) Angle of Repose;
(g) Safe/Allowable and Limiting Bearing Capacities of Soil/Rock at 3.0 m & 3.5 m
below ground level based on Shear failure and settlement criteria for footing width
of 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 5.5 & 6.0 m.
(h) Chemical Test results on Soil & subsoil water samples indicating concentration of
carbonates, sulphates, chlorides, nitrates, organic matter and any other chemical
harmful to concrete and reinforcement steel;
(i) Location of Water Table at the time of testing as well as historical highest water
table level in the area;
(j) Electrical Resistivity of Soil Strata along the transmission line route alignment and
any conclusion on soil profile based thereon;
(k) Optimum Moisture Content and 95% of Procter’s Dry Density;

(l) Any other engineering property of soil/rock which may be required for
classification, design and construction of tower foundations; and
(m) Recommendations for soil/rock parameters to be considered in the design of
foundations and any precaution needed during construction in regard to
coarse/fine aggregates, cement etc.
The provisional quantities of tower locations where soil investigation is envisaged
have been indicated in Bill of Quantities. However, during execution of work, the
quantities may vary and shall be decided by the Engineer - in - Charge, depending
upon the soil strata and terrain. Based on the bore log data / soil parameters /soil
investigation results, the Contractor shall recommend the type of foundations
suitable for each location and the same shall be got approved by the
Employer/PMC.
3.12.1.2.2 These specifications cover the technical requirements for a detailed Geotechnical
investigation and submission of a detailed Geotechnical Report. The work shall
include mobilization of all necessary tools and plants &equipment, provision of
necessary engineering supervision and technical personnel, skilled and unskilled
labour, etc. as required to carry out the entire field investigation as well as laboratory
tests, analysis and interpretation of data collected and preparation of the
Geotechnical Report. Contractor shall also collect data regarding variation of subsoil
water table along the proposed line route. The aforementioned work shall be
supervised by a graduate in Civil Engineering having at least 5 years of site experience
in geotechnical investigation work.Geotechnical Investigation Report shall be prepared
by a Post Graduate in Civil Engineering with specialization in Geotechnical Engineering
having atleast three years’ experience in the related field and preferably in the
geotechnical investigation for transmission line foundation of transmission lines of 132
KV and above and the whole of field work shall also be carried out under the overall
supervision of aforesaid expert.

Before taking up the work, the Contractor shall submit the detailed methodology
including field & laboratory tests proposed to be carried out to Employer/PMC for
approval. The work shall be started only after the approval of Employer/PMC.
3.12.1.2.3 Contractor shall make his own arrangements to establish the co-ordinate system
required to position boreholes, tests pits and other field test locations as per the
drawings/sketches supplied by Employer/PMC. Contractor shall determine the
reduced levels (R.L’s) at these locations with respect to benchmarks used in the
detailed survey. Contractor shall provide at site all required survey instruments to the
satisfactions of the Employer/PMC so that the work can be carried out accurately
according to specifications and drawings. Contractor shall also collect the data
regarding change of course of rivers, major natural streams and nalas, etc.,
encountered along the transmission line route from the best available sources and
shall furnish complete hydrological details including maximum discharge& velocity,
highest flood level (H.F.L), scour depth etc. of the concerned rivers, major streams
and nalas (canals).
3.12.1.2.4 The field and laboratory data shall be recorded on the proforma recommended in
relevant Indian Standards. Contractor shall submit to Employer/PMC two copies of
field bore logs (one copy each to Employer/PMC site and Corporate Office) and all the
field records (countersigned by the Employer/PMC) soon after the completion of each
boreholes/test.
3.12.1.2.5 Whenever Contractor is unable to extract undisturbed soil/rock samples, he shall

immediately inform the Employer/PMC. Payment for boring charges shall be subject
to Employer/PMC being satisfied that adequate effort has been made to extract
undisturbed samples. Special care shall be taken for locations where marshy soils are
encountered and Contractor in such cases shall ensure that specified number of vane
shear tests are performed and the results correlated with other soil parameters.
3.12.1.2.6 The Contractor shall interact with the Employer/PMC to get acquainted with the
different types of structures envisaged and in assessing the load intensities on the
foundation for the various types of towers in order to enable him to make specific
recommendation for the depth, founding strata, type of foundation and the allowable
bearing capacity.
3.12.1.2.7 After reviewing Contractor’s geotechnical investigation draft report and furnishing the
observations thereon, Employer/PMCwill call Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer for
discussions. Any expenditure associated with the redrafting and finalising the report,
traveling etc. shall be deemed included in the rates quoted for the geotechnical
investigations.
3.12.1.2.8 Contractor shall carry out all work expressed and implied in these specifications in
accordance with requirements of the specification.
3.12.1.2.9 The contractor shall prepare and submit soil profile along the transmission line route (
in digitized form, with digitized route alignment drawing as base) indicating salient soil
characteristics / features, water table etc based on detailed soil investigations and
other details / information collected during detailed survey.
3.12.1.3 General Requirements
3.12.1.3.1 Wherever possible, Contractor shall collect and review existing local knowledge,
records of test pits, boreholes, etc., types of foundations adopted and the behaviour
of existing structures, particularly those similar to the present project.
3.12.1.3.2 Contractor shall make use of information gathered from nearby quarries, unlined wells
excavation etc. Study of the general topography and exposed soil/rock surfaces of the
surrounding areas will often help in the delineation of different soil types.
3.12.1.3.3 Contractor shall gather data regarding the removal of overburden in the project area
either by performing test excavations, or by observing soil erosion or land slides in
order to estimate reconsolidation of the soil strata. Similarly, data regarding recent
land fills shall be studied to determine the characteristics of such land fills as well as
the original soil strata.

3.12.1.3.4 The water level in neighboring streams and water courses shall be noted. Contractor
shall make enquiries and shall verify whether there are abandoned underground
works e.g. worked out ballast pits, quarries, old brick fields, mines, mineral workings
etc.
3.12.1.3.5 It is essential that equipment and instruments be properly calibrated at the

commencement of the work and rechecked periodically as per recommendations of
their manufactures and as found necessary during the progress of work. If the
Employer/PMCso desires. Contractor shall arrange for having the instruments tested
at an approved laboratory at its cost and shall submit the test reports to the
Employer/PMC. If the Employer/PMCdesires to witness such tests, Contractor shall
arrange for the same.
3.12.1.4 Codes and Standards for Geotechnical Investigations
3.12.1.4.1 All standards, specifications and codes of practice referred to herein shall be the latest
editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions. In case of conflict
between the present specifications and those referred to herein, the former shall
prevail. Internationally accepted standards which ensure equal or higher performance
than those specified shall also be accepted.
3.12.1.4.2 All work shall be carried out in accordance with the following Indian Standards and
Codes:
Indian Title International

Standards (IS) Standard/Code
IS:1080-1990 Codes of Practice for Design and Construction

of Simple Spread Foundations.
IS:1498-1992 Classification and Identification of Soils for ASTM D 2487

General Engineering purposes. ASTM D2488


IS:1892-1992 Code of Practice for Subsurface Investigation

for Foundation
IS:1904-1986 Code of Practice for Design and Construction

of foundation in Soils: General Requirements.
IS:2131-1992 Method of Standard Penetration Test for ASTM D 1586

Soils
IS:2132-1992 Code of Practice for Thin Walled Tube ASTM D 1587

Sampling of Soils
IS:2720-1992 Method of Test for Soils(Relevant Parts) ASTM D 420
IS:2809-1991 Glossary of Terms and symbols Relating to ASTM D 653

Soil Engineering
IS:2911- Code of Practice for Design and construction

1980(Part-I to of Pile Foundations (Relevant Parts).
Part-IV)
IS:3025 Methods of Sampling and Testing(Physical

and Chemical) for water used in Industry
IS:3043-1991 Code of Practice for Earthing
IS:4078-1990 Code of Practice for Indexing and Storage of

Drill Cores.

of Foundations for Transmission Line Towers
and Poles.


IS:4434-1992 Code of Practice for In-situ Vane Shear Test ASTM D 2573
for Soils ASTM D 4648
IS:4453-1992 Code of Practice for Exploration by Pits,

Trenches, Drifts and Shafts.
IS:4464-1990 Code of Practice for Presentation of Drilling

information and core description in
Foundation investigation
IS:4968(Part- Method for Subsurface sounding for soils,

II)1992 dynamic method using cone and Bentonite
slurry.
IS:5313-1989 Guide for Core Drilling observations.
IS:6403-1990 Code of Practice for Determination of ASTM D 194

Allowable Bearing Pressure on Shallow
Foundation.
IS:6926-1990 Code of Practice for Diamond Core Drilling for

Site Investigation for River Valley Projects.
IS:6935-1989 Method of Determination of Water level in a

Bore Hole.
IS:7422-1990 Symbols and Abbreviations for use in

Geological Maps Sections and subsurface
Exploratory Logs (Relevant parts).
IS:8009(Part- Code of Practice for Calculation of

Settlements of Foundations (Shallow


I)-1993 Foundations subjected to symmetrical

Vertical Loads).
IS:8763-1978 Guide for Undisturbed Sampling of Sands
IS:8764-1991 Method of Determination of Point Load

Strength Index of Rocks.
IS:9143-1991 Method of Determination of Unconfined ASTM D 2938

Compressive Strength of Rock Materials.
IS:9179-1991 Method of Preparation of Rock Specimen for ASTM D 4543

Laboratory Testing.
IS:9259-1992 Specification for Liquid Limit Apparatus. ASTM D 4318
IS:9640-1992 Specification for Split Spoon Sampler. ASTM D 1586
IS:10050-1991 Method of Determination of Slake Durability ASTM D 4644

Index of Rocks.
IS:11315(Part- Description of Discontinuities in Rock Mass-

II)-1991 Core Recovery and Rock Quality.

o f Shallow Foundations on Rocks
3.12.1.5 Field Investigation for Soils
Tentative numbers of tower locations where detailed soil investigation to be done is

given in Bill of Quantities
3.12.1.5.1 Boring

Boreholes are required for detailed soil investigations.
3.12.1.5.1.1 General Requirements
a) Boreholes shall be made to obtain information about the subsoil profile, its nature
and strength and to collect soil samples for strata identification and for conducting
laboratory tests. The minimum diameter of the borehole shall be 150mm and
boring shall be carried out in accordance with the provisions of IS:1892 and the
present specification:
b) All boreholes shall be drilled upto the depths specified in clause 3.12.1.2.1. If a
strata is encountered where the Standard Penetration Test Records N values
greater than 100, with characteristics of rock, the borehole shall be advanced by
coring atleast 3m further in normal locations and at least 7m further for the case
of river crossing locations with prior approval of the Employer/PMC. When the
boreholes are to be terminated in soil strata, an additional Standard Penetration
Test shall be carried out at the termination depth. No extra payment shall be
made for carrying out Standard Penetration Tests.
c) Casing pipe shall be used when collapse of a borehole wall is probable. The
bottom of the casing pipe shall at all times be above the test of sampling level but
not more than 15cm above the borehole bottom. In case of cohesionless soils, the
advancement of the casing pipe shall be such that it does not disturb the soil to be
tested or sampled. The casing shall preferably be advanced by slowly rotating the
casing pipe and not by driving.
d) In-situ tests shall be conducted and undisturbed samples shall be obtained in the
boreholes at intervals specified here-in-after. Representative disturbed samples
shall be preserved for conducting various soil/rockidentification tests in the
laboratory. Water table in the bore hole shall be carefully recorded and reported
following IS:6935. No water or drilling mud shall be used while boring above

ground water table. For cohesion less soil below water table, the water level in
the borehole shall at all times be maintained slightly above the water table.
e) The borehole shall be cleaned using suitable tools to the depth of testing or
sampling, ensuring least or minimum disturbance of the soil at the bottom of the
borehole. The process of jetting through an open tube sampler shall not be
permitted. In cohesive soils, the borehole may be cleaned by using a bailer with a
flap valve. Gentle circulation of drilling fluid shall be done when rotary mud
circulation boring is adopted.
f) On completion of the drilling, Contractor shall backfill all boreholes as directed by

the Employer/PMC.
3.12.1.5.1.2 Auger Boring
Auger boring may be employed in soft to stiff cohesive soils above the water table.
Augers shall be of helical or post hole type and the cuttings brought up by the auger
shall be carefully examined in the field and the description of all strata shall be duly
recorded in the field borelog as per IS:1498. No water shall be introduced from the
top while conducting auger boring.
3.12.1.5.1.3 Shell and Auger Boring
 Shell and auger boring may be used in all types of soil which are free from boulders
asalready included in Clause 3.12.1.5.1.1(d). The use of chisel bits shall be permitted
in hard strata having SPT-N value greater than 100 Chisel bits may also be used to
extend the bore hole through local obstructions such as old construction. Boulders
rocky formations, etc. The requirements in Clause 3.12.1.5.1.2 shall apply for this type
of boring also.
 Rotary method may be used in all types of soil below water table. In this method the
boring is carried out by rotating the bit fixed at the lower end of the drill rod. Proper
care shall be taken to maintain firm contact between the bit and the bottom of the

borehole. Bentonite or drilling mud shall be used as drilling fluid to stabilise and
protect the inside surface of the borehole against collapse. Use of percussion tools
shall be permitted in hard clays and in dense sandy deposits.
3.12.1.5.2 Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
3.12.1.5.2.1 This test shall be conducted in all types of soil/rock deposits encountered within a
borehole in accordance with IS:2131 at an interval of 1.5 m up to a depth of 12.0m
and at an interval of 3.0m thereafter upto the specified depth, to find the variation in
the soil stratification by correlating with the number of blows required for unit
penetration of a Split Spoon Sampler into soil strata by 300mm. Structure sensitive
engineering properties of cohesive soils and sifts such as strength and compressibility
shall not be inferred based on SPT values.
3.12.1.5.2.2 The test shall be conducted at depths as follows and any change of strata:
Location Depths (m)
Normal Soils 1.5, 3.0, 4.5, 6.0, 7.5, 9.0, 10.5 & 12.0.
River crossings and special Locations. 1.5, 3.0, 4.5, 6.0, 7.5, 9.0, 10.5 & 12.0
and thereafter at an interval a depth of
39 m and last SPT test at a depth of
40m.
3.12.1.5.2.3 The test shall be carried out by driving a standard split spoon sampler in the bore hole
by means of a 650N hammer having a free fall of 0.75 m. The sampler shall be driven
into soil/rock strata for 450mm using the hammer and recording the nos. of blows for
every 150mm penetration. The number of blows required for the last 300mm
penetration shall be reported as ‘N’ value.

3.12.1.5.2.4 This test shall be discontinued when the blow count is equal to 100 or the penetration
is less than 25 mm for 50 blows. At the level where the test is discontinued, the
number of blows and the corresponding penetration shall be reported.
3.12.1.5.3 Sampling
3.12.1.5.3.1 General
a) Sufficient number of disturbed and undisturbed soil/rock samples shall be

collected. Disturbed soil samples shall be collected for soil identification and for
conducting tests such as sieve analysis, index properties, specific gravity, chemical
analysis etc. Undisturbed soil/rock samples shall be collected to estimate the
physical bearing capacity and settlement properties of the soil.
b) All accessories and sampling methods shall conform to IS:2131, IS:2132 and
IS:9640. All disturbed and undisturbed samples collected in the field shall be
classified at site as per IS:1498
c) All samples shall be identified with date, borehole or test pit number, depth of
sampling, etc. The top surface of the sample in-situ shall also be marked. Care
shall be taken to keep the core and box samples vertical, with the mark directing
upwards. The tube samples shall be properly trimmed at one end and suitably
capped and sealed with molten paraffin wax. The Contractor shall be responsible
for packing, storing in a cool place and transporting all the samples from site to the
laboratory within seven days after sampling with probe, protection against loss
and damage.
3.12.1.5.3.2 Disturbed Samples
a) Disturbed soil samples shall be collected in boreholes at regular intervals. Jar

samples weighing approximately 1 kg shall be collected at 0.5m intervals starting
from a depth of 0.5m below ground level and at every identifiable change of strata
to supplement the boring records. Samples shall be stored immediately in air tight

jars which shall be filled to capacity as much as possible. The disturbed soil
samples shall also be collected from the split spoon sampler from each depth
where SPT has been conducted for soil identification and conducting laboratory
tests such as sieve analysis, index properties, specific gravity, natural moisture
content, bulk & dry density, chemical analysis etc. The sample shall also be visually
classified and recorded at the site as well as properly preserved without loss of
moisture content and labeled.
b) In designated borrow areas, bulk samples, from a depth of about 0.5m below
ground level shall be collected to establish the required properties for use as a fill
material. Disturbed samples weighing about 25kg (250N) shall be collected at
shallow depths and immediately stored in polythene bags as per IS:1892. The bags
shall be sealed properly to preserve the natural moisture content of the sample
and placed in wooden boxes for transportation.
3.12.1.5.3.3 Undisturbed Samples
a) Undisturbed soil samples shall also be collected from various depths of boreholes
in accordance with IS:2132 for determining soil structure sensitive engineering
properties of soil/rock samples. The first undisturbed soil sample shall be collected
from a depth of 0.5 m below ground level and thereafter from each depth such
that the spacing between the levels of standard penetration test and undisturbed
sample shall not be less than 1.0m. Equipments, accessories and procedures for
conducting the test and for the collection of the undisturbed soil samples shall
conform to IS:2132.
b) In each borehole undisturbed samples shall be collected at every change of strata
and at depths as follows:-
Location Depths (m)
Normal Soils 0.5, 2.5, 4.0, 5.5, 7.0, 8.5, 10.0, 11.5
and at any change of strata.

Special Locations 0.5, 2.5, 4.0, 5.5,7.0,8.5,10.0,11.5 and

thereafter at the interval of 3.0 or
change of strata;
The spacing between the first &top most level of undisturbed sampling and first
standard penetration testing shall not be less than 1.0m.
c) Undisturbed samples shall be of 100mm diameter and 450mm in length. Samples

shall be collected in a manner to preserve the structure and moisture content of
the soil Accessories and sampling procedures shall conform to IS:1892 and IS:2132.
d) Undisturbed samples of soil shall be obtained using a thin walled tube sampler. In
order to reduce the wall friction, suitable precautions, such as oiling the surfaces
shall be taken. The sampling tube shall have a smooth finish on both surfaces and
a minimum effective length of 450mm. The area ratio of sampling tubes shall be
less than 12.5%. However, in case of very stiff soils area ratio up to 20% shall be
permitted.
e) Undisturbed sampling in very loose, saturated, sandy and silty soils and very soft
clays:Undisturbed soil samples shall be obtained using a piston sampler consisting
of a cylinder and piston system. In soft clays and silty clays, with water standing in
the casing pipe, piston sampler shall be used to collect undisturbed samples in the
presence of expert supervision.Accurate measurements of the sampling depth,
dimensions of sampler, stroke and length of sample recovery shall be recorded.
After the sampler is pushed to the required depth, the cylinder and piston system
shall be drawn up together, preventing disturbance and changes in moisture
content of the sample;
f) Undisturbed sampling in cohesion less soils

Undisturbed samples in cohesion less soils shall be obtained in accordance with

IS:8763. Sampler operated by compressed air shall be used to sample cohesion
less soils below ground water table.
3.12.1.5.3.4 Ground Water Table
1) One of the following methods shall be adopted for determining the elevation of
ground water table in boreholes as per IS:6935 and the instructions of the
Employer/PMC:
a) In permeable soils, the water level in the borehole shall be allowed to stabilize
after depressing it adequately by bailing before recording its level. Stability of
sides and bottom of the boreholes shall be ensured at all times.
b) For both permeable and impermeable soils, the following method shall be
suitable. The borehole shall be filled with water and then bailed out to various
depths. Observations on the rise or fall of water level shall be made at each depth.
The level at which neither fall nor rise is observed shall be considered the water
table elevation and confirmed by three successive readings of water level taken at
two hours interval.
c) If any variation of the ground water level is observed in any specific boreholes, the
water level in these boreholes shall be recorded during the course of the filed
investigation. Levels in nearby wells, streams, etc., if any, shall also be noted in
parallel.
d) Subsoil water samples
i. Subsoil water samples shall be collected for performing chemical analysis.

Representative ground water samples shall be collected when first encountered in
boreholes and before the addition of water to aid boring or drilling.
ii. Chemical analysis of water samples shall include determination of pH value,

turbidity, sulphate, carbonate, nitrate and chloride contents, presence of organic

matter and suspended solids. Chemical preservatives may be added to the sample
for cases as specified in the test methods or in applicable Indian Standards. This
shall only be done if analysis cannot be conducted within an hour of collection and
shall have the prior written permission and approval of the Employer/PMC.
3.12.1.5.3.5 Dynamic Cone Penetration Test (only at Special locations)
a. With bentonite slurry
Dynamic cone penetration test shall be conducted to predict stratification, density,

beating capacity of granular soils, etc in accordance with IS:4968(Part-II). The test
shall be conducted to the specified depth or refusal, whichever comes first.
Refusal shall be considered when the blow count exceeds 100 for 300mm
penetration. Equipment, accessories test procedures, field observations and
reporting of results shall conform to IS:4968(Part-II). The driving system shall
comprise of a 650 N weight hammer having a free fall of 750mm. The cone shall
be of 600 and of 65mm diameter provided with vents for continuous flow of
bentonite slurry through the cone and rods in order to avoid friction between the
rods and soil. On completion of the test the results shall be presented as a
continuous record of the number of blows required for every 300mm penetration
of the cone into the soil in a suitable chart supplemented by a graphical plot of
blow count for 300mm penetration vs. depth. On completion of the test, the
results shall be presented on the proforma approved by the Employer/PMC.
b. Without bentonite slurry
This test shall be conducted with 50mm diameter 60 0 cone fitted loosely to the
driving rod through a cone adopter. The cone shall be driven in to the soil by
allowing 650 N weight hammer top fall freely through a height of 750mm each
time. The number of blows for every 75mm penetration shall be recorded. The
process shall be repeated till the cone is driven to the required depth. The
penetration depth shall be limited to 5m in cohesion less soil and 10m in mixed

soil with some binding material. The cone driving rods, driving head, hoisting
equipment shall conform to IS: 10589. The test report should be prepared as per
guidelines of IS: 4968 (Part I).
3.12.1.5.3.6 Vane Shear Test. (required for boreholes wherecollection of Undisturbed Soil
Sampling is not possible. To be conducted at Special locations only)
Field vane shear test shall be performed inside the borehole to determine the shear
strength and bearing capacity of cohesive soils, especially of soft and sensitive clays,
which are highly susceptible to sampling disturbance. Equipment, accessories, test
procedures, field observations shall correspond to IS:4434. Tests may also be
conducted by direct penetration from ground surface. If the cuttings at the test depth
in the borehole show any presence of gravel, sand shells, decomposed wood, etc.,
which are likely to influence the test results substantially, the test at that particular
depth may be omitted with the permission of the Employer/PMC. However, the test
shall be conducted at a depth where these obstructions cease to occur. On
completion of the test, the results shall be reported in an approved proforma as
specified in Appendix-A of IS:4434.
3.12.1.6 Field Investigation for Rock
3.12.1.6.1 Rock Drilling
1) If, during the investigations, large hard fragments or natural rock beds are
encountered, work shall proceed with core drilling methods. The equipment and
procedures for this operation shall conform to IS:1892. The starting depth of drilling
in rock shall be certified by the Employer/PMC. At the end of the investigation, the
hole drilled in rock shall be backfilled with grout consisting of 1 part cement and 3
parts sand by weight.
2) Drilling shall be carried out with NX size tungsten carbide (TC) or diamond tipped drill
bits, depending on the type of rock and according to IS:6926. Suitable type of drill bit
(TC/Diamond)and core catchers shall be used to ensure continuous and good core

recovery. Core barrels and core catchers shall be used for breaking off the core and
retaining it when the rods are withdrawn. Double tube core barrels shall be used to
ensure better core recovery and to retrieve cores from layers of bedrock. Water shall
be circulated continuously in the hollow rods and the sludge conveying the rock
cuttings to the surface shall be collected. A very high core recovery ratio shall be
aimed at in order to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed sample. Attempt shall be made
to recover cores of 1.5m in length. Normally TC bit shall be used. Change over to a
diamond bit shall require the specific written approval of the Employer/PMC, and his
decision as to whether a TC or a diamond bit is to be used shall be final and binding on
Contractor.
3) No drilling run shall exceed 1.5 m in depth. If the core recovery is less than 80% in any
run, the length of the subsequent run shall be reduced to 0.75m. During drilling
operations observations on return water, rate of penetration etc. shall be made
recorded and recorded as per IS:5313.
a) The colour of return water at regular intervals, the depth at which any change of
colour of return water is observed, the depth of occurrence and amount of flow of
hot water, if encountered, shall be recorded.
b) The depth through which a uniform rate of penetration was maintained, the depth
at which marked change in rate of penetration or sudden fail on drill rod occurs,
the depth at which any blockage of drill bit causing core loss, if any, shall be
recorded.
c) Any heavy vibration or torque noticed during the drilling should be recorded
together with the depth of occurrence.
d) Special conditions like the depth at which grouting was done during, drilling,
presence of artesian conditions, loss of drilling fluid, observations of gas discharge
with return water, etc., shall also be observed and recorded.

e) All the observations and other details shall be recorded as per daily drill and
reported in a proforma as given in IS:5313, Appendix A.
3.12.1.6.2 Core Sampling
3.12.1.6.2.1 Core samples shall be extracted by the application of a continuous pressure at one
end of the core with the barrel held horizontally without vibration. Friable cores shall
be extracted from the barrel directly into a suitably sized half round plastic channel
section. Care shall be taken to extrude the samples in the direction of coring to avoid
stress reversal.
3.12.1.6.2.2 Immediately after withdrawal from the core barrel, the cores shall be placed in a tray
and transferred to boxes specially prepared for this purpose. The boxes shall be made
from seasoned timber or any other durably material and shall be indexed on top of
the lid according to IS 4078. The cores shall be numbered serially and arranged in the
boxes in a sequential order. The description of the core samples shall be recorded as
instructed in IS 4464. Where no core is recovered, it shall be recorded as specified in
the standard. Continuous record of core recovery and rock quality designation
(RD/DD/QD) are to be mentioned in the bore log in accordance with IS:1 1315 (Part-II).
3.12.1.7 Laboratory Testing
3.12.1.5.1 Essential Requirements
a) Depending on the types of substrata and soil/rock encountered, appropriate

laboratory tests shall be conducted on soil and rock samples collected in the field.
All necessary laboratory tests shall be conducted and performed on soil/rock
samples by qualified and experienced personnel who are thoroughly conversant
with the work. Three copies of all laboratory test results and records shall be
submitted to Employer/PMC progressively every week. Laboratory tests shall be
carried out concurrently with the field investigations as initial laboratory test
results could be useful in planning the later stages of field work. A schedule of

laboratory tests shall be prepared by Contractor well in advance of starting the

field works to the satisfaction of the Employer/PMC;
b) Laboratory tests shall be conducted using approved apparatus complying with the
requirements and specification of Indian Standards or other approved standards
for this type of work. It shall be ensured that the apparatus are in good working
condition before starting the laboratory tests. Calibration of all the instruments
and their accessories shall be done carefully and precisely at an approved
laboratory before taking up testing of samples in laboratory.
c) All samples, whether undisturbed or disturbed shall be extracted, prepared and

examined by competent personnel properly trained and experienced in soil
sampling. examination, testing and in using the apparatus in conformance with the
specified standards;
d) Undisturbed soil samples retained in liners or seamless tube samplers shall be

removed, without causing any disturbance to the samples, using suitably designed
extruders just prior to actual testing. If the extruder is horizontal, proper support
shall be provided to prevent the sample from breaking. For screw tube extruders,
the pushing head shall be free from the screw shaft so that no torque is applied to
the soil sample in contact with the pushing head. For soft clay samples, the
sample tube shall be cut by means of a high speed hacksaw to proper test length
and placed over the mould before pushing the sample into it with a suitable
piston;
e) While extracting a sample from a liner or tube, care shall be taken to assure that
its direction of movement is the same as that during sampling to avoid stress
reversal;
3.12.1.5.2 Tests

Tests as indicated in these specifications and as necessary and may be requested by

the Employer/PMC, shall be conducted. These tests shall include but may not be
limited to the following:
a) Tests of undisturbed and disturbed soil/rock samples
 Visual and engineering classification;
 Sieve analysis and hydrometric analysis;
 Atterberg’s limits:Liquid, plastic and shrinkage limits;
 Specific gravity;
 Bulk density and natural moisture content;
 Dry Bulk Density;
 Relative density(for sand),
 Chemical analysis
 Swell pressure and free swell index determination
 Proctor compaction test.
b) Tests of undisturbed soil samples:
 Unconfined compression test;
 Box shear test (for sand);
 Triaxial shear tests (depending on the type of soil and field conditions on
undisturbed or remoulded samples):
i. Unconsolidated undrained;
ii. Consolidated drained test;
 Consolidation.

c) Tests on rock samples
 Visual classification;
 Moisture content , porosity and density;
 Hardness
 Stake durability
 Unconfined compression test (both saturated and at in-situ water content);
 Point load strength index;
 Deformability test(both saturated and dry samples).
d) Chemical analysis of sub soil water.
3.12.1.5.3 Salient Test Requirement
a) Tri--axial shear tests shall be conducted on undisturbed soil samples, saturated by

the application of back pressure. Only if the water table is at sufficient depth so
that chances of its rising to the base of the footing are small or nil, the triaxial tests
shall be performed on specimens at natural moisture content. Each test shall be
carried out on a set of three test specimens from one sample at cell pressures
equal to 100, 200 and 300 KPa respectively or as required depending on the soil
conditions:
b) Direct shear test shall be conducted on undisturbed soil samples. The three
normal vertical stresses for each test shall be 100, 200 and 300 KPa or as required
for the soil conditions;
c) Consolidation test shall have loading stages of 10, 25, 50, 75, 100, 200, 400 and
800 KPa. Rebound curve shaft be recorded for all samples by unloading the

specimen at its in-situ stress. Additional rebound curves shall also be recorded
wherever desired by the Employer/PMC;
d) Chemical analysis of subsoil samples shall include determination of PH value,

carbonate, sulphate (both SO3 and SO4), chloride and nitrate contents, organic
matter, salinity and any other chemicals which may be harmful to the foundation
material viz concrete & reinforcement steel. Their contents in the soil shall be
indicated as percentage(%);
e) Chemical analysis of subsoil water samples shall include the determination of

properties such as colour, odour, turbidity, PH value and specific conductivity, the
carbonates, sulphates, chlorides & nitrates contents, organic matter and any other
chemical harmful to the foundation material materials viz concrete &
reinforcement steel. The chemical contents shall be indicated as parts per million
(PPM) based on weight.
3.12.1.8 Geotechnical Investigation Report
3.12.1.8.1 General
Contractor shall submit Geotechnical Investigation Report for each tower location
where investigation have been carried out containing geological information of the
region, procedures adopted for geotechnical investigation, field observations and
laboratory tests,, summarised test data, conclusions and recommendations. The
report shall also include detailed bore logs, subsoil sections, field test results,
laboratory observations and test results both in tabular as well as graphical form,
practical and theoretical considerations for the interpretation of test results,
supporting calculations for the conclusions drawn, etc. Initially, Contractor shall
submit three copies of the report in draft form for Employer/PMC’s review;
a) Contractor’s Geotechnical engineer shall visit Employer/PMC’s Corporate Office

for a detailed review based on Employer/PMC’s comments in order to discuss the
nature of modifications, if any, to be done in the draft report. Contractor shall

incorporate in the report the agreed modifications and resubmit the revised draft
report for approval. Ten copies of the detailed final approved report shall be
submitted to Employer/PMC together with one set of reproducible of the graphs,
tables etc.
b) The detailed final report based on field observations, in-situ and laboratory tests
shall encompass theoretical as well as practical considerations for classification,
design and construction of foundations for different types of soils.
3.12.1.8.2 Data to be furnished
The report shall also include the following
a) A location plan showing the locations and reduced levels of all field test e.g.
boreholes, trial pits, static cone penetration tests, dynamic cone penetration tests,
etc., property drawn to scale and dimensioned with reference to the established
bench mark;
b) A true cross section of all individual boreholes and test pits with reduced levels
and co-ordinates showing the classification and thickness of individual stratum,
position of ground water table, various in-situ tests conducted, samples collected
at different depths and the rock stratum, if encountered;
c) Geological information of the area including geomorphology, geological structure,

lithology, stratigraphy and tectonics, core recovery and rock quality designation
(RD/DD/QD), etc.,
d) Observations and data regarding change of course of rivers, velocity, scour depths,
slit factor, etc., and history of flood details for mid stream and river bank locations;
e) Past observations and historical data, if available, for the area or for other areas
with similar soil profile, or with similar structures in the surrounding areas;
f) Plot of Standard Penetration Test (uncorrected and corrected N values) with depth
for each bore hole;
g) Results of all laboratory test summarized according to Table A (i) for each sample
as well as (ii) for each layer, along with all the relevant charts, tables, graphs,
figures, supporting calculations, conclusions and photographs of representative
rock cores,
h) For all triaxial shear tests, stress vs. strain diagrams as well as Mohr’s circle
envelopes shall be furnished. If back pressure is applied for saturation, the
magnitude of the same shall be indicated. The value of modulus of elasticity (E)
shall be furnished for all tests along with relevant calculations;
i) For all consolidation tests, the following curves shall be furnished for proper
determination of coefficient of consolidation:
i. e vs. log p;
ii. e vs. p;
iii. Compression vs log t or vst.
The point showing the initial condition (e0, p0) of the soil shall be marked on the
curves;
j) The procedure adopted for calculating the compression index from the field curve
and settlement of soil strata shall be clearly specified. The time required for 50%
and 90% primary consolidation along with secondary settlements, if significant,
shall also be calculated.
Table A
SUMMARY OF RESULTS OF LABORATORY TESTS ON SOIL
AND WATER SAMPLES
1. Bore hole test pit. no
2. Depth (m)

3. Type of sample
4. Density(kg/m3)
a) Bulk
b) Dry.
c) Submerged
5. Natural Moisture Water content (%)
6. Particle Size (%)

a) Gravel
b) Sand
c) Silt
d) Clay
7. Index properties
a) LL
b) PL
c) PI
d) LI
8. Soil Classification
a) Classification - As per Unified Soil Classification System and in accordance with
relevant IS code:
b) Description
c) Specific gravity
9. Strength Parameters of Soil/Rock at various depths and soil strata encountered

a) Type
b) C (Cohesion)
c) Ø (angle of internal friction)
d) Angle of repose

10. Bearing Capacity of Soil/Rock at 3.0m and 3.5m below ground level for various width
of footings:
a) Safe/Allowable Bearing Capacity based on shear failure and settlement criteria;
b) Limiting Bearing Capacity;
11. Location of Water Table
a) Location of water table at the time of carrying out the test;
b) Likely highest level of Water Table based on analysis of historical data and
observations of water level in nearby wells/ponds/rivers/steams etc.
12. Consolidation Test
a) e0
b) Pc
c) Cc
d) DP
e) Mv
f) Cv
g) Optimum moisture content and 90% & 95% Proctor’s Dry Density of backfill
material;
13. Shrinkage limit(%)
14. Swell Test

a) S.Pr
b) FS
15. Relative Density (%)for cohesion less soils;
16. Remarks& Recommendations
Notations:
I. For type of Sample:
DB - Disturbed bulk soil sample.

DP - Disturbed SPT soil sample
DS - Disturbed samples from cutting edge of undisturbed soil sample.
RM - Remoulded soil sample
UB - Undisturbed block soil sample
US - Undisturbed soil sample by sampler
W - Water sample
II. For Strength Test :
SCPT - Static Cone Penetration Test
UCC - Unconfined Compression Test
VST - Vane Shear Test
Tuu - Unconsolidated Undrained Triaxial Test
Note: Replace T by D for Direct Shear Test
Tod - Consolidation Drained Triaxial Test
III. For Others :
LL - Liquid Limit (%)
PL - Plastic Limit
PI - Plasticity Index
LI - Liquidity Index
C - Cohesion (kPa)
Ø - Angle of Internal Friction (degrees)
S-Pr. - Swelling Pressure (kPa)

e0- Initial Void Ratio
Pc - Reconsolidation Pressure (kPa)
Cc - Compression Index
DP - Change in Pressure (kPa)
mv- Coefficient of Volume Compressibility (m2/KN)
Cv - Coefficient of Consolidation (m2/hr)
IV. For Chemical Test
As per Specifications - Clause 3.12.1.5.3 (d) &n (e)
3.12.1.8.3 Recommendations
Recommendations shall be provided for each tower location duly considering soil type
and tower spotting data. The recommendations shall provide all design parameters
and considerations required for proper selection, dimensioning and future
performance of tower foundations and the following
a) The subsurface soil/rock strata must provide safe bearing capacity and uplift
resistance by incorporating appropriate safety factors thereby avoiding rupture
under ultimate loads;
b) Movement of the foundation, including short and long term components under
transient and permanent loading, shall be strictly controlled with regard to
settlement, uplift, lateral translation and rotation:
c) Co-efficient of permeability of various sub soil and rock strata based on in-situ
permeability tests.
d) For shallow foundation the following shall be indicated with comprehensive

supporting calculations:

i. Net Safe/allowable as well as limiting bearing capacity of soil/rock strata for

isolated square footing of specified sizes two different founding depths of 3.0
& 3.5m below ground level considering both shear failure and settlement
criteria giving reasons for type of shear failure adopted in the calculation.
ii. Net safe/allowable as well as limiting bearing capacity of soil/rock strata for
raft foundations of widths greater than 5.0 m at 3.0 and 3.5m below ground
level considering both shear failure and settlement criteria.
iii. Rate and magnitude of expected settlement of foundations;
e) The stable slopes for shallow and deep excavations, active and passive earth
pressure at rest and angle of repose for sandy soils shall be furnished. The loading
of the foundations shall not compromise the stability of the surrounding
subsurface materials and the stability of the foundation shall be ensured against
sliding or overturning:-
f) Depending on the subsurface material, water table level and tower type, either
reinforced concrete isolated pad and chimney, cast-in-situ bored pile of special
foundations shall be installed at a given location.
g) In cases where normal open cast shallow foundations appear to be impractical

based on techno-economical considerations foundations appear to be impractical,
special pile foundations shall be given due consideration along with the following:
i. Type of pile foundation and reasons for recommending the same duly
considering the soil characteristics.
ii. Suitable founding strata for the pile:
iii. Estimated length of pile for 500, 750 and 1000 KN capacities; end bearing and
frictional resistance of pile capacity shall be indicated separately:
iv. Magnitude of negative skin friction or uplift forces due to soil swelling.

h) Where the subsoil water and soil properties are found to be chemically aggressive,
the precautions required to be taken during construction including any protective
coating to be applied on the foundations shall be recommended in report and
implemented by contractor during execution; susceptibility of soil to termite
action and remedial measures for the same shall also be dealt with in the report;
i) Suitability of locally available soils at site for filling/backfilling shall be investigated

and adequate compaction shall be ensured to achieve at least 95% of Proctor’s dry
density for backfilled soil.
j) If expansive soil such as black cotton soil is encountered recommendation of

removal o retaining of the same shall be given. In the latter case, detailed
specifications of special requirements shall also be given in the report.
k) Susceptibility of subsoil strata to liquefaction in the event of earthquake and

remedial measures, if required, shall be recommended in report and considered by
Contractor during execution.
l) Any other information of special significance such as dewatering schemes, etc.

which may have a bearing on the design and construction shall be provided.
m) Recommendations for additional soil investigations, beyond the scope of the

present work, shall be given if Contractor considers such investigations necessary.
3.12.1.8.4 Hydrogeological Conditions
The maximum elevation of ground water table, amplitudes of its fluctuations and data
on chemical reactivity of water with regard to foundation materials viz concrete &
reinforcement steel shall be dealt with in the report. While preparing ground water
characteristics, the following parameters shall be specified for each aquifer:
a) bicarbonate alkalinity mg-eq/(deg),
b) pH value

c) content of aggressive carbon dioxide, mg/l;
d) Content of magnesia salts. mg/l, recalculated in terms of ions Mg+2;
e) content of ammonia salts, mg/l, recalculated in terms of ions NH4+
f) content of caustic alkalis, mg/l, recalculated in terms of ions Na+ and K+
g) contents of chlorides,mg/l recalculated in terms of ions Cl-
h) contents of sulphates, mg/l, recalculated in terms of ions SO4-2
i) Aggregate content of chlorides, sulphates, nitrates, carbonates and other salts.

mg/l.
3.12.1.9 Rates and Measurements
3.12.1.9.1 Rates
The contractor’s quoted rates shall be inclusive of carrying out all investigations and
tests and making observations as specified above, establishing the ground level and
co-ordinates at the location of each borehole, test pit etc. No extra payments shall be
made for conducting Standard Penetration Test, collecting, packing, transporting of all
soil/rock samples and cores, recording of results on approved formats, preparation
and submission of geotechnical investigation report and all related works.
3.12.1.10 Specific Requirements for Geotechnical Investigation at River Crossings.
3.12.1.10.1 The entire soil investigation work at river crossing locations (if required) shall be
carried out in accordance with the relevant parts of the specifications for geotechnical
investigation modified to the extent given below.
3.12.1.10.2 Requirements
3.12.1.10.2.1 Boreholes shall be executed to specified depth.If refusal strata is reached (i.e. SPT-N
value is greater than 100 continuously for 5m depth) with characteristics of rock the

borehole may be terminated at shallower depth i.e. at 5m in refusal strata, with prior
approval of the Employer/PMC.
3.12.1.10.2.2 Laboratory testing shall be conducted on all soil/rcok as specified in previous clauses
related to normal foundations.
3.12.1.10.2.3 Geotechnical Report must furnish the following in addition to details required for
normal foundations::
a) Highest flood level (H.F.L.);
b) Maximum flood discharge of river/stream, velocity corresponding to maximum

flood discharge, cross section of river/stream indicating HFL (from authenticated
source or concerned Department of Government of Nepal, Silt Factor etc.
c) Recommendations regarding type of foundation to be adopted at the location.
3.12.1.10.3 A check list for reporting results of river crossing locations is enclosed at Annexure-C.
3.12.1.11 Special Terms and conditions for Geotechnical Investigation in the River bed for
River Crossing locations (if required)
3.12.1.11.1 Contractor is required to mobilize a suitable arrangement (floating pontoon, plant,

equipment etc,) to carry out geotechnical investigation work in creek/river locations
identified by the Employer/PMC.
3.12.1.11.2 In the event of storm or stoppage of work due to any reasons such as flood, etc.,
Contractor shall not be paid extra for mobilization / remobilization of floating
pontoon, plant, equipment, etc.
3.12.1.11.3 Contractor shall fully satisfy himself about the conditions of creek/river (depth of
water, wave currents, wind conditions, etc.) prevailing in the area of proposed
investigation and plan the necessary tools and plant to be deployed before quoting.
Any claim resulting from lack of information and data in this respect shall not be
entertained.

3.12.1.11.4 Contractor shall make his own arrangements for locating the coordinates and
position of boreholes in river with respect to two grid-lines indicated by
Employer/PMC.
3.12.1.11.5 Boring in creek or river shall be payable only below the bed level and no payment
shall be made for lowering the casing in water.
3.12.1.11.6 Contractor shall arrange facility up to the tower location in river for necessary
transportation on water (e.g. motor boat) to facilitate the supervision of work by
officials of Employer/PMC at its own cost.
3.12.1.11.7 Full details of the plant, proposed working method for boring and sampling in water
shall be submitted along with the Tender.
3.12.1.11.8 The unit rate quoted for underwater boring shall include complete work required as
per specification and no separate payment shall be made on any account
3.12.2 Soil Resistivity Measurement

Soil resistivity along the route alignment shall be measured in dry weather by four
electrodes method keeping electrode spacing of 50m. Measurement shall be made
at every 2 to 3 km along the route. In case, soil characteristics change within 1 to 2
km, the value shall also be measured at intermediate locations. The megger reading
and soil characteristics shall also be indicated in the soil resistivity results.
3.12.3 Stability of slope

Study of both short-term and long-term Slope stability at tower location as per the
decision of Employer/PMC using any acceptable software shall be within the scope of
the contractor; and if in-house facilities are not available and contractor may hire the
services of a specialized soil investigation and geotechnical firm for this study. During
detailed and Check survey, the contractor in consultation with Employer/PMC shall
identify such tower locations which may have the risk of slope stability due to formation
of benches for tower foundations or otherwise and he will collect, topographical data,

subsoil data, observe any feature or activity in the vicinity which may have adverse
impact on slope stability and he shall recommend any other type of foundation or
protection measures necessary for long-term stability of slope and protection of tower
foundation.
3.12.4 Geological stability of slope

The majority of the transmission line routes pass through steep Himalayan slopes
physiographical region of middle hills with altitude from below 1300 meter to 3000
meter. The geology of middle hills of the alignment primarily consists of sedimentary
rocks like siltstone, sandstone and mudstone. The middle hill exhibits a rugged
topography with deeply dissected gullies and steep slopes, the hills of Siwalik are
characterized by low terraces, alluvial fans, badlands and thin sandy soil covers. All the
tower locations, however, uphill or downhill of a slope shall be assessed from
engineering geological point of view to ensure avoiding of landslide prone areas and
possibilities, erosion prone soft over ground areas and a report shall be submitted along
with the detailed survey report. The cost of the Engineering geologist’s services and
necessary geological analysis shall be in-built within the contract price of detailed survey
of transmission line route/alignment.
The detailed reports of all the tower locations in steep slope from the stability point of
view shall be submitted by the contractor along with the soil investigation report.
3.12.5 After Carrying out the detailed survey and soil investigation, the Contractor shall
estimate complete BOQ of the transmission Line and submit the same to the Employer.
3.12.6 ENGINEERING GUIDELINES FOR CHECKING/ACCEPTING SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT

The soil investigation shall be carried out in line with the Technical Specification. The
detailed soil Investigation Report shall be signed by the soil investigating agency, Line
Contractor and Employer/PMC Engineer and it shall be ensured that the following
points are included and covered in the soil investigation report:-

3.12.6.1 Normal Locations :

a) All engineering & strength parameters of soil/rock strata and sub-soil water as
specified in Clause 3.12.1.5.3.1, Clause 3.12.1.8.2, Clause 3.12.1.8.3 and Clause
3.12.1.8.4;
b) Present water table and history of variation of water table at the tower location; and.
c) Classification of foundation based on the location of water table, Limiting Bearing
capacity, Soil type, the value of internal friction (), angle of repose of soil/rock in line
with parameters indicated in the standard foundation drawings.
3.12.6.2 River Crossing Locations:-
3.12.6.3 A sketch indicating profile of river crossing locations with borehole positions;
All engineering & strength parameters of soil/rock strata and sub-soil water as
specified in Clause 3.12.1.10 and Clause 3.12.1.11;
3.12.6.4 Natural Ground Level (GL) for all the locations;Note that the GL & HFL shall be
with respect to same reference. For example if HFL is given in RL, the ground level
shall be in terms of RL only. Mixing of level with respect to MSL (Mean Sea level)
& RL shall be avoided.
3.12.6.5 Whether the river is navigable or not;
3.12.6.6 Silt factor calculation based on the laboratory test along with the relevant soil test
results for different layers of the soil;
3.12.6.7 If Rock is encountered prior to termination of bore hole (40m below existing
Ground Level), core drilling shall be done. The details of core recovery (Run wise)
and calculation of Rock Quality Designation (RQD) together with the photograph of
core sample properly placed in a core Box are to be enclosed in the soil
investigation report.
3.13 CONSTRUCTION OF TOWER FOOTINGS

General
3.13.1 The type of footing to be constructed at each tower site shall be based on the soil
characteristics indicated on the route profile sheets/proposed in check formats of soil

classification and as determined by the Employer/PMC during the progress of the work.
The Employer reserves the right to change the type of footing at any location where
conditions during the progress of work indicated the use of a different type of footing.
3.13.2 Each tower shall have four identical footings each of which shall have steel stub angle
embedded in concrete. The footings for each tower in a straight section of the line shall
be placed so that the longitudinal axis of the tower cross arm shall be in a plane
perpendicular to the transverse of the line. Unless otherwise directed by the Employer,
the footings for each angle tower shall be placed in a manner so that the tower cross-
arms lie in a plane bisecting the interior angle formed by the intersection of the
transverses of adjacent sections of the line.
3.13.3 Foundations shall be constructed in accordance with the approved drawings.
3.13.4 The cement quantity specified in clause 3.22.9 is the minimum quantity of cement to be
used by the Contractor for different grade of concrete. However, the Contractor is
required to furnish their cement consumption for different grade of concrete and R.R
stone masonry in field quality plan as applicable.
3.14 SETTING OF STUBS

3.14.1 The stubs shall be set correctly at the exact locations with proper alignment and
precisely at correct levels with the stub setting template/prop setting arrangement and
leveling instruments. Stubs shall be set in the presence of authorized representative of
the Employer available at site, for which adequate advance intimation shall be given to
the Employer by the Contractor. This shall not, however, absolve the Contractor of his
responsibility for correctness of stub setting and for the correct erection of towers.
3.14.2 The stubs shall be set with their tops above the ground level as per approved design and
given a coping without making a plinth.
3.14.3 However, in hilly region for towers with unequal leg extensions, for river crossing towers
and for foundations in highly collapsible soils, props may be used with complete
accuracy and high skilled supervisions, subject to prior approval from Employer/PMC.

3.14.4 For all towers, the Contractor shall submit for approval the proposed method for setting
of stubs.
3.14.5 Sufficient number of Stub setting templates along with appropriate number of jacks
shall be arranged by the Contractor at his own cost for all heights of towers. The
Contractor shall also arrange the props for setting of stubs at specific locations where
use of prop is approved by the Employer/PMC. Stub Templates/Props shall be painted.
3.15. EXCAVATION
3.15.1.1 Scope
This section covers technical specification for excavation for foundation work of
transmission line towers. This shall include all works involved in excavation, dressing of
soil, shoring for foundation work and carting for good quality earth, if required for back
filling. Boring and sub-surface data regarding nature of soil, sub-soil water etc. shown
on drawings or otherwise furnished to the contractor shall be taken as a guidance only,
and variation there from shall not affect the terms of the contract. The Contractor must
satisfy of the character and volume of all works under this item and expected surface,
sub-surface, and /or subsoil to be encountered. He must also satisfy himself about
general conditions of transmission line route and ascertain the existing and future
obstructions likely to come up during the execution of the contract to carry out the work
under this scope.
3.15.2 Drainage In The Vicinity Of Excavation
The contractor shall control the grading in the vicinity of all excavations so that the
surface of the ground shall be properly sloped or dyked to prevent surface water from
running into the excavated areas during construction.
3.15.3 Excavations shall include the removal of all materials required to execute the work
properly and shall be made with sufficient clearance to permit the placing, inspection,
setting of forms and completion of all works for which the excavation was made.
3.15.4 Sides and bottom of excavation shall be cut sharp and true to the slopes indicated in the
drawing. Undercutting shall not be permitted. Earth sides of excavation shall not be

used in lieu of formwork for placement of concrete unless authorized, in special cases,
by the Employer or his representative where limitations of space for large excavation
necessitate such a decision.
3.15.5 When excavator/machines are used for excavation, the last 300mm before reaching the
required level shall be excavated by hand or by such equipment that shall leave the soil
at the required final level in its natural condition.
3.15.6 Suitability for bearing of the bottom of excavations shall be determined by the Employer
in the light of the soil investigation report/trail pit.
3.15.7 The bottom of excavations shall be trimmed to the required levels and when carried
below such levels due to contractor's fault, the excess depth shall be filled to the
required level at the contractor's cost with cement concrete not leaner than M-10 (1: 3:
6) or richer as directed by the Employer in each individual case.
3.15.8 Excavated material shall be placed beyond 1.5 m from the edge of the pit or half the
depth of the pit whichever is more or further away if directed by the Employer.
3.15.9 Excavation shall not be carried below the foundation level of structure close by until
required precautions have been taken.
3.15.10 The contractor shall be responsible for assumptions and conclusions regarding the
nature of materials to be excavated and the difficulty of making and maintaining the
required excavations and performing the work required as shown on the drawing and in
accordance with these specifications. Cofferdams, sheeting, shoring, bracing, and
draining, dewatering etc. shall be furnished and installed as required. The contractor
shall be held responsible for any damage to any part of the work and property caused
by collapse of sides of excavation. Material may be salvaged if it can be done with
safety for the work and structures, as approved by the Employer and no extra claim shall
be entertained for materials not salvaged or any other damage to contractor's property
as a result of the collapse. He shall not be entitled to any claim for redoing the
excavation as a result of the same.

3.15.11 Excavations for foundations where specified shall be carried at least 100 mm below the
bottom of structural concrete and then be brought to the required level of placing lean
concrete of M-10 (1: 3: 6) mix with aggregate of 40 mm maximum nominal size.
3.15.12 Shoring and Strutting
a) Shoring and strutting shall be done keeping in view the requirements given in IS:
3764 (latest). For excavations to be made in sandy soils or water bearing strata or
in any other type of soil where there is every likelihood of pits collapsing, shoring
and strutting made out of timber planks or steel frames of adequate strength as per
requirements shall necessarily be provided. The cost on a/c of shoring and strutting
shall be deemed to be included in the unit rates of excavation.
b) Where excavation required bracing, sheeting or shoring etc., the contractor shall
submit to the Employer the design and drawings showing arrangement and details
of proposed installation for examination and approval, and shall not proceed until
he has received approval from the Employer.
3.15.13 For purposes of excavation of earthwork, the term 'soil ' shall apply to all kinds of soil
etc.
3.15.14 Excavation below Water Table

a) Wherever water table is met with during the excavation the contractor shall
immediately report the fact to the Employer who shall arrange to record the exact
level of the water table. The decision of the Employer in the matter shall be final.
b) The contractor shall dewater and maintain the water table below bottom of the
excavated level during excavation, concreting and back fillings.
c) The guidelines for de - watering during construction specified in IS: 9759 (Latest)
shall be followed. Dewatering shall be carried out either manually or by mechanical
pumps or power driven pumps to facilitate excavation and casting of foundation.
The pits shall be kept dewatered till 24 hours of concreting the foundation.
3.16 EXCAVATIONS FOR TOWER SITES, DRAINAGE AND LINE CLEARANCE

3.16.1 Scope
This item covers excavation for leveling around the individual tower footings, drainage,
line clearance, etc. but excludes the excavation for tower footings. The excavation shall
be carried out as per clause 3.15.0 above and as described herein.
3.16.2 The excavations for tower sites, drainage and line clearance shall be made to the
approved dimensions and shall be finished according to the specified lines and grades.
Where the Employer considers it necessary, adequate drainage shall be provided
around tower footings. Except as otherwise provided in this specification, excavated
materials shall be used for grading as directed, around the site from where the materials
are excavated. The requirement of excavation for tower sites, drainage and line
clearance and the amount of excavation required at a location shall be optional with the
Employer.
3.16.3 Measurement and Payment
Measurement for payment on excavation for tower sites, line clearance and drainage
shall be made to the most practicable lines and grades as approved by the Employer.
Payment for such excavation, including the associated grading shall be made at the unit
rate per cubic meter quoted in the Schedule of prices.
3.17 EXCAVATION FOR TOWER'S FOOTINGS

3.17.1 Scope
This item covers excavation for the individual tower footings etc. The excavation shall
be carried out as per clause 3.15.0 above and as described herein.
3.17.2 Except as hereinafter provided, all excavations for footings shall be made to the lines
and grades of the foundation designs approved by the Employer. Any excavation done
beyond the lines of the foundation shall be at the expense of the Contractor. Any sand,
mud, salt or other undesirable materials which may have accumulated in the excavated
pits shall be removed by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Employer, before placing
the concrete. The rate of excavation shall include all associated activities like shoring,
shuttering, dewatering, stocking piling, dressing, back filling the foundation after

concreting with excavated / borrowed earth (irrespective of lead) and consolidation of

earth, carriage of surplus earth to the suitable point of disposal as required by the
Employer or any other activities related to the completion of foundation works.
3.17.3 Classification of Soil: For Excavation
The materials to be excavated shall be classified in accordance with latest edition of IS:
1200(Part-1), IS: 5613(Part - 2 /Section-2) and IS: 1498 and as follows unless otherwise
specified. Excavation rates for foundation pits shall be quoted by the tenderer for the
following type of soils. The typical foundation concrete drawings are enclosed.
a) ALL TYPE OF SOILS INCLUDING SOFT / DISINTEGRATED ROCK
Generally any soil which yields to the ordinary application of pick and Shovel rake
or other ordinary digging implement: such as vegetables or organic soil, turf, gravel,
sand, silt, loam, clay, peat etc. This shall also include rock and boulders that may be
quarried or split with crowbars. This shall also include laterite and hard
conglomerate.
b) HARD ROCK (REQUIRING BLASTING):
Any rock or boulder for the excavation of which blasting is required.
c) HARD ROCK (BLASTING PROHIBITED):
Hard Rock requiring blasting as described under (b) but where blasting is prohibited
for any reason and excavation is carried out by chiseling, wedging or any other
agreed method.
3.17.4 Where soils at tower locations are of composite nature, i.e. partly soil and partly hard
rock, the payment for excavation shall be made for each according to unit rates, and
total volume of hard rock and soil excavations shall be within guaranteed volume of
excavation. The decision of the Employer shall be final and binding with reference to
the classification of soils.
3.17.5 The cost of drilling, blasting & chiseling shall be included in the quoted rates for hard
rock excavation. Blasting materials shall be arranged by the contractor at his own cost.
For soils other than hard rock excavation rate to be quoted shall include the cost of back
filling with excavated soil/borrowed soil.

3.17.6 Where rock is encountered, the holes for tower footings shall preferably be drilled, but
where blasting is to be resorted to as an economy measure, it shall be done in
accordance with the relevant Nepal/Indian Standard and with utmost care to minimize
the use of concrete for filling up the blasted areas. All necessary precautions for
handling and use of the blasting material shall be taken as per the requirements of the
relevant Safety Code Only the persons having certificate for blasting issued by the
competent authority shall be deployed for carrying out the blasting. In case,
unnecessary large quantities are excavated / blasted resulting in the use of large
volumes of concrete, payment for concrete shall be limited to the guaranteed volume
and the cost of any concrete in excess of that shall be borne by the Contractor. In case
drilling is done, the stubs may be shortened suitably as approved by the Employer.
3.17.7 Measurement and Payment
Measurement for payment shall be based on volume calculations determined by the
existing grade and up to the bottom elevation of structural / lean concrete. If pay line of
adjacent foundations overlap, the overlapped portion shall be paid only once. Payment
for excavations for tower footings shall be made at the unit rate per cubic meter quoted
for the appropriate type of soil. The unit prices quoted shall include the cost of
necessary labour and material for all timbering, shoring and spreading and compacting
the excess material evenly around the site. Unit rate quoted shall also include the cost
of dewatering during excavation and as well as laying of foundations and nothing extra
shall be paid on this account. However, payments shall be restricted to guaranteed
volumes or actual whichever is less as per unit rates. If during the progress of excavation
or after the completion of excavation, any alteration in the dimensions of excavation
actually made become necessary, compensation therefore shall be determined as
follows:
Where additional excavation is called for on account of alteration in the dimensions of
excavation for a footing as a result of the use of improper methods of excavation or
means for supporting excavation or providing inadequate protection of the excavation
against weathering or delay between excavating the pit and placing of the concrete by

the Contractor, the cost of all additional excavation and also that of all additional
reinforcement, cement, concrete, backfilling and compacting shall be borne by the
Contractor.
a) Where additional excavation is called for due to change of the type of footing on
account of different soil conditions, payment shall be made in accordance with the
provision existing in this Specification.
3.18 EXCAVATION OF BORROWED EARTH FOR BACKFILL

3.18.1 Scope
This item covers excavation of borrowed earth required for backfill at the borrow areas
identified by the contractor.
3.18.2 The Contractor shall strip the borrow area of all unsuitable material as may be necessary
to obtain the required quantities of borrowed materials. The surfaces of borrow areas
shall be left in reasonably even condition.
3.18.3 Measurement
No separate payment shall be made to contractor for borrowed earth required for
backfilling and same is deemed to be inclusive in the rates quoted by him for the
complete foundation.
3.19. BACKFILLING
3.19.1 Scope
This section covers the technical requirements for backfilling. The contractor shall
furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for complete performance of the
work in accordance with the approved drawings.
3.19.2 After completion of foundation work and other construction below the elevation of the
final grades and prior to backfilling, all forms, temporary shoring, timber etc. shall be
removed and repairs, if any to the foundations shall be done and the excavation cleaned
of all trash, debris and perishable materials. Backfilling shall begin only with the
approval of the Employer.

3.19.3 Back filling shall normally be done with the excavated soil unless it consists of large
boulders/stones in which case the boulders shall be broken to a maximum size of 80
mm. The backfill material shall be clean and free from vegetation, pieces of timber and
other undesirable materials. Back filling shall be done with inorganic materials,
obtained from the excavation or borrow pits and subject to the approval of the
Employer.
3.19.4 Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon or against any foundation or facility where
there is danger of displacement or damage.
3.19.5 Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not to exceed 200 mm in thickness. Each
layer shall be compacted with proper moisture content with such equipment as may be
required to obtain a density not less than 96% of maximum as determined by the
relevant Indian Standards (latest edition). Trucks or heavy equipment for depositing or
compacting backfill shall not be used within 1.5 m of foundation that may be damaged
by their weight or operation. The methods of compaction shall be subject to the
approval of the Employer. Pushing of earth for backfilling shall not be adopted under
any circumstances.
3.19.6 After backfilling, 150 mm high earthen embankment (Bund) along the sides of
excavation pits shall be made and sufficient water poured in the back-filled pits so that
standing water remains above the back-filled earth for at least 24 hours. All surplus soil
including residual sand, stone and concrete waste lying around, if any, shall be stacked
within the tower base.
3.19.7 While backfilling of footings, the pad shall be covered with about 300 mm layer of fine
material before any coarse material is deposited. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to
the concrete during back filling and compaction of soil.
3.19.8 All topsoil shall be placed at the surface in the case of towers located on cultivated land.
3.19.9 Where excavated material is not considered to be suitable by the Employer for use as
back-fill, borrowed earth shall be used for backfilling, for which the provision of clause
3.19.0 of this Specification shall be applicable.

3.19.10On completion of foundation work, the earth surrounding them shall be accurately
finished to line and grade as shown on drawings or as directed by the Employer.
Finished surface shall be free of irregularities and depressions and shall be within 50 mm
of the specified level.
3.19.11 Measurement
The cost of backfilling and compaction is deemed to be included in the unit prices
quoted for excavation in clause 3.17.7.for complete foundation.
3.20. FORM WORK

3.20.1 Scope
This section covers technical requirements for furnishing and installation of formwork
for construction of foundations. The contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment and
materials required for complete performance of the work in accordance with the
drawings and as described herein.
3.20.2 Formwork shall be as per IS: 456-2000 and shall be composed of steel and /or best
quality shuttering wood of non-absorbent type timber. The timber shall be free from
knots and shall be of medium grain as far as possible.
3.20.3 The formwork shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions of the footings as per
the design drawings. All details of the formwork, placing, tieing, etc. shall be subject to
the approval of the Employer. The Contractor shall submit the design and drawings
showing details of the form construction to the Employer for approval before
commencement of actual work. The formwork shall be adequate to withstand the
pressure of freshly placed concrete or other loads imposed, without failure, movement
or deflection of the component parts. Formwork shall be sufficiently tight to prevent
the loss of liquid from the concrete.
3.20.4 The inner surfaces of formwork coming in contact with concrete shall be smooth and
free from projections. All rubbish particularly chipping, shavings dust and traces of
concrete, if any, shall be removed from the interior of the formwork before the concrete
is placed. The surface in contact with the concrete shall be wetted and sprayed with

fine sand or treated with an approved composition to prevent absorption of water from
the concrete. Such composition shall be kept out of contact with reinforcement and
shall be non-staining and non-injurious to concrete.
3.21 REINFORCEMENT
3.21.1 Scope
This section covers the technical requirements of supply and installation of
reinforcement steel for foundation work of transmission line towers. The contractor
shall furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for complete performance of
the work in accordance with the drawings and as described herein.
3.21.2 Reinforcing steel shall be of High Yield Strength Deformed Bars of Grade Fe 415 or Fe
500 conforming to IS:1786 and shall be clean and free from loose mill scales, dust, loose
rust and coats of paints, oil, grease or other coatings, which may impair or reduce its
bond with concrete. All steel reinforcements including and above 6mm diameter shall
necessarily be of tested quality. The minimum diameter of reinforcement bar to be used
in foundations shall not be less than 8 mm.
3.21.3 Reinforcement accessories shall be furnished by the contractor. Binding wire shall be
annealed iron wire quality not less than No. 16 swg (1.65mm dia.). Bar support, chairs
and bolsters shall be sufficiently strong to support the steel properly.
3.21.4 The bending and fixing of reinforcement bars for reinforced concrete work shall be in
accordance with IS: 2502, SP-34 and IS: 456-2000.
3.21.5 The measurement shall be based on the calculated weights of reinforcement steel as
per approved drawing in ton (MT) correct to 3rd place of decimal, no allowance being
made for wastage. No payment shall be made for wire required for binding the
reinforcement, chairs and spacers as the cost of these is deemed to be included in the
unit rate quoted for complete foundation. The payment shall be limited to guaranteed
Volume/weight or actual as per approved drawing excluding any wastage.
3.22. CONCRETE

3.22.1 Scope
This section covers the technical requirements in respect of materials used in forming,
mixing, placing, finishing, curing and testing of plain and reinforced cement concrete for
foundation work for transmission line towers. The contractor shall furnish all labour,
equipment and materials required for complete performance of the work in accordance
with the drawings and as described herein. The source approval of every item of
concrete viz. cement, aggregates, reinforcement steel are required prior to any
foundation activity.
3.22.2 Standards
a) Except where otherwise specified or implied, the concrete shall conform to the
provisions of IS: 456-2000.
b) The Indian Standard Specifications mentioned below shall be applicable to the
materials and processes used in the preparation of concrete.
(i) IS: 269-1970 - Specification for ordinary rapid hardening and low heat Portland
cement.
(ii) IS: 383-1970 - Specification for coarse and fine aggregate from natural sources
for concrete.
(iii) IS: 5613-(part -2/Sec -2)-1985 - Code of Practice for Design installation and
maintenance of overhead power lines.
(iv) IS: 4091-1967 - Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Foundations
for Transmission line Towers and Poles.
(v) IS:8112-2013 - Ordinary Portland Cement Grade-43;
(vi) IS:12269-2013 - Ordinary Portland Cement, Grade-53.
3.22.3 The provision of the latest revision of IS: 456-2000 shall be complied with unless
permitted otherwise and any other Indian Standard Code (latest revision) shall form a
part of this specification to the extent it has been referred to or applicable within this
specification. This specification shall have precedence in case anything contrary to this
is stated anywhere in the bidding document.
3.22.4 General Requirements

All materials, tests, mixing, placing, formwork, reinforcing and workmanship shall
conform to IS: 456-2000 PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE FOR GENERAL BUILDING
CONSTRUCTION- CODE OF PRACTICE' and other relevant Indian Standard codes.
3.22.5 Materials
a) Cement
Cement used shall be Ordinary Portland Cement of Grade-33 or Grade-43 or Grade-
53 conforming to latest version of IS:269, IS:8112 and IS:12269 respectively. Cement
which has set or partially set or older than 3 months shall not be used.
b) Coarse Aggregates (stone chips or stone ballast)
Aggregates of size ranging from 4.75 mm to the maximum size as stated in the
schedule conforming to IS: 383-1970 shall be termed as coarse aggregates. The
grading limits of the coarse aggregates shall be as per Table -3.1, 3.2, &3.3, as stated
hereinafter. Coarse aggregates shall be more or less cubical in shapes, hard, strong,
durable and of uniform and fine texture, free from faults or planes of weakness, free
from weathered faces and also free from laminations. It shall be clean and free from
clay films and other adherent coating. Porous or absorbent coarse aggregate shall
not be used. Coarse aggregates shall not contain any deleterious material liable to
attack the steel reinforcement. Stone or blasted parts of stones/boulders as
available from excavation may be crushed to form the coarse aggregates and may be
used in the work under this contract provided the same fulfills the quality
requirements stated earlier in this clause. In such cases due recovery shall be made
from the contractor from his bills @ per m3. Coarse aggregates shall be so stored so
as not to get mixed with soils or other deleterious materials. The coarse aggregate
shall be stored on hard firm ground having sufficient slope to provide adequate
drainage for rainwater. The stack of the coarse aggregates shall be such that the
same may be measured easily whenever found necessary by the Employer/PMC or
his authorized representative. If graded aggregates (coarse) are brought to site the
grading limits shall be as per table 3.1
TABLE - 3.1

GRADED STONE AGGREGATE ORGRAVEL

I.S. Sieve size Percentage passing for graded aggregate of nominal
Designation: 40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm
80 mm. 100 - - -
63 mm - - - -
40 mm 95-100 100 - -
20 mm 30-70 95-100 100 100
16 mm - - 90-100 -
12.5 mm - - - 90-100
10 mm 10-35 25-55 30-70 40-85
4.75 mm 0-5 0-10 0-10 0-10
2.36 mm - - - -
When coarse aggregates brought to the site is ungraded, single size coarse aggregates of
different nominal sizes, conforming to the requirements vide Table 3.2 given below,
shall be mixed at site with the other ingredients of concrete either directly in the
mixture or on the platform in the proportion indicated in Table 3.2 below: -
TABLE - 3.2
SINGLE SIZED (UNGRADED) STONE AGGREGATE OR GRAVEL
I.S. Sieve Percentage passing for single sized aggregates of
Designation: nominal size
40mm 20mm 16 mm 12.5mm 10 mm
80 mm. - - - - -
63 mm 100 - - - -
40 mm 85-100 100 - - -
20 mm 0-20 85-100 100 - -
16 mm - - 85-100 100 -
12.5 mm - - - 85-100 100
10 mm 0-5 0-20 0-30 0-45 85-100
4.75 mm - 0-5 0-5 0-10 0-20
2.36 mm - - - - 0-5

TABLE - 3.3
SINGLE SIZED (UNGRADED) STONE AGGREGATE OR GRAVEL
SL. No. Cement Nominal –Size Parts of single size aggregate
Concrete of graded
Grade Aggregates 50mm 40mm 20mm 12.5mm 10mm
required.
1 M-20 20mm - - 2 - 1
2 M-15 40mm - 21/2 1 1/2
3 M-15 20mm - - 3 - 1
4 M-10 40mm - 41/2 11/2 - -
5 M-10 20mm - - 41/2 - 11/2
The proportion indicated in Table -3.3 above are by volume. These proportions may
be varied somewhat by the Employer/PMC after making sieve analysis of the
aggregates brought to the site, when considered necessary for obtaining better
density and strength of concrete. No adjustments in rate shall be made for any
variation in the proportions so ordered by the Employer/PMC. If single size coarse
aggregates are not premixed at site to obtain the graded coarse aggregate required
for the mix, the volume of single size aggregates required for the mix shall be
suitably increased to account for reduction in total volume at the site of mixing.
c) Fine Aggregates
Coarse and fine sand shall be well graded within the limits by weight as specified in
IS: 383(Latest). Fineness modules shall not vary by more than plus or minus 0.20
from that of the approved sample. Fineness modules for sand shall not be less than
2.5.
d) Water
Water used for forming and curing the concrete shall be clean, fresh and free from
injurious amounts of oil, acids, alkalies, organic material or other deleterious
matters in solution or in suspension in such amounts that may impair the strength or

durability of the concrete. Saltish and muddy water shall not be used. Potable water
shall be generally satisfactory. IS: 3025(latest) and IS: 3550(latest) may be followed
for testing of water, if required, by the Employer.
e) Admixtures
The use of admixtures in concrete for promoting workability, improving strength,
entraining air or for any other purpose may be used only with the approval of the
Employer. Addition of admixture shall not reduce the specified strength of concrete
in any case. The admixtures shall conform to IS: 9103 (Latest edition). Admixtures
shall be used, if necessary only with the written permission of the Employer.
3.22.6 Grade of Concrete
Concrete shall be either ordinary or controlled and in grades designated as M-10, M–20
and M-25 etc. In accordance with IS: 456-2000 and these specifications.
3.22.7 Nominal Mix Concrete

a) Nominal mix concrete is recommended only when accurate control is impracticable
and not necessary. However, if nominal mix concrete is allowed by the Employer, it
shall be used only in the concrete of grade M-10 and M-20.
b) Concrete mix proportions for nominal mix concrete shall be, in general, as per IS:
456-2000. Concrete mix shall be of grade M-10 and M-20 having minimum cement
content per cubic meter of vibrated concrete as specified in Table-3.5
c) If nominal mix concrete made in accordance with the proportions given in Table 9
of IS: 456-2000 for a particular grade does not yield the specified strength and fails
to satisfy the requirements of 'Acceptance Criteria' as specified in IS: 456-2000, the
cement content shall be increased as directed by the Employer to obtain a specified
strength at no extra cost to the Employer.
d) Nominal mix concrete proportion for a given grade specified under relevant
paragraph above shall not however, be classified as a higher grade on the ground
that the test strengths were found higher than the minimum specified.

3.22.8 Design Mix Concrete

a) Design mix concrete shall be used on all concrete works except where specified
otherwise. Design mix concrete for use in plain and reinforced concrete structures
shall be in grade M-20 & M-25 respectively.
b) The mix proportions for all grades of concrete shall be designed to obtain strengths
corresponding to the values specified hereinafter for respective grades of concrete.
Preliminary tests as specified in the IS: 456-2000 and required by the Employer,
shall be carried out sufficiently ahead of the actual commencement of the work
with different grades of concrete made from representative samples of aggregates
and cement expected to be used on the job to ascertain the ratios by weight of
cement to total quantities of fine and coarse aggregate and the water cement ratio
required to produce a concrete of specified strength and desired workability.
c) Mix design for all grades of design mix concrete shall be undertaken to investigate
the grading of aggregates water cement ratio, workability and the quantity of
cement required to give cubes the minimum strength specified in IS: 456-2000 and
these specifications whichever is more. The proportions at the mix shall be
determined by weight. Adjustment of aggregate proportions due to moisture
present in the aggregate shall be made:
TABLE - 3.4
S.NO Grade of Concrete M-20 M-25
For cube For cube
i) Preliminary Tests at 28 days 20.0 N/sq.mm 25 .0 N/sq.mm
ii) Work Tests at 7 days 13.4 N/sq.mm 16.75 N/sq.mm
iii) Work Tests at 28 days 20.0 N/sq.mm 25 N/sq.mm

NOTE: a. M-20 grade of concrete to be used for R.C.C foundations.

b. The measured compressive strength of the specimen shall be calculated by
dividing the maximum load applied to the specimen during the test by the cross-
sectional area and shall be expressed to the nearest kg/sq m. Average of three
values shall be taken as the representative of the batch provided the Individual
variation is not more than ± 15 percent of the average. Otherwise repeat tests
shall be made.
c. Preliminary Tests:
A test conducted in laboratory on the trial mix of concrete produced in a
laboratory with the object of:
a. Designing of a concrete mix before the actual concreting operation start;
b. Determining the adjustments required in the design mix when there is a
change in the materials used during the execution of work;
c. Verifying the strength of the concrete mix.
i) Work Tests:
A test conducted in the field or in a laboratory on the specimen made on the
works, out of the concrete being used on the works.
ii) Design mix concrete shall be used on all concrete works, except where specified
otherwise. Work shall not commence until the Employer/PMC has approved the
control / design concrete mix. The contractor shall allow sufficient time for all the
obligations and tests etc. to be carried out prior to approval.
3.22.9 Concrete Mix Requirements
a) Design mix concrete as defined in IS: 456-2000 shall be used for all foundations
unless permitted otherwise.
b) Only well graded coarse aggregates of nominal size 40mm & 20mm conforming to
IS:383 shall be used in concrete work. The nominal size of coarse aggregate in lean

concrete of grade M-10 shall be 40mm and in structural concrete of grade M-15,
M-20 & M-25 shall be 20mm.
c) Fine aggregates of Grade-IV conforming to IS:383 shall not be used for reinforced
cement concrete work. The fineness modulus of fine aggregates shall be not less
than 2.5.
d) Water-cement ratio in concrete mix shall not be more than 0.5.
e) Concrete mix shall conform to IS: 456-2000 and these specifications.
f) The minimum quantity of cement content for each grade of concrete
notwithstanding the strength requirements specified in the specification, shall be
as below:
TABLE - 3.5
Grade of Concrete Minimum Cement content per Cubic
M-10 220 Kg
Metre.
M-20 360 Kg
M-25 410 Kg
g) Based on the contractor's mix design, if the actual requirement of cement for a
grade of concrete is found to be more than those specified above, such excess
quantity of cement shall be used for which nothing extra shall be paid.
h) Concrete slump shall be kept as low as possible consistent with proper handling
and thorough compaction.
i) The concrete shall be of such consistency as to give a slump of 50 to 75 mm with a
maximum water cement ratio of 0.50. Use of admixtures for increasing the work
ability and /or retarding the initial setting time of concrete may be used subject to
approval by the Employer.
j) The admixture content, batching method and time of introduction to the mix shall
be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for compliance with
these specifications.
k) For soil containing sulphate, the minimum cement content in concrete shall be
increased as perprovisions of IS 456-2000. .

l) Assumed Standard deviation for acceptance criteria of concrete shall be as per

Table-8 of IS 456:2000.
3.22.10 Concrete Mix Review

a) The source and quality of concrete materials and concrete proportions proposed
for the work shall be submitted to the Employer for review before the concrete
work is started. Complete certified reports prepared by an independent testing
laboratory and covering the materials and proportions shall be submitted to the
Employer. Review of these reports shall be for generally acceptability only and
continued compliance with all contract provisions only shall be required. The
Employer shall have the option to witness the preparation of the trial mixes,
testing etc.
b) Reports on admixture shall include the classification, brand, manufacturer and
active chemical ingredient. All admixtures, conforming to relevant IS Codes, shall
be the products of one manufacturer approved by the Employer.
c) Reports on the fine aggregates shall include the sources, type, gradation,
deleterious substance, soundness and the results of all tests required to verify
compliance with IS: 383 (Latest edition).
d) Reports on the coarse aggregates shall include the source, type, gradation,
deleterious substances, soundness, abrasion loss and the results of all tests
required to comply with IS: 383 (Latest edition).
e) Using concrete materials acceptable to the Employer, a tentative concrete mix
shall be designed and tested for each size and gradation of aggregates and for
each consistency intended for use on the work. Design quantities and test results
of each mix shall be submitted for review. Acceptable mixes shall be subjected to
field adjustments as necessary to meet the requirements of these Specifications.
f) The report for each tentative concrete mix submitted for review shall include the
following:
(i) Slump on which the design is based.

(ii) Total liters of water per cubic meter.

(iii) Water-cement ratio.
(iv) Ratio of fine to total aggregates.
(v) Weight (surface dry) of each aggregate per cubic meter.
(vi) Quantity of each admixture.
(vii) Air content, if any.
(viii) Compressive strength based on 7 days and 28 days compression test.
(ix) Time of initial set.
(x) Weight of cement used in the mix.
g) Concrete tests specimens shall be made, cured and tests in conformity with IS: 516
(Latest edition). These tests shall be conducted at approved laboratory. The
mould and materials for cubes shall be supplied by the contractors that shall also
arrange to transport the cubes to laboratory at his cost. Actual cost of the testing
shall also be borne by the Contractor.
3.22.11 Concrete Mixing
a) Concrete mixing shall conform to IS: 456-2000. Concrete shall normally be mixed
in a mechanical mixer. Mixing on metallic watertight platform shall be allowed
only in very difficult approach area with the prior approval of Employer. In case of
mixing by hand is allowed, the quantity of cement in concrete shall be 10% more
than used when concrete is mixed in mechanical mixer. The cost of additional
cement shall be borne by the Contractor himself.
b) The proportion of fine and coarse aggregates, cement and water shall be as
determined by the mix design in case of controlled concrete. The quantities of fine
and coarse aggregates shall be determined by weight. The Employer may allow
the quantity of aggregates to be determined by equivalent volume basis after the
relationship between the weight and volume is well established by trial and the
same shall be verified frequently. The quantity of cement shall always be
determined by weight. The water shall be measured accurately after giving proper
allowance for surface water present in the aggregates for which regular check shall

be made for bulking in the case of volume batching in accordance with IS: 2386
(PART -III).
c) Water shall not be added to the mix until all the cement and aggregates
constituting the batch are already in the drum and dry mixed for at least one
minute. Mixing shall be done in a mechanical mixer and the type and size shall be
subjected to the approval by the Employer. Mixer shall be rotated at a speed
recommended by the manufacturer and the water shall not be added to the mix
until all the cement and aggregates constituting the batch are already, in the drum
and dry mixed for at least one minute and thereafter mixing shall be continued for
at least 2 minutes and at least forty (40) revolutions after all materials are in the
drum for batches large than 0.75 cum or fraction thereof. All concrete shall be
mixed until there is a uniform distribution of materials and shall be discharged
completely before the mixer is recharged. All concrete shall be discharged within
3 minutes after the introduction of mixing water to the cement and aggregates,
unless a different time is specified by the Employer.
d) Before beginning a run of concrete all partially set or hardened concrete and
foreign material shall be removed from the inner surfaces of mixing conveying
equipment. The first batch of concrete, through a cleaned mixer, for use in the
works, shall contain 10% additional cement at no extra cost to allow for loss in the
drum. All conveyances, buggies and barrows shall be thoroughly cleaned at
frequent intervals during the placing of concrete. Concrete shall be rapidly
handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit and shall neither be delivered
by spout or troughs nor dumped into carriers with a free fall from the mixer of
more than 1.0M. Every possible precaution shall be taken to prevent segregation
or loss of the ingredients while transporting the concrete.
3.22.12 Concrete Placement
a) The handling, depositing and compacting of concrete shall conform to these
specifications, subject to adjustments by the Employer for weather or placement

conditions. During hot or cold weather, the concreting shall be done as per the
procedure set out in IS: 7861(Part -I & Part-II).
b) Concrete shall not be placed until the formwork, reinforcements and preparation of
surfaces involved in casting are approved by the Employer and shall be placed only
in the presence of Employer or his representative. The concrete shall not be placed
under water and all excavations prepared for concrete shall be maintained free of
water until the concreting is completed and 24 hours thereafter. All surfaces of
foundations upon or against which concrete is placed shall be free from mud and
loose earth.
c) Contractor shall keep an accurate record of the date on which the concrete is cast
for each part of work and date on which the forms are removed.
d) Concrete shall be conveyed to the point of final deposit by methods that shall
prevent the segregation or loss of the ingredients. Concrete shall be deposited in
its final position without moving it laterally in the forms for a distance in excess of
1.5 meter.
e) Concrete shall be deposited in approximately horizontal layers to proper depth for
effecting compaction. However, the depth of a layer shall not exceed 500 mm.
Each layer of concrete shall be plastic when covered with the following layer and
the forms shall be filled at a rate of vertical rise of not less than 150 mm per hour.
Construction joints shall be provided as necessary and as approved by the Employer
to comply with these requirements.
f) Plastic concrete is defined as concrete which can be re-vibrated at least to the
extent that an immersion type vibrator stud shall penetrate the concrete at least 25
mm by vibration action and its weight. Concrete which is no longer plastic but
which must be covered by an additional lift shall be immediately chipped back to
well consolidated concrete and flushed with mortar puddle as follows: The surface
of hardened concrete upon which fresh concrete is to be placed shall be rough and
clean and damp. Surface mortar shall be removed to expose the aggregate. The
hardened surface shall be cleaned of all foreign substances (including curing

compound), washed with clean water, and kept saturated during the 24 hours
period preceding placement of fresh concrete. Coarse aggregates shall be omitted
from the batches of concrete deposited on hardened concrete. This mortar puddle
shall cover the hardened concrete to a depth of not less than 15 mm at every point.
g) To secure maximum density and eliminate formation of air pockets, the concrete
shall be thoroughly vibrated and worked around all reinforcements, embedded
facilities and into corners of forms during and immediately after placingusing 20mm
size needle vibrators. Unless other methods are authorized by the Employer
mechanical vibrators conforming to IS: 2505, IS: 2506, IS: 2514 and IS: 4656, (all
Latest editions) shall be used for this purpose, the type and operation of which is
subject to the approval of the Employer. Needle vibrators shall be petrol operated
and at least three vibrators shall be available at the site at the time of casting of
foundation.
h) The placing of concrete shall be in a continuous operation with no interruption in
each location. Concrete shall be handled from the place of mixing to the place of
final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods, which shall prevent segregation.
i) Repairs of imperfection in concrete shall be completed within 24 hours after the
removal of forms. Repair of concrete shall be performed only in the presence of
the Employer or his representative. All exposed corners shall be slightly rounded or
chamfered. Concrete in the top of chimney shall be sloped to provide drainage
away from stub angles.
3.22.13 Temperature of Concrete
3.22.13.1 In hot weather, the temperature of concrete when it is placed in the forms shall not
be more than 38 deg C. In extreme hot weather some suitable means out of those
mentioned below shall be employed to lower the temperature of concrete:
a) Using cold mixing water.Use of ice for mixing water should be carefully
controlled to ensure complete melting before mixing is completed.
b) Cooling coarse aggregate with cold water by sprinkling or inundation.
c) Insulating mixer drums or cooling with sprays or with wet burlap coverings.

d) Shading materials and facilities hot otherwise protected from heat.

e) Working only at night.
3.22.13.2 In cold weather, the temperature of concrete when it is placed at or below freezing
temperatures shall be maintained at least 4.5 degree C. No frozen material or
material containing ice shall be used. Depending upon the severity of weather, it is
necessary to heat the mixing water or aggregate. Heating of mixing water shall be
preferred. Very hot water shall not be allowed to touch the cement to avoid quick or
flash setting, hot water and coldest portion of aggregate shall be brought together in
the mixer first.
3.22.13.3 If subject to the approval of Employer, heating of aggregate is used, the aggregate
shall be heated uniformly and carefully avoiding overheating and excessive drying.
The average temperature of aggregate shall not exceed 65 deg C and the maximum
temperature shall not exceed 100 deg C.
3.22.14 Stripping Time
Under fair weather conditions with average daily temperature not less than 20 deg C
and when ordinary Portland cement is used, forms may be struck after 24 hours of
placing the concrete. In very cold temperatures, the forms shall be struck after 48
hours of the placing of concrete.
3.22.15 Protection of Concrete
a) In very cold weather, the concrete shall be protected from freezing for at least 48
hours of placement when the mean daily temperature is 4.5 deg C. When the
mean daily temperature in the vicinity of work site falls below 4.5 deg C for more
than one day, the concrete shall be maintained at a temperature not less than 10
deg. C for at least 72 hours after it is placed. Concrete cured by water curing shall
be protected at 10 deg. C.
b) In hot weather, the curing shall be commenced even before stripping the form
work by loosening the forms and allowing curing water to run down between the
concrete forms.
3.22.16 Curing

a) Curing of concrete shall be shall be done for a minimum period of 10 days after
stripping of the form work. The curing time may be increased by Employer in case
of extreme cold weather
b) Uncovered concrete footing above the ground level shall be cured by wrapping
around hessian sacking or similar absorbent material and keeping it constantly
wet. For curing the foundations below ground level, after backfilling, 150 mm
high earthen embankment along the sides of excavation pits shall be made and
sufficient water shall be poured in the backfilled pits so that standing water may
remain above the backfilled earth.
c) In high temperature and low humidity areas, more frequent sprinkling shall be
done.
d) In cold weather at or below freezing temperature, concrete shall be insulated
with layer of stray or similar material covered with a water proof sheet material
to help retention of the original heat of concrete plus heat of hydration. Curing
shall be carried out for longer periods to the satisfaction of Employer, to ensure
that the concrete attains the strength and quality.
3.22.17 Sampling and Testing
a. Samples of concrete shall be taken at the direction of the Employer in the field in
accordance with IS: 1199 'Methods of Sampling & Analysis of Concrete.' The
testing shall be carried out as per IS: 456-2000 and other relevant codes.
b. The sample shall be tested for strength and consistency at any approved
laboratory in accordance with IS: 516. The moulds and material for cubes shall be
supplied by the Contractor who shall also arrange to transport the cubes to
laboratory at his cost. Actual cost of the testing shall also be borne by the
Contractor.
c. Number of samples to be taken for testing and verifying concrete strength shall
be in accordance with IS: 456-2000 and as per the directions of Employer.

d. Samples shall be cured under laboratory conditions except when in the opinion of
the Employer extreme weather conditions may prevail at which time the
Employer may require additional cubes cured under job conditions.
e. The Contractor shall promptly furnish to the Employer certified reports of all tests
made by the testing laboratory.
f. If the strength of the cubes for any portion of the concrete work falls below the
specified compressive strength, the criteria for acceptance of the portion of the
work shall be as stipulated in IS: 456-2000. The Employer shall also reserve the
right to reject whole or any part of the work. In case of acceptance of such works,
the standard deviations shall be worked out, and examined by the Employer and
if he is satisfied only then such works can be accepted at the reduced rates.
Furthermore, the Employer shall have the right to order a change in the mix or
the water cement ratio for the remaining portion of the foundations at no extra
3.22.18 Concreting of Foundation
The Contractor shall inform the Employer or his authorized representative sufficiently in
advance about the programme of concreting the location.
3.22.19 Measurement
Measurement of concrete shall be in cubic meter correct up to second place of decimal
and it shall be based on approved drawings of foundations, no deduction shall be made
for embedments and reinforcements.The payment shall be limited to guaranteed
volumes or actual as per approved drawing. The payment of foundation shall be made
for complete location.For foundation of special tower apart from pile foundation, the
unit rate of excavation, concrete and reinforcement steel of DD type of tower in
different type of soil shall be applicable as quoted in the price schedule
3.23 PROTECTION OF TOWER FOOTINGS

3.23.1 The work shall include providing all necessary stone revetment, Stone
masonry/concrete breast walls and retaining walls, earth filling above ground level etc.

Special measures for protection of foundations shall be taken in respect of locations

close to/in nallah, riverbeds, etc. by providing suitable crate of galvanized wire netting
and meshing packed with boulders. The top seal cover of the stone revetment work and
stone masonry works in breast/retaining walls shall be done with M-15 concrete (1:2:4
nominal mix). The Contractor shall furnish recommendations for providing protection to
tower foundation at such and other critical locations. Where the ground surface is
irregular, the foundation shall be finished off in a substantial and permanent way by
forming a plinth by side cutting and building a suitable stone revetment or in case of
rock foundation by building up with cement concrete as desired by the Employer. The
number of retaining walls and breast walls enroute transmission line shall be intimated
by the Contractor for obtaining the decision of the Employer before taking up erection.
3.23.2 Measurement
The unit rate of protection of the tower footing shall be quoted in the Schedule of Prices
and shall include the pointing using 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand) mortar on masonry of
retaining / breast walls. The payment of foundation shall be made for complete
location.
3.24 GROUNDING
3.24.1 The installation of earthing sets shall be in accordance with relevant standard
specifications. The galvanized steel pipe sets shall be installed in the ground near the
towers and connected to the tower legs by means of galvanized steel flat as shown
Section 6 Drawing. The grounding shall be affected by making about 350 mm dia. and
3600 mm deep pit at a distance of not less than 3650 mm diagonally away from the
stubs and filling in the pits with finely broken coke having granite sizes not more than 25
mm thick. The coke shall be maintained up to a distance of 150 mm from the pipe on all
sides. The top edge of the pipe shall be at least 600 mm below the ground level. The
steel strip shall be buried not less 450 mm deep from the ground level. Where tower
footing resistances exceed that specified in Section 3 of this Specification, the desired
earthing resistance shall be obtained by installing additional pipe earthing sets. The

distance between two electrodes in such a case shall preferably be not less than twice
the length of electrode.
3.24.2 At locations, where it is not possible to obtain the desired footing resistance by the
means mentioned in clause 3.25.1, the installation of counterpoise earthing shall be
resorted to. Four galvanized steel stranded conductors shall be radiated from tower as
shown in drawing volume. The measured earthing resistance of tower shall not exceed
10 ohms in dry weather. Earthing resistance tester shall be calibrated and the certificate
shall be submitted to the employer.
3.24.3 In case the measured resistance of the earthing arrangement described in 3.24.2 still
exceeds the values, the use of continuous counterpoise shall be made as per the
arrangement shown in Section 6 Drawing.
3.24.4 Where a tower stands on rock, efforts shall be made to obtain a good ground by
carrying a length of galvanized steel flat from the tower legs to earthing pipe driven in
damp soil at the shortest possible distance from the tower. The connecting flat shall be
buried in a groove cut in the rock surface and adequately protected from damage.
3.24.5 The Contractor shall measure and record the resistance of each tower to earth after
erection and before installing the earth wire and submit the same to the Employer.
3.25 HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION OF STEEL
All galvanized tower steel, including stub angles, shall be handled and transported to
work site by the Contractor with care to avoid bending of members and damage to
galvanized surfaces.
3.26 TOWER ERECTION

3.26.1 The Towers shall be erected by member by member assembly or any other standard
method without overstressing any member on foundations at least after 28 days. of
casting of foundation. The tower shall be erected in the best workmanlike manner.
3.26.2 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for correct erection for all towers as per the
approved drawings and their correct setting on the alignment finally approved by the
Employer. The towers must be truly vertical after erection, the permitted tolerance in
verticality being 1 in 360 of the tower height. No straining shall be permitted to make
the towers vertical.
3.26.3 A reasonable amount of drifting as permissible in IS: 5613 (Part 2/ Section -2) 1985 shall
be allowed in assembling, but reaming for correction of mis-matched holed due to shop
errors shall not be permitted. If any shop errors are discovered, the Contractor shall
notify the Employer, who shall decide whether the errors may be corrected in the field
or members returned to tower fabricator for correction or replacement. All galvanized
surfaces damaged as a result of correction shall be made good as directed by the
Employer.
3.26.4 All errors and omissions in erection of towers shall be corrected by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Employer. Any tower damaged during erection due to incomplete
bolting, improper guying or any other reasons, shall be repaired/ replaced by the
Contractor as directed by the Employer.
3.26.5 Assembly
3.26.5.1 The method followed for the erection of towers, shall ensure the points mentioned
below:
a) Straining of the members shall not be permitted for bringing them into position. It
may, however, be necessary to match hole positions at joints and to facilitate this,
tommy bars not more than 450 mm long may be used.
b) Before starting erection of an upper section, the lower section shall be completely
braced and all bolts provided in accordance with approved drawings.

c) All plan diagonals relevant to a section of tower shall be placed in position before
assemble upper section is taken up.
d) The bolt positions in assembled towers shall be as per IS: 5613 (part-2 / Section-2)-
1985.
e) Tower shall be fitted with number plate, danger plate, phase plates, circuit plate
and anti-climbing device as described.
f) All the blank holes, if any left, after complete erection of the tower, are to be filled
up by bolts and nuts of correct size.
3.26.6 TIGHTENING AND PUNCHING OF BOLTS AND NUTS

3.26.6.1 All nuts shall be tightened properly using correct size spanners. Before tightening, it
shall be ensured that filler washers and plates are placed in relevant gaps between
members, bolts of proper size and length are inserted and one spring washer is placed
under each nut, and in case of step bolts, spring washers have been placed under the
outer nuts. The tightening shall progressively be carried out from the top downwards,
care being taken that all bolts at every level are tightened simultaneously. The threads
of bolts projecting outside the nuts shall be punched at three positions on the diameter
to ensure that the nuts are not loosened in course of time. If during tightening, a nut is
found to be slipping or running over the bolt threads, the bolt together with the nut
shall be replaced.
3.26.6.2 Anti-theft bolts shall be used for the lower 3 meter of the tower.
3.27 TOWER ACCESSORIES

3.27.1 "Each tower shall be fitted with number plate, danger plate, circuit plate and phase
plates."
3.27.2 Anti- climbing device shall be provided on all towers.
3.27.3 Bird- guards shall be provided on suspension towers.

3.27.4 The compression dead end and jumper connection in tension assemblies shall be fixed
to conductor in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations which shall be
furnished by the contractor.
3.28 PAYMENTS FOR ERECTION

Payment terms as per number after completion of erection of tower as given in the
price schedule.
3.29 INSULATOR HOISTING

3.29.1 The insulators, string fittings and insulator string assembly drawings shall be supplied
bythe Contractor. The numbers of insulator units required per string are given in
chapter-6 of Section II and Section-III of this specification for suspension as well as
tension strings.
3.29.2 Damaged insulators and fittings, if any, shall not be used in the assemblies. All
insulators shall be cleaned in a manner that shall not spoil, injure or scratch the surface
of the insulator, but in no case, any oils shall be used for the purpose. Before hoisting,
the components of the insulator string shall be checked for any damage, crack and
missing of security clips etc.. Corona control rings in case of 220 kV lines only shall be
fitted in an approved manner. The yoke arrangements shall be horizontal for tension
and vertical in transverse direction for twin suspension strings. Torque wrench shall be
used for fixing different components, like suspension clamp for conductor and ground-
wire, etc. whenever, recommended by the manufacturer of the same.
3.29.3 The installation of string assemblies shall also include the installation of armour rod sets
at suspension locations.
3.29.4 The compression dead ends and jumper connection in tension assemblies shall be fixed
to conductor in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations which shall be
furnished by the Contractor.
3.29.5 Sacking shall be wrapped over the cross arm members of towers to prevent damage to
the galvanized surface during hoisting of string assemblies.

3.29.6 For checking the soundness of the insulators, IR measurement using 10 KV (DC) Megger
shall be carried out on insulators.
3.29.6 Payment for installing insulator assemblies of various types shall be included in the rates
quoted in the Schedule of Prices for stringing of conductors.
3.30 HANDLING OF CONDUCTOR AND GROUND WIRE/OPGW

3.30.1 Before commencement of stringing, the Contractor shall submit stringing charts for the
conductor and Earthwire/OPGW for various temperatures corresponding to spans and
equivalent spans prepared on the basis of the data given in Section - 3 of this
Specification and also on the data obtained from the detailed survey for the approval of
the Employer.
3.30.2 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for any damage to the towers or
conductor's during stringing. While running out the conductors, the care shall be taken
that the conductors do not touch and rub against the ground or objects which could
cause scratches or damage to the strands. The conductor shall be run out of the drums
from the top in order to avoid damage due to chafing. Immediately after running out,
the conductor shall be raised at the supports to the levels of the clamp and placed into
the running blocks. The groove of the running blocks shall be of such a design that the
seat is semi-circular and larger than the diameter of the conductor, ground wire and it
does not slip over or rub against the sides. The grooves shall be lined with hard rubber
or neoprene to avoid damage to conductor and shall be mounted on properly lubricated
bearing.
3.30.3 The running blocks shall be suspended in a manner to suit the design of the cross-arm.
All running blocks, especially those at the tensioning end shall be fitted on the cross
arms with jute cloth wrapped over the steel work and under the slings to avoid damage
to the slings as well as to the protective surface finish of the steel work. Normally,
suspension towers shall not be used even for temporary termination. In case small or
medium angle towers are used even for temporary terminations, these shall be well
guyed by dead-man anchoring/other anchoring methods and steps be taken by the

Contractor to avoid damage. Guying proposal along with necessary calculations shall be
submitted by the Contractor to Employer/PMC for the approval. Proper T & P shall also
be made available to the Employer by the Contractor for checking tensions in the guy
wires. The drums shall be provided with a suitable braking device to avoid damages,
loose running out and kinking of the conductor. The conductor shall be continuously
observed for loose or broken strands or any other damage. When approaching end of a
drum length, at least three coils shall be left when the stringing operations are to be
stopped. These coils are to be removed carefully, and if another length is required to be
run out, a joint shall be made as per the recommendations of the conductor
manufacturers.
Alternative procedure for stringing other than that specified may be offered.
3.30.4 Repairs to conductors, if necessary, shall be carried out during the running out
operations, with repair sleeves. Repairing of conductor surface shall be done only in
case of minor damage, scuff marks etc. keeping in view both electrical and mechanical
safety requirements. The final conductor surface shall be clean smooth and shall be
without any projections, sharp points, cuts abrasions etc.
3.30.5 Conductor splices shall be so made that they do not crack or get damaged in the
stringing operation. The Contractor shall use only such equipment/methods during
conductor stringing which ensures complete compliance in this regard.
3.30.6 Derricks and scaffolding shall be used where roads, rivers, channels, telecommunication
or overhead power lines, railways lines, fences or walls have to be crossed during
stringing operations. It shall be seen that normal services are not interrupted or
damage caused to property. Shut-down shall be obtained when working at crossing of
overhead power lines. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the proper
handling of the conductor, Earth wire/OPGW and accessories in the field.
3.30.7 Suitable guards/sheaves shall be used to protect the conductor from damage in places
where it would otherwise be impossible to save the conductors from coming in contact
with objects which may injure the conductors. Guards shall consist of material over

which the conductor may slide without injury and shall be subject to the approval of
Employer.
3.30.8 The sequence of running out shall be from top to downwards, i.e. The OPGW shall be
run out first, followed by the conductors in succession. Unbalances of loads on towers
shall be avoided as far as possible.
3.30.9 The proposed 220 kV Transmission lines may run parallel for certain distance with the
existing 115 kV, 220 kV, 500 kV lines if any, in particular 33 KV lines which may remain
energized during the stringing period. As a result there is a possibility of dangerous
voltage build up due to electromagnetic and electrostatic coupling in the pulling wire
conductors and ground wires/OPGW, which although comparatively small during
normal operations can be severe during switching operation. It shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to take adequate safety precautions to protect his employees and other
from this potential danger.
3.30.10 The medium angle tension towers of 220 kV lines are not designed for one side
stringing. In case, small angle towers are used for one side stringing, proper guying
arrangement shall be made by the Contractor during stringing to avoid unbalanced
loads on towers. All the expenditure on account of the above work is deemed to be
included in the tender and no extra payment shall be made for the same.
3.31 STRINGING OF CONDUCTOR AND GROUND WIRE/OPGW

3.31.1 Contractor should have at least 2 (two) set of tension stringing equipment and
shallarrange an additional tension stringing equipment at the time of stringing, if
required as directed by the employer.
3.31.2 The stringing of the conductor for 220 kV lines shall be done by the control tension
method. For hilly terrain, manual method of stringing can be used. The equipment shall
be capable of maintaining a continuous tension per bundle conductor such that the sag
for each conductor is about twenty percent greater than the sags specified in the
stringing sag table. The stringing of conductor for 220/132kV with single conductor shall
be done by standard stringing method.

3.31.3 The bidder shall give complete details of the stringing methods he proposes to follow.
Prior to stringing the Contractor shall submit the stringing charts for the conductor and
earth wire showing the initial and final sags and tension for various temperatures and
spans alongwith equivalent spans in the lines for the approval of the Employer/PMC
3.7.3 A controlled stringing method suitable for simultaneous stringing of the sub conductors
shall be used. The four/two conductors making up one phase bundle shall be pulled in
and paid out simultaneously. These conductors shall be of matched length. Conductors
or earth wires shall not be allowed to hang in the stringing blocks for more than 96
hours before being pulled to the specified sag.
Conductor creep are to be compensated by over tensioning the conductor at a
temperature as indicated in Section-6 of this specification lower than the ambient
temperature or by using the initial sag and tensions indicated in the tables.
3.32 JOINTING
3.32.1 All the joints on the conductor and Earth wire/OPGW shall be of compression type, in
accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer for which all necessary
tools and equipment like compressors, dies, etc.shall have to be arranged by the
Contractor. Each part of the joint shall be cleaned by wire brush to make it free of rust
or dirt etc. and shall properly be greased with anti-corrosive compound, if required and
as recommended by the supplier before the final compression is done with the
compressors.
3.32.2 All joints or splices shall be made at least 30 meters away from the structures. No joints
or splices shall be made in the spans crossing over power lines, main roads, railways and
rivers. The joints in the tension spans shall be permitted after the approval of the
Employer Engineer. Not more than one joint per sub-conductors shall be allowed in one
span. The compression type fitting used shall be self - centering type or care shall be
taken to mark the conductors to indicate when the fitting is centered properly.
Duringcompression or splicing operation, the conductor shall be handled in such a
manner as to prevent lateral or vertical bearing against the dies. After pressing the

joint, the aluminum sleeve shall have all corners rounded; burrs and sharp edges
removed and smoothened.
3.32.3 During stringing of conductor, to avoid any damage to the joint, the Contractor shall use
a suitable protector with mid span compression joints in case joints are to be passed
over pulley blocks /aerial rollers. The size of the groove of the pulley shall be such that
the joint along with protector can be passed over it smoothly. The arrangement to be
adopted shall be explained by the contractor.
3.33 SAGGING-IN-OPERATION
3.33.1 The conductors and Earth wire/OPGW shall be pulled up to the desired sag as per the
approved stringing chart or sag tables and left in running block for at least one hour
after which the sag shall be re-checked and adjusted, if necessary, before transferring
the conductors from the running blocks to the suspension clamps. The conductors shall
be clamped within 36 hours of sagging in.
3.33.2 The sag shall be checked in the first and the last span of the section in case of sections
up to eight spans and in one intermediate span also for sections with more than eight
spans. The sag shall also be checked when the conductors have been drawn up and
transferred from running blocks to the insulator clamps.
3.33.3 The running blocks, when suspended from the transmission structure for sagging shall
be so adjusted that the conductors on running blocks shall be at the same height as the
suspension clamp to which it is to be secured.
3.33.4 At sharp vertical downward angles, the sags and tensions shall be checked on both sides
of the angles, the conductor and earth wire shall be checked on the running block for
equality of tension on both sides. The suspension insulator assemblies shall normally
assume vertical positions when the conductor is clamped.
3.33.5 Tensioning and sagging operations shall be carried out in calm weather when rapid
changes in temperatures are not likely to occur. In areas where calm weather is not
prevalent during working season, the Contractor shall recommend the precautions to be
taken during final tensioning and sagging of conductor.

3.34 TENSIONING AND SAGGING OF CONDUCTORS AND GROUNDWIRE/OPGW

3.34.1 The tensioning and sagging shall be done in accordance with the approved stringing
charts before the conductors and earth wire/OPGW are finally attached to the towers
through the earth wire/OPGW clamps for the ground wire and insulator strings for the
conductor. Calibrated Dynamometers shall be employed for measuring tension in the
conductor and ground wire/OPGW. The dynamometers employed shall be periodically
checked and calibrated with a standard dynamometer.
3.34.2 Provision for ground undulations, errors in stringing shall be considered at the time of
stringing of conductors.
3.34.3 No pre-stressing / over-tensioning of the earth wire/OPGW shall be done.
3.34.4 The Contractor shall terminate the line conductors and earth wire/OPGW at the dead
end towers on each end of the line. Payment for stringing work shall be made for the
actual route length of the line at the unit rates quoted for the stringing of conductors
and earth wire/OPGW in the Schedule of Prices.
3.34.5 The adjustment of conductor sag by means of sag adjustment devices provided in the
insulator string or additional insulator shall invariably be not permitted at the time of
stringing of the conductors.
3.34.6 The connections of conductors at mid span compression joints shall be checked for
electrical efficiency.
3.35 CLIPPING IN
3.35.1 Clipping of the conductors in position shall be done in accordance with the
recommendations of the manufacturer. Conductor shall be fitted with the armour rods
at suspension point and with vibrations dampers at suspension and tension points.

3.35.2 The jumpers at the section and angle towers shall be formed to parabolic shape to
ensure maximum clearance requirements. Pilot suspension insulator string shall be
used, if so desired by the Employer to restrict the jumper swings to the designed values.
3.35.3 Fasteners in all fittings and accessories shall be secured in position. The security clip
shall be properly opened and strung into position.
3.36 FIXING OF CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE/OPGW ACCESSORIES

3.36.1 Vibration dampers and other conductor and earth wire/OPGW accessories supplied
shall be installed by the contractor as per the design requirements and respective
manufacturer’s instruction. Vibration dampers shall be fitted within 24 hours of the
conductor clamping. While installing the conductor and earth wire/OPGW accessories,
the proper care shall be taken to ensure that the surfaces are clean and smooth and no
damage shall occur to any part of the accessories.
3.36.2 The Contractor shall ensure that drain holes, if provided, in the weights of the vibration
dampers are open. The vibration dampers shall be installed at the intervals indicated by
the manufacturer and approval of the Employer. The required number of spacer cars/
cycles with meter counters suitable for installing vibration damper shall be arranged by
the Contractor.
3.36.3 Payment:Rates for installing all the required accessories viz. vibration dampers, spacers
shall be included in the rates of stringing of conductor and ground wire/OPGW.
3.37 REPLACEMENT OF TOWER MEMBERS

If any replacements are to be effected after stringing and tensioning or before handing
over, leg members and bracings shall not be removed without reducing the tension on
the tower with proper guying or releasing the conductor. If the replacement of cross
arms becomes necessary after stringing, the conductor shall be suitably tied to the
tower at tension points or transferred to suitable roller pulleys at suspension points.
3.38 FINAL CHECKING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

3.38.1 After completion of the works, final checking of the line shall be done by the Contractor
to ensure that all the foundation works, tower erection, and stringing have been done
strictly according to the specifications and as approved by the Employer. All the works
shall be thoroughly inspected keeping in view of the following main points:
a) Sufficient backfilled earth is lying over each foundation pit and it is adequately
compacted and levelled.
b) Concreted chimneys and their copings are in good finally shaped as per approved
conditions.
c) All the tower members are correctly used, strictly according to final approved
drawings and are free from any defect or damage whatsoever.
d) All bolts are properly tightened and punched /and tack welded (as specified).
e) The stringing of the conductors and Earth wire/OPGW has been done as per the
approved sag and tension charts and desired clearances are clearly available.
f) All conductor and Earth wire/OPGW accessories are properly installed.
g) All other requirements to complete the work like fixing of danger plate, phase
plates, number plate, anti-climbing device, Bird guards etc. are properly installed.
h) Wherever required, it should be ensured that revetment is provided.
i) The original tracings of profile, route alignment and tower design, structural
drawings bill of material, shop drawings of all towers are submitted to the
Employer for reference and record.
j) The line insulation is tested by the Contractor by providing his own equipment,
labour etc. to the satisfaction of the Employer.
k) The line is tested satisfactorily for commissioning purpose.
l) The right-of-way all along the route of line is clear of all obstructions and meets
requirements of clause 5.3 of IS: 5613 (Part -2/ Section-2) - 1985.
m) The contractor shall arrange for inspection of the transmission line with the
Employer, related authorities and other parties before energizing the line. The
contractor shall carry out the loop test, insulation test and megger test on the

phase conductor and OPGW, Those test records shall be submitted to Employer
for approval.
n) Any defects found as a result of inspection and testing shall be rectified by the
Contractor forthwith to the satisfaction of the Employer without any extra
charges.
o) Before taking over of the line by the Employer, the line shall be energized at full
working voltage.
3.39 PAYMENTS
3.39.1 Payment for stringing of Conductor, Earthwire and OPGW shall be done on the basis of
per kilometer and irrespective of number of tension/suspension towers. However,
stringing for river crossing spans have been given separately in the BPS. No separate
payment shall be made for hoisting of insulators and fitting of all the hardware and
accessories which is deemed to be included in the unit rate of stringing.
3.39.2 No claim for idle period resulting from any "force majeure" condition shall be
entertained by the Employer.
3.40 ERECTION SCHEDULE
3.40.1 The transmission line(s) covered under this specification are required to be completed
as per the programme given in the Annexure I.
3.40.2 The tenderer shall submit erection/construction schedule(s) covering all phases of work
starting from the date of award of contract up to the commissioning of the transmission
line, in the form of flow-diagrams showing critical path construction schedule of all
phases of work simultaneously or in the form of Bar Chart for all the lines separately.
3.41 PROGRESS REPORT
3.41.1 Tower wise Weekly and monthly Progress Reports of erection work in triplicate shall be
submitted by the Contractor.
3.42 BENCHING
3.42.1 When the line passes through hilly / undulated terrain, leveling the ground may be
required for casting of tower footings. All such activities shall be termed benching and

shall include cutting of excess earth and using the same for filling if required for
formation of benching and if excavated earth is found suitable for filling and removing
the excess earth to a suitable point of disposal as required by Employer. However, no
foundation shall rest on filled up soil. Benching shall be resorted to only after obtaining
the written approval from Employer/PMC. The topographical survey of tower location
requiring benching shall be carried out on suitable scale and contour interval (e.g. 1:100
Scale and 0.5 m contour interval) so that the volume of the earth to be cut could be
measured before cutting and approved by Employer for payment purposes. No separate
payment for topographical survey work shall be made and it shall be presumed to have
been included in the items required for formation of bench. Further, to minimize
benching, unequal leg extensions shall be considered and provided if found economical.
If the levels of the pit centres are found to be in sharp contrast with the level of tower
centre, the suitable hill side leg extensions may be deployed as required. The proposal
shall be submitted by the Contractor with detailed justification to the Employer/PMC for
approval.
3.43 PROTECTION OF TOWER AND TOWER FOOTING

3.43.1Tower shall be spotted such that the protection works required for tower foundation, such
as revetment, breast wall & retaining wall, areminimum and optimum. For tower
locations in undulated terrain such as hill / mountain slopes, options like use of
unequal leg extensions for towers, unequal chimney extensions etc. shall be explored
by the contractor for optimizing the need for revetment & benching
3.43.2 The work shall include all necessary stone revetments, breast walls, retaining walls,
concreting and earth filling above ground level, the clearing from site of all surplus
excavated soil, special measures for protection of foundation close to or in small
water streams (Nalas), river bank / bed, undulated terrain, protection of uphill /
downhill slopes required for protection of tower etc., including suitable revetment,
breast walls, retaining walls. The top cover of stone revetment, breast walls and
retaining walls shall be sealed with M-15 concrete (1 Cement : 2 Fine Aggregates : 4

Coarse Concrete). Contractor shall recommend suitable protection at such locations

wherever required. Details of protection of tower/tower footing are given in drawing
enclosed with these specifications for reference purpose only.
3.43.3 In protection of tower footings works the backfilling shall generally be done using soil
excavated at site unless deemed unsuitable for backfilling. In the latter case,
backfilling shall be done with borrowed earth of suitable quality irrespective of leads
and lift. The unit rate in Price Schedules shall include the required lead and
consolidation and leveling of earth after backfilling.
3.43.4 The provisional quantities for protection work of foundations are furnished in Price
Schedule of Bid. The unit rates shall also be applicable for adjusting the actual
quantities of protection works done. These unit rates shall hold good for protection
work carried out on down hills or up hills slopes applicable for the tower locations.
3.43.5 The unit rates for random rubble stone masonry in revetments, breast walls &
retaining walls quoted in price schedule shall also include excavation and construction
of stone masonry in 1:5 (1 Cement : 5 Coarse Sand) cement mortar and pointing of
masonry joints as specified in approved construction drawings inclusive of cost of all
materials, labour and hire charges of all plant & equipments. Unit rate for top sealing
with M-15 concrete is to be quoted separately and payment shall be made for
quantities as per approved drawings. For payment purposes, the volume of random
rubble masonry shall be measured from bottom to top sealing coat and paid at the
quoted rates indicated in price schedule
3.43.6 For some of the locations in small water streams (Nalas), river bed or undulated terrain
etc., boulders of minimum. 150mm size bounded and packed in galvanized wire net /
mesh of 8 SWG wire and 152 square (maximum) mesh are to be provided. These stones
shall be provided in crates size of 2.0mx2.0m or as deemed suitable for a particular
location.
3.44 Field Quality Plan

3.44.1 The Field Quality Plan is as given in Annex I. It shall include Description of Activities,
Items to be checked, Tests to be done, Reference documents, Testing Agency,
Approving Agency, Extent of Completion of work, Counter Check by Employer/PMC,
Accepting Authority etc.The Employer/PMC reserves the right to revise the field quality
plan in course of the work.

APPENDIX-I
GEOTECHNICAL HAZARD IDENTIFICATION
Completed by: Date:

Project No: Project Name:
Route Tower No.
Weather
Site Reconnaissance Remark
1 Tower description
1.1 Tower type and Extn:
1.2 Preliminary assessing of
Foundation Type :
1.3 Base width
1.4 Surrounding/location:
1.5 Soil type:
2. Geology
2.1 Solid geology:
2.2 Drift geology:
2.3 Faults within:
2.4 Fill/made ground in the
vicinity:
3.0 Hydrology and

hydrogeology
3.1 Watercourse/surface water,
e.g. Pond, stream, lake,river,
ditch, estuary, type ofriver, rate
of flow, colour ofwater:
3.2 Groundwater:
3.3 Flood risk:
3.4 Springs:
3.5 GW Abstraction points(SPZ)
4.0 Geomorphology
4.1 Landform, e.g. hill,
valley,coast, marsh, tidal,
riverfloodplain, moorland:
4.2 Topography &

Slopegradient e.g. flat,

slope,concave, convex, rocky:
4.3 Ground Level (m AOD):
4.4 Surface depressions:
5 Geohazards
5.1Evidence of slopeinstability,
e.g. leaningtrees/posts,
tension cracks,toe bulge,
soil creep:
5.2Valley cambering:
5.3Soft ground e.g.
peat,alluvium, brickearth:
5.4Erosion/scour:
5.5Mining/quarrying/tunnelling:
5.6Subsidence risk
(limestone,gypsum, halite or
chalk)
6. Environmental
6.1Vegetation e.g. marsh,forest,
woodland, field,invasive plants:
6.2Other
environmentalfeatures e.g.
animals,burrows, nests, etc.:
6.3Environmentally
sensitivearea:
7 Land Use
7.1 Geographical setting:
7.2Land use around support:
7.3Construction around
Tower:
7.4Third party activities,
e.g.pipelines and/or other
OHLs
7.5Presence of landfill:
7.6Post constructionexcavation
/ earthworks:
7.7Evidence of past human

activities
8.0 Evidence of possible land contamination (presence of surface staining, litter, burnt material,
fly tipped materials, stored chemicals, present/historic land use)
9.0 Access to tower location for GI
10.0 Sketch of Tower location
11.0 Photographs Taken

APPENDIX-II
PRE-COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
Introduction
Over all procedure, safety rules, Project Technical Requirements, dispatch procedures, switching
sequences, observations, passing criteria and documentation of test results have been
documented in this report.
The detailed inspection and handing over documents are required to be checked for the entire
length of transmission line before energization.
The detailed inspection/test procedures for each activity have been elaborated in separate section
of this documentation. The contents of this report are as following:
1. Definition
2. Overall Procedures
3. Safety procedures
4. Inspection
5. Statutory Requirements
6. Handing over
7. Protective system
8. Dispatch procedures
9. Switching procedures
10. Testing
11. Energization
12. De-energization
13. Observations and duration
14. Passing criteria

15. Documentation
1.0 Definition
"Main Transmission Lines" means all high pressure cables and overhead lines (not being an
essential part of the distribution system of a licensee) transmitting electricity from a
generating station to another generating station or a sub-station, together with any step-up
and step-down transformers, switch-gear and other works necessary to and used for the
control of such cables or overhead lines, and such buildings or part thereof as may be
required to accommodate such transformers, switch-gear and other works and the operating
staff thereof;
"Power System" means a system under the control of the Government or any other statutory
body of Generating Company or other agency and having one or more-
i) generating station; or
ii) main transmission lines and sub-stations; or
iii) generating stations and main transmission lines and substations;
"Load Dispatch Centre" means the Centre so designated where the operation of each of the
Regional/Area Electricity Grids constituting the country's power system is coordinated;
"Sub-Station" means a station for transforming or converting electricity for the transmission
or distribution thereof and includes transformers, convertors, switch-gear, capacitors,
synchronous condensers, structures cables and other appurtenant equipments and any
buildings used for that purpose and the site thereof, a site intended to be used for any such
purpose and any buildings used for housing the staff of the sub section;
"Tie-Line" means a line for the transfer of electricity between two power systems together
with switchgear and other works necessary to, and used for the control of such line.
2.0 Overall Procedure
First it is to be ascertained that the transmission line to be energized is ready for operation
and has been properly handed over (released) in writing. This will include all safety aspects,

Electrical inspector clearance, clearance from NEA Load Despatch Centre (LDC), and final
inspection, if any.
Instructions for the work and supervision are given by the test leader (nominated by NEA).
However all switching and all operational activities will be executed by the regular operators.
Line charging instructions received, are clearly understood by the Line in charge (from the
Contractor side) and doubts, if any, are to be got clarified prior to the energisation of the line.
Once the line is handed over for charging no work shall be permitted without a valid
WORKPERMIT.
When the whole system has been energized, including the AC line, it will be kept in this state
for 8 hours or more for "soaking" with continuous inspection and monitoring.
3.0 Safety Procedures
Energization implies an abrupt and serious change of the working conditions in the plant. In
order to avoid serious accidents, thorough information must be imparted to all personnel
involved in the construction of transmission line. It should be ensured that due publicity has
been made to the public in all the villages/areas along the line route cautioning them against
climbing the towers etc. and that the line is proposed to be charged on so and so date. It is
also to be confirmed that the AGENCIES involved in the construction activities shall not carry
out any job on the said line without a valid WORK PERMIT.
It shall be ensured before charging that all men, material, Tools and plants and any temporary
earthing on any part of the entire length of line are removed.
It must be ensured that any power supply / low voltage charging used as anti-theft measure
must be disconnected and isolated to avoid accidental connection.
All equipment tests and pre-commissioning tests must have been completed, reterminated
(in case cables were isolated for testing purpose) and documented.
The system must be formally declared ready for energization and handed over for operation
in writing.
4.0 Inspection

Before the line is scheduled to be handed over for the pre-commissioning/energization the
same shall be inspected by representatives of Employer, Employer/PMC’s Engineer and
Contractor as follows:
Such an inspection shall include:
i) Right of way/way leave/electrical clearance
ii) Foundation and Revetments/Protection Work
iii) Tower and Tower accessories
iv) Hardware Fittings
v) Insulators
vi) Conductors and Earthwire
vii) Accessories for conductor and Earthwire
viii) Aviation Warning Signals (Lights/globules/painting)
4.1 Right of Way/Way Leave/Electrical Clearance
4.1.1 Right of way/Way leave clearance

Ensure that no tree/tree branches are falling within the zone of minimum clearance specified
as per Fig. 1.

Guidelines of forest/environmental rules shall be followed to avoid excessive tree cutting i.e.
all the trees should be cut from ROUTE level in the 3 meter corridor below each line
Conductor/Earthwires. In the balance corridor, Trees branches are only to be lopped to attain
the specified clearance as per Table no 1.
TABLE NO. 1
CLEARANCE FOR RIGHT OF WAY
Transmission Voltage in kV Right of Way (in meters)
220kV 30 meter
4.1.2. Electrical Clearance
In case of line crossings, clearance between lowest conductor of line and top conductor of the
other line shall be adequate as follows:
(Minimum clearances in mm between lines when crossing each other)

Nominal System Voltage 132 kV 220 kV 400 kV
220 kV 4580 4580 6100
Jumpers in the tension tower are properly intact with conductor and form a parabolic shape
in order to achieve adequate clearance from super steel structure.
4.1.2.1. Ground clearance
Normally at the time of construction adequate clearance is provided between lowest

conductor and ground, but due to delay in charging/commissioning there arc chances of
dumping/heaping soil, earth and concrete etc. or staking bricks etc. which may cause
reduction in ground clearance. In such cases the stored materials shall be removed.
Ensure that there is no temporary or permanent construction of houses or shades below the
line. If the same has been constructed they shall be removed before charging.
The ground profile at the time of commissioning shall be checked with the profile approved at
the time of check survey.
Ground clearance of lowest conductors at critical points/where ever the lowest conductor is
touching the ground shall be checked in the field from any of the prevalent method and the
values of ground clearance at these critical points shall be recorded in the prescribed format.
In case of hilly Terrain and for building clearance, the side clearance from conductors and
jumpers at critical points shall also be checked and recorded for all phases of
conductor/earthwire towards hill/ building side.
4.1.2.2. Clearance for Telephone line crossings
The minimum clearances between the conductors of the power line and telecommunication
lines are specified as follows:
Transmission Voltage in kV Clearance
220kV 3050 meter

The vertical clearances between conductors and between conductor and earth-wire shall be
checked randomly say in any one span of all sections and 10 sections of hilly areas from single
line diagram of the towers.
4.2 Foundation and Revetments / Protection Work
FOUNDATION:
There shall not be any damage/uneven settlement of foundations.
It is to be ensured that back filling of foundation is properly done. Soil shall be filled over all
legs upto ground level.
Extra surface earth after foundation back filling shall be removed from legs of the tower
beyond a lead distance of 30 mtrs. Any crack or break in chimney, if found, shall be repaired.
REVETMENTS / PROTECTION:
Cracks/damages to revetments shall be repaired.
Wherever revetments/breast walls/retaining walls are provided for protection of tower

foundations, weep holes shall have slope such as to flush out the deposited water away from
tower platform.
In case of hill terrain, the benching area should be leveled properly. The area around tower
shall have proper slope for drainage of rain water.
4.3 Tower and Tower Accessories
4.3.1. Normal Tower
After completion of a transmission line, all the towers shall be thoroughly checked before
charging the line. Special attention shall be given to the points as mentioned below:-
Deformed/Buckled/missing/Rusted Members and Nuts and Bolts

It is to be ensured that no members are bend, deformed or rusted have been used in towers
and if so, the same shall be replaced.
If any members is found missing, a new member shall be Fixed as per erection drawing of
Towers.
Nuts shall be sufficiently tightened for the required Torque specified in the Approved Drawing
Minimum 2/3 complete threads shall be projected outside the nut. All bolts shall have their
nuts facing outside of the tower for Horizontal connection and Downwards for Vertical
connections.
Nuts & bolts shall be properly punched as per the specification and proper zinc rich paint shall
be applied. It shall be ensured that the circular length of each welding shall be at least 10mm.
It shall also be ensured that all extra blank holes provided on tower members are filled with
correct size of nuts & bolts.
4.3.2 Special Towers
In addition to the above checks for towers, ladders and platforms provided in special towers
shall be properly tightened and no foreign material shall be left out on such platforms.
Earthing of Towers
Ensure that proper earthing of tower has been done and earthing strip is neither damaged
nor broken and is properly fixed to the stub.
In case of counter poise earthing, it is to be ensured that earthwire is sufficiently buried in the
ground and no where it has drag out during cultivation. The length of counter-poise is
normally 30 mtrs as per TS.
Before charging of the line, ensure that resistance is below 10 ohms. If the value (before
stringing) has been recorded higher than 10 ohm earthing shall be changed to counterpoise
type.

Earthing of special towers shall be verified as per approved drawings applicable for special
towers/special foundation. (In case of anchor foundation bolt/anchor plate welded with last
leg of special tower.)
4.3.3. Tower accessories
All the danger plates, number plates, circuit plates, and phase plates shall be in position &
and as per the specification.
All plates shall be properly tightened.
It shall be ensured that phase plates are fixed in correct phase sequence. Specially at
transposition towers, the phase plates in the correct phase sequence shall be provided at
each towers or end tower as per the specification of the line.
It shall be ensured that the anti-climbing device (ACD) is provided, at the suit-able height of
tower. In case of barbed wire ACD, barbed wire shall be tightly fixed.
It shall be ensured that the step bolts (for normal towers) are provided upto the peak of
tower. Any missing step bolts shall be replaced.
Fixing of birds guards (wherever applicable) shall be ensured.
4.4. Hardware Fittings
Tightening of all bolts and nuts are to be checked upto specified torque.
Check the fixing of all security clips (W/R type clips).
Surface condition of corona control rings and distance/alignment between Tower side arcing
horn (wherever applicable) and line side arcing horn/corona control ring to be checked as per
approved drawings.
Ensure that, no. of insulators per string is lesser by one number as compared to no. of discs in
normal string at approach spans to the terminal ends (approx last 1.5 KM).
To restrict the swing of jumpers, the provision of Pilot strings in case of Tension Towers shall
be verified from the approved drawings.

4.5 Insulators
All the damaged/broken insulator discs shall be replaced.
Unusual deflection in suspension strings if observed shall be rectified.
The insulators shall be cleaned before charging.
IR value of individual disc of at least 5 insulators at random shall be checked by 5/10 kV

Megger.
4.6. Conductors and Earthwires
Surface Condition
Surface of the conductors shall be free from scratches/rubs
Ensure that conductor strands are not cut and opened up. Wherever strands are found
cut/damaged/scratched, they must be repaired with repair sleeves/repair protective rods in
case the nos. of damaged strands are within specified limits (normally upto 1/6 th nos. of
strands in the outer layer).
4.7. Accessories for Conductor and Earthwires
4.7.1. Joints
All joints on conductor/earthwircs shall be away from the tower at a distance of at least 30
metres or as provided in the Technical specification (TS).
Ensure that not more than one joint in a conductor is provided in one span or provided.
Ensure that no mid span joint is provided in major crossings for main roads, railway crossing
and major rivers etc. or provided in TS.
Ensure that all mid span joints on conductors/earthwire and repair sleeves of compression
type are free from sharp edges, rust and dust. Wherever grease are specified the same shall
be applied in the joints.
4.7.2. Clipping
Ensure that conductor is not over tightened in the suspension clamps.

4.7.3 Spacers, vibration dampers and copper bonds
Placement and no. of spacers between two sub conductors on each phase shall be verified as
per spacer placement chart.
Damaged/missing spacers shall be replaced and loose/displaced spacers shall be

tightened/relocated.
Spacing of Vibration dampers from the tower and spacing between damper to damper in case
two Vibration Dampers (VD) were provided, shall be verified as per the damper placement
chart. All loose/ displaced VD shall be properly tightened/relocated and missing VDs shall be
provided.
To be ensured that no copper bond is loose/missing.
4.7.4 Jumpers
Verify Electrical clearance of jumpers to tower body as per design. All the jumpers shall be
checked properly. In case, jumpers (conductor/earthwire) are found loose, it shall be
tightened adequately.
4.7.5 Foreign material
Ensure that all foreign materials viz dead bird. fallen tree branches, bird nests etc. on
conductors, earthwires, Jumper, insulator string, cross arms are re-moved.
4.7.6. Others
It shall be ensured that all temporary/local earthing, guys, T & P

(Tools and Plants), foreign material and other loose material which were used during
stringing/tower erection have been removed.
In case there is any change in the ground profile before commissioning of line from the
approved profile, the extra earth/obstruction/ temporary sheds/any other construction shall
be removed.
4.8 Aviation Warning / Obstruction Signals (Lights / Globules / Painting)

It shall be ensured that following measures have been taken in the line/ Towers falling within
obstruction zone of civil aviation and defense establishments as per their requirement and
our specification.
Day markers
Painting of Full/Top portion of Towers with Red/Orange and White Paints.
Globules on earthwires have been provided.
Night markers
It shall be ensured that proper aviation lights at the peak level/at specified heights of towers
have been provided along with Solar panels/Battery banks/Control cubicles and other
accessories as per specification. The functioning of lights with simulation to be
checked/verified.
5.0 Statutory Requirement
5.1. On the request of the Contractor, Employer will inform concerned authorities and obtain
approval, if required for (test) charging of the line. Employer will make public announcement.
The Contractor shall also use its site offices to disseminate such notice to the public and its
workers.
5.2 Before charging of the line shall be inspected jointly by NEA, Engineer and Contractor. The
Contractor shall assist NEA to the possible extend, during all kind of test including hot test and
the hours of soaking.
6.0 Handing Over
The transmission line shall be inspected prior to energization and a formal handing over
document to be jointly signed by the representatives of Contractor and NEA. However all
contractual taking over has to be resolved separately as per the terms and conditions of the

contract. The Handing over shall be limited to the completion of Erection and ready for
Energization.
Any outstanding points or remaining activities are to be listed jointly. The remaining
activities/outstanding points are classified in the following category:
Details of the SECTIONS:
A. List of outstanding activities remaining in any part of the line
B. A list of temporary arrangements introduced.
C. Check list records properly documented, completed and signed.
D. Original tracing of Profile, Route Alignment, Tower Design, Structural Drawings, Bill of
Materials, Shop Drawings, Stringing charts (initial and final as applicable) etc. of all
towers/line submitted to NEA.
With the outstanding activities mentioned above are solved or with only minor points without
influence on the charging remain (minor issues handing over of the transmission line shall be
accepted by the pre-commissioning team. This handing over for energization with or without
remaining activities shall be made by the group head to the commissioning in charge in
writing.
7.0 Protective System
Before energization it must be ascertained that all protective systems for the unit to be
energized are operative.
This includes confirmation that the protections have been properly tested and that the tests
have been documented.
It also includes verification by inspection or otherwise, if necessary by repetition of trip test,

that the protections are actually functionally enabled. This verification serves to prevent that
energization takes place of a unit where a protection has been disabled for test or other
reason. NEA and Engineer will conduct all the tests required. The Contractor may also witness
such tests.
8.0 Dispatch Procedures
All operational activities (switching etc.) must be coordinated and communicated with the
system dispatcher.
In this respect the general procedures already established by NEA will be followed.
9.0 Switching Procedures
For each activity the instructions to the operators and the communications to the dispatchers
will be made in writing or by confirmed telephone messages. The switching procedures first
to be properly documented step by step and understood by everybody involved in the
switching operation prior to the energization. Any clarification required in the procedures
must be resolved. The format established by Employer for switching orders and operational
data logging shall be followed.
The implication of this is that each and every activity must be listed and described, so that
complete information is available for detail investigation, if required in future. The Contractor
shall assist NEA in performing activities.
10.0 Testing and Measurement Procedures
Followings tests shall be conducted by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Employer in
the presence of Engineer.
10.1. Earth Resistance Measurement
Normally Earth tester is used for measuring
a) soil resistivity.
b) earth resistance
a. Prior to the testing of soil resistivity and earth resistance the operation manual of the testing
instrument available at site may be referred and procedures to be adopted for measurement
of soil resistivity and earth resistance.
A typical Earth tester has 4 terminals. C1, P1, C2, P2 and 4 similar electrodes are driven in the
ground at equal distances and connected to the instruments in the order of C1' P1 and P2, C2.
Then the handle is rotated or button is pressed and the reading of the resistance is read on
the megger scale. If R is the resistance measured then the
Specific resistivity = 2 aR
where a is the distance between the electrode and R is the resistance in ohms measured on
the megger.
b. In order to measure earth resistance of electrode of the substation it could be connected to

C1 and the value of R could be read in the scale with the rotation of the handle of the megger.
This will give the earth resistance. The value as far as possible shall be below 10 Ohm. To
improve the value, water shall be sprinkle at the earthing pit.
10.2 Before commissioning of the lines following tests may be carried out.
10.2.1 Insulation Resistance Test
This test may be carried out with the help of a 10 OR 12 KV megger preferably power driven
to ascertain the insulation condition of the line. In case 5 kV megger is used for insulation
resistance measurement it shall be ensured that the induced voltage (CVT reading) is LESS
than the instrument withstanding capacity otherwise it is likely that the instrument may be
damaged.
This Test is to be carried out First prior to the continuity test.
Measurement of Insulation Resistance
One of the most common devices used for testing electrical insulation is the Megger
Insulation Tester.
The DC test voltage is generated by a permanent magnet generator. This generator is turned
either by hand or by an electric motor. In either case a slip clutch maintains the generator
speed at a constant value so long as the slipping speed is exceeded. A constant voltage is
important when the insulation under test has a high capacitance. Common generator output
voltage are 500, 1000, 2500 and 5000 volts.
Many Meggers have a “guard” terminal as well as “line” and “earth”. The guard terminal is
useful shall one wish to exclude part of the insulation under test from the measurement. This
is possible since current flowing to the generator via the guard circuit does not pass through
the deflecting coil.
Another use of the guard circuit is to shield the “line” lead between the Megger and the
apparatus under test. This prevents leakage to ground from the “line” lead which would
invalidate the Megger reading.
Insulation resistance is the ratio VDC/IDC.VDC is applied across two conductors separately by the
insulation under test.
IDC is the current flowing through/over the insulation. For a healthy and clean insulation the
megger reading is in mega-Ohms to infinity. For dirty in, insulation and defective, moist
insulation the meggers shows a very low insulation resistance value.
Megger test gives clear indication about the health, cleanliness and dryness of the
line/equipment insulation.
5 KV megger or 10 KV megger or 12 KV megger may be used for the Transmission line keeping
all safety requirements, Permit to work, clearance from statutory bodies and other conditions
prevailing at the Sub-station where charging of the line is being co-ordinated.

10.2.2 Conductor Continuity Test
10.2.2.1 The objective of this test is to verify that each conductor of the overhead line properly
connected electrically (the value of electrical resistance of line does not vary abnormally from
that of a continuous conductor of the same size and length). The electrical resistance of the
conductor shall be measured with a Whetstone bridge or other suitable instrument, if
available taking the safety aspects of Equipment as well as testing Engineer.
A simple method of continuity test is illustrated below :
Once the insulation test is completed and the results confirms no short circuit carry the
following:
SENDING END RECEIVING END RESULTS (OHMS)
CLOSE R-Ph GS MEGGER R- Ph ZERO/LOW

OPEN Y – Ph GS MEGGER Y-Ph HIGH
OPEN B-Ph GS MEGGER B-Ph HIGH
OPEN R-Ph GS MEGGER R-Ph HIGH
CLOSE Y – Ph GS MEGGER Y-Ph ZERO/LOW
OPEN B-Ph GS MEGGER B-Ph HIGH
OPEN R-Ph GS MEGGER R-Ph HIGH
OPEN Y–Ph GS MEGGER Y-Ph HIGH
CLOSE B-Ph GS MEGGER B-Ph ZERO/LOW
(ALL GS OPEN CONDITION) GS means GROUND SWITCH
If the above test results are OK it confirms the continuity of the line.
10.2.2.2 The continuity Test of the line with proper phase indication or phase marking can be checked
by continuity test as described below:
SENDING END RECEIVING END RESULTS (OHMS)

MEGGER BETWEEN
CONNECT R&Y PHASE R PHASE & Y PH ZERO OR LOW
B-PHASE& ALL GS OPEN Y PHASE & B PH HIGH
B PHASE & R PH HIGH

CONNECT R & B PHASE R PHASE & Y PH HIGH

Y PHASE &ALL GS OPEN Y PHASE & B PH HIGH
B PHASE & R PH ZERO OR LOW
CONNECT Y & B PHASE R PHASE & Y PH HIGH
R-PHASE &ALL GS OPEN Y PHASE & B PH ZERO OR LOW
B PHASE & R PH HIGH
If the test results are OK it confirms that marking of the phases are in order.
10.2.2.2 Phase Sequence
Once the line is charged from one end, without closing the Breaker at the other end the Phase
sequence is to be checked from the CVT/PT output by the help of Phase Sequence Meter. In
case there are other feeders available Phase sequence is to be RECHECKED by the
measurement of secondary voltage of both the Feeders (New line & available charged line).
Let the secondary Voltage of CVT/PT is 110 volts (ph to ph) for both the Circuit. In case of
correct Phase Sequence the voltage reading shall be as follows:
NEW CIRCUIT OLD CIRCUIT VOLTAGE

R-Phase R-Phase 0
R-Phase Y-Phase 110
R-Phase B-Phase 110
Y-Phase R-Phase 110
Y-Phase Y-Phase 0
Y-Phase B-Phase 110
B-Phase R-Phase 110
B-Phase Y-Phase 110
B-Phase B-Phase 0
In case the results are not matching the phase sequence in to be rechecked and reconfirmed
before closing the breaker.

11.0 Energization
Execution of the energization is simply the last event in the switching sequence, switching of
the close control button for the relevant circuit breaker.
12.0 De-Energization
Instructions about de-energization will be given only if this is part of the test. Otherwise de-
energization will be considered part of regular operation.
13.0 Observation and Duration
Visual and audible inspection (look and listen) of the relevant equipment and reading of
permanent instrumentation will be made.
The system shall be charged at least for 24 hours. During this time continuous monitoring and
inspection will be maintained in control room, auxiliary systems areas and switch yards.
This will include frequent, scheduled inspection of all equipment and reading of all permanent
instruments and recorders, and surge arrester counters, especially system parameters as per
standard procedures adopted by EMPLOYER/PMC.
14.0 Passing Criteria
Neither insulation breakdown nor protective system actions must occur. No irregular
equipment behaviour noise, vibration, high temperature is permitted.
Corona discharges may not be “unreasonable”. Local discharges that may be attributable to
sharp points shall be carefully located and recorded. After termination of the energization the
equipment shall be closely inspected and the points rounded or covered.
No unscheduled changes of system nor of equipment is permitted during the 24 hour

energized condition.
15.0 Documentation
Switching and operational activities will be recorded in regular manner in the operator’s log.
Likewise all readings of permanent instruments, Copies of this log, notes on special
observations from inspections and other measurements will constitute the test records.
Annex-I
FIELD QUALITY PLAN FOR TRANSMISSION LINES
S. Description Items to be Checked Tests/Checks to be Ref. documents Check/Testing Counter Check/Test by Accepting
No. of Activity done Employer/PMC authority in
Agency Extent
Employer/PMC
1. Detailed a. Route alignment Optimisation of route a. Preliminary survey. Contractor 100% at Field 100% based on record To be notified
Survey length documents by the
Employer/PMC
b. Topographical map
b. Route profiling & 1. Ground a. Sag template Contractor 100% at Field 100% based on record To be notified
documents
tower spotting. clearance. -do- -do- by the
-do-
2. Cold wt. Span Employer/PMC
b. Tower Spotting data -do- -do-
-do-
3. Hot wt. Span c. Route alignment -do- -do-
4. Sum of Adj. Span
-do-
(wind span) -do- -do-
5. Angle of Devn.
2. Check Survey Tower Location & i) Alignment a. Route alignment Contractor 100% at Field i) All angle towers in plains To be notified
and 50% in hilly terrains.
Final Length ii) Final Length b. Tower Schedule -do- -do- by the
ii) Final length to be
checked on 100% basis Employer/PMC
c. Profile
based on
records/documents
3. Detailed Soil a. Borelog 1. Depth of bore log As per Employer/PMC Contractor 100% at Field To witness 20% at Field To be notified
Investigation 2. SPT Test Contract Specifications by the
Employer/PMC
3. Collection of
samples
Package KC3: Basantapur (Terhathum District)- Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung District) Transmission Line and 132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Sangu Part II-Section 6: Employer’s Requirements
S. Description Items to be Tests/Checks to be done Ref. documents Check/Testing Counter Check/Test by Accepting
No. of Activity Checked Agency Extent Employer/PMC authority in
Employer/PM
C
b. Tests on As per tech. Specs. As per Contract Lab appd. By 100% by testing lab Review of lab test results To be notified
samples Specifications Employer/PMC by the
Employer/PMC
1. Cement 1. Source approval Source meeting the Contractor As proposed by To verify the proposal -do-
based on the supply made
requirement of Contract Contractor
and factory test results.
Specifications
/Approved vendor
2. Physical tests As per Annexure-I of this Samples to be taken jointly Review of all MTC’s 100% review of lab test -do-
results
FQP with Employer/PMC and and one sample for
tested at Employer/PMC every 500 MT
approved lab
3. Chemical Tests -do- Contractor to submit MTC 100%% review of 100% review of MTC -do-
Chemical composition MTC by Contractor
of Cement
2. 1. Source approval To be procured from Contractor As proposed by To review the proposal -do-
based on the documents.
Reinforcemen main & approved Contractor
t Steel producers only.
2. Physical and Chemical As per Annexure-2 of Contractor to submit MTC All MTC’s 100% review of MTC -do-
analysis test this FQP
S. Description Items to be Tests/Checks to be done Ref. documents Check/Testing Counter Check/Test Accepting
Section 4 Page 117 of 133

No. of Activity Checked Agency Extent by Employer/PMC authority in

Employer/PMC
3. Coarse 1. Source approval Source meeting the Contractor Proposed by the Contractor, To review the To be notified
proposal based on the
Aggregates requirement of indicating the location of the by the
documents
Contract quarry and based on the test Employer/PMC
Specifications and results of Joint samples tested in
IS:383 Employer/PMC approved lab
2. Physical tests As per Annexure-3 of Samples to be taken One sample per lot of 200 cum 100% review of lab - do-
test results
this FQP jointly and tested in or part thereof
Employer/PMC
approved lab
4. Fine 1. Source approval Source meeting the Contractor Proposed by the Contractor, To review the - do-
proposal based on the
aggregate requirement of indicating the location of the
documents.
Contract Spec and quarry and based on the results
IS:383 of Joint samples tested in
Employer/PMC approved lab.
2. Physical test As per Annexure-4 of Samples to be taken One sample per lot of 200 cum 100% review of lab - do-
test results
this FQP jointly and tested in or part thereof
Employer/PMC
approved lab
5. Water 1. Cleaniness (Water shall be As per Contract Spec Contractor 100% visual check at Field Verification at random - do-
fresh and clean) and IS:456
S. Description Items to be Checked Tests/Checks to be done Ref. documents Check/Testing Counter Check/Test by Accepting
No. of Activity Employer/PMC authority in
Agency Extent
Employer/PMC

2. Suitability of water for concreting Water meeting the Contractor 100% Visual Check Verification at random - do-
requirement of at Field and Test
Contract Spec and Results of Water
IS:456-2000. Samples at
Employer/PMC’s
approved Lab.
1. Visual observation of soil strata As per Contract Contractor 100% at Field 100% at Field - do-
2. Ground water level Specifications
3. History of water table in adj.

Area/surface water
4. Soil Investigation wherever required
a. Before concreting
1. Bottom of excavated Depth of foundation Approved FDN Contractor 100% at Field 100% check by - do-
Employer/PMC
earth Drawings.
2. Stub setting 1) Centre Line -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
2) Diagonals
3) Level of stubs
3. Reinforcement steel Placement As per Bar bending -do- -do- -do- -do-
schedule & approved
foundation drawings.
b. During concreting

Agency Extent
Employer/PMC
1. Workability Slump Test As per Annexure-5 of Contractor 100% at field 20% check at random - do-
this FQP
2. Concrete Cubes Compressive As per Annexure-5 of Casting of cubes at One sample of 3 cubes in 100% review of lab test - do-
results. Cubes at 30%
Strength for Normal Strength and 28 this FQP site. Cubes to be each tower location for
locations are to be taken in
Shallow Foundations days tested at concreting of each day presence of
Employer/PMC’s
Employer/PMC
Representative for Normal
approved Lab for 28 Shallow Foundations and
100% Locations for
days strength
Special/Pile Foundations

S. Description Items to be Tests/Checks to be Ref. documents Check/Testing Counter Check/Test by Accepting

No. of Activity Checked done Agency Extent Employer/PMC authority in
Employer/PMC
b. Concrete 2. Cubes compressive -Do- Contractor. One set for concreting of 100% cubes for piles, 50% . - do-
for Pile caps, beams,
Strength for strength One set of cubes each pile. For Pile caps,
chimney etc. to be taken in
Special & Pile (Min. 6 nos.) to be beams, Chimney, one presence of
Employer/PMC’s
Foundations taken and tested for sample for every 20 Cu.m.
Representative. 100%
7&28 days strength or part thereof for each day review of test results.
at Employer/PMC of concreting.
approved Lab.
5. Tower 1. Materials Visual checking for Approved Drawings & Contractor 100% at stores 100% verification of records - do-
Erection a. Tower 1. Stacking Bill of Materials
member/bolts & 2. Cleanliness
nuts/washers/acce 3. Galvanizing
ssories 4. Damages
2. Erection of 1. Sequence of As per approved Contractor 100% at field 100% check - do-
Super-structure erection drawings and Contract
Specifications
2. Check for -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
completeness
3. Tightening of nuts -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
and bolts
4. Check for verticality -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
S. Description Items to be Tests/Checks to be done Ref. documents Check/Testing Counter Check/Test by Accepting authority

No. of Activity Checked Agency Extent Employer/PMC in Employer/PMC
5. Tack welding for bolts & As per Contract Contractor 100% at Field 100% Check - do-
nuts/Anti-theft bolt Specifications
tightening
3. Tower footing TFR at locations before and after As per Contract Contractor 100% at Field 20% locations to be - do-
verified
resistance (TFR) earthing. Specifications
7. Stringing 1. Materials - do-
a. Insulators 1. Visual check for As per Contract Contractor 100% at Field 100% verification of - do-
records and to carry
cleanliness/glazing/cracks/and Specifications
random checks 10%
white spots.
2. IR Value Minimum: 50M -do- One test per sample size of To verify Contractor’s -do-
records 100% and joint
Ohms 20 for every lot of 10,000
check 20% of total tests
3. E&M test - Insulator supplier a. 20 per 10,000 for discs Collection of samples, Tests to be
sealing them and
b. 3 per 1500 for long rod witnessed/
handing over by
Employer/PMC to Appd. at
Insulator supplier
Manufactu-rer’s
works
4. Traceability (Make/batch Packing list/CIP Contractor 100% at field 100% Review of records To be notified by
No./Locations where installed) the Employer/PMC
No. of Activity done Agency Extent Employer/PMC authority in
Employer/PMC

b. Conductor On receipt, Packing list Contractor 100% at stores 20% check To be notified by
1. Visual check of the
drum. Employer/PMC
2. Check for seals at -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
both ends, and
Employer/PMC
sticker on outer end
3. Check depth from -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
top of flange to the
top of the outer most
layer
c. Earthwire Check for seals at Packing list Contractor 100% at stores 20% check -do-
both ends
2. Field activity
a. Before Stringing Readiness for Stringing procedures as Contractor Readiness certificate to be Review of Certificate -do-
stringing per Contract submitted by the
Specifications Contractor
b. During stringing (Conductor/Earth- -do-
wrie)
Agency Extent
Employer/PMC
1. Scratch/cut check As per Approved Contractor 100% at Field 100% record & Field check -do-
20%
(Visual) Drawings and Contract
Specifications

2. Repair sleeve -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-

3. Mid span Joints -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
4. Guying (in case of As per Approved -do- -do- 100% -do-
towers not designed Guying Arrangement &
for one side Contract Specifications
stringing)
c. After stringing Check for,
1. Sag/Tension Sag tension -do- -do- 100% record & Field check -do-
20%
chart/tower Spotting
data
2. Electrical As per Approved -do- -do- -do- -do-
clearances Drawings and Contract
Specifications
i) Ground clearance -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
ii) Live metal -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
clearance etc.
3. Jumpering -do- -do- -do- -do- -do-
Agency Extent
Employer/PMC
4. Copper bond As per Approved Contractor 100% at Field 100% record & Field -do-
Check 20%
Drawings and Contract
Specifications

5. Placement of As per Contract -do- -do- -do- -do-

spacer/damper Specifications/
Drawings/
placement chart
8. Final Testing
a. Pre- a. Readiness of lines 1. Completeness of Pre-commissioning Contractor 100% 100% joint checking -do-
commissionin for pre- line. Procedures of Contract
g of lines commissioning 2. Meggar test of line Specification Append. II
b. Commi- Readiness of lines for 2. Digital a. Employer/PMC latest pre- -do- -do- -do- -do-
commissioning procedures
ssioning of commissioning photograph of each
b. Pre-commissioning
line tower to ascertain
Report
the completeness of
tower.
3. Electrical -do- -do- -do- -do-

Inspectors clearance

Annex-II
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA AND PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR CEMENT
ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT
S. Name of the test Ordinary Portland Cement 33 grade Ordinary Portland Cement Ordinary Portland Cement Remarks
No. as per IS 269 43 grade as per IS 8112 53 grade as per IS 12269
a) Physical Tests To be conducted in Employer/PMC’s

approved Lab
(i) Fineness Specific surface area shall not be less Specific surface area shall not be less Specific surface area shall not be less Test to be conducted in accordance with
than 225 sq.m. per Kg. than 225 sq.m. per Kg than 225 sq.m. per Kg. IS:4031(Part-2)
(ii) Compressive strength 72+ 1 hour : Not less than 16 Mpa (16 72+ 1 hour : Not less than 23 Mpa (23 72+ 1 hour: Not less than 27 Mpa (27
N/mm2) N/mm2) n/mm2)
168+ 2 hour : Not less than 22 Mpa 168+ 2 hour: Not less than 33 Mpa (33 168+ 2 hour : Not less than 37 Mpa (37 Test to be conducted in accordance with
(22 N/mm2) N/mm2) N/mm2) IS:4031(Part-6)
672+ 4 hour : Not less than 33 Mpa 672+ 4 hour : Not less than 43 Mpa 672+ 4 hour : Not less than 53 Mpa (53
(33 N/mm2) but not more than 48MPa (43 N/mm2) but not more than 58MPa N/mm2)
(iii) Initial & Final setting Initial setting time : Not less than 30 Initial setting time : Not less than 30 Initial setting time : Not less than 30 Test to be conducted in accordance with
time minutes minutes minutes IS:4031(Part-5)
Final setting time : Not more than 600 Final setting time : Not more than 600 Final setting time : Not more than 600
minutes minutes minutes
(iv) Soundness Un-aerated cement shall not have an Un-aerated cement shall not have an Un-aerated cement shall not have an Test to be conducted in accordance with
expansion of more than 10mm when expansion of more than 10mm when expansion of more than 10mm when IS:4031(Part-3)
tested by Le Chatlier Method and 0.8% tested by Le Chatlier Method and 0.8% tested by Le Chatlier Method and 0.8%
when tested by Autoclave Test when tested by Autoclave Test when tested by Autoclave Test Method.
Method. Method.

S. Name of the test Ordinary Portland Cement 33 grade Ordinary Portland Cement Ordinary Portland Cement Remarks
No. as per IS 269 43 grade as per IS 8112 53 grade as per IS 12269
b) Chemical Composition Tests (As per IS: 4032) Review of MTCC only
a) Ratio of percentage of lime to a) Ratio of percentage of lime to a) Ratio of percentage of lime to

percentage of silica, alumina & percentage of silica, alumina & percentage of silica, alumina &
iron oxide when calculated from iron oxide when calculated from iron oxide when calculated from
the formula given in IS:269: 0.66 the formula given in IS:8112: the formula given in IS:12269:
to 1.02 0.66 to 1.02 0.80 – 1.02
b) Ratio of percentage of alumina a) Ratio of percentage of alumina a) Ratio of percentage of alumina to

to that of iron oxide, Minimum: to that of iron oxide, Minimum that of iron oxide, Minimum:
0.66% 0.66 0.66%
c) Insoluble residue, percentage by c) Insoluble residue, percentage by c) Insoluble residue, percentage by

mass, Maximum: 4.00% mass Max. 4.00% mass Max. 4.00%
d) Magnesia, percentage by mass d) Magnesia, percentage by mass d) Magnesia, percentage by mass

Maximum: 6% Max. 6% Max. 6%
e) Total sulphur content calculated e) Total sulphur content calculated e) Total sulphur content calculated as
as sulphuric anhydride (SO3), as sulpuric anhydride (SO3), sulpuric anhydride (SO3),
percentage by mass, Maximum: percentage by mass, Maximum: percentage by mass, Maximum:
3.5 3.5 3.5
c) f) Chloride content, percentage by f) Chloride content, percentage by f) Chloride content, percentage by

mass, Maximum: 0.1 mass, Maximum: 0.1 mass, Maximum: 0.1
Annex-III
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA AND PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR REINFORCEMENT STEEL

S. Name of the Test Cold Twisted Deformed Bars of Steel Grade Fe 415 as per Cold Twisted Deformed Bars of Steel Grade Fe500
No. IS: 1786 as per IS: 1786
i) Chemical Analysis Test
Carbon, Maximum : 0.300% Carbon, Maximum : 0.300%
Sulpher, Maximum : 0.060% Sulpher, Maximum : 0.055%
Phosphorus, Maximum: 0.060% Phosphorus, Maximum: 0.055%
Sulpher & Phosphorus: 0.110% Sulpher & Phosphorus: 0.105% Testing in Employer/PMC’s approved Lab.
(Maximum) (Maximum)
ii) Physical Tests a) 0.2 percent proof stress/ yield stress, Minimum: 415 b) 0.2 percent proof stress/ yield stress,
N/mm2 Minimum: 500 N/mm2
-Do-
c) Percentage of elongation: 14.5% c) Percentage of elongation: 12%
iii) Bend & Rebend tests Test as per IS:1786: No rupture or cracks visible after the Test as per IS:1786: No rupture or cracks visible
test to a person of normal or corrected vision on bent/re- after the test to a person of normal or corrected
-Do-
bent portion. vision on bent/re-bent portion.

Annex-IV
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA AND PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR COARSE AGGREGATES
3. Coarse Aggregates (To comply with the requirements specified in IS:383)

i) Physical Tests
a) Size & Grading of a) Size & a) Size & Grading of Aggregates a) Size & Grading of Aggregates
Aggregates Grading of
Aggregates
40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm 10 mm 40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 12.5 mm
80mm - - - - - 100 - - -
63 mm 100 - - - - - - - -
40 mm 85 to 100 100 - - - 95 to 100 100 - -
20 mm 0 to 20 85 to 100 100 - - 30 to 70 95 to 100 100 100
16 mm - - 85 to 100 100 - - - 90-100 -
12.5 mm - - - 85 to 100 100 - - - 90 to 100
10 mm 0 to 5 0 to 20 0 to 30 0 to 45 85 to 100 10 to 35 25 to 35 30 to 70 40 to 85
4.75 mm - 0 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 20 0 to 5 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10
2.36 mm - - - - 0 to 5 - - - -
c. Aggregate Crushing Value Not to exceed 45%
[Determined in accordance with IS: 2386
(Part- IV)-1963]
d. Aggregates Impact Value Not to exceed 45%
(Part- IV)-1963]
e. Aggregate Abrasion Value Not to exceed 50%
(Part- IV)-1963]
f. Presence of deleterious material Deleterious materials shall not exceed the limits prescribed in Table-1 of IS:383-1970.

Annex-V
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA AND PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR FINE AGGREGATES
4. Fine Aggregates (To comply with the requirements specified in IS:383)
i) Physical Tests Percentage passing for graded aggregate of nominal size
a) Grading & Grading Zones of Fine IS Sieve Designation Grading Zone I Grading Zone II Grading Zone III
Aggregates
10 mm 100 100 100
4.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100
2.36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100
1.18 mm 30-70 55-90 75-100
600 microns 15-34 35-59 60-79
300 microns 5 to 20 8 to 30 12 to 40
150 microns 0-10 0-10 01-0
b) Presence of deleterious material Deleterious materials shall not b) Presence of Deleterious materials shall b) Presence of
exceed the limits prescribed in deleterious material not exceed the limits deleterious material
Table-1 of IS:383-1970. prescribed in Table-1 of
IS:383-1970.
c) Soundness Test (for concrete work subject to frost action) Average loss of weight after 5 cycles shall not exceed :
[Determined in accordance with IS: 2386 (Part- V)-1963] 10% when tested with sodium sulphate (Na2SO4); and
15% when tested with magnesium sulphate( MgS04)
d) Fineness Modulus of Fine Aggregates Shall be more than 2.5
Note:-Fine aggregate conforming to Grading Zone IV shall not be used in Reinforced Cement Concrete work

Package KC3: Basantapur (Terhathum District)- Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung District)
Transmission Line and 132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge Sangu Part II-Section 6: Employer’s
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Requirements
Annex-VI
ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA AND PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR CONCRETE WORK
1) Concrete a) Workability Slump shall be recorded by slump cone method and it

shall between 50-75 mm.
b) Compressive strength ) Normal Shallow Foundations: The frequency of
sampling of concrete shall be as per clause 15 of IS:456-
2000. However, a minimum of one sample comprising
three test specimen of 15 cm concrete cubes shall be
taken from each day concreting for testing the 28 days
compressive strength of concrete.
(ii) Special & Pile Foundations: The frequency of sampling
of concrete shall be as per clause 15 of IS:456-2000.
However, for pile foundations, 2 samples comprising six
specimen of 15 cm cubes shall be taken from each pile,
three for ascertaining the 7 days compressive strength of
concrete and balance three for ascertaining the 28 days
comprehensive strength of concrete. For concreting of
pile cap & chimney, minimum two samples comprising six
concrete cubes from each day concreting shall be taken
for testing the three cubes at 7 days and other three at 28
days for ascertaining the 7 days and 28 days
comprehensive strength of concrete.
Notes :
1) For nominal mix concrete of proportion 1:1.5:3 (1 Cement: 1.5 Fine Aggregate: 3.0
Coarse aggregates), 28 days compressive strength of concrete shall be 265 kg/Sq.cm. and
for nominal mix concrete of proportion 1:2:4 (1 Cement: 2 Fine Aggregates: 4 Coarse
Aggregates), it shall be 210 kg/Sq.cm.
2) ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA BASED ON 28 DAYS COMPRESSIVE STRENGTHS FOR NOMINAL
MIX CONCRETE: The acceptance criteria for concrete shall be as specified in IS:456-2000.
a) The average strength of three specimen shall be accepted as the compressive
strength of the concrete, provided the strength of any individual cube shall
neither be less than 70% nor higher than 130% of the specified strength.

(b) If the actual average strength of accepted sample exceeds specified strength by
more than 30%, the Employer/PMC, if he so desires, may further investigate the
matter. However, if the strength of any individual cube exceeds more than 30%
of the specified strength, it will be restricted to 30% only for computation of
strength.
(c) If the actual average strength of accepted sample is equal to or higher than
specified upto 30%, the concrete shall be considered acceptable and shall be
paid at full quoted rates.
(d) If the actual average strength of accepted sample is less than specified strength
but not less than 70% of the specified strength, the concrete may be accepted at
reduced rate at the discretion of Employer.
(e) If the actual average strength of accepted sample is less than 70% of specified
strength, the Engineer shall reject the defective portion of work represented by
sample and nothing shall be paid for the rejected work. The contractor shall be
required to dismantle the defective portion of work and rebuilt the same at his
own cost and risk as per the directions of Employer.
General Notes:

1) This Field Quality Plan is not to limit the supervisory checks which are otherwise
required to be carried out during execution of work as per drawings/Technical
specifications etc.
2) Contractor shall be responsible for implementing/documenting the FQP. Documents
shall be handed over by the contractor to Employer/PMC after the completion of the
work.
3) Acceptance criteria and permissible limits for tests are indicated in the Annexure.
However for further details/tests, the contract specification and relevant Indian
standards shall be referred to.
4) Tests as specified in this FQP shall be strictly followed.
5) The Employer/PMC reserves the right to further revise the FQP and issue to the
contractor.

Package-KC3

Section- IV-A
Chapter 4- Special Towers

SECTION IV-A
CHAPTER - 4
SPECIAL TOWERS
CONTENTS
4.0 GENERAL 1
4.1 SHIELDING ANGLE AND CLEARANCES 1
4.2 ANGLE OF DEVIATION 2
4.3 MAXIMUM TENSION LIMITS FOR CONDUCTOR, OPGW AND GROUNDWIRE 2
4.4 RIVER CROSSING SPAN / DESIGN SPAN 2
4.5 ANCHOR SPAN 2
4.6 WIND SPAN 2
4.7 WEIGHT SPAN 2
4.8 RULING SPAN/ EQUIVALENT SPAN 2
4.9 SAG TENSION CALCULATION 3
4.10 USE OF SPECIAL CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE 3
4.11 STEEL QUALITY 4
4.12 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF ANGLE SECTION USED 4
4.13 BOLTS AND NUTS 4
4.14 SLENDERNESS RATIO 4
4.15 REDUNDANT MEMBER 5
4.16 WIND LOADS 5
4.17 BROKEN WIRE CONDITION 6
4.18 AVIATION REQUIREMENTS 6

SECTION IV-A
CHAPTER - 4
SPECIAL TOWERS
4.0 GENERAL
4.0.1 Special towers shall be used for major river crossing, Deep valley crossing and other long
spans of the order of 800m and above as otherwise required for these lines. However, if
normal towers with very high extension (excluding up-to +9 M extension) are found
sufficient for spans less than 800 meter maintaining the ground clearance requirement,
same can be re-designed and erected as special tower. The scope covers design, supply of
these towers, check survey, foundation, tower erection and stringing. The Contractor shall
submit the most economical design for the special towers and foundations as per the
procedure laid down in CBIP publication No 290. (Manual on design of towers for long span
river crossing) in addition to IS 802-Part 1-Sec 1-2015. The unit rates per tonne for design,
fabrication, galvanizing and supply of special towers, their stubs/anchor bolts and rates for
stub-setting, erection and stringing shall be quoted as given in appropriate schedule.
4.0.2 For river crossing spans the towers shall be of suspension type followed by Anchor type
tower on either side of the river span. Anchor towers to be used for anchoring shall also be
special type angle/dead end towers. The towers for deep valley and other long span
crossings shall also be of special type angle/dead end towers. All the requirements for
standard towers shall apply for special towers except as given in the following clauses:
4.1 SHIELDING ANGLE AND CLEARANCES
4.1.1 The shielding angle shall not be greater than 5 deg.
4.1.2 The minimum clearance from lowest point of power conductor from highest flood level in
navigable rivers for crossing towers shall be obtained from the concerned authority for
Owner's approval.
4.1.3 The minimum electrical clearance between live parts and tower body and cross arm
members will be same as for normal tower.

4.1.4 The approximate height of foundation, on which stubs for river crossing towers are to be
set, over the highest flood level of the river shall be fixed only after owner's approval.
4.2 ANGLE OF DEVIATION
4.2.1 The angle of deviation to be considered for river crossing suspension towers is 5 deg. and
for angle/dead end tower as 30 degree and all the live metal clearances to be computed
considering double suspension string as per values indicated in the Indian Standard 5613.
4.2.2 The tower foundations shall be designed for loads as obtained from tower reactions at base
level considering following partial safety factors as follows.
a) Tower with angle of deviation up to 15 deg. : 1.1
b) Tower with angle of deviation above 15 deg. : 1.2
4.3 MAXIMUM TENSION LIMITS FOR CONDUCTOR, OPGW AND GROUNDWIRE
The maximum tension limits for conductor, OPGW and ground wire of special towers shall
be same as that of normal towers of the line.
4.4 RIVER CROSSING SPAN / DESIGN SPAN
Crossing span is the distance between two river crossing towers or two tall towers placed
on banks for crossing the river. Height of the river crossing tower or tall tower is fixed
depending on crossing span. Crossing span is an important parameter for designing river
crossing or tall tower.
4.5 ANCHOR SPAN
The distance between river crossing tower and anchor tower on either bank of the river is
anchor span. The anchor span shall be little more than normal span to avoid uplift on
anchor tower consequent to tall river crossing tower.
4.6 WIND SPAN
The wind span is the sum of the two half spans adjacent to the river crossing tower under
consideration. The details will be finalized after detailed survey based on the river crossing
span at site.
4.7 WEIGHT SPAN
The weight span is the horizontal distance between the lowest point of the conductors on
the two adjacent spans.

4.8 RULING SPAN/ EQUIVALENT SPAN

The ruling /equivalent span is calculated from the following formula between anchor tower
to anchor tower on either side of the river.
𝐿 3 +𝐿 3+𝐿 3
Ruling span = √ 1𝐿 +𝐿2 +𝐿 3
1 2 3
Where,
L1 = Span between anchor tower and river crossing tower on one side of river.
L2 = River crossing span
L3 = Span between river crossing tower and anchor tower on other side of the river.
4.9 SAG TENSION CALCULATION
The sag and tension calculation for river crossing stretches are very important. Sag and
tension calculations are carried out for ruling/ equivalent span following catenary equation
which decides the tension that will prevail in the conductors between anchor towers to
anchor tower. Heights of river crossing and anchor towers are finalized based on the sag at
crossing span and anchor span calculated with the tension of equivalent/ ruling span at
maximum temperature no wind condition. The factor of safety for conductor at starting
condition should not be less than 5.0 at no wind condition and everyday temperature.
AACSR Moose conductor shall be used to ensure maximum tension does not exceed 70% of
the UTS of the conductor.
4.9.1 SPACING BETWEEN CONDUCTORS/PHASE-TO-PHASE CLEARANCE
The spacing between conductors/phases for long span tower is recommended to calculated
from the following formula:
Vertical Clearance (m) = (0.75√(𝐹85 + 𝑙𝑘 ) ) + 𝑉⁄150
Horizontal Clearances (m) = (0.62√(𝐹85 + 𝑙𝑘 )) + 𝑉⁄150
Where,
F85 = Sag in meters at 85 deg. C and no wind condition.

Ik = Length of insulator string in meters.

V = line voltage in kV.
4.10 USE OF SPECIAL CONDUCTOR AND EARTHWIRE

For suitable reduction in tower height, special conductors/earth wire of higher strength
shall be used in the river crossing stretches. Special type conductor / special earth wire are
recommended in this regard. Using of such conductor / earth wire not only reduces tower
height but also saves in tower weight. AACSR Moose conductor shall be used to ensure
maximum tension does not exceed 70% of the UTS of the conductor. The earthwire will be
used for special tower 7/4.5 mm galvanized steel ground-wire and the maximum tension
shall not exceed 70% of the UTS of the ground-wire.
4.11 STEEL QUALITY

Normally, members of Tall River crossing tower are loaded heavily. This is due to
extraordinary height of towers, conductor and ground wire above ground level
encountering heavy wind. To have desired capacity in tower members to withstand heavy
loads, combination of mild and high tensile steel are normally used. HT steel to be used
shall have yield stress not more than that of steel equivalent to IS: 2062-2006, Grade quality
C with impact energy at -20 degree C, 490B/BSEN-10025-S355 J20.
4.12 MINIMUM THICKNESS OF ANGLE SECTION USED
River crossing towers are subjected to heavy loads. Therefore, angle section less than 5 mm
thickness should not be used in the tower to achieve adequate rigidity in the structure. The
minimum thickness of angle section shall not be less than following:
a) Leg members, main members of cross-arm and peak = 6 mm
b) Other members including bracings and redundant = 5 mm
4.13 BOLTS AND NUTS
Normally two sizes of bolts (diameters) could be used in the tower. One size is used for
lightly loaded members and the higher size bolt is used for heavily loaded member
especially legs. This is required to minimize the number of bolts in heavily loaded members.

To avoid any error during tower erection in respect of use of lower size bolt, it is preferable
to have distinguishable gap between the two sizes of bolts used. For example, if one size of
bolt is 16 mm dia., the second size should be 24 mm dia. bolt.
4.14 SLENDERNESS RATIO
Slenderness ratio for members shall be computed in accordance with IS - 802 (Part 1/Sec-2)
- 1992. Slenderness ratio (kl/r) for compression and tension members shall not exceed the
following values:
a) Leg members including corner members of earth wire = 120
Peak and lower corner members of the cross-arms in compression
b) For other members carrying computed stresses = 200
c) For redundant members = 200
d) For members under tensile stress only = 375
4.15 REDUNDANT MEMBER
All the redundant members should be designed for slenderness ratio of not more than 200.
Redundant members connected to leg member should be designed for actual axial load or
for 2.5% load carried by the leg member whichever is more stringent. Adequate number of
bolts shall be provided in the redundant members accordingly.
4.16 WIND LOADS
4.16.1 The wind loads on the special towers shall be calculated as given below.
a) The procedure for wind load calculation on tower, conductor, ground wire & insulators
shall be same as adopted for normal towers of the line except the reliability level 3
(Return period 500 years) and terrain roughness factor K2=1.08 shall be considered for
working out loads on special/river crossing towers.
b) The tower members will be designed considering the following angle of incidence of
wind for whichever case is more stringent for a particular member.
i) Angle of incidence of wind 900 to the tower and 900 to the conductor, ground wire
& insulator.
ii) Angle of incidence of wind 450 to the tower and 450 to the conductor, ground wire
& insulator.

iii) Angle of incidence of wind 0º to the tower (longitudinal direction)

The recommendation of the tenderer if any on the value of wind pressure on
conductors and towers to be considered shall be clearly brought out in the tender.
4.16.2 Vibration Analysis – for long spans the vibration analysis of the conductor shall be carried
out with the conductor properties, wind and the span. Necessary damping arrangement
shall be provided by the contractor depending on the air dynamic stability of the long span
conductor.
4.16.3 Maximum Tension Limits for Conductor and Ground wire

The maximum tension limits for conductor and ground wire of special towers shall be same
and towers to be considered shall be clearly brought out in the tender. The
recommendation of the tenderer if any on the value of wind pressure on conductors and
towers to be considered shall be clearly brought out in the tender.
4.17 BROKEN WIRE CONDITION

The broken wire conditions shall be considered as per IS: 802(part1/sec1)-1995 and its
latest edition.
Longitudinal Loads
a) The longitudinal loads due to power conductor and ground wire for suspension towers
shall be nil under normal conditions and 100 percent of maximum working tension of
conductor or ground wire under broken wire conditions.
b) Under normal condition, unbalanced longitudinal load due to difference in tensions in
ruling span for special crossing tower on one side and normal span of the line on the
other side shall also be considered for the design of anchor towers.
4.18 AVIATION REQUIREMENTS
The river crossing towers and long span shall be painted and provided with markers
respectively to caution the flying aircraft as given below:
Visual aids in the form of markers and luminaries shall be installed on the transmission lines
and transmission line supports of height more than (45m) to give warning to the flying

aircraft. These aids shall be weatherproof and should not cause tracking on their surface
due to leakage current. The Flight Safety/Relevant department in Nepal should be
approached for obtaining their approval at the time of execution of lines.
Visual Aids
a) Markers:
The mechanical markers in the form of color globules of dia. 40-50cm at an interval of
20m (as per requirement of Directorate of Flight Safety) or not more than 40m (as per
ICAO) shall be installed on the ground wire(s) in such a way that the top of each
marker is not below the level of highest wire. In case of two ground wires used on a
transmission line, the color globules may install on each ground wire but staggered.
The color of the marker should contrast with the background against which they are to
be seen. Orange and white or alternatively red and white markers should be used
except where such colors merge with the background. Typical sketch of a marker is
given in IS: 5613.
b) Luminaries:
Electrical luminaries used in HV and EHV lines works on the principle of power
obtained by capacitive coupling. The system, as shown in IS: 5613 comprises a lamp
producing red light constituting the light source and an auxiliary conductor for flowing
of electric energy produced by capacitive coupling for lighting the lamp. The size of
lamp and length of auxiliary conductor depends upon the voltage of the transmission
line.
c) Luminaries Used On Transmission Line Supports
High intensity obstacle lights shall be installed at these levels. The highest light level
should beat the top of the support structure. On lowest light level at the level of the
lowest point in the catenary between the two support structures and the middle level
at the mid-point between the top and bottom levels. The high intensity obstacle lights
should have a daytime effective intensity of not less than 100,000cd. The intensity of
light should reduce automatically to 20,000cd + 25 percent at twilight and again
automatically to a nighttime intensity of 1320cd + 25 percent. The light on a

supporting structure should flash sequentially @ 60 sequences per minute. The

middle level light shall flash first, followed by top level and then the bottom level. The
interval between the flashing of top level and bottom level should be approximately
twice the interval between the middle level and the top level. The interval between
the end of one sequence and the beginning of next should be about 10 times the
interval between the middle level and the top level.
d) The full height of the towers shall be painted over the galvanized surface in
contrasting bands of orange or red white. The bands should be horizontal and not less
than 1.5m and not more than 3m in height. The bands on the extremities should be
orange or red color.

Package-KC3

Section- IV-A
Chapter 5- Conductor, Ground wire, OPGW &
Accessories
Transmission Line and 132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge Sangu
SECTION IV A
CHAPTER - 5
CONDUCTOR, GROUND WIRE, OPGW AND ACCESSORIES
CONTENTS
DESCRIPTION PAGE
S.NO
NO.
5.0 INTRODUCTION 1
5.1 POWER CONDUCTOR 1
5.1.1 Scope 1
5.1.2 Standards 1
5.1.3 General Technical Requirements 4
5.1.4 Testing 18
5.1.5 Inspection and factory acceptance tests 29
5.1.6 Schedule of Deviations/Variations 30
5.2 GROUND WIRE 31
5.2.1 Scope 31
5.2.2 Standards 31
5.2.3 General Technical Requirements 32
5.2.4 Tests 35
5.2.5 REJECTION AND RETEST 41
5.2.6 PACKING AND MARKING 42
5.2.8 SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS/VARIATIONS 43
5.3 CONDUCTOR & EARTH WIRE ACCESSORIES 44
5.3.1 SCOPE 44
5.3.2 ITEMS COVERED IN SPECIFICATION 44
5.3.3 STANDARDS 44
5.3.4 MATERIALS/WORKMANSHIP 46
5.3.5 MARKINGS 48
5.3.6 BID DRAWINGS 48
5.3.7 CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES 50
5.3.8 MID SPAN COMPRESSION JOINT 50
5.3.9 REPAIR SLEEVE 50
5.3.10 VIBRATION DAMPER 51
5.3.11 BUNDLE SPACERS 54
5.3.12 SPACER DAMPER 58
5.4 EARTH WIRE ACCESSORIES 61
5.4.1 General 61

5.4.2 Vibration Damper 62

5.4.3 Flexible Copper Bond 63
5.4.4 Suspension Clamp 63
5.4.5 Tension Clamp 64
5.4.6 Tests and Standards 65
5.4.7 Type Tests 66
5.4.8 Acceptance Tests 68
5.4.9 Routine Tests 70
5.4.10 Test During Manufacture 70
5.4.11 Sample Batch For Type Testing 70
5.4.12 Testing Expenses 71
5.4.13 Additional Tests 71
5.4.14 Test Reports 71
5.4.15 Inspection 72
5.4.16 Packing And Marking 72
5.4.17 Type Tests- Annexure-A 74
5.4.18 Acceptance Tests- Annexure-B 81
5.5 OPGW AND OPGW ACCESSORIES 83
5.5.1 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION FOR OPGW 83
5.5.2 Mechanical and Electrical Requirements 84
5.5.3 Optical Waveguide Fibers 85
5.5.4 Attenuation Coefficient 86
5.5.5 Chromatic Dispersion 87
5.5.6 Bit Error Rate (BER) 87
5.5.7 Optical Cross Talk 87
5.5.8 Fiber Material 87
5.5.9 Fiber Coating 87
5.5.10 Fiber Identification 88
5.5.11 Filling Compound 88
5.5.12 Requirement of Protection Tube 89
5.5.13 Metallic Wires 89
5.5.14 Joints in Wires 90
5.6 OPGW LENGTHS 90
5.7 ASSOCIATED HARDWARE FOR OPGW 90
5.7.1 Suspension Clamp 90
5.7.2 Dead-end Assembly 91
5.7.3 Grounding Wire for Clamps 91
5.7.4 Structure Attachment Clamp Assemblies 91
5.7.5 Vibration Dampers 91
5.7.6 Shield Wire Joint Boxes 92

5.7.7 Termination / Splicing 92

5.7.8 List of Drawings and Documents 93
5.7.9 Workmanship 95
5.8 TESTS AND STANDARDS 95
5.8.1 General 95
5.8.2 Type test 96
5.8.3 Acceptance Tests 98
5.8.4 Routine Test 98
5.8.5 Sample Batch for Type Testing 100
5.8.6 Testing Expenses 101
5.8.7 Additional Tests 101
5.8.8 Test Reports 101
5.8.9 Inspection 102
5.8.10 Test Equipments and Special Tools 102
5.8.12 Packaging/Drums 104
5.8.13 Field Acceptance Testing 105
5.8.14 Storage of Equipment 105
5.8.15 Performance Guarantee 105
5.8.16 Training 105
5.8.17 Methodology of Work 107
5.8.18 Commissioning 108
5.8.20 Standards 108
5.9 TYPE TESTS ON COMPLETE OPGW, FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES-ANNEXURE C 112
5.9.1 Type tests on complete OPGW 112
5.9.2 Type test on OPGW fittings 117
5.9.3 Type test on vibration damper 119
ACCEPTANCE TESTS ON COMPLETE OPGW, OPTIC FIBRE, OPGW FITTINGS-
5.10 123
ANNEXURE D
5.10.1 Acceptance tests on complete OPGW 123
5.10.2 Acceptance tests on optic fibre 123
5.10.3 Acceptance tests on OPGW fittings 124

SECTION IV-A
CHAPTER - 5
CONDUCTOR, GROUND WIRE, OPGW AND ACCESSORIES
5.0 INTRODUCTION
This chapter covers the specification and General Technical Particulars of Power Conductor,
Galavanised Steel Ground Wire, OPGW and their accessories for use in Koshi Corridor 220 kV
Transmission Line Project as defined in Section 1.
The detailed specification for Power Conductor, Ground Wire, OPGW and their accessories
are given below.
5.1 POWER CONDUCTOR

5.1.1 Scope
This section covers design, manufacture, testing before dispatch, packing, supply and
delivery CIP destination, Storage at site of 597 sq.mm ACSR “Moose” Conductor of size 54/
3.53mm Aluminum + 7/3.53 mm steel. The Conductor shall only be accepted from those
manufacturers who have got the valid ISO 9001 or equivalent internationally recognized
certification and documentary proof for having such certification shall be submitted with the
tender.
5.1.2 Standards
5.1.2.1 The Conductor shall comply in all respects with the IS:398 (latest edition) with all
amendments unless otherwise stipulated in this specification or any other equivalent
International Standards which ensure equal or higher quality material.
5.1.2.2 The ACSR Conductor shall also conform to the following standards.
TABLE-5.0
S.NO Indian Title International
Standards Standards
1 IS:209-1992 Specification for Zinc ingot BS-3436-1961
Section IV-A- Chapter 5 Page 1 of 128

2 IS:398-1976 Specification for aluminum conductors for

overhead transmission purposes.
Part II & V Aluminum conductors galvanized steel IEC-60209-1966
reinforced BS-215 (Part-
II)1970
3 IS:1608-1995 Mechanical testing of metals Tensile ISO/R89-1959
Testing of Steel wire
4 IS:1755-1983 Method for wrapping test format telic
wires
5 IS:1778-1980 Reels and Drums for Bare conductors BS-1559-1949
6 IS:1841-1978 E.C. Grade Aluminum rod produced by
rolling
7 IS:2629-1966 Recommended practice for Hot Dip
Galvanizing of iron and steel
8 IS:2633-1986 Method of testing uniformity of coating of
zinc coated articles.
9 IS:4826-1968 Hot Galvanized deep coatings on round ASTM A472-729
steel wires. BS-443-1969
10 IS:5484-1978 E.C. Grade Aluminum rod produced by
continuous casting and rolling.
11 IS:6745-1972 Methods of determination of mass of zinc- BS-443-1969
coatingof zinc coated iron and steel
articles
12 IS:8263-1976 Method of radio-interference tests on high IEC:60437-1973
voltage installations. NEMA:107-1964
13 Overhead lines – Requirements for IEC 61394: 201
greases for aluminium, aluminium alloy
and steel bare conductors

14 Overhead electrical conductors- Formed IEC 62219: 2002

wire, concentric lay, stranded conductors
Greasing of the conductor BS EN 50182-2001
15 IS:1885 (Part- Electro-technical vocabulary :Electrical
32) /1996 cable
16 Round wire concentric lay overheard IEC 61089:1991
Electrical Stranded Conductor
17 Aluminum-clad steel wire for electrical IS 398:1993
Purpose
18 Overhead lines-requirements and tests IEC 61284:1997/8
For fittings
19 Zinc coating (hot-dip) on Iron and Steel ASTM A 153:
hardware
20 Concentric Lay Stranded Aluminum-Clad ASTM B416:
steel conductors
21 Concentric lay stranded aluminum ASTM B549:
conductors, aluminum clad steel
reinforced
Insulator and Conductor Fittings for BS 3288
22 Overhead Power Lines
Performance and General Requirements Part 1 (1993)
Specifications for a Range of Fittings Part 2 (1990)
23 Electrical Power technical standards of
Nepal
Hard-drawn aluminium wire for overhead IEC: 60889-1987
line conductor

Zinc-coated steel wires for stranded IEC: 60888-1987.

conductors
Overhead lines - Requirements for greases IEC 61394:2011
for aluminium, aluminium alloy and steel
bare conductors
5.1.2.3 Offers conforming to Standards other than IS-398 shall be accompanied by the English
version of relevant standards in support of the guaranteed particulars to be furnished as
per Section-IV enclosed.
5.1.3 General Technical Requirements

The conductor is to be greased expect outer layer. The Technical specifications of greasing
are covered in this chapter.
The Specific Technical Requirements are given in Section-3. The Conductor shall conform to
these technical requirements. The Bidder shall furnish guaranteed technical particulars as per
Section-IV.
A. The General Technical particulars of the ACSR Moose (excluding the grease) conductor are
tabulated below:
TABLE-5.1
S.No Description Particulars
1 Conductor ACSR “MOOSE” 54/3.53 mm Aluminum +
7/3.53 mm steel
2 Standard applicable IS-398 (part-V)-1996 or ASTM or IEC or
equivalent
3 Wire diameter
Aluminium 3.53 mm± 2mm
Steel 3.53 mm ± 7mm
4 Number of strands per layers
a) Steel

Steel Core 1
1st Steel Layer 6
b) Aluminium
1st Layer 12
2nd Layer 18
3rd Layer 24
5 Sectional Area (Approx.)
Total conductor 597.00 mm2
Total Aluminium 528.5 mm2
Cross sectional area of nominal 9.787 sq. mm
diameter wire (Steel or Aluminium)
6 Overall diameter 31.77 mm
7 Approximate mass:
Overall conductor 2004 kg/km
Aluminium Wire (per wire) 26.45 kg/km
Steel Wire (per wire) 76.34 kg/km
8 a. Maximum D.C. resistance of 0.05552  /km
conductor at 20 degrees C,
b. Maximum D.C. resistance of each 2.921  /km
Aluminum wire at 20 degrees C,
9 Ultimate Tensile strength 161.20 kN
10 Breaking Load of Wires (min):
a) Aluminium (per wire)
Before Stranding 1.57 kN or 160kg
b) Steel (per wire)
Before Stranding 12.86 kN or 1311 kg

11 Final modulus of elasticity 0.703 x 106 kg/cm2

12 Coefficient of Linear expansion 19.35 x 10-6
(per 0C)
13 a. Direction of Lay Outermost Layer shall be Right hand with
inner successive layers having opposite
directions to lay.
b. Lay Ratio Maximum Minimum
Steel core 6 wire layer 18 16
Aluminium
1st Layer (12 wire) 14 12
2nd Layer (18 wire) 13 11
3rd Layer (24 wire) 12 10
14 Zinc coating of steel core
a) Number of 1 minute dips 3
b) Number of half minute dips -
c) Minimum weight of Zinc Coating 250 g/m2
d) Process of Galvanizing Hot Dip Galvanization
e) Quality of Zinc (min.) Electrolyte High Grade 99.95%
a) Steel Not permitted
b) Aluminium No Joints shall be permitted in the
Outermost layer. Joints in the individual
aluminium wires in intermediate layers are
permitted in addition to those made in the
base rod or wire before final drawing, but
no two such joints shall be less than 15 m
apart in the complete stranded conductor.

c) Method of making joint Joints shall be made by the cold pressure

butt-welding.
d) Ultimate tensile strength of joint 14.67 kg/sq. mm
16 Minimum Number of twists to be 18 (Before Stranding)
withstood in torsion test when
tested on a gauge length of 100 16 (After Stranding)
times diameter of wire
17 Minimum Percentage of Elongation 4% (Before stranding)
during testing for Elongation Test on
an original gauge length of 200 mm. 3.5% (After Stranding)
18 Chemical composition of high
carbon steel wire
Element
a) Carbon 0.50 to 0.85 %
b) Manganese 0.50 to 1.10 %
c) Phosphorus Not more than 0.035 %
d) Sulphur Not more than 0.045 %
e) Silicon 0.10 to 0.35 %
19 Standard Supply length 1500 meter
20 Packing (Wooden Drums) IS 1778 : 1980 or latest edition
B. For crossings involving longer spans, Aluminium Alloy Conductor Steel Reinforced shall be
used in this project. The Aluminium Alloy of Silicon-Magnesium (6201) shall be used. The
AACSR Conductor shall generally conform to IS: 398 except where otherwise specified
herein.
Aluminium Alloy Strands shall be drawn from Silicon-Magnesium Alloy rods (6201) with
appropriate tampering followed by solution treatment. The General Technical particulars
of the Aluminium Alloy Conductor Steel Reinforced ‘AACSR’ Moose (excluding the grease)
conductor are tabulated below:

S.No Description Unit Guaranteed

Values
1.0. Raw Materials
1.1. Aluminium Alloy
a. Silicon % 0.5-0.9
b. Magnesium % 0.6-0.9
c. Ferrous % 0.5 (Max)
d. Copper % 0.1 (Max)
e. Manganese % 0.03 (Max)
f. Chromium % 0.03 (Max)
g. Zinc % 0.10 (Max)
h. Boron % 0.06 (Max)
i. Other Elements (each) % 0.03 (Max)
j. Other elements (total) % 0.1 (Max)
k. Aluminium % Reminder
1.2. Steel Wire / Rods
a. Carbon % 0.50 to 0.85
b. Manganese % 0.50 to 1.10
c. Phosphorous % Not more than 0.035
d. Sulphur % Not more than 0.045
e. Silicon % 0.10 to 0.35 (Max.)
1.3. Zinc
a. Minimum purity of Zinc % Electrolyte High Grade 99.95%
2.0. Aluminum Alloy strands after
stranding
2.1. Diameter
a. Nominal mm 3.53

b. Maximum mm 3.55
c. Minimum mm 3.51
2.3. Maximum resistance of 1 m Ω 0.003388
length of strand at 20 deg. C
3.0. Steel strand after stranding
3.1. Diameter
a. Nominal mm 3.53
b. Maximum mm 3.59
c. Minimum mm 3.47
3.3. Galvanising
a. Minimum weight of zinc coating gm 250
per sq.m.
b. Minimum number of dips that the Nos. 3 dips of one minute
galvanised strand can withstand
in the standard preece test
c. Min. No. of twists in guage length Nos. 18 (Before Stranding)
equal 100 times the dia. of wire
which the strand can withstand in 16 (After Stranding)
the torsion test
d. Process of Galvanizing Hot Dip Galvanization
4.0. Stranded Conductor
4.1. UTS of the conductor 224.64 (Min.)

4.2. Lay Ratio Max Min

a. Outer Steel layer mm 18 16
b. 12 wire Aluminium Alloy layer mm 14 12
c. 18 wire Aluminium Alloy layer mm 13 11
d. 24 wire Alumimium Alloy Layer mm 12 10
4.3. DC resistance of the conductor at Ω/k 0.0624
20°C m
4.4. Minimum corona Extinction kV 156
Voltage (line to phase) under Dry (rms
condition )
4.5. RIV at 1 MHz at 156 Amp (line to Micr Below 1000
phase) under Dry condition o
Volts
4.6. Standard length of the conductor m 1800
4.7. Tolerance on Standard length % ±5
4.8. Direction of lay of outer layer Right Hand
4.9. Linear mass of the conductor
a. Standard Kg/k 1996
m
b. Minimum Kg/k 1963
m
c. Maximum Kg/k 2032
m
4.10. Sectional Area (Approx.)
a. Total mm2 597.00
b. Aluminium mm2 528.5
c. Overall diameter mm 31.77

d. Minimum Percentage of 4% (Before stranding)

Elongation during testing for
Elongation Test on an original 3.5% (After Stranding)
gauge length of 200 mm.
5.0. Joints in strands
5.1. Steel Not permitted
5.2. Aluminium No Joints shall be permitted in the
Outermost layer. Joints in the individual
aluminium wires in intermediate layers
are permitted in addition to those made
in the base rod or wire before final
drawing, but no two such joints shall be
less than 15 m apart in the complete
stranded conductor.
5.3. Method of making joint Joints shall be made by the cold pressure
butt-welding.
5.4. Ultimate tensile strength of joint kg/s 14.67
q.
mm
6.0. Packing (Wooden Drums) IS 1778 : 1980
7.0. Standard applicable IS-398 (part-IV)-1996, IS-398 (part-V)-
1996 or ASTM or IEC or equivalent
5.1.3.1 Materials& Workmanship

5.1.3.1.1 The material offered shall be of best quality and workmanship. The steel cored aluminum
strands shall consist of hard drawn aluminum wire manufactured from not less than
99.5% pure electrolytic aluminum rods of E.C. grade and copper content not exceeding
0.04%. They shall have the same properties and characteristics as prescribed in IEC: 60889-
1987. The steel wire shall be made from material produced either by the acid or basic open

hearth process or by electric furnace process or basic oxygen process. Steel wire drawn
from Bessemer process shall not be used. Aluminium Alloy Strands shall be drawn from
Silicon-Magnesium Alloy rods (6201) with appropriate tampering followed by solution
treatment.
5.1.3.1.2 The steel wires shall be evenly and uniformly coated with electrolytic high grade, 99.95%
purity zinc complying with the latest issue of IS-209 for zinc. The uniformity of zinc coating
and the weight of coating shall be in accordance with Section-3 and shall be tested and
determined according to the latest IS-2633 or any other authoritative standard. Chemical
composition of high carbon steel wire shall be:
Element
Carbon 0.50 to 0.85 %
Manganese 0.50 to 1.10 %
Phosphorus Not more than 0.035 %
Sulphur Not more than 0.045 %
Silicon 0.10 to 0.35 %
5.1.3.1.3 The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanized and shall have a minimum zinc coating of 260
gm/Sq.m. The coating shall be smooth, continuous, and of uniform thickness, free from
imperfections and shall withstand minimum three dips after stranding in standard preece
test. The steel strands shall be preformed and post formed in order to prevent spreading of
strands in the event of cutting of composite core wire. The properties and characteristics
of finished strands and individual wires shall be as prescribed in IEC:60888-1987.
5.1.3.2 Conductor Parameters

5.1.3.2.1 The Parameters of individual strands and composite steel cored aluminium/ aluminium
alloy conductor shall be in accordance with the values given in Section 3.
5.1.3.2.2 Steel core and the inner layers of Aluminum/Aluminum alloy shall be covered with suitable
temperature resistant grease during manufacture, but no grease shall be applied to the
finished conductor. The Specification of greasing is specified in this clause no. 5.1.3.4 below.

5.1.3.2.3 Creep in a conductor is attributed partly due to settlement of strands and partly due to non-
elastic elongation of metal when subjected to load. The Bidder shall furnish the amount of
creep which will take place in 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50 years along with the supporting
calculations. The calculations should be based on everyday temperature of 32 degree C and
everyday tension of 25% of UTS of conductor of overhead lines.
5.1.3.3 Tolerances
5.1.3.3.1 The tolerances on standard diameter of Aluminum/Aluminium alloy and Steel wires shall
be as detailed in specific technical requirements.
5.1.3.3.2 The cross-section of any wire shall not depart from circularity by more than an
amount corresponding to the tolerance on the standard diameter.
5.1.3.3.3 The details of diameters, lay ratios of Aluminium and steel wires shall be in accordance with
the Section-3 "Technical Requirements".
5.1.3.4 Greasing and Surface Conditions
5.1.3.4.1 Greasing
Steel core and the inner layers of Aluminum/Aluminum alloy shall be covered with suitable
temperature resistant grease during manufacture, but no grease shall be applied to the
finished conductor. Sufficient grease shall be applied to the Steel and inner Aluminium
strands to fill the inter-strand spaces (viz. Inner Layer Protection). The completed conductor
shall be smooth and free from imperfections, dirt, grit, excessive amounts of drawing oil
and other foreign deposits.
The grease used for corrosion protection in the manufacture of ACSR shall have the
following requirements satisfying IEC 61394.
a) The entire conductor is greased except the outer layer.
b) The weight of the grease shall confirm the values given in IEC 61089.
c) It shall not flow or deteriorate at temperatures up to 850C.
d) It shall not be inimical to Aluminium or Galvanized Steel.
e) It shall have good adhesive and cohesive properties and shall retain these qualities
after weathering.
f) It shall not extrude a surplus to the outside of the conductor after erection.

g) It shall not present any risks to health and shall comply with all the usual health and
safety standards.
h) temperature resistant grease shall have minimum of Lithium soap grease
corresponding to Grade II of IS 7623:1993 having minimum drop point not less than
1800C
The greasing process and testing of grease shall be done on the basis of following standard
however, the construction features and basic properties of the conductor must not be
changed and these are to be as per relevant standard as specified in the specifications.
IEC 61394: 2011 Overhead lines – Requirements for greases for aluminium,
aluminium alloy and steel bare conductors
IEC 62219: 2002 Overhead electrical conductors- Formed wire, concentric lay,
stranded conductors
BS EN 50182-2001 Conductors for Overhead lines
IS 7623 : 1993 Lithium Base Grease for Industrial Purposes
5.1.3.4.2 Surface Conditions

All aluminum/Aluminum alloy and steel strands shall be smooth, and free from all
imperfections, spills and splits. The finished conductor shall be smooth, compact, uniform
and free from all imperfections including spills and splits, die marks, scratches,
abrasions, scuff marks, kinks (protrusion of wires), dents, pressmarks, cut marks,
wire cross-over, over-riding looseness, pressure and/or unusual bangle noise on tapping,
material inclusions, white rust, powder formation or black spots (on account of reaction
with trapped rain water etc.,), dirt, grit, etc. The surface of conductor shall be free from
points, sharp edges, abrasions or other departures from smoothness or uniformity of
surface contour that would increase radio interference and corona losses. When subjected
to tension up to 50% of the ultimate strength of the conductor, the surface shall not depart
from the cylindrical form nor any part of the component parts or strands move relative to
each other in such a way as to get out of place and disturb the longitudinal smoothness of
the conductor.

5.1.3.5 Joints in Wires

5.1.3.5.1 Aluminum/Aluminum alloy wires
5.1.3.5.1.1 During stranding, no aluminium/ aluminium alloy wire welds shall be made for the purpose
of achieving the required conductor length.
5.1.3.5.1.2 No joint shall be permitted in the individual aluminium wires in the outer most layer (24
wires) of the finished Conductor. However, joints in the 18 wire & 12 wires inner layers
of the conductor are permitted but these joints shall be made by the cold pressure butt
welding and shall be such that no two such joints shall be within 15 meters of each other in
the complete stranded conductor.
5.1.3.5.2 Steel wires
There shall be no joints in finished steel wires forming the core of the steel reinforced
aluminium/aluminium alloy conductor.
5.1.3.6 Stranding
5.1.3.6.1 The wires used in construction of the stranded conductor, shall, before stranding, satisfy all
requirements of IS-398-1996.
5.1.3.6.2 In all constructions, the successive layers shall be stranded in opposite directions. The wires
in each layer shall be evenly and closely stranded round the underlying wire or wires. The
outer most layer of wires shall have a right hand lay. The lay ratio of the different layers
shall be within the limits given under Section-3.
5.1.3.7 Packing
5.1.3.7.1 The conductor shall be supplied in non-returnable strong wooden/steel drums provided
with lagging of adequate strength constructed to protect the conductor against any
damage and displacement during transit, storage and subsequent handling and stringing
operations in the field. The drums shall generally conform to IS-1778-1980 and latest
version except as otherwise specified hereinafter. The conductor drums shall be adequate
to wind one standard length of at least 1500 meters for ACSR 'Moose' conductor.
5.1.3.7.2 The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for letting off the conductor under a
minimum controlled tension of the order of 5KN.

5.1.3.7.3 The bidders should submit their drawings of the conductor drums along with the bid. After
placement of letter of intent the contractor/manufacturer shall submit two copies of fully
dimensioned drawing of the drum for employer's approval. After getting approval from the
employer, contractor/manufacturer shall submit 6 more copies of the approved drawings
for further distribution and field use at Department's end.
5.1.3.7.4 All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned soft wood free from
defects that may materially weaken the component parts of the drums. Preservative
treatment for anti-termite/anti fungus shall be applied to the entire drum with
preservatives of a quality which is not harmful to the conductor.
5.1.3.7.5 All flanges shall be 2-ply construction with 64 mm thickness, with each ply at right angles to
the adjacent ply and nailed together. The nails shall be driven from the inside face flange,
punched and then clenched on the outer face. The thickness of each ply shall not vary by
more than 3mm from nominal thickness. There shall be at least 3 nails per plank of ply with
maximum nail spacing of 75 mm. Where a slot is cut with flange to receive the inner end
of the conductor the entrance shall be in line with the periphery of the barrel.
5.1.3.7.6 The wooden battens used for making the barrel of the conductor shall be of segmental type.
These shall be nailed to the barrel supports with at least two nails. The battens shall be
closely butted and shall provide a round barrel with smooth external surface. The edges of
the battens shall be rounded or chamfered to avoid damage to the conductor.
5.1.3.7.7 Barrel studs shall be used for construction of drums. The flanges shall be holed and the
barrel supports slotted to receive them. The barrel studs shall be threaded over a length
on either end, sufficient to accommodate washers, spindle plates and nuts for fixing
flanges at the required spacing.
5.1.3.7.8 Normally, the nuts on the studs shall stand protruded of the flanges. All the nails used on
the inner surface of the flanges and the drum barrel shall be countersunk. The ends of the
barrel shall generally be flushed with the top of the nuts.
5.1.3.7.9 The inner cheek of the flanges and drum barrel surface shall be painted with bitumen based
paint.

5.1.3.7.10 Before reeling, card board or double corrugated or thick bituminized waterproof bamboo
paper shall be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges of the drum by means of a
suitable commercial adhesive material. The paper should be dried before use. Medium
grade Kraft paper shall be used in between the layers of the conductor. After reeling the
conductor the exposed surface of the outer layer of conductor shall be wrapped with thin
polythene sheet across the flanges to preserve the conductor from dirt, grit and damage
during transportation and handling and also to prevent ingress of rain water during
storage/transport.
5.1.3.7.11 A minimum space of 50 mm shall be provided between the inner surface of the external
protective lagging and outer layer of the conductor. Outside the protective lagging, there
shall be minimum of two binders consisting of hoop iron/galvanized steel wire. Each
protective lagging shall have two recesses to accommodate the binders.
5.1.3.7.12 Each batten shall be securely nailed across grains as far as possible to the flange edges with
at least 2 nails per end. The length of the nails shall not be less than twice the thickness of
the battens. The nail shall not protrude above the general surface and shall not have
exposed sharp edges or allow the battens to be released due to corrosion.
5.1.3.7.13 The conductor ends shall be properly sealed and secured with the help of U-nails on one
side of the flanges.
5.1.3.7.14 Only one standard length of conductor shall be wound on each drum. The method of
lagging to be employed shall be clearly stated in the tender.
5.1.3.7.15 As an alternative to wooden drum Bidder may also supply the conductors in non-returnable
painted steel drums. The painting shall conform to IS: 9954-1981, reaffirmed in 1992.
Wooden/ steel drum will be treated at par for evaluation purpose and accordingly the
Bidder should quote the package.
5.1.3.8 Labeling and Marking
5.1.3.8.1 The drum number shall be branded or gauged or stenciled into the flange. An arrow shall
be marked on the sides of the drum, together with the words "Roll this way". Each drum
shall have the following information provided on the outside of the flange stenciled with
indelible ink.

a) Manufacturer's name and address.

b) Contract/Specification number.
c) Size and type of conductor.
d) Net weight of the conductor.
e) Gross weight of the conductor and drum.
f) Tear weight of the Conductor in the Drum
g) Arrow marking for unwinding
h) Distance between the outer Layer of the Conductor and the inner surface of lagging
i) Barrel diameter for three locations and an arrow arrow marking at the location of
the measurement.
j) Length of the conductor.
k) Position of the conductor end.
l) Drum and lot number.
m) Name and address of the consignee.
n) Month and year of manufacture.
o) The drum may also be marked with standard specification as per which the
conductor is manufactured.
5.1.3.9 Standard Lengths
5.1.3.9.1 The standard length of the conductor shall be 1500 meters for 'MOOSE' ACSR. Bidder shall
indicate the standard length of the conductor to be offered by them. A tolerance of plus or
minus 5% on the standard length offered by the bidder shall be permitted. All lengths
outside this limit of tolerance shall be treated as random lengths. The Owner reserves the
right to verify the length of the conductor after unreeling.
5.1.3.9.2 Unless otherwise agreed to between the employer and the manufacturer, it shall be
permissible to supply not more than 10 percent of the lengths on any one order in random
lengths; none of them shall be shorter than one third of the nominal length.
5.1.3.10 Quality Assurance Plan
activities of the material shall be required to be submitted by the bidder to the employer

along with the bid. The Quality Assurance Plan after the same is found acceptable will be
approved by the employer. The contractor shall follow the approved Quality Assurance Plan
in true spirit. If desired by the employer, he shall give access to all the documents and
materials to satisfy the employer that the Quality Assurance Plan is being properly followed.
5.1.4 Testing
The Conductor offered shall be type tested duly last 5 years (time period from before final
bid submission date). The Bidder needs to furnish Type Test Reports of identical conductor
along with the Bid for consideration. In case of non-submission of Type-test reports, Type
Test as per the following and as per IS-398 shall be carried out at the reputed standard
laboratory (acceptable to Employer).
5.1.4.1 Selection of Test Samples For Type Tests

5.1.4.1.1 The samples shall be taken from a continuous length of conductor and subjected to all the
tests specified in clause no. 5.1.4.2.2.
5.1.4.1.2 Selection of Test Samples for Acceptance Tests
5.1.4.1.2.1 Before dispatch from the works individual wire and finished steel cored
aluminium/aluminium alloy conductor shall be subjected to the tests as specified in IS:398
or any other authoritative standard.
5.1.4.1.2.2 Sample for individual wires for test shall be taken before stranding from outer ends of not
less than ten per cent of the spools in the case of aluminium/ Aluminium alloy wire and ten
percent of the wire coils in the case of steel wires. If samples are taken after stranding, they
shall be obtained by cutting 1.2 meters from the outer ends of the finished conductor from
not more than 10 per cent of the finished reels.
5.1.4.1.2.3 The routine tests shall be same as acceptance test and shall be carried out on each coil
before and after standing.
5.1.4.2 Tests
5.1.4.2.1 The following tests shall be carried out as per this specification on a sample/samples of
conductor.
5.1.4.2.2 Type Tests (Design test)

a) Visual examination
b) Measurement of diameters of individual aluminium/Aluminium alloy and steel
wires
c) Measurement of lay ratio of each layer
d) Breaking load of "Individual wire" as well as stranded Conductor
e) Ductility test
f) Wrapping test
g) Resistance test on aluminium/Aluminium alloy wires.
h) DC resistance test on composite conductor
i) Ultimate Breaking load test on stranded conductor.
j) Galvanizing test
k) Surface condition test
l) Stress Strain test
m) Breaking load test on welded Aluminium/ Aluminium alloy strands.
n) Corona test
o) Radio interference voltage test
5.1.4.2.3 Acceptance tests and Routine tests

a) Visual and dimensional check on drum.
b) Visual examination
c) Measurement of diameters of individual aluminium/ Aluminium alloy and steel
wires.
d) Measurement of lay ratio of each layer
e) Breaking load of "individual wire"
f) Ductility test
g) Wrapping test
h) Resistance test on aluminium/Aluminium alloy wires.
i) DC resistance test on composite conductor
j) Breaking load test on welded Aluminium strands.

k) Galvanizing test
5.1.4.2.4 Tests during Manufacture
The following tests during manufacture shall be carried out.
a) Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising, as per cl. 5.1.4.16
b) Chemical analysis of aluminium/Aluminium alloy used for making
aluminium/Aluminium alloy strands, as per cl. 5.1.4.15
c) Chemical analysis of steel used for making steel strands, as per cl. 5.1.4.15
Testing Procedures
5.1.4.3 Visual examination
The conductor shall be examined visually for good workmanship and general surface finish
of the conductor. The conductor drums shall be rewound in the presence of NEA/WAPCOS
Inspecting Officers. The Inspector will initially check for Scratches, Joints etc., and that the
conductor shall generally conform to the requirements of the specifications/IS 398(Part-II)-
1996.
5.1.4.4 Measurement of diameters of individual Aluminium/Aluminium alloy and Steel Wires.
The diameters of individual Aluminium/Aluminium alloy and Steel Wires shall be checked
to ensure that they conform to the requirements of this specification.
5.1.4.5 Measurement of lay-ratios
The lay-ratios of each layer of the conductor shall be measured and checked to ensure that
they conform to the requirements of this specification and IS: 398 (Part-II)-1996.
5.1.4.6 Breaking load test

5.1.4.6.1 Breaking load test on stranded conductor.
Circles perpendicular to the axis of the conductor shall be marked at two places on a sample
of conductor of minimum 5m length between fixing arrangement suitably fixed on a tensile
testing machine. The load shall be increased at a steady rate up to 50% of minimum
specified UTS and held for one minute. The circles drawn shall not be distorted due to
relative movement of strands. Thereafter the load shall be increased at steady rate to 100%

of UTS and held for one minute. The Conductor sample shall not fail during this period. The
applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.
5.1.4.6.2 Breaking load test on individual Aluminium/Aluminium alloy and galvanised steel wires.
5.1.4.6.2.1 This test shall be conducted on both Aluminium/Aluminium alloy and galvanised steel wires.
The breaking load of one specimen cut from each of the samples taken shall be determined
by means of suitable tensile testing machine. The load shall be applied gradually and the
rate of separation of the jaws of the testing machine shall be not less than 25 mm/min. and
not greater than 100 mm./min. The ultimate breaking load of the specimens shall be not
less than the values specified in the Section-3.
5.1.4.7 Ductility Test

For the purpose of this test both torsion and elongation tests shall be carried out on
galvanized steel wires only.
5.1.4.7.1 Torsion Test
One specimen cut from each of the samples taken shall be gripped in two vices exactly 15
cms apart. One of the vices shall be made to revolve at a speed not exceeding one
revolution per second and the other shall be capable of moving longitudinally to allow for
contraction or expansion during testing. A small tensile load not exceeding 2 (two) percent
of the breaking load of the wire shall be applied to the samples during testing. The test
shall be continued until fracture occurs and the fracture shall show a smooth surface at
right angles to the axis of the wire. After fracture, the specimen shall be free from helical
splits. The sample shall withstand a number of twists equivalent to not less than 18 on
length equal to 100 times the diameter. When twisted after stranding the number of
complete twists before fracture occurs shall be not less than 16 on a length equal to 100
times the diameter of the wire. In case test sample length is less or more than 100 times
the stranded diameter of the strand, the minimum number of twists will be proportioned
to the length and if number comes in the fraction then it will be rounded off to the next
higher whole number. The fracture shall show a smooth surface at right angles to the
axis of the wire.

5.1.4.7.2 Elongation Test

The elongation of one specimen cut from each of the samples taken shall be determined.
The specimen shall be straightened by hand and an original gauge length of 200 mm. shall
be marked on the wire. A tensile load shall be applied as described in 5.1.4.6.2.1 and the
elongation shall be measured after the fractured ends have been fitted together. If the
fracture occurs outside the gauge marks, or within 25 mm. of either mark and the required
elongation is not obtained, the test shall be disregarded and another test conducted. When
tested before stranding, the elongation shall be not less than 4 percent and when tested
after stranding, the elongation shall be not less than 3.5 percent.
5.1.4.8 Wrapping Test

This test shall be conducted on both Aluminium/Aluminium alloy and galvanised steel
wires.
5.1.4.8.1 Aluminium/Aluminium alloy wires
One specimen cut from each of the samples of aluminium/Aluminium alloy wires shall be
wrapped round a wire of its own diameter to forma close helix of 8turns. Six turns shall
then be unwrapped and closely wrapped in the same direction as before. The wire shall
not break or show any crack.
5.1.4.8.2 Galvanized steel wires
One specimen cut from each of the samples of galvanized steel wire taken shall be wrapped
round a mandrel of diameter equal to 4 times the wire diameter to form a close helix of 8
turns. Six turns shall then be unwrapped and again closely wrapped in the same direction
as before. The wire shall not break.
5.1.4.9 Resistance Test on Aluminium/Aluminium alloy Wire
5.1.4.9.1 This test shall be conducted on aluminium wires only, conforming to procedure as
per IEC:60889. The electrical resistance of one specimen of aluminium wire cut from each
of the samples taken shall be measured at ambient temperature. The measured resistance

shall be corrected to the value corresponding to 20 degrees C. by means of following

formula.
1
𝑅20 = 𝑅𝑡
1 + 𝛼 × (𝑇 − 20)
Where
R20 =Resistance corrected at 20 degrees C.
RT = Resistance measured at T degrees C.
α = Constant mass temperature coefficient of resistance 0.004.
T = Ambient temperature during measurement
This resistance calculated to 20 degrees C. shall be not more than the maximum value
specified in Section-3.
5.1.4.10 Galvanizing Test

5.1.4.10.1 This test shall be conducted on galvanized steel wires only. The uniformity of Zinc coating
and the weight of coating shall be in accordance with IS 4826-1979.
5.1.4.11 Surface Condition Test

A sample of the finished 'Moose' ACSR for 220 kV system having a minimum length of 5
meters with compression type dead end clamps compressed on both ends in such manner
as to permit the conductor to take its normal straight line shape, shall be subjected to a
tension of 50 percent of the UTS of the conductor. The surface shall not depart from its
cylindrical shape nor shall the strands move relative to each other so as to get out of place
or disturb the longitudinal smoothness of conductor. The measured diameter at any place
shall be not less than the sum of the minimum specified diameters of the individual
aluminium/Aluminium alloy and steel strands as indicated in Section-3.
5.1.4.12 CORONA TEST

5.1.4.12.1 A sample of the conductor for use in 220 KV overhead transmission line, arranged as a twin
horizontal bundle with a sub-conductor spacing of 450 mm. shall be subjected to 50 Hz
phase to earth voltage. The stringing height of the bundle shall be such that the minimum
clearance to ground is not more than 9.35 m.
5.1.4.12.2 The specimen shall have a corona extinction voltage without corona rings of not less than
154 KV (rms) under dry condition. There shall be no evidence of corona at any point of the
sample. The corresponding corona inception voltage shall also be measured. The test
should be conducted without Corona Control rings. However, small Corona rings may be
used to prevent corona in the end fittings. The voltage should be corrected for standard
atmospheric conditions.
5.1.4.13 RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE TEST

Under dry conditions, the conductor for use in 220 KV line shall be subjected to a 50 HZ ac
voltage of 154 KV (rms) line to ground under the conditions specified in clause 4.1.4.12.1,
corona test. The test shall be carried out as per the procedure given in IS:8263-1976. The
conductor shall have a radio interference levels below 1000 micro volts at 1.0 MHZ.
5.1.4.12 Stress-Strain Test

5.1.4.12.1 The test is contemplated only to collect the creep data of the conductor from the
manufacturer. A sample of conductor of minimum 10 metres length shall be suitably
compressed with dead end clamps.
5.1.4.12.2 Test Set-Up
5.1.4.12.2.1 The test sample shall be supported in a trough over its full length and the trough adjusted
so that the conductor will not be lifted by more than 10mm under tension. This shall be
ascertained by actual measurement.
5.1.4.12.2.2 The distance between the clamp and the sleeve mouth shall be monitored with callipers
during the test to ensure that, after the test, it does not change by more than 1mm +
0.1mm from the value before the test.

5.1.4.12.2.3 The conductor strain shall be evaluated from the measured displacements at the two
ends of the gauge length of the sample. The gauge reference targets shall be attached
to the clamps which lock the steel and aluminium/Aluminium alloy wires together. Target
plates may be used with dial gauges or displacement transducers and care shall be taken
to position the plates perpendicular to the conductor. Twisting the conductor, lifting
it and moving it from side-to-side by the maximum amounts expected during the test
should introduce no more than 0.3mm error in the reading.
5.1.4.12.3 Test Loads for Complete Conductor
The loading conditions for repeated stress-strain tests for complete conductor shall be as
follows:
5.1.4.12.3.1 1KN load shall be applied initially to straighten the conductor. The load shall be removed
after straightening and then the strain gauges are to be set at zero tension.
5.1.4.12.3.2 For non-continuous stress-strain data, the strain readings at 1KN intervals at lower
tensions and 5 KN intervals above 30% of UTS shall be recorded.
5.1.4.12.3.3 The sample shall be reloaded to 30% of UTS and held for 1 hour. Readings are to be noted
after 5, 10, 15, 30, 45 and 60 minutes during the hold period. The load shall be released
then after the hold period.
5.1.4.12.3.4 The sample shall be reloaded to 50% of UTS and held for 1 hour. Readings are to be noted
after 5, 10, 15, 30, 45 and 60 minutes during the hold period. The load shall be released
then after the hold period.
5.1.4.12.3.5 Reloading upto 70% of UTS shall be done and held for 1 hour. Readings are to be noted
after 5, 10, 15, 30, 45 and 60 minutes. The load shall be released.
5.1.4.12.3.6 Reloading upto 85% of UTS shall be done and held for 1 hour. Readings are to be noted
after 5, 10, 15, 30, 45 and 60 minutes and the load shall be released then.
5.1.4.12.3.7 Tension shall be applied again and shall be increased uniformly until the actual breaking
strength is reached. Simultaneous readings of tension and elongation shall be
recorded upto 90% of UTS at the intervals described under Clause 5.1.4.12.3.6.
5.1.4.12.4 Test Loads for steel core only

The loading conditions for repeated stress-strain tests for the steel core of ACSR shall be
as follows:
5.1.4.12.4.1 The test shall consist of successive applications of load applied in a manner similar to that
for the complete conductor at 30%, 50%, 70% and 85% of UTS.
5.1.4.12.4.2 The steel core shall be loaded until the elongation at the beginning of each hold period
corresponds to that obtained on the complete conductor at 30%, 50%, 70% and 85% of
UTS respectively.
5.1.4.12.5 Stress-strain curves
The design stress-strain curve shall be obtained by drawing a smooth curve through the
0.5 and 1 hour points at 30%, 50% and 70% of UTS loadings. The presence of any
aluminium/aluminium alloy slack that can be related to any observed extrusion entering
the span from the compression dead ends shall be removed from the lower ends of the
design curves. Both the laboratory and standard stress-strain curves shall be submitted
to the employer along with test results. The stress-strain data obtained during the test
shall be corrected to the standard temperature i.e. 20 deg. C.
5.1.4.13 DC Resistance Test on Composite Conductor
On a conductor sample of minimum 5m length, two contact clamps shall be fixed with a
pre-determined bolt torque. The resistance of the sample shall be measured by a Kelvin
Double bridge by placing the clamps initially zero meter and subsequently one meter
apart. The test shall be repeated at least five times and average value recorded. The
value obtained shall be corrected to the value at 20 deg C as per Clause 13.6 of IS: 398
(Part II)-1996. The corrected resistance value at 20 deg C shall conform to the
requirements of this specification.
5.1.4.14 Breaking load test on welded Aluminium/aluminium alloy Strands.
Two Aluminium/aluminium alloy wires shall be welded as per the approved quality plan
and shall be subjected to tensile load. The breaking strength of the welded joint of the
wire shall not be less than the guaranteed breaking strength of individual strands.
5.1.4.15 Chemical Analysis of Aluminium/aluminium alloy and steel

Samples taken from the Aluminium/aluminium alloy and Steel ingots / coils/ strands shall
be chemically/ spectrographically analysed. The same shall be in conformity with the
requirements stated in this specification.
5.1.4.16 Chemical Analysis of zinc
Samples taken from the zinc ingots shall be chemically / spectrographically analysed. The
same shall be in conformity with the requirements stated in this specification.
5.1.4.17 Visual and Dimensional check on Drums
The drums shall be visually and dimensionally checked to ensure that they conform to the
5.1.4.18 Rejection and Retest
5.1.4.18.1 In case of failure in any type test, the contractor/manufacturer is either required to
manufacture fresh sample lot and repeat all the tests successfully once or repeat that
particular type test three times successfully on the sample selected from the already
manufactured lot at his own expenses. In case a fresh lot is manufactured for testing then
the lot already manufactured shall be rejected.
5.1.4.18.2 If samples are taken for test after stranding and if any selected reel fails in the retest,
the manufacturer may test each and every reel and submit them for further inspection.
All rejected material shall be suitably marked and segregated.
5.1.4.19 Checking and Verification of Length of Conductor
5.1.4.19.1 The contractor should arrange for inspection by the representative of the employer
specially authorised for this purpose. At least 50% of the total number of drums of
conductor subject to minimum of two taken at random should be checked to ascertain
the length of conductor adopting the method at clause 5.1.6.6. Arrangements should be
made available in the works of the manufacturer for transferring the conductor from one
reel to another at the same time measuring the length of the conductor so transferred by
means of a meter.
5.1.4.20 Additional Tests
The Owner reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of
reasonable nature carried out at Bidder's premises, at site, or in any other standard

Laboratory in addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests to satisfy
himself that the materials comply with the specifications.
5.1.4.21 Testing Expenses
5.1.4.21.1 Bidder shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type test.
5.1.4.21.2 They shall ensure that adequate facilities are available in the laboratories and the tests
can be completed in these laboratories within the time schedule guaranteed by them.
5.1.4.21.3 The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during
manufacture specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price of the
conductor, except for the expenses of the inspector/Employer's representative.
5.1.4.21.4 In case of failure in any type test, if repeat type tests are required to be conducted then
all the expenses for deputation of Inspector/Employer's representatives shall be
included in the quoted price contract price. Also if on receipt of the
contractor/manufacturer's notice of testing, the Employer's representative does not find
'plant' to be ready for testing, the expenses incurred by the Employer, shall be borne by
the contractor.
5.1.4.22 Test Reports

5.1.4.22.1 Bidders should submit one Copy of type test reports and later on contractor shall be
furnish at least six copies along with one original. One copy will be returned duly certified
by the Employer/Owner only after which the commercial production of the material shall
start.
5.14.22.2 Record of Routine test reports shall be maintained by the contractor/manufacturer at his
works for periodic inspection by the Employer/Owner’s representative.
5.1.4.22.3 Test certificates of Tests during manufacture shall be maintained by the
contractor/manufacturer. These shall be produced for verification as and when desired
by the Employer/Owner.
5.1.4.23 Test Facilities
5.1.4.23.1 The following additional test facilities shall be available at the contractor/manufacturer's
works:

a) Calibration of various testing and measuring equipment including tensile testing

machine, resistance measurement facilities, burette, thermometer, barometer, etc.
b) Standard resistance for calibration of resistance bridges.
c) Finished Conductor shall be checked for length verification and surface finish on
separate rewinding machine at reduced speed (variable from 8 to 16 meters per
minute).The rewinding facilities shall have appropriate clutch system and be free of
vibrations, jerks etc with traverse laying facilities.
5.1.5 Inspection and factory acceptance tests
5.1.5.1 The Owner's representative shall, at all times, be entitled to have access to the works and all
places of manufacture where conductor shall be manufactured and the representative shall
have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Bidder's works, raw materials and
process of manufacture and conducting necessary tests as detailed herein.
5.1.5.2 The Bidder shall keep the Owner informed in advance of the time of starting and of the
progress of manufacture of conductor in its various stages so that arrangements can be
made for inspection.
5.1.5.3 The contractor will intimate the Employer/Owner about carrying out of the tests at least 15
days in advance of the scheduled date of tests during which the employer will arrange to
depute his representative/s to be present at the time of carrying out of the tests. Six (6)
copies of the test reports shall be submitted.
5.1.5.4 No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily
inspected and tested, unless the inspection is waived off by the owner in writing. In the later
case also, the conductor shall be dispatched only after satisfactory testing for all tests
specified herein has been completed and approved by the owner.
5.1.5.5 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Bidder of any of his
responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification, and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.
5.1.5.6 At least 50% of the total number of drums subject to minimum of two in any lot put up for
inspection shall be selected at random to ascertain the length of conductor by the following
method:

"At the works of the manufacturer of the conductor, the conductor shall be transferred
from one drum to another at the same time measuring its length with the help of a
graduated pulley and Cyclometer. The difference in the average length thus obtained and as
declared by the Bidder in the packing list shall be applied to all the drums if the conductor is
found short during checking".
5.1.6 Schedule of Deviations/Variations

If the tenderer has any exceptions to any of the clause/s laid down in this specification, these
should be clearly stated in the schedule of deviations/variations, otherwise it shall be
presumed that the tenderer agrees to the provision/s of this specification and same shall be
included in the contract and the contract in case of successful tenderers.

5.2 GALVANISED STRANDED STEEL GROUND WIRE

5.2.1 Scope
This section covers design, manufacture, testing before dispatch, packing, supply and delivery
CIP of the high tensile galvanized stranded steel earthwire of size 7/3.66 mm & 7/4.5 mm.
5.2.2 Standards
5.2.2.1 The ground wire shall be galvanized steel wire and the base metal shall be produced by open-
hearth, electric furnace or basic oxygen process and shall be of such combination that the
finished Galvanized steel wire shall have the same properties and characteristics as given in
IS 398 unless otherwise specified herein or any other International Standards which ensure
equal or higher quality of material. The Earth wire shall only be accepted from those
manufacturers who have got the valid ISO 9001 or equivalent internationally recognized
certification and documentary proof for having such certification shall be submitted with the
tender.
5.2.2.2 The galvanized stranded steel earth wires shall comply with 1S:2141-1979 and IS: I 2776-I 989
latest versions unless otherwise specified herein or any other International Standards which
ensure equal or higher quality of material
5.2.2.3 The galvanized stranded steel earth wires shall also conform to the following latest standards.
Whenever revised I.S. specifications are available, the same may be followed.
TABLE-5.2
S. No. Indian Standard Title
1 IS:209-I 992 Specification for zinc ingot
2 IS: 398 Aluminium conductor steel Reinforced.
3 IS:I608-1995 Mechanical testing of metals tensile testing
of steel wire.
4 IS: 1521-1972 Method of tensile testing of steel wire.
5 IS: 1755-1961 Specification for method for wrapping test of
wires.
6 IS: 1778-1980 Reels and drums for Bare wire.

7 IS: 2629-1966 Recommended practice for hot dip

galvanizing of iron and steel.
8 IS: 2633-1972 Method of testing of uniformity of coating on
Zinc coated article.
9 IS: 4826-1968 Galvanized coatings on round steel wires.
10 IS: 6745-1972 Method of determination of weight of Zinc
coating on Zinc coated iron and steel articles.
11 IS: 2141-1979 Specification for Galvanized stay strand.
12 IS: 12776-2002 Galvanized strand for earthing.
13 IS: 2363-1965 Glossary in terms relating to wire ropes
14 IS: 6594-1977 Technical supply conditions for steel wire
ropes & strand.
5.2.2.4 Offers conforming to standards other than the IS/IEC Specified above shall be accompanied
by the English version of relevant standards in support of the guaranteed technical particulars
to be furnished as per Section-3.
5.2.3 General Technical Requirements

5.2.3.1 The General Technical requirements are given in Section-3. The galvanized steel ground wire
shall conform to these technical requirements.
5.2.3.1.1 The Bidder shall furnish guaranteed technical particulars in Section-IV.
5.2.3.1.2 The details of the steel wire are tabulated below:
S.no. Particulars 7/3.66mm 7/4.5mm
Galvanized Steel Galvanized Steel
Ground Wire Ground Wire
1. Number of strands
Steel core 1 1
Outer Steel core 6 6

2. Total Sectional area 73.65 sq. mm 111.33 mm2

3. Overall diameter 10.98 mm 13.50 mm
4. Approximate weight 583 kg/km 882 kg/km
Maximum 604 kg/km 913 kg/km
Minimum 562 kg/km 851 kg/km
5. Minimum ultimate tensile 68.4 kN 106.2 kN
6. Direction of lay of outer layer Right Hand Right Hand
7. Tensile grade of wire 3 3
8. D.C. resistance @ 20 o C 2.51 ohms/km 1.66 ohms/km
5.2.3.2 Workmanship
5.2.3.2.1 All steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free from all imperfections such as spills and
splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions and kinks after drawing and also after stranding
fissures, roughness, grooves, inclusions or other defects which may endanger the
performance of the product. The ground wire shall be free from grease, metal particles, dirt
etc
5.2.3.2.2 The finished material shall have minimum brittleness as it will be subjected to appreciable
vibration while in use.
5.2.3.2.3 The steel strand shall be hot dip galvanised and shall have a minimum zinc coating of 260
gms/sq.m. and 275 gm sq. m on the uncoated wire surfaces of 7/3.66 mm and 7/4.5 mm
respectively.. The zinc used for galvanizing shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95%
purity. It shall conform to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209-1992.The zinc coating
shall be smooth, continuous, of uniform thickness, free from imperfections and shall
withstand three one minute ditps after stranding in Standard Preece test. The steel wire
rod shall be of the such quality and purity that, when drawn to the size of the strands
specified and coated with zinc, the finished strands shall be of uniform quality and have the
same properties and characteristics, as specified in relevant Indian Standards Specification.

5.2.3.2.4 The steel strands shall be preformed and post-formed in order to prevent the spreading of
strands in case earth wire is cut. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to galvanization during
pre-forming and post-forming operations.
5.2.3.2.5 The round wire steel core shall be with a round and uniform galvanization.
5.2.3.2.6 To avoid susceptibility towards wet storage stains (with rust), the finished material shall be
provided with a protective coating of boiled linseed oil.
5.2.3.3 Joints In Wires
There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished steel wire strand entering into the
manufacture of the earth wire. There shall be no strand joints or strand splices in any
length of the completed stranded earth wire.
5.2.3.4 Tolerances
The manufacturing tolerances to the extent of the following limits only shall be permitted
in the diameter of the individual steel strands and lay length of the earth wire.
TABLE-5.3
Standard Maximum Minimum
Diameter 7/3.66 3.66 mm 3.73 mm 3.59 mm
Diameter 7/4.5 4.5 mm 4.58 mm 4.42 mm
5.2.3.5 Materials
5.2.3.5.1 The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel rods and shall conform to the
following requirements as to the chemical composition:
TABLE-5.4
Carbon Not more than 0.55

Manganese 0.4 to 0.9
Phosphorus Not more than 0.04
Sulphur Not more than 0.04
Silicon 0.15 to 0.35
The zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95% purity.

5.2.3.5 Standard Length

5.2.3.6.1 The standard length of the earth wire shall be 3000 meters. The tolerance on length shall
be +/-5% on the standard length. 30 mm space may be left unwound between outer layer
of ground-wire and outer diameter of protective lagging of drum.
5.2.3.6.2 Random lengths shall be accepted, provided that no length is less than 70% of the standard
length and the total quality of random lengths shall not be more than 10% of the total
quantity ordered. One drum length of earth wire shall be wound on one drum.
5.2.3.7 Quality Assurance Plan
activities of the material shall be required to be submitted by the tenderer to the
Employer along with the tender. The Quality Assurance Plan after the same is found
acceptable will be approved by the Employer after award of the contract. The contractor
shall follow the approved Quality Assurance Plan in true spirit. If desired by the Employer,
he shall give access to all the documents and materials to satisfy the Employer that the
Quality Assurance Plan is being properly followed.
5.2.3.8 The contractor will intimate the Employer about carrying out of the tests at least 15 days in
advance of the scheduled date of tests during which the Employer will arrange to depute
his representative/s to be present at the time of carrying out of the tests. Six (6) copies of
the test reports shall be submitted.
5.2.4 Tests
5.2.4.1 The tests on the individual strands constituting the earth wire shall be conducted before
stranding by the manufacturer and all the test records shall be made available to the
Employer as and when desired. Tests on the sample of the strands after stranding and
complete earth wire taken from the earth wire drum shall be conducted in the presence of
the Employer or his authorized representative before dispatch of the ground wire.
5.2.4.2 The test pieces from the coils, spools or drum selected for testing shall withstand the
following tests.
5.2.4.2.1 Tests on Individual Strands

The Galvanised Steel Earthwire offered shall be type tested duly last 5 years (time period
from before final bid submission date). The Bidder needs to furnish Type Test Reports of
identical Galvanised Steel Earthwire along with the Bid for consideration. In case of non-
submission of Type-test reports, Type Test as per the following and as per IS-398 shall be
carried out at the reputed standard laboratory (acceptable to Employer).
5.2.4.2.1.1 Type Tests

TABLE-5.5
a. Verification of Diameter
b. Tensile test
c. Torsion test
d. Elongation test
e. Wrapping test As per IS 398, IS 2141 & IS 12776 (latest
f. DC resistance test editions)
g. Breaking load test

h. Chemical analysis of steel
I Galvanizing Test
5.2.4.2.1.2 Acceptance Tests

The acceptance test shall be same as type tests given in clause 5.2.4.2.1.1
5.2.4.2.2 Tests on Ground Wire
5.2.4.2.2.1 Type Tests
TABLE-5.6
a. Visual Examination As per IS 398
b. UTS Test As per IS 398
c. D C Resistance Test As per IS 398
d. Lay Length Check As per IS 398
e. Verification of length and As per IS 398
weight of ground wire.

f. Visual and dimensional As per IS 398

check on drum
5.2.4.2.2.2 Acceptance Tests

The acceptance tests shall be the same as type tests.
5.2.4.2.2.3 Routine Tests
a) Visual Examination
b) Lay Length Check.
c) Check for correctness of stranding
d) Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands.
e) Check that drums are as per Specification.
5.2.4.2.2.4 Tests during Manufacture

TABLE-5.7
a. Chemical Analysis of ZINC used for As per cl.5.2.4.4.5 of specification
covering
b. Chemical analysis of steel As per cl.5.2.4.4.4 of specification
5.2.4.3 Test Reports

5.2.4.3.1 The tenderer shall submit six (6) copies of certificates of the type and acceptance tests.
One copy each of test certificates shall be returned duly certified by the Employer.
5.2.4.3.2 All the routine tests shall be carried out by the manufacturer and record shall be made
available to the Employer as and when desired.
5.2.4.3.3 Testing Expenses
5.2.4.3.3.1 The break-up of the testing charges for the type tests specified shall be indicated
separately.
5.2.4.3.3.2 Bidders shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type tests.
They shall ensure that the tests can be completed in these laboratories within the time
schedule guaranteed by them.

5.2.4.3.3.3 In case of failure in any type test if repeat type tests are required to be conducted, then
all the expenses for deputation of Inspector/Employer's representative shall be deducted
from the contract price. Also, if on receipt of the Contractor's notice of testing, the
Employer's representative/Inspector does not find 'plant' to be ready for testing, the
expenses incurred by the Employer for re-deputation shall be deducted from the contract
price.
5.2.4.3.3.4 The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests specified herein shall be
treated as included in the quoted unit price except for the expenses of the
inspector/employer's representative.
5.2.4.3.4 Additional tests
5.2.4.3.4.1 The Employer reserves the right of having at his own expense any other test(s) of
reasonable nature carried out at contractor's premises, at site or in any other place in
addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests to satisfy him that the
materials comply with the specifications.
5.2.4.4 Procedure for Carrying Out Tests
5.2.4.4.1 Visual Examination
The individual strand and completed ground wire shall be examined visually for good
workmanship and general surface finish.
5.2.4.4.2 Chemical Analysis of Material (Steel & Zinc)
Samples taken from steel and Zinc ingots shall be chemically/spectrographically analyzed.
The same shall be in conformity with the requirements stated in this specification.
5.2.4.4.3 Tensile Test-Strands
The breaking load of individual strand before and after stranding shall be determined by
means of a suitable tensile testing machine. The load shall be applied gradually and the
rate of separation of the jaws of the testing machine shall be not less than 25 mm/min.
and greater than 100 mm/min. The breaking load shall not be less than guaranteed failing
load.
5.2.4.4.4 Elongation Test

The specimen of individual strand before and after stranding (straightened by hand) shall
be marked with a gauge length of 200 mm. A tensile load shall be applied gradually and
the rate of separation of jaws of the testing machine shall be not less than 25mm/min.
and not greater than 100mm/min. The elongation shall be measured after the fractured
ends have been fitted together. If the fracture occurs outside the gauge marks, or within
25mm of either marks and the required elongation is not obtained, the test shall be
discarded and another test made on fresh sample. The percentage elongation shall
conform to the guaranteed elongation limits.
5.2.4.4.5 Torsion Test
The specimen of individual strand before and after stranding shall be gripped at its end in
two voices, one of which shall be free to move longitudinally during the test. A small
tensile load not exceeding 2% (two percent) of the breaking load of the wire, shall be
applied to the sample during testing. The specimen shall be twisted by causing one of the
voices to revolve until fracture occurs and the number of twists shall be indicated by a
counter or other suitable devices. The rate of twisting shall not exceed 60 rev/min. When
tested the number of complete twists before fracture occurs shall be not less than the
guaranteed value on a length equal to 100 times the diameter of the wire. In case test
sample length is less or more than 100 times the stranded diameter of the wire. The
fracture shall show a smooth surface at right angles to the axis of the wire.
5.2.4.4.6 D.C. Resistance Test-Strands
The test shall be carried out as per the relevant standard. The electrical resistance of
individual strand shall be measured by a Kelvin double bridge or potentiometer. The value
obtained shall be corrected to the value at 20 deg.c. The D.C. resistance value should not
exceed the guaranteed d.c. resistance of the wire.
5.2.4.4.7 Ultimate Tensile Strength Test for Ground Wire
Circles perpendicular to the axis of the earth wire shall be marked at two places on a
sample of earth wire of minimum 5m length suitably compressed with dead end clamps
at either end. The load shall be increased at a steady rate upto 50% of UTS and held for
one minute. The circles drawn shall not be distorted due to relative movement of strands.

Thereafter, the load shall be increased at steady rate to 100% of UTS and held for one
minute. The earth wire sample shall not fail during this period. The applied load shall
then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.
5.2.4.4.8 Dc Resistance Test-Composite Ground Wire
On composite ground wire of minimum five meter length, two contact clamps shall be
fixed. The resistance shall be measured by a Kelvin double bridge by placing the clamps
initially Zero meter and subsequently one meter apart. The test shall be repeated at each
meter length and the value recorded. The value obtained shall be corrected to the value
at 20 deg. C. The resistance corrected to 20 deg. C. shall not exceed the guaranteed value.
5.2.4.4.9 Verification of Length and Weight of Ground Wire
Ten percent of the drums offered for inspection shall be checked for the length and
weight of the ground wire declared by the contractor/manufacturer. One empty drum
will be weighed and groundwire will be rewound on the empty drum and the wound drum
will be reweighed. The length of the groundwire will be measured by using a certified
measuring counter by appropriate weight and measurement authority. The cost towards
unreeling of ground wire drums for verifying the groundwire length and weight shall be
to the contractor/manufacturer’s account.
5.2.4.4.10 Visual and Dimensional Check On Drums
The drums shall be visually and dimensionally checked to ensure that they conform to the
5.2.4.4.11 Lay Length Check
The Lay Length shall be checked to ensure that it conforms to the requirements of this
specification.
5.2.4.5 Sample Batch for Type Testing
5.2.4.5.1 The Contractor shall offer material for selection of samples for type testing only after
getting Quality Assurance Plan approved by the Employer. The sample shall be
manufactured strictly in accordance with the Quality Assurance Plan approved by the
Employer.

5.2.4.5.2 The Contractor shall offer at least three drums for selection of sample required for
conducting all the type tests.
5.2.4.5.3 The Contractor is required to carry out all the Acceptance tests successfully in the
presence of Employer’s representative before sample selection.
5.2.4.6 Inspection
5.2.4.6.1 The Employer 's representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to the works
and all places of manufacture, where earth wire shall be manufactured and
representative shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the manufacturer's
works, raw materials and process of manufacture for conducting necessary tests as
detailed herein.
5.2.4.6.2 The Contractor shall keep the Employer informed in advance of the time of starting and
of the progress of manufacture of earth wire in its various stages so that arrangements
can be made for inspection.
5.2.4.6.3 No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been
satisfactorily inspected and tested, unless the inspection is waived off by the Employer in
writing. In the latter case also the earth wire shall be dispatched only after satisfactory
testing for all tests specified herein have been completed.
5.2.4.6.4 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the contractor of any
of his responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification and shall not
prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.
5.2.4.7 Test Facilities
5.2.4.7.1 In addition to the test facilities for conducting above tests, the following additional test
facilities shall be available at the contractor's works:
a) Calibration of various testing and measuring equipment including tensile testing
machine, resistance measurement facilities, burette, thermometer, barometer etc.
b) Standard resistance for calibration of resistance bridges.
c) Finished earth wire shall be checked for length verification and surface finish on
separate rewinding machine at reduced speed (variable from 8 to 16 meters per

minute). The rewinding facilities shall have appropriate clutch system and be free
of vibration, jerks, etc with traverse laying facilities.
5.2.5 REJECTION AND RETEST

5.2.5.1 In case of failure in any type test, the Contractor is either required to manufacture fresh
sample lot and repeat all the tests successfully once or repeat that particular type test
three times successfully on the sample selected from the already manufactured lot at his
own expenses. In case fresh lot is manufactured for testing then the lot already
manufactured shall be rejected. The decision of the Employer in this regard shall be final
and binding on the Contractor.
5.2.5.2 If the test pieces for tests on strands taken from finished groundwire on a drum selected
for such tests fail in the retest, the manufacturer shall test each and every drum and
submit them for re-inspection.
5.2.5.3 All rejected material shall be suitably marked and segregated.
5.2.6 PACKING AND MARKING
The ground wire shall be supplied in non-returnable reels or drums of non-perishable or
treated wood conforming to IS: 1778-1980 (specification for reels and drums for bare
wires), BS-1559 IS-6594-1977 or other authoritative standard. Each drum shall be
provided with a label fixed firmly on it bearing the following information.
a) Contract/purchase order no. & date.
b) Manufacturer's name and address.
c) Name and address of consignee.
d) Size of earthwire.
e) Drum Number, year of manufacture.
f) Length of earthwire in meters.
g) Gross weight of drum with earthwire.
h) Weight of empty drum with lagging.
i) Net weight of earthwire.
j) Arrow marking for unwinding.

k) Position of the earthwire ends.

l) Number of turns in the outermost layer.
m) Distance between outermost layer of earthwire and the inner surface of lagging.
n) Barrel diameter at three locations andan arrow marking at the location of
measurement.
The steel wire shall be packed in the drums in such a way that the drums shall withstand
the stresses and rough handling during transit, storing and stringing operations. The steel
wire shall be protected from weather with water-proof paper before winding and after
winding. There should not be more than one standard length in a drum. Each drum should
be provided with a triangular iron collar on either side of the axle hold for easy rolling and
to protect the drum from damage during rolling/winding operation. Proper care should
be taken to prevent the nails from damaging the steel wire.
5.2.7.0 SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS/VARIATIONS
If the tenderer has any exceptions to any of the clause/s laid down in this specification,
these should be clearly stated in the schedule of deviations/variations, (technical or
commercial), otherwise it shall be presumed that the tenderer agrees to the provision/s
of this specification and same shall be included in the purchase order and the contract in
case of successful tenderers.

5.3 CONDUCTOR & EARTH WIRE ACCESSORIES

5.3.1 SCOPE
5.3.1.1 This specification covers design, manufacture and testing before dispatch at works,
packing, supply and delivery CIP of Accessories for the “Moose-597 sq.mm” ACSR
Conductor & AACSR Conductor of size 54/ 3.53+7/3.53 mm , and Galvanized steel Earth
wire of size 7/3.66 mm & 7/4.5 mm earth-wire.
5.3.2 The following are the items covered in this Specification:
A) CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES
a. Performed Armour Rods
b. Mid Span Compression joint.
c. Repair Sleeve
d. Vibration Damper
e. Spacer Twin Conductor
f. Rigid spacer for jumper Twin Moose
g. Bundle Spacer for lines
B) EARTH WIRE ACCESSORIES:
a) Mid span compression Joints
b) Vibration Damper
c) Earth wire Suspension Clamp
d) Earth wire Tension Clamp
e) Flexible Copper Bond
5.3.3 STANDARDS
5.3.3.1 The accessories of the “Moose-597 sq.mm” ACSR Conductor and Earth wire shall
conform to the following Indian Standards or other equivalent international standards
which shall mean latest revisions/Amendment changes adopted and published unless
otherwise specified here in as well as to the provisions of this specification.
TABLE-5.8
S. No Indian Standard Title
1 IS: 209-1966 Specification for Zinc

2 IS: 398-1996 Specification for Aluminium Conductors for over

head Transmission purpose.
(Part -II) Aluminium Conductors Galvanized Steel
Reinforced for Extra High Voltage (66 KV and
above)
3 IS: 1327-1966 Method of determination of weight of the Tin
coating on Tin Plate.
4 IS: 1573-1976 Electroplated coating of Zinc on Iron & Steel.
5 IS: 2071-1974 Method of high Voltage testing General definitions
and test requirement
6 IS: 2121-1981 Specification for Conductors and earth wire
acessories for overhead power lines
Part - I Armor Rods, binding wires and tapes for
conductors.
Part - II Mid span joints and repair sleeves for conductor.
7 IS: 2629-1966 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of
Iron and steel.
8 IS: 2633-1972 Methods for testing Uniformity of zinc coating on
zinc coated Articles.
9 IS: 3138-1966 Hexagonal bolts and nuts
10 IS: 4218-1967 ISO metric screw threads
11 IS: 4826-1968 Galvanized coating on Round steel wires.
12 IS: 6745-1972 Methods of Determination of weight of zinc coating
on zinc coated Iron and Steel Articles.
13 IS: 8263-1966 Methods of Radio Interference Tests on High
voltage Insulators.
14 IS: 9708-1993 Specification for stock bridge vibration Dampers for
overhead power lines.

15 IS: 2982-1965 Specification for copper conductor in insulated

cables & cords.
16 IS: 5358-1969 Specification for Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings on
Fasteners.
17 IS: 8394-1977 Specification for Soldering &welded type terminals
ends for conductors and insulated cables.
5.3.3.2 In the event of the supply of accessories conforming to any standard other than Indian
standards listed above, the salient features of comparison shall be brought out and
furnished along with the bid.
5.3.3.3 The Accessories offered shall be suitable for operation in moderately polluted
atmosphere.
5.3.4 MATERIALS/WORKMANSHIP
5.3.4.1 All materials used in the manufacture of the equipments shall be of the first class quality
of its kind available and except where modified by this specification, shall comply in all
respects with the standards laid down by Bureau of Indian Standards.
5.3.4.2 The material to be used in manufacture shall be selected as the best available for the
purpose for which used, considering strength, durability and best engineering practice.
5.3.4.3 All the material to be supplied shall be of recent manufacture, unused and free from
defects. All the components of the same design shall be identical and like components
shall be interchangeable.
5.3.4.4 WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH
All the equipment shall be of the latest design and conform to the best modern practice
adopted in the extra high voltage field. The Bidder shall offer only such equipment as
guaranteed by him to be satisfactory and suitable for 220 KV transmission line and will
give continued good performance.
5.3.4.5 The design, manufacturing process and quality control of the material shall be such as to
achieve requisite factor of safety for maximum working load, highest mobility, elimination
of sharp edges and corners, best resistance to corrosion and a good finish.

5.3.4.6 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized, after all machining has been completed. Nuts
may, however, be tapped (Threaded) after galvanizing and the threads oiled. Spring
washers shall be electro galvanized. The bolt threads shall be undercut to take care of
increase in diameter due to galvanizing. Galvanizing shall be done in accordance with IS:
2629-1966 and satisfy the test mentioned in IS: 2633-1972. Fasteners shall withstand four
dips while spring washers shall withstand three dips. Other galvanized materials shall be
guaranteed to withstand at least six dips each lasting one minute under the standard
Preece test for galvanizing unless otherwise specified.
5.3.4.7 The zinc coating shall be perfectly adherent, of uniform thickness, smooth, reasonably
bright, continuous and free from imperfections such as flux, ash, rust stains, bulky
white deposits and blisters etc. The zinc used for galvanizing shall be of grade Zn 99.95
as per IS: 209-1979.
5.3.4.8 The casting shall be free from all internal defects like shrinkage, inclusions, blow holes,
cracks or other casting defects and the quality of products shall be uniform
throughout.
5.3.4.9 All current carrying parts shall be so designed and manufactured that contact
resistance is reduced to minimum and localized heating phenomenon is averted.
5.3.4.10 No equipment shall have sharp ends or edges, abrasions or projections etc. and shall not
cause any damage to the conductor in any way during erection or during continuous
operation which would produce high electrical and mechanical stresses in normal
working. The design of adjacent metal parts and mating surfaces shall be such as
to prevent corrosion of the contact surface and to maintain good electrical contact
under all service conditions. All equipments shall have satisfactory corona
performance so as to limit the losses and Radio Interference to acceptable level.
5.3.4.11 Particular care shall be taken during manufacture and subsequent handling to
ensure smooth surface free from abrasion or cuts.
5.3.4.12 The fasteners shall conform to the requirements of IS: 4218 and IS:6639-1972. All
fasteners and clamps shall have corona free locking arrangement to guard against
vibration loosening.

5.3.4.13 Welding of aluminium shall be by an inert gas shielded tungsten arc or inert gas shielded
metal arc process. Welds shall be clean, sound, smooth uniform, without overlaps
properly fused and completely sealed. There shall be no cracks, voids, incomplete
penetrations, and incomplete fusions under cutting or inclusions. Porosity shall be
minimized sothat the mechanical properties of the aluminium alloy are not affected. All
welds shall be properly finished as per best engineering practices.
5.3.5 MARKINGS
5.3.5.1 Assembly of each item shall be marked with trade mark of the manufacturer, the
manufacturer's catalogue number and year of manufacture. The identifying letters and
numerals shall be at least 5 mm high. This shall be cast or die stamped on over or both
sides of the assembly. The letters shall be distinct, durable and conspicuous.
5.3.5.2 Die compression areas shall be clearly marked on each accessory. Accessories designed
for continuous die compressions shall bear the words “COMPRESS FIRST” near the point
of each accessory where the compressions begin. Accessories designed for intermittent
die compressions shall bear the identification marks "COMPRESSION ZONE" and "NON-
COMPRESSION ZONE" distinctly with arrow mark showing the direction of compression
and shall have the ends of each compression zone completely encircled, with Knurled
or etched bands. The letters, numerals and other makings on finished accessories shall
be distinct and legible.
5.3.6 BID DRAWINGS
5.3.6.1 The Bidder shall furnish detailed dimensioned drawings of the equipments and all
component parts. Each drawing shall be identified by a drawing number. All drawings
shall be neatly arranged. All drafting and lettering shall be legible. The minimum size of
the lettering shall be 3 mm. All dimensions and dimensional tolerance shall be mentioned
in mm.
5.3.6.2 The drawings shall include:
a) Dimensions and dimensional tolerance.

b) Material, fabrication details including any weld details and any specified finishes
and coatings. Regarding material, designations and reference of standards are to
be indicated.
c) Catalogue No.
d) Marking
e) Weight of Assembly
f) Installation instructions
g) Design installation torque for bolt or cap screw.
h) Withstand torque that may be applied to the bolt or cap screw without failure of
component parts.
i) The compression dies number with recommended compression pressure.
j) All other relevant Technical details.
5.3.6.3 Placement charts for vibration dampers.
5.3.6.4 The above drawings shall be submitted with all the details as stated above along with the
bid document. After the placement of award, the contractor shall again submit the
drawings in six copies to the owner for approval. After owner's approval and successful
completion of all type tests 6 more sets of drawings shall be submitted to owner for
further distribution and field use at owner’s end.
5.3.6.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN
activities of the material shall be required to be submitted by the tenderer to the
Employer along with the tender. The Quality Assurance Plan after the same is found
acceptable will be approved by the Employer. The contractor shall follow the approved
Quality Assurance Plan in true spirit and if desired by the Employer, he shall give access
to all the documents and materials to satisfy the Employer that the Quality Assurance
Plan is being properly followed.
5.3.6.6 SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS/VARIATIONS
If the tenderer has any exceptions to any of the clause/s laid down in this specification,
these should be clearly stated in the schedule of deviations/variations, (technical or

commercial) otherwise it shall be presumed that the tenderer agrees to the provision/s
of this specification and same shall be included in the purchase order and the contract in
case of successful tenderers.
5.3.7. CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES

5.3.7.1 GENERAL
5.3.7.2 This section details the technical particulars of the accessories for “Moose-597 sq.mm”
ACSR Conductor.
5.3.7.3 2.5% extra fasteners and retaining rods shall be provided.
5.3.7.4 The technical particulars are given in Section-3 of the specification.
5.3.8 MID SPAN COMPRESSION JOINT

5.3.8.1 Mid Span Compression Joint shall be used for joining two lengths of conductor. The joint
shall have a resistivity less than 75% of the resistivity of equivalent length of conductor.
The joint shall not permit slipping off, damage to, or failure of the complete conductor or
any part thereof at a load less than 95% of the ultimate tensile strength of the conductor.
5.3.8.2 The joint shall be made of steel and aluminium sleeves for jointing the steel core and
aluminimum wires respectively. The steel sleeve should not crack or fail during
compression. The Brinnel Hardness of steel sleeve shall not exceed 200. The steel sleeve
shall be hot dip galvanised. The Joints shall be made of Special Aluminium Alloy for better
conductivity / Strength. The aluminimum sleeve shall have aluminimum of purity not less
than 99.5%. Tapered aluminium filler plugs shall also be provided on the line of
demarcation between compression and non-compression zone. The dimensions and
dimensional tolerances of mid span compression joint shall be as per Section-3 specific
technical requirement of the specification.
5.3.9 REPAIR SLEEVE
5.3.9.1 Repair sleeve of compression type shall be used to repair conductor with not more
than two strands broken in the outermost layer. The sleeves shall make of Special
Aluminium Alloy for better conductivity / Strength and shall have smooth surface. The

repair sleeve shall comprise of two pieces with a provision of seat for sliding of the keeper
piece. The edges of the seat as well as the keeper piece shall be rounded so that the
conductor strands are not damaged during installation. The dimensions and dimensional
tolerances of repair sleeve shall be as per Section-3 of the specification.
5.3.10 VIBRATION DAMPER
5.3.10.1 Vibration dampers of 4R-stockbridge type with four (4) different resonances spread
within the specified Aeolian frequency band-width shall be used at suspension and
tension points on each conductor in each span to damp out Aeolian vibrations as
mentioned hereinafter.
5.3.10.2 Alternate damping systems or "Dog bone" dampers offering equivalent or better
performance also shall be accepted provided the manufacturer meets the qualifying
requirements stipulated in Technical specification. Relevant technical documents to
establish the technical suitability of alternate systems shall be furnished by the bidder
along with the bid.
5.3.10.3 One damper minimum on each side per conductor for suspension points and two
dampers minimum on each side per conductor for tension points shall be used for ruling
span of 350 meters for 220 kV Transmission Line.
5.3.10.4 The clamp of the vibration damper shall be made of high strength aluminium alloy of type
LM-6 or equivalent. It shall be capable of supporting the damper and prevent damage
or chafing of the conductor during erection or continued operation. The clamp shall
have smooth and permanent grip to keep the damper in position on the conductor
without damaging the strands or causing premature fatigue failure of the conductor
under the clamp. The clamp groove shall be in uniform contact with the conductor over
the entire clamping surface except for the rounded edges. The groove of the clamp body
and clamp cap shall be smooth, free from projections, grit or other materials which
could cause damage to the conductor when the clamp is installed. Clamping bolts
shall be provided with self-locking nuts and designed to prevent corrosion of threads or
loosening in service.

5.3.10.5 The messenger cable shall be made of high strength galvanized steel/stainless steel with
a minimum strength of 135 Kg/sq.mm. It shall be of preformed and post formed quality
in order to prevent subsequent drop of weight and to maintain consistent flexural
stiffness of the cable in service. The number of strands in the messenger cable shall be
19.The messenger cable other than stainless steel shall be hot dip galvanized in
accordance with the recommendations of IS-4826-1979 for heavily coated wires.
5.3.10.6 The damper mass shall be made of hot dip galvanized mild steel/cast iron. All castings
shall be free from defects such as cracks, shrinkages, inclusions and blowholes etc. The
surface of the damper masses shall be smooth.
5.3.10.7 The damper clamp shall be casted over the messenger cable and offer sufficient and
permanent grip on it. The messenger cable shall not slip out of the grip at a load less than
the mass pull-off value of the damper. The damper masses shall be fixed to the
messenger cable in a suitable manner in order to avoid excessive stress concentration on
the messenger cables which shall cause premature fatigue failure of the same. The
messenger cable ends shall be suitably and effectively sealed to prevent corrosion.
5.3.10.8 The damper assembly shall be electrically conductive to reduce radio interference.
5.3.10.9 The vibration damper shall be capable of being installed and removed from energized line
by means of hot line techniques. In addition, the clamp shall be capable of being removed
and reinstalled on the conductor at the designated torque without shearing or damaging
of fasteners.
5.3.10.10 The manufacturer must indicate the clamp bolt tightening torque to ensure that the
slip strength of the clamp is maintained between 2.5 KN and 5 KN. The clamp when
installed on the conductor shall not cause excessive stress concentration on the
conductor leading to permanent deformation of the conductor strands and premature
fatigue failure in operation.
5.3.10.11 The vibration clamps shall not have magnetic power loss more than 1 watt at 500 Amps,
50 Hz alternating current per sub-conductor.
5.3.10.12 The vibration analysis of the system, with and without damper and dynamic
characteristics of the damper as detailed under Annexure-A, shall have to be submitted

by the Bidder along with his bid. The technical particulars for vibration analysis and
damping design of the system are as follows:
TABLE-5.9
S.No Technical Description Technical Particulars
1. Configuration: Double Circuit:
2. Conductor Twin ACSR and AACSR 'MOOSE'
Conductor bundle per phase in
horizontal formation at 450 mm apart
and all three phases of each
circuit in vertical configuration on each
side of tower.
3. Span length in meters
i. Ruling design span 350
ii. Maximum span 1000 (normal condition)
iii. Minimum span -1000 (for large angle tower, broken wire
condition)
4. Tensile load in conductor As per sag- tension provided
i. Every day temperature, nil wind 47242 N
(initial condition)
ii. Full design wind pressure at 95929 N
everyday temperature of 32
degree C
iii. Thirty Six (36) per cent Full Design 72684 N
Wind Pressure at Minimum
Temperature of -5 degree C.
iv. 10mm radial thickness of ice at -5 76168 N
degree C temperature and nil

wind. Ice unit weight is to be

considered as 916.8 kg/m2.
v. Twenty Eight (28) per cent Full 77555 N
Design Wind Pressure and 5 mm of
radial thickness of ice at Minimum
Temperature of -5 degree C.
vi. 75% Full design wind pressure at 81834 N
every day temperature for Tangent
towers under broken wire
condition.
vii. Nil wind at 85 degree C 35049 N
temperature
viii. Nil Wind at Minimum Temperature 61593 N
of -5 degree C.
5. Armor rods used Standard preformed armor Rods/AG
6. Wind velocity/Wind pressure 47 m/sec
7. Max. permissible dynamic +/- 150 micro strains
strains
Note: All Details regarding normal ruling span and weight span limits shall have to be
referred specified in chapter-1 of Section II of specification. The bidder shall
submit the sag-tension chart with the bid.
5.3.10.13 The damper placement chart for spans ranging from 100 m to 1000 m shall be
submitted by the Bidder. Placement charts should be duly supported with relevant
technical documents.
5.3.10.14 The damper placement charts shall include the following:
a) Location of the dampers for various combinations of spans and line tensions clearly
indicating the number of dampers to be installed per conductor per span.
b) Placement distance clearly identifying the extremities between which the distances
are to be measured.

c) Placement recommendation depending upon type of suspension clamps (viz.

Free centre type/Armor grip type etc.)
d) The influence of mid span compression joints, repair sleeves and armor rods
(standard and AGS) in the placement of dampers.
5.3.11 BUNDLE SPACERS

General:
Armour grip Bundle spacers shall be used to maintain the spacing of 450 mm between
the two sub-conductors of each bundle under all normal working conditions. The spacer
shall be designed for maintaining a gap of 450 mm for the twin sub-conductor system as
per relevant standard IS 10162.
5.3.11.1 The spacer shall have enough strength so as to restore normal spacing of the sub-
conductors after displacement by winds, short-circuit etc without permanent
deformation or damage either to conductor or assembly.
5.3.11.2 The materials used in manufacturing spacer shall be corrosion resistant. All ferrous parts
of spacer shall be hot-dip galvanized except spring washers which shall be electro-
galvanized conforming to the relevant Indian Standards.
5.3.11.3 Spacers offering equivalent or better performance shall also be accepted provided the
offer meets the qualifying requirements stipulated in Technical specification.
5.3.11.4 The offer shall include placement charts recommending the number of spacers per phase
per span and the sub span lengths to be maintained between the spacers while installing
on the twin bundle conductors.
5.3.11.4.1 The placement of spacers shall be in such a way that adjacent sub spans are sufficiently
detuned and the critical wind velocity of each sub span shall be kept more than 30 km/hr
and to avoid clashing of sub-conductors. The placement shall ensure bundle stability
under all operating conditions.
5.3.11.4.2 The placement chart shall be provided for spans ranging from 100m to 1100m. The
number of spacers recommended for a nominal ruling span of 350m shall however be not
less than six.

5.3.11.4.3 The bidder shall also furnish all the relevant technical documents in support of their
placement charts along with the bid.
5.3.11.5 Jumpers at tension points shall also be fitted with spacers so as to limit the length of free
conductor to 3.65m and to maintain the sub conductor spacing of 450 mm. Bidder shall
quote for rigid spacer for jumper. It shall meet all the requirements of spacer used in line
except for its vibration performance. Spacers requiring retaining Rods shall not be quoted
for jumpers.
5.3.11.6 The spacer offered by the Bidder shall satisfy the following requirements:
5.3.11.6.1 Spacer shall restore normal spacing of the subconductors after displacement by wind,
electromagetic and the electro-static forces under all operating conditions including the
specified short circuit level without permanent deformation / damage either to conductor
or to the assembly itself. They shall have uniform grip on the conductors.
5.3.11.6.2 For spacer requiring retaining rods, the retaining rods shall be designed for the specified
conductor size. The rods shall be made of high strength special aluminium alloy of type
6061 or equivalent aluminium alloy having minimum tensile strength of 35 kg/mm2. The
ends of retaining rods should be ball ended. The rods shall be heat-treated to achieve
specified mechanical properties and give proper resilience and retain the same during
service.
5.3.11.6.3 Four number of rods shall be applied on each clamps to hold the clamp in position. The
minimum diameter of the rods shall be 7.87 +/-0.1 and the length of the rods shall not be
less than 1100 mm.
5.3.11.6.4 Where elastomer surfaced clamp grooves are used, the elastomer shall be firmly fixed to
the clamp. The insert should be forged from aluminium alloy of type 6061 or equivalent
aluminium alloy having minimum tensile strength of 25 kg/mm2. The insert shall be duly
heat treated and aged to retain its consistent characteristics during service.
5.3.11.6.5 Any nut used shall be locked in an approved manner to prevent vibration loosening. The
ends of bolts and nuts shall be properly rounded for specified corona performance or
suitably shielded.

5.3.11.6.6 Clamp with cap shall be designed to prevent its cap from slipping out of position when
being tightened.
5.3.11.6.7 The clamp grooves shall be in uniform contact with the conductor over the entire
clamping surface except for rounded edges. The groove of the clamp body and clamp cap
shall be smooth and free of projections, grit or other material which cause damage to the
conductor when the clamp is installed.
5.3.11.6.8 For the spacer involving bolted clamps, the manufacturer must indicate the clamp bolt
tightening torque to ensure that the slip strength of the clamp is maintained between
2.5kN and 5kN. The clamp when installed on the conductor shall not cause excessive
stress concentration on the conductor leading to permanent deformation of the
conductor strands and premature fatigue failure in operation.
5.3.11.6.9 Universal type bolted clamps, covering a range of conductor sizes, will not be permitted.
5.3.11.6.10 No rubbing, other than that of the conductor clamp hinges or clamp swing bolts, shall
take place between any parts of the spacer. Joint incorporating a flexible medium shall be
such that there is no relative slip between them.
5.3.11.6.11 The spacer shall be suitably designed to avoid distortion or damage to the conductor or
to themselves during service.
5.3.11.6.12 Rigid spacers shall be acceptable only for jumpers
5.3.11.6.13 The spacer shall not damage or chafe the conductor in any way which might affect its
mechanical and fatigue strength or corona performance.
5.3.11.6.14 The clamping system shall be designed to compensate for any reduction due to conductor
creep.
5.3.11.6.15 The spacer assembly shall not have any projections, cuts, abrasions etc., or chattering
parts which might cause corona or RIV.
5.3.11.6.16 The spacer tube shall be made of aluminium alloy of type 6061 or equivalent aluminium
alloy. If fasteners of ferrous material are used, they shall conform to and be galvanized
conforming to relevant Indian Standards. The spacer involving ferrous fasteners shall not
have magnetic power loss more than one watt at 600 Amps 50 Hz alternating current per
sub conductor.

5.3.11.6.17 Elastomer, if used, shall be resistant to the effects of temperature up to 85 deg.C, ozone,
ultraviolet radiation and other atmospheric contaminants likely to be encountered in
service. It shall have good fatigue characteristics. The physical properties of the elastomer
shall be of approved standard.
5.3.11.6.18 The spacer assembly shall have electrical continuity. The electrical resistance between the
sub-conductor across the assembly in case of spacer having elastomer clamp grooves shall
be suitably selected by the manufacturers to ensure satisfactory electrical performance
and to avoid deterioration of elastomer under all service conditions.
5.3.11.6.19 The spacer assembly shall have complete ease of installation and shall be capable of
removal/reinstallation without any damage.
5.3.11.6.20 The spacer assembly shall be capable of being installed and removed from the energised
line by means of hot line techniques.
5.3.11.7 Tests
TABLE-5.10
Type tests
a Visual examination As per IS 10162
b Verification of dimensions As per IS 10162
c Movement test As per IS 10162
d Clamp slip test As per IS 10162
e Resilience test As per IS 10162
f Clamp bolt torque test As per IS 10162
g Assembly torque test As per IS 10162
h Tensile load test As per IS 10162
i Compression and pull off As per IS 10162
test
j Vibration test As per IS 10162
k Corona test As per IS 10162
l RIV test As per IS 10162

m Short-circuit current test As per IS 10162

n Magnetic power loss test As per IS 10162
o Galvanizing test As per IS 10162
p Log decrement test (for As per IS 10162
spacer dampers only)
Acceptance tests: The following tests shall constitute the acceptance tests:
b) Verification of dimensions
c) Movement test
d) Clamp slip test
e) Clamp bolt torque test
f) Assembly torque test
g) Tensile load test
h) Compression and pull off test
i) Galvanizing test
Routine test: The following shall constitute the routine tests
b) Verification of dimensions
5.4 Earth Wire Accessories

5.4.1 General
5.4.1.1 This section details the technical particulars of the accessories for Galvanized Steel Stranded
Earth wire as per Section - II of the specification. 2.5% extra fastener shall be supplied
5.4.1.2 Mid Span Compression Joint

Mid Span Compression Joint shall be used for joining two lengths of earth wire. The joint
shall be made of mild steel with aluminium encasing. The steel sleeve should not crack or fail
during compression. The Brunel Hardness of stainless steel should not exceed 200. The steel

sleeve shall be hot dip galvanized. The aluminium sleeve shall have aluminium of purity not
less than 99.5%. Filler aluminium sleeve shall also be provided at the both ends. The joints
shall not permit slipping off, damage to, or failure of the complete earth wire or any part
thereof at a load not less than 95% of the ultimate tensile strength of the earth wire. The joint
shall have resistivity less than 75% of resistivity of equivalent length of earth wire. The
dimensions and the dimensional tolerances of the joint shall be as per the Section - 3 of
the specification.
5.4.2 Vibration Damper
5.4.2.1 The bidder shall submit the vibration damper sample analysis with software output thereof.
The successful bidder shall submit the detailed analysis methods and placement criteria with
damping force and resonance frequency to NEA for approval.
Vibration dampers of4R-Stockbridge type with four (4) different resonant frequencies
spread within the specified Aeolian frequency band-width shall be used for suspension and
tension points on earth wire in each span to damp out Aeolian vibrations as mentioned
hereinafter.
5.4.2.2 Alternate damping systems or "Dogbone" dampers offering equivalent or better
performance shall also be acceptable provided the manufacturer meets the qualifying
requirements stipulated in Part-I and Part-III. Relevant technical documents to establish the
technical suitability of alternate systems shall be furnished by the bidder along with the bid.
5.4.2.3 One damper minimum on each side per earth wire at suspension points and two dampers on
each side at tension points shall be used for ruling design span of 350 meters.
5.4.2.4 The clamp of the vibration damper shall be made of aluminium alloy. It shall be capable of
supporting the damper during installation and prevent damage or chafing of the earth wire
during erection or continued operation. The clamp shall have smooth and permanent grip
to keep the damper in position on the earth wire without damaging the strands or
causing premature fatigue failure of the earth wire under the clamp. The clamp groove
shall be in uniform contact with the conductor over the entire clamping surface except
for the Rounded edges. The groove of the clamp body and clamp cap shall be smooth,
free from projections, grit or materials which could cause damage to the earth wire when

the clamp is installed. Clamping bolts shall be provided with self locking nuts designed to
prevent corrosion of the threads or loosening during service.
5.4.2.5 The messenger cable shall be made of high strength galvanized steel/stainless steel with a
minimum strength of 135 kg/sq.mm. It shall be of preformed and post formed quality in
order to prevent subsequent droop of weights and to maintain consistent flexural stiffness of
the cable in service. The number of strands in the messenger cable shall be 19. The
messenger cable ends shall be suitably and effectively sealed to prevent corrosion.
5.4.2.6 The damper mass shall be made of hot dip galvanized mild steel/cast iron. All castings shall
be free from defects such as cracks, shrinkages, inclusions and blow holes etc., The inside
and outside surfaces of the damper masses shall be smooth.
5.4.2.7 The bidder shall submit the sag-tension chart with the bid.
5.4.2.8 The damper placement chart for spans ranging from 100m to 1100m shall be submitted by
the bidder. All the placement charts should be duly supported by relevant technical
documents.
5.4.2.9 The damper placement charts shall include the following:
a) Location of the dampers for various combinations of spans and line tensions clearly
indicating number of dampers to be installed per earth wire per span/OPGW Span.
b) Placement distances clearly identifying the extremities between which the
distances are to be measured.
c) Placement recommendation depending upon type of suspension clamps (viz, Free
centre type/trunnion type etc.)
d) The influence of mid span compression joints in the placement of dampers.
5.4.3 Flexible Copper Bond
The flexible copper bond shall be circular in cross-section of minimum 34 sq.mm equivalent
copper area and not less than 500mm in length. It shall consist of 259 wires of 0.417 mm dia.
tinned copper conductor. It shall be laid up as 7 stranded ropes, each of 37 bunched wires.
The tinning shall be as per relevant Indian Standard. Two tinned copper connecting lugs
shall be press jointed to either ends of the flexible copper cable. One lug shall be suitable
for 12 mm. dia. bolt and the other for 16 mm dia. bolt. The complete assembly shall also

include one 16 mm dia., 40 mm long HRH MS Bolt hot dip galvanized with nut and lock
washer.
5.4.4 Suspension Clamp
5.4.4.1 Standard twisted shackle for earth wire suspension clamp shall be supplied for attaching
to the hanger having minimum thickness of 12 mm with a hole of 21.5 mm diameter
5.4.4.2 At all suspension towers, suitable suspension clamps shall be used to support the earth wire
of 7/3.66 mm size. The clamps shall be of either free-centre type and shall provide adequate
area of support to the earth wire. The groove of the clamp shall be smooth, finished in an
uniform circular or oval shape and shall slope downwards in a smooth curve to avoid edge
support and hence to reduce the intensity of bending moment on earth wire.
5.4.4.3 There shall be no sharp point in the clamps coming in contact with earth wire. There shall
not be any displacement in the configuration of the earth wire strands nor shall the strands
be unduly stressed in final assembly during working conditions.
5.4.4.4 The clamping piece and the clamp body shall be clamped by at least two U-bolts of size not
less than 10 mm diameter having one nut and one 3 mm thick washer on each of its
limbs. Suspension clamps shall be provided with inverted type U-bolts. One limb of the U-
bolt shall be long enough to accommodate the lug of the flexible copper bond.
5.4.4.5 The contractor shall supply all the components of the suspension assembly including
shackles, bolts, nuts, washers, split pin etc. The total drop of the suspension assembly from
the centre point of the attachment to the centre point of the earth wire shall not exceed
150 mm. The design of the assembly shall be such that the direction of run of the earth wire
shall be same as that of the conductor.
5.4.4.6 The complete assembly shall be guaranteed for slip strength of not less than 15 kN and not
more than 17 kN. The breaking strength of the assembly shall not be less than 25 KN.
5.4.5 Tension Clamp
5.4.5.1 At all tension towers suitable compression type tension clamps shall be used to hold 7/3.66
mm Galvanised steel earth wire. Anchor shackle shall be supplied which shall be suitable for
attaching the tension clamp to strain plates. The strain plates supplied with the towers will
have a minimum thickness of 8 mm with a hole of 21.5 mm diameter.

5.4.5.2 The clamps shall have adequate area of bearing surface to ensure positive electrical and
mechanical contact and shall not permit any slip to the earth wire under working tension and
vibration conditions. The angle of jumper terminal to be mounted should be 30 deg. with
respect to the vertical line.
5.4.5.3 The clamps shall be made of mild steel with Aluminium encasing. The steel should
not crack or fail during compression. The brinnel hardness of steel sleeve shall not exceed
200. The steel sleeve shall be hot dip galvanized. The aluminium encasing shall have
aluminium of purity not less than 99.5%. Filler aluminium sleeve shall also be provided at the
end.
5.4.5.4 The complete assembly shall be so designed as to avoid undue bending in any part of the
clamp and shall not produce any hindrance to the movements of the clamps in horizontal
or vertical directions.
5.4.5.5 The slip strength of the assembly shall not be less than 95% of the ultimate strength of the
earth wire.
5.4.5.6 The clamps shall be complete with all the components including anchor shackle, bolts, nuts,
washers, split pin, jumper arrangement etc.
5.4.6 Tests and Standards
5.4.6.1 Tests
The type, acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture shall be carried
out on conductor and earth wire accessories, for the purpose of this clause:
5.4.6.2 Type Tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried out to prove the design, process
of manufacture and general conformity of the material to this specification/IS. These
tests shall be carried out on samples prior to commencement of commercial production
against relevant Indian Standards specification. The bidder shall indicate their schedule
for carrying out these tests.
5.4.6.3 Acceptance Tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on samples taken
from each lot offered for pre-dispatch inspection for the purpose of acceptance of that lot.
5.4.6.4 Routine Tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on each item of the material
to check requirements which are likely to vary during production.

5.4.6.5 Tests During Manufacture shall mean those tests which are to be carried out during the
process of manufacture and end inspection by the Contractor to ensure the desired quality
of the end product to be supplied by him.
5.4.6.6 The norms and procedure of sampling for these tests will be as per the applicable /standards.
5.4.6.7 For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be the values guaranteed by
the bidder in the data requirement sheets of this proposal or the acceptance value specified
in this specification, whichever is more stringent for that particular test.
5.4.6.8 The contractor will intimate the Employer about carrying out of the tests at least 15 days in
advance of the scheduled date of tests during which the Employer will arrange to depute his
representative/s to be present at the time of carrying out of the tests. Six (6) copies of the
test reports shall be submitted.
5.4.7 Type Tests
5.4.7.1 Mid Span Compression Joint for Conductor and Earth wire
TABLE-5.11
b) Dimensional verification
c) Galvanizing test
d) Electrical Resistance Tests AS per IS: 2121-Part-II
e) Heating cycle test & Annexure-A
f) Chemical analysis of materials

g) Slip strength Test
Note: - Test mentioned at (e), is not applicable to mid span compression joint for earth wire.
5.4.7.2 Repair Sleeve for Conductor

TABLE-5.12
a) Visual examination AS per Annexure-A
b) Dimensional verification
c) Chemical analysis of materials

5.4.7.3 Flexible Copper Bond

TABLE-5.13
a) Visual examination AS per IS: 2121-Part-II
b) Dimensional verification & Annexure-A
c) Slip Strength Test
5.4.7.4 Vibration Damper for Conductor and Earth wire

TABLE-5.14
b) Verification of Dimensions
c) Damper efficiency test
d) Galvanizing/ electroplating test
f) Mass pull off test
g) Resonance frequency test
h) Chemical analysis of materials. As per IS: 9708-1993
i) Dynamic characteristics Test and Annexure-A
j) Vibration Analysis
k) Clamp Slip Test
l) Fatigue Tests
m) Magnetic Power loss Test
Note: - Test mentioned at (m), is not applicable to dampers for earth wire.
5.4.7.5 Earth wire Suspension Clamp Assembly
TABLE-5.15

a) Visual examination and

Dimensional verification IS: 2121-1992Part-III
b) Galvanizing Test and Annexure-A
c) Chemical analysis of materials
d) Mechanical Strength Test
e) Clamp slip strength Vs Torque
test for suspension assembly
5.4.7.6 Earth wire tension clamp assembly

TABLE-5.16
Dimensional verification
b) Galvanizing Test IS: 2121-1992 Part-III
c) Chemical analysis of materials and Annexure-A
d) Mechanical Strength Test
(Excluding clamp)
e) Slip strength Test on Tension
Assembly
f) Electrical Resistance Test on
Tension Clamp.
5.4.7.7 Flexible copper bond

TABLE-5.17
a) Visual examination IS: 2121-1992 Part-III
b) Dimensional verification and Annexure-A
c) Slip strength test
5.4.8 Acceptance Tests

5.4.8.1 Mid Span Compression Joint for Conductor and Earth wire- Accessories

TABLE-5.18
a) Visual examination and Dimensional Verification IS: 2121-(Part-II)- 1981
and Clause 6.2, 6.3 & 6.7
b) Galvanizing Test IS-2121-1992 (Part –III)
c) Slip strength Test Annexure-B
d) Hardness Test
5.4.8.2 Repair Sleeve for Conductor

TABLE-5.19
Clause 6.2, 6.3
5.4.8.3 Flexible Copper Bond

TABLE-5.20
Clause 6.2, 6.3
b) Slip Strength Test Annexure-B
5.4.8.4 Vibration Damper for Conductor and Earth wire
TABLE-5.21
a) Visual examination and Dimensional Verification IS: 9708-1993
b) Galvanizing Test As per Indian
i) On damper masses Standard
ii) On messenger cable
c) Verification of Resonance frequencies Annexure-B
d) Clamp Slip Test
e) Clamp Bolt Torque Test
f) Strength of the Messenger cable

g) Mass Pull Off Test

5.4.8.5 Earth wire Suspension clamp Assembly
TABLE-5.22
a) Visual examination and Dimensional Verification IS: 2121-(Part-III)- 1992
b) Galvanizing Test As per Indian Standard
c) Clamp Slip Strength Test Annexure-B
d) Mechanical Strength Test on each component
e) Chemical Analysis of materials
5.4.8.6 Earth wire Tension Clamp Assembly

TABLE-5.23
a) Visual examination and Dimensional Verification
b) Galvanizing Test IS: 2121-(Part-III)- 1992
c) Hardness Test
d) Mechanical Strength Test on each component Annexure-B
(Excluding clamp)
e) Slip strength Test for Tension clamp
f) Chemical Analysis of materials
5.4.9 Routine Tests

TABLE-5.24
Visual examination and Dimensional Verification IS: 2121-(Part-II)-
a)
1981 Clause 6.2, 6.3
5.4.10 Test During Manufacture

5.4.10.1 Chemical analysis of zinc used for Galvanizing. Samples taken from the zinc ingots shall be
chemically analyzed as per IS: 209-1979.
5.4.10.2 Test on Malleable Castings, Forgings and Fabricated Hardware. The chemical analysis,
mechanical and metallographic tests, inclusion rating and magnetic particle inspection

for malleable castings, chemical analysis, hardness test, grain size and magnetic particle
inspection for forgings and chemical analysis and mechanical tests for fabricated hardware
will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding these
tests will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Owner in the quality
assurance programme.
5.4.11 Sample Batch For Type Testing

5.4.11.1 The contractor shall offer at least three times the quantity of material required for conducting
all the type tests during sample selection for type testing.
5.4.11.2 The contractor is required to conduct all the acceptance tests successfully in presence of the
Owner's representative.
5.4.11.3 Sample selection should be done by the Employer's representative.
5.4.12 Testing Expenses

5.4.12.1 Bidder shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type tests, in case
of failure of submitting the type test reports performed within last Five years.
5.4.12.2 They shall ensure that the tests can be completed in these laboratories within the time
schedule guaranteed by them in the appropriate schedule of this specification.
5.4.12.3 In case of failure in any type test, the bidder whose material has failed is either required to
modify the design of the material and successfully complete the type tests in the
modified design or to repeat all type tests in the modified design or to repeat all those
particular type tests at least three times successfully at his own expenses. The decision of
the Owner in this regard shall be final and binding.
5.4.12.4 The entire cost of testing for acceptance and routine tests and test during manufacture
specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price of accessories, except
for the Employer's representative.
5.4.13 Additional Tests
5.4.13.1 The Employer reserves the right of having at his own expense any other test(s) of
reasonable nature carried out at Contractor's premises, at site, or in any other place in

addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests to satisfy himself that the
materials comply with the specification.
5.4.13.2 The Owner also reserves the right to repeat all type or acceptance tests on samples
selected from lots supplied to owner wherever deemed necessary.
5.4.14 Test Reports

5.4.14.1 Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six copies along with one original.
One copy shall be returned duly certified by the Owner only after which the commercial
production of the concerned material shall start.
5.4.14.2 Copies of acceptance test report shall be furnished in at least six copies. One copy shall be
returned, duly certified by the Owner only after which the materials will be dispatched.
5.4.14.3 Record of routine test report shall be maintained by the Contractor at his works for periodic
inspection by the Owner's representative.
5.4.14.4 Test certificates/record of tests carried out during manufacture and routine tests shall
be maintained by the Contractor. These shall be produced for verification as and when
desired by the Employer.
5.4.15 Inspection
5.4.15.1 The Employer's representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to the works and
all places of manufacture, where conductor and earth wire accessories and/or its
component parts shall be manufactured and the representatives shall have full facilities
for unrestricted inspection of the Contractor's sub-contractor's works, raw materials,
manufacturer of all the accessories and for conducting necessary tests as detailed herein.
5.4.15.2 The Contractor shall keep the Employer informed in advance of the time of starting and of
the progress of manufacture of the accessories in its various stages so that arrangements
could be made for inspection.
5.4.15.3 Accessories shall not be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been
satisfactorily inspected and tested, unless the inspection is waived off by the Owner in
writing. In the latter case also the accessories shall be dispatched only after all tests
specified herein have been satisfactorily completed.

5.4.15.4 The acceptance of any quantity of accessories shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the specification, and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection, if such accessories are later found to be defective.
5.4.16 Packing And Marking

5.4.16.1 All accessories shall be packed in strong, seasoned resistant wooden cases/crates. The gross
weight of the packing shall not normally exceed 100 kg to avoid handling problems.
5.4.16.2 The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during transit, storage
at site and subsequent handling in the field.
5.4.16.3 Suitable cushioning, protective padding, shall be provided to prevent damage or deformation
during transit and handling.
5.4.16.4 Bolts, nuts, washers, cotter pins, security clips and split pins etc. shall be packed duly installed
and assembled with the respective parts and suitable measures shall be used to prevent their
loss.
5.4.16.5 Each component part shall be legibly and indelibly marked with trade mark of the
manufacturer and year of manufacture.
5.4.16.6 All the packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly so as to ensure safe arrival at their
destination and to avoid the possibility of goods being lost or wrongly dispatched on
account of faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings. Each wooden case/crate shall
have all the markings stenciled on it in indelible ink.

ANNEXURE-A (TYPE TESTS)

5.4.17 Type Tests: Annexure-A
1) Mid Span Compression Joint for Conductor and Earth wire
a) SLIP STRENGTH TEST
The fitting compressed on conductor/earth wire shall not be less than one meter in
length. The test shall be carried out as per IS:2121-(Part-II)-1981 clause 6.4 except
that the load shall be steadily increased to 95% of minimum ultimate tensile strength
of conductor/ earth wire and retained for one minute at this load. There shall be no
movement of the conductor/earth wire relative to the fittings and no failure of the
fittings during this one minute period.
2) Flexible Copper Bond
a) Slip Strength Test
On applying a load of 3 KN between the two ends, stranded flexible copper cable
shall not come out of the connecting lugs and none of its strands shall be damaged.
After the test, the lugs shall be cut open to ascertain that the gripping of cable has not
been affected.
3) Vibration Damper for Conductor and Earth wire
a) Dynamic Characteristics Test
The damper shall be mounted with its clamp tightened with torque recommended by the
manufacturer on shaker table capable of simulating sinusoidal vibration for Aeolian
vibration frequency band of range from 5 to 45 Hz for damper for conductor and 15 to
75 Hz for damper for earth wire. The damper assembly shall be vibrated vertically with
a +/-1 mm amplitude from 5 to 15 Hz frequency and beyond 15Hz +/- 0.5mm to determine
the following characteristics with the help of suitable recording instruments :
(i) Force Vs frequency
(ii) Phase angle Vs frequency
(iii) Power dissipation Vs frequency
The Force Vs frequency curve shall not show steep peak at resonance frequencies and
deep troughs between the resonance frequencies. The resonance frequencies shall be

suitably spread within the Aeolian vibration frequency – band between the lower and
upper dangerous frequency limits determined by the vibration analysis of conductor /
earth wire without dampers.
Acceptance criteria for vibration damper

(i) The above dynamic characteristics test on five damper shall be conducted.
(ii) The mean reactance and phase angle Vs frequency curves shall be drawn with
the criteria of best fit method.
(iii) The above mean reactance response curve should lie with 0.135f to 0.541f
Kgf/mm limits for “Moose-597 sq.mm” ACSR Conductor, damper and 0.050f to
0.3 Kgf/mm limits for earth wire damper where 'f' is frequency in Hz.
(iv) The above mean phase angle response curve shall be between 25 to 130 and
within the frequency range of interest.
(v) If the above curve lies within the envelope, the damper design shall be
considered to have successfully met the requirement.
(vi) Visual resonance frequencies of each mass of damper are to be recorded and to
be compared with the guaranteed values.
b) Vibration Analysis
The vibration analysis of the conductor/earth wire shall be done with and without
damper installed on the span. The vibration analysis shall be done on a digital computer
using energy balance approach. The following parameters shall be taken into account for
the purpose of analysis;
(i) The analysis shall be done for single conductor /earth wire without armor rods
as per the parameters given in section I & II. The tension shall be taken as 35
KN and 12 KN for conductor and earth wire respectively for a span ranging
from 100m to 1100m.
(ii) The self damping factor and flexural stiffness (El) for conductor and earth wire
shall be calculated on the basis of experimental results. The details of
experimental analysis with these data should be furnished. The power

dissipation curve obtained from dynamic Characteristic Test shall be used for
analysis with damper.
(iii) Examine the Aeolian vibration level of the conductor/earth wire with and
without vibration damper installed at the recommended location or wind velocity
ranging from 0 to 30 km per hour, predicting amplitude, frequency and
vibration energy input.
(iv) From vibration analysis of conductor/earth wire without damper, anti-node
vibration amplitude and dynamic strain levels at clamped span extremities as
well as anti-nodes shall be examined and thus lower and upper dangerous
frequency limits between which the Aeolian vibration levels exceed the specified
limits shall be determined.
(v) From vibration analysis of conductor/earth wire with damper/dampers installed
at the recommended location, the dynamic strain level at the clamped span
extremities, damper attachment point and the anti-nodes on the
conductor/earth wire shall be determined. In addition to above damper clamp
vibration amplitude and anti-node vibration amplitudes shall also be examined.
(vi) The dynamic strain levels at damper attachment points, clamped span
extremities and anti-nodes shall not exceed the specified limits. The damper
clamp vibration amplitude shall not be more than that of the specified fatigue
limits.
c) Clamp Slip and Fatigue tests
(i) Test Set up
The clamp slip and fatigue tests shall be conducted on a laboratory set up with a
minimum effective span length of 30 m. The conductor/earth wire shall be
tensioned at 35 KN/12 KN and shall not be equipped with protective armor rods
at any point. Constant tension shall be maintained within the span by means of
lever arm arrangement. After the conductor/ earth wire has been tensioned,
clamps shall be installed to support the conductor/earth wire at both ends and
thus influence of connecting hardware fittings are eliminated from the free span.

The clamps shall not be used for holding the tension on the conductor/earth wire.
There shall be no loose parts, such as suspension clamps, U bolts, on the test span
supported between clamps mentioned above. The span shall be equipped with
vibration inducing equipment suitable for producing steady standing vibration.
The inducing equipment shall have facilities for step-less speed control as well as
step-less amplitude arrangement. Equipment shall be available for measuring the
frequency, cumulative number of cycles and amplitude of vibration at any point
along the span.
(ii) Clamp Slip Test
The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span. The damper clamp, after
tightening with the manufacturer's specified tightening torque, when
subjected to a longitudinal pull of 2.5 KN parallel to the axis of conductor/earth
wire for a minimum duration of one minute shall not slip i.e, the permanent
displacement between conductor/earth wire and clamp measured after removal
of the load shall not exceed 1.0 mm. The load shall be further increased till the
clamp starts slipping. The load at which the clamp slips shall not be more than 5
KN.
(iii) Fatigue Test
The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span with the manufacturer’s
specified tightening torque. It shall be ensured that the damper shall be kept
minimum three loops away from the shaker to eliminate stray signals influencing
damper movement.
The damper shall then be vibrated at the highest resonant frequency of each
damper mass. For dampers involving torsional resonant frequencies tests
shall be done at torsional modes also in addition to the highest resonant
frequencies at vertical modes. The resonance frequency shall be identified as the
frequency at which each damper mass vibrates with the maximum amplitude on
itself. The amplitude of vibration of the damper clamp shall be maintained not
less than +/-25/f mm, where f is the frequency in Hz.

The test shall be conducted for minimum ten million cycles at each resonant
frequency mentioned above. During the test if resonance shift is observed the
test frequency shall be tuned to the new resonant frequency. The clamp slip test
as mentioned hereinabove shall be repeated after fatigue test without re-torquing
or adjusting the damper clamp and the clamp shall withstand a minimum load
equal to 80% of the slip strength for a minimum duration of one minute.
After the above tests, the damper shall be removed from conductor/earth wire
and subjected to dynamic characteristics test. There shall not be any major
deterioration in the characteristic of the damper. The damper then shall be cut
open and inspected. There shall not be any broken, loose, or damaged part. There
shall not be significant deterioration or wear of the damper. The conductor/earth
wire under clamp shall also be free from any damage.
For the purpose of acceptance, the following criteria shall be applied:
a) There shall not be any frequency shift by more than +/-2 Hz at frequencies
lower than 15 Hz and +/-3Hz for frequencies higher than 15 Hz.
b) The force response curve shall generally lie within guaranteed % variation in
reactance after fatigue test in comparison with that before fatigue test by the
contractor/manufacturer.
c) The power dissipation of the damper shall not be less than guaranteed %
variation in power dissipation before fatigue test by the
contractor/manufacturer. However, it shall not be less than minimum power
dissipation which shall be governed by lower limits of reactance and phase
angle indicated in the envelope.
4) Magnetic Power Loss Test for Damper/Spacer/Spacer Damper
The sample involving ferrous parts shall be tested in a manner to simulate service conditions
for 50 Hz pure sine-wave. The test should be carried out at various currents ranging from 300
amperes to 900 amperes and the magnetic power loss at various currents should be specified
in tabulated graphical form. The difference between the power losses without and with

sample at room temperature shall be limited to 1 watt for 600 amperes current (rms). The
losses shall be determined by averaging the observations obtained from at least four samples.
5) Mechanical strength test of Earth wire Suspension/Tension Clamps
a) The suspension assembly/tension assembly (excluding tension clamp) shall be subjected

to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall
be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the minimum UTS specified. This load shall be
held for five minutes and then removed. After removal of the load, the components shall
not show any visual deformation and it shall be possible to disassemble them by hand.
Hand tools may be used to loosen the nuts initially. The assembly shall then be
reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be further increased at a
steady rate till the specified minimum UTS is reached and held for one minute. No
fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall then be increased until the
failing load is reached and the value recorded.
b) Clamp Slip Strength Vs Torque Test for suspension Assembly.
The suspension assembly shall be vertically suspended by means of a flexible attachment.
A suitable length of 7/3.66 Galvanised steel Earth wire shall be fixed in the clamp. The
clamp slip strength at various tightening torques shall be obtained by gradually applying
the load at one end of the earth wire. The clamp slip strength versus torque curve shall be
drawn. The clamp slip strength at the recommended tightening torque shall be more than
9 KN but less than 14 KN.
c) Slip Strength Test of Tension Clamp:
Tension clamps shall be compressed on a 5 m length of earth wire on both ends. The
assembly shall be mounted on a tensile testing machine and anchored in a manner
similarto the arrangement to be used in service. A tensile load of 50% of the specified
breaking load of the earthwire shall be applied & the sample shall be marked in such a way
that movement relative to the fitting can easily be detected. Without any subsequent
adjustment of the fitting, the load shall be steadily increased to 95% of the specified
breaking load and maintained for one minute. There shall be no movement of the earth

wire relative to the fitting during this one minute period and no failure of the fitting
also.
d) Electrical Resistance Test of Tension Clamp:

The tension clamp and the jumper shall be compressed on two suitable lengths of earth
wire. The electrical resistance shall be measured between points on earth wire near
the clamp and near the jumper mouth keeping 25 mm clearance of the fitting and
should not exceed 75% of the measured resistance of equivalent length of earth wire.
The test shall be conducted with direct current. The current connections shall be at a
distance not less than 50 times the diameter of earth wire from the fitting and shall
be made so that effective contact is ensured with all those strands of the earth wire
which would be taken into account in calculating its equivalent resistance.
The test shall be repeated with the polarity reversed and the average of the two results
considered as the measured value.
6) Chemical Analysis Test
Chemical analysis of the material used for manufacture of items shall be conducted to check
the conformity of the same with technical specification and approved drawing.
7) Corona Extinction Voltage Test (i) Dry

The sample when subjected to power frequency voltage shall have a corona extinction voltage
of not less than 156 kV rms line to ground under dry condition. There shall be no evidence of
corona on any part of the sample when all possible sources of corona are photographed in a
darkened room.
8) Radio Interference Voltage Test (i) Dry

Under the conditions as specified under (8) above, the sample shall have a radio interference
voltage level below 1000 microvolts at one MHz when subjected to 50 Hz AC Voltage of 156 kV
rms line to ground under dry condition. The test procedure shall be in accordance with IS: 8263-
1976.


ANNEXURE-B (ACCEPTANCE TESTS)

5.4.18 Acceptance Tests- Annexure-B
1) Mid Span Compression Joint for Conductor and Earth wire
a) Hardness Test
The Brine hardness at various points on the steel sleeve of conductor core and of
the earth wire compression joint and tension clamp shall be measured.
2) Flexible Copper Bond
a) Slip Strength Test
Same as Clause 2(a) of Annexure A
3) Vibration Damper for Conductor and Earth wire
a) Verification of Resonance Frequencies
The damper shall be mounted on a shaker table and vibrated at damper clamp
amplitude of +/-0.5 mm to determine the resonance frequencies shall be visually
identified as the frequency at which damper mass vibrates with maximum amplitude
on itself. The resonance frequency thus identified shall be compared with the
guaranteed value. A tolerance of +/-1 Hz at a frequency lower than 15 Hz and +/-2 Hz at
a frequency higher than 15 Hz only shall be allowed.
b) Clamp Slip Test
Same as Clause 3 (c) (ii) of Annexure-A.
c) Clamp Bolt Torque Test
The clamp shall be attached to a section of the conductor / earth wire. A torque of 150
percent of the manufacturer’s specified torque shall be applied to the bolt. There shall
be no failure of component parts. The test set up is as described in clause 3 (c) (i),
Annexure-A.
d) Strength of the Messenger Cable
The messenger cable shall be fixed in a suitable tensile testing machine and the tensile
load shall be gradually applied until yield point is reached. The load shall be not less
than the value guaranteed by the bidder.
e) Mass Pull Off Test

Each mass shall be pulled off in turn by fixing the mass in one jaw and the clamp in
the other of a suitable tensile testing machine. The longitudinal pull shall be applied
gradually until the mass begins to pull out of the messenger cable. The pull off loads shall
not be less than the value guaranteed by the bidder.
4) Spacer/Spacer Damper
a. Test Set up
The test set up for the tests described hereunder is as per clause 3 (c) (i) Annexure-A
b. Movement Test
The spacer/spacer damper assembly shall be capable of the following movements without
damaging the conductor, assuming one conductor is fixed and the other moving:
i. Longitudinal movement parallel to the conductor ± 50 mm
ii. Vertical movement in a vertical direction at right angle to the ± 25 mm
conductor.
iii. Torsional movement/angular movement in a vertical plane parallel ± 5 deg.
to the conductor
c. Compressive and Tensile Test

The spacer/spacer damper assembly shall withstand ultimate compressive load of 15 kN (1500
kg) and tensile load of 7.5 kN (750 kg) applied between sub-conductor bundle and held for one
minute without failure. Line distance between clamps shall be recorded during each of the
compression and tension test. Measurement shall be recorded at (i) no load (ii) with load (iii)
after release of load. The center line distance under load shall be within +/-100 mm of the
nominal design spacing. After release of load it shall be possible to retain the clamps at their
original position using only slight hand pressure. There shall be no deformation or damage to
the spacer assembly which would impair its function of maintaining the normal spacing.
d. Clamp Slip Test

Same as clause 4 (b) of Annexure-A.

e. Clamp Bolt Torque Test

The spacer/spacer damper assembly shall be attached to conductor. A torque of 150 percent
of the manufacturer's specified tightening torque shall be applied to the clamp bolts or cap
screws. There shall be no failure of the component parts.
f. Assembly Torque Test
The spacer/spacer damper assembly shall be installed on conductor. The same shall not rotate
on either clamp on applying a torque of 0.04 kN (4kg) in clockwise or anti-clockwise direction.
g. Hardness test for elastomer
The shore hardness at different points on the elastomer surface of cushion grip clamp shall be
measured by shore hardness meter. They shall be lie between 65 to 80.
h. UTS of Retaining Rods
The ultimate tensile strength of the retaining rods shall be measured. The value shall not be
less than 35 kg/mm2.
5.5 OPGW AND OPGW ACCESSORIES

5.5.1 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION FOR OPGW
The Scope of works covers design, supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Optical
Fibre Ground Wire (OPGW) including necessary accessories for fiber termination and splicing.
The Manufacturer of the OPGW shall be ISO 9001 (including Design) certified and
documentary evidence for such certification shall be submitted by the bidder.
The communication system being established over the OPGW and associated hardware shall
be integrated with the Employer’s main telecommunication network comprising of PLCC
other optical fiber and Microwave media. The Employer prefers that the minimum repeater
spacing, wherever possible, shall be 100 kilometers. The Bidder shall offer OPGW, containing
minimum 24 nos. Dual Window Single Mode (DWSM) or dispersion shifted optical fibers
conforming to ITU-T G652 optimized for 1310/1550 nanometer wave length (as per CCITT G.
653). The Bidders shall offer loose buffer or tight buffer type of OPGW with proper
justifications. The fibers shall be embedded in a water tight aluminium/aluminium
alloy/stainless steel tube and protected by galvanised steel/ aluminium alloy wires. If

stainless steel tube is used in contact with the Aluminium alloy or ACS wires, the Bidder shall
furnish in his offer all details, together with test results and field performance reports to
establish that there will be no galvanic corrosion. Alternatively, an aluminium rod may be
fabricated with one or more channels or grooves and formed into a helix to house and optical
fibers. An outer protective shield shall be applied around the rod such as an aluminium tube
or helically applied overlapping aluminium tape to provide additional mechanical and
environmental barrier. The availability of both the electric power and communication
transmission paths, on the supplied link (s), is of prime importance.
The Bidder in his Bid shall furnish all details about the design offered along with test and
performance reports of same or similar design. The OPGW offered by the Bidders shall be
compatible with OPGW of any make containing 1550 nm wave length optical fibers and
having similar optical properties specified in this specification. The Bidder shall confirm the
same accordingly in his bid.
5.5.2 Mechanical and Electrical Requirements
5.5.2.1 The performance characteristics of OPGW shall be similar to the Galvanised Earth wire
quality. The GTP and the following conditions shall be met for the OPGW as in table 5.25 and
5.26:
TABLE-5.25
i. Fibre Description Dual-Window Single-Mode
ii. Overall diameter 13.4mm
iii. Minimum breaking load (KN) 102.10 KN
iv. Unit weight (informative) 646 kg / Km
v. Nominal value of the mode field diameter 9.2 micrometer
vi. Tolerance in mode field diameter +/- 1.0 micrometer
vii. Outside (Clad) diameter 125 +/- 2 micrometer
viii. Cladding non- circularity < 2%
ix. Core cladding Concentricity error 1.0 micro meter
x. Everyday tension at 40 0C, no wind <25% of UTS of OPGW

xi. Screening level (tensile proof test)

a) Loose buffer design 1%
b) Tight buffer design 1.2%
xii. Cut off wavelength Maximum 1,100 nm-1300 nm
xiii. Proof stress Minimum 1%
xiv. Attenuation coefficient, Maximum at 1,310 nm, 0.40 dB/km
xv. Attenuation coefficient, Minimum at 1,550 nm, 0.25 dB/km
xvi. D.C. Resistance at20 degree C < 1.0 ohm/km
xvii. Short circuit current > 6.4 KA for 1.0 second
xviii. Cable cross-sectional area 102.30 sq mm
5.5.2.2 Temperature Rise
The OPGW shall withstand, without change in its characteristics the fault current specified
under cl. 5.5.2.1 (viii) above and the temperature rise, measured in the core of the OPGW
shall not exceed maximum allowable temperature of OPGW for the short circuit duration,
taking OPGW temperature before short circuit at 50 degree C. The Bidder, in his offer, shall
indicate maximum rated temperature of the fibers in the OPGW offered by him.
5.5.2.3 Lightning Protection
The isoceraunic value (i.e. thunderstorm days per year) is 30-130. The OPGW shall withstand,
without change in its characteristics, a lightning current of 150 KA (peak).
5.5.2.4 Minimum Bending Radius
The Bidders shall specify the minimum allowable radius of bending for OPGW Under all
temperature conditions for all long term and short term applications.
5.5.3 Optical Waveguide Fibers
5.5.3.1 The Dispersion Shifted Single-mode optical waveguide fibers shall have characteristics in
accordance with the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee
(ITU/CCITT) Fascicle III. 3 - Recommendation G.653 or equivalent standards with the following
preferences:
TABLE-5.26

sag-tension calculations/chart As per chapter-1 of Section-II this Technical

Specifications and submitted with the drawings
*The Bidder shall submit the sag-tension chart with the bid.
5.5.4 Attenuation Coefficient
5.5.4.1 The maximum attenuation of any individual fiber in a drum shall not exceed 0.25 dB/km at
1550 nm at + 20º C. The Bidder shall offer the typical attenuation spectral curves in the 1200
nm to 1600 nm wavelength range. The additional attenuation introduced for 100 turns of
un-cabled optical fibers (loosely wound) with 37.5 millimeter radius mandrel and measured
at 1550 nm at + 20º Celsius shall be less than 0.5 dB compared to the initial value measured
before winding.
The additional temporary attenuation compared to the initial value measured at + 200C due
to:
i. Temperature cycling (-20º C + 80º C) shall be less than 0.05 dB / km.
ii. Temperature rise on account of lightning stroke shall be less than 0.1 dB/km.
iii. Temperature rise on account of short circuit current shall be less than 0.25 dB/km.
The above increase in attenuation shall be only temporary. There shall be no measurable
increase in the fiber attenuation after normalcy is restored. The attenuation of the fibers
embedded in the OPGW shall be distributed uniformly throughout its length so that there are
no point discontinuities in excess of 0.05 dB. The fiber lengths in each reel shall be
continuous. No splice of fiber within a reel of OPGW shall be accepted. The optical wave
guide fiber shall be completely protected from water penetration and environmental
conditions. The bidder shall indicate index or refraction of the fiber core at 1550 nm and the
effective group refractive index for use with optic time domain reflectometer (OTDR).\
5.5.4.3 Fiber splice loss:

The splicing loss of any individual splice in any case shall not exceed 0.15 dB/splice, and mean
splice loss shall not exceed 0.1 dB/splice. Ageing shall not cause increase of the nominal
optical attenuation at ambient temp. at 1550 nm by more than 0.05 dB/km of fiber over a

period of 25 years. Bidder shall submit the ageing characteristics of the offered fibers. The
total additional attenuation, above the nominal attenuation due to regular splices, repair
splices, connectors, temperature variation, ageing etc. shall be indicated by the bidder.
5.5.5 Chromatic Dispersion
The zero-dispersion wavelength shall be 1550 nm. The required maximum tolerance on the
zero-dispersion wavelength (I0) shall be +/- 15nm. The maximum dispersion slope (S0 max)
shall be not more than 0.085 ps/ (km.nm2 ). The dispersion D max shall be less than 3.5
ps/nm.km in the operation window from 1525 nm to 1575 nm. In addition, the Bidder shall
provide a representative curve of the chromatic dispersion for a wavelength range between
1500 nm and 1600 nm.
5.5.6 Bit Error Rate (BER)
The communication system shall be designed to operate on an individual optical wave guide
fiber path with a bit error rate (BER) of 10-9 or better.
5.5.7 Optical Cross Talk
No measurable optical cross talk from one fiber to adjacent fibers in the same OPGW shall be
accepted.
5.5.8 Fiber Material
The fiber shall be manufactured from high grade silica and doped as necessary to provide
required transmission performance. The chemical composition of the fibers shall be
specifically designed to minimize the effect of hydrogen degradation. The Bidder shall submit
a certificate or test data to guarantee the maximum rated operating temperature of the
fibers.
5.5.9 Fiber Coating
The fiber core and cladding shall consist of silica (SiO2) glass. In order to prevent damage to
optical fiber the optical fiber shall be suitably coated. The coating provided must guarantee
sufficient mechanical protection when splicing optical fiber. Number of coatings shall be as
per design of OPGW.
The Bidder shall describe composition and thickness of the layer of coating used for
protection of fibers. The fiber coating shall be easily strippable during splicing and

termination with a mechanical stripping tool. Stripping shall not in duce any mechanical
stress of notches that could weaken the optical fiber. The Bidder shall recommend the
required special tools and methods of unsheathing and stripping of fibers. He shall also
recommend non toxic and non-allergic solvent, if required to be used for cleaning fiber
coating residues.
5.5.10 Fiber Identification

Each optical fiber, for identification, shall be color coded corresponding to sequential
numbering. The colors and numbering shall be in accordance with the relevant International
(IEC 304) standard. The color shall be integrated in the fiber coating and shall be
homogeneous. The original colour shall be discernible throughout the design life of the
OPGW. The color should not bleed from one fiber to the other and not fade when wiping the
fiber with acetone or alcohol. If the fibers are regrouped in bundles or in the tubes the later
shall be colored according to a determined code. The Bidder in his bid shall describe the color
code of the optical fiber in the OPGW offered, with the sequential number of individual fibers
and of bundles or tubes.
5.5.11 Filling Compound

If required, the interstices between the optical fibers shall be filled with a suitable water proof
compound. The filling compound shall be non-hygroscopic, electrically non conductive,
homogeneous and free from any metallic or foreign practices. The compound shall be
compatible with the entire OPGW component; it may come in contact with, and shall inhibit
generation of hydrogen within the OPGW. It shall not adversely affect the color of fibers and
shall be non-toxic for the skin and readily removable with an appropriate solvent that is non
toxic and non-allergic. The Bidder in his offer shall indicate recommended solvent for removal
of the filling compound. The compound shall guarantee the longitudinal water tightness of
the central core. It shall prevent longitudinal propagation of moisture in compliance with
water penetration test as per IEC-794-1-F5. The filling compound shall remain stable for
temperature variations from -20º C to + 80º C in continuous operation. The compound shall

not induce radial compression, micro-bending or shear on the fibers at the specified extreme
temperatures. It shall not drip or leak from OPGW at high temperatures and also under
momentary increase of high temperatures due to lightning strokes and short circuit currents.
5.5.12 Requirement of Protection Tube
The optical core, including the optical fibers shall be contained and protected by a tube made
of Aluminium, Aluminium Alloy or Stainless Steel, that is continuous, fully sealed, watertight
and without mechanical joints. Both welded and un-welded tube is acceptable if the same
meets the requirement of water penetration test as per IEC 794-1-F5.
The tube shall have sufficient resistance in order to protect the optical fibers against radial
compression transmitted by the metallic wires of the external layers. Under the normal
operating conditions, including Aeolian vibrations, sheeve pulling at minimum/maximum
temperature and maximum operating tension the tube shall not open, fissure and shall not
be deformed. The internal surfaces of the tube shall be smooth, without smudges, notches,
residues or roughness that may affect the optical fibers or their sheathing. The internal and
external surfaces of the tube shall be circular and the tube thickness shall be constant. No
tube joints shall be allowed in finished OPGW. The Bidder shall furnish fatigue test results
performed on the tube.
5.5.13 Metallic Wires
5.5.13.1 The protective optic unit shall be surrounded by concentrically stranded one or more layers
of Galvanised Steel (AS)/Aluminum Alloy or combination of Aluminium Alloy and Galvanised
steel wires or it may replace one or more of the wires of the inner layer. The AS wires shall
generally conform to IEC: 1232 -93. The Aluminium Alloy wires shall generally conform to
IEC: 104 -1987.
5.5.13.2 All AS/Aluminium Alloy wires shall be smooth, uniform and free from all imperfections that
are visible to the naked eye, such as, spills and splits, die marks, scratches, abrasions and kinks
after drawing and also after stranding.
5.5.13.3 For AS wires, the aluminium covering on each individual steel wire shall be continuous and
uniform and shall provide sufficiently strong bonding strength at the boundary between
aluminium layer and steel core.

5.5.13.4 The OPGW shall conform to the applicable clauses of IEC 1089 related to stranded
conductors. Adjacent wire layers shall be stranded with reverse lay directions. The direction
of lay of the external layer shall be left hand.
5.5.14 Joints in Wires

There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished AS Aluminium Alloy wires entering into the
manufacture of composite ground wire.
5.6 OPGW LENGTHS
5.6.1 The Bidder shall indicate the standard OPGW lengths offered by him along with minimum and
maximum lengths which could be supplied by him. However, standard OPGW lengths below
3 Km. will not be accepted unless submitted for approval specifying the reasons.
5.6.2 The number of splicing/jointing and joint boxes shall depend on length of OPGW to be supplied
by the Bidder. All jointing point shall be house in appropriate joint box mounted at the
platform with 3 times looped cable outside the joint boxes. The diameter of the loop shall be
from 1 to 3 meters. The quantities of splicing and joint boxes indicated in Schedule of
Requirements have been calculated based on standard length of 3 km of OPGW. Suitable
price preference for Bidders offering higher standard length shall be considered for
evaluation. For the purpose of price preference cost of joint box plus additional length of
OPGW required for splicing and fixing clamps shall be considered.
5.6.3 For minimizing the wastages during installation, the exact line span and total number of spans
shall be calculated by the Contractor/manufacturer for optimizing the length of OPGW to be
supplied per drum. The length per drum shall include actual distances between specific
towers plus allowances for sag plus height of tower plus additional lengths required for
splicing. The maximum line span shall not exceed 1100 meter.
5.7 ASSOCIATED HARDWARE FOR OPGW
5.7.1 Suspension Clamp
Preformed Armor grip suspension clamp shall be supplied. The aluminium alloy preformed
armor rods shall be used. The suspension clamp shall be designed to carry minimum vertical
load of 25 KN and shall have slip strength of not less than 12 KN and not more than 17 KN.

Standard twisted shackle shall be supplied for attaching suspension clamp to the hanger plate
having minimum thickness of 12 mm with hole of 21.5 mm diameter.
The contractor/manufacturer shall supply all the components of the suspension assembly
including shackles, bolts and nuts, washers, split pins, downlead clamps as necessary etc. The
total drop of the suspension assembly from the centre point of the attachment to the centre
point of the OPGW shall not exceed 150 mm. The design of the assembly shall be such that
the direction of run of the OPGW shall be same as that of the conductor.
5.7.2 Dead-end Assembly
The dead-end assembly shall be of bolted type/helical preformed type. The use of dead-end
assemblies shall incorporate suitable armor rods. The dead end assembly shall include all
necessary hardware for attaching the same to the tower strain plates. The strain plates
supplied with the towers will have a minimum thickness of 8 mm with a hole of 21.5 mm.
Dead-end clamps shall allow the OPGW to be continuous through the clamp without cutting
and jointing. Suitable extension links shall be installed where required to maintain the
bending radius of the OPGW within acceptable limits. The dead-end assembly shall have the
slip strength not less than 0.95 times the OPGW rated tensile strength.
5.7.3 Grounding Wire for Clamps
The grounding wire shall be bolted directly to the suspension or dead-end clamp. The
grounding wire shall consist of a 500 mm long length of Tined Copper conductor with an
equivalent size of OPGW and a lug at each end. One lug shall be attached to the suspension
or dead-end clamp, and the other lug with 16mm diameter bolt shall be attached to the
tower.
5.7.4 Structure Attachment Clamp Assemblies
The bolted clamps shall attach the OPGW to the structures. The clamps shall have two
parallel grooves for the OPGW, one on either side of connecting bolt. The clamps shall be
such that clamping characteristics do not adversely change if only one OPGW is installed. The
tower attachment plates shall locate the OPGW on the inside of the tower. It shall be
attached directly to tower legs/cross arm without drilling or any other modification to the
tower. At splice locations, the OPGW shall be coiled on the tower close to the splice box.

5.7.5 Vibration Dampers

4R stock bridge type vibration dampers having four (4) different frequencies spread within
the specified Aeolian frequency band-width corresponding to wind speed of 1m/s to the 7
m/s shall be used for suspension and tension points in each span to damp out Aeolian
vibrations. The clamp of the vibration damper shall be made of aluminium alloy. It shall be
capable of supporting the damper during installation and maintain the damper in position
without damaging or crushing the OPGW or causing fatigue under the clamp. Armor or patch
rods may be provided if necessary, to reduce clamping stresses on the OPGW. The armor rod
shall be made of Aluminium alloy.
The messenger cable shall be made of high strength galvanized steel or stainless steel with a
minimum strength of 135 kg./sq. mm. It shall be of preformed and post formed quality in
order to prevent subsequent drop of the weights and to maintain consistent flexural stiffness
of the cable in service. The number of strands in the messenger cable shall be 19. The
messenger cable ends shall be suitable sealed at the ends to prevent corrosion. The damper
mass shall be made of hot dip galvanized mild steel/cast iron or permanent mould cast zinc
alloy. The castings shall be free from cracks, shrinkages, inclusion and blow holes. The inside
and outside surfaces of the damper masses shall be smooth.
The vibration damper shall restrict the OPGW dynamic strain to 150 micro strains under all
conditions. The dampers shall not be dynamically overloaded during operation to prevent
damper fatigue. It is considered that at suspension & dead end locations one damper shall
be installed on OPGW on each side of the tower.
However the Bidder shall be responsible for carrying out necessary studies for arriving at the
exact placement of the vibration dampers.
5.7.6 Shield Wire Joint Boxes
Sturdy, all-weather proof units shall be provided. The shield-wire joint boxes shall include all
the necessary hardware to retain terminate, protect and splice the fibers, as well as suitable
clamps for fixing to the tower without any need of drilling holes in the tower structure. The
representative drawing of the joint box is enclosed with the specification.
5.7.7 Termination / Splicing

5.7.7.1 OPGW shall be terminated / spliced at the splice locations using shield wire joint boxes, which
shall be located about 10 m above ground level. Spare length of 15 m of OPGW shall be coiled
and attached securely to the tower near the shield wire joint boxes.
5.7.7.2 Fusion splicing shall be carried out by the Employer’s personnel trained by
Contractor/manufacturer using automatic fusion splicing equipment designed for the fiber
type. Fiber ends shall be prepared for splicing using methods and tools recommended. The
cleanliness and accurate cleaving of fiber ends shall be ensured prior to splicing.
5.7.7.3 The accurate alignment of fiber cores, prior to splicing, shall be verified using a technique that
monitors the optical power transmitted across the splice interface or real time control
technique. Fusion splicing shall be commenced only after manipulations of fiber alignment
have maximized the transmitted power. No single splice loss shall exceed 0.15 dB.
5.7.7.4 Splices shall be mechanically strengthened and protected from the environment by means of
purpose designed splice sleeves or enclosures. The finished splice shall be supported within
the shield wire joint box by means of suitable clips or restraints. It shall be possible to remove
and replace the splice in the support device without risk of damage to the splice or fiber.
5.7.7.5 Each fusion splice shall have a spare length of fiber of approximately 1 m associated with it.
This excess fiber shall be coiled neatly and clipped (or otherwise retained) within the shield
wire joint box.
5.7.8 List of Drawings and Documents

5.7.8.1 Bidder shall furnish one copy of full description and illustration of the materials offered and
the documents i to xxi. The Bidder shall also furnish sectional view drawings of all equipments
offered including OPGW and the Optical wave guide fiber.
5.7.8.2 The Contractor shall furnish the drawing, calculations, test reports and literature pertaining
to specified items (3 copies) for Employer’s approval which shall include but not be limited to
the following information:
i. Name and location of the factory or company manufacturing the optical fibers, OPGW
and all other equipment offered.

ii. Technical standard, manufacturing technology and quality assurance system for optical
fibers, OPGW.
iii. Detailed description of the OPGW structure, including dimensions of each part unit
weight and cross-section drawings.
iv. Technical standards of all other main elements used in OPGW and other equipment
offered.
v. Typical refractive index profile of the proposed fibers.
vi. The number of breakages per km in the process of proof test and the values of M
(gradient of Weibull plot) and N (Static fatigue constant, empirical) which are related to
the life time of the optical fibers.
vii. Technical measures for ensuring the life time of the OPGW.
viii. Optical signal performance calculations (e.g. optical power budget, signal bandwidth
analysis).
ix. Mounting drawings.
x. Drawings showing details of fusion splicing of OPGW.
xi. Test reports and certificates showing compliance with all required tests.
xii. Specific instructions for installation of OPGW.
xiii. Shield wire joint box drawings and details.
xiv. Installation, maintenance and instruction manuals.
xv. Maximum allowable strain margin with back up calculations and factory tests.
xvi. Sag and Tension Data
xvii. Initial and final stress-strain and creep datas
xviii. Drawing of each hardware item showing yield strength and ultimate or breaking
strength.
xix. Description of Quality Control/Assurance Programme
xx. Details of packing
xxi. Minimum permissible bend radius of OPGW.
The contractor/manufacturer shall, within 6 weeks of placement of order submit three sets
of final versions of all the above said drawings for Employer’s approval. After Employer’s

approval and successful completion of all type tests, the contractor/manufacturer shall within
three weeks, submit 6 prints, one set of good quality reproducible, one set of color drawings
in Auto CAD stored in magnetic media and one set of micro films of the approved drawings
for Employer’s use.
5.7.8.5 Six (6) sets of nicely printed (in Times font) and separate bound volumes of operation,
maintenance and erection manuals in English language for each equipment shall be
submitted by the Contractor/manufacturer for distribution, prior to the dispatch of the
equipment. The manual shall contain in separate sections all the drawings and information
required for erection, trouble-shooting operation and maintenance of the equipments. The
manual shall also contain a set of all the approved drawings in color, type test reports etc.
5.7.8.6 The contractor/manufacturer shall also furnish within thirty (30) days from rceipt of order
three VHS video cassettes in PAL B/G COLOR demonstrating the procedure of
installation/stringing of OPGW and associated hardware, fusion splicing of optical fibers of
OPGW cable, laying of cable and such other works and procedures including detailed testing
procedures of all the equipments (with slow motion sequences also) which would educate
and guide the Employer’s engineers in execution of work and trouble shooting and operation
and maintenance of the OPGW system. The video cassettes shall be informative and self-
explanatory and in English language only.
5.7.9 Workmanship
All the material shall be of latest design and conform to in all respects of high standard of
engineering design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation for a minimum anticipated life of 40 years.
5.8 TESTS AND STANDARDS

5.8.1 General
5.8.1.1 The Bidder along with his bid shall furnish type test certificates for the tests specified in clause
5.8.2.1 & 2 below for the equipments/materials offered by him. If the Bidder is required to
specially design the equipment to meet the Employer’s Specification, then he should submit
their type test certificates for the equipments/material which are similar to those offered by

him. The offer not accompanied by type test certificates as stated above will be treated as
incomplete and termed as non-responsive. The following type, acceptance, routine tests and
tests during manufacture shall be carried out on the materials. For the purpose of this clause:
5.8.1.3 “Type tests” shall mean those tests which are to be carried out to prove the design, process
of manufacture and general conformity of the materials to this Specification. These tests
shall be carried out on samples prior to commencement of commercial production against
the order. The bidder shall indicate their schedule for carrying out these tests.
5.8.1.4 “Acceptance Tests”-Dispatch inspection for the purposes of acceptance of that lot.
5.8.1.5 “Routine tests’ shall mean those tests which are to be carried out on the material to check
requirements which are likely to vary during production.
5.8.1.6 “Tests during manufacture” shall mean those tests which are to be carried out during the
process of manufacture and end inspection by the Contractor/manufacturer to ensure the
desired quality of the end product to be supplied by him.
5.8.1.7 The norms and procedure of sampling for these tests will be as per the Quality Assurance
Programme to be mutually agreed to by the Contractor/manufacturer and Employer.
5.8.1.8 The standards and norms to which these tests will be carried out are listed against them.
Where a particular test is a specific requirement of this Specification, the norms and
procedure of these shall be as specified in annexure of this Specification or as mutually agreed
to between the Contractor/manufacturer and the Employer in the Quality Assurance
Programme. For all type and acceptance tests the acceptance values shall be the values
guaranteed by the Bidder in the guaranteed technical particulars schedule or the acceptance
value specified in this specification, whichever is more stringent for that particular test.
5.8.2 Type test
5.8.2.1 Type Tests on Complete OPGW
The following tests shall be conducted once on sample/samples of OPGW from each
manufacturing facility (detailed in Annexure-C):
i. Water Penetration Test
ii. Seepage of flooding compound Tensile Performance Test

iii. D.C. Resistance test

iv. Crush test
v. Impact test
vi. Bend Test
vii. Strain margin test
viii. Aeolian Vibration Test
ix. Short Circuit Test
x. Lightning Test
xi. Temperature cycle test
xii. Sheave test
5.8.2.2 Type Tests on OPGW Fittings & Accessories

Suspension and Tension Assembly
TABLE-5.27
Mechanical strength test
Annexure-C
Clamp slip strength test
Dead-end Assembly
TABLE-5.28
Mechanical strength test
Annexure -C
Clamp slip strength test
Grounding clamp and Structure mounting clamp

TABLE-5.29
Clamp fit test
Annexure-C
Clamp strength test

Vibration Damper
TABLE-5.30
a) Dynamic characteristics test
b) Vibration analysis
Annexure-C
c) Clamp slip test
d) Fatigue test
5.8.3 Acceptance Tests

5.8.3.1 Acceptance Tests on Complete OPGW
TABLE-5.31
a) Dimensional Check
b) Lay length measurement
c) Crush Test Annexure - D
d) Impact test
e) Temperature cycle test
Acceptance Tests on Optic Fiber

TABLE-5.32
a) Attenuation variation with
Wavelength
b) Attenuation at the water
Annexure - D
peak
c) Attenuation with bending
d) Temperature cycling
Acceptance Tests on Metallic wires

TABLE-5.33
a) Tensile test
b) Elongation test
c) D.C. Resistance test
Annexure - D
d) Thickness of aluminium
(For AS wires)
e) Twist test (For AS wires)
5.8.3.2 Acceptance Tests on OPGW Fittings & Accessories

Suspension Assembly
TABLE-5.34
Visual examination and
a)
b) Clamp slip strength test Annexure - D
Mechanical strength testOn
c)
each component
Dead-end Assembly
TABLE-5.35
b) Clamp slip strength test Annexure – D
c) Mechanical strength testOn
each component
Grounding Wire for clamps

TABLE-5.36
a) Visual examination and Annexure - D

b) Tensile test
Structure mounting clamp

TABLE-5.37
Annexure - D
b) Clamp fit test
c) Clamp strength test
Vibration Damper
TABLE-5.38
b) Galvanizing test
(i) on damper masses
(ii) on messenger cable
c) Verification of resonance
Annexure - D
Frequencies
d) Clamp slip test
f) Strength of the messenger
cable
g) Mass pull off test
5.8.4 Routine Test

Measurement of optical fiber loss of each individual fiber at 1550 nm. Measurement of mode
field diameter and chromatic dispersion co-efficient of the fibers. All acceptance tests as
mentioned above under cl. 5.8.3 for metallic wires on each coil. Test during Manufacture
Chemical analysis of steel/aluminium alloy used for making strands. The tests for optic fiber

to be mutually agreed between the Contractor/manufacturer and Employer in the Quality

Assurance Programme.
5.8.5 Sample Batch for Type Testing
The Contractor/manufacturer shall offer material for selection of samples for type testing
only after getting Quality Assurance Plan approved from Employer’s Quality Assurance Deptt.
The sample shall be manufactured strictly in accordance with the Quality Assurance plan
approved by Employer. The Contractor/manufacturer shall offer at least three drums for
selection of sample required for conducting all the type tests. Before sample selection, the
Contractor/manufacturer is required to conduct all the acceptance tests successfully in
presence of the Employer’s representative.
5.8.6 Testing Expenses
Testing charges for all the type tests shall be indicated separately for each item in the
prescribed schedule of the bidding document. Bidder shall indicate the laboratories in which
they propose to conduct the type tests. They shall ensure that the tests can be completed in
these laboratories within the time schedule guaranteed by them in the appropriate schedule
of the bidding document. In case of failure in any type test, the Contractor/manufacturer is
either required to manufacture fresh sample lot and repeat all type tests successfully or
repeat that particular type tests at least three times successfully on the samples selected
from the already manufactured lot at his own expenses. In case a fresh lot is manufactured
for testing then the lot already manufactured shall be rejected. The entire cost of testing for
acceptance and routine tests and test during manufacture specified herein shall be treated
as included in the quoted unit price of materials, except for the expenses of
Inspector/Employer’s representative.
5.8.7 Additional Tests
The Employer reserves the right of having, at his own expense, any other test(s) of reasonable
nature carried out at Contractor/manufacturer’s premises, at site or in any other place in
addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests to satisfy himself that the
material comply with the Specification. The Employer also reserves the right to conduct all
the tests mentioned in this Specification at his own expense on the samples selected from

lots supplied to the Employer at Contractor/manufacturer’s premises or at any other test

centre. In case of evidence of non compliance, it shall be binding on the part of
Contractor/manufacturer to prove the compliance of the items to the Technical Specification
by repeat tests or corrections of deficiencies or replacement of defective items, all without
any extra cost to the Employer.
5.8.8 Test Reports
After award of the contract, Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six copies
along with one original. One copy shall be returned duly certified by the Employer, only after
which the commercial production of the concerned material shall start. Copies of acceptance
test report shall be furnished in at least six copies one copy shall be returned, duly certified
by the Employer, only after which the materials will be dispatched. Record of routine test
report shall be maintained by the Contractor/manufacturer at his works for periodic
inspection by the Employer’s representative. Test certificates of tests during manufacture
shall be maintained by the Contractor/manufacturer. These shall be produced for verification
as and when desired by the Employer.
5.8.9 Inspection
The Employer’s representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to the works and
all places of manufacture, where materials shall be manufactured and the representatives
shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Contractor/manufacturer’s, sub-
Contractor/manufacturer’s works, raw materials, manufacturer’s of all the materials and for
conducting necessary tests as detailed herein.
The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Contractor/manufacturer only under
packed condition. The engineer shall select samples at random from the packed lot for
carrying out acceptable tests.
The Contractor/manufacturer shall keep the Employer informed in advance of the time of
starting and of the progress of manufacture of materials in its various stages so that
arrangements could be made for inspection. Materials shall not be dispatched from its point
of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily inspected and tested, unless the inspection
is waived off by the Employer in writing. In the latter case also the materials shall be

dispatched only after all tests specified herein have been satisfactorily completed. The
acceptance of any quantity of materials shall in no way relieve the Contractor/manufacturer
of his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of the Specification, and shall not
prevent subsequent rejection, if such materials are later found to be defective.
5.8.10 Test Equipments and Special Tools
Two(2) sets, unless otherwise specified, of testing instruments, special tools, dies and
equipment that are uniquely required for installation, testing, repair and maintenance shall
be supplied. Each set shall include the following.
a) One (1) portable Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) with 1330 nm and 1550
nm module. The offered OTDR shall be suitable for attenuation profile measurements
(with a one meter resolution) on at least two times the length of the longest optical
link. OTDR shall incorporate a method for producing hard copy of the attenuation
profiles in graphical form.
b) One (1) Portable Optical Power Meter for 1550 nm and 1330 nm wavelengths.
c) One (1) Portable High Stability Laser Source each at 1550 nm and 1330 nm wavelengths
for optical power measurements.
d) One (1) fusion splicing machines with spare fiber reels.
e) The fusion splicing machine offered shall be of the fully automatic type, designed to
carry out fiber core alignment, pre-cleaning and fusion splicing functions as a fully
integrated and properly coordinated sequence of actions. It shall only be necessary
for the operator to correctly prepare the fiber ends and carry out preliminary
alignments prior to initiating the splicing sequence. Optical devices and light sources
that are utilized in fiber alignment system shall form an integral part of the fusion
splicing machine and alignment procedures that rely on the use of remotely mounted
light sources will not be accepted. The fusion splicing machine shall be capable of
producing splices with average attenuation values of less than 0.05 dB. The splicing
machine shall comply with relevant Health and Safety Standards.
f) One fiber reel containing 2 km long 1550 nm optical fiber.
g) Two (2) Fiber stripping tools and fiber cleaver.

h) Four (4) sets of tools for cutting metal wires/ tube containing optical fibers of OPGW.
i) Air-conditioner with portable diesel generator set and set of scaffolding and all
weather tent
j) Special stringing tools like stringing blocks, counter weight, stringing clamp etc.
required for OPGW stringing.
5.8.11 The contractor/manufacturer shall indicate the list of recommended spares for at least 15
years operation of these equipments. The Bidder shall train the three Employer’s engineers
for one week at the manufacturer’s works for maintenance and handling of these
equipments, without any extra charges. In addition to the above, the Bidder shall offer, with
recommended quantities, special tools, dies and equipment, in addition to those listed above
that in his opinion, are required for installation, repair and maintenance.
5.8.12 Packaging/Drums
5.8.12.1 The OPGW shall be supplied in non-returnable, strong steel drums provided with lagging of
adequate strength, constructed to protect the OPGW against all damage and displacement
during transit, storage and subsequent handling and stringing operations in the field. The
steel drums shall be collapsible.
The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for letting off the OPGW under a
minimum controlled tension of the order of 5 KN with the help of tension stringing
equipment. The Bidders shall submit their proposed drum drawing along with the bids. The
drum and inside flanges shall be such that damage will not occur to the OPGW during
shipping, handling, storage and stringing. A layer of suitable material may be provided which
is water resistant and will not absorb moisture. The outer layer of the OPGW shall be
protected by a water resistance wrapping over the exposed surface to prevent dirt and gritty
material from coming in contact with the OPGW during shipment and storage. A seal shall
be applied to each end of the OPGW to prevent the entrance of moisture into the optical
fibers or the escape of filling compound during shipment and storage.
A minimum space of 75mm shall be provided between the inner surface of the external
protective lagging and outer layer of the OPGW. The OPGW ends shall be properly sealed and
secured with the help of U nails or bolts on the side of one of the flanges to avoid loosening

of the OPGW layers during transit and handling. Only one length of OPGW shall be wound on
each drum. Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the
following information:
a) Name of the consignee
b) Details of consignment
c) Destination
d) Total weight of consignment
e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate
f) Handling and unpacking instructions
g) Bill of material indicating contents of each package.
(i) Each drum shall have the following information stenciled on it in indelible ink
along with other essential data:
(ii) Contract/Award letter number
(iii) Name and address of consignee
(iv) Manufacturer’s name and address
(v) Drum number
(vi) Size of OPGW
(vii) Length of OPGW in meters
(viii) Gross weight of drum with OPGW
(ix) Weight of empty drum with lagging
(x) Arrow marking for unwinding
(xi) Position of the OPGW ends.
The contractor/manufacturer shall ensure that the packing list and bill of material are
approved by the Employer before dispatch.
5.8.13 Field Acceptance Testing
Upon receipt of the OPGW from the Contractor/manufacturer, the Employer shall perform
acceptance tests in order to verify that the optical characteristics of the fiber meet the order
requirements and to determine if optical fibers have been damaged during shipment. The
tests may be performed by either using an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) or by

using a light source and a power meter. In case of evidence of non-compliance, it shall be
binding on the part of Contractor/manufacturer to prove the compliance of the items to the
Technical Specifications by repeat tests or replacement of defective drum, all without any
extra cost to the Employer.
5.8.14 Storage of Equipment
The storage of equipment will be the responsibility of Contractor.
5.8.15 Performance Guarantee
OPGW system shall be capable of continuous commercial operation with reliable and efficient
functioning for a minimum anticipated life span of forty (40) years. The system shall be
guaranteed for trouble free operation for a reasonable period.
5.8.16 Training
The Contractor shall conduct training program In two parts for Employer’s Engineer as per
the following:
i) Manufacturer’s premises 3 NEA engineers at manufacturer’s works for one week and all
the cost shall be included in the price.
ii) On the job at site
5.8.16.1 The Contractor/manufacturer shall have to provide training to Employer’s representatives at
his works and at the sites of the transmission lines.
The Contractor/manufacturer shall be required to provide facilities for training, where the
OPGW & equipments offered shall be manufactured. Special stress shall be given so as to
ensure that the trained engineers acquire proficiency in installation/stringing, termination/
splicing (including fusion splicing) & testing so that they can take up this work independently.
The contractor/manufacturer will be required to issue necessary certificates to the individual
engineers accordingly, certifying their proficiency in carrying out splicing (including fusion
splicing) & testing of fibers using OTDR.
The contractor shall note that these trained engineers of Employer would be required to carry
out termination/splicing of OPGW and supervision of installation/stringing of OPGW while
execution of the Project. The training must also include handling, operating and trouble
shooting of the T&M instruments offered. If the OPGW & equipment offered, is being

designed and manufactured in collaboration with any other manufacturer, the

Contractor/manufacturer shall provide for training of four engineers to be nominated by the
Employer, for in plant training in the collaborator’s works. In case of training at
Contractor/manufacturer’s works within India or outside India as the case may be, the to
and fro travel expenses, lodging and boarding charges as well as allowance for out of pocket
expenses in respect of the trainees shall be borne by the Turnkey Contractor. However, the
Contractor/manufacturer shall assist to arrange suitable facilities for lodging and boarding
as well as to and fro transport to the place of training for the trainees. In addition to the
above, the Contractor/manufacturer shall have to arrange for training of Employer’s
personnel at each of the sites of the transmission line when the contractor/manufacturer’s
personnel would be available at site for supervision in installation/stringing of OPGW,
termination/splicing (including fusion splicing), testing and commissioning etc.
5.8.17 Methodology of Work

The erection of Transmission Line will be taken up at the work sites simultaneously. The
installation/stringing of OPGW will be taken into hand along with the stringing of other Earth
wire, to be done by contractor. The installation/stringing of OPGW along with associated
hardware will be done by contractor. The splicing/termination of OPGW will be done by the
Employer’s engineers, trained by Contractor/manufacturer at his works and/or site. At the
time of commencement of the work mentioned above, the contractor/manufacturer, on
intimation shall depute his personnel to work site to supervise the work of contractor and
Employer’s Engineers. During the period the contractor/manufacturer’s personnel will:
i. Guide the contractor in installation/stringing of OPGW, associated hardware, jointing
boxes and vibration dampers.
ii. Guide the Employer’s engineer in splicing/termination of the optical fibers of the OPGW
and testing of splices/joints.
iii. Supervise the works of contractor and Employer’s engineers.
iv. Impart on job/onsite training to Employer’s personnel.

After completion of OPGW installation/stringing work the Contractor/manufacturer’s

personnel will supervise the Employer’s personnel in carrying out final checking and testing
of the OPGW. Employer’s personnel would test the work section wise i.e. between end
stations to repeater station, repeater station to repeater, repeater to interface station etc. as
the case may be. If any fault(s) is encountered in a particular section or sections his personnel
would identify the same and the same will be set right/ made good by him. Thus all the
sections will be checked, tested and made through by the Employer’s personnel under the
supervision of contractor/manufacturer and the Contractor/manufacturer will then issue a
certificate, certifying healthiness of all the OPGW Sections.
The optical Line Terminal Equipment (OLTE) and Repeater stations will be installed by the
Contractor. The optical fibers of the OPGW would then be terminated on the OLTE at the
end, repeater and interface stations by the Employer and the contractor. In case of any fault
in any section or sections, OPGW Contractor/manufacturer will depute his personnel, if so
required, on intimation from the Employer for rectifying the faulty sections. The
Contractor/manufacturer’s personnel should be able to reach the work site(s) at a very short
notice i.e. within a fortnight from the date of intimation. The Contractor/manufacturer would
be assisted, if necessary, to rectify such a fault by the Contractor and Employer’s Engineers.
In this manner the entire OPGW communication system will be made through and
commissioned.
5.8.18 Commissioning
The following commissioning tests shall be carried out:
a) End to end optical waveguide fiber continuity and attenuation measurement
This test shall be carried out from equipment connector end at one site to
corresponding end at the remote site.
This test shall be carried out in both directions. An OTDR printout of each test including
the Rayleigh scatter diagram shall be provided to the Employer free of cost for each
fiber.

b) Bit-Error-Rate count over 360 Hours (15 days) of continuous transmission test code on
each fiber at 8.448 Mbit/s using BER Test Equipment with hard copy output for each
test. At least two (2) personnel of the Employer who have attended the
Contractor/manufacturer’s training course will be available to assist the
contractor/manufacturer in performing the commissioning tests. All test results shall
be recorded on hard copy and also on magnetic media. All the test equipment required
for commissioning shall be provided by the Contractor/manufacturer and removed
from the site upon completion
5.8.20 Standards
The material shall conform to the following Indian/International Standards which shall mean
latest revisions, amendments/changes adopted and published unless otherwise specified
herein above. International and Internationally recognized standards to which these
standards generally correspond are also listed below. In the event of the supply of material
conforming to any standard other than Standards listed below, the salient features of
comparison shall be brought out and furnished along with the bid.
TABLE-5.39
S.No. Indian Title International
Standard Standards
1) The International Telegraph and Telephone G.653
Consultative Committee (CCITT)
Recommendations
2) International Electro technical vocabulary IEC:60050-1975
3) Optic Fibers, Part 1: IEC: 60793-1
Generic specification
4) Optic Fiber Cables Part-1: Generic IEC: 60794 – 1
specification

5) Optic Fiber Cables-Part-4-10:Arieal optical IEC : 60794-4-10

cable along electrical power lines-Family
specification for OPGW(Optical Ground
Wire)
6) Aluminium Alloy Redraw rods IEC: 60104 –
1987
7) IS- Galvanized Strand For Earthing —
12776:2002 Specification
8) Fiber Optic Test EIA-RS-445
Procedure Series EIA-RS-455
(FOTP.S)
9) IS: 2121 Specification for conductor and
Earth wire Accessories for Overhead Power
lines
10) Standard construction of composite fiber IEEE P1138-1990
optic Ground wire (OPGW) for use on
electric utility power lines
11) IS: 398 Standard conductor for overhead lines IEC:61089 – 1993
12) Overhead lines - Requirements for greases IEC:61394
for aluminium, aluminium alloy and steel
bare conductors
The Standards mentioned above are available from: -

TABLE-5.40
REFERENCE NAME AND ADDRESS
ABBREVIATION
BS British Standards, British Standards Institution
101, Pentonvile Road,

N-19-ND, UK
IEC/CISPR International Electro technical Commission

Bureau Central de la Commission,
Electro Technique International,1 Rue de verembe,
Geneva
SWITZERLAND
IS INDIAN STANDARDS INSTITUTION
ManakBhawan,
9, Bahadur Shah ZafarMarg,
New Delhi – 110001 INDIA
ISO International Organisation for Standardization,
Danish Board of Standardization
Danish StandardisingSraet,Aurehoegvej – 12
DK -2900, Heeleprup,
DENMARK
NEMA National Electric Manufacture Association,
155, East 44thStrteet,
New York, NY 10017,USA
CSA Canadian Standard Association
178, Raxadale Boulevard, Raxdale,
Ontario, CANADA M9W IR.

ANNEXURE ‘C’
5.9 TYPE TESTS ON COMPLETE OPGW, FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES-ANNEXURE C
5.9.1 TYPE TESTS ON COMPLETE OPGW
5.9.1.1 Water Penetration Test
The test shall be conducted in accordance with IEC 60794-1-F5. However test may be
conducted under testing lab ambient atmospheric conditions.
5.9.1.2 Seepage of Flooding Compound
For filled fiber optic ground wire, the test shall be conducted in accordance with EIA-455-81
except that a preconditioning cycle as given below may be used. The sample shall be
prepared as per Method-A of EIA-455-81. The unprepared end may be sealed. The filling and
flooding compound shall not flow (drip or leak) at 65º C.
Preconditioning Cycle
A clean glass dish shall be placed directly under the test specimen. The sample shall be
suspended vertically for 72 hours at 65º C +/-2º C. After preconditioning a small amount (less
than 1 % of the weight of the sample before testing) of mostly clear oil may be present.
Presence of a greater amount of material in the glass dish shall constitute failure.
5.9.1.3 Tensile Performance test
The test shall be conducted on a sample of sufficient length in accordance with IEC: 60794-1-
E1. There shall not be any change in attenuation upto 90% of RTS of OPGW. The load shall
be increased at steady rate upto rated tensile strength and held for 1 (one) minute. The
OPGW sample shall not fail during the period. The applied load shall then be increased until
the failing load is reached and the value recorded.
5.9.1.4 D.C. Resistance test
On an OPGW sample of minimum 5m length, two contact clamps shall be fixed with a
predetermined bolt torque. The resistance shall be measured by a Kelvin double bridge by
placing the clamps initially zero meter and subsequently one meter apart. The tests shall be
repeated at least five times and the average value recorded after correcting at 20 Deg. C.

5.9.1.5 Crush Test

The crush test shall be carried out on a sample of approximately 1 (one) meter long in
accordance with IEC: 60794-1-E3. Load equal to 1/3 the weight of a 400meter length of
OPGW shall be applied for a period of 10 minutes. A permanent or temporary increase in
optical attenuation value greater than 0.1 dB change in sample shall constitute failure. The
load shall be further increased in small increments until the measured attenuation of the
optical waveguide fibers increases and the failure load recorded along with results.
5.9.1.6 Impact Test
The Impact test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC: 60794-1-E4. Five separate
impacts of 0.1-0.3 kg-m shall be applied. The radius of the intermediate piece shall be the
reel drum radius +/-10%.A permanent or temporary increase in optical attenuation value
greater than 0.1 dB change in sample shall constitute failure
5.9.1.7 Bend Test
The short term and long term bend tests shall be conducted in accordance with Procedure 2
in IEC 60794-1-E11 to determine the minimum acceptable radius of bending without any
increase in attenuation or any other damage to the OPGW core such as bird caging,
deformation, kinking and crimping.
5.9.1.8 Strain Margin Test
The test shall be conducted on a sample of sufficient length to ensure that the sample
specimen under strain is a minimum of 10 meters long and that the optical fiber test specimen
under strain is a minimum of 100 meters long. The test sample shall be terminated at both
ends prior to strain in a manner such that the optical fibers cannot move relative to the
OPGW. Strain gauges shall be attached to the sample surface. Changes in the fiber length
may be measured using a laser and optical receiver. The propagation delay caused by the
change in fiber length may be determined by using both a pulse generator and digital storage
oscilloscope, or by measuring the phase shift of a modulated signal. Fiber attenuation at 1550
nm shall be monitored on the same fiber or on another fiber using a laser and power meter.
The sample is stretched while measuring tensile load, sample strain, fiber attenuation and
fiber length. The strain margin is defined as the percent elongation of the OPGW at which

the attenuation of the optical waveguide fibers has increased above the attenuation
measured before the start of each test.
5.9.1.9 Aeolian Vibration Test

The general arrangement to be used for the Aeolian vibration tests and the support details
shall be as per Appendix ‘B’ of IEEE P 1138 Draft 1990. The end abutments are used to load
and maintain tension in the fiber optic cable. The test section is contained between the two
intermediate abutments. The fiber optic ground wire to be tested should be cut to a sufficient
length beyond the intermediate abutments to allow removal of the OPGW outer strands and
to allow access to the optical fibers. Suitable dead end assemblies shall be installed on the
sample to fit between the intermediate abutments. The test sample shall be terminated at
both ends prior to tensioning in a manner such that the optical fibers cannot move relative
to the OPGW. A dynamometer, load cell or other devices should be used to measure sample
tension. Some means should be provided to maintain constant tension to allow for
temperature fluctuation during the testing. The sample should be tensioned to
approximately 25% +/-1% of the rated tensile strength. The active span length of the test
sample (dead-end to dead-end) shall be approx. 30 meters with a suitable suspension
assembly located approx. two thirds of the distance between the dead-end assemblies. It
shall be supported at a height such that the static sag angle of the sample to horizontal at the
suspension point should be 1.5+/ - 0.5 degrees. An electronically controlled shaker shall be
used to excite the sample in the vertical plane. The shaker should be located in the span to
allow for a minimum of six vibration loops between the suspension assembly and the shaker.
The optical fibers shall be connected to each other by means of fusion splices. Optical
measurements shall be made using a light source. The laser source shall be connected
through an optical Splitter to one end of the test fiber. The splitter shall divide the optical
signal into two parts. One part shall be fed directly into an optical power meter. The other
part shall be fusion spliced into one free end of the test fiber. A second optical power meter
shall be placed on the returning end of the test fiber such that signal from the optical source
shall go through the test field on each of the test fibers and then be read at this second meter.

The output of optical power meter shall be monitored using at least two different methods.
The attenuation shall be measured and recorded on a continual basis during the tests. The
sample shall be subjected to more than 100 million cycles. The test excitation frequency shall
be equal to and maintained at the nearest resonant frequency produced by a 4.5 m/sec wind
(i.e. frequency=830/diameter of OPGW in mm). The free loop peak to peak anti-node
amplitude shall be maintained at a level equal to one-third the diameter of the OPGW.
In the initial stages the test span requires continuous attention and recordings should be
taken approximately every 15 minutes until the test span is stabilized. After the test span has
stabilized, readings should be taken every hour. A final optical measurement shall be taken
at least two hours after the completion of the vibration test. Any damage to any component
of the test sample or permanent or temporary increase in attenuation greater than 1.0
dB/test fiber km shall constitute failure.
5.9.1.10 Short Circuit Test
The test shall be conducted on a sample of minimum length of 30 m tensioned at 20% of UTS
(Ultimate tensile strength). The fibers shall be connected to each other by means of fusion
splices. The splices must be made and placed in such a manner that they are not within the
test field, nor should they be subjected to vibration, sudden stress or temperature change
from fault current pulses, weather conditions or handling. Devices should be attached to
prevent movement of the core assembly relative to the strands. In addition, the OPGW
should be terminated and the core assembly shall be brought out of the strands at least 5 m
away from the current field. A later source shall be connected through an optical Splitter to
one end of the test fiber. The splitter shall divide the optical signal into two parts. One part
shall be fed directly into an optical power meter. The other part shall be fusion spliced into
one free end of the test fiber. A second optical power meter shall be placed on the returning
end of the test fiber such that signal from the optical source shall go through the test field on
each of the test fibers and then be read at this second meter. Any necessary power sources
for these shall be from a different power supply than that which feeds the fault current
apparatus. The output of optical power meter shall be monitored using at least two different
methods. In addition, OTDR measurements could be made before and after the test to verify

the location(s) of any attenuation increases. The core and OPGW surface temperatures plus
attenuation shall be measured and recorded on a continual basis during the tests and for 30
minutes after each test. Ten current pulses shall be applied with the OPGW being allowed to
cool to within 5ºC of the ambient temperature between each pulse. The fault current value
shall be derived from the specified OPGW 12T ratings. Each current pulse shall be applied
with full a symmetry. An increase in optical waveguide fibers attenuation greater than 1.0
dB/test fiber km at 1550 nm shall constitute failure. Bird caging or breaking of the conductor
strands shall also constitute failure.
5.9.1.11 Lightning Test
Tension equal to 20% of the OPGW RTS shall be applied to a sample with minimum length of
30 m of cabled fibers and two separate 4/10- micro second current impulses each having a
peak value of150 KA and a negative polarity shall be applied through a 1 cm gap. The
attenuation during the tests shall be continuously measured. After the tests the sample shall
be visually inspected. Any increase in optical waveguide fibers attenuation measured at 1550
nm shall construe failure.
5.9.1.12 Temperature Cycle Test
The test shall be conducted in accordance with IEC: 60794-1-F1 with the following cycle
parameters:
a) Low temperature (TA) = -40 Deg.C.
b) High temperature (TB) = +80 Deg.C.
c) Exposing period ( t 1) = 1 hour
The test shall be repeated ten times and the optical waveguide fibers attenuation at 1550 nm
shall be recorded. The maximum variation of the attenuation shall not exceed the Bidder’s
quoted values.
5.9.1.13 Sheave Test
The general arrangement for the sheave test shall be as per Appendix ‘D’ of IEEE P1138 Draft
1990. The test shall be performed on a sample of approximately 21 m long. Dead-end fittings
shall be clamped approximately 3 m in from each end of the test sample, leaving about 15m
of test length between them. The optical fibers shall be connected to each other by means

of fusion splices. Optical measurements shall be made using a light source. The laser source
shall be connected through an optical Splitter to one end of the test fiber. The splitter shall
divide the optical signal into two parts. One part shall be fed directly into an optical power
meter. The other part shall be fusion spliced into one free end of the test fiber. A second
optical power meter shall be placed on returning end of the test fiber such that signal from
the optical source shall go through the test field on each of the test fibers and then be read
as this second meter. The output of optical power meter shall be monitored using at least
two different methods. The attenuation shall be measured and recorded on a continual basis
during the tests.
The sample shall be led through a sheave. The minimum recommended sheave diameter is
40 x OPGW diameters. The sample shall be pulled at one dead end at 25% of its rated tensile
strength at a deflection angle of 30+/-2 degrees. The method of attachment, while not rigid,
shall limit the amount of twist that could occur at the lead end. A dynamometer and a swivel
shall be installed between the yoke and the other dead end. A 2m minimum length of the
OPGW test sample shall be pulled 70 times forward and backward through the sheave (35
times in each direction). Before the first pull, the beginning, midpoint and end of this length
shall be monitored continuously during the test. After the test is completed, the metallic
strands shall be removed and the test section and the protective tube diameter shall be
measured at the marked points and at the one-third points between each marked point. Any
significant damage to the OPGW or fiber optic unit at any points above deformation limits of
0.50 mm shall constitute failure. A permanent increase in optical attenuation greater than
1.0 dB/test fiber km shall constitute failure.
5.9.2 TYPE TEST ON OPGW FITTINGS
5.9.2.1 Mechanical Strength test for Suspension/ Tension Assembly
The suspension assembly/tension assembly (excluding tension clamp) shall be subjected to a
load equal to 50% of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be
increased at a steady rate to 67% of the minimum UTS specified. This load shall be held for
five minutes and then removed. After removal of the load, the components shall not show
any visual deformation and it shall be possible to disassemble them by hand. Hand tools may

be used to loosen the nuts initially. The assembly shall then be reassembled and loaded to
50% of UTS and the load shall be further increased at a steady rate till the specified minimum
UTS is reached and held for one minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The
applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.
5.9.2.2 Clamp Slip strength Test for Suspension Assembly
The suspension assembly shall be vertically suspended by means of a flexible attachment. A
suitable length OPGW shall be fixed in the clamps. The clamp slip strength at various
tightening torques shall be obtained by gradually applying the load at one end of the OPGW.
The clamp slip strength Vs torque curve shall be drawn. The clamp slip strength at the
recommended tightening torque shall be more than 12 KN but less than 17 KN.
5.9.2.3 Slip Strength Test of Tension Clamp
Tension clamps shall be fitted on a 5 m length of OPGW on both ends. The assembly shall be
mounted on a tensile testing machine and anchored in a manner similar to the arrangement
to be used in service.
A tensile load of 50% of the specified breaking load of the OPGW shall be applied and the
sample shall be marked in such a way that movement relative to the fitting can easily be
detected. Without any subsequent adjustment of the fitting, the load shall be steadily
increased to 95% of the specified breaking load and maintained for one minute. There shall
be no movement of the OPGW relative to the fitting during this one minute period and no
failure of the fitting also.
5.9.2.4 Grounding Clamp and Structure Mounting Clamp Fit Test
For structure mounting clamp, one series of tests shall be conducted with two OPGW
installed, one series of tests with one OPGW installed in one groove, and one series of tests
with one OPGW installed in the other groove. Each clamp shall be installed including
clamping compound as required on the OPGW. The nut shall be tightened on to the bolt by
using torque wrench with a torque of 5.5 kg-m or contractor/manufacturer’s recommended
torque and held for 10 minutes. After the test remove the OPGW and examine all its
components for distortion, crushing or breaking. Also the fiber optic cable shall be checked
to ensure free movement within the core using dial calipers to measure the diameter of the

core tube. The material shall be defined as failed if any visible distortion, crushing, cracking
or breaking of the core tube is observed, or the fiber optic cable within the core tube is not
free to move, or when the diameter of the core tube as measured at any location in the
clamped area is more than 0.5mm larger or smaller of the core diameter as measured outside
the clamped area.
5.9.2.5 Structure Mounting Clamp Strength Test
The clamp and mounting assembly shall be assembled on a vertical 200 mm 200mm angle
and a short length of OPGW installed. A vertical load of 200 kg shall be applied at the end of
the mounting clamp and held for 5 minutes. Subsequently the load shall be increased to 400
kg and held for 30 seconds. Any visible distortion, slipping or breaking of any component of
the mounting clamp or assembly shall constitute failure.
5.9.3 TYPE TEST ON VIBRATION DAMPER
5.9.3.1 Dynamic Characteristics Test
The damper shall be mounted with its clamp tightened with torque recommended by the
manufacturer on shaker table capable of simulating sinusoidal vibrations for Aeolian
Vibration frequency band of ranging from 10 to 60 Hz. The damper assembly shall be vibrated
vertically with a + 1mm amplitude from 5 to 15 Hz frequency and beyond 15 Hz at 0.5 mm to
determine following characteristics with the help of suitable recording instruments:
a) Force Vs frequency
b) Phase angle Vs frequency
c) Power dissipation Vs frequency
The Force Vs frequency curve shall not show steep peaks at resonance frequencies and deep
troughs between the resonance frequencies. The resonance frequencies shall be suitably
spread within the Aeolian vibration frequency-band between the lower and upper dangerous
frequency limits determined by the vibration analysis of OPGW without dampers. The above
dynamic characteristics test on five damper shall be conducted.
5.9.3.2 Vibration Analysis

The vibration analysis of the OPGW shall be done with and without damper installed on the
span. The vibration analysis shall be done on a digital computer using energy balance
approach. The following parameters shall be taken into account for the purpose of analysis:
a. The analysis shall be done for single OPGW without armor rods. The tension shall be
taken as 15 KN for a span ranging from 100 m to 1100m.
b. The self damping factor and flexural stiffness (El) for OPGW shall be calculated on the
basis of experimental results. The details to experimental analysis with these data
should be furnished.
c. The power dissipation curve obtained from Dynamic characteristics that shall be used
for analysis with damper.
d. Examine the Aeolian Vibration level of the OPGW with and without vibration damper
installed at the recommended location or wind velocity ranging from 0 to 30 km per
hour, predicting amplitude, frequency and vibration energy input.
e. From vibration analysis of OPGW without damper, anti-node vibration amplitude and
dynamic strain levels at clamped span extremities as well as anti-nodes shall be
examined and thus lower and upper dangerous frequency limits between which the
Aeolian vibration levels exceed the specified limits shall be determined.
f. From vibration analysis of OPGW without damper/dampers installed at the
recommended location, the dynamic strain level at the clamped span extremities,
damper attachment point and the anti-nodes on the OPGW shall be determined. In
addition to above clamp vibration amplitude and anti-node vibration amplitude shall
also be examined. The dynamic strain levels at damper attachment points, clamped
span extremities and anti-nodes shall not exceed the specified limits. The damper
clamp vibration amplitude shall not be more than that of the specified fatigue limits.
5.9.3.3 Clamp Slip and Fatigue Tests

1. Test Set Up
The clamp slip and fatigue tests shall be conducted on a laboratory set up with a minimum
effective span length of 30 m. The OPGW shall be tensioned at 15 KN and shall not be

equipped with protective armor rods at any point. Constant tension shall be maintained
within the span by means of lever arm arrangement. After the OPGW has been tensioned,
clamps shall be installed to support the OPGW at both ends and thus influence of
connecting hardware fittings are eliminated from the free span. The clamps shall not be
used for holding the tension on the OPGW. There shall be no loose parts, such as
suspension clamps, U bolts, on the test span supported between clamps mentioned
above. The span shall be equipped with vibration inducing equipment suitable for
producing steady standing vibration. The inducing equipment shall have facilities for
step-less speed control as well as step-less amplitude arrangement. Equipment shall be
available for measuring the frequency, cumulative number of cycles and amplitude of
vibration at any point along the span.
2. Clamp Slip test
The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span. The damper clamp, after
tightening with the manufacturer’s specified tightening torque, when subjected to a
longitudinal pull of 2.5 KN parallel to the axis of OPGW for a minimum duration of one
minutes shall not slip i.e. the permanent displacement between OPGW and clamp
measured after removal of the load shall not exceed 1.0 mm. The load shall be further
increased till the clamp starts slipping. The load at which the clamp slips shall not be more
than 5 KN.
3. Fatigue Test
The vibration damper shall be installed on the test span with the manufacturers’ specified
tightening torque. It shall be ensured that the damper shall be kept minimum three loops
away from the shaker to eliminate stray signals influencing damper movement. The
damper shall then be vibrated at the highest resonant frequency of each damper mass.
For dampers involving torsional resonant frequencies tests shall be done at torsional
modes also in addition to the highest resonant frequencies at vertical modes. The
resonance frequency shall be identified as the frequency at which each damper mass
vibrates with the maximum amplitude on itself. The amplitude of vibration of the damper
clamp shall be maintained not less than +25/f.mm, where f is the frequency in Hz.

The test shall be conducted for minimum ten million cycles at each resonant frequency
mentioned above. During the test if resonance shift is observed the test frequency shall
be tuned to the new resonant frequency. The clamp slip test as mentioned hereinabove
shall be repeated after fatigue test without re-torque or adjusting the damper clamp and
the clamp shall withstand a minimum load equal to 80% of the slip strength for a minimum
duration of one minute.After the above tests, the damper shall be removed from OPGW
and subjected to dynamic characteristics test. There shall not be any major deterioration
in the characteristic of the damper. The damper then shall be cut open and inspected.
There shall not be any broken, loose, or damaged part. There shall not be significant
deterioration or wear of the damper. The OPGW under clamp shall also be free from any
damage.
For the purpose of acceptance, the following criteria shall be applied.
(i) There shall not be any frequency shift by more than + 2 Hz for frequencies lower than
15 Hz and + 3 Hz for frequencies higher than 15 Hz.
(ii) The force response curve shall generally lie within guaranteed % variation in
reactance after fatigue test in comparison with that before fatigue test by the
contractor/manufacturer.
(iii) The power dissipation of the damper shall not be less than guaranteed % variation in
power dissipation before fatigue test by the Contractor/manufacturer. However, it
shall not be less than minimum power dissipation which shall be governed by lower
limits of reactance and phase angle indicated in the envelope.

ANNEXURE ‘D’
5.10 ACCEPTANCE TESTS ON COMPLETE OPGW, OPTIC FIBRE, OPGW FITTINGS-ANNEXURE D
5.10.1 ACCEPTANCE TESTS ON COMPLETE OPGW

5.10.1.1. Dimensional check
The individual strands and optical core shall be dimensionally checked to ensure that they
conform to the requirements of this Specification.
5.10.1.2. Lay Length Measurement
The Lay length shall be checked to ensure that they conform to the requirements of this
Specification.
5.10.1.3. Crush Test
The test shall be as per clause 1.5 of Annexure –C of this specification.
5.10.1.4. Impact Test
The test shall be as per clause no. 1.6 of Annexure –C of this specification.
5.10.1.5. Temperature cycle test
The test shall be as per clause no. 1.12 of Annexure –C of this specification.
5.10.2 ACCEPTANCE TESTS ON OPTIC FIBER
5.10.2.1. Attenuation variation with wavelength
The measurement shall be made in accordance with EIA-455-78. The spectral width of the
source shall be less than 10 nm.
5.10.2.2. Attenuation at the water peak
The tests shall be made in accordance with IEEE P 1138 Draft 1990.
5.10.2.3. Attenuation with Bending
The test shall be made in accordance with clause 4.2.1.3 of IEEE P 1138 Draft 1990.
5.10.2.4. Temperature cycling
The test shall be made in accordance with EIA-455-3, using test condition A-55 degree C to
+85 degree C.
5.10.3 ACCEPTANCE TESTS ON OPGW FITTINGS

5.10.3.1 Suspension Assembly/Tension Assembly

a) Visual Examination and Dimensional verification
The individual components shall be visually and dimensionally checked to ensure that they
b) Clamp Slip Strength Test
The test shall be as per of Annexure – C of this specification.
c) Mechanical Strength Test on Each Component
Each component of Suspension assembly/Tension assembly shall be tested as per Annexure –
C of this Specification.
5.10.3.2 Grounding Wire for Clamps
b) Tensile Test
The grounding wire shall withstand the guaranteed minimum breaking load by the
Contractor/manufacturer.
5.10.3.3 Structure mounting clamp
b) Clamp Fit Test
The test shall be as per Annexure-C of this specification.
c) Clamp Strength Test
5.10.3.4 Vibration Damper
b) Verification of Resonance Frequencies

The damper shall be mounted on a shaker table and vibrate at damper clamp displacement of
+/-0.5 mm to determine the resonance frequencies. The resonance shall be visually identified
as the frequency at which damper mass vibrates with maximum displacement on itself. The
resonance frequency thus identified shall be compared with the guaranteed value. A tolerance
of +1 Hz at a frequency lower than 15 Hz and + 2 Hz at a frequency higher than 15 Hz only shall
be allowed.
c) Clamp Slip Test
d) Clamp Bolt Torque Test
The clamp shall be attached to a section of the OPGW. A torque of 150 percent of the
manufacturer’s specified torque shall be applied to the bolt. There shall be no failure of
component parts. The test set up is as described in, Annexure-C.
e) Strength of the Messenger Cable
The messenger cable shall be fixed in a suitable tensile testing machine and the tensile load
shall be gradually applied until yield point is reached. The load shall be not less than the value
guaranteed by the Bidder.
f) Mass Pull Off Test
Each mass shall be pulled off in turn by fixing the mass in one jaw and the clamp in the other of
a suitable tensile testing machine. The longitudinal pull shall be applied gradually until the mass
begins to pull out of the messenger cable. The pull off loads shall not be less than the value
guaranteed by the Bidder.
g) Galvanizing Test
The test shall be carried out as per IS:2486 (Part-I) except that both uniformity of zinc coating
and standard Preece test shall be carried out and the results obtained shall satisfy the
requirements of this Specification.

Package-KC3

Section- IV-A
Chapter 6- Insulators and Insulator’s Hardware
SECTION IV-A
CHAPTER - 6
INSULATORS AND INSULATOR’S HARDWARE
CONTENTS
PAGE
S.NO DESCRIPTION
NO.
6.1 INSULATOR 1
6.1.1 SCOPE 1
6.1.2 STANDARDS 2
6.1.3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION 6
6.1.5 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 9
6.1.6 TESTS 14
6.1.7 ADDITIONAL TESTS 19
6.1.8 TEST CHARGES AND TEST SCHEDULE 19
6.1.9 SAMPLE BATCH FOR TYPE TESTING 21
6.1.10 SCHEDULE OF TESTING 21
6.1.11 INSPECTION 21
6.1.12 IDENTIFICATION MARKING 22
6.1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN 23
6.1.14 TEST REPORTS 24
6.1.15 COORDINATION FOR TESTING 24
6.1.16 PACKING AND FORWARDING 24
6.1.17 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 25
6.1.18 TEST DETAILS 25
6.2 INSULATOR HARDWARE FITTINGS 31
6.2.1 SCOPE 31
6.2.2 STANDARDS 32

6.2.3 DETAILS OF HARDWARE FITTINGS 34
6.2.5 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 36

6.2.6 INTERCHANGEABILITY 38
6.2.7 BALL AND SOCKET FITTINGS 38
6.2.8 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES 39
6.2.9 SECURITY CLIPS AND SPLIT PINS 39
6.2.10 CORONA AND RI PERFORMANCE 40
6.2.11 ARCING HORN 40
6.2.12 YOKE PLATES/LINK PLATES 40
6.2.13 CORONA CONTROL RINGS/GRADING RING 41
6.2.14 SAG ADJUSTMENT DEVICE 41
6.2.15 SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY 42
6.2.16 FREE CENTRE TYPE SUSPENSION CLAMP 43

6.2.17 PREFORMED ARMOR RODS SET 43
6.2.18 ARMOR GRIP SUSPENSION CLAMP 44
6.2.19 DEAD END ASSEMBLY 45
6.2.20 COMPRESSION MARKING 45
6.2.21 FASTENERS 46
6.2.22 FORGED COMPONENTS 47
6.2.23 MATERIALS 48
6.2.24 OTHER MISCELLANEOUS PARTS 48
6.2.25 GALVANIZING 48
6.2.26 WORKMANSHIP 48
6.2.27 EQUIPMENT MARKING 50
6.2.28 HOT LINE MAINTENANCE 50
6.2.29 TESTS 50

6.2.30 TYPE TESTS 51

6.2.31 ACCEPTANCE TESTS 53
6.2.32 ROUTINE TESTS 54
6.2.33 TEST CHARGES AND TEST SCHEDULE 55
6.2.34 SAMPLE BATCH FOR TYPE TESTING 56
6.2.35 INSPECTION 57
6.2.36 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN 57
6.2.37 DOCUMENTATION 58
6.2.38 TEST REPORTS 59
6.2.39 PACKING AND FORWARDING 60
6.2.40 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS 60
6.2.41 DETAILS OF TESTS 61

SECTION IV-A
CHAPTER - 6
INSULATORS AND INSULATOR’S HARDWARE
6.1 INSULATOR
6.1.1 SCOPE
a) This section covers design; manufacture, stage testing, inspection, testing before
dispatch, packing, supply and delivery of insulators specified here-in-under of 160
KN EM and 210kN (for special towers) strength Porcelain Disc insulators for Twin
ACSR “MOOSE” conductors.
b) For 220 kV Double Circuit Transmission line anti-fog type Disc Insulators of Electro-
mechanical strength of 160 KN and 210kN (for special towers) shall be used for
suspension towers and angle/tension towers in following insulator strings formation
along with all necessary hardware fittings:
i. 2 x 160 kN Double tension string for Twin “MOOSE” conductor (2x18): for
altitude up to 3000 meter for tension type of tower
ii. 3 x 160 kN Triple tension string for Twin “MOOSE” conductor (2x18): for
altitude up to 3000 meter for tension type of tower
iii. 1x 160 kN Single suspension "Pilot" insulator strings for Twin “MOOSE”
conductor (1x17): for large angle DE/Dead End Type of Towers type towers
iv. For special towers, 2x 210kN insulator Double tension string for Twin
“MOOSE” conductor (2x18): for altitude up to 3000 meter for tension type
of tower
6.1.2 STANDARDS
The insulator strings and its components shall conform to the following Nepali standards
(if any) / Indian standards or equivalent International Standards which shall mean to

latest revision, with amendments/changes adopted and published, unless specifically

stated otherwise in the specification.
In the event of supply of insulators conforming to Standards other than specified, the
Bidder shall confirm in his bid that these standards are equivalent to those specified. In
case of award, salient features of comparison between the standards proposed by the
Bidder and those specified in this document will be provided by the Contractor to
establish equivalence.
TABLE-6.0
S.No Indian Standards Title International

standard
1 IS: 209-1992 Specification for Zinc Ingot BS: 3436-1986
2 IS: 385 Specification for phosphor Bronze BS: 2870
rods and Bars, sheet strip and wire
3 IS: 406-1964 Method for chemical Analysis of
slab zinc (Spelter)
4 IS: 731-1971 Specification for Porcelain BS: 137-1982(I & II)
insulators for Over-head power IEC: 60383-
lines with a nominal voltage (Part-I)-1993
greater than 1000 V (Part-II)-1992
5 IS: 1367-1980 Technical supply conditions for
threaded steel fasteners.
6 IS: 1570-1961 Specification for wrought steels
for general engineering purposes
(Part-I) Steel specified by tensile and/or
yield properties
7 IS: 1573-1986 Specification for Electroplated

coatings of zinc on iron and steel.
8 IS: 2004-1991 Specification for Carbon steel

forgings for general engineering

purposes
9 IS: 2016- Specification for Plain Washers
10 IS: 2070-1962 Method of Impulse Voltage
Testing
11 IS 2071-1974 Code for Method of high voltage IEC 60-1-1989
testing Techniques
Part – I General definitions
and test requirements
Part – II Test Procedure
Part - III Measuring devices
12 IS: 2107-1977 Specification for white heart
malleable iron castings.
13 IS: 2108-1977 Specification for black heart
malleable iron castings.
14 IS: 2121-1981 Specification for Conductors and
earth wire accessories for
overhead power lines
Part-I Armor Rods, binding wires and
tapes for conductors.
Part-Il Mid span joints and repair
sleeves for conductor.
15 IS: 2486 Specification for Metal Fittings of
insulators for overhead power
lines with nominal voltage greater
than 1000V
Part-I – 1993 General requirements and tests BS: 3288-1979

Part-II - 1989 Dimensional requirements IEC: 120-1984, BS

3288-Part-2-1990
Part-III - 1974 Locking Devices IEC: 372-1984
Part-IV 1981 Tests for Locking Device
16 IS: 2629-1985 Recommended practice for hot ISO-1461(E)
dip galvanizing of iron and steel.
17 IS: 2633-1986 Method for testing of uniformity
of coating of zinc coated articles.
18 IS: 3138- 1966 Hexagonal bolts and nuts ISO/R947and
ISO/R272
19 IS: 3188-1980 Code for Characteristics of String IEC: 60305-1978
Insulator Units
20 IS: 4218-1976 ISO metric screw threads. ISO/R 68-1969,
R-26-1963,
R262-1969,
R965-1969.
21 IS: 4759-1996 Specification for Hot dip zinc
coating on structural steel and
other allied products.
22 IS: 5358-1969 Specification for Hot dips
Galvanized coatings on fasteners.
23 IS 6603 Stainless steel bars and flats
24 IS 6745-1972 Methods for Determination of BS: 433-1969
mass of zinc coated iron and steel ISO 1460-1973
articles
25 IS: 8263-1976 Methods of Radio Interference IEC: 437-1973
test on High Voltage insulators NEMA
PUBLICATION
NO.107/1964

CISPR
26 IS: 8269-1976 Methods for switching impulse IEC: 506-1975
test on High Voltage insulators.
27 Thermal mechanical performance IEC: 575-1977
test and mechanical performance
test on string insulator units.
28 Salt Fog Pollution Voltage IEC: 507-1991

withstand test.
29 Residual Strength of String IEC: 797-1984
Insulator units of Glass or
Ceramic Material for overhead
lines after mechanical Damage of
the Dielectric
30 Guide for the selection of IEC: 815-1986
insulators in respect of
polluted conditions.
31 IS 10136 - 1982 Code of practice for selection of
Disc Insulator fittings for Highest
system voltage of 72.5 kV and
above.
32 IS 13305 - 1992 Permissible Limits of Visual
Defects for Insulator Porcelains
for Electrical Circuits

6.1.3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

6.1.3.1 Details of Disc Insulators
The Insulator of the strings shall consist of standard discs for a three phase, 50 Hz,
effectively earthed 220 KV Transmission systems in a lightly polluted atmosphere.
 The discs shall be ball and socket (B&S) type.
 The discs shall be Anti-Fog type with Zinc sleeve.
 Bidder shall quote for electro porcelain disc insulators in accordance with the
clause 6.0 (Scope).
 The size of disc insulator, minimum creepage distance, the number to be used in
different types of strings, their electromechanical strength and mechanical strength
of insulator strings along with hardware fittings shall be as in Table below:
Table-6.1
Particulars of Insulators and Insulator Strings
Particulars Twin Single “I” Suspension Twin Moose Triple
Moose Pilot Insulator String tension string
Double
Tension
String
1. No. of standard 2x18 1x17 (twin moose) 3X18
Discs
2. Size of disc-mm 280x170 280x170 (twin moose) 280x170 and
and 330x170
330x170 (for special Towers)
(for special
Towers)
3. E&M Strength 2x160 kN 1x160 kN (twin moose) 3x160 kN
of each string and
2x210kN
(for special
towers)
4. Ball and socket 20 16/20 20
Designation

(mm)
5. Minimum 430 430 430
Creepage and and
distance of each 545mm (for 545mm (for special
disc (mm) special Towers)
Towers)
6.1.3.2 Dimensions of Insulator Discs

It shall be ensured that the dimensions of the disc insulators are within the limits
specified below:
Table-6.2
S.No. Description Standard Maximum Minimum
Insulator Disc with EM Strength 160 kN Disc

a) Diameter of disc (mm) 280 288 272
b) Ball to Ball spacing 170 175 165
between discs (mm)
Insulator Disc with EM Strength 210 kN Disc
a) Diameter of disc (mm) 330 343 317
b) Ball to Ball spacing 170 175 165
between discs (mm)
6.1.4 Bid Drawings

a) The bidder shall furnish full description and illustration of the material offered.
b) The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid the outline drawing of each insulator
unit including a cross-sectional view of the insulator shell. The drawing shall include
but not be limited to the following information:
(i) Shell diameter and ball to ball spacing with manufacturing tolerances.
(ii) Minimum creepage distance with positive tolerance.
(iii) Eccentricity of the disc
 Axial run out

 Radial run out
(iv) Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics.
(v) Size and weight of ball and socket parts.
(vi) Weight of unit insulator disc.
(vii) Materials for the disc, cap and pin and standard to which conforming.
(viii) Identification mark.
(ix) Manufacturer's catalogue number.
(x) Brief installation instructions.
(xi) Relevant technical details of significance.
(xii) Galvanization Process, weight of zinc and no. and duration of dips.
c) Drawings for complete Insulator strings may be furnished with following
information.
(i) Dimensional drawings for different insulator strings.
(ii) Electro-Mechanical Strength
(iii) No. of insulator disc units in each string.
(iv) Weight of insulator discs, Hardware sets and total weight of insulator strings.
(v) Tolerance if any.
d) After placement of the award, the contractor shall submit fully dimensioned
insulator drawings containing all the details as given in Clause No.6.3.1 and 6.3.2
above, in three (3) copies to Employer for approval. After getting approval from
Employer and successful completion of all the type tests, the contractor shall
submit six (6) more copies of the same drawing to the Employer for further
distribution and field use at Employer's end.
e) After placement of award the Contractor shall also submit fully dimensioned
insulator crate drawing of different types of insulators.
6.1.5 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

6.1.5.1 Porcelain

The porcelain used in the manufacture of the shells shall be Brown, nonporous of high
dielectric, mechanical and thermal strength, free from internal stresses, blisters,
laminations, voids, foreign matter, imperfections or other defects which might render it
in any way unsuitable for insulator shells. Porcelain shall remain unaffected by climatic
conditions, ozone, acid, alkalies, zinc or dust. The manufacturing shall be by the wet
process and impervious character obtained by thorough vitrification.
Porcelain Glaze
Surfaces to come in contact with cement shall be made rough by sanding. All other
exposed surfaces shall be glazed with ceramic materials having the same
temperature coefficient of expansion as that of the insulator shell. The thickness of
the glaze shall be uniform throughout and the color of the glaze shall be brown. The
glaze shall have a good visible lusture, smooth on surface and be subject to
satisfactory performance under extreme tropical climatic weather conditions and
prevent ageing of the porcelain. The glaze shall remain under compression on the
porcelain body throughout the working temperature range.
6.1.5.2 Metal Parts
a) Cap and Ball Pins
Ball pins shall be made with drop forged steel and caps with malleable cast iron.
They shall be in one single piece and duly hot dip galvanized. They shall not contain
parts or pieces joined together, welded, shrink fitted or by any other process from
more than one piece of material. The pins shall be of high tensile steel, drop forged
and heat treated. The caps shall be cast with good quality black heart malleable,
cast iron/spherical graphite iron/drop forged steel and annealed. Galvanizing shall
be by the hot dip process with a heavy coating of zinc of very high purity. The
Bidder shall specify the grade, composition and mechanical properties of steel used
for caps and pins.
b) Security Clips
The R type security clips shall be made of good quality phosphor bronze confirming
to IS 7814:1975 or stainless steel confirming to IS 6603:1972.

6.1.5.3 Filler Material

Cement to be used as a filler material shall be quick setting, fast curing Portland cement.
It shall not cause fracture by expansion or loosening by contraction. Cement shall not
react chemically with metal parts in contact with it and its thickness shall be as small
and as uniform as possible. Proper care shall be taken to correctly centre and locate
individual parts during cementing.
6.1.5.4 Material Design and Workmanship

a) General
 All raw materials to be used in the manufacture of these insulators shall be subject
to strict raw material quality control and to stage testing/ quality control during
manufacturing stage to ensure the quality of the final end product. Manufacturing
shall conform to the best engineering practices adopted in the field of extra high
voltage transmission. Bidders shall therefore offer insulators as are guaranteed by
them for satisfactory performance on 220 KV Transmission Lines.
 The design, manufacturing process and material control at various stages shall be
such as to give maximum working load, highest mobility, best resistance to
corrosion, good finish, elimination of sharp edges and corners to limit corona and
radio interference voltages.
b) Insulator Shell
The design of the insulator shells shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. Shells shall
be dried under controlled conditions of humidity and temperature.
c) Metal Parts
 The pin and cap shall be designed to transmit the mechanical stresses to the shell
by compression and develop uniform mechanical strength in the insulator. The cap
shall be circular with the inner and outer surfaces concentric and of such design

that it will not yield or distort under loaded conditions. The head portion of the pin
ball shall be suitably designed so that when the insulator is under tension, the
stresses are uniformly distributed over the pinhole portion of the shell. The pin ball
shall move freely in the ball socket either during assembly of a string or during
erection of a string or when a string is placed in position.
 Metal caps shall be free from cracks, seams, shrinks, air holes, blow holes and
rough edges. All metal surfaces shall be perfectly smooth with no projecting parts
or irregularities which may cause corona. All load bearing surfaces shall be smooth
and uniform so as to distribute the loading stresses uniformly. Pins shall not show
any microscopically visible cracks, inclusions and voids.
d) Galvanizing
e) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with the latest edition of
IS: 2629. The zinc to be used for galvanizing shall conform to minimum grade Zn
99.5 as per IS: 209. The zinc coating shall be uniform, smoothly adherent,
reasonably bright, continuous and free from impurities such as flux, ash, rust stains,
bulky white deposits and blisters. Before ball pins are galvanized, all die flashing on
the shank and on the bearing surface of the ball shall be carefully removed without
reducing the designed dimensional requirements. The galvanized metal parts shall
be guaranteed to withstand at least six successive dips each lasting one minute
duration under the standard preece test.
f) Cementing
The insulator design shall be such that the insulating medium shall not directly
engage with the hard metal. The surfaces of porcelain and the metal parts shall be
coated with resilient paint to offset the effect of difference in thermal expansions
of these materials.
6.1.5.5 Security Clips (Locking Devices)

6.1.5.5.1 Socket fitting shall be provided with R-shaped security clip in accordance with IS: 2486
(Parts III & IV) to provide positive locking against unintentional disengagement of socket

from ball of the insulator. The security clip shall be humped to maintain the clip in the
locked position and shall have prongs spread to prevent complete withdrawal from the
socket .The clip end shall not project outside the recess of socket when the clip is in
locked position. The locking device should be resilient, corrosion resistant and of suitable
mechanical strength. There shall be no risk of the locking device being displaced
accidentally or being rotated when in position. Under no circumstances shall the locking
device allow separation of insulator units of strings. The locking device shall be effective
at the lowest temperature likely to be encountered in service.
6.1.5.5.2 The hole for the security clip and length are designed to make the eye of the security clip
protrude at least 5 mm. The hole for the security clip shall be on the side of the socket
opposite to the socket opening. The hole for the clip shall be countersunk. The clip eye
shall be of such design that the same may be engaged by a hotline clip puller to provide
for disengagement under energized conditions.
6.1.5.5.3 The free ends of the security clip are bent outwards and one of the legs has a hump.
6.1.5.5.4 The force required to pull the clip to its unlocked position shall not be less than 50 N or
more than 500 N.
6.1.5.5.5 The security clip shall be made of stainless steel of type AISI 302 or 304 or phosphor
bronze as per IS: 7814.
6.1.5.5.6 The dimension of Security clip shall confirm to the Fig. 2 of IS 2486-Part-3 : 1974.
6.1.5.6 Ball and Socket Designation

The dimensions of the balls and sockets for 90 kN discs and 160 kN discs shall be 16 mm
and 20 mm designation, respectively in accordance with the standard dimensions stated
in IS: 2486 (Part II).
a) Interchangeability:
The insulators inclusive of the ball and socket fitting shall be of standard design suitable
for use with hardware fittings of any make conforming to relevant Indian standards.

6.1.5.7 Corona and Radio Interference (RI) Performance

All surfaces shall be clean, even, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or projections. No part
shall be subjected to excessive localized pressure. The metal parts and Porcelain shall not
produce any noise generating corona under all operating conditions.
6.1.5.8 Suitability for Live Line Maintenance

The insulators shall be compatible for use with hot line or live line maintenance
techniques so that usual hot line operations can be carried out with ease, speed and
safety.
a) Methods And Periodicity Of Maintenance

Bidders shall indicate the methods generally adopted in routine hot and cold line
maintenance of EHV lines for similar disc insulators supplied by them. Bidders shall also
indicate the recommended periodicity of such maintenance.
6.1.5.9 Freedom from Defects
Insulators shall have none of the following defects:
a. Ball pin shake
b. Cementing defects near the pin like small blow holes, small hair cracks, lumps, etc.,
c. Sand fall defects on the surface of the insulator.
6.1.5.10 Insulator Strings
a) Type and Rating
b) The insulator strings shall be formed with standard disc insulators described in this
specification for use on three phase, 220 KV, 50 Hz effectively earthed systems in a
Lightly polluted atmosphere. Suspension insulator strings for use with
suspension/tangent towers are to be fitted with disc insulator units of 160 kN EM
strength rating for Twin Moose Suspension Pilot String while Twin Moose Double tension
insulator strings for use with anchor/ tension towers are to be fitted with disc insulator
units of 160 KN EM strength rating.
c) String Size

d) The size of the disc insulator, the number to be used in different types of strings, their
electromechanical strength with minimum nominal creepage distance shall be in
accordance with Cl.No.6.1.3.1
e) Insulator units after assembly shall be concentric and coaxial within limits as permitted
by Indian Standards.
f) The string design shall be such that when units are coupled together, there should not be
contact between the shell of one unit and metal of the next adjacent unit. The design of
the ribs shall be such that the security clips of the insulator can the engaged and
disengaged easily with the hot stick without damaging the shell ribs.
6.1.6 TESTS
The following tests shall be carried out on the insulator string and disc insulators.
6.1.6.1 Type Tests

The insulator string and disc insulators offered shall be type tested duly last 5 years (time
period from before final bid submission date). The Bidder needs to furnish Type Test
Reports of identical insulator string and disc insulators along with the Bid for
consideration. In case of non-submission of Type-test reports, Type Test as per the
following and as per IS-398 shall be carried out at the reputed standard laboratory
(acceptable to Employer).
These shall mean those tests which are to be carried out to prove the design, process of
manufacture and general conformity of the material and product with the intent of this
specification. These tests shall be conducted on a representative number of samples
prior to commencement of commercial production. The Contractor shall indicate his
schedule for carrying out these tests.
6.1.6.2 Acceptance Tests

These shall mean those tests which are to be carried out on samples taken from each lot
offered for pre-dispatch inspection for the purpose of acceptance of the lot as per the
approved Sampling plan.
6.1.6.3 Routine Tests

These tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on each insulator to check
the requirements which are likely to vary during production.
6.1.6.4 Stage Tests during Manufacture

Stage tests during manufacture shall mean those tests which are to be carried out
during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the Contractor to ensure
the quality control such that the end product is of the desired quality conforming to the
intent of this specification.
6.1.6.5 Test Values

For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be the values guaranteed
by the bidder in the Guaranteed Technical Particulars or the acceptance values specified
in this specification or the relevant standard whichever is more stringent for that
particular test.
6.1.6.6 Test Procedures and Sampling Norms
The norms and procedures of sampling for the above tests shall be as per the relevant
Indian Standard or other internationally accepted standards. This will be discussed and
mutually agreed to between the Contractor and the Employer before placement of
order. The standards and norms according to which these tests are to be carried out are
listed against each test. Where a particular test is a specific requirement of this
specification, the norms and procedures of the same shall be as per Clause 6.1.18 or as
mutually agreed to between the Contractor and the Employer in the Quality Assurance
Program (QAP).
6.1.6.7 The following type tests shall be conducted on the disc Insulator units.

TABLE-6.3
1 Verification of dimensions
2 Dry lightning Impulse withstand voltage test IS: 13305-1992
3 Wet power frequency withstand voltage test
4 Electromechanical failing load test
5 Thermal Mechanical Performance test AS PER IEC: 60383-1-1993
6 Verification of the displacements
7 Verification of the locking system
8 Temperature cycle test
9 Puncture withstand test AS PER IEC: 60383-1-1993
10 Porosity test
11 Galvanizing test
12 Visual examination test IS: 731
13 Wet power frequency voltage flashover test BS: 137
14 Visible discharge test IS: 731-1971
15 RIV test (dry) IEC: 437-1973
16 Metallurgical test IS: 2108 & IS: 2004
17 Residual strength test As per clause no.
6.1.18.15
18 Steep wave front test As per clause no.
6.1.18.13
19 Mechanical Performance test As per IEC: 575-1977
6.1.6.7.1 The Thermal mechanical performance test and steep wave front test shall be repeated
once for every supply of 25,000 nos. insulators. The samples shall be drawn randomly
from any offered acceptance lot.
6.1.6.8 Acceptance Tests (On Disc Insulator Units)
TABLE-6.4

1 Verification of dimensions IS: 13305

2 Verification of the displacements
3 Verification of the locking system
4 Temperature cycle test As per IEC 60383-1-1993
5 Electromechanical failing load test
6 Porosity test
7 Galvanizing test
8 Visual examination test IS: 731
9 Residual strength test As per cl.no.6.1.18.15
10 Metallurgical test IS: 2108 & IS: 2004
11 Mechanical Performance test As per IEC: 60575- 1977
6.1.6.9 Routine Tests (Disc Insulator Units)

TABLE-6.5
1 Visual Inspection test As per IEC 60383-1
2 Mechanical test 1993.
3 Electrical test
6.1.6.10 The following Type Tests shall be conducted on complete insulator strings with hardware
fittings.
TABLE-6.6
1 Wet power frequency voltage test As per IEC: 383-2: 1992
2 Lightning impulse voltage test
3 Wet switching impulse voltage test
4 Visual Examination IS: 731
5 Voltage distribution test As per Clause no. 6.1.18.8
6 RIV test As per Clause no. 6.1.18.10
7 Mechanical strength test As per Clause no. 6.1.18.1

8 Dynamic/Vibration test As per Clause no. 6.1.18.9

9 Corona Extinction voltage test As per Clause no. 6.1.18.11
10 Pollution withstand voltage test As per Clause no. 6.1.18.12
6.1.6.11 All the type tests given under clause 6.1.6.7 & 6.1.6.10 shall be conducted on Twin
Moose Double suspension, Twin Moose Double Tension insulator string along with
hardware fittings.
All the above tests except at Sl No. 8 under clause 6.1.6.10 shall also be conducted on
Single and Double suspension pilot insulator strings along with hardware fittings.
6.1.6.12 Tests during Manufacture (Stage Tests)
On all components as applicable
TABLE-6.7
a. Chemical analysis of Zinc used for galvanizing As per Clause no.
6.1.18.2
b. Chemical analysis, mechanical and metallographic test As per Clause no.
and magnetic particle inspection for malleable castings 6.1.18.4
c. Chemical analysis, hardness test and magnetic particle As per Clause no.
inspection for forgings 6.1.18.3
d. Hydraulic internal Pressure on shell As per Clause no.
6.1.18.6
e. Crack detection test for metal parts As per Clause no.
6.1.18.7
6.1.7 ADDITIONAL TESTS
6.1.7.1. The Employer reserves the right for carrying out any other tests of a reasonable nature at
the works of the Contractor/ laboratory / research institute in addition to the above
mentioned type, acceptance and routine tests at the cost of the Employer to satisfy that
the material complies with the intent of this specification.
6.1.7.2. For 220 KV insulator strings, the Contractor is required to produce type test reports to
the satisfaction of the Employer.

6.1.7.3. Repeat E&M strength test.

E&M test on 20 nos. of samples for every lot of 10,000 nos. received at site shall be
conducted preferably at independent laboratory. Test charges have to be borne by the
Contractor and shall be included in quoted Ex-works price. In case of failure, it will be
repeated on double nos. of samples and if it again fails, the whole lot should be rejected
and shall be replaced by the Contractor. The samples have to be taken at random after
segregating insulators damaged in transportation or otherwise.
6.1.7.4. The Employer also reserves the right to conduct all the tests mentioned in this
specification at his own expense on the samples drawn from the site at Contractor's
premises or at any other test Centre. In case of evidence of non-compliance, it shall be
binding on the part of the Contractor to prove the compliance of the items to the
Technical Specifications by repeat test or correction of deficiencies or replacement of
defective items, all without any extra cost to the Employer.
6.1.8 TEST CHARGES AND TEST SCHEDULE

a) Type Tests
All the materials offered shall be fully type tested as per this specification and the
Bidder shall furnish type test reports along with the offer. These tests must not
have been conducted earlier than five years. The Employer reserves the right to
demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the presence of Employer's
representative. For this purpose, the Bidder may quote unit rates for carrying out
each type test. These prices shall be taken into consideration for bid evaluation.
For any change in the design/type offered against this specification, Employer
reserves the right to demand repetition of tests without any extra cost. Bidder
shall indicate unit type test charges for all the tests covered under Clause 6.1.6.7 &
6.1.6.10 separately, in the relevant schedule. Charges for each type test shall be
separately indicated. Test charges indicated by the bidder shall be inclusive of
repeat type tests envisaged in cl. No. 6.1.6.7.1

 In case of any failure during testing on complete insulator string, the test shall
be repeated at the Contractor's cost.
 In case of failure of any type test, the Contractor is either required to modify
the design of the material and successfully carryout all the type tests as has
been detailed out in Clause 6.1.6.7 & 6.1.6.10 of this specification or to
repeat that Particular type test at least three times successfully at his own
expenses. The decision of the Employer in this regard shall be final and
binding.
 Bidder shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the
type tests. They shall ensure that the tests can be completed in these
laboratories within the time schedule guaranteed by him in the appropriate
schedule.
 The entire cost of testing for acceptance and routine tests and tests during
manufacture specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit
price of disc insulators except for the expenses of the Inspector/Employer's
representative. All acceptance tests as stipulated herein shall be carried out by
the Contractor in the presence of Employer's representative. The record of
routine tests, as and when desired by the Employer shall be furnished by the
contractor.
 In case of failure in any type test, if repeat tests are required to be conducted,
then all the expenses for deputation of inspector/Employer’s representative
shall be deducted from the contract price. Also if on receipt of Contractor’s
notice of testing, the Employer’s representative does not find ‘plant’ to be
ready for testing the expenses incurred by the Employer for re-deputation shall
be deducted from the contract price.
 Immediately after finalization of the program of type/acceptance testing,
the Contractor shall give sufficient advance intimation to the Employer, to
enable him to depute his representative for witnessing the tests.

6.1.9 SAMPLE BATCH FOR TYPE TESTING

6.1.9.1. The Contractor shall offer material for sample selection for type testing only after getting
Quality Assurance Program (QAP) approved by the Employer. The Contractor shall offer
at least three times the quantity of materials required for conducting all the type tests
for sample selection. The sample for type testing will be manufactured strictly in
accordance with the Quality Assurance Program (QAP) approved by the Employer.
6.1.9.2. Before sample selection for type testing, the Contractor shall be required to conduct all
the acceptance tests successfully in presence of Employer's representative.
6.1.10 SCHEDULE OF TESTING

The Bidder has to indicate the schedule of following activities in their bids:
a) Submission of drawing for approval
b) Submission of Quality Assurance Program for approval
c) Offering of material for sample selection for type testing.
d) Type testing.
6.1.11 INSPECTION
6.1.11.1. The Employer and his representatives shall at all times be entitled to have access to the
works and to all places of manufacturer, where the insulators are manufactured and the
Contractor shall afford all facilities for unrestricted inspection of the works, inspection
of materials, inspection of manufacturing process of insulators and for conducting
necessary tests as specified herein.
6.1.11.2. The Contractor shall keep the Employer informed in advance of the time of starting and
of the progress of manufacture of insulators in its various stages so that arrangements
6.1.11.3. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has
been satisfactorily inspected and tested.

6.1.11.4. The acceptance of any quantity of insulators shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if such insulators are later found to be defective.
6.1.11.5. The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Contractor only under packed
condition as detailed earlier in the specification. The Employer shall select sample at
random from the packed lot for carrying out acceptance tests. Insulators shall normally
be offered for inspection in lots not exceeding 5,000 nos. The lot should be
homogeneous, and should contain insulators manufactured in the span of not more
than 3-4 consecutive weeks.
6.1.12 IDENTIFICATION MARKING

6.1.12.1. Each disc insulator unit shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the trade mark of the
manufacturer, the year of manufacture, the guaranteed combined mechanical and
electrical strength in Kilo-Newton abbreviated by 'KN' to facilitate easy identification
and proper use.
6.1.12.2. The marking shall be on porcelain. The marking on the insulator shall be printed and not
impressed and the same shall be applied before firing.
6.1.12.3. One 10mm thick ring or 20mm thick spot of suitable quality of paint shall be marked on
the cap of each insulator of particular strength for easy identification of the type of
insulator. The paint shall not have any deteriorating effect on the insulator
performance. Following codes shall be used as identification mark.
6.1.12.4. For 210 KN disc: Black
For 160 KN disc: Red
6.1.13 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN (QAP)

6.1.13.1. The Bidder shall invariably furnish the following information along with his offer,
Information shall be separately given for individual type of equipment offered.

a) Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of sub-contractors for

the raw material, list of standards according to which the raw material are
tested, list of tests normally carried out on raw material in presence of
Bidder's representative and copies of test certificates.
b) Information and copies of test certificates as in (a) above in respect of bought out
items.
c) List of manufacturing facilities available.
d) Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing exists.
e) List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections.
f) Special features provided in the hardware to make it maintenance free.
g) List of testing equipment available with the Bidder or its proposed manufacturer
for final testing of insulators specified and test plant limitation, if any, vis-a-vis the
type, special, acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards.
These limitations shall be very clearly brought out in schedule of deviations from
specified test requirements.
6.1.13.2. The Contractor shall within 30 days of placement of order, submit the following
information to the Employer.
a) List of raw material as well as bought out accessories and the name of the raw
material as well as bought out accessories with the names of sub-Contractors
selected from those furnished along with the offer.
b) Type test certificates of the raw material and bought out accessories.
c) Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) with customer holds points for Employer's
inspection. The QAP and Employer's hold points shall be discussed between the
Employer and the Contractor before the QAP is finalized.
6.1.13.3. The Contractor shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out items and raw
material at the time of routine testing of insulators.

6.1.14 TEST REPORTS

6.1.14.1. Six copies of type test reports shall be furnished to the Employer within 15 days of
conducting the tests. One copy will be returned duly certified by the Employer to the
Contractor within three weeks there afterwards and on receipt of the same Contractor
shall commence with the commercial production of the concerned material.
6.1.14.2. Six copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished to the Employer. One copy will
be returned, duly certified by the Employer and only thereafter shall the materials be
dispatched.
6.1.14.3. All records of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Contractor at his works for
periodic inspection by the Employer.
6.1.14.4. All test reports of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the
Contractor. These shall be produced for verification as and when requested for by the
Employer.
6.1.15 COORDINATION FOR TESTING

The contractor and its designated manufacturer shall take full responsibility for supply
and testing of insulator discs with the required hardware fittings and shall have to also
guarantee the test values and overall satisfactory performance of disc insulators with
the hardware fittings.
6.1.16 PACKING AND FORWARDING

6.1.16.1. All insulators shall be packed in strong seasoned wooden crates. The gross weight of the
crates along with insulators shall not normally exceed 50 Kg to avoid handling problem.
6.1.16.2. The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during transit,
storage at site and subsequent handling in the field.
6.1.16.3. Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacer shall be provided to
prevent damage to or deformation during transit and handling.

6.1.16.4. All packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly so as to ensure their safe
arrival at their destination and to avoid the possibility of goods being lost or wrongly
dispatched on account of faulty packing or faulty or illegible markings. Each wooden
case/crate shall have all the markings stenciled on it in indelible ink. All galvanized
components shall be given a protective coating against formation of white rust.
6.1.17 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS

The schedule of requirements and the desired delivery is set out in the bidding
document. The quantities given in the schedule are provisional and the exact qty shall
be finalized after detailed survey.
6.1.18 TEST DETAILS

6.1.18.1. Mechanical Strength Test
The complete insulator string along with its hardware fittings without arcing horn and
suspension assembly / dead end assembly shall be subjected to a load equal to 50% of
the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a
steady rate to 67% of the minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for five
minutes and then removed. After removal of the load, the string components shall not
show any visual deformation and it shall be possible to disassemble them by hand.
Hand tools may be used to remote cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The string
shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be further
increased at a steady rate to the specified minimum UTS and held for one minute. No
fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall then be increased until
6.1.18.2. Chemical Analysis of Zinc Used For Galvanizing
Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per IS: 209. The purity
of zinc shall not be less than 99.5 %.
6.1.18.3. Tests for Forgings

The chemical analysis, hardness test, and magnetic particle inspection for forgings, will
be as per the internationally recognized procedures for these tests. The sampling will
be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding test will be
as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Employer in the Quality
Assurance Programme.
6.1.18.4. Tests on Castings
The chemical analysis, mechanical and metallographic tests and magnetic particle
inspection for castings will be as per the internationally recognized procedures for these
tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details
regarding test will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and
Employer in the Quality Assurance Programme.
6.1.18.5. Eccentricity Test

The insulator shall be vertically mounted on a fixture using dummy pin and socket. A
vertical scale with horizontal slider shall be used for the axial run out. The pointer shall
be positioned in contact with the bottom of the outermost petticoat of the disc. The disc
insulators shall be rotated with reference to the fixture and the slider shall be allowed to
move up and down on the scale but always maintaining contact with the bottom of the
outermost petticoat. After one full rotation of the disc the maximum and minimum
position the slider has reached on the scale can be found out. Difference between the
above two readings shall satisfy the guaranteed value for axial run out. Similarly using a
horizontal scale with vertical slider the radial run out shall be measured. The slider shall
be positioned on the scale to establish contact with the circumference of the disc
insulator and disc insulator rotated on its fixture always maintaining the contact. After
one full rotation of the disc the maximum and minimum position of the slider reached
on the scale are found out. The difference between the above readings shall satisfy the
guaranteed value for radial run out.
6.1.18.6. Hydraulic Internal Pressure Test on Shells

The test shall be carried out on 100% shells before assembly. The details regarding test
will be as discussed and mutually agreed to by the Contractor and Employer in the
Quality Assurance Programme.
6.1.18.7. Crack Detection Test
Crack detection test shall be carried out on each ball pin before assembly of disc unit.
The manufacturer shall maintain complete record of having conducted such tests on
each and every piece of ball pin. The bidder shall furnish full details of the equipment
available with him for crack test and also indicate the test procedure in detail.
6.1.18.8. Voltage Distribution Test

The voltage across each insulator unit shall be measured by sphere gap method. The
result obtained shall be converted into percentage. The voltage across any disc shall not
exceed 13% for suspension insulator strings and 14% for tension insulator strings.
6.1.18.9. Dynamic/Vibration Test

The suspension string shall be tested in suspension mode and tension string in tension
mode itself in laboratory span of minimum 30 meters. In the case of suspension string a
load equal to 600 kg shall be applied along the axis of the suspension string by
means of turn buckle. The insulator string along with hardware fittings and conductor
tensioned at 43 KN shall be secured with clamps. The system shall be suitable to
maintain constant tension on conductor throughout the duration of the test. Vibration
dampers shall not be used on the test span. The conductor shall be vertically vibrated at
one of the resonance frequencies of the insulators string (more than 10 Hz) by means of
vibration inducing equipment. The peak to peak displacement in mm of vibration at the
antinode point nearest to the string shall be measured and the same shall not be less
than 1000/f1.8 where f is the frequency of vibration in cycles/sec. The insulator string
shall be vibrated for not less than 10 million cycles without any failure. After the test
the disc insulators shall be examined for looseness of pins and cap or any crack in the
cement. The hardware shall be examined for looseness for fatigue failure and

mechanical strength test. There shall be no deterioration of properties of hardware

components and disc insulators after the vibration test. The disc insulators shall be
subjected to the following tests as per relevant standards:
TABLE-6.8
Tests: Percentage of discs to be tested.
a Temperature cycle test followed by mechanical performance 60
test
b Puncture test 40
6.1.18.10. RIV Test (Dry)

Under the conditions as specified under clause 6.1.18.11 below the insulator string
along with complete hardware fittings shall have a radio interference voltage level
below 1000 microvolts at one (1) MHz when subjected to 50 Hz AC voltage of 154
KV(rms) line to ground under dry conditions. The test procedure shall be in
accordance with IS: 8263-1976/IEC:437, or its latest revision thereof.
6.1.18.11. Corona Extinction Voltage Test
The complete insulator string when subjected to power frequency voltage shall
have a corona extinction voltage of not less than 154 KV rms line to ground under dry
conditions. There shall be no evidence of corona on any part of the samples when all
sources of corona are photographed in a darkened room. The atmospheric conditions
during testing shall be recorded and the test results shall be accordingly corrected to
standard atmospheric conditions with suitable correction factor as stipulated in IEC:
383.
6.1.18.12. Pollution Withstand Voltage Test
The test shall be carried out in accordance with the clean fog test method (solid layer
method) prescribed in Section 4 of IEC: 60507-1991.Test procedure is as follows:-
The test object is first contaminated by dipping in contaminant solution, which is
composed of salt (NaCl), non-soluble material (Kaolin) and water. Non-soluble deposit

density (NSDD) and salt deposit density are 0.1 mg/sq.cm and 0.03 mg/sq.cm,
respectively. After having been contaminated and dried, the test object is installed in
the fog chamber. The specified constant test voltage as per IEC-60507 is applied to the
test object and then artificial steam fog is generated. The applied voltage is maintained
for 60 minutes or until flash over occurs within 60 minutes. The above procedure is
repeated at least three (3) times on renewed contaminated test object.
6.1.18.13. Steep Wave Front Test
The following test shall be performed on 10 insulator units selected at random from the
lot offered for selection for Type test.
a) Each insulator unit shall the subjected to five successive positive and negative
flashovers with a wave having minimum effective rate of rise of 2500 kV per
microsecond.
b) Each unit shall then be subjected to three dry power frequency voltage flashovers.
Acceptance Criteria an insulator shall be deemed to have met the requirement of
this test if having been successfully subjected to the ten impulse flashovers, the
arithmetic mean of the three subsequent dry power frequency voltage flashover
values equals or exceeds 95% of the rated dry power frequency flashover voltage.
An insulator shall be deemed to have failed to meet the requirement of above
testing if
(i) It has not flashed over when the oscillogram or peak voltage indicator shows a
marked reduction in voltage.
or
(ii) Any one of the subsequent three dry power frequency voltage flashover
values is less than 80% of the value specified. Failure of any one unit either in
the steep front of wave or subsequent low frequency voltage test shall be
cause for testing on double number of units.
6.1.18.14. Thermal Mechanical Performance Test
Thermal Mechanical Performance Test shall be performed in accordance with IEC
60383-1-1993 clause 20 with the following modifications:

(I) The applied mechanical load during this test shall be 70 % of the rated
electromechanical or mechanical value.
(ii) The acceptance criteria shall be
a) X greater than or equal to R+3S
where X is Mean value of the individual mechanical failing load.
R is the Rated electro-mechanical/mechanical failing load.
S is the Standard deviation
b) The minimum sample size shall be taken as 20 for disc insulator units.
c) The individual electromechanical failing load shall be at least equal to the
rated value. Also puncture shall not occur before the ultimate fracture.
6.1.18.15. Residual Strength Test

The above test shall be performed as per clauses 4.4 and 4.5 of IEC-797 preceded by the
temperature cycle test. The sample size shall be 25 and the evaluation of the results
and acceptance criteria shall be as per clause no. 4.6 of IEC : 60797.
6.1.18.16. Electromechanical Failing Load Test

This test shall be performed in accordance with clause 18 of IEC-383 with the following
acceptance criteria:
a) X greater than or equal R+3S where
X Mean value of the electro-mechanical failing load.
R Rated electromechanical failing load
S Standard deviation
b) The minimum sample size shall be taken as 20 for disc insulator units. However,
for larger lot size, IEC-591 shall be applicable.
c) The individual electro-mechanical failing load shall be at least equal to the rated
value. Also electrical puncture shall not occur before the ultimate fracture.

6.2 INSULATOR HARDWARE FITTINGS

6.2.1 SCOPE
6.2.1.1. This section covers design, manufacture, stage testing, inspection and testing before
dispatch, packing, supply and delivery CIP (free at destination site/store) of hardware
fittings, specified herein under for their satisfactory operation on 220 KV transmission
lines.
6.2.1.2. The following are the materials covered in this specification:
TABLE-6.9
Hardware Fittings for Insulators
S.No. Particulars 220 kV
2 Single Suspension pilot Insulator String for Twin Moose 1x17 Nos
Conductor (1x160kN)
3 Twin Moose Double Tension Insulator String, 2 x 18 Nos.
2 x 160kN for normal Towers
2 x 210kN for special Towers
4 Twin Moose Triple Tension String 3x18 Nos.
3 x 160 kN for normal Towers
3 x 210 kN for special Towers
6.2.1.3. For Twin Moose Section, Single suspension "pilot" insulator string disc insulator unit of
1x 160 KN EM strength shall be used.
6.2.1.4. For Twin Moose Double Tension Insulator String, disc insulator units of 160 KN EM
strength shall be used.
6.2.1.5. For important locations/spans Triple Tension String, disc insulator units of 160 kN EM
Strength shall be used.
6.2.1.6. For Special Towers, Twin Moose Double Tension Insulator String, disc insulator units of
210kN EM strength shall be used.
6.2.1.7. The arcing distance shall be minimum 2600 mm minimum and the insulator string
dimensions as given in the drawing section separately.

6.2.1.8. The total Insulator length for twin double tension string should be limited to 4260 mm
and 3445 mm for Single suspension Pilot string.
6.2.2 STANDARDS
6.2.2.1 The design, identification, manufacture and performance testing of the equipment
shall comply with the latest editions and amendments of the relevant Indian
Standards or International Standards. The tenderer shall clearly indicate in his tender
the reference standards to which the design, manufacture and performance testing of
the material offered shall comply.
6.2.2.2 Some of the applicable Standards, along with internationally recognized standards to
which these generally correspond are as given below.
TABLE-6.10
S.No. Indian TITLE International &

Standards (IS) Internationally recognized
standard
1 IS 209-1966 Specification for Zinc BS: 3436-1986
2 IS 2071-1974 Method of high voltage testing, BS: 137-1982 (I & II) IEC:
general definitions and test 60274-1968
requirement IEC: 60383-1993 (Part I&II)
part-I 1974 General definitions and test
requirements.
part-II Test Procedure
part-III Measuring devices.
3 IS 731-1974 Porcelain insulators for overhead IEC 60383 -1993 (Part I&II)
power lines with a nominal
voltage greater than 1000 V
4 IS: 2121-1981 Specification for Conductors and
earth wire accessories for

overhead power lines.

Part-I Armor Rods, binding wires and
tapes for conductors.
Part-II Mid span joints and repair
sleeves for conductor.
5 IS: 2486 Specification for insulator fittings
for overhead power lines with a
nominal voltage greater than
1000V.
Part-I: 1971 General requirements and Tests BS: 3288-1979
Part-II: 1974 Dimensional requirements IEC: 60120-1984
Part-III: 1975 Locking Devices. IEC: 60372-1984

6 IS: 2629-1985 Recommended practice for hot
dip galvanizing of iron and steel.
7 IS: 2633-1986 Method for testing of uniformity
of coating of zinc coated articles.
8 IS: 3138-1966 Hexagonal bolts and nuts. ISO/R947 and ISO/R272
9 IS: 3188-1980 Dimensions for disc insulators. IEC: 305-1978
10 IS: 4218-1976 ISO metric screw threads. ISO/R 68-1969, R-26-1963,
R262-1969, R 965-1969.
11 IS: 6745-1972 Determination of weight of zinc BS: 433-1969 ISO:1460(E)
coating on zinc coated iron and
steel articles.
12 IS: 8263-1976 Methods of RI test on HV IEC: 60437-1973 NEMA
insulators. PUBLICATION
NO.107/1964 CISPR
13 IS: 8269-1976 Methods for switching impulse IEC: 60506-1975

test on HV insulators.
14 Thermal mechanical performance IEC: 60575
test and mechanical performance
test on string insulator units.
Sampling rules IEC: 591-1978
15 IS: 6639-1972 Hexagonal bolts for steel ISO/R272-1968
structures.
16 Ozone test on Elastomer. ASTM-D1171
17 IS: 406 Methods of Chemical Analysis of
Slab zinc.
18 Insulators for overhead lines IEC 61467
with a nominal voltage
above 1 000 V –
AC power arc tests on
6.2.3 D insulator sets
ETAILS OF HARDWARE FITTINGS
6.2.3.1 The hardware fittings shall be as per the specification. Hardware fittings shall be
suitable for single/double suspension insulator strings and single/double tension
insulator strings. Each hardware fitting shall be supplied complete in all respects and
shall include all components indicated in the specification.
6.2.3.2 Particulars of Insulators and Insulator Strings
TABLE-6.11
Particulars of Insulators and Insulator Strings
Particulars Twin Moose Single “I” Twin Moose
Double Suspension Triple Tension
Tension Pilot Insulator String
String String
1. No. of standard 2x18 1x17 3X18
Discs
2. Size of disc-mm 280x170 280x170 280x170
and
305x170

(for special
Towers)
3. E&M Strength 2x160 kN 160 kN 3x160 kN
of each string and and
2x210kN 3x210kN (for
(for special special towers)
towers)
4. Ball and socket 20 20 20
Designation
(mm)
5. Minimum 430 430 430
Creepage and and
distance of 545 mm (for 545 mm (for
each disc (mm) special special Towers)
Towers)
6.2.4 BID DRAWINGS

A list of specification drawings in respect of the hardware fittings of this specification
are indicated in drawing’s section 6. These specification drawings are attached herewith
for information and guidance of the Bidder only. The drawings to be furnished by the
Bidder shall be as per his own design and manufacturing and shall be distinct and
separate from these specification drawings.
 The tenderer shall furnish full description and illustration of materials offered.
 Dimensioned drawings of the complete insulator strings and their component
parts showing clearly the following arrangements shall be furnished. Weight,
material and fabrication details of all the components should be included in the
drawings.
a) Attachment to the hanger or strain plate.
b) Suspension or dead end assembly.
c) Arcing horn attachment to the string as specified in this specification.
d) Yoke plates.

e) Hardware fittings of ball and socket type for interconnecting units to the top
and bottom yoke plates.
f) Links with suitable fittings.
g) Any other.
 After placement of award, the contractor shall submit fully dimensioned drawings
including all the components in three (3) copies to the Employer for approval. After
getting approval from the Employer and successful completion of all the type tests,
the contractor shall submit 6 more copies of the same drawings to the Employer for
further distribution and field use at Employer's end.
 Material specifications, details of applicable standards and heat treatment details
shall also be furnished.
 The details of manufacturing process also shall be furnished along with the
component drawings.
 The details of trade mark to be provided on the components shall also be furnished.
6.2.5 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS

6.2.5.1 General
This section details out the technical specification of the hardware fittings for 220 KV
insulator strings suitable for Twin ACSR “MOOSE” – 597 mm2 conductor.
6.2.5.2 Details of Hardware Fittings

The hardware fittings shall be as per specification. Each set of hardware fittings shall be
supplied complete in all respects and shall include following hardware parts:
a) Suitable yoke plate for double suspension, double tension strings complying with
the specification given here-in-after.
b) Suitable arcing horn as specified in clause here-in-after.
c) Suspension clamp and tension i.e., dead-end clamp and armor rods to suit
conductor sizes.

d) Òther fittings necessary, for making the string assemblies complete such as ball
hook, hanger, eye links, ball-clevis, socket-clevis, clevis-eye, clevis-clevis, clevis-
toungue, chain link and anchor shackles etc.
e) 2.5% extra fasteners and aluminium filler plugs.
6.2.5.3 Important Design Features

6.2.5.3.1 The insulator strings along with hardware fittings shall be used by attachment to tower
in the following manner:
a) Tension strings
Twin Moose Double tension string and Triple Tension string shall consist of 2x18 &
3x18 nos. discs of 160 KN EM strength for 220 kV Line. Suitable anchor shackles
shall be designed to accommodate the tower strain plates. For Special Towers,
Twin Moose Double Tension Insulator String, disc insulator units of 210kN EM
strength shall be used instead of 160kN.
b) Pilot Insulator String

The Twin Moose Single suspension “I” Pilot Insulator string to be used for large
angle towers, shall consist of 1x 17 nos. discs of 160 KN EM strength Moose for
220 kV Transmission Line. Each set of hardware fittings shall be supplied for
attaching to hanger/anchor shackle fixed to the tower.
6.2.5.3.2 Tolerance on overall length of the hardware fittings/complete insulator strings shall be +
2% and on individual components + 3%.
6.2.6 INTERCHANGEABILITY
The hardware together with ball and socket fittings shall be of standard design so that
these hardware are interchangeable with each other and suitable for use with disc
insulators of any make conforming to relevant Indian/International standard.

6.2.7 BALL AND SOCKET FITTINGS

6.2.7.1 The dimensions of the ball and socket shall be of designation 20 mm for 160 KN and
20/24 mm for 210 kN respectively for suspension string assembly and tension string
assembly in accordance with standard dimensions stated in IS: 2486 (Part-II)/IEC:120.
6.2.7.2 Ball Fittings
Ball fittings shall be made of class IV steel as per IS: 2004 -1978 or steel of equivalent
grade forged in one piece. They shall be normalized to achieve the minimum
breaking strength. Before galvanization of ball fittings, all die flashing on the shank and
on the bearing surface of the ball shall be carefully removed without reducing the
dimensions below the requirements.
6.2.7.3 Socket Fittings
 Socket fittings shall be made of class IV steel as per IS: 2004-1978 or steel of
equivalent grade and shall be forged in one piece. They shall be normalized to
achieve the minimum breaking strength.
 Socket ends, before galvanizing shall be of uniform contour. The bearing surface of
socket ends shall be uniform about the entire circumference without depressions
or high spots. The internal contours of socket ends shall be symmetrical with axis
of the fittings as per relevant standards. The axis of the bearing surfaces of socket
ends shall be co-axial with the axis of the fittings. There shall be no noticeable
tilting of the bearing surfaces with the axis of the fittings.
6.2.8 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

 The dimensions and tolerances of pin balls and socket ends shall conform to IS:
2486 Part-II/IEC120 and shall be checked by the gauge therein after galvanizing.
 The pin balls shall be checked with the applicable 'GO' gauges in at least two
directions, one of which shall be across the line of die flashing, and the other 90 deg
to this line. "NO GO" gauges shall not pass in any direction.

 The bearing surfaces of balls and machined sockets, before galvanizing, shall not
have surface roughness more than 250 micro inches.
 The bearing surface of socket ends shall be uniform about the entire circumference
without depressions or high spots. The internal contour of the socket ends shall be
concentric with the axis of fittings. The axis of the bearing surface of socket ends
shall be coaxial with the axis of fittings with no appreciable tilting.
6.2.9 SECURITY CLIPS AND SPLIT PINS

The security clip shall be made of stainless steel as per AISI 302 or 304-L or phosphor
bronze as per IS: 7814-1985.
 Socket fittings shall be provided with R-shaped security clip in accordance with IS:
2486 (Parts III & IV) to provide positive locking against unintentional
disengagement of socket from the ball of the insulator. The security clip shall be
humped to maintain the clip in the locked position and shall have both prongs
spread to prevent complete withdrawal from the socket. The clip end shall not
project outside the recess of socket when the clip is in locked position.
 The hole for the security clip shall be on the side of the socket opposite to the
socket opening. The hole for the clip shall be counter sunk. The clip eye shall be of
such design that the same may be engaged by a hotline clip puller to provide for
disengagement under energized conditions.
 Split pins shall be used with cotter bolts.
 The force required to pull the clip to its unlocked position shall not be less than 50
N or more than 500 N.
6.2.10 CORONA AND RI PERFORMANCE
Sharp edges and scratches shall be avoided on all the hardware fittings. All surfaces
must be clean, smooth, without cuts and abrasions or projections. The Bidder must give
suitable assurance about the satisfactory corona and radio interference performance of
the materials offered by him.
6.2.11 ARCING HORN

The arcing horn shall be either ball ended rod type or tubular type. The tower side
arcing horn shall be ball ended and a power arc test as per IEC 61467 shall be done. The
design of the arcing horn shall be such that effective operation under actual field
conditions is ensured. The design of arcing horn shall be such that the negative
tolerance in the insulator string may not infringe the requirement of minimum arcing
distance. The minimum arcing distance between arcing horn and corona control
rings/grading ring shall be 2600 mm. The minimum arcing distance shall be as indicated
in the drawings.
6.2.12 Yoke Plates/Link Plates
 The yoke plates/link plate shall be made of mild steel or high tensile steel, hot dip
galvanized.
 The strength of yoke plate shall be adequate to withstand the minimum ultimate
tensile strength. The plates shall be either triangular or rectangular in shape. The
design of yoke plate shall take into consideration the most unfavorable loading
conditions likely to be experienced as a result of dimensional tolerance for disc
insulators as well as components of hardware fittings within the specified range.
The plates shall have suitable holes for fixing arcing horn. All corners and edges
shall be rounded with a radius of about 3 mm.
 Holes shall be cylindrical, clean cut and perpendicular to the plane of the material.
The periphery of the holes shall be free from burrs. Design calculation i.e. for
bearing and tensile strength for deciding dimensions of yoke plate shall be
furnished by the contractor. The holes provided for bolts in the yoke plate should
satisfy shear edge condition as per clause no. 8.10 of IS: 800-1984.
6.2.13 CORONA CONTROL RINGS/GRADING RING

6.2.13.1 The corona control rings/grading rings shall be made of high strength heat treated
aluminium alloy tube. The brackets for supporting the rings and mounting bolts shall be
of high strength aluminium alloy or hot dip galvanized mild steel. The welded joint
should be of the mechanical strength at least 20 KN (2,000 Kg.).

6.2.13.2 The corona control rings/grading ring having suitable design as detailed hereunder shall
be provided on the line side of all the string hardware fittings.
6.2.13.3 The design and shape of the corona control rings/grading ring shall be such that it will
reduce the voltage across the line side insulator unit, adjacent to the conductor of an
insulator string, to a value less than 22 kV to prevent visual corona from forming on
metal parts of the insulators and shall minimize the Radio Interference Voltage (RIV)
from complete insulator and hardware assemblies when operated at a voltage 10%
higher than the rated service voltage.
6.2.13.4 The corona control ring shall have a minimum wall thickness of 2.5mm and tube
diameter between 55-60mm. The brackets shall not be welded to the pipe but shall be
fixed by means of bolts and nuts on a small attachment or a plate welded to the pipe.
The welded portion of the corona control ring/grading ring shall be grinded before
buffing.
6.2.13.5 The corona control ring/grading ring should have a brushed satin finish and not a bright
glossy surface to pass electrical requirement for smoothness. No blemish should be seen
or felt when rubbing a hand over the metal.
6.2.14 SAG ADJUSTMENT DEVICE

6.2.14.1 The sag adjustment device shall be of high quality mild steel or high tensile steel and hot
dip galvanised.
6.2.14.2 The sag adjustment device to be provided with the double tension fitting shall be of the
three plate type. The sag adjustment device shall be provided with a safety locking
arrangement. The device shall be of such design that the adjustment is done with ease,
speed and safety. The ultimate tensile strength shall be 161.78 KN (16,500 Kg.).
6.2.14.3 The maximum length of sag adjustment device from the connecting part of the rest of
the hardware fittings shall be 520 mm. The details of maximum and minimum
adjustment shall be clearly indicated in the drawing submitted with tender. The

adjustment of 150 mm shall be possible with the sag adjustment device. The step of
adjustment shall not be more than 15 mm.
6.2.15 SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY

 The suspension assembly for 220 kV line shall be suitable for Twin ACSR “MOOSE
597 mm2” conductor.
 The suspension assembly shall include either free centre type suspension clamp
along with a set of standard formed armor rods or one armor grip suspension
clamp. For pilot insulator string only free centre type suspension clamp shall be
used.
 The suspension clamp along with standard formed armor rods set shall be designed
to have maximum mobility in any direction and minimum moment of inertia so as
to have minimum stress on the conductor in the case of oscillation of the same.
 The suspension clamp along with standard formed armor rods set shall have a slip
strength not less than 8% of UTS and not to be more than 15% of UTS of conductor
as per IS 2486 part-I - 1993.
 The suspension assembly shall be smooth without any cuts, grooves, abrasions,
projections, ridges or excrescences which might damage the conductor.
 In case, the magnetic power loss of the suspension assembly obtained during type
testing of the same exceeds the value guaranteed by the tenderer in his tender, the
material shall be rejected outright.
6.2.16 FREE CENTRE TYPE SUSPENSION CLAMP

 The clamp body and keeper pieces shall be of high strength corrosion resistant
and heat treated cast/forged aluminium alloy. The components such as cotter
bolts, hangers, shackles, brackets and U-bolts etc., shall be of galvanized mild steel,
drop forged steel or high strength aluminium alloy.

 The body of free centre type suspension clamp shall be smoothly rounded and
curved into a bell mouth at the ends. The lip edges shall have rounded head. There
shall be at least two U-bolts for tightening of clamp-body and keeper pieces
together.
6.2.17 Preformed Armor Rods set
 The Pre-formed armor rods shall be made of high strength special aluminium alloy
of type 6061 or equivalent duly heat treated during manufacturing process. The
finished rod shall have a minimum tensile strength of 35 Kg/Sq.mm.
 The AGS formed Armor rod set suitable for ASCR “MOOSE – 597 mm2” (220 kV line)
conductor (line) conductor shall be used to minimize the stress developed in
the conductor due to different static and dynamic loads because of vibration due
to wind, slipping of conductor from the suspension clamp as a result of
unbalanced conductor tension in adjacent spans and broken wire conditions. It
shall also withstand power arcs, chafing and abrasion from suspension clamp
and localized heating effect due to magnetic power loss from Suspension clamp
as well as (I2R) resistance losses of the conductor.
 The formed armor rod set shall have right hand lay and the inside diameter of the
helix shall be less than the outside diameter of the conductor to grip the same
tightly. The surface of the armor rod when fitted on the conductor shall be smooth
and free from projections, cuts and abrasions etc.
 The pitch length of the rods shall be determined by the Bidder but shall be less
than that of the outer layer of ACSR “MOOSE – 597 mm2”for 220 kV line conductor
and the same shall be accurately controlled to maintain uniformity and
consistently reproducible characteristic wholly independent of the skill of linemen.
 The length and diameter of each rod shall be 2540mm + 25 mm and 9.27 mm + 0.1
mm respectively. The tolerance in length of the rods in completed set should be
within 13 mm between the longest and shortest rod. The ends of armor rod
shall be parrot billed.

 The number of armor rods in each set shall be 13. Each rod shall be marked in the
middle with paint for easy application on the line.
 The armor rod shall not lose their resilience even after five applications.
 The conductivity of each rod of the set shall not be less than 40% of the
conductivity of the International-Annealed Copper Standard (IACS).
6.2.18 ARMOR GRIP SUSPENSION CLAMP
 The armor grip suspension clamp shall comprise of retaining strap, support housing,
elastomer inserts with aluminium reinforcements and AGS formed rod set.
 The armor grip suspension clamp shall be so manufactured that it shall
minimize the static and dynamic stress developed in the conductor under
various loading conditions as well as during wind induced conductor vibrations.
It shall allow slipping of the conductor under unbalanced conductor tension in
adjacent spans and broken wire conditions. It shall also withstand power arcs and
have required level of Corona/RIV performance. The AGS preformed rods shall be
as detailed in clause 6.18.13 above except for the following:
a) The length of the formed rods shall be such that it shall ensure sufficient
slipping strength as detailed in cl. 6.18.11 and shall not introduce unfavorable
stress on the conductor under all operating conditions.
b) Elastomer cushion shall be resistant to the effects of temperature up to + 75
deg C, ozone, ultraviolet radiations and other atmospheric contaminants likely
to be encountered in service. The physical properties of the elastomer shall be
of approved standard. It shall be electrically shielded by a cage of AGS formed
rod set. The elastomer cushion shall be so designed that the curvature of the
AGS rod shall follow the contour of the neoprene insert and shall not leave any
gap between the two when installed.
 The tenderer may clearly indicate remedial measures to overcome the problem of
external erosion if any arising from galvanic interaction between the graphite
loaded rubber and the aluminium strands.

6.2.19 DEAD END ASSEMBLY

 The dead end Assembly shall be suitable for Twin ACSR “MOOSE – 597 mm2”
conductor and made of specially aluminum alloy for better conductivity and
strength.
 The dead end assembly shall be of compression type with provision for
compressing jumper terminal at one end. The angle of jumper terminal to be
mounted should be 30 deg. with respect to the vertical line. The area of bearing
surface on all the connections shall be sufficient to ensure positive electrical and
mechanical contact and avoid local heating due to I2R losses. The resistance of the
clamp when compressed on the conductor shall not be more than 75% of the
resistance of equivalent length of conductor.
 The assembly shall not permit slipping of, damage to or failure of the complete
conductor or any part thereof at a load less than 95% of the minimum UTS of the
conductor.
 The mechanical efficiency of the clamp shall not be affected by method of erection
involving the use of ‘come-along' or similar clamps before, during or after
assembly and erection of tension clamps itself.
 The outer sleeve shall be made out of E.C. grade aluminium of purity not less than
99.5%.
 Dimensional tolerance of the cross section of aluminium shall be as per
IS/Standards:
6.2.20 COMPRESSION MARKING

Die compression length shall be clearly marked on each dead end assembly designed
for continuous die compressions and shall bear the words 'COMPRESS FIRST' suitably
inscribed near the point on each assembly where the compression begins. It shall
bear identification marks 'COMPRESSION ZONE' and 'NON-COMPRESSION ZONE’
distinctly with arrow marks showing the direction of compressions and knurling
marks showing the end of the zones. Tapered aluminium filler plugs shall also be

provided at the line of demarcation between compression and non-compression zone.

The letters, number and other markings on the finished clamp shall be distinct and
legible.
6.2.21 FASTENERS
 All fasteners shall conform to IS: 6639-1972. All fasteners shall be hot dip
galvanized. All bolts and nuts shall have hexagonal heads, the heads being
forged out of solid truly concentric, and square with the shank, which must be
perfectly straight. All bolts and nuts shall be galvanized as per IS-1367-(Part 13)/IS-
2629.
 Fully threaded bolt shall not be used. The length of the bolt shall be such that the
threaded portion shall not extend into the place of contact of the component parts.
 Flat washers and spring washers shall be provided wherever necessary and shall be
of positive lock type. Thickness of washers shall conform to IS: 2016. Spring
washers shall be electro galvanized.
 To obviate bending stress in bolt, it shall not connect aggregate thickness more
than three times its diameter.
 All bolts shall be threaded to take the full depth of the nuts and threaded enough to
permit the firm gripping of the component parts but not further. It shall be ensured
that the threaded portion of the bolt protrudes not less than 3 mm and not more
than 8 mm when fully tightened. All nuts shall fit and tight to the point where
shank of the bolt connects to the head.
 Bolts may have either rolled or cut threads. Nuts may be threaded after galvanizing
to ensure clean threads but bolts shall not be threaded or rethreaded after
galvanizing. Nut threads shall be tapped oversize to closely fit those of the
galvanized bolt, with no unnecessary looseness but free enough to permit the nut
to be turned freely with fingers over the entire threaded length.
 Bolts up to M16 and having length up to 10 times the diameter of the bolt should
be manufactured by cold forging and thread rolling process to obtain good and

reliable mechanical properties and effective dimensional control. The shear

strength of bolt for 5.6 grades should be 310 MPa minimum as per IS-12427. Bolts
should be provided with washer face in accordance with IS: 1363 (Part-I) to ensure
proper bearing.
 Nuts should be double chamfered as per the requirement of IS: 1363- PartIII-1984.
It should be ensured by the manufacturer that nuts should not be over tapped
beyond 0.4mm oversize on effective diameter for size up to M16.
 The bidder shall furnish bolt schedules giving thickness of components connected,
the nut and the washer and the length of shank and the threaded portion of bolts,
size of holes and any other special details of this nature.
 To ensure effective in-process Quality Control it is essential that the manufacturer
should have all the testing facilities for tests like weight of zinc coating, shear
strength, other testing facilities etc, in house. The manufacturer should also have
proper quality assurance system which should be in line with the requirements of
this specification and IS-14000 Services Quality System Standard.
 Fasteners of grade higher than 8.8 are not to be used and minimum grade for bolt
shall be 5.6.
6.2.22 FORGED COMPONENTS

Forged components other than those covered in the clauses mentioned herein above
shall be made out of class IV steel as per IS: 2004 or equivalent. The components shall
be hot dip galvanized. The items shall be normalized to achieve the required tensile
properties. The forged components shall not have sharp corners and edges so as to
affect corona and RIV performance.
6.2.23 MATERIALS
The materials of the various components shall be as specified in clauses mentioned
hereinabove/Section-II. However, components made of alternative materials giving

equivalent or better performance shall also be considered. The contractor shall

indicate the material proposed to be used for each and every component of
hardware fittings stating clearly the class, grade or alloy designation of the material
and the reference standards. However the critical dimensions of components shall
not be changed in relation to selection of different material.
6.2.24 OTHER MISCELLANEOUS PARTS
Socket ended, ball ended items and all shackles and links shall be made by drop forging
process from suitable steel as per IS: 2004-1978 or equivalent. These parts shall be hot
dip galvanized after proper machining.
6.2.25 GALVANIZING
 All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with IS: 2629 and shall
satisfy the tests mentioned in IS: 2633. No material shall be galvanized until all shop
operations have been completed except that the nuts may be threaded and oiled
after galvanizing. Minimum weight of zinc coating shall be 300 g/sq.m. for
fasteners and 610 g/sq.m. for all other hot dip galvanized articles.
 Fasteners shall withstand four dips while spring washers shall withstand three dips
each of one minute duration in the Standard Preece test. Other galvanized material
shall withstand minimum six dips each of one minute duration in the standard
Preece test.
 The zinc coating shall be perfectly adherent, of uniform thickness, smooth,
reasonably bright, continuous and free from imperfections such as flux, ash, rust
stains, bulky white deposits and blisters.
 The zinc used for galvanizing shall be of minimum grade 99.95% as per IS: 209.
6.2.26 WORKMANSHIP
 All the equipment shall conform to the best modern practices adopted in the Extra
High Voltage field. The Bidder shall offer only such equipment as guaranteed by
him to be satisfactory and suitable for 220 kV transmission lines and will give
continued good performance.

 The manufacturing process and quality control of all the materials shall be such
as to give maximum possible working load, highest mobility, elimination of sharp
edges and corners to limit corona and radio-interference, best resistance to
corrosion and a good finish.
 Castings shall be uniform without sharp edges or corners, free from all defects like
shrinkage, inclusion, blow holes, cracks etc. Pressure die casting shall not be used
for casting of components with thickness more than 5 mm.
 Forgings shall be uniform in quality and condition, without sharp edges or corners,
free from cracks, flakes or seams, laps, slag, silvers, scabs, rolled-in scale and
fissures.
 All current carrying parts shall be so designed and manufactured that contact
resistance is reduced to minimum.
 No item shall have sharp ends or edges, abrasions or projections and cause
any damage to the conductor in any way during erection or during continuous
operation which would produce high electrical and mechanical stresses in
normal working. The design of adjacent metal parts and mating surfaces shall
be such as to prevent damage of the contact surface and to maintain good
electrical contact under service conditions.
 All fasteners shall have suitable corona free locking arrangement and shall not
loosen under vibration conditions.
 Welding of aluminium shall be by inert gas shielded tungsten arc or inert gas
shielded metal arc process. Welds shall be clean, sound, smooth uniform without
overlaps, properly fused and completely sealed. There shall be no cracks, voids,
incomplete penetration, incomplete fusions, undercutting or inclusions. Porosity
shall be minimized so that mechanical properties of the aluminium alloys are not
affected. All welds shall be properly finished as per good engineering practices.
6.2.27 EQUIPMENT MARKING

Each component of hardware shall be marked with the trade mark of the manufacturer.
Marks shall be forged or stamped with a steel die before galvanizing. The marks shall be
distinct, durable, and conspicuous.
6.2.28 HOT LINE MAINTENANCE

 The equipment offered shall be suitable for hot line maintenance.
 To release the tension in insulator strings, specially designed tools may be
necessary. The tenderers shall clearly indicate in their tender the type of tools to be
used and shall make sure that fittings and/or yoke plates accommodate these tools.
Tenderers shall also indicate the periodicity of maintenance.
6.2.29 TESTS
The following type, acceptance, routine tests and stage tests during manufacture shall
be carried out on the hardware fittings.
1. Type Tests
These are those tests which are to be carried out to prove the design, process of
manufacture and general conformity of the material in accordance with these
specifications. These tests shall be carried out on samples prior to commencement of
commercial production against this specification.
2. Acceptance Tests
These are those tests which are to be carried out during inspection prior to dispatch for
the purpose of acceptance of that lot.
3. Routine Tests
These are those tests which are to be carried out on each hardware fitting to check the
requirements which are likely to vary during production.
4. Stage Tests
Stage tests during manufacture shall mean those tests which are to be carried out
during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the Contractor to ensure
the desired quality of the end product.

5. Testing Values
For all type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be those values
guaranteed by the Contractor in the Guaranteed Technical Particulars or the acceptance
values specified in the relevant standard whichever is more stringent for that particular
test. The norms and procedures of sampling for these tests will be as per the Quality
Assurance Programme to be mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Employer.
The standards and norms to which these tests will be carried out are listed against
them. Where a particular test is a specific requirement of this specification, the
norms and procedures of these shall be as specified in Clause 6.25 of this specification
or as mutually agreed to between the Contractor and the Employer in the Quality
Assurance Program.
6.2.30 TYPE TESTS

The following type tests shall be conducted on fittings of each type as indicated in the
enclosed drawings. Type tests shall be made on fittings that have passed the routine
tests.
6.2.30.1. Type Tests on complete Insulator string along with Hardware fittings.
TABLE-6.12
1 Wet power frequency voltage test
2 Lightning impulse voltage test as per IEC: 383-2: -1992
3 Wet switching impulse voltage test
4 Visual Examination IS: 731
5 Voltage distribution test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.2
6 RIV test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.4
7 Mechanical strength test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.5
8 Dynamic/Vibration test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.16
9 Corona Extinction voltage test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.3
10 Pollution withstand voltage test As per IEC: 60507-1991

11 Power Arc Test As per IEC 61467-1997
Note:
i. All the type tests given under clause 6.19 shall be conducted on Twin Moose Double
suspension, Twin Moose Double Tension insulator string along with hardware
fittings.
ii. All the above tests except at Sl No. 8 shall also be conducted on Single and Double
suspension pilot insulator strings along with hardware fittings.
6.2.30.2. On Suspension Hardware fitting only

TABLE-6.13
A Shore hardness test of elastomer cushion for As per Clause no. 6.2.41.10
AG suspension clamp
B Bend test for armor rod set
C Resilience test for armor rods set IS: 2121 (Part-I)
D Conductivity test for armor rods set
E Clamp slip strength versus torque test for As per Clause no. 6.2.41.15
suspension clamp
F Magnetic power loss test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.6
G Mechanical strength test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.5 &
Clause no. 6.2.41.9
H Mechanical strength test of welded joint As per Clause no. 6.2.41.8
I Test on locking devices for ball and socket IEC-372(2)- 1976
coupling
J Mechanical strength test of each component As per Clause no. 6.2.41.7
K Verification of dimensions IS: 2486(Part-I)

L Galvanizing/Electroplating As per Clause no. 6.2.41.11
M Visual Examination IS: 2486(Part-I)
N Ozone test on elastomer As per Clause no. 6.2.41.17

6.2.30.3. On Tension Hardware Fittings only

TABLE-6.14
a. Slip strength test for dead end assembly
b. Electrical resistance test for dead end assembly
IS: 2486 (Part-I)
c. Heating cycle test for dead end assembly
d. Mechanical strength tests As per Clause no. 6.2.41.5 &
Clause no. 6.2.41.9
e. Verification of dimensions IS: 2486 (Part-I)
f. Galvanizing/Electroplating As per Clause no. 6.2.41.11
g. Visual examination IS: 2486 (Part-I)
6.2.30.4. Tests on Corona/Grading Rings

a. Mechanical Test : As per Cl. 6.25.18
b. Electrical Test : As per Cl. 6.25.19
Assembly Test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.1
6.2.31 ACCEPTANCE TESTS
6.2.31.1. On both Suspension and Tension hardware fittings for 220 kV lines
TABLE-6.15
a. Visual examination IS: 2486 (Part-I)

b. Verification of dimensions IS: 2486 (Part-I)
c. Galvanizing / Electroplating test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.11

d. Mechanical strength test of welded joint As per Clause no. 6.2.41.8

e. Test on locking devices for ball and socket coupling IEC: 372(2) 1976
f. Mechanical strength test of each component As per Clause no. 6.2.41.7
(excluding arcing horn.)
g. Mechanical strength test on arcing horn. BS 3288 (Part-I) 1979
h. Assembly Test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.1
6.2.31.2. On Suspension Hardware Fittings only

TABLE-6.16
a. Shore hardness test of elastomer cushion for AG As per Clause no.

suspension clamp 6.2.41.10
b. Bend test for armor rod set
c. Resilience test for armor rods set IS: 2121(PART-I)
d. Conductivity test for armor rods set
e. Clamp slip strength versus torque test for suspension As per Clause no.
6.2.41.15
clamp
f. Assembly Test As per Clause no.
6.2.41.1
6.2.31.3. On Tension Hardware Fittings Only

TABLE-6.17
a. Slip strength test for dead-end IS: 2486(Part-I)
assembly
b. Assembly Test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.1
6.2.32 ROUTINE TESTS

TABLE-6.18

a. Visual Inspection IS: 2486(Part-I)

b. Proof Load Test As per Clause no. 6.2.41.12
Tests during Manufacture

On all components as applicable
TABLE-6.19
a. Chemical analysis of Zinc used for As per Clause no. 6.2.41.13
galvanizing
b. Chemical analysis, hardness tests, As per Clause no. 6.2.41.14
grain size, inclusion rating and
magnetic particle inspection for
forgings/ castings
c. Chemical analysis, and proof load test
As per Clause no. 6.2.41.12 & As
for fabricated hardware per Clause no. 6.2.41.14
6.2.33 TEST CHARGES AND TEST SCHEDULE

a) Type Tests
All the equipments offered shall be fully type tested as per the relevant standards
and the Bidder shall furnish four sets of type test reports along with the offer.
These tests must not have been conducted earlier than five years. The Employer
reserves the right to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the
presence of Employer’s representative. For this purpose the Bidder may quote
unit rates for carrying out each type test. These prices shall be taken into
consideration for bid evaluation. For any change in the design/type already type
tested and the design/type offered against this specification the Employer reserves
the right to demand, repetition of tests without any extra cost.

b) For type tests which involve the tests on the complete insulator string with
hardware fittings, the contractor shall arrange the necessary number of sets of
hardware fittings at the place of testing free of cost.
c) In case of failure of the complete string in any type test, the contractor shall get
the test repeated at his cost.
d) In case of failure in any type test, the contractor is either required to modify the
design of the material and successfully carryout all the type tests as has been
detailed out in Clause 6.2.30 of this specification or to repeat that particular
type test at least three times successfully at his own expenses. The decision of
the Employer in this regard shall be final and binding.
e) Bidder shall indicate the laboratories in which it is proposed to conduct the type
tests. Bidder shall also ensure that the tests can be completed in these
laboratories within the time schedule guaranteed by him in the appropriate
schedule.
f) The entire cost of testing for acceptance and routine tests and tests during
manufacture specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price
of hardware fittings, except for the expenses of the Inspector/Employer's
representative. All acceptance tests shall be carried out by the Contractor in the
presence of Employer's representative.
g) In case of failure in any type test, if repeat tests are required to be conducted,
then all the expenses for deputation of Inspector/Employer’s representative shall
be deducted from the contract price. Also if on receipt of the Contractor’s notice
of testing, the Employer’s representative does not find ‘plant’ to be ready for
testing, the expenses incurred by the Employer for re-deputation shall be
deducted from contract price.
h) Immediately after finalization of the programme of type/acceptance/routine
testing, the Contractor shall give sufficient advance intimation to the Employer, to
enable him to depute his representative for witnessing the tests.

6.2.34 SAMPLE BATCH FOR TYPE TESTING

a) The Contractor shall offer material for sample selection for type testing only after
getting Quality assurance Programme approved by the Employer. The Contractor
shall offer at least three times the quantity of materials required for conducting
all the type tests for sample selection. The sample for type testing will be
manufactured strictly in accordance with the Quality Assurance Programme
b) Before sample selection, the Contractor shall be required to conduct all the
acceptance tests successfully in the presence of Employer's representative.
6.2.35 INSPECTION
6.2.35.1. The Employer shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of
manufacture, where the hardware fittings and its components are being
manufactured and the Contractor shall provide all facilities for unrestricted
inspection of the Contractor's works, raw materials, manufacture of all the accessories
and for conducting necessary tests as detailed herein.
6.2.35.2. The Contractor shall keep the Employer informed in advance of the time of starting and
of the progress of manufacture of accessories in its various stages so that arrangements
6.2.35.3. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material
has been satisfactorily inspected and tested.
6.2.35.4. The acceptance of any quantity of accessories shall in no way relieve the Contractor of
his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not
prevent subsequent rejection if such hardware fittings are later found to be defective.
6.2.35.5. The material for final inspection shall be offered by the contractor only under packed
condition. The engineer shall select sample at random from the packed lot for carrying
out acceptance tests.
6.2.36 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

6.2.36.1. The Bidder shall invariably furnish the following information along with his offer.
Information shall be separately given for individual type of equipment offered.
a) Statement giving list of important raw materials, names of sub-Contractors for
the raw material, list of standards according to which the raw material are
tested, list of tests normally carried out on raw material in presence of
Bidder's representative, copies of test certificates.
b) Information and copies of test certificates as in (a) above in respect of bought out
items.
c) List of manufacturing facilities available.
d) Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual processing exists.
e) List of areas in manufacturing process, where stage inspections are normally
carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections.
f) Special features provided in the hardware to make it maintenance free.
g) List of testing equipment available with the Bidder for final testing of hardware
specified and test plant limitation, if any, vis-a-vis the type, special, acceptance
and routine tests specified in the relevant standards. These limitations shall be
very clearly brought out in schedule of deviations from specified test
requirements.
6.2.36.2. The Contractor shall within 30 days of placement of order submit the following
information to the Employer.
a) List of raw material as well as bought out accessories and the name of the raw
material as well as bought out accessories and the names of sub-Contractors
selected from those furnished along with the offer.
b) Type test certificates of the raw material and bought out accessories.
c) Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) with customer holds points for Employer’s
inspection. The QAP and Employer's hold points shall be discussed between the
Employer and the Contractor before the QAP is finalized.
d) The Contractor shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out items
and raw material at the time of routine testing of the fully assembled hardware.

6.2.37 DOCUMENTATION
6.2.37.1 The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid the dimensional drawings of all types of
hardware fittings.
a) These drawings shall include the following information.
b) Dimensions.
c) Tolérance on dimensions.
d) Material designation used for different components with reference to standards.
e) Fabrication details such as welds, finishes and coatings.
6.2.37.2 Catalogue or part numbers for each component and the total assembly with bill of
materials.
a) Identification marking.
b) Weight of individual components and total assembled weight.
6.2.37.3 The assembly drawings shall include the following:
a) Brief installation instructions.
b) Design installation torque for the bolt or cap screw.
c) Withstand torque that can be applied to the bolt or cap screw without failure of
components or parts thereof.
d) Compression die number with recommended compression pressure.
e) Relevant technical details of significance.
6.2.38 TEST REPORTS
a) Six copies of type test reports shall be furnished to the Employer within 15days of
conducting the tests. One copy will be returned duly certified by the Employer to
the Contractor within three weeks thereafter wards and on receipt of the same
Contractor shall commence with the commercial production of the concerned
material.

b) Six copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished to the Employer. One
copy will be returned, duly certified by the Employer and only thereafter shall the
materials be dispatched.
c) All records of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Contractor at his
works for periodic inspection by the Employer.
d) All test reports of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the
Contractor. These shall be produced for verification as and when requested for by
the Employer.
6.22.5 The contractor shall take full responsibility for supply and testing of hardware fittings
with insulator discs and shall have to also guarantee the test values and overall
satisfactory performance of disc insulators with the hardware fittings.
6.2.39 PACKING AND FORWARDING

6.2.39.1 All hardware fittings shall be packed in suitably sized strong and weather resistant
wooden cases/crates. The gross weight of the packing shall not normally exceed 50 Kg.
to avoid handling problems.
6.2.39.2 Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or spacer shall be provided to prevent damage
to or deformation of the hardware’s during transit and handling.
6.2.39.3 All identical items shall be dispatched to destination duly assembled and packed. Bolts,
nuts, washers, cotter pins, security clips and split pins etc. shall be packed duly installed
and assembled with the respective parts and suitable measures shall be taken to
prevent their transit loss.
6.2.39.4 Each component part shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the trade mark of the
manufacturer and year of manufacture.
6.2.39.5 All packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly so as to ensure their safe
arrival at their destination and to avoid the possibility of goods being lost or wrongly
dispatched on account of faulty or illegible markings. Each wooden case/crate shall
have all the markings stenciled on it in inedible ink.

6.2.39.6 The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during transit
(Sea, Rail and Road) storage at site and subsequent handling in the field.
6.2.40 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS

a) This is set out separately in Bidding Document.
b) The scope of supply shall include a supply of 2.5 % extra quantity of bolts, nuts,
washers, split pins, cotter pins and such other small loose items free of cost.
6.2.41 DETAILS OF TESTS

6.2.41.1 Assembly Test
This test shall be carried out to ensure that cotter pins, bolts, clamps etc., fit freely and
properly.
6.2.41.2 Voltage Distribution Test
The voltage across each insulator unit shall be measured by using either sphere gap or
high impedance voltmeter. The result obtained shall be converted into percentage. The
voltage across any disc shall not exceed the following values: 13% for suspension
insulator strings and 14% for tension insulator strings.
6.2.41.3 Corona Extinction Voltage Test

The complete insulator string when subjected to power frequency voltage shall
have a corona extinction voltage of not less than 154 kV rms line to ground under dry
conditions. There shall be no evidence of corona on any part of the samples when all
sources of corona are photographed in a darkened room. The atmospheric conditions
during testing shall be recorded and the test results shall be accordingly corrected to
standard atmospheric conditions with suitable correction factor as stipulated in IEC:
383.
6.2.41.4 RIV Test (Dry)

Under the conditions as specified under clause 6.2.41.3 above the insulator string along
with complete hardware fittings shall have a radio interference voltage level below
1000 microvolts at one (1) MHz when subjected to 50 Hz AC voltage of 154 KV (rms)
line to ground under dry conditions. The test procedure shall be in accordance with IS:
8263-1976/IEC: 437, or its latest revision thereof.
6.2.41.5 Mechanical Strength Test
The complete insulator string along with its hardware fittings without arcing horn and
suspension assembly / dead end assembly shall be subjected to a load equal to 50% of
the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at
a steady rate to 67% of the minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for five
minutes and then removed. After removal of the load, the string components shall not
show any visual deformation and it shall be possible to disassemble them by hand.
Hand tools may be used to remove cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The strings
shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be further
increased at a steady rate to the specified minimum UTS and held for one minute. No
fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall then be increased until
6.2.41.6 Magnetic Power Loss Test for Suspension Assembly
One hollow aluminium tube of 29 mm diameter shall be placed. An alternating current
of 50 Hz over the range of 300 to 700 amps. shall be passed through the tube. The
reading of the wattmeter with and without suspension assembly shall be recorded. Not
less than 3 suspension assemblies shall be tested. The average power loss for
suspension assembly shall be plotted for each value of current. The value of the loss
corresponding to 500 amp. shall be read off from the graph.
6.2.41.7 Mechanical Strength Test of Each Component
Each component shall be subjected to a load equal to the specified minimum ultimate
tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a steady rate to 67% of the minimum
UTS specified. The load shall be held for five minutes and then removed. The
component shall then again be loaded to 50% to UTS and the load shall be further

increased at a steady rate till the specified UTS and held for one minute. No fracture
should occur. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing load is reached
and the value recorded.
6.2.41.8 Mechanical Strength Test of Welded Joint
The welded portion of each component shall be subjected to a load of 2000 Kgs. for one
minute. Thereafter, it shall be subjected to die-penetration /ultrasonic test. There shall
not be any crack at the welded portion.
6.2.41.9 Mechanical Strength Test for Suspension/Tension Hardware Fittings
The complete string (without insulators) excluding arcing horn, and suspension or
dead end assembly shall be subjected to a load equal to 50% of the specified minimum
ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a steady rate up to 67% of
the minimum UTS specified. This load shall be held for five minutes and then
removed. After removal of the load, the string component shall not show any visual
deformation and it shall be possible to disassemble them by hand. Hand tools may be
used to remove cotter pins and loosen the nuts initially. The string then be reassembled
and loaded to 50% of UTS and the load shall be further increased at a steady rate till
the specified minimum UTS is reached and held for one minute. No fracture should
occur during this period. The applied load shall then be increased until the failing
load is reached and the value recorded. This test shall be carried out for every 300 sets.
6.2.41.10 Shore Hardness Test
The shore hardness at various points on the surface of the elastomer cushion shall be
measured by a shore hardness meter and the shore hardness number shall lie in
between 65 to 80.
6.2.41.11 Galvanizing/Electroplating Test
The test shall be carried out as per clause no. 5.9 of IS: 2486 (Part-I)-1971 except that
both uniformity of zinc coating and standard Preece test shall be carried out and the
results obtained shall satisfy the requirements of this specification.
6.2.41.12 Proof Load Test

Each component shall be subjected to a load equal to 50 % of the specified minimum

ultimate tensile strength which shall be increased at a steady rate from 50% to 67% of
the minimum UTS. The load shall be held for one minute and then removed. After
removal of the load the component shall not show any visual deformation.
6.2.41.13 Chemical Analysis of Zinc
For the chemical analysis of the zinc used for galvanizing, samples taken from zinc ingot
shall be chemically analyzed as per IS: 209-1966. The purity of the zinc shall not be less
than 99.95%.
6.2.41.14 Tests For Forging/Casting and Fabricated Hardware
The chemical analysis, hardness test, grain size inclusion rating and magnetic particle
inspection for forging, casting and chemical analysis and proof load test for
fabricated hardware will be as per the internationally recognized procedures for
these tests. The sampling will be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The
details regarding test will be as in the Quality Assurance Plan.
6.2.41.15 Clamp Slip Strength Vs Torque Test for Suspension Clamp
The suspension clamp shall be vertically suspended by means of a flexible attachment.
A suitable length of ACSR “MOOSE – 597 mm2”conductor shall be fixed in the clamp.
The clamp slip strength at various tightening torques shall be obtained by gradually
applying the load at one end of the conductor. The clamp slips strength vs. torque curve
shall be drawn. The above procedure is applicable only for free centre type suspension
clamp. For AG suspension clamp only clamp slip strength after assembly shall be found
out. The clamp slip strength at the recommended tightening torque shall be more than
8% of UTS of conductor and less than 15% of UTS of Conductor as per IS 2486 –Part-I –
1993.
6.2.41.16 Dynamic/Vibration Test
The suspension string shall be tested in suspension mode and tension string in tension
mode itself in laboratory span of minimum 30 meters. In the case of suspension string a
load equal to 600 kg shall be applied along the axis of the suspension string by
means of turn buckle. The insulator string along with hardware fittings and conductor

tensioned at 3500 Kg shall be secured with clamps. The system shall be suitable to
maintain constant tension on conductor throughout the duration of the test. Vibration
dampers shall not be used on the test span. The conductor shall be vertically vibrated at
one of the resonance frequencies of the insulators string (more than 10 Hz) by means of
vibration inducing equipment. The peak to peak displacement in mm of vibration at the
anti-node point nearest to the string shall be measured and the same shall not be less
than 1000/f1.8 where f is the frequency of vibration in cycles/sec. The insulator string
shall be vibrated for not less than 10 million cycles without any failure. After the test
the disc insulators shall be examined for looseness of pins and cap or any crack in the
cement. The hardware for looseness shall be examined for fatigue failure and
mechanical strength test. There shall be no deterioration of properties of hardware
components and disc insulators after the vibration test. The disc insulators shall be
subjected to the following tests as per relevant standards:
TABLE-6.20
S.NO Tests Percentage of discs to be tested.
a. Temperature cycle test followed by 60
mechanical performance test
b. Puncture test 40
6.2.41.17 Ozone Test on Elastomer
This test shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D-1171 by the ozone chamber
exposure method (method B). The test duration shall be 500 hours and the ozone
concentration 50 PPHM. At the test completion, there shall be no visible crack under a
2 x magnification.
6.2.41.18 Mechanical test for Grading/Corona rings

The fittings should be rigidly supported. A load of 150 kg shall be applied and
maintained for one minute in the plane of the fitting. The fitting should not fail.
6.2.41.19 Electrical test for Grading/Corona ring

The electrical control fitting shall be designed to ensure that when incorporated in the
insulator string, the specified electrical performance of the string is achieved. There
shall be no visible discharge at the specified test voltage when tested with complete
string.
6.2.41.20 Power Arc Test

This test shall be performed as per IEC 61467 – 1997 or latest edition for all the insulator
string assemblies viz. double tension, triple tension and pilot string assemblies for acsr
Moose and AACSR moose respectively.
Test circuit Short circuit current Number and duration of test

B In = Isys = 35 KA Two of tn = 0.2s and one of tn =
0.5s
The acceptance criteria after the completion of test series shall be following.
a) Insulator separation not permitted.
b) Burning/melting of metal components, breakage of insulator sheds,glaze removal are
permitted.
c) The complete insulator string alongwith its hardware fitting excluding arching horn, corona
control ring/grading ring shall withstand 80% of UTS.
6.2.41.21 Additional Tests

a) The Employer reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s)
of reasonable nature carried out at Contractor's premises, at site, or in any
other place in addition to the aforesaid type, acceptance and routine tests to
satisfy that material comply with the specifications.
b) The Employer also reserves the right to conduct all the tests mentioned in this
specification at his own expense on the samples drawn from the site at
Contractor's premises or at any other test centre. In case of any failure, it shall be
binding on the part of the Contractor to replace that particular lot completely,
without any extra cost to the Employer.

Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
Technical Specifications-Substation
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
Chapter 1- SURGE ARRESTORS
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 1
SURGE ARRESTORS
CONTENTS
S.No DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
1.0 SCOPE 1
1.1 STANDARDS 1
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT 2
1.3 ARRESTOR HOUSING 3
1.4 FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES 4
1.5 SURGE MONITOR 4
1.6 TESTS 5
1.7 NAME PLATE 5
1.8 DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS 6
1.9 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 6
Section IV-B Chapter-1 Contents

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 1
SURGE ARRESTORS
1.0 SCOPE
1.0.1 These specifications are intended to cover the design, engineering, manufacturing,
inspection and testing at manufacturer’s works, packing, supply & delivery, storage,
transportation up to site, testing & commissioning of 120 kV, 30 kV, 10 kA, Station
class-3 heavy duty, gapless metal (zinc) oxide Surge Arrestors complete with
discharge counter, leakage current ammeter, insulating bases & clamps suitable for
Construction of 132/33 kV Substation at Dhunge Sangu in Nepal. Complete with all
materials, accessories and fittings, erection & maintenance tools & tackles,
mandatory spares as detailed in this specification.
1.0.2 Components having identical rating shall be interchangeable.
1.0.3 The performance of the equipment shall be guaranteed as per Section-V –
“Guaranteed and Other Technical Particulars”.
1.1 STANDARDS
1.1.1 The design, manufacture and performance of Surge Arrestors shall comply with IEC
60099-4/IS:3070 Part-3 and other specific requirements stipulated in the
specification. Unless otherwise specified, the equipment, material and processes shall
confirm to the latest applicable Indian standards or International Standards as listed
here under:-
TABLE-1.0
IS:2071-1993 (Part-1) Methods of High Voltage Testing General Definitions & Test
Requirements
IS:2071-1974 (Part-2) Test Procedures
IS:2629-1985 Recommended Practice for hot dip galvanizing on Iron & Steel
IS:2633-1986 Method for Testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated
Articles.
IS:3070-1993 (Part-3) Specification for surge arrestor for alternating current systems.
Section IV-B, Chapter-1

Page 1 of 8
Metal-Oxide lightning Arrestors without gaps

IS:4759-1996 Specification for hot dip zinc coating on Structural Steel and
Other allied products.
IS:5621-1980 Hollow Insulators for use in Electrical Equipment
IS:6209-1982 Methods of Partial discharge measurement.
IS:6745 Method for determination of mass of zinc coating on zinc
coated iron and steel articles
ANSI/IEEE-C.62.11 Metal oxide, Surge Arrestor for AC Power Circuits
(1982)
IEC 60099-4 Surge Arrestors
Electrical Power technical standards of Nepal.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT

1.2.1 The metal oxide gap less Surge Arrestor without any series or shunt gap shall be
suitable for protection of substation equipment and 132/33 kV, 15 MVA (3 X 5 MVA,
1-phase Power transformer bank), associated equipment from voltage surges
resulting from natural disturbance like lightning as well as system disturbances.
1.2.2 The surge arrestor shall draw negligible current at operating voltage and at the
same time offer least resistance during the flow of surge current.
1.2.3 The surge arrestor shall consist of non-linear resistor elements placed in series and
housed in electrical grade porcelain housing of specified creepage distance.
1.2.4 The assembly shall be hermetically sealed with suitable rubber gaskets with effective
sealing system arrangement to prevent ingress of moisture.
1.2.5 The surge arrestor shall be provided with line and earth terminals of suitable size.
The ground side terminal of surge arrestor shall be connected with 50x6 Sq. mm
galvanized strip, one end connected to the surge arrestor and second end to a
separate ground electrode. The bidder shall also recommend the procedure
which shall be followed in providing the earthing/system to the Surge Arrestor.

Page 2 of 8
1.2.6 The surge arrestor shall not operate under power frequency and temporary over
voltage conditions but under surge conditions, the surge arrestor shall change over to
the conducting mode.
1.2.7 The surge arrestor shall be suitable for circuit breaker performing 0-0.3sec.-CO-3min-
CO- duty in the system.
1.2.8 Surge arrestors shall have a suitable pressure relief system to avoid damage to the
porcelain housing and providing path for flow of rated fault currents in the event of
arrestor failure.
1.2.9 The reference current of the arrestor shall be high enough to eliminate the influence
of grading and stray capacitance on the measured reference voltage.
1.2.10 The Surge Arrestor shall be thermally stable and the bidder shall furnish a copy of
thermal stability test with the bid.
1.2.11 The arrestors shall be suitable for mounting on steel structures/supporting
structures. The supplier shall furnish the drawing indicating the dimensions, weights
etc. of the surge arrestors for the design of supporting structure and foundations.
1.2.12 The arrestor shall be capable of handling thermal energy for high surges, external
pollution and transient over voltage and have low losses at operating voltages.
1.2.13 The arrester shall meet the line discharge requirement of class 3 for 145/36kV of IEC
on two successive operations.
1.3 ARRESTOR HOUSING
1.3.1 The arrestor housing shall be made up of completely vitrified porcelain. The porcelain
used shall be homogenous, free from laminations, cavities and other flaws of
imperfections that might affect the mechanical and dielectric quality. The glazing of
porcelain shall be of uniform brown colour, free from blisters, burrs and other similar
defects.
1.3.2 Arrestors shall be complete with insulating bases, fasteners for stacking units, surge
counters with leakage current meters and terminal connectors.
1.3.3 Porcelain housing shall be so coordinated that external flashover shall not occur
due to application of any impulse or switching surge voltage upto the maximum

Page 3 of 8
design value for arrestor. The arrestors shall not fail due to arrestor porcelain
contamination. The arrestors housing shall be designed for pressure relief class as
given in Technical Parameters of the specification.
1.3.4 Sealed housings shall exhibit no measurable leakage.
1.4 FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES
1.4.1 The surge arrestor shall be complete with all required fittings & accessories including
insulating bases, fasteners for stacking units together, surge counters with leakage
current meters and terminal connectors.
1.4.2 The terminals shall be non-magnetic, corrosion proof, robust and of adequate size
and shall be so located that incoming and outgoing connections are made with
minimum possible bends. The top metal cap and base of surge arrestor shall be
galvanized. The line terminal shall have a built in clamping device which can be
adjusted for both horizontal and vertical takeoff. Connectors shall be suitable for
“Twin ACSR Moose –31.77mm Φ”. Connectors as appropriate shall be suitable for
horizontal/vertical takeoff.
1.4.3 Grading corona control rings if necessary shall be provided on each complete arrestor
pole for proper stress distribution.
1.4.4 The earthing connection will be made through Surge Arrestor base and Surge monitor
to Ground.
1.5 SURGE MONITOR
1.5.1 A self-contained discharge counter suitably enclosed for outdoor use and requiring
no auxiliary or battery supply for operation shall be provided for each single pole
unit. Leakage current meter with suitable scale range to measure leakage current of
surge arrestor shall also be supplied within the same enclosure. The number of
operations performed by the arrestor shall be recorded by a suitable cyclometric
counter and surge monitor shall be provided with an inspection window.
Surge monitor shall be mounted on the support structure of the surge arrestor at a suitable
height so that the reading can be taken from ground level through the inspection window
and length of connecting leads upto grounding point and bends are minimum.

Page 4 of 8
1.6 TESTS
1.6.1 Test on Surge Arrestors
The Surge Arrestors offered shall be type tested and type test reports shall be
submitted and shall be subjected to routine and acceptance tests in accordance with
IEC 60099-4 .Surge arrestor monitor shall be connected in series with the test
specimen during residual voltage and current impulse tests to establish its
performance. Additional routine test with 100 A and 10kA, current impulse (8/20
micro sec) shall also be performed on surge monitor. Surge monitor shall also be
tested for water dip test at 1.5 meter for 30 minutes and no water vapors shall be
visible on monitor glass.
Galvanization Test
All Ferrous parts exposed to atmospheric condition shall have passed the type tests
and be subjected to routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IS:2633 & IS
6745.
1.7 NAME PLATE
1.7.1 The name plate attached to the arrestor shall carry the following information :
 Rated Voltage
 Continuous Operation Voltage
 Normal discharge current
 Pressure relief rated current
 Manufacturers Trade Mark
 Name of Sub-station
 Year of Manufacturer
 Name of the manufacture
 Name of Client
 Purchase Order Number along with date

Page 5 of 8
1.8 DRAWINGS AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS

1.8.1 The successful bidder shall furnish to the employer the following drawings and
literature for approval before inspection/dispatch:
a) Outline dimensional drawings of Surge Arrestor and all accessories.
b) Assembly drawings and weights of main component parts.
c) Drawings of terminal clamps.
d) Arrangement of earthing lead.
e) Minimum air clearance to be maintained of line components to ground.
f) Name plate
g) Insulating base
h) Surge monitor
i) Instructions manual
j) Drawing showing details of pressure relief valve
k) Volt-time characteristics of surge arrestors
l) Detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing i.e. internal diameter,
external diameter, thickness, height, profile, creepage distance, dry arcing
distance etc.
1.9 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
1.9.1 Surge Arrestor Technical Particulars for 132/33 kV Substations
TABLE-1.1
i. Type Heavy duty, station class, Gapless
Metal oxide, outdoor
ii. Arrestor rating (kV rms) 120 30
iii. Maximum Continuous Operating voltage 102 25
(kV rms)
iv. Standard Nominal Discharge Current 10 kA (8/20 micro impulse shape)
v. Line discharge class Class-3
vi. Degree of protection IP 55

Page 6 of 8
vii. Max. Steep current impulse residual 380 95

viii. Max. Lightening Impulse residual 340 85
ix. Max. switching surge residual voltage at 272 68
1 kA (kVp)
x. Partial discharge at 1.05 COV not less than 10pC
greater than
xi. Max. discharge capability 5Kj/kV
corresponding to rated voltage
xii. Low current long duration test value Current: 600 A; Duration:2400 µs
xiii. High current short duration test value 100kA
(4/10 µ second wave)
xiv. Minimum Corona Extinction Voltage 105 NA
(kVrms)
xv. Maximum partial discharge at less than 10pC
1.05*Continuous Over Voltage(COV)
xvi. Prospective symmetrical fault current 31.5 25
for pressure relief test for (0.2 sec) kA
1.9.2 Insulator Housing

TABLE-1.2
Pressure Relief Class Class À’

Page 7 of 8
The above parameters and minimum safety clearances are applicable for installations up to
an altitude of 1000m above mean sea level. For Dhungesaghu (1350 MSL) where altitude is
exceeding 1000m, an altitude correction factor of 1.25% per 100m or as recommended by
relevant IS/IEC or part thereof shall be applied.

Page 8 of 8
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER –2
CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS/VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER –2
CONTENTS
2.0 SCOPE 1
2.1 STANDARDS 1
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (VT)/CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE 2

2.2 TRANSFORMERS(CVT)
2.3 RATING PLATE 4
2.4 TERMINAL CONNECTOR 4
2.5 BUSHING 4
2.6 TESTS 4
2.7 GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 5
Section IV-B – Chapter-2 Contents

SECTION 4
CHAPTER - 2
2.0 SCOPE
transportation up to site, Testing & commissioning of 132 kV CVTs and 33 kV voltage
transformers (Electromagnetic type) as per IEC 60044-5/IS – 3156 & IEC 186 and per
technical requirement covered under this specification complete with all materials,
accessories and fittings, erection & maintenance tools & tackles, mandatory spares as
detailed in this specification.
2.0.2 The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering
practices to ensure satisfactory performance throughout the service life.
2.1 STANDARDS
The VT and CVT shall confirm to the following Nepal/Indian/International standards:
TABLE-2.0
IEC 60044-2 Inductive Voltage Transformer
IEC 60044-5 Voltage/Capacitive voltage transformers Standards
IS : 3156 – 1992 ( Part I – 3 ) Specification for voltage transformer
IS : 335 – 1993 Specification for new insulating oil
IS : 5621 – 1980 Hollow insulator for use in electrical equipment
IS : 27071 – 1974 Method of HV testing
IS : 2633 – 1986 Methods for testing uniformity of coating of Zinc
coated articles
IS : 4253 – 1980 Specifications for gaskets
IS : 5561 – 1970 Electric power connector ( heavy duty ) electric
Section IV-B, Chapter-1 Page 1 of 7

IS : 1554 – 1988 (Part – I) PVC insulated ( Heavy duty ) electric cables

IS : 9348 Specification for coupling capacitors and capacitor
Divider
IS : 11322 Specification for partial discharge measurement in
instrument transformer.
IEC-60358 Coupling Capacitors and Capacitor divider
IEC-186 Voltage transformer
2.2 CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS(CVT)/VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER

2.2.2 General
i) CVT comprising of a capacitor divider unit and electromagnetic unit shall be
single phase oil filled, hermetically sealed, self cooled, outdoor type and
suitable for direct line connection without any fuse or isolating switch. The
secondary terminals of potential unit high frequency coupling terminals and the
earthing terminals shall be brought at separately and housed in a water proof
cabinet. The electromagnetic voltage transformer unit of CVT whose primary is
to be fed by the intermediate tapping of capacitor divider shall be of oil
immersed, self cooled design and shall be suitable for metering, protection and
synchronization. The primary winding shall be connected through a
compensating reactor to compensate the voltage increase at intermediate
tapping within the range of rated burden. Each CVT shall be provided with a
suitable damping device so that Ferro resonance oscillation due to saturation of
iron core or any inductance connected in parallel with it and initiated by either
overvoltage on the network side shall be near zero. A device such as spark gap
may be incorporated for limiting overvoltage which may appear across one or
more of CVT components.
ii) The VT shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and hermetically sealed
with stainless bellow or other suitable type of device (acceptable to Employer)
for absorbing variations in the volume of oil due to change of temperature of oil
to eliminate breathing and to prevent air and moisture from entering the tanks.

Method adopted for hermetic sealing shall be described in the offer or during
detailed engineering and shall be subject to approval of the Employer. Oil filling
and / oil sampling cocks, if provided to facilitate factory processing shall be
permanently sealed before dispatching the VT.
iii) The VT shall be so constructed that it can be easily transported to site within
the allowable transport limitations and in horizontal position if the transport
limitations so demand.
2.2.2 Primary Winding
The primary winding shall be of suitably insulated electrolytic copper wire. Type of
insulation used to be described in the offer.
i) The rating and diagram plate specified elsewhere in this specification shall also
indicate the above re-connection arrangement.
2.2.3 Secondary Winding
i) Suitably insulated copper wire of electrolytic grade shall be used for secondary
winding and type of insulation used shall be described in the offer. The secondary
winding of the Voltage transformer shall be protected by MCBs for each core.
ii) The VT secondary terminals shall be brought out in a weather proof terminal box. The
MCBs meant for protection of secondary winding shall also be located in the terminal
box. The terminal box shall be provided with removable gland plate and glands
suitable for 1100 volts grade, PVC insulated, PVC sheathed multi core 2.5 sq mm to
10 sq mm. stranded copper (vermin proof) and suitable arrangement shall be
provided for drying of air inside the terminal box. The dimensions of the opening of
the terminal box shall be adequate to enable easy access and working space with the
use of normal tools.
iii) Polarity shall be marked on each Voltage transformer at the secondary terminals in
the terminals box.
iv) The VT shall be provided with a rating plate with dimensions and markings as per IS:
3156. The marking shall be punched.

v) The primary terminals shall be of standard size of 30 mm x 80 mm length for all VTs.
The primary terminal shall be of heavily tinned electrolytic copper of 99.9% purity.
The minimum thickness of tinning shall be of 15 microns.
vi) For external connections of secondary windings, terminal studs shall be provided
with at least three nuts, plain and spring washers. The studs, nuts and washers, shall
be of brass, properly nickel plated. The size of the studs shall be 6 mm outside
diameter. A length of at least 15 mm shall be available on the studs for inserting the
leads.
2.3 RATING PLATE
2.3.1 Each VT shall be riveted with a non –corrosive & non –rusting rating plate made of
brass / anodized aluminum with all particulars marked as per IS – 3156 & IEC –186
amended up to date. Another similar plate showing connection diagram shall be
provided on each VT. Purchase order number and date shall be clearly written on
both the plates. Name of client, customer & consultant shall be mentioned.
2.4 TERMINAL CONNECTORS
2.4.1 All the Voltage transformers required shall be provided with appropriate rigid type
connectors suitable for Twin ACSR “Moose – 31.77 mm Φ”. Connectors shall be
suitable for horizontal/vertical takeoff with double conductor per phase.
2.5 BUSHING
2.5.1 Bushing shall be of high grade & homogeneous porcelain and shall comply with the
requirement of IS-5621. Make of bushing shall be got approved from the Employer
before commencement of supplies.
2.6 TESTS
2.6.1 Each VT/CVT shall comply with the type tests as stipulated in latest edition of
applicable IS/IEC. Reports of all type tests carried out on the offered equipment shall
be supplied. VT & CVT’s offered shall be subjected to routine and acceptance tests in
accordance with applicable Standards.

2.7 GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

2.7.1 Guaranteed & other technical particulars as called for shall be furnished with the
tender. Any other particulars considered necessary by the supplier may also be given
in addition to those listed. Incomplete tender will be rejected out rightly.
TABLE-2.1
SL.NO DESCTIPTION
(i) Rated voltage kV (rms) 132 33
(ii) Max System Voltage kV (rms) 145 36
(iii) Rated frequency 50(Hz)
(iv) System Earthing Solidly Earthed
(v) Short circuit level for one second kA 31.5 kA 25 kA
(rms)
(vi) Rated primary operating voltage 132/3 (kV) 33/3 (kV)
(vii) Rated secondary voltage

 Winding No.1 110/3 V
(viii) Class of accuracy of Each secondary
winding
 Winding No.1 3P
 Winding No.2 0.2
 Winding No.3 3P
(ix) Temperature rise As per IS 3156 & IEC 60044-2& 60044-5
(x) Voltage factor 1.5 for 30 sec. , 1.2 Continuous
(xi) Rated Insulation level
a) Rated voltage kV 132 33

b) 1.2 /50 micro sec. impulse 650 170

c) One minute dry power frequency 275 70
(xii) Rated burden (VA)
 Wdg I 50
 Wdg II 30
 Wdg III 50
(xiii) Standards reference range Of frequency 96 % to 102 % for protection and 99 % to
for which the Accuracy’s are valid 101 % for measurement
(xiv) One minute power frequency test 3
Withstand voltage for secondary
winding (kV rms)
(xv) Partial discharge level (Pico coulombs ) <10
(xvi) Rated Capacitance (picco-farad) 4400 NA
(+10%to -5%)
(xvii) Minimum Corona extinction Voltage 105
(kVrms)
(xviii) Maximum Radio interference voltage 500
156 kVrms)
(xix) Equivalent resistance over entire carrier < 40
frequency range (ohms) for CVT < 40
Insulator Housing
TABLE-2.3
Voltage Level (kV) 132 33


altitude of 1000m above mean sea level. For Dhungesaghu (1350 MSL) where altitude is

Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER – 3
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 3
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
CONTENTS

3.0 SCOPE 1
3.1 STANDARDS 1
3.2 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES 2
3.3 TERMINAL CONNECTORS 4
3.4 TERMINALS BOX 4
3.5 CO-ORDINATION 5
3.6 TEMPERATURE RISE 5
3.7 INSULATING OIL 5
3.8 RATING PLATE 5
3.9 TESTS 6
3.10 GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 6
3.11 DRAWINGS AND MATERIALS 6
3.12 BUSHING 6
3.13 FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES 7
3.14 MATERIALS AND WORKMENSHIP 7

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 3
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
3.0 SCOPE
Transportation upto site, Testing & commissioning of 132 kV and 33 kV current
transformers (CTs) for outdoor substation. The CTs are required for the protection
and metering purposes for Construction 132/33 kV substations at Dhunge Sangu in
Nepal complete with all materials, accessories and fittings, erection & maintenance
tools & tackles, mandatory spares as detailed in this specification.
3.1 STANDARDS
3.1.1 The CTs shall confirm to the following Indian/International standards as amended
upto date where specified otherwise:-
TABLE-3.0
IEC 60044-1 Specification, operation and maintenance for current
transformers
IS: 2705-1992(Part I, II,III, IV) Specification for current transformers
IS:335-1993 Insulating oil
IS: 5621-1980 Hollow insulators
IS: 2071-1974(Part II) Method of HV testing
IS: 2633-1986 Method for testing uniformity of zinc coating
IS: 4253-1980 Gaskets
IS:-5561-1970 Electric power connectors
IS: 1554-1988(Part I) PVC insulated (Heavy duty) electric cables

Page 1 of 13
IEC 185 Old edition of Current Transformers
3.2 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES

3.2.1 The 132/33 kV CTs shall be out door type, Single phase, oil immersed, self cooled&
hermetically sealed suitable for the services indicated. VA burden, accuracy class,
accuracy limit factor etc. required for 132/33 kV CTs shall be worked out by bidder as
per the system requirements. CTs shall be of live tank for 132 kV, dead tank/live tank
for 33 kV. The characteristics shall be such as to provide satisfactory performance for
burden ranging from 25% to 100% of rated burden over a range of 10% to 100% of
rated current in case of metering CTs and upto the accuracy limit/knee point voltage
in case of relaying CTs.
3.2.2 The core of the CTs shall be non-aging, high grade silicon laminated steel of low
hysteresis loss & high permeability to ensure high accuracy at both normal & over
currents and shall be of low reactance type so as to produce undistorted secondary
current under transient conditions at all the ratios. The cores to be used for
protective relaying purposes shall be of specified accuracy. The magnetization curve
for the cores shall be furnished after the selection of CTs. The saturation factor of this
core shall be low enough as not to cause any damage to the measuring instruments
in the event of maximum short circuit current.
3.2.3 The primary winding (bar/wound type) should be of electrolyte high conductivity
copper. Sufficient area of cross section shall be provided to cater for the short time
as well as continuous thermal current ratings under site conditions. The main
insulation shall be of paper of oil combination having good mechanical strength with
superior electrical properties and good aging qualities to ensure long trouble free
service. The rated extended primary current shall not be less than 15% of the rated
primary current.
3.2.4 The secondary winding shall be high conductivity copper of suitable cross section.
The copper wire shall have enamel insulation and paper insulation may also be
provided to enhance reliability. For obtaining different ratios, either the secondary

Page 2 of 13
winding may be suitably tapped or a number of identical primary windings with series
parallel arrangement may be provided. The rating of the secondary winding shall be
one ampere for all protections except where the CTs are delta connected. It shall be
0.577 A.
3.2.5 The CTs shall be hermetically sealed with stainless steel bellows or other suitable
type of device (acceptable to Employer) for absorbing variations in the volume of oil
due to change of temperature of oil to eliminate breathing and to prevent air &
moisture from entering into the tank. It will be ensured that shape of external parts
is such that the rain water does not accumulate. The CTs shall be provided with oil
level gauge marked with maximum & minimum levels. Background of oil level gauge
shall be snow white for clear visibility of oil. Pressure relief valve shall be provided
for releasing abnormal pressure. A filling plug at the top and drain valve at the
bottom shall be provided. Suitable no of cable glands for 4C, 6 mm2 copper PVC
cables shall be provided. All ferrous parts including nuts, bolts, washers etc. shall be
hot dip galvanized. All necessary lifting lugs & fixing lugs with bolts nuts etc. shall be
provided.
3.2.6 The equipment shall be suitable for fixing on supporting structures. The CTs shall be
provided with terminal connectors suitable for connections with other equipment at
site. The corresponding parts of similar items shall be interchangeable in every
respect. The connectors shall be bimetallic if connection is required between
aluminum and copper.
3.2.7 The upper tank shall be of high quality steel/light alloy which will serve as upper
termination and carry primary terminals which shall be of sufficient cross-section
suitable for mounting terminal connectors. The upper tank shall also serve as an
expansion chamber or contain suitable provisions for taking care of the effects of
temperature variations on oil. A pressure relief valve shall also be provided in the
upper tank for safety against abnormal pressure rise inside the CT.
3.2.8 The lower tank shall be of welded steel plate construction. The base construction
shall be suitable for mounting on raised steel structures to be provided by the

Page 3 of 13
contractor and shall have fixing lugs and lifting holes/lugs of adequate strength. The
dimensions of the base plate of supporting structure shall be as per requirement for
fixing the CT. Necessary provisions shall also be made on the lower tank for two
independent earthing connections with GI flat.

All the current transformers required shall be provided with appropriate rigid type
connectors suitable for Twin ACSR “Moose– 31.77 mm Φ”. Connectors shall be
suitable for horizontal/vertical takeoff with twin conductor per phase.
3.4 TERMINALS BOX

The leads from the secondary shall be brought out near the bottom of CT and
connected to terminals in the terminals box. The terminals box shall be of weather
proof construction with locking arrangement. An engraved diagram of terminal
connections with various taps unaffected by weather conditions throughout the life
of the equipment shall be mounted permanently on the inside of the door. A proper
seal shall be provided all around the door to check the ingress of moisture/dust into
the terminal box. The internal arrangement of the terminal box shall permit
convenient handling of connectors to the outgoing PVC insulated and steel wire
armoured copper cables of 6 mm2 size entering form below. The distance between
top of the secondary terminal & door of terminal box should not be less 2 inches.
The secondary of all CTs shall be fitted with shorting links in the terminal box before
dispatch. Further the shorting terminals shall be provided in the terminal box, so that
any cable can be disconnected/ratio changed and C.T. earthed. All terminal of control
circuits are to be wired up to marshalling box plus 20% spare evenly distributed on all
terminal blocks.

Page 4 of 13
3.5 CO-ORDINATION
The characteristics of the CTs e.g. VA burden, accuracy class, ALF, minimum knee
point voltage, maximum exciting current, secondary winding resistance etc. for
protection CTs shall be calculated by the bidder for the protection schemes supplied
and these shall be subject to the approval of Employer. Similarly the particulars of
CTs for metering requirement shall be approved by the Employer as per the
requirements of metering at various feeders.
3.6 TEMPERATURE RISE

The maximum temperature attained by any part of the equipment in service at site
under full load conditions and exposed continuously to the direct rays of the sun shall
not exceed the permissible limits fixed by the application standard, when corrected
for the difference between the ambient temperature at site & the ambient
temperature specified by the IEC 60044-1 & IS 2705 standard.
3.7 INSULATING OIL

The insulating oil shall comply with the requirement of IS:335-1993 as amended up to
date with the characteristics as stipulated in Table I therein. In addition, the oil shall
be subjected to agency test in accordance with the procedure laid down in ASTM-D-
1934 and after accelerated aging shall have the characteristics as stipulated in Table-
2 of this Standard.
3.8 RATING PLATE

Each CT shall be riveted with a non-corrosive & non-rusting engraved rating plate
made of brass/anodized aluminum with all particulars marked as per IS-2705 & IEC-
60044-1 amended up to date. Another similar plate showing connection diagram
shall also be provided on each CT. Employer Order number and date shall be clearly
written on both the plates along with name of Employer and manufacturer.

Page 5 of 13
3.9 TESTS
3.9.1 Each CT shall comply with the type test as stipulated in latest edition of IEC 60044-1,
IS-2705, Part I to IV or IEC-185.Reports of all the type tests carried out on the offered
equipment shall be supplied.
3.10 GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS

The technical particulars shall be furnished with the tender. Any other particulars
considered necessary by the supplier may also be given.
3.11 DRAWINGS AND MATERIALS

The tender shall supply all the relevant drawings of the equipment including
dimensional drawings, sectional view drawings, drawings showing inside details of
tank, terminals box, secondary terminals, insulator, flange etc. as detailed below. The
tender shall also supply illustrated and descriptive literature of offered equipment.
a) General arrangement of CT
b) Burden(VA) calculations for each core
c) Magnetizing characteristic, ratio and phase angle error curves & composite
curves of CT, CT resistance, knee point voltage etc.
d) Secondary terminal arrangement of transformer, terminals box, etc.
e) Type test report
f) Sectional view drawing of CT.
g) Mounting arrangement
h) Earthing
3.12 BUSHING
Bushings shall be of high grade homogeneous porcelain & shall comply with the
requirement of IEC 60044-1, IS-5621. Make of bushing shall be got approved from
the Employer before commencement of supplies. These shall be rated for the altitude
of operation.

Page 6 of 13
3.13 FITTINGS & ACCESSORIES

A list of fittings and accessories required to be incorporated/supplied with the CTs is
given below:
a) Primary terminals
b) Terminal connectors for connections from line to the CT primary
c) Oil level gauge
d) Pressure relief valve
e) Expansion chamber with steel bellows or other suitable type of device
(acceptable to Employer) for absorbing variations in the volume of oil due to
change of temperature of oil.
f) Weather proof secondary terminal box fitted with hinged door and complete
with terminals and shorting links, lugs/holes and CT secondary details engraved
on inside of cover.
g) Lifting lugs/holes.
h) Fixing lugs with bolts, units and washers for holding down the CTs on the
supporting steel structures.
i) Rating and connections diagram plates, indicating all the CT particulars such as
VA, class, ALF, knee point voltage with exciting current, secondary winding
resistance, taps, purpose and warning sign not to open CT.
j) Oil filling plug and drain valve.
k) Two earth connections on tank of suitable size to connect to the grounding grid.
l) Any other fittings/accessories not included above but which is required shall be
supplied with the CTs.
3.14 MATERIALS AND WORKMENSHIP

3.14.1 All material used in the manufacturing of equipment shall be new and of best quality
obtainable of their respective kinds & the whole of the work shall be of the highest
class well finished and of approved design & make. Casting shall be free from blow
holes, flaw cracks & other defects & shall be smooth, close grained of the true form &

Page 7 of 13
dimension. All machined surfaces shall be true & smooth finished. Electrolytic,
99.99% pure copper should be used and it should not be re-conditioned.
TABLE-3.1 Technical Particulars of Current Transformer for 132 KV Line bay
v. Current rating(A) 1200-600-300/1-1-1-1-1

kV
voltage (kV rms)

Page 8 of 13
xi. 1. core-1 PS
2. core-2 PS
3. core-3 0.2
4. core-4 PS
5. core-5 PS

xvi. Max.RIV for frequency between 0.5 to 2 MHz 500 µV at 92kV
TABLE-3.2 Technical Particulars of Current Transformer for 132 KV Transformer bay
v. Current rating(A) 600-300/1-1-1-1-1

Page 9 of 13

kV
voltage (kV rms)
xi. 1. core-1 PS
2. core-2 PS
3. core-3 0.2
4. core-4 PS
5. core-5 PS

xvi. Max.RIV for frequency between 0.5 to 2 MHz 500 at 92kV

Page 10 of 13
TABLE-3.3 Technical Particulars for 33 KV Line bay and Transformer bay CT
v. Current rating(A) 600-300/1-1-1-1

voltage (kVrms)

Bay
xi. 1. core-1 PS PS
2. core-2 0.2 0.2
3. core-3 5P20 5P20
4. core-4 5P20 5P20

Page 11 of 13


TABLE-3.4 Technical Particulars for 33 KV NCT
v. Current rating(A) 50-100/1-1A

voltage (kVrms)

Page 12 of 13

Bay
xi. 1. core-1 PS PS
2. core-2 5P20 5P20


TABLE-3.5: Technical Particulars for Insulator Housing
Voltage Level(kV) 132 33

Power frequency withstand test voltage (wet) (kV 275 70
rms)
relevant IS/IEC or part thereof shall be applied

Page 13 of 13
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER – 4
145/36 kV ISOLATOR AND ISOLATOR WITH EARTH SWITCH

SECTION 4
CHAPTER – 4
CONTENTS
S.NO DESCRIPTION PAGE NO

4.0 SCOPE 1
4.1 STANDARDS 1
4.2 TYPE & RATINGS 2
4.3 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES 3
4.4 MAIN CONTACTS 4
4.5 POST INSULATORS 4
4.6 CONNECTORS 5
4.7 OPERATING MECHANISM 5
4.8 SPACE HEATER & LIGHTING IN THE CUBICLE 7
4.9 BEARINGS 7
4.10 INTERLOCKS 8
4.11 AUXILIARY SWITCHES 8
4.12 ISOLATOR MOUNTING STRUCTURE 9
4.13 EARTHING SWITCHES 10
4.14 WIRING 10
4.15 DESIGN, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 11
4.16 TESTS 12
4.17 CABLE GLANDS 12
4.18 DRAWING AND LITERATURE 12
4.19 NAME PLATES 13
4.20 SPARES 14
4.21 OPERATING HANDLE 14
4.22 COMPLETENESS 15

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 4

4.0 SCOPE
Transportation upto site, testing & commissioning of the outdoor type 145 kV/36 kV
gang operated isolators and isolator cum earthing switches complete in all respects
with insulators, bimetallic connectors, arcing contacts, operating mechanism,
interlocks, auxiliary switches, indicating devices, supporting structures, fixing details
etc. with all materials, accessories and fittings, erection & maintenance tools &
tackles, mandatory spares as detailed in this specification.
4.1 STANDARDS
4.1.1 The isolators shall comply in all respects to the latest applicable
Nepal/Indian/International standards as listed hereunder:
TABLE-4.0
i) IEC 62271-102 Standards for high Voltage Switchgear
ii) IS 209:1992 Zinc ingot
iii) IS 456:1978 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
iv) IS 802:1977 Code of practice for use of structural steel inoverhead
transmission line towers. Part-I/Part-II, material loads and
permissible stress.
iv) IS 1363 : 1992 Hexagon head bolts, screws & nuts of product grade.

Page 1 of 19
v) IS 1852 : 1985 Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products.
vi) IS 2062 : 1992 Steel for general structural purpose
vii) IS 2071: 1981 High voltage test technique
viii) IS 2544 : 1973 Porcelain post-insulators for system with nominal voltage
greater than 1000V
ix) IS 2629 : 1985 Recommended practice for hot-dip galvanizing on iron and
steel.
x) IS 2633 1986 Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated
articles.
xi) IS 3063 : 1994 Fasteners single and rectangular section spring washers.
xii) IS 3716 : 1994 Application guide for insulation coordination.
xiii) IS 5350 : 1970 Dimensions of indoor and outdoor porcelain post insulators
and post insulators and post insulator unit for system with
nominal voltage greater than 1000 V.
xiv) 1S 5561:1970 Electric power connectors
xv) IS: 6639: 1972 Hexagonal bolts for steel structures.
xvi) IS : 6745 : 1972 Method for determination of mass of zinc coating on zinc and
steel articles
xvii IS 9921 : 1981 Alternating current dis-connectors (isolators) and earthing
switches for voltages above 1000 V.
xviii) IS : 2063 : 1987 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures
of electrical equipment.
xix) IEC : 694 Common specifications for high-voltage switch gear and
control gear standards.
4.2 TYPE & RATINGS

4.2.1 All Isolators required shall be centre break, double pole, single throw, gang operated,
with one control cabinet, outdoor type, silver plated contacts with pressure release
mechanism for main contacts with horizontal operating blades & insulator posts
arranged vertically. Isolators with earth switch shall be provided in addition to above

Page 2 of 19
one vertical break, earthing blade per pole suitable for fixing on either side of the
poles.
4.2.2 All Isolators blades shall have rotating blade feature and pressure relieving
mechanism. All Isolators shall move sufficiently from their fully closed position to the
fully open position so that the break is distinct and clearly visible from the ground
level. The isolator blades shall be suitable for locking in the open/closed position and
shall not fall to the closed/open position in case the operating shaft gets
disconnected.
4.2.3 The equipment offered by the bidder shall be designed for a normal current rating
specified in technical particulars of the specification and suitable for continuous
service at the system voltage specified herein. The isolators offered shall not be
required to operate under load but they shall be capable at the system voltage
specified i.e. 145/36 kV as appropriate to handle make and break:
(i) Magnetization currents of 132/33 kV, 15 MVA Power Transformers and
capacitive currents of bushing, bus bars, connections, very short length of
cables & currents of voltage transformers and dividers.
(ii) The capacitive charging currents of unloaded transmission lines as indicated in
the technical particulars.
4.3 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
4.3.1 Insulators shall be of porcelain and conform to IS-2544. The Insulator stack shall
comprise of minimum number of post insulators or single piece long rod type.
Pressure due to the contacts not transferred to the insulators after the main blades
are fully closed.
4.3.2 The base channels & other structural steel members such as operating pipes,
handles, phase coupling rods, operating mechanism boxes, bolts, pins etc. shall be of
requisite strength and hot dip galvanized to ensure operational stability. All castings
except current carrying parts shall be made of malleable cast iron & cast steel.
4.3.3 Arcing horns shall be provided to protect the insulators.

Page 3 of 19
4.4 MAIN CONTACTS

All Isolators shall have heavy duty, self aligning, silver plated contacts or with silver
inserts. The various parts should be accordingly finished to ensure interchangeability
of similar components. The switch blades forming the moving contacts shall be made
from tubular section of hard drawn aluminum having suitable dia. and shell thickness.
Main contacts shall be self aligning and self cleaning.
4.4.1 These contacts shall be liberally dimensioned so as to withstand safely the highest
short circuit currents and over voltages that may be encountered during service at
site. The surface of the contacts shall be rendered smooth and silver plated of
thickness not less than 25 micros and it should be of high quality and shaped so as to
ensure strong wiping and self cleaning operation. In nut shell, the male and female
contact assemblies shall be of substantial construction and design of these
assemblies shall ensure:-
a) Electro dynamic withstand ability during short circuits without any risk of
repulsion of contacts.
b) Thermal withstand ability during short circuits.
c) Constant contact pressure even when the live parts of the insulator unit stacks
are subjected to tensile stresses due to linear expansion of connected bus-bar
or flexible conductors either because of temperature variation or strong winds.
d) Wiping action during closing and opening.
e) Self alignment assuring closing of the switch without minute adjustments.
4.5 POST INSULATORS
4.5.1 The post insulators shall conform to IS-2544-1973 (amended to date) and
IS-5350-1971 (amended to date). The insulators selected shall be for use in highly
polluted atmosphere and shall be specifically suited to meet the particular
requirement of torsion strength and cantilever loads which they will be called upon

Page 4 of 19
to resist during service and at the rated voltage. Pressure due to contact shall not be
transferred to the insulators after the main blades are fully closed.
4.5.2 The Electrical and Mechanical values for the complete stack should in no way be less
than those specified in IS for effectively earthed system.
4.6 CONNECTORS
4.6.1 Each Isolators shall be provided with appropriate number (6 number minimum) of
Bimetallic connectors suitable for Twin ACSR “Moose- 31.77 mm Φ” Conductor, as
appropriate for a particular application.
4.6.2 The maximum length of the jumpers that may be safely connected or any special
instructions considered necessary to avoid undue load on the post insulators should
be stated by bidders in their offer.
4.7 OPERATING MECHANISM

4.7.1 The 145/36 kV isolators shall be motor operated and remote controlled from the
control room. The motor operated isolators shall also be suitable for local manual
operation and shall have controls for electrical operation. The Isolators shall also be
provided with manual operating mechanism. These shall be provided with ÒN’ and
OFF’ indicators and padlocking arrangements for locking in both the end positions,
to avoid un-intentional operation. The isolating distance should also be visible for
Isolators.
4.7.2 Operating mechanism shall provide a quick, simple and effective operation. The
degree of protection shall be IP-55.
4.7.3 The manual operating handles shall be mounted on the base of supporting structure.
Guide bearings shall be provided as necessary at a height of 1100 mm above the
ground level. All brackets, angles, guides, guide bearings or other member necessary
for attaching the operating mechanism and operating handles to the supporting
structure and foundations shall be supplied as an integral part of each Isolator. All
bearings shall be weather protected by means of covers & grease retainers.

Page 5 of 19
4.7.4 The ganging of operating mechanism shall be provided with sufficient adjustment to
allow for final alignment of the Isolator blades for simultaneous operation. Adjustable
stops shall be provided to prevent over travel in both directions.
4.7.5 The Isolator and associated operating mechanism shall be such that Isolator cannot
come out of their open or closed positions by gravity, wind pressure, vibrations,
reasonable shocks, or accidental touching of connecting rods of the operating
mechanism. Isolators shall be capable of resisting in closed position, the dynamic and
thermic effects of maximum possible short circuit current at its terminals. They shall
be so constructed that they do not open under the influence of the short circuit
current. The operating mechanism should be of robust construction, easy to operate
by a single person and conveniently located for local operation in the switchyard. All
the three phases are required to be opened or closed simultaneously. The
mechanism should be adjustable type and shall further be suitable for fitting
necessary interlocks and auxiliary switches and shall be provided with terminal
boxes for control and supply cables.
4.7.6 The operating mechanism electrically operated shall comprise one control cabinet for
each isolator equipped with requisite electrical devices and necessary terminal
blocks for termination of inter pole wiring.
4.7.7 The control cabinet of the mechanism shall be made of 12 SWG (2.64 mm thick) sheet
steel duly hot dip galvanized or casting. Hinged door shall be provided with pad
locking arrangement. Sloping rain hood shall be provided to cover all sides. 15 mm
thick neoprene or better type of gaskets shall be provided to ensure degree of
protection of at least IP55 as per IS: 2147. The cabinet shall be suitable for mounting
on support structure with adjustment for vertical alignment. Details of these
arrangements shall be furnished along with the tender or during detailed
engineering.
4.7.8 DUTY REQUIREMENTS

Page 6 of 19
Isolators and earth switches shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and
thermal effects of the maximum possible short circuit current of the systems in their
closed position. They shall be constructed such that they do not open under
influence of short circuit current. The isolator shall be capable of making/breaking
normal currents when no significant change in voltage occurs across the terminals of
each pole of isolator on account of make/break operation for bus transfer current
switching capacity as per IEC 62271-102.
4.8 SPACE HEATER & LIGHTING IN THE CUBICLE
4.8.1 The cubicle shall be provided with a space heater of suitable rating along with a
thermostat. It shall be operated from 230 V Single Phase, 50 Hz supply. There shall
be a double pole, MCB whose rating shall match with the space heater.
4.8.2 A LED of 7 W rating shall also be provided for lighting. 5/15 A, socket of reputed
makes along with switch shall also be provided. No fuse shall be acceptable and
instead of it, MCBs shall be provided where ever required.
4.9 BEARINGS
4.9.1 The design and construction of the various bearings shall embody all the features
required to withstand climatic condition specified, so as to ensure dependable and
effective operation even after long periods of inactive action of the Isolators. All
bearings in the current path, except those specifically designed as `high pressure
contacts, should be shunted by flexible copper conductors of adequate cross-section.
Bearing housings should be weather proof. Facilities should be provided for
lubrication of the bearings.
4.9.2 All bearings shall be filled with first fill of grease and provided with nipples for
servicing.
4.9.3 Thrust bearing /double roller or ball bearings shall be provided for the rotating
Insulator. These shall be protected from the weather by means of covers and grease
retainers. Bearing pressure shall be kept low to ensure long life and ease of

Page 7 of 19
operation.
4.9.4 All bearings must be of reputed and well known make and shall be subject to the
approval of the Employer to its entire satisfaction.
4.10 INTERLOCKS
4.10.1 Isolators shall be provided with padlocking facility to lock them in fully open & fully
closed positions. Padlocks with keys shall be supplied with Isolators.
4.10.2 Isolators shall be provided with electrical as well as mechanical interlocking feature. It
should not open when the associated circuit breaker is in closed position. It may be in
the form of bolt interlock comprising a coil of latch-in type to lock the Isolator driving
shaft and thus prevent Isolator operation in the latch-in condition. It shall be possible
to release the latch by energizing the coil when certain preset conditions of the
interlocking scheme are fulfilled. Further, a separate bypass switch shall be provided
on local cabinet to facilitate emergency manual operation of Isolator. The interlock
should of robust design of some repute `make’& contained in weather proof & dust
tight housing of IP-54.
4.10.3 Manual operating mechanism through crank and reduction gear shall be provided for
the earth switch. The operation of earth switch will be gang operated. The operation
of earth switch shall also be electrically inter-locked with circuit breaker and isolator
to prevent closing of earth switch when CB or isolator are closed and vice-versa.
4.10.4 The individual interlocking arrangement shall be provided and the interlocking coil
shall be suitable for continuous operation from DC supply.
4.11 AUXILIARY SWITCHES

4.11.1 Isolators shall be provided with 110 V. D.C. auxiliary switches for their remote
position indication on control board and for electrical interlocking with other
equipment.

Page 8 of 19
4.11.2 The switches shall have normally open and normally closed contacts. All contacts
should be brought out on terminals including spare ones. The auxiliary switches shall
be of robust construction, reputed make and housed in weather-proof and dust tight
covers mounted on the respective operating mechanism. It shall be possible to
change normally closed contacts into normally open contacts and vice versa at site.
The auxiliary switches shall strictly conform to IS:9921 in all respects. The auxiliary
switches & auxiliary circuits shall be capable of carrying current of at least 10 A
continuously and breaking of the current equivalent to at least 6A at 110 V DC with
circuit time constant not less than 20 ms.
4.12 ISOLATOR MOUNTING STRUCTURE

4.12.1 All isolators shall be suitable for mounting on galvanized steel structure of minimum
height of 2.5 meters. The mounting structures shall be fabricated out of steel
conforming to IS-2062 and designed in accordance IS-808. The structure shall be
galvanized as per IS-2633, IS-2629 etc.
4.12.2 All Isolators shall be mounted rigidly in an upright position on their own supporting
structures and not on the line or bus bar structures. Details of the supporting
structures shall be supplied with the bid. The Isolators should have requisite fixing
fixtures ready for mounting them and such structures.
4.12.3 All the equipment including the Isolators, supporting channels inter connecting pipes
for the poles as well as the stacks on the same pole, down pipe, G.I. rods, operating
mechanism shall be included in the scope of supply. Provision shall also be made for
proper grounding of the down pipe rods when such rod handles are required for
manual operation.
4.12.4 The vertical down pipe/operating pipe for Isolators shall be `B’ class G.I. Pipes of 32
mm outer dia. (minimum), hot dip Galvanized. The pipe/phase coupling pipe for
Isolators shall be `B’ `class G.I. Pipe of 19 mm outer dia.(minimum), hot dip
galvanized. The base channels for isolator will also be hot dip Galvanized.

Page 9 of 19
4.12.5 The frame of each Isolator shall be provided with reliable earthing terminal at two
ends for connection to earthing conductor suitable for specified fault current.
Note: All mild steel components shall be properly galvanized as the humidity at site is
condensing in nature. On each structure provision shall be made to earth it at two
points.
4.13 EARTHING SWITCHES

4.13.1 Earthing switch shall be locally/manually operated. It shall be constructional
interlocked with the isolator so that the earthing switch can be operated only when
the isolator is open and line is de-energized.
4.13.2 The switch shall be of the same current carrying capacity as the main blades. Each
earthing switch shall be provided with flexible copper strips for connections to
ground mat .These blades shall have the same short time current rating as the earth
blade.
4.13.3 The earthing switch shall be of non-ferrous material and the design shall match the
quality with that of the main isolating switch except that high pressure contacts are
not required.
4.13.4 The plane of movement and final position of the earth blades shall be such that
adequate electrical clearances are obtained from adjacent live parts.
4.13.5 The frame of each isolator & earthing switch shall be provided with two reliable earth
terminals for connection to the earth mat.
4.13.6 Earth switch shall consist of three earthing links per isolator which will normally rest
against the frames when the connected isolator is in closed position.
4.13.7 Earthing switch shall be capable of discharging trapped charges of the associated line.
4.14 WIRING
4.14.1 The auxiliary wiring shall consist of suitable colour/marked P.V.C. (non inflammable)
insulated electrolytic copper wires conforming to IS-694 and IS-1554 (Part-1). The

Page 10 of 19
control wiring shall be of 2.5 mm2 size. The cables for remote operation position
indication and interlocking shall be P.V.C. insulated having copper conductors. The
control terminal blocks of 1100 V rated shall be of current rating of 45 A.
4.14.2 The internal wiring shall be terminated with solder less crimping type of tinned
copper lugs. Not more than two leads shall be terminated in one terminal. Double
compression chromium plated cable glands shall be provided. The terminal blocks
shall be mounted on the mounting rails in vertical position only, such that sufficient
space is available to terminate external cables. At least five spare terminals shall be
provided.
4.14.3 A complete wiring diagram of the interlocking circuit and auxiliary switches should be
furnished by the bidder.
4.15 DESIGN, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

4.15.1 The successful bidder shall ensure full responsibility for the co-ordinated and
adequate design. All materials used in the construction of the equipment shall be of
the appropriate class, well finished and of approved design and make. All similar
parts should be accurately finished and interchangeable.
4.15.2 All ferrous parts shall be made of malleable cast iron or cast steel and hot dip
galvanized in accordance with IS-2633. Special attention shall be paid to give tropical
treatment to all the equipment as it will be subjected during service to extremely
severe exposure to atmospheric moisture and to long periods of high temperature.
All current carrying parts shall be of non-ferrous metal or alloys and shall be designed
to limit sharp points/edges and similar shape faces.
4.15.3 The temperature rise for the various parts shall be as per relevant IS.
Due to condensing type of humidity in Nepal the equipment is very much prone to
rust. The manufacture must ensure that galvanized is properly done to mitigate such
eventualities.

Page 11 of 19
4.16 TESTS
4.16.1 Each Isolator, earthing switch and Insulator shall strictly comply with the
requirements of all the type tests and shall be subjected to all routine and acceptance
tests stipulated in the relevant standards IEC 62271-102/IS-9921 (Part-4).
4.17 CABLE GLANDS

4.17.1 Double compression type, chrome plated brass cables glands for terminating
multicore control cables shall be provided with the auxiliary switch boxes.
4.18 DRAWING AND LITERATURE

4.18.1 All the dimensioned drawings along with illustrated and descriptive literature for all
equipment offered must be submitted after the award of the contract as below: -
(i) The drawings showing the outline dimensions of the Isolator and isolator with
E/S, level adjustment devices & bearing arrangement for rotating post.
(ii) Drawings showing details of main contacts and jumpering devices.
(iii) Drawing showing equipment of electrical interlock.
(iv) Control & wiring diagram of interlocking mechanism (Both Electrical and
Mechanical).
(v) Drawings giving complete dimensional details with make, type, reference
catalogue no. and details of Electrical & Mechanical characteristics of the
insulators offered for isolators.
(vi) Detailed Mechanical drawing of driving mechanism, operating pipes and
coupling pipes.
 Foundation drawings of the supporting structures of Isolator.
 Dimensioned drawing and bill of material for supporting structure.
(vii) The bidder may submit any other drawings, pamphlets, brochures, leaflets
necessary in addition to the drawings stated above for clarification.
(viii) Complete bill of material shall be given in all the drawings including therein
the dimensions, the material used, the No. of such items provided, surface

Page 12 of 19
treatment given to the same etc.

(ix) Considering the above the following drawings are the minimum to be
provided with necessary details for isolators and isolators with earth switches.
a. General arrangement for isolator and isolator with earth switch.
b. Main contact Assembly
c. Earth Switch Contact Assembly
d. Operating mechanism box for the main switch. Detailed wiring,
schematic and general arrangement drawings are to be provided, for
both the above switches.
e. Mechanical Interlock between earth switch and main switch.
f. Name Plate details
g. Terminal connector details
h. Details of post type Insulators
4.19 NAME PLATES

4.19.1 Isolators and associated operating devices shall be provided with a name plate which
contains the information in accordance with Table-1 of IS: 9921 (Part-5)-1985. The
Aluminum name plate of 0.56 mm should be with engraved letter size of 2 mm and
be anodized with white etched letters and black back ground. The name plate shall
also contain the purchase order no. & date, Specification No. and the name of the
Employer, client, project, etc. The name plate shall be weather proof and corrosion
proof. The name plate shall be visible in the position of normal service & installation.
4.19.2 Typically the name plate should be provided in the following format for the isolator,
isolator with earthing switch and for the operating device.
(i) Manufacturer
(ii) Designation of type
(iii) Serial number
(iv) Rated voltage

Page 13 of 19
(v) Altitude of operation(m)

(vi) Lightning impulse withstand voltage (kV)
(vii) Normal current (A)
(viii) Short time withstand current (kA) for 1 Sec.
(ix) Short circuit making current (kA)
(x) Auxiliary voltage
(xi) Mechanical terminal load (N)
(xii) Total mass (Kg)
(xiii) Auxiliary motor
a) Motor details
b) Volts …… Watts ……. =
c) Short time (Operating period) =
d) Motor current (A) =
4.20 SPARES
4.20.1 A list of spare part for isolators & isolator with earth switch, and operating
mechanism with recommended quantities for five years of normal operation shall be
submitted. A spare parts catalogue depicting various parts of the equipment
alongwith part number shall be supplied. Unit prices of post insulators, auxiliary
switch box for main isolator, fixed contacts assembly and moving blade assembly for
electrical interlock & bimetallic connectors etc. must be quoted alongwith
recommended spares.
4.21 OPERATING HANDLE

4.23.1 For hand operation of the isolators & isolators with earth switches; the operating
handle (galvanized) shall be provided with each isolator & isolator with earth switch.
Besides it any other tools & plants required for the safe operation and maintenance
of the equipment shall also be supplied by bidder.

Page 14 of 19
4.22 COMPLETENESS
4.22.1 All fittings, apparatus and accessories which may not be specifically mentioned in
the specification but which are usual or necessary for the equipment of similar
plant, shall be specified and shall be deemed to be included in the specification
and shall be furnished by the bidder.

4.23.1 The isolators and the isolators with earthing switch shall conform to the following
technical requirements:-
Since the Switchyards are located at an Altitude of Dhunge Sangu (1350 Mtrs) above
MSL , the equipment shall be suitable for increased insulation level with an Altitude
correction factor of 1.2 times the normal values and shall be suitable for operation
under prescribed conditions and for the sake of Inter-changeability/flexibility in use
of the same equipments at any Substation
Further the equipment being supplied shall be suitable for operation under sub Zero
Temp with ICE/Snow considerations .The equipment shall be suitable for working in
the temperature variation between (-5 Deg) to (+40 Deg) without reporting any
malfunction.
TABLE-4.1: Technical Particulars of 132 kV Isolator

1. Rated voltage kV (r.ms)/highest 132/145
System Voltage kV

Page 15 of 19

7. Rated lightning impulse

withstand voltage
a) Between the 650
terminals and
ground [ kV(peak)]
b) Between the 750
terminals with
contacts open
a) Across the isolating 315

distance kV (rms)
b) Between the terminals 275
and ground
9. Rated short circuit current 31.5
rating for 1 sec (kA)

current (kA)

Page 16 of 19
I. Mode of operation of A.C Motor operated

isolator
415V AC Manual
II. Operating motor
voltage
III. Mode of operation of
earthing switch Manual

15. Number of auxiliary contact of 12NO + 12 NC for Isolator and 2 pairs to make
each isolator before breakcontact
8 NO + 8 NC for Earth Switch

Material for fixed contact HDE copper

18. D.C. Supply voltage for 110 V
Interlocks volts
cabinet(including inter pole up to control cabinet plus 24 spare terminals
cabinet) evenly distributed.
20. Minimum Corona extinction 105
Voltage in open and close
position (kVrms)
21. Maximum RIV for frequency 500 at 92 kV rms
between 0.5 to 2 MHz in close
and open position (micro volt)
22. Mechanical Endurance Class M2 for isolator , M0 for Earth Switch

Page 17 of 19
TABLE-4.2: Technical Particulars of 33 kV Isolator

1. Rated voltage kV (r.ms)/Highest 33/36
System Voltage kV
7. Rated lightning impulse withstand

voltage
a) Across isolating distance 195
[kV(peak)]
b) Between terminals and
170
ground
a) Across the isolating 80

distance kV (rms)
ground
9. Short circuit current rating for 1 sec 25
(kA)

Page 18 of 19

current (kA)
i. Mode of operation of A.C Motor operated

isolator
415V AC
ii. Operating motor voltage
iii. Mode of operation of Manual

earthing switch
15. Number of auxiliary contact of 10 NO + 10 NC for Isolator and 2 pairs to
each isolator make before breakcontact8 NO + 8 NC for
Earth Switch
Material for fixed contact HDE Copper

cabinet(including inter pole up to control cabinet plus 24 spare terminals
cabinet) evenly distributed.
20. Endurance Class M2 for isolator and M0 for earth switch
altitude of 1000m above mean sea level. For Dhungesaghu (1350 MSL) where altitude is

Page 19 of 19
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER – 5
145/36kV SF6 (GAS) CIRCUIT BREAKERS
FOR OUTDOOR APPLICATION

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 5
145/36kV SF6 (GAS) CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR OUTDOOR APPLICATION
CONTENTS
5.0 SCOPE 1
5.1 PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM 1
5.2 STANDARDS 2
5.3 OUTDOOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS 3
5.4 DESIGN FEATURES 9
5.5 INSULATOR SUPPORTS 11
5.6 CONTROL CONNECTIONS AND WIRING 11
5.7 TERMINAL CONNECTORS 13
5.8 INTERLOCKS 13
5.9 AUXILIARY AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT 13
5.10 NAME, INSTRUCTION PLATES & MARKING 13
5.11 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT 14
5.12 TESTS 14
5.13 ERECTION TOOLS AND SPECIAL MAINTANCE TOOLS/EQUIPMENT 15
5.14 DRAWINGS, LITERATURE AND INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL 16
Section IV-B – Chapter-5 Contents

SECTION 4
CHAPTER – 5
145/36 kV SF6 (GAS) CIRCUIT BREAKERS FOR OUTDOOR APPLICATION
5.0 SCOPE
transportation upto site, testing & commissioning of the outdoor type 145/36 kV SF6
Gas filled CBs, complete with motor operated spring charged operating
mechanism, unitized air compressed system, air receiver, gas monitoring
instruments, operating mechanism, terminal connectors, hot dip galvanized
supporting structures with foundation bolts/copper piping/connectors/valves, cable
glands inter connecting cables complete with all materials, accessories and fittings,
erection & maintenance tools & tackles, mandatory spares as detailed in this
specification.
5.0.3 Any material and equipment not specifically stated in this specification but which
are necessary for satisfactory operation of the equipment shall be deemed to be
included unless specifically excluded and shall be supplied without any extra cost.
5.1 PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM

5.1.1 The Circuit Breakers to be provided under the specification are intended to be used
on 3 phase, AC, 50 Hz, earthed system. The nominal system voltage and the
corresponding highest system voltage, short time current rating, basic impulse
level etc. corresponding to standard values, are given in the technical parameters.

Page 1 of 22
5.2 STANDARDS
5.2.1 All the material and equipment shall comply in every respect with the latest edition
of IEC-62271-1,62271-100,62271-110,IEC-60376& IEC-694, IS:13118 or any other
equivalent Indian Standards or International Standards. The equipment, material &
processes shall confirm to the latest applicable National/International standards as
listed hereunder:-
TABLE-5.0
IS:209 Specification for Zinc
IS:694 PVC insulated cables for working voltage upto and including 1100 V.
IS:802 Use of structural steel in Over head Transmission Lines-Code (Part-1/Sec-1)
of Practice Part-I: Materials, Loads & Permissible stresses
IS:802 Section 1 : Material & Loads(Part-2/Sec-2) 2 : Permissible stresses
IS:808 Dimensions for Hot Rolled steel Beams, Columns, channel and Angle
sections
IS:1363 Hexagonal nuts
IS:1554 (Part-I) Specification for PVC insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cable working voltage
upto & including 1100 V.
IS:1852 Rolling & cutting tolerances of hot Rolled steel products.
IS:2016 Plain washers
IS:2062 Structural steel
IS:2071 Methods of High Voltage Testing
IS:2099 Bushings for alternating voltage above 1000 V
IS:2629 Recommended Practice for Hot Dip galvanization for Iron & Steel
IS:2633 Testing of Uniformity of Coating of Zinc coated Articles
IS:2825 Pressure vessels for unit compressor system
IS:3063 Single Coil Rectangular section spring washers for Bolts & Nuts
IS:3716 Application Guide for Insulation coordination
IS:4379 High pressure cylinder for SF6 gas
IS:5561 Specification for Electric Power connectors
IS:6639 Hexagonal Bolts for steel structures

Page 2 of 22
IS:6745 Determination of weight of Zinc coating on Zinc coated Iron & steel articles
IS:7285 Seamless manganese steel cylinders for permanent and high pressure
liquefiable gases
IS:12063 Classification of Degree of protection provided by Enclosures of Electrical
Equipment
IS:13118 Specification for High Voltage alternating Current Circuit Breakers
IEC Pub.No.376 Specifications and acceptance of new Sulfur hexafluoride
IEC 60427 Synthetic Testing of High Voltage alternating Current Circuit Breakers
IEC : 694 High Voltage switchgear and control gear
Electrical Power technical standards of Nepal.
5.3 OUT DOOR CIRCUIT BREAKERS

5.3.1 The 145/36 kV circuit breakers offered shall be SF6 gas filled suitable for outdoor
installation under the specified climatic conditions in Nepal. The circuit breakers shall
be operated by spring charged mechanism. The breakers shall be supplied as three
phase, three poles mechanically gang operated unit for 145kV, 36kV level with all
connectors, operating mechanism, control cabinets, piping, inter pole cable and cable
accessories, pressure gauges, density monitors, the auxiliary equipment and all
internal wirings installed and terminated in the apparatus box/switch cubicle for
ready installation at site on receipt at destination. All equipment connections and
cabling shall be designed and arranged so as to minimize the risk of fire and any
damage that may be caused in the event of fire.
5.3.2 The frames of equipment shall be provided with a reliable earthing terminal for
specified fault current. The diameter of clamping screw or bolt shall be at least 12
mm. The circuit breakers shall provide rapid and smooth interruption of current
under all conditions completely suppressing undesirable phenomenon even under
the most severe and persistent short circuit conditions when interrupting small
current including leading or lagging reactive currents.

Page 3 of 22
5.3.3 SF6 Gas Filled Circuit Breakers

5.3.3.1 Construction Features
SF6 Gas filled circuit breakers shall consist of three phase three poles using SF6 gas
confirming to IEC-376 at single pressure and puffer type interrupting arrangement.
The interrupting chambers of poles shall be mechanically connected and breaker shall
have common operating device for 3 poles. The circuit breakers for line are meant for
3 pole re-closure. SF6 gas confirming to IEC-376 shall be used in the interrupting
units at such a pressure that the breaker does not require any complex auxiliary
circuit for pressure and temperature control, special heating system and special
compressors etc. Suitable gas filling and pressure monitoring arrangements along
with the safety plug shall be provided for each interrupting unit sealed.
5.3.3.2 Insulation of phase to earth of the circuit breaker shall be independent of SF6 gas
pressure. Suitable measures shall be adopted in the individual interrupting unit to
achieve requisite degree of dryness of SF6 gas and to absorb its decomposition
products. SF6 gas filling should not develop dangerous over-pressure inside the
interrupting unit within the temperature rise limits to be encountered in service.
SF6gas filled in the interrupting units should work in the closed circuit without
causing any exhaust to the open air after performing opening or closing
operations. Time period in terms of number of operations on fault, number of years
of normal service after which SF6gas filling needs replacement shall be stated in
the tender. SF6 gas duly filled in each circuit breaker pole shall be included in the
scope of supply and the complete specifications of the SF6 gas proposed to be
utilized shall be stated in the tender. SF6 gas filled cylinder should be adequate for
filling gas at least in 3 No. complete breakers. The equipment for filling and detecting
leakage of SF6 gas for proper maintenance of circuit breaker shall be quoted in the
schedule of requirement. The same shall also be taken into consideration for bid
evaluation. In case purging of breaker before filling with SF6 gas is desirable, the
required equipment shall also be offered as a part of the maintenance equipment.
The equipment shall be complete with necessary pipes, couplings, flexible tubes and

Page 4 of 22
valves for coupling to the circuit breaker. An operation counter shall also be provided
in the Mechanism Box. SF6 (gas) pressure loss in the breaker shall not be more than
1% per year under normal operating conditions.
5.3.3.4 Sufficient SF6 gas shall be provided to fill all the circuit breakers installed. In addition
to this 20% of the total gas requirement shall be supplied in separate cylinders as
spare requirement.
5.3.3.6 Circuit Breaker Operation
5.3.3.6.1 Each circuit breaker shall be remote controlled from the control room but
provision shall be made for local electrical and manual spring charged motor
operation also. For remote and local electrical operation, 110 Volts D.C. shall
be available and the electrically operating coils (closing and shunt tripping)
shall be so designed that they operate the circuit breaker satisfactorily within a
control voltage variation of 70% to 110% of the normal for shunt trip coils and
85% - 110% of the normal for closing coils.
5.3.3.6.2 Duty Requirements

The Circuit breaker shall be capable of performing their duties without opening
resistors. The circuit breaker shall meet the duty requirements for any type of
fault or fault location also for line switching when used on a 145/36 kV effectively
grounded system , and perform make and break operations as per the stipulated
duty cycles satisfactorily. The breaker shall be capable of interrupting the steady
state and transient magnetizing current corresponding of power transformers and
line/cable charging currents.
5.3.3.7 Spring Charged Mechanism

5.3.3.7.1 Breaker shall be provided with spring operation mechanism. Spring operated
mechanism shall be complete with motor. Opening spring and closing spring with
limit switch for automatic charging and other necessary accessories to make the
mechanism, a complete operating unit shall be provided. On availability of power
supply to the motor, a continuous sequence of the closing and opening operation

Page 5 of 22
shall be possible with the energy contained in the operating mechanism. Breaker
operation shall be independent of the motor which shall be used for charging the
closing spring. Facility for manual charging of the closing spring shall also be
provided. The motor rating shall be such that it requires not more than 30 sec
for full charging of the closing spring. Closing action of circuit breaker shall
compress the opening spring ready for tripping. Provision shall be made to
prevent a closing operation of the breaker when the spring is in the partial
charged condition. Mechanical interlocks shall be provided in the operating
mechanism to prevent discharging of closing springs when the breaker is already
in the closed position. The spring operating mechanism shall have adequate
energy stored in the operating spring to close & latch to Circuit Breaker against
the rated making current and also to provide the required energy for the tripping
mechanism in case the tripping energy is desired from the operating mechanism.
5.3.3.7.2 Two independent trip coils and one closing coil shall be provided on each 145 kV
C.B. and one trip coil and one closing coil for each 36kV level C.B from reliability
consideration. It is intended to have continuous type of pre-closing and post-
closing trip circuit supervision through auxiliary relays for each trip coil for this
purpose. The trip coils shall, therefore, be designed keeping in view this
requirement. It shall be possible to lock out the circuit breaker operating
marshalling box in the open as well as close position of the breaker. The operating
mechanism shall be trip free as per IEC-62271-1, 62271-100/IS: 13118 and shall
have electrically operated anti pumping features. A mechanical position indicator
for ON/OFF condition of the circuit breaker shall also be provided on each
breaker/pole.
Handle shall be provided for hand charging the closing spring with each breaker.
5.3.3.8 Marshalling Box
5.3.3.8.1 All the central equipment immediately connected with the operation of 145 kV
circuit breaker shall be an outdoor type, weather/vermin and splash proof,

Page 6 of 22
having suitable number of hinged doors so as to afford easy access for all
equipments mounted inside.
5.3.3.8.2 Marshalling box shall be fabricated from heavy gauge M.S. sheet at least 3 mm
thick. The locking arrangement with lock(s) shall be provided on the front door to
check unauthorized operation. The cubicle shall be hot dip galvanized
construction so as to be suitable for use under tropical conditions at site. The
cabinet shall meet IP-55 requirement & contain the following equipments in
addition to any other equipment required for satisfactory operation of the circuit
breakers:-
1. Control selector switch for local/remote electrical operation with a neutral
position.
2. Control switch for local electrical operation.
3. Control knob for local operation of motor operated spring charged device in
the absence of DC supply.
4. Pressure switch with alarm contacts for signaling high/low pressure for SF6.
5. Relief and drain cock.
6. Circuit breaker mechanical ON/OFF position indicator.
7. Anti pumping relay.
8. Trip and closing coils.
9. Indicating lamps for various operations.
10. Space heater complete with a MCB and a thermostat to prevent moisture
condensation.
11. Safety valves.
12. MCBs for controlling AC & DC supplies.
13. 5/15 A, Power Socket with MCB.
14. 7 W, LED with a MCB.
15. Double compression, chrome plated, (heavy duty) brass, Cable glands for
various power and control cables.
16. Operation counter.

Page 7 of 22
17. Rating and diagram - plate incorporating the year of manufacture,

specification No., Purchase Order Number and date, name of client,
consultant, customer, project etc.
18. Any other item to complete the equipment.
19. All fixtures, nuts &bolts etc. for mounting the apparatus box either on the
circuit breaker supporting structure or on a nearby plinth shall be supplied.
Apparatus box shall be equipped with requisite number of cable glands for
power and control cables.
Note: The marshalling Box should be located at convenient height for the easy access &
operations.
5.3.3.9 Auxiliary Switches

Besides the auxiliary switches utilized by the manufacturer in the circuit breaker
control/trip supervision relays, at least 10 numbers additional each of normally
open and normal closed contacts shall be provided.
5.3.3.10 Mountings
5.3.3.10.1 The circuit breakers shall be self-supporting type. However, if necessary, for
the purpose of obtaining minimum ground clearance of 2.5 meter from the
nearest live part of the circuit breakers, the same shall be mounted on raised
steel structures, which shall be included in the scope of supply. The bidder
shall supply the following information and data for design/ checking of
foundations in addition to furnishing detailed drawings of foundations showing
arrangement of reinforcement etc.
1. Dead weight per pole and of complete circuit breaker.
2. Static bending moments about the foot of each pole and for complete
circuit breaker.
3. Static shear force at the foot of each pole and for complete circuit breaker.
4. Impact loading, if any, during operation of breaker.

Page 8 of 22
5.3.3.10.2 The above data shall represent static reactions for the worst wind or operation
conditions. Necessary connecting materials such as clamps, bolts, nuts,
washers etc. and fixing bolts for mounting the equipment on the
supporting structures, wherever required, shall be supplied.
5.4 DESIGN FEATURES
5.4.1 Contact System
5.4.1.1 The design of contact system of the circuit breakers shall be such to provide easy
access to the contacts system while undertaking maintenance and replacement
jobs. Auxiliary arcing contacts may be provided to protect the main contacts from
damage during circuit breaker operation. Main contacts shall be the first to open
and last to close so that contact burning and wear are the least.
5.4.1.2 In the event of leakage of SF6 gas to a value which cannot withstand dielectric
stresses specified in the open condition, it may be clearly stated whether the
contacts will remain in the open condition or self close.
5.4.1.3 Main contacts shall have ample area and contact pressure for carrying the rated
current and short time rated current without excessive temperature rise which
may cause pitting or welding.
5.4.2 Temperature Rise

The maximum temperature and temperature rise attained by various parts of circuit
breaker, when in service, under continuous full load conditions and exposed
continuously to the direct rays of the sun and air shall not exceed the permissible
limits specified in the IEC-62271-1, 62271-100/IS-13118.
5.4.3 Recovery Voltage & Power Factor

The circuit breaker shall be capable of interrupting rated power with recovery
voltage equal to the rated maximum line to line service voltage at rated frequency
and at a power factor not exceeding 0.15.

Page 9 of 22
5.4.4 Asynchronous Switching

The breaker shall be capable of satisfactory operation even under conditions of phase
opposition that may rise due to faulty synchronizing. The maximum capacity/power
which the breakers can satisfactorily interrupt under phase opposition shall be
stated in the tender.
5.4.5 RESTRIKING VOLTAGE
5.4.5.1 Capability of the breaker for interrupting at different frequencies shall be indicated
in the tender or shall be furnished during detailed engineering. The complete data
for the frequency, amplitude factor etc., for the rate of rise of re-striking voltage
shall be furnished in the tender as required as per latest edition of IEC-62271-
1,62271-100/IS:13118.
5.4.5.2 The measures adopted for ensuring proper operation at high rate of rise of re-
striking voltage and for limiting the actual voltage values across the breaker poles
shall be described in the tender. The type, characteristics and rating of the
resistor used, if any, to shunt the breaking contacts and of the auxiliary
switching devices used for interrupting the resistor current shall be clearly stated.
5.4.6 LINE CHARGING CURRENTS INTERRUPTING, CABLECHARGING CURRENT BREAKING
& SHUNT CAPACITOR BANK SWITCHING CAPACITY
5.4.6.1 The circuit breaker shall be designed so as to be capable of interrupting line
charging, cable charging and shunt capacitor bank switching currents of values not
less than those given in IS-13118 (higher values preferred) without undue rise in the
voltage on the supply side and without any re-strike and without showing signs of
undue strains. The guaranteed over voltages which shall not be exceeded while
interrupting the specified currents shall be stated in the tender.
5.4.6.2 The expected over voltage caused while interrupting the above charging currents
shall be provided.
5.4.7 TRANSFORMER CHARGING CURRENT BREAKING CAPACITY
5.4.7.1 The breakers shall be capable of interrupting inductive currents, such as those
occurring while switching off unloaded transformers, without giving rise to undue

Page 10 of 22
over voltages and without re-strike. The maximum over voltage value which will not
be exceeded under such conditions shall be stated in the tender.
5.4.8 BREAKING CAPACITY FOR KILOMETRIC FAULT
The interrupting capacity of the breaker for kilometric faults (short line faults) shall
be stated in the tender. The details of test conducted for ascertaining the
capabilities of the breaker under kilometric faults conditions shall also be stated
in the tender.
5.4.9 AUTOMATIC RAPID RECLOSING
The 145kV and 36kV line breakers shall be suitable for 3 pole rapid reclosing. The
operating duty of the breaker shall be CO-t-CO in which 't' represents the dead time
of the circuit breaker.
5.5 INSULATOR SUPPORTS
5.5.1 The insulation level of the external insulator support is given in technical particulars
and shall be suitable for installation in moderately contaminated atmosphere with
medium temperature and condensing type humidity. The porcelain used shall be
homogeneous, and free from cavities or other flaws. These shall be designed to have
ample insulation, mechanical strength and rigidity for satisfactory operation under
conditions specified above.
5.5.2 All bushings of identical ratings shall be interchangeable. The puncture strength of
the bushing shall be entirely free from rapid disturbances when operating at a
voltage upto 10% above rated voltage and shall also be free from external and
internal corona.
5.6 CONTROL CONNECTIONS AND WIRING
5.6.1 All connections and wiring shall be suitable for tropical atmosphere.
Apparatus/marshalling box connections shall be insulated and shall be neatly and
securely fixed to the panel. All box wiring shall be of a suitable self- extinguishing type
using FRLS cables and held in position by non-rusting metal cleats.

Page 11 of 22
5.6.2 Where 400 volts connections are taken through junction boxes or marshalling
boxes, they shall be adequately screened and "415 Volts- DANGER" notices must
be affixed to the outside of the junction boxes or marshalling boxes.
5.6.3 All box wiring shall be in accordance with relevant IS. All wires on apparatus box and
all multi core cables shall have ferrules which shall bear the same number on both
ends. Ferrules shall be of white insulating materials and shall be provided with
glossy finish to prevent adhesion. They shall be clearly and durably marked in black
and shall not be affected by dampness or by the Sun.
5.6.4 Ferrule numbering shall be in accordance with relevant IS. The same ferrule number
shall not be used on wires in different circuits on the same apparatus box.
5.6.5 Wiring shall in general be accommodated on the sides of the box and the wires
for each circuit shall be separately grouped.
5.6.6 Where equipment/components are mounted in the marshalling box, the metal cases
shall be separately earthed by means of copper wires or strips having adequate cross-
section, typically of 25x6 mm2 copper strip.
5.6.7 Multi core cables shall be so bound that each wire may be traced without difficulty to
its cable and terminal connection. The internal wiring in the Marshalling Box shall be
with stranded copper tinned wire.
5.6.8 All terminal boards shall be suitably mounted to give easy access to terminations and
to enable ferrule number to be read without difficulty. Terminal board rows shall be
spaced adequately and not less than 100 mm apart to permit convenient access to
wires terminators. Terminal boards shall have pairs of terminals for
incoming/outgoing wires. Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent
connections. The height of the barriers and the spacing between terminals shall be
such as to give adequate protection while allowing easy access to terminals. 20%
spare terminals shall be provided.
5.6.9 Instead of fuses, MCB’s shall be provided.

Page 12 of 22

5.7.1 Bimetallic terminal connectors suitable for Twin “ACSR Moose- 31.77 mm Φ”
conductor as per requirement shall be supplied. Each terminal connector shall be
suitable to receive horizontal and vertical connections of the transmission
conductor or station bus bars.
5.7.2 Each circuit breaker pole & control cabinet shall be provided with required number of
grounding terminals and clamps for receiving ground connections.
5.8 INTERLOCKS
5.8.1 Necessary interlocks to prevent the closing or opening of the breaker under low gas
pressure, and devices for initiating alarm shall be provided. Before the breaker trip
circuit is blocked, it should be got automatically tripped, and should stay so safely.
5.9 AUXILIARY AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
5.9.1 The rated continuous current of auxiliary and control equipment shall be 10 A
with temperature rise not exceeding the limits given in IEC-640 or equivalent ISS.
The rated short time withstand current shall be 100 A for duration of 30 ms and rated
insulation level of 2 kV A.C. for 1 minute.
5.9.2 Auxiliary contacts shall be suitable of making & breaking atleast 2 A at 110V DC with a
circuit time constant of not less than 20 ms.
5.10 NAME, INSTRUCTION PLATES & MARKING
5.10.1 All name plates, instructions plates, warning signs and any marking whatsoever on
the equipment and its parts and accessories should be in English Language. The name
plate information shall be as given in Table XI of IS: 13118. The name plate shall have
letter height of 4 mm & line 0.3 mm thick and the following data be engraved.
a) Name of Manufacturer
b) Type of Breaker
c) Month, year of Manufacturer.
d) Rated voltage
e) Rated Current
f) Lightning Impulse withstand voltage

Page 13 of 22
g) Short circuit breaking current along with duration

h) Operation sequence
i) Gas Pressure
j) Closing & Trip coil DC Control voltage
k) Spring charging motor voltage, & wattage
l) Heater supply voltage
m) Weight of circuit breaker
n) Frequency
o) Purchaser’s Name & Purchaser order No.
p) Altitude of operation
5.10.2 In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site, every part of the plant and
equipment shall be suitably marked. These markings shall be in conformity with those
given on the assembly drawings.
5.11 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT
5.11.1 Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically
mentioned in this specification but which are usually necessary for the
satisfactory operation of the equipment shall be deemed to have been included in
this specification. All foundation bolts shall be included in the scope of supply.
Earthquake dampers, if necessary shall also be provided on the equipment without
any extra cost.
5.12 TESTS
5.12.1 Latest Type Test Reports of the equipments and components shall be submitted
and shall be subjected to routine tests according to relevant standards and such
other tests including type, acceptance tests as may be required to ensure that all
equipment and components are satisfactory and in accordance with the
specification. No equipment shall be dispatched from the manufacturer’s works
before the relevant tests reports have been approved by the purchaser.

Page 14 of 22
5.12.3 Additional Tests :

1. Speed curves for each breaker shall be obtained by a suitable operation
analyzer/travel recorder to ascertain breaker contact movement during opening,
closing,auto reclosing and trip free operation under normal and limiting operating
conditions (control voltage, pneumatic/hydraulic pressure etc.). The tests shall show
the speed of contacts directly at various stages of operation, travel of contacts,
opening time, closing time, shortest time between separation and meeting of
contacts at break make operation etc. this test shall also be performed at site.
2. Measurement of dynamic contact resistance measurement for arcing and main
contacts shall be performed. Signature of dynamic contact resistance measurements
shall be taken as reference for comparing the same during operation and
maintenance in order to ascertain the healthiness of contact.
5.13 ERECTION TOOLS AND SPECIAL MAINTANCE TOOLS/EQUIPMENT
5.13.1 The bidder shall separately quote for a set of tools required for initial erection and
subsequent maintenance and special tests for the circuit breakers as called for in the
schedule of prices.
5.13.2 The brief detail of maintenance tools/equipments is given as under and one set shall
be supplied for each substation under the Contract. Necessary coverings and
instructions for safe keeping of these equipments over long periods shall be supplied.
5.13.3 SF6 GAS FILLING AND EVACUATING EQUIPMENT (PORTABLE)

The capacity of this plant shall be such that it shall not take appreciable time for
filling or evacuation of breaker. The required vacuum for complete evacuation shall
be attained with the help of this plant.
The SF6 gas shall comply with IEC 60376, 60376A and 60376B and shall be suitable in
all respects for use in the switchgear under the operating conditions.
The high pressure cylinders in which the SF6 gas is shipped and stored at site shall
comply with requirements of the relevant standards and regulations.
SF6 gas shall be tested for purity, dew point, air, hydrolysable fluorides and water
content as per IEC 60376, 60376A and 60376B and test certificates shall be furnished

Page 15 of 22
to Employer indicating all the tests as per IEC 60376 for each lot of SF6 gas in
stipulated copies as indicated in Chapter-GTR. Gas bottles should be tested for
leakage during receipt at site.
5.13.4 SF6 GAS LEAK DETECTOR
The SF6 gas leak detector shall meet the following requirements:
(a) The detector shall be free from induced voltage effects.
(b) The sending probe shall be such that it can reach all the points on the breakers
where leakage is to be sensed.
5.14 DRAWINGS, LITERATURE AND INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL
5.14.1 The bidder should submit with his tender dimensioned drawings of the equipment
offered along with illustrate and descriptive literature.
5.14.2 Further the successful bidder shall furnish 6 prints of the following drawing for each
type of breaker for approval of the client
a) General out line drawings showing dimensions, front and side elevations and
plan of CB along with control panel.
b) Sectional view drawings.
c) Mounting details.
d) Assembly & subassembly of the breaker arcing chamber, contacts operating
mechanism etc.
e) Wiring diagram showing local and remote scheme of breaker including alarms
indicating devices, instruments etc.
f) Foundation plane indicating weights of various components and impact loading.
5.14.3 After the approval of drawing by the client, the contractor shall submit 6 (Six) prints
of approved drawings.

Page 16 of 22
TABLE-5.1: Technical Particulars of 132 kV Circuit Breakers

5. Number of poles 1 pole/phase
6. Rated normal current (A) 1250
8. Rated short circuit current breaking 31.5
rms)
10. Rated short circuit current duration 1
(seconds)
11. First pole to clear factor 1.3
12. a) Total break time for any current 65
upto the rated breaking current with
limiting conditions of operating &
quenching media pressure (ms)
b) Rated Break time (ms) 60
16. Auto reclosing Three phase auto reclosing.

Page 17 of 22

between
line terminals and ground
open
terminals and ground and
contact open (kV rms)
18. Minimum corona extinction voltage in 105
19. Maximum radio interference voltage 500 at 92 kV rms
for frequency between 0.5 to 2 MHz in
open and close position (micro volt)

capacity (rms)
22. Difference in instants of
closing/opening of contacts
a) Within a pole(ms) 2.5
b) Between poles for opening(ms) 3.3
c) Between poles for closing(ms) 5

Page 18 of 22



a) Type Spring
c) Max. actuating force required Not to exceed 250 N

for manual charging of spring
27. Permissible supply tolerance variation 70%-110% of rated supply
in case of motor charging
b) No. of Auxiliary contacts 10 No. and 10 NC on each pole

c) Number of auxiliary contacts 10NO & 10 NC
(Over and above for
32. CLEARANCES
a) Phase to Phase spacing in the 3000

switchyard i.e. available interpole
spacing for breaker (mm)

Page 19 of 22
TABLE-5.2: Technical Particulars of 33 kV Circuit Breakers

6. Rated normal current (A) 630A
8. Rated short circuit current breaking 25
rms)
10. Rated short circuit current duration 3 sec
(seconds)
12. a) Total break time for any current upto 105
the rated breaking current with limiting
conditions of operating & quenching
media pressure (ms).
b) Rated break time (ms) 100
between line terminals and

Page 20 of 22

contact open
terminals and ground and ground
open (kV rms)
18. Minimum corona extinction voltage in NA
19. Maximum radio interference voltage for NA

capacity (rms)
22. Difference in instants of closing/opening
of contacts
a) Within a pole(ms) NA

Page 21 of 22

a) Type Spring
c) Max. actuating force required for Not to exceed 250 N

manual charging of spring
27. Permissible supply tolerance variation in 70%-110% of rated supply
b) No. of Auxiliary contacts 8 NO. and 8 NC
c) Number of auxiliary contacts 10 NO &10 NC
(Over and above for
32. CLERANCES
a) Phase to Phase spacing in the switchyard 1500

i.e available inter-pole spacing for
breaker (mm)

Page 22 of 22
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER – 6
POWER TRANSFORMERS
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 6
POWER TRANSFORMERS
CONTENTS
6.0 SCOPE 1
6.1 INTRODUCTION 2
6.2 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (STANDARD CONDITIONS) 2
6.3 PERFORMANCE 5
6.4 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES 7
6.5 DRAWINGS INCORPORATING THE FOLLOWING PARTICULARS SHALL BE 7
SUBMITTED WITH THE BID
6.6 MISCELLANEOUS 7
6.7 PARALLEL OPERATION 8
6.8 NAME/RATING PLATE 8
6.9 STANDARDS & CODES 8
6.10 GENERAL DESIGN CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES 9
6.11 PAINTING 10
6.12 DETAILED DESCRIPTION 10
6.13 TANK 11
6.14 TANK COVER 12
6.15 CONSERVATOR TANK 12
6.16 UNDER CARRIAGE 13
6.17 CORE 14
6.18 INTERNAL EARTHING 16
6.19 WINDING 17
6.20 INSULATING OIL 18
6.21 VALVES 19
6.22 BUSHING 20
6.23 MARSHALLING BOX AND MAIN CONTROL PANEL 22
6.24 ON LOAD TAP CHANGER (OLTC) 23

6.25 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE CONTROL 29
6.26 VOLTAGE REGULATING RELAYS 29
6.27 ON-LINE DISSOLVED GAS ANALYSIS (DGA) & MOISTURE METER 30
6.28 ANTI-EARTHQUAKE CLAMPING DEVICE 31
6.29 FITTINGS 32
6.30 CONTROL CONNECTIONS, ALARMS AND WIRING TERMINAL, BOARD AND 35
FUSES
6.31 RADIO INTERFERENCE AND NOISE LEVEL 39
6.32 NITROGEN INJECTION FIRE PROTECTION CUM EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM 39
(NIFPES) 5 MVA POWER TRANSFORMER
6.33 TESTS 45
6.34 TEST WAIVER, PROCEDURES AND COSTS 47
6.35 STAGE INSPECTION 48
6.36 TEST ON ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT 50
6.37 SEQUENCE OF TESTING ON ASSEMBLED TRANSFORMER 50
6.38 WITNESSING OF TESTS AND EXCESSIVE LOSSES 50
6.39 CAPITALISATION OF LOSSES AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR 51
EXCESSIVE LOSSES
6.40 REJECTION 52
6.41 DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL 52
6.42 CENTRE OF GRAVITY 54
6.43 TOOLS & TACKLES 54

Page 1 of 56
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 6
POWER TRANSFORMERS
6.0 SCOPE
6.0.1 These specifications are intended to cover design, engineering, manufacture, inspection
and testing at manufacturer’s works before dispatch, supply, transportation, insurance,
dispatch & delivery for project site in Nepal, handling, storage & preservation at site,
complete work of site assembly, erection, dehydration, testing and commissioning &
remedial action, if any, upto defect liability period of following type of oil immersed core
type Transformers complete with RTCC and OLTC panels, all accessories and fittings,
erection & maintenance tools & tackles, mandatory spares as detailed in this specifications.
6.0.2 The scope of supply shall include all parts, accessories, auxiliaries, mountings, etc. including
insulating oil required for first filling plus 10 % extra, which are necessary for satisfactory
operation of the Transformers even though not individually or specifically stated or
enumerated. The Transformer shall be transported filled with Nitrogen gas along with gas
pressure monitoring device and gas replenishing arrangement.
6.0.3 Corresponding parts of the Transformers, accessories, spares, etc. shall be of the same
materials, dimensions and workman-ship and shall be interchangeable.
6.0.4 Necessary shock absorbing device shall be provided on the Transformers to absorb the,
intensity of jerks during transportation to site.
6.0.5 The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering practices to
ensure satisfactory performance throughout the service life.

Page 2 of 56
6.0.6 Power cables, control cables & special cables, supports, cable racks, cable glands, lugs,
terminals, connectors, etc. for cabling between equipment &devices covered in this section
and upto UCB, Protection Panels shall be under scope of Supply.
6.0.7 Any material and equipments not specifically stated in this specification but which are
necessary for satisfactory operation of the equipment shall be deemed to be included
unless specifically excluded and shall be supplied without any extra cost.
6.0.9 The performance of the equipment shall be guaranteed as per Section-V – “Guaranteed
and Other Technical Particulars”.
6.0.10 The bidder has to furnish the testing facilities available at the manufacturer’s works.
6.0.11 The Technical Specification for 5 MVA, Single Phase Power Transformer is given below:
6.1 INTRODUCTION
The 5 MVA 132/33 kV 1 phase transformer shall be of core type, oil immersed
ONAN/ONAF cooled.
6.2 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (STANDARD CONDITIONS)
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 132/33 kV 5 MVA 1-PHASE TRANSFORMER
(i) Rated MVA 5 MVA ONAN/ONAF

(iii) Service Continuous
(iv) Frequency 50 Hz 3%
(v) Cooling medium Mineral oil
(vi) Rated Voltage

Page 3 of 56
High voltage side 132 kV

Low Voltage side 33 kV
(vii) Highest Continuous System
Voltage :
High voltage (HV) 145 kV
Low Voltage (LV) 36 kV
(viii) Method of system earthing: Neutral terminal- Solidly earthed

(ix) Type of tap changer OLTC
(x) Range of tapping Plus 5% to minus 15% with sixteen (16) equal steps
of 1.25%. Tapping shall be located at the neutral end
of the HV
(xi) Tap Control Full capacity - on load tap changer suitable for group
/ independent, remote / local electrical and local
manual operation and bi-directional power flow
(xii) Impedance at rated MVA 7.15 %
and on principal/ tap
(xiii) Type of insulation & 132 kV 33 kV
a) Type of insulation: Graded Uniform
b) One minute power 270 70kV
voltage (kV RMS)
c) Lighting Impulse withstand 650 170kV
test voltage (kVp):
(xiv) Material Copper Copper
(xv) Type of cooling ONAN /ONAF
(xvi) Maximum Flux Density (Bm) 1.6 wb/m2

Page 4 of 56
voltage & frequency

(xvii) Short circuit level of the 31.5 kA for HV for one sec and 25 KA for LV side
system to which for three sec.
connected
(xviii) Short circuit withstand 31.5 kA for HV for one sec and 25 KA for LV side
capacity for three sec.
(xix) Terminal details
a) 132 kV Twin ACSR “Moose” conductor for connecting to
Termination bushing terminals.
b) 33 kV Termination Twin ACSR “Moose” conductor for connecting to
bushing terminals.
(xx) Ten delta of winding Less than 0.005 at 20 deg C
(xxi) Maximum Temperature

Rise for various types of
cooling over an ambient of
34 deg C
a) Temperature rise of top
oil(Measured by 500 C
Thermometer)
b) Temperature rise of 550 C
winding(Measured by
resistance)
Note: The allowable temp rise during testing shall be reduced by 1 0K for every 250m
(xxii) Overload Capacity As per IEC 60076-7 or IS: 6600
(xxiii) Noise Level at Rated Less than 75db for ONAN

Voltage & Frequency Less than 80db at full load

Page 5 of 56
(xxiv) Transformer Bushings
Type HV- Oil Impregnated Paper (OIP) condenser type

LV- Porcelain and oil communicating type
Neutral- Porcelain and oil communicating type
HV LV Neutral
Rated Voltage 145kV 36kV 36kV
1. Rated current 250A 250A 250A
Lighting Impulse withstand 650 kV 170 kV 170 kV

voltage (kVp)
One minute power 275 kV 70 kV 70 kV
frequency withstand voltage
(kV RMS)
Minimum creepage distance 3625mm 900mm 900mm
Corona Extinction voltage NA
Ten Delta Less than 0.004 at 200 C
Note: The arcing distance of the busing shall be increased by 1.25 % per 100 metres to
account for the high altitude as per IEC 60137-2003.
(xxv) Transformer Oil As per IS:335 (latest edition), with pouring
temperature -100 C
(xxvi) Maximum partial discharge 100 pico-coulomb
level at 1.5 pu

Page 6 of 56
6.3 PERFORMANCE
6.3.1. The Transformers shall be capable of operating at full load for at least ten (10) minutes
during total failure of auxiliary power supply to cooling fans and pumps without exceeding
winding hot spot temperature exceeding 140°C.It shall also be capable of operating for 20
minutes in the event of failure of oil circulating pumps or blowers associated with all unit
coolers except one unit cooler without exceeding winding hot spot temperature exceeding
140°C. Necessary calculations in this regard shall be submitted during design stage.
6.3.2. The maximum flux density in any part of the core and yoke at normal voltage and
Frequency shall be such that the flux density under 10% over voltage condition shall not
exceed 1.76 Tesla with limiting value as (6.3.3) below.
6.3.3. The maximum flux density in any part of the core and yoke at rated MVA, voltage and
frequency shall not exceed 1.9 tesla at the lowest tap position under 10% continuous over
voltage & frequency condition.
6.3.4. The temperature of any part of the core or its support structure in contact with oil shall not
exceed 1200 C under normal operating condition and 130°C under most extreme operating
condition.
6.3.5. The insulation of core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall withstand a voltage of 2kV
(rms) for 1minute.
6.3.6. The insulating oil shall be virgin high grade inhibited, conforming to IEC 60296.
6.3.7. It shall withstand and give desired performance, without injurious heating for combined
voltage and frequency fluctuations. It shall withstand over fluxing conditions of 110, 125
and 140% for continuous, 1 minute and 5 seconds respectively.
6.3.8. Transformers shall be designed to achieve suppression of harmonic voltage especially the
third & fifth so as to eliminate wave form distortion and any possibility of high frequency
disturbances, inductive effects or circulating currents between neutral points of different
Transformers reaching such a magnitude as to cause interference with communication
circuits.

Page 7 of 56
6.3.9. It shall be capable of being loaded upto 150% of rated load as per IS 6600/ IEC 60076-7.
There shall be no limitation for overloading imposed by bushing, tap changer etc or any
other associated equipment.
6.3.10. Transformer shall be capable of withstanding for two second without damage to any
external short circuit, with the short circuit MVA available at the terminals.
6.3.11. Transformer shall under exceptional circumstances due to sudden disconnection of the
load, be capable of operating at the voltage approximately 25% above normal rated
voltage for a period of not exceeding one minute and 40% above normal for a period of 5
seconds.
6.3.12. The transformer may be operated continuously without danger on any particular tapping
at the rated MVA 10% of the voltage corresponding to the tapping.
6.3.13. The thermal ability withstand short circuit shall be demonstrated by calculation.
6.3.14. Transformers shall be suitable for continuous operation at rated output with a frequency
variation of up to 3% from normal frequency of 50 Hz without exceeding the specified
temperature rise.
6.3.15. The transformer shall be so designed that the current density of all the windings and the
regulating winding at the lowest tap should not exceed 250 A/sq.cm.
6.3.16. The thermal ability of the Transformer to withstand the short-circuit shall be demonstrated
by calculations. The duration of the symmetrical short circuit current to be used for the
calculation of the thermal ability to withstand short circuit shall be 2 seconds.
6.4 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES

The following Auxiliary power supplies shall be available at site:
i) AC, 3 phase 400 volts 50 Hz. earthed
ii) AC, 1 phase 230 volts 50 Hz. earthed
iii) 110 volts DC ungrounded.

Page 8 of 56
6.5 DRAWINGS INCORPORATING THE FOLLOWING PARTICULARS SHALL BE SUBMITTED WITH

THE BID
i. General outline drawing showing shipping dimensions and overall dimensions, net
weights and shipping weights, quality of insulating oil, spacing of wheels in either
direction of motion, location of coolers, marshalling box and tap changers etc.
ii. Height of centre line of HV and LV connectors of transformers from the rail top level.
iii. Dimensions of the largest part to be transported.
iv. GA drawings/details of various types of bushing.
6.6 MISCELLANEOUS
6.6.1. Padlocks along with duplicate keys as asked for various valves, marshalling box etc., shall
be supplied by the contractor, wherever applicable.
6.6.2. Foundation bolts for wheel locking devices of Transformer shall be supplied by the
Contractor.
6.7 PARALLEL OPERATION

The transformers Banks shall be capable of satisfactory parallel operation with each other
if connected between the high voltage and low voltage bus-bar.
In case of Transformer Banks, the Single phase Transformers shall be interchangeable with
each other without affecting Normal Operation/Parallel Operation of the Transformer
Bank(s).
6.8 NAME/RATING PLATE

Transformer rating plate shall contain the information as given in clause 7 IS-2026 (Part-I).
The details on rating plate shall be finalized during the detailed engineering.
6.9 STANDARDS & CODES

6.9.1 The equipment, materials and service covered by this specification shall conform to the
latest applicable provision of the following IEC/ Indian/International standards:

Page 9 of 56
TABLE 6.1.3: STANDARDS

IS:2026 (Part I to IV) Power Transformer
IS:6600 Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers
IS:335 New insulating oil for transformers, Switchgears
IS:3639 Fittings and accessories for power Transformers
IS:2099 High voltage porcelain bushings
IS:2705 Current Transformers
IS:3347 Dimensions for porcelain Transformer/Bushings
IS:3202 Code of practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment
IS:2147 Degree of protection
IS:2071 Method of high voltage testing
IS:3637 Gas operated relays
IS:1271 Classification of insulating materials for electrical machinery
and apparatus in relation to their stability in services
IS:5 Colour for ready mixed paints
IS:10028 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
transformers, Part I, II and III
IS:5561 Electric Power Connectors
C.B.I.P. Publication Manual on Transformers
IS 8478 OLTC
IEC 60076 Power transformer
IEC 60137 Insulating bushings for alternating voltages above 1 kV
IEC 60156 Insulating liquids - Determination of the breakdown voltage at
power frequency – Test method
IEC 60296 Specification for un used mineral insulating oils for
transformers and switchgear
IEC 60551 Determination of transformer and reactor sound levels
IEC 60616 Terminal and tapping markings for power transformer
IEC 60722 Guide to the lightning impulse and switching impulse testing
of power transformers and reactors

Page 10 of 56
6.10 GENERAL DESIGN CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES

6.10.1 All material used shall be of best quality and of the class most suitable for working under
the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of temperature and atmospheric
conditions without distortion or deterioration or the setting up of undue stresses which
may impair suitability of the various parts for the work which they have to perform.
6.10.2 Similar parts, particularly removable ones, shall be interchangeable.
6.10.3 Pipes and pipe fittings, screws, studs, nuts and bolts used for external connections shall be
as per the relevant standards. Steel bolts and nuts exposed to atmosphere shall be
galvanized.
6.10.4 Nuts, bolts and pins used inside the transformers and tap changer compartments shall be
provided with lock washers or locknuts.
6.10.5 Exposed parts shall not have pockets where water can collect.
6.10.6 Internal design of transformer shall ensure that air is not trapped in any location.
6.10.7 Material in contact with oil shall be such as not to contribute to the formation of acid in oil.
Surface in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium plated.
6.10.8 Labels, indelibly marked, shall be provided for all identifiable accessories like relays,
switches, current transformers etc. All label plates shall be of in-corrodible material.
6.10.9 All internal connections and fastenings shall be capable of operating under overloads and
over-excitation, allowed as per specified standards without injury.
6.10.10 Transformer and accessories shall be designed to facilitate proper operation, inspection,
maintenance and repairs.
6.10.11 No patching, plugging, shimming or other such means of overcoming defects, discrepancies
or errors will be accepted.
6.10.12 Schematic Drawing of the wiring, including external cables shall be put under the prospane
sheet on the inside door of the transformer marshalling box.
6.11 PAINTING
6.11.1 The interior of all transformer tanks and other oil filled chambers and internal structural
steel work shall be cleaned of all scale and rust by shot-blasting. These surfaces shall be
painted with not less than two coats of heat resistant, oil insoluble and insulating varnish.

Page 11 of 56
Steel surfaces exposed to the weather shall be thoroughly cleaned and have a priming coat
of zinc chromate applied. The second coat shall be of a glossy oil and weather resisting non
fading, paint of shade No. 631 as per IS:5.
6.11.2 Metal parts not accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion resistant material.
6.11.3 Interior surfaces of mechanism chambers and marshalling kiosks shall receive three coats
of paint after proper cleaning. The final coat shall be of a light coloured anti-corrosion
paint.
6.11.4 All paints shall be carefully selected to withstand heat, rain and extremes of weather. The
paint shall not scale off or crinkle or be removed by abrasion due to normal handling.
6.11.5 In case finish paint chips off or crinkle during transit or installation, the contractor shall
arrange for repainting transformer at site at his cost. The paint for repainting shall be
supplied by the contractor.
6.12 DETAILED DESCRIPTION
The detailed description of various parts of the Transformer is as follows:
6.13 TANK
6.13.1 The Transformer tank and cover shall be fabricated from high grade low carbon plate steel
of adequate thickness and tested quality. The tank and the cover shall be of welded
construction.
6.13.2 Lifting lugs or eyes shall be provided on the Transformer tank for handling during assembly
or dismantling. These lugs or eyes shall also be used for lifting of the complete Transformer
with the help of crane during handling. A minimum of four jacking pads shall be provided in
accessible position in tank to enable raising or lowering of complete Transformer (with oil)
and changing the plane of rotation of wheels using hydraulic jacks.
6.13.3 Tank shall be designed to permit lifting (without any distortion) by crane or jacks of the
complete transformer assembly filled with oil. Suitable lugs and bosses shall be provided
for this purpose. The Transformer design shall be such that the tank will not be split
between lower and upper connections for untanking.

Page 12 of 56
6.13.4 All beams, flanges, lifting lugs, braces and permanent parts attached to the tank, shall be
welded and where practicable, they shall be double welded.
6.13.5 The tank shall have sufficient strength to withstand without distortion, filling under vacuum
and continuous internal gas pressure of minimum 0.35 Kg/ cm2 with oil at operating level.
The main tank body of the transformer, excluding tap changing compartments and
radiators, shall be capable of withstanding pressure of 760 mm of Hg.
6.13.6 Inspection hole(s) with welded flange(s) and bolted cover(s) shall be provided on the tank
cover. The inspection hole(s) shall be of sufficient size to afford easy access to the lower
ends of the bushings, testing of earth connection, terminals etc. The design shall be such
that water shall not collect near the gasketed joints. At least two openings, one at each end
of the tank shall be provided.
6.13.7 The tank cover shall be fitted with pockets for a thermometer and for the bulbs of oil. &
winding temperature indicator. The thermometer pockets shall be fitted with a captive
screwed top to prevent ingress of water. The pockets for the oil temperature indicator shall
be located in the zone of maximum oil temperature and it shall be possible to remove the
instrument bulbs without lowering the oil in the tank.
6.13.8 All bolted connections to the tank shall be fitted with suitable oil-tight gaskets which shall
give satisfactory service under the operating conditions. Special attention shall be given to
the methods of making the hot oil-tight joints between the tank and the cover as also
between the tank cover and the bushings and all outlets to ensure that the joint can be
remade satisfactorily and with ease, with the help of semi-skilled labour. Where
compressible gaskets are used, steps shall be provided to prevent over-compression.
6.13.9 Suitable guides shall be provided for positioning the various parts during assembly or
dismantling. Adequate space shall be provided between the cores and windings and the
bottom of the tank for collection of any sediment.

Page 13 of 56
6.14 TANK COVER

The transformer top shall be provided with a detachable tank cover with bolted flanged
gasket joint. Lifting lugs shall be provided for removing the cover. The surface of the cover
shall be suitably sloped so that it does not retain rain water.
6.15 CONSERVATOR TANK

6.15.1 The conservator tank shall have adequate capacity between the highest and lowest visible
levels to meet the requirement of expansion of the total cold oil volume in the transformer
& cooling equipment from the minimum ambient temperature to 90 deg C.
6.15.2 A conservator complete with sump and drain valve (so placed as to drain the conservator
completely) shall be provided in such a position of the Transformer so as not to obstruct
the electrical connections to the Transformer and bolted so appropriately that it can be
easily removed for clearing purpose.
6.15.3 One prismatic oil level gauge & one magnetic oil level gauge, the latter with low level
electrically insulated alarm contacts and a dial showing minimum, maximum, and normal
oil levels shall be fitted at a height readable from the Transformer base level. Taps or
valves shall not be fitted to the oil gauges.
6.15.4 The conservator tank shall be fitted with flexible diaphragm.
6.15.5 Transformer shall be provided with thermo siphon fitters to prolong the life of transformer.
6.15.6 The oil pipe from the base of the conservator tank shall project into the conservator for a
distance of not less than 50 mm so as to form a water trap.
6.15.7 The oil connection from the Transformer tank to the conservator vessel up to the Buchholz
relay shall be arranged, at a rising angle of 3 to 9 degrees to the horizontal & shall consist
of 80 mm inside diameter pipe.
6.15.8 The conservator shall be provided with a valve to cut off the oil supply to the Transformer
after providing a straight run of pipe for at least a length of 5 times the internal diameter of
the pipe on the tank side and at least 3 times the internal diameter of the pipe on the
conservator side of the Gas & Oil actuated (Buchholz) relay. Isolating valve shall be
provided on both sides of the Buchholz relay.

Page 14 of 56
6.15.9 The conservator vessel shall be fitted with a breather in which silica gel is the dehydrating
agent and designed in such a way so as to ensure the following:-
6.15.10 The passage of air is through the silica gel.
6.15.11 The external atmosphere is not continuously in contact with the silica gel.
6.15.12 The moisture absorption indicated by a change in colour of the tinted crystals can be easily
observed from distance.
6.15.13 The breather shall be mounted approximately 1400 mm above ground level. In addition to
the silica gel breather, an oil resistant synthetic diaphragm seal/bag/air cell shall be
installed on the conservator to prevent direct contact between oil & air. The magnetic oil
level gauge provided with the conservator should have contacts for giving alarm when the
air cell gets damaged or sinks.
6.15.14 Instead of silica gel breather as specified, the Supplier may furnish the details of other
alternative method considered to be more efficient& effective for breathing for
consideration of the Employer along with relative merits of the offered method.
6.16 UNDER CARRIAGE

6.16.1 The transformer tank shall be supported on steel structure with detachable forged steel
flanged bidirectional wheels suitable for moving the transformer completely filled with oil.
A 1676 mm convenient track gauge for motion in both longitudinal and transverse
directions shall be installed by the Employer for which necessary drawing indicating rail
size, track gauge dimension, embedment details showing fixing of rails in concrete shall be
provided by the supplier. Means shall be provided for locking the swivel movements in
positions, parallel to and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the tank. Suitable
stoppers for the track wheels shall also be supplied. Flanged wheels shall be spaced
accordingly. Wheels shall be provided with suitable bearings which will resist rust and
corrosion and shall be equipped with fittings for lubrication.
6.16.2 The necessary arrangement for clamping of the wheels with the rails, capable of being put
on and off easily, shall also be provided by the supplier.

Page 15 of 56
6.16.3 Jacking pads shall be provided on the transformer. It shall be possible to change the
direction of the wheels through 90 degree when the transformer is lifted on jacks to permit
movement of the transformer both in longitudinal and transverse directions.
6.16.4 A set of hydraulic jacks (4 Nos.) for lifting the transformer shall be supplied by the supplier,
for the transformer .
6.16.5 Pulling eyes along with adequate capacity equipment for haulage & turning of Transformer
by 90 degrees shall be provided by the supplier to facilitate haulage of the Transformer and
these shall be suitably braced in vertical direction so that bending does not occur when the
pull has vertical components.
6.17 CORE
6.17.1 The magnetic circuit shall be constructed from high grade cold rolled non-ageing grain
oriented silicon steel lamination known as HI-B Grade or superior grade.
6.17.2 The laminations shall be free of all burrs and sharp projections. Each sheet shall have an
insulating coating resistant to the action of hot oil.
6.17.3 The core shall be clamped by epoxy resin clamps having sufficient strength and rigidity to
withstand the short circuit forces, if the core bolts are used to clamp the core. The
insulation for the core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall be designed to withstand a
voltage of 2 kV AC for one minute. The frame work and clamping arrangement shall be
earthed in accordance with clause no. 6.19.3
6.17.4 The completed core and coil shall be so assembled that the axis and the plane of the outer
surface of the core stack shall not deviate from the vertical plane by more than 25 mm.
6.17.5 All steel sections used for supporting the core shall be thoroughly shot or sand blasted,
after cutting, drilling and welding. Adequate care shall be exercised in the selection,
treatment and handling of core steel to ensure that the laminations are flat and the finally
assembled core is free from distortion. Laminations shall be coated with a durable baked
enamel/fiber glass insulation coating which shall be inert to the action of hot Transformer
oil.

Page 16 of 56
6.17.6 The finally assembled core with all the clamping structures shall be free from deformation
and shall not vibrate during operation.
6.17.7 The core clamping structure shall be designed to minimize eddy current loss.
6.17.8 The framework and clamping arrangements shall be securely earthed.
6.17.9 The core shall be carefully assembled and rigidly clamped to ensure adequate mechanical
strength.
6.17.10 Oil ducts shall be provided where necessary to ensure adequate cooling. The welding
structure and major insulation shall not obstruct the free flow of oil through such ducts.
6.17.11 The design of magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharges, development of
short circuit paths within itself or to the earthed clamping structure and production of flux
component at right angle to the plane of the lamination which may cause local heating. The
supporting frame work of the cores shall be so designed as to avoid the presence of
pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank through the drain valve or
cause trapping of air during filling.
6.17.12 The construction is to be of `core’ type. The core shall be provided with lugs suitable for
lifting the complete core and coil assembly. The core and coil assembly shall be so fixed in
the tank that shifting will not occur during transport or short circuits. All parts of the cores
shall be of robust design capable of withstanding any shocks to which they may be
subjected during lifting, transport, installation and worst forces during service.
6.17.13 The magnetization characteristics of the Transformer for impressed voltage upto 1.8 p.u.
shall be furnished during design stage.
6.17.14 Adequate lifting lugs shall be provided to enable the core and winding to be lifted. The
method of supporting the core structure in the tank and method of lifting weight of core
and coil assembly shall be subject to Employer's approval. When lifted, the weight shall be
carried from the base so that it does not subject core structure to undue stress. The
drawing showing the arrangement of supporting the core and coil including their lifting
arrangement shall be furnished for approval during design stage.

Page 17 of 56
6.18 INTERNAL EARTHING

6.18.1 All internal metal parts of the transformer, with the exception of individual laminations,
core bolts and their individual clamping plates shall be earthed.
6.18.2 The top clamping structure shall be connected to the tank by a copper strap. The bottom
clamping structure shall be earthed by one or more of the following methods:
6.18.3 By connection through vertical tie-rods to the top structure.
6.18.4 By direct metal to metal contact with the tank base.
6.18.5 By a connection to the top structure on the same side of the core as the main earth
connection to the tank.
6.18.6 Earthing of core clamping structure
6.18.7 It shall be ensured that all the laminations of the core shall be at earth potential Shorting
bridge piece shall be provided at core duct location. One point shall be taken out from the
core at the top and shall be shorted to the tank at the tank cover. The core and clamp
earthing shall be done outside the tank and no internal earthing arrangement shall be
provided.
6.18.8 The magnetic circuit shall be connected to the clamping structure at one point only and
this shall be brought out of the top cover of the transformer tank through a suitably rated
insulator. A disconnecting link shall be provided on transformer tank to facilitate
disconnections from ground for IR measurement purpose. The connection to the link from
the core shall be on the same side of the core as the main earth connection. Magnetic
circuits having an insulated sectional construction shall be provided with a separate link
foreach individual section.
6.18.9 Earthing of coils clamping rings
6.18.10 Where coil clamping rings are of metal, each ring shall be connected to the adjacent core
clamping structure on the same side of Transformer as the main earth connections.
6.18.11 All earthing connections with the exception of those from the individual coil clamping rings
shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than 0.8 sq.cm. Connections inserted between
laminations of different sections of core shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than
0.2 Sq. cm

Page 18 of 56
6.19 WINDING
6.19.1 Winding shall be subjected to a shrinking and seasoning process, so that no further
shrinkage occurs during service. Adjustable devices shall be provided for taking up possible
shrinkage in service.
6.19.2 All low voltage windings for use in the circular coil concentric winding shall be wound on a
performed insulating cylinder for mechanical protection of the winding in handling and
placing around the core.
6.19.3 Winding shall not contain sharp bends which might damage the insulation or produce high
dielectric stresses. The conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals in order to
minimize eddy currents and equalize the distribution of currents & temperatures along the
windings. No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its
thickness.
6.19.4 Materials used in the insulation and assembly of the windings shall be insoluble, non
catalytic and chemically inactive in the hot transformer oil and shall not liable to soften,
ooze out, shrink or collapse or the otherwise affected under the operating conditions.
6.19.5 Varnish application on coil windings may be given only for mechanical protection and not
for improvement in dielectric properties. In no case varnish or other adhesive be used
which will seal the coil and prevent evacuation of air and moisture and impregnation by oil.
6.19.6 Winding and connections shall be braced to withstand shocks during transport or short
circuit.
6.19.7 Permanent current carrying joints in the windings and leads shall be welded or brazed.
Clamping bolts for current carrying parts inside oil shall be made of oil resistant material
which shall not be affected by acidity in the oil. Steel bolts, if used, shall be suitably
treated.
6.19.8 Terminals of all windings shall be brought out of the tank through bushings for external
connections.
6.19.9 The completed core and coil assembly shall be dried in vacuum at not more than 0.5mm of
mercury absolute pressure and shall be immediately impregnated with oil after the drying

Page 19 of 56
process to ensure the elimination of air and moisture within the insulation. Vacuum may be
applied in either vacuum over or in the transformer tank.
6.19.10 The winding shall be so designed that all coil assemblies of identical voltage ratings shall be
interchangeable and field repairs to the winding can be made readily without special
equipment. The coils shall have high dielectric strength.
6.19.11 Coils shall be made of continuous smooth high grade electrolytic copper conductor, shaped
and braced to provide for expansion and contraction due to temperature changes.
Excessive current densities shall be avoided.
6.19.12 Adequate barriers shall be provided between coils and core and between high and low
voltage coil. End turns shall have additional protection against abnormal line disturbances.
6.19.13 The insulation of winding shall be designed to withstand voltage stress arising from surge in
transmission lines due to atmospheric or transient conditions caused by switching etc.
6.19.14 Tapings shall not be brought out from inside the coil or from intermediate turns and shall
be so arranged as to preserve as far as possible magnetic balance of the transformer at all
voltage ratios.
6.19.15 Magnitude of impulse surges transferred from HV to LV windings by induction and
capacitance coupling shall be limited to B.I.L. of LV winding.
6.20 INSULATING OIL

6.20.1 The insulating oil for the transformers shall be of EHV grade, generally conforming to IS:
335. No inhibitor shall be used in oil.
6.20.2 The quantity of oil required for the first filling of the transformer shall be stated in the bid.
The bidder shall quote the price of transformer complete with first filling of oil plus 10%
extra. However, the rate of transformer oil in US$ per liter shall be quoted separately also.
The transformer oil shall be supplied in non returnable containers/drums.
6.20.3 The design and materials used in the construction of the transformer shall be such as to
reduce the risk of the development of acidity in the oil.
6.20.4 The contractor shall dispatch the transformer filled with oil or in an atmosphere of
Nitrogen. In the former case, the contractor shall take care of the weight limitation on

Page 20 of 56
transport and handling facility at site. In the later case necessary arrangement shall be
ensured by the contractor to take care of pressure drop of Nitrogen during transit and
storage. A gas pressure valve with necessary pressure gauge and adopter valve shall be
provided.
6.21 VALVES
6.21.1 Valves shall be of forged carbon steel upto 50 mm size and of gun metal or of cast iron
bodies with gun metal fittings for sizes above 50 mm. They shall be of full way type with
screwed ends and shall be opened by turning counter clockwise when facing the hand
wheel. There shall be no oil leakage when the valves are in closed position.
6.21.2 Each valve shall be provided with an indicator to show the open and closed positions and
shall be provided with facility for padlocking in either open or closed position. All screwed
valves shall be furnished with pipe plugs for protection. Padlocks with duplicate keys shall
be supplied along with the valves.
6.21.3 All valves except screwed valves shall be provided with flanges having machined faced
drilled to suit the applicable requirements. Oil tight blanking plates shall be provided for
each connection for use when any radiator is detached and for all valves opening to
atmosphere. If any special radiator valve tools are required, the Contractor shall supply the
same.
6.21.4 Each transformer shall be provided with following valves on the tank :
i. Drain valve so located as to completely drain the tank.
ii. Two filter valves on diagonally opposite corners, of 50 mm size.
iii. Oil sampling valves not less than 8 mm at top and bottom of main tank.
iv. One 15 mm air release plug.
v. Valves between radiators and tank.
vi. Drain and filter valves shall be suitable for applying vacuum as specified in the
specifications.

Page 21 of 56
6.22 BUSHING
6.22.1 All porcelain used in bushings shall be homogeneous, anti-fog, non-porous, uniformly
glazed to brown colour and free from blisters, burns and other defects.
6.22.2 Stress due to expansion and contraction in any part of the bushing shall not lead to
deterioration.
6.22.3 Bushing shall be designed and tested to comply with the latest edition of applicable IEC &
IS standardsIS-2099 & IS-3347 (Part-III/Section-I) and to operate in foggy conditions.
6.22.4 Liquid/oil-filled bushings shall be equipped with liquid level indicators and means for
sampling and draining the liquid. The angle of inclination to vertical shall not exceed 30
degree. Tap for capacitance test shall be provided for condensers.
6.22.5 The bushings shall have puncture strength greater than the dry flash over value. Further,
the spacing between the bushing shall be adequate to prevent flash over under all
conditions of operation.
6.22.6 Bushing flanges shall not be of re-entrant shape which may trap air. Bushing turrets shall
be provided with vent pipes which shall be connected to route any gas collection through
the Buchholz relay.
6.22.7 Bushings for voltage for 72.5 kV and above shall be condenser type.
6.22.8 Bushing rated for 400 A and above shall have non-ferrous flanges and hardware.
6.22.9 Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanized. All bolt threads
shall be greased before erection.
6.22.10 Bushing shall be so located on the transformers that full flashover strength will be utilized.
Minimum clearances as required for the BIL shall be realized between live parts and live
parts to earthed structures.
6.22.11 All applicable routine and type tests certificates of the bushings shall be furnished for
approval.
6.22.12 Bushing shall be supplied with bimetallic/terminal connector/clamp suitable for fixing to
bushing terminal and the Twin ACSR “Moose” conductors. The connector/clamp shall be
rated to carry the bushing rated current without exceeding a temperature rise of 55Deg C

Page 22 of 56
over an ambient of 34 DegC. The connector/clamp shall be designed to be corona free at

the maximum rated line to ground voltage.
6.22.13 Weather proof outdoor type 36 kV class porcelain bushings shall be provided for HV & LV
side neutral terminal of each single phase Transformer. The neutral terminals shall be
suitable for connection to a copper bar through a bimetallic clamp. The copper bar neutral
conductor shall connect the neutral bushing of three single phase Transformers for neutral
formation and shall be supported with pin insulators of suitable rating. A neutral CT shall
be mounted in the arm of the copper bar neutral conductor after neutral formation on Y-
phase of the Transformers bank. The Transformer manufacturer shall supply complete
neutral equipment comprising of tank mounted neutral C.T. copper bar neutral conductor
with supporting pin insulator of suitable rating, neutral bushings and terminal clamps, etc.
The neutral for the Transformer bank shall be formed outside the Transformer tanks
through a copper conductor of adequate section. The neutral terminals of the Transformer
bank shall be suitable for connection to station ground mat through bimetallic connector.
All the necessary equipment comprising of copper conductor interconnection with
supporting insulators, Current Transformers with its mounting arrangement etc. for
formation of neutral outside the Transformer tanks including connection to the ground -
mat risers shall be in the scope of supply of the contractor.
6.22.14 Bushing of identical voltage rating shall be interchangeable.
6.22.15 The insulation class of high voltage neutral bushing shall be properly coordinated with the
insulation class of the neutral of the low voltage winding.
6.22.16 Each bushing shall be so co-ordinate with the transformer insulation that all flashover will
occur outside the tank.
6.23 MARSHALLING BOX AND MAIN CONTROL PANEL
6.26.1 Sheet steel (atleast 2.0 mm thick cold rolled or 2.5 mm thick hot rolled or alternately 1.6
mm thick stainless steel) , vermin proof, well ventilated and weather proof marshalling box
with water-tight hinged and padlocked door of a suitable construction shall be provided for
the transformer ancillary apparatus. The box shall have slopping roof and the interior and

Page 23 of 56
exterior painting shall be in accordance with the specification. Padlock along with duplicate
keys shall be supplied for marshalling box. The degree of protection shall be IP-55.
6.26.2 The schematic diagram of the circuitry inside the marshalling box be prepared and fixed
inside the door under a propane sheet.
6.26.3 To prevent internal condensation, an approved type of metal clad heater controlled by a
thermostat and water tight, single pole, iron-clad rotary switch mounted on the outside of
the box, shall be provided.
6.26.4 The marshalling box shall accommodate the following equipment along with their
completely wired repeat contacts:
a. Protection and control equipment for the cooling system.
b. Oil & Winding Temperature indicators of each phase of HV & LV windings mounted at
the height of not more than 1600 mm from the ground level.
c. Terminal boards & ground plates for incoming & outgoing cables and for Current
Transformer secondary’s and control equipment.
d. Illumination lamp and 5 Amp, 240 V, 3 pin socket with switch.
6.26.5 All incoming cables shall enter the marshalling box from the bottom and the gland plate
shall not be less than 450 mm from the base of the box. The gland plates & associated
compartment shall be sealed in a suitable manner to prevent the ingress of moisture from
the cable trench.
6.26.6 The main control panel for a bank of three single phase Transformers shall have the
Provision for accommodating 2 nos. 415 V, 3 phase AC incoming feeders, 2 Nos, 110 V DC
incoming feeders and required number of outgoing feeders to the marshalling box of
individual single phase Transformers. Necessary MCCBs/MCBs shall be provided in the
incoming and outgoing circuits by the supplier. The incoming AC & DC cables from Station
Auxiliary Board and DC Distribution board shall be provided and terminated. The outgoing
AC & DC cables between main control panel and individual single phase marshalling boxes
shall be provided by the supplier. The power cables, control cables/instrument cables
between main control panel and individual marshalling boxes & for taking the signal to
Station Auxiliary board and Protection panels shall be provided by the supplier.

Page 24 of 56
6.26.7 Temperature Indicating devices

All transformers shall be provided with a dial type thermometer for indicating oil
temperature. The indicator shall be fitted with a pointer to register maximum temp
recorded and adjustable set of mercury contact for alarm and trip.
6.26.8 In addition, all the transformers shall be provided with a dial type Hot Spot winding
temperature indicator in HV, MV & LV windings
6.26.9 The temperature indicators shall be housed in marshaling box.
6.26.10 The alarm (mercury) and trip (mercury) contact of WTI & OTI shall be adjustable between
40oC to 100oC. The temperature difference between opening & closing of these mercury
contacts shall not be more than 10 0 C.
6.26.11 The mercury contacts used for controlling cooling plant motors shall be adjustable to close
between 40oC and 100oC. The temperature differential between opening & closing of this
mercury contact shall be between 10oC to 15oC.
6.26.12 All contacts should be accessible on removal of the cover adjustable to scale. It shall also
be possible to move the pointers by hand for checking the operation of contacts and
associated equipment.
6.26.13 In addition each transformer shall be provided with a dial type thermometer for indicating
the ambient temperature.
6.24 ON LOAD TAP CHANGER (OLTC)

6.24.1. Each transformer shall be provided with an on load tap changer for varying it effective
transformation ratio while the transformer is ON Load and without providing phase
displacement. The salient features of the OLTC shall be as under:
1. All the transformers shall be running in parallel and their tap changers shall be
controlled by keeping any of them as master and others as followers.
2. The tap changing mechanism should be suitable for remote control operation from
remote control panel in the control room in addition to being capable of local manual
as well as local electrical operation.

Page 25 of 56
6.24.2. Tap Changing Switch shall be provided on LV side in sixteen (16) equal steps of 1.25% for
variation of voltage from minus 5% to plus 15%.
6.24.3. In case of Transformer Bank, all the transformers in Transformer Banks shall be running
in parallel and their tap changers shall be controlled by keeping any of them as master
and others as followers.
6.24.4. The on circuit switch handle shall be so located as to be easily operated by a man
standing on the Transformer floor and shall be provided with a locking arrangement
along with tap position indicator.
6.24.5. It shall not be possible to leave the tap changer in an intermediate position or leave the
tap changer in different position for a bank: of three single phase Transformers. This
shall be accomplished by means of electrical interlocking circuit.
6.24.6. The On Load Tap Changer (OLTC) shall be of high speed resistor type principle, make MR
or ABB Sweden. The on load changer shall be vacuum technology include the following:
1. An oil immersed tap selector and arcing switch or arc suppressing tap selector,
provided with reactor or resistor for reduction of make and breaks arcing voltages,
overloads and short circuits.
2. OLTC in addition to the requirement of 8.3 of IEC 60214 for on load tap changers, tap-
changing equipment shall be capable of carrying the same currents, due to external
short-circuit, as the transformer windings with they are associated.
3. The contract life of the moving and fixed contacts of the on-load tap selector switch at
the 600,000 operations minimum. The mechanical life shall be more than 800,000
operations. The number of operations between each maintenance period shall be
300,000 operations. The type test reports to support these figures shall be attached to
the bid.
4. Motor driven mechanism
5. Control and Protection devices
6. Local tap changer position indicator
7. Manual operation device

Page 26 of 56
6.24.7. The on-load tap changer shall be designed so that the contacts do not interrupt arc
within the main tank of transformer. The tap changer selector and arcing switch or arc
suppressing tap selector switch shall be located in one or more oil filled compartments.
The diverter switch should be provided with gas vent and Buchholz relay. It shall be
designed so as to prevent the oil in tap selector and diverter switch compartments from
mixing with the oil in transformer tank. The tap changer shall be capable of permitting
parallel operation with other transformer of the same type.
6.24.8. The transformer shall give full load output on all taps without exceeding the limit of
permissible temperature rise in oil and winding. The manual operating device shall be so
located on the transformer that it can be operated by a man standing at the level of
transformer track. It shall be strong and robust in construction and shall be capable of
giving satisfactory service under site conditions including frequent operations. It shall
not be possible to operate the electric drive when the manual operating gear is in use.
6.24.9. Necessary interlocks blocking independent control when the units are in parallel shall be
provided.
6.24.10. The controls shall be so arranged as to ensure that when a tap change operation has
commenced, it shall be completed independently of the operation of control relays or
switches. Local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement only until, the
control switch is returned to the off position between successive operations. Under
abnormal conditions such as may occur when the contactor controlling one tap change
sticks, the arrangement must be such as to switch off supply to the motor so that an out
of step condition is limited to one tap difference between the units. Limit switches shall
be provided to prevent over running of mechanism.
6.24.11. The transformer and the tap changing equipment shall be designed to permit full rated
operation with tap changing equipment temporarily installed in any intermediate
position. Details of out of step protection provided for the taps should be furnished in
the tender.
6.24.12. The control scheme for the tap changer shall be provided for independent auto/ non-
auto control of the tap changer when the transformers are in independent service.

Page 27 of 56
6.24.13. In addition provisions shall be made to enable parallel control also so that the tap
changers of two or more transformers will be operated simultaneously when one unit is
in parallel with another so that under normal conditions the tap changer will not
become out of step and this will eliminate circulating current. Additional features like
“Master / Follower” and visual indication, during the operation of motor shall also be
incorporated.
6.24.14. A mechanical tap position indicator shall be provided on the tap changer in addition to
remote indication equipment in the control room on remote control cubicle of OLTC.
Necessary interlocks, for independent control when the units are in parallel shall be
provided.
6.24.15. The whole motor drive unit comprising the motor and its control gear including
contactors, indicator, local electrical push buttons, five digit operation counters, handle
for manual control etc. as well as terminals for the control and indication wiring shall be
housed in a dust proof kiosk mounted on a tap changer. A heating element with
thermostat and switch shall also be provided in kiosk, for ensuring trouble free
operation of the drive in cold weather. Arrangement shall be made for padlocking the
kiosk. Tap position indication shall be visible by number appearing in a small glass
window on the front of the kiosk. For remote indication an instrument type indication
of digital type shall be provided, on a panel.
6.24.16. Any enclosed compartment not oil filled shall be adequately ventilated. All contactors,
relay coils or other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion or deterioration
due to condensation, fungi etc.
6.24.17. The oil in the compartments of the main tap changing apparatus which do not contain
contacts used for making or breaking current shall be maintained under conservator
head by means of a pipe connection from the highest point of the chamber to the
conservator. This connection shall be controlled by a suitable valve and shall be
arranged so that any gas leaving the chamber will pass into the gas and oil actuated
relay. A separate Buchholz relay with trip contacts shall be provided for the On-Load
Tap Changer chamber.

Page 28 of 56
6.24.18. Each compartment in which the oil is not maintained under conservator head shall be
provided with a suitable direct reading oil level gauge.
6.24.19. A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be fitted with the driving mechanism
chamber.
6.24.20. Local electrical control switches and the local operating gear shall be clearly labeled in
suitable manner to indicate the direction of operation of tap changer.
6.24.21. The prices shall include necessary indoor and outdoor equipment except for power and
control cables (between the tap changer and control room). Complete particulars of the
on load tap changer gear including, the capacity of the motor shall be stated in the
tender.
6.24.22. The remote control panel of OLTC gear to be installed in the control room should match
in colour and dimensions with the Employer’s transformer control panel for which
details would be furnished to the successful bidder.
6.24.23. In addition to the fittings, auxiliaries and accessories considered necessary by the
Employer the following items shall be provided.
6.24.24. For Local Electrical Control
1. Raise/ lower selector switch with a intermediate ÒFF’ position.
2. Auxiliary transformer (if necessary) along with MCB’s and links.
3. Step by step contactor
4. Thermal over-load relay for the motor
5. Reversing contactor
6. ON/OFF automatic trip air circuit breaker for motor supply
7. Local /remote change-over selector switch.
6.24.25. For Remote Electrical Independent Control
1. All equipment listed in (ii) above.
2. Tap position indicator for mounting on control panel in the control room.
3. Signal lamp and buzzer, for indicating “Tap Change in Progress”.
4. Raise lower switch push button type with intermediate off/position for remote
control.

Page 29 of 56
5. Emergency stop button (push button type) with visual indication.

6. Visual and alarm indication for non completion of operation within pre-set time.
7. Provision of interlocking system for blocking independent control when the units are
to run in parallel by providing interlockable phase sequence selector switch.
8. All audio-visual indications should be brought to the Remote Tap Changer Cubicle
(RTCC) panel.
9. A voltage chart along with HV & LV and tap position.
10. Space Heater with thermostat & switch to avoid condensation of moisture.
11. Suitable 11 W, CFL along with switch.
Note: - All equipment and their connections in RTCC panel should be properly marked. The
buzzer/bell (Industrial type) should be provided.
6.24.26. For Simultaneous Parallel Operation of Transformers
1. All equipment listed in (III) above.
2. Out of step relay along with auxiliary relays, contactors and other equipment
including a buzzer and signal lamp to indicate the out of step indication when
transformers in one of pair of group of rating in parallel are one tap out of step and
also to trip the circuit breaker.
3. Control selector switch to enable to run a transformer as Master/Follower or
independent in a group.
4. Selection switches for individual/parallel operation.
5. D.C. supply, Isolators, D.C. supply, ‘ON’ indication & DC failure, booster alongwith
cancellation.
6.25 AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE CONTROL

6.28.1 Automatic control shall be suitable for control of transformers in parallel.
6.28.2 Following methods of control shall be provided.

Page 30 of 56
1. Automatic Independent – It shall be possible to select automatic independent control

for each transformer irrespective of the method of control selected for any other of
the associated transformers.
2. Automatic parallel- It shall be possible to select any transformer for master or
follower control.
3. Interlocking shall be provided to not operate any tap changer by supervisory, remote
or local electrical hand control while the equipment is switched for automatic
operation.
6.26 VOLTAGE REGULATING RELAYS

6.29.1 Automatic voltage control shall be initiated by a voltage regulating relay of an approved
type and suitable for flush mounting. The relay shall operate from the nominal reference
voltage stated in the schedule of requirement derived from a circuit mounted LV voltage
transformer having Class 1.0 or 0.5 accuracy to IEC 60186 and the relay voltage reference
balance point shall be adjustable.
6.29.2 The relay bandwidth shall preferably be adjustable to any value between 1.5 times and 2.5
times the transformer tap step percentage, the nominal setting being twice the
transformer tap step percentage.
6.29.3 The relay shall be insensitive to frequency variation between the limits of 47 Hz and 51 Hz.
The relay shall be complete with a time delay element adjustable between 10 to 120
seconds. The relay shall also incorporate an under voltage blocking facility which renders
the control inoperative if the reference voltage falls below 80% of the nominal value with
automatic restoration of control when the reference voltage rises to 85% of nominal value.
6.29.4 On each transformer the voltage transformer supply to the voltage regulating relay shall be
mounted for partial or complete failure. The specified indicating lamp and alarm will be
inoperative when the circuit breaker controlling the lower voltage side of the transformer
is open and also that when the tap changer is on control other than automatic control.
6.29.5 The voltage regulating relays shall be equipped with in line compensation facility for
impedance or load current based compensation.

Page 31 of 56
6.29.6 The voltage regulating relays AVRs shall be suitable for parallel, slave/follower and
independent mode of operation and shall communicate with the other relays fitted with
the transformer to operate in parallel.
6.27 ON-LINE DISSOLVED GAS ANALYSIS (DGA) & MOISTURE METER (NOT APPLICABLE)
6.30.1 The equipment shall be provided for Multi-Gas online dissolved gas monitoring of
transformer required for detection of incipient faults in transformers as per relevant
standards. Transformer shall be fitted with online DGA which shall continuously monitor
PPM value of dissolved gases at regular intervals.
6.30.2 Technical Parameters:
The equipment must be capable to measure following fault indicating gases
i. Methane(CH4)
ii. Acetylene(C2H2)
iii. Ethylene(C2H4)
iv. Ethane(C2H6)
v. Hydrogen(H2)
vi. Carbon Monoxide(CO)
vii. Carbon Dioxide(C02)
6.30.3 The equipment shall also be able to measure Moisture (H20) content in transformer oil.
6.30.4 Humidity range shall be considered as 10 to 95 %.
6.30.5 The Accuracy of equipment shall be ±5% or ± Lowest detection level (LDL), (whichever is
greater)
6.30.6 The Repeatability of equipment shall be .±2% or.± 2 ppm, (whichever is greater)
6.30.7 The oil temperature range of the equipment shall be -10°C to 120°C and external
temperature range shall be -5°C to 50 °C.
6.30.8 The equipment should not use any Carrier Gases or calibration gases.
6.30.9 The equipment shall be required to measure gas concentration and compare it with
relevant IEC standard or user defined configuration for the alarm. The dissolved gases shall
be displayed in PPM or as a percent of alarm setting.

Page 32 of 56
6.30.10 The sampling rates measurement frequency shall be configurable from hourly to daily.
6.30.11 The equipment shall be built of memory to store results for minimum six month
irrespective of sampling rate at the lowest interval.
6.30.12 The equipment should have LCD display at local unit to provide test result instantly.
6.30.13 Suitable provision shall be made at the display unit to give alarm and trip signal.
6.30.14 All the results shall be suitably communicated (IEC 61850 protocol) to the remote
computers (HMI) located in control room & integrate into the SCADA system and locally
through laptop via RS-232/ RS-485, USB.
6.30.15 Suitable software shall be provided for Fault Diagnosis i.e. Key gases, Ratios (Rogers/IEC
standard), Duval's Triangle, Church Monogram and Cellulose Degradation etc.
6.30.16 The detecting, measuring and digital display unit shall be provided in a dust and weather
proof enclosure with degree of protection IP-55.
6.30.17 The equipment shall be suitable to operate on 230±10% V AC, 50Hz supply.
6.30.18 The Transformer shall be fitted with the relevant oil and gas actuated relay equipment
conforming to IS: 3637/ relevant IEC standards having contacts which shall close oil surge
or low level conditions.
6.28 ANTI-EARTHQUAKE CLAMPING DEVICE

To prevent transformer movement during earthquake, a clamping device shall be provided
for fixing the transformer to the foundation. The contractor shall supply necessary bolts for
embedding in the concrete after transformer is placed on foundation. The arrangement
shall be such that the transformer can be fixed to or unfastened from these bolts as
desired.
6.29 FITTINGS
The following fittings shall be provided on the transformers:
1. Conservator with isolating valves, oil filling hole with cap and drain valve. The drain
valve of 15 mm size for conservator vessels of dia. Up to 650 mm and of 25 mm size

Page 33 of 56
for conservator vessel dia. above 650 mm. The conservator vessel shall be fitted with
constant oil pressure diaphragm oil sealing system to prevent oxidation and
contamination of oil due to contact with air. The requirement of the system are as
given below:
a. Contact of the oil with atmosphere shall be prevented by using a flexible oil
resistant nitrile rubber air cell.
b. Diaphragm of conservator shall be able to withstand the vacuum during
installation/maintenance periods. Otherwise provision shall be kept to isolate
the conservator from the main tank when the latter is under vacuum by
providing a vacuum sealing valve in the pipe connecting main tank with the
conservator.
c. The connection of the air cell to the top reservoir is by an airproof seal
preventing entrance of air into the conservator.
d. The magnetic oil level gauge provided with the conservator shall have contacts
for giving alarm when the air cell gets damaged or sinks.
2. Magnetic type oil level gauge (150 mm dia.) with low oil level alarm contacts.
Prismatic/toughened glass oil level gauge.
3. Maintenance-free Dehydrating breather shall be provided at a level of 1300 mm
above ground level & Each silica gel breathe shall be equipped with a condition based
self-learning microprocessor control unit for optimal maximization controlled
regeneration on the silica gel during phase when the transformer exhaling and LED
status condition. The function shall be tested via a test button or silica gel free
breather is also accepted.
4. A double float type Buchholz relay with isolating valve, bleeding pipe and a testing
cock, the test cock shall be suitable for a flexible (pipe connection for checking its
operation). A 5 mm dia. Copper pipe shall be connected from the relay test cock to a
valve located about 1.25 meters above ground level to facilitate sampling of gas with
the transformer in service. Interconnection between gas collection box and relay shall
also be provided. The device shall be provided with two electrically independent

Page 34 of 56
ungrounded contacts, one for alarm on gas accumulation and the other for tripping
on sudden oil surge. These contacts shall be wired up to transformer marshalling box.
The relay shall be provided with shut off valve on the conservator side as well as on
the tank side.
5. Pressure relief device
A pressure relief device of sufficient size capable of resealing shall be provided for
rapid release of any pressure that may be generated within the tank and which may
result in damage to the equipment. The device shall be spring loaded and shall be
calibrated to operate at a set pressure of oil. The device shall be capable of resetting
itself automatically to its original condition after release of excess pressure. The
device shall be designed to eliminate any chattering of the valve during operation.
The device shall be provided with suitable alarm & trip contacts. The device shall
operate at a static pressure of less than the, hydraulic test Pressure for the
Transformer tank.
A necessary air equalizer connection through a pipe connecting the pressure relief
device to the conservator along with necessary alarm contacts shall be provided for
relieving or equalizing the pressure in the pressure relief device. A suitable pipe shall
be provided for draining the oil from the pressure relief device down to the oil pit.
6. Air release plugs in the top cover.
7. Inspection cover, access holes with bolted covers for access to inner ends of bushing,
etc.
8. Winding temperature (hot spot) indicating device for local mounting complete in all
respects. Winding temperature indicator shall have three sets of contacts to operate
at different settings :
9. To provide winding temperature `high alarm’
10. To provide temperature too high `trip’
11. Dial thermometer with pocket for oil temperature indicator with one set of alarm and
one set of trip contacts and maximum reading pointer.
12. Lifting eyes or lugs for the top cover, core and coils and for the complete transformer.

Page 35 of 56
13. Jacking pads.

14. Haulage lugs.
15. Protected type mercury/alcohol in glass thermometer and a pocket to house the
same.
16. Top and bottom filter valves on diagonally opposite ends with pad locking
arrangement on both valves.
17. Top and bottom sampling valves.
18. Drain valve with pad locking arrangement.
19. Rating and connection diagram plate.
20. Two earthing terminals each capable of carrying short circuit current of the
Transformer for 4 seconds shall be provided at bottom at two comers of the
Transformer tank. The earthing terminals shall be suitable for bolted connection and
connection to the earth mat risers, provided by the Employer.
21. Bi-directional flagged rollers with locking and bolting device.
22. Marshalling Box (MB)
23. Shut off valve on both sides of flexible pipe connections between radiator bank and
transformer tank.
24. Cooling Accessories :
25. Requisite number of radiators provided with :
26. One shut off valve on top
27. One shut off valve at bottom
28. Air release device on top
29. Drain and sampling device at bottom
30. Lifting lugs.
31. Air release device and oil drain plug on oil pipe connectors.
32. Terminal marking plates for Current Transformers and Main Transformer.
33. On Load tap changer with following as per arrangement of similar equipment for
main transformer.
34. Buchholz Relay.

Page 36 of 56
35. Pressure Relief Valve with trip contacts.

36. Remote Tap changer Control Panel.
37. Any other equipment recommended or suggested by the manufacturer of OLTC.
38. One number ladder with provision for anti-climbing device.
Note:
(i) The fittings listed above are indicative and any other fittings which are generally
required for satisfactory operation of the transformer are deemed to be included in the
quoted price of the transformer.
(ii) The contacts of various devices required for alarm and trip shall be potential free and
shall be adequately rated for continuous, making and breaking current duties at 110
volts D.C. (nominal).
6.30 CONTROL CONNECTIONS, ALARMS AND WIRING TERMINAL, BOARD AND FUSES
6.33.1 The Transformer manufacturer shall supply complete control equipment for the
Transformers and sufficient contacts for its auxiliaries including cooling fans and various
annunciations/alarms shall be provided. The control equipment for the Transformers shall
be housed in the respective marshalling boxes of weather proof construction. The supplier
shall take care the provision of Auxiliary supplies to marshalling box by providing necessary
MCCB, cables etc. The Transformer supplier shall make provision for repeat indications of
winding temperature of all the phases of 132 kV winding, oil temperature, Buchhloz relay
status, pressure relief device status, AC/DC supply status etc.
6.33.2 The control equipment to be provided with the Transformer shall also include (but not be
limited to)necessary supply distribution arrangement consisting of switch fuse units
contactors, overload relays, remote/local control switch, start/ stop push buttons etc
6.33.3 Provision shall be made in the Transformer control panels for annunciation alarms & trips
for the following (but not be limited to)abnormal conditions for which sufficient number of
contacts shall be provided on the initiating relays/devices:
Alarms
1. H. V. Winding temperature 'High'

Page 37 of 56
2. L. V. Winding temperature 'High'

3. Oil temperature 'High'
4. Buchholz relay 'Alarm'
5. Oil level 'Low'
6.
7.
8. Differential pressure 'Low'
9. Power supply "Failure"
10.
11.
Trips
1. H. V. Winding temperature 'Very High'
2. L. V. Winding temperature 'Very High'
3. Oil temperature 'Very High'
4. Buchholz relay 'Trip'
5. Pressure relief device operated
6.33.4 Normally no fuses shall be used anywhere. Instead of fuse, MCBs (both in AC & DC circuits)
shall be used. Only in cases where a MCB cannot replace a fuse due to system
requirements, a HRC fuse can be accepted.
6.33.5 All wiring connections, terminal boards, fuses MCB’s and links shall be suitable for tropical
atmosphere. Any wiring liable to be in contact with oil shall have oil resisting insulation and
the bare ends of stranded wire shall be sweated together to prevent seepage of oil along
the wire.
6.33.6 Panel connections shall be neatly and squarely fixed to the panel. All instruments and panel
wiring shall be run in PVC or non-rusting metal cleats of the compression type. All wiring to
a panel shall be taken from suitable terminal boards.
6.33.7 Where conduits are used, the runs shall be laid with suitable falls, and the lowest parts of
the run shall be external to the boxes. All conduit runs shall be adequately drained and
ventilated. Conduits shall not be run at or below ground level.

Page 38 of 56
6.33.8 When 400 volt connections are taken through junction boxes or marshalling boxes, they
shall be adequately screened and 400 volts Danger Notice must be affixed to the outside of
the junction boxes or marshalling box. Proper colour code for Red, Yellow, Blue wires shall
be followed.
6.33.9 All box wiring shall be in accordance with relevant IS. All wiring shall be of stranded copper
(48 strands) of 1100 Volt grade and size not less than 2.5 sq.mm.
6.33.10 All wires on panels and all multi-core cables shall have ferrules which bear the same
number at both ends, as indicated in the relevant drawing.
6.33.11 At those points of interconnection between the wiring carried out by separate contractors,
where a change of number cannot be avoided double ferrules shall be provided on each
wire. The change of numbering shall be shown on the appropriate diagram of the
equipment.
6.33.12 The same ferrule number shall not be used on wires in different circuits on the same
panels.
6.33.13 Ferrules shall be of white insulating material and shall be provided with glossy finish to
prevent the adhesion of dirt. They shall be clearly and durably marked in black and shall
not be affected by dampness or oil.
6.33.14 Stranded wires shall be terminated with tinned Ross Courtney terminals, claw washers or
crimped tubular lugs. Separate washers shall be suited to the size of the wire terminated.
Wiring shall, in general, be accommodated on the sides of the box and the wires for each
circuit shall be separately grouped. Back of panel wiring shall be arranged so that access to
the connecting items of relays and other apparatus is not impeded.
6.33.15 All circuits, in which the voltage exceeds 125 volts, shall be kept physically separated from
the remaining wiring. The function of each circuit shall be marked on the associated
terminal boards.
6.33.16 Where apparatus is mounted on panels, all metal cases shall be separately earthed by
means of stranded copper wire or strip having a cross section of not less than 2 sq. mm
where strip is used, the joints shall be sweated. The copper wire shall have green coloured
insulation for earth connections.

Page 39 of 56
6.33.17 All wiring diagram for control and relay panel shall preferably be drawn as viewed from the
back and shall show the terminal boards arranged as in services.
6.33.18 Terminal board rows should be spaced adequately not less than 100 mm apart to permit
convenient access to external cables and terminations.
6.33.19 Terminal boards shall be placed with respect to the cable gland (at a minimum distance of
200 mm) as to permit satisfactory arrangement of multicore cable tails.
6.33.20 Terminal boards shall have pairs of terminals for incoming and outgoing wires. Insulating
barriers shall be provided between adjacent connections. The height of the barriers and
the spacing between terminals shall be such as to give adequate protection while allowing
easy access to terminals. The terminals shall be adequately protected with insulating dust
proof covers. No live metal shall be exposed at the back of the terminal boards. CT
terminals shall have shorting facilities. The terminals for CTs should have provision to insert
suitable plugs and with isolating links. 20% spare terminals shall be provided.
6.33.21 All fuses shall be of the HRC cartridge type and these shall be properly labelled, wherever
these cannot be replaced by MCB as normally only MCB’s shall be used.
6.33.22 All interconnecting wiring, as per the final approved scheme between accessories of
transformer and marshalling box is included in the scope of this specification and shall be
done by the Transformer supplier.
6.33.23 The schematic diagram shall be drawn and fixed under a transparent prospane sheet on
the inner side of the marshalling box cover.
6.33.24 As a rule, the fuses shall be replaced by Miniature Circuit Breakers
(MCBs) in the control and other supplies.
6.33.25 To avoid condensation in the MB, a space heater shall be provided with an MCB and
thermostat.
6.33.26 Suitable 11W, CFL light shall be provided in the Marshalling Box for lightning purpose.
6.31 RADIO INTERFERENCE AND NOISE LEVEL

Transformers shall be designed with particular care to suppress at least the third and fifth
harmonic voltages so as to minimize interference with communication circuits.

Page 40 of 56
Transformer noise level, when energized at normal voltage and frequency shall be as per
NEMA stipulations.
6.32 NITROGEN INJECTION FIRE PROTECTION CUM EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM (NIFPES) FOR 5
MVA POWER TRANSFORMER
The contractor shall provide the nitrogen injection fire protection cum extinguishing
system. The fire protection system using nitrogen as fire quenching medium is required for
the 5 MVA, 132/33kV transformer NIFPES shall act as fire preventer by preventing
transformer oil tank explosion and possible fire in case of internal faults. In the event of fire
by external causes such as bushing fire, OLTC fires, fire from Surrounding equipment etc, it
shall act as a fast and effective fire fighter. NIFPES shall accomplish its role as fire preventer
and extinguisher without employing water and/or carbon dioxide. Fire shall be put out
within max. 3 minutes of system activation and within max. 30 seconds of commencement
of nitrogen injection.
6.32.1. Activation of NIFPES
Mal-functioning of fire prevention/extinguishing systems is their major shortcoming which
leads to interruption in power supply. The contractor shall ensure that the chances of
malfunctioning of NIFPES are practically nil. To achieve this objective, the contractor shall
work out his scheme of activating signals which, while preventing mal-operation, should
not be too rigorous to make the operation of NIFPES impracticable in case of actual need.
Transformer isolation shall be the mandatory pre-requisite for activation of the system in
automatic mode or remote mode in the control room. In addition, at least following
electrical-signals shall be provided in series for activating NIFPES.
6.32.2. Auto Mode
a) For prevention of fire:
i) Differential relay operation
ii) Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve
iii) Tripping of all connected breakers is a pre-requisite for initiation of system activation.
b) For extinguishing fire:

Page 41 of 56
i) Fire detector
ii) Buchholz relay paralleled with pressure relief valve
iii) Tripping of all connected breakers is a pre-requisite for initiation of system activation.
Manual Mode (Local/Remote): Tripping of all connected breakers is pre- requisite for
initiation of system activation.
Manual Mode (Mechanical): Tripping of all connected breakers is a pre- requisite for
initiation of system activation.
6.32.3. General description of NIFPES
Schematic of the system
NIFPES should be a standalone dedicated system for oil filled transformer. It should have a
fire extinguishing (F.E.) cubicle placed on a plinth at a distance of 6-10 mtrs from the
transformer. The F.E. cubicle may be connected to the transformer oil tank (near its top)
and to the oil pit (of capacity approx. equal to 10% of transformer oil tank) from its bottom
through oil pipes with gate valves. The F.E. cubicle should house a pressurized nitrogen
cylinder connected to the transformer oil tank (near its bottom). Cable connections are to
be provided from signal box placed on the transformer to the control box in the control
room and from control box to F.E. cubicle. Fire detectors placed at the top of transformer
are to be connected in parallel to the signal box. The signal box may be connected to a
Pre-stressed non-return valve fitted between the conservator tank and Buchholz relay.
Control box is also to be connected to relay panel in control room for system activation
signals.
6.32.4. Operation
On receipt of all activating signals, drain of pre-determined quantity of oil commences thus
removing high temp top oil layer. Simultaneously nitrogen is injected under high pressure
at a pre-fixed rate, stirring the oil thus bringing the temperature of top oil layer down.
Nitrogen occupies the space created by oil drained out and acts as an insulating layer
between the tank oil and fire on top cover. Pre-stressed non-return valve blocks oil flow
from conservator tank, thus isolating it & preventing aggravation of fire.
6.32.5. System components

Page 42 of 56
Broadly, NIFPES shall consist of the following components. It is emphasized that all
components, irrespective of their exclusion in the details given below, necessary for fast
reliable and effective working of NIFPES shall be considered within the scope of supply.
6.32.6. Fire extinguishing cubicle
It shall be made of 3 mm thick steel sheet, painted dark red from inside and outside with
hinged split doors fitted with high quality tamper proof lock. It shall be complete with the
base frame and the following:-
 Nitrogen gas cylinder with regulator and falling pressure electrical contact manometer. 12
 Oil drain pipe with mechanical quick drain valve.
 Electro mechanical control equipment for oil drain and pre-determined regulated nitrogen
release.
 Pressure monitoring switch for back-up protection for nitrogen release.
 Limit switches for monitoring of the system.
 Flanges on top panel for connecting oil drain and nitrogen injection pipes for transformer.
 Panel lighting (CFL type)
 Oil drain pipe extension of suitable sizes for connecting pipes to oil pit.
6.32.7. Control box

Control box for monitoring system operation, automatic control and remote operation,
with following alarms indication, light switches, push buttons, audio signal, line fault
detection suitable for tripping and signaling on 110V DC supply.
 System on
 PNRV open
 Oil drain valve closed
 Gas inlet valve closed
 PNRV closed
 Fire detector trip
 Buchholz relay trip

Page 43 of 56
 Oil drain valve open

 Extinction in progress
 Cylinder pressure low
 Differential relay trip
 PRV operated
 Transformer trip
 System out of service
 Line fault fire detector
 Line fault differential relay
 Line fault buchholz relay
 Line fault PRV
 Line fault transformer trip
 Line fault PNRV
 Auto / Manual/Off
 Extinction release on
 Extinction release off
 Lamp test
 Visual/Audio alarm
 Visual/Audio alarm
 Visual/audio alarm for DC supply fail
6.32.8. Pre-stressed non return valve (PNRV)
PNRV is to be fitted in the conservator pipe line between conservator and Buchholz relay. It
shall have the proximity switch for remote alarm, indication and with visual position
indicator the valve will not isolate conservator during, normal flow of oil during filtration or
filling, Locking plates shall be provided with handle for pad locking to ensure no
movement for valve position during service and filter position . The PNRV should be of the
best quality because malfunction of PNRV shall be of serious consequence as its closing
leads to stoppage of breathing of transformer.

Page 44 of 56
6.32.9. Fire detectors

The system shall be complete with adequate number of fire detectors fitted on the top of
oil tank, OLTC/OFF circuit tap changer for heat sensing each fitted with two no. cable
glands (water proof/weather proof).
6.32.10. Signal box
It shall be fitted on the transformer for terminating cable connections form PNRV and fire
detectors and for further connection to the control box.
6.32.11. Cables
Fire survival copper cables, able to withstand 750 degree C, Fire retardant low smoke
(FRLS) cable 12 core x 1.5 mm sq. for connection between transformer signal
box/marshalling box to control box and control box to fire extinguishing cubicle shall be
used. Fire retardant low smoke cable 4 core x 1.5mm sq. for connection between control
box to DC supply source and fire extinguishing cubicle to AC supply source, signal
Box/marshalling box to pre-stressed non return valve connection on transformer shall be
used.
6.32.12. Pipes
Pipes, complete with connections, flanges, bends tees etc. shall be supplied alongwith the
system.
6.32.13. Other items

A. Oil drain and nitrogen injection openings with gate valves on transformer tank at suitable
locations.
B. Flanges with dummy piece in conservator pipe between Buchholz relay and conservator
tank for fixing PNRV.
C. Fire detector brackets on transformer top cover.
D. Spare potential free contacts for system activating signals i.e. differential relay buchholz
relay, pressure relief valve, transformer isolation (master trip relay).
E. Pipe connections between transformer to fire extinguishing cubicle and fire extinguishing
cubicle to oil pit.

Page 45 of 56
F. Cabling on transformer top cover for fire detectors to be connected in parallel and inter
cabling between signal box to control box and control box to fire extinguishing cubicle.
G. Mild steel oil tank with moisture proof coating and sheet thickness of minimum 5 mm,
with watertight cover, to be placed in the oil pit. This tank shall be provided with the
manhole, air vent pipe through silica gel breather, drain valve and a spare gate valve at
the top.
H. The capacity of tank shall be adequate capacity and to be decided during detailed
engineering and shall be provided as each Substation. The location of the tank shall be
approved by the employer. All the Transformers to be fitted with NISPEF at that
Substation. shall be connected through suitable piping arrangement to this common
tank.
I. DC-DC converter 220-110V DC (optional, incase 110V, supply is not available.)
J. Gate valves on oil drain pipe and nitrogen injection pipe should be able to withstand full
vacuum. A non-return valve shall also be fitted on nitrogen injection pipe between
transformer and gate valve.
K. The F.E. cubicle shall be painted with post office red color (shade 538 of IS-5). All the
exposed parts i.e. pipes, supports, signal box etc shall be painted with enameled paint.
L. Civil works of Fire extinguishing cubicle
6.32.14. Interlocks
It shall be ensured that once the NIFPES gets activated manually or in auto mode, all the
connected breakers shall not close until the system is actually put in OFF mode. Also PNRV
shall get closed only if all the connected breakers are open .
Technical particulars
I. Fire extinction period

On commencement of nitrogen injection Max. 30 Seconds
II. From the moment of system Max. 3 Minutes
activation to

Page 46 of 56
III. Complete cooling 14

IV. Fire detectors heat sensing 141Deg C
temperature
V. Heat sensing area 800mm radius
VI. Pre-stressed non return valve setting Minimum 40 liter per minute for normal
operation and minimum 60 liter per
minute for abnormal operation
VII. Min. Capacity of nitrogen cylinder 10 m^3 gas at pressure of 150kg/cm^3
upto 60000 liter oil capacity of tank and
20m^3 gas at pressure of 150kg/cm^2
above 60000 liter.
VIII. Power Source (Control Box) 110V DC
IX. Fire extinguishing cubicle for lighting 230V AC
6.33 TESTS
6.33.1. Bidders have to offer the already type tested transformers as per relevant IEC/IS or any
other equivalent international standards. The type test report should not be earlier than 10
years as on the date of bid opening. If the transformers offered are not type tested or in
case of incomplete type test reports, the successful bidder shall undertake to repeat the
type test at his own expenses.
6.33.2. The Transformers shall be completely factory tested before dispatch in accordance with
the IEC/ IS standards and with such other tests as may be necessary to ensure that the
equipment is satisfactory and is in accordance with this specification. No equipment shall
be dispatched from the manufacturers work before the relevant test reports have been
6.33.3. Routine Tests
Routine tests on transformers shall include tests stated in latest issue of IS: 2026. These
tests shall also include but shall not be limited to the following:
1. Measurement of winding resistance.
2. Voltage ratio on each tapping and checking of voltage vector relationship.
3. Impedance at principal, minimum & maximum tapping position
4. Magnetic balance test.

Page 47 of 56
5. Load losses.
6. No load losses and no load current.
7. Insulation resistance for 60 seconds and 15 seconds (R60/R15) and polarization index
i.e. Insulation Resistance for 10 minutes and one minute (R10/R1).
8. Induced over voltage withstand test.
9. Separate source voltage withstand test (applied potential).
10. Tan delta measurement and capacitance of each winding to earth (with all other
windings earthed) & between all windings connected together to earth.
11. Measurement of acoustic noise level.
12. Measurement of Zero sequence impedance.
13. Lighting Impulse Test for 132/33kV Transformer
14. Di-electric Tests
a. For 132/33kV Transformers
o Short duration AC
o Separate source AC
o Long Duration AC
6.33.4. Type Tests

The transformer shall be subjected to the following type tests (in case the offered
transformers are not type tested or the complete type test was not conducted as per the
IEC/IS standards ) as per the IS 2026 in the presence of the Employers representative:
1. Lightning Impulse voltage Test
This test shall be carried out in accordance with clause 12 of the latest issue of IS: 2026
(Part-III).
2. Temperature Rise Test along with Dissolved gas analysis test.
The temperature rise test shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 2026 Part-II. The
Temperature rise shall not exceed the values stated elsewhere in the specification.

Page 48 of 56
Test shall be carried out by feeding 1.1 time the total guaranteed losses at 750C at
highest current tap.
3. Test on OLTC
4. All routine and type test shall be carried out free of cost.
6.33.5. Special Test:
Short Circuit Test: Short circuit test on one unit of each rating shall be conducted in the
presence of employer’s representative or if short circuit test on an identical unit of
transformer has already been conducted the same shall be submitted for consideration.
However, short circuit calculations shall be submitted to prove the withstand capability of
transformer for short circuit forces.
6.34 TEST WAIVER, PROCEDURES AND COSTS

6.34.1. The Employer, at his discretion, may waive impulse tests provided type test reports of
impulse voltage withstand tests carried out on an identical units in any Government
accredited Laboratory in India within last 5 years are furnished by the manufacturer.
6.34.2. No load losses and exciting current shall be measured at rated voltage, rated frequency
and at 90% and 110% of rated voltage, both before and after the lightning impulse tests.
6.34.3. The method of test loading shall be described in the test report for determination of both
average and hottest spot temperature. Where the winding temperature equipments are
specified, data shall also be included for calibration of hottest spot temperature indicator.
6.34.4. Resistance of each winding of each phase shall be measured at principal and at all the taps
and corrected to 75 0C.
6.34.5. Impedance voltage shall be measured at principal and at all taps,
6.34.6. No load Loss Measurement at 400 Volt.
6.35 STAGE INSPECTION

The Employer reserves the right for stage inspection at the time of manufacturing of the
transformers at various stages, to ensure that internal details are in accordance with
specifications approved manufacturer drawings for which the supplier would give 15 days

Page 49 of 56
prior notice and the supplier would not go ahead with further production schedule without
obtaining concurrence from the Employer.
a) Core:
Bidders will offer the core for inspection and approval by the Employer during the
manufacturing stage.
Following tests shall be carried out:
(i) Measurement of flux density.
(ii) No load loss measurement by providing dummy coils at 90%, 100% and 110% rated
voltage and frequency.
(iii) Physical inspection for quality of workmanship.
b) Windings:
(i) Measurement of cross-sectional area for current density.
(ii) Measurement of weight of bare copper/ cover by resistance methods.
(iii) Test may be carried out on sample of copper for assessing its quality.
c) Tests on Transformer Tank
(i) Vacuum Test: One transformer tank of each size shall be subjected to the vacuum
pressure of 760 mm of mercury. The tanks designed for full vacuum shall be tested at
an internal pressure of 3.33 KN/m2 (25 mm of mercury) for one hour. The permanent
deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been released shall not exceed the
value specified in C.B.I.P. Manual and as mentioned below on Transformers (Revised
1999) without affecting the performance of the transformer.
Horizontal length of flat plate Permanent Deflection

(mm) (mm)
Upto & including 750 5.0
751-1250 6.5
1251-1750 8.0

Page 50 of 56
1751-2000 9.5
2001-2250 11.0
2251-2500 12.5
2501-3000 16.0
above 3000 19.0
(ii) Pressure Test: One transformer tank of each size together with its radiators,
conservator vessel and other fittings shall be subjected to pressure corresponding to
twice the normal head of oil or to the normal pressure plus 35 KN/m2 square (5
1b/sq.in) whichever is lower measured at the base of the tank and will be maintained
for one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after the excess pressure has
been released shall not exceed the value specified in latest C.B.I.P. Manual on
Transformers and as mentioned above.
(iii) The pressure relief device shall be subjected to increasing oil pressure. It shall
operate before reaching the test pressure specified above. The operating pressure
shall be recorded. The device shall seal off after the pressure in excess has been
relieved (routine test).
(iv) Oil leakage test: All tanks and oil filled compartments shall be tested for oil tightness
by oil of a viscosity not greater than that of insulating oil to IS:335, at the specified
ambient temperature and subjected to a pressure equal to the normal pressure plus
35 KN/m2 square (5 1b/sq.in) measured at the base of the tank. This pressure shall
be maintained for a period of not less than 12 hours, during which time no leakage
shall occur.
6.36 TESTS ON ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
Porcelain bushings, bushing current transformers, wherever provided, winding
temperature indicating devices, dial thermometers, Buchholz relays, ON LOAD tap changer,
coolers, control devices, insulating oil and other associated equipment shall be tested by

Page 51 of 56
the supplier in accordance with relevant IS. If such equipment is purchased by the supplier
from a sub-vendor, he shall have them tested to comply with these requirements.
6.37 SEQUENCE OF TESTING ON ASSEMBLED TRANSFORMER

Unless otherwise agreed, the sequence of testing shall be as follows:
1. Ratio and vector group

2. Winding resistance measurement
3. Insulation resistance measurement
4. Separate source voltage withstand test
5. Measurement of Iron losses
6. Load losses and impedance voltage measurement
7. Temperature rise test
8. Induced voltage withstand test
9. Tests on OLTC
10. Magnetic balance test
6.38 WITNESSING OF TESTS AND EXCESSIVE LOSSES

6.38.1. The Employer and/or his representative reserve the right to witness any or all tests, or to
accord waiver at its sole discretion.
6.38.2. The Employer reserves the right to reject the Transformer if losses exceed the declared
losses beyond tolerance limits as per IS or if temperature rise of oil and winding exceed the
values specified elsewhere.
6.39 CAPITALISATION OF TRANSFORMER LOSSES

6.39.1 The transformer losses will be capitalized as follows for evaluation purpose:
a) No load losses: US$ 4684 per kW
b) Load losses: US$ 1180 per kW

Page 52 of 56
6.39.2 Guaranteed Values Not Reached
If the individual losses of a power transformer as measured during test exceeds the values
guaranteed in the Bid, then for each kilowatt of losses in excess of the losses guaranteed,
an amount at the rates of twice the rates of specified in clause 6. 42.1 for no load losses,
load losses and cooling fan load shall be deducted from the Contract Price of the successful
Bidder.
6.39.3 Performance Guarantee

The performance figures quoted on Technical Data Sheet shall be guaranteed within the
tolerances permitted by relevant standards listed under this Technical Specifications, and
shall become a part of the successful Bidder's Contract. In case of loss capitalization, no
tolerance shall be permitted for the guaranteed value. The transformer will be rejected, if
the measured no-load and load losses (excluding fan loss) exceed the guaranteed value by
over 15 % provided that the total losses do not exceed 10% as specified.
6.39.4 Bidders shall indicate the guaranteed values of no load losses at rated voltage & rated
frequency and load losses & Auxiliary losses at rated output, rated voltage & rated
frequency will be indicated in the Guaranteed Technical Particulars. If the bidders quote
unrealistic and unachievable guaranteed transformer loss values (no-load or load losses),
then the Employer may ask the bidder to submit technical justifications to Substantiate
such guaranteed losses. If the justifications are not satisfactory, the proposed transformers
shall be rejected and the bid shall be considered non-responsive.
6.40 REJECTION
The Employer may reject any transformer if during tests or service any of the following
conditions arise:
1) No load loss exceeds the guaranteed value by 15% or more.
2) Load loss exceeds the guaranteed value by 15% or more.

Page 53 of 56
3) Impedance value exceeds the guaranteed value by + 10% or more.

4) The difference in impedance values of any two phases during single phase short circuit
impedance test exceeds 2% of the average value guaranteed by the vendor.
5) Oil or winding temperature rise exceeds the specified value.
6) Transformer fails on power frequency voltage withstand test.
7) Transformer is proved to have been manufactured not in accordance with the agreed
specification.
6.41 DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL
6.41.1 Drawings
a. The contractor shall furnish, within 4 months after issuing of Letter of Award, six copies
each of the following drawings/documents incorporating name of project and transformer
rating for approval.
1. Detailed overall general arrangement drawing showing front and side elevations and
plan of the transformer and all accessories including radiators and external features
with details of dimensions, spacing of wheels in either direction of motion, net weights
and shipping weights, crane lift for untanking, size of lugs and eyes, bushing lifting
dimensions, clearances between HV and LV terminals and ground, quantity of
insulating oil etc.
2. Foundation plan showing loading on each wheel and jacking points with respect to
centre line of transformer.
3. GA drawings/details of bushing and terminal connectors.
4. Name plate drawing with terminal marking and connection diagrams.
5. Wheel locking arrangement drawing.
6. Transportation dimensions drawings.
7. Interconnection diagrams.
8. Over fluxing withstand time characteristic of transformer.
9. GA drawing of marshalling box.
10. Control scheme/wiring diagram of marshalling box, OLTC and interconnection between
OLTC, RTCC and marshalling box.

Page 54 of 56
11. Technical leaflets of major components and fittings.

12. As built drawings of schematics, wiring diagram etc.
13. Setting of oil temperature indicator, winding temperature indicator.
14. Completed technical data sheets.
15. Details including write-up of tap changing gear.
16. H.V. cond. bushing.
17. Bushing Assembly.
18. Bi-metallic connectors for connection to Twin ACSR “MOOSE” (as per site
requirement) conductor of 5 MVA transformers.
19. GA of LV cable Box.
20. Radiator type Assembly.
21. Detailed calculations showing short circuit withstand capability due to radial and axial
forces during short circuit. Also calculations for thermal withstand capability during
short circuit.
b. All drawings/documents, technical data sheets and test certificates/results/calculations
shall be furnished.
c. Detailed calculations showing circuit withstand capability due to radial and axial forces
during short circuit. Also calculations for thermal withstand capability during short circuit.
d. Any approval given to the detailed drawings by the Employer shall not relieve the
contractor of the responsibility for correctness of the drawing and in the manufacture of
the equipment.
6.41.2 Instructions Manual
Six sets of the instruction manuals shall be supplied atleast four (4) weeks before the actual
dispatch of equipment. The manuals shall be in bound volumes and shall contain all the
drawings and information required for erection, operation and maintenance of the
transformer.
6.41.3 Completeness of Equipment
a. All fittings and accessories, which may not be specifically mentioned in the specification
but which are necessary for the satisfactory operation of the plant, shall be deemed to be

Page 55 of 56
included in the specification and shall be furnished by the contractor without extra
charges. The equipment shall be complete in all details, whether such details are
mentioned in the specification or not, without any financial liability to the Employer under
any circumstances.
b. All deviations from this specification shall be separately listed under the requisite
schedules, in the absence of which it will be presumed that all the provisions of the
specification are compiled by the bidder.
6.42 CENTER OF GRAVITY
The center of gravity of the assembled Transformer shall be low and as near the vertical
centre axis as possible. The Transformer shall be stable with or without oil and with or
without bushings. If the center of gravity is eccentric relative to track either with or without
oil, its location shall be shown in the outline drawing.
6.43 TOOLS & TACKLES
Hydraulic jacks of suitable capacity and all the necessary tools and tackles required for
normal operation shall be supplied by the Contractor.

The bidder shall provide the GTPs of transformer along with the tender.

Page 56 of 56
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER – 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
CONTENTS
7.0 SCOPE 1
7.1 STANDARDS 1
7.2 DESCRIPTION 2
7.3 GENERAL EQUIPMENT 3
7.4 EARTHING CONDUCTOR LAYOUT 4
7.5 EARTHING PIT 4
7.6 TECHNICAL PARTICUALRS 4

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
7.0 SCOPE
transportation up to site, testing & commissioning of material of earthing system
for Construction of 132/33 kV substation at Dhunge Sangu in Nepal. It shall be the
bidder’s responsibility to assess the exact quantity of complete material required
for the earthing system. Geo Technical Investigations including measurement of soil
resistivity is in the scope of the contractor.
7.1 STANDARDS
7.1.1 The equipments / material of the earthing system shall confirm to the following
Indian/equivalent international Standards:-
TABLE-7.0
IS : 3043 Codes of Practice for Earthing
IS : 2026 – 1992 Steel for general structural purposes
IS: 808- 1991 Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column and angle
Sections.
IS : 816 – 1992 Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction in mild steel
IS: 1364- 1992 Hexagon head bolts, Screws and nuts of product grades A &
B
IS : 1599 – 1992 Methods for bend test
IS : 1608 – 1991 Method for tensile testing of steel products.
IS: 2629 – 19990 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing on iron
&Steel.
IS : 209 – 1992 Zinc ingot

Page 1 of 4
IEEE STD 80 -2000 IEEE Guide for safety in AC Substation Grounding
7.2 DESCRIPTION
7.2.1 The contractor shall prepare the design of ground mat , earthing electrode etc. for
132/33 kV Substation at Dhunge Sangu as per layout given in Drawings in
accordance with the latest Edition of IS : 3043, ANSI / IEEE- 80-2000 for 1 second
duration of fault current as per protection systems provided. The bidder shall make
arrangement to supply grounding material (flat, pipes, round etc.) as per design
approved by the employer/PMC for laying the ground mat in outdoor yard area
which is extended 2m beyond fencing including grounding of fencing in the outdoor
yard etc. The grounding of the equipment and devices both in the control room and
outdoor yard area shall be with M.S flats of required sizes, ground electrodes etc.
The earthing terminal for surge arrestors shall be directly connected to pipe
electrodes in treated earth pits as per IS: 3043. The earthing lead from the neutral
of the power transformer shall be directly connected to two pipe electrodes in
treated earth pits as per IS: 3043. Two ground connections shall be arranged for all
the equipments and devices, as per IE rules/standards.
The tentative size of the flats for ground mat to be used shall be as follows:
TABLE-7.1
a. Control room MS flat 50 x 10 mm2
b. Outdoor yard MS flat 50 x 10 mm2
c. Riser MS Flat 50 x 6 mm2
d. Earthing electrodes 3 m long x 40 mm dia MS rod
e. Earthing Electrode for treated earthing 40 mm dia x 3 meter long G.I
pits pipe
The bidder shall design the Earthmat on the basis of fault level of switchgear.

Page 2 of 4
7.3 GENERAL EQUIPMENT

a) The noncurrent carrying parts of equipment / devices is to be connected to
grounding mat by 50 x 6 mm2 MS flats.
b) The conductor laid below ground level shall be mild steel black flat and that
above ground level shall be galvanized mild steel flat.
c) The various structures in outdoor yard shall also be grounded as per standards
by using 50x6mm2sizes of MS flats to the main ground mat.
d) All joints of grounding flat between themselves & grounding electrodes
should be over lap welded. The length of weld shall be atleast double the
width of grounding flat.
e) The earth conductors shall be free from pitting, laminations, rust, scale and
other electrical& mechanical defects.
f) The connections between earth leads and equipment shall normally be of
bolted type.
g) A layer of crushed rock of 20 mm thickness and atleast 150 mm deep shall be
spread over the switchyard area and 1.5 m beyond the periphery of grounding
conductor , The crushed rock shall also placed outside, along the periphery of
the fencing when the fencing is connected to the main grounding system. The
supply of crushed rock is in the scope of bidders. The resistivity of crushed
rock is to be 3000 Ohm-Meter (Approximate).
h) A ground mat of fine mesh shall be provided below operating mechanism of
isolator.
i) For transformer neutral earthing and surge arrester earthing, treated earth
pits shall be provided with 40-mm Dia, 3-meter long G.I pipe.
The contractor shall design the earth mat on the basis of fault level of switchgear.

Page 3 of 4
7.4 EARTHING CONDUCTOR LAYOUT

Earthing conductors buried in ground shall be laid minimum 600 mm below ground
level or otherwise decided during detailed engineering. A minimum earth cover of
300 mm shall be provided between earth conductor and the bottom of trench
/foundation/ underground pipes at Crossings. Earthing conductor along their run in
cable trenches etc. shall be supported by suitable welding /cleating at interval of
750 mm to 1000 mm.
7.5 EARTHING PIT
Earthing conductor around the building shall be buried in earth at a minimum
distance of 1500 mm from the outer boundary of the building. Earth pit shall be
made and electrodes shall be embedded below permanent moisture level.
TABLE-7.2
S.No. Item Description
a. 50 x 10 mm2 MS flat for As per drawing prepared by the
earthing mat Contractor for each sub – station with
complete BOQ
b. Equipment earthing with 50 x 6 --- do ---
mm2 MS flat complete with
clamps accessories
c. 40 mm dia. G.I pipe, 3 meter ---do---
long with suitable
arrangements for fixing earth
strip
d. 40 mm dia. MS rod ,3 meter ---do---
long with suitable
arrangements for fixing earth
strip

Page 4 of 4
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER – 8
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 8
CONTENTS
S.NO DESCRIPTION PAGE.NO
8.0 SCOPE 1
8.1 DESCRIPTION 1
8.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR SUBSTATION CONTROL ROOM BUILDING 1
8.3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF OUTDOOR SWITCHYARD BY SHIELD WIRES 2
8.4 DRAWING/DOCUMENTS 3

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 8
8.0 SCOPE
transportation up to site, Testing & commissioning of material for lightning
protection of 132/33 kV Substation at Dhunge Sangu in Nepal. It shall be the
bidder’s responsibility to assess the exact requirement of complete material.
8.1 DESCRIPTION
8.1.1 Direct stoke lightning protection and Lightning masts with supporting structure
shall be provided in outdoor switchyards and for substation control room building.
The layout drawings of substation indicate the tentative arrangement. The final
arrangement shall be decided after approval of the direct stroke lighting protection
scheme of each substation. Method of protection for outdoor switchyard shall
generally to be followed as per procedure laid down by Mr. Razevig. The Aluminum
Clad Steel shield wires 7/4.15 mm are connected to ground wire peaks of the
columns of the bus bar, galvanized mild steel pipes in the transformers yard area
and terminal gantries. The lightning protective scheme for control room building
shall be as per guidelines laid down in IS: 2309.
8.2 GENERAL LIGHTENING PROTECTION REQUIREMENT FOR SUBSTATION CONTROL

ROOM BUILDING
8.2.1 The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground
metallic service ducts and cables.
8.2.2 Conductors of the lightning protection system shall not be connected with the
conductors of earthing system above ground level.

Page 1 of 3
8.2.3 Down conductors shall be cleated on the structures at 2000 mm interval.

8.2.4 All joints in the down conductors shall be of welded type. Lightning conductor on
roof shall not be-directly cleated on surface. Supporting blocks of PCC/insulating
material shall be used for conductor fixing. The conductor hardware accessories of
the lightning protection system shall be non- deteriorating & non-corrosive type.
8.2.5 Down conductors shall be as short & straight as practicable and shall follow direct
path to earth. Down conductor shall not be connected to other earthing
conductors above ground level.
8.2.6 Connection between each down conductor and rod electrodes shall be made via
test joint (Pad type compression clamp) located approximately 1500 mm above
ground level. Lightning conductor shall not pass through or run inside G.I. cable
conduit and metal enclosures of electrical equipment.
8.2.7 All metallic structure within a vicinity of 2000 mm of the conductors shall be
bonded to the conductors of lightning protection system.
8.3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION OF OUTDOOR SWITCHYARD BY SHIELD WIRES

8.3.1 The protection zone provided by shield wires shall include bus-bar, switchgear and
transformers and shall be checked as follows:
The sectional plane of the protected zone along one earth wire is bounded by an
arc, the centre of which, both form the ground and from earth wire is equal to
twice the height of the earth wire. The arc touches the ground at a distance of 3 x
Height of ground wire from the foot of earth wire. The angle between the tangents
to the boundary line is 2x30 o at the point of intersection.
8.3.2 The sectional plane of the protection zone with two earth wires is separated by a
distance < 2 x height of ground wire and the outer boundary lines arc as for one
earth wire. The sectional plane of the protected zone between two wires is
bounded by an arc the centre of which is at twice the height of earth wire above
the ground and midway between two wires. The radius is the distance between the
earth wires and the midpoint.

Page 2 of 3
8.3.3 The additional lightning cum lighting masts shall only be provided if required.
8.4 DRAWING/DOCUMENTS
8.4.1 The following drawings & documents shall be furnished by the contractor for
approval/reference.
a) Lightning protection drawing of the control room along with B.O.Q.
b) Lightning protection drawing of outdoor switchyard with complete B.O.Q.
c) Calculations & protection zones of the electrical equipment i.e. bus-bar, CBs,
CTs, Isolators etc.

Page 3 of 3
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER – 9
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION AND CONTROLSYSTEM

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 9
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
CONTENTS

9.0 GENERAL 1
9.1 SYSTEM DESIGN 3
9.2 BAY LEVEL FUNCTIONS 6
9.3 GATEWAY 18
9.4 SYSTEM HARDWARE 19
9.5 SOFTWARE STRUCTURE 23
9.6 TESTS 25
9.7 SYSTEM OPERATION 28
9.8 POWER SUPPLY 29
9.9 DOCUMENTATION 29
9.10 TRAINING, SUPPORT SERVICES, MAINTENANCE AND 31
SPARES
9.11 MAINTENANCE 34
9.12 RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY 34
9.13 SPARES 37
9.14 LIST OF EQUIPMENTS 37
9.15 TENTATIVE LIST FOR VARIOUS FEEDERS/BAYS AND 38
SYSTEMS
9.16 LIST OF ANALOG AND DIGITAL INPUTS 41
9.17 APPENDICES 49

IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Part II(B):Section VI: Employer's Requirement
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 9
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION PROTECTION SYSTEM
9.0. GENERAL
9.0.1. The scope covers the design, engineering, manufacture, testing at Manufacturer’s works
before dispatch, packing and forwarding, transportation, insurance, handling, delivering
at site, proper storage at site, transportation up to site, supervision for erection testing
and commissioning of the 132/33kV Substation Automation System along with Bay level
Control Units complete with all materials, accessories and fittings, erection &
maintenance tools & tackles, mandatory spares as detailed in this specification for
132/33kV substation at Dhungesangu - Package KC-3.
9.0.2. The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be an integrated system to carry out
control, monitoring, protection, metering and communication functions of all 132kV and
33kV feeder. SAS shall have an extreme range of SACADA functions. SAS will be based on
IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-101 protocol. All devices shall be compatible to above
protocol and have the capability to link with National Load Dispatch Centre. The SAS shall
contain the following main functional parts:
a. Intelligence Electronic Devices (IED s) for control and monitoring at Bay Level
called by Bay Control Units (BCU) Located in Control Panels of respective feeders.
b. Station Human Machine Interface (HMI) Main and Stand by.
c. Redundant Managed Switched Ethernet Local Area Network communication

infrastructure with hot standby.
d. Gateway for remote control via industrial grade hardware (to Future National
Control Centre ) through IEC60870-5-104 protocol.

Page 1 of 56
e. Gateway for remote supervisory control (to LDC Katmandu, Nepal), should be able
to communicate with LDC on IEC 60870-5-101 protocol.
f. The requirement of IO point shall be worked out by the bidder as per criterion
enclosed as Appendix-II for data exchange with LDCs in Nepal.
g. Supply of necessary furniture for accommodating the HMI Main and Stand by,
printers, display units etc are in the scope of the contractor.
h. Peripheral equipment like printers, display units, key boards, mouse etc.
i. Time synchronization shall be done by using GPS.
j. Inverter of suitable rating for power supply to SAS system from station battery.
k. A dedicated UPS to feed the power of SAS system (Size of UPS shall be decided
based on the load assuming 3 hr Power Backup with 50% redundancy).
l. All necessary Software’s required with license shall be provided to NEA and
purchased licenses in the name of NEA.
Note: For Equipment/Meters which do not support IEC-61850 protocol, necessary

protocol conveter to be used for interfacing and the same deemed to be included in the
scope of contractor
9.0.3. It shall enable local station control via a PC by means of human machine interface (HMI)
and control software package, which shall contain an extensive range of supervisory
control and data acquisition (SCADA) functions.
9.0.4. It shall include communication gateway, intelligent electronic devices (IED) for bay
control and inter IED communication infrastructure. An architecture drawing for SAS is
enclosed.
9.0.5. The communication gateway shall facilitate the information flow with Load Dispatch
Center. The bay level intelligent electronic devices (IED) for protection and control shall

Page 2 of 56
provide the direct connection to the switchgear without the need of interposing
components and perform control, protection, and monitoring functions.
9.1. SYSTEM DESIGN
9.1.1. General System Design
The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be suitable for operation, control and
monitoring of the complete substation including future extensions if any as shown in
Single Line Diagrams for Dhunge-Sangu Substation. However, Bay level Ethernet switches
to be supplied for the present bays in the scope of supply.The systems shall be of the
state-of-the art suitable for operation under electrical environment present in extra high
voltage substations, follow the latest engineering practice, and ensure long-term
compatibility requirements and continuity of equipment supply and the safety of the
operating staff. The offered SAS shall support remote control and monitoring from Load
Dispatch Center via gateways. The system shall be designed such that personnel without
any background knowledge in Microprocessor-based technology are able to operate the
system. The operator interface shall be intuitive such that operating personnel shall be
able to operate the system easily after having received some basic training. The system
shall incorporate the control, monitoring and protection functions specified, self-
monitoring, signaling and testing facilities, measuring as well as memory functions, event
recording and evaluation of disturbance records. Maintenance, modification or extension
of components may not cause a shutdown of the whole substation automation system.
Self-monitoring of components, modules and communication shall be incorporated to
increase the availability and the reliability of the equipment and minimize maintenance.
9.1.2. System architecture
The SAS shall be based on a decentralized architecture and on a concept of bay-oriented,

distributed intelligence. Functions shall be decentralized, object-oriented and located as
close as possible to the process. The main process information of the station shall be
stored in distributed databases. The typical SAS architecture shall be structured in two

Page 3 of 56
levels, i.e. in a station and a bay level. At bay level, the IEDs shall provide all bay level
functions regarding control, monitoring and protection, inputs for status indication and
outputs for commands. The IEDs should be directly connected to the equipment without
any need for additional interposition or transducers. Each bay control IED shall be
independent from each other and its functioning shall not be affected by any fault
occurring in any of the other bay control units of the station. The data exchange between
the electronic devices on bay and station level shall take place via the communication
infrastructure. This shall be realized using fibre-optic cables, thereby guaranteeing
disturbance free communication. The fibre optic cables shall be run in HDPE pipes. Data
exchange is to be realized using IEC 61850 protocol with a 50% redundancy managed
Ethernet switched communication infrastructure.
The communication shall be made in fault tolerant ring in redundant mode, excluding
the links between individual bay IEDs to switch wherein the redundant connections are
not envisaged, such that failure of one set of fiber shall not affect the normal operation
of the SAS. However, failure of fiber shall be alarmed in SAS. Each fiber optic cable shall
have four (4) spare fibers.
At station level, the entire station shall be controlled and supervised from the station
HMI. It shall also be possible to control and monitor the bay from the bay level
equipment at all times. Clear control priorities shall prevent operation of a single switch
at the same time from more than one of the various control levels, i.e. LDC (Load
Dispatch Centre), station HMI, bay level or apparatus level. The priority shall always be
on the lowest enabled control level. The station level contains the station-oriented
functions, which cannot be realized at bay level, e.g. alarm list or event list related to the
entire substation, gateway for the communication with Load Dispatch Centre. The GPS
time synchronizing signal (as specified in the section relay & protection) for the
synchronization of the entire system shall be provided. The SAS shall contain the
functional parts as described in Para1.1.2 above.

Page 4 of 56
9.1.3. Functional Requirements
The high-voltage apparatus within the station shall be operated from different places:
a. National Control Centre
b. Station HMI.
c. Local Bay controller IED (in the bays)
Operation shall be possible by only one operator at a time. The operation shall depend
on the conditions of other functions, such as interlocking, synchrocheck, etc. (see
description in “Bay level control functions”).
9.1.4. Select-Before-Execute
For security reasons the command is always to be given in two stages: selection of the
object and command for operation under all mode of operation except emergency
operation. Final execution shall take place only when selection and command are
actuated.
9.1.5. Command supervision Bay/station interlocking and blocking
Software Interlocking is to be provided to ensure that inadvertent incorrect operation of

switchgear causing damage and accidents in case of false operation does not take place.
In addition to software interlocking hardwired interlocking are to be provided for:
a. Bus Earth switch Interlocking.
b. Isolator Earth switch interlocking.
c. Isolator-Breaker Interlocking.
It shall be a simple layout, easy to test and simple to handle when upgrading the station
with future bays. For software interlocking the bidder shall describe the scenario while
an IED of another bay is switched off or fails. A software interlock override function shall
be provided which can be enabled to bypass the interlocking function.

Page 5 of 56
9.1.6. Run Time Command cancellation
Command execution timer (configurable) must be available for each control level
connection. If the control action is not completed within a specified time, the command
should get cancelled.
9.1.7. Self-supervision
Continuous self-supervision function with self-diagnostic feature shall be included.
9.1.8. User configuration
The monitoring, controlling and configuration of all input and output logical signals and
binary inputs and relay outputs for all built-in functions and signals shall be possible both
locally and remotely. It shall also be possible to interconnect and derive input and output
signals, logic functions, using built-In functions, complex voltage and currents, additional
logics (AND-gates, OR gates and timers). (Multi activation of these additional functions
should be possible). The Functional requirement shall be divided into following levels:
a. Bay (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated disconnector, earth
switches and instrument transformer) Level Functions
b. System Level Functions
9.2. BAY LEVEL FUNCTIONS
In a decentralized architecture the functionality shall be as close to the process as

possible. In this respect, the following functions can be allocated at bay level:
a. Bay control functions including data collection functionality in bay control unit.
b. Bay protection functions
c. Separate IEDs shall be provided for bay control function and bay protection function.

Page 6 of 56
9.2.1. Bay control functions
9.2.1.1. Overview of Functions
a. Control mode selection
b. Select-before-execute principle
c. Command supervision:
i. Interlocking and blocking
ii. Double command
d. Synchrocheck, voltage selection
e. Run Time Command cancellation
f. Transformer tap changer control (Raise and lower of tap) (for power transformer
bays)
g. Operation counters for circuit breakers and pumps
h. Operating pressure supervision through digital contacts only
i. Breaker position indication per phase
j. Alarm annunciation
k. Measurement display
l. Local HMI (local guided, emergency mode)
m. Interface to the station HMI.
n. Data storage for at least 250 events
o. Extension possibilities with additional I/O's inside the unit or via fiber optic
communication and process bus.
9.2.1.2. Control mode selection
a) Bay level Operation:

Page 7 of 56
As soon as the operator receives the operation access at bay level, the operation is
normally performed via bay control IED. During normal operation bay control unit
allows the safe operation of all switching devices via the bay control IED.
EMERGENCY Operation
It shall be possible to close or open the selected Circuit Breaker with ON or OFF buttons
even during the outage of bay IED.
REMOTE mode
Control authority in this mode is given to a higher level (Remote Control Centre) and the
installation can be controlled only remotely. Control operation from lower levels shall
not be possible in this operating mode.
9.2.1.3. Synchronism and energizing check
The synchronism and energizing check functions shall be bay-oriented and distributed to
the bay control devices. These features are:
a. Settable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference.
b. Energizing for dead line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead line dead bus with
no synchro-check function.
c. Synchronizing between live line and live bus with synchro-check Function
9.2.1.4. Voltage selection
The voltages relevant for the Synchro check functions are dependent on the station
topology, i.e. on the positions of the circuit breakers and/or the isolators. The correct
voltage for synchronizing and energizing is derived from the auxiliary switches of the
circuit breakers, the isolator, and earthing switch and shall be selected automatically by
the bay control.

Page 8 of 56
9.2.1.5. Transformer tap changer control
Raise and lower operation of OLTC taps of transformer shall be facilitated through Bay
controller IED in OLTC Panel.
9.2.2. Bay protection functions
9.2.2.1. General
The protection functions are independent of bay control function. The protection shall be
provided by separate protection IEDs (numerical relays) and other protection devices as
per Chapter Control & Relay Panels. IEDs, shall be connected to the communication
infrastructure for data sharing and meet the real-time communication requirements for
automatic functions. The data presentation and the configuration of the various IEDs
shall be compatible with the overall system communication and data exchange
requirements.
Each IED should contain an event recorder capable of storing at least 250 time-tagged
events. The Fault recorder function shall be as per Chapter 10 Control Relay and
Protection Panels and give alarm if 70 % memory is full.
9.2.2.2. Bay Monitoring Function:
Analogue inputs for voltage and current measurements shall be connected directly to the
voltage transformers (VT) and the current transformers (CT) without intermediate
transducers. The values of active power (W), reactive power (VAR), frequency (Hz), and
the rms values for voltage (V) and current (I), Energy Meter function shall be calculated in
the Bay control/protection unit.
9.2.3. System level functions
9.2.3.1. Status supervision
The position of each switchgear, e.g. circuit breaker, isolator, earthing switch,
transformer tap changer etc., shall be supervised continuously. Every detected change of
position shall be immediately displayed in the single-line diagram on the station HMI

Page 9 of 56
screen and the MIMIC Diagram, recorded in the event list and a hard copy printout shall
be produced. Alarms shall be initiated in the case of spontaneous position changes. The
switchgear positions shall be indicated by two auxiliary switches, normally closed (NC)
and normally open (NO), which shall give ambivalent signals. An alarm shall be initiated if
these position indications are inconsistent or if the time required for operating
mechanism to change position exceeds a predefined limit. The SAS shall also monitor the
status of sub-station auxiliaries. The status and control of auxiliaries shall be done
through separate one or more IED and all alarm and analogue values shall be monitored
and recoded through this IED.
9.2.3.2. Measurements
The analogue values acquired/calculated in bay control/protection unit shall be displayed

locally on the station HMI and in the control centre. The abnormal values must be
discarded. The analogue values shall be updated every 2 seconds. Threshold limit values
shall be selectable for alarm indications.
9.2.3.3. Event and alarm handling
Events and alarms are generated either by the switchgear, by the control IEDs, or by the
station level unit. They shall be recorded in an event list in the station HMI. Alarms shall
be recorded in a separate alarm list and appear on the screen. All, or a freely selectable
group of events and alarms shall also be printed out on an event printer. The alarms and
events shall be time-tagged with a time resolution of 1 ms.
The list for various feeders are given in the Single Line Diagram of Dhunge-Sangu
Substation
9.2.4. Station HMI
9.2.4.1. Substation HMI Operation:
On the HMI the object has to be selected first. In case of a blocking or interlocking
conditions are not met, the selection shall not be possible and an appropriate alarm

Page 10 of 56
annunciation shall occur. If a selection is valid the position indication will show the
possible direction, and the appropriate control execution button shall be pressed in order
to close or open the corresponding object. Control operation from other places (e.g.
REMOTE) shall not be possible in this operating mode.
9.2.4.2. Presentation and dialogues
General
The operator station HMI shall be redundant with hot standby and shall provide basic
functions for supervision and control of the substation. The operator shall give
commands to the switchgear on the screen via mouse clicks. The HMI shall give the
operator access to alarms and events displayed on the screen. Aside from these lists on
the screen, there shall be a printout of alarms or events in an event log. An acoustic
alarm shall indicate abnormalities, and all unacknowledged alarms shall be accessible
from any screen selected by the operator. The following standard pictures shall be
available from the HMI:
a. Single-line diagram showing the switchgear status and measured values
b. Control dialogues with interlocking or blocking information details.
This control dialogue shall tell the operator whether the device operation is permitted or
blocked.
(i) Measurement dialogues
(ii) Alarm list, station / bay-oriented
(iii) Event list, station / bay-oriented
(iv) System status

Page 11 of 56
9.2.4.3. HMI design principles
Consistent design principles shall be adopted with the HMI concerning labels, colours,
dialogues and fonts. Non-valid selections shall be dimmed out. The object status shall be
indicated using different status colors for:
a. Selected object under command
b. Selected on the screen
c. Not updated, obsolete values, not in use or not sampled
d. Alarm or faulty state
e. Warning or blocked
f. Update blocked or manually updated
g. Control blocked
h. Normal state
9.2.4.4. Process status displays and command procedures
The process status of the substation in terms of actual values of currents, voltages,
frequency, active and reactive powers as well as the positions of circuit breakers,
isolators and transformer tap-changers shall be displayed in the station single-line
diagram. In order to ensure a high degree of security against undesired operation, a
"select-before-execute" command procedure shall be provided. After the "selection" of a
switch, the operator shall be able to recognize the selected device on the screen, and all
other switchgear shall be blocked. As communication between control centre and device
to be controlled is established, the operator shall be prompted to confirm the control
action and only then final execute command shall be accepted. After the “execution” of
the command the operated switching symbol shall flash until the switch has reached its
new position. The operator shall be in a position to execute a command only, if the
switch is not blocked and if no interlocking condition is going to be violated. The

Page 12 of 56
interlocking statements shall be checked by the interlocking scheme implemented at bay

and station level. After command execution the operator shall receive a confirmation
that the new switching position has been reached or an indication that the switching
procedure was unsuccessful with the indication of the reason for non-functioning.
9.2.4.5. System supervision & display
The SAS system shall be comprehensively self-monitored such that faults are
immediately indicated to the operator, possibly before they develop into serious
situations. Such faults are recorded as a faulty status in a system supervision display. This
display shall cover the status of the entire substation including all switchgear, IEDs,
communication infrastructure and remote communication links, and printers at the
station level, etc.
9.2.4.6. Event list
The event list shall contain events that are important for the control and monitoring of
the substation. The event and associated time (with1ms resolution) of its occurrence has
to be displayed for each event. The operator shall be able to call up the chronological
event list on the monitor at any time for the whole substation or sections of it. A printout
of each display shall be possible on the hard copy printer. The events shall be registered
in a chronological event list in which the type of event and its time of occurrence are
specified. It shall be possible to store all events in the computer for at least one month.
The information shall also be obtainable from a printed event log. The chronological
event list shall contain:
a. Position changes of circuit breakers, isolators and earthing devices
b. Indication of protective relay operations
c. Fault signals from the switchgear

Page 13 of 56
d. Indication when analog measured values exceed upper and lower limits. Suitable
provision shall be made in the system to define two level of alarm on either side of
the value or which shall be user defined for each measurands.
e. Loss of communication.
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of events shall be available. The filters shall
be designed to enable viewing of events grouped per:
(i) Date and time
(ii) Bay
(iii) Device
(iv) Function e.g. trips, protection operations etc.
(v) Alarm class
9.2.4.7. Alarm list
Faults and errors occurring in the substation shall be listed in an alarm list and shall be
immediately transmitted to the control centre. The alarm list shall substitute a
conventional alarm tableau, and shall constitute an evaluation of all station alarms. It
shall contain unacknowledged alarms and persisting faults. The date and time of
occurrence shall be indicated. The alarm list shall consist of a summary display of the
present alarm situation. Each alarm shall be reported on one line that contains:
a. The date and time of the alarm
b. The name of the alarming object
c. A descriptive text
d. The acknowledgement state.
Whenever an alarm condition occurs, the alarm condition must be shown on the alarm
list and must be displayed in a flashing state along with an audible alarm. After
acknowledgement of the alarm, it should appear in a steady (i.e. not flashing) state and

Page 14 of 56
the audible alarm shall stop. The alarm should disappear only if the alarm condition has
physically cleared and the operator has reset the alarm with a reset command. The state
of the alarms shall be shown in the alarm list (Unacknowledged and persistent,
Unacknowledged and cleared, Acknowledged and persistent). Filters for selection of a
certain type or group of alarms shall be available as for events.
9.2.4.8. Object picture
When selecting an object such as a circuit breaker or isolator in the single-line diagram,
the associated bay picture shall be presented first. In the selected object picture, all
attributes like
a. Type of blocking
b. Authority
c. Local / remote control
d. LDC / SAS control
e. Errors etc.,
Shall be displayed.
9.2.4.9. Control dialogues
The operator shall give commands to the system by means of mouse click located on the
single-line diagram. Data entry is performed with the keyboard. Dedicated control
dialogues for controlling at least the following devices shall be available:
a. Breaker and disconnector
b. Transformer tap-changer
9.2.4.10. User-authority levels
It shall be possible to restrict activation of the process pictures of each object (bays,
apparatus) within a certain user authorization group. Each user shall then be given access
rights to each group of objects, e.g.:

Page 15 of 56
a. Display only
b. Normal operation (e.g. open/close of switchgear)
c. Restricted operation (e.g. by-passed interlocking)
d. System administrator
For maintenance and engineering purposes of the station HMI, the following
authorization levels shall be available:
(i) No engineering allowed
(ii) Engineering/configuration allowed
(iii) Entire system management allowed
The access rights shall be defined by passwords assigned during the log-in procedure.
Only the system administrator shall be able to add/remove users and change access
rights.
9.2.4.11. Reports
A. The reports shall provide time-related follow-ups of measured and calculated

values. The data displayed shall comprise:
(i) Trend reports:
a. Day (mean, peak)
b. Month (mean, peak)
c. Semi-annual (mean, peak)
d. Year (mean, peak)
(ii) Historical reports of selected analogue Values:
a. Day (at 15 minutes interval)
b. Week

Page 16 of 56
c. Month
d. Year
B. It shall be possible to select displayed values from the database in the process
display on-line. Scrolling between e.g. days shall be possible. Unsure values shall
be indicated. It shall be possible to select the time period for which the specific
data are kept in the memory. Following printouts shall be available from the
printer and shall be printed on demand:
a. Daily voltage and frequency curves depicting time on X-axis and the appropriate
parameters on the Y-axis. The time duration of the curve is 24 hours.
b. Weekly trend curves for real and derived analogue values.
c. Printouts of the maximum and minimum values and frequency of, occurrence
and duration of maximum and minimum values for each analogue parameter for
each circuit in 24 hr period.
d. Provision shall be made for logging information about breaker status like number
of operation with date and time indications along with the current value it
interrupts (in both condition i.e. Manual opening and fault tripping)
e. Equipment operation details shift wise and during 24 hours.
f. Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand for MW, MVAR,

Current, Voltage on each feeder and transformer as well as Tap Positions,
temperature and status of pumps and fans for transformers.
g. Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand system frequency and

average frequency.
h. Reports in specified formats which shall be handed over to successful bidder.

The bidder has to develop these reports. The reports are limited to the formats
for which data is available in the SAS database.

Page 17 of 56
9.2.4.12. Trend display (historical data)
It shall be possible to illustrate all types of process data as trends – input and output
data, binary and analogue data. The trends shall be displayed in graphical form as column
or curve diagrams with a maximum of 10 trends per screen. Adjustable time span and
scaling ranges must be provided. It shall be possible to change the type of value logging
(direct, mean, sum, or difference) on-line in the window. It shall also be possible to
change the update intervals on-line in the picture as well as the selection of threshold
values for alarming purposes.
9.2.4.13. Automatic disturbance file transfer
All recorded data from the IEDs with integrated disturbance recorder as well as
dedicated disturbance recording systems shall be automatically uploaded (event
triggered or once per day) to a dedicated computer and be stored on the hard disc.
9.2.4.14. Disturbance analysis
The PC-based work station shall have necessary software to evaluate all the required
information for proper fault analysis.
9.2.4.15. IED parameter setting
It shall be possible to access all protection and control IEDs for reading the parameters
(settings) from a dedicated monitoring computer. The setting of parameters or the
activation of parameter sets shall only be allowed after entering a password.
9.2.4.16. Automatic sequences
The available automatic sequences in the system should be listed and described, (e.g.
sequences related to the bus transfer). It must be possible to initiate pre-defined
automatic sequences by the operator and also define new automatic sequences.

Page 18 of 56
9.3. GATEWAY
9.3.1. Communication Interface
The Substation Automation System shall have the capability to support simultaneous
communications with multiple independent remote master stations; The Substation
Automation System shall have communication ports as follows:
(a) Two ports for Remote Control Centre/National Load Center
(b) Two ports for Load Dispatch Centre
The communication interface to the SAS shall allow scanning and control of defined
points within the substation automation system independently for each control centre.
The substation automation system shall simultaneously respond to independent scans
and commands from employer's control centers (LDC & NCC). The substation automation
system shall support the use of a different communication data exchange rate (bits per
second), scanning cycle, and/or communication protocol to each remote control centre.
Also, each control centre’s data scan and control commands may be different for
different data points within the substation automation system's database.
9.3.2. Load Dispatch Centre and National Control Centre Communication Interface
Employer will supply communication channels between the Substation Automation

System and the Load Dispatch centre/Remote Control centre. The communication
channels provided by Employer will consist either of microwave, optical fibre, VSAT or
leased line, the details of which shall be provided during detailed Engineering.
9.3.3. Interface equipment:
The Contractor shall provide interface equipment for communicating between

Substation Automation system and Load Dispatch Centre/Remote control centre.
However, the communication channels available for this purpose shall be intimated to
successful bidder during Detailed Engineering. The modem for both ends should be

Page 19 of 56
standalone type complete in all respects including power supply to interface with
communication channel..
9.3.4. Communication Protocol
The communication protocol for gateway to LDC must be open protocol and shall
support IEC 60870-5-101 and IEC 61850 for all levels of communication for sub-station
automation such as Bay to station HMI.
9.4. SYSTEM HARDWARE:
9.4.1. Redundant Station HMI, and Disturbance Recorder Work station:
The contractor shall provide redundant station HMI in hot standby mode. The servers
used in these work stations shall be of industrial grade. It shall be capable to perform all
functions for entire substation including future requirements as indicated in the SLD. It
shall use industrial grade components. Processor and RAM shall be selected in such a
manner that during normal operation not more than 30% capacity of processing and
memory are used. Supplier shall demonstrate these features. The capacity of hard disk
shall be selected such that the following requirement should occupy less than 50% of disk
space:
a. Storage of all analogue data (at 15 Minutes interval)and digital data including alarm ,
event and trend data for Thirty (30) days,
b. Storage of all necessary software,
c. 500GB space for OWNER'S use. Supplier shall demonstrate that the capacity of hard
disk is sufficient to meet the above requirement.
9.4.2. HMI (Human Machine Interface)
The VDU shall show overview diagrams (Single Line Diagrams) and complete details of
the equipment with a colour display. All event and alarm annunciation shall be selectable
in the form of lists. Operation shall be by a user friendly function keyboard and a cursor

Page 20 of 56
positioning device. The user interface shall be based on WINDOWS concepts with
graphics & facility for panning, scrolling, zooming, uncluttering etc.
9.4.3. Visual Display Units/TFT's (Thin Film Technology)
The display units shall have high resolution and reflection protected picture screen. High
stability of the picture geometry shall be ensured. The screen shall be at least 32"
diagonally in size and capable of colour graphic displays. The display shall accommodate
resolution of 1280 X 1024 pixels.
9.4.4. Printer
It shall be robust & suitable for operation with a minimum of 132 characters per line. The
printing operation shall be quiet with a noise level of less than 45 dB suitable for location
in the control room. Printer shall accept and print all ASCII characters via master control
computer unit interface. The printer shall have in built testing facility. Failure of the
printer shall be indicated in the Station HMI. The printer shall have an off line mode
selector switch to enable safe maintenance. The maintenance should be simple with
provisions for ease of change of print head, ribbon changing, paper insertion etc. All
reports and graphics prints shall be printed on laser printer. One dot matrix printer shall
be exclusively used for hourly log printing. All printers shall be continuously online.
9.4.5. Mass Storage Unit
The mass storage unit shall be built-in to the Station HMI. All operational measured
values, and indications shall be stored in a mass-storage unit in form of DVD RW the unit
should support at least Read (48X), Write (24X), and Re-Write (10X) operations, with
Multi-Session capability. It should support ISO9660, Rock ridge and Joliet File systems. It
should support formatting and use under the operating system provided for Station HMI.
The monthly back up of data shall be taken on disc. The facility of back up of data shall be
inherent in the software.

Page 21 of 56
9.4.6. Switched Ethernet Communication Infrastructure:
The bidder shall provide the redundant switched optical Ethernet communication
infrastructure for SAS One switch shall be provided to connect all IEDs in 2 adjacent 132
kV bays and 4 adjacent 33kV bays to communication infrastructure. Each switch shall
have at least 50% spare ports for connecting bay level IEDs and one spare port for
connecting station bus.
9.4.6.1. Bay level unit
The bay unit shall use industrial grade components. The bay level unit, based on
microprocessor technology, shall use numerical techniques for the calculation and
evaluation of external input analogue signals. They shall incorporate select-before-
operate control principles as safety measures for operation via the HMI. They shall
perform all bay related functions, such as control commands, bay interlocking, data
acquisition, data storage, event recording and shall provide inputs for status indication
and outputs for commands. They shall be directly connected to the equipment. The bay
unit shall acquire and process all data for the bay (Equipment status, fault indications,
measured values, alarms etc.) and transmit these to the other devices in sub-station
automation system. In addition, this shall receive the operation commands from station
HMI and control centre. The bay unit shall have the capability to store all the data for at
least 24 hours. One no. Bay level unit shall be provided for supervision and control of
each 132 and 33kV (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker, associated disconnector,
earth switches and instrument transformers). The Bay level unit shall be equipped with
analogue and binary inputs/outputs for handling the control, status monitoring and
analogue measurement functions. All bay level interlocks are to be incorporated in the
Bay level unit so as to permit control from the Bay level unit/ local bay mimic panel, with
all bay interlocks in place, during maintenance and commissioning or in case of
contingencies when the Station HMI is out of service. The bay control unit to be
provided for the bays shall be preferably installed in the control panel for respective
bay. The Bay level unit shall meet the requirements for withstanding electromagnetic

Page 22 of 56
interference according to relevant parts of IEC. Failure of any single component within
the equipment shall neither cause unwanted operation nor lead to a complete system
breakdown.
9.4.6.2. Input/output (I/O) modules
The I/O modules shall form a part of the bay level unit and shall provide coupling to the
substation equipment. The I/O modules shall acquire all equipment information (i.e. data
coming directly from the equipment or from switchgear interlocking devices) and
transmit commands for operation of the equipment. The measured values of voltage and
current shall be from the secondary of instrument transformers. The digital inputs shall
be acquired by exception with 1 ms resolution. Contact bouncing in digital inputs shall
not be assumed as change of state each bay unit shall consist minimum 25% redundant
I/O for future use. A separate Bay Level Unit shall be provided with minimum 48 Digital
Inputs , 8 Analogue Inputs, 16 digital output and 8 analogue output (if required as per the
schematics) for the control and monitoring of State of ACDB , DCDB, Battery Bank and
Chargers , Fire and Alarm System , DG Sets Local Temperature state, Lighting states etc.
9.4.7. Extendibility in future
Offered substation automation system shall be suitable for extension in future for
additional bays. During such requirement, all the drawings and configurations,
alarm/event list etc. displayed shall be designed in such a manner that its extension shall
be easily performed by the employer. During such event, normal operation of the
existing substation shall be unaffected and system shall not require a shutdown. The
contractor shall provide all necessary software tools along with source codes to perform
addition of bays of in future and complete integration with SAS by the user. These
software tools shall be able to configure IED, add additional analogue variable, alarm list,
event list, modify interlocking logics etc. for additional bays/equipment which shall be
added in future.

Page 23 of 56
9.5. SOFTWARE STRUCTURE
The software package shall be structured according to the SAS architecture and strictly
divided in various levels. Necessary firewall shall be provided at suitable points in
software to protect the system. An extension of the station shall be possible with lowest
possible efforts. Maintenance, modification or an extension of components of any feeder
may not force a shut-down of the parts of the system which are not affected by the
system adaptation.
9.5.1. Station level software
9.5.1.1. Human-machine interface (HMI)
The base HMI software package for the operator station shall include the main SAS
functions and it shall be independent of project specific hardware version and operating
system. It shall further include tools for picture editing, engineering and system
configuration. The system shall be easy to use, to maintain, and to adapt according to
specific user requirements. Systems shall contain a library with standard functions and
applications.
9.5.2. Bay level software
9.5.2.1. System software
The system software shall be structured in various levels. This software shall be placed in
a non-volatile memory. The lowest level shall assure system performance and contain
basic functions, which shall not be accessible by the application and maintenance
engineer for modifications. The system shall support the generation of typical control
macros and a process database for user specific data storage. In case of restoration of
links after failure, the software along with hardware shall be capable of automatically
synchronizing with the remaining system without any manual interface. This shall be
demonstrated by contractor during integrated system test.

Page 24 of 56
9.5.2.2. Application software
In order to ensure robust quality and reliable software functions, the main part of the
application software shall consist of standard software modules built as functional block
elements. The functional blocks shall be documented and thoroughly tested. They form
part of a library. The application software within the control/protection devices shall be
programmed in a functional block language.
9.5.2.3. The contractor shall provide network management system software for following
management functions:
a. Configuration Management
b. Fault Management
c. Performance Monitoring
This system shall be used for management of communication devices and other IEDs in
the system. This NMS can be loaded in DR work-station and shall be easy to use, user
friendly and menu based. The NMS shall monitor all the devices in the SAS and report if
there is any fault in the monitored devices. The NMS shall
(a) Maintain performance, resource usage, and error statistics for all
managed links and devices and present this information via displays,
periodic reports and on demand reports.
(b) Maintain a graphical display of SAS connectivity and device status.
(c) Issue alarms when error conditions occurs
(d) Provide facility to add and delete addresses and links
9.5.2.4. The contractor shall provide each software in two copies in CD to load into the system in
case of any problem related with Hardware/Communication etc.

Page 25 of 56
9.6. TESTS
The substation automation system offered by the bidder shall be subjected to following
tests to establish compliance with IEC 61850 for EHV sub-station equipment installed in
sheltered area in the outdoor switchyard and specified ambient conditions:
9.6.1. Type Tests:
9.6.1.1. Control IEDs and Communication Equipment:
I. Power Input:
a. Auxiliary Voltage
b. Curent Circuits
c. Voltage Circuits
d. Indications
II. Accuracy Tests:
a. Operational Measured Values
b. Currents
c. Voltages
d. Time resolution
 Insulation Tests:
 Dielectric Tests
 Impulse Voltage withstand Test
III. Influencing Quantities
a. Limits of operation
b. Permissible ripples
c. Interruption of input voltage

Page 26 of 56
IV. Electromagnetic Compatibility Test:
a. 1 MHZ. burst disturbance test
b. Electrostatic Discharge Test
c. Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance Test
d. Electrical Fast transient Disturbance Test
e. Conducted Disturbances Tests induced by Radio Frequency Field
f. Magnetic Field Test
g. Emission (Radio interference level) Test.
h. Conducted Interference Test
V. Function Tests:
a. Indication
b. Commands
c. Measured value Acquisition
d. Display Indications
VI. Environmental tests:
a. Cold Temperature
b. Dry Heat
c. Wet heat
d. Humidity (Damp heat Cycle)
e. Vibration
f. Bump
g. Shock

Page 27 of 56
Note:- Manufacture shall produce the report of these type test for verification of information
9.6.1.2. Factory Acceptance Tests and Site Acceptance Tests:
The supplier shall submit a test procedure for factory acceptance test (FAT) and site
tests of the station automation system for approval. For the individual bay level IED’s
applicable type test certificates shall be submitted. The manufacturing and configuration
phase of the SAS shall be concluded by the factory acceptance test (FAT). The purpose is
to ensure that the Contractor has interpreted the specified requirements correctly and
that the FAT includes checking to the degree required by the user. The general
philosophy shall be to deliver a system to site only after it has been thoroughly tested
and its specified performance has been verified, as far as site conditions can be simulated
in a test lab. During FAT the entire Sub-station Automation System including complete
control and protection system to be supplied under present scope shall be tested for
complete functionality and configuration in factory itself. The extensive testing shall be
carried out during FAT. The purpose of Factory Acceptance Testing is to ensure trouble
free installation at site. No major configuration setting of system is envisaged at site. If
the complete system consists of parts from various suppliers or some parts are already
installed on site, the FAT shall be limited to sub-system tests. In such a case, the
complete system test shall be performed on site together with the site acceptance test
(SAT).
9.6.1.3. Hardware Integration Tests:
The hardware integration test shall be performed on the specified systems to be used for
Factory tests when the hardware has been installed in the factory. The operation of each
item shall be verified as an integral part of system. Applicable hardware diagnostics shall
be used to verify that each hardware component is completely operational and
assembled into a configuration capable of supporting software integration and factory
testing of the system. The equipment expansion capability shall also be verified during

Page 28 of 56
the hardware integration tests. The vendor specifically demonstrates how to add a
device in future in SAS during FAT. The device shall be from a different manufacturer
than the SAS supplier.
9.6.1.4. Integrated System Tests:
Integrated system tests shall verify the stability of the hardware and the software. During
the tests all functions shall run concurrently and all equipment shall operate a
continuous 100 Hours period. The integrated system test shall ensure the SAS is free of
improper interactions between software and hardware while the system is operating as a
whole.
9.6.1.5. Site Acceptance Tests:
The site acceptance tests (SAT) shall completely verify all the features of SAS hardware
and software. The bidder shall submit the detailed SAT procedure and SAT procedure
shall be read in conjunction with the specification.
9.7. SYSTEM OPERATION
9.7.1. Substation Operation
9.7.1.1. Normal operation
Operation of the system by the operator from the remote LDC or at the substation shall
take place via industry standard HMI (Human Machine interface) subsystem consisting of
graphic colour VDU, a standard keyboard and a cursor positioning device (mouse). The
coloured screen shall be divided into 3 fields:
a. Message field with display of present time and date
b. Display field for single line diagrams
c. Navigation bar with alarm/condition indication

Page 29 of 56
For display of alarm annunciation, lists of events etc a separate HMI View node shall be
provided. All operations shall be performed with mouse and/or a minimum number of
function keys and cursor keys. The function keys shall have different meanings depending
on the operation. The operator shall see the relevant meanings as function tests
displayed in the command field (i.e. operator prompting). For control actions, the
switchgear (i.e. circuit breaker etc.) requested shall be selectable on the display by
means of the cursor keys. The switching element selected shall then appear on the
background that shall be flashing in a different color. The operator prompting shall
distinguish between:-
 Prompting of indications e.g. fault indications in the switchgear, and
 prompting of operational sequences e.g. execution of switching operations
The summary information displayed in the message field shall give a rapid display of
alarm/message of the system in which a fault has occurred and alarm annunciation lists
in which the fault is described more fully. Each operational sequence shall be divided into
single operation steps which are initiated by means of the function keys/WINDOW
command by mouse. Operator prompting shall be designed in such a manner that only
the permissible keys are available in the command field related to the specific operation
step. Only those switching elements shall be accessed for which control actions are
possible. If the operation step is rejected by the system, the operator prompting shall be
supported by additional comments in the message field. The operation status shall be
reset to the corresponding preceding step in the operation sequence by pressing one of
the function keys. All operations shall be verified. Incorrect operations shall be indicated
by comments in the message field and must not be executed. The offer shall include a
comprehensive description of the system. The above operation shall also be possible via
WINDOWS based system by mouse.

Page 30 of 56
9.8. POWER SUPPLY:
Power supply to substation Automation System shall be derived from substation DC

supply at 110 V Inverter of suitable capacity shall be provided to Station HMI and its
peripheral devices like printer etc; Incase of power failure, necessary safeguard software
shall be built for proper shutdown and restart. A Dedicated UPS of appropriate rating s
shall be provided as backup suitable for 3 hrs operation of substation Automation system
with 50% redundancy.
9.9. DOCUMENTATION
9.9.1. The following documents shall be submitted for employer’s approval during detailed
engineering:
(i) System Architecture Drawing
(ii) Hardware Specification
(iii) Functional Design Document
(iv) Clear procedure describing how to add an IED/bay/diameter in future covering all
major supplier
9.9.2. The following documentation to be provided for the system in the course of the project
shall be consistent, CAD supported, and of similar look/feel. All CAD drawings to be
provide in “dxf” format.
a. List of Drawings
b. Substation automation system architecture
c. Block Diagram
d. Guaranteed technical parameters, Functional Design Specification and

Guaranteed availability and reliability
e. Calculation for power supply dimensioning
f. I/O Signal lists

Page 31 of 56
g. Schematic diagrams
h. List of Apparatus
i. List of Labels
j. Logic Diagram (hardware & software )
k. Control Room Lay-out
l. Test Procedure for Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
m. Product Manuals (Buyers Guide, Design Guide etc.)
n. Assembly Drawing
o. Operator’s Manual
p. Complete documentation of implemented protocols between various elements
q. Listing of software and loadable in CD ROM
r. Other documents as may be required during detailed engineering
Six sets of hard copy and two sets of CD ROM containing all the as built
documents/drawings shall be provided.
9.10. TRAINING, SUPPORT SERVICES, MAINTENANCE AND SPARES
9.10.1. Training
Contractor or its designated manufacturer personnel who are experienced instructors

and who speak understandable English shall conduct training. The contractor shall
arrange on its own cost all hardware training platform required for successful training
and understanding in India. The Contractor shall provide all necessary training material.
Each trainee shall receive individual copies of all technical manuals and all other
documents used for training. These materials shall be sent to Employer at least two
months before the scheduled commencement of the particular training course. Class
materials, including the documents sent before the training courses as well as class

Page 32 of 56
handouts, shall become the property of Employer. Employer reserves the right to copy
such materials, but for in-house training and use only. Hands-on training shall utilize
equipment identical to that being supplied to Employer. The schedule, location, and
detailed contents of each course will be finalized during Employer and Contractor
discussions.
The contractor shall provide training for PMC and NEA personnel (Max 4 persons from
NEA) comprehensively covering following courses. The Duration of the course is given
in Section -1: General Information and Scope.
TABLE-1.4
S. No. Name of Course
1. SAS Hardware
2. SAS Software
3. SAS Application Software
9.10.2. Computer System Hardware Course
A computer system hardware course shall be offered, but at the system level only. The
training course shall be designed to give Employer hardware personnel sufficient
knowledge of the overall design and operation of the system so that they can correct
obvious problems, configure the hardware, perform preventive maintenance, run
diagnostic programs, and communicate with contract maintenance personnel. The
following subjects shall be covered:
a. System Hardware Overview: Configuration of the system hardware.
b. Equipment Maintenance: Basic theory of operation, maintenance techniques and

diagnostic procedures for each element of the computer system, e.g., processors,
auxiliary memories, LANs, routers and printers. Configuration of all the hardware
equipments.

Page 33 of 56
c. System Expansion: Techniques and procedures to expand and add equipment such
as loggers, monitors, and communication channels.
d. System Maintenance: Theory of operation and maintenance of the redundant

hardware configuration, failover hardware, configuration control panels, and
failover switches. Maintenance of protective devices and power supplies.
e. Subsystem Maintenance: Theory of design and operation, maintenance techniques

and practices, diagnostic procedures, and (where applicable) expansion techniques
and procedures. Classes shall include hands-on training for the specific subsystems
that are part of Employer's equipment or part of similarly designed and configured
subsystems. All interfaces to the computing equipment shall be taught in detail.
f. Operational Training: Practical training on preventive and corrective maintenance

of all equipment, including use of special tools and instruments. This training shall
be provided on Employer equipment, or on similarly configured systems.
9.10.3. Computer System Software Course
The Contractor shall provide a computer system software course that covers the
following subjects:
a. System Programming: Including all applicable programming languages and all

stand-alone service and utility packages provided with the system. An introduction
to software architecture, Effect of tuning parameters (OS software, Network
software, database software etc.) on the performance of the system.
b. Operating System: Including the user aspects of the operating system, such as
program loading and integrating procedures; scheduling, management, service, and
utility functions; and system expansion techniques and procedures
c. System Initialization and Failover: Including design, theory of operation, and

practice

Page 34 of 56
d. Diagnostics: Including the execution of diagnostic procedures and the

interpretation of diagnostic outputs,
e. Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of system

software documentation.
f. Hands-on Training: One week, with allocated computer time for trainee
performance of unstructured exercises and with the course instructor available for
assistance as necessary.
9.10.4. Application Software Course
The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive application software courses covering all
applications including the database and display building course. The training shall
include:
a. Overview: Block diagrams of the application software and data flows.

Programming standards and program interface conventions.
b. Application Functions: Functional capabilities, design, and major algorithms.

Associated maintenance and expansion techniques.
c. Software Development: Techniques and conventions to be used for the

preparation and integration of new software functions.
d. Software Generation: Generation of application software from source code and

associated software configuration control procedures.
e. Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of functional

and detailed design documentation and of programmer and user manuals.
f. Hands-on Training: One week, with allocated computer time for trainee
performance of unstructured exercises and with the course instructor available
for assistance as necessary.

Page 35 of 56
9.11. MAINTENANCE
9.11.1. Maintenance Responsibility during the Guaranteed Availability Period
During Guaranteed Availability Period, the Contractor shall take continual actions to
ensure the guaranteed availability and shall make available all the necessary resources
such as specialist personnel, spare parts, tools, test devices etc. for replacement or repair
of all defective parts and shall have prime responsibility for keeping the system
operational.
9.12. RELIABILITY AND AVAILABILITY
The SAS shall be designed so that the failure of any single component, processor, or
device shall not render the system unavailable. The SAS shall be designed to satisfy the
very high demands for reliability and availability concerning:
a. Mechanical and electrical design
b. Security against electrical interference (EMI)
c. High quality components and boards
d. Modular, well-tested hardware
e. Thoroughly developed and tested modular software
f. Easy-to-understand programming language for application programming
g. Detailed graphical documentation and application software
h. Built-in supervision and diagnostic functions
i. Security
(i) Experience of security requirements
(ii) Process know-how
(iii) Select before execute at operation
(iv) Process status representation as double indications

Page 36 of 56
j. Distributed solution
k. Independent units connected to the local area network
l. Back-up functions
m. Panel design appropriate to the harsh electrical environment and ambient

conditions
n. Panel grounding immune against transient ground potential rise.
9.12.1. Outage terms
9.12.1.1. Outage
The state in which substation automation system or a unit of SAS is unavailable for
Normal Operation as defined in the clause 9.1 due to an event directly related to the SAS
or unit of SAS. In the event, the owner has taken any equipment/ system other than Sub-
station Automation System for schedule/forced maintenance, the consequent outage to
SAS shall not be considered as outage for the purpose of availability.
9.12.1.2. Actual outage duration (AOD)
The time elapsed in hours between the start and the end of an outage. The time shall be
counted to the nearest 1/4th of an hour. Time less than 1/4th of an hour shall be
counted as having duration of 1/4th of an hour.
9.12.1.3. Period Hours (PH)
The number of hours in the reporting period. In a full year the period hour are 8760h
(8784h for a leap year).
9.12.1.4. Actual Outage hours (AOH)
The sum of actual outage duration within the reporting period AOH = Σ AOD

Page 37 of 56
9.12.1.5. Availability:
Each SAS shall have a total availability of 99.98 % i.e. the ratio of total time duration
minus the actual outage duration to total time duration.
9.12.2. Guarantees Required
The availability for the complete SAS shall be guaranteed by the Contractor. Bidder shall
include in their offer the detailed calculation for the availability. The contractor shall
demonstrate their availability guaranteed by conducting the availability test on the total
sub-station automation system as a whole after commissioning of total Sub-station
Automation system. The test shall verify the reliability and integrity of all sub-systems.
Under these conditions the test shall establish an overall availability of 99.98%. After the
lapse of 1000 Hours of cumulative test time, test records shall be examined to determine
the conformance with availability criterion. In case of any outage during the availability
test, the contractor shall rectify the problem and after rectification, the 1000 Hours
period start after such rectification. If test object has not been met the test shall
continue until the specified availability is achieved. The contractor has to establish the
availability in a maximum period of three months from the date of commencement of
the availability test. After the satisfactory conclusion of test both contractor and
employer shall mutually agree to the test results and if these results satisfy the
availability criterion, the test is considered to be completed successfully. After that the
system shall be taken over by the employer and then the guarantee period shall start.
9.13. SPARES
9.13.1. Consumables:
All consumables such as paper, cartridges shall be supplied by the contractor till the SAS
is taken over by the owner.

Page 38 of 56
9.13.2. Availability Spares:
In addition to mandatory spares as listed in Chapter “Mandatory Spares” section project

for SAS, the bidder is required to list the spares, which may be required for ensuring the
guaranteed availability during the guaranteed availability period. The final list of spares
shall form part of scope of supply and accordingly the price thereof shall be quoted by
the bidder and shall be considered in the evaluation of the bids. During the guaranteed
availability period, the spare parts supplied by the Contractor shall be made available to
the Contractor for usage subject to replenishment at the earliest. Thus, at the end of
availability period the inventory of spares with the Employer shall be fully replenished by
the Contractor. However, any additional spares required to meet the availability of the
system (which are not a part of the above spares supplied by the Contractor) would have
to be supplied immediately by the Contractor free of cost to the Employer.
9.14. LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
Quantity of equipments shall be decided by bidder in order to achieve guaranteed

reliability and availability as declared by bidder.
a. Station HMI
b. Redundant Station HMI (in Hot-standby mode)
c. Bay level units along with bay mimic as detailed in chapter.
d. Bay Level Unit for Auxiliary system (as per requirement)
e. Disturbance Recorder Work Station(Maintenance HMI)
f. Colour Laser Printer (For Reports & Disturbance records)
g. Dot matrix printers - (one each for Alarms and log sheets)
h. Furniture as site requirement finalized during detailed engineering.
i. All interface equipment for gateway

Page 39 of 56
j. Communication infrastructure between Bay level units, Station HMI, Printers,

gateways, redundant LAN etc. as required
k. Modems as per requirement.
l. GPS system, UPS , Ethernet Switch , Printer Server , KVM Extender , Fiber Optic
Cable with ST connector
m. Any other equipment as necessary.
9.15. TENTATIVE LIST FOR VARIOUS FEEDERS/BAYS AND SYSTEMS
The tentative list for various feeders and systems are given below:
9.15.1. Dhunge Sangu – 220/132/33KV SUBSTATION:
a. 220kV Side (Future):
(i) Bus bar Scheme: One and Half Breaker Scheme.
(ii) 4 Nos. of 220 kV incoming/ Outgoing line bays
(iii) 4 Nos. of Tie bays.
(iv) 3 Nos. of 220kV bay for Main Power Transformer for 220/132 kV Power
Transformers.
(v) 3 Nos. of 100 MVA Power Transformers (9 Nos. +1 Nos. 33.3 MVA 220/132
kV Single phase Auto Transformer).
b. 132kV Side:
(i) Bus bar Scheme: Double bus with bypass isolator Scheme.
(ii) 2 Nos. of 132 kV Transformer bay for 132/33 kV Power Transformers.
(iii) 3 Nos of 132 kV Transformer bay for 220/132 kV Power Transformers

(Future)
(iv) 5 Nos. of 132 kV incoming/ Outgoing line bays (Future)
(v) 1 No of 132 kV outgoing/Incomer Bay from Basantpur

Page 40 of 56
(vi) 1 No of Bus Coupler Bay.
(vii) 2 Nos. of 15 MVA, 132/33 kV Power Transformers (3 Nos. +1 Nos. 5 MVA

132/33 kV Single phase Transformer)
c. 33kV Side:
(i) Bus bar scheme: Single bus.
(ii) 2 Nos. of 33kV Transformer bay for 132/33kV transformers with full
equipment.
(iii) 1 No. Line Bay for NEA use.
(iv) 2 Nos of Outgoing distributors.
(v) 1 No. of Station transformer bay.
(vi) 1 No. 400 KVA, 33/0.4kV Three Phase Station Transformer.
9.16. LIST OF ANALOG AND DIGITAL INPUTS
This prepared list is preliminary in nature as per requirement during detail design same
can be revised up to ± 20%.
Basic Monitoring requirements are:
a. Equipment &Switchgear status indication
b. Measurements (V, I, P, Q, f)
c. Event
d. Alarm
e. Winding temperature of transformers
f. ambient temperature
g. Status and display of 415V LT system, 110V & 48V DC system, D.G.Set.
h. Status of display of Fire protection system and Air conditioning system (NA).

Page 41 of 56
i. Acquisition of all counters in Communication panels through potential free

contacts from Communication Panel or independently by counting the
receive/send commands.
j. Acquisition of alarm and fault record from protection relays
k. Disturbance records
l. Monitoring the state of batteries by displaying DC voltage, charging current and

load current etc.
m. Tap-position of Transformer
9.16.1. List of Inputs
The list of input for typical bays is as below
(As applicable):-
9.16.2. Analogue inputs
TABLE-1.5
i. For line
Current A Phase
B phase
C phase
Voltage A-B phase
B-C phase
C-A phase
3-Phase Real Power
3-Phase Reactive Power
Power factor
frequency
ii. For transformer

Page 42 of 56
Current A Phase
B phase
C phase
WTI, OTI (for transformer)
Tap position (for transformer only)
3-Phase Real Power
3-Phase Reactive Power
Power factor
frequency
iii. Common
a. Voltage for Double bus wherever applicable
Voltage A-B phase
B-C phase
C-A phase
b. Frequency for both Busbars
c. Ambient temperature (switchyard)
1. Voltage A-B, B-C, C-A of Main Switch Board section-I
2. Current from LT Station transformer-I
3. Current from LT Station transformer-II
4. Voltage of 110 V DCDB
5. Voltage of 48 V DCDB
6. Current from 110 V Battery set
7. Current from 48 V Battery set
8. Current from 110V Battery charger

Page 43 of 56
9. Current from 48V Battery charger
10. Energy from 400 V ACDB
9.16.3. Digital Inputs
The list of input for various bays/SYSTEM is as follows (as applicable):
9.16.4. Line bays
1. Status of CB.
2. Status of Isolator, Earth switch
3. CB trouble
4. CB operation/closing lockout
5. Trip coil faulty(two Circuits)
6. Main bkr auto recloser operated
7. A/R lockout
8. Direct trip-I/II sent
9. Direct trip-I/II received
10. Carrier send
11. Carrier received
12. Main I/II blocking
13. Main I/II-Inter trip send
14. Main I/II-Inter trip received
15. O/V STAGE – I operated
16. O/V STAGE – II operated
17. FAULT LOCATOR FAULTY

Page 44 of 56
18. MAIN-I/II VT FUSE FAIL
19. MAIN-I PROTN TRIP
20. MAIN-I PSB ALARM
21. MAIN-I SOTF TRIP
22. MAIN-I START
23. MAIN-I/II Carrier aided trip
24. MAIN-I/II fault in reverse direction
25. MAIN-I/II ZONE-2 TRIP
26. MAIN-I/II ZONE-3 TRIP
27. MAIN-I/II weak end infeed optd
28. MAIN-II PSB alarm
29. MAIN-II SOTF TRIP
30. MAIN-II start
31. MAIN-II Carrier aided trip
32. MAIN-I/II fault in reverse direction
33. Back-up o/c optd
34. Back-up e/f optd
35. 110V DC source(2 Nos) fail
36. SPEECH CHANNEL FAIL
37. Spring Charge Failure Alarm
38. SF6 Pressure 1st Stage Alarm
39. SF6 Pressure 2nd Stage Trip

Page 45 of 56
40. Closing and Tripping Coil (2 Nos) of CB MCB Tripped Alarm
41. Busbar DC Healthy
42. 87 L Relay Healthy Status
43. 21 L Relay Healthy Status
44. 67/76 N Relay Healthy Status
45. Manual Trip/Close of CB
46. CB Motor Supply MCB Tripped Alarm.
47. Local/Remote IND
48. Communication Status
49. Carrier out position
49.0.1. Transformer bays (as applicable):
1. Status of CB, Isolator, Earth switch
2. CB trouble
3. CB operation/closing lockout
4. Trip coil faulty
5. LBB operated
6. Bus bar protection trip relay operated
7. REF OPTD
8. DIF OPTD
9. OVERFLUX ALARM (LV)
10. OVERFLUX TRIP (LV)
11. OVERFLUX ALARM (HV)

Page 46 of 56
12. OVERFLUX TRIP (HV)
13. HV BUS VTFUSE FAIL
14. LV BUS VT FUSE FAIL
15. OTI ALARM/TRIP
16. PRD OPTD
17. OVERLOAD ALARM
18. BUCHOLZ TRIP
19. BUCHOLZ ALARM
20. OLTC BUCHOLZ ALARM
21. OLTC BUCHOLZ TRIP
22. OIL LOW ALARM
23. Back-Up O/C (HV) operated
24. Back-Up E/F (HV)operated
25. 110 V DC-I source fail
26. 110 V DC-II source fail
27. TAP MISMATCH
28. GR-A PROTN OPTD
29. GR-B PROTN OPTD
30. Back-up O/C (LV) operated
31. Back-up E/F (LV)operated
49.0.2. Busbar Protection
1. Bus bar-I trip

Page 47 of 56
2. Bus bar-II trip
3. Bus bar-I LBB trip
4. Bus bar-II LBB trip
5. Bus bar zone-I CT Supervision
6. Bus bar zone-II CT Supervision
7. Bus protection relay fail
8. Bus bar-I Protection ‘OUT’
9. Bus bar-II Protection ‘OUT’
49.0.3. Auxiliary system
1. Incomer-I On/Off
2. Incomer-II On/Off
3. 415V Bus-I/II U/V
4. DG set breaker on/off
5. Alarm/trip signals as listed in Section: DG set
6. LT transformer- Buchholz Alarm & trip
7. LT transformer- WTI Alarm & trip
8. LT transformer- OTI Alarm & trip
9. Communication Panel exchange fail
10. Time sync. Signal absent
11. Alarm/trip signals as listed in Section: Battery and Battery charger
12. 110 V DC- earth fault
13. 48 V DC- earth fault

Page 48 of 56
14. Alarm/trip signals as listed in Section: Fire protection system
15. The exact number and description of digital inputs shall be as per detailed
16. Engineering requirement Apart from the above mentioned digital inputs, minimum of
100 inputs shall be kept for NEA use in future.
9.16.5. Integration of SCADA system:
Augmentation and integration of work related to SCADA System.
Interfacing &Integration of newly developed/extended bays in Basantpur substation with

existing SAS System/RTU and LDC Kathmandu is in the scope of contractor.
Contractor shall take utmost attention towards compatibility in design, supply,
installation, interfacing and integration of the new SCADA system (Line bay) with the
existing SCADA System. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the compatibilities and
complete interfacing of the new communication/signal system to ensure the successful
operation.
The Make, Model No & SAS Architecture drawing of Basantpur substation will be
provided to the contractor during detailed engineering stage
The 132/33 bays under present scope at Dhunge Sangu substations shall be integrated by
the contractor into existing SCADA system of Siemens ‘SINAUT Spectrum”(version 4.3.2)
installed at Master Station i.e. Nepal Electricity Authority Load Dispatch Centre ( located
in Siuchatar, Kathmandu). The integration shall include all software and Hardware
required at the Control Centre as well as necessary data base, display generation and
upgrades for proposed control and monitoring of station and Network Analysis. The
above activities shall be carried out as appropriate, in Dhunge Sangu Substation and the
Load Dispatch Centre. The manufacturers of the existing SCADA system are:-
LDC facilities: Siemens, Germany
RTU facilities: ABB, Germany

Page 49 of 56
The details of existing RTU installed at existing substations and Data acquisitions
principles (types of analogue/digital data ) for control, monitoring of substations is
enclosed at Appendix III.
The existing communication protocol used for SCADA at LDC Kathmandu is IEC 101. For
the present scope of work the Data shall be obtained from the Substation Automation
System (based on IEC 61850) using Gateway port with communication protocol IEC 101
as per requirement and send to existing Inaruwa Substation through gateway port and
necessary works of integration at Inaruwa and LDC Kathmandu for onward transmission
of Data and Voice.

Page 50 of 56
9.17. APPENDICES
Appendix-I
TYPICAL ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING
OF
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM
DR WORKSTATION REDUNDANT HMI

Printers GPS
Redundant Station LAN
RSCC RCC RSCC RCC
Gateway 1 Server 1 Server 2 Gateway 2

(HOT) (STAND BY)
Ethernet Switch for Ethernet Switch for

Stn. Stn.
Fault Tolerant Ring-IEC61850-8-1
Ethernet Switch for Ethernet Switch for Ethernet Switch for

Dia 1/Bays Dia 2/Bays Dia n/Bays
IEDs for IEDs for IEDs for Fiber Optic

Control Control Control Connections
IEDs for IEDs for IEDs for

Protection Protection Protection
IEDs for IEDs for IEDs for

Protection Protection Protection

Page 51 of 56
Note:
1. The redundant managed bus shall be realized by high speed optical bus using industrial
grade components and shall be as per IEC 61850.
2. Inside the sub-station, all connections shall be realized as per IEC 61850 protocol.
3. For gateway, it shall communicate with Load Dispatch Centre (LDC) on IEC 60870-5-101
protocol.
4. The printer as required shall be connected to station bus directly and can be managed
either from station HMI, HMI view node or disturbance recorder work station.
The above layout is typical. However if any contractor offers slightly modified architecture based
on their standard practice without compromising the working, the same shall be subject to
approval during detailed engineering.

Page 52 of 56
Appendix-II
List of IO Points to be transmitted to LDC (as applicable)
1. MW and MVAR for all lines, transformers ,reactors and Capacitors
2. Voltage of all buses
3. Frequency of all 132 kV Bus
4. All Breakers
5. All isolators
6. Tap Position for all transformers
7. Master protection signal for all feeders, transformers Units and Bus Bar
8. Loss of Voltage signal for Bus bar
9. All the points identified in point (5),(8) and (1) above as GPS Time stamped.
10. Temperature value per substation.
11. Any other point deemed necessary for successful commissioning of the project shall be
decided during detailed engineering with no extra cost.
12. Metering Data from Energy meter.

Page 53 of 56
Appendix-III
EXISTING RTU BASED SCADA & ITS DATA ACQUISITION
1.0 GENARAL INFORMATION
1.1 Remote Terminal Units
The Load Dispatch Centre (LDC) at Kathmandu controls and monitors the network of Integrated
Nepal Power System (INPS) via RTUs located at its various substations.
In addition to the above, two local RTUs have been installed at the LDC: one to handle local-
control-center status inputs and analog inputs and outputs; and the other for training,
maintenance and testing purposes.
Manufacturers of existing SCADA system are:
LDC facilities: SIEMENS, Germany
RTU facilities: ABB, Germany
1.2 Data acquisition principles for existing Substation
The existing substations are provided with RTU for interfacing of the following supervisory
controls and data acquisitions:
Remote Control
 Remote control of all 132/33kV circuit breakers.
Status indications
 Status indications of all 132kV circuit breakers, busbar and line isolators.
 Status indications of all 33kV line feeders.
1.3 Integration of SCADA of existing Substation
The existing communication protocol used for SCADA at LDC Kathmandu is IEC 101. For the
present scope of work no RTU is envisaged and the Data for SCADA purpose shall be obtained

Page 54 of 56
from the Substation Automation System (based on IEC 61850) using Gateway port with
communication protocol IEC 101 as per requirement being provided under present contract.
Table 1.4 : Alarms to be acquired from each type of bay
Type of Alarm Line Bay Transformer Coupler Bay Busbar Station

Bay
Main protection trip MPT MPT MPT
Back-up protection trip BPT BPT BPT
Bay fault BFA BFA BFA
Circuit breaker fault CBF CBF CBF
Auto-recloser operated ARO
Temperature Alarm TAL
Temperature Trip TTR
Buchholz alarm BAL
Buchholz Trip BTR
General GTA
transformer/reactor
talarm
General GTT
transformer/reactor Trip
Busbar Voltage status BVS
Station urgent fault SUF
Station none-urgent fault SNF
Station Control disabled SCD
RTU alarm RTU
Communication alarm COM
Total 5 10 4 1 5

Page 55 of 56
Measurements
 Busbar voltages (separate for each busbar and section) of all 132/33 kV Busbars.
 Active/reactive power for
 All 132kV Line feeders.
 All 132kV and 33kV Transformer feeders.
 Single phase current measurements for all 33kV lines participating in load shedding Scheme.

Page 56 of 56
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER - 10
CONTROL AND RELAY PANELS

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 10
CONTENTS

10.1 SCOPE 1
10.2 STANDARDS 1
10.4 MOUNTING 4
10.5 PANEL INTERNAL WIRING 4
10.6 TERMINAL BLOCKS 6
10.7 PAINTING 7
10.8 MIMIC DIAGRAM 7
10.9 NAME PLATES AND MARKINGS 8
10.10 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 9
10.11 EARTHING 10
10.12 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS 11
10.13 ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM FOR CONTROL PANEL 11
10.14 SWITCHES 13
10.15 INDICATING LAMPS 16
10.16 POSITION INDICATORS 16
10.17 SYNCHRONISING EQUIPMENT 16
10.18 RELAYS 18
10.19 TRANSMISSION LINE PROTECTION 21
10.20 LINE OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION RELAY FOR 132 kV 24
10.21 BACK-UP DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT 25
PROTECTION SCHEME IN TRANSMISSION LINE

10.22 33 KV LINE PROTECTION 26

10.23 CIRCUIT BREAKER PROTECTION 26
10.24 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION 27
10.25 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY 32
10.26 TRIPPING RELAY 32
10.27 DC SUPPLY SUPERIVISION RELAY 33
10.28 BUS BAR PROTECTION 33
10.29 FAULT RECORDER 35
10.30 DISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATOR 39
10.31 TIME SYNCHRONISATION EQUPMENT 39
10.32 RELAY TEST KIT 41
10.33 TYPE TESTS 41
10.34 CONFIGURATION OF CONTROL AND PROTECTION PANELS 42
10.35 ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE TOOL EQUIPMENTS 50
10.36 TROPICALISATION 50
10.37 FALSE PANELS 50
10.38 BAY MARSHALLING KIOSKS 50
10.39 PROTECTION COUPLER 51
10.40 ENERGY METER 51
10.41 APPENDIX – I 52
10.42 APPENDIX - II 57

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 10
10.1 SCOPE
These specifications are intended to cover the design, engineering, manufacturing, inspection
and testing at manufacturer’s works, packing, supply & delivery, storage, Testing &
commissioning of relay and protection panels for Construction 132/33 kV substations at
Dhunge Sangu in Nepal. It shall be the bidder’s responsibility to assess the exact quantity of
complete material required for the relay and protection panels based on the various drawings
during detailed engineering.
10.2 STANDARDS
The latest revision/amendments of Codes, Standards and Recommendations published by the

following international organizations shall be applicable for the equipment/material covered
in this Specification. In case of conflict, the vendor/manufacturer may propose
equipment/material conforming to one group of Standards specified hereunder without
jeopardizing the requirements of these Specifications:
CODE DESCRIPTION
IEC 255 Electrical relays
IEC 38 IEC Standard voltages
IEC 68 Environmental testing
IEC 664 Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage
systems
EN 50081-2 Emissivity (Industry)
EN 50082-2 Immunity (Industry)
IEC 255-6 Measuring relays and protection equipment
IEC 255-7 Test and measurement procedures for electromechanical all-

Page 1 of 58
or-nothing relays
IEC 68-2-3 Damp heat steady state
IEC 68-2-3 Test Db and guidance; Damp heat, cyclic
IEC 255-5 Insulation tests for electrical relays
IEC 255-22 Electrical disturbance tests for measuring relays and protection
equipment:
IEC 255-22-1 1 MHz burst disturbance test
IEC 255-22-2 Electrostatic discharge test
IEC 255-22-3 Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance test
IEC 255-22-4 Fast transient disturbance test
IEC 255-11 Interruptions to and alternating components (ripple) in D.C
auxiliary energizing quantity to measuring relays
IEC 255-6 Measuring relays and protection equipment
IEC 255-21 Vibration, shock, bump and seismic tests on measuring relays
and protection equipment:
IEC 255-21-1 Vibration tests (sinusoidal)
IEC 255-21-2 Shock and bump tests
IEC 255-21-3 Seismic tests
IEC 255-0-20 Contact performance of electrical relays
IEC 870-3 class 2 Digital I/O, analogue I/O dielectric tests
IEC 801-5/class 3 Digital I/O surge withstand test
IEC 870-3/class2: Radio interference test
IEC 801-4/4 Transient fast burst test
IEC 801-2/4 Static discharge
IEC 801-3/3 Electromagnetic fields

Page 2 of 58
10.3.1 Simplex panel shall consist of a vertical front panel with equipment mounted thereon and
having wiring access from rear for control panels & either front or rear for relay panels. In
case of panel having width more than 800mm, double leaf-doors shall be provided. Doors
shall have handles with either built-in locking facility or will be provided with pad-lock.
10.3.2 Relay panels shall be of simplex type design as indicated. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor to ensure that the equipment specified and such unspecified complementary
equipment required for completeness of the protective/control schemes is properly
accommodated in the panels without congestion and if necessary, provide panels with larger
dimensions. No price increase at a later date on this account shall be allowed. However, the
width of panels that are being offered to be placed in control room. Should be inconformity
with the space availability in the control room.
10.3.3 Panels shall be completely metal enclosed and shall be dust, moisture and vermin proof. The
enclosure shall provide a degree of protection not less than IP-31 in accordance with IEC
60529 (Part-1).
10.3.4 Panels shall be free standing, floor mounting type and shall comprise structural frames
completely enclosed with specially selected smooth finished, cold rolled sheet steel of
thickness not less than 3 mm for weight bearing members of the panels such as base frame
,front sheet and door frames, and 2.0mm for sides, door, top and bottom portions. There shall
be sufficient reinforcement to provide level transportation and installation.
10.3.5 All doors, removable covers and panels shall be gasketed all around with neoprene gaskets.
Ventilating louvers, if provided shall have screens and filters. The screens shall be made of
either brass or GI wire mesh.
10.3.6 Design, materials selection and workmanship shall be such as to result in neat appearance,
inside and outside with no welds, rivets or bolt head apparent from outside, with all exterior
surfaces tune and smooth.

Page 3 of 58
10.3.7 Panels shall have base frame with smooth bearing surface, which shall be fixed on the
embedded foundation channels/insert plates. Anti vibration strips made of shock absorbing
materials which shall be supplied by the contractor, shall be placed between panel & base
frame.
10.3.8 Cable entries to the panels shall be from the bottom. Cable gland plate fitted on the bottom
of the panel shall be connected to earthing of the panel/station through a flexible braided
copper conductor rigidly.
10.3.9 Relay panels of modern modular construction would also be acceptable.
10.4 MOUNTING
10.4.1 All equipment on and in panels shall be mounted and completely wired to the terminal blocks
ready for external connections. The equipment on front of panel shall be mounted flush. No
equipment shall be mounted on the doors.
10.4.2 Equipment shall be mounted such that removal and replacement can be accomplished
individually without interruption of service to adjacent devices and are readily accessible
without use of special tools. Terminal marking on the equipment shall be clearly visible.
10.4.3 The Contractor shall carry out cut out, mounting and wiring of the free issue items supplied by
others which are to be mounted in his panel in accordance with the corresponding equipment
manufacturer's drawings. Cut outs if any, provided for future mounting of equipment shall be
properly blanked off with blanking plate.
10.4.4 The center lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be not less than 750mm
from the bottom of the panel. The centre lines of relays, meters and recorders shall be not
less than 450mm from the bottom of the panel.
10.4.5 The centre lines of switches, push buttons and indicating lamps shall be matched to give a
neat and uniform appearance. Likewise the top lines of all meters, relays and recorders etc.
shall be matched.
10.5 PANEL INTERNAL WIRING

Page 4 of 58
10.5.1 Panels shall be supplied complete with interconnecting wiring provided between all electrical
devices mounted and wired in the panels and between the devices and terminal blocks for the
devices to be connected to equipment outside the panels. When panels are arranged to be
located adjacent to each other all inter panel wiring and connections between the panels shall
be furnished and the wiring shall be carried out internally.
10.5.2 All wiring shall be carried out with 1100V grade, single core, stranded copper conductor wires
with PVC insulation. The minimum size of the multi-stranded copper conductor used or
internal wiring shall be as follows:
 All circuits except current transformer circuits – Cu cable of size 1.5 sq. mm
 All current transformer circuits – Cu cable of size 2.5 sq. mm
10.5.3 All internal wiring shall be securely supported, neatly arranged, readily accessible and
connected to equipment terminals and terminal blocks. Wiring gutters & troughs shall be
used for this purpose.
10.5.4 Auxiliary bus wiring for AC and DC supplies, voltage transformer circuits, annunciation circuits
and other common services shall be provided near the top of the panels running throughout
the entire length of the panels.
10.5.5 Wire termination shall be made with solder less crimping type and tinned copper lugs, which
firmly grip the conductor. Insulated sleeves shall be provided at all the wire terminations.
Engraved core identification plastic ferrules marked to correspond with panel wiring diagram
shall be fitted at both ends of each wire. Ferrules shall fit tightly on the wire and shall not fall
off when the wire is disconnected from terminal blocks. All wires directly connected to trip
circuit breaker or device shall be distinguished by the addition of red coloured unlettered
ferrule.
10.5.6 Longitudinal troughs extending throughout the full length of the panel shall be preferred for
inter panel wiring. Inter-connections to adjacent panel shall be brought out to a separate set
of terminal blocks located near the slots of holes meant for taking the inter-connecting wires.

Page 5 of 58
10.5.7 Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness and correctness of the internal
wiring and for the proper functioning of the connected equipments.
10.6 TERMINAL BLOCKS
10.6.1 All internal wiring to be connected to external equipment shall terminate on terminal blocks.
Terminal blocks shall be 1100 V grade and have 10 Amps continuous rating, moulded piece,
complete with insulated barriers, stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock nuts. Markings
on the terminal blocks shall correspond to wire number and terminal numbers on the wiring
diagrams. All terminal blocks shall have shrouding with transparent unbreakable material.
10.6.2 Disconnecting type terminal blocks for current transformer and voltage transformer
secondary leads shall be provided. Also current transformer secondary leads shall be provided
with short circuiting and earthing facilities.
10.6.3 At least 20% spare terminals shall be provided on each panel and these spare terminals shall
be uniformly distributed on all terminal blocks.
10.6.4 Unless otherwise specified, terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the following
conductors of external cable on each side - All CT circuits: minimum of two of 4 sq. mm
copper cable AC/DC Power Supply Circuits: minimum of two of 6 sq. mm copper cable. All
other circuits: minimum of one of 2.5mm Sq. Copper. No. of cores shall be decided as per
requirement during design engineering.
10.6.5 There shall be a minimum clearance of 250mm between the first row of terminal blocks and
the associated cable gland plate or panel side wall. Also the clearance between two rows of
terminal blocks edges shall be minimum of 150mm.
10.6.6 Arrangement of the terminal block assemblies and the wiring channel within the enclosure
shall be such that a row of terminal blocks is run in parallel and close proximity along each
side of the wiring-duct to provide for convenient attachment of internal panel wiring. The side
of the terminal block opposite the wiring duct shall be reserved for the Employer's external
cable connections if any. All adjacent terminal blocks shall also share this field wiring corridor.

Page 6 of 58
All wiring shall be provided with adequate support inside the panels to hold them firmly and
toenable free and flexible termination without causing strain on terminals.
10.6.7 All necessary cable terminating accessories such as gland plates, supporting clamps &
brackets, wiring troughs and gutters etc.(except glands & lugs) for external cables shall be
included the scope of supply.
10.6.8 The test terminal blocks (TTB) to be provided shall be fully enclosed with removable covers
and made of moulded, non-inflammable plastic material with boxes and barriers moulded
integrally. All terminals shall be clearly marked with identification numbers or letters to
facilitate connection to external wiring. Terminal block shall have shorting, disconnecting
facility for CT circuits and testing facilities for protective gears.
10.7 PAINTING
10.7.1 All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with the IS:6005 "Code of practice for
phosphating iron and steel".
10.7.2 Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.
10.7.3 Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with running
water rinsing with a slightly alkaline hot water and drying.
10.7.4 After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water followed by final
rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.
10.7.5 The phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats of ready mixed,
stovedtypemzinc chromate primer. The first coat may be "flash dried" while the second coat
shall be stoved.
10.7.6 After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be applied,
each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall be applied after inspection of
first coat of painting. The exterior colour of paint shall be of a slightly different shade to
enable inspection of the painting.

Page 7 of 58
10.7.7 A small quantity of finished paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after
installation of the panels.
10.7.8 In case the bidder proposes to follow any other established painting procedure like
electrostatic painting, the procedure shall be submitted for NEA’s review and approval.
10.8 MIMIC DIAGRAM
10.8.1 Coloured mimic diagram and symbols showing the exact representation of the system shall be
provided in the front of control panels.
10.8.2 Mimic diagram shall be made preferably of anodised aluminium or plastic of approved fast
colour material, which shall be screwed on to the panel and can be easily cleaned. The mimic
bus shall be 2mm thick. The width of the mimic bus shall be 10mm for bus bars and 7mm for
other connections. Painted overlaid mimic is also acceptable.
10.8.3 Mimic bus colour will be represented by color codes as follows:
132 kV Lemon Yellow
33 kV Brilliant Green
0.4 kV (Auxiliaries) Black
10.8.4 When semaphore indicators are used for equipment position, they shall be so mounted in the
mimic that the equipment in close position shall complete the continuity of mimic.
10.8.5 Indicating lamp, one for each phase, for each bus shall be provided on the mimic to indicate
bus charged condition
10.9 NAME PLATES AND MARKINGS
10.9.1 All equipment mounted on front and rear side as well as equipment mounted inside the
panels shall be provided with individual name plates with equipment designation engraved.
Also on the top of each panel on front as well as rear side, large and bold nameplates shall be
provided for circuit/feeder designation.

Page 8 of 58
10.9.2 All front mounted equipment shall also be provided at the rear with individual name plates
engraved with tag numbers corresponding to the one shown in the panel internal wiring to
facilitate easy tracing of the wiring.
10.9.3 All relays and other devices shall be clearly marked with manufacturer's name, manufacturer's
type, serial number and electrical rating data.
10.9.4 Name Plates shall be made of non-rusting metal or 3 plylamicoid. Name plates shall be black
with white engraving lettering.
10.9.5 All the panels shall be provided with name plate mounted inside the panel bearing LOA No &
Date, Name of the Substation & feeder and reference drawing number.
10.10 MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES
10.10.1 Plug Point: 230V, Single phase 50Hz, AC socket with switch suitable to accept 5 Amps and
15 Amps pin round standard plug, shall be provided in the interior of each cubicle with ON-
OFF switch.
10.10.2 Interior Lighting: Each panel shall be provided with a fluorescent lighting fixture rated for
230 Volts, single phase, 50 Hz supply for the interior illumination of the panel controlled by
the respective panel door switch.
10.10.3 Switches and Fuses: Each panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for
receiving, distributing and isolating of DC and AC supplies for various control, signaling,
lighting and space heater circuits. The incoming and sub-circuits shall be separately
provided with miniature circuit breakers (MCB). Selection of the main and sub-circuit MCB
rating shall be such as to ensure selective clearance of sub-circuit faults. MCBs shall confirm
to IS: 13947. Each MCB shall be provided with one potential free contact and the same
shall be wired for annunciation purpose. However voltage transformer circuits for relaying
and metering shall be protected by fuses. All fuses shall be HRC cartridge type conforming

Page 9 of 58
to IS: 13703 mounted on plug-in type fuse bases. . Fuse carrier base as well as MCBs shall
have imprints of the fuse 'rating' and 'voltage'.
10.10.4 Space Heater: Each panel shall be provided with a space heater rated for 230V, single
phase, 50 Hz Ac supply for the internal heating of the panel to prevent condensation of
moisture. The fittings shall be complete with switch unit.
10.11 EARTHING
10.11.1 All panels shall be equipped with an earth bus securely fixed. Location of earth bus shall
ensure no radiation interference for earth systems under various switching conditions of
isolators and breakers. The material and the sizes of the bus bar shall be at least 25 X 6 sq.
mm perforated copper with threaded holes at a gap of 50mm with a provision of bolts and
nuts for connection with cable armours and mounted equipment etc for effective earthing.
When several panels are mounted adjoining each other, the earth bus shall be made
continuous and necessary connectors and clamps for this purpose shall be included in the
scope of supply of Contractor. Provision shall be made for extending the earth bus bars to
future adjoining panels on either side.
10.11.2 Provision shall be made on each bus bar of the end panels for connecting Substation
earthing grid. Necessary terminal clamps and connectors for this purpose shall be included in
the scope of supply of Contractor.
10.11.3 All metallic cases of relays, instruments and other panel mounted equipment including gland
plate, shall be connected to the earth bus by copper wires of size not less than 2.5 sq. mm.
The colour code of earthing wires shall be green.
10.11.4 Looping of earth connections which would result in loss of earth connection to other devices
when the loop is broken, shall not be permitted. Earthing may be done in such a manner
that no circulating current shall flow in the panel
10.11.5 CVT/VT and CT secondary neutral or common lead shall be earthed at one place only at the
terminal blocks where they enter the panel. Such earthing shall be made through links so

Page 10 of 58
that earthing may be removed from one group without disturbing continuity of earthing
system for other groups.
10.11.6 An electrostatic discharge arrangement shall be provided in each panel so as to discharge

human body before he handles the equipments inside the panels.
10.12 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS
10.12.1 Unless otherwise specified, all electrical Measuring instruments shall be of digital type
suitable for flush mounting.
10.12.2 Instruments shall have 4-digit display; display height being not less than 25 mm
10.12.3 Multifunction meter of 0.2 Accuracy Class with RS 485, RS 232 & Front optical Port is to be
provided in Control Panels of all transformer bays
10.12.4 Energy Meter & Multifunction meter are of 0.2 Accuracy Class with RS 485, RS 232 & Front
optical Port is to be provided in Control Panels of all Line bays
10.13 ANNUNCIATION SYSTEM FOR CONTROL PANEL
10.13.1 Alarm annunciation system shall be provided in the control board by means of visual and
audible alarm in order to draw the attention of the operator to the abnormal operating
conditions or the operation of some protective devices. The annunciation equipment shall be
suitable for operation on the voltages specified in this specification.
10.13.2 The visual annunciation shall be provided by annunciation facia, mounted flush on the top of
the control panels.
10.13.3 The annunciation facia shall be provided with translucent plastic window for alarm point with
approximate size of 35mm x 50mm. The facia plates shall be engraved in black lettering with
respective inscriptions. Alarm inscriptions shall be engraved on each window in not more
than three lines and size of the lettering shall not be less than 5 mm.
10.13.4 Each annunciation window shall be provided with two white lamps in parallel to provide

Page 11 of 58
safety against lamp failure. Long life lamps shall be used. The transparency of cover plates
and wattage of the lamps provided in the facia windows shall be adequate to ensure clear
visibility of the inscriptions in the control room having high illumination intensity (350 Lux),
from the location of the operator's desk.
10.13.5 All Trip facia shall have red colour and all Non-trip facia shall have white colour.
10.13.6 The audible alarm shall be provided by Buzzer/ Hooter /Bell having different sounds and shall
be used as follows.
Hooter Alarm Annunciation
Bell Annunciation DC failure
Buzzer AC supply failure
10.13.7 Sequence of operation of the annunciator shall be as follows :
Sl. NO. Alarm Condition Fault Visual Audible

Contact Annunciation Annunciation
1. Normal Open OFF OFF
2. Abnormal Close Flashing ON
3. Accept Push Button Close Steady On OFF

Pressed Open Steady On OFF
4. Reset Push Button Close On OFF

Pressed Open Off OFF
5. Lamp Test Push Open Steady On OFF

Button Pressed
10.13.8 Audible annunciation for the failure of DC supply to the annunciation system shall be provided
and this annunciation shall operate on 230 Volts AC supply. On failure of the DC to the

Page 12 of 58
annunciation system for more than 2 or 3 seconds (adjustable setting), a bell shall sound. A
separate push button shall be provided for the cancellation of this audible alarm alone but the
facia window shall remain steadily lighted till the supply to annunciation system is restored.
10.13.9 A separate voltage check relay shall be provided to monitor the failure of supply (230V AC) to
the scheme mentioned in Clause above. If the failure of supply exists for more than 2 to 3
seconds, this relay shall initiate visual and audible annunciation. Visual and audible
annunciation for the failure of AC supply to the annunciation system shall be provided and
this annunciation shall operate on Annunciation DC and buzzer shall sound.
10.13.10 The annunciation system described above shall meet the following additional requirements :
a) The annunciation system shall be capable of catering to at least 20 simultaneous signals at a

time.
b) One set of the following push buttons shall be provided on each control panel:
 Reset push button for annunciation system
 Accept push button for annunciation system
 Lamp test push button for testing the facia windows
c) One set of the following items shall be provided common for all the control panel (not
applicable for extension of substation) :
 Flasher relay for annunciation system
 Push button for Flasher test
 Three Push buttons for test of all audible alarm systems
d) These testing circuits shall be so connected that while testing is being done, it shall not
prevent the registering of any new annunciation that may land during the test.
e) The annunciation shall be repetitive type and shall be capable of registering the fleeting
signal. Minimum duration of the fleeting signal registered by the system shall be 15 milli
seconds.

Page 13 of 58
f) In case of static annunciator scheme, special precaution shall be taken to ensure that spurious
alarm condition does not appear due to influence of external electromagnetic/ electrostatic
interference on the annunciator wiring and switching disturbances from the neighbouring
circuits within the panels and the static annunciator shall meet the high voltage susceptibility
test , impulse voltage withstand test , high frequency disturbance test– class III and fast
transient disturbance test –level III as per IEC 60255.
10.13.11 The annunciation system to be supplied for existing sub-stations shall be engineered as an
extension to the existing scheme.
10.14 SWITCHES
10.14.1 Control and instrument switches shall be rotary operated type with escutcheon plates clearly
marked to show operating position and circuit designation plates and suitable for flush
mounting with only switch front plate and operating handle projecting out.
The selection of operating handles for the different types of switches shall be as follows :
Breaker, isolator control switches Pistol grip, black
A/R ON/OFF Switch Pistol grip, black
Tele Protection ON/OFF Pistol grip, black
Local/Remote Selector Switch Pistol grip, black
10.14.2 The control switch of breaker and isolator shall be of spring return to neutral type. The switch
shall have spring return from close and trip positions to "after close" and "after trip"
positions respectively.
10.14.5 Lockable type of switches which can be locked in particular positions shall be provided when
specified. The key locks shall be fitted on the operating handles.
10.14.6 The contacts of all switches shall preferably open and close with snap action to minimise
arcing. Contacts of switches shall be spring assisted and contact faces shall be with rivets of
pure silver or silver alloy. Springs shall not be used as current carrying parts

Page 14 of 58
10.14.7 The contact combination and their operation shall be such as to give completeness to the
interlock and function of the scheme.
10.14.8 The contact rating of the switches shall be as follows:
Description Contact Rating in Amps

110V DC 48V DC
Make and carry 10 10
Continuously
Make and carry 30 30
for 0.5 sec
10.15 INDICATING LAMPS
10.15.1 Indicating lamps shall be of cluster LED type suitable for panel mounting with rear terminal
connections. Lamps shall be provided with series connected resistors preferably built in the
lamp assembly. Lamps shall have translucent lamp covers to diffuse lights coloured red, green,
amber, clear white or blue as specified. The lamp cover shall be preferably of screwed type,
unbreakable and moulded from heat resisting material.
10.15.2 The lamps shall be provided with suitable resistors.
10.15.3 Lamps and lenses shall be interchangeable and easily replaceable from the front of the panel.
Tools, if required for replacing the bulbs and lenses shall also be included in the scope of the
supply.
10.15.4 The indicating lamps with resistors shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a continuous
basis.
10.16 POSITION INDICATORS
10.16.1 Position indicators of "SEMAPHORE" type shall be provided when specified as part of the
mimic diagrams on panels for indicating the position of circuit breakers, isolating/earthing

Page 15 of 58
switches etc. The indicator shall be suitable for semi-flush mounting with only the front disc
projecting out and with terminal connection from the rear. Their strips shall be of the same
colour as the associated mimic.
10.16.2 Position indicator shall be suitable for DC Voltage as specified. When the supervised object is
in the closed position, the pointer of the indicator shall take up a position in line with the
mimic bus bars, and at right angles to them when the object is in the open position. When the
supply failure to the indicator occurs, the pointer shall take up an intermediate position to
indicate the supply failure.
10.16.3 The rating of the indicator shall not exceed 2.5 W.
10.16.4 The position indicators shall withstand 120% of rated voltage on a continuous basis.
10.17 SYNCHRONISING EQUIPMENT
10.17.1. For sub-station equipped with sub-station Automation system, the requirement of
synchronisation is specified in chapter Sub-station Automation System and the same shall
prevail. For other sub-station which is not equipped with Sub-sub-station automation system
following shall be applicable as per requirement.
10.17.2. The synchronising instruments shall be mounted either on a synchronising trolley or on a syn-
chronising panel. The panel/ trolley shall be equipped with double analog voltmeters and
double analog frequency meters, synchroscope and lamps fully wired. The size of voltmeters
and frequency meters provided in the synchronising panel shall not be less than 144 X 144
sq.mm. Suitable auxiliary voltage transformers wherever necessary shall also be provided for
synchronising condition. In case the synchroscope is not continuously rated, a synchroscope
cut-off switch shall be provided and an indicating lamp to indicate that the synchroscope is
energised, shall also be provided
10.17.3. Synchronising check relay with necessary ancillary equipment’s shall be provided which shall
permit breakers to close after checking the requirements of synchronising of incoming and
running supply. The phase angle setting shall not exceed 35 degree and have voltage
difference setting not exceeding 10%. This relay shall have a response time of less than 200

Page 16 of 58
milliseconds when the two system conditions are met within present limits and with the timer
disconnected. The relay shall have a frequency difference setting not exceeding 0.45% at
rated value and at the minimum time setting. The relay shall have an adjustable time setting
range of 0.5-20 seconds. A guard relay shall be provided to prevent the closing attempt by
means of synchronising check relay when control switch is kept in closed position long before
the two systems are in synchronism
10.17.4. The synchronising panel shall be draw out and swing type which can be swivelled in left and
right direction. The synchronising panel shall be placed along with control panels and the
number of synchronising panel shall be as indicated in SCHEDULES OF RATES AND PRICES. The
incoming and running bus wires of VT secondary shall be connected and run as bus wires in
the control panels and will be extended to synchronising panel for synchronisation of circuit
breakers. The selector switch provided for each circuit breaker in respective control panels
shall be lockable type with a common key so that only one selector switch is kept in
synchronising mode at a time.
10.17.5. Alternatively, the trolley shall be of mobile type with four rubber-padding wheels capable of
rotating in 360 degree around the vertical axis. Suitable bumpers with rubber padding shall
be provided all around the trolley to prevent any accidental damage to any panel in the
control room while the trolley is in movement. The trolley shall have two meter long flexible
cord fully wired to the instruments and terminated in a plug in order to facilitate connecting
the trolley to any of the panels. The receptacle to accept the plug shall be provided on the
panel.
10.17.6. At existing sub-stations, the synchronising scheme shall be engineered to be compatible with
the existing synchronising scheme and synchronising socket/switch on the panel. In
substations, where synchronising panels are available, the bidder shall carry out the shifting of
the above panels, if required, to facilitate the extension of control panel placement.

Page 17 of 58
10.18 RELAYS
10.18.1 All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS:3231/IEC-60255/IEC 61000 or other
applicable standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi-flush mounting on the front
with connections from the rear. All the relays shall be directly connected to the inter bay bus
using fiber optic cables and shall support peer to peer communication. The relays shall
generate GOOSE messages as per IEC 61850 standards for interlocking and shall also ensure
interoperability with third party relays. Each relay shall also generate an ICD file in XML format
for engineering integration to a SCADA system. The relays should have a port for local
communication for relay settings, modifications etc.
10.18.2 All main protective relays shall be of numerical type and communication protocol shall be as
per IEC 61850. Further, the test levels of EMI as indicated in IEC 61850 shall be applicable to
these.
10.18.3 All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in type/modular cases with proper testing
facilities. Necessary test plugs/test handles shall be supplied loose and shall be included in
contractor's scope of supply.
10.18.4 All AC operated relays shall be suitable for operation at 50 Hz. AC Voltage operated relays
shall be suitable for 110 Volts VT secondary and current operated relays for 1 amp CT
secondary. All DC operated relays and timers shall be designed for the DC voltage specified,
and shall operate satisfactorily between 80% and 110% of rated voltage. Voltage operated
relays shall have adequate thermal capacity for continuous operation.
10.18.5 The protective relays shall be suitable for efficient and reliable operation of the protection
scheme described in the specification. Necessary auxiliary relays and timers required for
interlocking schemes for multiplying of contacts suiting contact duties of protective relays and
monitoring of control supplies and circuits, lockout relay monitoring circuits etc. also required
for the complete protection schemes described in the specification shall be provided. All
protective relays shall be provided with at least two pairs of potential free isolated output
contacts. Auxiliary relays and timers shall have pairs of contacts as required to complete the

Page 18 of 58
scheme; contacts shall be silver faced with spring action. Relay case shall have adequate
number of terminals for making potential free external connections to the relay coils and
contacts, including spare contacts.
10.18.6 All protective relays, auxiliary relays and timers except the lock out relays and interlocking
relays specified shall be provided with self-reset type contacts. All protective relays and timers
shall be provided with externally hand reset positive action operation indicators with
inscription .All protective relays which do not have built-in hand-reset operation indicators
shall have additional auxiliary relays with operating indicators (Flag relays) for this purpose.
Similarly, separate operating indicator (auxiliary relays) shall also be provided in the trip
circuits of protections located outside the board such as Buchholz relays, oil and winding
temperature protection, sudden pressure devices, fire protection etc.
10.18.7 Timers shall be of solid-state type. Time delay in terms of milliseconds obtained by the
external capacitor resistor combination is not preferred and shall be avoided.
10.18.8 No control relay which shall trip the power circuit breaker when the relay is de-energized shall
be employed in the circuits.
10.18.9 Provision shall be made for easy isolation of trip circuits of each relay for the purpose of
testing and maintenance and suitable test blocks for specified protection schemes like-
distance protection, bus-bar protection etc.
10.18.10 Auxiliary seal-in-units provided on the protective relays shall preferably be of shunt
reinforcement type. If series relays are used the following shall be strictly ensured:
 The operating time of the series seal-in-unit shall be sufficiently shorter than that of
the trip coil or trip relay in series with which it operates to ensure definite operation
of the flag indicator of the relay.
 Seal-in-unit shall obtain adequate current for operation when one or more relays
operate simultaneously.

Page 19 of 58
 Impedance of the seal-in-unit shall be small enough to permit satisfactory operation

of the trip coil on trip relays when the D.C. Supply Voltage is minimum.
 Trip-circuit seal-in is required for all trip outputs, irrespective of the magnitude of
the interrupted current. The trip-circuit seal-in logic shall not only seal-in the trip
output(s),but also the relevant initiation signals to other scheme functions, (e.g.
initiate signals to the circuit breaker failure function, reclosing function etc.), and
the alarm output signals.
 Two methods of seal-in are required, one based on the measurement of AC current,
catering for those circumstances for which the interrupted current is above a set
threshold, and one based on a fixed time duration, catering for those circumstances
for which the interrupted current is small (below the set threshold).
 For the current seal-in method, the seal-in shall be maintained until the circuit
breaker opens, at which time the seal-in shall reset and the seal-in method shall not
now revert to the fixed time duration method. For this seal-in method, the sealing
shall be maintained for the set time duration. For the line protection schemes, this
time duration shall be independently settable for single- and three-pole tripping.
 Seal-in by way of current or by way of the fixed duration timer shall occur
irrespective of whether the trip command originates from within the main
protection device itself (from any of the internal protection functions), or from an
external device with its trip output routed through the main protection device for
tripping. Trip-circuit seal-in shall not take place under sub-harmonic conditions (e.g.
reactor ring down).
10.18.11 All protective relays and alarm relays shall be provided with one extra isolated pair of contacts
wired to terminals exclusively for future use.
10.18.12 The setting ranges of the relays offered, if different from the ones specified shall also be
acceptable if they meet the functional requirements.

Page 20 of 58
10.18.13 Any alternative/additional protections or relays considered necessary for providing complete
effective and reliable protection shall also be offered separately. The acceptance of this
alternative/ additional equipment shall lie with the NEA.
10.18.14 The bidder shall include in his bid a list of installations where the relays quoted have been in
satisfactory operation.
10.18.15 All relays and their drawings shall have phase indications as R-Red, Y-yellow, B-blue
10.18.16 For numerical relays, the scope shall include the following:
10.18.17 Necessary software and hardware to up/down load the data to/from the relay from/to the
personal computer installed in the substation. All relays to be wired up in LAN to
communicate the local PC.
10.18.18 The relay shall have suitable communication facility for future connectivity to SCADA. The
relay shall be capable of supporting IEC 870-5-103 and 61850-protocol.
10.18.19 All the auxiliary relays shall be modular and plug-in type. No deviation shall be allowed to this
clause.
10.19 TRANSMISSION LINE PROTECTION
10.19.1 The line protection relays are required to protect the line and clear the faults on line within
shortest possible time with reliability, selectivity and full sensitivity to all type of faults online.
10.19.2 The Transmission system for which the line protection equipment are required is shown in the
reference drawing/document(s). The length of lines and the line parameters (Electrical
Constants) shall be provided during detailed engineering.
10.19.3 The maximum fault current could be as high as 31.5 kA but the minimum fault current could
beas low as 20% of rated current of CT secondary. The starting & measuring relays
characteristics should be satisfactory under these extremely varying conditions.
10.19.4 The protective relays shall be suitable for use with voltage transformers having non-electronic
damping and transient response as per IEC.

Page 21 of 58
10.19.5 Disturbance Recorder, Fault Recorder and Distance to fault Locator functions shall be
provided, as an integral part of line protection relay shall be acceptable provided these meet
the technical requirements as specified in the respective clauses.
10.19.6 Auto reclose relay function if offered as an integral part of line distance protection relay, shall
be acceptable for 132kV lines, provided the auto reclose relay feature meets the technical
requirements as specified in the respective clause.
10.19.7 The following protections shall be provided for each of the Transmission lines:
For 132 kV TRANSMISSION LINE
 Main: In 132 kV line -Distance protection scheme.
 Back up: Directional Over Current and Earth fault protection scheme.
Carrier -inter tripping through OPGW shall also be provided with suitable equipment by the bidder.
10.19.8 The detailed description of the above line protections is given here under.
a. Main: Numerical, communicable Distance Protection scheme:
 Shall have continuous self-monitoring and diagnostic feature.
 Shall be non-switched type with separate measurements for all phase to phase and
phase to ground faults
 Shall have stepped time-distance characteristics and four independent zones (zone
1, zone-2, zone-3, Reverse Zone-4)
 Shall have mho or quadrilateral or other suitably shaped characteristics for zone-1,
zone-2 and zone- 3, Reverse zone).
 Shall have following maximum operating time (including carrier and trip relay time,
if any) under given set of conditions and with CVT being used on line (with all filters
included) at 50 % of Zone 1 reach
For SIR 0.01-4 40ms at nearest end and 60ms at remote end.

Page 22 of 58
For SIR 4 - 15 45ms at nearest end and 65ms at remote end.
(Carrier transmission line is taken as 20 ms and any reduction in carrier

transmission time should reflect in reduction of operating time.
 Line Protection for 132KV system for remote end tripping will be done through
OPGW.
 The relay shall have an adjustable characteristics angle setting range of 30 -85
degree or shall have independent resistance(R) and reactance (X) setting.
 Shall have two independent continuously variable time setting range of 0-3 seconds
for zone-2and 0-5 seconds for zone-3.
 Shall have resetting time of less than 55 milli-seconds (including the resetting time
of trip relays)
 Shall have facilities for offset features with adjustable 10-20% of Zone-3 setting.
 Shall have variable residual compensation.
 Shall have memory circuits with defined characteristics in all three phases to ensure
correct operation during close-up 3 phase faults and other adverse conditions and
shall operate instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to zero-volt 3 phase
fault
 Shall have weak end in-feed feature
 Shall be suitable for three phase tripping.
 Shall have a continuous current rating of two times of rated current. The voltage
circuit shall be capable of operation at 1.2 times rated voltage. The relay shall also
be capable of carrying a high short time current of 70 times rated current without
damage for a period of 1 sec.
 Shall be provided with necessary self reset type trip duty contacts for completion of
the scheme(Minimum number of these trip duty contacts shall be four per phase)

Page 23 of 58
either through built in or through separate high speed trip relays. Making capacity
of these trip contacts shall be 30 amp for 0.2 seconds with an inductive load of L/R >
10 mill seconds. If separate high speed trip relays are used, the operating time of
the same shall not be more than 10 milliseconds
 Shall be suitable for use in permissive under reach / over reach /blocking
communication mode.
 Shall have suitable number of potential free contacts for inter Tripping, Auto
reclosing, CB failure, Disturbance recorder & Data acquisition system.
 Include power swing blocking protection which shall
a. Have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection described above.
b. Block tripping during power swing conditions.
c. Release blocking in the event of actual fault.
 Include fuse failure protection which shall monitor all the three fuses of CVT and
associated cable against open circuit.
a. Inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation.
b. Have an operating time less than 7 milliseconds
c. Remain inoperative for system earth faults
 The Relay shall have in built feature of broken conductor detection.
 Must have a current reversal guard feature.
10.20 LINE OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION FOR 132 kV
10.21.1 Monitor all three phases.
10.21.2 Have two independent stages and stage-I & II relay are acceptable as built in with line distance
relay.

Page 24 of 58
10.21.3 Have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage with an adjustable time delay
range of 1 to 60 seconds for the first stage.
10.21.4 Have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage with a time delay of 100-200
mill seconds for the second stage.
10.21.5 Be tuned to power frequency.
10.21.6 Provided with separate operation indicators (flag target) for each stage relays.
10.21.7 Have a drop-off to pick-up ratio greater than 95%
10.21.8 Provide separate out-put contacts for each ‘Phase’ and stage for breaker trip relays, event
logger and other scheme requirement.
10.21.9 Acceptable as a Built in function of Distance Protection Numerical Relay provided all the
above clauses are met.
10.21 BACK-UP DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT AND EARTH FAULT PROTECTION SCHEME IN 132 KV
TRANSMISSION LINE
10.21.1 Shall have three over current and one earth fault element(s) which shall be either
independent or composite unit.
10.21.2 Shall be of Numerical type
10.21.3 Shall include necessary CVT fuse failure relays for alarm purposes.
10.21.4 Over current shall
i. Have DMT feature
ii. Have IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times
setting
iii. Have a variable setting range of 50-200% of rated current
iv. Have a characteristic angle of 30/45 degree lead
v. Include hand reset flag indicators or IEDs.

Page 25 of 58
10.21.5 Earth fault relay shall
i. Have DMT feature
ii. Have IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times
setting
iii. Have a variable setting range of 20-80% of rated current
iv. Have a characteristic angle of 45/60 degree lag
v. Include hand reset flag indicators or IEDs.
vi. Include necessary separate interposing voltage transformers or have internal

feature in there lay for open delta voltage to the relay.
10.22 33 KV LINE PROTECTION
Non directional IDMT and Earth Fault Protection for 33 kV line feeders shall have 3 over current
and one earth fault element each.
10.23 CIRCUIT BREAKER PROTECTION FOR 132 KV
This shall include following function:
10.23.1 AUTO RECLOSING shall be of numerical type and shall
i. Have three phase reclosing facilities for 132 kV lines.
ii. Have a continuously variable three phase dead time range of 0.1-2 seconds.
iii. Have a continuously variable reclaim time range of 5-25 seconds.
10.23.2 SYNCHRO CHECK
i. Have facilities for selecting check synchronizing or dead line charging features. It shall
be possible at any time to change the required feature by reconnection of links.
ii. Be of single shot type.
iii. Shall be acceptable as built in with line Bay Control Unit (BCU) provided for
substation automation system.

Page 26 of 58
iv. Shall have priority circuit for closing
10.23.3 LOCAL BREAKER BACK-UP PROTECTION SCHEME shall
i. Be provided on 132 kV.
ii. Be triple pole type.
iii. Have an operating time of less than 15 milli seconds
iv. Have a resetting time of less than 15 milli seconds
v. Have three over current elements,
vi. Have a setting range of 20-80% of rated current
vii. Have a continuous thermal withstand two times rated current irrespective of the
setting
viii. Have a timer with continuously adjustable setting range of 0.1-1 seconds
ix. Have necessary auxiliary relays to make a comprehensive scheme.
x. Be arranged to get individual initiation from the corresponding phase of main

protections of line for each over current element. However, common three phase
initiation is acceptable for other protections and transformer equipment protections.
xi. Acceptable as built in feature of Busbar Protection relay is acceptable provided the
requirements of above clauses are met
10.24 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION
All transformer protection functions may be grouped into Group-I and Group-II protections in
the following manner:
Following protection functions may be provided in HV Transformer protection relay:
a) Differential Protection as per clause no. 10.24.2
b) LV REF Protection as per clause no. 10.24.4
c) Over fluxing Protection for HV side as per clause no. 10.24.3

Page 27 of 58
d) Over Load Protection as per clause no. 10.24.6
e) Non-Direction Over current and earth fault protection with non-directional high Set
Feature for HV side as per clause no. 10.24.4
f) Neutral Current Relay for Single Phase Transformer Bank 10.24.7
g) Buchholz /OLTC Buchholz alarm / trip
h) WTI/OTI/PRD alarm/trip of transformer
Following protection functions may be provided in LV Transformer protection relay:
a) Non Direction Over current and earth fault protection as per clause no. 10.24.4
b) LV REF Protection as per clause no. 10.24.4
10.24.1 Transformer Auxiliary protection contacts (Bucholz, PRV, Oil temperature, Winding
temperature, OLTC Bucholz can be wired suitably in the above protections and provide
separate Flag relays/Auxiliary Relays.
i. Numerical Transformer differential protection scheme shall Be triple pole type, with
faulty phase identification/ indication
ii. Have an operating time not greater than 30 milli seconds at 5 times the rated current
iii. Have three instantaneous high set over-current units
iv. Have an adjustable bias setting range of 20-50%
v. Be suitable for rated current of 1 Amp.
vi. Have second harmonic or other inrush proof features and also should be stable under
normal over fluxing conditions. Magnetizing inrush proof feature shall not be
achieved through any intentional time delay e.g. use of timers to block relay
operation or using disc operated relays
vii. Have an operating current setting of 15% or less

Page 28 of 58
viii. Include necessary separate interposing current transformers for angle and ratio
correction or have internal feature in the relay to take care of the angle & ratio
correction
ix. Have a fault recording feature to record graphic form of instantaneous values of
current in all three windings in 6 analogue channels for voltage transformers, during
faults and disturbances for the pre fault and post fault period. The fault recorder shall
have the facility to record the following external digital channel signals apart from the
digital signals pertaining to differential relay.
 HV breaker status
 LV breaker status
 Buchholz /OLTC Buchholz alarm / trip
 WTI/OTI/PRD alarm/trip of transformer
Necessary hardware and software for down loading the data captured by disturbance recorder
to the personal computer available in the substation shall be included in the scope.
10.24.2 Over fluxing protection Relays shall
i. Operate on the principle of Voltage to frequency ratio and shall be phase to phase
connected
ii. Have inverse time characteristics, matching with transformer over fluxing withstand
capability curve.
iii. Provide an independent 'alarm' with the time delay continuously adjustable between
0.1 to 6.0 seconds at values of 'v/f' between 100% to 130% of rated values
iv. Tripping time shall be governed by 'v/f' Vs. time characteristics of the relay
v. Have a set of characteristics for various time multiplier settings. The maximum
operating time of the relay shall not exceed 3 seconds and 1.5 seconds at 'v/f' values
of 1.4 and 1.5 times, the rated values, respectively.

Page 29 of 58
vi. Have an accuracy of operating time, better than +10%.
vii. Have a resetting ratio of 95 % or better.
viii. Be acceptable as a built in feature of numerical transformer differential relay.
10.24.3 Numerical Restricted Earth Fault Protection shall
i. Be single pole type
ii. Be of current/voltage operated high impedance type
iii. Have a current setting range of 10-40% of 1 Amp./ have a suitable voltage setting
range.
iv. Be tuned to the system frequency
v. Be used for HV and LV winding.
vi. Built in feature of Numerical Differential Protection Relay/Non directional Over

current Relay is acceptable provided the requirements of above clauses are met.
10.24.4 Numerical Non-Directional Back-up Over Current and Earth fault protection scheme with
high set feature
i. Shall have three over current and one earth fault element(s) which shall be either
independent or composite unit(s).
ii. The scheme shall include necessary VT fuse failure relays for alarm purposes
iii. Over current relay shall
 Have IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10times
setting and have a variable setting range of 50-200% of rated current
 Have low transient, over reach high set instantaneous unit of continuously variable
setting range 500%-2000 % i.e. 5 to 20 times of rated current
 Have a characteristic angle of 30/45 degree lead
 Include hand reset flag indicators or IEDs.

Page 30 of 58
iv. Earth fault relay shall
 Have IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10times
setting and have a variable setting range of 20-80% of rated current.
 Have low transient, over reach high set instantaneous unit of continuously variable
setting range 500%-2000 % i.e 5 to 20 times of rated current.
 Have a characteristic angle of 45/60 degree lag
 Include hand reset flag indicators or IEDs.
 Include necessary separate interposing voltage transformers or have internal

feature in the relay for open delta voltage to the relay.
x. Have a fault recording feature to record graphic form of instantaneous values of

current in all three windings in 6 analogue channels for voltage transformers, during
faults and disturbances for the pre fault and post fault period. The fault recorder shall
have the facility to record the following external digital channel signals apart from the
digital signals pertaining to Numerical Over current Relay.
 HV breaker status
 LV breaker status
 Buchholz /OLTC Buchholz alarm / trip
 WTI/OTI/PRD alarm/trip of transformer
10.24.5 Transformer Overload Protection Relay shall
i. Be of single pole type
ii. Be of definite time over-current type
iii. Have one set of over-current relay element, with continuously adjustable setting
range of 50%-200% of rated current

Page 31 of 58
iv. Have one adjustable time delay relay for alarm having setting range of 1 to 10.0
seconds, continuously.
v. Have a drop-off/pick-up ratio greater than 95%.
vi. Be acceptable as built in feature of numerical transformer differential relay
10.24.6 Transformer Neutral Current Protection relay (for 1-Phase transformer bank neutral) shall
have directional IDMT characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at 10 times
setting and have a variable setting range of 20-80% of rated current.
10.24.7 The Station Transformer 33/0.4 kV shall have Non Directional Over Current protection.
10.24.8 Further, Transformer auxiliary protections contacts (Buchholz, PRV, Oil Temperature,
Winding Temperature, OLTC Buchholz etc.) can be wired suitably in above protections or
provide separate Flag relays/Auxiliary relays as per scheme requirements.
10.25 TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY (Circuit breaker protection)
10.25.1 The relay shall be capable of monitoring the healthiness of each 'phase' trip-coil and
associated circuit of circuit breaker during 'ON' and 'OFF' conditions.
10.25.2 The relay shall have adequate contacts for providing connection to alarm and event logger.
10.25.3 The relay shall have time delay on drop-off of not less than 200 milli seconds and be provided
with operation indications for each phase.
10.26 TRIPPING RELAY
10.26.1 High Speed Tripping Relay shall be instantaneous (operating time not to exceed 10 milli-
seconds).
10.26.2 Reset within 20 milli seconds
10.26.3 Be D.C. operated
10.26.4 Have adequate contacts to meet the requirement of scheme, other functions like auto-reclose
relay, LBB relay as well as cater to associated equipment like event logger, Disturbance
recorder, fault Locator, etc.

Page 32 of 58
10.26.5 Be provided with operation indicators for each element/coil.
10.27 DC SUPPLY SUPERIVISION RELAY
10.27.1 The relay shall be capable of monitoring the failure of D.C. supply to which, it is connected.
10.27.2 It shall have adequate potential free contacts to meet the scheme requirement.
10.27.3 The relay shall have a 'time delay on drop-off' of not less than 100 milli seconds and be
provided with operation indicator/flag.
10.28 BUS BAR PROTECTION FOR 132 KV
10.28.1 The bus bar scheme shall be Double Bus Single breaker with by-pass isolator scheme.
10.28.2 Single Static Busbar Differential protection scheme shall be provided for each main bus for
132 kV voltage levels. The busbar protection should be designed according to Double Bus Single
breaker with by-pass isolator scheme.
10.28.3 Bus bar protection for each busbar shall incorporate a main protection and check feature.
10.28.4 Each Bus Bar protection scheme shall
i. Have maximum operating time up to trip impulse to trip relay for all types of faults of
25 milliseconds at 5 times setting value.
ii. Operate selectively for each bus bar
iii. Give hundred percent security up to 31.5 KA fault level for 132kV.Incorporate
continuous supervision for CT secondary against any possible open circuit and if it
occurs, shall render the relevant zone of protection inoperative and initiate an alarm.
iv. Not give false operation during normal load flow in bus bars.
v. Incorporate clear zone indication.
vi. Be of phase segregated and triple pole type
vii. Provide independent zones of protection.
viii. Include individual high speed electrically reset tripping relays for each feeder

Page 33 of 58
ix. Be transient free in operation
x. Include continuous D.C. supplies supervision.
xi. Not cause tripping for the differential current below the load current of heaviest
loaded feeder.
Contractor shall submit application check for the same.
xii. Shall include necessary C.T. switching relays wherever C.T. switching is involved and
have 'CT' selection incomplete alarm
xiii. Include protection 'IN/OUT' switch for each zone.
xiv. Shall include trip relays, CT switching relays (if applicable), auxiliary CTs (if applicable)
as well as additional power supply modules, input modules etc. as may be required to
provide a Bus-bar protection scheme for the complete bus arrangement i.e. for all the
bay or breaker sunder this specification as well as for the future bays as per the Single
line diagram of the substations.
Suitable panels to mount these in switchyard are also included in the scope of the work.
xv. Shall incorporate continuous supervision for CT secondaries and shall render the
relevant zones of protection in operative against possible open circuit and protection
transferred to check zone only.
10.28.5 Built-in Local Breaker Backup protection feature as a part of bus bar protection scheme shall
also be acceptable.
10.28.6 The test terminal blocks (TTB) to be provided shall be fully enclosed with removable covers
and made of moulded, non-inflammable plastic material with boxes and barriers moulded
integrally. All terminals shall be clearly marked with identification numbers or letters to
facilitate connection to external wiring. Terminal block shall have shorting, disconnecting and
testing facilities for CT circuits.

Page 34 of 58
10.29 FAULT RECORDER
The Fault recorder shall be provided for the transmission line and the fault recorder as in-built
feature of line distance relay is also acceptable provided the requirements of following clauses
are met.
10.29.1 Fault recorder shall be microprocessor based and shall be used to record the graphic form of
instantaneous values of voltage and current in all three phases, open delta voltage & neutral
current, open or closed position of relay contacts and breakers during the system
disturbances and built in feature of line distance relay is acceptable provided the
requirements of following clauses are met
10.29.2 The fault recorder shall consist of individual acquisition units, one for each feeder and an
Evaluation unit, which is common for the entire Substation. Whenever, more than one
acquisition units are connected to an Evaluation unit, necessary hardware and software shall
also be supplied for on line transfer of data from all acquisition units to Evaluation unit. If
there are any constraints for one Evaluation unit to accept the data from number of
acquisition units under the present scope, adequate number of Evaluation units shall be
supplied. In case of extension of existing substation(s), one set of Evaluation unit shall be
supplied for each substation where ever Fault recorders are specified.
10.29.3 Fault recorder shall have 8 analog and 16 digital channels for each feeder.
10.29.4 Acquisition units shall acquire the fault data for the pre fault and post fault period and
transfer them to Evaluation unit automatically to store in the hard disk. The acquisition units
shall be located in the protection panels of the respective feeders.
10.29.5 The acquisition unit shall be suitable for inputs from current transformers with 1A rated
secondary and voltage transformers with 63.5V (phase to neutral voltage) rated secondary.
Any device required for processing of input signals in order to make the signals compatible to
the Fault recorder equipment shall form an integral part of it. However, such processing of
input signals shall in no way distort its waveform.

Page 35 of 58
10.29.6 The equipment shall be carefully screened, shielded, earthed and protected as may be
required for its safe functioning. Also, the Fault recorder shall have stable software, reliable
hardware, simplicity of maintenance and immunity from the effects of the hostile
environment of EHV switchyard which are prone to various interference signals typically from
large switching transients.
10.29.7 The Evaluation unit shall consist of a desktop personal computer (including LED Display,
mouse and keyboard) and printer. The desktop PC shall have Intel –i5 5th generation
processor or better and having a clock speed 2.2GHZwith Turbo Boost to 2.7 GHZ or better.
The hard disk capacity of PC shall not be less than 1 TB and RAM capacity shall not be less
than 8 GB.
10.29.8 Necessary software for transferring the data automatically from local evaluation unit to a
remote station and receiving the same at the remote station through Employer’s optic\
fibre/VSAT/LEASED LINE shall be provided.
10.29.9 Evaluation software shall be provided for the analysis and evaluation of the recorded data
made available in the PC under WINDOWS environment. The Software features shall include
repositioning of analog and digital signals, selection and amplification of time and amplitude
scales of each analog and digital channel, calculation of MAX/MIN frequency, phase difference
values, recording of MAX/MIN values etc. of analog channel, group of signal to be drawn on
the same axis etc, listing and numbering of all analog and digital channels and current,
voltage, frequency and phase difference values at the time of fault/tripping. Also, the
software should be capable of carrying out Fourier /Harmonic analysis of the current and
voltage wave forms. The Fault records shall also be available in COMTRADE format (IEEE
standard- Common Format for Transient data Exchange for Power System)
10.29.10 The Evaluation unit shall be connected to the printer to obtain the graphic form of
disturbances whenever desired by the operator.
10.29.11 Fault recorder acquisition units shall be suitable to operate from 110 V DC / 220V DC as
available at substation Evaluation unit along with the printer shall normally be connected to

Page 36 of 58
220V, single phase AC supply. In case of failure of AC supply, Evaluation unit and printer shall
be switched automatically to the station DC through Inverter of adequate capacity which shall
form a part of Fault recorder system.
10.29.12 The acquisition unit shall have the following features:
i. Facility shall exist to alarm operator in case of any internal faults in the acquisition
units such as power supply fail, processor / memory fail etc and same shall be wired
to annunciation system.
ii. The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side and 250 Hz or better on upper
side.
iii. Scan rate shall be 1000 Hz/channel or better.
iv. Pre-fault time shall not be less than 100 milliseconds and the post fault time shall not
be less than 2 seconds (adjustable). If another system disturbance occurs during one
post-fault runtime, the recorder shall also be able to record the same. However, the
total memory of acquisition unit shall not be less than 5.0 seconds
v. The open delta voltage and neutral current shall be derived either through software
or externally by providing necessary auxiliary transformers.
vi. The acquisition unit shall be typically used to record the following digital channels but
not limited to:
 Main CB R phase open
 Main CB Y phase open
 Main CB B phase open
 Inter trip received
 Main Protection operated
 Main Auto reclosed operated

Page 37 of 58
 Over Voltage stage 1 /2 operated
 Direct Trip received
 Back Up protection operated
 Bus bar protection operated
 LBB operated of main circuit breaker
 Bus Coupler Circuit Breaker Open Status
vii. In case the Fault recorder is in-built part of line distance protection, above digital
channels maybe interfaced either externally or internally.
viii. Any digital signal can be programmed to act as trigger for the acquisition unit. Analog
channels should have programmable threshold levels for triggers and selection for
over or under levels should be possible.
10.29.13 The Colour Laser printer shall be compatible with the desktop PC and shall use Plain paper.
The print out shall contain the Feeder identity, Date and time (in hour, minute and second up
to 100th of a second), identity of trigger source and Graphic form of analog and digital signals
of all the channels. Two packets of Z-fold paper (500 sheets in each packet) suitable for
printer shall be supplied.
10.29.14 Each Fault recorder shall have its own time generator and the clock of the time generator
shall be such that the drift is limited to +0.5 seconds/day, if allowed to run without
synchronisation Further, Fault recorder shall have facility to synchronise its time generator
from Time Synchronisation Equipment complint with IEC 61850 communication standard
having output in SNTP format The recorder shall give annunciation in case of absence of
synchronizing within a specified time.
10.29.15 Substations where Time Synchronisation Equipment is not available, time generator of
anyone of the Fault recorders can be taken as master and time generators of other Fault
recorders and Event loggers in that station shall be synchronized to follow the master.

Page 38 of 58
10.30 DISTANCE TO FAULT LOCATOR
It shall have the following features:
10.30.1 Be electronic or microprocessor based type.
10.30.2 Be 'On-line' type
10.30.3 Be suitable for breaker operating time of 2 cycles
10.30.4 Have built-in display unit
10.30.5 The display shall be directly in percent of line length or kilometres without requiring any
further calculations
10.30.6 Have an accuracy of 3% or better for the typical conditions defined for operating timings
measurement of distance relays.
10.30.7 The above accuracy should not be impaired under the following conditions:
 Presence of remote end infeed
 Predominant D.C. component in fault current
 High fault arc resistance
 Severe CVT transients
10.30.8 Shall have mutual zero sequence compensation unit if fault locator is to be used on double
circuit transmission line.
10.30.9 Built in feature of line distance relay is acceptable provided the requirements of above
clauses are met
10.31 TIME SYNCHRONISATION EQUPMENT
10.31.1 The Time synchronisation equipment shall receive the co-ordinated Universal Time
(UTC)transmitted through Geo Positioning Satellite System (GPS) and synchronise
equipments to the Nepal Standard Time in a substation.

Page 39 of 58
10.31.2 Time synchronisation equipment shall include antenna, all special cables and processing
equipment etc.
10.31.3 It shall be compatible for synchronisation of Event Loggers, Disturbance recorders and
SCADA at a substation through individual port or through Ethernet realised through optic
fibre bus.
10.31.4 Equipment shall operate up to the ambient temperature of 50 degree centigrade and
100%humidity.
10.31.5 The synchronisation equipment shall have 2micro second accuracy. Equipment shall give real
time corresponding to IST (taking into consideration all factors like voltage, & temperature
variations, propagation & processing delays etc).
10.31.6 Equipment shall meet the requirement of IEC 60255 for storage & operation.
10.31.7 The system shall be able to track the satellites to ensure no interruption of synchronization
signal.
10.31.8 The output signal from each port shall be programmable at site for either one hour, half
hour, minute or second pulse, as per requirement.
10.31.9 The equipment offered shall have six (6) output ports. Various combinations of output ports
shall be selected by the customer, during detailed engineering, from the following:
 Voltage signal: Normally 0-5V with 50 milli Seconds minimum pulse duration. In
case any other voltage signal required, it shall be decided during detailed
engineering.
 Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 milli Seconds.)
 IRIG-B
 RS232C
10.31.10 The equipment shall have a periodic time correction facility of one second periodicity.

Page 40 of 58
10.31.11 Time synchronisation equipment shall be suitable to operate from 220V DC or 110V DC as
available at Substation.
10.31.12 Equipment shall have real time digital display in hour, minute, second (24 hour mode) &
have a separate time display unit
10.32 RELAY TEST KIT
10.32.1 One relay test kit shall comprise of the following equipment as detailed here under
1 sets Relay tools kits
1 nos. Test plugs
1 no. Special type test plugs for using with modular type cases (if applicable)
10.33 TYPE TESTS
10.33.1 The reports for following type tests shall be submitted by the bidder for the Protective relays,
Fault locator, Disturbance recorder and Event Logger
i. Insulation tests as per IEC 60255-5
ii. High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 60255-4 (Appendix -E) -Class III (not
applicable for electromechanical relays)
iii. Fast transient test as per IEC 1000-4, Level III(not applicable for electromechanical
relays)
iv. Relay characteristics, performance and accuracy test as per IEC 60255
 Steady state Characteristics and operating time
 Dynamic Characteristics and operating time for distance protection relays and
current differential protection relays
 For Disturbance recorder and Event logger only performance tests are intended
under this item.

Page 41 of 58
v. Tests for thermal and mechanical requirements as per IEC 60255-6
vi. Tests for rated burden as per IEC 60255-6
vii. Contact performance test as per IEC 60255-0-20 (not applicable for Event logger,
Distance to fault locator and Disturbance recorder)
10.33.2 Steady state & Dynamic characteristics test reports on the distance protection relays, as type
test, shall be based on test programme on simulator/network analyzer / PTL. Alternatively, the
files generated using Electromagnetic transient Programme (EMTP) can also be used for
carrying out the above tests. Single source dynamic tests on transformer differential relay shall
be/ should have been conducted based on general guidelines specified in CIGRE committee 34
reports on Evaluation of characteristics and performance of Power system protection relays
and protective systems.
10.34 CONFIGURATION OF CONTROL AND PROTECTION PANELS
The following is the general criteria for the selection of the equipments to be provided in each
type of panel. However, contractor can optimise the requirement of panels by suitably
clubbing the feeder protection and CB relay panels. It may be noted that Main-I and Main-II
protections for line cannot be provided in single panel. Similarly, Group-I & Group-II
protections for transformer cannot be provided in single panel.
10.34.1 CONTROL PANEL
Various types of control panels shall consist of the following
Sno Device Quantity

1 Bay Control Unit 1 no.
2 Multifunction meter with 0.2 1 no each for line and transformer bays
Class Accuracy With RS 485, RS
232 & Front Optical port)
3 Energy Meter with 0.2 Class 1 no each for line bay
Accuracy With RS 485, RS 232 &

Page 42 of 58
Front Optical port)

4 Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
5 Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolator
6 Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
7 Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolator
8 White indicating lamp (DC 2 nos for each feeder
healthy lamp)
9 Annunciation windows with 18 nos for each feeder
associated annunciation relays
10 Push button for alarm 3 nos for each control panel
Accept/reset/lamp test
11 Test Blocks for Energy Meter 1no in each line bay
12 Test Blocks for Multifunction 1 no in each line bay and transformer bays
meter
13 DC Change over relay 1 no
14 Local/Remote selector switch 1 no
15 Breaker Control Switch 1 no
16 Isolator Control Switch 1 NO each for isolator
17 CB close multiplication relay 1 no
18 CB Trip multiplication relay 1 no as per scheme requirement
19 DC Supervision relays 2 nos
20 Trip Circuit Supervision relays 2 nos
21 Any other item required for 1 lot
successful completion of the
scheme

Page 43 of 58
Notes:
1 The above list of equipments mentioned for control panel is generally applicable unless it is
defined elsewhere and in case of bay extension in existing substations, necessary equipments
for matching the existing control panel shall be supplied.
2 Common synchronising switch is also acceptable in Synchronising trolley for new Substations.
In this case individual synchronising selector switch is not required for each Circuit Breaker in
control panel.
3 Each line /HV side of transformer/ LV side of transformer /Bus reactor /TBC /BC/ Bus Section
shall be considered as one feeder for above purpose.
10.34.2 Configuration Of Relay And Protection Panels
The following is the general criteria for the selection of the equipments to be provided in each
type of panel.
A. LINE PROTECTION PANEL
The Line Protection panel for transmission lines shall consist of following relays and protection
schemes
S.No Description 132kV line

1. Main Numerical Distance Protection scheme. 1 set
2. Over Voltage Relay 1 set/Built in Distance
Protection Relay
3. 3 phase high speed trip relays 3 nos
4. 1 phase high speed self-reset trip relays 3 Nos
5. Trip Transfer Relays 2 Nos
6. Flag relays , carrier receive As required (Lot)
relays ,aux. Relays timers etc as per scheme requirements
7. Under voltage relay for 2 Nos
isolator /earth switch

Page 44 of 58
8. Directional back up Over current and E/F Protection 1 Set

scheme
9. Fault Recorder and Disturbance to Fault Recorder Built in Distance
Protection Relay
10. Busbar Protection bay units 2 Nos
11. Test Terminal Blocks 1 No each for Numerical
Relay/as per scheme
requirements
12. Tele-protection On/OFF Switch 1 No.
13. Overvoltage protection Built in Distance
Protection Relay
14. Distance To Fault Locator Built in Distance
Protection Relay
15. Auto Reclose Built in Distance
Protection Relay
16. Power Swing Block Built in Distance
Protection Relay
17. Switch On to Fault Built in Distance
Protection Relay
18. STUB Protection Built in Distance
Protection Relay
19. CVT Selection Relay as per scheme requirement 1 No
20. Any other item required for successful completion of the 1 lot
scheme
B. 33 KV LINE CONTROL & PROTECTION PANEL
S.No Description Quantity

Page 45 of 58
1. Bay Control & Protection Unit 1 no.

2. Numerical Non Directional Over Current and Earth Fault 1 no/Built in Bay
Relay 1No.with High Set Feature and in built LBB protection Control &
(as part of BCU is acceptable) Protection Unit
3. Energy Meter with 0.2 Class Accuracy With RS 485, RS 232 & 1 no
Front Optical port)
4. Master Trip Relay with adequate no of contacts 1 No. and 1 no.
Electrical Resettable type.
5. CB Troubles and Alarm (Part of BCU) 1 Set
6. Metering (part of BCU) 1 Set
7. DC supply supervision relay 2 nos.
8. Trip circuit supervision relays 2 nos.
9. Emergency CB TNC Switches 1 no
10. Flag relays, aux. relays, timers, trip relays etc. As per scheme Lot
requirements.
(Acceptable as part of BCU)
11. Any other item required for successful completion of the 1 lot
scheme
C. TRANSFORMER PROTECTION PANEL (132/33 kV)
Each protection panel for Transformer shall consist of the following equipments:
S.No Description HV LV
1. Transformer Differential protection scheme 1 set Not Required
2. Over fluxing protection scheme 1 Set/Built in Not Required

Transformer
Differential

Page 46 of 58
protection
Relay
3. Non Directional back-up O/C & E/F 1 Set 1 Set
protection with high Set (Part of BCPU is
acceptable)
4. Over load protection scheme 1 no./ Built in Not Required
Transformer
Differential
protection
Relay
5. Restricted Earth fault protection scheme 1 no./ Built in 1no.
Transformer
Differential
protection
Relay
6. Three phase trip relays 3 nos. 3 nos.

7. Trip Transfer Relays 2 Nos -
8. CVT selection relay as per scheme Lot Lot
requirement
9. Flag relays ,aux .relays , timers etc as per As required As required (Lot)
scheme relay requirements including (Lot)
transformer alarms and trip functions
10. Fault Recorder 1 no/ Built in Not Required
Numerical
Relay
11. Transformer Neutral Current relay for 1- 1 Set

Page 47 of 58
Phase transformer bank

12. Test Terminal Blocks 1 No each for 1 No each for
Numerical Numerical Relay/as
Relay/as per per scheme
scheme requirements
requirements
13. Any other item required for successful 1 lot Any other item
completion of the scheme required for
successful
completion of the
scheme
D. BUS COUPLER PROTECTION PANEL (for 132 kV Voltage level)
Each Bus coupler panel shall consist of the following:
S.No Description 132 kV
1. Non-Directional back up over current 1 Set

and E/F Relay with non-directional high
set
2. Local Breaker Back up Protection 1 Set/As built in Numerical
Overcurrent Relay
Three phase trip relays 3no.
3. Bay Control Unit 1 No
4. Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
5. Red indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolator
6. Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each Circuit breaker
7. Green indicating lamp 1 no. for each isolator
8. White indicating lamp (DC healthy 2 nos for each feeder

Page 48 of 58
lamp)
9. Annunciation windows with associated 18 nos for each feeder
annunciation relays
10. Push button for alarm 3 nos for each control panel
Accept/reset/lamp test
11. DC Change over relay 1 no
12. Local/Remote selector switch 1 no
13. Breaker Control Switch 1 no
14. Isolator control Switch 1 No each for isolator
15. CB close multiplication relay 1 no
16. CB Trip multiplication relay 1 no as per scheme requirement
17. DC Supervision relays 2 nos
18. Trip Circuit Supervision relays 2 nos
19. Any other item required for successful 1 lot
completion of the scheme
20. Flag relays, aux. relays, timers, trip Lot
relays etc. As per scheme
requirements.
(Acceptable as part of BCU)
E. BUS BAR PROTECTION PANEL (132 kV Voltage level)
The Bus bar protection panel shall consist of the following:
S.No Description 132 kV
1. Complete Bus bar Protection scheme as per 1 set*

Chapter 10 Clause 10.27
*Indicates Two Bus bar Protection Panels, one each for one bus.

Page 49 of 58
10.35 ERECTION AND MAINTENANCE TOOL EQUIPMENTS
All special testing equipment required for the installation and maintenance of the apparatus,
Instruments devices shall be furnished in relevant schedule.
10.36 TROPICALISATION
Control room will be normally air-cooled/air- conditioned. All equipments shall however be
suitable for installation in a tropical monsoon area having hot, humid climate and dry and
dusty seasons with ambient conditions specified in the specification. All control wiring,
equipment and accessories shall be protected against fungus growth, condensation, vermin
and other harmful effects due to tropical environment.
10.37 FALSE PANELS:
While panning the Control and Relay panel in the control room building it may so happen that
a few panels may get located on the floor beam, where it shall not be possible to provide
opening in the floor slab for cable entry in to the panel, as such locations false panels made
with similar material and manner as main control and relay panels but without having any
equipment or wiring inside. This is to ensure continuous placement of panels one after the
other having a aesthetic look in the control room.
10.38 BAY MARSHALLING KIOSKS
 The Bay marshalling kiosks high quality thermo plastic enclosure having IP-66/67 protection
shall be supplied by the successful bidder. These kiosks should have following properties.
 Very high impact resistance.
 High IP rating (IP 66/67) (Dust and jet water proof)
 Wide operating temperature (-40 to 120 degree Celsius)
 UV resistance
 Self-extinguishing flame retardant

Page 50 of 58
 Non-Toxic (Halogen Free)
 Good resistance to chemical and rust proof
 Light weight
 Totally electrical insulated.
 Easy machining with normal tools.
 Cable entry through IP 66 glands of various sizes and flexible conduit entry.
10.39 PROTECTION COUPLER: ( Not Applicable)
 One nos of Digital Protection Coupler shall be used at Dhunge sangu substation for
Teleprotection Applications.
 Each DPC shall be equipped with 4 commands and all accessories, cabling etc required to
interface with SDH/MUX telecommunication terminal equipment for its commissioning is in
present scope of contract. The specification for the digital protection coupler shall be as per
Appendix I.
10.40 ENERGY METER:
 One number each Energy meter for the record and revenue purpose is to be provided for
each 132/33kV bays (Transformer, Bus coupler bays to be excluded) at Dhunge sangu
substation under present scope of contract, meeting the requirement as specified at
Appendix-II.

Page 51 of 58
PENDIX-I
SPECIFICATION FOR DIGITIAL PROTECTION COUPLER
1.0 Digital protection coupler for protection signalling through optical fibre cable system.
1.1 The Digital protection signalling equipment is required to transfer the trip commands from
one end of the line to the other end in the shortest possible time with adequate security and
dependability. It shall also monitor the healthiness of the link from one end to the other and
give alarms in case of any abnormality. The protection signalling equipment shall have a
proven operating record in similar application over EHV systems and shall operate on 48V DC
(+10%, -10%). It shall provide minimum four commands. These commands shall be suitable for
direct tripping, Intertripping and Blocking protection schemes of EHV lines.
The protection signalling equipment shall communicate to the remote end interfacing with
SDH terminal equipment at its 2Mbps port. It shall provide suitable interfaces for protective
relays, which operate at 220/110V DC. Power supply points shall be immune to
electromagnetic interface.
1.2 Principle of operation
During normal operation, protection signalling equipment shall transmit a guard signal/code.
In case Protection signalling equipment is actuated by protective relays for transmission of
commands, it shall interrupt the guard signal/code and shall transmit the command code to
the remote end. The receiver shall recognize the command code and absence of the guard
code and will generate the command to the protective relays.
All signal processing i.e. generation of tripping signal and the evaluation of the signals being
received shall be performed completely digital using Digital Signal Processing techniques.
1.3 Loop testing
An automatic loop testing routine shall check the teleprotection channel.
It shall also be possible to initiate a loop test manually at any station by pressing a button on
the front of the equipment.

Page 52 of 58
Internal test routine shall continuously monitor the availability of the protection signaling
equipment.
Proper tripping signal shall always take the priority over the test procedure.
The high speed digital protection signalling equipment shall be designed and provided with
following features.
● Shall work in conjunction with SDH terminal equipment.
● It shall communicate on G 703 (E1,2 Mbps)
● Full Duplex operation
● Auto loop facility shall be provided
● Shall meet IEC 60834-1 standard
● Shall be able to transmit upto 4commands with trip counter simultaneously or

sequentially in one 2Mbps channel
Bidder shall quote for protection signalling equipment suitable for 4 commands with separate
trip counters for transmit and receive. With regard to trip counters alternate arrangement .i.e.
Laptop along with software & all accessories to download events including carrier receipt and
transmit shall be acceptable. Laptop for the above shall be supplied at each substation under
substation package.
High security and dependability shall be ensured by the manufacturer. Probability of false
tripping and failure to trip shall be minimum. Statistical curves/figures indicating above
mentioned measures shall be submitted along with the bid.
The DPC can be either housed in offered Control & Protection Panel / PLCC Panel or in
separate panel.
Reports of the following tests as per clause 9.2 of Chapter 2-GTR shall be submitted for
approval for protection signalling equipment and relays associated with the protection
signalling equipment and interface unit with protective relay units, if any.

Page 53 of 58
i) General equipment interface tests :
a) Insulated voltage withstand tests
b) Damped oscillatory waves disturbance test
c) Fast transient bursts disturbance test
d) Electrostatic discharge disturbance test
e) Radiated electromagnetic field test
f) RF disturbance emission test
ii) Specific power supply tests
a) Power supply variations
b) Interruptions
c) LF disturbance emission
d) Reverse polarity
iii) Tele-protection system performance tests
a) Security
b) Dependability
c) Jitter
d) Recovery time
e) Transmission time
f) Alarm functions
g) Temperature and Humidity tests (As per IEC 68-2)
- Dry heat test (50°C for 8 hours)
- Low temperature test (-5°C for 8 hours)

Page 54 of 58
- Damp heat test (40°C/95%RH for 8 hours)
All the above tests at i, ii & iii (except temperature & humidity tests) shall be as per IEC
60834-1 and the standards mentioned therein.
iv) Relays
a) Impulse voltage withstand test as per IEC 60255.
b) High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 60255.
The protection signalling equipment shall be of modular construction and preferably mounted
in the Relay panels. Cabling between the protection signalling equipment & Protection relays
and between protection signalling equipment & Communication equipment shall be in the
scope of bidder.
The input/output interface to the protection equipment shall be achieved by means of relays
and the input/output rack wiring shall be carefully segregated from other shelf/cubicle wiring.
The isolation requirements of the protection interface shall be for 2kV rms.
1.4 Major technical Particulars
The major technical particulars of protection signalling equipment shall be as follows.
i) Power supply 48V DC +10%, -10%
ii) Number of commands 4 (four)
iii) Operating time <7 ms
iv) Back to back operate time without propagation delay ≤ 8 ms
v) Interface to Protection relays
Input: Contact Rating:
Rated voltage : 250 volts DC
Maximum current rating: 5 amps
Output: Contact Rating:

Page 55 of 58
Rated current : 0.1 A DC
Other parameters : As per IEC-255-0-20
vi) Alarm contact
Rated current : 0.1 A DC
Other parameters : As per IEC-255-0-20
vii) Digital communication interface: G 703(E1)

Page 56 of 58
APPENDIX II
Specification for Revenue Meter & Metering (Instrument) Transformer
General:
The units shall be suitable for operating in Outdoor environment and shall be manufactured by
International Reputed ISO 9001 Company
Energy Meter
The Energy Meter shall have the following minimum requirement
Type Electronic, 3Phase, 4wire, Wye Connection, Bi-directional
0.2
Applicable Standard IEC 687 (latest edition) or Equivalent
Measurement a) Polyphase Quantities kWh, kVARh, kVAh
b) Instantaneous Quantities Real Time, kW, kVA, PF, Volts,

Amps, Frequency
Rated Current (In) 5A or 1A
Rated Maximum Current 1.2xIn
Starting Current 0.001xIn
Voltage (Phase) 110V/√3
Frequency 50Hz
Programmable Interval length At least 1 to 30 min
At Least 60 days of storage using 4 channels at 15min

Load Profile Memory Storage Intervals

Page 57 of 58
At Least 4 channels of storage (kWh import, kWh export,

Channels of Load Profile Data
kVARh Import, kVARh export)
Other Features to be Included a) Serial communication port and Accessories
b) Optical Port Communication (With optical Probe)
c) Remote Download Modem (in built)
d) Hardware Key to Prevent any Calibration and

configuration change
e) PT or CT error gain correction
f) Non Volatile memory
g) Inbuilt Super capacitor
h) Meter shall be able to record and store in Non-Volatile

memory the instant of Power failure and the instant of
supply restoration.

Page 58 of 58
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER - 11
FIBER OPTICS TERMINAL EQUIPMENT

Package KC3: Construction of 220 kV DC Transmission Line from Basasntpur to
Dhuge Sangu and 132/33 kV substation in Dhuge sangu
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 11
CONTENTS

11.0 GENERAL 1
11.1 CROSS REFERENCES 5
11.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS 5
11.3 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 8
11.4 DESIGN CRITERIA- GENERAL 9
11.5 INTRODUCTION 11
11.6 GENERAL NETWORK CHARACTERISTICS 13
11.7 FIBER OPTIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM 19
11.8 MDF, DDF AND CABLING 28
11.9 PATCH CORDS 29
11.10 TELECOMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT NETWORK / NETWORK 29
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (AS APPLICABLE)
11.11 COMMUNICATION CHANNEL REQUIREMENT AND 34
INTEGRATIONS
11.12 CRAFT TERMINAL 35
11.13 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS 36
11.14 GENERAL SOFTWARE / FIRMWARE REQUIREMENTS 37
11.15 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 39
11.16 PRIMARY SOURCE AC/DC POWER REQUIREMENTS 41
11.17 EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION, ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION 43
11.18 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, CABLE ROUTES AND ASSOCIATED 49
CIVIL WORKS

11.19 Augmentation and integration work related to Communication 51

System.
11.20 INSPECTION 52
11.21 TEST PLANS AND PROCEDURES 53
11.22 TYPE TESTING 57
11.23 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST 67
11.24 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS 71
11.25 MANADATORY SPARES 75

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 11
11.0. GENERAL
11.0.1. The scope covers design, engineering, manufacture and testing at manufacturer’s works
before dispatch, packing and forwarding, transportation, insurance, handling, delivering at
site, proper storage at site, factory training, site training, supervision for erection testing
and commissioning, installation of Fiber Optics Based Communication equipments which
includes Fibre Optic Terminal and Multiplexer equipment which includes all materials,
accessories and fittings, erection & maintenance tools & tackles, mandatory spares as
detailed in this specification for 132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung District)
and integration of communication network in Basantpur Optical Fiber Termination
equipment for Basantpur-Dhunge Sangu Link in Nepal. The technical specification includes
installing communication System, telephone system, teleprotection and interface cards to
interconnect with SCADA and CCTV equipment for the efficient supervision, control,
operation and maintenance of the transmission system. Optical fiber communication link
with its associated terminal equipments are required at 132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge
Sangu (Taplejung District). In particular following components are included in the scope of
work:
(i) Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) equipments along with suitable optical line
interfaces & tributary cards.
(ii) Associated termination equipment (drop-insert multiplexers, subscriber line

interfacing card etc.).
(iii) Local Craft Terminal.
(iv) All cabling, wiring, Digital Distribution Frame patch facilities, equipments MDF
and interconnections to the supplied equipment at the defined interfaces.

Page 1 of 83
(v) MDF & DDF cross connects required to route and activate circuits.
(vi) System integration of the supplied subsystems and also integration with existing
communication equipment such as SDH, MUX etc.
(vii) System integration of the supplied equipments (termination equipment system)

with existing equipments for seamless transmission of communication channel
(viii) Integration of supplied system with the user equipments such as RTUs, SCADA
systems, PABX etc.
(ix) Maintenance of the supplied system
(x) All other associated works/items described in the technical specifications for a
viable and fully functional communication network.
The Contractor is encouraged to offer standard products and designs. However, the
Contractor must conform to the requirements and provide any special equipment
necessary to meet the requirements stated herein.
It should be noted that preliminary design information and Bill of Quantity (BoQ) specified
in this specifications are indicative only. The Contractor shall verify the design data during
the site surveys & detail engineering and finalise the BoQ as required for ultimate design &
system performance.
The Bidder's proposal shall address all functional and performance requirements within
this specification and shall include sufficient information and supporting documentation in
order to determine compliance with this specification without further necessity for
inquiries.
An analysis of the functional and performance requirements of this specification and/or

site surveys, design, and engineering may lead the Contractor to conclude that additional
items are required that are not specifically mentioned in this specification. The Contractor
shall be responsible for providing at no added cost to the Employer, all such additional
items and services such that a viable and fully functional communication equipment

Page 2 of 83
system is implemented that meets or exceeds the capacity, and performance requirements
specified. Such materials and services shall be considered to be within the scope of the
contract. To the extent possible, the Bidders shall identify and include all such additional
items and services in their proposal.
All equipment provided shall be designed to interface with existing equipment and shall be
capable of supporting all present requirements and spare capacity requirement identified
in this specification.
The communication equipment shall be designed and provisioned for expansions and
reconfigurations without impairing normal operation, including adding and removing
circuits. The offered items shall be designed to operate in varying environments. Adequate
measures shall be taken to provide protection against rodents, contaminants, pollutants,
water & moisture, lightning & short circuit, vibration and electro-magnetic interference
etc.
The Bidders are advised to visit sites (at their own expense), prior to the submission of a
proposal, and make surveys and assessments as deemed necessary for proposal
submission. The successful bidder (Contractor) is required to visit all sites. The site visits
after contract award shall include all necessary surveys to allow the contractor to perform
the design and implementation functions. The Contractor shall inform their site survey
schedule to the Employer well in advance. The site survey schedule shall be finalised in
consultation with the Employer. The Employer may be associated with the Contractor
during their site survey activities.
After the site survey, the Contractor shall submit to the Employer a survey report on each
link and site. This report shall include at least the following items:
a) Proposed routing of power, earthing, signal cables and patch cords etc.
b) Confirmation of adequacy of Space and AC/DC Power supply requirements
c) Proposals for new rooms/buildings if required
d) Identification of facility modifications if required

Page 3 of 83
e) Identify all additional items required for integration for each site/location.
11.0.2. Closed Circuit TV (CCTV) system to be installed in all the substations. Tentative Locations of
camera as detailed below and finalized during detailed engineering
a. All incoming bays should cover all the isolators in the bay
b. All outing bays should cover all the isolators in the bay
c. Transformer bays
d. Bus coupler bays
e. Covering Entrance gate of Substation
f. Control Room Building
g. Any other locations as desired by the NEA finalized during detailed engineering
11.0.3. The security monitoring system shall be provided with CCTV and digital video record would
be able to transmit signal to Load Dispatch Centre (LDC)
11.0.4. Time Synchronization Equipment (TSE)
11.0.4.1. The Time Synchronization Equipment (TSE) shall receive the co-ordinate Universal. Times
(UTC) transmitted through Geo Positioning Satellite System (GPS) and synchronize
equipments to the Nepal Standard Time in a substation. Time synchronization equipment
shall include antenna, all special cables and processing equipment etc. It shall be
compatible for synchronization of Event Loggers, Disturbance recorders and SCADA at a
substation through individual port or through Ethernet realized through optic fibre bus.
The real time clock will not drift by more than 60 s in one month.
11.0.4.2. Supply shall be complete with all materials, accessories and fittings, erection &
maintenance tools & tackles, mandatory spares as detailed in this specification.
11.0.4.3. The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering practices to

Page 4 of 83
11.0.4.4. Any material and equipments not specifically stated in this specification but which are
11.0.4.5. Components having identical rating shall be interchangeable.
11.0.4.6. The bidder has to furnish the testing facilities available at the manufacturer’s works.
11.1. CROSS REFERENCES
This Materials Standard Specification shall be read in conjunction with the latest General
Specification and General Information which shall be considered as an integral part of this
Technical Specification as per IEC 60331.
11.2. APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS
The latest revision/amendments of Codes, Standards and Recommendations published by

the following international organizations shall be applicable for the equipment/material
covered in this Specification. In case of conflict, the vendor/manufacturer may propose
equipment/material conforming to one group of Standards specified hereunder without
jeopardizing the requirements of this Specification:
1. ANSI/ATIS T1.617 Bearer Services; Frame Relaying - ISDN DSSI; Bearer Services -
Frame Relaying
2. IEC 60255-5 Insulation Coordination for Measuring Relays and Protection Equipment
– Requirements and Tests
3. IEC 60255-22-1 Electrical Disturbance Tests for Measuring Relays and Protection
Equipment, Part I: 1MHz Burst Disturbance Tests
4. IEC 60834-1 Tele protection Equipments of Power Systems – Performance and

Testing, Part 1: Command Systems
5. IEC 60870-3 Tele control Equipments and Systems, Part 3: Interfaces (Electrical
Characteristics)

Page 5 of 83
6. IEC 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Part 4-2: Testing and

Measurement Techniques – Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test

Measurement Techniques Radiated, Radio Frequency, Electromagnetic Field
Immunity Test
8. IEC 61000-4-4 Attachment 2, Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Part 4-4: Testing

and Measurement Techniques – Electrical Fast Transient Burst Immunity Test

Measurement Techniques – Surge Immunity Test
10. IEC 61000-4-6 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC), Part 4-6: Immunity to Conducted
Disturbances, Induced by Radio Frequency Fields
Measurement Techniques – Oscillatory Waves Immunity Test
12. ISO/IEC 8802-3 Information Technology – Telecommunications and Information

Exchange Between Systems – Local and Metropolitan Area Networks – Specific
Requirements, Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection
(CSAMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications
13. ITU-T G.703 Physical/Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interfaces
14. ITU-T G.707 Network Node Interface for the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
15. ITU-T G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
16. ITU-T G.711 Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) of Voice Frequencies, Appendix II: A
Comfort Noise Payload Definition for ITU-T G711 use in Packet-Based Multimedia
17. ITU-T G.712 Transmission Performance Characteristics of Pulse Code Modulation

(PCM)
18. ITU-T G.773 Protocol Suites for Q-Interfaces for Management of Transmission
Systems

Page 6 of 83
19. ITU-T G.775 Loss of Signal (LOS), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Remote Defect
Indication (RDI) Defect Detection and Clearance Criteria for PDH Signals
20. ITU-T G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) Equipment

Functional Blocks
21. ITU-T G.803 Architecture of Transport Networks Based on the Synchronous Digital
Hierarchy (SDH)
22. ITU-T G.805 Generic Functional Architecture of Transport Networks
23. ITU-T G.813 Timing Characteristics of SDH Equipment Slave Clocks (ESC)
24. ITU-T G.821 Error Performance of an International Digital Connection Operating at Bit
Rate Below the Primary Rate and Forming Part of an Integrated Services Digital
Network
25. ITU-T G.823 Control of Jitter and Wander Within Digital Networks Which are Based
on the 2Mbps Hierarchy
26. ITU-T G.825 Control of Jitter and Wander Within Digital Networks Which are Based
on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
27. ITU-T G.826 Error Performance Parameters and Objectives for International, Constant
Bit-Rate Digital Paths at or Above the Primary Rate
28. ITU-T G.841 Types and Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
Network Protection Architectures
29. ITU-T G.957 Optical Interfaces for Equipments and Systems Relating to the
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
30. ITU-T G.958 Digital Line Systems Based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy for Use
on Optical Fiber Cables
31. ITU-T I.233 Frame Mode Bearer Services

Page 7 of 83
32. ITU-T M.2101.1 Performance Limits for Bringing into Service and Maintenance of
International SDH Paths and Multiplex Sections
33. ITU-T Q.811 Lower layer Protocol Profiles for the Q3 and X Interfaces
34. ITU-T Q.552 Transmission Characteristics at 2-Wire Analogue Interfaces of Digital

Exchanges
35. ITU-T T.50 International Reference Alphabet (IDA) – Information Technology – 7 Bit
Coded Character Set for Information Interchange
36. ITU-T V.24 List of Definitions for Interchange Circuits Between Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) and Data Circuit – Terminating Equipment
37. ITU-T V.28 Electrical Characteristics for Unbalanced Double-Current Interchange

Circuits
38. ITU-T V.35 Data Transmission at 48Kbps Using 60-108 kHz Group Band Circuits.
Specifications and codes shall be the latest version, inclusive of revisions, which are in force
at the date of the contract award. Where new specifications, codes, and revisions are
issued during the period of the contract, the Contractor shall attempt to comply with such,
provided that no additional expenses are charged to the Employer without Employer's
written consent.
In the event the Contractor offers to supply material and/or equipment in compliance to
any standard other than Standards listed herein, the Contractor shall include with their
proposal, full salient characteristics of the new standard for comparison.
11.3. DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

11.3.1. GENERAL
The Fiber optics terminal equipment shall meet, or exceed the requirements of this
specification in all respects.
Manufacturer’s documents and drawings as required in Drawings Schedule shall include all
pertinent construction details of the equipment. All pertinent dimensions for the

Page 8 of 83
construction of the equipment shall be provided for NEA/WAPCOS evaluation and

approval.
11.4. DESIGN CRITERIA-GENERAL

11.4.1. The equipment shall meet indoor ambient temperature requirements as specified in
General Information.
11.4.2. The equipment shall be specifically designed for low to medium channel applications to be
operated at the carrier level rate of STM as per the ITU-T standard G.709, and related ITU-T
SDH equipment standards and proven for use in an Electric Utility Telecommunications
environment. They shall be designed to provide a minimum twenty (20) years of acceptable
service.
11.4.3. The design of the equipment shall utilize field proven solid state components and circuits in
order to provide high equipment reliability.
11.4.4. Overall system availability (protected mode) between any two interconnected terminals for
the Fiber optic terminal links shall be 99.999 percent, or greater throughout the minimum
20 year lifetime of the equipment. For determining system availability, the equipment
manufacturer's Mean time between failure and mean time to repair figures (for each Fiber
optic terminal) shall be used.
11.4.5. Equipment shall have specific plug-in interface modules (integrated in the basic equipment
main unit) which shall allow for direct connection to the following:
a. Protective relay commands (distance type, breaker failure type, directional earth
fault relays and other relays requiring direct transfer trip contact closures).
b. External protective relay signaling equipment (interfacing with the Fiber optics
terminal equipment at the 64 Kbps G.703 level).
c. Numerical (Microcontroller based) protective relays (interfacing with the equipment

at the 64 Kbps G.703 level).
d. SCADA RTU equipment (both digital and analog connections).
e. Transmission of external equipment alarms.

Page 9 of 83
f. Data traffic.
g. Ethernet LAN, E1 (Flexible interconnection speed to 2 Mbps) G.703 electrical, as well

as normal telephone traffic.
h. E1 interface for CCTV data transmission
11.4.6. Optical inputs/outputs for the equipment shall operate with 1310nm or 1550nm single
mode optical signals, with the following available optical transmitters / receivers, which are
shown in the Table 1 below: main unit which shall allow for direct connection to the
following:
TABLE 1.4.6.1 - OPTICAL WAVELENGTH AND OPTICAL UNIT OPTIONS
WAVELENGTH OPTION
1310 nm Low Power (LED Version) when available from the Fiber Optic terminal
Equipment Manufacturer
11.4.7. Additional signal security shall be integrated in the Fiber optic terminals to assure error-
free operation of the communications link, when the communications link encounters high
bit-error rates.
11.4.8. The equipment shall be based on the supporting to future configuration of STM. All
terminal equipment shelves shall be fully wired, and additional shelves provided, to
support the installation of the plug-in interface modules and future channel expansion
requirements, which are specified in the equipment quantity table included in the Project
Scope of Work and Technical Specification.
11.4.9. All equipment shelves of the Fiber optic terminal equipment shall be designed for
mounting on standard EIA 19-inch wide racks or equipment cabinets as described in
Section 5.0 of this standard.

Page 10 of 83
11.4.10. All modules and shelves of the terminal equipment shall have integral high voltage surge
and fast transient protection as per International Standards.
11.4.11. The equipment shall also contain suitable EMI/RFI protection as specified as per
International Standards.
11.4.12. The equipment shall be designed to contain a basic equipment main unit (which contains
equipment shelves and units/modules for the basic multiplexing requirements), as well as
plug-in interface modules.
11.4.13. For any Fiber optic terminal equipment type, the DC power consumption shall be less than
200 Watts DC Peak Power.
11.4.14. Alarm Transmission Requirements.
11.4.15. Each terminal shall be equipped with alarm transmission and detection equipment (Alarm
Unit (AU) or equivalent) to allow transmission and reception of selected alarms (as
specified in the Project Specification) on the remote end(s) of the Fiber optic link to the
fiber optic remote supervisory terminals at the sites referenced in the associated Project
Scope of Work and Technical Specification (for turnkey projects).
11.4.16. All Protective relay communication between remote stations will be transmitted through
FOTS (Fiber optic transmission system) for tripping and communication
11.4.17. The equipment shall have extensive alarm reporting facilities to report local terminal
alarms. Alarms may be reported locally (at the terminal equipment end) by use of LED
indicators, or through use of a local (portable) craft terminal.
11.4.18. Following Annexure shall be integral part of this Chapter:
Annexure 10 (a): Network Configuration and Equipment Characteristics
Annexure 10 (b): Environment, EMI, Power Supply, Cabling and Earthing
Annexure 10 (c): Inspection, Test and Availability.
11.5. INTRODUCTION
This section describes the Fiber Optic Communication network configuration and the
equipment characteristics for communication system to be installed under the project. The
sub-systems addressed within this section are:

Page 11 of 83
1. Fiber Optic Transmission System (FOTS)
2. Termination Equipment Subsystems
3. MDF, DDF and Cabling
The requirements described herein are applicable to and in support of network

requirements. The equipment supplied shall support existing network for Power system
operational requirements.
The security related requirements of the equipment shall be as per relevant agency and
shall be followed/complied by the vendor.
The manufacturer shall allow the Employer and/or its designated agencies to inspect the
hardware, software, design, development, manufacturing, facility and supply chain and
subject all software to a security/threat check any time during the supplies of equipment.
The contractor shall ensure that the supplied equipments have been got tested as per
relevant contemporary International Security Standards e.g. IT and IT related elements
against ISO/IEC 15408 standards, for Information Security Management System against ISO
27000 series Standards, Telecom and Telecom related elements against 3GPP security
standards, 3GPP2 security standards etc. from any international agency/ labs of the
standards e.g. Common Criteria Labs in case of ISO/IEC 15408 standards until 31st March
2013. From 1st April, 2013, the certification shall be got done from authorized and certified
agency.
The Contractor shall also ensure that the equipment supplied has all the contemporary
security related features and features related to communication security as prescribed
under relevant security standards. A list of features, equipments, software etc. supplied
and implemented in the project shall be given for use by the Employer
In case of any deliberate attempt for a security breach at the time of procurement or at a
later stage after deployment/installation of the equipment or during maintenance, liability
and criminal proceedings can be initiated against the Contractor as per guidelines of
Government department.

Page 12 of 83
11.6. General Network Characteristics

11.6.1. Description
The fibre optic network shall be based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) having
bit rate of STM-1 (upgradable to STM-4) as identified in the BoQ. The network shall consist
of overhead fibre optic links with a minimum bit rate of Synchronous Transport Module-1
(STM-1). The Contractor can propose a system based on higher bit rate systems, if
required, so as to meet the link budget requirements or any other specification
requirement. The detailed BOQ is described in appendices.
11.6.2. Functional Requirement
The primary function of the communication network is to provide a highly reliable voice
and data communication system for grid operation in support of the
SCADA/EMS/RTUs/PMUs. The communications support requirement for
SCADA/EMS/RTUs/PMUs system is for low & high speed data, express voice circuits and
administrative voice circuits as defined in appendices. A brief summary of the
communication system requirements is as follows:
a) High speed E1 channel support (2.048 Mbps)
b) 64 kbps & N x 64 kbps data channel support
c) Low speed (300 -1200 bps) data channel support
d) Voice (2 wire, 4 wire) analog channel support.
e) Data transport supporting Network Management channels
f) The connectivity envisaged between RTUs and Control Centre over TCP-IP using
Ethernet interface or over serial interface.
g) Network cards should be according to the standards.
11.6.3. General Systems Requirements
Required characteristics are defined and specified herein at the system level, subsystem
level, and equipment level.

Page 13 of 83
11.6.3.1. System Synchronization
The Contractor shall synchronize the existing equipments and all the new equipments
under the contract using existing Master clock, if available. The Contractor shall provide
the additional clocks as required under the set of clock indicated in BoQ. In addition to GPS
input reference, the synchronization clock must have provision to take INPUT reference
coming from other clock. The contractor shall submit the synchronization plan as per
standard ITU-T G.811. All sync equipments proposed under this contract should meet ITU-T
G.811 criterion. The holdover quality of slave clock, if any, shall meet ITU-T G.812 standard
requirements.
The Contractor shall provide system wide synchronization fully distributed throughout the
telecom network and connected to all equipments new & existing. The Contractor shall
submit the synchronization plan for the entire network meeting the requirement of ITU-T
G.803. The synchronization plan shall clearly indicate the requirement of additional clocks
with full justification.
The system equipment requiring “clock” shall be connected to the master clock using
external clocking. For this purpose, appropriate interfaces(s) in the transmission &
termination equipment being supplied and all other associated hardware shall be provided
by the Contractor.
11.6.3.2. System Maintainability
To facilitate performance trending, efficient diagnosis and corrective resolution, the system
shall permit in-service diagnostic testing to be executed both locally and from remote
locations, manually and/or initiated under TMN control (if provided). Such testing shall not
affect the functional operation of the system.
11.6.3.3. System Upgradeability and Expandability
Equipment supplied shall be sized (though not necessarily equipped) to support system/
subsystem expansion to full capacity as provided by specified aggregate transmission rates.
Equipment units provisioned for equipped subunits shall be terminated at appropriate

Page 14 of 83
patching facilities or termination blocks. Power supplies shall be sized for maximum
equipped system capacity.
11.6.3.4. Equipment Availability
The calculated availability of each fibre optic link (E1 to E1) shall be at least 99.999%. The
calculated availability is defined as the theoretical availability determined by a statistical
calculation based on the mean-time-between-failure (MTBF) and the mean-time-to-repair
(MTTR) of the components and subsystems comprising the FOTS. For this analysis, an
MTTR of atleast 4 hours shall be assumed. The down time of the fibre optic cable shall not
be considered in the aforesaid availability calculations. The calculated failure rates of the
units and the calculated availabilities of the equipment being offered shall be provided by
the Contractor during detailed engineering.
11.6.3.5. Revision Levels and Modifications
All hardware, firmware and software delivered as part of the communications network
shall be field proven and at the most of current revision level. All modifications and
changes necessary to meet this requirement shall be completed prior to the start of the
factory tests or under special circumstances, on written approval by Employer, prior to the
completion of SAT.
11.6.3.6. Equipment Capacities
Equipment supplied shall be sized and equipped with sufficient capacity to support BoQ
and configuration requirements as identified in the appendices. Each subsystem supplied
shall be sized (to be equipped as specified) to support full subsystem expansion.
11.6.3.7. Redundancy Requirements and Protection Schemes
Equipment redundancy and Automatic Protection Schemes (APS) are specified in the Table
2-1. The failure of one element shall not prevent the use of any other that has not failed.

Page 15 of 83
Table 2-1
Equipment Redundancy Requirements Summary
Fiber Optic transmission Equipment :
SDH equipment
Power Supply & Converters ------------------------------ 1:1 APS or distributed power

supply
Common Control* Cards ----------------------------------- 1:1 APS
MUX, DROP/INSERT
Power Supply --------------------------------------------------- 1:1 APS or distributed power
supply
* = Common control cards which are essentially
required for operation of the equipment.
The offered equipment shall support at least SNCP as per standard ITU-T G.841. In case the
equipment offered by the Bidder does not support the above mentioned minimum
protection methods, the bidder shall have to provide all additional equipment needed to
provide same level of flexibility, redundancy and functionality at no additional cost to
Employer. The bidders shall provide details of protection schemes supported in the Bid
document.
The offered equipment shall support automatic switchover function between the
redundant modules and all required modules and hardware to support the automatic
switch over shall be provided by the Contractor.

Page 16 of 83
11.6.3.8. Lost Signal Recovery
At any digital signal level, reapplication of a lost signal shall result in automatic
resynchronization and full restoration to normal operation without manual intervention.
All alarms incident to the signal failure, shall be automatically cleared at the equipment,
rack and monitoring levels and normal operation indications restored and reported if
applicable.
11.6.3.9. Software Upgrades
The Contractor shall provide antivirus software along with all the computer
hardware/software which shall be upgraded periodically till the maintenance services
contract in the bid. Further, to meet all the specifications requirements during
implementation and maintenance, if upgrade in the hardware/software of supplied item is
required, the same shall be done by the contractor without any additional cost to the
Employer.
11.6.3.10.General Site Considerations
All fiber optic links up to 35 kms transmission line length shall be implemented by the
Contractor without repeaters. In order to meet the link budget requirement, the
Contractor shall provide all the necessary equipments only in the end stations. The
contractor may provide the optical amplifier, wave length translator, optical cards or high
capacity SDH equipment with suitable rack/subrack to meet the maximum distance limit.
All the provided equipments shall be monitored/managed by Craft Terminal.
11.6.3.11.Proposed Optical Fibre Characteristics
The link budget calculations and equipment design shall be based on the specified fibre
parameters. The optical cables shall have Dual Window Single Mode (DWSM) fibres
conforming to ITU-T Recommendations G.652D and the major parameters of these optical
fibre(s) are defined in Table-2-2:

Page 17 of 83
Table-2-2
Optical Fibre Characteristics
Fibre Description: Dual-Window Single-Mode (DWSM)
Mode Field Diameter: 8.6 to 9.5 μm (±0.6 µm)
Cladding Diameter: 125.0 μm + 1μm
Mode field Concentricity Error: < 0.6μm
Core-Clad concentricity error: < 1.0μm
Cladding non-circularity < 1%
Cable Cut off Wavelength: < 1260 nm
1550 loss performance As per G.652D
Proof Test Level  0.69 Gpa
Attenuation coefficient @1310nm <0.35 dB/Km
@1550nm <0.21 dB/Km
Attenuation variation with wavelength
1285 nm - 1330 nm Attenuation coefficient @1310 ± 0.05 dB
1525 nm – 1575 nm Attenuation coefficient @1550 ± 0.05 dB
Point discontinuities <0.1dB
Chromatic Dispersion; Max.: 18.0 ps/(nm x km) @ 1550 nm
3.5 ps/(nm x km) @ 1288-1339nm
5.3 ps/(nm x km) @ 1271-1360nm
Zero Dispersion Wavelength: 1300 to 1324nm
Zero Dispersion Slope: 0.092 ps/(nm2xkm) maximum
Polarization mode dispersion coefficient < 0.2 ps/km^1/2
Temperature Dependence: Induced attenuation < 0.05 dB (-60 deg C -
+85 deg C)
Bend performance: @1310nm (75+2 mm dia Mandrel), 100
turns;

Page 18 of 83
Attenuation rise  0.05 dB

@1550nm (30+1 mm dia Mandrel), 100
turns;
@1550nm (32+0.5 mm dia Mandrel), 1
turn;
11.6.4. Fibre Optic Link Lengths
The fiber optic route lengths are as specified in Drawing: Proposed Scheme of Transmission
& substation network. The lengths specified in appendices are the transmission line route
lengths; however the actual fiber cable length shall exceed the route lengths on account of
extra cable requirement due to sag, jointing & splicing, approach cabling etc. For bidding
purposes the Contractor may assume an additional cable length of 5% of given route
length + 1Km towards approach cable for calculating the link length. The exact cable
lengths shall be determined by the Contractor during the survey. The same shall be used by
the Contractor for final link design during the detailed engineering of the project.
11.7. FIBRE OPTIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
The Fibre Optic Transmission System (FOTS) is defined herein to include ETSI digital optical
line termination equipment. The FOTS shall be based on SDH technology. Minimum
aggregate bit rate shall be STM-1 (upgradable to STM-4) and equipped with 2 nos. of
minimum 16 port E1 interface(G.703) card, one no. of minimum 4 port Ethernet interface
(IEEE 802.3/IEEE 802.3u) card supporting layer 2 switching as tributaries. The Ethernet
interfaces shall support VLAN (IEEE 802.1P/Q), spanning tree (IEEE 802.1D) quality of
service. Protection scheme for Ethernet traffic should be ERPS based (Ethernet ring
protection scheme) as per ITU-T G.8032.

Page 19 of 83
The Contractor shall provide (supply and install) connectorised jumpers (patch cords) for
FODP-to-equipment and equipment-to-equipment connection. Two number spare jumpers
shall be provided for each equipment connection. Fiber jumpers shall be of sufficient
lengths as to provide at least 0.5m of service loop when connected for their intended
purpose.
11.7.1. SDH Equipment

11.7.1.1. Functional Requirement
There is a requirement for different types of equipment under this project which are
described in this section. The BOQ is provided in the appendices. For the purpose of BOQ,
the SDH Equipment is considered to be divided in three parts i.e. Optical interface/SFP,
Tributary Cards (Electrical tributaries such as E1 & Ethernet 10/100 Mbps) and Base
Equipment (Consisting of Common Cards, Control Cards, Optical base card, Power supply
cards, sub-rack, cabinet, other hardware and accessories required for installation of
equipment i.e. everything besides optical interface/SFP and tributary cards).
If bidder is offering equipment with multifunction cards such as cross-connect or control

card with optical interface/SFP or tributary interface, such type of multifunction card shall
be considered as Common control card and shall be the part of base equipment. In case
optical interface/SFP is embedded with control card, the adequate number of optical
interface/SFPs shall be offered to meet the redundancy requirements of the specifications.
Further, control card shall not be equipped with more than one optical interface/SFP and
optical base card shall not be equipped with more than two optical interface/SFPs.
The equipment shall be configurable either as Terminal Multiplexer (TM) as well as ADM
with software settings only.
SDH ADM
The aggregate interfaces shall be (at least) STM-1 towards at least two protected directions
(Protected as specified in this specifications). At present the equipment shall be equipped

Page 20 of 83
with a 2 nos., min.16 E-1 port electrical tributary cards & one no., min.4 port Ethernet
interface card as tributaries. The equipment shall provide access to full STM-4 payload.
The offered STM-1 SDH equipment shall be upgradeable to STM-4 by changing optical line
cards only. Cross connection (VC4) capability of offered SDH equipment shall be provided
according to STM-4 equipment. The contractor shall demonstrate the STM-4 upgradeability
during FAT.
11.7.1.2. Redundancy and Protection
Two fibre rings shall be implemented wherever the network permits. On linear sections of
the network, protected links using 4 fibres shall be implemented.
11.7.1.3. Service Channel
Service channels shall be provided as a function of the SDH equipment and shall be
equipped with Service Channel Muldems that shall provide at a minimum: One voice
channel (order wire) with analog interface (0.3 to 3.4 kHz) and one data channel. Both
omnibus and selective calling facilities shall be provided. There shall be a facility to extend
the line system order-wire to any other system or exchange lines on 2W/4W basis.
11.7.1.4. Supervision and Alarms
ISM (In Service Monitoring) circuitry shall be provided as a function of the SDH equipment.
Local visual alarm indicators shall be provided on the equipment, as a rack summary alarm
panel. Alarms shall be as per ITU-T Standards G.774, G.783 and G.784. Additionally, F2/Q2
interfaces for a local craftsperson terminal interface and remote equipment monitoring is
required.
The Equipment shall support collection of at least four (4) external alarms for monitoring
and control of station associated devices by the TMN.
11.7.1.5. Synchronisation
The equipment shall provide synchronisation as per Table 2-2. One 2MHz synchronisation
output from each equipment shall be provided.

Page 21 of 83
11.7.1.6. Electrical and Optical I/O Characteristics and General Parameters
Table 2-3 provides the electrical and optical characteristics as well as other general
parameters for SDH equipment.
Table 2-3
Electrical and Optical I/O Characteristics and General Parameters
Optical Wavelength NOTE (1) 1310/1550 nm
Optical Source NOTE (2) Laser
Optical Source Lifespan Better than 5 X 105 hours
Optical Fibre Type G.652 D

Optical Connectors Type FC-PC
Transmission Quality Per ITU-T G.821, G.823, G.826

Source Primary Power - 48 Vdc
Equipment Specifications Per ITU-T G.783
Tributary, Electrical Interface Per ITU-T G.703, 75 Ω
Ethernet Interface 10/100 Mbps
SDH Bit Rates Per ITU-T G.703
Optical Interfaces Per ITU-T G.957, G.958
Frame and Multiplexing Structure for Per ITU-T G.707
SDH
Synchronization Per ITU-T G.813
Management Functions Per ITU-T G.774, G.784
Protection Architectures Per ITU-T G.841
Built In Testing and Alarms Per ITU-T G.774, G.783, G.784
NOTE (1) Optical wavelength shall be selected considering the characteristics of

the optical fibre and the link budget.

Page 22 of 83
NOTE (2) Eye Safety for Laser Equipment: To avoid eye damage, when a receiver
detects a line interruption, it is required that the optical power of the
laser shall be reduced to safe limits on the transmitter in the opposite
direction as per ITU-T G.958.
NOTE (3) In case other than FC-PC connector is provided in the equipment,
suitable patch cord with matching connector are to be provided to
connect with FODP.
11.7.2. Optical Link Performance Requirements
The optical fibre link performance requirements are specified as follows:
11.7.2.1. Link Budget Calculations
The Fibre Optic link budget calculations shall be calculated based upon the following
criteria:
1. Fibre attenuation: The fibre attenuation shall be taken to be the guaranteed maximum
fibre attenuation i.e. 0.21 dB/Km @1550nm and 0.35 dB/km @1310nm.
2. Splice loss: Minimum 0.05 dB per splice. One splice shall be considered for every 3 kms.
3. Connector losses: Losses due to connectors shall be considered to be minimum 1.0 dB

per link.
4. Equipment Parameters: The equipment parameters to be considered for link budget

calculations shall be the guaranteed “End of Life (EOL)” parameters. In case, the End of
Life parameters are not specified for the SDH equipment, an End of Life Margin of at
least 2 dB shall be considered and a similar margin shall be considered for optical
amplifiers.
5. Optical path Penalty: An optical path penalty of at least 1 dB shall be considered to

account for total degradations due to reflections, inter symbol interference, mode
partition noise and laser chirp.

Page 23 of 83
6. Maintenance Margin: A maintenance margin of at least 2.5 dB/100Km shall be kept

towards cabling, repair splicing, cable ageing and temperature variations etc.
7. Other losses: Other losses, if any required specifically for system to be supplied shall
also be suitably considered.
8. Dispersion: The fibre dispersion shall be taken to be the guaranteed maximum

dispersion i.e. 18 ps/nm.Km @1550 nm & 3.5 ps/nm.km @ 1310 nm for DWSM fibres.
9. Bit Error Rate: The link budget calculations shall be done for a BER of 10 -10.
The bidders shall determine the total link loss based on the above parameters and shall
submit the system design (including link budget calculations) for each category of fibre
optic link during detailed engineering.
For finalising the FOTS system design & BOQ, above methodology shall be adopted taking
into account fibre attenuation, dispersion and splice loss determined during the detailed
engineering. Accordingly, additions and deletions from the contract shall be carried out
based on unit rates indicated in the contract.
11.7.2.2. Link Performance
The Link performance for ES, SES and BER for the fibre optic links shall correspond to
National Network as defined in ITU-T G.826.
11.7.2.3. FODP to SDH Equipment
The Contractor shall be responsible for connectivity between the FODP and the SDH
equipment. The Contractor shall provide FC PC coupled patch cords. The patch-cord length
between the FODP & equipment rack shall be suitably protected from rodents, abrasion,
crush or mechanical damage.If there is distance between FODP & Equipment the patch
cords should be fitted with cable raceways

Page 24 of 83
11.7.3. Termination Equipment Subsystem
The Termination Equipment Subsystem is defined to include the equipment that interfaces
(adapts) the subscriber (user) to the Fibre Optic Transmission System (FOTS). A Functional
description of these equipments are as follows:
11.7.4. Functional Description
The transmission network node provides subscriber interface to the transmission network
and/or switching/routing. For clarity, the basic functions accomplished at the network
nodal points, are described briefly as follows:
Primary Multiplexer shall be used to accomplish subscriber connectivity to the Digital

Communication Network. Subscriber Line Units shall provide analog to digital and direct
digital conversion to 64 Kbps digital channel. In the CEPT standard hierarchy, thirty (30)
such 64 Kbps digital channels shall be Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) resulting in a single
2.048 Mbps (E-1) digital bit stream.
Digital Drop-Insert and Branching Equipment shall be used to digitally interface a small
number of channels at spur locations without requiring successive D/A and A/D
conversions of the throughput channels.
The equipment shall also have an interface for external 2048 kHz synchronisation signal
according to ITU-T Recommendation G.703.
11.7.5. First Order (Primary) Multiplexing
The Contractor shall be required to provide E-1 Drop & Insert Multiplexer and E-1 Channel
Bank primary multiplexing in compliance with the electrical input-output characteristics
provided in Table 2-4.
11.7.5.1. Drop & Insert Primary Multiplexing
Drop & Insert primary multiplexing in conformance with CEPT E-1 characteristics shall be
required at locations where the subscriber requirement is minimal. The drop and insertion
of up to thirty 64 Kbps channels supporting subscriber line units (SLU) shall be required at

Page 25 of 83
intermediate locations. The Drop & Insert Muxes supplied shall be performance and card
compatible with the Channel Bank Equipment provided so that all Subscriber Line Interface
cards are interchangeable.
Table 2-4
CEPT E-1 Standard First Order Multiplexing
Electrical Input/Output Characteristics
Applicable Standards: CEPT per CCITT Recommendation G.702, G.703,
G.711 and G.712
Number of Tributaries: 30 X 64 Kbps
Alternative Sub-rate Tributaries: n X 64 Kbps V.36
64Kb/s V.11/V.36
Output Aggregate Rate: 2.048 Mb/s ± 50 ppm
Interface Code: HDB3
Impedance: 75 ohm unbalanced
Peak Level @ 120 ohm: 3.0 volts ± 10%
Peak Level @ 75 ohm: 2.37 volts ± 10%
Maximum Insertion Loss: 6 dB
Signal Waveform: Per CCITT G.703
Frame Structure: Per CCITT G.742
Jitter Performance: Per CCITT G.823
Power Supply Voltage: - 48 Vdc
11.7.5.2. Channel Banks (Mux, Drop/Insert)
User voice and data equipment interfacing requirements are defined at the subscriber line
level. Primary multiplexing in conformance with CEPT E-1 characteristics shall be used to
provide first order multiplexing of up to thirty 64 Kbps channels supporting Subscriber Line
Units (SLUs).

Page 26 of 83
11.7.5.3. Subscriber Line Units\Subscriber Line Interface Cards
The terms Subscriber Line Interface Cards and Subscriber Line Units have been used
interchangeably throughout the specification. Multiple configurations of SLUs shall be
required to provide subscriber to primary multiplexer Bank interfacing for a variety of voice
and data communications. In case there are changes in number or type of cards because
of changes in channel requirements, the contract price shall be adjusted accordingly.
The SLU interface requirements are discussed in the following subparagraphs:
a. Voice Channels
The voice channel requirement is for (I) 4-Wire E&M trunking in support of PABX trunks &
PLC VF and (II) 2-Wire telephonic interfaces. 2 wire SLUs shall be DTMF/TP optioned for 2-
wire loop start or 2-wire GND start. The voice cards shall utilize ITU.T A - law companded
PCM G.711, 64 kbits/s encoding. The voice card requirements are indicated in the BoQ in
appendices.
b. Sub-Channel Data Multiplexing
For this Project, the RTU data interface to the wideband telecommunications network
node shall be defined at the DTE level at low-speed rates of 300, 600 and 1200 baud. The
port shall be compatible with RS232C interface. The Contractor shall be required to furnish
64 Kbps SLU asynchronous dataplexing for at least 4 selectable low speed DTE interfaces
whenever multiple asynchronous data circuits are required.
c. Synchronous Data
The Contractor shall provide a direct DTE interface for synchronous communications at
speed of 64Kbps and compatible with CCITT G.703 Kbit/s, V.35 and X.21 interfaces. Data
rate selection shall be switch selectable or programmable.

Page 27 of 83
d. Nx64 kbps Synchronous Data
There is also a requirement for N x 64 kbps V.35, X.21 interfaces. The tentative quantities
have been identified in the appendices. However the final BOQ shall be worked out during
detailed design and contract price shall be adjusted accordingly.
11.8. MDF, DDF and Cabling
For the purposes of the specification, the contractor shall provide cabling, wiring, DDF
patching facilities and MDFs interfacing to the wideband telecommunications system.
Equipment and material components for MDF, DDF and cabling are also part of this
procurement. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to provide all cable support
required for full supplied equipment interconnection with the MDF and shall be in
accordance with communications industry standard practices and the requirements
mentioned in the technical specifications.Special Flooring should be used for MDF and DDF.
11.8.1. Digital Distribution Frame Functional Requirements
The Contractor shall provide DDF for Digital Signal Cross connect (DSX) Broadband-quality
(better than 20 MHz) patching facilities configured "normally-thru" with Equipment, Line
and Monitor Patch Jacks. DDFs shall provide the following basic functions:
i) "Normally thru" circuit routing
ii) Circuit rerouting via patch cord assemblies
iii) Circuit disconnect and termination
All DDFs shall be sized and equipped to support the offered configuration of the provided
equipment. Independent Transmit and Receive patch jack assemblies (line and equipment)
shall provide for separate transmit and receive single-plug patching. Transmit and receive
patch jack assemblies shall be located side-by-side such that dual-plug patch cord
assemblies may be used to route both transmit and receive for the same circuit.

Page 28 of 83
11.8.2. Main Distribution Frames
The Contractor shall make provision for cross connection of subscriber services to the
subscribers utilizing Krone type or equivalent and shall provide full connectivity up to and
terminated on the equipment side of the appropriate DDFs and line side of MDFs. The
Contractor shall terminate on the equipment side of patching facilities provided by other
contracts and shall provide DSX type patching facilities supporting aggregate bit streams
(i.e. dataplexers and E-1 Channel Banks). Separate Patch panels or MDFs shall be provided
for Data and Voice. All cross connects shall be accomplished utilizing one, two or three pair
patch cords. Patch plugs are permissible for direct one-to-one circuit "cut-thru".
11.9. PATCH CORDS

The Contractor has to supply FC PC coupled Patch cords as described in BOQ. The Patch
cord return loss shall be equal to or better than 40 dB and insertion loss equal to or less
than 0.5 dB.
11.10. TELECOMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT NETWORK / NETWORK MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM(NOT APPLICABLE)
The Contractor shall provide a Telecommunications Management Network System (TMN)

for operational support to the FOTS and associated Termination equipment subsystems.
This TMN shall provide the capability to monitor, reconfigure, and control elements of the
telecommunications network from a centralized location and at each node of the network
where equipment is located. This TMN system shall assist Employer/Owner in the
operations and maintenance of the wideband communication resources of the including
detection of degraded circuits, system performance, the diagnosis of problems, the
implementation of remedial actions and the allocation or reallocation of
telecommunications resources and addition/deletion of network elements.
The contractor shall supply preferably a single TMN for all the NEs (Network Elements)
such as SDH equipment, Mux, Drop-Insert, DACS etc. In case a single TMN can not be
provided for all the NEs, the contractor may supply separate TMNs. Each of the offered

Page 29 of 83
TMN shall meet the requirements indicated in this section. The bidder shall provide details
of the offered TMN in the bid.
11.10.1. Applicable Standards
The TMN design concept, functional and informational architecture and physical
architecture, shall be in compliance with ITU-T Recommendation M.3010. The offered TMN
system shall be capable of integration to other supplier’s Network Management System
(NMS) upwardly through North bound interfaces. The north bound interface in the EMS
shall be CORBA/TMF-814 compliant.
11.10.2. TMN Architecture
The TMN shall provide
A. Collection of Management data from all Network Elements (NEs) supplied under this
package. The minimum monitoring and control requirements for the communication
equipment shall be as defined in this section.
B. For TMN architecture ITU T M.3400, M.3020 should be applicable.
C. Processing of above management data by using processor(s) located at control Centre

and additional intermediate station processor(s), wherever required.
D. Monitoring and control of the NEs as defined below:
i. TMN system at LDC (including local operator console, if applicable) shall support
management of all equipments supplied and monitoring of the entire regional
network supplied under this package. At a minimum functions of Network
management layer (NML) and Element management layer (EML) as defined in
CCITT M3010. The detailed functions are listed in TS.
ii. Monitoring and control of NEs using Craft Terminals as defined in this Section .
E. Supervisory monitoring and control of the following station associated devices:
i. Intrusion Detection Alarms

Page 30 of 83
ii. Power Failure
iii. Fire and Smoke Detection
iv. Environmental Control (Temperature, Humidity etc.)
F. Communication channel support for TMN System as specified in Technical

Specifications (TS).
The supplied TMN system shall be capable of handling all management functions for at
least 150% of the final network elements. Further, the centralised TMN system shall also
have provision for addition of at least two remote operator consoles. The TMN hardware
shall be so designed that failure of a single processor/component (router, switch, converter
etc.) shall not inhibit any of the functionality of the TMN at control centre. The Contractor
shall submit for Employer’s approval the TMN architecture describing in detail the
following subsystems/features:
a. Database used in TMN
b. Master Processor, server/workstation, LAN, Peripherals and hardware
c. Software and operating system
d. Local Consoles/remote consoles
e. Craft Terminals
f. Data communication between NEs, Remote/Local Consoles and TMN Processor(s)
g. Routers/Bridges
h. Expansion Capabilities
11.10.3. Management Functions
The TMN shall support following Management functions:

Page 31 of 83
11.10.3.1.Configuration Management
Configuration management is concerned with management, display, and control of the

network configuration. Minimum specific requirements that shall be satisfied include the
following:
a. Provide tools to establish and maintain the backbone topology and configuration
information and provide graphical maps depicting the configurations.
b. Gather descriptive information about the current configuration of the equipment,

provide operator displays, and prepare reports.
c. Provide tools for planning, establishing, and changing the static equipment
configuration. Provide for changes to the equipment configuration in response to
equipment failures, planned upgrades, and operator requests to take equipment
offline for testing.
d. Provide verification testing to support new equipment installation.
11.10.3.2.Fault Management
Fault management is concerned with detecting, diagnosing, bypassing, directing service

restoration, and reporting on all the backbone network equipment, systems, and links.
Minimum specific requirements that shall be satisfied include the following:
a. Display equipment status in a consistent fashion regardless of the source of the data
on a graphical topological, map-type display. Status shall be displayed through the use
of colours on links and nodes as well as through text.
b. Obtain status and detect faults through periodic polling, processing of unsolicited
alarms and error events, and periodic testing for connectivity.
c. Maintain an alarm summary of unacknowledged alarm events on the management

station display and maintain a log of all received alarms. The operator shall be able to
acknowledge and clear alarms individually and as a group. The use of alarm
correlation techniques is encouraged to minimize the proliferation of alarms caused by

Page 32 of 83
a single, common event. All alarms shall be configurable as critical alarms, major
alarms and minor alarms with different colours.
d. Provide the capability to diagnose and isolate failures through analysis of error and
event reports and through the use of both on-line and off-line diagnostic tests and
display of monitored data.
e. The criteria for fail over shall be configurable as automatic fail over to redundant
equipment wherever possible and through operator-initiated actions where automatic
fail over is not possible. The status of fail over shall be reported to the NMS.
f. Track network equipment failure history.
11.10.3.3.Performance Management
Performance management is concerned with evaluation of the use of network equipments

and their capability to meet performance objectives. Minimum specific requirements that
shall be satisfied include the following:
a. Provide support for an operator to initiate, collect, and terminate performance metrics
under both normal and degraded conditions. For example, BER of each link, together
with other data measured at each node, shall be available on operator request (at
least for SDH).
b. Monitor point to point & end to end signal quality and history. Provide operator
controls to monitor performance of specified events, measures, and resources (at least
for SDH). Specifically provide displays to permit the operator to:
i. Select/deselect network equipments, events, and threshold parameters to

monitor
ii. Set monitoring start time and duration or end time
iii. Set monitoring sampling frequency
iv. Set/change threshold values on selected performance parameters
v. Generate alarm events when thresholds are exceeded.

Page 33 of 83
vi. Set multiple thresholds on certain performance parameters. Alarm categories

include as a minimum a warning and a failure.
vii. Calculate selected statistical data to measure performance on selected

equipment based on both current and historical performance data maintained in
performance logs. Performance data provided is limited to what is available
from the equipment Contractors.
viii. Provide graphical displays of point to point and end to end current performance
parameter values. Provide tabular displays of current, peak, and average values
for performance parameters.
ix. Generate reports on a daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly basis containing system
statistics.
11.10.3.4.Security Management
The TMN shall be provided with security features to limit access to monitoring and control
capabilities to only authorized personnel. One access level of System Administrator and at
least two levels of operator access shall be provided - read (view) only, and write
(configure). The system administrator shall be able to create, define and modify operators
with different access levels, network domains and perform all kind of maintenance and up
gradation of the TMN system. With "read only" access level, network parameters should
only be viewed. Access to database maintenance, command control and test functions
shall be available with "write" access level. Means shall be provided to ensure only one
authorized user has write capability for a selected domain of the network. It shall be
possible to define multiple domains for purposes of monitoring and control.
Human error and conflict detection are also required. Such errors and access violations
shall be reported to the offending user as error messages and warnings.
11.11. COMMUNICATION CHANNEL REQUIREMENT AND INTEGRATION (NOT APPLICABLE)
Communication requirements for TMN system have not been considered in Appendices
and the Contractor shall provide these as a part of TMN system. The Contractor shall

Page 34 of 83
provide all required interface cards / devices, LAN, routers/bridges, channel routing,
cabling, wiring etc. and interfacing required for full TMN data transport.
The TMN data transport shall utilize the wideband communications transmission system
service channel in the overhead whenever possible. This will provide inherent critical path
protection
Should the configuration requirements dictate multiple TMN station processors, the TMN
Master Station shall require bidirectional data transport with its station processor(s). This
communications interfacing shall be via critically protected data channels. It shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to provide for and equip all necessary critically protected TMN
data channel support.
In case supervisory channels are not available, the Contractor shall provide suitable
interfaces in their supplied equipment for transport of TMN data. The Contractor shall also
be responsible for providing suitable channels with appropriate interfaces to transport the
TMN data.
The NMS information of existing PDH & SDH system shall be transported through the new
communication network, wherever required, up to the NMS location. The NMS
information of the new SDH & PDH system being procured under the package shall be
transported through the existing communication network using 64 kbps/2Mpbs (G.703)
interfaces. Any hardware required for above interfacing shall be provided by the
Contractor.
The bidders shall describe in the proposal the TMN data transport proposed to be used by
the bidder in detail including capacity requirements and various components/equipment
proposed to be used.
11.12. CRAFT TERMINAL
Each equipment (SDH equipment, Mux, Drop/Insert and DACS etc.) on the fiber optic
communication network shall include provision for connecting a portable personal
computer (PC) to be known as craft terminal to support local commissioning and

Page 35 of 83
maintenance activities. Craft Terminal Should be according to ITU-G 774 & G.826 standards
for error performance and performance. Through the use of this PC and local
displays/controls, the operator shall be able to:
a. Change the configuration of the station & the connected NEs.
b. Perform tests
c. Get detailed fault information
The craft terminal shall be connected to the interface available in the communication
equipment. Portable (laptop) computers (Craft terminals), each complete with necessary
system and application software to support the functions listed above, shall be supplied to
the employer as per BOQ given in the appendices.
11.13. HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS

11.13.1. Master Processor, Server/Workstation and Craft Terminal
The server/workstation and craft terminal shall have suitable processor(s) which shall be
sufficient to meet all the functional requirement and expansion capabilities stipulated in
this specification. Only reputed make like Dell, IBM, HP, Compaq make shall be supplied.
The server shall have minimum configuration of 3GHz for CISC based or 1.6GHz for RISC
based processor, 4GB RAM, DVD-RAM drive, redundant 500 GB internal Hard Disk Drive,
101-Enhanced style keyboards, mouse, parallel, serial, USB(2.0) ports and hot swap
redundant power supply. VDUs shall be 17" TFT active matrix color LCD with a minimum
resolution of 1024 X 768. Appropriate network drive card shall also be provided wherever
required. However, the internal hard disk drive for the server shall be redundant and all
the data shall be mirrored. Further, the TMN software shall support data mirroring on
redundant disk drives.
The workstation shall have minimum configuration of 2.4GHz for CISC or 1.4GHz for RISC
based processor, 4GB RAM, DVD-RW drive, 500 GB Hard Disk Drive, 101-Enhanced style

Page 36 of 83
keyboards, mouse, parallel, serial and USB (2.0) ports. VDUs shall be 19" TFT active matrix
color LCD with a minimum resolution of 1024 X 768. Appropriate network drive card shall
also be provided wherever required.
CPU enclosures shall be desktop type and shall include available expansion slots except for
the Craft Terminal which shall be a laptop. The craft terminal shall have minimum
configuration of 2.4 GHz, 2 GB RAM, DVD RW drive,500 GB Hard Disk Drive, keyboard,
mouse/trackball etc., parallel, serial/USB (2.0) ports to accommodate printers, and
Internal/external Data/Fax modem and a battery back-up of at least 60 minutes. VDUs
shall be 17" TFT active matrix color LCD with a minimum resolution of 1024 X 768.
11.13.2. Peripherals and hardware
TMN system shall be provided with laser printer. The laser printer shall have a minimum
print speed of 17 pages per minute and a minimum resolution of 1200 x 1200 dpi. The laser
printer shall have parallel and LAN ports for connecting to TMN system.
The laser printer under this specification shall be black & white and include print enhanced
buffering to prevent loss of print data in the event of a print failure.
11.13.3. Local/Remote Operator Consoles (As Applicable)
The Contractor shall provide operator consoles sized and equipped to support the
subsystem(s) furnished and in compliance with the specification. The console shall provide
hardware interfacing for the TMN users to the software operating support systems. At a
minimum, a console shall include the hardware similar to a workstation.
11.13.4. Power Supplies
The TMN system shall use 220 volts 50 Hz A.C or -48 volt D.C as available at site for its
operation as available at site.
11.14. GENERAL SOFTWARE/FIRMWARE REQUIREMENTS
Due to various alternative design approaches, it is neither intended nor possible to specify
all software and firmware characteristics. It is the intent herein to provide design

Page 37 of 83
boundaries and guidelines that help to ensure a demonstrated, integrated program

package that is maintainable and meets both hardware systems requirements and the
customer's operational requirements.
11.14.1. Operating System Software
Operating system software shall be provided to control the execution of system programs,
application programs, and management devices, to allocate system resources, and manage
communications among the system processors. The contractor shall make no modifications
to the OEM's operating system, except as provided as USER installation parameters.
11.14.2. Applications Software
All applications software shall be written in a high-level programming language unless

developed using industry proven application programs and development tools provided
with the system. The contractor shall make no modifications to the applications program
except as provided as USER development tools.
11.14.3. Software Utilities
A utility shall be provided to convert all reports into standard PC application formats such
as excel.
11.14.4. Revisions, Upgrades, Maintainability
All firmware and software delivered under this specification shall be the latest field proven
version available at the time of contract approval. Installed demonstration for acceptance
shall be required. All firmware provided shall support its fully equipped intended functional
requirements without additional rewrite or programming.
All software shall be easily user expandable to accommodate the anticipated system
growth, as defined in this specification. Reassembly recompilation or revision upgrades of
the software or components of the software, shall not be necessary to accommodate full
system expansion.

Page 38 of 83
Software provided shall be compliant with national and international industry standards.
11.14.5. Database(s)
The contractor shall develop all the databases for final wideband network following the
global acronyms for all stations. Database(s) to be provided shall contain all structure
definitions and data for the integrated functional requirements of TMN system.
TMN operator Groups shall share the same virtual database. This means that they shall
share the same database and database manager, whether or not physically separate
databases are maintained.
11.14.6. Help
All applications shall be supported by USER accessible HELP commands that shall assist the
user in the performance of its tasks. HELP commands for an application shall be available
to the user from within the active application and shall not interfere with the activities of
the application.
Annexure 10 (b): Environment, EMI, Power Supply, Cabling and Earthling
The purpose of this section is to describe the minimum general equipment characteristics
and specifications for environmental conditions, source power conditioning and backup,
equipment construction, and installation. The section also highlights the stringent Electro
Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) guidelines for equipment that will be operated under the
severest Electro Magnetic Interference (EMI) and Electro Static Discharge (ESD) conditions
expected in an Extra High Voltage (EHV) power system environment.
11.15. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Equipment and their components provided under this specification shall operate reliably
under the following environmental conditions.
11.15.1. Temperature and Humidity
Most of the equipment will not be installed in environmentally controlled shelters.

Therefore, equipment shall operate in accordance with the limits shown in Table 4-1.

Page 39 of 83
Table 4-1
Environmental Operating Limits
Temperature Range: (Un Controlled Environment)
Specification 0 to 45°C
Operation without damage -10 to 55°C
Shipping/storage -40 to 60°C
Relative Humidity, non-condensing Upto 90%
Elevation:
Operating to 3,000 m
Non-operating to 10,000 m
For each location, the Contractor is required to assess the environmental conditions for the
equipment to be installed under this specification. The Contractor is responsible for all
necessary enclosure, rack or equipment upgrades to ensure the proper operation of the
installed equipment.
11.15.2. EMI and Electrostatic Interference
At each location, the Contractor shall assess the need for shielding against radiated
emissions and shall provide recommended solutions for any EMI problem found at each
location. Specifications provides the type of immunity tests for which the equipment shall
be required to pass without failure. For the individual tests to be carried out at the
different interfaces, references are made to the relevant IEC and ITU-T recommendations.
11.15.3. Vibration and Shock Resistance
As per testing requirements indicated in this specification.
11.15.4. Tropicalization
Communications equipment will often be stored and operated in uncontrolled

environment areas and will be subject to mould, growth of fungus, corrosion and

Page 40 of 83
oxidation. The equipment and components shall be suitably tropicalized during

manufacture through commissioning, as necessary.
11.15.5. Contaminants
Communications equipment may be located in areas of poor air quality with the main
contaminant being dust. Cabinets shall be tight fitting utilizing filtered ventilation openings
only.
11.16. PRIMARY SOURCE AC/DC POWER REQUIREMENTS
Facilities will be required to support both AC and DC power load requirements of

telecommunications equipment as specified below:
11.16.1. Primary Source AC Power
It will be the Employer's responsibility to provide required Primary AC source Power for
communications equipment installed under this specification. The Primary AC Power
supplied will be 230 VAC ± 5%, 50Hz with a frequency variance between 48.75 and 51.25
Hz. Harmonic distortion will not exceed five (3) percent.
All equipment and components provided under this specification requiring Primary AC
Power, shall be designed for normal operation under the above stated tolerances for 230
VAC supply.
The Contractor shall provide in their Bid as well as in the survey report to the Employer the
projected 230 VAC Primary Power load requirement per equipment and totals, by location,
for equipment provided under this specification. The Contractor shall provide suitable UPS
for communication equipment/module etc. requiring AC power supply at locations other
than control centre.
11.16.2. -48V DC Power
Power supplies/converters for communications equipment (except computer system

supplied as part of NMS which shall use 230 VAC) provided under this specification, shall
use -48Vdc uninterrupted primary source power. The power supply may vary normally

Page 41 of 83
within the voltage range -42 to -58 Vdc and the supplied equipment shall operate
satisfactorily within this range.
11.16.3. Power Distribution and Protection
The Employer will furnish only one source primary 230 VAC and/or -48 VDC power. It shall
be the Contractor's responsibility for the connection and distribution of all Primary AC and
-48V dc source power, in full compliance with all local and national electrical codes.
The Employer shall indicate during the survey by Contractor, on the primary source, the
feeders/points that can be used by the Contractor. The Contractor shall supply & install
Primary AC and -48Vdc feeder cables to Contractor-furnished distribution panels.
The Contractor shall provide required distribution panels, circuit breakers and appropriate
Panel Disconnects. Distribution Panel feeders, Panel Disconnects, distribution panels and
circuit breakers shall be sized and equipped to support at least 100% expanded load
requirements.
The Contractor shall provide and install all required primary power distribution sourced
from the distribution panels. The Contractor shall also be responsible for Load Balancing.
The Contractor is responsible for all inter-rack (enclosure) and intra-rack (enclosure) power
distribution required to support equipment supplied under this specification. The
Contractor shall provide all cabling, fusing, switching and circuit breaker and surge
protection required.
Partially equipped subsystems shall be installed with provision for expansion. Equipment
power supplies provided under this specification, shall be sized to support fully equipped
subsystems. Primary power distribution protection shall be sized to support and protect
maximum operating load potential whether or not the actual projected load shall meet
that maximum load potential.
The Contractor shall provide equipment and rack safety earthing in compliance with this
specification.

Page 42 of 83
11.17. EQUIPMENT CONSTRUCTION, ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION
All equipment supplied under this specification shall be constructed, assembled and
installed in accordance with the following requirements:
11.17.1. Identification
All cabling, racks/enclosures, equipment, modules and materials shall be uniquely

identifiable as per the following:
11.17.1.1.Equipment
Each equipment component to the level of printed circuit card, shall be clearly marked
with the manufacturer's part number, serial number, month/year of manufacture and
revision level. Changes to components shall be identified by an unambiguous change to the
marked revision level. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the master
revision level list until the Contractor has complied with all requirements of this
specification.
Where custom components and parts are provided, each component/part shall be marked
to specifically identify that component/part. Printed circuit card cages are defined as an
equipment component and as such, shall be clearly identified as stated within this
specification.
Equipment chassis and printed circuit card cages having wired backplanes, shall be clearly
marked with the manufacturer's part number, serial number, month/year of manufacture,
revision level and an additional identifier corresponding directly to the applicable
backplane wiring diagram/list.
11.17.1.2.Power Distribution
Power distribution panels shall be clearly marked with their unique identifier, source feed
information, and remote source feed emergency disconnect location and identity.
Power distribution panel "Main Disconnect" and circuit breakers shall be clearly marked
with a unique identifier. Circuit breaker feed lists shall be clear, accurate and the feed list

Page 43 of 83
information shall be posted inside each distribution panel door. Wiring diagram also
posted outside the panel door.
Inter-rack and intra-rack (enclosure) power distribution shall be clearly identified with
source feed, voltage and power rating information. All power feed cabling shall be clearly
identified near the point of termination.
All power distribution identification shall utilize heat-resistant permanent marking

techniques such as stamped non-metallic tags, embossed labels, etc. Marking techniques
are subject to approval by the Employer. Power distribution identifiers and information
shall agree with the Contractor's power cable plant drawings.
11.17.1.3.Signal Cabling
Connectorised signal cabling/wiring requires marking with a unique identifier at each

connectorised end. The signal cable/wire identifier shall include a cable identifier and the
location of both terminations.
Signal cable/wiring installed on terminal blocks requires marking with the cable identifier
and distant end location. The cable tag shall be clearly visible at the cable fanout point.
All signal cable, wiring and terminations shall be clearly labelled/tagged with identifiers
consistent with Contractor supplied cable plant records. Marking techniques are subject to
approval by the Employer.
11.17.1.4.Equipment Racks and Enclosures
All equipment racks, enclosures and equipment, including distribution frames, shall be
clearly labelled with unique identifiers consistent with Contractor supplied floor plans and
rack elevations.
11.17.2. Installation Hardware
Equipment racks, enclosures, cable raceways and installation hardware shall, at a

minimum, comply with the following requirements:

Page 44 of 83
11.17.2.1.Equipment Sub-Racks and Cabinets (Enclosures)
All equipment provided under this specification, shall be physically mounted in sub-racks
and cabinets (enclosures). The Contractor shall determine and propose for the Employer
approval, the type, size, weight and manner of installation for each location.
Selection of equipment sub-racks and cabinets (enclosures) shall meet the following
requirements:
A. Equipment SubRack Construction
Equipment Sub Racks provided for installation in environmentally controlled facilities, shall
meet the following minimum requirements:
1. Equipment Sub Racks shall be steel/aluminium fabricated and finished on all surfaces.
All metal and welds shall be thoroughly cleaned and sanded to obtain a smooth finish.
All sub rack bolts are fastened using cage bolts All surfaces shall be treated for rust and
primed to form a bond between metal and the finish coats of paint.
2. Equipment covers shall be provided for exposed components mounted inequipment

sub Racks.
3. Dust and moisture protection shall meet or exceed IP20 standards.
B. Equipment Cabinet (Enclosure) Construction
i. Equipment cabinets (enclosures) shall be steel/ steel & Aluminium extrusion

fabricated and finished on all surfaces. All metal and welds shall be thoroughly
cleaned and sanded to obtain a smooth finish. All surfaces shall be treated for rust
and primed to form a bond between metal and the finish coats of paint.
ii. Equipment cabinets (enclosures) shall be designed free-standing but shall be

mounted to the floor. Cabinets (enclosures) shall have secure fitting, lockable, full-
length front doors for access to hardware and wiring. Equipment covers for exposed
components mounted inside cabinets are not required unless specifically
recommended.

Page 45 of 83
iii. All doors and removable panels shall be fitted with long life rubber beading. All
panels shall be fabricated from minimum 2.0mm thickness steel sheet. However, for
racks with load bearing Aluminium extrusion frame, door panels and side panels may
be fabricated from minimum 1.6mm thickness steel sheet and the top & bottom
panels shall be fabricated from minimum 2.0mm thickness steel sheet.
iv. Equipment cabinets (enclosures) shall be dust and moisture-proof as per IP41
specification, or better.
11.17.2.2.Cable Raceways
The Contractor is required to provide and install all additional necessary indoor and
outdoor cable raceways. The cable raceways shall be in conformance with the following:
1) Signal cabling and power cabling shall require separate cable raceways. Signal and
power cabling shall not share the same raceways and shall be installed as far apart as
is practical. Adequate shielding shall be provided as required.
2) All cable raceways shall be sized to support full loading requirements plus at least a
200% safety loading factor.
3) Outdoor cable raceways shall be of corrugated construction and shall be fitted with
solid covers overlapping all sides of the cable raceways.
4) Outdoor cable raceways shall be fabricated from construction grade aluminum,

galvanized iron or anodized sheet metal or any other suitable material approved by
the Employer. Suitable anti-corrosion measures shall be taken. Steel fabricated
raceways shall be finished inside and out, treated to resist rust and to form a metal-to-
paint bond.
5) Indoor cable raceways fabricated of aluminum or galvanized iron, shall not normally
need special finishing or painting, unless otherwise stipulated by the Employer. Steel
fabricated raceways shall require a red oxide primer coat at a minimum.

Page 46 of 83
11.17.3. Signaling Distribution
The Contractor shall be responsible for all signal wiring associated with furnished
equipment in accordance with the following:
i. All signal wiring connections to the communications equipment shall be via Krone type
or equivalent terminal blocks.
ii. The Contractor shall provide subscriber level wiring and patching wherever required.
11.17.4. Lightning and Transient Voltage Protection
The Contractor shall be required to provide protection from lightning and transient
voltages for all wideband communications equipment, in accordance with the following:
i. At the outside cable plant point-of-entry of all cabling penetrations for all cabling
installed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall provide lightning and transient voltage
isolation for the inside plants cabling, wiring, and all terminations and equipment.
ii. All equipment installed under this specification that requires 240VAC primary power,
shall be surge protected.
11.17.5. Station Safety Earthing and Signal Grounding
For each facility, the Contractor is responsible for meeting the following substation and
equipment terminal earthing requirements:
i. All safety earthing and signal grounding shall be in full compliance with EMI/EMC
requirements as per relevant international standards
ii. Each cabinet (enclosure) or cabinet (enclosure) group shall include suitable signal
ground and safety earth networks. The signal ground network shall terminate at a
separate signal ground stud connection isolated from safety earth.
iii. Each earth/ground network shall utilize copper bus bars, copper braids and/or 16
sqmm or bigger earth cable. All equipment earth/ground connections shall be made
directly to the equipment chassis utilizing grounding lugs and secured metal-to-metal

Page 47 of 83
with star washers. Use of the enclosure frame, skin or chassis mounting hardware as
part of the earthing/grounding networks, is not acceptable.
iv. The safety earth network shall be connected to "earth ground" at the safety earth
stud. The earth stud connection shall be sized for an external earthing cable equipped
with a 2/0 solid copper lug secured metal-to-metal with star washers. Primary AC
feeds and distribution within enclosures requires earthing wire connection to the
safety earth stud.
v. The safety earth and signal ground networks shall be inter-connected only at the
safety earth stud and signal ground stud.
The Contractor shall extend the existing station earth to the equipment room using
suitable G.I. earthing strip (50 x 6 mm), wherever required. .
The Contractor is responsible for providing all required earthing/grounding cable and
installation. Cabinet (Enclosure) and equipment safety earthing and signal grounding shall
be subject to the Employer’s approval.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the suitability of existing station earth
for the equipment to be supplied under this contract. In case existing earthing
arrangement at the site is not adequate, the Contractor shall either make improvement in
the existing earthing arrangement or make new earthing as per requirement.
11.17.6. Interconnections
All power and signal cabling between component units of the communications systems
shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor and shall be shown on contractor-supplied
as-built drawings.
The Contractor shall supply and install all primary power cords, powerstrips, receptacles,
circuit breakers, fuse panels, switches, earth fault detectors, surge protectors, distribution
cabling, and power connectors required to support all equipment enclosures and system
components furnished and installed under this specification, except as specifically
excluded.

Page 48 of 83
Plug-type power connectors with captive fastening (such as "Twist-Lock") shall be used for
interconnection of source power to the equipment enclosures or racks.
Plug-type connectors with captive fasteners (ie. DB-25, etc) shall be used for the
interconnection of all inter and intra-enclosure signalling cable.
11.17.7. Finish Colors
Unless otherwise specified, finish colors for enclosures shall be gloss white enamel on the
inside, and semi-gloss medium grey enamel on the outside. Only brushed aluminum trim
shall be used. Employer reserves the right to approve the proposed color scheme.
11.18. LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, CABLE ROUTES AND ASSOCIATED CIVIL WORKS
During the Site Surveys, the Contractor shall determine and propose locations for all
equipment to be supplied under this contract. Further, the Contractor shall locate and
identify proposed routing for all cabling between all equipment locations including existing
and planned equipment not provided under this contract, but required to be connected
under the scope of this contract. This subsection defines the requirements and clarifies the
responsibilities of the Employer and the Contractor regarding equipment siting, intra and
inter facility interconnectivity and necessary associated civil works.
11.18.1. Locations for Supplied Equipment
All transmission equipment and associated DDFs and MDFs, shall generally be colocated in
the same communications room located in the Control Building whenever possible.
11.18.2. Associated Civil Works
The Contractor shall provide all required minor civil works necessary for full connectivity as
required in the Contractor’s scope of work as follows:
i. All wall and floor penetrations necessary for the installation of all cabling to be
performed in accordance with the requirements of this specification.
ii. Installation of racks, cabinets, cable raceways, and cabling supplied as part of this
contract.

Page 49 of 83
11.18.3. Cable Trenches
A network of cable trenches and/or ducts may exist at some sites but shall require
expansion and/or new construction at some stations. It shall be a responsibility of the
contractor to cooperate fully with the Employer and all other on-going project contractors
in the planning and efficient use of existing and new cable trenches. The existing cable
trenches/ cable raceways proposed to be used shall be identified in the survey report. The
contractor shall make its best effort to route the cable through the existing available cable
trenches. Where suitable existing cable trenches are not available, suitable alternatives
shall be proposed for Employer approval. The Employer shall provide any additional cable
trenches required for such approved alternatives.
It may be noted that in order to utilise the existing trenches, the Contractor supplied cables
may be required to be co-located with LV cables. Accordingly, the contractor shall ensure
that selection and installation of cables is suitable for the purpose. The contractor shall be
responsible for new building penetrations required for supplied cabling. Caution shall be
taken to ensure existing equipment and site personnel are protected from dust and debris
incident to the cable penetration work. Penetration shall be neatly formed and sealed for
protection from moisture, dust wind and vermin intrusion.
All required fitting, supports, accessories, ducts, inner ducts, conduits, riser and any item
not specially mentioned but required for lay and installation of cables in trenches shall be
supplied and installed by the Contractor.
ANNEXTURE 10 (c): Inspection, Test and Availability
All materials furnished and all work performed under this Contract shall be inspected and
tested. Deliverables shall not be shipped until all required inspections and tests have been
completed, and all deficiencies have been corrected to comply with this Specification and
approved for shipment by the Employer.
Except where otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide all manpower and materials
for tests, including testing facilities, logistics, power and instrumentation, and replacement

Page 50 of 83
of damaged parts. The costs shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be
included in the contract price.
The entire cost of testing for factory & site acceptance, routine tests, production tests and
other test during manufacture & site activities specified herein shall be treated as included
in the quoted unit price of materials, except for the expenses of Inspector/Employer’s
representative.
Acceptance or waiver of tests shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility to
furnish material in accordance with the specifications.
All tests shall be witnessed by the Employer and/or its authorized representative
(hereinafter referred to as the Employer) unless the Employer authorizes testing to
proceed without witness. The Employer representative shall sign the test form indicating
approval of successful tests.
Should any inspections or tests indicate that specific item does not meet Specification
requirements, the appropriate items shall be replaced, upgraded, or added by the
Contractor as necessary to correct the noted deficiencies at no cost to the Employer. After
correction of a deficiency, all necessary retests shall be performed to verify the
effectiveness of the corrective action.
The Employer reserves the right to require the Contractor to perform, at the Employer's
expense, any other reasonable test(s) at the Contractor's premises, on site, or elsewhere in
addition to the specified Type, Acceptance, Routine, or Manufacturing tests to assure the
Employer of specification compliance.
All security related features shall be demonstrated during FAT/SAT as required by the
Employer.
11.19. Augmentation and integration work related to Communication System.
The existing FO communication link exists between Inaruwa-Dhalkebar(New)-

Hetauda(new) Substations to the LDC Kathmandu. Data and voice communications from
various substations and power houses flow to LDC in Inaruwa-Dhalkebar(New)-

Page 51 of 83
Hetauda(new) Substations to the LDC Kathmandu. The scope of work for supply,
installation of approach optical fibre (as per requirement from JB to ODF box), Optical Line
Termination Equipment, Digital Multiplexer, hardware accessories etc at Dhunge Sangu
and its integration work at Dhunge Sangu & LDC Kathmandu for onward transmission of
Data and Voice communication upto LDC Kathmandu is included in the Contract.
For Voice Communication, Necessary subscriber interface cards has to be supplied for
subscription to PABX at Basantapur/Tumlingtar/Baneshwar and PABX details will be
provided to the contractor during detailed engineering stage.
11.20. INSPECTION
Access to the Contractor's facilities during system manufacturing and testing and to any
facility where systems/ equipment are being produced/ tested/ integrated for the fibre
optic communication network, shall be available to the Employer. At all times the Employer
shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of such materials or equipment. To
facilitate this, the Contractor shall submit for the Employer approval, a comprehensive
Quality Assurance Plan using ISO 9000 as a general guideline. In addition, the Quality
Assurance Plan shall satisfy the following:
1. Sufficient office facilities, equipment, and documentation necessary to complete all

inspections and to verify that the equipment is being fabricated and maintained in
accordance with the Specification shall be provided by the Contractor to the
Employer.
2. Inspections to be performed by the Employer will include visual examination of

hardware, cable dressings and labeling. Contractor's documentation will also be
examined to verify that it adequately identifies and describes all offered items and
spare parts.
3. Access to inspect the Contractor's standards, procedures, and records that are
applicable to the supplied equipment shall be provided to the Employer. Documents

Page 52 of 83
will be inspected to verify that the Contractor has performed the required quality
assurance activities.
4. The inspection rights described above shall also apply to sub Contractors who are
responsible for supplying major components described in this Specification. These
items shall be inspected and tested at the sub Contractor's factory by the Employer's
representatives prior to shipping this equipment to the Contractor's facility or
directly to the Employer.
5. The above inspection rights shall also apply to sub Contractors supplying assemblies,
subassemblies and components. However, such items will normally be inspected and
tested by the Employer's representatives at the Contractor's site before acceptance.
11.21. TEST PLANS AND PROCEDURES
Test plans and test procedures for both factory and site acceptance tests shall be provided
by the Contractor. Test plans and test procedures shall ensure that each factory and site
test is comprehensive and verify all the features of the equipment to be tested. Test plans
and test procedures shall be modular to allow individual test segments to be repeated
upon request.
The Contractor shall submit a Test Schedule for the Employer's approval within one (1)
week after the award of contract for Type Tests and three (3) months after the award of
contract for all other tests. The test schedule shall list the tests to be carried out, and the
approximate test duration. The test periods shall also be indicated in the PERT chart or
equivalent for the work.
The Contractor shall give the Employer twenty one (21) days written notice of any material
being ready for testing. Fifteen days prior to the scheduled testing, the Employer shall
provide written notice to the Contractor of any drawings, equipment, material, or
workmanship which, in the Employer’s opinion, are not compliant to the specification. The
Contractor shall give due consideration to such objections, if valid, effecting the corrections

Page 53 of 83
as necessary or shall prove, in writing, that said modifications are unnecessary for contract
compliance.
11.21.1. Factory and Site Test Plans
A test plan for factory and site acceptance tests shall be submitted for approval, at least
four (4) weeks before the start of testing. The test plan shall be a single overview
document that defines the overall schedule and individual responsibilities associated with
conducting the tests, documenting the test results, and successfully completing the test
criteria. Test Plans shall include, at a minimum, the information contained in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1
Factory & field Test Plan Requirements
Item: Description:
1. Test schedule
2. Record-keeping assignments, procedures and forms
3. Procedures for monitoring, correcting and retesting variances
4. Procedures for controlling and documenting all changes made
to the communications equipment after the start of testing
11.21.2. Test Procedures
Test procedures for factory and site testing shall be submitted for the Employer approval at
least four (4) weeks before each individual test. Fully approved test procedures shall be
submitted to the Employer at least four weeks prior to the commencement of testing.
Testing shall not commence without approved test procedures. At a minimum, test
procedures shall include the items listed in Table 4-2.
All test equipment and/or instruments shall bear calibration stickers indicating valid
calibration on and beyond the testing date. The time lapsed since last calibration shall not
exceed the test equipment/ jig manufacturer recommended calibration interval or the
interval recommended in the test lab’s internal quality procedures.

Page 54 of 83
The Contractor shall ensure that all testing will be performed by qualified testing personnel
well experienced in performing such tests.
Table 4-2
Test Procedure Requirements
Item: Description:
1. Test Title and Revision Level, if applicable
2. List of Standard(s) complied with
3. Function(s) / parameter(s) to be tested
4. Purpose of each test segment
5. List of required test equipment
Description of any special test conditions or special actions required. This
includes complete descriptions, listings and user interface procedures for all
6.
special hardware and software tools and/or display formats to be used during
the test.
7. Test setup including test configuration block diagrams and/or illustrations.
8. Test procedures to be followed.
9. Required inputs and expected outputs for each test segment
10. Acceptance criteria for each test segment.
List of test data to be supplied by the Contractor(s) and copies of any certified
11. data to be used
12. Format of test reports.
11.21.3. Test Records
Complete and indexed records of all factory and site acceptance tests results shall be
maintained and provided to the Employer by the Contractor in hardcopy. The records shall
be keyed to the steps enumerated in the test procedures. The minimal items required in
test records are described in Table 4-3.

Page 55 of 83
Table 4-3
Test Record Requirements
Item: Description:
1. Test Title and Revision Level, if applicable; contract references
2. Date and time for test start and test completed
3. Test title and reference to the appropriate section of the test procedures
4. Description of any special test conditions or special actions taken (Includes
test-case data).
5. Test results for each test segment including an indication of Passed,
Conditional Pass, Incomplete or Failed.
6. Test procedure modifications made during testing.
7. Variance Report(s) tracking information and copies (if variance(s) was
detected).
8. Contractor's test engineer(s) identification, signature and remarks
9. Employer's test witness identification, signature and remarks
10. List of all attachments
11. Attachments (including system logs, printouts, variances, hard copies of visual
test result displays, etc.)
All principle test records, test certificates and performance curves shall be supplied for all
tests carried out as proof of compliance with the specifications and/or each and every
specified test. These test certificates, records and performance curves shall be supplied for
all tests, whether or not they have been witnessed by the Employer within the specified
duration after the completion of test. Information given on such test certificates and
curves shall be sufficient to identify the material or equipment to which the certificates
refer, and shall also bear the Contractor's reference and heading.

Page 56 of 83
11.21.4. Rejection of Elements

Any item or component which fails to comply with the requirements of this Specification in
any respect, at any stage of manufacture, test, erection or on completion at site may be
rejected by the Employer either in whole or part as considered necessary.
Material or components with defects of such a nature that do not meet the requirements
of the Specification by adjustment or modification shall be replaced by the Contractor at
his own expense. After adjustment or modification, the Contractor shall submit the items
to the Employer for further inspection and/or tests.
11.21.5. Test Periods Defined
The terminology used in Volume I, General Conditions of Contract and their correlation
with the tests requirements described within this section is as follows:
Pre-Commissioning & Commissioning Period - The Site Acceptance Test (SAT)
Operational Acceptance - Successful completion of SAT
11.22. TYPE TESTING
"Type Tests" shall be defined as those tests which are to be carried out to prove the design,
process of manufacture and general conformity of the materials to this Specification. Type
Testing shall comply with the following:
a) All equipment being supplied shall conform to type tests as per technical specification.
b) The test reports submitted shall be of the tests conducted within last five (5) years
prior to the date of bid opening. In case the test reports are older than five years (5)
ago on the date of bid opening, the Contractor shall repeat these tests at no extra cost
to the purchaser.
c) The Contractor shall submit, within 30 days of Contract Award, copies of test reports
for all of the Type Tests that are specified in the specifications and that have previously
( before Contract award) been performed. These reports may be accepted by the
Employer only if they apply to materials and equipment that are essentially identical to

Page 57 of 83
those due to be delivered under the Contract and only if test procedures and
parameter values are identical to those specified in this specifications carried out at
accredited labs and witnessed by third party / customer’s representatives.
In the event of any discrepancy in the test reports or any type tests not carried out, same
shall be carried out by Contractor without any additional cost implication to the Employer.
d) Type Tests shall be certified or performed by reputed laboratories using material and
equipment data sheets and test procedures that have been approved by the Employer.
The test procedures shall be formatted as defined in the technical specifications and
shall include a complete list of the applicable reference standards and submitted for
Employer approval at least four (4) weeks before commencement of test(s). The
Contractor shall provide the Employer at least 30 days written notice of the planned
commencement of each type test.
e) The Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule for performing all specified type tests.
These tests shall be performed in the presence of a representative of the Employer.
f) The Contractor shall ensure that all type tests can be completed within the time
schedule offered in his Technical Proposal.
g) In case of failure during any type test, the Supplier is either required to manufacture a
fresh sample lot and repeat all type tests successfully or repeat that particular type
test(s) at least three times successfully on the samples selected from the already
manufactured lot at his own expenses. In case a fresh lot is manufactured for testing
then the lot already manufactured shall be rejected.
11.22.1. Type Test Samples
The Contractor shall supply equipment/material for sample selection only after the Quality
Assurance Plan has been approved by the Employer. The sample material shall be
manufactured strictly in accordance with the approved Quality Assurance Plan. The
Contractor shall submit for Employer approval, the type test sample selection procedure.
The selection process for conducting the type tests shall ensure that samples are selected

Page 58 of 83
at random. At least three samples of each of the proposed equipment shall be offered for
selection, out of which one sample for each equipment shall be selected.
11.22.2. List of Type Tests
The type testing shall be conducted on the following equipment
1. SDH Equipment with all types of cards (optical card, Tributary card or any other
equipment as part of repeater less links)
2. Primary Multiplexer & Drop – Insert Multiplexer with subscriber interface card
11.22.2.1.List of type test to be conducted on Telecom equipment
The type tests for SDH Equipment with all types of cards, Primary Multiplexer & Drop –
Insert Mux with subscriber interface card are described below:
11.22.2.1.1. Temperature and Humidity Tests
The tests listed below are defined in IEC Publication 60068.
1. Low Temperature Test: Operation to Specifications
Low temperature tests shall be conducted as defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-1, test
method Ad, with the following specifications:
I. Test Duration: The equipment is started up as soon as thermal equilibrium has been
reached and operated for sixteen (16) hours. Its performance is checked during the
test.
II. Degree of Severity: Test shall be done at 0°C
III. Acceptance Criteria: No degradation of performance during and after the test.
2. Low Temperature Test : Operation without Damage
Low temperature tests shall be conducted as defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-1, test
method Ad, with the following specifications:

Page 59 of 83
reached and operated for 72 hours. Its performance is checked during the test and
after the test as soon as the thermal equilibrium is reached at the room temperature
(Post-test).
II. Degree of Severity: Test shall be done at -10° C
III. Acceptance Criteria: Degradation of performance is allowable during the test,

however there shall be no degradation of performance in the post-test.
3. Dry Heat Test: Operation to Specifications
Dry heat test shall be done as defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-2, test method Bd, with
the following specifications:
reached and operated for 96 hours. Its performance is checked during the test.
II. Degree of Severity: As per table 5-1: operation to specification range.
III. Acceptance Criteria: No degradation of performance during and after the test.
4. Dry Heat Test: Operation without Damage
Dry heat tests shall be done as defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-2, test method Bd, with
reached and operated for 96 hours. Its performance is checked during the test and
after the test as soon as the thermal equilibrium is reached at the room temperature
(Post-test).
II. Degree of Severity: Test shall be done at 55ºC.
III. Acceptance Criteria: Degradation of performance is allowable during the test,

however there shall be no degradation of performance in the post-test.

Page 60 of 83
5. Damp Heat Test
Damp heat testing reveals aging with respect to the humidity level and applies basically to
electronic equipment. This test shall be done as defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-3 with
reached and operated for 10 days. Its performance is checked during the test.
II. Acceptance Criteria: The equipment shall meet the specified requirement and there
shall not be any degradation in BER.
6. Temperature Variation Test
Temperature variation testing shall be as per IEC Publication 60068-2-14 (Gradual

Variations, Method Nb). The equipment shall be powered on and various parameters shall
be monitored continuously during the test period.
I. Number of cycles required is five (5)
II. The degree of severity: temperature TL:0°C, TH: As per table 5-1 (Operation to
specification range)
III. Cycle duration for each temperature is three (3) hours.
IV. Ramp: 1 oC/minute.
V. Acceptance Criteria: The equipment shall meet the specified requirement and there
shall not be any degradation in BER.
11.22.2.1.2. Power Supply and EMI/EMC tests
The test procedure and acceptance criteria shall be as defined in IEC 60870-2-1.
A. Immunity Tests
The list of Immunity tests are specified below in Table 4-4:
Table 4-4: Recommended Immunity Tests

Page 61 of 83
S.NO Immunity Test AC Power DC Power Control & Telecom Para-metres

. Supply Supply Signal Line
1 Voltage
Yes Yes N/A N/A Table 11 of
Fluctuations
IEC 60870-2-1:
1995 - Level :
2 Voltage dips
1
and Yes Yes N/A N/A
Interruptions
3 1.2/50 - 8/20 μs
Yes Yes Yes N/A
surges
4 Fast transient
Table 12 of
bursts Yes Yes Yes Yes
IEC 60870-2-1:
1995 - Level :
5 Damped
4
oscillatory
waves Yes Yes Yes Yes
6 10/700 μs
surges N/A N/A N/A Yes
7 Electrostatic Table 13 of
discharge IEC 60870-2-1:
Yes
1995 - Level :
4

Page 62 of 83

8 Power Yes Table 14 of

frequency IEC 60870-2-1:
magnetic field 1995
- Level : 4
9 Damped
Yes
oscillatory
magnetic field
10 Radiated Table 15 of
electromagnetic IEC 60870-2-1:
Yes
field 1995 - Level :
4
11 Power IEC 61000-4-

Frequency 16 : 2002-07
voltage on Level : 4
N/A N/A Yes Yes
control and
signal lines

Page 63 of 83

12 DC voltage on IEC 61000-4-

control and 16
signal lines : 2002-07
N/A N/A Yes N/A Lev
el :
4
-End of Table-
B. Emission Tests
The list of Emission tests are specified below in Table 4-5
Table 4-5:
Recommended Emission Tests
S. NO. Emission test AC DC Control Telecom Para-
Power Power & Line metres
Supply Supply Signal

Page 64 of 83
Table 4-5:
Recommended Emission Tests
S. NO. Emission test AC DC Control Telecom Para-
Power Power & Line metres
Supply Supply Signal
Table 17 of
1 LF disturbance IEC 60870-
voltages 2-1: 1995 -
CCITT N/A Yes N/A N/A Class : B
recommendation
P.53
2 RF disturbance
voltages Yes Yes N/A N/A
CISPR 22
3 RF disturbance
currents N/A N/A N/A Yes
CISPR 22
4 RF radiated fields
CISPR 22 Yes
-End Of Table-
C. Insulation Withstand Voltages
As per section 6 of IEC 870-2-1. Recommended class: VW1 of Table 18.

Page 65 of 83
11.22.2.1.3. Mechanical Tests

A. Mechanical Vibration Test
The procedure for this test is described in IEC Publication 60068-2-6. The testing procedure
shall be carried out in the sequence 8.1 + 8.2.1 + 8.1 as described in document 60068-2-6.
For the vibration response investigation (clause 8.1 of 60068-2-6), the test shall be carried
out over a sweep cycle under the same conditions as for the endurance test (described
later), but the vibration amplitude and the sweep rate may be decreased below these
conditions so that the determination of the response characteristics can be obtained.
The endurance test conditions are selected according to the vibration withstand
requirements.
Transportation tests shall be performed with the equipment packed according to the
Contractor's specifications.
B. Shock Test
The procedure of this test is defined in IEC Publication 60068-2-27 (each test) with a semi-
sinusoidal shape (clause 3.1.1.2).
The recommended severity shall be A = 294 m/s2, D = 18 ms. Three shocks per axis per
direction shall be applied to the equipment packed according to the Contractor's
specifications.
Or Free Fall Test
This test could be performed as an alternative to the shock or Bump test. The procedure is
defined in IEC publication 60068-2-32. The equipment shall be packed according to the
Contractor's specifications. The drop height shall be defined in accordance with IEC 68-2-
32. The surface of the packing case which comes into contact with the ground is the
surface on which the packing case normally rests; if the packing does not have any features
(inscription, special shape, etc.) identifying this surface, the test is carried out successively
on all the surfaces of the packing.

Page 66 of 83
Or Bump Test
This test could be performed as an alternative to Shock test or Free Fall test. The procedure
is defined in IEC 60068-2-29.
11.23. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS
Factory acceptance tests shall be conducted on randomly selected final assemblies of all
equipment to be supplied. Factory acceptance testing shall be carried out on SDH
Equipments, associated line & tributary cards, Termination Equipments (Primary Mux,
Drop/Insert, associated Subscriber Line Interface Cards etc) and all other items for which
price has been identified separately in the Bid Price Schedules.
Equipment shall not be shipped to the Employer until required factory tests are completed
satisfactorily, all variances are resolved, full test documentation has been delivered to the
Employer, and the Employer has issued Material Inspection & Clearance Certificate (MICC).
Successful completion of the factory tests and the Employer approval to ship, shall in no
way constitute final acceptance of the system or any portion thereof. These tests shall be
carried out in the presence of the Employer's authorised representatives unless waiver for
witnessing by Employer’s representatives is intimated to the contractor.
Factory acceptance tests shall not proceed without the prior delivery to and approval of all
test documentation by the Employer.
The factory acceptance test shall demonstrate the technical characteristics of the
equipment in relation to this specifications and approved drawings and documents. List of
factory acceptance tests for Fibre Optic Transmission system, Termination Equipment Sub-
system and NMS are given in specified Tables in this section. This list of factory acceptance
tests shall be supplemented by the Contractor's standard FAT testing program. The factory
acceptance tests for the other items shall be proposed by the Contractor in accordance
with technical specifications and Contractor's (including Sub-Contractor's / supplier's)
standard FAT testing program. In general the FAT for other items shall include at least:

Page 67 of 83
Physical verification, demonstration of technical characteristics, various operational

modes, functional interfaces, alarms and diagnostics etc.
For Test equipment & clock, FAT shall include supply of proper calibration certificates,
demonstration of satisfactory performance, evidence of correct equipment configuration
and manufacturer’s final inspection certificate/ report.
11.23.1. Sampling for FAT
From each batch of equipment presented by the Contractor for Factory acceptance testing,
the Employer shall select random sample(s) to be tested for acceptance. Unless otherwise
agreed, all required FAT tests in the approved FAT procedures, shall be performed on all
samples. The Sampling rate for the Factory acceptance tests shall be minimum 10% of the
batch size (minimum 1) for all items. The physical verification shall be carried out on 100%
of the offered quantities as per the approved FAT procedure. In case any of the selected
samples fail, the failed sample is rejected and additional 20% samples shall be selected
randomly and tested. In case any sample from the additional 20% also fails the entire
batch may be rejected. In case a number of equipments are required for demonstration of
the performance of any equipment during FAT, the sample size shall be taken as that
number of equipments which are necessary to demonstrate the performance, irrespective
of the percentage.
Since FAT testing provides a measure of assurance that the Quality Control objectives are
being met during all phases of production, the Employer reserves the right to require the
Contractor to investigate and report on the cause of FAT failures and to suspend further
testing/ approvals until such a report is made and remedial actions taken, as applicable.
11.23.2. Production Testing
Production testing shall mean those tests which are to be carried out during the process of
production by the Contractor to ensure the desired quality of end product to be supplied
by him. The production tests to be carried out at each stage of production shall be based
on the Contractor’s standard quality assurance procedures. The production tests to be

Page 68 of 83
carried out shall be listed in the Manufacturing Quality Plan (MQP), alongwith information
such as sampling frequency, applicable standards, acceptance criteria etc.
Table 4-6:
Factory Acceptance Testing for Fibre Optic Transmission System
Item: Description:
1. Physical inspection for conformance to DRS, BOQ, drawings and
appearance of equipment
2. Optical output power
3. Transmitter lightwave spectral analysis
4. Low receive level threshold
5. Generation of bit error rate curve
6. Measurement of analog and digital service channel parameters as well as
service channel functionality
7. Performance of supervision, alarm, Craftsperson interface, diagnostics,
loop backs etc.
8. Electrical interface tests which include: output and input jitter, bit error
rate, pulse shape, cable compensation, and line rate tolerance for
multiplexers
9. At a minimum tests on Ethernet interface shall include demonstration of
ping test, throughput test, Latency test, Packet Loss test as per RFC 2544
11. Simulation of failure conditions and failover of each redundant unit.
12. Test of spare card slots
13. Checks of power supply/converter voltage margins
14. Random inspections to verify the accuracy of documentation
15. Test of spare parts/modules/cards as per applicable tests

Page 69 of 83
Table 4-7
Factory Acceptance Testing Requirements for Termination Equipment
(MUX)
Item Description:
1. Physical Inspection for conformance to DRS, BOQ, drawings and appearance of
equipment
2. Performance of supervision, alarm, control and switching systems, diagnostics,
loopbacks, Craftsperson interface etc.
3. Electrical interface tests which include: output and input jitter, bit error rate,
pulse shape, cable compensation, and line rate tolerance for the channel
banks/low-level multiplexers
4. Framing, signaling, and operational and maintenance tests consistent with
applicable ITU-T requirements
5. Simulation of failure conditions and failover of each redundant unit
6. Test of spare card slots and test of spare parts/modules/cards as per applicable
tests
7. Checks of power supply/converter voltage margins and short circuit and
overvoltage protection
8. Random inspections to verify the accuracy of documentation
Table 4-8
FAT on Craft Terminal
Physical inspection of Craft Terminal hardware for conformance to approved
1.
BoQ, DRS & drawing
2. Testing of Craft Terminal to demonstrate proper operation of all functions

Page 70 of 83
11.24. SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the submission of all equipment & test equipment
supplied in this contract for site tests and inspection as required by the Employer. All
equipment shall be tested on site under the conditions in which it will normally operate.
The tests shall be exhaustive and shall demonstrate that the overall performance of the
contract works satisfies every requirement specified. At a minimum Site Acceptance
Testing requirement for Telecom equipment is outlined in following section. This testing
shall be supplemented by the Contractor's standard installation testing program, which
shall be in accordance with his quality plan(s) for Telecom equipment installation.
During the course of installation, the Employer shall have full access for inspection and
verification of the progress of the work and for checking workmanship and accuracy, as
may be required. On completion of the work prior to commissioning, all equipment shall be
tested to the satisfaction of the Employer to demonstrate that it is entirely suitable for
commercial operation.
11.24.1. Phases for Site Acceptance Testing
The SAT shall be completed in following phases:
11.24.1.1.Installation Testing
The field installation test shall be performed for all equipment at each location. If any
equipment has been damaged or for any reason does not comply with this Specification,
the Contractor shall provide and install replacement parts at its own cost and expense.
In the installation test report, the Contractor shall include a list of all hardware or
components replaced or changed between the completion of factory tests and the start of
field tests and show that documentation and spare parts have been updated.
The minimal installation testing requirements for fiber optic transmission subsystem,
Termination equipment sub-system are provided in respective Tables in this section.

Page 71 of 83
11.24.1.2.Link Commissioning Tests
The commissioning tests shall verify that communication can be performed over the fiber
optic link under test. Delay measurement, Bit Error measurements & service channel
performance monitoring shall be made on the fibre optic links to verify compliance with
designed link performance.
For Ethernet interface: At a minimum the following test requirements shall be

demonstrated as per RFC 2544:
a) Ping test
b) Throughput test
c) Latency test
d) Packet Loss
10% of the total links (Chosen by the Employer, generally to cover links from all
configurations used) shall be tested for a duration of 12 Hours. Rest of the links shall be
tested for 1 Hour. In case a link does not meet the performance requirements during 1
hour, then the duration of the test shall be increased to 12 hours.
In case any link does not meet the performance requirements during 12 hour, then the
cause of failure shall be investigated and the test shall be repeated after rectifying the
defects.
This phase of testing shall be conducted by the Contractor and witnessed by the Employer.
Field adjustments shall be made to meet established standard, however if the field
adjustments fail to correct the defects the equipments may be returned to the Contractor
for replacement at his own expense. In case any adjustments are required to be made
during the interval of the test then the test shall be repeated.
11.24.1.3.Integrated Testing
Prior to commencement of integrated testing the overall system shall be configured as

required to provide all the data and voice channel required to interconnect the various

Page 72 of 83
User’s interfaces. The integrated testing for a batch shall include end-to-end testing of
back-bone network included in that batch. Integrated testing for last batch shall include
testing of the entire back-bone. The intent of integrated testing is to demonstrate that the
equipment is operational end to end under actual conditions, that all variances identified
during factory and field installation and communications testing have been corrected, and
that the communication equipment is compatible with other equipment at all locations.
The Integrated System Test shall include all fibre optic transmission equipment,
termination equipment, the network management subsystem and other components.
At a minimum the following tests shall be included in the integrated testing:
(1) Equipment configuration shall be checked to establish that it supports the channel
routing.
(2) End to end testing of all individual voice circuits
(3) End-to-end testing of all individual Data Circuits.
(4) Demonstration of Protection switching and synchronization of equipment as per

synchronization plan.
Table 4-9
Fibre Optic Transmission system Installation Testing
Item: Description:
1. Physical Inspection for conformance to drawings, rack elevations and
appearance of equipment and cabling
2. Station power supply input and equipment power supply (DC-DC converter)
output voltage measurements
3. Terminal transceiver performance testing (Tx power, Tx spectrum, receive
signal strength, connector losses etc.)
4. Service channel performance
5. Craftsperson interface, alarm and control functional performance
6. Rack and local alarms: No alarms shall be present and all alarms shall be

Page 73 of 83
demonstrated to be functional
7. Network management interface and supervision performance
8. Correct configuration, level setting & adjustments and termination of Input/
output interfaces
9. Proper establishment of Safety and signalling earthing system and resistance
to ground to be checked.
10. Simulation of failure conditions and failover of protected components.
Table 4-10
Termination Equipment Sub-system Installation Testing
Item: Description:
1. Physical Inspection for conformance to drawings, rack elevations and
2. Power supply/converter voltage measurements
3. Muldem performance testing
4. Craftsperson interface, alarm and control functional performance
5. Rack and Local alarms
6. Network management interface and supervision performance
7. Channel performance
8. Safety and signalling earthing system
9. Simulation of failure conditions and failover of protected components.
Table 4-11
NMS Installation Testing (if Applicable)
Item: Description:
1. Physical inspection for conformance to drawings, rack elevations and
2. Workstation hardware inventory, configuration and characteristics

Page 74 of 83
3. Demonstration of proper operation of all hardware, including workstations

peripherals
11.25. MANADATORY SPARES
Mandatory Spares to be supplied as per the recommendation of the manufacturer and the
cost for equipment to be quoted including the mandatory spares.

Page 75 of 83
Package KC2: Koshi Corridor Substations
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/71/72-2 Part II-Section VI: Employer’s Requirements
ANNEXTURE 10 (d): Tentative Bill of Quantities for Fiber Optic Based Communication
Equipments
132/33 kV S/S in
S.No. Item Description Unit Dhunge Sangu
(Taplejung District)
1.0 Transmission Equipment
A SDH Equipment ( STM - 1 upgradable
to STM-4 ADM, upto two directions)
(I) Base Equipment (Common cards,
Cross-connect/control cards, Optical
base card, Power supply cards, power
cabling, other hardware & accessories No. 1
including sub-racks, patch cords, DDF
etc. fully equipped excluding (II) and
(III) below)
(III) Optical Line Interface card and SFPs
(Minimum 4 interfaces per card)(to 1
support minimum 40 kms)**
(IV) Tributary Cards
(a) E1 Interface card (Minimum 16
No. 2
interfaces per card )
(b) Ethernet interfaces 10/100 Mbps with
Layer-2 switching (Minimum 4 No. 1
interfaces per card.)
2.0 Termination Equipment
Drop/Insert Multiplexer
A1 Base Equipment (Common cards, No. 2
Power supply cards, power cabling,

Page 76 of 81
132/33 kV S/S in
other hardware & accessories
including sub-racks, etc. fully
equipped excluding subscriber line
interface cards)
A2 Subscriber Line Interface Cards
2 wire (sub/sub) voice channel cards
a) No. 1
(min 8 channels per card)
2 wire (sub/exchange) voice channel
No. 1
b) cards (min 8 channels per card)
4 wire (E&M) voice channel cards
c) No. 1
(min 8 channels per card)
Asynchronous Sub Channels data
d) No. 1
cards (minimum 4 channels per card)
e) Synchronous data card (NX64kbps) No. 1
3.0 Equipment Cabinets
a) For Drop/Insert Multiplexer No. 1
b) For SDH Equipment No. 1
4.0 TMN – Craft Terminal for SDH & PDH
Equipments
(a) Hardware Set* -
(b) Software Set* -
5.0 Synchronization Equipment
GPS clock including all hardware &
Set -
accessories
6.0 Main Distribution Frame No. 1

Page 77 of 81
132/33 kV S/S in
(100 pairs)
7.0 FODP
FODP (minimum 24 Fibres) : Indoor
Type, rack mounted with FCPC No. 1
coupling and pig tails
8.0 Fibre Optic approach cable
(a) 24 Fibre (DWSM –G.652D) Km. 0.5
(b) Installation hardware set for above 24
Set *** 1
Fibre, Fibre Optic Approach Cable
9.0 Teleprotection Modules Set 2
Note# :Optical interface/SFP can be provided with Optical base card or Control card with the
condition that control card shall not be equipped with more than one Optical
interface/SFP and optical card with not more than two Optical interface/SFP.
However main and protection channel shall be terminated on separate cards
Note** : Suitable Optical Interface Card(s) or any other solution such as SDH equipment with
optical amplifier, wavelength translator or higher aggregate bit rate SDH equipment
may be offer for the lengths to meet the link budget requirements without
repeater.
Note*: Set shall include all required hardware/software for complete TMN –Craft Terminal
system as specified in technical specifications.
Note ***: One set of installation hardware shall contain all installation hardware fittings as
may be required for 1 km of Approach Fibre Optic cable.
Data Requirement Sheets

Page 78 of 81
The following sets of Data Requirement Sheets are required to be filled up by the bidders to
aid in the evaluation process. The response shall be brief and to the point and shall be
supported by the printed product description and other literature. The DRS duly filled and
the relevant drawings shall also be submitted during the detailed engineering along with the
relevant technical brochures.
DRS Form 01
DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for

OPTICAL LINE TERMINATION EQUIPMENT (OLTE)
Manufacturer:_________________________________
Model #: _________________________________
GENERAL OLTE FEATURES

As per Technical As per Bidder Offering
Seq Parameter: Specification
1. SDH hierarchy level: STM-1
Capacity Aggregate Bit-rate: 155 Mbps
CEPT E-1 Ports: 63 x E1

2. Minimum No. of protected
(MSP) directions Two
3. No. of E1 ports in E1 tributary minimum 16

Page 79 of 81
cards
4. No. of ethernet ports in minimum 4
Ethernet interface
tributary cards
5. Service Channel provision Yes
a) Voice Channel Minimum 1
b) Data Channel Minimum 1
6.
Power Supply cards of SDH 1:1 APS or distributed
equipment power supply
1:1 APS
Common Control* Card of SDH
equipment
* = Common Control Cards which are essentially required for the operation of the
equipmentDRS Form 02
DATA REQUIREMENTS SHEETS for
Primary Multiplexer/Drop & Insert Multiplexer
Manufacturer:
____________
_____________
Model #:
____________
_________________
Configuration:

Page 80 of 81
As per Technical As per Bidder

Seq. Parameter
Specification Offering
1. Output Aggregate Rate 2.048 Mbps
+/- 50 ppm
2. Interface Code HDB3
3. Impedance 75 ohm
unbalanc
ed
4. Maximum Insertion Loss 6 dB
5. Power Supply card of multiplexer 1:1 APS or
distributed power
supply
The detailed DRS for all equipments/items are required to be submitted along with
brochures during detailed engineering.

Page 81 of 81
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER – 12
A.C. Distribution Board

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 12
A.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD
CONTENTS
12.0 SCOPE 1
12.1 STANDARDS 1
12.2 DESCRIPTION 3
12.4 PAINTING 9
12.5 BUS – BAR , SWITCHING DEVICES & CONNECTIONS 10
12.6 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS ( MCCB) 11
12.7 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB) 12
RESIDUAL CURRENT – OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCB) / 12
12.8
EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (ELCB )
12.9 FUSE HOLDER /BASE 13
12.10 FUSES 13
12.11 INTERNAL WIRING 14
12.12 NAME PLATE 14
12.13 DRAWINGS & LITERATURE 14
12.14 TESTING & INSPECTION 15

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 12
A.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD
12.0 SCOPE
inspection and testing at manufacturer’s works, packing, supply & delivery, Testing &
commissioning of 415 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire, AC distribution switch boards cubical in-
door type complete with all materials, accessories and fittings, erection &
132/33 kV substations at Dhunge Sangu in Nepal.
12.0.3 Any material and equipments not specifically stated in this specification but which
12.0.5 The performance of the equipment shall be guaranteed as per Section-V
“Guaranteed and Other Technical Particulars”. The bidder has to furnish the testing
facilities available at the manufacturer’s works.
12.1 STANDARDS
12.1.1 The equipment covered by this specification shall confirm to the provisions of the
following Indian/International standards as amended up to date except where
specified otherwise in this specification. IS: 1248- 1993- Direct acting indicating
analogue electrical Maintaining instruments and their accessories:-

Page 1 of 18
TABLE-12.1.1
S.No. IS Code Description
1. IS: 722 Electricity meters.
2. IS: 8623 Specifications for factory built assemblies of Switchgear
and control gear for voltage up to and including 1000 V
AC & 1200 V DC.
3. IS: 4237 General requirements for switch gear and Control gear
for voltage not exceeding 1000 volts.
4. IS: 2147 Degree of protection provided enclosure for low

voltage Switchgear and control gear.
5. IS: 2516(Part-II Sec-I) Air circuit breaker.
6. IS: 3156 Voltage transformer.
7. IS: 2705 Current transformer.
8. IS: 4064 Air break switches.
9. IS: 9224 Low voltage fuses.
10. IS: 6875 Switches & Push buttons
11. IS: 6005 Code of practice for phosphating of Iron & Steel.
12. IS: 2633 Hot dip galvanizing.
13. IS: 375 - Marketing and arrangements of bus-bars
14. IS: 5082 Electrical grade aluminum E 912.
15. IS:1248 -1993 Direct acting indicating analogue electrical Maintaining
instrument and their accessories
The Equipment and material meeting the requirement of any other Indian standards
or internationally recognized standards which ensure a quality equal or better than
the standard mentioned above shall also be acceptable. Where the equipment
confirms to any other standards then salient points of difference between the
standards adopted and those prescribed in these specifications shall be clearly

Page 2 of 18
brought out in the bid and a copy of the applicable standards shall also be enclosed
by the bidder with the bid.
12.2 DESCRIPTION
12.2.1 The LT Distribution Board shall be fed from 400 KVA, 33kV/415 V distribution
transformer.
12.2.2 Tentatively the following minimum feeders shall be required from the AC
Distribution Board, and each shall be suitably rated as per requirement.
a. Incoming from 400 kVA, 33 kV/415 V, Station Transformer 4 wire, 3 phase
supply.
b. Incomer from Diesel Generator set.
c. 3 phase, 4 wires supply for oil filtration set.
d. Single phase supply to various 132 kV Circuit Breakers (separate feeders to
each).
e. 3 phase, 4 wires supply for indoor lighting.
f. 3 phase, 4 wires supply for outdoor lighting.
g. 3 phase, 4 wires for transformer Marshalling boxes.
h. 1 phase supply to 33 kV switch gear panel board.
i. 1 phase supply to 132 kV C&R Panels.
j. 1 phase supply to Substation Automation System, HMI, printers etc.
k. 1 phase supply to 132 kV isolator boxes for motor operation.
l. 3 phase, 4 wires feeders for Battery chargers.
m. 1 phase supply for OPGW Communication Panel.
n. 3 phase, 4 wires feeders for each Bay marshalling Kiosk.
o. At least 20% (minimum 1) of each rating as spares.
p. Three phase/single phase supply as per requirement with individual
MCCB/MCB’s to Air conditioning system, CCTV, Fire detection alarm and
control system, etc.
12.2.3 Incoming from transformer shall be provided with the following:
a. 630 A, MCCB (with adjustable setting) with O/L & S/C releases

Page 3 of 18
b. One No. 100 mm dia. flush mounted Ammeter with range 0-600 amp with
phase selector switch.
c. One No. 100 mm dia. flush mounting voltmeter scale range 0-500 V with fuse
and selector switch, along with LED type, indicating lamps before the selector
switch.
d. 600/1 Amp. CTS having burden 25 VA and accuracy class – I
e. One No. 3 phase, 4 wires unbalanced load integrating watt – load meter
operable on 600/1 A CT. Each circuit as indicated above shall have switch
rating and labeling as mentioned their against each and shall include bus-bar
connections, terminals cable glands and legs etc.
f. Bus bar shall be of Aluminum and designed for 630 Amps for phases and 415A
for neutral.
12.2.4 415 V AC switch board cubical type shall consist of feeders as above and shall have
MCB of rating and labeling as per system requirement. It shall include bus-bar
connections terminals, Cable glands and lugs. The aluminum busbar shall be
designed for 630 Amps for phases and 400 Amp for neutral based current density of
85 Amp per sq. cm. The bidder shall design the ratings of MCB/MCCBs’ which shall
be approved by Employer/PMC. The above detail of outgoing feeders is provisional
and is subject to change during detailed engineering.
12.2.5 The A.C. Board shall be fitted with the following accessories:
1. 230 V, AC space heater with MCB and thermostat.
2. Only MCB/MCCBs’ as appropriate shall be provided. No fuses are allowed.
3. All the feeders shall be provided with single phase ammeters. For three
phase supplies an ammeter with selector switch (or in yellow phase only)
shall be provided. Typical ammeter size shall be 70 mm x 70 mm. These
details shall be finalized during detailed engineering.
4. Necessary CTs wherever required for current measurement shall be
provided. The secondary rating of each shall be 1A.
5. Indicating lamps shall be of low wattage typically 2.6 W or less.

Page 4 of 18
6. All the terminals for external cabling shall be suitably rated as per the size of
the external cables.
7. All the indicating instruments, lamps, handles, MCCBs’, MCB’s shall be flush
mounted.
8. Panel shall be indoor, single front, fixed type.
9. Base frame shall be of ISMC-100.
10. Phase clearances shall be as per relevant Indian/Nepal Standard.
11. Panel Paint: will be decided during detailed engineering
12. Interior & mounting plate: Glossy white
13. Bus bars to be colour coded and also the circuits taken from it.
14. Earth bus of 50 x 6 mm2 copper strip shall project out of the panel at both
ends and shall have two holes for earth connections.
15. Control Wiring: 1.5 mm2 copper (48 strands), 2.5 mm2 copper for CTs (48
strands)
16. Power Switch & MCCB shall be door interlocked and shall have pad locking
17. Caution Name Plates for live terminals shall be provided.

12.3.1 415 V Station Supply LT Board
The supply board shall comprise of:
a. Metal enclosed, indoor /outdoor mounted, dust and vermin proof and self
supporting cubicle type made –up of mild steel sections and cold rolled sheet
steel of 2 mm thickness for enclosure and all load bearing members, doors &
fitting plate. The Gland Plate shall be 3 mm thick, sheet steel, with double
compressions, chromium plated brass glands.
b. The board shall be stiffened properly to be free from vibration, twist and
bends. The degree of protection of enclosure to be not less than IP-54 for all
indoor type panels and IP-55 for all outdoor mounted panel or boards
respectively as stipulated by IS: 2147.

Page 5 of 18
c. Requisite number of sheet steel enclosure for mounting circuit breakers,

relays, switches, CTs and other components. Light structural members shall be
jointed preferably by bolting.
d. Separate cable / busbar chambers duly partitioned, removable covers and
metals still frames of single front double access type having feeders located in
the front and vertical bus bars and cable chamber located in the rear.
e. Detachable or hinged type door with handle and locking arrangements and
easy access for inspection and maintenance works.
f. Bottom frame suitable for erection on flush concrete floor by means of evenly
spaced grouting bolts projecting through the base channel members.
g. Necessary facilities for entry of cable from the bottom. No access to any live
part inside the panel to avoid accident. Separate cable support to avoid load
on the thimble of cable as well as on the links.
h. Synthetic rubber Gaskets all round the perimeter of cover, gland plates,
removable covers and doors shall be provided.
i. Eye bolts at the top to facilitate lifting and anti vibration pads between base
frame and panel to prevent vibration.
j. Adequate strength to withstanding all stresses imposed during handling,
transportation, installation and operation without distortion or damage. The
panels shall be assembled to the extent possible within transporting and
handling limitations duly wired up and ready for installation in accordance
with this specification.
k. Each MCB to have separate bus –link wired up to terminal block so that by
removal of link, the outgoing feeder is isolated without removing cable from
the terminals.
l. The minimum component height will be 250 mm form the ground level for
case of maintenance.

Page 6 of 18
m. It must be ensured while designing the switch boards that adequate electrical
clearance as required under the rules shall be provided for the various
components inside the cubical.
12.3.2 Distribution Board
a. The boards shall be fabricated out of best quality cold rolled sheet steel of 2
mm including for doors & sides and shall be fully dust and vermin proof
affording a degree of protection of IP – 54 for indoor DBs and IP 55 for
outdoor DBs as per IS – 2174.
b. Distribution boards shall be provided both hinged door with handle and
looking facility for switch on inter lock facility for switch on interlock of
doors. Doors shall be gasketted all round with neoprene gaskets.
c. All accessible live connections / parts shall be shrouded and it shall possible
to change /replace individual MCB /Fuse units form the front of the board
without danger & coming in to contact with live parts.
d. Adequate interior cabling space and suitable removable type cable entry
plates shall be provided for top/ bottom entry of cable gland plate shall be
supplied undrilled. Necessary number of glands to suit the specified cable
shall be provided. Cable glands shall be screwed on type and made of
chromium plated brass.
e. The DB shall have two earthing terminals for connecting to the stations
earthing.
f. The AC DBs shall be either floor mounted type. Suitable foundations channels
with necessary bolts and nuts shall be provided.
g. The danger board shall be fixed on the front of the door of DBs as per
standards.
h. Wiring inside the panel shall be carried out with 1100 V grade PVC insulated
stranded copper conductors of adequate size on both ends of each wire
engraved identification ferrules shall be provided.

Page 7 of 18
i. Bus bar shall be of copper adequately sized for the specified continuous
current rating such that the maximum temperature of the bus bar and links
does not exceed 750 C.
j. All MCBs /Isolators /switches etc. shall be flush mounted with hinged door
provided with locking arrangement and an inner Bakelite sheet /fibre glass
sheet shall be provided inside such accidental contact.
k. Equipment mounted inside the panel shall be provided with individual labels
with equipment designation /rating. Front of the panel shall be provided with
label engraved with designation of the panel as furnished by the purchaser.
Label shall be made of 3 ply lamicold /engraved PVC having white letters on
black ground. Letter size shall be 4 mm minimum.
l. Terminal blocks shall be 1100 V grade clip on type, moulded in melamine
suitable for terminating incoming cable of suitable size of stranded copper
conductor and outgoing circuits of approved sizes. All the terminals shall be
shrouded, numbered and provided with identification strip for the feeders.
m. MCB’s shall be current limiting type magnetic and thermal release suitable
for manual closing and automatic tripping under fault condition single pole
MCB’s shall have interrupting capacity not less than 10 kA. MCB knob shall
be marked with ON/OFF indication. A trip free release shall be provided to
ensure tripping on fault even if the knob is held in on position to avoid
accidental contact. MCCB shall have adjustable setting, O/L & S.C. releases.
n. Fuses if required shall be HRC cartridge type complete with fuses fittings.
Fuses fittings shall incorporate fully insulated shrouded contacts. Visible
indication of operation of fuses shall be provided. However, Employer/PMC
would not prefer to have fuses instead MCB’s should be provided.
o. The indoor panel shall be finalized during detailed engineering. The inside of
the panel shall be glossy white.

Page 8 of 18
12.4 PAINTING
a. All sheet work shall be phosphate in accordance with following procedure
and in accordance with IS: 6005, code of practice for phosphating iron and
steel, with seven tank process.
b. Oil, grease and dirt shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.
c. Rust and scale shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.
d. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by
washing and running water rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.
e. After phosphating, through rinsing shall be carried out by clean water
followed by final rinsing with dilute solution and oven drying.
f. The phosphate coating shall be sealed by the application of two coats of red
mixed stoving type Zinc chromate primer. The coat may be ‘flash dried’ while
the second coat shall be stove dried.
g. After the application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel
shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat
shall be applied after completion of tests. The color of the finishing paint on
the exterior should be got approved form the purchasers before painting. All
the panels and DBs shall be painted white in the interior.
h. Each coat of primer and furnishing paint shall be of a slightly different shade
to enable inspection of painting.
i. The final finished film thickness of paint on sheet steel shall not be less than
100 microns and shall not be more than 150 microns.
j. Finished painted appearance shall present an aesthetically pleasing
appearance free from dents and uneven surface.
k. Adequacy quantity of finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touchup
required at site after the installation of the L.T., AC station board and
distribution boards.

Page 9 of 18
12.5 BUS – BAR, SWITCHING DEVICES & CONNECTIONS

12.5.1 LT Station Supply Board
Bus bar system for LT station supply board shall be assembled and fully tested and
certified in accordance with relevant standards i.e. IS :375 or BS : 5486 & IEC 439
The bus bars of LT station supply boards shall be of high conductivity aluminum and
of uniform rectangular cross section. The size of bus bar shall be got approved from
the purchaser before the procurement /fabrication. The bus bars and supporting
arrangements shall be designed to withstand thermal and magnetic stresses
corresponding to 10 kA fault level. All bus bars and metallic bus supports shall be
insulated by heat shrunk PVC sleeves with exceptional dielectric properties to
provide additional protection against accidental contact and to prevent failure in
the event of accidental presence of external agents. Bus bars supports shall be arc
resistant flame retardant, porcelain type or sheet moulding compound having high
insulation resistance and de-moulding compound having high insulation resistance
and dielectric strength to avoid ground faults of bus due to dust collection. At the
busbar joints and tap-off points, removable shrouds (sleeves) shall be provided.
Temperature rise shall not exceed the maximum allowable temperature for the
equipment as specified in relevant IS/IEC specification even under over load
conditions and shall be of sufficient size to limit the temperature rise not to exceed
the specified value in the applicable standard inside the enclosure. Ground bus shall
be provided at the bottom of each station supply board throughout the entire
length of the board. This bus shall be earthed solidly by connecting to the main
earthling system of the substation. There should be provision for earthing at both
ends of the switchboard Lugs, bolts, nuts and spring washers shall be provided for
earth connection.
12.5.2 Distribution Board
These shall be provided whenever required to further distribute the three phase
supply taken from the ACDB. The bus bars of distribution boards shall be of
electrolytic copper having 99.9 % purity as per IS-440 unless otherwise specified.

Page 10 of 18
The size of the Bus bars be got approved form the purchaser during detailed
engineering.
a) All bus bars, MCBs, Switch fuse units, fuses and connection shall be of
sufficient size to limit the temperature not to exceed the specified value in
the relevant standard inside the enclosure while carrying full load current. All
main bus bars connections and bus bar outgoing taps be tin plated and
tightly clamped with through bolts to ensure maximum conductivity. All bus
bars shall be rigid type. All bus bars connections shall be accessible for
inspection and maintenance purpose.
b) Bus bars supports shall be made of suitable insulating material such as sheet
moulding compound, glass reinforced moulded plastic material, or cast resin
etc., of thickness not less than 6 mm. Separate supports shall be provided for
all three phases, anti – tracking barriers shall be incorporated.
c) The bus bars shall be protected from Accidental contact by using highly not
less than 6 mm thick.
d) The size of neutral bus of the wall mounted type 3 phase 4 wire distribution
board shall be rated as the phase bus-bars. The neutral bus should have
sufficient terminals and detachable links for all the single phase outgoing and
supports shall have sufficient strength to with stand thermal and
electromechanical stresses for a short circuit level of 10 kA of the system.
12.6 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCCB)

The MCBs shall be of reputed make having proven performance record and
confirming to IS – 2516 ( part I & II ) with minimum rupturing capacity of 10 kA The
MCCBs shall be quick make quick break, independent manual type trip free
mechanism . Position of knob shall be provided to test trip the MCCBs mechanically.
Overload and short circuit protection for all circuits shall be provided for MCCBs. The
MCCBS shall be covered with the insulating case and covers made of high strength,
high resistant and flame retardant thermosetting insulating material.

Page 11 of 18
12.7 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS (MCB)

The MCBs shall be of reputed make and the characteristics of MCB shall be suitable
for control & protection circuit equipment’s, high pressure mercury vapour/ sodium
vapour lamps / fluorescent tubes & power points etc. MCB shall be hand operated,
air break, quick make, quick break confirming to applicable standards mentioned. The
out-going MCBs shall be provided with overload / short circuit device for protection
under overload and short circuit conditions. The MCB shall confirm to IS – 8828
(latest edition) and shall have a minimum interrupting rating of 10 kA. MCB shall be
flush mounted and fitted on Zinc chromium M.S channel provided in DB construction.
Single pole MCBs shall be provided for all outgoing A.C feeders.
12.8 RESIDUAL CURRENT – OPERATED CIRCUIT BREAKERS (RCCB) / EARTH LEAKAGE

CIRCUIT BREAKERS (ELCB)
12.8.1 The RCCB/ELCB offered shall confirm to IS: 12640 and shall be suitable for particular
application in conjunction with MCB and arranged for manual closing and opening
and automatic tripping on earth fault condition. In case of multi-pole circuit breakers,
the indication shall represent the position of all the poles. The metallic portions of
the mechanism shall be either inherently resistant to or treated so as to make them
resistant to atmospheric corrosion. The operating mechanism shall be trip free. The
operation mechanism case shall be effectively sealed by the manufacturer to prevent
access to the mechanism. The case shall be of insulating material. The temperature
rise at specified parts of RCCB shall not exceed the value given in table 1 of IS: 12640.
12.8.2 The RCCB shall be provided with test device for testing automatic opening of the
circuit breaker by an integral test device. The test device shall be arranged for
external operation in such a way that the protection afforded by the cover or
enclosure is not impaired. The test device shall meet the requirement of clause 7.8 of
IS: 12640.

Page 12 of 18
12.8.3 The preferred rated current and rated tripping current shall be any one of the values
given in clause 4.4 and 4.5 of IS: 12640 meeting the operating requirement of
respective MCBs.
12.8.4 The selection and application of RCCBs shall generally be in accordance with
guidelines given in Annex – A (clause 2.2.10) of IS: 12640.
12.8.5 The product of rated residual current (rated tripping current) in amperes and the
earth loop impedance in ohm should not exceed the value 50. The RCCB shall be so
chosen that the same has lowest suitable tripping current.
12.9 FUSE HOLDER /BASE

Fuse holder unit for outgoing circuits wherever provided and approved by purchaser
shall confirm to IS – 1300. Fuse holder be suitable for HRC fuse links of required
rating. They shall be made up of superior grade phenolic moulding compound with
non – inflammable property. Fuses holder shall be supplied with necessary cable
holding screws and terminal lug fasteners and conducting portion copper carrier with
extruded brass base support. Further conducting part shall be silver plated to provide
long lasting shall be complete with pressure clip so formed to provide durable firm
grip of male and female parts. Fuse holder shall be fully shrouded to ensure
personnel safety.
12.10 FUSES
Generally fuses shall not be used anywhere. However if approved by Employer/PMC
due to specific situation the fuses shall be of reputed make and shall be HRC
Cartridge type with minimum rupturing capacity of 10 kA. The fusing factor shall be
greater than 1.5 and shall be provided with visible indicator for having operated. All
HRC fuses shall confirm to IS: 9224. Fuses shall be dimensionally interchangeable with
any other compatible make and shall be so designed to ensure non-deteriorating
time current characteristics.

Page 13 of 18
12.11 INTERNAL WIRING

The LTAC station supply board and the distribution boards shall be supplied with
complete internal wiring. The wiring shall be carried out the 1100 V grade, PVC
insulated. Stranded supper conductor cables of adequate size shall be used to suit the
rated circuit current. Engraved identification ferrules, marked to correspond with the
wiring diagram shall be fitted at both ends of each wire. All wiring shall be terminated
on terminal blocks. Terminal blocks shall be one piece moulded and suitable for 500
V. Stud type terminal blocks shall be used for higher current rating. Terminals shall be
adequately rated for the short circuit current. Typically terminals of ‘Phoenix Contact’
make shall be provided which shall be approved by purchaser during detailed
engineering.
12.12 NAME PLATE

Name plate shall be made of non rusting metal or engraved on PVC shall be of size 50
mm x 20 mm indicating the feeder details and shall be provided for all feeders for
easy identification DB No. etc. shall be provided.
12.13 DRAWINGS & LITERATURE

After receipts of the order, the contractor shall be required to furnish 10 prints of the
following drawings for approval:-
a) General arrangements drawing of AC distribution board.
b) Typical schematic diagram of AC distribution board.
c) Complete assembly drawing of AC distribution boards showing plan,
elevation. sectional views and location of terminal blocks cable entry details
d) Control and wiring diagram for each module of AC distribution board including
spare terminals and inter modular and inter panel wiring.
e) Foundation plan showing location, channels, foundation bolts etc.
f) Schematic control diagram for control interlocks, relays, instruments and
space heaters.

Page 14 of 18
g) Protective relay characteristics of each type of relay

h) Fuse characteristics curve for each type of rating
i) Technical and descriptive literature giving details of the equipment offered.
12.14 TESTING & INSPECTION

12.14.1 All tests and inspection shall be made at the manufacturer's works unless
otherwise specifically agreed upon by the manufacturer and Employer/PMC at the
time of placement of purchase order. The manufacturer shall afford to the
inspector representing the purchaser, all reasonable facilities, without charge to
satisfy him that the material being furnished is in accordance with these
specifications. The purchaser reserves the right to get any component/material
being used by the manufacturer of the L.T. board tested from any recognized test
house. No material shall be dispatched without prior approval of the all the test
reports and certificates by the purchaser.
12.14.2 The inspection by the Employer/PMC or his authorized representative shall not
relieve the bidder of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with the
specification.
TABLE-12.14.2.1
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
1. AC SYSTEM 3 phase, 4 wire, solidly earthed
a. Voltage 415 volts- 15 % to +10 %
b. Frequency 50 Hz + 3 %
c. Combined variation in - 10 % to + 10 % Absolute sum
voltage & frequency
d. Fault level 10 kA (rms)
2. BUS BAR
a. Continuous 630 A Aluminum
b. Short time ( 1 Sec) 10 kA rms

Page 15 of 18
3. ONE MINUTE POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND VOLTAGE

a. Power circuits 2.5 kV (rms)
b. Control circuits 2.5 kV (rms)
4. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER
a. Voltage AC 3- phases –415 V (-15 to + 10 % )
b. Frequency 50 Hz
c. Short circuit Performance 10 kA (rms)
d. Making capacity 2.5 times breaking capacity
e. Operating Mechanism Manual , trip free
f. Temperature rise As per IS: 2516
g. Mechanical rise As per IS: 2516
h. Auxiliary contacts 4 No., 4 NC
5. METERS
a. Accuracy class 1.0 or better
b. one minute power 2 .5 kV (rms)
frequency withstand
voltage
6. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
a. Type Cast resin, Bar primary
b. Secondary circuit 1 Amp.
c. Voltage class and 1100 V, 50 Hz
Frequency
d. Class of insulation E or better
e. Accuracy
I. Accuracy class Class 1, 10 VA
metering CT
II. Accuracy class 5p 10 , 15 VA
protection CT

Page 16 of 18
f. Short time current rating 10 kA (rms) for 1 sec.

g. one minute power 2.5 kV (rms)
frequency withstand
voltage
7. VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
I. Type Cast resin
II. Rated voltage 415 V±10%
a. Primary 415 V /√3
b. Secondary 110V/√3
III. Accuracy class and VA
burden
a. Metering 1.0, 10 VA
b. Protection 3 p, 50 VA
IV. Method of connection
a. Primary Star
b. Secondary Star
V. Rated voltage factor 1.1 continuous , 1.5 for 3 sec.
VI. Class of insulation E or better
VII. One minute power 2.5 kV (rms)
frequency withstand
voltage
8. RELAY
a. One minute power 2.0 kV (rms)
frequency withstand voltage
9. CUBICLE COLOUR FINISH
a. Interior Glossy white
b. Exterior Decided during detailed engineering
10. ACCESSORIES

Page 17 of 18
a. Plug point with switch fuse.

b. Space heater with
thermostat
d. Danger plate

Page 18 of 18
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER – 13
D.C. Battery, Battery Charger & DC Distribution Board

IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Part - II Section 6: Employer's Requirement
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 13
D.C. BATTERY, BATTERY CHARGER & DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
CONTENTS
13.0 SCOPE 1
13.1 STANDARDS 2
13.2 TYPE AND RATING 4
13.3 DESCRIPTION OF BATTERY CHARGER 10
13.4 D.C. DISTRIBUTION PANEL 17
13.5 TESTS 18
13.6 INSPECTION 19
13.7 DRAWINGS 19
13.8 SPARES 20
13.9 INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL 20
13.10 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT 21
13.11 TOOLS, TACKLES AND SLINGS FOR ERECTION, TESTING & 22
COMMISSIONING
13.12 DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS 22
13.14 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS 22

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 13
D.C. BATTERY, BATTERY CHARGER & DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD
13.0 SCOPE
13.0.1 This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s works,
supply, delivery, storage, transportation up to site, erection, testing and
commissioning of 110 V, DC distribution board, Nickel-Cadmium (Ni - Cd) DC battery,
battery charger complete with all materials, accessories and fittings, erection &
Construction 132/33 kV substations at Dhunge Sangu in Nepal.
practices to ensure satisfactory performance throughout the service life. Any material
and equipments not specifically stated in this specification but which are necessary
for satisfactory operation of the equipment shall be deemed to be included unless
specifically excluded and shall be supplied without any extra cost. Components
having identical rating shall be interchangeable. The performance of the equipment
shall be guaranteed as per Section-V – “Guaranteed and Other Technical
Particulars”. The bidder has to furnish the testing facilities available at the
manufacturer’s works.
13.0.3 It is proposed to provide 110 V DC supply for control & protection, indication,
annunciation, emergency lighting etc. and 48 V DC supply for OPGW Communication
system. DC battery system shall comprise of the following items.
a) Two sets of 110 V, Nickel Cadmium (Ni - Cd), 250 Ah (or of higher rating) & 48 V,
Nickel Cadmium (Ni- Cd) 100Ah (or of higher rating) maintenance free, factory
charged station batteries.
b) Two sets Float-cum boosts charger panels (one working and one standby) for
110 V & 48 V batteries. Float cum boost chargers shall incorporate advanced
semiconductor rectifiers (Eg. SCRs), semiconductor fuses, necessary ripple filters

Page 1 of 25
and reverse blocking diodes. Bidder shall furnish the current stability of the
charger and availability of automatic/manual controller settings during the
detailed engineering stage.
c) Two sets of 110 V & 48 V DC distribution panel along with necessary controls,
indications, annunciation and accessories. The unit shall be made of sheet steel
of 14 gauge thickness and shall have appropriate dimensions.
d) Battery stands interconnection cables, termination, lugs etc. to complete the
system for 110 V & 48 V batteries.
e) Bidder shall furnish calculation in support of battery sizing, selection of number
of cells, float and boost voltages, cooling system (if required) and Ampere
Rating calculation of Battery Charger considering the entire load of the
substation as per approved single line diagram of the substation during detailed
engineering stage.
f) Depth of discharge for battery at average temperature shall be furnished during
g) Accessories & devices required for testing, commissioning & operation of 110 V
& 48 V batteries.
h) Spare parts for both 110 V & 48 V batteries.
13.1 STANDARDS
13.1.1 The DC battery charging equipment and control panel with their accessories shall
conform to the latest amendment and edition of the following Indian Standards or
IEC or Nepal or any other equivalent international standards:
TABLE - 13.1.1.1
International Indian
S. No. Standards Standards Description
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or
other non-acid electrolytes-Nickel-Cadmium
prismatic secondary single Cells with partial gas
1 IEC: 62259 - recombination

Page 2 of 25
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or

other non-acid electrolytes- vented Nickel-Cadmium
2 IEC: 60623 IS: 10918 prismatic rechargeable single Cells.
Recommended practice for maintenance testing &
replacement of Ni - Cd storage batteries for
3 IEEE:1106 generating stations and substations
Recommended practice for sizing of Ni - Cd batteries
4 IEEE:1115 for stationary applications
Glass reinforced polyester sheet modeling
5 IS 13410 compounds
6 IS :1248 Voltmeter
7 IS:5 Colours for ready mix paints.
Specification for Direct acting indicating analogue
8 IS : 1248 electrical measuring instruments.
Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low
9 IEC : 947-1 IS : 13947 Prt-1 voltage switches gear and control gear.
10 IEC : 947-2 IS : 13947 Prt.-2 Low voltage circuit breaker
Specification for low voltage switches gear and
11 IEC : 947-3 IS : 13947 Prt-3 control gear.
12 IEC : 947-4 IS : 13947 Prt-4 Contactors
13 IEC:439 IS:8623 Low voltage switch-gear and control-gear assembly
14 IS:8686 Static protective relays
15 IEC: 337 IS:6875 Control switches
16 IEC:225 IS : 3231 Electrical relays for power system protection.
17 IS : 3842 Application guide for Electrical relays for AC System
Mono-crystalline semi-conductor Rectifier cells and
18 IEC 146 IS : 3895 stacks.
Mono crystalline semi-conductor Rectifier assemblies
19 IEC 146 IS : 4540 and equipment.
IS:6619
20 Safety Code for Semi-conductor Rectifier Equipment.
Control switches (switching devices for control and
IS:6875 auxiliary circuits including contactor relays) for
21 Voltages up to 1000 V AC or 1200 V DC.
IS : 9000 Basic environmental testing procedures for
22 electronic and electrical items.
23 IEC:60269 IS:13703 Prt-4 Low voltage fuses for protection of semiconductor

Page 3 of 25
devices
24 IS:1901 Visual indicating lamps
25 IS:6005 Code of practice for phosphating of Iron and Steel.
PVC Insulated Cable for working voltages upto and
26 IEC :227 IS:694 /IS: 1554 including 1100 V.
13.1.2 The Equipment and material meeting the requirement of any other Nepal or
internationally recognized standards which ensure a quality equal or better than
the standard mentioned above shall also be acceptable. Where the equipment
conforms to any other standards then salient points of difference between the
standards adopted and those prescribed in these specifications shall be clearly
brought out in the bid and a copy of the applicable standards shall also be enclosed
by the bidder with the bid.
13.2 TYPE AND RATING

13.2.1 The battery shall be rated for 250 Ah (or of higher rating) & 100 Ah (or of higher
rating) capacity on 10 hours basis for to end voltage of the cell as 1.14 V. The
batteries shall be of Nickel - Cadmium, high discharge performance type, factory
charged and shall be rated at 27 0C and shall conform to IS: 10918. Nominal voltage
of each cell shall be 1.2 V capacities at various rates of discharge and corresponding
final voltages shall be in accordance with IEC 60623/IS 10918. In the normal course,
the load shall be supplied by battery charger (in constant voltage mode) as well as
floating the battery. When AC Mains supply fails, the DC load shall be supplied by
the battery. After resumption of AC mains supply, the battery set shall be kept for
charging under boost mode.
(i) It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide battery of adequate
capacity to meet specified requirements pertaining to control, protection
indication, annunciation etc., and emergency lighting. For computing battery
capacity it is assumed that the battery is fully charged at the beginning of
loading cycle and is discharged to a voltage of 1.14 volts per cell at the end of

Page 4 of 25
the loading cycle. The battery shall have minimum difference between float
and boost charging voltages.
(ii) The contractor shall specify lower optimum voltage to be maintained by
charges to maintain batteries in fully charged condition, for minimum
evaporation and maximum battery life for 110 V DC systems. The contractor
shall also specify freshening charge requirement, if any for optimum battery
life as well as boost charging cycles of the battery. Periodic discharge
recharge cycle of the batteries is not envisaged.
(iii) Suitable means shall be provided for indicating and annunciating the fully
discharged condition of the battery of both 110 V and 48 V DC systems in
control room.
(iv) Bidder is REQUIRED TO SUBMIT BATTERY CAPACITY CALCULATION to confirm
the adequacy of rating and if higher rating is selected, the same shall be
without any extra cost to the employer, and this should apply not only to
battery, but also to all the items given in the scope above.
(v) It shall be the responsibility of the bidder to ascertains and confirm that the
rating of the boost cum float charger (or separate float & boost charger) is
adequate for the associated battery offered.
13.2.2 It is not intended to specify completely herein all details of the equipment.
Nevertheless the equipment shall be complete and operative in all aspects and shall
conform to highest standard of engineering, design and workmanship. Any material
or accessory which may not have been specifically mentioned but which is
necessary for trouble free operation and maintenance of the equipment shall be
deemed to be included without any extra cost to the employer. Details in this
regard shall be finalized during detailed engineering as per requirements of
Employer.
13.2.3 No acid filling and initial charging should be required at site. It should be of low self
discharge rate, reduced memory effect and can be stored for longer period.

Page 5 of 25
13.2.3.1 Construction
The cells shall have prismatic, spill-proof and valve-regulated partial recombination
type of construction with partial recombination feature. The cells shall be flooded
type containing sufficient reserve electrolyte. Battery shall be equipped with nickel-
plated copper (or lead plated copper) inter-cell connectors and terminals. The cells
shall be housed in high-strength impact resistant & alkali-resistant containers and
should be transparent / translucent to facilitate checking of electrolyte level.
Container and lid should be welded and should not cause leakage of
electrolyte/gases during operation even in case of normal mechanical/electrical
abuses. O-rings of nitrile rubber with EPOXY sealing shall be used to ensure proper
sealing of bushings etc. Flip-top vent plugs/ valves with flame arrester feature shall
be provided. The regulating valve type design shall be of self-resealing type.
Construction of cells shall be to ensure proper air circulation between the cells for
heat dissipation/ ventilation (by providing either insulated button separators
integral with the outer surface of the cell container or by suitably designing the
inter cell connectors). The containers shall be strong enough, so that excessive
bulging of container does not occur during service. Cells shall be supplied in filled &
charged state or otherwise electrolyte dry form & battery water separately or in
liquid form shall be shipped as desired by the owner. Battery shall have provision
for water top up to ensures electrolyte level does not fall below recommended
level.
13.2.3.2 Electrodes
Positive and negative electrodes shall be made by encapsulating/impregnating
active material in order to ensure that the battery is able to perform reliably over
its life. Positive and negative electrodes shall be separated by micro porous
separators. The structure of electrodes shall be elastic enough to absorb
mechanical stresses & volume changes during charge/discharge cycles.

Page 6 of 25
13.2.3.3 Electrolyte
The electrolyte shall be prepared from battery grade potassium hydroxide
(KOH) confirming to IEC 60993. The cells shall contain sufficient reserve electrolyte
for efficient heat dissipation & to reduce water topping up interval. Reserve
electrolyte shall not be less than 06 ml/Ah.
13.2.3.4 Connectors
Nickel plated copper intercell connectors shall be used for connecting up adjacent
cells and rows. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be nickel-plated steel/stainless
steel/brass having coating of lead. All terminals and cell inter-connectors shall be
fully insulated or have insulation shrouds.
13.2.3.5 Terminals
Separate terminals shall be provided on the end cell for connecting load through
DCDB and for connecting charger leads. All terminals shall be of suitably sized
nickel-plated steel. Suitable nickel-plated copper lugs shall be provided by the
supplier for use of the purchaser for connecting up the load wiring. All connectors
and leads shall be suitable for carrying 30minute discharge current continuously
and rated for short circuit duty of 4 kA for 01 second.
13.2.3.6 Manual of Instructions
The manufacturer shall supply a copy of the instruction manual for commissioning
& initial treatment of the battery and maintenance during service with every
battery bank ordered.
13.2.3.7 Recombination Efficiency
In order to reduce topping-up frequency, recombination of Hydrogen & Oxygen
gases evolved during charging/discharging shall be achieved by using safe and
reliable technology such as catalytic conversion/valve regulation technique or both.
Minimum recombination efficiency shall be 80%. Recombination efficiency test
shall be done in accordance with IEC 62259. In case the batteries are operated at
high temperatures & are frequently boost charged the water consumption may be
higher & topping-up frequency may increase.

Page 7 of 25
13.2.3.8 Battery Racks

Suitable corrosion resistant battery racks and cable supports shall be provided.
Metallic racks shall be properly earthed. The bottom tier of stand shall have a
ground clearance of 150 mm minimum above the floor. Racks shall be made of
alkali resistant powder coated steel or stainless steel or FRP to ensure corrosion
resistance.
13.2.3.9 Temperature Range
Battery must be capable of continuous operation in temperatures range of -50 C to
+500 C for prolonged periods. No Air-conditioning and false roofing shall be
provided where batteries are to be installed. Exhaust fans of appropriate rating to
be installed in the Battery Room and the prior approval of the employer is to be
taken before placing the order.
13.2.3.10 Accessories
The following accessories (BIS certified) shall be supplied with each set of battery:-
(i) Clamp-on type digital multi-meter of AC/DC current range having ISI mark.
(ii) Pair of gloves.
(iii) 10” Slide insulated wrench for opening terminal nuts.
(iv) Plastic/glass syringe.
(v) Alcohol thermometer.
(vi) Hydrometer for use while filling electrolyte.
13.2.3.11 Charge Rate
Fully discharged batteries should be able to get recharged in 7 hours maximum to
90% of capacity. At higher temperatures, the charging time may be slightly more.
The trickle charge rate shall be 1-2 mA /Ah.
13.2.3.12 Cell Designation
The practice as per IS: 10918 (latest version) shall be followed.
13.2.3.13 Polarity Marking
The polarity of the terminals shall be marked for identification. Positive terminal
may be identified by 'P' or a (+) sign or red colour mark and negative terminal

Page 8 of 25
may be identified by 'N' or (-) sign or blue colour mark. Marking shall be
permanent and non-deteriorating.
13.2.3.14 Performance Curves
The bidder shall furnish all characteristics curves for satisfactory operation and
maintenance of batteries under service conditions.
13.2.3.15 Warning Marking
The battery shall be furnished with a warning plate located at conspicuous place
specifying the use of 'ALKALINE ELECTROLYTE ONLY' (in block letters) and
specifying proper filling level of the electrolyte. Marking shall be permanent and
non-deteriorating.
13.2.3.16 Packing
The batteries shall be securely packed in wooden crates suitable for handling
during transit by rail/road and secured to avoid any loss or damage during transit.
Carton boxes duly palletized shall also be acceptable.
13.2.3.17 Tests
The batteries shall be tested for type, acceptance and routine tests in line with IS:
10918 & IEC: 62259 (latest versions). The owner may at their discretion to accept
the batteries based on type tests already carried-out. In such cases, Type test
reports for tests carried out not earlier than 05 years from bid opening date from
NABL accredited labs shall be acceptable.
Note: In case Type tests are repeated, life cycle test may not be insisted upon Ni-Cd
battery of the specific ratings to be ordered, as this test takes a long time (2-3
years). However, satisfactory evidence is to be furnished for having made this test
on cell of any other Ah capacity of the same design.
13.2.3.18 Guarantee
The batteries shall be guaranteed for a period of 36 months from the date of
commissioning.

Page 9 of 25
13.3 DESCRIPTION OF BATTERY CHARGER

13.3.1 General
a) Solid state float-cum-boost charger or separately housed float and boost
charger shall comprise of silicon controlled rectifiers (SCRs) connected in full
wave bridge circuit for charging the battery set. They should be interlocked so
that at a time only float or boost charger can be connected to the battery
system. The battery and the charging equipment will normally be connected to
the common bus at all times supplying loads at constant voltage. The charging
equipment in addition to charging the battery shall deliver all the demands of
the switchgear, protection and auxiliary equipment. In the event of AC failure
the battery shall supply the entire power to the control bus and also for
emergency lighting. The input supply shall be three phase 4 wire.
b) The battery charger shall have circuit for automatic switching of the voltage,
dropper diodes in stages so that the voltage at the distribution panel remains
within the specified limits. Thus automatic switching of selected numbers of
diodes, with the aid of DC contactors may be necessary in float and boost
mode. This automatic selection and switching of dropper diodes should also
be available when AC supply fails. Reverse blocking diodes shall be provided
on the output side to prevent back feeding from battery.
c) Each battery charger shall be suitable for float charging the battery under
normal conditions and boost charging the battery when it has discharged
during service conditions. The change over from float to boost mode and vice
versa shall be automatic. The bidder shall arrange to provide 80% battery tap
and blocking diode for DC supply during boost charging if float and boost
charging voltages differ by more than 0.1 to 0.15 V per cell. The Boost charger
shall restore a fully charged condition a fully discharged battery in not more
than 12 hours.

Page 10 of 25
d) The rectifier transformer shall be dry type and copper wound with required
number of taps. The transformer shall be natural air cooled and its rating shall
be 10% more than the continuous overloading capacity.
e) In the float charging mode, the charger shall be designed for supplying:
i. The DC loads of supervision lamps and relay coils that remain energized
during normal operation and the momentary closing and trip coil loads of
the breakers.
ii. The float charging current of the battery.
f) Battery charging equipment complete with all accessories shall be housed in
free standing type sheet steel cubicle. Sheet steel used for construction shall
be 2 mm thick. The units shall be wired using 1100 V grade. PVC insulated,
stranded electrolytic copper conductor wires.
g) Battery charger shall be provided with facility for both automatic and manual
control of output. A selection switch shall be provided for selecting the mode
of operation – automatic or manual. Potentiometer shall be provided for auto
setting of output current or voltage of charger. When operating on automatic
control mode, the float charger output voltage shall remain within + 1% of the
set value for A.C. input voltage variation of – 15 to +10% frequency variation of
+5% a combined voltage and frequency variation of –15 to +10% and a D.C.
load variation from zero to full load.
h) The float charger shall be suitable for floating the battery anywhere between
1.4 to 1.42 Volts per cell, preferably at the optimum float voltage, while
supplying the continuous D.C. load. The manufacturer has to recommend the
optimum voltage for the batteries so that the battery will draw the necessary
trickle charging current from the float charger.
i) Recharging of discharged battery, after resumption of AC supply, should be
possible through a boost charger capable of providing recharging voltage from
1.53 to 1.7 volts per cell so that the necessary starting current and the finishing
current for the battery charging can be obtained. All the cells of the battery

Page 11 of 25
bank should be recharged uniformly without undercharging or overcharging

any portion of the bank.
j) The charging system should also ensure the connection of the full battery to
the load bus bar, even if another AC power failure takes place, when the
battery is on boost charge mode. The circuit should also provide a continuity
of DC supply even during any “Ride through” period.
k) Suitable filter circuits comprising of smoothing chokes and condenser with
alarm indication shall be provided in all the chargers to limit the ripple content
of the D.C. output voltage within + 2%. For protection of these necessary
MCBs/ MCCBs’ shall be provided.
13.3.2 Contactors
The battery charger shall have an AC contactor on the input side. It shall be of air
break type and suitable for continuous duty. The operating coil shall be rated for
240 volts AC.
13.3.3 Thermal Overload Relay
A thermal overload relay incorporating a distinct phasing protection (using
differential movement of bimetal strips) shall also be provided for the AC input.
The relay shall trip the above contactor.
13.3.4 Rectifier Transformer
The rectifier transformer shall be copper wound continuously rated, natural air
cooled (N.A) type. The rating of the rectifier, transformer shall correspond to the
rating of the associated rectifier assembly. The calculations for rating of
transformer shall be furnished.
13.3.5 Rectifier Assembly

Full wave controlled bridge circuits, preferably full wave half controlled shall be
provided for float-cum-boost charger. The rectifier assembly shall be designed to
meet the duty as required by the respective charger. Rectifier shall be mounted on
heat sinks. Necessary resistor and condenser network for surge suppression with

Page 12 of 25
semi-conductor HRC fuses shall be provided in each arm of the rectifier connection
along with trip alarm indication.
13.3.6 Instruments
One AC voltmeter (with selector switch), One DC voltmeter, one AC ammeter (with
shunt and selector switch) and one DC ammeter (with shunt) shall be provided for
the charger. The instruments shall be flush type, dust proof and moisture resistant.
The instruments shall have easily accessible means for zero adjustment. The
Instruments shall be of better than 1.5 accuracy classes, LED type indicating lamps
shall be provided across the AC and DC supply.
13.3.7 Moulded Cases Circuit Breaker / Miniature Circuit Breakers
Manufacturer should supply the equipment by providing MCCB/MCB’s of suitable
rating until and unless it is essentially required to use a HRC fuse. MCCB (Molded
Cases Circuit Breaker) AC input and DC output shall be controlled by MCCB of
suitable rating with HRC fuse for back-up protection in charger. They shall be
suitable for 415/240 V AC and 110 V DC. MCCB shall be provided with thermo
magnetic type release for over current and short circuit protection. Sufficient NC
and NO contacts shall be available for interlocks & annunciation.
13.3.8 Fuses
The Employer would like to have equipment with MCCB/MCB’s instead of fuses.
However, if essentially used, all fuses shall be of HRC type with suitable fittings.
Ratings shall be chosen by the bidder depending on the circuit requirements.
13.3.9 Blocking Diode

Blocking diode of suitable rating shall be provided in positive pole of the output
circuit of each charger to prevent current flow from DC battery.
13.3.10 Alarm/Indicators
The following are the minimum requirements. However, details shall be finalized
during detailed engineering, which shall be provided by manufacturer.
I. The following alarm, indicators and metering have to be provided.

Page 13 of 25
a. Main incoming AC supply ON (for float as well as Float-cum-boost

charger)
b. DC supply ON (for Float-cum Boost charger).
c. Float-cum-Boost charger rectifier failure
d. AC main failure
e. Float-cum-Boost output DC fuse failure
f. Filter fuse /MCB failure
g. Earth leakage
h. Controller card defective
i. Float charger load limiter operated
j. SCR ‘s ( Silicon Control Rectifier) fail Alarm
k. Any other annunciation recommended by manufacturer.
II. Metering the following meters shall be provided.
a. AC incoming voltmeter with selector switch.
b. AC ammeter with selector switch
c. DC output voltmeter for Float-cum-Boost charger
d. DC ammeter for Float-cum-Boost charger
e. Milli Ammeter for measuring trickle charging current of battery.
III. In addition to above, facilities shall be there for detection of following
abnormal conditions/faults.
a) DC over voltage and under voltage
b) Battery earth leakage
c) Overload in float and boost charger
13.3.11 NAME PLATES AND MARKING

The name plates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each
charger, on front as well as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be
provided to identify the charger. Name plates with full and clear inscription shall

Page 14 of 25
also be provided on and inside of the panels for identification of various

equipments and ease of operation and maintenance.
13.3.12 CONSTRUCTION
a. The charger shall be indoor, floor-mounted, self-supporting sheet metal
enclosed cubicle type mounted on a channel base via a neoprene gasket.
The Contractor shall supply all necessary base frames, anchor bolts and
hardware. The chargers shall be fabricated from 2.0 mm cold rolled steel
and shall have folded type of construction. Removable gland plates for all
cables and lugs for power cables shall be supplied by the contractor. The
lugs for power cables shall be made of electrolytic copper with tin coat.
The Charger shall be tropicalised and vermin proof. Ventilation louvers, if
provided shall be backed with screens. All doors and covers shall be fitted
with synthetic rubber gaskets. The charger shall have hinged double leaf
doors provided on front and or backside for adequate access to the
Charger internals. All charger cubicle doors shall be properly earthed. The
degree of protection of charger enclosure shall be at least IP-54 as per IS:
2147.
b. All indicating instruments, control switches and indicating lamps shall be
mounted on the front side of the charger. Each charger shall be
furnished completely & wired upto power cable lugs and terminal blocks
ready for external connections. The control wiring shall be carried out
with 1.1 kV PVC insulated, 2.5 sq.mm. Stranded copper wires. Control
terminals of reputed make and type shall be suitable for connecting two
wires, with 2, 5 sq. mm stranded copper conductors. All terminals shall
be numbered for ease of connections and identification. Each wire shall
bear a ferrule or tag on each end for identification. At least 20% spare
terminal shall be provided for control circuits. The insulation of all
circuits except the low voltage electronic circuits shall withstand test

Page 15 of 25
voltage of 2 kV for one minute. An air clearance of at least ten (10) mm

shall be maintained throughout for such circuits, right up to the terminal
lugs. Whenever this clearance is not available, the live parts shall be
insulated or shrouded.
c. An earthing copper strip of adequate size shall be provided in the panel.
13.3.13 Painting
All sheet steel work shall be pretreated, in tanks, in accordance with IS: 6005.
Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by
pickling with acid. After pickling, the parts shall be washed in running water. Then
these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. The phosphate coating
shall be ‘Class-C’, as specified in IS: 6005. Welding shall not be done after
phosphating. The phosphated surfaces shall be rinsed and passivity prior to
application of stoved red oxide primer coating. After primer application, two coats
of finishing synthetic enamel paint of shade-692 (smoke grey) of IS : 5 shall be
applied, unless required otherwise by the Employer. The inside of the chargers
shall be glossy white. Each coat of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be properly
stoved. The paint thickness shall not be less than fifty (50) microns.
13.3.14 Accessories/Components
Each battery charger shall be provided with accessories that include, but are not
limited to the following: (To be finalized during detailed engineering)
a) Silicon controlled rectifiers connected in full wave bridge circuit with ripple
control devices and transient suppression network.
b) Double wound (copper winding) dry type transformer with taps.
c) Automatic voltage regulator unit with manual/auto control switch.
d) Coarse and fine control potentiometers for manual control.
e) Selector switch for mode of charging i.e. float charging/boost charging
f) Off-load tap changing switch for changing the taps of the transformer
g) DC voltmeter with MCB and a three position selector switch
h) DC ammeter with shunt

Page 16 of 25
i) Incoming MCB on AC side with alarm contacts and surge suppressors

j) MCB on DC output side with alarm contacts
k) Centre zero ammeter with shunt
l) Voltage dropping diodes in load circuit during boost charging mode
m) DC under voltage relay and earth fault relay
n) AC/DC switching relays for alarm and indication circuit including buzzer
o) Current limiting feature
p) Cubicle space heater suitable for 220 V AC, 1 Ph. 50 Hz supply, with MCB and
thermostat.
q) CFL tube for cubicle internal lighting with MCB.
r) Other items as indicated in the earlier paragraphs.
13.4 D.C. DISTRIBUTION PANEL
13.4.1 The board shall be metal clad, totally enclosed indoor floor mounted, and free-
standing cubicle type. Entry for incoming and outgoing cables shall be from
bottom. Bus-bars shall be made of tinned copper and insulated. The construction
feature, pre-treatment, painting and other aspects shall comply with specification
covered for LT AC/DC board. The frame shall be fabricated using suitable mild steel
structural section or pressed and shaped cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less
than 2.0 mm. The panel shall be provided with circuits and components such as
meters, relays, etc. as per the 110 V DC single line diagram enclosed. Main bus bar
shall be of high conductivity tinned copper of uniform rectangular cross section
provided with positive and negative bus bars of adequate size. Components such as
MCBs etc. shall be of reputed make with proven performance record and suitable
for DC application. The bus bars shall be insulated.
13.4.2 The DC distribution panel shall be complete with bus bars, input/output terminals,
inter panel connections, internal wiring, name and rating plates, mimic diagram (at
the front of the switchboard), earthing bus and space heaters etc. The terminals
shall be of reputed make and will be subject to approval of Employer.

Page 17 of 25
13.4.3 Emergency Lighting

In case of AC failure, DC board shall supply emergency light in the Control Room
building. Necessary devices for automatic change over for emergency lighting from
AC to DC supply complete with necessary relays, interlocking and indications etc.
shall be provided. Details shall be approved during engineering stage.
13.4.4 An earth bus bar of 25 mm Cu. Flat (to be got approved from Employer during
detailed engineering) shall be provided along the entire length of the switchboard
at the bottom. Two nos. earthing terminals connected to the earth bus bar shall be
provided on the external face of the board for connection to the earthing grid at
the sub-station.
13.4.5 ALL OUT GOING & INCOMING FEEDERS SHALL BE THROUGH MCCB/MCB’s THE
ISOLATING LINKS SHALL BE PROVIDED BEFORE MCCB/MCB.
13.5 TESTS
13.5.1 Battery Charger
The type and routine tests shall be carried out on all the components of Battery
Chargers as per relevant Indian Standards. Rectifier transformer shall be subjected
to short circuit test in addition to type and routine tests specified in IS: 4540.
Following type tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Employer’s
representative, if so desired by the Employer.
a) Insulation resistance test
b) HV test on power & control circuits
c) Temperature rise/heat run test
d) Regulation test at specified AC supply and load variation.
e) Ripple measurement
f) Load limiting feature of trickle charger
g) Load test (efficiency and power factor measurement for both float and boost
charger etc.)
h) Checking of annunciation circuits
i) Surge withstand and capability test

Page 18 of 25
Along with the offer, the bidder shall submit the test certificates for above tests for
similar chargers already supplied to other customers/ organizations.
13.5.2 The contractor shall have to demonstrate to the Employer that the charger conform
to the specification regarding continuous rating, ripple content, voltage regulation
and load limiting characteristics before dispatch and after installation at site.
The following acceptance tests shall be carried out at site:
a. Insulation resistance test
b. Automatic voltage Regulation operation
c. Checking of proper annunciation system operation
13.5.3 Battery charging equipment shall be type tested for dead short circuits of output
terminals at full D.C. voltage without blowing off any fuses MCB’s/or components.
13.6 INSPECTION
otherwise specifically agreed upon by the manufacturer and Employer at the
time of placement of purchase order. The manufacturer shall afford to the
inspector representing the Employer, all reasonable facilities, without charge, to
satisfy him that the material being furnished is in accordance with the
specification. The Employer reserves the right to get any component/ material used
by the manufacturer tested from any recognized Test House.
13.6.2 The inspection by the Employer or his authorized representative shall not
relieve the bidder of his obligation of furnishing equipment in accordance with
the specification, and if at any it is found that equipment has not been tested as
desired by Employer, the same would be rejected.
13.7 DRAWINGS
The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the following drawings and
catalogues.
a) General arrangement drawing showing the proposed arrangement of
cells/battery, battery charger.

Page 19 of 25
b) Charge and discharge performance curve of the battery

c) Complete schematic diagram of charger and bill of materials.
d) Layout drawing of battery giving details of terminal posts and arrangement of
cable termination including general arrangement of cells.
e) General arrangement drawing of the battery charger showing mounting
details of various equipment and foundation details.
f) Complete schematic diagram of charger including alarm and annunciation
scheme and bill of material.
g) Voltage vs current characteristic curve and automatic voltage regulator.
h) Complete technical literature for battery and battery chargers.
i) Copy of instruction manual for initial treatment and for subsequent
maintenance during service.
j) Interconnection Diagram.
k) Any other drawing to be finalized during detailed engineering.
13.8 SPARES
13.8.1 Mandatory Spares
As, per the Price Schedule; Mandatory spares considered to be sufficient for
successful operation and maintenance of equipment for a period of 5 years are
listed separately in Chapter- 25 “Mandatory Spares”. The bidder may review the
above spares and may add the spares, which are essentially required for the
satisfactory operation & maintenance of the equipment. The Bidder shall
accordingly quote the itemized price of these spares in the price Schedule.
13.8.2 Recommended Spares
The bidder may recommend the spares in addition to the mandatory spares, the
itemized prices of the spares shall be quoted in price Schedule.
13.9 INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL
Six sets of the instruction manuals shall be supplied atleast four (4) weeks before
the actual dispatch of equipment. The manuals shall be in bound volumes and shall

Page 20 of 25
contain all the drawings and information required for erection, operation and
maintenance of the transformer. The manuals shall include amongst others, the
following particulars:
a) Marked erection prints identifying the components, parts of the equipment as
dispatched with assembly drawings.
b) Catalogue, users manual, maintenance manual for the equipments shall also
be submitted.
c) Salient technical particulars of the equipments.
d) Copies of all final approved drawings.
e) Detailed O&M instructions with periodical check lists and Performa etc.
13.10 COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT
13.11.1 All fittings and accessories, which may not be specifically mentioned in the
specification but which are necessary for the satisfactory operation of the plant,
shall be deemed to be included in the specification and shall be furnished by the
contractor without extra charges. The equipment shall be complete in all details,
whether such details are mentioned in the specification or not, without any
financial liability to the Employer under any circumstances.
13.11.2 All deviations from this specification shall be separately listed under the requisite
schedules, in the absence of which it will be presumed that all the provisions of the
specifications have been complied with the bidder.
13.11 TOOLS, TACKLES AND SLINGS FOR ERECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING
The supplier shall provide/arrange testing instruments, tools, tackles and slings
required for erection, testing and commissioning of the equipment at site. The list
of testing instruments, tools, tackles & slings required to be arranged by the
supplier shall be submitted along with the bid.

Page 21 of 25
13.12 DEVIATIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS

All the deviations from the specifications shall be separately listed in specified
Annexure in the absence of which it will be presumed that the provisions of the
specifications have been fully complied with by the bidder.

All Schedules annexed to the specification, shall be duly filled by the bidder
separately given in Section-III – “Guaranteed and Other Technical Particulars”.
13.14 TECHNICAL PARAMETERS

TABLE-13.1
A D.C. Battery For Station Battery For Communication
I. Type Nickel-Cadmium completely sealed, maintenance

free stationary, normal discharge performance
type suitable for application in sub stations having
life of not less than Ten years on float operation
II. Ambient temperature
a. Max. 37.50 C …. Do…
b. Min. -5 0 C …. Do…
c. No. of cells As per Req. As per Req.
d. Rated voltage 110 V 48 V
III. Minimum capacity for: 250 AH 100AH
10 hr. Discharge rate
to end voltage V/cell
at 270 C
IV. Capacity of the one 20 AH 10 AH
hour discharge rate to
end voltage V/cell at

Page 22 of 25
270 C
V. Float voltage 1.4 to 1.42 V/cell 1.4 to 1.42 V/cell
VI. Optimum float voltage To be specified by To be specified by the
the manufacturer manufacturer
VII. Boost voltage 1.53 to 1.7 V/Cell 1.53 to 1.7 V/Cell
VIII. Ampere-Hour Not less than 90% Not less than 90%
efficiency
IX. Watt-Hour efficiency Not less than 75% Not less than 75%
X. Self-discharge < 0.5% per week < 0.5 % per week
XI. Life >10 Years >10 Years
B. Battery Charger Float-cum-Boost Charger.
I. Type Solid state, full Solid state, full wave
wave controlled controlled bridge rectifier
bridge rectifier (preferably half controlled
(preferably half type)
controlled type)
II. A.C. Input
a. Supply 400 V, 3 phase, 4 400 V, 3 phase, 4 wire
wire
b. Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz
c. Input voltage -15% to +10% -15% to +10%
variation
d. Frequency variation +5% +5%
e. Combined voltage & -15% to +10% -15% to +10%
frequency variation
f. System Earthing Effectively Effectively earthed
earthed
III. D.C. Output For Station For Station Battery

Page 23 of 25
Battery
a. Continuous D.C. load To charge as well To charge as well as supply
as supply DC load DC load
b. Output voltage range 0- 150 V 0-65 V
c. For D.C. load +1% (digitally +1% (digitally controlled)
variation from 0 to controlled)
100% output Voltage
stable within
d. Continuous Current 100% (digitally 100% (digitally controlled)
settings controlled)
e. Ripple content Less than 2% Less than 2%
IV. AC input /DC output (to be controlled by for both float-cum-boost)
MCCB/MCB & with links to isolate circuits)

Page 24 of 25
IMPORTANT NOTE
a) The equipment shall be used >1300 m altitude (height above MSL) with condensing
humid atmosphere, coupled with low temperature. All components must be designed
keeping this in view.
b) Bidder must indicate with each set of battery, battery chargers, and DCDB’s
recommendatory spare parts for five years’ operation along with unit rates.
c) Details submitted by Bidder shall be reviewed and approved during detailed
engineering.
d) DCDB shall be provided with necessary relays to monitor and check the earth fault on
the system. Alarm scheme shall also be provided for the system.

Page 25 of 25
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER –14
Power and Control Cables
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 14
POWER AND CONTROL CABLES
CONTENTS
14.0 SCOPE 1
14.1 STANDARDS 1
14.2 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT 3
14.3 CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS 5
14.4 CABLE ACCESSORIES FOR HT CABLES 8
14.5 TERMINATION KITS 8
14.6 REQUIREMENT OF XLPE JOINTS & TERMINATION 8
14.7 CABLE DRUMS 9
14.8 INSPECTION 10
14.9 TESTS 11
14.10 MAKE 15

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 14
14.0 SCOPE
transportation up to site, Testing & commissioning of HT Power Cables, LT Power
Cables & Control Cables complete with all materials, accessories and fittings,
erection & maintenance tools & tackles, mandatory spares as detailed in this
specification for for Construction of 132/33 kV Substation at Dhunge Sangu in
Nepal. Any other cables which may be required for Power, Control and other
systems but not specifically brought out here or elsewhere shall be included and
spelt out in the bid.
14.0.3 Any material and equipment not specifically stated in this specification but which
“Guaranteed and Other Technical Particulars”. The bidder has to furnish the
testing facilities available at the manufacturer’s works.
14.1 STANDARDS
14.1.1 The cables under this specification shall comply with the requirements of latest
edition of the following Indian/International standards including amendments:-
TABLE-14.1.1.1
S.No. IS Codes Description
1. IS: 1554 (Part-I) PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables for working voltage

Page 1 of 15
up to and including 1100 V.

2. IS: 1753 Aluminium conductors for insulated cables.
3. IS: 3961 Part-II Recommended current rating for PVC insulated and PVC
sheathed heavy duty cables
4. IS: 3975 Metal steel wires, strips and tapes for armouring of cables
5. IS: 4905 Methods for random sampling
6. IS:5831 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.
7. IS: 7098 (Part- I) Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for
working voltages upto & including 1100 V.
8. IS: 7098 (Part-II) Cross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cable for
working voltage from 3.3 kV to 33 kV.
9. IS: 8130 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords.
10. IS: 10418 Wooden drums for electric cables.
11. IS: 10810 Method of tests for cables
12. ASTMD 2863 Standard method for measuring the minimum oxygen
concentration to support candle like combustion of plastic
13. IEEE-383 Standard for type test of IE class of electric cables
14. IEC-332 (Part-I) Tests on electric cables under fire conditions.
15. IEC-754 (Part-I) Test on gases evolved during combustion of electric cables
16. ASTMD – 2843 Test method for density of smoke from the burning on
decomposition of plastic
14.1.2 The Equipment and material meeting the requirement of any other Indian
standards or equivalent internationally recognized standards which ensure a quality
equal or better than the standard mentioned above shall also be acceptable. Where
the equipment confirms to any other standards then salient points of difference
between the standards adopted and those prescribed in these specifications shall
be clearly brought out in the bid and a copy of the applicable standards shall also be
enclosed by the bidder with the bid.

Page 2 of 15
14.2 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

a) The cables shall be suitable for laying in racks, ducts, covered trenches,
conduits and underground buried installation with chances of flooding by
water.
b) Cables shall be designed to withstand mechanical, electrical and thermal
stresses developed under steady state and transient operating conditions.
c) The aluminum/copper wires used for manufacturing the cables shall be true
circular in shape before stranding and shall be of uniformly good quality free
from defects. All aluminum used in the cables shall be of H2 grade.
d) Aluminum conductor used in power cables shall have tensile strength of more
than 100N/sq mm. The conductor of control cables shall be manufactured
from plain annealed copper. The entire conductor shall be multi-stranded.
e) PVC insulation shall be suitable for continuous conductor temperature of 70oC
and short circuit conductor temperature of 160oC. XLPE insulation shall be
suitable for continuous conductor temperature of 90 oC and short circuit
conductor temperature of 250oC.
f) The cable cores shall be laid up with fillers between the cores wherever
necessary. It should not stick to insulation and inner sheath. All the cables,
other than single core unarmored cable shall have distinct extruded PVC inner
sheath black in colour as per IS 5831.
g) The fillers and inner sheath shall be of non-hygroscopic flame retardant and
material shall be softer than insulation and outer sheath shall be suitable for
the operation temperature of the cable.
h) For single core armoured cables, armouring shall be of aluminum wires. For
multi-core armoured cables, armouring shall be of galvanized steel as follows:
TABLE-14.2.0
Calculated nominal size & diameter of Type of armour
cable under armour
a. Up to 13 mm 1.4 mm dia. GS wire

Page 3 of 15
b. Above 13 up to 25 mm 0.8 mm thick GS strip/1.6 mm dia. GS wire

c. Above 25 up to 40 mm 0.8 mm thick GS strip/2.0 mm dia. GS wire
d. Above 40 up to 55 mm 1.4 mm thick GS strip/2.5 mm dia. GS wire
e. Above 55 up to 70 mm 1.4 mm thick GS strip/3.15 mm dia. GS wire
f. Above 70 mm 1.4 mm thick GS strip/4 mm dia. GS wire
14.2.1 The gap between armour wire/strip shall not exceed one armour wire/strip space
and there shall be no cross over/over-riding of armour wire/strip. The minimum
area of coverage of armouring shall be 90%. The breaking load of armour joint shall
not be less than 95% of that of armour wire/strip. Zinc rich paint shall be applied
on armour joint surface.
(i) Suitable chemicals shall be added to the outer sheaths of all cables to protect
them from rodent and termite attack. These chemicals shall not have any
harmful effect on the human being.
(ii) The normal current rating of all PVC insulated cables shall be as per IS-3961
and should suit the duty requirements for which it is intended.
(iii) Outer sheath shall be of PVC black in colour for power cables and grey in
colour for control cables.
(iv) Cores of the cables of up to 5 cores shall be identified by coloring of
insulation. Following colour scheme shall be adopted:
1 core - Red, Black, Yellow & Blue
2 core - Red & Black
3 core - Red, Yellow & Blue
4 core - Red, Yellow, Blue & Black
5 core - Red, Yellow, Blue, Black & Grey
For reduced neutral conductors the core shall be black.
(v) For cables having more than 5 cores, core identification shall be done by
numbering insulation of core sequentially, starting by number 1 in the inner
layer (e.g. say for 10 core cable, core numbering shall be from 1 to 10). The

Page 4 of 15
numbers shall be printed in Hindu-Arabic numerals on the outer surfaces of

the cores. All the numbers shall be of same colour, which shall contrast with
the colour of insulation. The colour of the insulation for all the cores shall be
grey only. The numerals shall be legible and indelible. The numbers shall be
repeated at regular intervals along the core, consecutive numbers being
inverted in relation to each other. When number is a single numeral, a dash
shall be placed underneath it. If the number consists of two numerals, these
shall be disposed one below the other and a dash placed below the lower
numeral. The spacing between consecutive numbers shall not exceed 50 mm.
(vi) In addition to manufacturer's identification on cables as per IS, following
marking shall also be embossed over outer sheath.
a) Cable size and voltage grade.
b) Sequential marking of length of the cable in metres at every one metre.
The embossing shall be progressive, automatic, on line and marking shall be
legible and indelible.
(vii) Allowable tolerance on the overall diameter of the cables shall be ±2mm
maximum, over the declared value in the technical data sheets.
(viii) In Substation repairs to the cables shall not be accepted.
(ix) Identification of cores: - The insulated cores of HT and LT power cables shall
be identified by coloured code. The control cables shall have identification by
means of indelible printing of numbers on its cores at intervals not more than
75 mm. At least 20% cores shall be kept as spares in the multicore control
cables.
14.3 CONSTRUCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
14.3.1 General
a) 33 kV Power Cable: - The cables shall confirm to IS-7098 (Part-II)
b) The cable shall be 33 kV (earthed system) grade, heavy duty, stranded
aluminum conductor, XLPE insulated, provided with conductor screening and

Page 5 of 15
insulation screening, galvanized steel wire/strip armored, extruded PVC of

Type ST2 outer sheathed.
c) The conductors shall be stranded and compacted circular for all cables. The
conductors shall be provided with non-metallic extruded semi conducting
shielding.
d) The cores insulation shall be with cross-linked polyethylene insulation
compound applied by extrusion. It shall be free from voids and shall withstand
all mechanical and thermal stresses under steady state and transient
operating conditions. It shall confirm to the properties given in Table-I of IS-
7098 (Part-II).
e) The insulation shielding shall consist of non-metallic extruded semi-
conducting compound in combination with a non-magnetic metallic screening
of copper. The copper screen shall be capable of carrying the single line to
ground fault current for the duration specified in the data sheet. Vendor shall
furnish calculation in support of selection of the size of copper screen along
with bids.
f) The conductor screen, XLPE insulation and insulation screen shall all be
extruded in one operation by ‘Triple Extrusion’ process to ensure perfect
bonding between the layers. The core identification shall be by coloured strips
or by printed numerals.
g) The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid up cores by extrusion and shall
confirm to the requirements of type ST2compound of IS: 5831. The extruded
inner sheath shall be of uniform thickness.
h) For multicore cables, the armoring shall be by galvanized steel strips. If
armoring is specified for single core cables, the same shall be with H4 grade
hard drawn aluminium round wire of 2.5mm diameter.
i) The outer sheath of the cables shall be applied by extrusion over the
armouring and shall be of PVC compound confirming to the requirements of
type ST2 compound of IS: 5831. The thickness of outer sheath shall be as per

Page 6 of 15
amendment no.1 of table 5 of IS: 7098 Part-2 (Column 3 & 5 for both
armoured and unarmoured cables).
j) The dimensions of the insulation, inner sheath and armour materials shall be
governed by values given in Tables 2, 3 & 4 (Method 3) of IS: 7098 Part-II).
14.3.2 PVC LT Power and Control Cables
a) All power cables for use on low voltage systems shall be heavy duty type,
1100 V grade with aluminium conductor, PVC insulated, PVC inner sheathed,
armoured/ unarmored and overall PVC sheathed as detailed below.
b) All Control cables for use on low voltage systems shall be heavy duty type,
1100 V grade with Copper conductor, PVC insulated, PVC inner sheathed,
armoured/ unarmored and overall PVC sheathed as detailed below.
c) The conductors shall be stranded for both aluminium and copper cables. The
minimum number of strands shall be 7 (seven) except as otherwise specified
conductors. Conductors, whose nominal area will be lesser than 25 sq.mm,
shall be of circular cross section only. Cables of nominal area 25 sq.mm and
above may be circular or shaped Cables with reduced neutral conductor shall
have sizes as per Table 1 of IS: 1554 (Part-I).
d) The core insulation shall be with PVC compound applied over the conductor
by extrusion and shall confirm to the requirements of type ‘A’ compound as
per IS: 5831. The thickness of insulation and the tolerance on thickness of
insulation shall be as per Table 2 of IS: 1554 Part-I.
e) The inner sheath shall be applied over the laid up cores by extrusion and shall
be of PVC confirming to the requirements of type ST1 PVC compound as per
IS: 5831. The minimum thickness of inner sheath shall be as per Table 4 of IS:
1554 Part-I.
f) If armouring is specified for multicore cables, the same shall be by single
round galvanized steel wires where the calculated diameter below armoured
does not exceed 13 mm and by galvanized steel strips where this dimension is
greater than 13 mm.

Page 7 of 15
g) Control Cables shall be 1.1 kV grade, heavy duty, multicore stranded, tinned
copper annealed conductor, PVC insulated, armoured extruded PVC of outer
sheathed.
14.4 CABLE ACCESSORIES FOR HT CABLES
a) The termination and straight through jointing kits for use on the systems shall
be heat shrinkable type and suitable for the type of cables offered as per this
specifications.
b) The accessories shall be supplied complete in all respects and should be
supplied in kit form. Each component of the kit shall carry the manufacturers’
mark of origin.
c) The kit shall include all stress grading insulating and sealing materials apart
from conductor fittings and consumable items. An installation instruction
sheet shall also be included in each kit.
d) The contents of the accessories kit including all consumables shall be suitable
for storage without deterioration at a temperature of 45 oC with shelf life
extending more than 5 years.
e) A set of tools for making joints shall be provided (both for indoor and outdoor
joints).
14.5 TERMINATION KITS
The heat shrink terminating kits shall be suitable for termination of the cables to
indoor switchgear or to a weather proof cable box of an outdoor transformer or to
a 4 pole structure. For outdoor terminations weather shields/sealing ends and any
other accessories required shall also form part of the kit.
14.6 REQUIREMENT OF XLPE JOINTS & TERMINATION
14.6.1 The straight through jointing kit shall be suitable for installation on over head trays,
concrete lined trenches and ducts and for underground burial with uncontrolled
backfill and possibility of flooding by water and chemicals. These shall have
protection against any mechanical damage and suitably designed to be protected
against rodent and termite attack. It shall meet the following requirements.

Page 8 of 15
a) Conductivity of the jointed conductor shall not be less than that of the main
conductor of the cable.
b) Joints between two conductors or conductor lugs shall have a mechanical
strength not less than that of the conductor.
c) Adequate insulation level free from voids and impurities.
d) Adequate stress relief provision
e) Adequate creepage paths to eliminate system tracking.
f) Ability to withstand electromagnetic thermal stress during flow of short circuit
current.
g) Proper seals for water, dust and chemical fumes for checking their ingress
under all the conditions.
h) Inner semi-conducting layer with a smooth surface & good contacts and
insulation.
i) Outer semi-conducting layer to adhere firmly to the insulation
j) Earth continuity connection of adequate size shall be a part of the kit.
k) Heat shrinkable technique shall be used for termination kits.
14.6.2 This system shall be based on the use of heat shrinkable radiation vulcanized cross
linked polyethylene tubes (semi-conducting and insulation grade) and skirts. These
tubes shall be fitted to the cable and/or joints and set in position by shrink fitting by
application of heat by a gas torch or kerosene blow lamp. The heat shrinkable
tubes, designed as stress control tubing, insulating tubing and screen tubing shall
meet the requirements of temperature, flexibility, stress grading, long life,
resistance to corrosion and chemical etc. Complete list of various items required for
making various type of joints shall be furnished with the offer.
14.7 CABLE DRUMS
14.7.1 Cables shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden or steel drums of heavy
construction. For wooden drums the wood used for construction for the drum shall
be properly seasoned, sound and free from defects. Wood preservative shall be
applied to the entire drum.

Page 9 of 15
14.7.2 Bidder shall indicate in the offer the standard length for each size of power and
control cable which can be furnished on one drum. The cable length per drum shall
be subject to tolerance of + 5% of the standard drums length agreed between
Employer and bidder. The Employer shall have the option of rejecting cables drums
with shorter lengths.
14.7.3 A layer of water -proof paper shall be applied to the surfaces of the drums and over
the outer most cables layer. A clear space of at least 40 mm shall be left between
the cables and the logging.
14.7.4 Each drum shall carry the manufacturer's name, the owner's name address and
contract number, item number and type, size and length of cable, net and gross
weight stenciled on both sides of drum. A tag containing the same information
shall be attached to the leading end of the cable. An arrow and suitable
accompanying wordings shall be marked on one end of the reel indicating the
direction in which it should be rolled.
14.7.5 Packing shall be sturdy and adequate to protect the cables from any injury due to
mishandling or other conditions encountered during transportation handling and
storage. Both cable ends shall be sealed with PVC/Rubber caps so as to eliminate
ingress of water during transportation, storage and erection.
14.8 INSPECTION
14.8.1 Before dispatch, the cables offered shall be made available for inspection to a duly
authorized representative of the Owner. Inspection may also be made at any stage
of manufacture at the option of the Owner and the cables found unsatisfactory due
to the material used or poor workmanship shall be rejected. The supplier shall
guarantee free access to the places of manufacture to the Owner representative at
all times when the work is in progress. The contractor shall inform the Owner in
advance the time of starting of manufacture and the progress of manufacture of
the cables offered by him so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
14.8.2 Inspection and acceptance of cables by the Owner or his authorized representative
shall not relieve the contractor of his obligation of furnishing cables in accordance

Page 10 of 15
with the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such cables are
later found to be defective.
14.8.3 The cables shall comply with type tests stipulated in prescribed section and the
relevant standards. Test reports for all type tests shall be submitted with the
tender.
14.8.4 All type and sizes of cables shall be subjected to routine and acceptance tests as
stipulated in relevant standards without any extra cost to the Employer. Cables
should not be dispatched until the test reports are duly approved by the Owner or
his authorized representative, and specific instructions to dispatch the inspected
items issued.
14.8.5 The Employer reserves the right of having any other special tests of reasonable
nature carried out at site or at manufacturer's works or at any other place in
addition to the aforesaid type and routine tests to satisfy himself that the cables
comply with the specification, without any financial liability.
14.8.6 Six copies of test reports shall be supplied for approval. The reports shall indicate
clearly the governing standards and the standard values specified for each test to
facilitate checking of the test reports. Four bound copies of the test reports shall
be submitted after approval of test reports along with the cables.
14.9 TESTS
14.9.1 All types and sizes of cables being supplied shall be subjected to type tests, routine
tests and acceptance tests as specified below and according to relevant standards.
14.9.2 Employer at his discretion may ask the bidders to conduct any or all the type tests
for which at least 15 days advance notice shall be given by the contractor.
14.9.3 Charges for Type, acceptance test and routine test shall be deemed to be included
in the bid price of individual cables. All the type and routine test reports,
certificates shall be submitted and got approved from the Employer before dispatch
of the equipment.

Page 11 of 15
14.9.4 Type Tests

Type tests shall be carried out on all the types and sizes of cables if desired or
alternatively latest test certificates shall be acceptable. The following type tests
shall be conducted:-
TABLE-14.7.4.1
S.No. Test Remarks
A. For Conductor
1. Annealing test For copper conductor only
2. Tensile test For aluminum conductor only
3. Wrapping test For aluminum conductor only
4. Resistance test
B. For Armour Wires/Strips
5. Measurement of Dimensions
6. Tensile test
7. Elongation test
8. Torsion test For round wires only
9. Winding test For strips only
10. Resistance test
11. Zinc Coating test For G.S. strips/wires only
C. For PVC/XLPE Insulation & PVC Sheath
12. Test for thickness

14. Tensile strength and elongation test before
aging and after aging
14. Aging in air ovens
15. Loss of mass test For PVC insulation & PVC
sheath only
16. Hot deformation test -do-
17. Heat stock test -do-

Page 12 of 15
18. Shrinkage test -do-

19. Cold bend/cold Impact test -do-
20. Colour fastness to -do-
21. Thermal stability test -do-
22. Bleeding and blooming test -do-
23. Hot set test For XLPE insulation only
24. Water absorption test For XLPE insulation only
D. For Completed Cables
25. Insulation resistance test
26. High voltage test
27. Partial discharge test
28. Bending test
29. Dielectric Power factor test
i) As a function of voltage
ii) As a function of temperature
30. Heating cycle test
31. Impulse with stand test
32. Measurement of eccentricity and ovality
33. Short circuit test
14.9.5 Short Circuit Test

a) Short circuit test on conductors shall be carried out on cables samples.
b) During each short circuit test, the cable shall be subjected to thermal (rms) and
dynamic (peak) short circuit current of specified duration.
c) The test sample shall be subject to following tests before carrying out the
short circuit test and after completion of short circuit test (when cable has
cooled down to ambient temperature).
 Conductor resistance measurement

Page 13 of 15
 High voltage test

 Tan delta measurement
 Partial discharge measurement (for cables of 6.6 kV grade)
 Volume resistivity.
d) Before applying the short circuit current, the test sample shall be heated up to
the specified maximum conductor temperature (70 deg C for PVC cables). This
may be done by eddy current heating or by giving intermittent high current
impulses as per the convenience of test station. After establishing specified
conductor temp., the cable shall be subjected to short circuit test.
e) Acceptance Criteria
After the short circuit test the test specimen shall meet the following:
i. No. Visual damage
ii. HV Test
iii. Pd test
iv. Tan delta values as per standard
v. Conductor resistance not more than + 5%
vi. Volume resistivity shall not be below the standard acceptance value.
14.9.6 Acceptance Test
Acceptance tests shall be carried out on each type and size of the cable on the
cable drums selected at random.
The following shall constitute acceptance test:
a) Annealing test
b) Tensile test
c) Wrapping test
d) Resistance test
e) Test for thickness
f) Tensile strength and elongation test before aging and after aging
g) Aging in air ovens
h) Hot set test

Page 14 of 15
i) Insulation resistance test

j) High voltage test
k) Partial discharge test
l) Measurement of eccentricity and ovality.
14.9.7 Routine Test
Routine test shall be carried out for each drum of cables of all type and sizes.
Following shall constitute routine tests:
a) Resistance test
b) Insulation resistance test
c) High voltage test.
14.10 MAKE
All the cables shall be from experienced and reputed manufacturers, (as are
approved by Employer) with proven experience in operation for power sub-stations
and having capability to develop, test and timely supply cables as specified in the
tender specification. The manufacturer shall have arrangements for carrying out all
the tests including special tests such as flammability test, smoke generation test,
HCL gas evaluation test as per the standards specified and have furnished
satisfactory test results.
TABLE-14.9.1
1. L.T. POWER & CONTROL CABLES Description
(a) Size of Cable As per requirement (given in the Bid Price
Schedule)
(b) Voltage rating 650/1100 V
(c ) Short circuit withstand for 1 sec. 13 kA/system requirement
(d) Conductor for LT power cable Aluminium
(e) Conductor for control cable Copper

Page 15 of 15
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER –15
Illumination/Lighting System
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3 Part II : Section 6: Employer's Requirement
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 15
ILLUMINATION/LIGHTING SYSTEM
CONTENTS

15.0 SCOPE 1
15.1 STANDARDS 3
15.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4
15.3 TYPE AND DESCRIPTION 6
15.4 ACCESSORIES FOR LIGHTING FITTING 7
15.5 TYPE OF LIGHTING FIXTURES 11
15.6 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 12
15.7 WIRING OF LIGHTING FIXTURE AND RECEPTACLES 13
15.8 ROAD /STREET LIGHTING POLES 13
15.9 DRAWING & LITERATURE 14
15.10 INSPECTION OF TESTING 14
15.11 TECHNICAL PARTICULARS REQUIREMENTS 15
Section IV-B Chapter-15 Content

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 15
ILLUMINATION/LIGHTING SYSTEM
15.0. SCOPE
15.0.1. These specifications are intended to cover the design, engineering, manufacturing,
inspection and testing at manufacturer’s works, packing, erection, supply & delivery,
storage, transportation upto site, testing & commissioning of lighting system
comprising of lighting fixtures, complete with lamps supports & accessories,
distribution boxes, galvanized rigid steels/PVC conduits, lighting wires, earth wire,
receptacles, switch boards, switches, junction boxes, pullout boxes complete with
accessories and emergency lightning in case of failure of L.T. AC supply complete
with all materials, accessories and fittings, erection & maintenance tools & tackles,
mandatory spares as detailed in this specification for Construction of 132/33 kV
Substation at Dhunge Sangu in Nepal.
15.0.2. Illumination/Lighting System complete in all respects as per clause 15.0.1 and
illumination levels as per clause 15.0.7 is to be provided for present scope of
bays/equipment only including the illumination along the boundary wall, Control
Building and other buildings in the present scope of work.
15.0.3. The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering
15.0.4. Any material and equipment not specifically stated in this specification but which
15.0.5. Components having identical rating shall be interchangeable.
15.0.6. The performance of the equipment shall be guaranteed as per Section-V –
“Guaranteed and other Technical Particulars”. The bidder has to furnish the testing
facilities available at the manufacturer’s works.

Page 1 of 16
15.0.7. The illumination levels in the switch yard, control room building, approach road etc.
shall be as under:-
(a) Normal Lighting
TABLE-15.0.5.1
S.No. Particulars of Locations Average Illumination

Level, (Lux)
a. Control room 300
b. Battery room 200
c. OPGW communication room 300
d. Office/Administrative Block 300
e. Outdoor Switchyard 50
f. Corridors 70
g. Approach roads 30
h. Path ways 50
i. Store room 100
j. Toilets 100
k. Boundary wall 30
15.0.8. The illumination design of outdoor switch yard, control room of the substation,
approach road to the substation and fencing etc. shall form the basis of lighting
fixtures quantity. Illumination scheme shall be designed to ensure illumination
intensity of 50 Lux in the outdoor switchyard. The luminaries offered shall be suitable
for mounting on the switchyard structure/lighting tower.
15.0.9. Suitable number of power sockets along with plugs shall be supplied for the control
room and in the switchyard for miscellaneous applications such as for fans, welding
sets, Air Conditioners, transformer filtration sets, heaters etc.
15.0.10. Contractor shall provide one set of luminous intensity & glare measuring instruments.

Page 2 of 16
15.1. STANDARDS
15.1.1. The lightening equipment / accessories shall comply with the latest edition of
following Indian/International standards: -
TABLE-15.1.1.1
IS 16101 : 2012 General Lighting - LEDs and LED modules – Terms and Definitions
IS 16102 : 2012: Self- Ballasted LED Lamps for General Lighting Services Part 1
Part 1 Safety Requirements
IS 16102 : 2012: Self-Ballasted LED Lamps for General Lighting Services Part 2
Part 2 Performance Requirements
IS 16103 : 2012: LED Modules for General Lighting Part 1 Safety Requirements
Part 1
IS 16103 : 2012: LED Modules for General Lighting Part 2 Performance
Part 2 Requirements
IS 15885 Safety of Lamp Control Gear

IS 16104 : 2012 DC or AC Supplied Electronic Control Gear for LED Modules -
Performance Requirements
IS 16105 : 2012 Method of Measurement of Lumen Maintenance of
Solid State Light (LED) Sources/Products
IS 694 1490 PVC insulated cables for working voltage up to and including
1100Volts.
IS 16107 : 2012 Luminaries Performance
IS 16108 : 2012 Photobiological Safety of Lamps and Lamp Systems
CISPR – 15/ EN For RFI/EMI

55015
IS 1554 1488 PVC insulated (Heavy-duty) electric cable for working voltage
up to and including 1100 volts.

Page 3 of 16
IS 1777 Industrial luminaries with metal reflectors

IS 8828 Circuit breakers for over current protection
15.1.2. The Equipment and material meeting the requirement of Indian or any other
equivalent internationally recognized standards which ensure a quality equal or
better than the Indian standard mentioned above shall also be acceptable. Where the
equipment conforms to any other standards then salient points of difference
between the standards adopted and those prescribed in this specification shall be
clearly brought out in the bid and a copy of the applicable standards shall also be
enclosed by the bidder with the bid.
15.2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
15.2.1. The fittings shall be designed for continuous trouble free operation under
atmospheric conditions as specified without reduction in lamp life or without
deterioration of materials and internal wiring. Outdoor fittings shall be weather proof
and rain proof types.
a) The fittings shall be designed so as to facilitate easy maintenance, including

cleaning, replacement of units etc.
b) Connections between different components shall be made in such a way that

they will not get loose by small vibration.
c) The utilization for each type of lighting fitting in terms of proportion of the
light emitted by the bare lamps which falls on the working plane shall be
furnished.
d) All fittings shall be supplied complete with lamps suitable for operation on the
supply voltage including permissible variations.
e) The fittings and accessories shall be designed to have low temperature rises
and the temperature rise above the ambient temperature shall be as indicated
in the relevant standards.

Page 4 of 16
f) All LED fitting shall be complete with all accessories.
g) Each fitting shall have a terminal block suitable for loop- in / loop out and T –
off connection and wired with 650 / 1100 V, 3 core, PVC insulated Cu
conductor cable of not less than 2.5 sq. mm size unless otherwise specified.
Each fitting shall be complete with the internal wiring by means of stranded
copper wire and terminated on the terminal block.
h) The mounting facility and conduit knock- out for the fixture shall be as
specified and shall be suitable for 20 mm or higher size conduit entry.
i) All hardware used in the luminaries shall be suitably plated or anodized and
passivated for use in the substation.
j) Each lighting fitting shall be provided with an earthing terminal suitable for
connection to an earthing conductor.
k) All metal or metal enclosed parts of the housing shall be bonded and
connected to the earthing terminal so as to ensure satisfactory earthing
continuity throughout the fixture.
l) All surface of the fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased. The fittings
shall be free from scale, rust, sharp edges and burrs.
m) The housing shall be stove – enameled / epoxy stove enameled – vitreous

enameled or anodized as indicated in the specification of the relevant fixture.
n) When enamel is specified, it shall have a minimum thickness of 2 mills for

outside surface and 1.5 mills inside surface. The finish shall be nonporous and
free blemishes, blisters and fading.
o) The surface shall be scratch resistant and shall show no sign of cracking or
flaking when bent through 90 o over 12 mm diameter mandrel.
p) The finish of the fittings shall be such that no bright spots are produced either
by direct light source or by reflection.

Page 5 of 16
15.3. TYPE AND DESCRIPTION
15.3.1. Decorative Type Fittings
Decorative LED fitting shall be provided with mounting / housing channel cum
reflectors of CRCA sheet steel, stove enameled. Diffusers or louvers shall be provided,
as required. Diffuser shall be of translucent white opal acrylic or depending upon the
type of fitting. Fitting shall be suitable for the number of lamps of specified wattage,
for directly mounting on ceiling / conduit suspended or for recess mounting in false
ceiling, as specified. Decorative LED fitting when required, should be suitable for 16
to 40 W LED lamps, suspended or recess mounting in false ceiling.
15.3.2. Industrial Type Fittings
These fittings shall be suitable for use with LED lamps as per requirements and
generally as described below.
LED Lights to be mounted in the false ceiling so as to form a continuous luminous

ceiling, shall have an inside reflector of non fluorescent power neoprene gasket and
wire guards as stated in above item.
15.3.3. Flood Lighting Fittings
Flood lighting weather proof fittings for illuminating outdoor yards, buildings and
structures, the fittings shall be suitable for use with or up to 250 W, LED lamps. These
lamps should be weather – proof, anti-corrosive painted completely wired box shall
be provided to house the ballast and related power electronics are provided with
cable glands for cable entry. The housing and connector box of the fittings shall be of
cast aluminium with pre-wired lamp holder and a cable box at the bottom provided
with cable gland of brass. The reflector shall be of anodized, mirror polished
aluminum. Heat resistant, toughened clear glass cover and necessary neoprene
gaskets to make the unit weather proof shall be provided. A cast – iron base shall be
provided for fixing the flood light to any structure or building. Fittings shall be

Page 6 of 16
capable of being rotated in both horizontal and vertical and plane and locked in any
desired position. For focusing purposes, focusing knobs shall be provided on the
housing to obtain desired light span.
The above flood lights shall be suitable for medium beam / long range narrow beam
as per requirement.
15.3.4. Post Top Lantern Type
Post top mounting fittings for illumination of walkways, entrances to buildings and
fencing of switchyard shall be provided. The fitting shall be suitable for 40 W LED
lamps. The pole mounting piece and the canopy shall be of aluminum and finished
with corrosion proof paint..
15.3.5. Street Lighting Fittings
15.3.5.1. Street lighting fitting shall be of LED abiding relevant IS/ International Standard.
15.3.5.2. The size of threads, length of threads, socket bores of various types of fittings shall
comply with relevant standards specified.
15.3.5.3. The fittings shall be designed such that the glare value is controlled below an
acceptable level. The light distribution patterns of cut-off, semi-cut and non cut- off
fitting shall be as per relevant standards specified.
15.4. ACCESSORIES FOR LIGHTING FITTING
15.4.1. Reflectors
15.4.1.1. The reflectors shall be made of CRCA sheet steel or aluminum indicated for above
mentioned fittings in the bill of quantities. The thickness of steel / aluminum shall
comply with relevant standards specified. Reflectors made of steel shall have stove
enameled/ vitreous enameled / epoxy coating finish. Aluminum used for reflectors
shall be anodized / epoxy stove enameled / mirror polished. The finish for the
reflector shall

Page 7 of 16
15.4.1.2. The finish of reflectors shall be free from scratches or blisters and shall have a
smooth and glossy surface having an optimum light reflection coefficient such as to
ensure the overall light output specified by the manufacturer. Reflector shall be
readily removable from the housing for cleaning and maintenance without disturbing
the lamps and without the use of tools. They shall be securely fixed to the housing by
means of positive fastening device of captive type.
15.4.2. Lamp / Starter Holders
15.4.2.1. Lamp holders shall preferably be for LED lamps etc. Holders shall be designed and
manufactured in accordance with relevant standard to give long and satisfactory
service. They shall have low contact resistance, shall be resistant to wear and shall be
suitable for operation at the specified temperature without deterioration in
insulation value. They shall hold the lamps in position under normal condition of
shock and vibration met with in normal installation and use.
15.4.3. Ballasts (Not applicable)
15.4.3.1. The ballasts shall designed, manufactured and supplied in accordance with IS 3021
and function satisfactorily under site condition specified. The ballasts shall be
designed to have a long service life. The power loss in ballasts (if required)for LED
lamps shall not be more than the specified watts as per relevant standard and for the
fluorescent lamps it shall be the minimum commercially available in the industry..
15.4.3.2. Ballasts shall be mounted using self-locking, anti-vibration fixing and shall be easy to
remove without demounting the fittings. They shall be in dusting and non-
combustible enclosures.
15.4.3.3. The ballasts shall be of the inductive, heavy duty type, filled with thermosetting,
insulating, moisture repellent polyester compound filled under pressure or vacuum.
The ballast wiring shall be of copper wire. Ballasts shall be designed for maximum
winding temperature rise of 55 Deg. Cel under rated conditions. They shall be free
from humidity. Ballasts for LED lamps shall be provided with suitable tapping to set

Page 8 of 16
the voltage within the range specified. End connections and taps shall be brought out
in a suitable terminal block, rigidly fixed to the ballast enclosure..
15.4.3.4. Separate ballasts for each lamp shall be provided in case of multi-lamp fixtures.
15.4.4. Capacitors (Not applicable)
The Capacitors shall have a constant value of capacitance and shall be connected
across the supply of individual lamp circuits. Capacitors shall be suitable for operation
at the supply voltage as specified and shall have a value of capacitance so as to
correct the power factors of its corresponding lamp circuit to the extent of 0.98 lag.
Capacitors shall be hermetically sealed in a metal enclosure.
15.4.5. Lamps
15.4.5.1. The LED lamps to be supplied shall conform to relevant IS/IEC standards. LED lamps
shall be suitable for use in any position.
15.4.5.2. The lamps shall be capable of withstanding small vibrations and the connections at
lead in wires and filaments / electrodes shall not break under such circumstances.
15.4.5.3. Lamp shall confirm to relevant standards and shall be suitable for supply voltage and
frequency specified.
15.4.6. Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)
15.4.6.1. The MCB’s shall be of reputed make and the characteristics of MCB shall be suitable
for control & protection circuit equipments of high pressure mercury vapor / sodium
lamps / fluorescent tubes & plug points etc. MCB shall be hand operated, air break,
quick make, quick break, conforming to applicable standards mentioned.
15.4.7. The outgoing MCB’s shall be provided with overload / short circuit device for
protection under overload and short circuit conditions. The MCB shall conform to IS-
8828 (latest edition) and shall have an interrupting rating of 9 kA. MCB shall be flush
mounted and fitted on Zinc chromium plated M.S channel provided in DB
construction. Single pole MCB’s shall be provided for all outgoing A.C feeders.

Page 9 of 16
15.4.8. Receptacles
All receptacles shall be of cast steel or aluminium, heavy duty type, suitable for fixing on wall or
column and complete with individual switch. In general the receptacles to be installed are of the
following types:
15.4.8.1. Type RO-15A, 240V, 2 pole, 3 pin type with third pin grounded, metal clad with gasket
having cable gland entry suitable for 2 core 6 mm2 PVC armoured cable and a metallic
cover fixed to it with a metallic chain. Receptacles shall be suitable for installation in
moist location and/ or outdoor. The switch shall be of rotary type. Receptacles shall
be housed in an enclosure made out of 2 mm thick GI sheet with hinged doors with
padlocking arrangements. Door shall be lined with good quality gaskets. This shall
conform to IP 55.
15.4.8.2. Type RI-Combination of 5A and 15A, 240V, 3 pin type with third pin grounded,
suitable for flush mounting. The switch shall be of piano key type and shall be flush
mounted.
15.4.8.3. Type RP-63A, 415V, 3 phase, 4 pin interlocked plug and switch with earthing contacts.
Other requirements shall be same as type RO. The receptacle shall be suitable for 3½
core 35mm2 / 3½ core 70mm2 aluminium conductor cable entry and shall also be
suitable for loop-in-loop-out connection of cables of identical size. Receptacle shall
be suitable for outdoor application. Receptacles shall be housed in a box made out of
2 mm thick G. I. sheet, with hinged door with padlocking arrangement. Door shall be
lined with good quality gaskets. This shall conform to IP 55.
15.4.9. Name Plate
Name plate shall be made of non – rusting metal or engraved on PVC shall be of size
50mm x 20 mm indicating the feeders details shall be provided for all feeders for easy
identification. Further, name plate indicating DB No. etc. shall be provided.

Page 10 of 16
15.4.10. Switch Boxes
a) Switch boxes shall be made of 1.6 mm thick, MS sheet with 3 mm. thick
decorative, Bakelite / Perspex cover. Switch box shall be hot dip galvanized
provided with earthing terminal, mounting holes and screws, specified
number of conduit knockouts on both the sides and shall be suitable for
surface / flush mounting.
b) Switches shall be Piano key type single pole, quick make/quick break, suitable
for operation on 240 V AC supply. It shall be reputed make subject to owner’s
approval.
c) Sockets shall be of 3 pin type, suitable for 240 V AC supply and 450 V for 3
phase supply.
d) Terminal blocks provided for all incoming and outgoing wires shall be of 650 V
grades, moulded in melamine suitable for looping in and looping out of
stranded copper wires used.
Note: The maker of above items shall be as approved by purchaser during detailed
engineering.
15.5. TYPE OF LIGHTING FIXTURES
15.5.1. The type of lighting fixtures to be used in the indoor / outdoor areas with their type
designation is given below:
TABLE-15.5.1.1
AREA TYPE OF FIXTURE

a) Control Room Decorative LED lamp lighting fixtures surface / false ceiling mounting type,
complete enclosed acrylic, control gear, mounting accessories and with 2 x
16 W/ 2 x 20 W LED lamps.

Page 11 of 16
b) Entrance Water proof and splash proof totally enclosed lighting fixture with clear
glass cover suitable for surface mounting, complete with internal wiring,
control gear, mounting accessories and with 4 ft 2 x 16 W LED lamps.
c) Battery Room Corrosion resistant acid vapor proof lighting fixture suitable for surface
mounting complete with internal wiring, control gear mounting accessories
with 4 ft x 2 x 16watts LED lamps.
d) Outdoor 80 W/120 W LED Lamps
switchyard &
road
e) Toilets Industrial fluorescent lamps lighting fixtures suitable for surface / mounting
complete with internal wiring, mounting rail , vitreous enameled sheet
steel reflector, Control gear, mounting accessories and with 4 ft 1 x 16 W
LED lamps.
15.6. EMERGENCY LIGHTING
15.6.1. Emergency lighting shall be considered on the following areas / rooms with corrosion
resistant vapour proof lighting fixture suitable for surface mounting complete with
internal wiring with 1x 16 W LED lamps suitable for 110 V DC.
TABLE-15.6.1.1
Normally ‘ON’ Total

a. Control Room 4 4
b. Communication room 1 1
c. Battery Room 1 1
d. Gallery/Lobby 1 1
e. Office block & Engineers room 2 2
f. Entrance 1 1

Page 12 of 16
g. Corridor 1 1
h. reception 1 1
i. Store Room 1 1
15.6.2. Emergency lights will normally work on 110 V DC batteries and to be supplied from
DCDB through appropriate circuitary. Facilities to switch off “Normally ON” lights
individually may be considered.
15.7. WIRING OF LIGHTING FIXTURE AND RECEPTACLES
15.7.1. Area wise lighting fixture shall be controllable individually by use of single pole
decorative type switch, which in turn will be fed from the outgoing circuit of sub-
lighting panel. The lighting circuits will be wired with stranded copper conductor run
in–side 20 mm dia. PVC conduits. The conduits will be concealed mounted with
support span of min. 750 mm. Suitable GI junction boxes shall be provided as
required. The internal wiring with heavy duty PVC pipes & fitting is recommended as
GI conduits may get rusted in the long run. All the metal parts of junction holder shall
be earthed by earth conductor not less than 14 SWG green coloured insulated copper
conductor.
15.8. ROAD /STREET LIGHTING POLES
15.8.1. The street light poles of 8m height shall be steel tubular poles complete with fixing
brackets and junction boxes mounted 1 m above ground.
15.8.2. The galvanized sheet steel junction box for the street lighting pole shall be
completely weather proof conforming to IP: 55 poles with lockable door and with
MCB. The terminal shall be stud type and suitable for 2 nos. , 16 mm 2 cable and
double compression gland.
15.8.3. Wiring from junction box at the bottom of the pole to the fixture at the top of the
pole shall be done by using 2.5 sq. mm copper cables.

Page 13 of 16
15.9. DRAWING & LITERATURE
15.9.1. The contractors shall furnish the following
a) Detailed illumination scheme for substation shall be submitted along with
calculations for the approval of Employer.
b) Layout of luminaries in the control room and switchyard with light above
ground & mode of fixing
c) No. of lamps fixture proposed with type & make.
d) Polar curves, utilization curve and catalogue for the same
e) Catalogue & literature of various luminaries.
f) Emergency DC lighting schemes in AC supply failure.
15.10. INSPECTION OF TESTING
The supplier shall at its own expense carryout at the place of manufacture all such
tests and/or inspection of the equipment as per relevant IEC/ISS. The employer or
their designated representative shall be entitled to attend the aforesaid test and/or
inspections.
Type Test:
Equipment offered shall be Type tested as per relevant IEC/ISS. The Type test report
of the equipment supplied against this specification for the test carried out during the
last 5 years shall be furnished for approval. If the supplier fails to submit the Type test
reports or Type test reports are not complying with the technical specification, Type
test would be conducted by the contractor in the presence of authorised
representative of the employer at no additional cost implications to the employer.
The type tests conducted earlier should have either been conducted in accredited
laboratory (accredited by the national accreditation body of the country where
laboratory is located) or any government approved laboratory.

Page 14 of 16
Routine Test:
These tests would be conducted or new material and other finished material in
accordance with provision of Indian or other Internationally accepted standards.
Proper record of all routine tests has to be maintained and made available to the
employer on demand.
Acceptance Test:
These tests would be conducted as per Quality Assurance Programme approved by

the employer on each and every lot of finished material which is ready for dispatch.
The tests shall be conducted in presence of employer authorized representatives.
NOTE: For all type, routine and acceptance test, the acceptance value shall be the
values guaranteed by the bidded on the guaranteed technical particulars of his
proposal or the test value specified in the specification, whichever is more stringent
for that particular test.
No material shall be dispatched without the approval of test and inspection report.
15.11. TECHNICAL PARTICULARS REQUIREMENTS
TABLE-15.11.1
a. Supply voltage 230 V

b. Frequency 50 Hz
c. Variation of voltage  10%
d. Variation of frequency  5%
e. Combined voltage & frequency  10%
variation
f. Type of internal lighting wires Copper wiring, P.V.C. insulated 1100

Page 15 of 16
V grade.
g. Conduit 14 mm, 25mm, 32mm and 63 mm
PVC medium duty pipe
h. Earthing wire
i. Material Copper
ii. Size 8 SWG GI
iii. Light Points 16 SWG (stranded) with green colour
insulation
iv. Power Points 14 SWG (stranded) with green colour
insulation
i. Temperature rise As per IS:10322 (Pt-4)
j. Lighting fixtures & As per IS:8623 (Part-1)
accessories panel
Note:
a) PVC conduit & fittings shall be of fire resistant & non-inflammable type.
b) All wiring shall be of 99.9% electrolytic copper of reputed make approved by

purchaser.
c) For emergency light the fittings shall be suitable for 110 V D.C. systems.
d) No fuses shall be used. Instead of its MCB’s/ MCCB’s as appropriate of proper

short circuit level should be used.
e) To have aesthetic look the junction boxes, switches, etc. shall be of the same
manufacturer. Similarly MCBs and distribution box shall also be of the same
manufacturer.

Page 16 of 16
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER –16
Civil Works
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/–KC-3 Part II: Section 6: Employer's Requirement
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 16
CIVIL WORKS
CONTENTS
Sl. NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

16.0 GENERAL 1
16.1 SCOPE OF WORK 3
16.2 TENDER DRAWINGS 6
16.3 GENERAL AND SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 6
16.4 DOCUMENTS FOR APPROVAL 43
16.5 EXPERTISE STAFF AND LABOUR 44
16.6 CONSTRUCTIONAL PLANTS 44
16.7 PROGRAMME FOR EXECUTION OF WORKS 45
16.8 ACCESS TO SITE AND LAND FOR TEMPORARY WORKS 45
16.9 SAFETY OF EXISTING SERVICES 46
16.10 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS FROM WEATHER 47
16.11 ARRANGEMENT OF WATER DURING CONSTRUCTION 47
16.12 PERMANENT SOURCE OF POTABLE WATER 48
16.13 CONSTRUCTION POWER 48
16.14 SANITATION AND PUBLIC HEALTH 49
16.15 STORAGE SPACES AND SHEDS 49
16.16 OFFICE OF CONTRACTOR AND EMPLOYER/PMC 49
16.17 REMOVAL OF CAMPS 49
16.18 APPOINTMENT OF SAFETY SUPERVISOR 50
16.19 SETTING OUT OF WORKS 50
16.20 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS 50
16.21 TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY 80
Section IV-B Chapter 16 INDEX


16.22 SITE LEVELLING AND FORMATION OF TERRACES 81
16.23 SLOPE PROTECTION WORKS 83
16.24 CATCH DRAINS 83
16.25 EXCAVATAION 83
16.26 ANTIQUITIES 85
16.27 REMOVAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL 85
16.28 MATERIAL FOR FILLING/BACKFILLING 86
16.29 BACKFILLING OF EXCAVATION 86
16.30 SAND FILLING 87
16.31 COMPACTION 87
16.32 ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT 88
16.33 DAMP PROOFING COURSE 88
16.34 CONCRETE WORK 89
16.35 CONSTRUCTIONAL TOLERANCES 101
16.36 FORMWORK, SHUTTERING AND STAGING 101
16.37 REINFORCEMENT 105
16.38 MASONRY WORK 108
16.39 PLASTERING 117
16.40 WATER PROOFING COMPOUND 119
16.41 FLOORING, SKIRTING AND DADO WORKS 120
16.42 STRUCTURAL STEEL TRUSS ROOF 136
16.43 FALSE CEILING 143
16.44 POWDER COATED ALLUMINIUM DOORS AND WINDOWS 144
16.45 PAINTING 145
16.46 PLINTH PROTECTION 149
16.47 BITUMINIOUS ROAD WORK 150
16.48 OPEN SURFACE DRAIN 152
16.49 CHEQUERED STEEL PLATE COVERS 153


16.50 CHAIN LINK FENCING 153
16.51 STEEL GATES 155
16.52 WATER SUPPLY, PLUMBING AND SANITARY WORKS 155
16.53 CAST IRON SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPES AND FITTINGS 161
16.54 BRICK /RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY MANHOLES 163
16.55 SEPTIC TANK 164
16.56 SOAK PIT 164
16.57 LANDSCAPING WORKS 164
16.58 ANTI-WEED TREATMENT AND STONE GRAVEL SURFACING 167
16.59 SUPPLY AND LAYING OF R.C.C. NON-PRESSURE RIPES 169
16.60 QUALITY ASSURANCE, FIELD TESTING AND CHECKING PLAN 170
16.61 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 173

CHAPTER –16
CIVIL WORKS
16.0. GENERAL
16.0.1. These Specifications cover the detailed engineering covering planning, design and
preparation of all construction drawings; the supply of all materials, labour, fuel,
construction plant & machinery and execution of all civil works required for successful
commissioning of 220/132/33 kV substation at Dhungesangu. The work shall include (i)
Site development works covering topographical survey of substation site and preparation
of contour maps; geotechnical/soil investigations at substation Site; site leveling and the
formation of required number of terraces as per topography of site which shall involve
excavation in all types of soils, soft & hard rock, the filling required for site levelling and/or
formation of terraces and disposal of surplus earth; construction of R.C.C retaining walls
between the terraces; construction of stone masonry retaining/breast walls for hill slope
protection; the construction of R.C.C./Stone masonry catch drains etc; Construction of
fencing at the periphery of substation site; (ii) construction of foundations for gantry
towers/columns, lightening/lighting masts, equipment supporting structures, transformers
and all other structures/equipments; (iii) construction of R.C.C. Fire Protection Wall & Oil
collecting Pits including drainage of oil from transformer soak pits to central oil collecting
pit with necessary manholes; (iv) construction of R.C.C. Rail-cum-Road for handling of
transformers; (v) construction of Control Room-cum-Administrative building, D.G. Set
Room building, Staff Quarters, Guard Room, Car/Scooter Parking Shed and Stores with all
necessary finishes, fittings & fixtures and including all water supply, sanitary works,
electrical works, lighting and required civil works for air conditioning, firefighting
arrangements etc; (vi) construction of R.C.C. Cable trenches with precast R.C.C. covers;
(vii) construction of stone/brick masonry drains including the disposal of surface runoff
water outside the substation boundary to any natural drain/stream; (viii) Construction of
chain link fencing around substation; (ix) all internal roads and culverts; (x) laying of earth
mat etc. as shown in the tender drawings attached in Section-6 of Part-2 of Specifications
and as specified in the Bill of Quantities and any other civil work required for successful
Section IV-B Chapter 16 Page 1 of 186

commissioning of substations.
16.0.2. The entire civil works under this contract shall be carried out in accordance with these
specifications, relevant Indian/Nepalese Standards and specifications/guidelines of
Department of Urban Development & Building Construction and Department of Road,
Government of Nepal. The relevant Codes of Practice including all amendments, additions
and correction slips issued by Bureau of Indian Standard up to one month (i.e. 30 days)
prior to prescribed date of submission of bids shall be considered applicable in this
contract. The Schedule of Quantities and Rates and tender drawings shall form the part of
this Contract. In case of any discrepancy, most stringent provision shall be followed with
the approval of Employer.
16.0.3. All civil works shall satisfy the general technical requirements specified herein under in
subsequent clauses. All civil structures, buildings, foundations and other facilities shall be
designed to the service conditions and loads specified elsewhere in this Specification or
implied as per relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards.
16.0.4. All civil works shall be designed and executed as per applicable Indian Standards/
equivalent International Standards and Codes. All materials shall be of best quality
conforming to relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards and Codes.
16.0.5. The Contractor shall prepare all designs and construction drawings and shall furnish all
materials, labour, tools, equipment, constructional plant & machinery, fuel, transportation
and all other incidental items not shown or specified but as may be required for execution
of civil works in accordance with this specifications, approved construction drawings and
direction of Employer/PMC.
16.0.6. The works shall be carried out according to the design/drawings to be developed by the
Contractor and approved by the Employer/PMC. For all buildings, structures, foundations
etc., the necessary layout and details shall also be developed by the Contractor keeping in
view the functional requirements of the substation and providing enough space and
access for operation and maintenance. Certain minimum requirements are indicated in
this specification for guidance purposes only.
16.0.7. All references given herein are intended solely for the information and guidance of the
contractor and shall in no way exclude the application of other clauses of the contract
documents which, in the opinion of Employer/PMC, may affect the contract.

16.0.8. Total Area of substation plot within its boundary walls is about 67456 sq.m. The aforesaid
area is approximate and may vary. The employer does not take any guarantee of its
correctness or any conclusion drawn there from.
16.1. SCOPE OF WORK
16.1.1. The work to be carried out under these specifications shall include but not limited to the
following works:
(a) Detailed engineering including planning, design and preparation of all architectural ,
landscaping and construction drawings and execution of all civil works required for
220/132/33 kV substation at Dhungesangu;
(b) To carry out topographical survey at substation site including 100 meter beyond
substation boundaries and other important features like roads, rivers/streams and
preparation of contour maps on specified scale & contour interval;
(c) Carrying out geotechnical/soil investigations at each substation site for ascertaining
the soil strata likely to be encountered and determining all necessary engineering
properties of soil strata required for design of foundations, site development works,
construction of roads, design of earth mat etc.;
(d) Carrying out site development work at each substation site including site leveling
and formation of required number of terraces as per topography of site for locating
the various facilities and components of substation. The work shall involve
excavation in all types of soils including soft & hard rock; filling with selected
excavated earth for levelling & formation of terraces, compacting the filled up earth
to specified Proctor's Dry Density and disposal of surplus earth; construction of
R.C.C retaining walls between the terraces; construction of stone masonry breast
walls on hill side of terraces for slope protection and stone masonry toe/retaining
walls on filled up side as per requirement; and construction of R.C.C./Stone masonry
catch drains etc.

(e) Construction of Fenced Boundary Wall of Substation plot with necessary gates, guard
room etc.;
(f) Construction of foundations for gantry towers/columns, lightening/lighting masts,

equipment supporting structures, transformers and all other structures &
equipments;
(g) Construction of R.C.C. Fire Protection Walls between transformers and construction
of Central Oil Collecting Pits including underground drainage arrangement of oil from
transformer soak pits to central oil collecting pit by laying R.C.C. pipes of prescribed
size & quality and constructing necessary manholes etc.;
(h) Construction of Substation Control Room-cum-Administrative building, D.G. Set

Room building, Staff Quarters, Guard Room, Stores and Car Parking Shed with all
finishes, fittings & fixtures including water supply, plumbing work, sanitary works,
electrification & lighting, civil works required for air conditioning & firefighting
facilities etc. including anti termite treatment. Control Room Building-cum-
Administrative building and other specified areas shall be provided with air
conditioning to maintain prescribed temperature and humidity level. Control Room
Building shall be two storied building in which ground floor shall be used for cable
laying and first floor for installation of Control & Rely Panels, A.C. & D.C. Distribution
boards, Batteries, Electric Workshop, Communication Equipments, Stores and other
auxiliary facilities etc. Administrative block shall be a single storey building in
continuation of Control Room building and shall have rooms for Officers and staff,
conference room, Pantry, Reception Area, Gent’s & Lady’s Toilets etc. A tentative
layout of Control Room-cum- Administrative building is shown in tender drawing
attached in Section-6 of Part-2 of Specifications for the information and guidance of
bidders. The said drawing is tentative and purely indicative and in no way final
drawing. The layout of said building shall be prepared by Contractor after award of
work to meet the requirements of this specifications and respective substation and
as approved by Employer/PMC.

(i) Construction of R.C.C. Cable Trenches with R.C.C. precast covers including providing
suitable crossing arrangements for cable trenches at the crossings of drains & roads
and providing all necessary embedment like plates, angles etc in cable trenches for
laying the cables. Edges of cable trenches and R.C.C. precast covers shall be
protected against damage during laying of cables and during placing/ removal of
precast R.C.C. covers by providing edge protection angles as shown in tender
drawings attached in Section-6 of Part-2 of Specifications.
(j) Construction of stone/brick masonry drains for drainage of substation and disposal
of surface runoff water to any nearby natural drain/stream/river including providing
necessary culverts at road crossings;
(k) Construction of R.C.C. road-cum-rail track, Jacking pads, pulling blocks etc required
for handling of transformers during installation, removal & maintenance;
(l) Construction of all internal bituminous roads;
(m) Finishing the yard by providing anti weed treatment and surfacing with stone gravel
after construction of all foundations, cable trenches, drains, other underground
facilities and erection of all equipment; etc
(n) Providing chain link fencing around switchyard with lockable steel gates of
appropriate sizes, one for equipment and other for operational & maintenance
personnel;
(o) The execution of all necessary water supply, sanitary and area drainage works;
(p) The execution of all necessary electrical wiring and installation of all lighting and
other fittings & fixtures;
(q) Any other work/works whether specified or not but required and necessary for
successful commissioning of substations.
(r) Scope includes civil works only for bays in the scope of this specification. However,
site development works, the formation of terraces and construction of control room-
cum-administrative building shall be for the ultimate stage of substation covering

bays in the scope of this specification as well as future bays as shown in bid
drawings.
The above scope of work shall be read in conjunction with Section-1 of Part-2 of this
specification and both are complementary to each other.
16.2. Tender Drawings

Tender drawings giving typical details of civil works are attached in Section-VI of this
specification for information and guidance of bidders. The details shown therein are
purely tentative and for tender purpose only. All civil, architectural & landscaping works
shall be executed as per designs and drawings to be prepared by contractor after award of
work and approved by Employer/PMC.
16.3. GENERAL AND SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
16.3.1. Design Criteria for Civil Works: The Contractor shall be required to prepare a detailed
design criteria and basis for the design of all civil works required for substations including
foundations, buildings, Road-cum-Rail track, internal roads, drainage, water supply,
sanitary works and all other works in the scope of this specification bringing out the
standards proposed to be used, the details of materials & loads, analysis & design
methods and computer software proposed to be used and all other relevant details in
conformity with this specification and related Indian Standards and submit the same to
Employer/PMC for approval. The design of civil works shall be taken up only after having
the approval of aforesaid design criteria & basis from Employer/PMC.
16.3.2. The Contractor shall also prepare detailed proposals for geotechnical investigation,
topographical survey and site levelling works including formation of terraces in conformity
with this specification and related Indian Standards for the approval of Employer/PMC
bringing out details of works proposed to be carried out and methodology proposed to be
used. These works shall be taken up only after the approval of aforesaid proposals by
Employer/PMC.
16.3.3. Geotechnical Investigation
16.3.3.1. The Contractor shall carry out detailed geotechnical investigation at each substation site
as per these specifications and related Indian Standards to arrive at sufficiently accurate,

general as well as specific information about the soil profile, necessary soil parameters of
the Site including engineering properties of soils required for (i) planning and design of site
development works; (ii) safe and rational design and construction of foundations of the
various buildings, structures and equipments and (iii) design of internal roads.
16.3.3.2. Geotechnical/Soil investigation at each substation site shall be carried out up to a depth of
two times the expected maximum width of any foundation below foundation level or up
to 12 m below ground level whichever is more. In case of pile foundations, the soil
investigation shall be carried out up to a minimum depth of 20 meter below ground level
or as per the expected length of pile whichever is more.
16.3.3.3. A detailed soil report including field data duly certified by site engineer of Employer/PMC
shall be submitted by the Contractor for specific approval of Employer/PMC. The report
shall contain all soil parameters including engineering properties of soils along with
recommendations of Geotechnical Consultant for type of foundation, engineering
properties of soil including safe/allowable bearing capacity required for site development
works and design and construction of foundations, roads etc.
16.3.3.4. The Bidder may visit the substation sites to ascertain the site & soil conditions likely to be
encountered during execution of works. Any variation in soil data shall not constitute a
valid reason for any additional cost and shall not affect the terms & conditions of the
contract. Field tests must be conducted covering entire substation area including all the
critical locations i.e. Control Room-cum-Administrative Building, Lightning/Lighting Masts,
Gantry Tower/column locations, transformers etc.
16.3.4. Topographical Survey
16.3.4.1. A preliminary topographical survey of each substation site has been carried out by the
Employer and tentative contour maps have been prepared. The preliminary layout of each
substation has been superimposed on contour map drawings and these drawings are
attached in Section-6 of Part-2 of Specifications for the information and guidance of
Bidders. However, the Employer does not take any responsibility for correctness of these
drawings and any interpretation or conclusion drawn there from by bidders. The
successful bidder shall carry out topographical survey and prepare contour map of each
substation site after award of work and the same shall form the basis of all site
development works.
16.3.4.2. The land for construction of substations shall be handed over to the successful bidder as
on where basis after award of work. The contractor shall carry out topographical survey at
each substation site covering the entire area of substation and 100 m beyond substation
plot boundary including all nearby important features like existing roads, foot tracks,
natural streams, rivers, houses etc and prepare contour map on 1 : 1000 scale with 0.5
contour interval. Since contour map shall form the basis of estimation of quantities of
excavation and filling required for site development work, 0.50 m contour interval shall be
maintained and only for very steep topography, 1.0 m contour interval may be adopted
with the approval of Employer/PMC.
16.3.4.3. The spot levels shall be taken in a grid of 2 m x 2 m as well as at all such points where
there is a sudden change in levels. The spot levels shall be taken with respect to a
temporary bench mark to be established by contractor at substation site by transferring
the levels from a permanent bench mark of Survey Department of Nepal available near to
substation site.
16.3.4.4. The contractor shall submit the spot levels (in grid format) in editable soft copy in excel
format along with contour map of each substation site on 1 : 1000 scale with contour
interval of 0.5/1.0 m in editable auto cad soft drawing as well as in hard copies for each
substation.
16.3.5. Site Levelling & Formation of Terraces
16.3.5.1. Based on preliminary topographical survey of each substation site, the Employer has
tentatively finalized the levels and nos. of terraces at each substation site and the same
are given tender drawings attached in Section-6 of Part-2 of Specifications for the
information and guidance of Bidders. The levels and nos. of terraces as given in tender
drawings are purely tentative and in no way final. These details shall be finalized by
successful bidder in consultation and with the approval of Employer/PMC after award of
work based on topographical maps prepared by him.
16.3.5.2. The contractor shall level the area required for construction of substation either at a single
level or multiple levels depending upon the topography of site and space requirement for
each substation and also ensuring minimum requirements of earth work during site
levelling and formation of terraces. The number of terraces and their levels at each
substation site shall be finalized by contractor in consultation and with the approval of
Employer/PMC after completion of topographical survey of substation sites and
preparation of contour maps and taking into account the requirement of earthwork for
site levelling and formation of terraces and highest flood level. The proposal in this regard
shall be submitted by the Contractor for the approval of Employer/PMC. The work of site
levelling and formation of terraces shall be taken up only after approval of related
drawings by the Employer/PMC.
16.3.5.3. The proposal of site levelling and formation of terraces shall be approved by the
Employer/PMC during detailed Engineering stage after finalization of layout of substations
and completion of work of topographical survey & preparation of contour maps.
16.3.6. Layout & Levels of Structures
16.3.6.1. The layout and levels of all structures shall be made by the Contractor at his own cost
from the general grids of the plot and benchmarks set by him and approved by
Employer/PMC. The Contractor shall provide all assistance in terms of instruments,
materials and personnel to Employer/PMC for checking the detailed layout and shall be
solely responsible for the correctness of the layout and levels.
16.3.7. Drainage of Substation
16.3.7.1. The Contractor shall carry out overall planning and design of both external & internal
storm water drainage system for each substation including development of layout, designs
and drawings of all drains including all culverts, connection of internal drains to the outfall
point located outside the substation boundary wall. Invert level of drainage system at
outfall point shall be decided in such a way that the water from internal drains can be
easily discharged outside the substation boundary wall by gravity. Outfall point shall be
got approved from Employer/PMC before commencement of construction. While
designing the drainage system, the following points shall be taken care of:
(a) The drainage system for each substation shall be designed for one hour rain fall
intensity of 25 years return period and the data of rainfall required for designing
the size of drains shall be acquired from the concerned departments of
Government of Nepal by the contractor himself at his own cost
(b) The surface of the switchyard shall be sloped towards drains to prevent
accumulation of water.
(c) Drains shall be constructed at suitable locations in such a way that substation is
not flooded and roads are not affected due to accumulation of surface runoff
water. In the substation, the maximum spacing between two drains shall not be
more than 100 meter. It shall be ensured that no area is left un-drained.
(d) Open surface drains shall have a minimum clear width (i.e. Inner) of 300mm and a
minimum depth of 300mm depth at their starting points. The depth of drain shall
be measured with respect to ground level of substation i.e. from bottom of
switchyard stone filling.
(e) Longitudinal slope of drains shall be kept not less than 1 in 1000.
(f) Open surface drains shall be constructed with brick masonry or stone masonry as
per the site condition. A 100 mm thick layer of 1 : 2 : 4 Plain Cement Concrete (1
cement : 2 Fine Aggregates : 4 Coarse Aggregates of 20 mm nominal size) shall be
laid at the bottom of all drains over a 50 mm thick layer of Lean Concrete of
proportion 1: 3 : 6 (1 cement: 3 Fine Aggregates : 6 Coarse Aggregates of 20mm
nominal size). Before laying the lean concrete layer, the earth below shall be
thoroughly compacted for ensuring that there is no loose pocket below drain.
(g) The last course of brick masonry in drain walls shall be with brick on edge.
(h) A concrete coping of 50 mm thick plain cement concrete of 1 : 2 : 4 (1 cement : 2

Fine Aggregates : 4 Coarse Aggregates of 20 mm nominal size) proportion shall be
provided at top of all masonry drains for the protection of masonry.
(i) All internal and exposed surfaces of drains shall be plastered with 15 mm thick 1 : 3
cement – sand plaster ( 1 Cement : 3Coarse Sand)
(j) The side wall of the drains shall be 25 mm above the gravel level to prevent falling
of gravel into drain. Groove of 125 mm width shall be provided at 1000 mm
spacing in drain walls above ground level with suitable mild steel grating for

drainage of water from stone metal layer.
(k) The maximum velocity of water in open stone/brick masonry drains and pipe
drains shall be limited to 1.80 m/sec and 2.4m/sec respectively. However,
minimum non-silting velocity of 0.6m/sec shall be ensured and maintained in all
drains.
(l) Pipe drains shall be provided in areas of switchyard where movement of crane will
be necessary during operating phase of the substation.
(m) Concrete (R.C.C.) pipes of class NP-3 conforming to IS:458 shall be provided for
pipe drains as well at road crossings for culverts. However, for rail crossings, R.C.C.
pipes of class NP-4 conforming to IS:458 shall be provided. The internal diameter
of pipes shall not be less than 450 mm. For the design of R.C.C. pipes for drains and
culverts, relevant Indian Standards/equivalent International Standards shall be
followed.
(n) Pipe drains shall be provided with manholes at the spacing of not more than 30.0
m and at locations where there is change in slope/direction of flow
(o) If the invert level of outfall point is above the invert level of last drain in the
substation boundary, the sump of suitable size shall be constructed within the
substation boundary and auto start pumps of adequate capacity shall be provided
to pump out the water from sump to natural drain so as to ensure that there is no
flooding of switchyard..
(p) The drainage scheme and associated drawings shall be got approved from
Employer/PMC before commencement of construction.
16.3.8. Road-cum-Rail Tracks and Internal Roads

16.3.8.1. All the road-cum-rail tracks and internal roads as shown in the layout drawing of the
substations enclosed in Section-6 of Part-2 of Specification are in the scope of this
specification. However, the exact length and requirements of road-cum-rail tracks and
internal roads shall be finalized during detailed engineering based on approved layout of
each substation. While planning and designing the road-cum-rail track and internal roads,
the following points shall be taken care of:

(a) Road-cum-rail track and internal roads shall be designed for the load of heaviest
transformer in the substation. Designs shall be carried out as per relevant
Indian/Nepalese Standards as well as Standards of Indian Road Congress and
Department of Roads, Government of Nepal.
(b) R.C.C. Jacking Pads of required size shall be provided in Road-cum-Rail Track at all
turning points where the direction of transformer wheels is required to be changed
during the installation or removal of transformer. Concrete pulling blocks of
necessary capacity shall also be provided at all turning points as well as along the
length at a spacing of not more than 30 meter for handling of transformer during
installation or removal.
(c) The road from main gate of Substation to Control Room-cum-Administrative

Building shall be 5.0 m wide bituminous road. All other internal roads within
substation boundary wall shall be 3.75 m wide bituminous road. In addition, 5.0 m
wide road shall have 0.5 m wide shoulder and 3.75 m wide road shall have 0.3 m
wide shoulder on either side of the road. The tentative layout of roads is shown in
the plot plan and layout drawings of respective substation in Section-6. However,
road layout - shall be finalized during detailed design engineering stage based on
the approved layout of the respective substations and operation and maintenance
requirements.
(d) Strengthening or widening of existing roads as applicable shall be carried out with
2.5 cm thick premix carpet over a 100 mm thick (minimum) or as per design
requirement, whichever is more, compacted layer of WBM (Water Bound
Macadam) after filling the pot holes of existing roads with WBM material.
Widening of existing roads, if required, shall be carried out as per specification of
new roads.

(e) Adequate turning space for vehicles considering the transportation of heaviest
transformer shall be provided and bend radii shall be set accordingly. Road to the
Transformer Area shall be as short and straight as far as possible.
(f) All culverts and allied structures (required for road/rail track, drain, trench
crossings etc.) shall be designed as per relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent
International Standards for the load of heaviest transformer. All drawings of roads,
culverts and allied structures shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted to
Employer/PMC for approval.
16.3.9. Transformers Foundation and Road-cum-Rail Track

16.3.9.1. The Contractor shall design, prepare construction drawings for the foundations of
transformers and shall provide a R.C.C. Road-cum-Rail Track integrated with the
Transformer foundations to enable installation and the replacement of any transformer
unit during operation and maintenance stage. The road-cum-rail track system shall be
suitable to permit the movement of any transformer unit fully assembled (including OLTC,
bushings) with oil and shall enable the removal of any transfer unit from its foundation to
the nearest road. If crossings of cable trench/drain are required, suitably designed pipe or
box R.C.C. culverts shall be provided as per requirement and site conditions in accordance
with relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards.
16.3.9.2. Each Transformer including oil conservator tank and cooler banks etc. shall be placed on
R.C.C. walls in a soak pit. The clear distance of the soak pit walls (inner face of wall) from
the Transformer’s outer most faces shall be 20% of the Transformer height or 1.0 m
whichever is more. The oil soak pit thus formed shall have a capacity equal to 200%
volume of total oil contained in transformer of 220 kV voltage level and 130% for 132 kV
or lower voltage level transformers. The walls of oil soak pit shall project 150 mm above
the finished level of the switchyard so as to avoid outside water entering into the soak pit.
The bottom of the soak pit shall have a uniform slope towards the sump pit. While
designing the oil soak pit, the movement of the transformer shall be duly considered and
taken into account in the design.
16.3.9.3. The gratings for transformer soak pits shall be made of MS flat of size not less than 40 mm

x 5mm placed at 30mm center to center and MS flat of minimum size of 25mm x 5mm
placed at spacing of 100 mm center to center, both placed at right angle to each other.
The sizes of flats shall be as per design requirement and sizes specified above are the
minimum sizes. Maximum length of grating shall be 2000mm and width shall not be more
than 500mm. The gratings shall be supported on structural steel beams of size not less
than ISMB 100 mm, which shall be supported on soak pit walls and pedestals to be raised
from soak pit bottom as per design requirement. A 300 mm thick layer of
broken/crushed/non-crushed stone having size 40mm to 60mm shall be laid over gratings,
which shall act as barrier to fire and an extinguisher for flaming oil. All structural steel
components and steel gratings shall be hot dip galvanized.
16.3.9.4. Each soak pit shall be provided a sump pit of minimum size 600 mm x 600 mm and 300
mm deep in one corner and soak pit floor shall be sloped towards this sump pit for easy
drainage of oil & rain water from soak pit to central oil collecting pit so that soak pit
remains dry.
16.3.9.5. One or more central oil collecting pits, at a suitable location, shall be provided which shall
act as main disposal tank for all adjoining transformer soak pits. The individual soak pit of
transformers shall be drained into central oil collecting pit by providing a pipe line with
minimum 300 mm diameter R.C.C. Pipes of NP-3 Class from transformer soak pits to
central oil collecting pit. Manholes shall be provided as per requirement but spacing of
manholes shall not be more than 30 m.
16.3.9.6. The transformer foundation including soak pit, road-cum-rail track and central oil colleting
pits shall be of reinforced cement concrete construction and shall be designed as per
relevant Indian Standards/equivalent International Standards and these specifications.
16.3.9.7. A pump of adequate capacity shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor to evacuate
the rain water and oil from the central oil collecting pit.
16.3.9.8. Central Oil Collecting Pit shall be provided with 900 mm high railing for safety of
personnel.
16.3.10. Fire Protection Walls
16.3.10.1. Fire protection walls shall be provided between two transformer units located in close
proximity for fire safety of transformers in accordance with modern engineering practice
and Local Advisory Committee (LAC) recommendations. The fire protection walls shall be
of R.C.C. construction. While designing the fire protection walls, the following aspects shall
be duly taken care of:
16.3.10.2. Fire Resistance: The fire protection wall shall have a minimum fire resistance of 3 hours.
The partitions, which are made to reduce the noise level, shall have the same fire
resistance. The walls of the building, which are used as fire protection walls, shall also
have a minimum fire resistance of 3 hours.
16.3.10.3. The fire protection walls shall be designed to protect against the effect of radiant heat and
flying debris from an adjacent fire.
16.3.10.4. Dimensions: The fire protection wall shall extend not less than 1000 mm beyond
transformer’s outer most faces and its cooling bank and 1000 mm above the conservator
tank or safety vent. A minimum clearance of 2.0 meter shall be provided between the
equipments e.g. Transformer and fire protection walls. The building walls, which act as
firewalls, shall extend at least 1.0 m above the roof in order to protect the building against
fire.
16.3.10.5. Materials: The fire protection wall shall be made of reinforced cement concrete as per the
relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards.
16.3.11. Indoor Transformers
16.3.11.1. For indoor installation of oil filled transformers, the transformers of rating of more than 75
kVA shall be located in a vault. Transformer vaults shall have a minimum fire resistance
rating of 3 hours but where transformers are protected by water spray, Halogen or Carbon
dioxide systems, vaults of 1 hour rating is adequate.
16.3.11.2. A trapped floor drain shall be provided which discharges burning oil to a safe location. A
fire resistant door and a noncombustible curb at least 100 mm high shall be provided at
each doorway. Switchboards etc. shall be physically separated from the vaults and the
latter should never be used as offices, filling cabinets, work rooms, etc.
16.3.11.3. Adequate ventilation shall be provided in the transformer vault. Transformer shall be
separated from surrounding walls by 750 mm (minimum) to permit free air circulation.

16.3.12. Foundations and other R.C.C. Constructions

16.3.12.1. General Requirements
(i) The work covered under this clause comprises the design, preparation of
construction drawings and construction of foundations and other R.C.C.
constructions for substation gantry towers/columns, lightening/lighting masts, bus
supports, equipment supports, transformers, jacking pads, pulling blocks, fire
protection walls, control cubicles, marshaling kiosks, auxiliary equipments,
construction of Control Room-cum-Administrative building, D.G. Set Room
building, Underground Water Storage Tank, R.C.C. cable trenches, or any other
facility or foundation required for successful commissioning of substations. This
clause is also applicable to the other R.C.C. constructions.
(ii) All foundations except for external lighting poles shall be of reinforced cement
concrete construction. The external lighting pole shall be embedded in plain
cement concrete of proportion 1:2:4 (1 Cement : 2 Fine Aggregates : 4 Coarse
Aggregates) to the designed depth. The design and construction of R.C.C.
structures and foundations shall be carried out as per relevant Indian Standards.
(iii) The grade of structural concrete for all foundations, structures, buildings and all
load bearing members except water retaining structures shall be design mix
concrete of M-20 grade conforming to IS:456 and these specifications or
equivalent International Standards. The grade of concrete for water retaining
structures shall be M-25. Higher grade of concrete than specified above may be
used at the discretion of Contractor without any additional financial implication to
the Employer/PMC.
(iv) All tests on concrete shall be conducted as per relevant Indian Standards/
equivalent International Standards.
(v) The plinth of switchyard foundations and buildings shall be kept not less than
300mm and 500 mm above finished ground level respectively.
(vi) A layer of lean concrete 1 : 3 : 6 (1 Cement : 3 Fine Aggregates : 6 Coarse
Aggregates of 20 mm nominal size) of 100 mm thickness shall be provided below
all foundations, underground structures, trenches etc to provide a levelling course
and a base for construction.

(vii) The design of foundations shall be based on the approved soil data, sub-soil
conditions and safe/allowable bearing capacity of soil as well as for all possible
critical loads and the combinations thereof. The foundations either shallow spread
footings or raft foundation or pile foundation as may be required based on
soil/sub-soil conditions and superimposed loads shall be provided.
(viii) If pile foundations are needed, the same shall be cast-in-situ bored or under
reamed pile type as per relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International
Standards. Only R.C.C. cast-in-site bored piles shall be provided. Suitability of the
adopted type of pile shall be justified by way of full design calculations. Detailed
design calculations shall be submitted by the contractor showing complete details
of piles/pile groups proposed to be used. Necessary initial load test shall also be
carried out by the contractor at his own cost to establish the pile design capacity.
Only after the design capacity of piles has been established, the Contractor shall
take up the job of piling. Routine load tests for the piles shall also be conducted as
specified in relevant Indian Standard. All the work (design & testing) shall be
planned in such a way that these shall not cause any delay in project completion.
16.3.12.2. Foundation Depths: Minimum depth of foundations below ground level shall be not less
than as given below:
(a) Minimum depth of Foundations for Gantry Towers and : 2.5 m

Lightning/Lighting Masts
(b) Minimum depth of Foundations for Equipment : 2.0 m

Supporting Structures
(d) Minimum depth of Foundation for Control Room : 2.0 m

-cum-Administrative & D.G. Set Room Buildings
e) Minimum depth of Foundation for Fencing Posts : 0.6 m

and Minor Structures
16.3.12.3. Design Requirements for Foundations and other R.C.C. Structures: While designing
foundations and R.C.C. structures, the following points shall be taken care of:

(a) Dead Loads, Live/Imposed Loads, Wind Loads, Snow Loads and Special Loads and
Load Combinations, as applicable, shall be considered as per IS:875 (Part-I to Part
V) until and unless specified otherwise in this specification.
(b) Seismic Loads: Seismic load shall be considered as per IS:1893 corresponding to
Zone-V. It shall be ensured that seismic loads to be considered in designs are not
less than the seismic loads corresponding to earthquake occurred in Nepal in April,
2015.
(c) Limit state method of design as per relevant Indian Standards or equivalent
International Standards subject to the approval of Employer/PMC shall be
adopted.
(d) Cold twisted deformed bars of grade Fe-415 or Fe-500 conforming to relevant
Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards shall be used for
reinforcement.
(e) Two layers of reinforcement (on inner and outer face) shall be provided in walls &
slab sections (like cable trenches, underground water tank etc) as well as in
foundations irrespective of design requirement. The minimum reinforcement as
per IS:456 or equivalent International Standards shall be provided in cases where
there is no design requirement.
(f) Clear cover to reinforcement shall be as per relevant Indian Standards/equivalent

International Standards. However, it shall not be less than 50 mm for foundations
and 25 mm for underground structures like cable trenches, underground water
tanks and similar other structures.
(g) The detailing of reinforcement in foundations and R.C.C. structures shall be carried
out as per relevant Indian Standards/equivalent International Standards.
(h) R.C.C. water retaining structures like water storage tanks etc shall be designed as
un-cracked section in accordance with relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent
International Standards. However, cable trenches/storm water drains etc shall be

designed as cracked section with limited steel stresses as per relevant Indian
Standards/ equivalent International Standards.
(i) The foundations and other R.C.C. structures shall be designed for all the critical
combination of loads as per the relevant Indian Standards/equivalent International
Standards. Detailed design calculations and drawings of foundations and other
R.C.C. structures shall be submitted by the contractor to Employer/PMC for
approval.
(j) Design of foundations and other R.C.C. structures shall consider any sub-soil water
pressure that may be encountered.
(k) Necessary protection to the foundations and underground structures, if required

as per the findings of soil investigation, shall be provided to take care of any special
requirements for aggressive soils or sub soil water or both, black cotton soil or any
other type of soil which is detrimental/harmful to the concrete or reinforcement
steel.
(l) R.C.C. columns shall be provided with rigid connection at the base with column
footings.
(m) All substructures shall be checked for sliding and overturning stability during both
construction and operating conditions for various combinations of loads. Factors of
safety for these cases shall be as specified in relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent
International Standards or as stipulated elsewhere in these Specifications. For
checking against overturning, weight of soil vertically above the footing only shall
be considered.
(n) Earth pressure for all underground structures shall be calculated using co-efficient
of earth pressure at rest or co-efficient of active or passive earth pressure,
whichever is applicable. However, for the design of substructures of any
underground enclosures, earth pressure at rest shall be considered.
(o) In addition to earth pressure and sub soil water pressure etc, a surcharge load of
2.0 ton/m2 shall also be considered for the design of all underground structures
including cable trenches, sumps, underground water tanks, drains, substructure of

any underground hollow enclosure etc for taking care of the vehicular traffic in the
vicinity of the structures.
(p) Following conditions shall be considered for the design of water tank, cable
trenches, sumps, drains/trenches and other underground structures:
(i) Full water pressure from inside and no earth pressure & sub-soil water
pressure and surcharge pressure from outside.
(ii) Full earth pressure, surcharge pressure and sub-soil water pressure from
outside and no water pressure from inside.
(iii) Design shall also be checked against buoyancy under empty condition due to
sub-soil water during construction and maintenance stages. Minimum factor
of safety of 1.1 against buoyancy shall be ensured ignoring the superimposed
loadings.
(q) Base slab of any underground enclosure shall also be designed for empty condition
during construction and maintenance stages with ground water table (GWT) at
highest possible level.
(r) Base slab of any underground enclosure like water storage tank shall also be
designed for the condition of different combination of pump sumps being empty
during maintenance stages with GWT at highest possible level. Intermediate
dividing piers of such enclosures shall be designed considering water in one pump
sump only and the other pumps sump being empty for maintenance.
(s) The foundations shall be proportioned so that the estimated total and differential
settlement of the foundations are not greater than the settlements that the
structure or equipment is designed to accommodate.
(t) The tower and equipment foundations shall be checked for a factor of safety as per
relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards for two conditions
i.e. Normal condition and Abnormal condition (i.e. either with short circuit forces

or earthquake forces whichever is more critical) against sliding, overturning and

pullout.
(u) Thickness of footing slab shall not be less than 250 mm for dry locations and 300
mm for wet locations.
(v) The thickness of wall of underground tanks, sumps etc shall not be less than 250
mm.
(w) Diameter of main reinforcement bar in foundations, water tanks, sumps etc shall
not be less than 12 mm and in floor/roof slabs of buildings not less than 10mm.
(x) Thickness of floor/roof slabs of buildings shall not be less than 150 mm
16.3.13. Cable Trenches and Cable Trench Crossings
While designing cable trenches and their crossings, the following points shall be taken
care of:
(a) The cable trenches and pre-cast removable R.C.C. cover (with lifting arrangement)
shall be constructed using R.C.C. of M-20 grade as per relevant Indian Standards/
(b) The cable trench walls shall be designed for the following minimum loads:
(i) Dead load of cables 155 kg per meter length of cable tray plus 75 Kg
concentrated load on account of maintenance crew anywhere on one tier at
the outer edge of tier;
(ii) Earth pressure; and
(iii) Uniform surcharge load of 2.0 ton/m2.
(c) Cable trench covers shall be designed for self-weight and for a concentrated load
of 150 kg at center of span on each cover.
(d) Thickness of cable trench walls and base slab shall not be less than 150 mm and
diameter of reinforcement bars shall not be less than 10 mm.

(e) Necessary sumps shall be provided for collecting water from cable trenches and
each sump shall be provided with self-starting pumps of suitable capacity. These
pumps shall be supplied and installed for pumping out water collected in sump pit.
(f) Cable trenches shall not be used as storm water drains.
(g) The top of trenches shall be kept at least 100 mm above the finished ground level.
The top of cable trenches shall be such that the surface run off rainwater does not
enter into the cable trenches.
(h) Edge Protection Angles of size 45x45x5 mm with lugs shall be provided for edge
protection in cable trenches and their precast covers for protection of
edges/corners against breakage.
(i) All metal parts inside the trenches shall be connected to the earthing system.
(j) Trench wall shall not foul with the foundation. Suitable clear gap shall be provided.
(k) The trench bed shall have a slope of 1/1000 along the run
(l) Cable trenches shall be blocked at the ends if required with brick masonry in
cement sand mortar 1:6 and plaster with 12mm thick 1:4 cement sand mortar.
(m) Cable trench crossings shall be designed for critical load likely to be passed over
the crossing. The cable trench crossing may be of either R.C.C box culvert type or
R.C.C. Hume pipes embedded in plain concrete as per design requirement and
approved by Employer/PMC.
(n) In case of pumping of water from cable trench sump pits to nearest storm water
drain becomes necessary, auto start pump shall be provided at each sump pit.
16.3.14. Requirements for Buildings

16.3.14.1. General Requirements:
(a) The work includes detailed design & engineering and construction of Control
Room-cum-Administrative Building, D.G. Set Room, Staff Quarters, Stores, Guard
Room, Car Parking Shed or any other building including anti-termite treatment,
DPC, plinth protection, peripheral drains, water supply, plumbing, sanitary and civil

works required for firefighting, electrification, air conditioning etc.

(b) The work shall also include the preparation of architectural designs and drawings
of buildings as per Nepalese Practice/tradition and providing architectural features
in buildings accordingly. For aforesaid work, a reputed local architect having
minimum five year experience in similar works shall be engaged by successful
bidder with the approval of Employer.
(c) Minimum clear headroom in various buildings shall be maintained as under:
 Control Room Block, D.G Set Room and Store : 3.70 M
 Administrative Block, Staff Quarters, Guard Room : 3.0 M
 Car Parking Shed : 3.0 M
The above specified clear headroom are minimum and incase higher clear
headroom are required from functional requirements in any building, the same
shall be provided within quoted rates.
(d) The tentative sizes of various buildings are shown in bid drawings available in
Section-VI of this specification. The size and details shown in the tender drawings
are tentative and indicative only and are meant for the information and guidance
of bidders. However, the sizes of buildings shall be finalized during detailed
engineering after award of work with the approval of Employer/PMC. The Control
Room-cum-Administrative building shall be planned and constructed by taking into
account the present requirements as well as future expansion (i.e. nos. of bays in
the scope of this specification and bays to be added in future as shown in bid
drawings or as directed by the Employer/PMC after award of work).
(e) All buildings shall be R.C.C. Framed structure with R.C.C. roof except Car Parking
Shed which shall be steel structure with truss roof and R.C.C. foundation.
(f) The control Room Building shall be a double storey building and designed and
oriented in such a manner so that whole of outdoor switchyard is visible from the
Control Room Building. The ground floor of control room building shall be used for
cable laying and first floor for installation of control & relay panels and locating
other auxiliary equipments & facilities like batteries, A.C. & D.C Distribution

boards, Communication Equipments, Electrical Workshop, Stores etc.

(g) Administrative block of building shall be a single storey R.C.C. framed structure
with R.C.C. roof and shall have rooms for engineers and staff, conference, pantry,
reception, gents & lady’s toilets etc.
(h) The civil works for auxiliary services like ventilation, air conditioning, fire
protection and detection system and all other miscellaneous services shall be
provided in accordance with the requirements specified in relevant section of this
specification.
(i) All buildings shall be constructed as per the design and drawings to be developed
by the contractor and approved by Employer/PMC.
(j) All Safety Railings in Staircases, Balconies or any other place shall be 0.9 meter high
and made of stainless steel pipes and plates. The diameter of top and middle rails
shall not be less than 40mm and 32mm respectively. The thickness of stainless
steel plates shall be not less than 6mm. The railing shall consist of vertical posts of
40mm diameter stainless pipes at a spacing not more than 1000mm center to
center. There would be one top rail and minimum two intermediate rails. The
design of railing shall be as approved by the Employer/PMC.
(k) The layout of the panels in the Control Room shall be decided based on the
manufacturer’s drawings during detailed engineering by the contractor in
consultation and with the approval of Employer/PMC.
16.3.14.2. Design Requirements: While designing various building, it shall be ensured that they meet
the following requirements:
(a) the requirements specified in this specifications and relevant Indian/Nepalese or
equivalent International standards as well as specifications/guidelines of
Department of Urban Development and Building Construction, Govt. of Nepal;
(b) the specified climatic and loading conditions;
(c) the requirements of the equipments and apparatus contained in the buildings and
to be compatible with the intended use and occupancy in all respects;
(d) functional and economical space arrangement;

(e) To be aesthetically pleasing;
(f) Different buildings shall show a uniformity and consistency in architectural design
as far as possible;
(g) To allow for easy access to the equipments for operation and maintenance;
(h) Wherever access to the roof is required, R.C.C. stair case shall be provided.
(i) Fire retarding materials which shall prevent supporting or spreading of fire shall be
provided for walls, ceilings, doors etc..
(j) Expansion joints, wherever required, shall be provided as per relevant standards.
16.3.14.3. Design Loads

(i) Building structure shall be designed for the most critical combinations of dead
loads, live loads, super-imposed loads, equipment loads, erection loads, wind
loads, snow loads, seismic loads etc. Any other incidental load, if anticipated, shall
also be duly accounted for in the design and shall be clearly mentioned. All the
members of the buildings frame shall be designed for the worst combination of
loads as per relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards.
(ii) Dead loads shall include the weight of structures complete with finishes, fittings &
fixtures and partitions and shall be taken as per relevant Indian Standards/
(iii) Super-imposed loads in different areas shall include live loads, equipment loads,
and loads due to cable trays, small pipe racks/hangers and erection, operation and
maintenance, wherever these loads are expected. Equipment loads shall constitute
all loads of equipments to be supported on the building frame. The various
buildings shall be designed for live load not less than given in Table-16.1 below:

TABLE-16.1
LIVE LOADS
Sl. No. Area Load
(1) (2) (3)

1. For Offices 5 kN/m2
2. For Equipment Floors and 10 kN/m2

Stores
If higher than 10 kN/m2 (Based As per actual Requirement.
on Equipment Weight and
Layout Plans)
3. Staircases & Balconies 5 kN/m2
4. Toilets 2 kN/m2
5. Chequered Plate Covers 5 kN/m2
6. Corridors/Walkways 5kN/m2
7. Staff Quarters
Rooms, Kitchen, Toilets 2 kN/m2

Corridors, Passage, Staircase, 3 kN/m2
Store & Balcony
8. Accessible Roofs 1.5 kN/m2
9. Non-accessible Roofs 0.75 kN/m2
(iv) Wind loads shall be calculated as per relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent
Nepalese Standards. The Factors affecting the wind speed shall be considered as
per site conditions.
(v) Earthquake loads shall be calculated as per IS: 1893 or equivalent Nepalese
Standards and considering the earthquake intensity of earthquake experienced in
Nepal in April, 2015. Seismic coefficient Method or Response spectrum method

shall be used for seismic analysis of the building for Earthquake forces as per IS:
1893 or equivalent International Standards.
(vi) Wind forces and Seismic forces shall not be considered to act simultaneously.
(vii) The load combinations that create maximum stresses in structure shall be
considered as per relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards.
(viii) Floors Slabs shall be designed to carry loads imposed by equipments, cables,
piping, movement of maintenance trucks (if required) and any other load
associated with the building. In general, building shall be designed for live loads as
specified above or loads specified in relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent
International Standards whichever is higher. Cable and piping loads shall also be
considered in addition to the live loads for floors where these loads are expected.
16.3.14.4. Walls and Floor/Roof Slabs
(a) All walls shall be non-load bearing walls, in brickwork as per this specification.
Minimum thickness of external walls shall be 230 mm (one brick) thick with they
shall be laid in cement sand mortar 1:6 (1 Cement: 6 Coarse Sand). Internal
Partition walls, wherever shown in approved drawings, shall be of 115 mm thick
(half brick) reinforced brick masonry wall in cement sand mortar 1:4 (1 Cement : 4
Coarse Sand) duly providing two 6 mm reinforcement bars at every fourth layer..
(b) All Floor/Roof slabs shall be regular beam - slab construction. However, sunken
R.C.C. slab shall be provided in toilet areas as per the requirement.
(c) The minimum thickness of floor and roof slab shall not be less than 150 mm.
(d) False ceiling in Control Room-cum-Administrative building shall be provided as per

requirement and as directed by Employer/PMC.
(e) Minimum height of skirting above finished floor level shall be 150 mm. The skirting
material shall match with the floor finish.
(f) The dado in toilets, pantry room and battery room shall be up to ceiling height.
(g) Minimum height of the parapet walls shall be 900 mm above finished roof level.

(h) Floor finish at ground floor shall be laid over 100 mm thick plain cement concrete
1:3:6 (1 cement : 3Fine Aggregates : 6Coarse Aggregates) below which a 100 mm
thick layer of well compacted local sand and a layer of 200 mm thick compacted
well graded stone packing (stone size from 25 mm to 100 mm) with interstices
filled with local sand shall be provided. The earth below sand layer shall also be
well rammed and well compacted before laying the stone packing layer.
16.3.14.5. Details of Roof
Roof of the building shall consist of cast-in-situ R.C.C. slab treated with a water proofing
system which shall be an integral cement based treatment conforming to relevant Indian
Standards/ equivalent International Standards. The water proofing treatment shall
comprise the following:
(a) Applying a cement slurry coat of neat cement using 2.75 kg/m2 of cement admixed
with water proofing compound conforming to relevant Indian Standards/
equivalent International Standards over the R.C.C. slab including cleaning the
surface with wire brushes and keeping the cleaned surface wet for 24 hours before
treatment.
(b) Laying cement concrete using broken stone of size from 25mm to 100mm size with
50% of cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement: 5 coarse sand) admixed with water proofing
compound conforming to relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International
Standards over 20mm thick layer of cement mortar 1:5 (1 Cement: 5 coarse sand)
admixed with water proofing compound conforming to relevant Indian Standards/
equivalent International Standards to required slope and treating similarly the
adjoining walls up to 300mm height including rounding of junctions of walls and
slabs.
(c) After two days of proper curing, applying a second coat of cement slurry admixed
with water proofing compound conforming relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent

(d) Finishing the surface with 20mm thick joint less cement mortar of mix 1:4 (1
cement : 4 coarse sand) admixed with water proofing compound conforming to
relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards and finally finishing
the surface with trowel with neat cement slurry and making of 300 x 300 mm
square.
(e) The whole terrace so finished shall be flooded with water for a minimum period of
two weeks for curing and for final test. All the above operations shall be carried
out in order specified above and as directed by the Employer/PMC.
(f) Average thickness of water proofing shall be 120 mm and minimum thickness at
khurra shall be 65 mm.
16.3.14.6. Partitions: Partitions wherever provided in approved drawings, shall be made of powder
coated aluminum frame with 5.5 mm thick clear glass or pre-laminated board depending
upon the location of partition and as directed by Employer/PMC.
16.3.14.7. Plastering: External surfaces of buildings shall have 18 mm thick cement – sand plaster in
two layers, with the under layer of 12mm thick plaster in 1:5 cement sand mortar (1
Cement : 5 Medium Sand) and the top layer 6.0 mm thick plaster in 1:4 cement sand
mortar (1 Cement : 4 Fine Sand). Inside faces of walls shall be provided 12mm or 15 mm
thick cement – sand plaster in 1:4 cement sand mortar (1 Cement : 4 Fine Sand). Rough
faces of walls shall receive 15mm thick cement sand plaster and even faces, 12 mm thick
cement sand plaster. All R.C.C. ceilings shall be provided with 6.0 mm thick cement – sand
plaster in 1:3 cement sand mortar (1 cement : 3 Fine sand).
16.3.14.8. External & Internal Painting: External and internal surfaces of various Buildings shall be
painted as per the detailed finishing schedule in Table 16.2 and shall conform to the
relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards, manufacturer’s
specification and approval of Employer/PMC.
16.3.14.9. Doors, Windows and Ventilators: The schedule of doors, windows and ventilators of the
various Buildings shall be as per the detailed finishing schedule in Table 16.2 and shall
conform to the relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards. Rolling
Steel Shutters shall be provided as per the layout and requirements of the building. Main

entrance door to control room building shall be made of powder coated aluminum frame
with 5.5 mm thick glazing.
16.3.14.10. Cable Trench inside Control Room Building: All cable trenches inside the Control Room
Building, if any, shall be covered with 6.0 mm thick (minimum) steel chequered plate
covers stiffened with suitable size of stiffeners.
16.3.14.11. Plinth Protection: 750 mm wide plinth protection around the building shall be provided.
Plinth protection shall comprise 100 mm thick plain cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2
Fine Aggregates : 4 Coarse Aggregates of 20 mm nominal size) laid over 75 mm thick
(compacted) soling layer of well compacted stone aggregates of 40 mm nominal size with
interstices filled with local sand and finished smooth with 12 mm cement plaster in
cement mortar 1:4. Soling layer shall be provided adequate slope. The earth below soling
layer shall also be well compacted & consolidated.
16.3.14.12. Plumbing & Sanitation:
(a) All plumbing and sanitary works shall be executed to comply with the
requirements of the appropriate bye-laws, rules and regulations of the Local
Authority having jurisdiction over such matters, these specifications and relevant
Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards. The Contractor shall arrange
for all necessary formalities to be met with regards to the inspection, testing,
obtaining approval and giving notices etc.
(b) ‘SINTEX’ or an equivalent make PVC Overhead Water Tank(s) of adequate capacity
depending on the number of users for 24 hours storage of water shall be provided.
However, a minimum of 2 nos. of 1500 liter capacity tanks in Control Room-cum-
Administrative building and one tank of 1500 liter capacity for each flat of staff
quarter and guard room shall be provided. PVC Overhead tanks shall conform to
relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards.
(c) Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) pipes having thermal stability for hot and
cold water supply including all CPVC plain and brass threading conforming to
relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards shall be used for
internal piping works for water supply.

(d) C.I. pipes with lead joints conforming to relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent
International Standards shall be used for sanitary works above ground level and
R.C.C. pipes (NP-3 Class) shall be used for sanitary works below ground level.
(e) Separate toilets for ladies and gents shall be provided in Administrative Block with
separate entrances. Ladies Block shall have one ladies toilet with western type of
WC and Gents Block shall have two WC, one with western type of WC and other
with Indian type of WC. Each flat in staff quarters and guard room shall have one
western type WC. All other fitting & fixtures in toilets shall be as specified below
(f) Each toilet shall have the following minimum fittings:
(i) One WC (Western type) 390 mm high along with toilet paper roll holder
and all other fittings;
(ii) Common Gent’s Toilet in Administrative Block shall have a minimum two
WC, one with WC (Western type) 390 mm high and other with WC (Indian
Type) along with toilet paper roll holder and all other fittings;
(iii) Gents toilet shall also have Urinals (430 x 260 x 350 mm size) with all
fittings and built-in-sensor for automatic flush after use. Toilet attached to
Conference Room and common toilet in Administrative block shall have a
minimum two nos. of urinals and all other common toilet shall have one
urinal.
(iv) Common Toilet and Toilet attached to Conference Room shall have two
number of Wash basin (550 x 400 mm) each with all fittings. Other toilets
shall have one wash basin of same size with all fittings.
(v) Bathroom mirror (600 x 450 x 6 mm thick) with hard board backing shall be
provided with all washbasins.
(vi) CP brass towel rail (600 x 20 mm) with CP brass brackets by the side of each
wash basin.
(vii) Soap holder and liquid soap dispenser with each wash basin.

(viii) One Automatic Hand Dryer in each toilet.
(g) Water cooler for drinking water with adequate water storage facility shall be
provided in Control Room-cum-Administrative building which shall preferably be
located near the pantry room and away from the toilet block.
(h) One no. of stainless steel kitchen sink with Drain board (510 x 1040 x 178 mm bowl
depth) shall be provided in pantry as well as in all kitchens in Staff Quarters.
(i) All fittings, fasteners, gratings shall be chromium plated conforming to relevant
Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards.
(j) All sanitary fixtures and fittings shall be, in general, conforming to relevant Indian
Standards/ equivalent International Standards and shall be of approved quality,
type and make, manufactured by reputed manufacturers. All items brought to site
must bear identification marks of the Manufacturer.
(k) Contractor shall provide necessary nos. of septic tank and soak pit of adequate
capacity to treat the sewage/sullage from the buildings.
(l) Contractor shall undertake all other activities required to complete and
commission the building.
16.3.14.13. Building Storm Water Drainage

(a) The building design shall provide for the collection of storm water from the roof.
This water shall be drained to the main drainage system of the Sub-station.
(b) 150 mm diameter Cast Iron Rainwater down comer pipes conforming to relevant
Indian Standard / equivalent International standards with water tight lead joints
shall be provided to drain off the rain water from the roofs. These pipes shall be
suitably concealed with masonry work or cement concrete or cladding material.
The number and size of down comer pipes shall be governed by relevant Indian

(c) All drains inside the buildings shall have minimum 40 mm thick grating covers; and
in areas where heavy equipment loads are envisaged, Pre-Cast R.C.C. covers shall
be provided in place of steel grating.
(d) Suitable arrangements for draining out water collected from equipment blow
downs, leakages, floor washings, firefighting etc. shall be provided for each floor.
16.3.14.14. Detailed Finishing Schedule
The tentative finishing schedule for various buildings is given in Table-16.2 below. The same
shall be finalized during detailed engineering as per architectural and functional requirements
with the approval of Employer/PMC:
TABLE-16.2
DETAILED FINISHING SCHEDULE FOR BUILDINGS
Sl. LOCATION FLOORING & WALL CEILING DOOR, WINDOWS &
No. SKIRTING 150 MM (INTERNAL) VENTILATOR
HIGH
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
A. CONTROL ROOM-CUM-ADMINISTRATIVE BUILDING
1.  Control Room Vitrified tiles 8.0 Plastic White wash Windows shall be
 Conference mm thick of size emulsion paint above False of powder coated
Room 600 x 600mm over prepared Ceiling except aluminium with
 Substation In- smooth for reception, 5.5mm thick
charge Room surface by lobby and glazing. All doors
 Office Rooms applying a 2.0 corridor where shall be glazed
 Electrical/ mm thick layer Oil bound powder coated
Electronics Test of Plaster of washable aluminium doors
Lab. Paris distemper on with 5.5.mm thick
 Reception/ smooth surface Glazing.
Lobby applied with
 Corridor plaster of Paris
putty
6. ACDB & DCDB 50 mm thick Oil bound Oil bound Steel door 45mm
Room cement concrete washable washable thick double sheet
flooring with distemper on distemper on 18 gauge MS steel
metallic hardener smooth smooth surface suitably reinforced
topping. Skirting surface applied with and filled with
shall be of 1:3 applied with plaster of Paris mineral wool.
cement sand plaster of Paris putty Windows/
plaster. putty ventilator shall be
of powder coated
aluminum with
5.5mm thick


HIGH
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
glazing.
7. Battery Room Alkali and Acid DADO of Alkali Alkali and Acid Steel door 45mm
Resistance Tile and Acid Resistance thick double sheet
Flooring Resistant tiles Paint 18 gauge MS steel
up to ceiling suitably reinforced
height and filled with
mineral wool.
Windows/ventilato
r shall be of
powder coated
aluminum with
5.5 mm thick
glazing.
10. Portico Cast-in-situ 50.0 Granite Stone Oil bound All doors shall be
mm thick. Cement Cladding washable glazed powder
concrete flooring distemper on coated aluminium
with metallic prepared doors with 5.5.mm
hardener. smooth surface thick Glazing.
by applying 2.0
mm thick layer
of Plaster of
Paris
11. Toilet DADO - Glazed Oil bound Windows/
Vitrified anti skid Ceramic 8 mm washable ventilator shall be
8.0 mm thick tiles thick tiles of distemper over of powder coated
of size 300 x 300 size 300 x 300 prepared aluminum with
mm mm up to smooth surface 5.5mm thick
ceiling height by applying 2.0 glazing. All doors
mm thick layer shall be flush door
of Plaster of shutters made of
Paris pre-laminated
particle board with
powder coated
aluminum frame.
B. D.G. SET ROOM BUILDING AND STORE
D.G. Set Room 50 mm thick Oil bound Oil bound Rolling shutter
& cement concrete washable washable shall be of steel.
Store flooring with distemper on distemper on Entry door shall
metallic hardener smooth smooth surface be of steel single
topping. Skirting surface applied with
leaf door.
shall be of 1:3 applied with plaster of Paris


HIGH
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
cement sand plaster of Paris putty Windows/
plaster. putty ventilators shall
be of power
coated
aluminium
sections with
5.5mm thick
glass
C. STAFF QUARTERS & GUARD ROOM
Rooms, Kitchen, 25 mm thick Oil bound Oil bound Wooden Frames &
Lobby & Balcony marble stone washable washable Shutters
flooring distemper distemper over Entrance Door
over prepared prepared shall have double
smooth smooth surface door comprising
surface by by applying 2.0 one normal door
applying 2.0 mm thick layer and other with
mm thick layer of Plaster of wire net.
of Plaster of Paris
Paris
Toilet Vitrified anti skid DADO - Glazed Oil bound Wooden Frames &
tiles 8.0 mm thick Ceramic 8 mm washable Shutters
of size 300 x 300 thick tiles of distemper over
mm size 300 x 300 prepared
mm up to smooth surface
ceiling height by applying 2.0
mm thick layer
of Plaster of
Paris
Staircase 25 mm thick Oil bound Oil bound Wooden Frames &
marble stone washable washable Shutters
finishing on tread, distemper distemper over
riser, landing and over prepared prepared
skirting. smooth smooth surface
surface by by applying 2.0
applying 2.0 mm thick layer
mm thick layer of Plaster of
of Plaster of Paris
Paris
D. CAR PARKING SHED
Car Parking Shed 50 mm thick Structural Roof sheeting
cement concrete Steel members shall be given
flooring with including one coat of Zinc
metallic hardener Columns, Roof rich Primer and


HIGH
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
topping. Trusses, two coats of
Purlins etc. approved Paint.
shall be given
one coat of
lead rich
primer and
two coats of
approved
Paint.
16.3.14.15. False Ceiling
The false ceiling shall be provided in Control Room, Conference Room and other specified
areas.
16.3.14.16. Under Deck Insulation
50 mm thick insulation mat of Fiber Glass Crown - 100 or equivalent made out of fiber
glass conforming to relevant Indian Standard/ Equivalent International Standard and
backed with 34 gauge aluminum foil and 22gauge x 12mm wire mesh netting shall be fixed
to ceiling in all air conditioned areas with false ceiling.
16.3.14.17. Electrification
All electrification works shall be executed as per details specified elsewhere in the
technical specification, relevant Indian Standards and specifications/guidelines of
Department of Urban Development & Building Construction, Government of Nepal. All
fittings &fixtures and details shall be as per relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent
International Standards and shall be of approved make.
16.3.15. Underground Water Storage Tank
16.3.15.1. A Reinforced Cement Concrete Underground Water Tank of 50 Cubic Meter Capacity shall
be constructed for meeting the water requirement of substation. A sump of size 0.75 m x
0.75 m x 0.5 m deep shall be provided at one corner of tank for the purpose of cleaning

and maintenance. Top of water tank shall be about 500 mm above finished ground level of
switch yard.
16.3.15.2. Two manhole of about 600 mm diameter with cast iron manhole frames & covers shall be
provided in the roof slab of water tank at two opposite end for facilitating entry of
maintenance staff inside the tank for its periodical cleaning and maintenance.
16.3.15.3. Suitable rubber coated MS rungs @ 300 mm centre to centre shall be provided on tank
wall where manholes have been provided to act as ladder.
16.3.15.4. Integral water proofing compound of reputed brand shall be added to the concrete of
water tank. Quantity of compound to be added in concrete shall be as per manufacturer’s
recommendation.
16.3.15.5. Inside surfaces of water tank (i.e. floor and walls) shall be provided white glazed vitrified
tiles of approved make.
16.3.15.6. All inserts, nozzles, pipe sleeves etc shall be provided during concreting at suitable
locations as per approved drawings.
16.3.15.7. P.V.C. water stopper shall be provided at all construction joints of water tank.
16.3.15.8. The design of water tank shall be carried out as an un-cracked section as per relevant
Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards.
16.3.16. Water Supply and Plumbing Works
16.3.16.1. Water Source shall be identified by the Contractor. Employer/PMC may extent necessary
assistance in this regard, if required by the contractor, but it shall remain the responsibility
of the contractor. Contractor shall estimate the total water requirement both in terms of
quantity and head and shall make necessary arrangement to bring water from source to
substation site (i.e. to underground water storage tank). The whole arrangement shall be
subject to the approval of Employer/PMC.
16.3.16.2. The contractor shall carry out all the plumbing works required for supply of water within
substation to various buildings and facilities.
16.3.16.3. A scheme shall be prepared by the contractor indicating the layout and details of water
supply network which shall be got approved from Employer/PMC before actual start of
work. The scope shall include all other incidental items not shown or specified but as may
be required for complete performance of the works.
16.3.16.4. The work shall, in general, shall be carried out as per and relevant Indian Standards and
specifications/guidelines of Department of Urban Development & Building Construction,
Government of Nepal.
16.3.17. Sewerage Disposal System
16.3.17.1. Sewerage system shall be provided for Control Room-cum-Administrative Building, D.G.
Set Room Building and other facilities.
16.3.17.2. The Contractor shall provide complete exterior sewerage disposal system including laying
of soil pipes, necessary manholes, septic tank and soak pit suitable for 50 users. If septic
and soak pit system for sewerage disposal is not acceptable by local Nepalese Authorities,
the contractor shall install sewerage system as per local statutory requirements.
16.3.17.3. The work shall, in general, shall be carried out as per relevant Indian Standards and
16.3.18. Miscellaneous General Requirements
16.3.18.1. All civil works, in general, shall be carried out as per relevant Indian Standards and
16.3.18.2. All Architectural designs & drawings of building including schedule of finishes shall be
prepared by the contractor. These shall be as per local Nepalese practice. The landscaping
of whole substation shall also be carried out and implemented by the contractor.
16.3.18.3. The materials and workmanship shall be of the best quality conforming to these
specifications and relevant Indian Standard and shall be subject to the approval of the
Employer/PMC. The word "to the approval of the Employer/PMC" shall deemed to be
included in the description of all materials incorporated in the Works, whether

manufactured or natural, and also in the description of all operations for the due
execution of the works.
16.3.18.4. All materials shall be of approved manufacturer and origin, matching with the samples and
shall be delivered at the Site well in advance before they are to be used in the Works.
Employer/PMC may require and order for testing of materials before giving his approval.
The Contractor shall provide any information required by the Employer/PMC regarding
the quality, weight, strength, constituents, and description etc. of the materials.
16.3.18.5. No material of any description shall be used without prior approval by the Employer/PMC
and any material rejected as unfit for use in the Works shall be removed immediately from
the Site and without any compensation to the Contractor.
16.3.18.6. Dense concrete with controlled water cement ratio as per relevant Indian Standards/
equivalent International Standards shall be used for all foundations and concrete
structures for achieving water tightness.
16.3.18.7. All joints including construction and expansion joints for the water retaining structures
shall be made water tight by providing PVC ribbed water stops with central bulb. However,
kicker type (externally placed) PVC water stops shall be used for the base slab and in other
areas where it is required to facilitate concreting. The minimum thickness of PVC water
stops shall be not less than 5 mm and minimum width shall be not less than 230 mm.
16.3.18.8. All steel sections and fabricated structures which are required to be transported on sea
shall be provided with anti-corrosive paint to take care of sea worthiness.
16.3.18.9. All mild steel parts used in the water retaining structures shall be hot dip galvanized. The
minimum coating of the zinc shall be not less than 750gm/m2 for galvanized structures
and shall comply with relevant Indian Standards/equivalent International Standards.
Galvanizing shall be checked and tested in accordance with relevant Indian
Standards/equivalent International Standards. The galvanizing shall be followed by the
application of an etching primer and dipping in black bitumen in accordance with relevant
Indian Standards or equivalent International Standards.
16.3.18.10. A lean concrete layer of M-10 grade concrete of not less than 100 mm thickness
conforming to relevant Indian Standards/equivalent International Standards shall be

provided below all foundations, R.C.C. structures and floors at ground level.
16.3.18.11. Bricks having minimum compressive strength of 75 kg/cm2 shall only be used for masonry
work. Contractor shall ascertain himself regarding the availability of bricks of minimum 75
kg/cm2 compressive strength before submitting his offer. The contractor may use
concrete blocks of equivalent compressive strength in place of bricks.
16.3.18.12. Doors and windows on external walls of the buildings shall be provided with R.C.C.
Sunshade over the openings with 300 mm projection on either side of the openings.
Projection of sunshade from the wall shall be minimum 450 mm over window openings
and 750 mm over door openings.
16.3.18.13. The height of riser in stairs shall not be more than 150 mm and tread shall not be less than
300 mm wide. Minimum width of stairs shall be 1500 mm. Mid landing shall be provided
after every 10 steps. Service ladder shall be provided for access to all roofs. Fire Escape
staircase, if required, as per local byelaws, shall be provided in control room building.
16.3.18.14. Edge Protection Angles of size 45x45x5 mm (minimum) with lugs shall be provided for
edge protection all round of cut outs/openings in floor slab, edges of drains supporting
grating covers, supporting edges of manhole precast cover and any other place where
breakage of edges/corners of concrete is expected.
16.3.18.15. Anti-termite chemical treatment for buildings shall be given to all column pits, wall
trenches, foundations, filling below the floors etc. as per relevant Indian Standards /
16.3.18.16. Hand-railing of minimum 900mm height shall be provided around all floor/roof openings,
projections/balconies, walkways, platforms, stairs, underground tanks & sumps open to
sky etc.
16.3.18.17. Reinforcement steel shall be of grade Fe-415 or Fe-500 conforming to relevant Indian
Standards/equivalent International Standards. The materials specification, workmanship
and acceptance criteria shall be as per relevant clauses of applicable Indian Standards /
equivalent International Standards
16.3.18.18. Items/components of buildings not explicitly covered in the specification but required for
completion of the project shall be deemed to be included in the scope.
16.3.18.19. Requirement of Sulphate Resistant Cement (SRC) for sub structural works shall be decided
based on sulphate/chloride contents in soil and subsoil water in accordance with relevant
Indian Standards/equivalent International Standards based on the findings of the detailed
soil investigation to be carried out by the contractor.
16.3.18.20. Foundation system adopted by contractor shall ensure that total settlement, relative
settlement and other criteria shall be as per provision in relevant Indian Standards /
16.3.18.21. All water retaining structures designed as un-cracked section shall also be tested for water
tightness at full water level in accordance with relevant Indian Standards/equivalent
16.3.18.22. Construction joints shall be as per Indian Standards/equivalent International Standards.
16.3.18.23. The plasticizer-cum-water proofing cement additive conforming to relevant Indian

Standards/equivalent International Standards shall be added in concrete of all
underground concrete structures like basements, pumps houses, water retaining
structures etc. The quantity and method of mixing shall be as per Manufacturer's
recommendations. . The concrete surface of these structures in contact with earth shall
also be provided with two coat of bituminous paint for water/damp proofing. In case of
water leakage in the above structures, the rectification method shall be applied as per
relevant Indian Standards/equivalent International Standards for repairing the leakage.
16.3.18.24. All building/construction materials shall conform to the best quality specified in relevant
Indian Standards / equivalent International Standards.
16.3.19. Coordination & Interfacing
16.3.19.1. The proper coordination and all interfacing of civil works activities like fixing of conduits in
roofs/walls/floors, fixing of foundation bolts, fixing of lighting fixtures, fixing of
supports/embedment, provision of cutouts etc. shall be the sole responsibility of the

Contractor. He shall plan all such activities in advance and execute in such a manner that
interfacing activities do not become bottlenecks and dismantling, breakage etc. is reduced
to bare minimum.
16.3.20. Statutory Rules and Regulations
16.3.20.1. Contractor shall comply with all the applicable statutory rules and regulations pertaining
to Factories Act, Fire Safety Rules & Regulations and Water and Sewerage Act for pollution
control etc. of Government of Nepal.
16.3.20.2. Provisions for fire proof doors, nos. of staircases, fire escape stairs, fire separation wall,
plastering on structural members (in fire prone areas) etc. shall be made according to the
recommendations of Local Advisory Committee.
16.3.20.3. Statutory clearances and norms of Local Pollution Control Board shall be strictly followed
in design and construction of civil works and for effluent quality from plant.
16.3.21. Field Quality Plan
16.3.21.1. The contractor shall prepare field quality plan for civil works as per relevant Indian
Standards/equivalent International Standards during detailed engineering stage and
submit the same to Employer/PMC for approval within ONE month after award of work.
16.3.22. Trade Names
16.3.22.1. Trade Names and Catalogue References are given solely as a guide to the quality and
alternative manufacturers of the materials or goods of equivalent quality may be
approved by the Employer/PMC.
16.3.23. Samples of Materials
16.3.23.1. Samples of all materials shall be deposited with the Employer/PMC for approval prior to
ordering or delivery to site. The Employer/PMC reserves his right to test any sample to
destruction and retain samples until the maintenance period. No payment shall be made
for supplying the samples to the Employer. All materials delivered at site shall be equal to
or better in all respects than the samples approved by Employer/PMC.
16.3.24. Testing of Materials

16.3.24.1. For any material to be used in the Works, the Employer/PMC may direct contractor for
carrying out any test which may be carried out at the place of manufacturer or on the site
or at an approved laboratory. The tests shall be required on soils, materials whether
natural or manufactured and workmanship to verify their compliance with the
Specifications. Samples of all such materials and manufactured articles together with all
necessary labour, materials, plant and apparatus required for sampling and for carrying
out tests shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own cost.
16.4. DOCUMENTS FOR APPROVAL

16.4.1. All documents including designs and drawings shall be submitted by the contractor for
approval. An indicative but not exhaustive, list of documents is given below for
information and guidance:
(a) Geotechnical/Soil Investigation Procedure & Report;

(b) Topographical survey procedure, Topographical Maps and related details;
(c) Proposal for Site Levelling and Formation of Terraces
(d) All Architectural drawings of buildings including schedule of finishes and
Landscaping details & drawings;
(e) Structural design calculations, Structural drawings (including construction/
fabrication), both in hard and editable soft copies, for all reinforced concrete and
structural steel structures, buildings and foundations.
(f) Fully dimensioned and detailed floor plans, elevations, cross-sections and
longitudinal sections identifying the major building components for all buildings.
(g) Product information of building components and materials, including walls,
partitions, flooring, ceilings, roofing, doors, windows & ventilators, wall paneling
and building finishes along with BOQ.
(h) A detailed schedule of building finishes including colors schemes along with item
description.
(i) A door & window schedule showing door & window size, types and locations, lock
sets and latch sets and other door hardware along with item details.

(j) Cable Trench Layouts including cable trench details, road & storm water drains
crossings and drainage of water from cable trenches;
(k) Storm Water Drainage arrangement including drain layout, drain details, culverts
for cable trench & road crossings and disposal of water to nearby natural drain;
(l) Layout of Roads and Road-cum-Rail track in substation including all designs and
drawings with full details;
(m) Design/drawings of Fencings and Gates with their complete details.
(n) Any other design and drawing as required or directed by Employer/PMC.
16.4.2. Approval of the above designs, drawings and other documents shall be obtained before
ordering materials or starting construction/fabrication, as applicable. The approval of
Employer/PMC, however, shall not relieve the contractor of his responsibilities in regard
to their correctness, safety and compliance to these specifications. Should anything
happen to any structure/foundation/facility designed and constructed by the contractor,
he alone shall be solely responsible for the same.
16.5. EXPATRIATE STAFF AND LABOUR
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the requirements for obtaining work permits from
the Government of Nepal for his expatriate staff and labour and he shall follow all
procedures laid down by the Government of Nepal with respect to the application for such
work permits as well as for the recruitment, termination and repatriation of his expatriate
staff and labour.
16.6. CONSTRUCTIONAL PLANT

16.6.1. The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the various provisions of the Specification regarding
the use of ‘semi-mechanized’ methods of construction including deployment of
mechanical excavators & loaders, stone crushers, concrete batching plants and
equipments for compaction mixing, placing and compacting of concrete. The Contractor
shall submit the full list of Plant & Equipments he proposes to deploy at project Sites for
the execution of the works.

16.7. PROGRAMS FOR THE EXECUTION OF WORKS

16.7.1. The Contractor shall, upon receiving the Letter of Award, within 15 days, submit to the
Employer/PMC his Work Schedule for execution of works for approval.
16.7.2. The order in which works are proposed to be executed shall be subject to approval by the
Employer/PMC. The Contractor shall also carry out necessary adjustments in the work
programme required by the Employer/PMC during the course of execution of works. The
compliance by the Contractor of any such adjustment shall not relieve him of any of his
obligations and responsibilities under the contract.
16.7.3. The Contractor shall execute the works in accordance with the Work Schedule approved
by the Employer/PMC. However, the Employer's approval of Work Schedule does not
relieve the contractor of his contractual obligations to complete the works in the
prescribed order and by the prescribed completion date.
16.7.4. The Contractor shall, from time to time, review his progress and make such amendments
in his programme of execution of the Works as may be necessary to ensure the
completion of the works by the prescribed completion date.
16.8. ACCESS TO THE SITE AND LAND FOR TEPMORARY WORKS

16.8.1. The Substation site is near to the existing Earthen Road from Dovan to Sangu. It is,
however, strongly recommended that the bidders should visit the project sites and make
their own assessment about available accesses, road conditions and transportation
constraints & limitations etc. before submission of their bids. After submission of bid by
any bidder, it shall be presumed that the bidder have satisfied himself as to the location of
site, site conditions and access to various areas where works are to be executed and
nothing extra shall be paid or extension of time allowed on account of incorrect or
incomplete assessment of these factors by bidder. For transportation of equipments and
other materials to project sites, the requisite permission from concerned authority of
Government of Nepal shall be arranged by the contractor himself. However, Employer
may assist the contractor in obtaining such permissions.
16.8.2. Any strengthening/improvement/ modification required in the existing roads, culverts,

bridges etc. for transportation of equipment, materials, construction plant & machinery
etc. up to the proposed sites shall be the responsibility of successful bidder. It is bidders
responsibility to transport all equipments/materials to respective substation sites and
bidders are supposed to make their own assessments of existing road conditions and
transportation limitations and quote his rates accordingly.
16.8.3. The Employer has acquired the land for the substation which is in physical possession of
NEA and it shall be handed over to the successful bidder after award of contract. The
Contractor shall be allotted the actual area necessary for the construction and execution
of the works. Other areas which he may be required by him for storing, manufacturing, or
other temporary works or for setting up site office or for what-so-ever use, shall be
arranged by Contractor himself at his on cost. No separate payment shall be made to the
Contractor on account of this and the he must make due allowance for them in his quoted
rates.
16.8.4. There are no forests at selected substations site. However, cutting of trees and clearing of
bushes etc from each substation site if any, shall be in the scope of the contractor.
However, statutory clearances, if any, for the same shall be obtained by Employer.
16.8.5. The Contractor shall take necessary measures and precautions to prevent injury, damage
and trespass of lands, fences and other properties near and adjacent to the his Works and
shall, in this connection, make all necessary arrangements with adjoining landowners and
in case of Government Property, with the concerned Department of Government of
Nepal. The Contractor shall ensure that he and his personnel and workmen observe all
rules and regulations of local self-Government and Government of Nepal in force.
16.8.6. After completion of the works and before handing over to Employer, the Contractor shall
make good, or pay compensation for any injury, damage or trespassing of land, fences and
other properties caused by his operations at his own cost to the full satisfaction of
concerned party/parties.
16.9. SAFETY OF EXISTING SERVICES

16.9.1. Drains, pipes, cables and similar other services encountered in the course of the works

shall be guarded against damage by the Contractor for ensuring their continued and
uninterrupted use by their users and to the full satisfaction of the owners of these
services. The Contractor shall not store materials or otherwise occupy any part of the site
in a manner likely to hinder the operation of such services.
16.9.2. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to inform the Employer/PMC immediately

whenever any existing service is encountered during execution of works.
16.9.3. The Contractor shall be held liable for all damages to water supply mains & pipes, electric
lines & cables or any other line or installation of any kind either above or below ground
caused by him or his subcontractors during the execution of the works, whether such
services are shown on the bid drawings or not. The Contractor shall report to the
Employer/PMC as well as concerned authorities of any such damage or interference
without delay and he shall do all work to repair or reinstate as considered necessary by
concerned authorities at his own cost and nothing extra shall be paid to him for such
works.
16.9.4. If the Contractor fails to repair or reinstate the damaged services within the time
considered reasonable by the Employer/PMC, the Employer may get the damaged services
repaired or reinstated by the other contractor and the cost thereof shall be paid by the
Contractor to the employer.
16.10. PROTECTION OF MATERIALS FROM WEATHER

16.10.1. All materials shall be stored on site in a manner specified in these specifications and
approved by the Employer/PMC to protect them against damage or deterioration from
the weather or any other cause. The cost of all such protection shall be deemed to be
included in the quoted rates of the contractor.
16.11. ARRANGEMENT OF WATER DURING CONSTRUCTION

16.11.1. The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for water required by him for
construction purposes as well as for drinking and other purposes during construction. He
shall supply all hydrants, hoses, cocks, pumps, tanks, cart vessels and all necessary
appliances for the distribution and transportation of water as per work requirement at his

own cost.
16.11.2. The possibility of obtaining water from local Public Water Supply shall also be explored by
the contractor and if found possible, the contractor shall make all necessary arrangements
and pay all the charges for connection to the mains and for water used.
16.12. PERMANENT SOURCE OF POTABLE WATER

16.12.1. Source of supply of potable water for the substation shall be finalized after award of
work. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to explore and identify the probable
source of potable water and make all necessary arrangements for bringing water from
identified source to substation site.
16.12.2. The contractor shall collect the samples of water from identified source during different
season of the year and get the water samples tested from a government testing laboratory. If
as per water test reports, any treatment to raw water is required to make it potable, the
necessary permanent treatment facility for the same as approved by Employer/PMC shall
also be provided within quoted rates.
16.12.3. It is for information of bidders that a small stream is flowing through substation site which
could be one of the permanent source of water for substation provided it has adequate
flow throughout the year and quality of water is potable or could be made potable with
some treatment. The quantity and quality of water available in the stream during various
seasons of a year is required to be established by successful bidder. The aforesaid
information is for the guidance of bidders and the Employer does not take any
responsibility for its correctness. The identification of permanent source of potable water
and bringing the water to substation site is the responsibility of successful bidder.
16.13. CONSTRUCTION POWER

16.13.1. The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for electricity for meeting his
requirements as well as requirements of his subcontractors for lighting and construction
power at his own cost. All temporary wiring, connections, fittings etc. shall be removed
after completion of work. The Contractor shall pay all fees and charges and obtain all
permits in connection therewith.

16.14. SANITATION AND PUBLIC HEALTH

16.14.1. The Contractor shall comply with all regulations and instructions issued by the
Department of Health of Government of Nepal or by any officer appointed by any Public
Health Authority with respect to the sanitation and Public Health of the laborers and the
Contractor’s Employees.
16.14.2. The Site shall be kept in a clean and proper sanitation condition. No nuisance shall be
committed on or around the work site. Toilets for the workmen and staff shall be provided
in accordance with the requirements of the Medical officer or Sanitary Authorities.
Separate toilets shall be provided for women. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
sanitary discipline of his personnel and laborers.
16.14.3. The Employer/PMC has a right to order any laborer, who in his opinion, does not have a
satisfactory sanitary discipline, off the site with immediate effect.
16.15. STORAGE SPACES AND SHEDS

16.15.1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the erection of suitable temporary stores and
workshops and their removal on completion of the works at his own cost. All stores shall
be adequate for protection of materials and the equipment kept therein and shall be
constructed and located to the satisfaction of the Employer/PM.
16.16. OFFICE FOR CONTRACTOR AND EMPLOYER/PMC

16.16.1. The Contractor shall erect an office of suitable construction near the Works Site for his
requirements as well as for the requirements of Employer/PMC at his own cost. The
contractor’s office shall remain open at all hours during which the work is in progress at
site.
16.16.2. Any notice to be given to or served upon the Contractor shall be deemed and taken to be
effectually given or served upon by the delivery thereof at such office.
16.17. REMOVAL OF CAMPS

16.17.1. On the completion of the Contract, the Contractor, at his own cost, shall take down and
remove all structures and materials connected with his temporary offices and camps and
backfill trenches, fill up all toilet pits, soak pits and other sewage disposal excavations, and

shall restore the site as far as practicable to its original condition and leave it neat and tidy
to the satisfaction of the Employer/PMC.
16.18. APPOINTMENT OF SAFETY SUPERVISOR

16.18.1. The Contractor shall designate one of his senior staff, who is qualified and experienced
and having knowledge of safety matters and safety regulations as Safety Supervisor. The
Safety Supervisor shall look after in all matters regarding safety, hygiene and welfare of
the workmen. The Safety Supervisor may, in addition, carry out the other duties.
16.19. SETTING OUT OF WORKS

16.19.1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the setting out of the Works and shall employ all
such qualified and experienced staff and equipments as may be necessary for this
purpose.
16.19.2. The Contractor shall clear the site and set out the Works well in advance to enable the
Employer/PMC to inspect and approve the same prior to commencement of the Works.
16.19.3. The Contractor shall provide a site plan showing the position of his site offices, storage
sheds, accommodation, in relation to the Permanent Works for the approval of the
Employer/PMC before commencing erection of his camp.
16.19.4. The layout and levels of all structure etc shall be made by the Contractor at his own cost
from the general grids of the plot and benchmarks set by the Contractor and approved by
the Employer/PMC. The Contractor shall give all help in instruments, materials and
personnel to the Employer/PMC for checking the detailed layout and shall be solely
responsible for the correctness of the layout and levels.
16.20. GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATIONS

16.20.1. General
16.20.1.1. The contractor shall carry out detailed Geotechnical investigation at each substation site to
provide the designer with sufficiently accurate information, both general and specific,
about the substrata profile and engineering properties of soil/ soft & fissured rock/hard
rock, which may be met at site, on the basis of which the foundations of substation steel
structures, transformers, control room-cum-administrative building, D.G. Set Room

building and other equipments & facilities including site development works, road-cum rail
track and internal roads could be designed rationally and economically.
16.20.1.2. The work of geotechnical investigation shall be carried out in following two stages:
(i) Site Development Work
A few boreholes/test pits shall be bored/excavated to determine the engineering

properties of soil/rock required for site development work and formation of terraces.
It shall involve collection of soil samples for classification of soil, bulk & dry density,
natural moisture content, Atterberg's Limits, Optimum Moisture Content, 90% & 95%
of Proctor's Dry Densities, shear parameters, stable slope in cutting in soil/rock, stable
slope in filling etc. In case of rocky strata is encountered, the services of a Engineering
Geologist shall also be required for deciding stable slope of rock in cutting.
(ii) Substation Foundations and other Civil Works
The geotechnical investigation for substation foundations and other civil works shall be
carried out after completion of site development work and formation of terraces.
16.20.1.3. These specifications provide general guidelines for geotechnical investigation for soils,
soft/fissured rocks and hard rocks.
16.20.2. Scope
16.20.2.1. The scope of work includes detail soil investigations at substation site up to a depth of 12m
below ground level or 1.5 times the width of foundation below foundation level whichever
is more for shallow foundations and up to a depth of 30 m below ground level for deep
foundations such as pile etc. by drilling boreholes, conducting SPT and/or Vane Shear tests,
collection of disturbed & undisturbed soil samples/rock samples from various depths for
conducting necessary laboratory tests for determining various engineering properties of
soil/rock required for classification and design of foundations and other facilities like
internal roads, formation of terraces for site development etc.
16.20.2.2. The scope includes preparation of geotechnical investigation report of each substation
giving bore log data and the following and any other engineering properties of soil/rock

required for classification and design of foundation and other facilities:

(a) Soil/Rock profile along the depth of borehole;
(b) Grain size distribution and classification of Soil/rock;
(c) Atterberg’s limits;
(d) Bulk Unit Weight; Natural Moisture Content, Dry Unit Weight; Specific Gravity;
(e) Shear Parameters i.e. Cohesion ‘C’ & Angle of Friction ‘ø’ of Soil/Rock;
(f) Consolidation Parameters;
(g) Safe and Allowable Bearing Capacities of Soil/Rock at 2.0 m & 2.5 m below finished
ground level based on Shear failure criteria and settlement criteria for footing width of
2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 5.5 & 6.0 m.
(h) Optimum Moisture Content including 90% and 95% of Procter’s Dry Density values;
(i) California Bearing Ratio;
(j) Stable Slope for cutting and filling with excavated material;
(k) Chemical Test results on Soil & subsoil water samples indicating concentration of
carbonates, sulphates, chlorides, nitrates, organic matter and any other chemical
harmful to concrete and reinforcement steel;
(l) Location of Water Table at the time of testing as well as historical highest water table
level in the area;
(m) Electrical Resistivity of Soil Strata and any conclusion on soil profile drawn from soil
resistivity values;
(n) Any other engineering property of soil/rock which may be required for design and
construction of foundations and other facilities at substation; and
(o) Recommendations for soil/rock parameters to be considered in the design of
foundations and any precaution needed during construction in regard to coarse/fine
aggregates, cement etc.
16.20.2.3. These specifications cover the technical requirements for a detailed Geotechnical
investigation at each substation site and submission of a detailed Geotechnical Report. The
work shall include mobilization of all necessary tools and plants & equipment, provision of
necessary engineering supervision and technical personnel, skilled and unskilled labour,
etc. as required to carry out the entire field investigation as well as laboratory tests,
analysis and interpretation of data collected and preparation of the Geotechnical Report.
16.20.2.4. The whole work of geological investigation at each substation site shall be supervised by a
graduate in Civil Engineering having at least 5 years of site experience in geotechnical
investigation work. Geotechnical Investigation Report shall be prepared by a Post Graduate
in Civil Engineering with specialization in Geotechnical Engineering having at least three
years experience in the related field and preferably in the geotechnical investigation of
power projects of voltage level of 220 KV and above and the whole of field work shall also
be carried out under the overall supervision of aforesaid expert.
16.20.2.5. Before taking up the work, the Contractor shall submit the detailed methodology including
field & laboratory tests proposed to be carried out to Employer/PMC for approval. The
work shall be started only after the approval of Employer/PMC.
16.20.2.6. Contractor shall make his own arrangements to establish the coordinate system required
to position boreholes, tests pits and other field test locations as per the layout of each
substation. Contractor shall determine the reduced levels (R.L’s) at these locations with
respect to benchmarks used in the detailed survey. Contractor shall provide at site all
necessary equipments, instruments and facilities to the satisfaction of the Employer/PMC
so that the work can be carried out accurately according to specifications and drawings.
16.20.2.7. The field and laboratory observations/data/results shall be recorded on the Performa
recommended in relevant Indian Standards. Contractor shall submit to Employer/PMC two
copies of field bore logs (one copy each to Employer, PMC site and PMC's Corporate Office)
and all the field records (countersigned by the Employer/PMC) soon after the completion
of each borehole/test pit/test.
16.20.2.8. Whenever Contractor is unable to extract undisturbed soil samples, he shall immediately
inform the Employer/PMC. Payment for boring charges shall be subject to Employer/PMC
being satisfied that adequate efforts have been made to extract undisturbed soil samples
from the borehole. Special care shall be taken for locations where marshy soils are
encountered and Contractor in such cases shall ensure that specified/requited number of
vane shear tests are performed and the results correlated with other soil parameters.
16.20.2.9. After reviewing Contractor’s geotechnical investigation draft report and furnishing the
observations thereon, Employer/PMC may call Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer for
discussions. Any expenditure associated with the aforesaid visit, traveling, redrafting and
finalizing the report etc. shall be deemed to be included in the quoted rates for the
geotechnical investigations.
16.20.2.10. Contractor shall carry out all works expressed and implied in these specifications in
accordance with requirements of the work.
16.20.3. General Requirements
16.20.3.1. Wherever possible, Contractor shall collect and review existing local knowledge, records of
test pits, boreholes, etc., types of foundations adopted and the behavior of existing
structures, particularly those similar to the present project.
16.20.3.2. Contractor shall make use of information gathered from nearby quarries, unlined wells
excavation etc. Study of the general topography and exposed soil/rock surfaces of the
surrounding areas shall often help in the delineation of different soil types.
16.20.3.3. The water level in neighboring streams and water courses shall be noted. Contractor shall
make enquiries and shall verify whether there are any abandoned underground works e.g.
worked out ballast pits, quarries, old brick fields, mines, etc.
16.20.3.4. All instruments/equipments shall be properly calibrated at the commencement of the work
and rechecked periodically as per recommendations of their manufactures and as found
necessary during the progress of work. If the Employer/PMC so desires. Contractor shall
arrange for having the instruments tested at an approved laboratory at its own cost and
shall submit the test reports to the Employer/PMC. If the Employer/PMC desires to witness
such tests, Contractor shall arrange for the same.
16.20.4. Codes and Standards for Geotechnical Investigations
16.20.4.1. All standards, specifications and codes of practice referred to herein shall be the latest
editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions as existing 30 days
before the prescribed date of bid submission. In case of conflict between these
specifications and Standards referred to herein, the most stringent condition out of the
two shall prevail. Other mutually acceptable International standards which ensure equal or
higher performance than those specified herein shall also be accepted.
16.20.4.2. All works shall be carried out in accordance with the following Indian Standards and Codes:


IS:1080-1990 Codes of Practice for Design and

Construction of Simple Spread
Foundations.
IS:1498-1992 Classification and Identification of Soils for ASTM D 2487

General Engineering purposes. ASTM D2488
IS:1888-1982 Method of Load Test on Soils
IS:1892-1992 Code of Practice for Subsurface

Investigation for Foundation
IS:1904-1986 Code of Practice for Design and

Construction of foundation in Soils:
General Requirements.
IS:2131-1992 Method of Standard Penetration Test for ASTM D 1586

Soils
IS:2132-1992 Code of Practice for Thin Walled Tube ASTM D 1587

Sampling of Soils
IS:2720-1992 Method of Test for Soils(Relevant Parts) ASTM D 420
IS:2720 (Part- Laboratory Determination of California

16)-1987 Bearing Ratio(CBR)
IS:2809-1991 Glossary of Terms and symbols Relating to ASTM D 653

Soil Engineering
IS:2911- Code of Practice for Design and

1980(Part-I to construction of Pile Foundations (Relevant


Part-IV) Parts).
IS:3025 Methods of Sampling and Testing(Physical

and Chemical) for water used in Industry
IS:3043-1991 Code of Practice for Earthing
IS:4078-1990 Code of Practice for Indexing and Storage

of Drill Cores.
IS:4091-1987 Code of Practice for Design and

Construction of Foundations for
Transmission Line Towers and Poles.
IS:4434-1992 Code of Practice for In-situ Vane Shear ASTM D 2573

Test for Soils ASTM D 4648
IS:4453-1992 Code of Practice for Exploration by Pits,

Trenches, Drifts and Shafts.
IS:4464-1990 Code of Practice for Presentation of

Drilling information and core description
in Foundation investigation
IS:4968(Part- Method for Subsurface sounding for soils,

II)1992 dynamic method using cone and
Bentonite slurry.
IS:5313-1989 Guide for Core Drilling observations.
IS:6403-1990 Code of Practice for Determination of ASTM D 194

Allowable Bearing Pressure on Shallow


Foundation.
IS:6926-1990 Code of Practice for Diamond Core Drilling

for Site Investigation for River Valley
Projects.
IS:6935-1989 Method of Determination of Water level

in a Bore Hole.
IS:7422-1990 Symbols and Abbreviations for use in

Geological Maps Sections and subsurface
Exploratory Logs (Relevant Parts)
IS:8009(Part- Code of Practice for Calculation of

I)-1993 Settlements of Foundations (Shallow
Foundations subjected to symmetrical
Vertical Loads).
IS:8763-1978 Guide for Undisturbed Sampling of Sands
IS:8764-1991 Method of Determination of Point Load

Strength Index of Rocks.
IS:9143-1991 Method of Determination of Unconfined ASTM D 2938

Compressive Strength of Rock Materials.
IS:9179-1991 Method of Preparation of Rock Specimen ASTM D 4543

for Laboratory Testing.
IS:9259-1992 Specification for Liquid Limit Apparatus. ASTM D 4318
IS:9640-1992 Specification for Split Spoon Sampler. ASTM D 1586


IS:10050- Method of Determination of Slake ASTM D 4644

1991 Durability Index of Rocks.
IS:11315(Part- Description of Discontinuities in Rock

II)-1991 Mass-Core Recovery and Rock Quality.
IS:12070- Code of Practice for Design and

1987 Construction o f Shallow Foundations on
Rocks
The above list of Indian Standards is not exhaustive but indicative. Any other
Standard/Code as per requirement of work shall also be applicable.
16.20.5. Field Investigation for Soils
The field investigations for soils shall be carried out by following methods:
i. By boring Boreholes, conducting SPT at prescribed depths and collection of

disturbed & undisturbed soil samples from prescribed depths for laboratory tests;
ii. By excavating Trial Pits of specified size and collection of disturbed & undisturbed
soil samples from prescribed depths for laboratory tests;
iii. By conducting Plate Load Test;
iv. By Measurement of Electrical Resistivity of Soil;
v. Any other investigation or test required for determining necessary engineering
properties of soil or soil strata required for the design of substation;
16.20.5.1. Boreholes
Boreholes shall be made to obtain information about the subsoil profile, its nature and
strength and to collect soil samples for strata identification and conducting laboratory
tests.

The number of boreholes shall not be less than as given below at each substation site:
 Site Development Work : 3 Nos.

 Control Room-cum-Administrative building : 2 Nos.
 D.G. Set Room Building : 1 No.
 Transformer Area : 2 Nos.
 132kV Yard Area : 2 Nos.
 33kV Yard Area : 1 No.
 Staff Quarters : 2 Nos.
 Store and Car Parking Shed : 1 No. each
Number of boreholes may be increased in case soil strata is found varying from borehole
to borehole in order to have fair idea of soil profile.
16.20.5.1.1. General Requirements
a) The minimum diameter of the borehole shall be 150mm and boring shall be carried
out in accordance with IS:1892 and these specifications:
b) All boreholes shall be drilled up to the specified depths. If a strata is encountered

where the Standard Penetration Test 'N' value is greater than 100, with characteristics
of rock, the borehole shall be advanced by coring at least 3.0 m further for shallow
foundations and at least 7.0 m for deep foundations like pile with prior approval of the
Employer/PMC. When the boreholes are to be terminated in soil strata, an additional
Standard Penetration Test shall be carried out at the termination depth. No extra
payment shall be made for carrying out Standard Penetration Tests.
c) Casing pipe shall be used when collapse of a borehole wall is probable. The bottom of
the casing pipe shall at all times be above the test of sampling level but not more than
150 mm above the borehole bottom. In case of cohesion-less soils, the advancement
of the casing pipe shall be such that it does not disturb the soil to be tested or
sampled. The casing shall preferably be advanced by slowly rotating the casing pipe
and not by driving.

d) In-situ tests (i.e. SPT and/or Vane Shear) shall be conducted as specified depths in
boreholes and undisturbed soil samples shall be obtained from the boreholes at
specified depths/intervals. Representative disturbed soil samples from split tube
sampler shall also be collected and preserved for conducting various soil identification
tests in the laboratory. Water table in the bore hole shall be carefully measured and
recorded in accordance with IS:6935.
e) No water or drilling mud shall be used while boring above ground water table. For
cohesion less soil below water table, the water level in the borehole shall at all times
be maintained slightly above the water table.
f) The borehole shall be cleaned using suitable tools to the depth of testing or sampling,
ensuring least or minimum disturbance of the soil at the bottom of the borehole. The
process of jetting through an open tube sampler shall not be permitted. In cohesive
soils, the borehole may be cleaned by using a bailer with a flap valve. Gentle
circulation of drilling fluid shall be done when rotary mud circulation boring is
adopted.
g) On completion of the drilling, Contractor shall backfill all boreholes as directed by the
Employer/PMC.
16.20.5.1.2. Methods of Boring

(i) Auger Boring
Auger boring may be employed in soft to stiff cohesive soils above the water table.
Augers shall be of helical or post hole type and the cuttings brought up by the auger shall
be carefully examined in the field and the description of all strata shall be duly recorded in
the field bore log as per IS:1498. No water shall be introduced from the top while boring
by auger.
(ii) Shell and Auger Boring
Shell and auger boring may be used in all types of soil which are free from boulders. The
use of chisel bits shall be permitted in hard strata having 'N' value greater than 100. Chisel

bits may also be used to extend the bore hole through local obstructions such as old
construction, boulders, rocky formations, etc. The requirements specified for Auger
boring shall apply for this type of boring also.
(iii) Rotary Boring
Rotary Boring may be used in all types of soil below water table. In this method, the
boring is carried out by rotating the bit fixed at the lower end of the drill rod. Proper care
shall be taken to maintain firm contact between the bit and the bottom of the borehole.
Bentonite or drilling mud shall be used as drilling fluid to stabilize and protect the inside
surface of the borehole against collapse. Use of percussion tools shall be permitted in hard
clays and in dense sandy deposits.
16.20.5.1.3. Cleaning of Boreholes
Boreholes shall be cleaned up to testing or sampling elevation using suitable tools before
carrying out SPT or before collection of undisturbed soil samples from borehole. Cleaning
of borehole above water table shall be done by bailer with flap valves. The cleaning of
borehole below water table shall be carried out by continuing circulation of drilling fluid
for 10 to 15 minutes after reaching the desired level so that all soil cuttings are removed
by drilling fluid and clear drilling fluid comes out from borehole.
16.20.5.2. Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
This test shall be conducted in all types of soil/rock deposits encountered within a
borehole in accordance with IS:2131 at an interval of 1.5 m up to a depth of 12.0m and at
an interval of 3.0m thereafter up to the specified depth, to find the variation in the soil
stratification by correlating with the number of blows required for 300 mm penetration of
a Split Spoon Sampler into soil strata. Structure sensitive engineering properties of
cohesive soils and silts such as strength and compressibility shall not be inferred based on
SPT values.
16.20.5.2.1. The SPT in boreholes shall be conducted at depths as given in table below and any
change of strata:

Location Depths (m)
Shallow foundation locations 1.5, 3.0, 4.5, 6.0, 7.5, 9.0, 10.5 & 12.0.
Deep and Special foundation locations 1.5, 3.0, 4.5, 6.0, 7.5, 9.0, 10.5 & 12.0
and thereafter at an interval of 3 m up
to a depth of 30 m.
16.20.5.2.2. The test shall be carried out by driving a standard split spoon sampler in the bore hole
by means of a 650N hammer having a free fall of 0.75 m. The sampler shall be driven into
soil strata for 450mm using the hammer and recording the nos. of blows for every
150mm penetration. The number of blows required for the last 300mm penetration shall
be reported as ‘N’ value.
16.20.5.2.3. This test shall be discontinued when ‘N’ value is equal to 100 or more, or the
penetration is less than 25 mm for 50 blows. At the level where the test is discontinued,
the number of blows and the corresponding penetration shall be reported. If termination
of borehole as per aforesaid stipulation happens before reaching the specified depth of
12 m of borehole, the Employer/PMC may direct the Contractor to advance the borehole
by coring as specified earlier in these specifications.
16.20.5.3. Soil Sampling
16.20.5.3.1. General
a) Sufficient number of disturbed and undisturbed soil samples shall be collected.

Disturbed soil samples shall be collected for soil identification and for conducting tests
such as sieve analysis, index properties (i.e. Atterberg's limits), specific gravity,
chemical analysis etc. Undisturbed soil samples shall be collected to conduct necessary
tests for determining shear parameters (i.e. Cohesion and Angle of Internal Friction)
and settlement characteristics of soil strata as well as estimating the bearing capacity
of soil strata.

b) All accessories and sampling methods shall conform to IS:2131, IS:2132 and IS:9640.
All disturbed and undisturbed samples collected in the field shall be classified at site as
per IS:1498
c) All samples shall be identified with date, borehole/ test pit number, depth of sampling,
etc. The top surface of the undisturbed soil samples shall also be marked. Care shall
be taken to keep the core and box samples vertical, with the mark directing upwards.
The tube samples shall be properly trimmed at one end and suitably capped and
sealed with molten paraffin wax. The Contractor shall be responsible for packing and
storing all soil samples in a cool place and transporting them from site to the soil
testing laboratory within seven days after sampling with proper protection against loss
and damage.
16.20.5.3.2. Disturbed Soil Samples
a) Disturbed soil samples shall be collected in boreholes at regular intervals. Jar samples
weighing approximately 1 kg shall be collected at 0.5m intervals starting from a depth
of 0.5m below ground level and at every identifiable change of strata to supplement
the boring records. Samples shall be stored immediately in air tight jars which shall be
filled to capacity as much as possible. The disturbed soil samples shall also be collected
from the split spoon sampler from each depth where SPT has been conducted for soil
identification and conducting laboratory tests such as sieve analysis, index properties
(Atterberg's Limits), specific gravity, natural moisture content, dry density, chemical
analysis etc. The sample shall also be visually classified and recorded at the site as well
as properly preserved without loss of moisture content and labeled.
b) In designated borrow areas, the soil samples, from a depth of about 0.5m below
ground level, shall be collected to establish the required properties for use as a fill
material. Disturbed soil samples weighing about 25kg (250N) shall be collected at
shallow depths and immediately stored in polythene bags as per IS:1892. The bags
shall be sealed properly to preserve the natural moisture content of the sample and
placed in wooden boxes for transportation.

16.20.5.3.3. Undisturbed Soil Samples

a) Undisturbed soil samples shall also be collected from specified depths of boreholes in
accordance with IS:2132 for determining soil structure sensitive engineering properties of soil
samples. The first undisturbed soil sample shall be collected from a depth of 0.5 m below
ground level and thereafter at an interval of 1.5 m in such a manner that the spacing between
the levels of standard penetration test and undisturbed soil sample is not less than 1.0m.
Equipments, accessories and procedures for the collection of the undisturbed soil samples
shall conform to IS:1892 and IS:2132.
b) In each borehole, the undisturbed soil samples shall be collected from depths as specified in
table below and at every change of strata:
Location Depths (m)
Shallow Foundation Locations 0.5, 2.5, 4.0, 5.5, 7.0, 8.5, 10.0, 11.5
and at any change of strata.
Deep and Special Foundation Locations 0.5, 2.5, 4.0, 5.5,7.0,8.5,10.0,11.5 and
thereafter at the interval of 3.0 or
change of strata;
c) Undisturbed soil samples shall be of 100mm diameter and 450mm in length. Samples shall be
collected in a manner to preserve the structure and moisture content of the soil.
d) Undisturbed soil samples shall be obtained using a thin walled tube sampler. In order to
reduce the wall friction, suitable precautions, such as oiling the surfaces of sampler shall be
taken. The sampling tube shall have a smooth finish on both surfaces and a minimum
effective length of 450mm. The area ratio of sampling tubes shall be less than 12.5%.
However, in case of very stiff soils, area ratio up to 20% shall be permitted.
e) Undisturbed Soil Sampling in very loose & saturated sandy and silty soils and very soft clays:
Undisturbed soil samples in case of very loose & saturated sandy and silty soils and very soft
clays shall be obtained using a piston sampler consisting of a cylinder and piston system in the
presence of expert supervision.

Accurate measurements of the sampling depth, dimensions of sampler, stroke and length of
sample recovery shall be recorded. After the sampler is pushed to the required depth, the
cylinder and piston system shall be drawn up together, preventing disturbance and changes in
moisture content of the sample.
f) Undisturbed sampling in cohesion less soils: Undisturbed soil samples in cohesion less soils
shall be obtained in accordance with IS:8763. Sampler operated by compressed air shall be
used to obtain samples of cohesion less soils below ground water table.
16.20.5.4. Ground Water Table
1) One of the following methods shall be adopted for determining the elevation of ground
water table in boreholes in accordance with IS:6935 and the instructions of the
Employer/PMC:
a) In permeable soils, the water level in the borehole shall be allowed to stabilize after
depressing it adequately by bailing before recording its level. Stability of sides and
bottom of the boreholes shall be ensured at all times.
b) For both permeable and impermeable soils, the following method shall be suitable.
The borehole shall be filled with water and then bailed out to various depths.
Observations on the rise or fall of water level shall be made at each depth. The level at
which neither fall nor rise is observed shall be considered the water table elevation
and confirmed by three successive readings of water level taken at two hours interval.
g) Levels in nearby wells, streams, etc., if any, shall also be noted in parallel.
h) Subsoil water samples
a) Subsoil water samples shall be collected for performing chemical analysis.

Representative ground water samples shall be collected when first encountered in
boreholes and before the addition of water to aid boring or drilling.
b) Chemical analysis of water samples shall include determination of pH value, turbidity,

sulphate, carbonate, nitrate and chloride contents, presence of organic matter and
suspended solids. Chemical preservatives may be added to the sample for cases as
specified in the test methods or in applicable Indian Standards. This shall only be done
if analysis cannot be conducted within an hour of collection and shall have the prior
written permission and approval of the Employer/PMC.
16.20.5.5. Vane Shear Test. (required for boreholes where collection of Undisturbed Soil Sampling is
not possible.)
Field vane shear test shall be performed inside the borehole to determine the shear
strength of cohesive soils, especially of soft and sensitive clays, which are highly
susceptible to sampling disturbance. Equipment, accessories, test procedures, field
observations shall be prescribed in IS:4434. Tests may also be conducted by direct
penetration from ground surface. If the cuttings at the test depth in the borehole show
any presence of gravel, sand shells, decomposed wood, etc., which are likely to influence
the test results substantially, the test at that particular depth shall be omitted with the
permission of the Employer/PMC. However, the test shall be conducted at a depth where
these obstructions cease to occur. On completion of the test, the results shall be reported
in an approved Performa as specified in Appendix-A of IS:4434.
16.20.6. Trial/Test Pits
The Contractor shall excavate trial pits of size 2.5 m x 2.5 m and 3.0 m depth. Disturbed
&Undisturbed samples shall be taken from the trial pits at as per the direction of the
Employer/PMC for carrying out necessary laboratory tests on them. Number of trial pits
shall be as given below:
 Site Development Work : 3 Nos.

 Control Room cum Administrative Building : 1 No.
 Transformer Area : 1 No.
 132kV yard area : 1 No.
 33kV Yard Area : 1 No.
 Staff Quarters : 2 Nos.
 Store, Car Parking Shed & Guard Room : 1 No. each
Disturbed soil samples from Test Pit shall be collected from 0.5 m, 1.5 m & 2.5 m depth
from ground level. One undisturbed soil sample shall be collected from 3.0 m depth from

ground level. Both disturbed and undisturbed soil samples shall be tested in laboratory in
similar manner as soil samples from boreholes. Logging of Test Pits shall also be given in
the report in similar manner as for boreholes.
All Trial Pits shall be re-filled with approved material after collection of soil samples and
logging of pits. Backfilling shall be done in layers of not more than 300mm and each layer
compacted to 90% of Proctor Dry Density at optimum moisture content.
16.20.7. Plate Load Test
Plate load test shall be conducted at the location of Control Room-cum-Administrative

Building and Transformer Area to determine the bearing capacity, modulus of sub grade
reaction and load/settlement characteristics of soil at shallow depths by loading a steel
plate kept at the desired depth and measuring the settlement under different loads, until
a desired settlement takes place or failure occurs. The specification for the equipment and
accessories required for conducting the test, the test procedure, field observations and
reporting of results shall conform to IS:1888-1982 and other relevant Indian Standards/
equivalent International Standards. Plate load test shall be performed at the proposed
foundation depth below ground level. The size of plate shall be not less than 450 x 450
mm. If desired by Employer, cyclic plate load test shall be conducted instead of simple
plate load test.
Undisturbed soil samples shall also be collected from the pit at 1.0 m depth and bottom
of pit for carrying out laboratory tests in similar manner as on soil samples from
boreholes.
The size of the pit for plate load test shall not be less than five times the plate size and
shall be taken up to the specified depth. All provisions regarding excavation and visual
examination of pit shall be observed.
Unless otherwise specified, the reaction method of loading shall be adopted. Settlement
shall be recorded from dial gauges placed at four diametrically opposite ends of the test
plate.

The load shall be increased in stages. Under each loading stage, record of Time vs.
Settlement shall be kept as specified in relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent
Backfilling of the pit shall be carried out as per the directions of the Employer/PMC.
Unless otherwise specified the excavated soil shall be used for this purpose. In cases of
gravel-boulder or rocky strata, respective relevant codes shall be followed for tests.
16.20.8. Soil/Electrical Resistivity Test
The test shall be conducted to determine the electrical resistivity of soil required for
designing the safety grounding system/earthing mat for the entire substation area. The
specifications for the equipments and other accessories required for performing electrical
resistivity test, the test procedure, and reporting of field observations shall conform to
relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards. The test shall be conducted
using Wagner’s four electrode method as specified in relevant Indian Standards/
equivalent International Standards. Unless otherwise specified, the test shall be
conducted along two perpendicular lines parallel to the coordinate axis at each test
location. On each line, a minimum of 8 to 10 readings shall be taken by changing the
spacing of the electrodes from an initial small value of 0.20 m up to a distance of 50.0 m.
Soil resistivity at each substation shall be measured after formation of terraces in dry
weather.
16.20.9. Field Investigation for Rock

16.20.9.1. Rock Drilling
1) If, during the investigations, large hard fragments or natural rock beds are encountered or
'N' value of 100 or more is observed, the boring shall proceed with core drilling method.
The equipment and procedures for this operation shall conform to IS:1892. The starting
depth of drilling in rock shall be certified by the Employer/PMC. At the end of the
investigation, the hole drilled in rock shall be backfilled with grout consisting of 1 part
cement and 3 parts sand by weight.

2) Drilling shall be carried out with NX size tungsten carbide (TC) or diamond tipped drill bits,
depending on the type of rock and according to IS:6926. Suitable type of drill bit
(TC/Diamond ) and core catchers shall be used to ensure continuous and good core
recovery of not less than 90%. Core barrels and core catchers shall be used for breaking
off the core and retaining it when the rods are withdrawn. Double tube core barrels shall
be used to ensure better core recovery and to retrieve cores from layers of bedrock.
Water shall be circulated continuously in the hollow rods and the sludge conveying the
rock cuttings to the surface shall be collected. A very high core recovery ratio shall be
aimed at in order to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed samples of rock. Attempt shall be
made to recover cores of 1.5m in length. Normally TC bit shall be used. Change over to a
diamond bit shall require the specific written approval of the Employer/PMC, and his
decision as to whether a TC or a diamond bit is to be used shall be final and binding on
Contractor.
3) No drilling run shall exceed 1.5 m in depth. If the core recovery is less than 80% in any run,
the length of the subsequent run shall be reduced to 0.75m. During drilling operations,
the following observations on return water, rate of penetration etc. shall be made and
recorded as per IS:5313.
a) The colour of return water at regular intervals, the depth at which any change of
colour of return water is observed, the depth of occurrence and amount of flow of hot
water, if encountered, shall be recorded.
b) The depth through which a uniform rate of penetration was maintained, the depth at
which marked change in rate of penetration or sudden fall of drill rod occurs, the
depth at which any blockage of drill bit causing core loss, if any, shall be recorded.
c) Any heavy vibration or torque noticed during the drilling should be recorded together
with the depth of occurrence.
d) Special conditions like the depth at which grouting was done during drilling, presence
of artesian conditions, loss of drilling fluid, observations of gas discharge with return
water, etc., shall also be observed and recorded.

e) All the observations and other details shall be recorded as per daily drill and reported
in a Performa as given in Appendix A of IS:5313.
16.20.9.2. Core Sampling

16.20.9.2.1. Core samples shall be extracted by the application of a continuous pressure at one end of
the core with the barrel held horizontally without vibration. Friable cores shall be
extracted from the barrel directly into a suitably sized half round plastic channel section.
Care shall be taken to extrude the samples in the direction of coring to avoid stress
reversal.
16.20.9.2.2. Immediately after withdrawal from the core barrel, the cores shall be placed in a tray and
transferred to core boxes specially prepared for this purpose. The boxes shall be made
from seasoned timber or any other durably material and shall be indexed on top of the lid
according to IS:4078. The cores shall be numbered serially and arranged in the boxes in a
sequential order. The description of the core samples shall be recorded as instructed in
IS:4464. Where no core is recovered, it shall be recorded as specified in the standard.
Continuous record of core recovery and rock quality designation (RD/DD/QD) are to be
mentioned in the bore log in accordance with IS:1 1315 (Part-II).
16.20.10. Laboratory Testing of Soil & Rock Samples
16.20.10.1. Essential Requirements
a) Depending on the types of substrata and soil encountered, appropriate and all
necessary laboratory tests shall be conducted on soil samples collected in the field and
all tests shall be conducted and performed by qualified and experienced personnel
who are thoroughly conversant with the work. Three copies of all laboratory test
results & records shall be submitted to Employer/PMC progressively every week.
Laboratory tests shall be carried out concurrently with the field investigations as initial
laboratory test results could be useful in planning the later stages of field work. A
schedule of laboratory tests shall be prepared by Contractor well in advance of starting
the field works to the satisfaction of the Employer/PMC;

b) Laboratory tests shall be conducted using approved apparatus complying with the
requirements of these specifications and relevant Indian Standards or any other
approved standards for this type of work. It shall be ensured that the apparatus are in
good working condition before starting the laboratory tests. Calibration of all the
instruments and their accessories shall be done carefully and precisely at an approved
laboratory before taking up testing of samples in laboratory.
c) All samples, whether undisturbed or disturbed shall be extracted, prepared and

examined by competent personnel properly trained and experienced in soil sampling.
examination, testing and in using the apparatus in conformance with the specified
standards;
d) Undisturbed soil samples retained in liners or seamless tube samplers shall be

removed, without causing any disturbance to the samples, using suitably designed
extruders just prior to actual testing. If the extruder is horizontal, proper support shall
be provided to prevent the sample from breaking. For screw tube extruders, the
pushing head shall be free from the screw shaft so that no torque is applied to the soil
sample in contact with the pushing head. For soft clay samples, the sample tube shall
be cut by means of a high speed hacksaw to proper test length and placed over the
mould before pushing the sample into it with a suitable piston;
e) While extracting a sample from a liner or tube, care shall be taken to assure that its
direction of movement is the same as that during sampling to avoid stress reversal;
16.20.10.2. Laboratory Tests
Tests as indicated in these specifications and as necessary and may be directed by the
Employer/PMC, shall be conducted. These tests shall include but may not be limited to
the following :
a) Tests of undisturbed and disturbed soil samples
 Visual and engineering classification;

 Sieve analysis and hydrometric analysis;
 Atterberg’s Limits;
 Specific Gravity;
 Dry Density and Natural Moisture Content;
 Relative Density(for sand),
 Chemical Analysis
 Proctor Compaction test.
b) Tests of Undisturbed Soil Samples:
 Bulk Density;
 Unconfined Compression Test;
 Direct/Box Shear Test (for sand);
 Tri-axial Shear Tests (depending on the type of soil and field conditions on
undisturbed or re-moulded samples):
i. Unconsolidated Un-drained Tri-axial Test;
ii. Consolidated Drained Tri-axial Test;
 Consolidation Test.
i. California Bearing Ratio
c) California Bearing Ratio (CBR): CBR shall be determined by conducting laboratory test
on soil samples in accordance with IS:2720(Part-16)-1987.
d) Tests on rock samples
 Visual classification;
 Moisture content , porosity and density;

 Hardness
 Stake durability
 Unconfined Compression Test (both saturated and at in-situ water content);
 Point Load Strength Index;
 Deformability Test(both saturated and dry samples).
e) Chemical analysis of sub soil water.
16.20.10.3. Salient Test Requirement
a) Tri-axial shear tests shall be conducted on undisturbed soil samples, saturated by the
application of back pressure. Only if the water table is at sufficient depth so that
chances of its rising to the base of the footing are small or nil, the tri-axial tests shall
be performed on specimens at natural moisture content. Each test shall be carried out
on a set of three test specimens from one sample at cell pressures equal to 100, 200
and 300 KPa respectively or as required depending on the soil conditions;
b) Direct shear test shall be conducted on undisturbed soil samples. The three normal
vertical stresses for each test shall be 100, 200 and 300 KPa or as required for the soil
conditions;
c) Consolidation test shall have loading stages of 10, 25, 50, 75, 100, 200, 400 and 800
KPa. Rebound curve shall be recorded for all samples by unloading the specimen at its
in-situ stress. Additional rebound curves shall also be recorded wherever desired by
the Employer/PMC;
d) Chemical analysis of subsoil samples shall include determination of PH value,

carbonate, sulphate (both SO3 and SO4), chloride and nitrate contents, organic matter,
salinity and any other chemicals which may be harmful to the foundation materials viz.

concrete & reinforcement steel. Their contents in the soil shall be indicated as
percentage(%);
e) Chemical analysis of subsoil water samples shall include the determination of

properties such as colour, odour, turbidity, PH value and specific conductivity, the
carbonates, sulphates, chlorides & nitrates contents, organic matter and any other
chemical harmful to the foundation material materials viz. concrete & reinforcement
steel. The chemical contents shall be indicated as parts per million (PPM) based on
weight.
16.20.11. Geotechnical Investigation Report

16.20.11.1. General
Contractor shall submit Geotechnical Investigation Report for each substation site
containing geological information of the region, procedures adopted for geotechnical
investigation, field observations, results of field & laboratory tests, summarized test data,
conclusions and recommendations. The report shall also include detailed bore logs,
subsoil sections, field test results, laboratory observations and test results both in tabular
as well as graphical form, practical and theoretical considerations for the interpretation of
test results, the supporting calculations for the conclusions drawn, etc. Initially,
Contractor shall submit three copies of the report in draft form for Employer/PMC’s
review;
a) Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer may be asked to visit Employer /PMC’s Corporate

Office for a detailed review of report based on Employer/PMC’s comments in order to
discuss the nature of modifications to be done in the draft report. Contractor shall
incorporate the agreed modifications in the report and resubmit the revised draft
report for approval. Three copies of the detailed final report along with its soft copy in
PDF format shall be submitted to Employer/PMC together with one set of reproducible
of the graphs, tables etc.
b) The final report based on field observations, in-situ and laboratory tests shall
encompass theoretical as well as practical considerations for design and construction

of foundations for various structures, buildings and equipments and design of other
facilities of substation.
16.20.11.2. Data and Details to be furnished in the Report
The report shall also include the following
a) A location plan showing the locations and reduced levels of all field test e.g. boreholes,
trial pits, plate load test etc., property drawn to scale and dimensioned with reference
to the established bench mark;
b) A true cross section of all individual boreholes and test pits with reduced levels and
coordinates showing the classification and thickness of individual stratum, position of
ground water table, various in-situ tests conducted, samples collected from different
depths and the rock stratum, if encountered;
c) Geological information of the area including geomorphology, geological structure,

lithology, stratigraphy and tectonics, core recovery and rock quality designation
(RD/DD/QD), etc. for rocky strata,
d) Plot of Standard Penetration Test (uncorrected and corrected N values) with depth for
each bore hole;
e) Results of all laboratory tests summarized in a table (i) for each sample as well as (ii)
for each layer along with all the relevant charts, tables, graphs, figures, supporting
calculations, conclusions and photographs of representative rock cores;
f) For tri-axial shear tests, stress vs. strain diagrams as well as Mohr’s circle envelopes
shall be furnished. If back pressure is applied for saturation, the magnitude of the
same shall be indicated. The value of modulus of elasticity (E) shall be furnished for all
tests along with relevant calculations;
g) For all consolidation tests, the following curves shall be furnished for proper
determination of coefficient of consolidation:
i. e vs. log p;

ii. e vs. p;
iii. Compression vs. log t or vs.t.
The point showing the initial condition (e0, p0) of the soil shall be marked on the
curves;
h) The procedure adopted for calculating the compression index from the field curve and
settlement of soil strata shall be clearly specified. The time required for 50% and 90%
primary consolidation along with secondary settlements, if significant, shall also be
calculated.
i) California Bearing Ratio;
Table-A
SUMMARY OF RESULTS OF LABORATORY TESTS ON SOIL
AND WATER SAMPLES
1. Bore hole test pit. no
2. Depth (m)
3. Type of sample
4. Density(kg/m3)
a) Bulk
b) Dry.
c) Submerged
5. Natural Moisture Water content (%)
6. Particle Size (%)

a) Gravel
b) Sand
c) Silt
d) Clay

7. Atterberg's Limits (Index Properties)

LL - Liquid Limit (%)
PL - Plastic Limit
PI - Plasticity Index
LI - Liquidity Index
8. Soil Classification
a) Classification - As per Unified Soil Classification System in accordance with relevant
IS code:
b) Description of Soil Type
c) Specific gravity
9. Strength Parameters of Soil/Rock at various depths and soil strata encountered

a) Soil Type
b) C (Cohesion)
c) Ø (angle of internal friction)
10. Bearing Capacity of Soil/Rock at 2.0 m and 2.5 m below ground level for various width of
footings:
a) Safe/Allowable Bearing Capacity based on shear failure and settlement criteria;
11. Consolidation Test
e0 - Initial Void Ratio
Pc - Reconsolidation Pressure (kPa)
Cc - Compression Index
DP - Change in Pressure (kPa)
mv - Coefficient of Volume Compressibility (m2/KN)
Cv - Coefficient of Consolidation (m2/hr)
12. Optimum Moisture Content;

13. 90% & 95% Proctor’s Dry Density;
14. Shrinkage limit(%)
15. Relative Density (%) for cohesion less soils;

16. California Bearing Ratio
17. Location of Water Table

a) Location of water table at the time of carrying out the test;
b) Likely highest level of Water Table based on analysis of historical data and
observations of water level in nearby wells/ponds/rivers/steams etc.
18. Conclusion & Recommendations
I. For Chemical Test
As per Specifications.
16.20.11.3. Recommendations
Recommendations shall be provided for each substation duly considering type of soil,
type of structure/equipment and nature & intensity of loading etc. The recommendations
shall provide all necessary engineering properties of soils and considerations required for
proper selection, dimensioning and performance of foundations and the following:
a) The subsurface soil/rock strata must provide safe bearing capacity and uplift resistance
by incorporating appropriate safety factors thereby avoiding failure under ultimate
loads;
b) Movement of the foundations including short and long term components under
transient and permanent loading, shall be strictly controlled with regard to settlement,
uplift, lateral translation and rotation:
c) For shallow foundation the following shall be indicated with comprehensive

supporting calculations:
i. Net Safe/allowable bearing capacity of soil/rock strata for isolated square footings
of specified sizes for two different founding depths of 2.0 & 2.5m below ground
level considering both shear failure and settlement criteria giving reasons for type
of shear failure adopted in the calculation.

ii. Net safe/allowable bearing capacity of soil strata for raft foundations of widths
greater than 5.0 m at 2.5 and 3.0 m below ground level considering both shear
failure and settlement criteria.
iii. Rate and magnitude of expected settlement of foundations;
d) The stable slopes for shallow and deep excavations, active and passive earth pressure
coefficients and angle of repose for soils shall be furnished.
e) Stable slope for cutting and filling for site development work and creation of terraces;
f) In cases where normal shallow foundations are not found to be feasible based on
techno-economical considerations, pile foundations shall be given due consideration
along with the following:
i. Type of pile foundation and reasons for recommending the same duly considering
the soil characteristics.
ii. Suitable founding strata for the pile:
iii. Estimated length of pile for 500, 750 and 1000 KN capacities; end bearing and
frictional resistance of pile capacity shall be indicated separately:
iv. Magnitude of negative skin friction if any.
g) California Bearing Ratio for the design of roads;
h) Where the subsoil water and soil properties are found to be chemically aggressive, the
precautions required to be taken during construction including any protective coating
to be applied on the foundations shall be recommended in report and implemented by
contractor during execution; susceptibility of soil to termite action and remedial
measures for the same shall also be dealt with in the report;
i) Suitability of locally available soils at site for filling/backfilling shall be investigated and
required compaction shall be ensured to achieve 95% of Proctor’s dry density for
backfilled soil.

j) If expansive soil such as black cotton soil is encountered, the recommendation of

removal or retaining of the same shall be given. In the latter case, detailed
specifications of special requirements shall also be given in the report.
k) Susceptibility of subsoil strata to liquefaction in the event of earthquake and remedial

measures, if required, and type of foundations to be provided shall be recommended
in report and considered by Contractor during execution.
l) Any other information of special significance such as dewatering schemes, etc. which
may have a bearing on the design and construction shall be provided.
16.21. TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY
16.21.1. Scope
The scope comprises carrying out topographical survey work, setting out and making
profiles, preparation of plot plan, setting up Bench Marks and taking spot levels at a grid
of not more than 2 m x 2 m size, preparation of contour maps on the 1 : 1000 scale with
contour interval of 0.50 m. The whole work shall be carried out as per norms and
guidelines of Survey Department of Government of Nepal.
16.21.2. The methodoology of topographical survey work along with survey instruments proposed
to be used, shall be submitted to Employer/PMC for approval.
16.21.3. Before starting the topographical survey work, a temporary bench mark shall be
established by Contractor at each substation site and its level fixed from a known
Permanent Bench Mark of Survey Department of Nepal by double levelling. The level shall
also be linked with nearest bench mark established by transmission line contractor for the
purpose of cross checking the levels.
16.21.4. The contractor shall carry out topographical survey work by taking spot levels at not
bigger than 2 m x 2 m size grid as per topography of site and at all such points where
there is sudden change in levels with respect to bench mark established at site by
contractor.

16.21.5. Topographical survey shall be carried out by qualified surveyors using Total Station
instrument.
16.21.6. The contractor shall submit the spot levels (in grid format) in editable soft copy in excel
format and contour map on 1 : 1000 scale with contour interval of 0.5 m in editable auto
cad soft drawing.
16.22. SITE LEVELLING& FORMATION OF TERRACES
16.22.1. The land for construction of substations will be handed over to the successful bidder as on
where basis after award of work. Site shall be cleared, surveyed and leveled by the
contractor as per approved general arrangement drawing of each substation. The
Contractor shall develop the site area to meet the requirement of the intended purpose.
16.22.2. Employer has carried out the preliminary topographical survey of substation sites and
prepared preliminary contour maps and finalized the tentative nos. of terraces/benches to
be formed and their levels. Substation layouts have been superimposed on contour map
drawings which are attached in Section-6 of Part-II, Section-VI for information and
guidance of bidders. The details given therein are tentative and for tender purposes only
and in no way they are final.
16.22.3. During detailed engineering stage, the contractor shall prepare the site grading and
levelling proposal by optimizing the quantities of earth work in cutting and filling based on
his topographical survey and contour maps and finalize the nos. of terraces and their
levels and submit the same to Employer/PMC for approval. While finalizing the levels of
terraces, it shall be ensured that no foundation of any major equipment is located on filled
up soil as far as possible.
16.22.4. Contractor shall submit the hard copy as well as editable soft copy of leveling proposal
(Excavation and Filling Quantities calculation in Excel Sheet and levelling drawing in Auto
CAD) to Employer/PMC for approval.
16.22.5. Before taking of the work of site levelling and formation of terraces, the contractor shall
remove all tress, plants, bushes and any other organic matter from the proposed area and
stack the wood obtained from cutting of trees at a place as directed by Employer/PMC.
16.22.6. The work shall involve excavation in all type of soils including soft rock and hard rock. The
excavation shall be carried out by mechanical means using equipments of approved type
and capacity. Soil obtained from excavation shall be used, if found suitable, for carrying
out filling during site levelling operations.
16.22.7. Excavation in Hard Rock shall be carried out by blasting. Explosives and necessary
accessories including drilling equipments like jack hammer, compressors etc. required for
excavation in hard rock shall be arranged by the contractor. The blasting shall be done by
licensed blasters. All necessary precautions and safety measures as per relevant Indian
standards/ International standards shall be taken while carrying out blasting. The rock
obtained from blasting shall be suitably stacked at designated places and if found suitable,
the same shall be utilized in the construction of Random Rubble Masonry Retaining and
Breast/Toe walls as well as in manufacturing of coarse aggregates required for concrete.
While carrying out blasting, it shall be ensured that there is no damage to any nearby
structures like houses, school buildings, water supply system etc. or to any person passing
by the side of blasting site The excavated soil to be used for filling during site levelling
operation shall be suitable for the purpose and shall conform to the requirements
specified under the clause of ‘Filling’ of this specification. Unsuitable excavated material, if
any, shall be removed from site and disposed off at designated disposal areas. Any
shortfall in the quantity of fill material shall be met from suitable borrow areas to be
identified by the contractor and approved by the Employer/PMC. The works of leveling
and filling shall be carried out as per relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International
Standards and as directed by Employer/PMC.
16.22.8. The filling shall be carried out in layers of not more than 300mm thickness and each layer
compacted by mechanical means (i.e. rollers of appropriate capacity and size) at optimum
moisture content to achieve 95% of standard Proctor’s dry density. Cohesion less material
shall be compacted by vibratory rollers to achieve relative density of not less than 70%.
16.22.9. Where formation of terraces requires the construction of toe/retaining walls, these
retaining/toe walls shall be constructed before taking levelling operation in the said area.

16.23. SLOPE PROTECTION WORKS
16.23.1. While carrying out excavation during site levelling and terrace formation, stable slope on
hill side shall be maintained. Wherever any instability or slide is observed in hill slope,
suitable slope protection measures shall be taken which may involve construction of R.R.
Masonry retaining walls, breast walls etc.
16.23.2. Contractor shall prepare the designs and drawings of R.R. Masonry retaining walls, breast
walls, toe walls etc. as per site conditions and submit the same to Employer/PMC for
approval. No construction work shall be undertaken without approval of Employer/ PMC.
16.23.3. Construction of R.R. Masonry retaining/breast/toe wall shall be carried out as per detailed
specification of R.R. Masonry given under the clause of Masonry work of this specification.
16.23.4. Weep Holes of suitable size and at appropriate spacing shall be provided in all retaining
and breast walls. At the back of weep holes, properly designed filters shall be provided.
16.23.5. 75 mm thick coping of 1:2:4 (1 Cement : 2 Fine Aggregates : 4 Coarse Aggregates of 20mm
nominal size) concrete shall be provided at the top of retaining/ breast walls to protect
the masonry.
16.24. CATCH DRAINS
16.24.1. Stone Masonry Catch Drains shall be provided on uphill side of substation sites to arrest
the surface runoff water from uphill slopes entering the substation.
16.24.2. The size of catch drain shall be decided based on catchment area and one hour rain fall
intensity of 25 years return period.
16.24.3. The catch drains shall be constructed as per specifications and requirements for drains
specified under the clause of ‘General and Specific Design Requirements’ of this
specification.
16.25. EXCAVATION
16.25.1. This clause covers excavation required for foundation works of Retaining/Breast/Toe
Walls, Gantry Towers, Equipment support structures, Transformer foundations, Lighting
poles, Cable trenches, Buildings, Car parking shed, Fire Protection Wall, Underground
Water Storage tank etc.
16.25.2. All excavation shall be carried out to such lengths, depths and inclinations as shown on the
approved construction drawings or as may be ordered by the Employer/PMC.
16.25.3. No foundation shall be laid over filled-up area. All foundations for Permanent Works shall
be carried at least 0.6 meter into the virgin soil to the satisfaction of the Employer/PMC.
16.25.4. Prior to the commencement of any excavation, the Contractor shall satisfy himself as to
the circumstances at the Site and of all the materials, obstructions, strata, water streams
including the possibility of floods etc. likely to be encountered. The quoted rates in the
Price Schedule shall provide for these circumstances.
16.25.5. The Contractor shall carry out all excavations required for works in all types of materials
whatsoever is encountered, including boulders, decomposed/fissured rock, or hard rock of
any type. All excavation and blasting/drilling works shall be carried out as per IS:
1200(Part-I)-1992 and IS: 4081-1986 respectively.
16.25.6. The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to preserve the materials below and
beyond any line of excavation in the soundest possible condition. Any damage to the
excavation or works due to the Contractor's operations, including shattering of the
material beyond the excavation lines, shall be repaired at the expense of and by the
Contractor. Any and all excess excavation carried out by Contractor for his convenience or
for any purpose or reason, except as may be ordered in writing by the Employer/PMC,
shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
16.25.7. All excavations shall be carried out in the dry conditions. The Contractor shall take all
necessary precautions including supplying and operation of all necessary pumping plant to
remove all subsurface water and water from any source whatsoever which may enter the
excavations whether these are in progress or completed. Every precaution shall be taken
so as not to disturb the soil below foundation level.
16.25.8. Whenever water table is met with during the excavation, it shall be dewatered and water
table shall be maintained below the bottom of the excavation level during excavation,
concreting and backfilling.
16.25.9. If excavations are required to be carried out within 3.0 m of any building or other
Constructions, the Contractor shall execute the work in such a way and manner that shall
avoid damage to existing structures and minimize disturbances.
16.25.10. Excavation shall be finished to the lines and dimensions shown on the approved
construction drawings or directed by the Employer/PMC. Final excavation & trimming of
all excavations in the last 300 mm depth shall be carried out by the use of hand tools. In
case, excavation is made below levels specified in construction drawings by mistake, the
same shall be made up by contractor at his own cost by providing concrete of M-10 grade
to bring the bottom of excavation to the required level.
16.25.11. Where in the opinion of the Employer/PMC, the works are likely to cause disturbance to
the public, the Contractor shall organize his operations in such a way as to reduce the
interval between opening up and back-filling the excavations to a bare minimum. No
further work shall commence until the Employer/PMC has inspected and approved the
completed excavation.
16.25.12. All excavation operation shall include excavation and disposal of the excess excavated
materials. The excavated material shall be disposed off at a place as directed by the
Employer/PMC.
16.26. ANTIQUITIES
16.26.1. Any finds of Archeological interest such as relics of antiquity, coins, fossils or other articles
of value shall be delivered to Employer/PMC and these shall be the property of the
government.
16.27. REMOVAL OF SURPLUS EXCAVATED MATERIAL
16.27.1. Excavated material which is not required or suitable for filling/backfilling shall be removed
and disposed off at designated dumping places approved by the Employer/PMC. All
rubbish and waste material shall similarly be removed and disposed off by the Contractor.
16.27.2. If surplus earth generated from site levelling or foundation is disposed off within
substation boundary, the same shall be spread in uniform layers of 300 mm thickness and

compacted with rollers of appropriate capacity at optimum moisture content to achieve

95% of Protector’s Dry Density.The contractor shall take every precaution against causing
any nuisance, damage, injury or inconvenience in the handling, stacking, carting or
disposal of excavated materials or any other operation, matter or thing in connection
therewith.
16.27.3. No excavated material shall be placed in any position where it may be washed away or
may be liable to fall or spread into any private property or across a road or footpath, and
should this nevertheless occur, the Contractor shall forthwith remove such materials at no
16.27.4. Should the Employer/PMC direct the Contractor to tip certain surplus excavated materials
in a particular place other than the tipping places obtained by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall abide by such instructions and shall make no claim in consequence
thereof unless the place specified entails a longer haul than what would be incurred by
tipping at the place or places obtained by the Contractor and first approved by the
Employer/PMC.
16.28. MATERIAL FOR FILLING/BACK FILLING
16.28.1. All materials used by the Contractor for the purpose of filling, backfilling and
embankments shall be approved by the Employer/PMC.
16.28.2. Earth used for filling, backfilling and embankments shall be free from stone, shingle or
boulders larger than 75mm in any direction, salts, organic or other foreign materials.
Normally earth excavated from the same area shall be used for filling. However, if such
earth contains deleterious material, saltpeter earth etc., the same shall not be used. All
clots of earth shall be broken or removed.
16.29. BACK FILLING OF EXCAVATIONS
16.29.1. The backfilling of excavations shall commence as soon as practicable and only after the
Permanent Works have been inspected and approved by the Employer/PMC. No
backfilling shall commence without the approval of Employer/PMC.

16.29.2. Before back filling, the spaces around the foundations, pipes, drains etc. shall be cleared
of all debris, brick bats etc. The filling shall be done in layers not exceeding 200 mm. Each
layer shall be watered to optimum moisture content, rammed and compacted to achieve
95% of Proctor’s dry density before the succeeding layer is laid, which shall also be
watered and compacted in similar manner.
16.29.3. Earth shall be compacted with iron rammers or any other suitable means and with butt
ends of crowbars where rammer cannot be used. Special care shall be taken so as to
ensure that no damage is caused to foundations, pipes, drains, masonry, cables etc.
16.29.4. Reinstatement of Surfaces: Unless otherwise shown on the approved construction

drawings, all trenches and backfilled excavations shall be reinstated to their original
condition and appearance to the satisfaction of the Employer/PMC.
16.30. SAND FILLING

16.30.1. General
Sand filling shall be done similar to earth filling except that the compaction is done with
vibratory compactors and by flooding with water. The surface of the compacted sand shall
be dressed to required level and slope. Any other operation on top of the sand fill shall not
be started until the Employer/PMC has inspected and approved the sand filling.
16.30.2. Material
Local Sand conforming to the specifications of /guidelines of Department of Urban
Development & Building Construction and Department of Road, Government of Nepal
shall be used.
16.30.3. Filling
The filling with sand in specified areas shall be done in layers in similar way as earth filling
but compacted with vibratory rollers/compactors. After completion of filling, it shall be
flooded with water for 24 hours.
16.31. COMPACTION
16.31.1. Backfilled earth shall be compacted to minimum 95% of Proctor’s dry density at optimum
moisture content (OMC). The sub grade for the roads and embankment filling shall also be

compacted to minimum 95% of Proctor’s dry density at OMC.
16.31.2. Cohesion less material shall be compacted to 70% of relative density (minimum). All
compacted sand filling shall be confined as far as practicable.
16.31.3. Each layer of earth embankment when compacted shall be as close to optimum moisture
content as practicable. Embankment material which does not contain sufficient moisture
to obtain proper compaction shall be wetted. If the material contains any excess moisture,
then it shall be allowed to dry before rolling. The rolling shall begin at the edges
overlapping half the width of the roller each time and progress to the center of the road
or towards the building as applicable. Rolling will also be required on rock fills. No
compaction shall be carried out in rainy weather.
16.32. ANTI-TERMITE TREATMENT

16.32.1. General
Prevention of termites reaching the superstructure of the buildings shall be achieved by
creating a chemical barrier. Therefore, the soil beneath the buildings and around the
foundations shall be treated with chloropyrifos 20 EC (0.75%) or equivalent as per the
direction of Employer/PMC. This pre-constructional soil treatment shall be carried out in
coordination with the building works and shall be executed in such a manner that the civil
works are not hampered or delayed by the termite treatment.
16.32.2. Application
Treatment shall be carried out as detailed in IS: 6313(Part-II)-1981. The specified quantity
of chemical emulsion shall be used for each specific area. Created barriers shall not be
disturbed. If for any reason whatsoever, they have been disturbed, the continuity and
completeness of treatment shall be restored.
16.32.3. Ten years guarantee shall be given by the Contractor for anti-termite treatment.
16.33. DAMP PROOFING COURSE
16.33.1. General
The Damp Proof Course over masonry walls at plinth level as shown in the approved
construction drawings or as directed by the Employer/PMC shall be provided for damp
proofing of all buildings.
16.33.2. Application
16.33.2.1. The surface of brick masonry shall be leveled and prepared before laying damp proof
course.
16.33.2.2. Damp Proof Course shall consists of a75 mm thick layer of cement concrete 1:1.5:3 (1
Cement : 1.5 Fine Aggregates : 3 Coarse Aggregates of 12.5 mm nominal size) and
spreading a layer of bitumen over dried concrete surface as specified rate.
16.33.2.3. The concrete shall also be mixed with an approved water proofing compound as per the
standard specification and cured for a minimum period of 7 days after laying or as
directed by Employer/PMC.
16.33.2.4. After concrete surface has dried and has become free of any moisture, a coat of hot
bitumen (asphalt 80/100 or equivalent) at the rate of 1.7 kg per square meter shall be
applied over concrete surface. The pouring of bitumen shall be so regulated so that
correct weight of material per unit area is spread uniformly over the concrete surface.
Edge of DPC shall be straight, even and vertical.
16.34. CONCRETE WORK
16.34.1. General
The contractor shall submit to the Employer/PMC the samples of all materials proposed
for use in the production of concrete for the works, together with a list of suppliers. The
Employer/PMC consent in writing shall be obtained for all such samples and sources of
supply before any concreting work is taken up by the Contractor. No changes shall
subsequently be made without the approval of Employer/PMC. The Employer/PMC shall
have access to all sources of supply for the purpose of inspecting and taking samples.
16.34.2. Supervision
The contractor shall employ a competent supervisors approved by the Employer/PMC to

supervise all stages of the concrete works, including the supervision of the making of tests
cubes and all other site tests. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping all records of

testing and work progress as required by the Employer/PMC.
16.34.3. Responsibility
Approval of materials and workmanship by the Employer/PMC shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility of ensuring that materials and workmanship comply with
these specifications and the quality and standards specified herein.
16.34.4. Materials
16.34.4.1. General
Materials used in the Works shall be of the qualities and kinds specified herein and equal
to approved samples. The delivery of materials shall be made sufficiently in advance to
enable further samples to be taken and tested if required. Materials not approved shall be
immediately removed from the work’s site by the contractor at his own cost.
All specified properties of the materials used in making concrete shall be tested with a
frequency necessary to ensure continuous compliance to the specification. Whenever, any
new material is to be used; testing frequencies shall be approved by the Employer/PMC.
The materials shall be transported, handled and stored at the site or elsewhere in such a
manner as to prevent damage, deterioration or contamination.
16.34.4.2. Cement
Grade: Cement shall be procured from an approved source and shall be Ordinary Portland
Cement of Grade 43 complying with IS: 269. Cement shall be delivered in sealed
manufacturer's branded bags or barrels. Damaged bags or barrels and any cement,
Employer/PMC considers unsatisfactory shall be rejected. Each bag shall be used on the
day of opening and any bag/bags opened on the previous day shall be rejected. All
rejected cement including that which has become affected by damp conditions is to be
removed from site within 48 hours.
Storage: Cement shall be stored and stacked in bags in dry and water proof shed. The bags
shall be stacked at least 200 mm clear above the floor. A space of about 600 mm all round
shall be kept between the exterior walls and the stacks. Cement bags shall be placed close

together in the stock to reduce circulation of air as much as possible. Cement bags shall
not be stacked more than 10 bags high to avoid lumping under pressure. If the stack is
more than 7 bags high, the bags shall be arranged in header and stretcher fashion, to
lessen the danger of toppling over. For extra safety during the monsoon, the cement bags
shall be properly covered with 700 gauge polythene sheet. Care shall be taken that the
polythene sheet is not damaged any time during use.
When removing bags from storage some bags shall be removed from two or three tiers
back rather than all from one tier. When removing cement bags for use, the "first in, first
out" rule shall apply, that is the oldest cement shall be taken out first. Each consignment
of cement shall be stacked separately therein to permit easy access for inspection and
facilitate removal. Storage of cement at the site of work shall be at Contractor's expense
and risk.
Expiry: Cement shall not be used after 6 months from its manufacture date or after it has
been held in store for 3 months or more. All bags shall be dated upon arrival at the site.
Quality: In order to get a relatively quicker idea of the quality of cement, the compressive
strength test at 3 days shall be carried out in addition to 7-days test given in table below.
In all cases, the 28 days compressive strength specified shall be the criterion for
acceptance or rejection of the concrete. Notwithstanding the above requirements and
tests the Employer/PMC may reject any cement which in his opinion is unsatisfactory for
any reason whatsoever. Cement temperature shall not exceed 60 degree Celsius when
used.
16.34.4.3. Water
Water for use in concrete mixing and curing shall be quality of potable water obtained
from an approved source and shall not be of a quality that shall affect the setting time,
strength and durability of the concrete or mortar. The water shall not affect the
appearance of the hardened concrete or mortar by discoloration or efflorescence, nor
shall it have any effect, whatsoever on the reinforcement at any stage. Water used for
mixing concrete and mortars shall be clean and reasonably free from injurious quantities

of deleterious materials such as oil, acids, alkalis, salts and vegetable growth. Generally
potable water shall be used. Where water can be noticed to contain any sugar or an
excess of acid, alkali or salt, the Employer/PMC may decide the maximum permissible
limits of deleterious materials in water. Water for mixing and curing shall in general
conform to IS: 456-2000.
Water shall be stored in approved, clean containers which are protected from wind, dust,
organic contamination or from contamination by any other source.
16.34.4.4. Aggregates
General
Materials used as aggregates shall be obtained from a source known to produce

aggregates of satisfactory quality for concrete and shall be chemically inert, strong, hard,
durable, of limited porosity, and free from adhering coatings, clay lumps, coal and coal
residues and organic or other impurities that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or
may impair the strength or durability of the concrete. Aggregates shall be natural gravel or
crushed stone. The aggregates used in any concrete mix shall not cause damage or
weakening of the concrete.
Aggregates shall be stored and handled only on approved impervious free draining
platforms. Aggregates shall be stacked separately according to the size in regular stacks of
proper height. While stock-piling, the aggregates shall not form pyramids resulting in
segregation of different sized materials. All aggregates which have become segregated
shall be mixed mechanically before use for ensuing uniformity of gradation and quality.
Aggregates which have become contaminated whilst stored on site shall be removed.
Fine Aggregates
Fine Aggregates/Sand shall be free from clay, silt and other harmful organic impurities and
shall comply to the requirements specified in IS:383 and shall be of quality approved by
Employer/PMC.

Coarse Aggregates
Coarse Aggregate for concrete shall be of specified nominal size and must have been
manufactured from hard and durable stones and and comply to the requirements
specified in IS: 383 and shall be of quality approved by Employer/PMC
16.34.4.5. Admixtures
Admixtures and additives shall comply with IS: 9103 and may only be used with the prior
written approval of the Employer/PMC. Approved admixtures shall be used in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations, shall be dispensed by approved equipment,
which provides a visible means of checking each dose, and shall comply with the relevant
Indian Standard. The proposed dosages, the manufacturer's technical information and the
results of trial mixes shall be submitted to the Employer/PMC for approval.
When more than one admixture is to be used in a concrete, the compatibility of the
various admixtures shall be ascertained and established by standard tests and certified by
the manufacturer(s). No admixture containing chloride or nitrate shall be used.
16.34.5. Concrete Mix Proportions
The determination of the proportions of cement, aggregates and water to attain the
required strengths shall be made as per following two methods:
(i) By designing the concrete mix i.e. ‘Design Mix Concrete’
or
(ii) By adopting nominal concrete mix i.e. ‘Nominal Mix Concrete’.
In the bill of quantities, ‘Nominal Mix Concrete’ has been specified by specifying the
proportions of concrete constituents i.e. cement, fine aggregates & coarse aggregates, by
volume as is usual in Nepal. However, these proportions are given only for guidance and
shall be altered as and when necessary in order to comply with the strength requirements
of concrete.
‘Design Mix Concrete ‘shall be allowed provided adequate (weight batching) equipment
are available and it shall comply with IS: 456-2000.
16.34.6. Mixing
Mixing of concrete shall be done in a mechanical mixer of minimum size 7/10 (with
hopper only). Mixing by hand shall be allowed only in special cases with the prior, written
permission of the Employer/PMC. Coarse and Fine aggregates shall be washed with water
to remove dirt, dust or any foreign materials, where necessary or directed by
Employer/PMC.
The mixer drum shall be first cleaned of any foreign material, dust and any hardened
concrete from previous use and then flushed clean with water. Measured quantity of dry
coarse aggregates shall be first put into mixer drum followed by measured quantity of fine
aggregates and then cement. The first batch of concrete at the start of work on any day
shall have 10% extra quantity of cement. In case damp sand is used, only half of the
quantity of coarse aggregate shall be added followed by cement and sand. Finally balance
quantity of the coarse aggregate shall be added. The skip shall be raised and dry materials
shall be lowered into the drum. The dry materials shall be mixed for at least 1 minute or
ten turns of the drum, after which the correct quantity of water shall be added gradually
while the drum is in motion for ensuring even distribution of the dry material. The total
quantity of water for mixing shall be introduced before 25% of mixing time has elapsed
and the specified water cement ratio shall be strictly maintained. The complete contents
of the mixed concrete shall be emptied before recharging. When the mixer is closed down
for the day or at any time exceeding 20 minutes, the drum shall be flushed clean.
Mixing time: The materials shall be mixed for a period of not less than 2 minutes and until
a uniform color and consistency are obtained. The time shall be counted from the
moment all the materials have been put into the drum. Suitable admixtures may be added
during mixing in case temperature is very low.
16.34.7. Trial Mixes
The Employer/PMC may require trial mixes for concrete of grades M20 and M15 prepared
on site using the proposed plant, equipment and mixing methods. These mixes shall be
made in presence of the Employer/PMC. From each mix, six cubes shall be prepared and

cured as specified in relevant Indian Standard. The design of Concrete Mix shall be carried
out and conform to IS: 10262-2009.
When concrete mix has been approved, no variations shall be made in the proportions,
the source and type of materials i.e. cement and coarse & fine aggregates including the
size and grading of aggregates without the consent and written approval of the
Employer/PMC who may require further tests to be conducted before giving approval.
Approval by the Employer/PMC of a concrete mix shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility of achieving and maintaining the specified strength of concrete.
16.34.8. Compliance and Quality Control
Samples from fresh concrete shall be taken as specified in these specifications and IS: 456-
2000 to cast cubes of size 150 x 150 x 150 mm for testing for strength at 7 days and 28
days. All concrete of any given mix, poured between takings of two consecutive samples
shall be represented by the former sample. The cost of casting cubes for testing the
strength at 7 days and 28 days including the cost of concrete and all other incidental
charges such as curing and carriage to the approved testing laboratory shall be borne by
the Contractor within his quoted rates for concrete works. The testing fee for the cubes
shall also be borne by the contractor.
The contractor shall keep a complete record of concreting including the date and time of
placing the concrete in each portion of the work. The record shall be available for
inspection at any time by the Employer/PMC. The following information for testing shall
be recorded for each cube:
(a) Concrete Mix and Grade
(b) Slump
(c) Maximum water-cement ratio
(d) Date and time for casting cubes
(e) Location of concrete in structure
(f) Cube identification mark

(g) Date of testing
All cubes shall be clearly marked prior to leaving the site and no cube shall leave the site
unless documentation complying with the above has been supplied to the Employer/PMC.
If instructed by the Employer/PMC, the temperature of concrete samples shall be
determined.
Random sampling procedure shall be adopted to ensure that each concrete batch shall
have a reasonable chance of being tested, i.e. the sampling shall be spread over the entire
period of concreting and cover all mixing units.
In order to get a relatively quicker idea of the quality of concrete, the compressive
strength test on concrete cubes at 7 days shall be carried out in addition to compressive
strength at 28-days. In all cases, 28 days compressive strength specified shall alone be the
criterion for acceptance or rejection of concrete. 7 days and 28 days compressive strength
of concrete shall be not less than as given in table below:
TABLE-16.4
(COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE)
Grade of Compressive Strength of 150 Compressive Strength of 150 mm
Concrete mm Concrete Cubes at 7 days Concrete Cubes at 28 days
M 15 10.0 N/mm2 15.0 N/mm2
M 20 13.5 N/mm2 20.0 N/mm2
M 25 16.7 N/mm2 25.0 N/mm2
The acceptance criteria for concrete shall be as prescribed in IS: 456-2000.
16.34.9. Concreting
The Contractor shall provide at least fifty percent of all concreting equipment as standby
during any period of concreting.
Concreting shall commence only after the Employer/PMC has inspected the centering,
shuttering and reinforcement and has approved the same.

Shuttering shall be clean and free from all shavings, saw dust, pieces of wood, or other
foreign materials, and shall be treated as specified in these specifications and relevant
standards. Construction plant and materials required during the concreting work and for
curing shall be on site and fully prepared before concreting commences. All accessories
shall be installed and formwork for holes, chases etc. shall be provided as specified. Only
after all these preparations and other relevant requirements have been completed, shall
the Employer/PMC's approval to place concrete be given.
In case of concreting of slabs and beams, wooden planks or catwalks supported directly on
the centering by means of wooden locks or lugs shall be provided to convey the concrete
to the place of disposal without to walk over the reinforcement. In case of columns and
walls, the concreting shall be done without construction joints as far as possible. If
construction joints are unavoidable, these shall be got approved from Employer/PMC well
in advance of commencement of concreting. No construction joint shall be provided
without the approval of Employer/PMC. The concreting in the vertical direction shall be
restricted to one meter per hour. In deep trenches and footings, concrete shall be placed
through chutes or as directed by the Employer/PMC. In case of columns and walls, the
shuttering shall be so adjusted that the vertical drop of concrete is not more than 1.5
meters at a time.
The concrete shall be deposited in its final position in a manner to preclude segregation of
ingredients. During cold weather, the concreting shall not be done when the temperature
falls below 4.5 degrees Celsius as a rule. If it is deemed necessary to perform concreting
below 4.5 degrees Celsius, the approval from Employer/PMC shall be taken and
appropriate procedure for concreting as per relevant standard shall be adopted. Concrete
placed shall be protected against frost by suitable covering. Concrete damaged by frost
shall be removed and work redone. During the hot weather, precaution shall be taken to
ensure that the temperature of wet concrete does not exceed 38 degrees Celsius. No
concreting shall be carried out in heavy rain. The time between mixing and placing of
concrete shall not exceed 30 minutes so that the initial setting process is not interfered
with.

Concrete shall be compacted into a dense mass immediately after placing, by means of
mechanical vibrators designed for continuous operation. Hand compaction, if permitted in
very special circumstances, shall be done with the help of tamping rods so that concrete is
thoroughly compacted and completely worked around the reinforcement, embedded
fixtures and comers of the formwork. The layers of concrete shall be so placed that the
bottom layer does not finally set before the top layer is placed. The vibrators shall
maintain the whole of concrete under treatment in an adequate stage of agitation, such
that effective compaction is attained at a rate commensurate with the supply of concrete
from the mixers. The vibration shall continue during the whole period occupied by placing
of concrete, the vibrators being adjusted so that the center of vibrations approximates to
the center of the mass being placed at the time of compacting.
Concrete shall be judged to be properly compacted when the mortar fills the spaces
between the coarse aggregate and begins to cream up to form an even surface. When this
condition has been attained, the vibrator shall be stopped. In case both internal and
external vibrators are used, the internal vibrators shall first be withdrawn slowly after
which the external vibrators shall be stopped so that no loose pocket is left in the body of
the concrete. The specific instructions of the manufacturer of the particular type of
vibrator used shall be strictly complied with.
Shaking of reinforcement for the purpose of compaction shall not be permitted.

Compaction shall be completed before the initial setting starts, i.e. within 30 minutes of
addition of water to the dry mixture. Vibrators shall not be used to move the concrete
within the formwork. For items where the vibrators are not to be used, the Contractor
shall obtain written permission of the Employer/PMC before the start of the work.
The Contractor shall provide openings, mortises, chases, sleeves etc. and fix bolts, anchors
etc. in concrete as given in the approved construction drawings as work proceeds and
shall support embedded items against displacement. Items cast shall have all voids filled
with readily removable material to prevent concrete ingress.
The Employer/PMC shall have the right to reject any concrete which he considers to have

been inadequately mixed or in which the ingredients have segregated or which is no

longer capable of being effectively placed or compacted.
All receptacles used for the transport and placing of the concrete shall be kept clean and
shall be thoroughly washed out after stopping work and at the end of each shift.
16.34.10. Construction Joints
Concreting shall be carried out continuously up to the construction joints, the position and
details of which shall be as shown on the approved construction drawings or as directed
by the Employer/PMC.
Construction Joints shall be kept to a minimum and shall not be located in valleys. They
shall be kept at places where shear force is minimal and shall be straight and at right
angles to the direction of the main reinforcement. In case of columns, the joints shall be
horizontal and located at 100 to 150 mm below the bottom of the beam running into the
column head. The portion of the column between the construction joint level and the top
of the slab shall be concreted with the beams.
When concreting in slabs and beams is stopped on a vertical plane, an approved stop
board shall be placed with necessary slots for reinforcement bars or any other obstruction
to pass the bars freely without bending. The construction joint shall be keyed by providing
a triangular or trapezoidal fillet nailed on the stop board. Inclined or feather joints shall
not be permitted. Any concrete flowing through the joints of the stop board shall be
removed soon after the initial set.
When stopping concrete on a horizontal plane, a key shall be provided by inserting a

wedge. The surface shall be roughened and cleaned after the initial set.
When the work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened, such surface shall be
roughened. It shall then be swept clean and thoroughly wetted for 24 hours. For vertical
joints, neat cement slurry at the rate of2.75 kg of cement per square meter shall be
applied on the surface to make it dry. For horizontal joints, the surface shall be covered
with a layer of mortar about 10 to 15 mm thick composed of cement and sand in the same
ratio as the cement and sand in concrete mix. This layer of cement mortar shall be freshly
mixed and applied immediately before placing the concrete.
When the work has to be resumed on a surface which has not fully hardened, all laitance
shall be removed by scrubbing the wet surface with wire or bristle brushes, care being
taken to avoid dislodgment of coarse aggregates. The surface shall be thoroughly wetted
and all free water removed. The surface shall then be coated with neat cement slurry at
the rate of 2.75kg of cement per square meter. On this surface, a layer of concrete not
exceeding 150mm in thickness shall first be placed and shall be well rammed against old
work, particular attention being paid to comers and close spots; work thereafter shall
proceed in the normal way.
16.34.11. Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be provided as shown on the approved construction drawings.

Bitumen impregnated fiber board shall be provided at expansion Joints and sealed with
bitumen.
16.34.12. Curing
After the concrete has begun to harden i.e. about 1 to 2 hours after its laying, it shall be
protected from quick drying by covering it with moist gunny bags, sand or any other
material approved by the Employer/PMC. After 24 hours of laying of concrete, the surface
shall be cured by flooding with water of minimum 25mm depth, or by covering with wet
absorbent materials. The curing shall be done for a minimum period of 10 days. In case of
roof slabs, the top surface shall be finished even and smooth with wooden trowel, before
the concrete begins to set.
Over the foundation concrete, the masonry work may be started after 48 hours of its
laying but the curing of cement concrete shall be continued along with the masonry work
for minimum period of 14days.
Where cement concrete is used as sub-grade for flooring, the flooring may be commenced
before the curing period of sub-grade is over but the curing of Sub-grade shall be
continued along with the top layer of flooring for a minimum period of 14 days.

The water used for curing shall not produce any objectionable strains or unsightly deposit
on concrete surfaces. In special circumstances and locations, the curing by other means
such as sealing materials, insulating blankets etc. may be adopted with the specific prior
approval of the Employer/PMC.
16.35. CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
16.35.1. The tolerances within which concrete works shall be carried out are as summarized below:
TABLE-16.6
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
Construction Permissible Deviation (mm)
Size and shapes
Thickness of walls and slab + 6 mm
Sizes of Columns and beams + 6 mm
Dimensions of foundations + 50 mm
Variation from plumb (vertically up to 5 m + 12 mm

height)
Levels to slabs and beams + 10 mm
16.35.2. Unfinished floor slabs shall not show more than 6 .0 mm undulation when tested with 3 m
long true straight edge. The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the deviations of
the finished concrete structures within the limits given, and any rectification of work not
constructed within the tolerances set out shall be entirely at the expense of the
Contractor.
16.36. FORMWORK, SHUTTERING AND STAGING
16.36.1. Propping and Centering
Props used for centering shall be of steel, timber posts, ballies or any other material
approved by the Employer/PMC. In no case bellies shall be of diameter less than 100 mm

measured at mid length and 80 mm at thin end. Maximum permissible spacing of props
shall be 1.2 meters center to center. Ballies shall rest squarely on wooden sole plates of
40mm thickness and minimum bearing area of 0.1 square meter laid either on ground or
on 40x40 cm brick masonry pillars in mud mortar of height not exceeding 40 cm. Double
wedges shall further be provided between the sole plates and the wooden props so as to
facilitate tightening and easing of shuttering without jarring the concrete.
The details of form work stated above shall be applicable for spans upto 4.50 meters and
height upto 3.50 meters. In case any of these limits is exceeded, the form work shall be
properly designed for the self-weight, weight of reinforcement, weight of fresh concrete,
various live loads imposed during the construction process (such as workmen and
equipment) etc. Dumping of concrete, movement of construction equipment and action of
the wind may produce lateral forces which must be resisted by the form work to prevent
lateral failure for which suitable horizontal as well as diagonal bracing shall be provided.
The stresses in bending, buckling load of props, permissible deflection of shuttering shall
not exceed the permissible stresses of the materials. In case height of centering exceeds
3.50 meters, the props may be provided in multi-stages.
Before the concreting is started, the props and wedges shall be thoroughly checked to
ensure that these are intact and suitable action taken in case these are loose. While the
concreting is in progress, at least one carpenter shall be readily available at the site. The
carpenter shall keep a constant watch on the props and take immediate remedial
measures, as soon as any of these get loosened. Care shall be taken that props and
wedges do not get loose till shuttering is removed and concrete gains required strength
for supporting the self-load and imposed loads, if any.
16.36.2. Shuttering
The shuttering shall have a smooth and even surface and the joints shall not permit
leakage of cement slurry. In general, only shuttering made of steel angles and steel plates
or shuttering made of wooden frame and minimum 12mm thick laminated waterproof
plywood shall be used. All bolts and nuts shall be countersunk and well ground to provide

a smooth plane surface.
Where, on practical reasons of having a smooth surface finish, only wooden shuttering
shall be used, approval for using the same shall be obtained from the Employer/PMC
before starting the shuttering work. The timber used shall be well seasoned, free from
loose knots, projecting nails, splits or other defects that may mar the surface of the
concrete. It shall not be so dry as to absorb water from concrete and swell and bulge, nor
so green or wet as to shrink after erection. Species of timbers which are not affected
appreciably by its contact with water shall be used. Thickness of planks shall not be less
than 25mm. For exposed concrete surfaces, timber for shuttering shall be dressed on all
faces in contact with concrete. The chamfers, beveled edges and mouldings shall be made
in the formwork itself. Opening for fan clamps and other fittings connected with services
shall be provided in the shuttering as directed by the Employer/PMC.
As far as practicable, clamps shall be used to hold the forms together. Where use of nails
is unavoidable, minimum number of nails shall be used and these shall be left projecting
so that they can be easily withdrawn. Use of double head nails shall be preferred.
Shuttering shall also be provided for the sloping top faces of work and anchored to
prevent floatation where the slope exceeds 1 (V) in 2.5 (H).
16.36.3. Surface Treatment for Shuttering
The surfaces of shuttering that shall come in contact with concrete shall be coated with
soap solution or raw linseed oil of approved manufacture or any other approved material
(such as polythene sheets) to prevent adhesion of green concrete to form work. Soap
solution, for the purpose shall be prepared by dissolving yellow soap in water to get the
consistency of paint. Inside surfaces of forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before
application of any of the materials mentioned above. Release agents shall be applied
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall not be allowed to
come in contact with any reinforcement. .
The Contractor shall give the Employer/PMC due notice before placing any concrete in the
forms to permit him to inspect and accept the formwork as to its strength, alignment and

general fitness, but such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for
safety of workmen, machinery, materials and results obtained.
16.36.4. Camber
Suitable camber shall be provided in horizontal members of structures, especially in long

spans to counteract the effects of deflection. The form work shall be so assembled as to
provide for such camber. The camber for beams and slabs shall be 4 mm per meter (1 in
250) or as directed by the Employer/PMC so as to offset the subsequent deflection. For
cantilevers, the camber at free end shall be l/50th of the projected length or as directed
by the Employer/PMC.
16.36.5. Removal of Formwork
The form work shall be so removed as not to cause any damage to concrete due to shock
or vibration. In a slab and beam construction, sides of beam shall be stripped first, then
the underside of slab and lastly the underside of the beam. Form work must be so
designed that it can be striped in the following order:
(a) Shutters to vertical (non load bearing) vertical faces of column, beams etc.
(b) Shutters forming soffits to slabs, horizontal and inclined which carry only light load
such as bottom shutters of floor/roofs slabs, canopy etc.
(c) Soffit shutters carrying heavy load such as bottom shuttering of beams and girders.
The whole of the formwork shall be accordingly planned and a definite scheme of
operation shall be worked out. In no circumstances shall forms be struck until the
concrete reaches strength of at least twice the stress to which the concrete may be
subjected at the time of striking. Where possible the formwork shall be left longer as it
shall assist curing. Forms shall be eased carefully in order to prevent the load being
suddenly transferred to concrete.
The minimum period that shall elapse after the concrete has been laid, before easing and
removal of centering and shuttering is given in table below:

TABLE-16.5
STRIPPING PERIOD FOR FORMWORK
Sl. No. Parts of Structure Period for ordinary Portland cement

Sides of foundations,
1 48 hours
columns, beams
Underside of slabs upto 4.5
2 07 days
meters span
Underside of slabs of more
than 4.5 meters span and
3 14 days
underside of beams and
arches up to 6 meters span
Under sides of beams and
4 arches over 6 meter span and 21 days
up to 9 meters span
In case of cantilever slabs and beams, the centering shall remain till structures for counter
action or bearing down have been erected and have attained sufficient strength. Proper
precautions shall be taken to allow for the decrease in the rate of hardening and gaining of
strength that occur with all cements in cold weather. Work damaged through or careless
removal of forms shall be reconstructed.
The Contractor shall record the date upon which the concrete is placed in each part of the
work, and the date on which the formwork removed there from. The assessment of the
period elapsing between placing the concrete and removing the form work and
consequence arising there from shall be the Contractor's entire responsibility.
16.37. REINFORCEMENT
16.37.1. General
The Contractor shall furnish to the Employer/PMC the copies of the manufacturer's tests
certificates for the steel reinforcement to be supplied. If required by the Employer/PMC,

the Contractor shall submit samples to, and get the samples tested from a recognized
testing laboratory approved by the Employer/PMC and obtain & furnish the test
certificates.
All reinforcement steel bars shall be clean and free from corrosion, loose rust, mill scale,
paint, oil, grease, adhering earth, or any other material that may impair the bond between
the concrete and the reinforcement or that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or
may be detrimental to the quality of the concrete.
The Contractor shall ensure that cutting, bending and placing of reinforcement is checked
by a competent person. The Contractor shall notify the Employer/PMC well in advance
about portions of reinforcement work ready for inspection and shall keep a detailed record
of the planning and control of the reinforcement work.
16.37.2. Storage of Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be stored on properly constructed racks at least 200 mm above

ground level. The storage, cutting and bending of steel reinforcement shall be carried out
under cover on an approved, free draining platform. The method of storing shall be such
as to prevent contamination or damage by weather or accident. Steel shall be protected
from humidity when stored.
16.37.3. Cutting and Bending
Dirt, rust, concrete, scale, paint, oil, grease salt etc. shall be removed from the
reinforcement by sand blasting or other approved methods. Reinforcement shall be
subjected to a constant even load and not an impact load. Welding of reinforcement shall
not be allowed. Bars incorrectly bent shall be used only if the means used for
straightening and re-bending be such as not to damage the steel. No reinforcement shall
be bent when in position in the works without approval, whether or not is partially
embedded in hardened concrete.
Bar types, sizes and placement shall be as shown on the approved construction Drawings
and cutting and bending shall be carried out in accordance IS: 2502 - 1983.

16.37.4. Fixing Reinforcement
Reinforcement bars shall be placed in position as shown on the approved construction

drawings. The bars crossing one another shall be tied together at every intersection with
two strands of annealed steel wire 0.90 to 1.6 mm thickness twisted tight to make the
skeleton of the steel work rigid so that the reinforcement does not get displaced during
the placing of concrete. Overlapping of bars, where necessary, shall be done as per
specification or as shown on the approved construction drawings. over lapping bars shall
be bound together at intervals not exceeding twice the diameter of such bar, with two
strands of annealed steel wire of 0.90 mm to 1.6mm thickness twisted tight. The overlaps
shall be staggered for different bars and located at points along the span where neither
shear nor bending moment is maximum. Not more than 50% of bars shall be lapped at a
section. The reinforcement shall be fixed accurately in position so that the reinforcement
is in the correct position in relation to the formwork to give the specified concrete cover.
The reinforcement shall be securely fixed in position so that it is not displaced at the time
of placing of concrete due to movement of labour for placing and compaction of concrete
or any related operation.
Reinforcement shall be placed within the following tolerances:
 For effective depth 200 mm or less + 10 mm
 For effective depth more than 200 mm + 15 mm
The concrete cover to reinforcement shall in no case be reduced by more than one third
of specified cover or 5 mm whichever is less. Covers should be increased where water is
predominant. The following procedure shall be followed for maintaining the correct cover
to reinforcement:
(a) In case of beam and slab construction, precast cover blocks made of cement mortar
1:2 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand) of about 40 x 40 cm section and of thickness equal to
the specified cover shall be placed between the bars and shuttering at sufficiently
close spacing so as to secure and maintain the requisite concrete cover over
reinforcement.

(b) In case of cantilever beams and beams and slabs having reinforcement on two
opposite faces i.e. bottom and top faces, the vertical distance between the
horizontal bars shall be maintained by introducing chair spacers or support bars of
steel at 1.0 meter or at shorter spacing to avoid sagging.
(c) In case of beams, foundation footings or similar other structures which have been
provided reinforcement in two layers in the same direction, the spacing between
two layers of reinforcement shall be not less than the diameter of bigger bar or 5
mm more than the nominal sixe of coarse aggregates whichever is more. This
spacing shall be maintained by providing spacer bar of required diameter as to meet
the aforesaid requirements at spacing of not more than 1.0 meter.
(d) In case of columns, the vertical bars shall be kept in position by means of timber
templates with slots accurately cut in them, or with blocks of appropriate size made
of cement mortar 1 : 2 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand) suitably tied to the vertical
reinforcement of columns.
Site manufactured blocks shall be well compacted and water cured for a minimum of 14 days after
casting and shall have a 10 minute absorption of less than 3.2% by weight. Concrete spacers shall be
comparable in strength, durability and appearance to the surrounding concrete.
16.38. MASONRY WORK
16.38.1. Hollow Cement Concrete Block Masonry
16.38.1.1. General
(i) Material: Hollow Concrete Blocks shall be made of concrete of grade M-20 with
nominal size of coarse aggregates of 12.5mm. All materials of concrete and concrete
mix requirements shall be same as for item of concrete specified in these
specifications.
(ii) In case of hand moulded blocks where compaction is done manually,concrete mix of
damp earth consistency shall be used in order to enable de-moulding immediately
after casting. The consistency of the mix shall be such that it may whither when

compressed in the hand without free water being visible. Too little water causes the
mix to be friable, whilst too much water causes difficulty in the immediate withdrawal
of the mould.
(iii) In case of machine moulded blocks, the web marking on the units as they come from
the machine give a good indication as to whether the concrete of proper consistency
has been used. If traces of moisture come on the outside of squared mass of concrete,
it indicates unsuitable consistency.
16.38.1.2. Manufacture
In case of manual compaction, the mixture shall be placed into the mould in layers of
about 50 to 75 mm and each layer thoroughly tamped with suitable tampers until the
whole mould is filled up and stuck off level with a trowel. In the case of machine
compaction, the mould shall be filled up to a certain height above the mould, vibrated or
mechanically tamped and struck off level. After de-moulding, the blocks shall be protected
until they are sufficiently hardened to permit handling without damage.
16.38.1.3. Curing
The blocks shall be cured in a curing water tank for at least 28 days. The water in the
curing tank shall be changed at least every four days.
16.38.1.4. Drying
The blocks shall be dried in shade before being used on the work.
16.38.1.5. Physical requirement of blocks
The average crushing strength of blocks based on crushing strength of eight blocks shall be
not less than 50 kg/sq.cm of gross area. The lowest strength of any individual block shall
not be less than 80% .of the average strength of eight blocks.
The volume of cavity shall not exceed 50% of gross volume of block.The blocks shall be
true to shape. The actual size of the blocks for different thickness of masonry shall be as
given in table below:

TABLE-16.7
SIZE OF CONCRETE BLOCKS
Thickness of Size of Block

Masonry ( mm)
(mm) Length Breadth Height
100 390 100 190
200 390 200 190
The permissible dimensional tolerance shall be 1.5 mm for breadth and height and 3.0 mm
for length.
16.38.1.6. Laying of blocks
The blocks shall be laid by breaking joints in successive layers. Half or cut blocks shall not
be used except where necessary for breaking the joints in successive layers. Blocks in such
cases shall be cut to the required size and used near the ends of walls.
A layer of mortar of mix specified in the approved construction drawings shall be spread
on full width of suitable length of lower course keeping the mortar droppings in the
hollows of the blocks to the minimum possible. Each block shall be properly bedded and
set home by gentle tapping with handle of shovel or wooden mallet. The side face shall be
buttered with mortar before the next block is laid and pressed against it. On completion of
a course, the vertical joints shall be fully filled from the top with mortar.
All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical. The
vertical joints in alternate layer shall come directly one over the other. The walls shall be
truly plumb.
All the connected block work shall be carried up nearly at one level and no portion of the
work shall be left more than one meter below the rest of the work.
All item fixtures, pipes, outlets of water, hold fasts of door and windows etc. which are
required to be built in wall shall be embedded in cement mortar or cement concrete as

specified in their correct position as the work proceeds.
A set of tools comprising of wooden straight edges, mason's spirit level, square half meter
rule, line and pins string and plumb shall be kept on the site of work.
16.38.1.7. Joints
Blocks shall be so laid that all joints are fully filled with mortar. The thickness of joints shall
not exceed 10 mm. The face joint shall be raked to minimum, depth of 10 mm by raking
tool, daily during the process of work when the mortar is still green so as to provide
proper key for plaster. Where plastering is not required to be done, the joints shall be
struck flush and finished at the time of lying. The face of block work shall be cleaned the
very day that block work is laid and all mortar dropping removed.
16.38.1.8. Curing
Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering. Masonry shall be kept
constantly moist on all the faces for a minimum period of 10 (ten) days.
16.38.1.9. Scaffolding
Single scaffolding shall be allowed. The hole left in masonry work for supporting the
scaffolding shall be filled and made good before plastering.
16.38.2. Random Rubble Masonry
16.38.2.1. General
The stones for masonry shall be hard, sound and durable of a quarry approved by the
Employer/PMC before stones are used in the works. Stones shall be hammer dressed to
seem closed joint so that the stones when laid shall come into closed proximately. Stones
would be fairly equal and no stones shall be less than 150mm in size. Cement mortar shall
be of proportion 1:6 (1 cement: 6 coarse sand).The materials of mortar i.e. cement and
coarse sand shall be as specified for concrete work.
Through bond stones of one piece shall be provided, one for every 0.5 sq.m. of face and
shall be extended to the full thickness of wall. All stones shall be thoroughly wetted before
laying. The masonry shall be cured for a period of 10 days, and shall be protected from
sun, rain, frost and other weather effects.
16.38.2.2. Scaffolding
Single scaffolding having one set of vertical supports shall be allowed. The supports shall
be sound and strong, tied together by horizontal pieces. Over which the scaffolding planks
shall be fixed. The inner end of the horizontal scaffolding member may rest in a hole
provided in the masonry. Such holes, however, shall not be allowed in pillars less than one
meter in width of near the skew pack of arches. The holes left in masonry work for
supporting scaffolding shall be filled and made good with cement concrete 1:3:6 (1
cement:3 coarse sand: 6 coarse aggregates of20 mm nominal size).
16.38.2.3. Curing
Masonry work shall be kept constantly moist on all faces for a minimum period of 10 days.
16.38.2.4. Protection
Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering and the work shall also be
suitably protected from damage, mortar dropping and rain during construction.
16.38.3. Brick Masonry
16.38.3.1. Classification:
The brick masonry shall be classified according to the class designation of bricks used.
16.38.3.2. Mortar:
The proportion of mortar for brickwork of thickness 230 mm or more shall be 1 : 6 (1

Cement : 6 Coarse Sand) and for half brick walls, 1 : 4 (1 Cement : 4 Coarse Sand) and
conforming to relevant Indian standards.
16.38.3.3. Soaking of Bricks:
Bricks shall be soaked in water before use for a period just sufficient to penetrate the
whole depth of the brick. Alternatively, the bricks may be adequately soaked in stacks by
profusely spraying with clean water at regular intervals for a period not less than six hours.
The brick required for the masonry work using mud mortar shall not be soaked. When the

bricks are soaked, they shall be removed from the tank sufficiently early so as to allow
them to be skin dry. Such soaked bricks shall be stacked on a clean place where they are
not again spoiled by dirt, earth etc.
16.38.4. Laying
Bricks shall be laid in English Bond unless specified otherwise. For brick work in half brick
wall, the bricks shall be laid in stretcher bond. Half or cut bricks shall not be used except as
a closer or where necessary to complete the bond. Closers in such cases, shall be cut to
the required size and used near the ends of the wall. Header bond shall be used preferably
in all courses in curved plan for ensuring better alignment.
All loose materials, dirt and set lumps of mortar which may be lying over the surface on
which brick work is to be freshly started, shall be removed with a wire brush and surface
wetted. Bricks shall be laid on full bed of mortar. Each brick shall be properly bedded and
set home by gentle tapping with handle of shovel or wooden mallet. The side face shall be
buttered with mortar before the next brick is laid and pressed against it. On completion of
a course, joints shall be fully filled and packed with mortar such that no hollow space is
left between the joints.
The walls shall be taken up truly in plumb or true to the required batter where specified.
All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints shall be truly vertical. Vertical
joints in the alternate course shall come directly one over the other. Quonin, Jambs and
other angles shall be properly aligned within following maximum permissible tolerances.
(a) Deviation from vertical within a storey shall not exceed 6.0 mm per 3.0 m height.
(b) Deviation in vertically in total height of any wall of building more than one storey
in height shall not exceed 12.5mm.
(c) Deviation from position shown on plan of any brick work shall not exceed 6.0 mm.
(d) Relative displacements between loads bearing wall in adjacent storey intended to
be vertical alignments shall not exceed 6.0 mm.
A set of tools comprising of wooden straight edge, Masonic spirit levels, square, 1.0 meter

rule line and plumb shall be kept on the site of work for every 2 masons for proper check
during the progress of work.
All quoins shall be accurately constructed and the height of brick courses shall be kept
uniform. This shall be checked using graduated wooden straight edge or storey rod
indicating height of each course including thickness of joints. The position of damp proof
course, window sills, bottom of lintels, top of the wall etc. along the height of the wall
shall be marked on the graduated straight edge or Storey rod.
No part of the wall during its construction shall rise more than one meter above the
general construction level. Parts of wall left at different levels shall be racked back at an
angle of 450 or less with the horizontal. Tooting shall not be permitted as an alternative to
racking back. For half brick partition to be keyed into main walls, indents shall be left in
the main walls.
All pipes fittings and specials, spouts, hold fasts and other fixtures which are required to
be built into the walls shall be embedded, as specified in the approved construction
drawings, in their correct position as the work proceeds unless otherwise directed by the
Employer/PMC.
Top courses of all plinths, parapets, steps and top of walls below floor and roof slabs shall
be laid with brick on edge, unless specified otherwise. Brick on edge laid in the top courses
at corner of walls shall be properly radiated and keyed into position to form cut (maru)
corners. Where bricks cannot be cut to the required shape to form cut (maru) corners,
cement concrete of proportion 1:2:4 (1 cement:2 coarse sand: 4 coarse aggregates of 20
mm normal size) equal to thickness of course shall be provided in lieu of cut bricks.
In case of walls of one brick thick and under, one face shall be kept even and in proper
plane, while the other face may be slightly rough. In case of walls more than one brick
thick, both the faces shall be kept even and in proper plan.
To facilitate taking service lines later without excessive cutting of completed work, pipe
sleeves shall be provided, where specified or directed by Employer/PMC, while raising the
brick work. Such sleeves in external walls shall be sloped down outward so as to avoid

passage of water inside.
Top of the brick work in coping and sills in external walls shall be slightly tilted. Where
brick coping and sills are projecting beyond the face of the wall, drip course/throating
shall be provided.
Care shall be taken during construction that edges of jambs, sills and projections are not
damaged. In case of rain, new built works shall be covered with gunny bags or tarpaulin so
as to prevent the mortar from being washed away. Damage, if any, shall be made good to
the satisfaction of the Employer/PMC.
Vertical reinforcement in the form of bars (high strength deformed bars), considered
necessary at the corners and junction of walls and jamb opening doors, windows etc, shall
be encased with cement mortar not leaner than 1: 3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) or cement
concrete of grade not leaner than M-15. The reinforcement shall be suitably tied, properly
embedded in the foundation and at roof level. The diameter of bars shall not be less than
8mm and concrete proportion shall be not leaner than 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4
coarse aggregates of 20mm nominal size).
In retaining walls and the like, where water is likely to accumulate, weep holes, 50 to
75mm square size, shall be provided at a spacing of 2.0 m vertically and horizontally unless
otherwise specified. The lowest weep hole shall be at about 300 mm above the ground
level. All weep holes shall be surrounded by loose stones and shall have sufficient fall to
drain out the water quickly.
Work of cutting chases, wherever required to be made in the walls for housing G.I. pipe, CI
pipe or any other fixtures, shall be carried out in various locations as per following
guidelines:
(a) Cutting of chases in load bearing walls of one brick or more thick
(i) As far as possible services shall be planned with the help of vertical chases.
Horizontal chases shall be avoided.
(ii) The depth of vertical chases and horizontal chases shall not exceed one

third and one sixth of the thickness of the masonry respectively.
(iii) When narrow stretches of masonry such as between doors and windows,
cannot be avoided, they shall not be pierced with openings for soil pipes or
waste pipes or timber joints etc. Where there is a possibility of load
concentration as narrow lengths of walls, they shall be checked for stresses
and high strength bricks in richer mortar or concrete walls provided, if
required.
(iv) Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2.0 m in any stretch of a wall. These
shall be kept away from bearings of beams and lintels. If unavoidable,
stresses in the affected area shall be checked and kept within permissible
limits.
(v) Masonry directly above, if wider than 300 mm in horizontal dimension,

shall be supported on lintel. Holes in masonry may be provided upto 300
mm in width and 300 mm in height without any lintel. In the case of circular
holes in the masonry, no lintel needs to be provided for holes upto 400 mm
diameter.
(b) Cutting of chases in half brick load bearing walls
(i) No chase shall be permitted in half brick load bearing walls and as such no
recessed conduits and concealed pipes shall be provided with half brick thick
load bearing walls.
(c) Cutting of chases in half brick non load bearing walls
(i) Services shall be planned with the help of vertical chases. Horizontal chases
shall be provided only when unavoidable.
16.38.5. Joints
The thickness of all types of joints including brick wall joints and cross joints shall be as
specified in approved construction drawings or directed by Employer/PMC. However, the
thickness of joints shall be not more than 10 mm. The deviation from the specified

thickness of all joints shall not exceed one fifth of specified thickness.
16.38.6. Finishing of Joints
The face of brick work shall be finished flush or by pointing as specified in approved
construction drawings or directed by Employer/PMC. In flush finishing, either the face
joints of the mortar shall be worked out while still green to give a finished surface flush
with the face of the brick (in case no plaster on wall is required) or the joints shall be
squarely raked out to a depth of about 10 mm while the mortar is still green for
subsequent plastering (in case, plaster on wall is required to be provided). The faces of
brick work shall be cleaned with wire brush so as to remove any splashes of mortar during
the course of raising the brick work. In pointing, the joints shall be squarely raked out to a
depth of 15 mm while the mortar is still green and raked joints shall be brushed to remove
dust and loose particles and well wetted, and shall be later refilled with mortar to give
ruled finish. Some such finishes are ‘flush’, ‘weathered’, ruled etc.
16.38.7. Curing:
The brick work shall be constantly kept moist on all faces for a minimum period of seven
days. Brick work done during the day shall be suitably marked indicating the data on which
the work is done so as to keep a watch on the curing period.
16.39. PLASTERING
16.39.1. General
Cement, water and sand to be used in plaster work shall conform to relevant Indian
Standards and specifications/guidelines of Department of Urban Development & Building
Construction, Government of Nepal. Plastering shall be started from the top and worked
down towards the floor. All put log holes shall be properly filled in advance of the
plastering as the scaffolding is taken down. To ensure even thickness and a true surface
plaster about 15x15 cm patches shall be first applied, horizontally &vertically, at not more
than 2 meters intervals over the entire surface to serve as gauges. The surface of these
gauge areas shall be truly in the plane of the finished plaster surface. The mortar shall be
applied to uniform surface which shall be brought to true surface by working a wooden
straight edge reaching across the gauges with small upward and sideways movements at a
time. Finally the surface shall be finished off true with trowel or wooden float as a smooth
or a sandy granular texture as required. Excessive toweling or over working the float shall
be avoided.
All corners arises angles and junctions shall be truly vertical or horizontal as case may be
and shall be carefully finished. Rounding or chamfering of corners, junction etc. wherever
required shall be done without any extra payment. Such rounding or chamfering shall be
carried out with proper templates to the size required.
While suspending work at the end of the day, the plaster shall be left out clean to line
both horizontally and vertically. When recommencing the plastering, the edge of the old
work shall be scraped cleaned and wetted with cement slurry before plaster is applied to
the adjacent areas to enable the two to properly joint together. Plastering work shall be
closed at the end of the day on the body of the wall and not nearer than 15 cm to any
corners or arises it shall not be closed on the body of the features such as plasters, bands
and copings, as these invariable lead to leakage. No portion of the surface shall be left out
initially to be patched up later on.
The plastering and finishing shall be completed within half an hour of adding water to the
dry mortar.
16.39.2. Finish
The plaster shall be finished to a true and plumb surface and to the proper degree of
smoothness as required. The work shall be tested frequently as the work precedes with a
true straight edge not less than 2.5 m long and with plumb bobs. All horizontal lines and
surfaces shall be tested with a level and all jambs and corners with a plumb bob as the
work proceeds.
16.39.3. Precaution
Any cracks which appear in the surface, or any portion which sound hollow when tapped,
or are found to be soft or otherwise defective, shall be cut out in rectangular shape and
redone as directed by Employer/PMC.
16.39.4. Thickness
The thickness of the plaster specified shall be measured exclusive of the thickness of key.
The average thickness of the plaster shall not be less than the specified thickness and the
minimum thickness over any portion of the surface shall not be less than specified
thickness by more than 3 mm. Where the specified thickness of plaster is 20 mm or more,
it shall be applied in two stages. In the cases of brick work the minimum thickness over the
surface shall not be less than 12 mm on even face and 15 mm on rough face of wall.
16.39.5. Curing
Curing shall be started as soon as the plaster hardened sufficiently so as not to be

damaged when watered. The plaster shall be kept wet for a period of at least 7 days and
during this period, it shall be suitably protected from all damages by the contractor at his
own expense by such means as the Employer/PMC may approve or direct. The dates on
which the plastering is done shall be legibly marked on the various sections plastered so
that curing for the specified period thereafter can be watched.
16.39.6. Scaffolding
For all exposed brick work or tile work, double scaffolding having two sets of vertical
supports shall be provided. The supports shall be sound and strong tied together with
horizontal pieces over which scaffolding planks shall be fixed. For all other masonry in
buildings, single scaffolding shall be permitted. In such cases, the inner end of the
horizontal scaffolding pole shall rest in a hole provided only in the header course for the
purpose. Only one header for each pole shall be left out. Such holes for scaffolding
however, shall not be allowed in pillars/ Columns less than 1.0 m in width, or immediately
near the skew backs of arches. The hole left in masonry works for scaffolding purpose shall
be filled and made good before plastering.
16.40. WATER PROOFING COMPOUND
16.40.1. General
The water proofing compound shall conform to relevant Indian Standards/equivalent

International Standards and shall be mixed in concrete and cement mortar in the
proportion and in the way as recommended by the manufacturer.
16.41. FLOORING, SKIRTING AND DADO WORKS
Unless otherwise shown on the approved construction drawings or specified, the

materials, workmanship, etc shall - conform to relevant Indian Standards and
16.41.1.1. Vitrified Tile Flooring And Dado/ Skirting
16.41.1.2. Materials
Vitrified Tiles: The tiles shall be vitrified, glazed and anti-skidding type conforming to
IS:15622 and shall be of approved make, color and design. They shall be flat and true to
shape and free from cracks, blisters, welts, crawling, crazing spots, chipped edges, corners
or other imperfections detracting from their appearance. The glazing shall be of uniform
shade.
The tiles shall be of square or rectangular of nominal sizes such as 300x300 mm, 300x600
mm, 600x600 mm or any other size as directed by the Employer/PMC.
The thickness of the tiles shall not be less than 10 mm for floor tiles and 6 mm for wall
tiles.
Samples of tiles shall be got approved by the Employer/PMC before use in the work. Top
surface of tile shall be glossy or matt as specified.
16.41.1.3. Preparation of Surface & Laying
Sub grade concrete or R.C.C slab or side brick wall/ or plastered surfaces on which tiles are
to be laid shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. Until and unless the surface is approved
by the Employer/PMC, the flooring shall not be started. The bedding for the tile shall be of
Cement Mortar 1:3 (1 Cement : 3 Coarse Sand) and shall be applied and allowed to
harden. The mortar shall be roughened with wire brushes or by scratching diagonal lines
1.5mm deep at 7.5mm centre both ways. The back of tiles shall be buttered with a coat of

grey cement slurry paste and edges with white cement slurry and set in the bedding
mortar. The tiles shall be tapped gently with wooden mallet and corrected to proper
planes and lines. The tile shall be butt jointed in pattern and joints shall be as fine as
possible. The top of skirting/ dado shall be truly horizontal and joints truly vertical. After a
period of curing of 7 days minimum, the tiles shall be cleaned and shall not sound hollow
when tapped. The surface during laying shall be checked with a straight edge 2 m long.
Where full size tiles cannot be fixed, these shall be cut/sawn to the required size & their
edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. Tiles shall enter not less than
10mm under side skirting/dado. After the tiles have been laid, surplus cement grout shall
be cleaned off.
Before laying the cement mortar bedding the concrete floor surface shall be thoroughly
hacked, cleaned of all mortar scales, concrete lumps etc. brushed, washed with water to
remove mud, dirt etc. from the surface and shall be thoroughly wetted. Until and unless
the surface is approved by the Employer/PMC, the flooring shall not be started. A bedding
of cement mortar (1:4 of specified thickness or more if required to make up the level or
grade) shall be laid evenly and to the required slopes as directed. The terrazzo tiles shall
then be laid immediately after laying the mortar. All tiles shall be truly and evenly set in a
thick slurry of cement of honey like consistency applied to the sides and bottom and over
the prepared base at the rate of 4.4 kg/sq.m. over such an area would accommodate
about 20 tiles. The tiles shall then be tamped down with wooden mallet until they are
properly bedded and exactly in true plane and line, with the adjacent tiles. Care shall be
taken to ensure that the tiles are solidly bedded without voids and air pockets. All tiles
shall be extended upto the un-plastered surfaces of masonry walls/ RCC columns/ RCC
walls. Wherever full tiles / half tiles cannot be fixed, tiles shall be cut /sawn from full tile to
the required size and their edges rubbed smooth to ensure a straight and true joint. The
tiles shall be close jointed in matching cement slurry and the cement slurry oozing out
through the thin joints shall be immediately wiped clean. The joints between the tiles shall
not be greater than 1.5 mm. and shall be kept in straight lines or to suit the required
pattern. The junction between wall plaster and tile work shall be finished neatly and

without any waviness. All tiles shall be laid as to have continuous lines from various rooms
to the passage. No change of lines shall be permitted at junction between rooms and
passage. The joints shall be fine and made neatly indistinguishable by grouting of the
joints @ 2.20 kg/sq.m. of grey cement slurry mixed with suitable colouring pigments to
match with the tiles. People should not be allowed to walk over the freshly laid tiles.
Adjustment of levels in thickness of mortar bedding due to different type of flooring if any,
shall be done by the contractor within a reasonable limit/distance as directed by the
Engineer-in-Charge without any extra cost to the Department.
16.41.1.4. Mortar and Bedding:
Cement mortar for bedding shall be of proportion specified in items schedule and shall
conform to the specification for materials, preparations etc. as specified under cement
mortar. The amount of water added while preparing mortar shall be the minimum
necessary to give sufficient plasticity for laying. Care shall be taken in preparation of the
mortar to ensure that there are no hard lumps that would interfere with the evenness of
bedding of the tiles. Before spreading the mortar bed the base shall be cleaned of all dirt,
scum or laitance and loose materials and well wetted without forming any pools of water
on the surface. The mortar of specified proportion and thickness shall then be even and
smoothly spread over the base by use of screed battens to proper level or slope. Cement
mortar of thickness and proportion as specified in the schedule for dado shall be applied
to the wall after preparing the wall surface as specified under cement plaster 20mm. thick
and brought to correct line and plumb and the surface left rough to receive the tiles.
16.41.1.5. Fixing of Tiles for Flooring:
The tiles before laying shall be soaked in water for atleast 2 hours. The tiles shall be laid on
the bedding mortar when it is still plastic but has become sufficiently stiff to offer a fairly
firm cushion for the tiles. Tiles which are fixed on the flooring adjoining the wall shall be so
arranged that the surface on the round edge tiles shall correspond to the skirting or dado.
Neat cement mortar grout 1:2, using fine sand (Table-III, Zone-IV and as per IS:383 ) of
honey like consistency shall be spread over the bedding mortar just to cover as much area

as can be tiled within half an hour. The edges of the tiles shall be smeared with neat white
cement slurry and fixed in this grout one after the other, each tile being well pressed and
gently tapped with a wooden mallet till it is properly bedded and in level with the
adjoining tiles. There shall be no hollows in bed or joints. The joints shall be kept as close
as possible and in straight line. The surface of the flooring during laying shall be frequently
checked with a straight edge about 2 meter long to obtain a true surface with the required
slope. in width. The joint shall be grouted with white/matching colour cement slurry. After
fixing the tiles, finally in an even plane or slope, the flooring shall be covered with wet
sand and allowed undisturbed for 14days.
16.41.1.6. Fixing Tiles for Dado & Skirting
The dado/skirting work shall be done only after fixing the tiles on the floor. The approved
white glazed tiles before laying shall be soaked in water for at least 2 hours. Tiles shall be
fixed when the cushioning mortar is still plastic and before it gets very stiff. The back of
the tile shall be covered with this layer of cement mortar 1:2 using fine sand (Table-III,
Zone-IV, IS: 383) and the edge of the tile smeared with neat white cement slurry. The tile
shall then be pressed in the mortar and gently tapped against the wall with a wooden
mallet. The fixing shall be done from bottom of wall upwards without any hollows in the
bed of joints. Each tile shall be as close as possible to one adjoining. The tiles shall be
jointed with white cement slurry. Any thickness difference in the thickness of the tiles
shall be arranged out in cushioning mortar so that all tiles faces are in one vertical plane.
The joints between the tiles shall not exceed 1.00 mm in width and they shall be uniform.
While fixing tiles in dado work, care shall be taken to break the joints vertically. The top of
the dado shall be touched up neatly with the rest of the plaster above. After fixing the
dado/skirting etc., they shall be kept continuously wet for 7 days. If doors, windows or
other openings are located within the dado area, the corners, sills, jambs etc. shall be
provided with true right angles without any specials. The contractor will not be entitled to
any extra claims on this account for cutting of tiles if required.
Cleaning: After the tiles have been laid in a room or the day’s fixing work is completed, the

surplus cement grout that may have come out of the joints shall be cleaned off before it
sets. After the complete curing, the dado or skirting over shall be washed thoroughly
clean. In the case of flooring, once the floor has set, the floor shall be carefully washed
clean and dried. When dry, the floor shall be covered with oil free dry saw dust. It shall be
removed only after completion of the construction work and just before the floor is used.
16.41.2. Terrazzo (Marble Chips) Flooring
16.41.2.1. General
50 mm thick marble chips flooring grinded and polished to granolithic finish shall be
provided in buildings wherever specified in the approved construction drawings. It shall
consists of a 35 mm thick cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 Cement: 2 sand: 4 Coarse aggregates
of 12.5 mm nominal size) under layer and a 15 mm thick top layer with 6 mm thick white,
black or approved colour marble chips of nominal size 1.5 mm laid in white cement in
proportion 1:2 (1 White Cement: 2 marbles chips).The thickness of the top layer shall not
be less than that specified.
16.41.2.2. Under Layer
Cement concrete of specified mix shall be used and the concrete shall conform to the
specification given under the ‘Concreting’. The panels shall be of uniform size not
exceeding 2.0sq.m.area and 2.0 m in length in inside situation. In exposed situations, the
length of any side of the panel shall not be more than 1.25 meters.
Cement slurry @ 2.75 kg. per sq. m. shall be applied before laying of layer over the cement
concrete / R.C.C. surface.
16.41.2.3. Glass and PVC Strips:
Glass or PVC strips of 4.0 mm thickness and 40 mm wide shall be provided in joints of
terrazzo floors. The strips shall be fixed over under layer in a pattern shown in the
construction drawings or as directed by Employer/PMC with their top at proper level.
16.41.2.4. Top Layer
Marbles: The mix for terrazzo topping shall consist of white cement with or without

pigment, marble powder, marble chips and water. The white cement and marble powder
shall be mixed in the proportion of 3 part marble powder by weight. For every part of
cement marble powder mix, the proportion of marble chips by volume shall be as follows:
TABLE-16.8
PROPORTION OF MARBLE CHIPS
Size of Marble Chips Proportion of aggregates to binder mix

For grade 0 and 1 1.75 parts
Mixed size aggregate 1.50 parts
The marbles chips shall be hard, sound, dense and homogeneous in structure with
crystalline and coarse grains. They shall be uniform in colour and free from stains, cracks
decay and weathering.
Before starting the work, the contractor shall get the samples of marble chips approved by
the Employer/PMC. The cement to be used shall be white cement with pigment of
approved colour and quality in the specified ratio or in the ratio to get the required shade
ordered by the Employer/PMC. Pigment where specified, shall be mixed dry thoroughly
with the cement and marble powder and marble chips added and mixed as specified
above. The full quantity of dry mixture of mortar required for a room shall be prepared in
a lot in order to ensure a uniform colour. The mixture shall be stored in a dry place and
well covered and protected from moisture. The dry mortar shall be mixed with water in
the usual way as and when required. The mixed mortar shall be homogeneous and stiff
and contain just sufficient water to make it workable.
The terrazzo topping shall be laid while the under layer is still plastic, but has hardened
sufficiently to prevent cement from rising to the surface. This is normally achieved
between 18 to 24 hours after the under layer has been laid. A cement slurry preferably of
the same colour as the topping shall be applied on the surface immediately before laying

of terrazzo topping is commenced. The terrazzo topping shall be laid to a uniform

thickness slightly more than that specified in order to get the specified finished thickness
after rubbing. The surface of the top layer shall be troweled over, pressed and brought
true to required level by a straight edge and steel floats in such a manner that the
maximum amount of marble chips come up and are spread uniformly over the surface.
16.41.2.5. Curing, Polishing and Finishing
Curing shall be done by suitable means, such as laying moist jute bags or pounding water.
Polishing shall be done by machine. About 36 hours after laying the top layer, it shall be
watered and ground evenly with machine fitted with special rapid cutting grit block
(Carborandum stone) of coarse grade (No.60) till the marble chips are evenly exposed and
the floor is smooth. After the first grinding, the surface shall be thoroughly washed to
remove all grinding mud and covered with a grout of white cement in same mix and
proportion as the topping in order to fill any pin holes that appear. The surface shall be
allowed to cure for 5 to 7 days and then ground with machine fitted with fine grit blocks
(No. 120).The surface is cleaned and repaired as before and allowed to cure again for 3 to
5 days. Finally the third grinding shall be done with machine fitted with fine grade grit
blocks (No. 320) to get even and smooth surface without pin holes. The finished surface
should show the marble chips evenly exposed.
Where use of machine for polishing is not feasible or possible, the rubbing and polishing
shall be done by hand held machine or by hand, in the same manner as specified for
machine polishing except that carborundun stone of coarse grade (No. 60) shall be used
for the 1strubbing, stone of medium grade (No. 80) for second rubbing and stone of fine
grade (No. 120) for final rubbing and polishing.
After the final polish either by machine or by hand, the oxalic acid shall be dusted over the
surface @ 33 gm per square meter sprinkled with water and rubbed, hard with a namdah
block (pad of woolen rugs). The following day the floor shall be wiped with a moist rug and
dried with a soft cloth and finished clean.

16.41.2.6. Precautions
Terrazzo flooring in lavatories and bathrooms, if specified in approved construction

drawings, shall be laid after fixing of water closet and squatting pans and floor traps. Traps
shall be plugged, while laying the floor and opened after the floors are cured and cleaned.
Any damage done to W.Cs, Squatting pans and floor traps during the execution of work
shall be made good. The floor shall be protected from damage during the execution of
work.
16.41.3. Marble Chips Skirting
16.41.3.1. General
Marble chips skirting of 150 mm height shall be provided in areas where terrazzo flooring
has been provided, which shall be rubbed and polished to granolithic finish. The under
layer shall be 12 mm thick plaster in cement mortar 1:3 ( 1 Cement: 3 Sand) and top layer
15 mm thick with marble chips of approved colours and of 4 mm nominal size laid in white
cement with matching pigment (to floor) in proportion 1:2 (1 White Cement:2 marble
chips).
16.41.3.2. Preparation of surface
The joints shall be raked to a depth of at least 15 mm in masonry walls, while the masonry
is being laid. In case of concrete walls, the surface shall be roughened by hacking. The
surface shall be cleaned thoroughly washed with water and kept wet for 12 hours before
skirting work is commenced. The cement slurry shall be applied on cleaned surface just
before laying the undercoat for skirting.
16.41.3.3. Application
Skirting with specified mortar and to specified thickness shall be laid immediately after the
surface is prepared. The joints in skirting shall be finished smooth and true, with top truly
horizontal and joints truly vertical except where otherwise indicated.
16.41.3.4. Curing
Curing shall be commenced on the next day of plastering when the plaster has hardened

sufficiently. It shall be continued for a minimum period of 7 days except that the under
coats shall be finished rough with a scratching tool to form base for the top coat.
16.41.4. Acid and Alkali Resistant Tiles Flooring
16.41.4.1. Manufacture and Finish
The tiles shall be of vitreous ware and free from deleterious substances. The iron oxide
content allowable in the raw material shall not exceed two percent. The tiles shall be
vitrified at the temperature of 11000 C and above and shall be kept unglazed. The finished,
tile, when fractured shall appear fine grained in texture, dense and homogenous. The tiles
shall be sound, true to shape, flat and free from flows and manufacturing defects affecting
their utility. The tiles shall be of required color.
The tiles shall be conforming to IS:4457. The tiles shall be tested for water absorption,
compressive strength, acid resistance etc. as per IS:4457. Sampling procedure for
acceptance tests and criteria for conformity shall be as per IS:4457.
16.41.4.2. Dimensions and Tolerances
Ceramic unglazed vitreous acid-resistant tiles shall be of sizes 100x100 mm (or 98.5 X 98.5
mm), 150x150 mm (or 148.5 X 148.5 mm) and 200x200 mm (or 198.5 X 198.5 mm) as per
approval of Employer/PMC. The thickness of tiles to be used for flooring shall not be less
than 15 mm and that for Dado, not less than 10 mm. The depth of the grooves on the
underside of the tile shall not exceed 3 mm. Tolerance on length, breadth and thickness of
tiles shall be as specified in IS:4457.
16.41.4.3. Shape
The tiles shall be square shape. Half tiles, rectangular in shape, shall also be available. Half
tiles for use with full tiles shall have dimensions which shall be such as to make two half
tiles, when joined together, match with the dimension of full tile. The shape of tiles other
than square shall be used only after approval of Employer/PMC. Tiles shall be checked for
squareness and warp as per IS: 4457.

16.41.4.4. Loss in Abrasion
The maximum percentage of loss in abrasion of the ceramic unglazed vitreous acid
resistant tiles determined in accordance with the procedure laid down in IS:1237 shall be
as mentioned in IS:4457.
16.41.4.5. Performance Requirements
The tiles when tested in accordance with method given in IS:4457 shall conform to be
requirement specified therein.
16.41.4.6. Marking
Tiles shall be legibly marked on the back with the name of the manufacturer or his trade
mark, batch number and year of manufacture. Each tile may also be marked with the ISI
certification mark.
16.41.5. Ironite Flooring
16.41.5.1. General
To withstand heavy wear and tear, concrete flooring with metallic concrete hardening
compound such as Ironite/ hardonate shall be laid as wearing layer in specified areas. It
shall consist of 50 mm thick cement concrete (M-15 grade) under layer and 15 mm thick
topping layer with metal hardener.
16.41.5.2. Metallic Concrete Hardening Compound
The metallic compound shall be Ironite/ Hardonate of approved quality consisting of

uniformly graded iron particles, free from non-ferrous metal particles, oil, grease and
soluble alkaline compound.
16.41.5.3. Cement Concrete Under Layer
Materials: The specifications for materials, grading, mixing shall generally conform to their
relevant specifications described under the item of ‘Concrete’. The nominal size of coarse
aggregate shall be 10 mm. The fine aggregate shall consist of properly graded sand.
Concrete shall be mixed by machine and hand mixing shall not be allowed.

Preparation of Base: The base concrete surface shall be thoroughly chipped to remove
laitance, caked mortar, loose sand, dirt etc, cleaned with wire brush and washed clean and
watered until no more water is absorbed. Where the base concrete has hardened so much
that roughening the surface by wire brushes is not possible, the same shall be roughened
by chipping or hacking at close intervals. The surface shall be soaked with water for at
least 12 hours and surface water removed and dried before laying the concrete under
layer. Before laying the concrete, cement slurry at 2.75 kg/ sq.m. of surface shall be
applied for better bond.
The joints in the floor finish shall extend through the borders and skirting/dado. The
border shall have mitred joints at the corners of the room.
Mixing: The concrete of under layer shall be of mix of one part of cement, two parts of
fine aggregates and 4 parts of well graded coarse aggregates of 10 mm nominal size. The
ingredients shall be thoroughly mixed with just sufficient water to the required plasticity,
having water cement ratio of not more than 0.4.
Laying: The free water on the surface of the base shall be removed and a coat of cement
slurry to the consistency of thick cream shall be applied on the concrete surface. On this
fresh grouted base, the prepared cement concrete shall be spread evenly and laid
immediately after mixing and levelled carefully. Immediately after laying the concrete, the
surface shall be inspected for high or low spots and any needed correction made up by
adding or removing the concrete and whole surface is again levelled. The concrete shall be
compacted and brought to the specified levels by means of a heavy straight edge resting
on the side forms and down ahead with a sawing motion in combination with a series of
lifts and drops alternatively with small lateral shifts, either mechanically or manually as
directed by the Employer/PMC. When the layer is made even, the surface shall be
completed by ramming or beating and then screed to a uniform line and level. Before the
initial set commences, the surface shall be trowelled to smooth and even surface free
from defects and blemishes and tested with straight edges.

Finishing the Surface: After the concrete has been thoroughly compacted and when most
of the surface water has disappeared, the surface shall be given broom finish with an
approved type of brass or M.S. fiber broom. The broom shall be pulled gently over the
surface from edge to edge in such a manner that corrugation shall be uniform in width and
depth, the depth shall be not more than 1.5 mm. Brooming shall be done when the
concrete is in such a condition that the surface shall not be torn or unduly roughened by
the operation. Coarse or long bristles which cause irregularities or deep corrugation shall
be trimmed out. Brooms which are worn or otherwise unsatisfactory shall be discarded.
The top surface shall be roughened with brushes while the concrete is still green and the
form shall be kept projecting up 12 mm over the concrete surfaces to receive the metallic
hardening compound topping.
16.41.5.4. Metallic Concrete Hardener Topping
This shall consist of 15 mm thick layer of mix 1:2 (1 part of cement mixed with hardener: 2
parts of stone aggregate of 6 mm nominal size by volume). The metallic concrete hardener
compound being mixed with cement in the ratio of 1:4 (1 metallic concrete hardener: 4
cement used by weight) or as specified by the manufacturer.
Concrete hardener shall be dry mixed thoroughly with cement on a clean dry
concrete/metal platform. This dry mixture shall then mixed with stone aggregate of 6mm
nominal size or as otherwise specified in the ratio of 1:2 (1 cement mixed with hardener: 2
stone aggregate) by volume, and well turned over. Just enough water shall then be added
to this dry mix as required for floor concrete, water cement ratio not exceeding 0.4.The
mixture so obtained shall be laid in 12 mm thickness on cement concrete floor within 1 to
4 hours of its laying. The topping shall be laid true to provide a uniform and even surface.
It shall be firmly pressed into the bottom concrete so as to have good bond with it. The
concrete shall be mechanically well compacted. Manual compaction will not be permitted
unless approved by the Employer/PMC. After the initial set has started, the surface shall
be finished smooth and true to slope with steel floats.

16.41.5.5. Curing and Precautions
The completed flooring shall be protected from sun, wind and rain for the first two days
and movement of persons over the floor is prohibited during this period. The finished
surface shall be cured continuously from the next day after finishing, at least for a period
of 7 days. Curing shall be done by spreading sand and kept damp throughout the curing
period of seven days minimum. The surface shall be protected from any damage to it
whatsoever. The surface shall then be allowed to dry slowly. All corners, junctions of floor
with plastered wall surface shall be rounded off.
16.41.6. Fine Grained Stone Slab Flooring
16.41.6.1. Marble Stone and Similar Fine Grained Stones:
These shall include natural stone slabs of regular shape and dimensions and capable of
taking a good polish and lay over a under bed on a concrete or masonry surface.
16.41.6.2. Thickness
The under bed shall have a minimum thickness of 12mm and an average thickness of
20mm.The stone slabs shall be of 25 mm or 30 mm or 40 mm thickness as specified or
directed by Employer/PMC. The total thickness shall however be as shown on the
drawings.
16.41.6.3. Stone Slab
The stone slabs shall be made from selected stock and shall be hard, sound, homogeneous
and dense in texture and free from flaws. Angles and edges shall be true, square, free
from chipping and surfaces shall be plane The slab shall be machine cut to the required
dimensions. Tolerances of +5 mm in dimensions and +2 mm in thickness shall be allowed.
Unless otherwise specified the slabs shall not be smaller than 300mm x 300mm.
Stone slabs shall come from specific regions and in specified quality with the top surface
fine chisel dressed. All Sides shall also be fine chisel dressed to the full depth to allow for
the finest possible joints. Slabs shall be delivered to the site well protected against
damage and stored in a dry place under cover.

16.41.6.4. Mix for Under Bed
As specified for terrazzo tile finish.
16.41.6.5. Laying
The sides and top surface of the slabs shall be machine rubbed or table rubbed with
coarse sandstone and washed clean before laying.
The under bed mortar shall be evenly spread and slab shall be laid over the under bed,
pressed and tapped down with a wooden mallet to the proper level. The slab shall then be
lifted and the under bed corrected if necessary and allowed to stiffen a little. Thick cement
slurry shall then be mixed with a pigment matching the colour of stone. The slab shall be
gently laid and tapped with a wooden mallet to bed properly toa very fine joint and to the
required level. All surplus cement slurry shall be removed and the surface mopped clean
with a wet soft cloth. The laid finish shall be cured for 7 days by keeping it wet.
16.41.6.6. Polishing and Finishing
Fine chiseling shall be done to remove slight undulations at the Joints. Polishing and
finishing shall be done as specified for terrazzo tile finish. However, the joints shall be so
fine in the case of stone slabs that grouting shall not be called for.
16.41.7. Glazed Tiles
The walls in toilets, bathrooms, pantries etc shall be finished with glazed tiles of approved
size, quality, colour, texture and make upto ceiling height. Complete work shall be carried
out as per relevant Indian Standards and specifications/guidelines of Department of Urban
Development & Building Construction, Government of Nepal.
16.41.7.1. Glazed Tiles in Skirting and Dado
The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to IS:15622. The tiles shall
be earthenware covered by a glaze thoroughly matured and fitted to the body. The tiles
shall be sound, true to shape, flat and free from flaws and other manufacturing defects
affecting their utility. The top surface of the tiles shall be glazed. The underside of the tiles
shall not have glaze in order that the tile may adhere properly to the base. The edges of

the tiles shall be free from glaze;
The glaze shall be free from welts; ships craze specks, crawlings or other imperfections
detracting from the appearance when viewed from a distance of one meter. The glaze
shall be either glossy or matt as specified in approved construction drawings or directed
by Employer/PMC.
16.41.7.2. Dimensions
Glazed earthenware tiles shall be of rectangular sizes such as 450 mm x 300 mm or as

specified in approved construction drawings or directed by Employer/PMC and shall be
straight or cushion edge type. Half tiles for use as full tiles shall have dimensions which
shall be such as to make the half tiles when joined together (with 1 mm joint) match with
dimensions of full tiles. The thickness of the tiles shall be not less than 6 mm.
The dimensions of fittings associated with the glazed tiles namely covered edges, round
edge tile, angles comer cups, ridge and legs , cornices and capping beads shall be of the
shape and dimensions as required and the thickness of fittings shall be same as the
thickness of tiles given above.
16.41.7.3. Tolerances
Facial Dimensions: The dimensions of all the four sides of the tiles shall be measured to
the nearest 0.1 mm .The average value of lengths /breadth shall not vary more than + 0.8
mm from the specified dimensions of tiles. The variation of individual dimensions from
average value of length and breadth shall not exceed + 0.5 mm. Tolerance on thickness
shall be +0.4mm.Tiles shall be checked for squareness and warpage as specified herein
under.
16.41.7.4. Trueness of Shape (Squareness)
Any variation from a right angle in the angle contained by any two adjoining sides shall be
limited so that a builder's steel square is placed against the angle, the distance between
the inner edge of the square and the adjacent side of the tile or fitting shall not be more
than 0.5 mm per 100 mm run.

16.41.7.5. Warpage
The tiles when tested for warpage on the edge and on diagonal shall not have warpage
exceeding the values as specified below:
TABLE-16.9
WARPAGE TOLERANCE
Size of Tile (mm) Warpage (mm)

100 mm x 100 mm + 0.3
200 mm x 200 mm + 0.4
152 mm x 152 mm + 0.7
16.41.7.6. Performance Requirement
Water Absorption: The average water absorption of the tiles when tested and evaluated
in accordance with IS:15622 shall not exceed 20 per cent.
Crazing: Tiles subjected to two cycles of crazing test as per IS:15622 shall not show any
sign of crazing.
Impact Resistance: Tiles when tested for impact resistance as per IS:15622 shall remain
intact, apart from surface marking.
Chemical Resistance: When tested as per IS:15622, the glazed surface of tiles and for the
fittings having a white glossy glaze shall show no modification.
Preparation of surfaces: The joints shall be raked out to a depth of at least 15 mm in

masonry walls. In case of concrete walls, the surface shall be hacked and roughened with
wire brushes. The surface shall be cleaned thoroughly, washed with water and kept wet
for 24 hours before skirting is commenced
16.41.7.7. Laying
12 mm thick plaster of cement mortar 1:3 (1 Cement: 3 Coarse sand) mix shall be applied

and allowed to harden. The plaster shall be roughened with wire brushes or by scratching
diagonally at closed intervals.
The tiles shall be soaked in water, washed clean, and coat of cement slurry applied
liberally at the back of tiles and set in the bedding mortar. The tiles shall be tamped and
corrected to proper place and lines. The tiles shall be set in the required pattern and
jointed. Top of skirting or dado shall be truly horizontal and joints truly vertical except
where otherwise indicated. Skirting and dado shall rest on the top of the flooring. Where
full size tiles cannot be fixed, these shall be cut (sawn) to the required size and their edge
rubbed smooth.
16.41.7.8. Curing and Finishing
The joints shall be cleaned off the grey cement grout with wire/ coir brush or trowel to a
depth of 2mm to 3mm and all dust and loose mortar removed. Joints shall then be flush
pointed with white cement added with pigments if required to match the colour of tiles.
The work shall then be kept wet for 7 days. After curing, the surface shall be washed and
finished clean. The finished work shall not sound hollow when tapped with a wooden
mallet.
16.42. STRUCTURAL STEEL TRUSS ROOF
16.42.1. General
Unless or otherwise shown on the drawings or otherwise specified, the materials,

workmanship, measurement and rate shall be as per relevant Indian Standards for
structural steel works and specifications/guidelines of Department of Urban Development
& Building Construction, Government of Nepal
16.42.2. Material
All materials supplied or used in the manufacture of items of steelwork shall be the best of
the respective kinds and free from defects and shall conform to applicable Indian
Standards.
All finished steel shall be well and cleanly rolled to the dimensions and weight specified by

applicable Indian Standard subject to permissible tolerances as per IS: 1852 (Rolling and
cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products). The finished material shall be free from
cracks, surface flaws, laminations, rough and imperfect edges and all other harmful
defects.
Steel sections shall be free from rust, scaling and pitting and shall be well protected. The
decision of the Employer/PMC regarding rejecting steel section on account of any of the
above defects shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
The mechanical and chemical properties of steel shall be as per as per relevant Indian
Standards.
(a) All circular steel tubes shall conform to IS: 1161-1968 and manufactured from Steel
of Grade Yst 240, hot finished grade with carbon and sulphur contents of less than
0.3% & 0.06% respectively. The steel shall be of tested quality.
(b) All rectangular and square hollow section shall conform to IS: 1387-1967,IS: 4293—
1985manufactured from steel of Grade Yst 240, hot finished grade with carbon
content of less than 0.3%. The steel shall have no more than 0.06% sulphur or more
than 0.06% Phosphorus and shall be of tested quality.
(c) All other steel shall conform to IS: 2062-2011defined as ST 42-S (standard quality)
unless mentioned in item below.
(d) Steel conforming to IS: 1977 defined as ST 32-00 (ordinary quality) shall only be used
for:
 Anchors or brackets in concrete or brickwork
 Holding down bolts for fixing trusses etc.
 Wind bracing rods and rings
 Bolts, nuts washers
If no relevant India Standard exists, the materials shall be of an approved manufacturer

entirely adequate for their purpose in the Works as approved by Employer/PMC.

16.42.3. Fabrication
The fabrication of structural steel work shall be carried out in accordance with approved
construction/ fabrication drawings and in accordance with relevant Indian Standards.
The contractor shall ensure that all materials and workmanship are free from defects and
the contractor shall replace any defective material and workmanship found during
fabrication or erection at no cost to the Employer.
16.42.4. Workmanship
The contractor shall observe the greatest accuracy and ensure that all parts fit together
properly on assembly and erection. When sealing hollow sections, the contractor shall
ensure that insides of sections are dry and clear of debris before sealing ends and
openings.
16.42.5. Welding
All welding of steel shall be carried out in the workshop of the contractor or of an
approved manufacturer. No welding on the site shall be carried out without the prior
written approval of the Employer/PMC. Welding shall be carried out as per following
Indian Standards:
(a) IS:806 - Code of Practice for use of steel tubes in General Building Construction;
(b) IS:816 - Code of Practice for use of Metal Arc Welding for General Construction in
Mild Steel;
(c) IS: 823 - Code of Procedure for Manual Metal Arc Welding of Mild Steel;
(d) IS: 819 -Code of Practice for Resistance Spot Welding for light assemblies in Mild
Steel.
In general, the size of Fillet welds shall not be less than 6 mm and the welds shall be
continuous unless otherwise specified or approved by the Employer/PMC.
The Contractor shall not commence any fabrication of steel work before he has obtained
the approval of the Employer/PMC of his proposed welding processes, techniques and

weld procedures.
The Contractor shall select the type of electrode that he considers suitable for the Works.
All electrodes shall comply with 1S:814 (Part-1&2) and shall be baked and stored in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. All welds shall be cleaned off slag
and ground smooth. The Employer/PMC may require tests on welds as per relevant Indian
Standards.
16.42.6. Bolting
Only bolts, nuts and washers to be used in works shall be new and conform to relevant
Indian Standards. All bolted connections shall fit closely together and bolt holes shall
match and be parallel. During erection, the holes shall not be distorted or enlarged. If the
contractor wishes to enlarge any hole, this shall be carried out only after approval of
Employer/PMC and shall be done by reaming. Bolts shall be tightened to the torque
specified or as may be ordered or approved by the Employer/PMC. Taper washers shall be
used wherever bolt heads or nuts are bearing on sloping surfaces of members.
16.42.7. Protective Coating
All surfaces of steelwork (with the exception of galvanized surfaces) shall receive one coat
of approved zinc chromate primer conforming to IS: 104 before leaving the workshop.
16.42.8. Shop Assembly
Trusses, prior to their packing and transportation to the site, shall be assembled in the
Contractor’s fabricating workshop to determine the correctness of the fabrication. Each
assembled unit shall be closely checked to ensure that the specified alignment has been
provided. Assembly and disassembly work shall be carried out in the presence of the
Employer/PMC (or his Representative). The Contractor shall rectify at his own expense any
error or defect observed during the trial assembly.
Before the trusses are dismantled for delivery, each item shall be matched, marked to
facilitate erection at the site. The markings on members shall be punched with the help of
steel letters and figure punches and shall remain clearly visible. After the application of

the protective coating, the location of the match marks shall be indicated by a ring of
white paint.
Prior to the dispatch of the steelwork from the fabrication yard, the contractor shall
prepare a plan showing the arrangement of the trusses and their appropriate match marks
and shall forward one copy to the Employer/PMC.
16.42.9. Transportation
The contractor shall be responsible for all handling and transportation of the steelwork
from its place of manufacture to the site. Prior to the transportation, the Contractor shall
prepare the items of steelwork for transport so as to effectively protect all coatings
against damage of any kind. Should any damage nevertheless occur, the same shall be
made good by the contractor at no cost to the Employer? All repairs of protective coatings
shall be carried out in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations and to
the satisfaction of the Employer/PMC.
16.42.10. Erection of Steel Work
Holding down bolts shall be cast into first stage concrete. Before commencing any
erection of structural steelwork, the contractor shall submit to the Employer/PMC for his
approval, a written description of his proposed method and sequence of work including
full details of his proposals for temporary supports, bracing and steadying. Such
temporary supports etc shall be sufficient to ensure the stability of all members of
steelwork during the erection. The Employer/PMC’s approval of the Contractor’s
measures shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities under the
Contract. During the erection, the steelwork shall not be subjected to stresses in excess of
the maximum permissible stresses specified in IS: 806-1968 or other applicable Indian
Standards. The Contractor shall not carry out any modifications to fabricated steelwork
without the written approval of the Employer/PMC. On completion of erection, the
steelwork shall be plumb, true to line and level in accordance with the approved drawings
to the satisfaction of the Employer/PMC.

16.42.11. G.I. Sheet Roofing
Roofing shall consist of steel roof trusses and set of purlins over which G.I. Corrugated
Sheet of 1.0 mm thick shall be provided. All structural steel for roofing shall be mild steel
of grade G24 having Young Modulus of 21,000 da N/mm2 and yield strength of a minimum
24 da N/mm2. All fillet welds shall be full penetration and shall be for structural purpose.
Minimum size and other details of welds shall conforms to IS:800-2007, IS:816, IS:9595
and other relevant standards.
Purlins of mild steel rolled sections of requisite size shall be fixed over the principal rafters
of trusses. The top surfaces of the purlins shall be uniform and plane. They shall be
painted before fixing on top.
Gutters shall be fabricated from plain G.I. sheets 1.25mm thick or other size as specified in
the approved construction drawings. Eaves gutters shall be of the shape and section as
specified in approved construction drawings. The overall width of the sheet referred to
therein shall mean the peripheral width of the gutter including the rounded edges. The
longitudinal edges shall be turned back to the extent of 12 mm and beaten to form a
rounded edge. The ends of the sheets at junctions of pieces shall be hooked into each
other and beaten flush to avoid leakage. Gutter shall be laid with a minimum slope of 1 in
100. Gutter shall be supported on and fixed to M. S. flat iron brackets bent to shape and
fixed to the requisite slope. The maximum spacing of brackets shall be 1.20 meter.
16.42.12. Ridges and Hips
Ridges and hips of roof shall be covered with ridge and hip sections of G.I. Sheet of 22
Gauge with a minimum lap of 200 mm on either side over the G.I. Corrugated sheets. The
end laps of the ridges and hips and between ridges and hips shall also be not less than 200
mm. The ridges and hips shall be of 60omm overall width and shall be properly bent to
shape.
16.42.12.1. Fixing
Ridges shall be fixed to the purlins below with the same 8.0 mm diameter G.I. hook, bolts
and nuts and bitumen and G.I. limpet washers which fix sheets to the purlins. Similarly
hips shall be fixed to the roof members below such as purlins, hip and valley rafters with
the same 8.0 mm dia. G.I. hook bolts and nuts and bitumen and G.I limpet washers which
fix the sheets to these roof members. At least one of the fixing bolts shall pass through the
end laps of ridges and hips, on either side. If this is not possible, extra hook bolts shall be
provided. The end laps of ridges and hips shall be joined together by galvanized iron seam
bolts 25 mm x6mm size each with bitumen and G.I. washer white lead as directed by the
Employer/PMC.
16.42.12.2. Finish
The edges of the ridges and hips shall be straight from end to end and their surface shall
be plane and parallel to the general plane of the roof. The ridges and hips shall fit in
squarely on the sheets.
16.42.13. Wind Ties
These shall be fixed at the eave end of the sheets. The fixing shall be done with same hook
bolts which secure the sheets to the purlin.
16.42.14. Holding Down Bolts
The holding down/foundation bolts shall be placed in the 1st stage concrete and these
shall be held in position with a wooden/metal template. The bolt shall be provided with
suitable timber mould or pipe sleeve to allow for adjustment. The timber mould or pipe
shall be removed after initial set of concrete. The spaces left around holding down bolts
shall have sloping channel leading to the side of pedestal and on the underside of the base
plate to allow the spaces being grouted after the base plate is fixed in the position along
with the column.
16.42.15. Mild Steel Bolts, Nuts and Washer
All bolts heads and nuts shall be hexagonal unless specified otherwise. The screwed
threads shall conform to IS: 1363 and the thread surface shall not be tapered. The bolts
shall be of such length as to project at least two clear threads beyond the nuts when fixed
in position, and these shall fit in the holes without any slake. The nuts shall fit in 'the

threaded ends of bolts properly. In all cases where full bearing area of the bolts is to be
developed, the bolts shall be provided with a washer of sufficient thickness under the nut
to avoid any threaded portion of the bolt being within the thickness of the parts bolted
together. Where there is the risk of the nuts being removed or becoming loose due to
vibration or reversal of stresses, these shall be secured from slackening by the use of lock-
nuts, spring washers or cross cutting as directed by the Employer/PMC.
16.43. FALSE CELING
16.43.1. It shall involve providing and fixing tiled false ceiling of approved material of size 595x595
mm in true horizontal level, suspended on interlocking grid of hot dip galvanized steel
sections (galvanized @120 gram per square meter both side inclusive).
16.43.2. The interlocking grid shall consist of main ‘T’ runners with suitably spaced joints to get
required length and of size 24x38mm made from 0.8 mm thick (minimum) steel sheet,
spaced @ 1200 mm centre to centre and cross ‘T’ of size 24x25mm made of 0.3 mm thick
(minimum) sheet, 1200 long paced between main ‘T’ at 600 mm centre to centre to form
the grid of 1200x600 mm and secondary cross ‘T’ of length 600 mm and of size 24x25
mm, made from 0.8 mm thick (minimum) steel sheet to be interlocked at middle of the
1200x600 mm panel to form the grid of 600x600mm and wall angle of size 24x24x0.3 mm
and laying false ceiling titles of approved texture in the grid including, required
cutting/making opening for services like diffusers, grills, light fittings & fixtures, smoke
detectors etc.
16.43.3. The main ‘T’ runners shall be suspended from ceiling using GI slotted cleats of size
27x37x25x1.6 mm fixed to ceiling with 12.5 mm diameter and 50 mm long dash fasteners,
4 mm diameter GI adjustable rods with galvanized butterfly level clips of size 85x30x0.8
mm spaced at 1200 mm centre to centre along main ‘T’. The bottom exposed width of 24
mm of all ‘T’ sections shall be pre-painted with polyester paint.
16.43.4. The false ceiling panel/titles shall be either of the following material as approved by
Employer/PMC:
(a) 12.5 mm thick square edge PVC laminated Gypsum tiles made of Gypsum Plaster

board manufactured from natural Gypsum as per IS:2095 and laminated with white
0.16 mm thick fire retardant PVC film on the face side on the back side with alledges
sealed with the face side PVC film which shall go around and wraps the edges and is
bonded to the edges and the back side polyester film so as to make the tile a
completely sealed unit.
(b) 12.5 mm thick fully perforated Gypsum Board tile made from plasterboard having
glass fibers conforming to IS:2095 of size 595x595 mm, having 9.7x9.7 mm at 19.4
mm centre to centre with center of boarders of 48 mm and the side boarders of 30
mm, backed with non woven tissue on back side, having NRC (Noise Reduction
Coefficient) of 0.79, with 50 mm resin bonded glass wool backing.
(c) 15 mm thick densified regular edges eco-friendly light weight calcium silicate false
ceiling titles of approved texture spintone/cosmos/Hexa or equivalent of size
595x595 mm
(d) 15.0 mm thick approximately 600 X 600mm size mineral fiber board tiles.
16.43.5. The work shall be carried out at all heights as per approved drawings and direction of
Employer/PMC.
16.44. POWER COATED ALUMINIUM DOORS AND WINDOWS
16.44.1. General
Power coated aluminum doors, windows and ventilators shall, in general, conform to
relevant Indian Standards and specifications/guidelines of Department of Urban
Development & Building Construction, Government of Nepal.
16.44.2. Extruded aluminum sections shall have a minimum 3 mm wall thickness. All sections shall
be approved by the Employer/PMC before fabrication is taken up. Door frames, mullions,
transoms, etc., shall be anodized in bath of sulphuric acid to provide a clear coating of
minimum 6.0 mm thickness. The anodized materials shall then be sealed by immersing in
boiling water for 15 minutes. A protective transparent coating shall be applied to the
sections before shipment from the factory.

16.44.3. All work shall be fitted and shop assembled to a first class job, and ready for erection.
Shop joints shall be made to hair lines and then welded or braced by such method as shall
produce a uniform colour throughout the work. Work on the above, other than described,
shall be carefully fitted and assembled with concealed fasteners. Wherever possible, joints
shall be made in concealed locations and on edges of doors. Field connections of all work
shall be made with concealed screws or other approved type of fasteners. Glazing beads
shall be snap fit type without visible screws and shall be of sizes to accommodate glazing.
All work shall be adequately braced and reinforced as necessary for strength and rigidity.
16.44.4. Doors, Windows, and Ventilators Fittings
16.44.4.1. General
The make and quality of the fitting shall be approved by Employer/PMC. The screws used
for fittings shall be of same metal and finished as the fittings. Number of screws used for
the fittings shall be as specified in the approved drawings or specification of the fittings.
16.44.5. Hold Fast
16.44.5.1. General
The suitable Hold Fast shall be provided for fixing doors, windows and ventilator frames
into masonry or concrete. 50 mm length at one end of the hold fast shall be bent at right
angles and one hole of 11 mm diameter shall be made in it for fixing to the frame with 10
mm diameter bolt. The bolt head shall be sunk into the frame and covered with with
suitable plugs matching with the frame. At the other end, the hold fast shall be forked and
bent at right angles in opposite directions and fixed in cement concrete block/masonry
wall of specified size.
16.45. PAINTING
16.45.1. Cement Paint
The cement paint shall be conforming to IS: 5410 and shall be of approved brand and
manufacture. The cement paint shall be brought to the site of work in the containers in

sealed condition. The materials shall be brought in at a time in adequate quantities to

suffice for the whole work or at least a fortnight's work. The materials shall be kept in the
joint custody of the Contractor and the Employer/PMC. The empties shall not be removed
from the site of work till the relevant item of the work has been completed and
permission obtained from the Employer/PMC.
16.45.1.2. Preparation of mix
Cement paint shall be mixed in such quantities that the same can be used within an hour
of its mixing as otherwise the mixture shall set affecting flow and finish. Cement paint
shall be mixed with water in two stages. The first stage shall comprise of 2 parts of cement
paint and one part of water stirred thoroughly as allowed to stand for 5 minutes. Care
shall be taken to add the cement paint gradually to the water and not vice versa. The
second stage shall comprise of adding further one part of water to the mix and stirring
thoroughly to obtain a liquid of workable and uniform consistency. In all cases the
manufacturer’s instructions shall be followed meticulously.
Cement paint drums shall be kept tightly closed when not in use as by exposure to
atmosphere; the cement paint rapidly becomes air set due to its hygroscope qualities. In
case of cement paint brought in gunny bags, once the bag is opened, the contents should
be consumed in full on the day of its opening. If the same is not likely to be consumed in
full, the balance quantity should be transferred and preserved in an airtight container to
avoid its exposure to atmosphere.
The solution shall be applied on the clean wetted surface with brushes or spraying
machine. The solution shall be kept well stirred during the period of application. It shall be
applied on the surface which is on the dry side of the building so that the direct heat of
the sun on the surface is avoided. The method of application for cement paint shall be as
per manufacturer's specification. The completed surface shall be watered after the day's
work.
The second coat shall be applied after the first coat has been set for at least 24 hours.

Before application of the second or subsequent coats, the surface of the previous coat
shall not be wetted.
For new work, the surface shall be treated with three or more coat of water proof cement
paint or as found necessary to get a uniform shade as per directions of Employer/PMC.
16.45.2. Red Oxide Ready Mixed Painting over C.G.I. Sheet
16.45.2.1. General
Ready mixed paint, suitable for painting over G.I. sheets, of approved brand and
manufacturer and of the required shade shall be used. New or weathered G.I. sheet shall
be painted with a priming coat of one coat of red oxide zinc chromate paint. Primer shall
be applied before fixing sheets in place.
Application: - The crowns shall be painted first and when these get dried, the general coat
shall be given to ensure uniform finish over the entire surface without the crowns showing
signs of thinning. The second or additional coats shall be applied when the previous coat
has dried.
16.45.3. Distempering
16.45.3.1. General
Distempering shall be done with acrylic distemper of approved brand and manufacture
(one or more coats) and of required shade on new work to give an even shade.
The acrylic distemper of required colour conforming to IS:427 and of approved brand and
manufacturer shall be used. The shade shall be got approved from the Employer/PMC
before application of the distemper. The acrylic distemper shall be stirred slowly in clean
water using 0.6 liter of water per kg of distemper or as specified by the manufacturer.
Warm water shall preferably be used. The mixture shall be allowed to stand for at least 30
minutes (or if practicable overnight) before use. The mixture shall be well stirred before
and during use to maintain an even consistency. Distemper shall not be mixed in larger
quantity than is actually required for one day's work.

16.45.3.3. Preparation of Surface
Before new work is distempered, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from
mortar droppings and other foreign matter and sand prepared smooth. New plaster
surfaces shall be allowed to dry for at least two months before applying distemper. In the
case of old work, all loose pieces and scales shall be removed by sand papering. The
surface shall be cleaned of all grease, dirt etc.
Plaster shall be made good with Plaster of Paris mixed with the color to be used. The
surface shall then be rubbed down again with a fine grade sand paper and made smooth.
A coat of the distemper shall be applied over the patches. The patched surface shall be
allowed to dry thoroughly before the regular coat of distemper is applied.
16.45.3.4. Priming coat
A priming coat of whiting shall be applied over the prepared surface in case of new work.
No white washing coat shall be used as a priming coat for distemper. The treated surface
shall be allowed to dry before distemper coat is given.
In the case of new work, the treatment shall consist of a priming coat of whiting followed
by the application of three or more coats of distemper till the surface shows an even
color. For old work, the surface prepared shall be applied two or more coats of distemper
till the surface attains an even color. The application of each coat shall be carried out as
follows:
The entire surface shall be coated with approved make and color distemper by proper
distemper brushes (ordinary white wash brushes shall not be allowed) in horizontal
strokes followed immediately by vertical ones which together shall constitute one coat.
The subsequent coats shall be applied only after the previous coat has dried. The finished
surface shall be even and uniform and shall show no brush marks.
Enough distemper shall be mixed to finish one room at a time. The application of a coat in
each room shall be finished in one operation and no work shall be started in any room,

which cannot be completed the same day. After each day's work, the brushes shall be
washed in hot water and hung down to dry. Old brushes which are dirty or caked with
distemper shall not be used
16.45.4. Plastic Emulsion Paint
16.45.4.1. General
Plastic emulsion paint shall be conforming to IS: 5411 and shall be of approved make and
manufacture and of required shade.
Preparation of Surface: The plaster surface shall be allowed to dry thoroughly. A thin layer
of plaster of Paris shall be applied to make the wall/ceiling surface perfectly plane and wall
junction lines perfectly straight and neat. The surface shall be finished smooth. Care must
be taken to keep this layer as thin as possible. This shall be got inspected by the
Employer/PMC before the application of the plastic emulsion paint. Turpentine shall not
be used for thinning purpose. The surface on finishing shall present a flat velvety smooth
finish. If necessary more coats shall be applied till the surface present a uniform
appearance.
No oil based putties shall be used in preparation of wall. Splashes of paint shall be cleaned
out without delay as they shall be difficult to remove after hardening. Washing of surface
treated with plastic emulsion paint shall not be done within 3 to 4 weeks of application.
16.46. PLINTH PROTECTION
Plinth Protection shall be provided as specified in the approved drawings to required

width. It shall consists of 100mm thick cement concrete of M15 Grade (1Cement: 2 Fine
Aggregates: 4Coarse Aggregates of 20mm nominal size) over 7.5 cm thick bed of gravel or
shingle 40mm nominal size grouted with fine sand. The outer edge shall be lined with
bricks/stone blocks laid on edge and joints laid in cement mortar 1:4 (1 Cement : 4 Coarse
sand). Plinth protection shall be laid with a minimum outward slope of 1 in 50.
16.46.1. Preparing the Ground Surface
The ground, where plinth protection is to be laid, shall first be prepared to the required

slope. The high portions of ground shall be excavated; hollows and depressions filled up to
the required level with the excavated/borrowed earth and watered and well compacted
by iron rammers to give a firm base and uniform outward slope. Surplus earth, if any,
obtained shall be disposed as directed by the Employer/PMC.
16.47. BITUMINIOUS ROAD WORK
16.47.1. General
All internal roads shall be designed for the load of heaviest transformer with the load of all
HV/LV bushes and oil contained in it and considering the California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of
soil strata determined during geotechnical investigation at each substation site.
16.47.2. The internal roads shall meet all the requirements specified under clause ‘General and
Specific Technical Requirements’ of this specification.
16.47.3. Construction of Roads including shoulders shall be carried out conforming to relevant
Indian Standards, Standards of Indian Road Congress and specifications/guidelines of
Department of Roads, Government of Nepal.
16.47.4. PAVEMENT MATERIALS
16.47.4.1. SUB-BASE COURSE
Sub-base shall be a non-plastic, sandy, granular material with a C.B.R. value greater than 15.
It shall be free of deleterious material and subjected to the Employer's approval. Thickness
of sub-base course shall be not less than 300 mm compacted.
16.47.4.2. BASE COURSE
Base shall be of WBM (water bound macadam) using crushed aggregate with a CBR value
greater than 80. The filler material for WBM shall be stone dust. It shall be free of
deleterious material and subjected to the Employer's approval. Thickness of base course
shall be not less than 150mm compacted.

It shall conform to following gradation:
Sieve size Percentage passing
1 1"/2 100
3/4" 90 - 100
3/8" 50 - 80
No.4 35 - 55
No.30 10 - 30
No.200 2-9
16.47.4.3. WEARING COURSE

Wearing course shall be of asphalt concrete mixture and its thickness shall not be less than
40mm (compacted).
16.47.4.4. Asphalt Concrete Mixture

Asphalt concrete shall be a mixture of mineral aggregate and paving asphalt mixed at a
central mixing plant. Its components shall be as specified herein.
Paving asphalt shall be stream-refined asphalt produced from crude asphalt petroleum or
mixture of refined liquid asphalt and refined solid asphalt. It shall be homogeneous and free
from water and residues of coal, coal tar or paraffin oil. It shall have a penetration grade of
85-100 when tested according to ASTM D-5.
Aggregate for asphalt concrete shall be a composition of coarse aggregate and fine
aggregate. Both shall be clean and durable.
16.47.4.5. Composition of Grading
The grading of the combined aggregates and the percentage of asphalt shall be as follows.
Percentages shown are based on weight of dry aggregates.

Minimum Maximum
3/4" 100 -
1/2" 95 100
3/8" 72 88


No.4 46 60
No.8 28 42
No.30 15 27
No.50 10 20
No.200 4 7
Asphalt content (%) 408 6.0
16.47.5. ROAD CURB

Both side of road edge shall be provided with Brick curb having its corner chamfered.
Minimum projection of curb from road surface shall not be less than 80mm.
16.48. OPEN SURFACE DRAIN
16.48.1. General
Constructing random rubble or brick masonry open surface drains in cement mortar 1:6 (1
Cement : 6 Coarse Sand) including earth work in excavation, 75 mm thick bed concrete 1:
3 : 6 (1 Cement : 3 Fine Aggregates : 6 Coarse Aggregate of 20 mm and down gauge) and
100 mm thick cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 Cement : 2 Fine Aggregates : 4 Coarse Aggregates
of 12.5 mm nominal size) and plastering its inner and exposed surfaces above ground
level with cement plaster 1:4 (1 Cement : 4 sand) with a floating coat of neat cement
slurry inside the drain including disposal of surplus earth complete as per relevant Indian
Standard and specifications/guidelines of Department of Urban Development & Building
Construction and Department of Road, Government of Nepal.
The size of open surface drains shall be as per design requirement. However, it shall not
be less than 300 mm wide and 450 mm deep including 150 mm free board. Drains shall be
laid to such gradients and in such locations as may be shown in the relevant construction
drawing or as directed by the Employer/PMC. A free board of not less than 150 mm shall
be provided in all drains. The drain shall be given, as far as possible, uniform slope from
the starting point to the discharge point.

16.49. CHEQUERED STEEL PLATE COVERS
16.49.1. General
Chequered Steel Plate covers over trenches and other openings inside buildings shall be
installed as specified in approved drawings or as directed by the Employer/PMC.
In order to facilitate easy removal and placing, all covers shall be tapered along the
perimeter towards the bottom. The maximum clearance between cover and outer frame
shall be not more than 5.0 mm at finished floor level. The corrosion protection shall be
generally achieved by painting.
16.50. CHAIN LINK FENCING
16.50.1. General
Fencing shall be designed for the most critical load combination taking care of wind forces,
stability, tension on wires, minimum requirements as per this clause and relevant
recommendations. Fencing shall be of galvanized steel and it shall be at least 2.5 m high
with diamond shapes. A concrete base shall be provided below fencing.
16.50.2. Material
The minimum requirements are as follows:
(a) Chain Link Fence fabric shall be in accordance with IS:2721 with specifications in table
16.10 below:
TABLE-16.10
SPECIFICATIONS OF CHAIN LINK FENCE FABRIC
1. Size of mesh 75 mm
2. Size of coated wire 3.15 mm
3. Width of chain link 2400 mm
4. Class of Zinc Coating Mecum
(b) Posts: The size of Intermediate, straining and stay posts shall be not less than the sizes

given in Table 16.11 below:
TABLE-16.11
SIZE OF POSTS FOR FENCING
Angle Section Size in mm

Intermediate posts L 65 x 65 x 5
Straining posts L 65 x 65 x 5
Stay posts L 45 x 45 x5,
All structural steel sections, plates, flats etc. shall conform to IS: 2062.
(c) Barbed Wire
The barbed wire shall consist of two splices per reel. The barbed wire shall be formed by
twisting two line wires, one containing the barbs. The barbed wire shall be 12 SWG
galvanized steel barbed wire with its weight 155-136 gm/m length. Distance between two
barbs shall be 75 mm. Above chain link fencing, 3-rows (6 nos.) of barbed tape/wire shall
be provided in each arm of the Y shaped barbed arm at top.
16.50.3. Installation
Fence shall be installed along lines shown on approved drawings. Holes in ground for posts
shall be excavated by approved methods. Intermediate posts shall be spaced at 3.0 m
(maximum) apart measured parallel to ground surface. Straining posts shall be installed at
equal intervals not exceeding 30.0 m. Straining posts shall be installed at sharp changes in
grade, at corners, at change of direction and where directed by the Employer/PMC. All
corner posts shall have two stay posts and every tenth post shall have a transverse stay
post. Post shall be set in concrete. Concrete shall be of M15 grade of nominal mix 1 : 2 : 4
(1 Cement : 2 Fine Aggregates : 4 Coarse Aggregates of 20 mm nominal size) and work
shall conform to relevant Indian Standard. Posts shall be braced and held in plumb
position and true alignment and elevation until concrete has set.
Fence fabric shall not be installed until concrete has cured for a minimum period of 21

days. The fabric shall be fixed to Intermediate and Straining Posts as shown in Bid
drawings. .
16.51. GATES
16.51.1. General
The Gate frame shall be made of heavy duty MS pipe and grills of steel angle/flats
conforming to relevant Indian Standard. The gates shall be fabricated with welded joints
as per approved drawing/ specification to achieve rigid connections. The gate frame shall
be painted with one coat of approved steel primer & two coats of approved synthetic
enamel paint of approved color. Gates shall be fitted with approved quality iron hinges,
latch and latch catch. Latch and latch catch shall be suitable for attachment and operation
of padlock from either side of gates. Hinges shall permit gates to swing through 180
degree back against fence. Gates shall be fitted with galvanized chain hook or gate hold
back to hold gates open. Double gates shall be fitted with center rest and drop bolt to
secure gates in closed position.
16.52. WATER SUPPLY, PLUMBING AND SANITARY WORKS
16.52.1. General
All works shall be carried out, in general, in accordance with relevant Indian & Nepalese
Standards and specifications/guidelines of Department of Urban Development & Building
Construction, Government of Nepal and as directed by Employer/PMC.
16.52.2. Materials
16.52.2.1. G.I. Pipes and Socket
The pipe shall be galvanized mild steel hot finished seamless (HFS) screwed and socket
conforming to the requirements of IS: 1239 (Part-1) for medium grade. They shall be of
the diameter (nominal bore) specified in the approved drawings or as directed by
Employer/PMC. However, the diameter shall not be less than 15 mm. Galvanizing shall
conform to IS: 4736. The zinc coating shall be adherent, smooth and free from
imperfections such as flux, ash and dress inclusions, bare patches, black spots, pin holes,

lumping, runs, rust strains, dull white deposits and blisters. The pipes and sockets shall be
cleanly finished, well galvanized and free from cracks, surface flaw laminations and other
defects. All screw threads shall be clean and well out. The ends shall be cut cleanly and
square with the axis of the tube. All screwed tubes and sockets shall have pipe threads
conforming to the requirements ofIS: 554. Screwed tubes shall have taper threads while
the sockets shall have parallel threads.
All tubes shall withstand a test pressure of 50 kg/cm2without showing any defect. The
fittings shall be of mild steel tubular or wrought steel conforming to IS: 1239 (Part-II). The
fittings and sockets shall be designated by the respective nominal bores of the pipe for
which they are intended.
16.52.2.2. Bib Cocks and Stopcock
A bib cock (bib tap) is a draw off tap with horizontal inlet and free outlet. A stop cock (stop
tap) is a valve for insertion in a pipe line for controlling or stopping the flow.
They shall be of size specified in the approved drawings and shall be of screw down type
conforming to IS: 781.The closing device shall work by means of a disc carrying a
renewable non-metallic washer which shuts against water pressure on a seating at right
angles to the axis of the threaded spindle which operates it. The handle shall be either
crutch or butterfly type securely fixed to the spindle. They shall be of the loose leather
seated pattern. They shall open in anti-clock wise direction. They shall be made of brass
polished bright or of Chromium Plated brass as specified in approved drawings. They shall
be of approved brand. The free outlet of the bib taps shall have an outside thread to make
connection with a threaded hose pipe connection possible whenever required.
16.52.2.3. Chromium Plated Brass Pillar Taps
These shall be of chromium plated brass and shall conform to IS: 1795. The nominal size of
the tap shall be 15mm. The nominal size shall be designated by the nominal bore of the
pipe outlet to which the tap is to be fitted. Every pillar tap complete with component parts
shall withstand an internally applied hydraulic pressure of20 kg/cm 2maintained for a
period of 2 minutes during which period it shall neither leak nor sweat. These shall be of

approved brand.
16.52.2.4. European/ Indian Type W.C. Pan
Water closet shall be of white/vitreous china, European/ Indian Type, as specified in

approved drawings or as directed by Employer/PMC confirming to IS: 2556 (Part-I, Part-II
& Part-III). It shall be of the Wash down Type attached with S-trap. It shall be of approved
make/brand. All vitreous sanitary appliances shall confirm to IS: 2556.
16.52.2.5. Low Level Flushing Cistern
Cistern shall be of 12.5 liters capacity, white vitreous china with complete fittings. Low
level flushing cistern manually operated shall be installed in office toilet and shall conform
to IS: 774. The body thickness shall not be less than 10mm at any place. The cistern shall
be free from manufacturing defects and other defects affecting its utility. All working parts
shall be designed to operate smoothly and efficiently. Cistern shall be mosquito proof. The
breadth from front to back shall be such that the cover and seat of the water closet pan
shall come to rest in stable position when raised. The cistern shall have removable cover
which shall fit closely on it and be secured against displacement. The outlet fitting shall be
securely connected to the cistern and shall be 40 mm in diameter and shall conform to IS:
1703.
The float shall be made of polythene. The flush handle shall be of chromium plated brass.
The siphoned function of the flushing cistern shall be capable of being rapidly brought into
action by the operating handle but shall not self-siphon or leak. The discharge rate of
cistern shall be about 5 liters in 3 seconds and there shall be no appreciable change in the
force of flush during the period of discharge. A tolerance of + 0.5 liters shall be allowed
over the rated discharge capacity of the cistern. The cistern shall be of approved brand
and manufacturer.
16.52.2.6. White Vitreous Flat Back Wash Basin
Wash Basin shall conform to IS: 2556 (Part-I to Part-IV). Wash basin shall be of one piece
construction of the sizes as specified in the approved drawings or directed by the
Employer/PMC. All internal angles shall be designed to facilitate cleaning. Each washbasin
shall have a skirting at the back and shall be provided with single or double tap holes as
specified. The tap holes shall be 28mm square or 30 mm round. Each washbasin shall have
a circular waste hold to which the interior of the basin shall drain. The waste hold shall be
either rebated or beveled internally with diameter of 65mm at top. Stud slots to receive to
C.I. bracket on the underside of the wash basin shall be suitable for bracket, with stud not
exceeding 13 mm, 5 mm high and 305 mm from the back of the basin to the centre of the
stud. The stud slot shall be of depth sufficient to take 5mm stud.
C.I. brackets shall conform to IS: 775. They shall be protected by suitable paint of
approved quality. Wash basins and C.I. brackets shall be of approved brand and
manufacturer.
16.52.2.7. C.P. Brass Towel Rail
The rail shall be of Chromium Plated brass with two Chromium Plated brass brackets, to
be fixed with 25mm C.P. screws. The size of the rail shall be 750 mm x 20 mm diameter
and 1.25 mm thick. It shall be of approved brand and manufacturer.
16.52.2.8. C.P. Brass Waste
Waste shall be chromium plated brass conforming to IS: 2963 and shall be sound, free
from laps, blow holes and pitting and other manufacturing defects. External and internal
surfaces shall be clean and smooth. The body and nut shall be truly machined so that the
nut smoothly moves on the body. It shall be of approved brand and manufacturer.
16.52.2.9. C.P. Brass Trap
Wash basins shall be provided with Chromium Plated brass trap of U type or bottle type,
of required size. It shall be or approved brand and manufacturer.
16.52.2.10. C.P. Beveled Edge Mirror
Mirror shall be of superior sheet glass with edges beveled. It shall be free from flaws,
specks, or bubbles. The size of the mirror shall be 90 x 45 cm and its thickness shall not be
less than 5.5 mm. It shall be uniformly silver plated at the back and shall be free from
silvering defects. Silvering shall have a protective uniform covering of red lead paint.

Mirror shall be of approved brand and manufacturer.
16.52.2.11. C.P. Toilet Paper Holder
Holder shall be of Chromium plated brass of standard size. It shall be of approved brand
and manufacturer.
16.52.2.12. Telescopic Flush Pipe for W.C
Pipe shall be of 40 mm diameter for low level cistern made of medium quality galvanized
iron. The flushing pipe shall be of suitable length with bends etc. as required for fixing it
with front or back inlet of W.C. pan.
16.52.2.13. Plastic Toilet Seat Cover/Lid
Seat Cover shall have Chromium Plated brass hinges and rubber buffers and shall conform
to IS: 2548. It shall be made of molded synthetic materials, which shall be tough and hard
with high resistance to solvents and shall be free from blisters and other surface defects.
Seat cover shall be finished smooth, and lacquer shall not be used for surface finishing. It
shall be of approved quality and manufacturer.
16.52.2.14. Sand Cast Iron Floor Trap
The floor trap shall be P type with a minimum of 50 mm water seal and shall be of self-
cleaning design. Inlet shall be of size 100 mm and exit shall be the same as the size of
waste pipe. It shall have a sand cast iron grating (screwed down or hinged) without vent
arm. Coating, internally and externally shall be as approved by Employer/PMC. It shall be
of approved manufacturer.
16.52.2.15. Sand Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings
Pipes and fittings shall conform to IS: 1729. The pipe shall have spigot and socket ends
with bead on spigot end. The pipes and fittings shall be true to shape, smooth and
cylindrical, their inner and outer surface being as nearly as practicable concentric. They
shall be sound and nicely cast, free from cracks, laps, pinholes and other imperfections
and shall be neatly dressed and carefully fitted.

The ends of pipes and fittings shall be reasonably square to their axis. The length of pipes
shall be 1.5/1.8/2.0m including socket ends. The pipes and fittings shall be supplied
without ears. All pipes and fittings shall ring clearly when struck over with a light hand
hammer and shall be capable of being easily worked with a drill or file.
All pipes and fittings shall be coated internally and externally with the same material at
the factory, the fittings being preheated prior to total immersion in a batch containing a
uniformly heated composition having a tar or other suitable base. The coating material
shall be smooth good adherence and shall not scale off. The coating shall be smooth and
tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77 degree
Celsius, but not so brittle at a temperature of 0 degrees Celsius as to chip off when
scraped lightly with a pen knife. The thickness and dimension specified for the
corresponding sizes of straight pipes. The access door fittings shall be designed so as to
avoid dead spaces in which filth may accumulate. Doors shall be provided with 3mm
rubber insertion packing and when closed and bolted, these shall be water tight. They
shall be submitted to the Employer/PMC for approval.
16.52.2.16. Glazed Stoneware Pipe
All pipes shall have spigot and socket ends conforming to IS: 651. They shall be sound, free
from visible defects such as fire cracks or hair cracks or any other manufacturing defects.
The glaze of pipes shall be free from crazing. The pipe shall give sharp clear note when
struck with a light hammer. There shall be no broken blisters. The length of the pipes shall
be 50, 75 or 90 cm exclusive of the internal depth of the socket.
16.52.2.17. C.I. Frame and Cover for Manholes.
Cast Iron Frame and Manhole covers shall be of heavy duty type conforming to IS:458.
16.52.2.18. Spun Yarn
Spun yarn shall be of clean hemp and of good quality. It shall be soaked in hot coal tar of
bitumen and cooled before use.

16.53. CAST IRON SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPES AND FITTINGS
16.53.1. General
Pipe, fittings shall be as specified in this Specification and of size as specified in the
approved drawings. Where pipes are running along walls, they shall be fixed at all joints
with Galvanized M.S. holder bat clamps 1.6 mm thick. This shall be done by embedding
the hooks of the clamps in cement concrete blocks 10 x 10 x 10 cm 1:2:4 mix (1 cement :2
Fine Aggregates : 4 Coarse aggregates 20 mm nominal size) for which necessary holes shall
be made in the wall at proper places. The clamps shall be kept about 50 mm clear of
finished face of wall, so as to facilitate cleaning and painting of pipes. The pipes shall be
fixed perfectly vertical or to the lines and slopes as directed. The spigot of the upper pipe
shall be properly fitted in the socket of the lower pipes such that there is a uniform
annular space for filling with the jointing material.
The joint shall be caulked in with lead as soon as the next length of pipe is placed in
position. The open end (socket end) of the pipe shall be kept closed till the next length of
pipe is fitted and jointed, to prevent any foreign material falling in and choking the pipe.
The spigot end shall butt the shoulder of the socket and leave no gap in between. The
annular space between the socket and the spigot shall first be well packet in with spun
yarn leaving 25mm from the lip of the socket for the lead. The joint shall then be lead
caulked. All cast iron pipes shall be carried up above the roof and shall have a sand cast
iron terminal guard.
The waste from wash basin shall be connected to the outside drains, without gully trap.
The waste of toilet floor shall be connected to the outside drains through cast iron trap of
self-cleansing design as specified in this Specification. The soil pipe of lavatories shall be
connected directly to the inspection chamber.
16.53.2. Preparing the Joint
The interior of the socket and exterior of the spigot shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried.
The spigot end shall be inserted into the socket right up to the back of the socket and
carefully centered by two or three laps of treated spun yarn, twisted into ropes of uniform

thickness, well caulked into the back of the socket.No piece of yarn shall be shorter than
the circumference of the pipe. The jointed pipe line shall be required levels and direction.
16.53.3. Leading
The leading of pipes shall be made by means of ropes covered with clay or by using special
leading rings. The lead shall be melted so as to be thoroughly fluid and each joint shall be
filled in one pour. The following precautions shall be taken for melting lead:
(a) The pot and the ladle, in which lead shall be put, shall be clean and dry.
(b) Sufficient quantity of lead shall be melted.
(c) Any scum or dross which may appear on the surface of the lead during melting shall
be removed.
(d) Lead shall not be overheated. The minimum quantity of lead for each joint shall be
as under.
 50 mm = 0.52 kg.
 75 mm = 0.88 kg.
 100 mm = 0.98 kg.
 150 mm = 1.20 kg.
16.53.4. Caulking
After the lead has been run into the joint, the lead shall be thoroughly caulked. Caulking of
joints shall be done after a convenient length of pipes has been laid and leaded. The
leading ring shall first be removed and any lead outside the socket shall be removed with a
flat chisel and then the joint caulked round three times with caulking tools of increasing
thickness and hammer 2 to 3 kg weight. The joints shall not be covered until the pipe line
has been tested.
16.53.5. Testing
All sand cast iron pipes and fittings including joints shall be tested by a smoke test to the
satisfaction of the Employer/PMC and left in working order after completion.
16.53.6. Lead Caulked Joints
Lead caulked joints shall be enumerated for measurement. Rate shall include the cost of
all materials and labour involved in the operations described above.
16.53.7. Painting
Cast iron pipes, fittings, holder bat clamps shall be painted with (a) one coat of primer
followed by a finishing coat both of approved quality, where exposed. (b) Two coats of
bituminous paint of approved quality, where buried under ground.
The paint shall be laid evenly and smoothly. The crossing and ‘laying off' process given
under this Specification shall be used. The painted surface shall present a uniform
appearance and glossy finish free from streaks, blisters etc.
16.53.8. Glazed Stoneware Soil Pipes
Glazed stoneware soil pipes shall be as specified and of size as specified in the approved
drawings. They shall be laid in concrete upto their haunches. Laying, jointing,
measurement shall be as per relevant Indian Standards and specifications/guidelines of
Department of Urban Development & Building Construction, Government of Nepal. The
Concrete bed shall be 15 cm thick and 50 cm wide. Concreting shall be done upto
haunches of the pipe. The concrete shall be of M15 grade of nominal mix 1 : 2 : 4 (1
cement : 2 Fine Aggregates : 4 Coarse aggregates 20 mm nominal size).
16.54. BRICK/RANDOM RUBBLE MASONRY MANHOLES
16.54.1. General
They shall be made of either brick masonry or Random Rubble stone masonry without
foot rests. The manholes shall conform to relevant Indian Standards and
specifications/guidelines of Department of Urban Development & Building Construction
and Department of Road, Government of Nepal.

16.55. SEPTIC TANK
16.55.1. General
R.C.C. septic tank shall be of size suitable for specified number of users. These shall
conform to relevant Indian Standards, specifications/guidelines of Department of Urban
Development & Building Construction, Government of Nepal and as per direction of
Employer/PMC.
16.56. SOAK PIT
16.56.1. General
The construction of Soak pit shall be carried out as shown in approved drawings and as per
relevant Indian Standards, specifications/guidelines of Department of Urban Development
& Building Construction, Government of Nepal and as per direction of Employer/PMC.
16.57. LANDSCAPING WORKS
16.57.1. Scope of Work
The scope of work shall include landscaping of the whole substation area within its
boundary wall to give a pleasant appearance to substation and its surrounding. The work
shall also include carrying out bio engineering works for slope stabilization. Whole work
shall be planned and designed by a local Nepalese architect having requisite experience in
similar works for at least 3 years. All the details of landscaping and bio engineering works
shall be executed as per design and drawings to be developed by the contractor and
approved by the Employer/PMC.
Within substation boundary, the grading and levelling shall be planned in such a manner
so as to avoid unnecessary disturbance to the existing topography and landscape.
The details of landscaping and bio engineering works as given in subsequent clauses are
indicative and not exhaustive. The details shall be finalized during detailed design and
engineering stage by the landscaping architect to be engaged by the successful bidder.

16.57.2. Approach Road to Substation and Control Room-cum-Administrative Buildings
(i) Hedges/Shurbs and trees of local species shall be planted along both sides of road
leading from main entrance of substation to Control Room-cum- Administrative
Building/ D.G. Set Room Building. The flower beds of local species shall also be
provided along both sides of the aforesaid road.
(ii) The grass of local variety shall be planted in the vacant land on both sides of the
road.
(iii) No plantation shall be carried out along the roads inside the switchyard fencing but
on roads outside the switchyard fencing, Hedges/Shrubs and trees of local species
shall be planted along both side of road along with flower beds.
16.57.3. Control Room-cum- Administrative Building/ D.G. Set Room Building:
(i) A green belt shall be developed around Control Room-cum- Administrative Building/
D.G. Set Room Building by planting grass around buildings, hedges/shrubs at the
periphery of grassed area and plants of local and suitable species in and around
grassed area.
(ii) Flower beds shall also be provided in the grassed area.
(iii) A water body in the form of a fountain shall be provided at appropriate place in the
area.
16.57.4. Vacant Areas:
(i) The area of future bays shall be kept graded and levelled with only grass planted
thereon.
(ii) Other Area: In balanced area, bio engineering works for slope stabilization and
development of greenery shall be carried out.
16.57.5. Bio Engineering Works:
The contractor shall survey and design the bio engineering works as per standard manuals
and guidelines to cope with the existing slope conditions and submit to employer for

approval. There are a number of bio engineering techniques which could be adopted and
a few of them are listed below:
(i) Grass Plantation
(ii) Brush Layering
(iii) Turfing
(iv) Bamboo Plantation
(v) Fascines
(vi) Palisades
(vii) Any other techniques
16.57.6. Choice of Appropriate Species:
The local species of vegetation and plants/ trees shall be used as they are already adapted
to the local conditions and are more likely to survive and resist to local diseases, are more
readily available, and are likely to be a lower cost option.
16.57.7. Maintenance:
The contractor shall provide care and maintenance during plant development, typically
including the following activities:
(i) Fertilization: To promote plant development, the fertilization has proven

successful and it promotes a much faster closing of plant cover which in turn
reduces the risk of erosion. Mineralized fertilizers, manure, compost etc. shall be
used. The amount, combination and timing of fertilizers are plant, site and time
specific and shall be detailed in a fertilization plan.
(ii) Irrigation: Moderate climatic zones, irrigation should only be used to sludge the
root stokes of new plantings or to assist during droughts. In arid zones or areas
with very dry summers may require frequent irrigation to ensure successful
growth.
(iii) Soil Cultivation and Soil improvement: Loosening of soil and weed control helps in

plant development particularly at the beginning. A 10-20 centimeter thick mulch

layer of rooting material (especially litter, grass, straw and weed cutting) shall be
given so as to regulate temperature and humidity close to the soil surface and
improve soil activity.
(iv) Care for trees and bushes: Woody plants may require cutting in the first 2 years to
improve their health and shape. Bushes with a single main stem are cut to produce
several main shoots.
(v) Death of Plants: If some of the plants in the bio engineering work become dead or
are not found to work, the contractor shall rework in the affected part.
(vi) (However, NEA may review)
16.58. ANTIWEED TREATMENT & STONE GRAVEL SURFACING
16.58.1. Scope of Work
The Contractor shall furnish all labour, equipment and materials required for complete
performance of the work in accordance with the approved drawings, this specification and
relevant Indian Standards.
Anti-weed treatment and gravel surfacing in the substation shall be done in the areas of
the switchyard under present scope of work. .
16.58.2. Clearing:
The area to be surfaced shall be cleared of all plants, logs, slumps, bushes, vegetation,
grass, woods, roots, rubbish, slush etc. and all other objectionable matters.
16.58.3. Application of Anti Weed Treatment
After all the structures/equipments are erected, anti-weed treatment shall be applied in
the area of switchyard where ever gravel surfacing is to be done. Once area is free of
weed and plant roots, it shall be leveled to required grade and slope.
The chemical of approved make shall be used for anti-weed treatment. The
recommendation of local agriculture or horticulture department may be sought where
ever feasible while choosing the type of chemical to be used for anti-weed treatment.
The anti-weed chemical shall be procured from reputed manufacturers. The doses and
application of chemical shall be strictly done as per manufacturer’s recommendations.
Nevertheless the effectiveness of the chemical shall be demonstrated by the contractor in

a test area of about 10.0 m X10.0 m and shall be sprinkled with water at least once in the
afternoon every day after forty eight hours of application of chemical. The treated area
shall be monitored over a period of two to three weeks for any growth of weeds by the
Employer/PMC. The final approval to chemical for anti-weed treatment shall be given by
Employer/PMC based on the results trial test.
16.58.4. Preparation of Sub Grade for Gravel Surfacing
After completion of anti-weed treatment, the surface of the switchyard area shall be
maintained, compacted to the lines and grades as shown in approved drawings and as
directed by Employer/PMC. The sub grade shall be compacted by using half ton roller
with suitable water sprinkling arrangement to form a smooth and compact surface. The
roller shall run over the sub grade till the soil is evenly and densely consolidated and
behaves as an elastic mass.
The areas that are considered by the Employer/PMC to be too congested with foundations
and structures for proper compaction of sub grade by rolling by normal rolling
equipments, the sub grade shall be compacted by hand tools. - Due care shall be
exercised so as not to damage any foundation, structures or equipment during rolling
compaction.
For easy drainage of water, the slope of 1:1000 to compacted sub-grade shall be provided
from the ridge to the nearest drain. The ridge shall be suitably located at the centre of the
area between the nearest drains. .
16.58.5. Gravel Surfacing
The work shall consist of stone dust/coarse sand and stone gravel, spread uniformly on
the switchyard area in following two layers:

(i) Stone Dust/Coarse Sand Layer : 75 mm thick (Compacted)
(ii) Stone Gravel Layer
 20/10mm graded gravel : 50 mm thick (Compacted)

 40/20 mm graded gravel : 100 mm thick (compacted)
The materials for gravel surfacing shall be free from all types of organic materials and shall
conform to IS:383 and as approved by the Employer/PMC.
The material to be used for gravel surfacing shall be uncrushed/crushed/broken stone of

specified size conforming to IS:383. Hardness, flakiness shall be as required for wearing
surfaces of concrete.
(a) Hardness
- Abrasion value as per relevant Indian Standard;
- Impact value as per relevant Indian Standard.
(b) Flakiness Index

- One test shall be conducted as per relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent
16.58.6. Compaction of Gravel Surfacing Materials
Compaction of gravel surfacing materials shall be carried out in similar way as for sub
grade by using appropriate rollers.
16.59. SUPPLY AND LAYING OF R.C.C. NON-PRESSURE PIPES
16.59.1. Non Pressure R.C.C. pipes shall be of Class NP-3 or NP-4 conforming to IS:458 as specified
in approved drawings.
16.59.2. The pipes shall be laid as per relevant Indian Standards and specifications/guidelines of
Department of Urban Development & Building Construction and Department of Road,

16.60. QUALITY ASSURANCE, FIELD TESTING AND CHECKING PLAN
16.60.1. General
The contractor shall prepare a ‘Quality Assurance and Field Testing and Checking Plan’
within 30 days after award of work to Employer for approval. No field work shall be
undertaken without having the approval of the same.
16.60.2. ‘Quality Assurance and Field Testing and Checking Plan’ to be prepared by the contractor
shall include the following specific requirements:
16.60.2.1. Contractor shall carry out all sampling and testing in accordance with the relevant Indian
Standards at his own cost in his Field Lab or lab approved by Employer/PMC and he shall
submit the results in triplicate within 5 days after completion of test.
16.60.2.2. Sampling requirement for concrete shall be as given in table 16.8 below:
TABLE-16.8
SAMPLING REQUIREMENT OF CONCRETE
Qty. of Concrete in work No. of Samples

Upto 5 Cum One
6 – 15 Cum Two
Above 16 Cum Three to Four
Sampling shall be undertaken as described below:
(a) At least 6 specimens per sample shall be taken. Three shall be tested at 7 days and
remaining three at 28 days.
(b) To control the consistency of the concrete from every mixer or mixing plant, slump
tests shall be carried every 2 hours or as directed by Employer/PMC in accordance
with IS:1199. The Employer/PMC may waive any test for small & unimportant
concreting at his discretion.

16.60.2.3. Minimum cement content in different grades of concrete shall be as given in table 16.9
below:
TABLE-16.9
MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT IN CONCRETE

Grades of Concrete Minimum cement content per
cum of finished concrete
M-10 240 kg
M-15 300 kg
M-20 330 kg
M-25 360 kg
16.60.3. Standard Field Quality Plan
The field quality plan shall include the items as given in Table – 16.10 and all other
relevant items of work:
TABLE-16.10
FIELD QUALITY PLAN
Sl. Section Sampling Code reference Review

No.
1. Foundation Material
a) Cement
Fineness, One IS: 456, IS: 269, IS: Manufacturer’s
compressive sample per 8112, IS: 12269, IS: test Certificates
strength, initial& 100 MT 1489
final setting time,
soundness etc.
b) Coarse Aggregates
Grading, Specific One IS: 383, IS: 2386 Source to be
Gravity, Crushing sample per approved by
Value, Bulk density, 100 Cum Employer/PMC
absorption value
etc.


No.
c) Fine Aggregates
Grading, Specific One IS: 383, IS: 2386 Source to be
Gravity, Crushing sample per approved by
value, Bulk density, 100 cum Employer/PMC
absorption value
etc.
d) Water Random IS: 456, IS: 3025 Source to be
approved by
Employer/PMC
2. Reinforcement Steel
a) Dimensional check Random - Employer/PMC
b) Chemical analysis, One IS: 432, IS: 1139, IS: Manufacturer

Tensile Test, Yield sample of 1786 test Certificate/
Stress/Proof stress, 40 MT one lab test
percentage
elongation, Bend
&re-bend tests
c) Placement of 100% IS: 456, IS: 2502 Employer/PMC
reinforcement check as
including cutting, per bar
bending, lap length, bending
joints, chairs, schedule at
spacer bars, tying each
etc location
3. Structural Steel
a) Dimensional Check Random - Employer/PMC
& Visual check for
rust, pitting etc.
b) Physical properties One IS: 2062 Manufacturer

of steel sample per test certificate
40 MT
4. Gantry / Equipment Foundation & Trenches
a) Excavation for Each - Employer/PMC
Dimensional Location
conformity,

No.
location, slope, etc.
b) Foundation Bolts & 100% at - Employer/PMC
Inserts, stubs sizes, each
location, levels, c/c location
distance alignment
5. Shuttering/Formwork
Alignment, plumb,
level, height,
Employer/PMC
rigidity, strutting, -do- As per specification
shoring, cleaning,
oiling bracing
6. Hallow Cement Concrete Block Masonry
a) Casting stage mix, Random
strength, Water but Employer/PMC
As per specification
Cement ratio, grit periodic
size, finishing checking
b) Laying
Alignment, plumb, Regular Employer/PMC
line and level Supervision
finishing
Plastering
6.
a) Thickness, Random As per specification Employer/PMC
evenness mortar
mix, gauges at 2 m
intervals
b) Curing 100% As per specification Employer/PMC
check
16.61. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
16.61.1. Geotechnical investigation
The measurement and payment for the work of geotechnical investigation shall be regulated as
under:

(i) Boreholes in all Types of Soils: The payment for boreholes shall be made at the unit
rate quoted in price schedule for actual depth of borehole and same shall be
inclusive of cost of making boreholes, conducting SPT at specified depths and
collection of disturbed and undisturbed soil samples from boreholes from specified
depths, packing and transportation of soil samples from site to approved Soil
Testing Laboratory, conducting prescribed tests on soil samples in laboratory and
preparation of report;
(ii) Drilling in Rock: The payment for drilling in rock shall made at the unit rate quoted
in price schedule for actual depth of drilling and same shall be inclusive of cost of
drilling, obtaining continuous cores of rock, supplying the wooden core boxes and
storing the cores therein, logging of cores by an engineering geologist,
transportation of rock samples from site to approved Rock Testing Laboratory,
conducting prescribed tests on rock samples in laboratory and preparation of
report;
(iii) Test/Trial Pits: Test/Trial Pits shall be measured in nos. and payment shall be made
as per unit rate for test pits quoted in price schedule for actual nos. of test pits
excavated at site. The quoted unit rate shall include all works required for
excavation of test pits, collection of soil samples from pit and conducting prescribed
tests on soil samples in laboratory and preparation of report;
(iii) Plate Load Test: Plate Test shall be measured in nos. and payment shall be made as
per unit rate for plate load test quoted in price schedule for actual nos. of plate test
conducted at site. The quoted unit rate shall include all works required for
conducting plate load test, collection of soil samples from pit and conducting
prescribed tests on soil samples in laboratory and preparation of report;
(iv) Electrical Resistivity Test: The payment for soil resistivity tests shall be made on
Lump Sum basis or as a Lot. Necessary numbers of electrical resistivity tests as per
design requirement and as directed by Employer/PMC shall be carried out after

formation of terraces and quoted rates shall include the cost of all operations and
preparation of report.
The quoted rates in price schedule shall include the whole scope of work as given in this
specification and shall include carrying out all specified field tests, collection of disturbed
and undisturbed soil samples, conducting all necessary laboratory tests on soil & rock
samples for determining the physical and engineering properties of soil/rock, compilation
of results and preparation of soil/geotechnical investigation report with recommendations
for type of foundations i.e. shallow type or pile type to be provided for various structures
and buildings etc.
16.61.2. Topographical Survey
The work of topographical survey shall be measured on lump sum basis for each
substation and shall cover the whole plot area of substation including area 100 m beyond
substation boundaries as well as adjoining existing roads and other important physical
features like streams, rivers, buildings/hutments etc.
16.61.3. Site Leveling and Formation of Terraces
Measurement of earth work in cutting and filling required in site leveling work and
formation of terraces for all leads and lifts including filling with suitable excavated earth
shall be made in Cubic meters as per quoted rates for excavation in Price Schedule . The
excavation in all kind of soils including soft/fissured rock and hard rock shall be measured
separately. The quantities shall be calculated with reference to existing ground level and
levels specified in approved site leveling drawings. The disposal of excess excavated earth
to designated disposal areas shall be made in Cubic Meters as per quoted rates in price
schedule.
16.61.4. Random Rubble Stone Masonry Breast & Retaining/Toe Walls
The payment for construction of Random Rubble Masonry Breast and Retaining/Toe Walls
shall be made as per the unit rate of items involved in their construction i.e. Excavation,
P.C.C., Stone Masonry Work and Concrete and their unit rate quoted in the price schedule.
No separate payment for making weep holes, providing filter behind weep holes and
providing flush or raised pointing shall be made and rates for these are deemed to be
included in the quoted rate for stone masonry.
16.61.5. R.C.C. Retaining Walls
The payment for construction of R.C.C. Retaining Walls shall be made as per the unit rate
of items involved in their construction i.e. Excavation, P.C.C., Concrete Work,
Reinforcement Steel Work and their unit rate quoted in the price schedule. No separate
payment for providing shuttering, making weep holes and providing filter behind weep
holes shall be made and rates for these are deemed to be included in the quoted rates.
16.61.6. Excavation for Foundations & Other Structures
The payment for Excavation required for foundations, cable trenches, drains etc shall be
made on cubic meter basis as per unit rates quoted in the price schedule. The quantity of
excavation shall be calculated as per approved construction drawings and allowing
150mm margin beyond foundation dimensions irrespective of actual size of excavation
made by the contractor. The rate for excavation in ordinary soil quoted in price schedule
shall include excavation in all kinds of soil including excavation in soft/fissured rock not
requiring blasting for all leads and lifts. Excavation in hard rock requiring blasting shall be
measured separately and payment shall be made as per unit rate quoted in the price
schedule. In case water table is encountered, the extra for excavation below water table
shall be paid separately as per rate quoted in the price schedule.
The rate of excavation shall include disposal of surplus earth or excavated rock to a
suitable location for all leads. The surplus earth, if disposed off within substation
boundary, shall be spread in uniform layers not exceeding 200 mm in thickness, each layer
compacted with appropriate and approved compacting equipment at optimum moisture
content to achieve Protector’s Dry Density of not less than 95% and no separate payment
for the same shall be made.
The quantity of excavation for foundations of towers/columns, lighting/lightening masts,

equipment support structures, - transformers/Reactors, fire protection walls, cable
trenches, underground tanks, , control cubicles, marshaling box shall only be measured.

The measurement of excavation for aforesaid works shall be made considering dimension
of the pit leaving 150 mm gap around the base pad (lean concrete) or actually excavated
pit, whichever is less. The quantity shall be measured in cubic meters.
No separate payment for excavation for buildings and item of works where quoted price is
on lump sum basis or Lot basis shall be made and same is deemed to be included in plinth
area rate for buildings and in Lump sum/Lot Price for other relevant items.
16.61.7. Backfilling
The payment for Backfilling around foundations, cable trenches etc shall be made on cubic
meter basis as per unit rates quoted in the price schedule. The quantity of backfilling shall
be calculated as per approved construction drawings and allowing 150mm margin beyond
foundation dimensions irrespective of actual size of excavation made by the contractor.
The backfilling shall be done in layers at optimum moisture content to achieve specified
Protector's Dry Density as per specification.
No separate payment for backfilling for buildings and other item of works where quoted
price is on lump sum basis or Lot basis shall be made and same is deemed to be included
in plinth area rate for buildings and in Lump sum/Lot Price for other relevant items.
16.61.8. Plain Cement Concrete (P.C.C.)
Providing and laying Plain Cement Concrete of all types and at all locations including all
leads and lifts shall be measured in cubic meters as per lines and levels indicated in the
approved drawings. The payment for P.C.C. shall be made as per unit rate quoted in the
price schedule.
The payment for P.C.C. required for works such as hold fasts of doors/windows/rolling
shutters, fixing of plumbing pipes, bedding concrete for sewer lines, embedment of
electrical conduits etc. shall not be made separately and deemed included in the
composite rates quoted by the bidder for respective works.

No separate payment for P.C.C. for buildings and other item of works where quoted price
is on lump sum basis or Lot basis shall be made and same is deemed to be included in
plinth area rate for buildings and in Lump sum/Lot Price for other relevant items.
16.61.9. Form & Shuttering Work
No separate payment for formwork, shuttering and staging work shall be made and its
rate deemed to be included in the unit rate of concrete in plinth area rate for buildings
and in Lump sum/Lot Price for other relevant items.
16.61.10. Reinforced Cement Concrete (R.C.C.)
Measurement of reinforced cement concrete at all locations shall be made and shall
include all leads, lifts, formwork, grouting of pockets and underpinning (but shall exclude
reinforcement & miscellaneous structural steel items like embedment, inserts, edge
protection angles etc.) of specified grade/design mix. This shall also include pre-cast R.C.C.
work and addition of water proofing compound wherever required for which no additional
payment shall be made. The quantity shall be measured in cubic meters as per lines and
levels indicated in the approved construction drawings. No deduction shall be made for
volume occupied by reinforcement/inserts/sleeves and for openings having cross-
sectional area up to 0.10 sq.m.
No separate payment for R.C.C. for buildings and other item of works where quoted price
is on lump sum basis or Lot basis shall be made and same is deemed to be included in
plinth area rate for buildings and in Lump sum/Lot Price for other relevant items.
16.61.11. Steel Reinforcement
The payment for reinforcement steel shall be made on per ton basis as per unit rate
quoted in the price schedule. Reinforcement steel shall be measured in length (as per
approved construction drawing and bar bending schedule) including hooks, if any,
separately for different diameters as actually used in R.C.C. work excluding overlaps. From
the length so measured, the weight of reinforcement shall be calculated in metric ton on
the basis of sectional weights as adopted by Indian Standards/equivalent International
standards. Wastage, overlaps, couplings, welded joints, spacer bars, chairs, stays, hangers
and annealed steel wire or other methods for binding and placing shall not be measured
and cost of these items shall be deemed to be included in the unit rates quoted for
reinforcement in price schedule.
No separate payment for reinforcement steel for buildings and other item of works where
quoted price is on lump sum basis or Lot basis shall be made and same is deemed to be
included in plinth area rate for buildings and in Lump sum/Lot Price for other relevant
items.
16.61.12. Miscellaneous Structural Steel
(a) The payment for Supply, fabrication, transportation and erection of all miscellaneous
structural steel work required for rail fixing, gratings and supports for stone filling in
transformers foundations, chequered plate covers, cable supports, earthing cleats
and edge protection angles and all other steel fittings and fixtures, inserts and
embedment in concrete shall be made on per metric ton basis and quantities
calculated as per approved drawings and actually provided at site. The unit rate for
this item shall be inclusive of cutting, grinding, drilling, bolting, welding, pre-heating
of the welded joints, applying a priming coat of steel primer and anti-corrosive
bitumastic paint/ synthetic enamel paint and setting of all types of embedment in
concrete etc.
(b) The payment of galvanized steel embedded parts and structural members shall be
made on per kg basis based on actual quantity supplied and installed at site.
(c) No separate payment for miscellaneous structural steel for buildings and other item
of works where quoted price is on lump sum basis or Lot basis shall be made and
same is deemed to be included in plinth area rate for buildings and in Lump sum/Lot
Price for other relevant items.
16.61.13. Stone filling over Grating in Transformer Foundation and Oil Drainage Arrangement
(a) Measurement of stone filling over gratings in transformer foundations shall be made
as per theoretical volume of the space to be filled in the transformer foundation as

per approved drawings. This shall be measured in cubic meters and payment made
as per unit rate quoted in the price schedule.
(b) The payment for laying R.C.C. pipes for oil drainage shall be measured in running
meters and shall include the cost of all materials and operations required for laying
the pipes as per relevant Indian standards.
(c) The construction of masonry manholes required for oil drainage from transformer
soak pit to central oil collecting pit shall be measured in numbers and payment made
on per manhole basis.
16.61.14. Road-cum-Rail Track, Jacking Pads and Pulling Blocks
(a) The quantities of excavation, P.C.C., structural concrete (R.C.C.) and reinforcement
shall be calculated based on approved drawings and payment shall be made at the unit
rate of respective item quoted in price schedule.
(b) The payment for rail shall be made in running meter as per approved drawings and
actual quantity provided at site.
(c) The payment for embedded steel parts like steel plate, angles etc required for fixing
the rail shall be made as per the unit rate for miscellaneous structural steel and
quantity calculated as per approved drawings
16.61.15. Internal Bituminous Roads
(i) The measurement of bituminous road shall be made in running meter for different
width of roads (the width specified is the width of black top of road excluding
shoulders) and shall include all items such as excavation, compaction, rolling,
watering, sub base course, WBM, shoulder, premix carpet etc complete as per
specification and approved drawings.
(ii) The measurement of strengthening of existing road (bituminous road) shall be made
on the basis of area in square meter (M2) of the top bituminous completed surface
of the road including premix carpet etc, completed as per specification.

16.61.16. Anti-weed Treatment and Stone Gravel Surfacing
The payment shall be made for the actual area in square meters of stone spreading
provided in the switchyard. It shall include providing all works as specified in the
specification of this item including anti-weed treatment and preparation of sub grade.
16.61.17. Chain Link Fencing and Gate
The Payment shall be made in running meters of the fence provided as per approved
drawing. The rate shall be including all types of posts, chain link fabric, MS Angles & Flats,
galvanizing, painting, etc complete including the excavation and concrete required for
fixing the fencing posts in ground. The - gates shall be measured in Kg and payment shall
be made as per unit rate quoted in price schedule for the actual weight of gates as per the
approved drawings. The Reinforced Concrete Pillar and their foundations required for the
installation of gates shall be paid separately as per unit rates of relevant items (i.e.
Excavation, P.C.C., R.C.C., and Reinforcement Steel) in Price Schedule.
16.61.18. Cable Trenches & Sump Pits
(a) The payment earthwork, P.C.C., R.C.C., reinforcement steel, R.C.C. Hume pipes and
miscellaneous steel required for construction of Cable Trenches, Sump Pits and cable
trench crossings shall be measured under respective items of price schedule. No
separate payment for brick work, plaster and PVC pipes used for cable trench
crossings and sealing of trench mouth shall be made.
(b) The lump sum payment for pumping arrangement per sump pit shall be made
including the cost of pump, necessary piping and safe installation of pump.
16.61.19. External Drainage of Substation
The payment for the work of external drainage system shall be made on lump sum basis
for each substation. The work shall include construction of all brick/stone masonry drains
as per specification including construction of both pipe and R.C.C. type box culverts at
road & cable trench crossing and disposal of whole surface runoff water from substation
site to natural stream/river outside the substation boundary.

16.61.20. Control Room-cum-Administrative Buildings and D.G Set Room Building
The payment for each building shall be made on plinth/floor area basis, area measured in
square meter correct up to third place of decimal. The rate shall be inclusive of all civil
works required for structure including excavation, concreting, reinforcement steel,
structural steel, stone soling, flooring, tiling, internal & external finishing works, internal
water supply and sanitary works including all specified fitting and fixtures, internal
electrification and all electrical fitting and fixtures etc. all complete. The entire work
required for completing the buildings in all respects as per this specification and approved
drawings shall be deemed to be included in this unit rate. The release of payment shall be
regulated with progress of work at following stages:
A. Control Room-Cum-Administrative Building:

(i) 15% on completion of construction up to plinth level including foundations,
brickwork, backfilling of foundation trenches, laying of DPC and filling and
compaction of earth below floor level of building.
(ii) 25% on completion of ground floor slab of control room block and roof slab of
administrative block including brickwork in walls & parapets, fixing of
doors/windows/ventilators frames, staircase, ramp (if any).
(iii) 15% on completion of roof slab of control room block including brickwork in
walls & parapets, fixing of doors/windows/ventilators frames, staircase, ramp (if
any).
(iv) 20% on completion of electrical wiring, laying of underground sanitary and water
supply pipes within building, exterior and interior plastering, plinth protection,
flooring, tile work, fixing of doors/windows/ventilators and rolling shutter (if
any), false ceiling (if any) and all other finishing works for building as a whole.
(v) 15% 0n completion of exterior and interior painting of walls, ceilings, doors,
windows, ventilators & rolling shutters, fixing of all water supply, sanitary and
electrical fitting & fixtures, connection to external water supply main, septic tank
and making toilets & kitchen/pantry functional etc. and all other specified works
for building as a whole.

(vi) 10% on completion of whole building & finishing works and its acceptance by
Employer.
B. D.G. Set Room Building and Store

(i) 20% 0n completion of construction up to plinth level including brickwork,
backfilling of foundation trenches, laying of DPC and filling and compaction of
earth below floor level of the building.
(ii) 35% on completion of superstructure including brickwork in walls & parapets,
fixing of doors/windows/ventilators frames.
(iii) 20% on completion of electrical wiring, laying of underground sanitary and water
any), false ceiling (if any) and all other finishing works for building as a whole.
(iv) 15% on completion of exterior and interior painting of walls, ceilings, doors,
windows, ventilators & rolling shutters, fixing of all electrical fitting & fixtures etc
and all other specified works for building as a whole.
(v) 10% on completion of whole building & finishing works and its acceptance by
Employer.
C. Staff Quarters
(ii) 20% on completion of first floor slab including brickwork in walls, fixing of
(iii) 15% on completion of second floor slab including brickwork in walls, fixing of
doors/windows/ventilators frames, staircase;
(iv) 10% on completion of roof slab including brickwork in walls, fixing of
doors/windows/ventilators frames, staircase, parapet;
(v) 20% on completion of electrical wiring, laying of underground sanitary and water
flooring, tile work, fixing of doors/windows/ventilators and all other finishing

works for building as a whole.
(vi) 10% 0n completion of exterior and interior painting of walls, ceilings, doors,
windows, ventilators, fixing of all water supply, sanitary and electrical fitting &
fixtures, connection to external water supply main, septic tank and making toilets
& kitchen functional etc. and all other specified works for building as a whole.
(vii) 10% on completion of whole building & finishing works and its acceptance by
Employer.
D. Guard Room
(ii) 30% on completion of roof slab including brickwork in walls & parapets, fixing of
(iii) 20% on completion of electrical wiring, laying of underground sanitary and water
any), and all other finishing works for building as a whole.
(iv) 20% 0n completion of exterior and interior painting of walls, ceilings, doors,
windows, ventilators & rolling shutters, fixing of all water supply, sanitary and
electrical fitting & fixtures, connection to external water supply main, septic tank
and making toilets & kitchen functional etc. and all other specified works for
building as a whole.
(v) 10% on completion of whole building & finishing works and its acceptance by
Employer.
E. Car Parking Shed

(i) 20% on completion of construction up to plinth level including brickwork,

backfilling of foundation trenches and filling and compaction of earth below floor
level of the shed;
(ii) 40% on completion of superstructure including erection of trusses, purlins etc.;
(iii) 30% on completion of sheeting over roof trusses and flooring, exterior and
interior painting of structural steel columns, roof trusses & roofing sheets (both
side) etc. and all other specified works for car parking shed as a whole;
(iv) 10% on completion of whole car parking shed and finishing works and its
acceptance by Employer.
16.61.21. External water supply from Source to underground water tank and from underground
water tank to all faculties in Substation
The work of external water supply shall include making arrangement for potable water
from source to underground R.C.C. water tank of 50 cubic meter capacity and from
underground water tank to all facilities including Control Room Building, D.G. Set Room
Building etc and making and providing all pumping facilities complete as per specifications
and approved scheme. The payment shall be made on lump sum basis. The contractor
shall be required to complete the work in all respect as per specifications and direction of
Employer/PMC.
16.61.22. External Sewage System for Substation
The work of External Sewage System for substation shall include laying of all soil pipes,
construction of manholes with heavy duty cast iron manhole covers and construction of
Septic Tank and Soak Pit suitable for 50 users and carrying out all works as per this
specification, related Indian standards and . Specifications/guidelines of Department of
Urban Development & Building Construction, Government of Nepal. The payment for this
work shall be made on lump sum basis. The contractor shall be required to complete the
work in all respect as per specification, approved drawings and direction of
Employer/PMC.
16.61.23. Landscaping

The landscaping of whole substation area shall be carried out by the Contractor through
an Architect specialized in the - Landscaping work of similar projects and similar
environmental setting. The payment for turfing shall be made for actual area of turfing
measured in sq.m. and unit price for turfing quoted in price schedule. For remaining
works of landscaping, the payment shall be made on lump sum basis i.e. as a 'Lot'.
16.61.24. Rate for Items of work not covered in the Specification
If any item of work is not covered in this specification but required to be executed, its rate
for payment shall be considered as per District Rate of concerned district of Nepal. If the
same is not available in the concerned District rates, the rate as per neighbouring District
of Nepal shall be considered. In the absence of availability of rate as per above, the
detailed analysis of rate as per norms of Nepal especially Department of Urban
Development & Building Construction, Government of Nepal and as approved by
Employer/PMC shall be carried out by Contractor and submitted to Employer/PMC for
approval. The rate as approved by Employer/PMC shall form the basis for the payment for
all such items of work. The decision of Employer/PMC in the above matter shall be final
and binding on contractor.

Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER –17
Galvanized Steel Structures
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 17
SUBSTATION GALVANIZED STEEL STRUCTURES
CONTENTS
Sl. No. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO

17.0 SCOPE 1
17.1 SUBSTATION LAYOUT AND SECTIONS DRAWINGS 4
17.2 SUBLET ORDERS 4
17.3 CODES AND STANDARDS 5
17.4 DESIGN AND DRAWINGS 8
17.5 MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP 10
17.6 STORAGE OF MATERIAL 12
17.7 GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 12
17.8 STATUARY REQUIREMENTS 15
17.9 DESIGN LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS 16
17.10 DESIGN OF STRUCTURES 27
17.11 FASTENERS: BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS 32
17.12 STEP BOLTS AND LADDERS 34
17.13 FOUNDATION BOLTS 34
17.14 GROUTING 35
17.15 FABRICATION 36
17.16 GALVANIZING 45
17.17 ERECTION 48
17.18 SAFTEY PRECAUTIONS 49
17.19 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN 49
17.20 BILL OF MATERIALS 50
17.21 GUARANTEED QUANTITIES OF STRUCTURES 51
Section 4 – Chapter 17 INDEX

Sl. No. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO

17.22 PAYMENT 51
17.23 INSPECTION, TESTING & ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA 51
17.24 PACKING 53
17.25 SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS / VARIATIONS 55
Section 4 – Chapter 17 INDEX

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 17
SUB-STATION STRUCTURES
17.0 SCOPE
17.0.1. These specifications are intended to cover the design, fabrication, trial assembly,
galvanizing, testing at manufacturer’s works, inspection before dispatch, packing,
transportation, storage and handling at site, erection etc. of substation galvanized steel
structures comprising gantry towers/columns, lightening/lighting masts, beams,
equipment supporting structures etc and any other structure which may be required for
incoming and/or outgoing lines with all necessary accessories as required for successful
commissioning of 220/132/33kV substations at Dhungesangu in Nepal. The tentative
layout drawings of these substations appended with these specifications. All materials
and works shall, in general, conform to these specifications and relevant Indian
17.0.2. The scope shall also include supply and erection of all types of galvanized structures
including supply of gusset plates, bolts, nuts, plain/tapered/spring washers, step bolts,
ladders, base plates, foundation bolts, all necessary inserts in concrete, equipment
mounting bolts, structure earthing bolts, fixing plates, necessary angles & bolts for
structure/ground mounted marshaling kiosks/boxes (AC/DC Marshalling box &
equipment control cabinets) and any other item as required for successful completion
of job and commissioning of substations.
17.0.3. It is the intent of the Employer/PMC to provide equipment supporting structures which
allow interchangeability of equipment at a later stage. Accordingly, Contractor is
expected to design the equipment supporting structures with the provision of stool.
Stool shall be provided by the Contractor between the equipment and its supporting
structure to match the bus bar height. The top of stool shall be connected to the
equipment and the bottom of the stool shall be connected to the base of equipment
supporting structure.

17.0.4. Contractor shall provide suitable arrangement on the equipment supporting structures,
wherever required, to suit the fixation of accessories such as marshalling boxes, MOM
boxes, Control Cabinets, Junction box, surge counter etc and incorporate the details in
the fabrication drawings of equipment supporting structures.
17.0.5. The connection of all structures to their foundations shall be with base plates and
anchor/foundation bolts.
17.0.6. All steel structures and anchor/foundation bolts, fasteners (Nuts, bolts & washers) shall
be fully galvanized as per relevant Indian Standards / equivalent International
Standards. The weight of the zinc coating shall be at least 610 gram/m 2 for structural
members and 450 gram/m2 for all bolts, nuts & washers including anchor/foundation
bolts.
17.0.7. The lightening/lighting mast shall be designed suitably so as to have illumination

platforms at required heights for installing the luminaries to obtain prescribed
illumination intensity.
17.0.8. The line diagrams of all structures of 220 kV, 132kV and 33 kV substations shall be
prepared by the contractor based on their design during detailed engineering stage.
The fabrication drawings, proto corrected drawings along with Bill of Material (BOM)
for all the structures including equipment supporting structures shall be prepared by
the contractor during detailed engineering for submission to Employer/PMC for their
approval. Supporting structure for circuit breaker shall also be designed and supplied
by the Equipment Manufacturer or Contractor.
17.0.9. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for designing, detailing, fabrication,
galvanizing and erection of the steel structures as per these specifications, testing as
per relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards and for their
satisfactory performance. All designs/drawings and details shall be subject to the
approval of the Employer/PMC who shall have the right to instruct the contractor to
make changes in designs/drawings and details necessary to make them conform to

these specifications and relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards.

The contractor shall be required:
(a) To submit the detailed design calculations for all steel structures comprising
gantry towers/columns, beams, lightening/lighting masts, equipment supporting
structures for each substation as per their approved layout & section drawings (to
be developed by the Contractor and approved by the Employer/PMC). The
structures shall be designed for specified loads and loading combinations and
meet all specified requirements.
(b) To submit design and fabrication drawings of all substation structures including
equipment supporting structures required for each substation for the approval of
Employer/PMC.
(c) To carry out testing of structures as per relevant codes and standards.
(d) To suitably mark and transport all steel structures and accessories safely to the
site and their proper and safe storage at site.
(e) To carry out erection of all structures and accessories at site for the purpose for
which structures have been designed, fabricated and supplied.
17.0.10. The approval of designs and drawings by the Employer/PMC shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility of ensuring correct designs, fabrication, galvanizing,
supply and erection of all structures and their satisfactory performance. Should any
deficiency or defect is noticed at any stage or performance was not found to be
satisfactory or meeting the requirements of these specifications, the Contractor shall
be responsible to rectify all such defects & deficiencies to the full satisfaction of
Employer.
17.0.11. The contractor shall furnish all materials, labour, tools & plants, erection equipment
etc, whether specified or not, required for the completion of job and successful
commissioning of substations.
17.0.12. The bidders shall quote lump sum price for design, supply, galvanizing, packing,
transportation, storage at site and erection of substation structures for each substation
including supply of all necessary hardware, fittings & fixtures etc required for successful
erection, testing & commissioning of substations. The rates to be quoted shall also
include the fee for the preparation of designs, design/fabrication drawings, furnishing
the required number of hard & soft copies of all design & drawings, manuals, supply of
all materials, hardware, fittings & fixtures, packing, transportation charges, octopi &
tolls, labour, freight insurance, storage at site including arranging all erection plant and
equipment etc and all temporary and permanent works necessary for satisfactory
completion of job in all respects.
17.1. SUBSTATION LAYOUT AND SECTIONS DRAWINGS
17.1.1. The following preliminary electrical layout plan and sections drawings of each
substation are attached in Section-VI of this specification for the information and
guidance of bidders.
(i) Drg. No. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/04: 220/132/33 kV Substation,

Dhungesangu: Electrical Layout ;
(ii) Drg. No. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/05: 220/132/33 kV Substation,

Dhungesangu: Electrical Sections ;
The above drawings are purely tentative and for tender purpose only and in no way
final drawings. The contractor shall be required to prepare layout and sectional
elevation drawings of each substation to meet the requirements of these
specifications and get them approved from Employer/PMC. The work shall be
executed as per approved drawings.
17.2. SUBLET ORDERS
17.2.1. No sublet order shall be placed by the Contractor on any manufacturer or supplier
without prior written approval of the Employer and when such approval is given, the
copies of all drawings/specifications referred to in the sublet order shall be furnished to
the Employer/PMC for information.

17.3. CODES AND STANDARDS
17.3.1. All works shall be carried out strictly in accordance with these specifications and
relevant Indian/Nepalese Standards or equivalent International Standard and Codes of
Practices whether mentioned in the specification or not.
17.3.2. Except where otherwise specified or implied, the design, manufacturing, fabrication
and galvanization of switchyard steel structures shall conform to the provisions of
IS:802 (Part-I/Sec-1)-1992, IS:802 (Part-I/Sec-2)-1995 and IS:802 (Part-II)-1978.
17.3.3. Unless otherwise stated, the latest version (i.e. as existing one month prior to date of
submission of bids) of standards & codes as given in Table 17.1 below shall be
applicable for steel structures and other allied works in the scope of this specification:
Table - 17.1
Indian Standards & Codes
S. No. Standard No. Title

1 IS:800 Code of practice for use of structural Steel in general
building construction.
2 IS:802 (Part-I/Sec-2)- Use of structural steel in Overhead Transmission Line
1992 Towers – Code of Practice: Part-1 Material, Loads and
Permissible Stresses
3 IS:802 (Part-II)-1992 Code of Practice for Use of structural Steel in Overhead
Transmission Line Towers: Part-II Fabrication, Galvanizing,
Inspection and Packing
4 IS:808 Specification for Rolled Steel Beams, Channels and Angle
Sections.
5 IS:813 Scheme of symbols for welding
6 IS:814 Covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steel
7 IS:815 Classification coding of covered electrodes for metal arc
welding of structural steels
8 IS:816 Code of Practice for use of material arc welding for general
construction in mild steel
9 IS:817 Code of practice for training and testing metal arc welders


10 IS:822 Code of practice for inspection of welds
11 IS:823 Code of practice for manual metal arc welding of mild steel
12 IS:875 Code of practice for structural safety of buildings: loading
standards
13 IS:919 ISO System of Limits and Fits
14 IS:1364 Specification for hexagonal bolts, screws, nuts and lock nuts
15 IS:1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners

16 IS:1573 Specification for electroplated coatings of zinc on iron and
steel
17 IS:1730 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet and strip for structural and
general engineering purposes.
18 IS:1731 Dimensions for steel flats for structural and general
engineering purposes
19 IS:1893 Criterion for earthquake resistant design of structures
20 IS:2016 Specification for plain washers
21 IS:2062 Specification for structural steel fusion welding quality
22 IS:2633 Method of testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated
articles
23 IS:4759 Specification for hot-dip zinc coatings on structural steel and
other allied products
24 IS:6639 Specification for hexagonal bolts for steel structures.
25 IS:7215 Tolerance for fabrication of steel structures
26 IS:7318 Approved tests for welders when welding procedure
approval is not required
27 IS:2363 Black hexagonal bolts, nuts and lock nuts and hexagonal
screws
28 IS:2629 Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of iron and
steel
29 IS:1978 Specification for line pipe
30 IS:3063 Specification for spring washers
31 IS:806 Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building
construction
32 IS:1161 Specification for steel tubes for structural purposes


33 IS:209 Specification for zinc
35 IS:6610 Specification for heavy washer for steel structures
36 IS:5358 Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on fasteners
37 IS:6745 Specification for methods of determination of weight of zinc
coating on zinc coated iron and steel articles
38 IS:228 Method of chemical analysis of pig iron, cast iron, plain
carbon & low alloy steel
39 IS:406 Specification for Method of CHEMICAL Analysis for slab zinc
40 IS:1083 Precision hexagonal bots, screws and nuts (BSW & BHF
threads).
41 IS:1181 Qualifying tests for metal arc welders (engaged in welding
structures other than pipes).
42 IS:1182 Recommended practice for radiographic examination of
fusion welded butt joints in steel plates
43 IS:1363 Specification for block hexagonal bolts, nuts and locks nuts
and block hexagonal screws
44 IS:1477 Code of practice for finishing of ferrous metal in buildings –
painting and allied finishers – Part-I (Operation and
workmanship).
45 IS:1599 Method of bend tests for steel products other than sheet,
wire & tubes
46 IS:1608 Method of tensile testing of steel products other than sheet
strip wire & tube
47 IS:1852 Specification for rolling and cutting tolerance for hot rolled
steel products
48 IS:2074 Ready mix paint, red oxide zinc chromate primer
49 IS:2551 Danger notice plates
50 IS:2595 Code of practice for radiographic testing
51 IS:3502 Steel for checked plates
52 IS:3613 Acceptance tests for wire flux combination for metal arc
welding for mild steel
53 IS:3658 Code for practice for liquid penetrant flow detection
54 IS:3664 Code of practice for ultrasonic testing by pulse echo method
55 IS:4000 Code of practice for assembly of structural joints using high


tensile friction grip fasteners
56 IS:5334 Code of practice for magnetic practice flow detection of
welds
57 IS:5613 Code of practice for design, installation and maintenance of
overhead power lines
58 IS:5624 Foundation bolts
59 SP:6(4) Use of high strength frication grip bolts (IS Publication)
60 IS:10238 Step bolts for steel structures
61 IS:12427 Transmission tower bolts
17.3.4. The list of Standards & Codes as given in Table 17.1 above is not exhaustive but
indicative only. All other relevant Indian/Nepalese Standard not mentioned in the list
shall also be applicable.
17.3.5. The equipment/materials meeting the requirement of any other International

standard which ensure a quality equal or better than the standard mentioned above
shall also be acceptable.
17.3.6. Where any equipment/material conforming to any other standard other than
mentioned above is offered by the bidder, then the salient points of difference
between the standards adopted and those prescribed in these specifications shall be
clearly brought out in the bid and a copy of the applicable standards shall also be
enclosed with his bid. It shall, however, be subject to the acceptance and the
approval of Employer/PMC.
17.4. DESIGNS & DRAWINGS
17.4.1. After the award of contract, the contractor shall submit to the Employer, for his
approval, the detailed design calculations, drawings for each type of gantry tower,
beams, lightening/lighting masts and equipment supporting structures etc. The
design of structures shall be accompanied with the following drawings:
(a) Loading diagrams of structures; and

(b) Single line diagram of structures.
17.4.2. The contractor shall submit the following designs and drawings as well as any other
design & drawing required in connection with substation steel structures for
approval of Employer/PMC:
(a) Design of all substation steel structures comprising gantry towers, beams,
lighting/lightening masts, equipment supporting structures etc.
(b) Design drawings of all structures including base plates, foundation bolts etc
with the size of the various members and location of joints, etc.
(c) Detailed fabrication drawings of all structures indicating the fabrication

details of all members including gusset plates, base plates, foundation bolts
etc; erection mark assigned to various members; sizes of the members;
details of joints; details of stringing points etc. The details of joints, stringing
points, base plates, foundation bolts and similar other items shall be
furnished separately in the drawing on a larger scale.
(d) One hard copy and one editable soft copy of all designs to both Employer and
PMC.
(e) Three hard copies and one editable soft copy of all drawings and bill of
materials to both Employer and PMC.
(f) Results of any test as & when conducted or required by the employer and
report thereof.
(g) Any other design or drawing or document required for successful completion
of job as desired by Employer.
17.4.3. The fabrication drawings shall be prepared by the Contractor based on approved line
diagram of structures and submitted to Employer/PMC for approval. The fabrication
drawings shall indicate complete details of fabrication and erection including all
erection/fabrication splicing details, joint details, weld sizes & lengths, bolt details

and all customary details in accordance with standard structural engineering

practice.
17.4.4. The approval of designs & drawings by Employer/PMC shall, however, not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility for safety and durability of structures and good
connections and any loss occurring due to defective design, fabrication or
workmanship shall be borne by the contractor.
17.4.5. The Contractor shall submit hard copy and editable soft copy of all designs preferably
in STAAD PRO and drawings in AUTOCAD to Employer/PMC. The Contractor shall
submit the copy of relevant Indian/International Standards & Codes referred to by
him in design of structures to Employer/PMC for reference if necessary during
17.4.6. In case, the Employer/PMC feels that any design or drawing is required to be
modified even after its approval, the Contractor shall modify the said design/drawing
and resubmit the same for approval.
17.5. MATERIALS & WORKMANSHIP

17.5.1.1. All materials used in the manufacture of the substation steel structures shall be of
tested and best quality conforming to relevant Indian/Nepalese standards. The
materials, for which no Indian/ Nepalese Standards exist, shall be in accordance with
any other mutually acceptable International Standard.
17.5.1.2. The workmanship shall be of the high order in accordance with relevant Indian
standards and best engineering practices.
17.5.2. Structural Steel Sections and Plates
17.5.2.1. Structural steel of tested quality conforming to IS: 2062-2011 shall be used for the
fabrication of steel structures, base plates, foundation bolts etc. The structural steel
sections and plates shall be hot rolled manufactured either using mild steel of Grade
E250 (Designated Yield Strength 250 MPa) or high tensile strength steel of Grade
350 (Designated Yield Strength 350 MPa).

17.5.2.2. Structural Steel Sections used for the fabrication of structures shall, in general,
conform to IS: 808-1989.
17.5.2.3. Structural Steel plates used in the fabrication of steel structures shall be of Grade
E250 (Designated Yield Strength 250 MPa) or Grade E350 (Designated Yield Strength
350 MPa) of tested quality conforming to IS: 2062-20117. Flats of equivalent grade
meeting mechanical strength and metallurgical properties may also be used in place
of plates for packing plates and packing washers.
17.5.2.4. Other equivalent grade of structural steel angle sections and plates conforming to
any other equivalent International Standards can also be used if approved by the
Employer. The steel sections and plates conforming to any other International
standards, if used, shall be of equal or superior quality with corresponding Indian
Standards. However, the use of steel of grade having designated yield strength of
more than 350 MPa shall not be permitted.
17.5.2.5. All steel sections and plates supplied shall be free from all imperfections, mill scales,
slag intrusion, laminations, pitting, rusts etc that may impair their strength,
durability and appearance. All materials shall be of tested quality and the test
certificates from Manufacturer in respect of each consignment shall be submitted by
the contractor to employer for acceptance. If any clarification on test certificates
sought by the Employer/PMC shall be promptly furnished by the contractor. Till test
certificates are accepted by the Employer/PMC, the steel of that particular
consignment shall not be used in works.
17.5.2.6. Samples of all materials procured by the Contractor and workmanship proposed to
be employed in the execution of the works may be inspected, at any time, by the
Employer/PMC. In case either sample of any material or workmanship is found to be
of substandard/unacceptable quality, the Contractor shall immediately discontinue
use of such material and workmanship and get fresh samples approved from the
Employer/PMC. Nothing shall affect the liberty of the employer to reject portions of
the structures where defective materials and/or workmanship have already been
used before detection.

17.5.3. Bolts, Nuts and Washers

17.5.3.1. The bolts conforming to IS: 12427 and of property class 5.6 as per IS: 1367(Part-III)
and matching nut of property class 5.0 as per IS: 1367(Part-VI) shall be provided.
17.5.3.2. Flat and tapered washers shall be of mild steel conforming to relevant Indian
Standard.
17.5.3.3. Spring washers conforming to IS: 3063 shall be provided.
17.5.3.4. Foundation bolts shall be of mild steel of Grade E250 (Designated Yield Strength 250
MPa) conforming to IS: 2062.
17.5.4. Test Certificates
17.5.4.1. Copies of all test certificates relating to material procured by the Contractor for the
works shall be submitted to Employer/PMC.
17.6. STORAGE OF MATERIAL
17.6.1. All materials shall be stored in such a manner so as to prevent deterioration and to
ensure the preservation of their quality and fitness for the work. Any material which
has deteriorated or has been damaged shall be removed from Contractor’s yard or
site stores immediately.
17.6.2. Steel sections for fabrication of structures shall be stored in separate stacks above
ground, section wise and length wise so that they can be easily inspected at any
time.
17.6.3. Bolts, nuts and washers and other fastening materials shall be stored on racks off the
ground with a coating of suitable protective oil. These shall be stored in separate
gunny bags or compartments in accordance to diameter, length and quality.
17.7. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
17.7.1. Structural steel of tested quality conforming to IS:2062-2011 shall be used for the
fabrication of substation steel structures. The steel shall be either Mild steel of grade
Fe250 or high tensile steel of grade Fe350.
17.7.2. Except where otherwise specified or implied, the design, manufacturing, fabrication,
galvanizing etc of steel structures shall conform to the provisions of IS:802 (Part-

I/Sec-1)-1992, IS:802 (Part-I/Sec-2)-1995 and IS:802(Part-II)-1978 and other relevant

Indian Standards.
17.7.3. The Contractor shall furnish the most economical design for substation steel
structures conforming to these specifications, relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent
17.7.4. The structures shall be self-supporting lattice type steel structures with bolted
connections and fully galvanized. No welding shall be allowed in lattice structures
except for connecting the base plates & stiffeners to the legs of structures.
17.7.5. The structures shall be so designed that only the rationalized ISI metric hot rolled
sections of tested quality conforming to IS: 808 and IS: 2062 are used in fabrication
of substation steel structures. Further, the Contractor, while designing substation
structures, shall use only such sizes of steel sections which are easily available and
procurable. Substitution, if any, of steel sections in the structures by higher sizes,
due to non-availability or any other reasons, shall be at the cost of Contractor and
the Employer shall not accept any liability on this account.
17.7.6. The bidders shall take into account any fabrication wastages while quoting rates and
the Employer shall not accept any liability in connection with wastage of steel during
fabrication or otherwise.
17.7.7. While designing gantry towers/columns, beams, lightening/lighting masts,

equipment supporting structures etc, the base width of structures and size of beams
shall be so chosen so that there is no hindrance to various electrical clearances and
adequate electrical clearances as specified in these specifications, relevant Indian
Standards/ equivalent International Standards and statuary rules and regulations of
the country of Employer, whichever is more stringent shall be ensured.
17.7.8. Grounding of all steel structures shall be done as specified in these specifications.
17.7.9. The structures shall be designed for dead loads, live loads, wind loads, seismic loads,
short circuit forces, operational loads, conductor/shielding wire/ground wire
tensions & deviation loads and the load of conductors, insulators, shielding/ground

wire, hardware and all fittings & fixtures, as applicable under specified loading
conditions.
17.7.10. The equipment supporting structures shall be either pipe type or lattice type as per
the support requirement of equipment and fully galvanized and shall be designed to
carry the weight of equipments, conductors, hardware, all fittings & fixtures, wind
loads, earthquake loads, short circuit forces, operational loads etc.
17.7.11. Lightening masts, if provided, shall also cater to the station lighting purposes. The
height of lightening/lighting mast shall be as per approved structural layout and
designed for diagonal wind also. The platforms shall be provided at heights required
for mounting of lighting fixtures. Size of platforms shall be adequate for mounting a
minimum of four lighting fixtures on each side. Provision shall be made for tilting the
lighting fixtures to suitable angle. The platforms shall also have protection railing.
The lightening masts shall be provided with structural steel ladder within its base
upto the highest platform. The ladder shall be provided with safety cage.
17.7.12. If luminaries are proposed to be fixed on gantries/towers, then the loading for the
same shall be considered in the design. The holes in the relevant members of
structures for fixing the brackets for luminaries shall be provided wherever required.
17.7.13. All gantry towers and beams shall be designed as dead end structures i.e. all the
balancing conductors/wires on one side of gantry shall be assumed broken. The
structures shall be designed for normal condition and under short circuit condition as
well as for earthquake loads. The Contractor can rationalize the designs and reduce
the varieties if it is economical. All gantry towers and beams of same designation
shall be interchangeable.
17.7.14. The sequence of applying tension during stringing shall also be taken care of in the
design of structures and specified by the contractor on the drawings.
17.7.15. The beams shall be connected with gantry towers/columns by bolted joints.
17.7.16. Foundation bolts shall be designed for the loads for which structures are designed.

17.7.17. The analysis of structures shall be done with well established modern computer
software programme like STAAD PRO. The computer software programme to be
employed should have been prepared or approved by a recognized institution. The
contractor shall submit the particulars and name of the computer programme as
well as names of the customers to whom the substation steel structures have been
supplied based on the said computer programme and also the structures test results
providing the efficacy of the programme to the Employer/PMC for approval before
taking up the design.
17.7.18. The contractor shall also submit manual calculations, if required by the
Employer/PMC, for verifying the analysis and design results of the structures
obtained using software.
17.7.19. Hard copy of all designs along with soft copy of input files of the computer software
used for analysis of various structures (i.e. gantry towers & beams,
lightening/lighting masts, equipment supporting structures etc) shall be submitted
by the contractor to Employer/PMC for approval. The Employer shall check the
design of structures submitted by the Contractor and if any modifications/ changes
are necessitated consequent to the checking, the same shall be incorporated by the
contractor without any additional cost to the Employer.
17.7.20. Design Criteria to be prepared by Contractor: The Contractor shall be required to

prepare a detailed design criteria and basis for the design of substation steel
structures bringing out the standards proposed to be used, the details of materials &
loads, analysis & design methods and computer software proposed to be used and
all other relevant details in conformity with this specification and submit the same to
Employer/PMC for approval. The design of substation structures shall be taken up
only after the approval of aforesaid design criteria & basis by Employer/PMC.
17.8. STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS

17.8.1. Statutory requirements as laid down in the Safety and Electricity Supply Regulations
of the country of Employer or by any other statutory body applicable to such
structures shall be met and satisfied.

17.9. DESIGN LOADS AND LOAD COMBINATIONS
17.9.1. The substation steel structures shall be designed to withstand the following loads as
applicable to respective structure:
(a) Dead loads;
(b) Tension in conductors/wires under various climatic conditions;
(c) Live Loads;
(d) Wind loads;
(e) Earthquake/Seismic loads;
(f) Short Circuit Forces;
(g) Erection loads;
(h) Service loads;
(i) Operational loads;
(j) All secondary effects due to temperature, shrinkage etc; and
(k) Any other special load during erection or the service period of structures.
17.9.2. All structures shall be designed for the worst combination of dead loads, live loads,
conductor/shield wire/ground wire tensions, wind loads, seismic forces, short circuit
forces, etc as per relevant Indian Standards / equivalent International Standards. The
loads due to deviation of conductor/shield wire/ground wire, unbalanced tension in
conductor/shield wire/ground wire, torsional load due to unbalanced vertical and
horizontal forces, erection loads, service loads, operational loads including ‘snatch’ in
the case of bundled conductors etc shall also be considered in the design.
17.9.3. Wind and Seismic Loads shall not be considered acting simultaneously on structures
i.e. only one load out of two shall be considered at a time in the design of structures
in combination of other loads.
17.9.4. Short Circuit Forces: Short circuit forces shall be estimated as specified in IEC 865 or
relevant Indian Standard/ equivalent International Standard and shall be subject to
the approval of Employer. Short circuit forces shall be calculated considering a fault
level of 40.0 kA for 220kV, 31..5KA for 132kV and 25KA for 33kV or as directed by the
Employer/PMC.
17.9.5. Wind Loads: Wind pressure on steel structures, rigid bus bar tubes, conductors,
ground/shield wires, insulator strings, hardware, other fittings & fixtures and
equipment shall be considered as per IS:802(Part-I/Sec-1)-1995 for specified wind
zone.
17.9.6. Earthquake/Seismic Forces: Earthquake/Seismic Forces shall be considered and

worked out in accordance with IS:1893 for seismic Zone – V. The appropriate inertia
loadings on various structures shall be assessed depending upon individual
responses of the structures and as stipulated in IS:1893. The vertical seismic co-
efficient, where applicable, shall be taken as half of the horizontal seismic co-
efficient. In important structures wherever there is a possibility of amplification of
vertical seismic co-efficient, the stipulations of IS:1893 shall be followed.
17.9.7. Vertical Loads
17.9.7.1. The vertical loads shall comprise the following loads:
(i) Weight of rigid bus bar, conductor, ground/shield wire, jumpers etc;
(ii) Weight of insulators, hardware and other fittings & fixtures;
(iii) Self-weight of structure and respective equipment;
(iv) Weight of under hung connectors where applicable; and
(v) Weight of man with tools at each conductor point or any location of structure
critical for a particular member.
17.9.7.2. The vertical loads due to the weight of bus bars, approach span conductors,
shield/ground wires, insulator strings, equipment etc if supported on the gantry,
shall be considered in the design of beams & gantry towers.

17.9.7.3. A provision of a load of 1500 N shall be made for a lineman with tools in the design
of substation structures. The weight of man with tools shall also be assumed to act
anywhere on the horizontal members and members with inclination up to 150.
17.9.7.4. The self-weight of the beam shall be considered in the design of beams. In case of
the design of gantry towers, lightening/lighting mast, equipment supporting
structures, the weight of superincumbent portion of the structure shall be
considered in the design.
17.9.8. Conductor/ Wire Tension Loads
17.9.8.1. The maximum working tension for bus bars, conductors and shield wires shall be
considered as per Sag Tension calculations or specified, whichever is more critical.
17.9.8.2. The loads due to wire tensions shall be calculated along and transverse to the beam
axis at the points of attachment of conductor/wires. In case of gantry towers and
lightening masts, the wire tensions shall be resolved in the direction of its adjacent
faces.
17.9.8.3. The worst condition of unbalanced conductors and shield wire loads, with all
balancing conductor/wire on the opposite side of the structure shall be assumed to
be broken for the design of structures.
17.9.9. Terminal/ Line Take off Gantries
17.9.9.1. Terminal/line take off gantries shall be designed for a minimum conductor tension of
2.0 ton per phase for 220 kV, 1.0 ton per phase for 132 kV and 0.50 ton for 33 kV or
as per actual requirement whichever is higher.
17.9.9.2. The distance between terminal gantry and dead end tower shall be taken as 200
meters for 220kV, 150 meters for 132kV and 80 meters for 33 kV switch yard or as
actual whichever is more. The design of these terminal gantries shall also be checked
considering + 300 deviation of conductor in both vertical and horizontal planes. For
other gantries, the structural layout requirements shall be adopted in the design.

17.9.9.3. The maximum stringing tensions in the approach spans shall be taken as per design
of dead end towers and actual site conditions.
17.9.10. COMBINATION OF LOADS
17.9.10.1. The structures shall be designed for the two loading conditions i.e. normal condition
and abnormal condition. In abnormal condition, short circuit forces or earthquake
loads whichever is more critical shall be combined with loads under normal
condition. The earthquake loads and wind loads shall not be considered together i.e.
one load shall be considered at a time. In both conditions, the design of all structures
shall be based on the assumption that all the balancing conductors/wires on one side
are broken. In addition, all structures shall also be checked under Safety &
Maintenance Condition.
17.9.10.2. The combination of loads shall be made under the normal and abnormal conditions
for wind blowing either normal to beam (longitudinal direction) or parallel to beam
(transverse direction). In case of equipment supporting structures and stand alone
structures like lighting masts etc, wind shall be assumed acting normal to two
adjacent faces of structure, one at a time as well as in diagonal direction. Loads shall
be resolved into transverse, longitudinal and vertical directions for the purpose of
design. All balancing conductors/wires on one side of gantry shall be considered
broken in Normal Condition as well as in Abnormal Condition.
17.9.10.3. Normal Condition
(i) Wind loads on bus bars, conductors, shield/ground wires, insulator string,
jumpers, other hardware, fitting& fixtures, equipments, members of structure
etc.
(ii) Winds on approach span conductors and ground wire.
(iii) Unbalanced loads due to conductor/wire tensions considering all the

balancing conductors/wires on one side being broken;
(iv) Deviation loads due to conductor/wire tensions;

(v) Dead loads of wires, insulators, hardware, fitting & fixtures, equipment,
structural members, weight of lineman with tools etc.
The above loads shall be resolved in transverse, longitudinal and vertical directions as
under:
(a) Wind Loads: Wind load on gantry towers, Lightening/Lighting Mast, beams,
bus bar, conductors, shield/ground wires, jumpers, connectors, insulators,
equipment, other hardware, fittings & fixtures etc with wind blowing either in
Transverse or Longitudinal direction;
(b) Transverse Loads: Component of Mechanical Tension due to conductor and

shield/ground wire deviation in Transverse direction;
(c) Longitudinal Loads: Component of Mechanical Tension due to conductor and

shield/ground wire deviation in Longitudinal direction;
(d) Vertical Loads: Load due to weight of conductor, shielding wire, insulator
strings, jumpers, hardware, other fittings & fittings, connectors, accessories,
self-weight of structure, component of Mechanical Tension of conductor and
shielding/ground6+ wire in vertical direction.
17.9.10.4. Abnormal Condition
Either of the two conditions viz. short circuit condition or earthquake condition,
whichever is more stringent, shall be considered for the design of substation steel
structures as described below:
(a) Short Circuit Condition: Where short circuit loads are specified, these shall be
considered in addition to the combination of loads as stipulated in Normal
Condition.
(b) Earthquake Condition: Earthquake/Seismic forces as specified shall be considered

in addition to the combination of loads as stipulated in Normal Condition
excluding the wind loads.

17.9.10.5. Safety & Maintenance Condition: All bracing and redundant members of the gantry
towers, beams, lightening/lighting masts and equipment supporting structures which
are horizontal or inclined up to 150 from horizontal shall be designed to withstand an
ultimate vertical load of 1500 N considered acting at the center or any other point of
the member independent of all other loads but including self weight of member. All
gantry towers, beams and masts shall also be designed to withstand, independent of
all other loads but considering self weight of structure, an ultimate vertical load of
1500 N as a weight of Lineman with tools and an additional load of 3500 N acting at
each conductor attachment point of beam and shield/ground wire peak.
17.9.10.6. The Substation steel structures shall be designed for the most stringent
combinations of loadings as specified above in Normal and Abnormal conditions and
checked under safety & maintenance condition and shall be able to withstand these
loads without exceeding the minimum guaranteed yield stress of material as per
IS:802(Part-1/Sec-1)-1995 without any injury or permanent deflection.
17.9.10.7. Sag Tension Calculations
17.9.10.8. Sag tension calculations for conductor and shield/ground wire shall be made for the
following conditions:
(i) Full wind pressure on conductor and shield/ground wire at every day
temperature;
(ii) 36 % of full design wind pressure on conductor and shield/ground wire at

minimum temperature;
(iii) Every day temperature and nil wind (Initial condition);
(iv) 850 C temperature for ACSR conductor (950 C temperature in case of AAAC or
AA conductor) and nil wind; and
(v) Minimum temperature and nil wind.
17.9.10.9. The sag of shield/ground wire shall be maintained within 90% of the conductor sag.
The effect of insulator string on calculation of conductor sag shall also be considered.

17.9.10.10. Initial tension under every day temperature and ‘nil’ wind as applicable for
conductor and shield/ground wire shall be such that maximum sag at maximum
temperature is within permissible limits keeping in view the electrical clearances
required from ground/ equipments / structures. Final sag shall be maintained
considering the effect of insulator string.
17.9.11. Computation of Wind Loads
17.9.11.1. The wind pressure shall be assumed as acting horizontally.
17.9.11.2. Wind Load shall be corresponding to Wind Zone 4 of IS: 802 (Part-1/Section-1)-1995.
The relevant design parameters for Wind Zone 4 shall be as under:
(a) Basic wind speed ‘Vb’ = 47 m/s [which is peak gust velocity averaged over a
short time interval of about 3 seconds at mean height of 10 meter above
ground level in an open terrain (Terrain Category 2) and has been worked out
for a return period of 50 years]
(b) Reliability Level : 1
(c) Terrain Category: 2
(d) Reference Wind Speed ‘VR’ = Vb/K0 [VR is extreme value of wind speed over
an averaging period of 10 minutes duration and K0 is factor to convert 3
seconds peak gust speed into average speed of wind during 10 minutes period
at a level of 10 meters above ground. The value of K0 is 17.375.
‘VR’ = 47/1.375 = 34.18 m/s
(e) Design Wind Speed ‘Vd’ = VR x K1 x K2
Where K1 is Risk Coefficient & K2 is Terrain Roughness Coefficient;
K1 = 1.0 (For Reliability Level 1)
K2 = 1.0 (For Terrain Category 2)
Thus Design Wind Speed Vd = 1.0 x 1.0 x 34.18 = 34.18 m/s
(f) Design Wind Pressure Pd = 0.6 x Vd2

= 0.6 x 34.18 x 34.18 = 701 N/m2
17.9.11.3. Gantry towers/columns, beams, Lightening/Lighting Masts and equipment

supporting structures etc shall be designed for Design Wind Pressure of 701 N/m2.
17.9.11.4. The wind load on structures shall be determined assuming the specified wind
pressure to be acting on the projected area of the members on the windward face in
accordance with IS:802 (Part-I/Sec-1)-1995 considering applicable Drag Coefficient,
Gust Response Factor etc.
17.9.11.5. The wind load on bus bars, approach span conductors and shield wires shall be
determined in accordance with IS:802 (Part-I/Sec-1)-1995 assuming the specified
wind pressure to be acting on full projected area. In case of bundle conductors (more
than one conductor per phase), the wind pressure shall be assumed as acting on full
projected area of each sub-conductor in the bundle.
17.9.11.6. The wind load on insulator string shall be calculated in accordance with IS:802 (Part-
I/Sec-1)-1995 by taking the effective projected area of the cylinder with diameter
equal to that of the insulator skirt and length based on the number of discs and
hardware in the insulator string.
17.9.11.7. The wind load on equipment shall be calculated based on the design wind pressure
in accordance with IS: 802(Part-I/Sec-1)-1995 considering projected area of
equipment perpendicular to wind direction.
17.9.11.8. The direction of the wind shall be assumed so as to produce the maximum stress in
any member for the combination of wind loads and other loads. For this condition,
wind shall be assumed acting in two directions at right angles to each other and
critical wind load shall be considered for the design of structures. The diagonal wind
shall also be considered for standalone structures like equipment supporting
structures, lighting masts etc.
17.9.11.9. Substation Steel Structures shall be designed for the maximum tension in conductor
and shield/ground wire corresponding to any of the following conditions whichever
is more critical:

(i) Full design wind pressure and every day temperature;
(ii) 36% of full design wind pressure and minimum temperature.
Provided that the tension in wires under any of the above conditions does not
exceed 70% of ultimate tensile strength of conductor/ ground wire.
17.9.11.10. Wind Load on Structure: In order to determine the wind load on Gantry Towers,
Beams, Lightening/Lighting Masts, Equipment Supporting Structures, it shall be
divided into different panels having a height/length ‘h’. These panels are normally
taken between the intersections of the legs and bracings. For a lattice structures of
square cross section, the resultant wind load Fwt in Newton, for wind normal to the
panel, on a panel of height/length ‘h’ applied at the center of gravity of this panel
shall be as under:
Fwt= Pd x Cdt x Ae x Gt
Where
Pd= Design wind pressure in N/m2;
Cdt = Drag coefficient for panel under consideration against which the wind is
blowing. Values of Cdt for the different solidity ratio shall be as per Table-5 of
IS: 802(Part-1/Sec-1)-1995.
Ae = Total net surface area of members in the panel under consideration projected
normal to the face in sq m.
Gt = Gust response factor, peculiar to the ground roughness and depends on the
height above ground. Values of Gt shall be as per Table-6 of IS:802(Part-1/Sec-
1)-1995.
17.9.11.11. Wind Load on Conductor, Shield/Ground Wire and Jumpers etc: The load due to
wind on each conductor and shield/ground wire, Fwc in Newton applied at supporting
point normal to the conductor or shield/ground wire shall be determined by the
following expression:
Fwc= Pd x Cdc x L x d x Gc

Where:
Pd = Design wind pressure in N/m2;
Cdc = Drag coefficient, taken as 1.0 for conductor and 1.2 for earth wire;
L = Wind span, being sum of half the spans on either side of supporting
Structures, in meters;
d = Diameter of conductor/earth wire, in meters
Gc = Gust response factor, takes into account the turbulence of the wind and
the dynamic response of the conductor. Values of Gcshall as per Table-7
of IS:802 (Part-1/Sec-1)-1995 for the average height of conductor /
ground wire above ground.
The average height of conductor shall be taken up to clamping point of conductor

less two-third sag at minimum temperature and no wind. The average height of the
shield/ground wire shall be taken up to clamping point less two-third sag at minimum
temperature and ‘nil’ wind.
17.9.11.12. Wind Load on Insulator Strings: Wind load on insulator strings ‘Fwi’ shall be
determined on insulator length from the attachment point to the center line of the
conductor in case of suspension insulators string and up to the end of clamp in case
of tension insulators string , in the direction of the wind as follows:
Fwi = CdixPd x Ai x Gi
Where,
Cdi = Drag coefficient of insulators taken as 1.2;
Pd = Design wind pressure in N/ m2;
Ai = Area of insulator string projected horizontally on a vertical plane parallel to the

axis of the string. In the absence of actual value, it may be taken as 50% of the
gross projected area of the cylinder with diameter equal to that of the insulator
skirt; and

Gi = Gust response factor, peculiar to the ground roughness and depends on the
height of insulator attachment point above ground. Values of G i shall be as per
Table-6 of IS: 802 (Part-1/Sec-1)-1995.
17.9.12. Computation of Conductor/Wire Tension Loads
17.9.12.1. The maximum tension for conductors and shield/ground wires shall be based on Sag
Tension Calculations as per following conditions whichever is more stringent:
(i) Full design wind pressure on conductor and shield/ground wire at every day
temperature; and
(ii) 36% of full design wind pressure on conductor and shield/ground wire at
minimum temperature.
17.9.12.2. The maximum tension to be considered for the design of structures shall be subject
to the approval of the Employer.
17.9.12.3. The loads due to conductor/wire tensions shall be resolved along three
perpendicular directions to the beams and gantry towers and considered accordingly
in the design.
17.9.12.4. The worst condition of unbalanced conductors and shield/ground wire loads, with all
balancing conductor/wire on the opposite side of the structure assumed broken shall
be considered for the design of structures.(It is repetition)
17.9.13. Strength Factors Related to Quality
17.9.13.1. The design of substation steel structures shall be carried out in accordance with the
provisions covered in IS: 802(Part-1/Sec-2)-1992. However, to account for the
reduction in strength due to dimensional tolerances of the structural sections, the
following strength factors shall be considered depending upon the yield strength of
steel:

(i) If steel with minimum guaranteed yield strength is used for fabrication of
substation structures, the estimated loads shall be increased by a factor of 1.02 to
account for dimensional tolerances.
(ii) If steel of minimum guaranteed yield strength is not used for fabrication of
substation structures, the estimated loads shall be increased by a factor of 1.05,
in addition to that mentioned in (i) above.
17.10. DESIGN OF STRUCTURES
17.10.1. The design of lattice type of steel structures for gantries, masts and equipment
supporting structures shall be carried out in accordance with procedure and
guidelines specified in IS:802(Part-1/Sec-1)-1995, IS:802(Part-1/Sec-2)-1992 and
IS:802(Part-II)-1978 and as given herein under. Indian Standard IS:800 shall be
referred to and used for any aspect of design not covered in IS:802.
17.10.2. The structural design of pipe type equipment supporting structures shall be carried
out in accordance with IS: 806 entitled ‘Code of Practice for Steel Tubes in General
Building Construction.’
17.10.3. Minimum Thickness and Size of Members
17.10.3.1. The minimum thickness of angle section used in the design of substation steel
structures, unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification, shall be kept
not less than the following values:
(a) Main leg members of gantry towers, Beams, lightening/lighting masts, and
equipment supporting structures : 5 mm
(b) For all other members : 4 mm
(c) The thickness for gusset plate shall not be less than 6.0 mm. Where a gusset
plate is required to transmit stress, it shall not be less than thickness of the
thickest bracing member connected plus 2.0 mm.
(d) Only Equal Angles shall be used and size of angle shall not be less than 45 x 45
mm

17.10.4. Allowable Stresses
17.10.4.1. Axial Stress in Tension
The estimated tensile stress on the net effective sectional area in various members
shall not exceed 250 N/mm2 for mild steel sections or the specified yield stress of
steel for high tensile steel sections (if proposed to be used in the fabrication of
substation steel structures and agreed to by Employer) as per IS: 2062-2011 or any
other equivalent to International Standards.
17.10.4.2. Axial Stress in Compression
(A) The estimated compressive stress in various members shall not exceed the
value given by the formulae in clause 5.2 of IS: 802 (Part-I/Sec-2). As per said
formula, the allowable unit stress Fa, in Mpa on the gross cross sectional area of
the axially loaded compression members shall be calculated as under:
𝐾𝑙⁄𝑟 2
(a) 𝐹𝑎 =[1 − 1⁄2 ( ) ] × 𝐹𝑦
𝐶𝑐
Where 𝐾𝑙⁄ ≤ 𝐶
𝑟 𝑐
and,
𝜋 2 ×𝐸
(b) 𝐹𝑎 = 𝐾𝑙⁄ 2
𝑟
When 𝐾𝑙⁄ ˃𝐶
𝑟 𝑐
Where,
2𝐸
Cc = π×√ 𝐹
𝑦
𝐹𝑦 = minimum guaranteed yield stress of the material, Mpa
E = modulus of elasticity of steel that is 2x105Mpa,
𝐾𝑙⁄ = largest effective slenderness ratio of any unbraced segment

𝑟
of the member,
L = un-braced length of the compression member in cm, and

r = appropriate radius of gyration in cm.
(B) The formulae given in (A) above are applicable provided the largest width to
thickness ratio ‘b/t’ is not more than the limiting value given by:
( 𝑡 )Lim = (210⁄ )
𝑏
√𝐹𝑦
Where
B = distance from edge of fillet to the extreme fibre in mm, and
t = thickness of flange in mm.
(C) Where the width to thickness ratio exceeds the limit given in (B), the formulae
given in (A) shall be used substituting for Fy the value Fcr given by:
6.77×𝑏⁄𝑡×𝐹𝑦
(a) 𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 1.677 — 𝑏⁄
𝑡 𝑙𝑖𝑚
𝑏⁄ 𝑏
When 𝑡𝑙𝑖𝑚 ≤ ⁄𝑡 ≤ 378/√𝐹𝑦
And,
(b) 𝐹𝑐𝑟 = 65550/(𝑏⁄𝑡)2
When 𝑏⁄ > 378/√𝐹

𝑡 𝑦
Note:- The maximum permissible value of b/t for any type of steel section shall not
exceed 25.
17.10.5. Redundant Members
17.10.5.1. The redundant members shall be checked individually for 2.5 percent of axial load
carried by the member to whom it supports. In addition, the members shall also
satisfy the requirements specified under ‘Safety & Maintenance Condition’ in clause
17.9.117.4

17.10.6. Stresses in Bolts
17.10.6.1. The estimated stresses in bolts shall not exceed the values given in IS:802 (Part-1/
Sec-2) which are reproduced in Table – 17.2 below.
TABLE – 17.2
ULTIMATE STRESSES IN BOLTS in MPa
Nature of stress Permissible Stress For Bolts Remarks

of Property Class 5.6
Shear Stress on Gross 310 For bolts in double shear, the
Area of bolts area to be assumed shall be
twice the area defined. For
gross area of bolts, refer item
(a) in clause 17.10.6.2 below.
Bearing Stress on Gross 620 For the bolt area in bearing,
Diameter of Bolts see item (b) in clause
17.10.6.2 below.
Axial Tensile Stress 250
17.10.6.2. Gross area and Bearing area of bolts shall be considered as under:
(a) Gross area of Bolt: For the purpose of calculating the shear stress, the gross
area of bolts shall be taken as the nominal area of the bolt i.e. (π x d2)/4
where‘d’ is the nominal diameter of bolt.
(b) Bearing Area of Bolt: It shall be taken as ‘d x t’ where ‘d’ is the nominal
diameter of the bolt and ‘t’ is the thickness of the thinner of the parts jointed.
(c) Where the material of bolt and the structural members are of different
grades, the bearing strength of the joint shall be governed by the lower of
two.
17.10.7. Slenderness Ratio
17.10.7.1. Slenderness ratio of compression and redundant members shall be computed in

accordance with clause 6 of IS:802 (Part-1/sec-2) which is reproduced in Table – 17.3
below:

Table – 17.3
Permissible Slenderness Ratio
Sl. No. Type of Members Value of KL/r

1. Compression Members
(i) Leg sections or joint members bolted in both faces at L/r
connections for 0 < L/r ≤120
(ii) Members with concentric loading at both ends of the L/r
unsupported panel for 0 < L/r ≤120
(iii) Member with concentric loading at one end and normal 30+0.75 L/r
framing eccentricity at the other end of the unsupported
panel for 0 < L/r ≤ 120
(iv) Member with normal framing eccentricities at both ends 60+0.50 L/r
of the un-supported panel for 0 < L/r ≤ 120
(v) Member unrestrained against rotation at both ends of the L/r
unsupported panel for 120 ≤ L/r ≤ 200
(vi) Member partially restrained against rotation at one end of 28.6+0.762 L/r
the unsupported panel for 120 < L/r <225
(vii) Member partially restrained against rotation at both ends of 46.2+0.615 L/r
the unsupported panel for 120 < L/r < 250
2. Redundant Members
(i) For 0< L/r < 250 L/r
17.10.7.2. For the values of ‘KL/r’ corresponding to 1(vi) and 1(vii) in above table, the following
procedure of evaluation shall be adopted:
(a) The restrained member must be connected to the restraining member with at
least two bolts.
(b) The restraining member must have a stiffness factor ‘I/L’ in the stress plane
(I=Moment of inertia and L=Length) that equals or exceeds the sum of the
stiffness factors in the stress plane of the restrained members that are
connected to it.
(c) Angle members connected by one leg should have the holes located as close
to the outstanding leg as feasible. Normal framing eccentricities at load

transfer connection imply that connection holes are located between the heel
of the angle and the center line of the framing leg.
17.10.7.3. In calculating the slenderness ratio of the members, the Length ‘L’ shall be the
distance between the intersections of the center of gravity lines at each end of the
member.
17.10.7.4. The following maximum limit of the effective slenderness ratio i.e. the ratio of
unsupported length of the section in any plane to the appropriate radius of gyration
shall not exceed value specified herein under:-
(b) For main leg members of gantry towers, beams, lightening/lighting masts, and
equipment supporting structures in compression : 120
(c) For the members having computed stresses : 200
(d) For redundant members : 250
(e) For members having axial tensile stress only : 400
17.10.8. Erection Stresses
17.10.8.1. Where erection stresses combined with other possible co-existent stresses could
produce a working stress in any member above the permissible stress, the additional
strengthening of such members shall be affected or such other provisions made as
are necessary to bring the stresses within the permissible limit.
17.11. FASTENERS - BOLTS, NUTS AND WASHERS
17.11.1. All substation steel structure members shall have bolted connections. All bolts and
nuts shall conform to IS: 12427. Bolts shall have hexagonal head, the heads being
forged out of the solid, truly concentric, and square with the shank, which must be
perfectly straight. All bolts and nuts shall be galvanized in accordance with IS:367
(Part-13)/IS: 2629.
17.11.2. All bolts shall be of 16 mm in diameter or higher as per design requirement and shall
be of property class 5.6 as specified in IS: 1367(Part-III) and matching nut shall be of
property class 5.0 as specified in IS: 1367 (Part-VI).

17.11.3. Bolts up to 16 mm diameter and having length up to 10 times the diameter of the
bolt shall be manufactured by cold forging and thread rolling process to obtain good
and reliable mechanical properties and effective dimensional control.
17.11.4. The shear strength of bolts for property class 5.6 shall be not less than 310 MPa as
specified in Indian Standard IS: 12427. Bolts shall be provided with washer face in
accordance with IS: 1363 (Part-I) to ensure proper bearing.
17.11.5. Nuts for hexagonal bolts shall be double chamfered as specified in IS: 1363 (Part-III).
It shall be ensured by the manufacturer that nuts shall not be over tapped beyond
0.40 mm on effective diameter for size up to 16 mm. Nuts for anti-theft bolts shall be
round tapered with hexagonal shear nuts. The hexagonal portion of shear nuts shall
break away at specified torque recommended by the supplier to ensure proper
tightening of members so that fasteners are not opened subsequently with tools.
The tightening torque and shearing of anti-theft nuts shall be verified during proto-
assembly.
17.11.6. Fully threaded bolts shall not be used. The length of bolts shall be such that the
threaded portion shall not extend into the place of contact of the members.
17.11.7. All bolts shall be threaded to take the full depth of the nuts and threaded for enough
to permit firm gripping of the members, but not further. It shall be ensured that the
threaded portion of each bolt protrudes not less than 3.0 mm and not more than 8.0
mm when fully tightened.
17.11.8. Flat and tapered washers shall be provided wherever necessary.
17.11.9. Spring washers shall be provided for insertion under all nuts. These washers shall be
electro-galvanized, positive lock type and 3.5mm in thickness for 16mm diameter
bolts.
17.11.10. To avoid bending stress in bolts or to reduce it to minimum, no bolt shall connect
aggregate thickness of members more than three times its diameter.

17.11.11. The bolt positions in assembled structures shall be as per approved fabrication
drawings. Bolts at the joints shall be so staggered that nuts shall be tightened with
spanners without fouling.
17.12. STEP BOLTS & LADDERS
17.12.1. In order to facilitate inspection and maintenance, each gantry tower,

lightening/lighting mast and equipment supporting structure shall be provided with
climbing devices at two diagonally opposite legs in the form of step bolts of not less
than 16.0 mm diameter and 175 mm long, spaced not more than 450 mm apart,
staggered on faces on diagonally opposite legs and extending from about 0.5 meter
above the ground level to the top of the structure. The step bolts shall conform to IS:
5613 (Part-2/Sec-1)-1985 and other relevant Indian Standards.
17.12.2. Each step bolts shall be provided with two nuts on one end to fasten the bolt
securely to the structure and button head at the other end to prevent the feet from
slipping away. The step bolts shall be capable of withstanding a vertical load not less
than 1500 N.
17.12.3. Lightening/Lighting Masts shall be provided with structural steel ladder with safety
guard extending from about 0.5 meter above the ground level to the top most
platforms provided for installing lighting fittings & fixtures.
17.13. FOUNDATION BOLTS
17.13.1. All foundation bolts for lattice and pipe structures shall be supplied by the
Contractor as an essential part and parcel of structures.
17.13.2. All foundation bolts shall be of mild steel of grade Fe250 conforming to relevant
Indian Standards/equivalent International Standards.
17.13.3. Diameter of foundation bolts shall not be less than 20 mm. All foundation bolts shall
develop their full strength by bond between bolt and concrete i.e. the length of
foundation bolt to be embedded in concrete shall be not less than the development
length of bolt corresponding to the grade of foundation concrete.

17.13.4. Each foundation bolt shall be provided with a plain/spring washer of appropriate
thickness, one normal nut and one lock nut. In addition, one additional nut shall be
provided in each foundation bolt below the base plate which may be used for the
purpose of leveling. All nuts and washers shall conform to relevant Indian Standards/
17.13.5. All foundation bolts shall be provided with two numbers of standard nuts, one check
nut, one plain washer and a mild steel plate of suitable size but not less than 75 x 75
x 6mm welded/bolted at the bottom of foundation bolt for ensuring mechanical
anchorage of bolts in foundation.
17.13.6. The foundation bolts shall be galvanized from the top to a point at least 300 mm
below the proposed elevation of the concrete foundation. Utmost care shall be
taken in not galvanizing the portion to be embedded in concrete below this
stipulated level as it may affect the bond stress between bolt and concrete.
17.13.7. Foundation bolts for gantry towers/columns, lightening/lighting masts and

equipment supporting structures and elsewhere shall be embedded in first stage
concrete while foundation is cast. The contractor shall ensure proper alignment of
these bolts to match the holes in the base plate.
17.13.8. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct alignment and levelling of all steel
structures at site to ensure that the towers/structures are plumb.
17.14. GROUTING
17.14.1. The space between top of concrete foundations and bottom of base plates shall be
grouted so as to ensure complete (i.e. 100%) contact between base plates and
foundations for transfer of load from structures to foundations. The method of
grouting shall be subject to the approval of Employer/PMC.
17.14.2. The strength of grout mix shall not be less than that of foundation concrete. The mix
proportion for grouting shall be subject to the approval of Employer/PMC.
17.14.3. Anti-shrinkage compound/admixture conforming to relevant Indian Standard shall be

mixed in all grout mixes as per recommendation of Manufacturer.
17.14.4. Payment for Grouting: The payment for grouting of bases of structures shall be
deemed to be included in the erection charges of structures and no separate
payment for the same shall be made.
17.15. FABRICATION
Except where here-in-after modified, the details of fabrication shall, in general,

conform to IS: 802(Part-II), other relevant Indian Standards or equivalent
17.15.1.1. All materials shall be completely shop fabricated and finished with proper
connections and erection marks for ready assembly in the field.
17.15.1.2. Members of the structures shall be fabricated as per the approved fabrication
drawings and in accordance with relevant Indian Standards/equivalent International
Standards and the best engineering practice.
17.15.1.3. No individual members shall be longer than 6000 mm.
17.15.1.4. Normally bolted butt joint shall be used to connect the parts of structures. The
thickness of inside angle cleat shall not be less than that of the heavier member
connected. The lap splices may be used for connecting members of unequal
thickness and the inside angle of lap splices shall be rounded at the heel to fit the
fillet of the outside angle. All splice joints shall be designed to develop full strength
of connected members.
17.15.1.5. Joints shall be so designed so as to avoid eccentricity, as far as possible.
17.15.1.6. The use of gusset plates at joints shall be avoided as far as possible. However where
the connections are such that the elimination of the guest plates and spacer plates
are not possible, the gusset/spacer plates may be used in conformity with modern
engineering practice.
17.15.1.7. The use of fillers in the connections shall be avoided as far as possible. The diagonal
web members in tension may be connected entirely to the gusset plate where

necessary to avoid the use of fillers. Each diagonal shall be in one piece without
splices or centre gusset and it shall be connected at the point of intersection by one
or more bolts.
17.15.1.8. Members of the structures shall be accurately fabricated, so that the same can be
assembled at site without any strain in members or in bolts.
17.15.1.9. The Contractor, during fabrication of structure members, shall ensure that mild steel
and high tensile steel sections don’t get mixed up and as such identification mark
shall be embossed on each and every H.T. Steel section at the time of cutting/
shearing of members.
17.15.1.10. All members of the structures shall be cut to correct lengths and fabricated in
accordance with the fabrication drawings approved by the Employer. Welding of
two or more pieces to obtain the specified length of member shall not be allowed.
Members shall be straight to the permissible tolerances or better when required to
ensure proper fit before being laid off or worked and after galvanizing.
17.15.1.11. No angle member shall have its two leg flanges brought together by closing the
angle.
17.15.1.12. All parts of the structures shall be accessible for inspection and cleaning. Drain holes
shall be provided at all points where pockets or depressions are likely to hold water.
17.15.1.13. All similar parts of structures shall be made strictly interchangeable. No rough edges
shall be permitted anywhere throughout the work.
17.15.1.14. Structural members shall be so fabricated as to be bolted together easily at site.

Preference shall be given to the design with least number of parts and the one which
offers best facilities for transport, erection and maintenance. In designing the
structures for minimum number of parts, the Contractor shall not, however, employ
parts of such dimensions as shall prove difficult to handle.
17.15.1.15. Workmanship and finish shall correspond to the best engineering practices. All steel
sections before any work is done on them, shall be carefully leveled, straightened

and made true by a method which shall not injure the material so that, when
assembled, the adjacent surfaces are in close contact.
17.15.2. Straightening
17.15.2.1. All steel sections, before any cutting is done, shall be carefully straightened and
made true by straightening machine or pressure. Hammering shall not be permitted
for straightening or flattening of members. All sheared edges shall be free from
burrs and no rough edges from shearing shall be left. Straightening shall be so done
that it does not injure the material. Sharp bends shall be a cause for rejection.
17.15.3. Cutting
17.15.3.1. Cutting may be affected by shearing, cropping, sawing or by gas cutting by

mechanically controlled torch. Shearing, cropping and gas cutting shall be clean,
square and free from distortions and burns, and should the Employer/PMC find it
necessary, the edges shall be ground by the Contractor after cutting without any
additional cost. The cut surfaces shall be clean, smooth, reasonably square and free
from any distortion. The cut edges of all plates shall be perfectly straight and
uniform throughout.
17.15.4. Bending
17.15.4.1. Mild steel angle sections of size upto 75x75mm (thickness up to and including 6.0
mm) shall be bent cold up to and including bend angles of 10 0. Mild steel angle
sections of size above 75x75mm (thickness upto and including 6.0 mm) and upto and
including 100x100mm (thickness upto 8.0 mm) may also be bent cold upto bend
angles of 50. All other angle sections and bend angles not covered above shall be
bent hot.
17.15.4.2. All plates up to 12.0 mm thickness shall be bent cold upto a maximum bend angle of
150. Hot bending shall be employed for greater bend angles and thicker plates.
17.15.4.3. Bends on all high tensile steel sections/plates shall be done hot.

17.15.4.4. The bends shall be of even profile and free from any surface damages. All hot bent
material shall be air-cooled.
17.15.5. Holing
17.15.5.1. Holes for bolts in the members shall be either punched or drilled to jig but drilled
holes are preferred. Holes shall not be formed by flame cutting process. All burrs left
by punching or drilling shall be completely removed.
17.15.5.2. Members shall be straightened again after punching or drilling of holes.
17.15.5.3. Punching may be adopted for mild steel sections with thickness upto 16.0 mm. For
thicker sections, drilling shall be used.
17.15.5.4. The holes near the bend line of a bent member on both sides of bend line shall be
punched/drilled after bending and relative positions of those holes shall be
maintained with the use of proper templates/jigs and fixtures.
17.15.5.5. The limit of punching for high tensile Steel sections shall be intimated by the
contractor, which shall be in accordance with relevant Indian Standard/ equivalent
International Standard and subject to approval of Employer/PMC.
17.15.5.6. Punched/drilled holes shall be at right angle to the surface and the walls of holes
shall be parallel. Holes shall be perfectly circular unless specified otherwise in the
approved fabrication drawings.
17.15.6. Spacing of Bolts and Edge Distance
17.15.6.1. The minimum spacing and minimum edge distances of bolts shall be as given Table –
17.4 below:
Table – 17.4
Spacing of Bolts and Edge Distance
Bolt Hole Minimum Minimum Edge Minimum Edge

Diameter Diameter Bolt Spacing Distance of Hole Distance of Hole
(mm) (mm) (mm) Centre to Rolled or centre to sheared
Sawn cut edge or flame cut Edge

(mm) (mm)
16 17.5 40 20 23
20 217.5 48 25 28
24 25.5 60 33 38
17.15.6.2. As a general rule, the minimum distance from hole centre to edge shall be 17.5 x
bolt diameter and minimum distance between centre to centre of holes shall be 2.5
x bolt diameter.
17.15.7. Locking Devices
17.15.7.1. Electro-galvanized spring washers of type ‘B’ of thickness indicated in the Table –
17.5 below corresponding to respective bolt diameter shall be provided for insertion
under all nuts.
Table – 17.5
Diameter of Bolt and Thickness of Spring Washer
Bolt Diameter Thickness of spring washer

(mm) (mm)
16 3.5
20 4.0
24 4.5
17.15.8. Welding
17.15.8.1. The work shall be done as per approved fabrication drawings which shall clearly
indicate various details of joints to be welded, type of weld, size & length of weld,
weather shop weld or site weld etc. Symbols for welding on fabrication drawings
shall be according to IS: 813.

17.15.8.2. Welding shall be done before galvanizing. No welding shall be allowed after
galvanizing.
17.15.8.3. Welding shall be done by an electric arc process. The procedure to be followed,
materials, plant and equipment to be used and testing and inspection procedures to
be applied shall be subject to the approval and the satisfaction of the Employer/PMC
and shall, in general, conform to relevant Indian standards viz. IS: 816, IS: 823, IS:
814 and Indian Standards Hand Book for metal arc welding etc.
17.15.8.4. All the welders to be employed for the job shall have to qualify the appropriate tests
laid down in IS: 1811 and IS: 817.
17.15.8.5. Edge Preparation for Welding: Proper edge preparation shall be made for jointing of
materials before welding except for square butt welds. Type of edge preparation
shall depend on the thickness of parent materials that are to be joined. The edge
forms shall be chosen to suit the design technology and production conditions and
shall be subject to the approval of the Employer/PMC. The edge form shall be
prepared either by machine or by automatic gas cutting with surface roughness of
the welding area not exceeding Ra = 50. All edges cut by flame shall be ground
before they are welded.
17.15.8.6. Electrodes
(i) The electrodes used for welding shall be of suitable type and size depending
upon specifications of the parent material, the method of welding, the
position of welding and quality of welds desired e.g. normal penetration
welds or deep penetration welds.
(ii) Where coated electrode are used they shall meet the requirements of IS:814
and relevant ASME-SEC IX. Covering shall be heavy to withstand normal
conditions of handling and storage. They shall be free from all defects which
interfere with performance of electrodes.
(iii) Only those electrodes which give radiographic quality of welds shall be used.

(iv) Where bare electrodes are used, these shall correspond to specification of the
parent material. The electrodes shall be stored properly and the flux shall be
baked before use in an oven in accordance with the manufacturer’s
requirements.
17.15.8.7. Sequence of Welding
(i) The sequence of welding shall be carefully chosen to ensure that the
components assembled by welding are free from distortion and large residual
stresses are not developed. The distortion shall be effectively controlled
either by a counter effect or by a counter distortion. The direction of welding
should be away from point of restraint and towards the point of maximum
freedom.
(ii) All welds shall be finished full and made with correct number of runs. The
welds being kept free from slag and other inclusions, all adhering slag being
removed from exposed surfaces immediately after such run.
(iii) Non uniform heating and cooling shall be avoided to ensure that excessive
stresses are not locked up resulting ultimately in cracks.
(iv) Intermittent welds shall not be permitted without the approval of the
Employer/PMC. These shall be permitted only when specifically approved in
the fabrication drawings.
17.15.8.8. Inspection of Welds
(i) 100 per cent welds shall be inspected visually for external defects. Dimensions
of welds shall be checked. The length and size of weld shall be as per
approved fabrication drawings. It may be slightly over sized but shall not be
under sized. The profile of weld is affected by the position of the joint but it
shall be uniform. In case of butt and corner welds, the profile shall be convex
and in case of submerged arc fillet weld, it shall be slightly concave.
(ii) The welds shall have regular height and width of beads. The height and
spacing of ripples shall be uniform. The joints in the weld run where welding
has been recommended shall as far as possible be smooth and should not

show any humps or craters in the weld surface. Welds shall be free from
unfilled craters on the surface, under cuts, slag on the surface and visible
cracks. Such inspection shall be done after cleaning the weld surface with
steel wire brushes and chisel to remove sputter metal, scale, slag etc. If
external defects mentioned above are noticed, the work shall be dismantled
and redone.
17.15.8.9. Rectification of Defective Welding Work: Whenever defects like improper
penetration, extensive presence of blow holes, undercuts, cracking, slag inclusion
etc. are noticed by visual inspection/other tests, the welds in such locations shall be
removed by gouging process. The joints shall be prepared again by cleaning the
burrs and residual matters with wire brushes and grinding if necessary and re-
welded. The gouging shall as far as possible be done by gouging electrodes. Flame
gouging shall be resorted to only in special cases with the specific permission of the
Employer/PMC.
17.15.8.10. Acceptance of Welded Structures
(i) The acceptance of the welded work shall depend upon correct dimensions,
alignment and absence of distortion in the structure, satisfactory results from
the examination of welds, the soundness of the welds and upon general
workmanship being good.
(ii) Random Dye Penetration (D.P.) test shall be conducted on welds after
completing the welding.
(iii) The radiographic/ultrasonic testing of welds shall be undertaken if found
necessary and directed by the Employer.
17.15.9. ERECTION MARK
17.15.9.1. Each member of the structure shall have a unique erection mark conforming to
component number given to it in the fabrication drawings. This mark shall be
punched with marking dies of 16 mm size before galvanizing and shall be legible
after galvanizing.
17.15.9.2. Erection Mark shall be in format A-BB-CC-DDD where:

A = Employer’s Code assigned by the Contractor – Alphabet;
BB = Contractor’s Mark – Numerical;
CC = Structure Type – Alphabet; and
DDD = Member Number assigned by the Contractor – Numerical
17.15.9.3. The proposal of Erection Mark shall be prepared by the Contractor and got approved
from Employer/PMC before starting any fabrication work.
17.15.10. FABRICATION TOLERANCES
17.15.10.1. The fabrication tolerances shall, in general, conform to IS:802(Part-II)-1978 and as

given herein under. The tolerances not specified IS:802(Part-II)-1978 shall, in
general, conform to IS:7215-1974 unless otherwise specified here-in-under.
17.15.10.2. Tolerance on the overall length of a member shall be within + 2 mm.
17.15.10.3. Tolerance on gauge distance shall be within + 1 mm so that structure could be

assembled at site without any undue strain on structure members or in bolts.
17.15.10.4. No bolt hole shall be more than 17.5 mm larger than the corresponding bolt
diameter.
17.15.10.5. The maximum allowable difference in diameter of the holes on the two sides of the
plate or angle shall be 0.8 mm, that is, the allowable taper in a punched hole shall
not exceed 0·8 mm on diameter.
17.15.10.6. Tolerance cumulative and between consecutive holes shall be within + 2 mm and + 1
mm respectively.
17.15.10.7. The threaded portion of each bolt shall project out through the nut at least one
thread.
17.15.10.8. The gap between the ends of two connected members in a butt splice shall not be
more than 6.0 mm and less than 4.0 mm.

17.15.11. PROTO TYPE ASSEMBLY
17.15.11.1. The Contractor, after the approval of designs & fabrication drawings, offer the proto
type of the each structure for Employer/PMC’s inspection at his works or works of
manufacturer so as to ensure fitment of various members and to avoid problems
during erection..
17.15.11.2. Before proceeding with the bulk fabrication of any of structure i.e. gantry towers,
beams, lightening/lighting masts and equipment supporting structures etc, the
Contractor shall fabricate and assemble in his works for inspection by the Employer
or his authorized representative, one structure of each type as finally approved by
the Employer for checking the fabrication accuracy and workmanship. The check
assembly shall be in a horizontal position. Proto assembly made on ground in
horizontal position shall be adequately supported to prevent distortion and
overstressing of members to ensure proper fit and shall be accomplished without
extraordinary effort to align bolt holes or to force pieces into position. For the check
assembly, bolts and nuts shall be not more than finger tight.
17.15.11.3. Any changes pointed out by Employer or his representative during inspection shall
be incorporated by the contractor.
17.15.11.4. The mass manufacture of structures shall be taken up without the approval of
prototype structure and its bill of materials.
17.16. GALVANIZING
17.16.1. All members of substation steel structures and fasteners including foundation bolts
shall be hot dip galvanized. Spring Washers shall be Electro galvanized.
17.16.2. Galvanizing of the members of the structures shall conform to IS: 2629-1966 and IS:
4759-1968 and that of fasteners to IS: 5358-1969. Spring washers shall be electro-
galvanized as per Grade 4 of IS: 1573-1986.
17.16.3. Zinc required for galvanizing shall be arranged by the Contractor. Purity of Zinc shall
be not less than 99.95% as per relevant Indian Standards/equivalent International
Standards.
17.16.4. All galvanized members shall withstand tests as per IS: 2633-1986.
17.16.5. The Galvanizing of steel members shall be done after all fabrication works have been
completed except that the nuts may be tapped or re-run after galvanizing. Threads
of bolts and nuts shall have a neat fit and shall be such that they can be turned with
finger throughout the length of the threads of bolts and they shall be capable of
developing full strength of the bolts.
17.16.6. Pickling shall be carried out by immersing the steel members in an acid bath
containing either sulfuric or hydrochloric acid at a suitable concentration and
temperature. The concentration of the acid and temperature of the bath can be
varied, provided, the pickling time is adjusted accordingly. The pickling process shall
be completed by thoroughly rinsing with water, which should be warm, so as to
remove the residual acid completely.
17.16.7. Galvanizing shall be carried out by hot dip process in a proper and uniformly heated
bath. It shall meet all the requirements, when tested in accordance with IS: 2633 –
‘Methods of Testing Weight, Thickness and Uniformity of Coating on Hot Dipped
Galvanized Articles’. The zinc coating shall be uniform, clean and of a standard
thickness on the entire surface of the material galvanized.
17.16.8. Galvanizing of each member shall be carried out in one complete immersion. Double
dipping shall not be permitted. When the steel member is removed from the
galvanizing kettle, excess spelter shall be removed by ‘bumping’. The process known
as ‘wiping’ or ‘scrapping’ shall not be used for this purpose.
17.16.9. All bolts, nuts, locknuts, washers etc shall also be hot dip galvanized. Excess spelter
from bolts, nuts etc. shall be removed by centrifugal spinning of bolts or nuts.
Threading after galvanizing, shall not be permitted. Nuts, however, may be tapped,
but not to cause appreciable racking of the nut on the bolts.
17.16.10. The surface preparation for galvanizing and the process of galvanizing itself, shall not
adversely affect the mechanical properties of the materials to be galvanized.

17.16.11. Materials on which galvanizing has been damaged shall be acid stripped and re-
galvanized unless otherwise directed, but if any member becomes damaged after
having under gone re-galvanization once, the same shall be rejected.
17.16.12. All steel structures and accessories after galvanizing shall be treated by dipping them
in Sodium Dichromate solution or treated with approved inhibitor (the details of
which shall be provided by the contractor to the Employer/PMC before starting the
galvanizing) for protection against white rust formation during transportation.
17.16.13. Special care shall be taken not to injure the galvanized surfaces during transport,
handling and erection. Damages, if any, shall be made good in accordance with the
provisions of this specification or as directed by the Employer/PMC.
17.16.14. Adverse Atmospheric Conditions: Low temperature coupled with high humidity (RH
approaching 80%) causes fast rusting to steel parts. The Contractor, therefore, shall
be required to give special attention to galvanizing for ensuring that it is of superior
quality and not less than specified. Items not properly galvanized or getting rusted
shall be rejected at the cost and risk of Contractor.
17.16.15. The acceptable values of the coating of zinc on the steel members, bolts, nuts and
washers shall be not less than specified in Table – 17.6 below:
TABLE - 17.6
Sl. No. Item Minimum Zinc

Coating
1. Structural steel members except 610 gm/m2
bolts, nuts and washers
2. Bolts, nuts and washers 450 gm/m2
17.16.16. Members embedded in concrete shall be galvanized from the top to a point at least
300 mm below the proposed elevation of the concrete foundation. Utmost care shall
be taken in not galvanizing the portion to be embedded in concrete below this
stipulated level.

17.16.17. The Contractor shall furnish sufficient quantity of zinc paint of approved quality, free
of cost, for repairing damages of minor nature in galvanized surfaces in transit or
during handling.
17.16.18. Employer’s approval shall be obtained if galvanizing is done outside the Contractor’s
fabrication plant.
17.16.19. The Contractor shall be required to make arrangement for frequent inspection by
the Employer/PMC as well as continuous inspection by a resident representative of
the Employer/PMC, if so desired, for fabrication and galvanization work.
17.17. ERECTION
17.17.1. The Contractor shall arrange at his own cost all plant and equipment, welding set,
tools and tackles, scaffolding, trestles equipments and all other accessories and
ancillaries required for carrying out erection without causing any stresses in the
members which may cause deformation and permanent damage. Minor modification
if any, required during erection shall be done at site with the approval of
Employer/PMC.
17.17.2. The component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that they are neither
twisted nor otherwise damaged and shall be so prepared that the specified camber,
if any, is provided. In order to minimize distortion in member the component parts
shall be positioned by using the clamps, clips, dogs, jigs and other suitable means
and fasteners shall be placed in a balanced pattern. If the individual components are
to be bolted, paralleled and tapered, the drifts shall be used to align the part so that
the bolts can be accurately positioned.
17.17.3. Touch-up Painting: Minor defects and damages in hot dip galvanized members shall
be repaired at site by applying zinc rich primer and two coats of enamel paint in
accordance with relevant Indian Standards and this specification to the satisfaction
of Employer/PMC.
17.17.4. Stability of Structures: The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability of the
structures at all stages of its erection at site and shall take all necessary measures by

providing temporary bracings and guying to ensure adequate resistance to wind and
also to loads due to erection equipment and their operations.
17.18. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
17.18.1. The Contractor shall strictly follow all precautions at all stages of fabrication, trial
assembly, packing, transportation and erection of steel structures. The stipulations
contained in relevant Indian Standards/ equivalent International Standards for safety
during erection of structural steel work shall also be adhered to.
17.19. QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN AND QUALITY CONTROL
17.19.1. The Contractor shall prepare a Quality Assurance Plan as per relevant Indian
Standards/ equivalent International Standards to accept/check the materials,
fabrication, welding, manufacturing, galvanizing etc within one month after award of
work and submit the same to Employer/ PMC for approval. The Quality Assurance
Plan shall include customer’s hold points and shall cover all stages of work right from
design till successful erection of structures. The Quality Assurance Plan shall be
examined by the Employer/PMC and if found to be acceptable, the same shall be
approved by the Employer subject to compliance to observations, if any. The
Contractor shall follow the approved Quality Assurance Plan in true spirit. If desired
by the Employer, the contractor shall give access to all the documents and materials
to satisfy the Employer that the Quality Assurance Plan is being strictly followed.
17.19.2. To ensure effective quality control during manufacturing process, the manufacturer
shall have in house testing facility for all tests like weight of zinc coating, shear
strength and other tests etc. The manufacturer should also have proper Quality
Assurance System which should be in line with the requirement of this specification
and ISO: 9000 & 14000 series Quality System Standard.
17.19.3. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control procedures for different
items of work and materials to the extent deems necessary and as directed by
Employer/PMC to ensure that all works are performed in accordance with this
specification. In addition to the Contractor’s quality control procedure, the materials

and workmanship shall be subject to inspection by the Employer or his authorized

representative.
17.19.4. The quality control procedure shall cover but not be limited to the following items of
work:
(i) Steel: Manufacturer’s Test Certificates and Test Reports of representative

samples of materials.
(ii) Bolts, Nuts & Washers: Manufacturer’s certificates, dimensional check for
bolts, nuts & washers.
(iii) Fabrication: Specifications, IS:802(Part-II) & other relevant Standards & Codes
and approved fabrication drawings.
(iv) Galvanizing: Tests for weight, thickness and uniformity of zinc coating in
accordance with IS: 2633.
(v) Paints: Manufacturer’s test certificates, test physical inspection reports.
17.20. BILL OF MATERIALS
17.20.1. The bill of materials shall be prepared based on approved fabrication drawings. The
bill of materials for each type of structure shall be prepared separately and
submitted to the Employer/PMC for approval.
17.20.2. The bill of materials shall contain the erection mark of each member, dimensions,
weight and total weight. Weight of bolts, nuts & washers shall be indicated
separately. Total weight of the structure shall be indicated in the last page of bill of
materials.
17.20.3. The weight of structures shall be calculated by using the standard sectional weights
of steel structures of the sizes indicated in the approved fabrication drawings and bill
of materials, without taking into consideration the reduction in weight due to drilling
of bolt holes, skew cuts, chamfering, etc. or increase in weight due to galvanization
but taking into consideration the weight of bolts, nuts, washers, hangers, D-Shackles,
Ù’ bolts, strain plates etc.

17.20.4. The Contractor, while designing substation structures, shall use only such sizes of
steel sections which are easily procurable. If for any reason, the sections approved
are not easily procurable, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to procure the
alternative sizes which are satisfactory from the point of view of design, fabrication,
and galvanization and supply the same at no additional cost to the Employer.
17.21. GUARANTEED QUANTITIES OF STRUCTURES
17.21.1. The Bidders are required to quote guaranteed weights for various structures in the
Schedule of ‘Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Substation Structures’ in Section-5
of Part-II, Section-VI.
17.22. PAYMENT
17.22.1. The payment for structures shall be made as per weight in approved drawings of
respective structure or guaranteed weight quoted by Bidders in Schedule of
‘Guaranteed Technical Particulars for Substation Structures’, whichever is minimum
and unit rate per metric ton for galvanized steel structures quoted by bidders in Price
Schedule in Section-IV(A) of Part-I. The weight of each structure shall include the
weight of all its members, nuts, bolts, washers, spring washers, gusset plates, base
plates, foundation bolts etc. Bidders shall ensure that they quote for full scope of
work on fit for purpose basis.
17.22.2. In case any new type of structure is required which is not covered under guaranteed
weight, the payment for such structure shall be made as per its weight in approved
drawing and unit rate per metric ton for galvanized steel structures quoted by
bidders in Price Schedule in Section-IV(A) of Part-I.
17.23. INSPECTION, TESTING & ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
17.23.1. Each part of the fabricated steel work shall be inspected as per approved Quality
Plans and certified by Employer/PMC as satisfactory before it is dispatched to the
erection site. Such certification shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility
regarding adequacy, correctness and completeness of fabrication and galvanization.

17.23.2. Employer/PMC or his representative shall have free access to manufacturer’s works
to satisfy that the fabrication is being done in accordance with the provisions of this
specification and approved fabrication drawings.
17.23.3. The tests as specified in this specification and/or in the relevant Indian Standard shall
be conducted on the material before dispatch.
17.23.4. The Contractor shall provide all materials, stores, labour, tools and plant, apparatus
and instruments, electricity, fuel, water, transport, accommodation etc as may be
required by the Employer/PMC to carry out inspection and/or tests as specified in
these specifications and relevant Indian Standards.
17.23.5. The Contractor shall ensure compliance with the provisions of this specification and
he shall carry out sampling and necessary tests in accordance with the relevant
Indian Standards and as supplemented herein at his own cost, unless otherwise
specified in the contract. The Contractor shall get the specimens tested in a
laboratory approved by the Employer and submit to the Employer three copies of
the test results within five days after completion of the test.
17.23.6. Only tested quality steel conforming to IS: 2062 having mill test reports shall be used
in fabrication of structures. However, to ascertain the quality of the steel used, the
Employer reserves the right to get the material tested at an approved laboratory, the
cost of which shall be borne by the contractor.
17.23.7. All bolts, nuts and washers shall be procured from reputed manufacturers and shall
conform to the relevant Indian Standards.
17.23.8. The weight, thickness and uniformity of zinc coating on hot dipped galvanized
members shall be tested in accordance with IS: 2633 for ensuring the compliance
with the requirements specified in specification. The galvanized steel member shall
withstand minimum four, one minute dips in copper sulfate solution as per IS: 2633.
17.23.9. The finished surfaces of steel structures shall be visually examined for defects like
discolored patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter which is loosely
attached to the steel, globules, spiky deposits, blistered surface, flaking or peeling off

etc. There shall be no flaking or loosening when struck squarely with a chisel faced
hammer. The presence of any of these defects noticed on visual microscopic
inspection shall render the material liable to rejection.
17.23.10. Defects in galvanizing in certain members indicating presence of impurities in the

galvanizing bath in quantities larger than that permitted by the specifications, or lack
of quality control in any manner in the galvanizing plant shall render the entire
production in the relevant shift liable to rejection.
17.23.11. Should any structure or part of a structure be found not to comply with any of the
provisions of this specification, the same shall be liable for rejection. No structure or
part of the structure, once rejected, shall be offered again, except in cases where the
employer considers the defects rectifiable. The employer may, at his discretion,
check the test results obtained at the Contractor’s works by independent tests at an
approved laboratory and should the items, so tested, be found to be unsatisfactory,
the same shall be rejected. The cost of tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
17.23.12. When all tests to be performed in the Contractor’s shop under the terms of this
contract have been successfully carried out, the steel work shall be accepted
forthwith and the Employer shall issue an acceptance certificate, upon receipt of
which, the items shall be dispatched. No item shall be delivered unless an
acceptance certificate for the same has been issued. The satisfactory completion of
prescribed tests or the issue of the dispatch certificates shall not bind the Employer
to accept the work, should it, on further tests before or after erection be found not
in compliance with the specification.
17.24. PACKING
17.24.1. The material shall be boxed or bundled for transport in the following manner:-
17.24.2. All Angles members shall be packed in bundles securely wrapped four times around
at each end and in the middle and at every meter with No.9 gauge galvanized steel

wire with ends twisted tightly. Gross weight of any bundle shall not exceed
approximately 450 kg.
17.24.3. Cleat angles, brackets, fillet plates and similar small loose pieces shall be nested and
bolted together in multiples and securely wired together through holes, wrapped
round at least four times with No.9 gauge galvanized steel wire and ends twisted
tightly. Gross weight of each bundle shall not exceed approximately 70kg.
17.24.4. The correct quantity of bolts, nuts and washers plus 2.50 percent extra for each type
of gantry tower, beam, lighting/lightening mast, equipment supporting structure etc.
shall be packed in gunny bags, accurately & securely tagged in accordance with the
contents and a number of bags packed in wooden box tightly wrapped with 25 mm
wide x 18 gauge iron band stretched entirely around the box with end overlapping at
least 150 mm. Gross weight of each box shall not exceed approximately 70 kg.
17.24.5. All packing shall be subject to the approval of the Employer, or his appointed
representative. The packing shall be carried out with caution to protect the material
against any damage during transportation as well as from moisture, salt or any
impurities which may cause rusting or harmful effects. The packages shall be new
and sufficiently sturdy in construction to withstand stresses during transportation
from contractor’s works to site as well as stress during handling at site without
causing any damage to the material.
17.24.6. MARKING OF PACKING
The packing shall be marked in the following manner:
17.24.6.1. The bundles and the packages shall be clearly marked with the consignee and
destination by indelible ink.
17.24.6.2. Erection mark of the members of gantry towers, beams, lighting/lightening masts
and equipment supporting structures etc shall be indicated on the bundles or
packages of gusset plates, bolts & nuts, cleats etc.

17.25. SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS / VARIATIONS
17.25.1. If the bidder has any exceptions to any of the clauses laid down in this specification,
those shall be clearly stated in the schedule of deviations/variations (Technical or
Commercial). Otherwise, it shall be presumed that the bidder agrees to the
provisions of this specification and same shall be included in the award letter.

Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER –18
Miscellaneous Items for Sub-stations
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 18
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS FOR SUB-STATIONS
CONTENTS
S NO DESCRIPTION PAGE NO
18.0 SCOPE 1
18.1 STANDARDS 1
18.2 CONTROL CABINETS AND MARSHALLING KIOSK 3
18.3 BUSBAR CONDUCTOR AND CONNECTORS 5
18.4 POWER CONNECTORS & CLAMPS 7
18.5 SUSPENSION AND TENSION INSULATORS AND HARDWARE 8
18.6 BUS POST INSULATORS 11
18.7 EARTHWIRE 14
18.8 FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM OF THE SUB-STATION 15
18.9 AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION EQUIPMENT 22
18.10 TESTS 24
18.11 DRAWINGS AND BILL OF MATERIALS 25

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 18
18.0. SCOPE
These specifications are intended to cover the design, engineering, manufacturing,
inspection and testing at manufacturer’s works, packing, supply & delivery,
transportation to site, storage, Testing & commissioning of miscellaneous items such as
control cabinets, marshalling kiosks, bus bar conductors and connectors, power
connectors, clamps, suspension and tension insulators and their hardware fittings, post
insulators, earth wire and accessories, firefighting system of the substation, air-
conditioning and ventilation equipment etc. required for successful commissioning of
132/33 kV substation at Dhunge Sangu in Nepal. The design and workmanship shall be in
accordance with relevant Indian/International standards and the best engineering
and equipment not specifically stated in this specification but necessary for satisfactory
completion and commissioning of substations shall be deemed to be included in the
scope of the contractor unless specifically excluded and shall be supplied without any
extra cost. Items/Components having identical rating shall be interchangeable. The
contractor shall furnish the testing facilities available at the manufacturer’s works or any
other testing facility.
18.1. STANDARDS
18.1.1. The equipments covered by this specification shall confirm to the requirements of the
latest edition of the following Indian/International standards:-
TABLE-18.1
IS: 1646 Code of Practice for Fire Safety in Buildings.
IS: 2878 Portable CO2 Type Fire Extinguishers
Standard Specification for Hard-Drawn Aluminum-Clad Steel Wire.

ASTM B415
(Standard for work-hardened wires plated aluminum steel)

Page 1 of 25
Standard Specification for Aluminum 1350-H19 Wire for Electrical

ASTM B230 Purposes. (Standard for aluminum cables 1350-H19 for electrical
purposes).
Standard specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6201-T81 Wire for Electrical
ASTM b398 Purposes. (Standard for cables alloy 6201-T81 aluminum goals
Electric).
IS: 1778-1980 Reels and Drums for Bare Conductors
IEC 60120 - Dimension of assemblies and commoners socket elements
of insulator string
IS: 1521-1991 Methods for Tensile Testing of Steel Wire.
IEC 60305 - Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000
V. insulator units of ceramic material or glass for systems
Locking device for ball joints and housing
IEC 60372 - Ball of string insulator units. Dimensions and tests.
Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000V.

IEC 60383 -
IS: 2121-1981 Specification for Earth Wire and Earth Wire Accessories
BS 729-1971 Hot dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel tubes. British Standards
Institution.
IS: 5561 Power Connectors
IEC : 120- Dimensional of Ball And Socket Coupling of String Insulator Units.
1984
IEC: 168-1994 Tests on Indoor And Outdoor Post Insulators of Ceramic Material or
Glass of Systems with Nominal Voltage Greater than 1000 V.
IEC: 273-1990 Characteristics of Indoor And Outdoor Post Insulators for Systems with
Nominal Voltages Greater than 1000 V.
IEC: 372-1984 Locking Devices For Ball and Socket Couplings of String Insulator Units –
Dimensions and Tests.
IEC: 471-1977 Dimensions of Clevis and Tongue Couplings of String Insulator Units.
ANSI – C29 Wet Process Porcelain Insulators.
ANSI – C29.1 Test Methods for Electrical Power Insulators.
ANSI – C29.8 For Wet Process Porcelain Insulators Apparatus, Post Type.

Page 2 of 25
ANSI – G8 Iron & Steel Based Ware.

ANSI – Extra Heavy Duty Class – Tested Cartridge Fired ‘C’ Wedge Connectors.
C119.4(AA)
BS 1490 Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy ingots and castings for general
engineering purposes.
IEC 61109- Insulators for overhead lines- Composite suspension and tension
2008
insulators for A.C. systems with a nominal voltage greater than 1000 V
– Definitions, test methods and acceptance criteria
Electrical Power Technical Standards of Nepal.
18.1.2. The Equipment and material meeting the requirement of any other equivalent
internationally recognized standards which ensure a quality equal or better than the
standard mentioned above shall also be acceptable. Where the equipment/material
confirms to any other standards, the salient points of difference between the standards
adopted and those prescribed in these specifications shall be clearly brought out in the
bid and a copy of the applicable standards shall also be enclosed by the bidder with the
bid.
18.2. CONTROL CABINETS AND MARSHALLING KIOSK
18.2.1. The control cabinets/junction boxes/marshalling kiosk shall generally confirm to IS-
5039. Control cabinets & marshalling Kiosk shall be made of steel sheet of specified
thickness enclosed and shall be dust, water and vermin proof. Sheet steel used shall be
at least 2.0 mm thick cold rolled, 2.5 mm hot rolled and properly braced to prevent
wobbling.
18.2.2. The enclosures of the control cabinets & marshalling kiosk shall provide a degree of
protection of not less than IP 55 (as per IS: 2147).
18.2.3. Control cabinets shall be of free standing floor mounting type or wall mounting type or
pedestal mounting type as per requirement.

Page 3 of 25
18.2.4. Control cabinets and Marshalling kiosk shall be provided with double hinged doors with
padlocking arrangement. The distance between two hinges shall not exceed 350 mm to
ensure uniform sealing pressure against atmosphere.
18.2.5. All doors, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around with neoprene
gaskets. The marshalling kiosks shall have these removable covers on both the sides
front as well as rear.
18.2.6. The cable entries to the marshalling kiosk shall be from the bottom. Suitable cable
gland plate of thickness of not less than 3 mm projecting at least 150 mm above the
base of the marshalling kiosk shall be provided for this purpose. Necessary numbers of
cables glands shall be supplied and fitted on this gland plate. The glands shall be dust
free, tight, screw on compression type and made of brass. The glands shall have
provision for securing armour of the cable separately and shall be provided with
earthing tag, the gland shall be cadmium plated.
18.2.7. All sheet steel sheet work shall be degreased, pickled, phosphated and then applied
with two Coats of zinc chromate primer and two Coats of finishing synthetic enamel
paint, both inside and outside. The colour of the outer finishing paint shall be light grey
in accordance with shade No. 631 of IS-5 and inside shall be of glossy white.
18.2.8. Suitable heaters shall be mounted in the cabinet to prevent condensation. MCB and
lamp control thermostat shall be provided. Heater shall be suitable for 230 V AC supply
voltage.
18.2.9. The terminals shall be so staggered that the connection of external cable to any
terminal block should be possible without disturbing the rest of the connections. The
terminal block arrangements shall be such as to provide maximum accessibility to all
conductor terminations and any arrangement preventing access to other terminal
screws shall not be accepted.
18.2.10. The terminal blocks to be provided shall be fully enclosed with removable covers and
made of moulded, non-inflammable plastic material with boxes and barriers moulded
integrally. Such blocks shall have washer and binding screws for external circuit wire
connections, a white marking strip for circuit identification and moulded plastic cover.

Page 4 of 25
All terminals shall be clearly marked with identification, number of letters to facilitate
connection to external wiring. These terminals shall be of stud type. All internal wiring
in central cabinet & marshalling box shall be with FRLS, tinned, stranded (48 or more)
PVC control cables.
18.2.11. The arrangements shall be made in such a manner that it is possible to safely connect
or disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse (MCB’s shall be used wherever
possible) links when the cabinet is live. Cabinet Wiring Control accessories shall be
suitable for 60 Degrees C to take care of temperatures due to space heaters.
18.2.12. Tests
Control cabinets shall confirm to type and routine tests in accordance with IS: 5039. In
addition to the type tests, verification of the degree of protection as per IS: 2147 for
IS: 55 shall be conducted. After degree of protection tests on control cabinet, 2.5 kV
rms for 1 minute, insulation resistance & functional tests shall be conducted.
18.3. BUSBAR CONDUCTOR AND CONNECTORS
18.3.1. General Requirement
18.3.1.1. Tubular aluminum bas bars with suitable size shall be made of alloy E91E confirming to
BS2898 & IS: 5082 and stranded conductors to IEC 61089. The thickness of the tubes,
size, numbers and type shall be finalized during detailed engineering. The dropper
connections shall be of "ACSR Twin Moose Conductor" as per equipment. Equipment
to equipment connections shall be made with "ASCR Twin Moose Conductor” as well
as suitable size of aluminum tube may also be used.
18.3.1.2. The General construction of the connectors and their insulator supports shall be
mechanically strong and shall withstand all stresses which may be imposed on them
during normal working conditions due to fixing, vibrations, climatic conditions, short-
circuit or other causes.
18.3.1.3. All connectors shall be kept as short and as straight as possible. Provisions shall be
made to allow expansion and contraction of all connections due to changes in
temperature, and under all loading and short-circuit conditions while keeping the
whole system in perfect operating conditions, also without exerting of stress on any

Page 5 of 25
part of the system or supporting structure. The design of all conductor/insulator

hardware and accessories shall avoid sharp corners of projections which produce high
electrical stress in normal working conditions.
18.3.1.4. Aluminium strands of conductor shall be hard drawn confirming to IEC 61089 or ASTM
399 (latest edition) and the conductivity shall not be less than 99.5%. The surface of
the conductor shall be clean, dry and free from any grease that may be used in
manufacturing. The strands shall be smooth and free from burrs, projections and
imperfections. The steel wires shall be hot dip galvanized. Zinc chemical composition
in the slab and the method of zinc coating shall be as per the applicable standards. The
mass of the zinc coating over wires shall correspond to relevant International Standard.
18.3.1.5. Joints between buses and Tee-Off connection between individual lengths of buses and
between connectors and equipments/apparatus shall securely clamp the conductor
and at the same time provide ample contact surface for carrying the full rated current
of the equipment. All necessary connections clamps etc. shall be supplied by the
contractor.
18.3.1.6. Special care shall be taken to avoid the possibility of any electrolyte action between
the conductors, clamps and the terminals of the apparatus.
18.3.2. Aluminium Tubular Bus Bar:
18.3.2.1. The aluminium tubes as per details given in table below shall be supplied and installed
for 132/33kV substation at Dhunge Sangu in Nepal.
TABLE-18.2
Sl. No. Item 132 kV Bus Bar 33 kV Bus Bar

a. Material Aluminium Aluminium
b. Diameter 100 mm 75 mm
c. Maximum Span 12000 mm 6000 mm
18.3.2.2. Post insulators, supporting structures and suitable connectors for tubular bus bars shall
also be supplied and installed. The contractor shall also design, supply and install the
anti-vibration facilities for aluminium tubular bus bars.

Page 6 of 25
18.3.2.3. The conductor shall have the physical properties or equivalent:

TABLE-18.3
a. Type ACSR “Moose”
b. Overall Diameter 31.77 mm
c. Cross Sectional Area 597 mm2
d. Stranding (nos./mm) 54+7/3.53mm
e. Mass 2004 kg/km
f. Ultimate Tensile Strength 16275 kg (159.60 kN)
g. Rated DC resistance at 20oC 0.05596 Ω/km
18.4. POWER CONNECTORS & CLAMPS

18.4.1. The suitable size of aluminium connectors/Bi-metallic connectors shall be used for
making connection to the equipment terminals. These shall be bolted type. The clamps
shall be made of aluminium alloy and shall be suitable for "ACSR Twin Moose
conductor". The surface of the clamp shall be smooth with all edges rounded off the
clamps & connectors shall confirm to BS 159 & BS 3288-Part I.
18.4.2. The clamps & connectors shall be made of materials as given in the table below:
TABLE-18.4
a. For connecting ACSR Moose Aluminum alloy casting confirming to designation
conductor A6 of IS: 617 and shall be tested for all tests as per
IS-618.
b. For connecting equipment Bimetallic connectors made from aluminum alloy
terminals made of copper casting confirming to BS 1490: 1988 with 4 mm
thick cast copper liner
c. For connecting shield wire Malleable iron casting
d. Bolts, nuts & plain washers Hot dip galvanized mild steel confirming to
relevant Indian standards

Page 7 of 25
e. Spring washers for item à’ to Electro galvanized in accordance with relevant
`c’ Indian standards
18.4.3. All casting shall be free from blow boles, surfaces blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp
edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
18.4.4. No part of a clamp or connector shall be less than 10 mm thick.
18.4.5. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance to BS 729.
18.4.6. For bimetallic clamps or connectors, copper alloy liner shall be cast integral with
aluminium alloy body.
18.4.7. Flexible connectors, braids or laminated strap shall be made from tinned sheets or
Aluminium Laminated clamps, depending on the clamp. The terminal clamps for bus
posts shall be suitable for both expansion as well as fixed connections to "ACSR Twin
Moose conductor".
18.4.8. Size of the terminal/conductor for which the clamp/connector is suitable shall be
embossed/punched (i.e. indelibly marked) on each components of the
clamp/connector, except on the hardware.
18.4.9. Clamps shall be designed to carry the same current as the conductor and the
temperature rise shall be equal or less than that of the conductor at the specified
ambient temperature. The rated current for which the clamp/connector is designed
with respect to the specified reference ambient temperature, shall also be indelibly
marked on each component of the clamp/connector, except on the hardware.
18.4.10. All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum
contact resistance.
18.4.11. Clamps and connectors shall be designed corona controlled.
18.5. SUSPENSION, TENSION INSULATORS AND HARDWARES

18.5.1. All insulators shall be of porcelain and shall satisfactorily withstand the specific climatic
and service conditions
18.5.2. The insulators shall be designed for fog conditions. Insulators for suspension & tensions
strings shall confirm to IEC 61109-2008. Insulator hardware shall confirm to BS 3288-
Part 2.

Page 8 of 25
18.5.3. All the insulators shall be manufactured by the wet process. The porcelain shall be
uniform brown colour, free from blisters, burrs and other similar defects. Insulators
shall have a good luster. The glaze shall be un-affected by sudden changes in
temperature and atmospheric pollutants such as ozone, acids, alkali, dust etc. Each
insulator shall have marking as per applicable International standard.
18.5.4. The design of the insulator shall be such that stress due to expansion and contraction
of any part of the insulators shall not lead to its deterioration. The porcelain shall not
engage directly with hard metal.
18.5.5. Cement used in the construction of insulator shall not cause fracture by expansion and
loosening by contraction. Proper care shall be taken to assemble and align the
individual parts of the insulator correctly during cementing so that load distribution in
discs takes place uniformly. The cement shall not cause chemical reaction with the
metal fittings.
18.5.6. The tension and suspension insulator string shall be of ball and socket type. These shall
be suitable to secure bus conductor to the structure. The number of discs, size and
electro-mechanical strength are specified elsewhere in the specification. The support
insulators shall be strong enough to withstand the electro-dynamics forces occurring
during the short circuit conditions.
18.5.7. Each insulator string shall be supplied complete in every respect and shall include the
following:
a) Fittings for attachment to the U bolt or strain plate;
b) Suspension and tension aluminum alloy clamps; and
c) Fittings for attachment of the clamps to the string
18.5.8. The contractor shall be responsible for satisfying himself that the fittings are entirely
suitable for the structures and the conductors and confirms to relevant standards.
18.5.9. The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction
in any part of the insulator shall not lead to its deterioration. All ferrous parts shall be
hot dip galvanized in accordance with the latest edition of BS 729. The zinc coating
used for galvanizing shall be grade Zn 99.5 confirming to ASTM B 952. The zinc coating

Page 9 of 25
shall be uniform, smooth, reasonably bright, continuous and free from intersection
such as flux ash rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters.
18.5.10. Contractor shall make available relevant data on all the essential features of design
including the method of assembly of discs and metal parts, number of discs per
insulator string etc.;
18.5.11. Insulators hardware shall be of forged steel. Malleable cast iron shall not be accepted.
All the surfaces must be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or projection. No parts
shall be subjected to excessive localized pressure. The metal parts shall not produce
any noise generating corona under the operating conditions.
18.5.12. Insulator hardware shall be of bolted type.
18.5.13. Contractor shall supply and install the following insulators sets with all necessary
accessories.
TABLE-18.5
Sl. no Item 132kV Level 33kV Level
i) Type Anti-fog type, Outdoor Anti-fog type, Outdoor Ball

Ball and Socket complying and Socket complying with IS
with IS 731 & IS 2486 731 & IS 2486 (Part-II)/ IEC
(Part-II)/ IEC 61109-2008 61109-2008
ii) Size of Disc 280x170 mm2 280x170 mm2
iii) Rated Voltage 11 kV 11 kV
iv) No. of Disc. Unit per
string
a. Suspension 11 3
(S/S)
b. Tension (S/T) 12 3
v) Minimum failing load
a. Suspension 90 kN 90 kN

Page 10 of 25
b. Tension 160 kN 160 kN
vi) Creepage Distance of 320 mm 320 mm

insulator
vii) Power Frequency 35 kV 38 kV
(wet) withstand
voltage
viii) Power Frequency 1.3 times the dry flashover 1.3 times the dry flashover
(puncture) withstand voltage of the unit voltage of the unit
voltage of single disk
ix) Impulse withstand 75 kV 75 kV
voltage of the disk
The Insulator String (Suspension/Tension) shall be capable of withstanding the BIL for the
respective voltage levels as specified elsewhere in the specification.
Note: The above parameters are applicable for installations up to an altitude of 1000m above
mean sea level. For location where altitude is exceeding 1000m, an altitude correction factor
of 1.25% per 100m or as recommended by relevant IS/IEC or part thereof shall be applied.
18.6. BUS POST INSULATORS
The post insulators shall conform in general to latest IEC-60168, IEC 60273 and IEC-
60815.
18.6.1. Constructional Features
a) Post type insulators shall consist of a porcelain part permanently secured in a metal
base to be mounted on the supporting structures. They shall be capable of being
mounted upright. They shall be designed to withstand any shocks to which they
may be subjected to by the operation of the associated equipment. Only solid core
insulators shall be acceptable.
b) Porcelain used shall be homogeneous, free from lamination, cavities and other
flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric properties and
shall be thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture.

Page 11 of 25
c) Glazing of the porcelain shall be of uniform brown in colour, free from blisters,
burrs and other similar defects.
d) The insulator shall have alternate long and short sheds with aerodynamic profile,
the shed profile shall also meet the requirements of IEC-60815 for the specified
pollution level.
e) When operating at normal rated voltage, there shall be no electric discharge
between conductor and insulators which would cause corrosion or injury to
Conductors or insulators by the formation of substance produced by chemical
reaction.
f) The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and
contraction in any part of the insulator shall not lead to its deterioration.
g) All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised. The zinc used for galvanising shall be
of grade Zn 99.95. The zinc coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably
bright, continuous and free from imper¬fections such as flux ash, rust stains, bulky
white deposits and blisters. The metal parts shall not produce any noise generating
corona under the operating conditions.
 Every bolt shall be provided with a steel washer under the nut so that part
of the threaded portion of the bolts is within the thickness of the parts
bolted together.
 Flat washer shall be circular of a diameter 2.5 times that of bolt and of
suitable thickness. Where bolt heads/nuts bear upon the beveled surfaces
they shall be provided with square tapered washers of suitable thickness
to afford a seating square with the axis of the bolt.
 All bolts and nuts shall be of steel with well formed hexagonal heads
forged from the solid and shall be hot dip galvanised. The nuts shall be
good fit on the bolts and two clear threads shall show through the nut
when it has been finally tightened up.
 Spring washers should be electro galvanized.

Page 12 of 25
18.6.2. Tests
In accordance with the stipulations of the specification, the post insulators shall be
subjected to type, acceptance, sample and routine tests as per IEC-60168.
18.6.2.1. In addition to acceptance/sample/routine tests as per IEC-60168, the following tests
shall also be carried out.
a) Ultrasonic test as an acceptance test
b) Soundness test, metallurgical tests and magnetic test on MCI caps and pedestal
tests as acceptance test.
c) All hot dip galvanized components shall be subject to check the uniformity of
thickness and weight of zinc coating on sample basis.
d) The bending test shall be carried out at 50% minimum failing load in four
directions as a routine test and at 100% minimum failing load in four directions as
an acceptance test.
e) Acceptance norms for visual defects allowed at site and also at works shall be
agreed to, in the Quality plan.
Table – 18.6
Technical Parameters of Bus Post Insulators.
Sl. No Description 132 kV 33KV
a) Type Solid Core Solid Core

b) Voltage Class (kV) 145 36 kV
c) Dry and wet one minute power 275 70
frequency withstand voltage(kV rms)
d) Dry lightning impulse withstand 650 170
Voltage (kVp)
e) Radio interference voltage (Micro volt >500 NA
at 1 MHz) at a system voltage of 156
kV.
g) Corona extinction voltage (kV rms) 105 NA
(min.)

Page 13 of 25
h) Cantilever Strength
(i) Total minimum cantilever strength (Kg) 600 450
(ii) Total minimum breaking strength (Kg) 720 -
i) Minimum torsional moment As per IEC-273 As per IEC-273
k) P.C.D Top (mm) 127 127
Bottom (mm) 254 254
l) No. of bolts
Top 4 4
Bottom 8 8
m) Diameter of bolt/holes (mm)
Bolt dia M16 M16
Hole dia 18 18
o) Minimum total creepage distance for 3625 900
Heavy Pollution (mm)
18.7. EARTHWIRE
18.7.1. The earth wire shall be Aluminum clad steel wire of size and mechanical characteristics
as specified in the specification. The technical characteristics of the Earth wire shall be
as specified in the table below.
TABLE-18.6
a. Material G.S. Wire
b. Size 7/4.115 mm
c. Ultimate Tensile Strength 10300 kg
d. Overall diameter 12.35 mm
e. Modulus of Elasticity 149000 MPA
f. Co-efficient of linear expansion 12.9x10-6 per degree C
g. Weight (kg/km) 619
h. Cross sectional Area 77.89 mm2

Page 14 of 25
18.7.2. Earth wire Accessories

The earth wire accessories i.e. dead end assemblies, earthing clamps and P.G. clamps
offered shall be suitable for earth wire. The material employed in the manufacture of
accessories viz. Stainless steel, malleable cast iron and forged steel etc. depending on
the type of application for which the accessories are required shall have requisite
mechanical strength. The composition of materials to be used shall be made available
to the Employer for verification if required.
18.7.3. Dead End Assemblies
Compression type dead end assemblies for G.S earth wire are required for use on the
sub-station towers. The dead end assemblies shall be supplied complete with Jumper,
terminals, nuts and bolts, suitable link pieces between steel clamps and tower strain
plate so as to provide sufficient flexibility to the attachment. The portion to be
compressed shall be clearly marked. Dead end assemblies shall have conductivity not
less than that of equivalent length of ground wire and tensile strength not less than
90% of breaking strength of ground wire.
18.7.4. Earthing Clips
Earthing clips are required for establishing a good electrical contact between the earth
wire Jumper connection of the two dead-end assemblies and the tension tower strain
plate. Earthing shall be suitable for mounting directly on the strain plates without any
other accessories.
18.8. FIRE FIGHTING SYSTEM OF THE SUB-STATION
18.8.1. Scope
18.8.1.1. Portable fire extinguisher of CO2 and Dry Chemical Powder type shall be provided for
protection against fire for 132/33kV substation. These equipments shall be located
near all fire risk areas in such a manner that these shall be accessible at the time of
fire. The quantity and location of extinguishers shall be as per requirements of Fire
Protection Manual (Part I) issued by Tariff Advisory Committee of India (TAC) and IS:
2190 as well as applicable Nepal Standards and Practices. The Control Room building

Page 15 of 25
shall be provided with Fire Detection and Alarm System based on smoke detectors
and/or heat detectors and shall conform to relevant standards.
18.8.1.2. A comprehensive fire protection system shall be designed, supplied, installed and
commissioned which shall ensure fire protection where needed. The firefighting
installation shall be supplemented by fire detection and fire alarm system.
18.8.1.3. The buildings shall be of such design so as to minimize the possibility of fire spread
internally and also with respect to their surroundings. This in particular pertains to
exposure protection.
18.8.1.4. Escape routes and emergency exits shall be easily noticeable. Coloured signs and lights
shall be selected and provided as per Employer's approval. Design features for all fire
preventive measures shall be co-ordinate to suit the systems of the existing and new
buildings and allow proper integration.
18.8.1.5. The firefighting installation shall be ready for operation before commissioning of any
building and/or equipment wherever applicable.
18.8.1.6. In addition, the system design shall be subject to the approval of concerned Nepal
Authorities. The Contractor shall prepare all necessary documents and drawings to
obtain the prior approval of the system design by the concerned Nepal Authorities,
before the execution of procurement/manufacturing.
18.8.1.7. All parts of the system in contact with water shall be of corrosion resistant materials.
18.8.2. Portable Type Fire Extinguishers:

18.8.2.1. This Specification lays down the requirement regarding Portable Type fire
extinguishers of following types:
a) Carbon Dioxide type
b) Dry Chemical powder type
c) Foam Type
18.8.2.2. All the portable extinguishers shall be capable of discharging freely and completely in
upright position.

Page 16 of 25
18.8.2.3. Each extinguisher shall have the instructions for operating the extinguishers on its
body itself.
18.8.2.4. All extinguishers shall be supplied with initial charge and accessories as required.
18.8.2.5. Portable type extinguishers shall be provided with suitable clamps for mounting on
walls/columns.
18.8.2.6. Capacities of Fire Extinguishers of each type shall be as indicated in the schedule of
quantities.
18.8.2.7. Carbon Dioxide (CO2 type) extinguishers shall conform to IS: 2878.
18.8.2.8. Dry chemical powder type extinguisher shall conform to IS: 2171.
18.8.2.9. Tests and Inspection
All tests required to ensure that the equipment conforms to the Specification
requirements and relevant Indian standards and codes shall be conducted by the
contractor. A performance demonstration test at site of five (5) percent or one (1)
number whichever is higher, of the extinguishers shall be carried out by the Contractor.
All consumable and replaceable items required for this test would be supplied by the
Contractor without any extra cost to the Employer.
Performance Certificate of extinguishers shall be in line of applicable Indian Standards.
In case, where no Indian Standard is available for a particular type of extinguishers, the
method of testing shall be mutually agreed to before placement of order for the
extinguishers.
18.8.2.10. PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any defect due to
faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be guaranteed to
operate satisfactorily at the rated capacities at site.
18.8.3. Trolley Mounted Dry Chemical Powder Type Mobile Fire Extinguisher
The Specification lays down the requirements for Trolley mounted fire extinguishers of
dry chemical powder type. Design, manufacture, material of construction and
performance of mobile type fire extinguishers shall comply with the requirements of
latest Indian Standards & shall have BIS approval (ISI marked).

Page 17 of 25

i. The capacity of the mobile dry chemical powder type fire extinguisher shall be 22.5
kg, i.e. the total capacity of the container, when powder completely filled to the
specified level shall be 22.5 kg.
ii. The fire extinguishers shall be used for Class ‘B’, ‘C’, and ‘E’ fires. The extinguishers
shall operate in the vertical position, mounted on solid rubber type trolley wheels.
The effective throw during operation of the extinguishers shall not be less than 10
meter.
iii. A carbon dioxide cartridge fitted with valved discharge head, shall provide
sufficient carbon dioxide to expel the dry chemical powder.
18.8.3.2. Design and Construction
i. The construction of trolley type fire extinguishers shall conform to relevant IS
standard and not be limited to the requirements specified herein.
ii. The body of the fire extinguisher shall be cylindrical. It shall have adequate
supporting arrangement.
iii. The balance of the fully equipped assembly shall be so arranged that it can be
easily towed speedily behind a jeep or a car and also wheeled by a single operator.
iv. Two solid rubber tyre trolley wheels shall be fitted to the body of the trolley type
fire extinguisher. The rubber tyres shall have an effective life of less than three (3)
years.
v. The extinguisher shall be fitted with a discharge hose and nozzle connection. The
hose shall be of rubber or composite construction having a minimum length of 4.5-
meter. The bursting pressure of the hose shall not be less than 42 kgf/cm (g).
vi. The design of discharge nozzle shall be such that when the extinguisher is operated
in still air, the powder shall be thrown in the form of a jet having a range range not
less than 10m for a period of 50-60 seconds. The nozzle shall be fitted with a hand
control device.
vii. Provision shall be made for making a pressure test on the body.

Page 18 of 25
viii. To minimize corrosion, the various components shall be provided with suitable
anti-corrosive treatment/paint as per the requirement of applicable codes.
ix. Each mobile extinguisher shall be complete with initial charge, discharge fittings
and accessories.
18.8.3.3. Tests and Inspection
Testing at manufacturer’s works:
i. The manufacturer shall conduct all tests required to ensure that the equipment
furnished confirms to this Specification requirements, relevant Indian Standards
and applicable codes. The body of Extinguisher shall be capable of withstanding an
internal hydraulic pressure of 25 kgf/cm (g) without leakage or visible distortion,
prior to painting, for a minimum period of 5 minutes.
ii. In destruction tests, if called for, ultimate failure shall occur at a test pressure not
less than 32 kgf/cm (g) and if it occurs below 32 kgf/cm (g), there shall not be
damage in any joint, seam casting of fittings.
iii. A performance demonstration test at site on five (5) percent or one (1) number,
whichever is higher, shall be carried out by the CONTRACTOR. All consumable and
replaceable items required for the test shall be supplied by the CONTRACTOR
without any extra cost to Employer.
18.8.3.4. Performance Guarantee
18.8.3.5. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any defect due
to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be guaranteed to
operate satisfactorily at the rated capacity at site.
18.8.3.6. Painting
i. Each mobile fire extinguisher shall be painted with durable enamel paint of red
colour conforming to relevant Indian Standard. The mobile type fire extinguisher
shall be of make approved by Tariff Advisory Committee/NFPA/FOC/UL. Appliances
conforming to the relevant BS/NFPA Standards are also acceptable provided the
construction generally conform to the IS Standards so that spares refills/cartridges

Page 19 of 25
of Indian make conforming to IS Specification can be used after the operation of

the extinguisher.
ii. Spare charge cartridges equivalent to requirements of 2 Nos. extinguishers shall
also be supplied.
18.8.4. Trolley Mounted Carbon-Dioxide Type Mobile Fire Extinguisher
This Specification lays down the requirements regarding Trolly mounted fire
extinguishers of carbon-dioxide. Design, manufacture, material of construction and
performance of extinguisher as specified herein shall comply with the requirements of
latest applicable Indian Standards IS: 2878 or equivalents and shall have BIS approval
(ISI marked).
i. The capacity of the extinguisher shall be 22.5 kg of carbon-dioxide when filled in
the container.
ii. The extinguisher shall be designed for use where larger high intensity fire hazards
are involved requiring versatility of action. These shall be used for Class ‘B’ fire, i.e.
fire in flammable liquid. Class ‘C’ fire i.e. fire in gaseous substances under pressure
and Class ‘E’ fire, i.e. fires in live electrical equipment.
iii. The extinguisher shall be operated in upright position, by releasing a suitable valve.
iv. The range of effective operation of the extinguishers shall be about 4 meters.
18.8.4.2. Design and Construction
i. The construction of Trolly mounted fire extinguisher of carbon-dioxide type, shall
in general conform to IS:2828 subject to the requirements mentioned hereunder:
ii. The carbon-dioxide gas shall conform to IS:307.
iii. The body of the extinguisher shall be cylindrical in shape and made of steel. It shall
have adequate supporting arrangement so that it can rest on the wheeled body in
upright position and the operator be free to direct the stream.
iv. The weight of the full equipped trolley unit shall be so arranged, that despite its
considerable weight, it can be easily wheeled by one man. It shall be capable of
being towed speedily behind a jeep or car.

Page 20 of 25
v. The cylinder shall be mounted on a trolley fitted with two cushion tyred wheels
and fitted with suitable handle. The overall wheel diameter shall be about 280
mm.
vi. The frame of the trolley shall be made of welded steel section.
vii. The design shall permit easy maintenance and operation by one person.
viii. The extinguisher shall be fitted with a high pressure flexible hose of about 9 m
length and internal dia to hoses shall not be more than 12 mm.
ix. A discharge horn made of fibre or any other material non-conducting to electricity
shall be fitted with a handle made of thermal insulating material capable of
protecting operators hand from freezing effects.
x. Suitable provision for firmly securing the horn to the body, when it is not in use,
shall be provided. The fixing device shall not interfere with the operation or
mobility of the extinguisher.
xi. The discharge valve or operating head shall be capable of being operated
satisfactorily. It shall be made of material as specified in IS: 2878.
xii. There shall be no leakage of CO2 from valve or fitting during the use of
extinguisher. Valve shall be provided with suitable safety device to prevent over
pressure in cylinder.
xiii. A seal or device shall be fitted on extinguisher to indicate that the extinguisher has
not been used.
xiv. Each extinguisher shall be complete with initial charge, discharge fittings and other
accessories as required.
18.8.5. The minimum quantity of fire extinguishers to be supplied for 132/33 kV substation at
Dhunge Sangu in Nepal is as follows:
TABLE-18.7 Minimum Requirement of Fire Extinguishers
S. No. Type Location Quantity
a. 22.5 Kg Capacity fire extinguisher of CO2 Transformer 2 Nos.
type, Trolley Mounted
b. 25 Kg Capacity fire extinguisher of Dry Switchyard 2 Nos.

Page 21 of 25
Chemical Powder type, Trolley Mounted

c. Fire Buckets (6 Nos. with stand in one set) Switchyard & 5 Nos.
Control Room
Building
d. CO2 fire extinguisher of 6.5 kg capacity wall Control Room/LT 10 Nos.
mounted Room/Telecom
Room/Battery
Room/Store Room
e. Foam Type- 9 Liters Generator Room 2 Nos
f. Dry Powder Type-5 Kgs Office 6 Nos
Room/Meeting
Room/Pantry Room
g. 50 Liters Mechanical Foam type Fire Control Room 4 Nos
Building
Extinguisher
However, the contractor shall estimate the quantity of Fire extinguishers of various
types required based on the substation and control room layout to meet the
requirement of TAC and NEMA standards and in case the requirement so worked out is
higher than that minimum requirement specified above, the higher quantity shall be
supplied without any extra cost. In no case, the quantity shall be less than minimum
specified above.
18.9. AIR-CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION EQUIPMENT
18.9.1. General
18.9.1.1. This specification covers supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Air
conditioning system in specified areas of the control room building. It is proposed to
provide Air conditioners in the control room where very sophisticated electronic
equipment & modules are installed for maintaining proper temperature.
18.9.1.2. Air conditioning shall be provided in the following areas of the Control room building:

Page 22 of 25
18.9.1.3. Control and Relay panel Area, ACDB & DCDB/LT room, office room, Conference Room,
OPGW room etc. Proper Ventilation system shall be provided for DG Room, Store and
battery room etc and it is duly approved by the employer before placing the order
during detailed engineering stage.
18.9.1.4. Air conditioning units for control room building shall be set to maintain the inside DBT
at 24°C ± 20 C.
18.9.1.5. Each Control panel room shall be provided with temperature transducer to monitor
the temperature of the panel room. The Temperature transducer shall have the
following specification:
Sensor : Air temperature sensor (indoor use)
Output : 4 to 20mA
Temperature range : -50C to 600C
Resolution : 0.10C
Accuracy : 0.50C or better.
18.9.1.6. In the LT room where 3 phase, 4 wire AC LT panels & DC panels are installed, a lot of
heat is generated and the temperature of the equipment goes up. To maintain proper
temperature of LT panels, exhaust fans shall be provided to dissipate the heat
generated inside the LT boards.
18.9.2. SCOPE
i. The scope of the equipment to be furnished and services to be provided
under the contract are outlined hereinafter and the same is to be read in
conjunction with the provision contained in other sections/ clauses. The
scope of the work under the contract shall be deemed to include all such
items, which although not specifically mentioned in the bid documents
and/or in Bidder's proposal, but are required to make the equipment/system
complete for its safe, efficient, reliable and trouble free operation.
ii. Copper refrigerant piping complete with insulation between the indoor and
remote outdoor condensers as required.
iii. PVC drain piping from the indoor unit’s upto the nearest drain point.

Page 23 of 25
iv. Power and control cabling between the indoor unit and outdoor unit and
earthing and voltage stabilizer units for each AC unit.
v. Supply and erection of Power and control cable and earthing.
vi. MS Brackets for outdoor condensing units, condensers as required.
vii. The minimum number of Air conditioners of High wall type split AC units of
1.0 TR, 1.5 TR and 2.0 TR capacity with high wall type indoor evaporator unit
shall be installed in various rooms are listed below Table:
TABLE-18.8 Minimum Requirement of Split Type Air conditioners
S. No. Substation Area of Capacity of Split AC Quantity

Installation (In TR) (Nos.)
1 Dhunge Sangu Control Room 2 4
Conference 1 2
Room
Office Room 1 1
Telecom Room 1 1
Executive Room 1 2
( 2 Nos)
ACDB & DCDB 1.5 1
Room
18.9.3. Specification of Split AC units

18.9.3.1. The split AC units shall be complete with indoor evaporator and outdoor condensing
units and cordless remote control units.
18.9.3.2. Outdoor unit shall comprise of hermetically sealed reciprocating/rotary compressors
mounted on vibration isolators, propeller type axial flow fans and copper tube
aluminum finned coils all assembled in a sheet metal casing. The casing and the total
unit shall be properly treated and shall be weatherproof type. They shall be compact in
size and shall have horizontal discharge of air.

Page 24 of 25
18.9.3.3. The indoor units shall be high wall type. The indoor unit shall be compact and shall
have elegant appearance. They shall have low noise centrifugal blowers driven by
special motors and copper tube aluminum finned cooling coils. Removable and
washable polypropylene filters shall be provided. They shall be complete with multi-
function cordless remote control unit with special features like programmable timer,
sleep mode and soft dry mode etc.
18.9.3.4. The split AC units shall be of reputed and approved make.
18.10. TESTS
18.10.1. Type Tests
All the equipments/miscellaneous items offered shall be fully type tested as per the
relevant standards. In case the equipment of the type and design offered has already
been type tested, the contractor shall furnish the type test reports for approval before
placing the order. The employer reserves the right to demand repetition of some or all
the type tests in the presence of employer’s representative.
18.10.2. Routine and Acceptance Tests
All the routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out by the
contractor at the manufacturer’s works. All acceptance tests as stipulated in the
relevant standard shall be carried out by the Contractor/Manufacturer in the presence
of the Employer’s representative. No material shall be dispatched without the approval
of test certificates.
18.11. DRAWINGS AND BILL OF MATERIALS
The contractor shall furnish the following drawings:
1) Sectional drawings showing the general constructional features of insulators
(tension, suspension & post and hardware, conductors for equipment, bus
conductors and earth wires).
2) General outline diagram showing all dimensions, net weight of each type of
hardware fittings.
3) Drawing of Marshalling Kiosks/Control cabinets.

Page 25 of 25
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER –19
Erection, Testing and Commissioning of Electrical Equipment
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 19
ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS
19.0 GENERAL 1
19.1 DETAILED DESIGN AND DRAWING 3
19.2 ERECTION 7
19.3 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 11

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 19
ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
19.0 GENERAL
19.0.1 This covers tentative requirements for installation, testing and commissioning of all
electrical equipments for 132/33 kV substation at Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung District)
in Nepal. The electrical and associated equipments shall be erected in conformity
with the requirements of Indian Standards, Codes/International codes and
practices, Indian & Nepal Safety rules and all other statutory regulations of Nepal
that may be relevant to erection and testing/commissioning as per requirements of
IS/IEC and other details given elsewhere in the Project Documents.
19.0.2 The contractor shall furnish all labour, skilled and un-skilled, supervisory and
administrative personnel erection tool & tackles, transport vehicles, mobile cranes,
digging/excavation equipment, testing and commissioning equipment, implements
necessary for timely and effective execution of the contract. The installation work
is inclusive of supply of erection materials, hardware, consumables and supply
items to complete the installation under turnkey execution of the project.
19.0.3 Sub-Station Checks

Contractor shall carry out the following checks at the substation under the project,
and submit the report to Employer.
1) The installation has been carried out in accordance with the approved
drawings.
2) Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth clearances are provided as required.
3) All equipments are effectively earthed and properly connected to the
required number of earth electrodes.

Page 1 of 15
4) The required ground clearance to live terminals is provided.

5) Suitable fencing is provided with gate with lockable arrangements.
6) The required numbers of caution boards, fire-fighting equipments, operating
rods, insulating mats, etc. are kept in the substation.
7) In case of indoor substation, sufficient ventilation and draining arrangements
are made (Not apllicable).
8) All cable trenches are provided with non-flammable covers.
9) Free accessibility is provided for all equipments for normal operation.
10) All name plates should be fixed and the equipments; fully painted.
11) All construction materials and temporary connections are removed.
12) Oil levels, bus bar tightness, transformer tap position, etc. are in order.
13) Earth pipe troughs and cover slabs are provided for earth electrodes earth
pits. Neutral and lightning arrester earth pits are marked for easy
identification.
14) Earth electrodes are of GI pipes or MS Rods. For earth connections, brass
bolts and nuts with lead washers are provided in the pipes/-plates.
15) Earth pipe troughs, oil sumps/pits are free from rubbish and dirt and stone
jelly and the earth connections are visible and easily accessible.
16) Panels and equipments are all vermin and damp proof and all unused
openings or holes are blocked properly.
17) The earth bus bars are checked for tightness and for corrosion free joint
surface.
18) Control switch fuses are provided at an accessible height from ground.
19) Safety devices, horizontal and vertical barriers, bus bar covers/shrouds,
automatic safety shutters/doors interlock; handle interlock for safe and
reliable operation in all panels and cubicles.
20) Clearances in the front, rear and sides of the switchboards are adequate.

Page 2 of 15
21) The switch operates freely; all the blades make contact at the same time.
The arcing horns contact in advance, and the handles are provided with
locking arrangements.
22) Insulators are free from cracks and are clean.
23) In the case of transformers, there is no oil leak.
24) Connections to bushings in transformers are tightened and have good
contact.
25) Bushings are free from cracks and are clean.
26) Accessories of transformers like breathers, vent pipe, buchholz relay, etc. are
in order.
27) Connections to gas relay in transformer are in order
28) Oil and winding temperature are set for specific requirements in
transformers.
29) In case of cable trenches, adequate arrangements to pump out water that
has entered due to seepage or other reason is provided and
30) All incoming and outgoing circuits of panels are clearly and indelibly labeled
for identifications both at the front and at the rear.
31) Busbar phases are to marked on both sides
32) Stone spreading has been properly carried out by the contractor.
19.1 DETAILED DESIGNS AND DRAWINGS

Detailed dimensional drawings and design calculations for the following shall be
submitted by the contractor to the Employer and Consultant for scrutiny and
approval:
TABLE-19.1.1
List of drawings
S No Drawing title

Page 3 of 15
Electrical Design and Drawings

1. Single Line Diagram
2. General Layout Plan
3. General Layout Section
4. Single line Protection Diagram
5. Control and Protection Philosophy
6. Sub Station Operation Philosophy
7. Electrical clearances diagram
8. Fault Level calculation
9. Short Circuit Forces calculation on Bus Bars
10. Short Circuit Forces calculation for equipments structures
11. Gantry Loading Details
12. Gantry Layout Plan
13. Gantry Loading Diagram
14. Gantry tower and girder design calculations
15. Gantry tower and girder drawings
16. Equipment structure design calculation design
17. Equipment structure drawings
18. Earth mat Design Calculations
19. Calculations for step and touch potential
20. Earthing Layout Diagram
21. Gantry and Equipment Earthing Details
22. BOQ for earthing system
23. Erection Key Diagram
BOQ for Hardware, Clamps & Connectors, ACSR conductor, Post
24. Insulators, Disc Insulators, Equipment Bus bar
25. Cable trench layout drawing

Page 4 of 15
26. Cable size calculations

27. Wiring diagram and Cable schedule
28. BOQ for control and power cables
29. Illumination system design calculations outdoor and indoor
30. Illumination system layout outdoor and indoor
31. BOQ for illumination system
32. Control Room Layout Plan, Elevation & Side View
33. Control Room building Architecture Drawing
34. Lightning system design calculations
35. Lightning system design layout
36. Fire Protection System Design Philosophy and calculations
37. BOQ for Fire Protection System
38. Drawings for Fire Protection System
39. Station Auxiliary Supply System Load calculation
40. Station Auxiliary Supply Single Line Diagram
41. Protection Single Line diagram for station auxiliary system
42. Relay setting details for Aux AC System
43. Station Auxiliary Supply Yard Layout
44. BOQ For Station Auxiliary Supply
Battery sizing calculations and selection of battery bank for Aux DC
45. Supply and OP Communication System
Single Line diagram for Aux DC System and DC For Optical Fiber
46. Communication System.
47. BOQ for DC System
48. Battery Charger rating calculations
49. Control and Protection Philosophy, SCADA System
50. Relevant drawings & documents for Substation Automation System

Page 5 of 15
51. System architecture for control and protection system

52. BOQ for control and protection system
53. Relay setting calculations for protection system
54. Any other Relevant drawing required for the completion of the work
Civil Design and Drawings
1. Design of transformer foundation
2. Drawing of transformer foundation
3. Design of gantry tower foundation
4. Drawing of gantry tower foundation
5. Design of equipment foundations
6. Drawing of equipment foundation
7. Design of lightening mast foundation
8. Drawing of lightening mast foundation
9. Design of equipment foundations
10. Drawings of equipment foundations
11. Design of foundation for equipments in station auxiliary supply yard
12. Drawing of foundation for equipments in station auxiliary supply yard
13. Design for control room building
14. Drawing for control room building
Conduit layout for illumination and fire protection system concealed
15. wiring for control room
16. Design for cable trench sections
17. Drawing for cable trench sections
18. Design for drain and water harvesting system
19. Drawing for drain and water harvesting system
20. Drain and road layout drawing
21. Design for drain/trench culvert at road crossing

Page 6 of 15
22. Drawing for drain/trench culvert at road crossing

23. Design for road
24. Drawing for Sub Station fencing
25. Drawing for transformer pit grating
26. Drawing for street light pole foundation
27. Drawing for fire protection pump house building
28. Drawing for vehicle parking shade
29. Design for transmission line tower foundations
30. Drawing for transmission line tower foundations
31. Design for foundation of AC kiosk
32. Drawing for foundation of AC kiosk
33. Design , Drawing of RCC retaining wall, Stone masonry breast wall
34. Any other Relevant drawing required for the completion of the work
19.2 ERECTION
19.2.1 Erection of Power Transformer Bank(s)
The bidder shall assemble and install the outdoor Power Transformer Bank(s)
including the tap change gear as covered in the specification. The bidder shall be
responsible for arranging the necessary equipments required for the erection of the
transformers. Necessary commissioning tests shall be carried out before putting
the transformers in commercial operation to the satisfaction of the Employer.
19.2.2 Erection of the outdoor equipments
The bidder shall assemble, install and connect all the circuit breakers, current
transformers and potential transformers, CTs, lightning arrestors, CVT/VT’s,
communications system etc.as specified in the technical specifications. The
equipment shall be placed and leveled carefully on their respective foundation or
structures as the case may be. The operating mechanism and control circuits of
the circuit breakers shall be tested for proper opening, closing and position

Page 7 of 15
indications. The opening and closing tests shall be made from the control points
and also in service operation. The equipment will be subjected to normal
commissioning tests before putting the equipment in commercial operation. Main
contact resistances of all the phases shall be recorded so as to ensure that the
contacts are properly closed.
19.2.3 Erection of Isolator and Isolators cum Earthing Switches

The isolators and isolators cum earthing switches as covered in the document of
the specification shall be mounted by the bidder on the steel structures. The poles
of the switches shall be aligned accurately and leveled on the supporting steel
structures. The switches shall be adjusted so as to permit operation with ease by
one man. Each bearing of the operating mechanism shall be properly lubricated.
The equipment shall be subjected to normal commissioning tests before putting it
in commercial operation.
19.2.4 Erection of Indoor equipments
The bidder shall install various indoor equipments as indicated in the Documents in
the control room building which will consist of control and relay panels for HV & LV,
SAS panels, Fiber Optical Telecommunication System, 400 V AC and 110 V DC
distribution boards, Battery & Battery Chargers, RTCC etc., All the materials such as
bolts, nuts, washers and screws for installing the equipment, insulating tape
compound, solder, soldering paste and connectors for making the electrical
connections and hard-wood blocks for supporting the cables shall be arranged by
the contractor. Special care shall be exercised in the sub-station to avoid damage
to the equipment. The bidder shall furnish the patching lacquer and shall repair
any damage to the lacquered surface of the board. The cables entering at the
bottom of the control board shall be adequately supported at the trench opening

Page 8 of 15
by means of aluminum clamps. Each block shall be drilled with holes to fit the cable
longitudinally and the clamped together with two through bolts.
19.2.5 Erection of Control and Power cables
The bidder shall be responsible for laying the control and power cables covered
under the project. The bidder shall furnish all insulating tape and compound,
solder, soldering paste and connectors. Power and control cables shall be run into
cable trenches on supports of suitable dimension in the switchyard and in cable
conduit near equipment for equipment connection. Conduits shall be cleaned and
free from obstructions and sharp corners. A clean, dry, tight fitting rag shall be
drawn through the conduit immediately before installing the cables. The cables
shall be installed in such a manner that there will be no cuts or abrasion in the
insulation or protective covering of the conductors. Splicing of conductors shall be
made in boxes, panel boards and cabinets. Where a lubricant is required for pulling
wire or cable only soapstone or a similar approved material not injurious to the
wire or cable sheath shall be used. Any wire or cable damaged during installation
shall be removed and replaced at the bidder expenses. After all cables are installed
and all equipment wiring, devices and fixtures have been connected by the bidder,
he shall conduct such insulation and operating tests as in his opinion are necessary
to demonstrate the adequacy of the electrical installations and to ensure that no
damage has occurred to the cables during the installation. All runs, connections,
soldering and taping of conductors shall be made neatly.
19.2.6 Erection of Fiber Optic Telecommunication System
The bidder shall be responsible for the complete erection, testing and
commissioning of the Fiber Optic Telecommunication System.
19.2.7 Erection of sub-station structures, insulators and hardware, bus-bars, earthing
and other sundry materials

Page 9 of 15
a) The bidder shall be responsible for erection of structures, insulators and

hardware, bus-bars, earthing and other sundry materials etc. required for the
project.
b) No steel structure shall be erected on foundations until at least 14 days after
placing of the concrete in foundations. Base plates where required shall be
grounded. All base plates shall be set accurately to the grade and alignment
designated on drawings duly approved by the Employer. All galvanized steel
shall be handled with care to avoid bending or damage to the galvanizing.
Pieces bent in handling may be used only if they can be straightened without
injury to the galvanizing. The method of erection of the structure is left to the
contractor and it is to be duly approved by the Employer before commencing
erection activities.
c) Insulators and bus bars’ materials:

The bidder shall install all bus-bars, insulators and hardware, overhead ground
wires over substation structures, as covered in the specification. The bidder
shall also install the conductors, over head ground wires, OPGW, Optical
Approach Cable, hardware and insulators in the span between the dead end
tower and the sub-station structures. Conductors which are used in tension
and overhead ground wires shall be free of joints or splices. The equipment
used for stringing the conductor and overhead ground wires shall be such that
the conductor will not be damaged or injured. All section of the conductors
damaged by the application of gripping attachments shall be replaced before
the conductors are strung. All data such as stringing tables, giving tension with
temperature variations will be supplied by the contractor. The contractor shall
also be responsible for installing the various conductors, required for
connection of the various equipments in the sub-station.
19.2.8 Grounding system

Page 10 of 15
The Contractor shall lay the ground mat, as per design and drawing approved for
the substation. They shall make all the grounding connections to equipments and
structures. Risers from the station ground mat for this purpose shall also be
provided by the bidder as per drawings approved by Employer.
19.2.9 Erection of lighting fixtures, sockets outlets, fire-fighting equipments etc.
The Contractor shall install and connect all lighting fixtures in the switchyard and
along fencing. Distribution pillars and socket outlets, detailed in specifications for
lighting and fire protection system shall be provided for power supply to electrical
instruments/equipment and oil filtration plant etc. All the materials such as tape
and compound, solder, soldering paste, required for wiring of the lighting fixtures
shall be arranged by the contractor. Switchyard and control room lighting fixtures
shall be installed as per the approved drawings of illumination design.
19.2.10 Electrical Conduits

The bidder shall furnish and install all embedded and exposed electrical conduits,
conduits fittings, boxes and accessories. The conduits and the fittings shall be as
per the relevant Indian/International Standard. The underground metal/PVC
conduits as per project requirements shall be embedded in a concrete encasement.
Conduits, conduit boxes and fittings shall be secured in positions while concrete is
being placed. The threads of all embedded G.I. conduit joints shall be covered with
red lead or applied with an insulating varnish. Joints between conduits and cabinets
in outdoor installations shall be watertight. The route of all conduit in sub-station,
steel structures for purpose of lighting in switchyard shall be determined by the
bidder.
19.3 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
19.3.1 Before the substation is energized, necessary commissioning tests may be
conducted and any adjustments etc. required to be made in the equipments may
be carried out. After all the pre-commissioning tests are successfully carried out,

Page 11 of 15
the substation shall be put into commercial operation and handed over to the
Employer. The commissioning tests’ reports shall be submitted to the Employer for
his approval.
19.3.2 The contractor shall perform all tests as per IS/International standard and any
additional tests based on specialties of the equipment without any extra cost to the
Employer. The bidder shall arrange all instruments required for conducting these
tests along with calibration certificates and shall furnish the list of the instrument to
the Engineer for his approval. The tentative description is given as below.
19.3.2.1 General checks
a) Check for physical damage;
b) Check from name plate that all items are as per specification;
c) Check tightness of all bolts, clamps and connecting terminals;
d) For oil-filled equipments, check for oil leakages. Check oil level and top up
wherever necessary;
e) Check ground connections;
f) Check cleanliness of insulators and bushings.
19.3.2.2 Transformers
a) Testing of Transformer Oil as per IS/IEC;
b) Insulation resistance and checking of polarization index of winding;
c) Voltage ratio test on all taps;
d) Vector group test;
e) Operation test of tap changer;
f) Buchholz relay operation test;
g) Operation test of all protective devices and interlocks;
h) Insulation resistance of control wiring;
i) Measurement of core loss;
j) Measurement of winding resistance;
k) Calibration of temperature indications and temperature relays;

Page 12 of 15
l) All checks on OLTC.

19.3.2.3 Circuit Breakers
a) Insulation resistance of pole(s);
b) Check adjustments, if any, suggested by manufacturer;
c) Breaker closing and tripping operations;
d) Trip free and anti-pumping operations;
e) Minimum pick up voltages of coils;
f) Contact resistances;
g) Functional checking of SF6 Gas system;
h) Functional checking of control circuits, interlocks, tripping through protective
relays;
i) Insulation resistance of control circuits, motor etc.;
j) Resistances of closing & tripping coils;
k) Leakage testing of SF6 (gas).
19.3.2.4 Isolators
a) Insulation resistance(s) of pole(s);
b) Manual & electrical operations and interlocks;
c) Insulation resistances of control circuits and motors;
d) Ground connections;
e) Contact resistances;
f) Proper alignment so as to minimize the vibrations during operation.
19.3.2.5 Current Transformers
a) Insulation resistance test;
b) Polarity test;
c) Ratio test;
d) Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable);
e) Magnetizing characteristic test;
f) Winding resistance test.

Page 13 of 15
19.3.2.6 Voltage Transformer

a) Insulation resistance test;
b) Polarity test;
c) Ratio test;
d) Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable).
19.3.2.7 Lightning Arrester
a) Leakage current;
b) Resistances of ground connections.
19.3.2.8 Motors
a) Insulation resistance;
b) Phase sequence and proper direction of rotation.
19.3.2.9 Station Earthing
a) Check soil resistivity;
b) Check continuity of ground conductors;
c) Check earth resistance of the entire grid;
d) Check for weld joints and application of zinc paint on galvanized surfaces.
19.3.2.10 ACSR Conductor, Power Connectors
a) Physical check for finish;
b) Electrical clearances check;
c) Milli-Volt drop test on all power connectors;
d) Sag and tension check on conductors.
19.3.2.11 Insulators
a) Verification of dimensions;
b) Verification of displacement(s);
c) Verification of the locking systems;
d) Temperature cycle test;
e) Porosity Test;
f) Galvanizing Test;

Page 14 of 15
g) Visual Examination Test;

h) Residual Strength Test;
i) Metallurgical Test;
j) Mechanical Performance Test.
19.3.2.12 Control & Relay Panels, Optical Fiber Termination Equipment and Substation
Automation System.
a) Operations of all types of relays, alarms and controls independently and
through equipments;
b) Insulation testing of terminals;
c) Operation of substation automation system;
d) Operation of Optical Fiber Terminal Equipment Panel (OPGW).

Page 15 of 15
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER –20
Station Transformers
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 20
STATION TRANSFORMER
CONTENTS
20.0 SCOPE 1
20.1 INTRODUCTION 2
20.2 PERFORMANCE 4
20.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 7
20.4 TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT 8
20.5 INSPECTION AND TESTING 8
20.6 FACTORY TEST 10
20.7 FITTINGS 12
20.8 PAINTING 13
20.9 SPARE PARTS 13

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 20
STATION TRANSFORMERS
20.0 SCOPE
20.0.1 These specifications are intended to cover design, engineering, manufacture, inspection
and testing at manufacturer’s works before dispatch, supply, transportation, insurance,
dispatch & delivery for project site in Nepal, handling, storage & preservation at site,
complete work of site assembly, erection, dehydration, testing and commissioning &
remedial action, if any, up to defect liability period of following type of oil immersed core
type Transformers complete with all accessories and fittings, erection & maintenance tools
& tackles, mandatory spares as detailed in this specifications for construction of 132/33 kV
Substation at Dhunge Sangu in Nepal.
20.0.2 The scope of supply shall include all parts, accessories, auxiliaries, mountings, etc. including
insulating oil required for first filling plus 10 % extra, which are necessary for satisfactory
operation of the Transformers even though not individually or specifically stated or
enumerated.
20.0.3 Corresponding parts of the Transformers, accessories, spares, etc. shall be of the same
materials, dimensions and workman-ship and shall be interchangeable.
20.0.4 The design and workmanship shall be in accordance with the best engineering practices to
20.0.5 Power cables, control cables & special cables, supports, cable racks, cable glands, lugs,
terminals, connectors, etc. for cabling between equipment & devices covered in this
section and upto UCB, Protection Panels shall be under scope of Supply.
20.0.6 Any material and equipments not specifically stated in this specification but which are

Page 1 of 13
20.0.8 The performance of the equipment shall be guaranteed as per Section V – “Guaranteed
and Other Technical Particulars”.
20.0.10 The Technical Specification for oil filled transformer i.e. 400KVA, 33/0.4 kV are given
below:
20.1 INTRODUCTION
1) The 400 KVA, 33/0.4KV 3-phase Transformer shall be of core type, oil immersed ONAN
cooled.
20.1.1 SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS (STANDARD CONDITIONS)
The below parameters and minimum safety clearances are applicable for installations up to
Further the equipment being supplied shall be suitable for operation under sub Zero Temp
with ICE/Snow considerations. The equipment shall be suitable for working in the
temperature variation between (-5 Deg) to (+40 Deg) without reporting any malfunction.
SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 400KVA TRANSFORMER
(i) Rated KVA of the 400 KVA ONAN

Transformer
(iii) Frequency 50 Hz  3%
(iv) Cooling medium Mineral oil
(v) Rated Voltage

a) High voltage side 33 kV
b) Low voltage side 415 V
(vi) Highest Continuous System
Voltage :

Page 2 of 13
a) High voltage (HV) 36 kV

b) Low Voltage (LV) 433 V
(vii) Method of system earthing:
a) Low Voltage (IV) Solidly earthed
(viii) Type of tap changer Off load Tap changer
(ix) Range of tapping Plus 5% to minus 5% with four (4) equal steps of
2.5%.
(x) Impedance at rated MVA 4.5 %
Base on Principal tap
(xi) Type of insulation & 33 kV 0.4 kV
a) Type of insulation: Uniform Uniform
b) One minute power 70 3
voltage (kV RMS)
c) Lightening Impulse 170 -
withstand test voltage
(kVp):
(xii) Winding connection Delta (HV) Star (LV)
Material Copper Copper
(xiii) Vector group: Dyn1
(xiv) Type of cooling ONAN

(xv) Maximum Flux Density (Bm) 1.6 wb/m2
voltage & frequency
(xvi) Short circuit level of the 25 kA for three sec.
system to which

Page 3 of 13
connected
(xvii) Maximum Temperature Rise
for various types of cooling
over an ambient of 40 deg C
a) Temperature rise of top oil 500 C
b) Temperature rise of winding 550 C
Note: The allowable temp rise during testing shall be reduced by 10K for every 250m
(xviii) Noise Level at Rated Voltage Less than 75db for ONAN
& Frequency Less than 80db at full load
(xix) Transformer Oil As per IS:335 (latest edition), with pouring
temperature -100 C
20.2 PERFORMANCE
a) The Transformers shall be capable of operating at full load for at least ten (10) minutes during
total failure of auxiliary power supply.
b) The maximum flux density in any part of the core and yoke at normal voltage and Frequency
shall be such that the flux density under 10% over voltage condition shall not exceed 1.9
Tesla.
c) The insulation of core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall withstand a voltage of 2kV (rms)
for 1minute.
d) The insulating oil shall be conforming to IEC 60296.
e) It shall withstand and give desired performance, without injurious heating for combined
voltage and frequency fluctuations. It shall withstand over fluxing conditions of 110, 125 and
140% for continuous, 1 minute and 5 seconds respectively.

Page 4 of 13
f) It shall be capable of being loaded upto 150% of rated load as per IS 6600/ IEC 60076-7. There
shall be no limitation for overloading imposed by bushing, tap changer etc or any other
associated equipment.
g) Transformer shall be capable of withstanding for two second without damage to any external
short circuit, with the short circuit MVA available at the terminals.
h) Transformer shall under exceptional circumstances due to sudden disconnection of the load,
be capable of operating at the voltage approximately 25% above normal rated voltage for a
period of not exceeding one minute and 40% above normal for a period of 5 seconds.
i) The transformer may be operated continuously without danger on any particular tapping at
the rated MVA 10% of the voltage corresponding to the tapping.
j) Transformers shall be suitable for continuous operation at rated output with a frequency
variation of up to 3% from normal frequency of 50 Hz without exceeding the specified
temperature rise.
k) The transformer shall be so designed that the current density of all the windings and the
regulating winding at the lowest tap should not exceed 100 A/sq.cm.
20.2.1 AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLIES
The following Auxiliary power supplies shall be available at site:
i) AC, 1 phase 230 volts 50 Hz. earthed
ii) 110 volts DC ungrounded.
20.2.2 DRAWINGS INCORPORATING THE FOLLOWING PARTICULARS SHALL BE SUBMITTED WITH
THE BID
i. General outline drawing showing shipping dimensions and overall dimensions, net
weights and shipping weights, quality of insulating oil, spacing of wheels in either
direction of motion, location of coolers, marshalling box and tap changers etc.
ii. Height of centre line of HV and LV connectors of transformers from the rail top level.
iii. Dimensions of the largest part to be transported.
iv. GA drawings/details of various types of bushing.
v. Type test certificates of Identical design transformers.
vi. Illustrative & descriptive literature of the Transformer.

Page 5 of 13
vii. Maintenance and Operating Instructions.

20.2.3 MISCELLANEOUS
a) Padlocks along with duplicate keys as asked for various valves, marshalling box etc., shall
be supplied by the contractor, wherever applicable.
b) Foundation bolts for wheel locking devices of Transformer shall be supplied by the
Contractor.
20.2.4 PARALLEL OPERATION
The transformers Banks shall be capable of satisfactory parallel operation with each other
if connected between the high voltage and low voltage bus-bar.
20.2.5 SCHEDULES
All Schedules annexed to the specification, shall be duly filled by the bidder separately.
20.2.6 NAME/RATING PLATE
Transformer rating plate shall contain the information as given in clause 7 IS-2026 (Part-I).
The details on rating plate shall be finalized during the detailed engineering.
20.2.7 STANDARDS & CODES
20.2.7.1 The equipment, materials and service covered by this specification shall conform to the
latest applicable provision of the following Laos/ Indian/International standards:
TABLE 6.1.3: STANDARDS

IS:2026 (Part I to IV) Power Transformer
IS:6600 Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers
IS:335 New insulating oil for transformers, Switchgears
IS:3639 Fittings and accessories for power Transformers
IS:2099 High voltage porcelain bushings
IS:2705 Current Transformers
IS:3347 Dimensions for porcelain Transformer/Bushings
IS:3202 Code of practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment
IS:2147 Degree of protection

Page 6 of 13
IS:2071 Method of high voltage testing

IS:3637 Gas operated relays
IS:1271 Classification of insulating materials for electrical machinery
and apparatus in relation to their stability in services
IS:5 Colour for ready mixed paints
IS:10028 Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
transformers, Part I, II and III
IS:5561 Electric Power Connectors
C.B.I.P. Publication Manual on Transformers
IS 8478 OLTC
20.2.7.2 The Equipment and material meeting the requirement of any other Nepal Standards or
internationally recognized standards which ensure a quality equal or better than the
standard mentioned above shall also be acceptable. Where the equipment conforms to
any other standards then salient points of difference between the standards adopted and
those prescribed in these specifications shall be clearly brought out in the bid and a copy
of the applicable standards shall also be enclosed by the bidder with the bid.
20.3 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
20.3.1 Core
The core shall be constructed from high grade, non-aging, cold rolled grain-oriented silicon
steel laminations. The maximum flux density in any part of the cores and yoke at normal
voltage and frequency shall be such that the flux density at any tap position with 10%
voltage variation from the voltage corresponding to the tap shall not exceed 1.9 Wb/sq-m.
20.3.2 Windings
The conductor shall be of electrolytic copper, free from scales and burrs.
20.3.3 Insulating Oil
The oil supplied with transformer shall be unused and have the parameters for unused new
oil conforming to IEC: 60296 while tested at oil Contractor's premises, No inhibitors shall

Page 7 of 13
be used in oil. Ten percent extra oil shall be supplied for topping up after commissioning in
nonreturnable containers suitable for outdoor storage.
20.4 TERMINAL ARRANGEMENT
a) Bushing terminals shall be provided with suitable terminal connectors of approved
type and size for cable/overhead conductors termination of HV side and cable
termination on LV side.
b) The neutral terminals of 400V winding shall be brought out on a bushing along with
the 433 volt phase terminals to form a 4 wire system for the 400 volt. Additional
neutral bushing shall also be provided for earthing.
20.4.1 Off Circuit Tap Changing Equipment
The tap change switch shall be three phase, hand operated for simultaneous switching of
similar taps on the three phases by operating an external hand wheel.
20.4.2 Marshalling Box
A metal enclosed, weather, vermin & dust proof marshalling box shall be provided with
each transformer to accommodate temperature indicators, terminal blocks etc. It shall
have a degree of protection of IP 55 as per IEC: 60947 Part-1.
20.4.3 Cable boxes

Whenever cable connections are required, suitable cable boxes shall be provided and shall
be air insulated. They shall be of sufficient size to accommodate Purchaser's cables and
shall have suitable removable side/top cover to facilitate cable termination and inspection.
Cable boxes shall be dust & vermin proof.
20.5 INSPECTION AND TESTING
a) The Contractor shall draw up and carry out a comprehensive inspection and testing
program during manufacture and commissioning of the transformer. The
programme shall be duly approved by the Purchaser.
b) The Contractor shall carryout all routine tests on all the transformers as per
relevant standards. Type test report shall be submitted for approval during detail
engineering.

Page 8 of 13
20.5.1 INSPECTION
20.5.2 Tank and Accessories
a) Physical and dimensional check of transformer tank and accessories.
b) Crack detection of major strength weld seams by dye penetration test.
20.5.3 Core
a) Physical inspection and check of quality of varnish, if used.
b) Sample testing of core material for checking specific loss, bend properties,
magnestisation, characteristics and thickness.
c) Check on completed core for measurement of iron loss and check for any hot spot
by exciting the core so as to induce the designed value of flux density in the core.
d) HV Test
20.5.4 Insulating Material
a) Sample checks for physical properties of the material
b) Check for dielectric strength
c) Check for the reaction of hot oil on insulating material
20.5.5 Winding
a) Sample check on winding conductor for mechanical properties and electrical
conductivity and on installation covering.
b) Sample check on insulation paper for pH value, Bursting strength, Electric strength.
20.5.6 Assembled Transformer
a) Check complete transformer against approved outline drawing provision for all
fittings, finish etc.
b) Jacking test on all the assembled transformers.
20.5.7 Oil
All Standard tests in accordance with relevant Standards shall be carried out on oil samples
taken from the transformer before and after testing of the transformer.

Page 9 of 13
The contractor shall also prepare a comprehensive inspection and testing programme for
all bought out sub-contracted items and shall submit the same to the Purchaser for
approval. Such programme shall include the following components:
a) Buchholz Relay
b) Winding temperature Indicator
c) Bushings
d) Marshaling Box
e) Tap changer switch
f) Oil temperature indicator
20.6 FACTORY TEST
20.6.1 All standard routine tests in accordance with latest issue of IEC: 60076 shall be carried out
on each transformer.
20.6.2 The transformer shall conform to all the type tests in accordance with latest issues of IEC:
60076. The manufacturer shall submit type tests & additional test reports as listed above
as already carried out on transformers of identical design for owner’s acceptance. In such a
case validity of type test reports shall be in line with clause 9.2 of Chapter 2-GTR of
technical specifications. Following parameters in general shall be ensured for
establishment of identical design as per IEC 60076, Part-V.
a) Same Voltage ratio, KVA rating, vector group & impedance.
b) Same conceptual design of core and winding.
c) Same arrangement and geometrical sequence of the main windings.
d) Same type of winding conductors.
e) Same type of main windings.
f) Absorbed power at short circuit (ie rated power/per unit short circuit impedance)
between 30% and 130% of that relating to the reference transformer.
g) Axial forces and winding stresses occurring at short circuit not exceeding 120% of those
relating to the reference transformer.
h) Same manufacturing process.
i) Same Clamping and winding support arrangement..

Page 10 of 13
20.6.3 In addition to all type and routine tests, transformer shall also conform to following
additional type tests as per IEC: 60076.
a) Measurement of zero sequence impedance
b) Short circuit test
c) Measurement of acoustic noise level. This shall conform to NEMA standard
publication TR-1.
d) Measurement of capacitance and tan delta of transformer winding.
e) Test on oil samples as per equivalent international standard.
20.6.4 All auxiliary equipment shall be tested as per the relevant Test Certificates shall be
submitted for bought out items.
20.6.5 High voltage withstand test shall be performed on auxiliary equipment and wiring after
complete assembly.
20.6.6 Tank Tests:
i) Routine Tests: As per IEC: 60076 Part-1 including
ii) Vacuum Tests: As per IEC: 60076 Part-1
iii) Pressure Test: As per IEC: 60076 Part-1
20.6.7 In addition to the above, the following checks should be carried out at manufacturer's
works before despatch for all transformers:
a) Check for interchangeability of components of similar transformers and for
mounting dimensions.
b) Check for proper packing and preservation of accessories like radiators, bushings
explosion vent, dehydrating breather, Buchholz relay, conservator etc.
c) Check for proper provision of bracings to arrest the movements of core and winding
assembly inside the tank.
d) Test for gas tightness and derivation of leakage rate. To ensure adequate reserve
gas capacity during transit and storage.
20.6.8 The Contractor shall submit a detailed inspection and testing programme for field
activities, covering areas right from the receipt of material stage upto commissioning stage

Page 11 of 13
as per equivalent international standard - Code of practice for installation and maintenance
of transformers. The indicative checks and tests are given below.
a) Physical checks on each transformer on receipt at site for any damage or short
supply.
b) Tests on oil samples
c) Oil leakage test
d) Physical checks for colour of silica in breather
e) Check for oil level in breather housing, conservator tank, etc.
f) Check for correct operation of all protections and alarms.
g) Insulation Resistance Measurement for Main Winding, control wiring etc.
h) Continuously observe the transformer operation at no load for 24 hours.
20.7 FITTINGS
The following fittings shall be provided with each transformer covered under this
specification.
i) Conservator with drain plug and oil filling hole with blanking plate
ii) Plain oil Gauge
iii) Silica gel Breather
iv) Pressure Relief vent
v) Pocket on tank cover for Thermometer
vi) Valves
vii) Earthing Terminals
viii) Rating & Terminal Marking Plates
ix) Lifting Lugs
x) Rollers
xi) Air Release Plug
The fittings listed above are only indicative and any other fittings which generally are
required for satisfactory operation of transformer are deemed to be included.

Page 12 of 13
20.8 PAINTING
20.8.1 The interior of all transformer tanks and other oil filled chambers and internal structural
steel work shall be cleaned of all scale and rust by shot-blasting. These surfaces shall be
painted with not less than two coats of heat resistant, oil insoluble and insulating varnish.
Steel surfaces exposed to the weather shall be thoroughly cleaned and have a priming coat
of zinc chromate applied. The second coat shall be of a glossy oil and weather resisting non
fading, paint of shade No. 631 as per IS:5.
20.8.2 Metal parts not accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion resistant material.
20.8.3 Interior surfaces of mechanism chambers and marshalling kiosks shall receive three coats
of paint after proper cleaning. The final coat shall be of a light coloured anti-corrosion
paint.
20.8.4 All paints shall be carefully selected to withstand heat, rain and extremes of weather. The
paint shall not scale off or crinkle or be removed by abrasion due to normal handling.
20.8.5 In case finish paint chips off or crinkle during transit or installation, the contractor shall
arrange for repainting transformer at site at his cost. The paint for repainting shall be
supplied by the contractor.
20.9 SPARE PARTS
20.9.1 The list of spares for outdoor type transformers covered under this chapter shall be as
specified in Chapter 23 Mandatory Spare Parts.
20.9.2 In addition, the Bidder shall also recommend optional spare parts and maintenance
equipment necessary for three (5) years of successful operation of the equipment. The
prices of these shall be indicated in respective schedules and these shall not be considered
for the purpose of evaluation.

Page 13 of 13
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER –21
100 kVA, 415 V Diesel Generator Sets
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 21
100 KVA, 415 V DIESEL GENERATOR SETS
CONTENTS
S NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE NO
21.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY 1
21.1 STANDARDS 2
21.2 DIESEL ENGINE 2
21.3 LUBRICATING SYSTEM 4
21.4 FUEL OIL SYSTEM 5
21.5 AIR INTAKE SYSTEM 6
21.6 AIR EXHAUST SYSTEM 7
21.7 COOLING 7
21.8 ENGINE GOVERNOR 8
21.9 NOISE LEVEL 8
21.10 DC EQUIPMENT 8
21.11 PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS 10
21.12 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT 10
21.13 ALTERNATOR 12
21.14 EXCITATION SYSTEM 15
21.15 VOLTAGE REGULATOR 15
21.16 CONTROL PANELS FOR DG SET 16
21.17 CONTROL OF DIESEL GENERATOR SETS 19
21.18 ANNUNCIALTION SYSTEM & AUXILIARIES 20
21.19 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 21
21.20 RELAYS 22
21.21 INDICATING INSTRUMENTS 24
21.22 CONTROL / SELECTOR SWITCHES 24

21.23 PUSH BUTTONS 25

21.24 INDICATING LAMPS 25
21.25 INSTRUMENTS FOR DIESEL ENGINE 26
21.26 FUEL CONSUMPTION 26
21.27 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES OF DG SET 27
21.28 INSPECTION & TESTING 27
21.29 CIVIL WORKS 31
21.30 DRAWINGS/ DOCUMENTS 31
21.31 RECOMMENDED SPARES PARTS 32

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 22
21.0 SCOPE OF SUPPLY

21.0.1 The specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, testing at
manufacturer’s work, supply, transportation to project site , storage, transportation
upto site, erection, testing and commissioning at site of 1 No. of 3 Phase, 415 V
Diesel Generator Sets of stationary type having a net electrical output of 100 kVA,
silent type, with acoustic enclosure, capacity at specified site conditions complete
with all materials, accessories and fittings, erection & maintenance tools & tackles,
mandatory spares as detailed in this specification for 132/33 kV substation at Dhunge
Sangu in Nepal and each equipped with the following.
a) Diesel Engine complete with all accessories
b) An alternator directly coupled to the engine through flexible /rigid coupling
complete with all accessories.
c) A control panel for starting
d) Complete starting arrangement like a starter battery & battery charger of
suitable capacity and suitably mounted etc.
e) Base frame, foundation bolts etc.
f) Interconnection piping, cabling and accessories
g) Power & Control Cables, glands, lugs etc.
h) AMF panel and its accessories etc
and equipment not specifically stated in this specification but which are necessary
for satisfactory operation of the equipment shall be deemed to be included unless
specifically excluded and shall be supplied without any extra cost. The performance

Page 1 of 32
of the equipment shall be guaranteed as per Section-V – “Guaranteed and Other

Technical Particulars”.
21.1 STANDARDS
22.1.1 All materials and equipment shall comply with all the applicable provisions of the
latest revision of IEC/ Indian Standards, Indian Electricity Rules and other applicable
statutory provisions, rules and regulations. Where no Indian Standards are available,
the material and equipment shall comply with all applicable provisions of the latest
revisions of the relevant International Standards and regulations. The Standards
applicable to the specification are given below:
TABLE-21.0
BS: 5522&BS: 64 9 Diesel Engines for general purposes.
IS: 4722 & BS: 2613 Three phase alternator
IS: 1651& IS: 4172 Stationary cells and batteries, lead acid type
IS: 8623 Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
IS: 5002 Performance requirements for constant speed compression
ignition (diesel) engine for general purposes ( above 20 KW)
IS: 13947 Low voltage switchgear and control gear
21.1.2 The Equipment and material meeting the requirement of any other internationally
recognized standards which ensure a quality equal or better than the standard
mentioned above shall also be acceptable. Where the equipment conforms to any
other standards then salient points of difference between the standards adopted and
those prescribed in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the bid and a copy
of the applicable standards shall also be enclosed by the bidder with the bid.
21.2 DIESEL ENGINE
21.2.1 Each Diesel set shall include but not limited to the following:

Page 2 of 32
21.2.1.1 The diesel engine shall be of four stroke with vertical or ‘V’ type cylinder
arrangement, turbo charged and water cooled with inter cooler and pre-
combustion chamber capable of developing specified load at rated speed at the site
conditions & altitude. The engine shall be capable of driving the alternator
continuously at its rated full load and rated speed without getting over loaded
under the prevailing operating conditions. The engine shall be of medium speed
type and the rated speed shall not exceed 1500 RPM. The Engine shall be fitted
with all standard accessories according to modern standard practices including cold
starting.
a. The engine shall be electrical self-starting type. The source of energy shall
be 24 V maintenance free batteries along with float & boost chargers which
are to supplied, installed and commissioned by the bidder. The cranking
device shall be designed in such a way that the engine starts automatically
and reaches rated speed within 30 seconds of starting impulse being
received. The fuel oil system and the lubricating oil system shall also start
operating simultaneously and automatically as soon as starting impulse is
received to obviate the chance of seizure of the piston and bearing as well as
air locking in fuel supply system.
b. Starter Motor: The starting motor shall conform to IS: 4722.
c. The engine starting system complete with starter motors, batteries etc. shall
be suitable to start automatically.
21.2.1.2 The Contractor must furnish a detailed calculation justifying that the engine offered
by him will meet the requirement of developing 100 kVA continuous net power
output at alternator terminals under site conditions, without getting over loaded.
Continuous BHP rating of the engine shall be such that the DG set can continuously
deliver the specified net electrical output, while supplying power/driving all electrical
and mechanical auxiliaries connected to alternator terminals and engine shaft at the
specified site conditions.

Page 3 of 32
21.2.1.3 The power rating, quantity of fuel consumption, governor performance and
torsional vibration shall be in accordance with BS: 5514 or equivalent standards.
21.2.1.4 Each engine shall be provided with exhaust gas turbocharger having an integral
intake air filter. It shall be of a robust construction, suitable of being driven by engine
exhaust, having a common shaft for the turbine and blower. It shall draw air from air
filter of adequate capacity to suit the requirements of the engine.
21.3 LUBRICATING SYSTEM

21.3.1 The engine shall have a closed cycle integrated lubricating oil system with positive oil
pressure and crank chamber for the collection/storage of the lubricating oil during
circulation. The Engine lubricating oil system shall be suitable to lubricate the
required working parts of the engine effectively under the specified climatic
condition, with the recommended grades of reputed oil companies. The lube oil shall
conform to IS: 466. A pump shall be provided with a regulator for controlling the oil
pressure.
21.3.2 The engine shall include in its supply necessary lubricating oil filters and coolers. The
system shall be complete in all respects. The filter elements shall be of replaceable
type. The filters provided shall be for operation under normal conditions for a period
of more than 250 hours without the necessity for its replacement for cleaning.
a) Pressure switch shall be provided in the lubricating oil system to trip the engine
in case of inadequate lube oil pressure. When the minimum safe pressure of
the lube oil is reached the engine must get tripped.
b) Necessary temperature and pressure gauges for lubricating oil system should
be provided.
21.3.3 The Contractor should provide suitable heater to pre-heat the lube oil with provision
for automatic switching off. In case the Contractor in his opinion feels, the heaters
are not required, he will furnish all calculations to justify his opinion.

Page 4 of 32
21.3.4 The oil cooler shall be either of Air or raw water-cooled preferably air-cooled. The
coolers shall be an integral part of the DG set and shall be equipped with necessary
accessories.
21.3.5 1 No. Semi-rotary hand-operated pump complete with rubber hosepipe of at least 5-
meter length with suitable nozzles for transferring lube oil from barrels to service
tank shall be provided.
21.3.6 All required piping, fittings valves, filters, strainers, lubricating oil heat exchangers,
temperature and pressure gauges, by pass valves, pressure switches, alarm controls,
thermostat, cooler accessories, hose pipes and other accessories, instruments,
equipment needed for the above services are covered under the scope of the
Contractor. Companion flanges, gaskets, and nuts & bolts at all the terminal points
shall be provided by contractor/ supplier.
21.4 FUEL OIL SYSTEM

21.4.1 The engine shall be capable of running on all types of High Speed Diesel Fuel oil
normally available in market.
21.4.2 The fuel consumption of the engine at full, three quarters and half of its rated power
output are to be indicated by the Contractor. Also specific fuel consumption of the
engine to be furnished.
21.4.3 A fuel oil service tank with capacity of 900 liters shall be provided on a suitably
fabricated steel platform. The tank shall be complete with level indicator marked in
liters, filling inlet with removable screen, an outlet, a drain plug, an air vent and
necessary piping, low level oil sensing device with annunciation circuit and other
instrumentation. The tank shall be painted with oil resistant paint and shall be
erected in accordance with Indian explosive act 1932 and relevant Nepal act if
applicable. Any license required to be obtained from explosive department for the
installation of fuel tank has to be obtained by the contractor. A mechanical type oil
level indicator to indicate low/high level in the tank shall also be provided. In

Page 5 of 32
addition to this there should be fuel oil level sensing device, which will give an alarm
in case oil level goes below a preset value.
21.4.4 A hand pump for pumping the fuel into the fuel service tank together with necessary
pipes and tubing shall be provided. The inlet of the pump shall be provided with 5
meters long armoured hose with suitable filter. The Contractor shall provide suitable
length of flexible hosepipe at the diesel oil fuel transfer pump outlet to enable
transfer of diesel oil from barrels to the tank.
21.4.5 Complete interconnecting piping between the fuel tank and engine along with
necessary fittings, valves, filters, strainers, instruments for monitoring cleanliness of
filters/strainers and accessories for flow of fuel oil to the engine and also for return of
excess fuel oil from the engine to the tank shall be provided.
21.4.6 The oil system should be self-priming type.
21.4.7 Fuel passage of proper size and type shall be provided
21.4.8 An engine driven booster pump shall be provided to deliver fuel oil from the supply
line, filtered through filters, to the fuel oil injectors. The Contractor may offer any
alternative method of fuel supply to the engine.
21.4.9 Injection shall be provided to receive low-pressure fuel from the fuel pump and
deliver it into the individual combustion chamber at right time in exact quantity and
in proper condition of combustion.
21.5 AIR INTAKE SYSTEM

21.5.1 The diesel engine shall be provided with special dry type air filters having low
resistance to air passage, high dust retaining efficiency and provision or easy
cleaning. Filters shall be suitable for achieving satisfactory engine operation and
ensuring the engine life under tropical humid conditions with Sulphur dioxide and
trioxide fumes, abrasive dust and particles of 5 to 50 microns present in the
atmosphere. The minimum efficiency of filters shall be 90% down to the 5-micron
size. The face velocity across the filters shall be limited to 2.0 m/sec.

Page 6 of 32
21.6 AIR EXHAUST SYSTEM

21.6.1 The exhaust system shall consist of exhaust gas driven turbocharger with piping inter
connection cylinder head outlets with the turbo charger inlet. Exhaust manifold shall
be fabricated steel construction and suitably insulated. The exhaust gases after
passing through turbo charger should be taken out through the wall of engine room
through necessary piping, adopters etc. The exhaust piping shall be diverted to a
point outside the DG-room and terminated at a height about 2.0 m above the roof of
the DG room. The exhaust piping along with silencer shall be suitably thermally
insulated with proper insulation and flexible connections shall be provided in the
exhaust piping to avoid transmission of vibrations from the engine to the structures.
The engine shall be provided with an exhaust manifold in sections suitably equipped
with matching flanges, expansion joints with least possible bends and drain plug.
Filters, silencers of residential type, ducts, exhaust pipes, and fittings accessories for
support from the ground as well as from walls shall be provided.
21.7 COOLING
21.7.1 The cooling of the engine shall be with water filled radiator. The Jacket cooling water
shall be circulated by the engine self-driven pump for cooling of cylinder head,
cylinder liners, cylinder blocks, injectors, intake and exhaust valve, charger air cooler
and turbo charger. The Contractor shall indicate quantity of water required for
cooling in a closed circuit. Jacket water in turn shall be cooled by air-cooled radiator.
The radiator shall be cooled by Engine driven fans and shall be complete with
screens, dampers, ducts and accessories etc. The temperature of the Jacket water
shall be thermostatically controlled for initial run.
21.7.2 Provision for alarm on high Jacket water temperature shall be made. Jacket water
system complete with necessary engine driven pumps, air cooled radiator type heat
exchangers, engine driven fans, expansion tank with wall bracket, alarm on high
water jacket temperature, required pipes, fittings, valves, instruments and
accessories shall be supplied by the Contractor.

Page 7 of 32
21.8 ENGINE GOVERNOR

21.8.1 The governor for diesel engine shall be provided with hydro-mechanical/electronic
governor of “Wood-Ward” or equivalent make conforming to “Class A 1. Precision
grade governing” of BS: 5522 or approved equal standard and the governor shall have
the following features:
a. It shall be capable of operating with “Zero Droop” and the droop shall be
adjustable at the engine from 0 to 5% of the rated full load speed upon
gradual changes from no load to full load. It shall have necessary
characteristics to maintain the speed of the Engine substantially constant
even on sudden variation in the load. It shall take care of Heavy duty motor
starting.
b. The governor shall be suitable for operation without external source of
power supply. Electronic governor shall be preferred.
c. A mechanical over speed tripping mechanism shall be provided to shut off
fuel automatically in case it reaches about 110% of rated speed. The value at
which the mechanism trips the engine shall be adjustable. In no case, even
under the worst conditions the speed shall increase more than 120% to save
the alternator.
d. An engine mounted emergency stop push button shall be provided.
21.9 NOISE LEVEL

21.9.1 The engine shall be designed to achieve maximum quietness of operation. Efficient
Industrial silencer shall be provided for the exhaust as well as the air intake. Noise
level shall not exceed 93 dB at 1 m. distance. Arrangement provided to reduce noise
level may be indicated.
21.10 DC EQUIPMENT
21.10.1 For starting, protection and control circuit, 1 set of 24 V DC equipment comprising
of heavy duty maintenance free battery and battery charger with all accessories
instruments shall be supplied by the Contractor for each DG set.24 V heavy-duty

Page 8 of 32
battery shall be of suitable rating on 10 hrs basis conforming to the relevant BS/IS
to cater to the no. of starting attempts of the engine and other DC equipment
requirements. The battery for starting the engine shall be capable of performing at
least six (6) normal starts without recharging. The batteries shall be of reputed
make suitable for diesel engine starting duty.
21.10.2 A battery charger comprising of Float charger unit and Boost charger unit shall be
supplied for each battery. Normally the float charger shall supply continuous DC
requirements and trickle charge the battery floating on DC bus. The boost charger
unit shall quick charge the battery as and when required. Battery charger using
semiconductor rectifier shall be provided with all accessories mounted in an
enclosed sheet steel cubicle. Battery charger, which shall normally be used as
trickle charger, shall have built in automatic voltage control to maintain output DC
voltage within one (1) percent of the voltage setting when input AC supply has
voltage and frequency variation. When the battery has been substantially
discharged, boost charger shall quick charge the battery. For quick charging,
charger shall have a built in automatic constant current characteristic load-limiting
feature. Battery charger shall be supplied complete with all devices including but
not limited to following:
TABLE-21.1
Quantity
S.No Item
per DG Set
a. ON/OFF MCB for 415 V AC ( 3 pole) 1 No.
b. Suitably rated transformer with ±2.5 percent and 5 percent tapping on
1 No.
primary winding to compensate for AC supply voltage variations.
c. Suitably rated silicon rectifier Bridge complete with RC surge suppression net
1 No
work, heat sink and semi-conductor fuse & trip indicating fuse.
d. Ripple filtering devices. 1 Set

e. Double pole ON/OFF rotary switch for DC 1 No.

Page 9 of 32
f. HRC fuses with fittings for above with trip indication 2 Nos.
g. Red indicating light to indicate DC supply ‘ON’. 1 No.
h. Automatic voltage regulator. 1 Set
i. Selector switch for selecting mode of charging, i.e., float charging/quick
1 No.
charging.
j. Suitably scaled square faced moving coil ammeter each for AC & DC current
1 No each
measurement.
k. Auto/Manual selector switch. 1 No.
l. Potentiometer with knob for setting the quick charging current or current
limit for load limiting feature and other potentiometers needed for auto and 1 No.
manual mode of operation.
m. Voltmeter each for indication of AC &DC output voltages 1 No. each
Charger with necessary filters, instruments and suitable characteristics for

charging the battery and keeping it in fully charged state complete with all
n. 1 Set
auto control, protection monitoring, annunciation equipment and self
supporting panels indicting lamps etc.
21.11 PIPING, VALVES AND FITTINGS

21.11.1 The engine shall be supplied with all piping, valves and fittings for the fuel oil,
lubricating oil, engine starting air inlet and engine exhaust system, along with
expansion joints, drain plugs, flanges etc.
21.12 ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT

21.12.1 The following equipment shall be supplied as a part of the engine -
1. Exhaust gas driven turbo charger (s), flexible connection (s) and exhaust piping
suitably designed for operation at high temperature associated with exhaust
gases and with silencers.

Page 10 of 32
2. Charge-air cooler, dry type air filters, corrosion resistors, dry paper elements, air
cleaners, residential type silencers.
3. Hydraulic/electronic (Wood –Ward Model or equivalent) class A1 precision grade
Governor with speed droop control.
4. Over speed trip mechanical
5. Crank case breather
6. DC motor starting device (s)
7. Torsional vibration dampers.
8. Fly wheel and guard
9. Pipe fittings and valves for the fuel oil, lubricating oil, engine starting air inlet and
engine exhaust system, along with expansion joints, drain plugs, flanges etc.
10. Indicator cocks and adaptors, oil/jacket water heater, thermostats, temperature
gauges.
11. Filters, strainers, lubricators and residential type silencers, crank case oil dip stick.
12. Set of common base frame for engine, alternator and exciter, foundation bolts,
flexible couplings between engine and generator, necessary holding down bolts,
nuts, shims, base frames for panels, batteries, battery chargers, day tanks etc.
13. Control panel for auto/manual startup, operation and shut down with all related
instruments and controls.
14. Local instrument, gauge board (s) for oil pressure/temperature, jacket water
temperature, running hour meter, RPM meter, exhaust gas thermometers.
15. Expansion joints for connection to exhaust piping.
16. Thermal insulation for exhaust gas silencers and piping to limit outside surface
temperature to 70 Deg. C at an ambient temperature of 370 deg. C.
17. Radiator
18. Tachometer.
19. Protective equipment, i.e. fuel cut off solenoid and suitable relays to protect the
engine against excessive cylinder temperature, low lubrication oil pressure, low &
high lubrication oil level etc.

Page 11 of 32
20. Lifting attachment for lifting the complete set or the engine and alternator
separately.
21. Instruction manuals and wall charts describing installation, operation, service and
overhaul along with necessary details of equipment part list and spares.
22. Drain trays for placing under engine sump.
23. Hand pumps for pumping fuel oil in service tanks with hoses and filters.
24. Daily service fuel oil tanks, piping and drain cock or plug, make up water tank.
25. All other instruments and accessories etc., as specified.
21.13 ALTERNATOR
21.13.1 The alternator shall be brushless with horizontal shaft, revolving field, alternating
current synchronous type and suitable to be driven by diesel engine specified in the
specification and shall conform to requirement of IS: 4722 & BS: 5000 and other
equivalent standards. All insulated winding conductor of the alternator shall be of
copper. The overall alternating winding insulation shall be class ‘H’ Operation from
temperature rise consideration and suitable to feed 3 phase, 4 wire system. Each
alternator shall have the following technical particulars.
TABLE-21.2
S.No. Item Quantity
a. Alternator net continuous output at site conditions, after 100 kVA
b. Power factor 0.8 lagging
c. Overload capacity for one (1) hour in twelve consecutive 10%
hours of operation
d. Rated voltage 415 V
e. Rated Frequency 50 Hz
f. Number of phases Three (3)
g. Winding connections Star (Y)

Page 12 of 32
h. Design max ambient temperature 40 Deg. C

i. Type of insulation
a. Armature winding Class H
b. Field winding Class H
c. Connections Class H
d. Core connections Class H
e. Type of enclosure Screen protected
IP 23
j. Permissible voltage variation for satisfactory operation at ±10%
rated KVA
k. Permissible frequency variation ± 5%
l. Permissible combined voltage and frequency variation 10%
(Absolute sum)
m. Method of Neutral grounding Solidly earthed
n. Efficiency Better than 90%
21.13.2 The continuous rating of the alternator at 450 C ambient shall at least be equal the
net electrical output specified for DG set plus the power requirements of all
auxiliaries connected to alternator terminal including excitation ( it is taken from
alternator terminals). The alternator shall be self-excited & automatic regulated
type.
21.13.3 The temperature rise limits shall be 77.600 C above maximum ambient temperature
of 400 C when measured by resistance i.e. temperature rise to be limited to Class ‘B’
insulation for stator and rotor.
21.13.4 All parts of the generator and accessories shall be able to withstand all electrical,
mechanical and other stresses which may be experienced during operation,
including frequent over speed conditions. The generator unit shall be capable of
withstanding three phase short circuit at the generator terminals when operating at

Page 13 of 32
rated KVA and power factor, 5 percent over voltage and with fixed excitation for
three (3) seconds.
21.13.5 The stator shall be of rigid construction, built up of steel stampings of high
permeability and low hysteresis loss. The design shall be such that the temperature
of all parts of the windings and core is kept as uniform as possible throughout to
avoid excessive local heating. The generator shall incorporate embedded
temperature detectors mounted on control panel with adjustable alarm. Alternator
bearings shall also be provided with RTDs. (Resistance Temperature Detectors).
21.13.6 Two Earthing terminals diametrically opposite to each other and with clamps shall be
provided on the generator suitable for 50 mmx10 mm GS flat conductors.
21.13.7 The generator shall be of air-cooled type with air circulation through the machine by
the blower fans mounted on the rotor. The Contractor will clearly indicate the type
of cooling arrangement being provided with the generator. Air intake shall be from
non-drive end of the alternator and outlet towards engine side.
21.13.8 The alternator rotor and bearings shall be so designed as to safely with-stand an over
speed of 20% over normal speed. The type of the bearing provided shall be so
designed and arranged that displacement between portions of the coil and between
the coils and the cover due to centrifugal force is minimized.
21.13.9 The supply of cables, laying and termination is in the scope of the contractor. Cables
of suitable size shall be XLPE insulated, aluminum wire, armoured, FRLS, PVC overall
sheathed. The winding of the alternator shall be star connected. Neutral formation
shall be done in the control panel after providing CTs before neutral formation.
Cables from alternator phase terminals shall be terminated in the control panels
after providing CTs of suitable rating. Details of CTs shall be supplied by the
Contractor. The cables on the control panels side shall be terminated and connected
by the Contractor and shall provide cable glands, gland plate (s) and crimping type
cable sockets of reputed make for these cables. Contractor shall take special care to
provide sufficient space in the control panel for termination of all cables.

Page 14 of 32
21.14 EXCITATION SYSTEM

21.14.1 The alternator shall have its own excitation system. If a rotating exciter is provided
for this purpose, it shall be driven by the alternator shaft. Excitation power shall be
driven from alternator terminals itself if exciter is not provided. The excitation
system shall be of self-excited, self-regulated/static type. The response ratio of the
excitation shall be not less than 0.5. The excitation system shall be designed and / or
protected such that harmful over voltage cannot occur due to machine over speed.
The exciter shall be provided with two (2) nos. diametrically opposite grounding
terminals with suitable clamps.
21.15 VOLTAGE REGULATOR
21.15.1 Each generator shall be capable of operation over a range of ± 10% of the rated
voltage and shall keep the terminal voltage within ± 1% of the set value. Voltage
regulator shall be supplied complete with cross current compensation (preferably of
the static type), voltage adjusting rheostat, all accessories and alarm contacts for
successful operation including mounting and wiring. Current transformers for
compensation shall be included in the scope of Contractor and shall be suitably
mounted. Voltage regulator will be provided on the control panels for the voltage
control of DG sets. The components used in the system shall be adequately
designed for satisfactory operation under full load conditions, overload conditions as
specified and also under short circuit condition. The allowable variation for the
aforesaid system shall be within the range of ± 1 percent. It shall have a rapid
transient voltage response to suddenly applied loads together with the reliability of
the system. The setting available on voltage regulator shall be + 10%. The excitation
system shall be complete with all necessary accessories.
21.15.2 Terminal Box and Connection:
The alternator output terminals shall be enclosed in a terminal box mounted in an
accessible position on the alternator frame. Cable glands and lugs shall be provided
for all power and control cables, which have to be terminated on the equipment
supplied under this package. As far as possible, connections between the exciter

Page 15 of 32
and alternator shall be connected with the machine frame and connections carrying
AC and DC shall be segregated from each other.
21.16 CONTROL PANELS FOR DG SET

21.16.1 A free standing control panel and/ or board mounted near DG Set, safely accessible
while engine is running shall be provided. Control panels/board shall be made of
2.00 mm thick cold rolled sheet steel and have IP 52 degree of protection as per IS :
13947. It shall be vermin and dust proof. The paint shade shall conform to shade
692 of IS-5.
21.16.2 The control panel shall be of unit type construction, compact and neat, provided
with hinged door, locking arrangement, keys and flush handles. It shall be provided
with 2 nos. grounding terminals with suitable clamps.
21.16.3 All cables shall enter from bottom. Separate cable chamber shall be provided in
the control panel with cable termination, complete with cable glands, lugs etc.
Generator star point shall be formed in the control panels.
21.16.4 All the control switches, push buttons, indicating instruments, signal lamps shall be
flush mounted on the front of the control panel.
21.16.5 All internal wiring shall be carried out by 1150 volts grade, FRLS, PVC insulated
copper wires of cross section not less than 2.5 sq.mm. The wiring shall be identified
at both ends by means of plastic ferrules. Suitable internal lights (panel illumination)
and 3 pin, 15 A plug socket shall be provided along with control MCBs.
21.16.6 A tinned copper bar of adequate dimension shall be provided for each connection
complete with nuts and bolts as required for external connections to the earth grid
of the substation.
21.16.7 CT shorting links, test terminals, blocks etc. shall be provided. All the equipment
mounted inside the control panels shall be identified by Lamicoid Labels.
21.16.8 The panel shall have mounted on it the Automatic Voltage Regulator, field breaker
and field discharge resistor with associated control switches and indicating lamps or

Page 16 of 32
this may be provided in the separate matching cubicle to be mounted along side the
control panel.
21.16.9 Requirements in AMF panel
 Four pole Air break contactor for Mains and for Alternator of 630A capacity
 Three over current relay for generator protection (CDV61/62)
 Instantaneous earth fault Rely through Neutral CT (1A-4A)
 Field failure relay YCGF-11A
 HRC fuses for short circuit protection on both mains and for alternator.
 Mode selector switch ( Auto / Manual / test / off)
 ƒ Voltmeter with selector switch 0 – 500V A.C. Analog type
 ƒ Ammeter with selector switch 0 – 400A, A.C. Analog type
 ƒ Line voltage monitor (3phase) with adjustment for presetting the voltage
 ƒ Current transformers 400/5A 5P10 for protection and class1 for measuring
Note: The line voltage monitor (LVM) should monitor the voltage condition of
the mains supply and bring the D-G set in to operation if the line voltage falls
below ±10% from the rated voltage of 415V.
21.16.10 The control panel shall also be provided with the following accessories for each DG
sets:-
TABLE-21.3
S.No. Item Quantity per
DG set
1. Single phase AC Ammeters 3 Nos
2. Single phase CTs for metering (Cast resins) 3 Nos
3. Single phase CTs for protection 15 VA CL 5P10 for O/C & E/F relay 3 Nos
4. CTs for REF protection. 4 Nos.
5. Reverse power relay 1 No.
6. AC voltmeter with a selector switches (0-500 V). 1 No.

Page 17 of 32
7. Frequency meter of 45-50-55 Hz digital type 1 No.

8. Watt meter to read 3 phase power ( 3 phase 4 wire) 1 No.
9. Power Factor meter. 1 No.
10. Counter to indicate no. of times set has operated and time totalize. 1 No.
11. Red lamps for D.G. “ON” position 1 No.
12. Green lamps for D.G. “OFF” position 1 No.
13. Energy meter – Electronic type 1 No.
14. Mains supply voltage monitor. 1 No.
15. Relays and timers for the control and protection 1 set
16. Auto – Test - Manual – OFF switch 1 No.
17. Double compression type cable glands of suitable sizes 1 No.
18. Mode selector switch off/manual/ Test / Auto. 1 No.
19. Fluorescent lamp 40 W 240V complete with MCB for Internal illumination 1 set
20. Contactor for generator neutral over voltage relay 1 No
21. Door switches 240 V AC. 1 No
22. Push button for starting/stopping of the DG set 1No. each
23. Electronic hooter for the annunciation. 1 No
24. Rotary switch of 2 position ON/OFF. 1 No
25. 3 Phase, 4 Poles contractor 1 No
26. Mimic diagram of DG 1 No
27. Annunciation for DG set 1 No
28. 5 A, 3/2 pin socket with MCB 1 No
29. Speed raise, speed lower, test start and stop push buttons with 2 NO +2 NC
contact element shrouded types
30. Selector switch for OFF/TRICKLE/BOOST charging 1 No
31. Any other item essential for DG Set operation & maintenance will be
provided

Page 18 of 32
21.17 CONTROL OF DIESEL GENERATOR SETS

21.17.1 The diesel generating sets shall be controlled from control panel. Diesel generator
sets shall normally be at rest when AC supply of the station is available and start
automatically upon failure of normal power supply and stop automatically after
restoration of normal power supply. The DG Set shall also be able to start and stop
manually by push button.
21.17.2 The protection scheme of the DG set shall include the following:
1. A triple pole thermal over load protection relay.

2. 3 Nos. O/C and 1 no. E/F protection with IDMT characteristic.
3. Restricted E/F protection for the alternator.
4. AUTO MAINS FAILURE : (AMF)
Protection and interlocks needed for the auto starting of the diesel
generator set in case of main supply failure in future.
5. Over voltage and under voltage protections.

6. Reverse Power flow protection
7. Protection for
a. Low lube oil pressure
b. High jacket water temp
c. Over speed
8. Any other protection recommended by the manufacturer for the safe,
efficient and trouble free running of the equipment and their
accessories during the life time.
21.17.3 Failure to start:
21.17.3.1 A three attempt starting facility using two impulse timers and a summation timer
for engine shall be provided and if voltage fails to develop within 30 seconds from
receiving the first start impulse the set shall block automatically & a visual
indication and audible alarm shall be provided.

Page 19 of 32
21.18 ANNUNCIALTION SYSTEM & AUXILIARIES
21.18.1 Annunciation System
The control panel shall be supplied with all necessary relays and other accessories suitable
for operation on DC supply. The contractor shall provide 24 V DC supply exclusively meant
for the purpose of starting of the DG sets. Window type annunciation complete with
ACCEPT, RESET, TEST BUTTONS AND FLASHER RELAY etc. shall be provided on the diesel
generator control panel to give visual and audible indication of any one or more the
following troubles.
Trip Alarms:
a. High Jacket water temperature

b. Lubricating oil pressure low
c. Engine over speed
d. Generator fault – O/C, E/F, Reverse Power, Over Voltage &
UnderVoltage
e. Failure to start the engine
f. Loss of 24 volts DC control supply
Non-Trip Alarms:
a. Lubricating oil level low

b. Sub-fuel oil tank low
c. Fuel oil tank level low
d. Excitation failure
21.18.2 In addition 4 Nos. spare windows shall be provided.
21.18.3 The annunciation system shall be window type having static circuitry. On initiation
by protective relay contact, the relay actuates and flashing signal is turned to the
corresponding channel. Simultaneously, the alarm circuit is also made operative. On
operation of the accept push button, the audible signal is switched off and the

Page 20 of 32
flashing window changes its state to steady illumination. Operating sequence shall
be as follows.
TABLE-21.4
Condition Audible Alarm Visual Condition
Normal Fault/Abnormal OFF ON OFF ON Flashing
Accept OFF ON (Steady)
Initiating Test OFF ON ( Steady)
Reset OFF OFF
21.19 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
21.19.1 The technical particulars of current transformers shall be as follows:
TABLE-21.5
a. Type Cast resin insulated bar or wound type
b. Specification & standards As specified herein and as per IS: 2705
c. Number of phases Single Phase
d. Secondary CT 5 Amp.
e. Rated Burden 15 VA for metering & 15 VA for

Protection
f. Accuracy Class 1 (Metering)
5P10 ( Protection)
g. Rated continuous thermal Same as rated primary current
Current at specified ambient

temperature

Page 21 of 32
h. Rated short time thermal current 25 KA for (1) one second or the
maximum let through current of the
previous (upstream) protective devise.
i. Rated dynamic current 65 KA (peak) or the maximum current of

the previous (upstream) protective
device.
j. Class of insulation Class ‘H’
k. One (1) minute power frequency

withstand voltage
i) Between all terminals 2 kV

connected together and all
parts to be earthed
ii) Between contacts terminal
with contacts closed and all 2 kV
remaining terminals
connected together
21.20 RELAYS
21.20.1 The following type of relays shall be provided:
a. Non-directional 3 over current & Inst. Earth Fault relay with setting range of 50-
200% and relay 20-80% rated time 1.3 second shall be supplied. The relay shall
have inverse time current characteristics on all taps and very low overshoot.
b. REF relay.
c. A triple pole thermal over load protection relay.
d. Hand/ electrically Reset Alternator trip relay (86).
e. The relays shall be fast acting multi-contact, attracted armature type with high
mechanical stability. It shall be suitable for tripping duties requiring

Page 22 of 32
simultaneous switching operation. The relay shall be suitable for 24 V DC

supply.
f. Overvoltage & Undervoltage Protection Relay.
g. One No. Voltage Sensing Relay to sense that voltage developed is correct so
that breaker is permitted to close.
h. Reverse Power relay.
21.20.2 The technical particulars of the relays shall be as follows:
TABLE-21.6
a. Type Flush mounted, tropicalised drawout.
b. Specifications and standards As specified herein and as per IS:3231
c. Current coil rated current 5 A, AC
d. Potential coil rated voltage 110 V AC/ 24 V DC
e. Operating time class As needed for instantaneous relay
f. Control supply 24 V DC
g. Class of insulation ‘H’
h. One (I) minute power frequency tests

voltage
i) Between all terminals connected 2 kV

together and all parts to be earthed
ii) Between contacts terminal with 2 kV

contacts closed and all remaining
terminals connected together
iii) Between circuits to be connected in 2 kV

use

Page 23 of 32
iv) Between contacts in open position 1 kV
21.20.3 Rated continuous, short time thermal and dynamic currents for coils and contacts
shall be suitable for service involved. Relay shall provide reliable, sensitive and
selective circuit and equipment protection at all times while maintaining supply to
healthy circuits. False tripping shall not take place. Relays shall be rectangular in
shape and have dust tight covers. Relays shall be equipped with auxiliary reset,
positive action operation indicator. No control relay tripping a circuit breaker on
being de-energized shall be used in control schemes. Auxiliary relays shall be
designed for operation of DC and shall operate satisfactorily between eighty (80) per
cent and hundred and ten (110) percent of the rated voltage.
21.21 INDICATING INSTRUMENTS
21.21.1 Technical particulars of the indicating instruments shall be as follows:
TABLE-21.7
a. Type Flush mounted,
b. Specifications and standards As specified herein and as per IS: 1248
c. Accuracy ± 1 percent
d. Size 96 mm x 96 mm
e. Finish Parallax free dull black with white dial and black
markings
f. 1 (One) minute power 2 kV

frequency test voltage
21.21.2 Instruments shall be mounted on the front of the cubicle. AC instruments shall be
suitable for connection to 5 A CTs and 110 V VTs and series resistors wherever

Page 24 of 32
necessary. DC instruments shall be supplied with shunts, wherever necessary. The

instruments shall be of accuracy class 1.0 and switch board types. Elements shall be
shock resistant and shielded from external magnetic fields. Cases of the instruments
shall be dust and moisture proof.
21.22 CONTROL / SELECTOR SWITCHES

21.22.1 Control and selector switches shall be rotary type and provided with properly
designated escutcheon plates clearly marked to show operating positions.
21.22.2 Switch ratings shall be adequate for the purpose intended. Selector switch handles
shall be either spade or pointer or oval shaped. These shall have required number
of position and contacts. Voltmeter selector switch shall be four (4) position stay put
type with pointer or oval shaped handle, and an engraved escutcheon plate.
21.23 PUSH BUTTONS

21.23.1 All push buttons shall have two at least 1 NO and 1 NC contacts. The contacts shall
have adequate rating for their application. The push button knob colours shall be as
per approval of the purchaser. All push buttons shall be of self reset type with
standard push knobs. The contacts of push buttons shall be enclosed in a
transparent cover. It shall be possible to add at least 1 NO & 1 NC contact to the
push buttons, if so required at site. All push buttons shall have integral inscription
plates duly inscribed to indicate their function.
21.24 INDICATING LAMPS

21.24.1 Indicating lamps shall be filament type and of low watt consumption. They shall be
of double contact bayonet cap type. Each lamp shall be furnished with a suitably
rated series resistor to avoid short circuiting of control supply in the event of
filament fusing. Lamps shall be provided with translucent lamp covers which shall
diffuse coloured light red, green, amber, or white as the case may be. Lamp covers
shall be unbreakable, moulded from heat-resistant, translucent and fast colour

Page 25 of 32
material. Bulbs and caps shall be interchangeable and easily replaceable from the
front and shall normally not require any special tools for replacement. If any special
tool is required, the same shall be supplied with each switchgear and control panel.
21.25 INSTRUMENTS FOR DIESEL ENGINE

21.25.1 The following instruments shall be provided for each Diesel Engine on the Gauge
Board.
a. Thermometers for measurement of lube oil and jacket water temperatures.

b. Hour meter and RPM indicator.
c. Pressure gauges for lube oil, fuel oil system, jacket water inlet to engine, and for
all aux. pumps provided with DG sets.
d. Pressure and temperature switches for lube oil system shall be provided on the
panel and to trip the unit if the pressure falls below safe limit or temperature
rises above desired limit. Temperature switches for annunciation of high jacket
water temperature should also be provided.
e. A thermo switch shall be provided at the lube oil outlet from engine bearing for
alarm on high oil temperature.
f. Starting switch with key.
g. Locally mounted pressure and temperature gauges on the concerned piping on
inlet and outlet of cooling water for heat exchanger.
21.26 FUEL CONSUMPTION

21.26.1 The guaranteed fuel consumption based on net calorific value of 10,000 k cal/litre
under full load, ¾ load, ½ load conditions with tolerance ± 5% shall be indicated. The
Contractor shall intimate the consumption of lubrication oil/hour and the number of
hours after which the replacement of the lubricating oil is recommended.

Page 26 of 32
21.27 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES OF DG SET

21.27.1 General
a. All materials used shall be new and of tested quality conforming to applicable
National and International standards and Nepal Electricity Rules.
b. The whole equipment shall be transportable and capable of installation at site with
ease and without any damage. It shall give continued reliable operation over long
life at full load rating under worst specified site conditions.
c. All renewable and similar parts shall be interchangeable.
d. All components shall be designed to withstand the extremes of all magnetic,
electrical, mechanical and thermal stresses and gas pressure which may be
encountered during normal and abnormal operating conditions.
e. All metal parts not accessible for painting shall be made of corrosion resisting
material. All machined or bright surfaces shall be coated with a suitable rust
preventive compound and wrapped or otherwise protected.
f. Paints shall be carefully selected to withstand tropical heat and extremes of
weather. It shall not scale off or crinkle or be removed by abrasion in handling.
g. Adequate quantity of loose paints for retouching in field shall be furnished. Should
the finish paint scale off or crinkle during transit or installation, the contractor shall
arrange for repainting at site, at his cost.
h. Equipment shall be completely assembled at the works to ascertain that all parts
fit correctly. Maximum possible wiring and assembly or components like
instruments transformers, relays instruments etc. shall also be carried out before
dispatch to minimize erection time at site.
21.28 INSPECTION & TESTING
21.28.1 The DG set (Diesel Engine, alternator, exciter etc.) should have been successfully
type tested as per relevant IS/IEC/BS and the contractor shall submit the type tests
report of the type tests along with the tender for similar DG set.

Page 27 of 32
21.28.2 After completion of the manufacture of equipment, routine tests shall be performed
as per relevant IEC/IS and requisite copies of the test certificates shall be furnished.
21.28.3 Diesel engine, alternator, control and switchgear panels, AVR, battery and battery
charger, cables, instruments, busbars, relays, CTs, contactors and all accessories etc.
shall be subject to routine, type and acceptance tests in accordance with the
requirements of the latest issue of relevant India/IEC Standards in the presence of
purchaser’s representative. The bidder shall clearly state the testing facilities
available at his works for testing the complete equipment with all fittings and
accessories offered. Each completely wired control panel and board shall be tested
to ensure that all its protective, control, interlock systems are satisfactorily
functioning as per requirements. Test certificates for functional tests shall be
furnished to the purchaser.
21.28.4 The tests to be carried out on diesel generator set shall include (but not limited to)
the following:
21.28.4.1 Diesel Engine
a. Power output at full throttle
b. RPM, torque, fuel rate, fuel pressure, lubricating oil pressure, intake manifold
pressure blow by exhaust temperature and smoke checks.
c. Performance parameters measurements at full load, half load, ¾ load and ¼
load shall be noted.
i) RPM and lubricating oil pressure at high idle and low idle shall be noted.
ii) Engine washing for leakage check
iii) Performance parameters at 10% overload.
d. Calculations for horsepower and efficiency at full load, ½ load, ¾ load, and
10% overload shall be furnished.
e. Time from initiation of start command to rated speed shall be noted.
f. Chemical and physical characteristics shall be tested and certificate shall be
submitted to the owner.

Page 28 of 32
g. Crack detection check and ultrasonic test on forgings and casting of critical
parts, e.g. crank shaft, camshaft, connecting rod, cylinder head, piston and
alternator shaft.
h. Hydrostatic test shall be carried out on all pressure parts.
i. Static balancing shall be carried out in all rotating parts and shafts shall be both
statically and dynamically balanced.
j. Performance test of fuel pump and injector.
k. Bench test of all the safety control devices separately.
21.28.4.2 Type Test of Alternator

The alternator should have been type tested for the following tests as per IS: 4722
(latest edition, amended upto date). The test reports of these tests shall be
submitted for Owner’s review.
a. Measurement resistance
b. Phase sequence test.
c. Regulation test ( for alternator only)
d. Measurement of leakage reactance and potier reactance ( for alternator
only)
e. Measurement of open circuit characteristics
f. Measurement of short-circuit characteristics ( for alternator only)
g. Efficiency test
h. Temperature rise test
i. Momentary overload test
j. Over speed test
k. High voltage test
l. Insulation resistance test ( both before and after high voltage test)
m. Noise level and vibration
n. Determination of deviation of voltage wave form from sinusoidal ( for
alternator only)

Page 29 of 32
21.28.4.3 Routine Test of Alternator

a. Phase sequence and polarity marking tests
b. Check of direction of rotation
c. Insulation resistance measurement both before and after high voltage tests
d. Vibration test
e. Measurement of resistance of field winding, main armature winding, space
heaters etc. and leakage reactance measurement.
f. Open circuit test.
g. Short circuit test.
h. Temperature rise test and 50% overload test for 15 seconds after
temperature rise test.
i. High voltage test
j. Wave form test
k. 120% over speed test
l. Momentary overload test
m. Regulation test
n.
21.28.4.4 Exciter
Nominal exciter response test and other tests as per standard.
21.28.5 Tests on completely assembled DG set
a. Functional checks for local, manual, auto start, speed and voltage control.
b. Tests to check the starting time from completely cold conditions.
c. Vibration and noise tests.
d. One hour at full load, one hour at ¾ load running.
e. Four hours at full load followed by one hour continuous load of 110%.
f. Fuel consumption tests
g. Automatic starting and interlocks checks
i. Governor response
ii. Over speed test and over speed trip test.

Page 30 of 32
Note: The contractor submit the type test and routine test report of the bought out items
at the time of inspection and testing of the DG set by the representatives of WAPCOS.
21.29 CIVIL WORKS

21.29.1 All the civil works for DG Set i.e. foundations, trenches etc. are to be carried out by
the Contractor.
21.29.2 All the required drawings for the civil works shall be furnished by the Contractor for
approval without any extra cost.
21.30 DRAWINGS/ DOCUMENTS
21.30.1 The following Drawings/ Document shall be submitted within 10 days after the
award of contract.
a. Dimensioned general arrangement drawings showing front and side elevations,
b. Plan, sectional views of the equipment terminal blocks, terminals for external
connections, cable end box and cable glands forming part of the contractor’s
supply.
c. Schematic wiring diagram along with write ups for control, interlocks etc.
d. Instrumentation, protection, space heating and panel illumination circuits.
e. Terminal blocks and terminal arrangement drawing showing control and power
cable connections.
f. Net and shipping weights, crane lifts for assembly & dismantling and size of
lifting lugs and eyes.
g. Outline drawings indicating weights, dimensions, all forces and loads under
normal and abnormal operating conditions for the design of foundations and
associated equipment by the Contractor.
h. Schedule of all base channels, sleeves, foundation bolts, inserts and other parts
to be set in the foundation.
i. List of nameplates with text.
j. Leaflets and instruction for cards of control components, instruments, relays and
other accessories, as applicable.

Page 31 of 32
k. Any other drawings or details not specifically mentioned herein but necessary for
the satisfactory operation of the equipment.
l. Instruction Manuals and wall charts:
Six (6) copies of installation, testing and commissioning, operation and maintenance
manuals shall be furnished. These manuals shall be sturdily bound volumes and shall
contain every drawing and detailed by step information required for installation,
testing, setting and adjustment of all components after installation, operation and
maintenance, and spares of the equipment and all its components.
21.31 RECOMMENDED SPARES PARTS

21.31.1 The bidder shall furnish a list of spare parts for DG set with recommended
quantities for 5 years of normal operation. The spare parts catalogue depicting
various parts of the equipment along with part number shall be supplied. Unit
prices must be quoted along with recommended spares.

Page 32 of 32
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER –22
CCTV System
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 22
CCTV SYSTEM
CONTENTS
22.0 SCOPE 1
22.1 CODES AND STANDARDS 2
22.2 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 3
22.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL 12
22.4 DOCUMENTATION 13
22.5 HANDLING 16
22.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING 17
22.7 INSTALLATION AND PRE-COMMISSIONING 18
22.8 SPARE PARTS AND CONSUMABLES 18

SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 22
CCTV SYSTEM
22.0 SCOPE
22.0.1 Introduction
This specification covers the minimum requirements for the design, materials,
construction, fabrication, inspection, supply & delivery, storage, transportation
upto site, testing and commissioning of integrated colored closed circuit television
(CCTV) system giving complete visual coverage and remote monitoring of
designated operation of Isolators of Each bay in a Substation. All camera views shall
be available to the Main Control Room (MCR). Camera selection shall be via keypad
control units connected to a video switching matrix for Construction of 132/33 kV
Substation in Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung District) Nepal. All equipment supplied shall
conform to that detailed within this specification. The system shall comprise:-
a) Local control and monitor facilities in locations providing selective control
and monitoring of up to cameras.
b) All closed circuit camera should be capable for Zoom-in & Zoom –out facility
& Turn around facility.
c) Tentative Locations of camera as detailed below and finalized during detailed
engineering and minimum no. of cameras 10 nos.
 All incoming bays should cover all the isolators in the bay
 All outing bays should cover all the isolators in the bay
 All Transformer bays
 Bus coupler bays
 Covering Entrance gate of Substation
 Any other locations as desired by the ED with in substation premises
finalized during detailed engineering

Page 1 of 19
d) Field installed camera equipment with Zoom-in & Zoom-out, turn around
features
 Monitors
 Central Rack Equipment
 Optical fiber patch panels
 VCRs/HDD drive recording
practices to ensure satisfactory performance throughout the service life. Any
material and equipments not specifically stated in this specification but which are
necessary for satisfactory operation of the equipment shall be deemed to be
Components having identical rating shall be interchangeable.
22.0.3 The performance of the equipment shall be guaranteed as per Section-V–
“Guaranteed and Other Technical Particulars”. The bidder has to furnish the
testing facilities available at the manufacturer’s works.
22.1 CODES AND STANDARDS
22.1.1 It shall be the VENDOR’s responsibility to be, or to become, knowledgeable of the
requirements of the referenced Codes and Standards. The following
Nepal/Indian/International codes and standards, to the extent specified herein,
form a part of this specification. When an edition date is not indicated for a code or
standard, the latest edition in force at the time of VENDOR’s proposal submission
shall apply.
a) IEC 60028 International Standard of Resistance for Copper
b) IEC 60248 Conductors of insulated cables
c) IEC 60255 Electrical relays all or nothing
d) IEC 60331 Fire resistance characteristics of electric cables
e) IEC 60326 Printed circuit boards
f) IEC 60529 Degrees for protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
g) IEC 60801 Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial Process
Measurement and Control Equipment

Page 2 of 19
h) IEC 60885 Electrical test methods for electric cables

i) ITU-T Standards and Recommendations, including those previously
published under the CCITT regulations
j) AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE
k) IEEE-472 Surge Withstand Capability
l) MILITARY SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
m) MIL HDBK 217 Reliability Prediction of Electronic Equipment
n) Electrical Power technical standards of Nepal.
22.1.2 The Equipment and material meeting the requirement of any other internationally
recognized standards which ensure a quality equal or better than the standard
mentioned above shall also be acceptable. Where the equipment conforms to any
other standards then salient points of difference between the standards adopted
and those prescribed in this specification shall be clearly brought out in the bid and
a copy of the applicable standards shall also be enclosed by the bidder with the bid.
22.2 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A) SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
22.2.1 General
The system shall be based on state of the art reliable solid state technology. It shall
use microprocessor software control based architecture. The central system shall
have full redundancy to be fault tolerant. The system shall be modular in design
and allow future expansion to double its capacity with no or minimal service
interruption. However, the central system shall be equipped to cater for 25%
system expansion. It shall include, but not limited to, the following equipment. A
Central Control Rack providing the interface between the control and monitoring
facilities and field installed camera equipment. Field installed colour cameras. A
number of cameras shall be mounted on Mast/ Support structure in the substation.
Control facilities and video display monitors providing a display of camera images
manually selected from the control keyboard or sequentially selected pictures
arranged in a pre-determined sequence.

Page 3 of 19
22.2.2 Equipment Location

(i) A Central Equipment Rack - 19’’ type equipment racks, located in the
Telecoms Rack Room (TRR).
(ii) Operator Monitoring and Control:-
22.2.2.1 The Main Control Room (MCR) shall include at least a 29’’ colour video display
monitor’s flat square screen LCD/Desktop Computer and associated control
keyboard units.
22.2.3 Transmission Equipment
22.2.3.1 Transmission equipment shall be of modular construction and shall utilize optical
fibre cables. Multimode optical fibre cables shall be provided between the Central
Equipment Rack and the field located optical fibre patch panels located in each IES.
These optical fibre cables shall carry both video and telemetry data control
information.
22.2.3.2 Each camera shall be connected via multimode fibre cable that has minimum
capacity of four fibers.
22.2.4 CCTV Camera Multimode O.F. Transmitter Unit
The multimode optical fibre cable from each camera will be terminated via a SC
connector to a optical fibre transmitter unit. The bi-phase telemetry data control
information shall terminate on a RS-485 data module. One transmitter and data
module is required for each camera unit. The O.F transmitter and the bi-phase
telemetry data unit shall be contained within the camera housing. The optical fibre
transmitter shall modulate the analogue video signal and convert it to light, suitable
for optical fibre cable transmission. The video signal will then be routed via the
optical fibre cable and patch panels to the video matrix within the CCTV Central
equipment rack.
22.2.5 Central Rack Equipment

Page 4 of 19
The Central Rack Equipment shall house the main electrical, electronic, optical fibre
and processing equipment necessary for system distribution, video switching
matrices, microprocessor control subsystem, power supplies, operator control
keyboard, etc. The rack shall be provided with powered fans to enable adequate air
flow. The system shall include extensive self-diagnostic routines to detect and
report any system (hardware or software) malfunction including the connecting
cables and outdoor equipment. The system shall be fully redundant and fault
tolerant with no single point of failure. The system should be capable to be
interfaced and integrated with similar CCTV system.
22.2.5.1 Central Rack Unit
The CCTV Central Rack Unit with its associated switching and fibre optic equipment,
complete with rack mounted 29” colour monitor shall be provided. This shall enable
the CCTV to operate as an independent stand-alone CCTV sub-system should the
need arise, i.e. the event of a fault or a break in the optical fibre cable, and or a
fault within the main CCTV control and switching system. Hence operation and
control of the cameras can still be available directly from a control
keyboard/display unit or portable PC.
22.2.5.2 Switching Matrix Unit
Video switching shall be carried out by a microprocessor-based cross point modular
matrix switching units capable of automatically routing video signals from a
requested camera position to a specified monitor. The switching unit shall present a
number of output ports for interfacing to monitors and accommodate other
integrated VCRs. An interface port shall be reserved for
maintenance/administration purposes. A Laptop PC terminal shall be provided, it
shall be loaded with the latest version of diagnostic software according to standard
specs. An interface port shall be reserved for a Real Time Clock. GUI port required
for the connectivity of central rate unit with LAN of control room required so that
to enable authorized workstations to monitor the whole plant from their remote
locations.

Page 5 of 19
The Switching matrix units shall have none blocking structure and support
broadband video transmission with almost no signal degradation (i.e. attenuation,
delay, etc.).
22.2.5.3 Video Quad Processor
Selectable quad/full screen coloured processors units shall be provided. The system
shall be capable of presenting the selected video images to video monitors and
recorders in quad, split or full screen viewing modes, and shall be independent of
both record and real time viewing functions. The system shall allow any and all
monitors to activate the quad split feature simultaneously.
22.2.5.4 Digital video recorder
A digital video recorder (DVR) is an electronic device that records video in a digital
format to a disk drive, USB flash drive, SD memory card, SSD or other local or
networked mass storage device.
CCTV Recording options include:
 On-board hard disc
 Separate SCUSI or iSCUSI hard disc recording
 Direct Attached Storage (DAS)
 Network Attached Storage (NAS)
 RAID0, 1, 5, 6 and LTO-tape storage
The CCTV Video Recorder (CCTV DVR) is a core element of a CCTV
footage recording solution. It ensures that all cameras are recorded at the correct
resolution and frame rate and allows images to be monitored and controlled on
screen. CCTV DVR and NVR systems can also allow access to CCTV Systems via the
internet or through a local area network.
22.2.6 Operator Control Keyboard Units

Control functions of the CCTV cameras from the MCR and ECR keyboards i.e.
camera selection, sequence programming, sequence hold commands shall be
provided. Alpha numeric/display keyboards shall be provided, suitable for desk

Page 6 of 19
mounting. A busy indicator device shall be provided on each monitor to indicate, if

a chosen camera is already under control by another operator. One
Keyboard/display unit shall be installed (flush mounted) in each of the workstations
in the MCR, and one keyboard/display unit shall be installed in and shall have the
following functions:-
a) Power on/off control of each camera.
b) Zoom-in & Zoom-out of each camera.
c) Turn round of each camera.
d) Sequence Control - to program required automatic camera selection.
e) Iris Control - to open/close camera iris.
f) Wash/wipe Control - enable the wash/wipe facility to clean camera glass face.
g) Camera selection enabling up to four camera outputs to be displayed on the
monitors simultaneously.
h) Access security programmed codes shall be provided, for use of keyboards by
authorized operators.
22.2.7 Monitors
22.2.7.1 At least “24” diagonal size CCTV monitors shall be supplied they shall be of the
indoor type with a minimum protection of IP 20, c/w with overhead brackets
suitable for ceiling mounting. The exact size shall be finalized in the EPC phase and
the model has to be the latest at time and to be reviewed and approved by the
company. CCTV monitor control adjustments shall be via an infra-red or wireless
remote control unit, and shall include the following control functions as a
minimum:-
a) Brightness control
b) Contrast control
c) Colour control
d) On/Off and standby control
22.2.7.2 Picture Quality
a) To be compatible with Pal 625 colour standard or better.

Page 7 of 19
b) The monitors shall be responsive to widely varying lighting conditions from 5

lux reflected light to 100,000 lux as may be associated with bright sunlight,
Electric arc and welding arc lights.
c) Under the worst case lighting conditions specified above the overall signal to-
noise ratio shall be 45dB.
d) Horizontal resolution of greater than 600 lines and 440,000 pixels.
e) Accept a supply voltage of 240 Volts 50Hz.
22.2.7.3 Other Facilities
a) Time, date and title ID information of cameras shall be displayed on all
monitors.
b) The monitors shall be capable of supporting 2 or 4-way split screen displays.
22.2.8 Cameras
Colour Charge Coupled Device (CCD) cameras shall be provided and installed at
strategic locations within the substation to enable efficient monitoring of the
substation equipment for safe operation. The cameras shall be solid state
microprocessor controlled intelligent type. The camera design shall ensure high
definition and brilliant images of the covered areas under normal daylight, low
visibility periods and at night under emergency light (i.e. 1.5 LUX). The main
features of the cameras shall meet the following:
a) The standard shall be Pal 625 line colour with 2:1 interlace.
b) The cameras shall generate standard Pal 625 line colour video and provide a
1v Pk to Pk video signal at the video output.
c) Cameras shall be designed to provide high picture quality under varying light
conditions and fitted with automatic light correction facilities.
d) Fitted with automatic iris control, zoom and gain control.
e) Able to operate with a fixed focus lens and motorized zoom lens.
f) All cameras shall be powered from the nearest plant UPS 240 Volts 50Hz local
power source.

Page 8 of 19
g) All cameras shall be of identical model that shall be fully controlled& rotated
from the system central maintenance terminal (PC).
22.2.9 Camera Housing
Depending on the location, the cameras as well as any other outdoor equipment
shall be housed in an explosion-proof and/or weather-proof IP67 none metallic
(GRP) cases. The explosion proof requirements shall be in accordance with the area
classification in which the equipment will be installed.
The Camera housing shall be:-
a) Suitable for housing all equipment necessary for camera operation.
b) Cameras shall be housed in a sealed unit.
c) Equipped with sun hood, and window wipe facilities.
22.2.10 Equipment alarms
The Vendor shall state the alarm indications supplied as standard with the
equipment. These alarms shall include but not limited to the following:-
a) Equipment failure
b) Mains fuse failure
c) Common group or individual equipment failure. This shall take the form of an
earth-free and volt-free contact rated nominally for 5 amps at 24V D.C. This
alarm condition shall be interfaced to the SCS for annunciation.
d) Provision in the SCS (Station Control System) to be considered by the
Contractor and SCS (Substation Control System) Vendor for CCTV alarms.
22.2.11 Cables
All required cables including the multimode optical fiber cables between field
cameras and optical fiber patch panels shall be provided by CONTRACTOR.
22.2.12 Electrical Protection
All field mounted electrical equipment shall be of the explosion-proof type EEx(d)
or EEx(i) certified to CENELEC/IEC or equivalent for hazardous area classified Zone
1, IIC, T3 or Zone 2, IIC, T3 as required.

Page 9 of 19
22.2.13 Power Supplies and Earthing

The control system, monitors and all critical components of the CCTV system shall
be powered by the Telecom 240 Volt, 50 Hz Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).
Power to all cameras and associated equipment will be supplied from the UPS 240
volt 50 Hz vital power distribution panels. All system components shall be capable
of operating at a minimum of ± 10% available voltage, ± 5% frequency, and
interruption time of 10 m Seconds and 5% harmonic content. VENDOR shall state
the total load requirements for each system, in his offer to permit sizing of the UPS
system. This shall include the power requirements for each cabinet and total power
for each system. VENDOR will include inrush currents and crest factors in supplied
information.
22.2.14 Mean Time to Repair (MTTR)
The design and construction of the CCTV system shall ensure high reliability and
availability. The CCTV system shall employ modular constructional techniques in its
design, allowing a first line maintenance philosophy of module replacement to be
implemented. The average module replacement time for the system will be less
than 1 hour as long as the correct spares holding are maintained as recommended
by the supplier.
22.2.15 Environmental conditions
Cameras shall be located in the switch yard, in the control room and entrance gate
and the environmental conditions as specified in Section-I: General Information and
Scope.
22.2.16 System Software

A. Programming
All programming and configuration shall be performed by the manufacturer and
will be developed on the basis of the approved software specifications. Approval of

Page 10 of 19
the software specifications shall be by NEA/WAPCOS. Software shall be protected

from unauthorized changes by the use of multilevel passwords. Manufacturer shall
state with proposal methods available and proposed in their system to implement
such protection. The latest proven software version shall be loaded prior to the
system testing. At the time of Final Acceptance the final software issue shall be
offered to NEA. The manufacturer shall provide all information required to carry
out editing and configuration of the system. A full description shall be provided in
the techniques required to amend existing configuration and replace old versions in
the system. A separate list of editing features shall be included, defining what can
be done on line, and anything that must be developed off line.
B. Licenses and Installation
All software shall be supplied fully installed on the equipment and a master copy
provided on suitable media, CD-ROM preferred. All manuals shall be included and
manufacturer shall ensure that all applicable software licenses are transferred to
NEA.
22.2.17 Noise Immunity (RFI/EMI)
The system shall be designed to prevent the emission of, and susceptibility to, RFI
and EMI. The system shall not be unduly affected by the emissions of nearby
equipment, nor shall it affect the nearby equipment. Emissions shall not initiate
unpredictable or undesirable actions / responses, measurement errors,
communications faults etc. If such instances become evident at site, the VENDOR
shall be wholly responsible for the expeditious resolution of the problem to owner
satisfaction. The application of RFI/EMI protection components or configurations
such as filtering, screening, minimal physical discontinuities and bonding shall be
employed. This includes unit construction and packaging design to ensure easy
serviceability and also that the integrity of RFI/EMI features, will not be degraded
during normal maintenance conditions. RFI protection against hardware damage
and system errors shall be provided for the equipment being furnished. Errors
caused by RFI shall not exceed 0.1 percent of span for exposure to a field strength

Page 11 of 19
of 10 volts/meter over the frequency range of 10 Hz-1000 MHz with all covers in
place. With covers removed errors shall not exceed 0.5 percent of span. A certified
test report shall be required in the proposal to verify this performance. Vendor
equipment shall meet all applicable RFI emissions standards. VENDOR’s equipment
shall not cause RFI interference to Owner hand held radios. VENDOR shall provide
hand held radio to be used for factory test of RFI and susceptibility. The frequency
is to be offered for review to the Owner operations personnel. The most probable
source of radio frequency interference (RFI) at the site is the use of hand held radio
transceivers with nominal transmitted power of 5 watts. VENDOR shall state any
frequencies in the VHF and UHF bands for which they cannot comply. Other sources
of RFI/EMI include fixed radio stations, vehicle radio transmitters, hand-held or
mobile communications equipment, commutator type electrical devices, electrical
storms, welding equipment, solenoids, relays and contactors carrying heavy
currents. The control system shall be immune from these sources of RFI/EMI and
shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60801. The system shall also be supplied
with provisions for protecting against system errors and hardware damage resulting
from electrical transients on power or signal wiring. These transients include those
generated by switching large electrical loads, by power line faults, and due to
lighting strikes which induce surges on power or signal cables. The IEEE Standard
472 shall apply to all system power inputs and signal inputs from field devices. The
VENDOR shall detail in the proposal the method proposed to provide this
protection.
22.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL
22.3.1 The manufacturers shall have in effect at all times, a QA/QC program which clearly
establishes the authority and responsibility of those responsible for the quality
system. Persons performing quality functions shall have sufficient and well defined
authority to enforce quality requirements that initiate, identify, recommend and
provide solutions to quality problems and verify the effectiveness of the corrective
action. Manufacturer’s proposed quality system shall fully satisfy all the elements

Page 12 of 19
of ISO 9001, "Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in

Design/Development, Production, Installation, and servicing" and ISO 9004,
"Quality Management and Quality System Elements- Guidelines". The quality
system shall provide for the planned and systematic control of all quality-related
activities performed during design. Implementation of the system shall be in
accordance with the manufacturer’s Quality Manual and Project Specific Quality
plan, which shall both together with all related/referenced procedures, be
submitted to NEA/WAPCOS for review, comment and approval. The manufacturers
shall identify in purchase documents to its contractors all applicable QA/QC
requirements imposed by the NEA/WAPCOS, and shall ensure compliance thereto.
On request, manufacturers shall provide objective evidence of its QA/QC
surveillance of its contractor’s activities. If selected manufacturer have ISO 9001 or
ISO 9002 certification, as required for contracted scope, then copies of these
certifications are to be provided for NEA/WAPCOS review.
22.4 DOCUMENTATION
22.4.1 Manufacturers shall submit the type and quantity of drawings and documentation
for NEA/WAPCOS.
22.4.2 Mutual agreement of scheduled submission of drawings and engineering data shall
be an integral part of any formal Purchase Order.
22.4.3 Comments made by NEA/WAPCOS on drawing submissions shall not relieve EPC
contractor of any responsibility in meeting the requirements of the specifications.
Such comments shall not be construed as permission to deviate from requirements
of the Purchase Order unless specific and mutual agreement is reached and
confirmed in writing.
22.4.4 Each drawing shall be provided with a title block in the bottom right-hand corner
incorporating the following information:
a. Official trade name and logo of COMPANY
b. PO number together with item tag numbers
c. Document number and revision

Page 13 of 19
d. Manufacturer drawing number and revision

Drawing title giving the description of contents whereby the drawing can be
identified Revisions to drawing shall be identified with symbols (alpha or numeric)
adjacent to the alterations, a brief description in tabular form of each revision shall
be given, and if applicable, the authority and date of the revision shall be listed. The
term "Latest Revision" shall not be used.
22.4.5 Additionally, all final system design documentation shall be provided in electronic
format. All project specific system design drawings shall be provided in DXF file
format. All project specific design specifications produced shall be provided in
Microsoft Word format. All project database information shall be provided in .dbf
format. Additionally, it is desired to have as much standard system documentation
as possible available on CD-ROM with search and retrieval capabilities.
Manufacturer shall advise the extent of provided hardware and operating software
covered by documentation in this manner.
22.4.6 All suppliers’ documents and drawings shall strictly follow revision marking (vertical
line in right border) along with (strikethrough) for deletion and (underlined) for
addition & modifications in hard copy as well as in electronic copy. All
documents/drawings shall be submitted showing the last revision and
changes/additions made along with a list of item-by- item vendor response to
Company comments. When Company approves a document with “No Comments”,
suppliers shall issue such documents/drawings as “Company approved issue”. In
this issue, the document shall be same as previous submission except that it will
only show revised/added version without any revision marks.
22.4.7 CCTV system documentation to be supplied by VENDOR shall include, but not be
limited to connection drawings, detailed descriptions of hardware equipment, fully
dimensioned outline drawings of all panels and equipment, power requirements,
earthing, site preparation, installation, operation, maintenance and fault finding
manuals, and catalogue sheets of all furnished components. Wiring diagrams shall

Page 14 of 19
include customer tag numbers. The Vendor documentation shall include, but not be
limited to, the listed documentation below related to project:
a) Functional Design Specification (FDS) for CCTV system.
b) Drawing cross reference.
c) CCTV system FAT specification.
d) CCTV system hardware configuration.
e) CCTV system Software Design Specification.
f) CCTV termination details.
g) CCTV system panels general arrangement.
h) CCTV system SAT specification.
i) Communications Interface protocol specification(s).
j) Recommended spare parts list with part numbers.
Any other documentation listed in the Document Requirement Schedule.
22.4.8 The CCTV system VENDOR shall provide an advance copy of wiring details and
software disks to NEA for follow-up prior to system installation at site. All
engineering documents shall have the legend pages at the beginning (if applicable)
to show the standard symbols, abbreviations, definitions and description of used
logic/functional blocks. Software media (operating and application), all related
manuals, all sub Vendors software media and manuals shall be part of supplied
documentation.
22.4.9 As Built Drawings

Before completion of final Site Acceptance Test, the manufacturer shall issue a
complete set of approved updated drawings incorporating all modifications,
additions or other changes that have taken place during manufacture and site pre-
commissioning. Each drawing shall be clearly marked “as-built” and dated. Prior to
their issue, manufacturer shall maintain a NEA master set of working drawings at
site detailing all changes made during installation and commissioning.

Page 15 of 19
22.5 HANDLING
22.5.1 Packaging and Shipping
Preparation for shipment shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s standards
and as noted herein. Manufacturers shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of
preparation for shipment provisions with respect to materials and application, and
to provide equipment at the destination in ex-works condition when handled by
commercial carriers. Adequate protection shall be provided to prevent mechanical
damage and atmospheric corrosion in transit and at the job site. Preparation for
shipment and packing will be subject to inspection and rejection by NEA/WAPCOS
inspectors. All costs occasioned by such rejection shall be to the account of the
Contractor. All equipment shall be packed with moisture desiccant and moisture
detection strips shall be installed in all packed equipment. These shall be inspected
after installation and previously established testing / replacement policies will be
implemented should internal exposure to moisture be evident. These procedures
will be prepared by the manufacturer and approved by the NEA/WAPCOS.
Equipment shall be packed, securely anchored, and skid mounted when required.
Bracing, supports, and rigging connections shall be provided to prevent damage
during transit, lifting, or unloading. Separate, loose, and spare parts shall be
completely boxed. Pieces of equipment and spare parts shall be identified by item
number and service and marked with Purchase Order number, equipment / tag
number, and weight, both inside and outside of each individual package or
container. A bill of material shall be enclosed in each package or container of parts.
One complete set of the installation, operation, and maintenance instructions shall
be packed in the boxes or crates with equipment.
22.5.2 Preservation and Storage
Equipment and materials shall be protected to withstand ocean transit and
extended period of storage at the job site for a minimum of 18 months. All supplied
items shall be protected to safeguard against all adverse environments, such as:
humidity, moisture, rain, dust, sand, mud, salt air, salt spray, and seawater. All

Page 16 of 19
equipment and materials shall be preserved and export packed in accordance with
Preservation and Storage Specification.
22.6 INSPECTION AND TESTING
otherwise specifically agreed upon by the manufacturer and employer at the time
of placement of purchase order. The manufacturer shall afford to the inspector
representing the employer, all reasonable facilities, without charge to satisfy
him that the material being furnished is in accordance with these specifications.
The employer reserves the right to get any component/material being used by the
manufacturer of the CCTV Camera tested from any recognized test house. No
material shall be dispatched without prior approval of the all the test reports and
certificates by the employer.
22.6.2 The testing shall be structured in a logical manner and shall cover, but not be
limited to, the following:
a) Earthing isolation and continuity measurements at sample locations
b) Power up, power distribution verification plus Voltage and Current
measurements
c) Diagnostics
d) Power supply test (momentary power loss, voltage fluctuations, etc.)
e) RFI and EMI testing.
22.6.3 CCTV Functional Test

22.6.3.1 For each system this test after site installation shall repeat all the FAT tests related
to system behaviour:
a) system power-up
b) power failure
c) hardware diagnostics
d) test of all other system basic functions
e) Load and fault simulation

Page 17 of 19
22.6.3.2 The test shall demonstrate that the system has been received in good condition, is
installed correctly, is healthy and can successfully be used for further site activities.
22.6.4 Site Acceptance Test
The SAT acceptance date shall start after successful completion of all approved
tests and after the system behavior and performances have been monitored for a
period of thirty days. After thirty days if the system operates as per specification,
Site Acceptance of the system shall be signed. Check of network load shall be done
in the course of the Site Acceptance test. SAT procedures must be detailed and
should be reviewed and accepted by the company.
22.7 INSTALLATION AND PRE-COMMISSIONING

22.7.1 Installation of Equipment
Installation will be carried out by the EPC contractor. Any special tools required for
installation will be provided by the contractor. One notebook PC shall be provided
for remote access of the system to monitor, alter or correct the system
configuration. The notebook shall be of latest proven model. The PC configuration
shall be finalized during the EPC.
22.7.2 Pre-commissioning Procedure
Pre-commissioning shall include, but is not limited to, the following:
a) An audit and inspection of equipment received. A deficiency report shall be
written and appropriate action taken to rectify any problems.
b) Each system shall be powered up and functionally tested, including
communications, diagnostics functions and logic, with appropriate test
equipment as defined by manufacturer.
22.8 SPARE PARTS AND CONSUMABLES

22.8.1 Start-Up and Commissioning Spares
The VENDOR shall supply start-up spares, as required in order to avoid using any of
the recommended spares. The cost of start-up spares shall be quoted separately.

Page 18 of 19
The time scales and procedure for repair and/or replacement of parts shall be
stated in the VENDOR’s proposal.

Page 19 of 19
Package-KC3
Section-IV-B
CHAPTER –23
Mandatory Spare Parts
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER – 23
MANDATORY SPARES, TOOLS & TESTING EQUIPMENT
CONTENTS
23.0 SCOPE 1
23.1 TRANSFORMERS 1
23.2 132/33 kV SF6 (GAS) CIRCUIT BREAKERS 2
23.3 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 3
23.4 POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS 3
23.5 132/33 kV ISOLATORS 3
23.6 120/30 KV SURGE ARRESTORS 4
23.7 C & R PANELS (132/33 kV Substation) 4
23.8 OPGW COMMUNICATION PANEL 5
23.9 TOOLS & TESTING EQUIPMENT 6

Part II Section 6: Employer's Requirement
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC-3
SECTION IV-B
CHAPTER - 23
MANDATORY SPARES, TOOLS & TESTING EQUIPMENTS
23.0. SCOPE
23.0.1. Mandatory spares, tools, and testing equipments are required for 5 MVA, 132/33 kV
Single Phase Power Transformer, 132/33 kV Circuit Breakers, 132/33 kV Isolators, CTs,
PTs, C&R Panels etc. of 132/33 kV substation at Dhunge Sangu (Taplejung District) in
Nepal, for preventive maintenance & emergency maintenance during break down(s) of
the equipment(s). The bidders may quote their rates in the schedule of prices for
mandatory spares. A list of mandatory spares for five years of normal operation is given
below. Their cost shall be taken into account for the evaluation of financial bids. The
bidder shall also submit their list of recommended spare parts for 5 years, for the
equipments.
23.0.2. The maker of spares shall be as that of the main equipments and all the spares shall be
interchangeable.
23.0.3. The testing equipments must also be of the original equipments’ manufacturers. If not in
the range of manufacturers given for the Project, the same shall be mutually decided
between Employer & Contractor, as Employer only would accept material of standard
make and proven quality.
Note: Hydraulic Jacks are covered in the main supply as per specifications.
23.1. TRANSFORMERS
TRANSFORMERS
Spares for Power Transformer Bank(s) 132/33 kV, 1-Ø

5MVA
i. HV bushing with metal parts and gaskets 1 No.
ii. LV bushing with metal parts and gaskets 1 No.
iii. LV Neutral bushing with metal part and gaskets 1 No.
iv. Set of gaskets 1 set
v. Buchholz Relay complete with contacts 1 set

Page 1 of 6
vi. Winding temperature indicator 1 No.
vii. Oil Temperature indicator with local and remote 1 No.
sensing device and contact
viii. Magnetic Oil Level gauge 1 No.
ix. Set of valves complete 1 set
Tap change Diverter switch 1 set
(complete for one phase)
x.
xi. Silica Gel 20 kg
xii. Winding Temperature sensing element 1 No.
xiii. Oil temperature sensing element 1 No.
xiv. Diaphragm for explosion vent (if provided in the 1 sets
transformer)
xv. Terminal Connectors 1 set
xvi. Silica gel breather for main tank 1 No.
xvii. Silica gel breather for OLTC 1 No.
xviii. Remote Tap Position Indicator 1 No.
xix. Cooler fan with motor 1 No.
xx. Starters, contactors, switches & Relays for Electrical 1 set
control panels(One set of each type)
23.2. 132/33 kV SF6 (GAS) CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SF6 (GAS) CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SF6 (GAS) CIRCUIT BREAKERS 132 kV 33 kV
i. One pole complete with column and Interrupter 1 No. 1 No.

but without support structure
ii. Fixed & moving contacts complete for one pole 1 set 1 set
iii. Rubber gaskets, ‘O’ rings and seals for three phase 2 sets 2 sets
pole
iv. Density meter with switch contact 1 No. 1 No.
v. Closing coil 1 Nos. 2 Nos.
vi. Trip coil 1 Nos. 2 Nos.
vii. Terminal connectors 1 Nos. 3 Nos.
viii. Operation counter 1 No. 1 No.

Page 2 of 6
ix. SF6 gas For one For two
complete complete
breaker (3 breaker (3
phases) phases)
x. All types of coupling for SF6 gas 1 No. 1 No.
xi. Motor for spring charging 1 Nos. 2 Nos.
23.3. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
i. 132 kV , 1200-600-300/1-1-1-1-1A, 5 Cores, 1 Phase CT 1 Nos.
ii. 132 kV , 600-300/1-1-1-1-1A, 5 Cores, 1 Phase CT 1 Nos.
iii. 33 kV, 400-200/1-1-1-1A, 4 Cores, 1 Phase CT 1 Nos.
23.4. CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS/POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS
CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS/POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS
i. 132 kV and 33 kV Single Phase Capacitive Voltage Transformer 1 Nos. each
23.5. 132/33 kV ISOLATORS
132/33 kV ISOLATORS AT EACH SUBSTATION

No. Description 132 kV 33 kV
i. Complete Insulator unit for one pole 5 No. 5 No.
ii. Copper contact fingers for male & female contacts 5 set 3 set
iii. Terminal connectors 5 No 5 No
iv. Limit switch & Auxiliary contacts 2 set 2 set
v. Earthing blade & fixed contact assembly 1 set 1 set
vi. Motor Housing bearing assembly 2 set 2 set
vii. Motor with gear assembly 1 set 1 set
viii. Auxiliary Switch assembly complete 2 set 2 set

Page 3 of 6
ix. coils 2 set 2 set
23.6. 120/30 KV SURGE ARRESTORS
120/30 KV SURGE ARRESTORS AT EACH SUBSTATION (wherever applicable)

120 kV 30 kV
120/30 kV, 10kA Single Phase Surge
i. Arrestor complete in all respects 1 No. 1 No.
Including base and surge monitor
23.7. C & R PANELS (132/33 kV Substation)
C & R PANELS (132/33 kV Substation) (wherever applicable)

i. Tool Kit 1 No.
ii. Set of Control switches used 1 set
iii. Each type of Auxiliary and trip relays used 1 set
iv. Multifunction meter 1 No.
v. Each type fuse links and MCB used as per scheme 1 No. of each type
requirement
vi. Terminal blocks -20% of used TB 1 No.
vii. FO Cable 10 meters 2 Nos.
viii. Indicating lamps 2 Nos.
ix. Illumination lamps 2 Nos.
x. 3 pin 15 A socket with ON/OFF switch 1 Nos.
xi. Energy meter 1 No.
xii. Battery & Battery Charger
a) Intercell inter row connections One set of each
b) Nuts, bolts & washers 5 sets
c) Insulators used as supports for connecting strips (If
applicable) 5 Nos. of each type

Page 4 of 6
d) Pad insulators to be placed below the batteries As per Manufacturer
Recommendation.
e) Flexible copper end connector strips As per Manufacturer
Recommendation.
f) Petroleum jelly 5 Kg
xiii. Battery Charger*
a) Set of diodes of each type & rating
b) Set of silicon controlled rectifiers of each rating used
c) Set of chokes of each type & rating used
d) Set of capacitors of each type & rating
e) Set of resistors of each type & rating
f) Set of transistors of each type & rating
g) Set of MCB of each type & rating
h) Set of fuses of each type & rating
i) Set of fuse assembly unit of each type & rating
j) Set of contactors of each type & rating
k) Set of thermal over current relay of each type & rating
l) Set of auxiliary contactors of each type & rating
m) Set of control & selector switches of each type & rating
n) Indicating lamps As per Manufacturer
o) Panel / Cabinet space heater with thermostat Recommendation
*Tentative list and the spares to be offered as per manufacturer recommendation and
the list has to be submitted to Employer for approval
23.8. OPGW Communication Panel
OPGW Communication Panel (WHEREVER APPLICABLE)
i. As recommended by the manufacturer 1 set

Page 5 of 6
23.9. TOOLS & TESTING EQUIPMENT
TOOLS & TESTING EQUIPMENT AT EACH SUBSTATION (wherever applicable)

S. No. Item Quantity
i. Transformer oil testing (BDV) kit 1 No.
ii. Transformer oil sampling steel bottles of 1 liter capacity 2 Nos.
iii. 2.5 kV Megger (Motorized) 1 No.
iv. 1000 V Megger 1 No.
v. Multimeter digital 1 No.
vi. 4 Terminal Earth tests 1 No.
vii. Phase sequence meters 1 No.
viii. 6000 LPH Oil filtration Unit 1 No.

Page 6 of 6
Package-KC3
Section-V
Guaranteed Technical Particulars
Package-KC3
Section V-A
Guaranteed Technical Particular- Transmission Line
IFB No: KOSHI/NEA/KC3 Guaranteed Technical Particulars Koshi Corridor 220 kV Transmission Line Project
in Nepal

Package- KC3: Construction of 220 kV Double Circuit Transmission Line from Basantapur– Dhunge Sangu and 132/33 kV Substation in Dhunge Sangu
SECTION - V-A
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR SUPPLY OF TOWERS & ACCESSORIES AND FOUNDATION
(TO BE FILLED IN AND SIGNED BY THE TENDERER)
I TOWERS Guranteed Technical Particular

1 Line voltage
2 Number of circuits
3 Name of Manufacturer and country of origin
i) Steel
ii) Bolts, nuts and washers
iii) Tower accessories
4 Name and address of :
i) Tower fabricator
ii) Galvanizer
5 SAGS AND TENSIONS Conductor Earth wire
i Every day temperature, nil wind (initial condition)
ii Full design wind pressure on conductor / earth wire/OPGW
at every day temperature.
iii Thirty Six (36) percent Full Design Wind Pressure on
conductor / earth wire/OPGW at Minimum Temperature.
iv 10mm radial thickness of ice on conductor and earthwire

at minimum temperature and nil wind
v Twenty Eight (28) per cent Full Design Wind Pressure on
conductor / earth wire/OPGW and 5 mm of radial
thickness of ice at Minimum Temperature
vi Minimum Temperature, Nil Wind
vii 85o/53 o C, Nil wind
viii 75% Full design wind pressure on conductor / earth
wire/OPGW at every day temperature for Tangent towers
under broken wire condition.
ix Nil Wind at Minimum Temperature
6. Clearances and Tolerances

6.1 Minimum ground Clearance under Maximum temperature
and nil wind (mm)
6.2 Provision for creep compensation (mm)
6.4 Minimum live metal clearances
6.4.1 For Altitude band 0-3000m above msl
a Insulator String
Swing Angle (Deg) Min. Electrical Clearance (mm)

Single/Pilot Double Suspension Double Tension
Supension
0
15
30
45
60
b Jumper Swings
Swing Angle (mm) Min. Electrical Clearance (Deg)
Double Tension
0
10
20
30
6.5 Maximum tolerance in verticality
Section 5
Page 1 of 23
in Nepal
II CONDUCTOR 597 sq.mm ACSR Moose (Al 54/3.53mm + 597 sq.mm AACSR Moose (Al
St. 7/3.53 mm) Alloy 54/3.53mm + St. 7/3.53
mm)
1 Maker's Name, Address & Country. :
a Aluminum/Aluminium Alloy :
b Galvanised Steel wire
c Complete conductor
CONDUCTOR
3 Size & Code
4 IS/International Standards applicable
5 Wire diameter in mm
a Aluminium/Aluminium Alloy
b Steel Wire
6 Number of strands :
1st layer of Steel
2nd layer of Steel
3rd layer of Aluminium/Aluminium Alloy
4th layer of Aluminium/Aluminium Alloy
5th layer of Aluminium/Aluminium Alloy
7 Total Sectional Area of complete conductor in mm2 :
Total Sectional Area of Aluminium in mm2 :
8 Overall diameter of complete conductor in mm :
9 Weight in kg :
10 Calculated D.C. resistance at 20 degrees C, maximum.
11 Continuous current rating at 85 degree C (Enclose
supporting calculations)
12 Corona extinction voltage, kV
13 Radio interference voltage
14 Ultimate tensile strength, kN
15 Final modulus of elasticity
16 Co-efficient of Linear expansion
17 Lay-Ratio Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum
Steel Core (6 Wire layer)
Aluminium
1st layer
2nd layer
3rd layer
STRANDS
Section 5
Page 2 of 23
in Nepal
18 Technical particulars of Aluminum/Aluminium Alloy and Aluminium Steel Aluminium Steel

Steel strands Alloy
a Diameter (mm)
Standard
Maximum
Minimum
b Cross-sectional area of nominal diameter wire (sqmm):
c Weight in Kg./Km.
d Minimum breaking load in Kg/KN
Before stranding
After stranding
e Minimum ultimate tensile stress of strand (kg/sq. mm)
f Co-efficient of linear expansion

19 D.C. Resistance at 20 degrees C in ohms/Km
20 Zinc coating of steel wire in gms/m2
a Number of 1 minute dips.
Number of 1/2 minute dips.
b Minimum weight of Zinc Coating
c Process of Galvanizing
d Quality of Zinc
597 sq.mm ACSR Moose (Al 54/3.53mm + 597 sq.mm AACSR Moose (Al
St. 7/3.53 mm) Alloy 54/3.53mm + St. 7/3.53
mm)
a Steel
b Aluminium
c Method of making joint
d Ultimate tensile strength of joint
22 Maximum single length of conductor which can be
manufactured in km
23 Standard length of each piece in Km
24 a) Tolerance if any on standard lengths
b) Details of random lengths :
25 No. of standard length in one reel
26 Type of Drums and IS applicable
27 Dimensions of the Drum in cm. (Drawing shall be
enclosed).
28 Weight of the Drum in kg
29 with conductor
30 empty Drum with lagging
31 Details of marking on conductor drum
32 Whether the drums are suitable for use with tension
stringing equipment.
33 Standard according to which the conductor will be
manufactured and tested
a Certification Mark if any :
b Test certificate enclosed : Yes/No
34 Chemical composition of high carbon steel wire
35 Initial & Final sag and Tension charts Furnished
36 Stress/Strain data corresponding to different tensions,
temperatures and time furnished.
37 Curves/tables of creep compensation corresponding to
different tensions temperatures furnished
38 Other details if any :
III Galvanised Steel Earth wire G.S. Earthwire (7/3.66mm) G.S. Earthwire (7/4.15mm)
1 Maker's Name, address and country :

a Steel wires/rods :
b Zinc :
c Galvanised stranded Steel wire :
Section 5
Page 3 of 23
in Nepal
2 a.Stranding and wire diameter (mm)

b. No. of strands
Steel Core (No.)
outer steel layer (No.)
c.Weight of complete (kg/km) :
3 Single wire before stranding
a) Diameter of wire (mm) :
b) Tolerance if any (+/-%) :
c) Minimum elongation in 200 mm length (mm):
d) Minimum breaking strength (kg):
e) Minimum tensile strength (kg/sqmm):
f) D.C. resistance at 20 degC (ohms/km):
4 Stranded wire
a) Length of lay
Maximum (mm) :
Minimum (mm) :
b) Minimum breaking load (kg or KN):
c) Overall diameter (mm) :
d) Minimum breaking load (kg or KN) :
e) Overall diameter (mm) :
f) Modulus of elasticity (kg/sq mm) :
i) Initial :
ii) Final :
g) Coefficient of linear expansion (per degC)
h) D.C. resistance at 20 degC (ohms/km) :
i) Total sectional area (sq.mm) :
j) Overall weight (kg/Km) :
5 Direction of lay of outer layer :
6 Zinc coating
a) Number of one minute dips (No.) :
b) Number of half minute dips (No.) :
c) Quality of Zinc :
d) Weight of coating on wire (gm/sq.m) :
e) Process of galvanising :
7 Joints :
8 Oiling :
9 Standard length (m) :
10 Tolerance if any on standard length (+/- % )
11 Standard length of earth wire in each drum (m)
12 No. of standard lengths in each drum
13 (a) Random lengths (m) :
(b) No. of random lengths (No) :
14 Standard weight of drum (kg) :
15 Type of drum and IS/IEC applicable :
16 Dimensions of the drum in cm. (Drawing shall be
enclosed):
17 Weight of the Drum
- with earth wire (kg.) :
- empty drum with lagging (kg.) :
18 Type of drum and IS applicable :
19 Dimensions of the drum in cm. (Drawing shall be enclosed)
:
20 Details of marking on earth wire drum :
21 Drums suitable for tension stringing :
22 Standards according to which the earth wire will be :
a) Manufactured
b) Tested
c) Types of tests
23 Chemical composition :
24 Other details if any
Section 5
Page 4 of 23
in Nepal
IV. CONDUCTOR ACCESSORIES 597 sq.mm ACSR Moose (Al 54/3.53mm + 597 sq.mm AACSR Moose (Al
St. 7/3.53 mm) Alloy 54/3.53mm + St. 7/3.53
mm)
A. MID SPAN COMPRESSION JOINTS
1 Maker's name and country
2 Type
3 Suitable for (Conductor size) (mm)
4 Materials of joint with reference of ISS to which it
conforms
a) Aluminium sleeve
5 Shape of cross-section
a) Before compression
b) After compression
6 Outside diameter of sleeves
i) Aluminium (mm)
Aluminium
i) Corner to corner (mm)
ii) Surface to surface (mm)
7 Inside diameter of sleeves
i) Aluminium (mm)
8 Length of sleeves
i) Aluminium (mm)
i) Aluminium (mm)
9 Weight of sleeve in
i) Aluminium (kg.)
10 Breaking strength of the mid span joint as percentage of
ultimate tensile strength of conductor (%)
11 Conductivity of the compression joint expressed as
percentage of the conductivity of equivalent length of the
conductor(%)
12 Whether compression and non-compression joints
marked on the sleevs.
13 Slip strength of mid span compression joints expressed as
% of UTS of conductors.
14 Details of die set required for making joint.
15 Type of greece and capacity of Hydraulic compressor for
making joints.
16 Suitable for passing through the sleeve of stringing block.
17 Reference of manufacturers' drawing and catalogue no. etc
18 Reference of ISS or any other international standard to

which the midspan joints conform, if any
19 Certification Mark (ISI/BS/or Any other International
Standard)
20 Packing details
B. REPAIR SLEEVE
1 Maker's name and country
2 Type
3 Suitable for Conductor size (mm)
4 Shape of cross-section
5 Inside diameter of sleeves (mm)
Before compression
6 Outside diameter of sleeve
a) Before compression (mm)
Section 5
Page 5 of 23
in Nepal
i) Corner to corner
ii) Surface to surface
7 Length of sleeve
b) After compression (mm)
8 Weight of sleeve
9 Conductivity of the repair sleeve expressed as
percentage of the equivalent length of Bare conductor
(%)
10 Material and standard to which conforming
11 Breaking strength as % of UTS of conductor
12 Resistance as percentage of measured resistance of
equivalent length of conductor
13 Details of die set for making joint
14 Capacity of compressor for making joint
15 Whether suitable to pass through stringing blocks when
installed on conductor during tension stringing if not state
the protective device needed to make it suitable.
16 Certification mark (ISI/BS/Any International Institution.
17 Reference of ISS or any other international standard

specification to which the repair sleeves shall conform, if
any
18 Reference of drawing and catalogue no. etc.
19 Packing details,
C. VIBRATION DAMPERS
1 Maker's name & Country
2 Type
3 Suitable for conductor size (mm)
4 Total weight of each damper (kg)
5 Dimension of balancing weights (mm)
6 Weight of each balancing weight (kg)
7 Tolerance in balancing weights (+/-%)
8 Messenger cable
(a) Stranding and wire diameter
(b) UTS of each strand
(c) Ultimate bending strength
9 Slipping strength of cable w.r.t. each balancing weight
10 Natural frequency of the damper (hz)

(a) First resonance
(b) Second resonance
(c) Third resonance
(d) Fourth resonance
11 The number of damper required per span
(suspension/tension)
(a) Span lengths (mtrs) 100 250 390 400 440 1100
(b) Nos. of dampers (nos.)
12 Position of fixing damper on the conductor from the clamp
mouth
(a) At tension points
i) First damper (mm)
ii) Second damper, (mm)
iii) Third damper (mm)
(b) At suspension points
13 Clamping torque (kg m)
14 Minimum fatigue strength in no. of cycles at +/-1 mm
amplitude at
(a) Resonant frequency of line conductor
(b) Highest resonant frequency of vibration damper
Section 5
Page 6 of 23
in Nepal
15 Clamp slipping strength of vibration damper (kg)

(a) Before fatigue test
(b) After undergoing fatigue test without re-torquing the
bolts.
16 (a) Diagram showing power dissipated by the damper in
watts for various vibration frequencies & amplitudes
(watts)
(b) Diagram showing the vibration energy for conductor
bundle for various frequencies under varied winds and
spans
17 Magnetic power loss per damper at 600 amp. 50 Hz AC
current (watts)
18 Material and standards to which conforming
a) Clamp b) Messenger cable c) Damper weight
19 Quantity of zinc and standard to which conforming
20 Galvanization
(a) method of galvanization
i) Spring washers
ii) Other spare parts
(b) no. of dips
i) One minute
ii) Half minute
(c) minimum weight of zinc coating (g/sq. m)
i) Casting
ii) Wires
21 Certification Mark (ISI/BS/or any other International
Standard)
22 Packing details
i) Marking
ii) Standard to which conforming
D. SPACERS
1 Makers's name & Country
2 Type
3 Suitable for conductor size (mm)
4 weight of the bundle spacer (kg)
5 Spacing between sub-conductor
(a) Along the run of line (mm)
(b) At suspension insulator- string (mm)
(c) At tension insulator strings (mm)
(d) At jumpers (mm)
6 Distance between support clamp and first spacer (mm)
(a) At tension position (mm)

(b) At suspension position (mm)
7 Longitudinal distance between spacers
(a) Span (m.) 100 250 390 400 440 1100
(b) Maximum (m.)
(c) Minimum (m.)
8 No. of spacers per span (nos.)
(a) Span length
(b) Nos.
9 Maximum distance between adjacent spacers of each
phase for jumper connection
10 Deflection of spacers
(i) Under normal full load current (mm)
(ii) Under fault conditions (mm)
11 Ultimate strength of the spacer under (mm)
(i) Compressive load (kg)
(ii) Tensile load
12 Movement which can be applied to the spacers
(i) Longitudinal parallel to the conductor (mm)
(ii) Vertical in a vertical direction at right angle to the
conductor(mm)
Section 5
Page 7 of 23
in Nepal
(iii)Torsional (angular) in a vertical plane parallel to the

conductor (degrees)
13 Magnetic power loss per spacer (watts) at 600 amps. 50 Hz
AC current
14 Corona performance of the spacer
(a) Visible corona voltage line to earth (kV)
i) Dry condition
Inception (kV rms)
Extinction (kV rms)
ii) Wet condition
Inception (kV rms)
Extinction (kV rms)
(b) Corona power loss per spacer at rated voltage (watts)
i) Dry condition (watts)

ii) Wet condition (watts)
15 Radio Interference voltage performance of the spacer at
305 kV (rms) phase to ground
i) Dry condition (micro volts)
ii) Wet condition at corona extinction voltage(micro volts)
16 Damping performance of the spacer

(i) If vibration test satisfactory
(ii) If damping test satisfactory
17 Clamp slipping strength of spacer clamp
(a) Before vibartion test when tightened at specified
torque (kg)
(b) After under-going the vibration test
(i) Without retorquing the clamp of the assembly (kg)
(ii)With retorquing the clamp of the assembly (kg)
18 Minimum fatigue strength of spacer and no. of cycles
for specified amplitudes and and frequencies under
following conditions
i) Forlongitudinal vibration (kg/Hz)
ii) For vertical vibration (kg/Hz)
iii) For subspan oscillation (kg/Hz)
19 Material & Standard to which conforming
20 Quality of Aluminium Alloy
21 Galvanisation
a) Method of galvanisation
i) Spring Washers
ii) any other spare parts
b) Quality of Zinc and standard to which conforming
22 Short circuit Rating (kA)
23 Equivalent compressive and tensile strength of 40KA short
circuit current (kg)
24 Shore hardness of the Elastomer(if applicable)
25 Electrical resistance of elastomer (ohms)
26 Electrical resistance between two sub-conductor across the
assembly (ohm)
27 Maximum conductor temperature which can be with stood
by the elastomer (deg. C.)
28 Certification Mark
29 Packing details
i) Marking
ii) Standard to which conforming.
E. SPACER DAMPERS
1 Makers's name & address
2 Type
3 Suitable for (conductor size) (mention drg. and catalogue
nos. also) (mm)
4 Total weight of each spacer damper (kg)
Section 5
Page 8 of 23
in Nepal
5 Spacing between subconductor (mm)

(i) Along run of line (mm)
(ii)At suspension insulators string (mm)
(iii)At tension insulator string(mm)
6 Distance between support clamp and first spacer
(i) At tension position (mm)
(ii)At suspension position (mm)
7 Minimum no. of spacer dampers per span (nos.)
} 250 m
} 390 m
} 400 m
} 450 m
8 Maximum distance between adjacent spacers of each
phase along run of line (mtrs.)
9 (i) Under normal full load current (mm)
(ii) Under fault conditions (mm)
10 Ultimate strength of the spacer damper (mm)
(i) Compressive load (kg)
(ii) Tensile load (kg)
11 Movement which can be applied to the spacer damper
(i) Longitudinal parallel to conductor(mm)

(ii) Vertical (mm)
(iii)Torsional (degrees)
12 Magnetic power loss per spacer (watts) damper at 600
amps. 50 cycles/ sec. AC current
13 Corona performance of the spacer damper of 50 Hz supply
(a) Corona inception and extinction voltage line to earth

(kV)
i) Dry condition
ii) Wet condition
(b) Corona power loss per spacer damper in watts at rated
voltage (watts)
i) Dry condition
ii) Wet condition
14 Radio Interference voltage performance of the spacer
damper at 305 kV (rms) phase to ground
i) Dry condition
ii) Wet condition
15 (a) Diagram showing power dissipated by the damper
in watts for various vibration frequencies and amplitude
(watts)
(b) Diagram showing vibration energy per conductor
bundle for various frequencies under varied winds and
spans
16 Minimum fatigue strength of spacer damper in nos. of
cycles for specified amplitudes and frequencies under
following conditions
i) For longitudinal vibration (kg/Hz)
ii) For vertical vibration (kg/Hz)
iii) For subspan oscillation (kg/Hz)
17 Clamp slipping strength of spacer damper clamp
(a) Before vibration test when tightened at specified
torque
(b) After the vibration test
(i) Without retorquing the bolts and cap screws (kg)
(ii)With retorquing the bolts and cap screws (kg)
18 Natural frequency of the spacer damper
(a) Upper frequency (Hz)
(b) Lower frequency (Hz)
19 Material & Standard to which conforming
20 Quality of Aluminium Alloy
Section 5
Page 9 of 23
in Nepal
21 Galvanisation
a) Method of galvanisation
i) Spring Washers
ii) any other spare parts
b) Quality of Zinc and standard to which conforming
22 Short circuit Rating (KA)
23 Equivalent compressive and tensile strength of 40KA short
circuit current (kg)
24 Electrical resistance of elastomer (ohms)
25 Electrical resistance between two sub-conductors accross
the assembly (ohm)
26 Maximum conductor temperature which can be with stood
by the elastomer (deg. C.)
27 Log decreement value for 4 to 6 times the conductor
diameter
28 Certification Mark (ISI/BS/or any other International
Standard)
29 Packing details
i) Standard to which conforming.
V. GALVANISED STEEL EARTH WIRE ACCESSORIES

A. SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
1 Manufacturer's name & address
2 Type
3 Material
4 Drawing no. (give complete details and dimension
including no. of components)
5 Reference of Indian Standard specification to which
conform
6 Minimum slip strength with respect to earth wire
7 Minimum ultimate breaking strength
8 Galvanising
(a) Spring washers
(b) Other ferrous parts
(c) weight of zinc (g/sq. m)
(d) no. of dips
i) one minute
ii) half minute
(e) Quality of zinc and standard to which conforming
9 Fixing arrangement of clamp on the ground wire / OPGW
10 Whether the limb of the U-bolt has been long enough to

accommodate the leg of the flexible copper bond (Y/N)
11 Total drop of the suspension assembly from the centre

point of the attachment to the centre point of the ground
wire (mm)
12 Certification Mark (ISI/BS/Any other International
Standard)
13 Total weight of assembly (kg)
14 Method of manufacture adopted e.g. forging or casting
15 Packing details
16 Other details, if any
B. TENSION ASSEMBLY
2 Type
3 Material
(a) Body
(b) Bolts and nuts
4 Drawing no. (give complete details and dimension and no.
of components)
Section 5
Page 10 of 23
in Nepal
5 Reference of Indian Standard specification / IEC to which

conforms
6 Minimum slip strength
8 Brinnel hardness of steel
9 Galvanising
(a) Spring washers
(d) no. of dips
i) one minute
ii) half minute
10 Total weight of complete assembly (kg)
11 Breaking strength of tension clamp as % of breaking load of
ground wire
12 Resistivity as % of equivalent length of ground wire
13 Whether lugs along with necessary nuts and bolts for
jumper connections will be supplied (Y/N)
14 Angle of Jumper terminal with the vertical plate (degree)
15 Whether the bolt holding the jumper is sufficiently long

and will be provided with washers, nuts and locking nuts
etc., for fixing one lug of the flexible copper bond (Y/N0)

Standard)
17 Packing details
2 Type
3 Suitable for earth wire of size (mm)
4 Material with reference of ISS to which it conforms
(a) Clamp
(b) Messenger cable
(c) Weight
5 Reference of manufacturer's drawing and catalogue no.
etc.
7 Dimensions of balancing weights (mm)
8 Length of each balancing weight (mm)
10 Tolerance in balancing weights (+%)
11 Messenger cable
(a) Stranding and wire diameter (mm)
(b) Ultimate tensile strength (kg)
(c) Ultimate bending strength (kg m)
12 Slipping strength of stranded messenger cable with respect
to balancing weight (kg)
(watts)
(b) Diagram showing the vibration energy for various
frequencies under varied winds and spans
14 Natural frequency of the damper
(a) Ist (Hz)
(b) IInd (Hz)
(c) IIIrd (Hz)
(d) IVth (Hz)
15 The number of dampers required per span for various span
length
Section 5
Page 11 of 23
in Nepal
(a) Span lengths (mtrs) 250m 390m 400m 440m

1100m
(b) Nos. of dampers
i) Suspension span
ii) Tension span
16 Position of fixing damper on the earth wire from the clamp
mouth
ii) Second damper (mm)
18 Maximum possible dynamic strain on the earth wire with
recommended number of dampers
19 Minimum fatigue strength at amplitude of +/- 0.5 mm in
nos. of cycles at
(a) Resonant frequency of Earth wire
(b) Highest frequency of vibration dampers
20 Clamp slipping strength of vibration damper
(b) After fatigue test for 10 million cycles
21 Weight of zinc coating in (gms/m2 )
(a) Spring washers
(b) Bolts and nuts
(c) Weights
(d) Clamp
(e) Messenger cable
22 No. of dips of 1 minute duration which the damper
withstands under 'Preece Test'
(a) Spring washers
(b) Bolts and nuts
(c) Weights
(d) Clamp
(e) Messenger cable
23 Packing details
24 Certificate Marks (ISI/BS/or Any other International
Standard)
D) MIDSPAN COMPRESSION JOINT
1 Maker's name & address
2 Type
3 Inside diameter of sleeve before compression
4 Outside dimension of sleeve
a)Before compression (mm)
b)After compression (mm)
i. Corner to corner (mm)
ii. Surface to surface (mm)
5 Length of sleeve
6 Weight of sleeve (kg)
7 Slipping strength of mid span (%)
joint, expressed as a percentage of
Ultimate tensile strength
8 Resistance of the compressed
Unit expressed as a percentage
of the Resistance of equivalent
length of bare earth wire
9 Material of sleeves
a)Material
b)Standard to which conform
Section 5
Page 12 of 23
in Nepal
c)Whether annealed properly

d)Brinnel Hardness of material
10 Galvanization
a)Process
b) Weight of zinc (g/sq. m)
c)No. of dips
i) one minute
ii) half minute
d)Quality of zinc and standard to which conforming
11 Whether compression and non compression joints marked
on the sleeve (Y/N)
12 Breaking strength of Mid span joint as of the breaking load
of ground wire %
13 Details of die set for making joint
14 Whether suitable to pass through stringing block when
installed on ground wire during tension stringing if not
state the protective device needed to make it suitable.
15 Capacity of Hydraulic compressor for making joint

16 Certification mark (ISI/BS/Any international Institution
17 Drum no. and details and no. of components

18 Packing details
E) FLEXIBLE COPPER BONDS

2 Governing Standard
3 Material & Standard
4 No. of Strands
5 Length
6 Weight
7 Slipping strength of lugs provided on either end of earthing
bond without any damage to earthing bond
8 Certification mark (ISI/BS/Any international Institution
9 Packing details (No. of bonding pices per package and

gross weight)
E. FLEXIBLE COPPER BONDS

Flexible Copper Bonds (Bonding Pieces)
1 Maker's name and address
2 Governing standard
Material and standard to which conforming
No. of strands and wire diameter.
Length(mm)
Resistance (ohms)
Weight (kg)
Slip strength of lugs provided on either end of earthing
bond without any damage to earthing bond (kg)
Certification mark (ISI/BS/ Any International Institution).
Packing details (No. of bonding pieces per package and

gross weight).
VI. OPGW
1 Maker's Name, address and country :
a Steel wires/rods :
b Zinc :
c Galvanised stranded Steel wire/OPGW :
2 No. of cores
3 Weight of complete (kg/km) :
4 a) Minimum breaking load (kg or KN):
Section 5
Page 13 of 23
in Nepal
b) Overall weight (kg/Km) :

c) Overall diameter (mm) :
d) Minimum breaking load (kg or KN) :
e) Overall diameter (mm) :
f) Modulus of elasticity (kg/sq mm) :
i) Initial :
ii) Final :
g) Coefficient of linear expansion (per degC)
h) D.C. resistance at 20 degC (ohms/km) :
i) Total sectional area (sq.mm) :
5 Standard length (m) :
6 Tolerance if any on standard length (+/- % )
7 Standard length of earth wire in each drum (m)
8 No. of standard lengths in each drum
9 (a) Random lengths (m) :
10 (b) No. of random lengths (No) :
11 Standard weight of drum (kg) :
12 Type of drum and IS/IEC applicable :
13 Dimensions of the drum in cm. (Drawing shall be
enclosed):
14 Weight of the Drum
- with earth wire (kg.) :
- empty drum with lagging (kg.) :
15 Type of drum and IS applicable :
16 Dimensions of the drum in cm. (Drawing shall be enclosed)
:
17 Details of marking on earth wire drum :
18 Drums suitable for tension stringing :
19 Standards according to which the earth wire will be :
a) Manufactured
b) Tested
c) Types of tests
20 Other details if any
VII. OPGW ACCESSORIES

A. SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
2 Type
3 Material
4 Drawing no. (give complete details and dimension
including no. of components)
5 Reference of Indian Standard specification to which
conform
6 Minimum slip strength with respect to earth wire
8 Galvanising
(a) Spring washers
(d) no. of dips
i) one minute
ii) half minute
9 Fixing arrangement of clamp on the ground wire / OPGW
10 Whether the limb of the U-bolt has been long enough to

accommodate the leg of the flexible copper bond (Y/N)
11 Total drop of the suspension assembly from the centre

point of the attachment to the centre point of the ground
wire (mm)
Section 5
Page 14 of 23
in Nepal
12 Certification Mark (ISI/BS/Any other International

Standard)
13 Total weight of assembly (kg)
14 Method of manufacture adopted e.g. forging or casting
15 Packing details
B. TENSION ASSEMBLY
2 Type
3 Material
(a) Body
(b) Bolts and nuts
4 Drawing no. (give complete details and dimension and no.
of components)
5 Reference of Indian Standard specification / IEC to which
conforms
6 Minimum slip strength
8 Brinnel hardness of steel
9 Galvanising
(a) Spring washers
(d) no. of dips
i) one minute
ii) half minute
10 Total weight of complete assembly (kg)
11 Breaking strength of tension clamp as % of breaking load of
ground wire
12 Resistivity as % of equivalent length of ground wire
13 Whether lugs along with necessary nuts and bolts for

jumper connections will be supplied (Y/N)
14 Angle of Jumper terminal with the vertical plate (degree)
15 Whether the bolt holding the jumper is sufficiently long

and will be provided with washers, nuts and locking nuts
etc., for fixing one lug of the flexible copper bond (Y/N0)

Standard)
17 Packing details
2 Type
3 Suitable for earth wire of size (mm)
4 Material with reference of ISS to which it conforms
(a) Clamp
(b) Messenger cable
(c) Weight
5 Reference of manufacturer's drawing and catalogue no.
etc.
7 Dimensions of balancing weights (mm)
8 Length of each balancing weight (mm)
10 Tolerance in balancing weights (+%)
11 Messenger cable
(a) Stranding and wire diameter (mm)
(b) Ultimate tensile strength (kg)
Section 5
Page 15 of 23
in Nepal
(c) Ultimate bending strength (kg m)

12 Slipping strength of stranded messenger cable with respect
to balancing weight (kg)
(watts)
(b) Diagram showing the vibration energy for various
frequencies under varied winds and spans
14 Natural frequency of the damper
(a) Ist (Hz)
(b) IInd (Hz)
(c) IIIrd (Hz)
(d) IVth (Hz)
15 The number of dampers required per span for various span
length
(a) Span lengths (mtrs) 250m 390m 400m 440m
1100m
(b) Nos. of dampers
i) Suspension span
ii) Tension span
16 Position of fixing damper on the earth wire from the clamp
mouth
ii) Second damper (mm)
18 Maximum possible dynamic strain on the earth wire with
recommended number of dampers
19 Minimum fatigue strength at amplitude of +/- 0.5 mm in
nos. of cycles at
(a) Resonant frequency of Earth wire
(b) Highest frequency of vibration dampers
20 Clamp slipping strength of vibration damper
(b) After fatigue test for 10 million cycles
21 Weight of zinc coating in (gms/m2 )
(a) Spring washers
(b) Bolts and nuts
(c) Weights
(d) Clamp
(e) Messenger cable
22 No. of dips of 1 minute duration which the damper
withstands under 'Preece Test'
(a) Spring washers
(b) Bolts and nuts
(c) Weights
(d) Clamp
(e) Messenger cable
23 Packing details
24 Certificate Marks (ISI/BS/or Any other International
Standard)
D. GROUNDING WIRE FOR CLAMPS

2 Type
3 Wire diameter
4 Length of Grounding wire
5 Weight of Grounding wire (kg)
6 Galvanization
(a) Process
Section 5
Page 16 of 23
in Nepal
(a) Process
(b) weight of zinc (g/sq.m.)
(c) no. of dips
(i) one minute dip
(ii) Half minute dip
7 Quality of zinc and standard to which conforming
8 Certification mark (ISI/BS/Any International Institution.
9 Packing details
E. STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT CLAMP ACCESSORIES

1 Maker's name and address
3 Material and standard to which conforming
4 No. of Groove
5 Galvanising
a) Spring washers
b) Other ferrous parts
6 Certification mark (ISI/BS/ Any International Institution).
7 Packing details
VIII. INSULATOR DISCS AND COMPLETE STRINGS

I. SINGLE DISC INSULATOR 90kN 160kN 210kN
1 Type of insulator
2 Maker's name,address and country
3 Material and Governing standard
4 Detailed dimensional drawing indicating tolerances for
each type of insulator disc enclosed (YES/NO)
5 Dimensions (Indicate tolerances also)
a) Diameter (mm)
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
b) Spacing (mm)
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
c) Creepage distance (mm)
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
6 Pin-ball-shank diameter (mm)
a) Suspension insulator
b) Tension insulator
7 Colour
a) Suspension
b) Tension
8 Electromechanical strength (KN)
a) Suspension
b) Tension
9 Mechanical breaking strength (KN)
a) Suspension
b) Tension
10 Power frequency one-minute withstand voltage -KV (rms)
a) Dry
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
b) Wet
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
11 Impulse 1.2x50 microsecond withstand voltage -KV (peak)
a) +ve Wave
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
b) -ve Wave KV (peak)
Section 5
Page 17 of 23
in Nepal
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
12 Power frequency flashover voltage -KV (rms)
a) Dry
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
b) Wet KV (rms)
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
13 Impulse 1.2x50 microsecond flashover voltage KV (peak)
a) +ve Wave
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
b) -ve Wave
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
14 Power frequency puncture voltage KV (rms)
a) Suspension
b) Tension
(ii) Corona extinction voltage KV (rms)
a) Suspension
b) Tension
15 RIV at 10 KV (rms)
a) Suspension (microvolts)
b) Tension (microvolts)
16 Weight of the Insulator disc (kg)
a) Suspension
b) Tension
17 Locking device
a) Type
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
b) Material
i) Suspension
ii) Tension
c) Standard to which conforming
18 Socket and ball ended component
a) Standard to which conforming
b) Material and Standard to which conforming
c) Galvanising process
d) Quality of zinc and Standard to which conforming
e) Weight of zinc (g/m2 )
f) Number of one-minute dips
19 Packing details (No. of disc insulators of each type per
package and gross weight)
20 Certification mark (BIS/BS/Any National Institution)
II. INSULATOR STRINGS For Altitude band upto 3000m above msl
1 No. of insulator discs
a) Single suspension 'I' Pilot Insulator String
b) Double suspension 'II' Pilot Insulator String
c) Double Suspension Insulator String
d) Double Tension Insulator String
2 Electromechanical (E.M.) Strength - KN

c) Double Suspension Insulator String
d) Double Tension Insulator String
e) Double Tension Insulator String for special towers
3 Power frequency one minute withstand voltage KV (rms)
Dry/Wet
Section 5
Page 18 of 23
in Nepal
i) Suspension Insulator String

a) Double Suspension
ii) Tension Insulator String
a) Double Tension
b) Double Tension (for special Towers)
iii) Pilot Suspension Insulator String
4 Power frequency flashover voltage KV (rms) Dry/Wet
a) Double Tension
5 Impulse withstand voltage (dry) KV (peak)
Positive wave
a) Double Tension
Negative wave
a) Double Tension
6 Impulse flashover voltage (dry)
Positive wave - KV (peak)
a) Double Tension
Negative wave - KV (peak)
a) Double Tension
7 Corona extinction voltage - KV (rms)
a) Dry/Wet - KV (rms)
Section 5
Page 19 of 23
in Nepal
a) Double Tension
8 Maximum RIV for complete string i.e. including arcing
horns, clamps etc. at 154 KV (rms) (in microvolt)
a) Double Tension
9 Creepage distance of complete string
a) Double Tension
10 Detailed Dimensional drawing for insulator strings with
tolerances attached for:
i) Suspension Insulator String (YES/NO)
ii) Tension Insulator String (YES/NO)
a) Double Tension
iii) Pilot Suspension Insulator String (YES/NO)
11 Weight (kg.)
a) Double Tension
12 Maximum percentage of line to earth voltage across
insulator discs of insulator string (of n numbers of discs) for
double(II) suspension, Double tension, Double Tension for
Special Towers.
a) Ist insulator disc from line side
b) 2nd insulator disc from line side
c) (n-1)th insulator disc from line side
d) nth insulator disc from line side.
13 Mechanical strength of complete insulator string alongwith
hardware fittings.
a) Double Suspension 'II'
a) Double Tension
Section 5
Page 20 of 23
in Nepal
14 Whether end user certificate in support of performance

attached. (YES/NO)
15 Certification Mark (BIS/BS/Any National Institution)
IX HARDWARE FITTINGS
A. DOUBLE SUSPENSION CLAMP ASSEMBLY
1 Type
2 Manufacturer's Name, address and country
3 Suitable for (Conductor size)
5 Detailed dimensioned drawings of each component
showing tole-rances, material and the standard to which
conforming enclosed. YES/NO
6 Weight of suspension clamp (kg.)
a) Body
b) Supporting and clamping components
c) Total
7 Galvanization and standard to which conforming.
a) Spring washers
2
c) Weight of zinc g/m
d) Number of one-minute dips
e) Quality of zinc and standard to which conforming
8 Minimum failing load (No deformation) (kg.) & (KN)
9 Slip strength at recommended tightening torque (KN)
10 Whether clamp torque Vs slip curve enclosed

YES/NO
11 Magnetic power loss at:
a) 500 amps Watts
12 Whether a graph showing relation between power losses
in watts against current in amperes is enclosed
YES/NO
13 Formed armour rod set
a) Type
b) Manufacturer's name, address and country
c) Suitable for (Conductor size)
d) No. of rods per set (No.)
e) Direction of lay
f) Overall length after fitting on conductor (mm)
g) Actual length of each rod along its helix (mm)
h) Diameter of each rod (mm)
i) Tolerance in
i) Diameter of each rod (+/- mm)
ii) Length of each rod (+/- mm)
iii) Difference of length between the longest and
shortest rod in a set (+/- mm)
j) Type of aluminium alloy used for manufacture of
Formed armour rod set and standard to which conforming
k) UTS of each rod (kg/mm2 )

14 Elastomer for AGS clamps
a) Supplier
b) Type
c) Moulded on insert YES/NO
d) Shore hardness
e) Temp. range for which designed (deg.C)
15 Particulars of insert
a) Type of aluminium alloy used for manufacturing of
insert and standard to which conforming.
b) Manufacturing process
16 Packing details (No. of suspension clamp/formed armour
rod set/elastomer etc. per package and gross weight of
each package)
Section 5
Page 21 of 23
in Nepal

enclosed YES/NO
18 Certification mark (BIS/BS/Any National Institution).
B. TENSION (DOUBLE) CLAMP ASSEMBLY (FOR NORMAL For Normal Tower
AS WELL AS SPECIAL TOWERS)
1 Type
2 Manufacturer's name address and country
3 Suitable for (conductor size)
5 Detailed dimensioned drawings of each component
showing tolerances, material and standard to which
conforming enclosed YES/NO
6 Materials composition and standard to which conforming.
a) Outer sleeve
b) Inner sleeve
7 Slip strength (KN)
8 Minimum failing load (KN) (No deformation)
9 Shape of cross section
i) Aluminium
ii) Steel
i) Aluminium
ii) Steel
10 Dimensions of sleeve (mm)
i) Aluminium sleeve
ii) Steel sleeve
i) Aluminium sleeve
ii) Steel sleeve
11 Length of sleeve
i) Aluminium sleeve
ii) Steel sleeve
i) Aluminium sleeve
ii) Steel sleeve
12 Galvanisation
a) Process
b) Weight of zinc (g/sq.m)
c) No. of dips
i) 1 minute
ii) 1/2 minute
d) Quality of zinc and standard to which conforming.
13 Whether compression and non-compression (YES/NO)
zones marked on the sleeves
14 Electrical resistance of tension clamp as a % of equivalent
length of conductor.
15 Details of dies and hydraulic compressor required for
compressing sleeves of tension clamp.
16 Packing details (Nos. of tension clamp assembly per
package and gross weight)
17 Whether end user certificate in support of YES/NO
performance enclosed
18 Certification mark (BIS/BS/Any National Institution)
III. OTHER HARDWARE FITTINGS
1 Manufacturer's name, address and country.
2 Material, composition, mechanical strength and standard
to which conforming.
a) Anchor shackle
b) Chain link
c) Yoke plate
Section 5
Page 22 of 23
in Nepal
d) Arcing horn
e) Split pin
f) Socket clevis
g) Ball clevis
h) Clevis-Clevis
i) Clevis eye
j) Ball hook
k) Socket eye horn holder type
l) Ball eye
m) Twisted shackle
3 Galvanisation and Standard to which conforming.
a) Spring washers
c) Weight of zinc g/sq.m
d) No. of one minute dips
e) No. of 1/2 minute dips.
4 Quality of zinc and standard to which conforming.
5 Detailed dimensioned drawing of each fitting showing
tolerances, weight,strength etc. enclosed (YES/NO)
6 Whether components are interchangeable. (YES/NO)
7 Packing details of each fitting per package and gross

weight
enclosed YES/NO
9 Certification mark (BIS/BS/Any National institution.)
NOTE: - Individual GTP's shall be furnished for all types of towers (For Twin conductor section) with and without extensions for 220 kV D/C
Transmission lines separately.
Section 5
Page 23 of 23
Package-KC3
Section-V-B
Guaranteed Technical Particular-Substation
SECTION V-B
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS - SUBSTATION
CONTENTS
Sl. Chapter Description

No.
1. Chapter-1 Surge Arrestors
2. Chapter-2 Capacitive Voltage Transformers/Voltage Transformers
3. Chapter-3 Current Transformer
4. Chapter-4 145/36 kV Isolator And Isolator With Earth Switch
5. Chapter-5 145/36kv SF6 (Gas) Circuit Breakers For Outdoor

Application
6. Chapter-6 Power Transformers
7. Chapter-7 Earthing System
8. Chapter-8 Lightning Protection
9. Chapter-9 Substation Automation and Control System
10. Chapter-10 Control and Relay Panels
11. Chapter-11 Fibre Optics Terminal Equipment
12. Chapter-12 A.C Distribution Board
13. Chapter-13 D.C. Battery, Battery Charger & DC Distribution Board
14. Chapter-14 Power and Control Cables
15. Chapter-15 Illumination/Lighting System
Section V-B Contents Page 1 of 2

16. Chapter-16 Civil Works
17. Chapter-17 Galvanized Steel Structures
18. Chapter-18 Miscellaneous Items For Sub-Stations
19. Chapter-19 Erection, Testing And Commissioning of Electrical

Equipment
20. Chapter-20 Station Transformers
21. Chapter-21 100 KVA, 415 V Diesel Generator Sets
22. Chapter-22 CCTV System
23. Chapter-23 DIGITAL TELEPHONE EXHANGE (PBX)
Section V-B Contents Page 2 of 2

CHAPTER 1: SURGE ARRESTERS
(132/33 kV)
Sr. no. Description Guaranteed Particulars

132kV 33kV
1. Manufacturer’s Name and Country
2. Manufacturer’s type designation

3. Applicable technical standard
4. Rated frequency (Hz)
5. Arrestor rating (kV rms)
6. Maximum Continuous Operating voltage (kV
rms)
7. Lightning Impulse withstand voltage (kVp)
8. Power Frequency Withstand Voltage (kVrms)
9. Standard Nominal Discharge Current
10. Line discharge class

11. Degree of protection
12. Max. Steep current impulse residual voltage at
10 kA (kVp)
13. Max. Lightening Impulse residual voltage at 10
kA (kVp)
14. Max. switching surge residual voltage at 1 kA
(kVp)
15. Partial discharge at 1.05 COV not greater than
16. Low current long duration test value
17. High current short duration test value (4/10 µ
second wave) (kApeak)
18. Minimum Corona Extinction Voltage (kVrms)
19. Maximum partial discharge at 1.05*Continuous
Over Voltage(COV)
20. Prospective symmetrical fault current for
pressure relief test for (0.2 sec) kA
21. Maximum energy dissipation capability (kJ/kV of
rated voltage of arrester) (kJ/kV)
22. Whether pressure relief devices provided
(Yes/No)
23. Metal oxide discs:
a). Country of manufacture
b). Size of discs (Diameter & Thickness) (mm,
mm)
c). How the electrical contact is ensured
between blocks
d). Medium of heat dissipation from the blocks
to the surrounding
24. Whether following curves enclosed with offer
a). Volt time characteristic (Yes/No)
b). Voltage current characteristic of arrester
(Yes/No)
INSULATOR HOUSING

132kV 33kV
2. Power frequency withstand test voltage (wet) (kV
rms)
3. Lightning impulse withstand/tests voltage (kVp)
4. Creepage distance (mm)
5. Cantilever Strength (Kg)
CHAPTER - 2
CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
(132 kV)
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS
(33 kV)
Sr. DESCTIPTION
No. 132 kV 33 kV
3. Mounting of tank
4. Rated voltage kV (rms)
5. Max System Voltage kV (rms)
6. Rated frequency
7. System Earthing
8. Short circuit level for one second kA
(rms)
9. Rated primary operating voltage
10. No. of Secondary Windings
11. Rated secondary voltage
 Winding No.1
 Winding No. 2
 Winding No. 3
12. Class of accuracy of Each secondary
winding
 Winding No.1
 Winding No.2
 Winding No.3
13. Temperature rise above ambient
(Deg. C)
14. Voltage factor continuous / For 30 sec
15. Rated Insulation level
a) Rated voltage kV
b) 1.2 /50 micro sec. impulse
c) One minute dry power frequency
16. Rated burden (VA)
 Wdg I
 Wdg II
 Wdg III
17. Standards reference range of frequency
for which the Accuracy’s are valid for
protection and measuring winding.
18. One minute power frequency
Withstand test voltage for secondary
winding (kV rms) (Hz)
19. Partial discharge level (Pico coulombs )
20. Rated Capacitance (picco-farad)
21. Minimum Corona extinction Voltage
(kVrms)
22. Maximum Radio interference voltage
156 kVrms)
23. Equivalent resistance over entire carrier
frequency range (ohms) for CVT
24. Maximum ratio error (%) with rated
burden and normal primary voltage (%)
25. Maximum phase error (%) with rated
burden and normal primary voltage (%)
26. Quantity of insulating oil (Litres)
27. Total weight including oil (Kg)
28. Whether sealed (if so type of sealing)
(Yes/No)
29. Over all dimensions
a). Height (mm)
b). Length (mm)
c). Breadth (mm)
30. High frequency capacitance for entire
carrier frequency range
Insulator Housing
Sr. DESCTIPTION Guaranteed Particulars

No 132 kV 33 kV
2. Power frequency withstand test voltage (kV
rms)
3. Lightning impulse withstand/tests voltage
(kVp)
5. Cantilever Strength (Kg)
CHAPTER - 3
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (CTs)
Sr. Description Guaranteed Particulars

no. 132kV 33kV
2. Rated Voltage (kV)
3. Max. Continuous rated voltage (kV)
4. Standard to which it conforms

6. Core Details
a) No. of cores
b) Rated primary current (Amp)
c) Rated secondary current (Amp)
d) Rated output (Burden) (VA)
e) Accuracy class of CT Cores
i. core-1
ii. core-2
iii. core-3
iv. core-4
v. core-5
f) ISF for metering core
g) CT resistance of secondary winding (Ohms)
h) Ratios available at different taps
7. a).Rated short circuit withstand capacity for 1

second (kA)
8. Rated insulation level (Standard Values)
a) Lightening Impulse withstand voltage (Peak) kV
b)One minute power frequency withstand voltage

(kV rms)
i). Primary Winding
ii). Secondary Winding
9. Type of insulation
10. Rated continuous thermal current
11. Maximum temperature rise over maximum

ambient temperature
12. Max. Corona excitation voltage(kV) NA
13. Max.RIV for frequency between 0.5 to 2 MHz NA

(µVolt)
14. Cantilever Strength
15. Max. Partial discharge level (pC)
16. Total weight (Kg)
17. a) Quantity of oil (litres)

b) Standard with which it complies
18. Overall dimensions (mm x mm x mm)
19. Type of primary winding
20. Flux density at knee point voltage (knee point

defined at the point at which 10% increase in
voltage produces a 50% increase in magnetization
current) for PS accuracy class(Tesla)
21. Variation in ratio and phase angle error due to
variation in
a.) Voltage by 1% (%, %)
b.) Frequency by 1 Hz (%, %)
22. Whether pressure relief device is provided
(Yes/No)
23. Whether the following are enclosed with tender:

(Yes/No)
a.) Drawings as per the specification (Yes/No)
b.) Technical literature for current transformer

and marshalling box. (Yes/No)
c.)Magnetization curve (Yes/No)
d.) Ratio and phase angle characteristics at least

up to accuracy limit factor (Yes/No)
Insulator Housing
no. 132kV 33kV
1. Voltage Level(kV)
2. Power frequency withstand test voltage (wet) (kV
rms)
3. Lightning impulse withstand/tests voltage (kVp)
5. Cantilever strength (Kg)
CHAPTER – 4
ISOLATOR AND ISOLATOR WITH EARTHING SWITCH
S. Description Parameter
No. 132 kV 33 kV
2. Type Designation
3. Applicable standard
4. Type - (Outdoor)
5. Rated voltage kV (r.ms)/Highest System

Voltage kV
7. Number of poles
8. Whether all three poles are ganged

together mechanically/electrically
(Yes/No)
9. Rated current (Amp)
10. Rated dynamic short circuit current of
a).Isolator (kA peak)
b).Earthing switch (kA peak)
11. a) Rated lightening impulse withstand

voltage between line terminals and
ground [kV(peak)]
b) Between terminals with Isolator

contacts open [kV(peak)]
12. One min. power frequency withstand
voltage in kV (rms)
a) between line terminals kV (rms)

and earth (Kv rms)
b) Between terminals with isolator
contacts open Across the isolating
distance kV (rms)
temperature (Deg.C)
14. Rated mechanical loads for horizontal
break isolator
a).Longitudinal (N)
b).Transverse (N)
15. Operating Mechanism
a) Type of operating mechanism
b) Name of manufacturer
c) Whether inter-pole cabling included in

scope of supply (Yes/No)
d) Whether separate operating mechanism

provided for operation of isolator pole
and earthing switch. (Yes/No)
e) Electrical operation
i) Motor type (AC/DC)
ii) Applicable standard
iii) Rated voltage and current (V, A)
iv) Type of enclosure and method of

cooling
v) Power required for closing and

opening operation (Watts)
vi) Running time of motor for closing

and opening operation (Sec)
vii) Control supply for motor control

center (Volts)
f) Type of manual operating mechanism for

isolator pole
g) Whether padlocking included as per the

specification (Yes/No)
h) Type of manual device for Earthing Switch
16. Operating time

a).Opening time (sec)
b).Closing time (sec)
17. i) Number of auxiliary contact of

each isolator
ii) Earth Switch NA
18. Phase to phase spacing
19. Main contacts (fixed and moving)
a. Type
b. Material
c. Whether contacts are silver plated

(Yes/No)
d. Thickness of silver coating (mm)
e. Contact area (Sq. mm)
f. Contact pressure (kg/sq. cm)
g. Current density
h. Number of operations which the

isolator can make without
deterioration of contacts. (Nos.)
20. D.C. Supply voltage for Interlocks

21. No. of terminal in control
cabinet(including inter pole cabinet)
22. Minimum Corona extinction voltage in NA
23. Maximum RIV for frequency between 0.5 NA
to 2 MHz in close and open position
(micro volt)
24. Mechanical Endurance Class
25. Auxiliary contacts
a). Isolator
i) Total number of spare contacts

provided for purchaser’s use
a) NO (Nos.)
b) NC (Nos.)
ii) Rated voltage (Volts)
iii) Rated continuous current (Amp)
iv) Rated breaking current (Amp)
b). Earth Switch
i) Total number of spare contacts

provided for Purchaser’s use
a) NO (Nos.)
b) NC (Nos.)
ii) Rated voltage (Volts)
iii) Rated continuous current (Amp)
iv) Rated breaking current (Amp)
c). Whether arcing contacts provided and if

so give type and material used. (Yes/No)
26. Interlocking
a) Details of mechanical interlock between

isolator and earth switch enclosed
(Yes/No)
b) Details of electrical interlock for isolator

and earth switch enclosed(Yes/No)
c) Details of electrical scheme to provide

remote alarm for pole discrepancy.
(Yes/No)
d) Details of electrical interlock to bring back

all three poles to open position in case
any pole fails to close within specified
time (Yes/No)
e) Details of provisions to cut off supply to

the motor during manual operation and
provision for declutching the motor.
(Yes/No)
f) Arrangement provided to prevent

electrical or manual operation unless
interlock conditions are satisfied.
(Yes/No)
27. a) Minimum phase to ground clearance

(mm)
b) Minimum distance between phases

when isolator is open (mm)
28. Terminal Clamps & Connectors
a). Manufacturer’s name
b). Applicable standard
c). Material
i) Clamp body
ii) Bolts and nuts
iii) Spring washer
iv) Liners if any
d). Rated current (Amp)
e). Rated terminal load (Kg)
f). Weight of clamp complete with hardware

(Kg)
g). Radio Interference Voltage (mV)

h). Corona extinction voltage (kV rms)
29. Total creepage distance of insulator (mm)
30. Cantilever strength of insulator
31. Control Cabinets / Marshalling box
a). Manufacturer’s name
b). Thickness of sheet (mm)
c). Degree of protection provided
d). Colour of finish paint
i) Outside
ii) Inside
e). Control wiring
i) Voltage rating (Volts)
ii) Size and material of conductor (Sq.

mm / SWG)
f). Terminal block
i) Make
ii) Current rating (Amp)
g). Space heater rating at 240 volts (Watts)
h). Whether all cabling for wiring out

contacts to control cabinet included in
scope of supply (Yes/No)
32. Size and Weight
a). Weight of each pole (Kg)
b). Dimension of the isolators
i) without earthing switch (mm x mm x

mm)
ii) with earth switch on one side (mm x

mm x mm)
iii) with earth switch on both sides (mm

x mm x mm)
33. Enclosures
Whether the following are enclosed
i) Type test report for main equipment

and auxiliaries (Yes/No)
ii) Drawings as per specification

(Yes/No)
iii) Technical literature for isolator,

operating mechanism and support
insulators. (Yes/No)
CHAPTER – 5
SF6 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Sr. Parameters/Standards Guaranteed Particulars

No 132 kV 33 kV
1. Manufacturer’s Name and Country:
3. Applicable Technical Standards

4. Rated Voltage (kV rms)
6. Type of arc quenching medium
7. Number of poles
8. Rated normal current (A)
9. First pole to clear factor

10. Rated short circuit current breaking
11. Rated short circuit making current (kA rms)
12. Rated short circuit current duration
(seconds)
13. a) Total break time for any current upto the
rated breaking current with limiting
conditions of operating & quenching media
pressure (ms)
b) Rated break time(ms)
14. Closing time (ms)
15. Standard value of rated transient recovery
voltage for terminal fault
16. Rated operating duty cycle
17. Auto reclosing

a) 1.2/50 micro second lightning impulse
terminals and ground between terminals
with contact open
b) One minute power frequency withstand
voltage between line terminals and
No 132 kV 33 kV
ground and ground between terminals
with contact open (kV rms)
19. Minimum corona extinction voltage in open
and close position (kV rms)
20. Maximum radio interference voltage for
21. Maximum line charging current (rms)
22. Rated cable charging breaking current

capacity (rms)
23. Difference in instants of closing/opening of
contacts
a) Within a pole(ms)
24. Maximum noise level upto 50 m distance
from the base of CB (dB)
temperature (Deg.C)
26. No. of trip coils

Operating mechanism
a) Type
b) Charging
c) Max. actuating force required for manual
charging of spring
d) Supply voltage
e) Permissible supply voltage variation in
a) Auxiliary Contacts
b) No. of Auxiliary contacts
c) Number of auxiliary contacts
(Over and above for Control/Supervision)
d) Auxiliary contacts continuous current

rating
No 132 kV 33 kV
e) Auxiliary contacts breaking capacity
27. Minimum Creepage distance (mm)

28. Control circuit voltage
29. Circuit breaker class
30. CLEARANCES
a) Phase to Phase spacing for breaker (mm)
b) Phase to earth clearance (mm)

31. Quantity of SF6 (gas) required for 1st filling
of all 3 poles of CB at rated pressure
32. Rated pressure of SF6 (gas) in CB
33. Quantity of SF6 gas & its pressure supplied
in SF6 (gas) cylinder + 20% extra
34. Make and type of vacuum interrupter —
35. Short circuit rating of vacuum interrupter —
36. Whether vacuum interrupter are Type —
Tested (Yes/ No)
37. No. of operation with full short circuit —
CHAPTER – 6
POWER TRANSFORMERS

no. 132/33 KV, 5 MVA SINGLE PHASE
TRANSFORMER
1. Name of the Manufacturer and Country
2. Governing standard
3. Service
4. Rated MVA of the Transformer
5. a) With ONAN cooling (MVA)
6. Rated MVA of the unit
7. Frequency (Hz)
8. Cooling medium
9. Rated Voltage
a) High voltage side (kV)
b) Low Voltage side (kV)
10. Highest Continuous System Voltage :
a) High voltage (HV)
b) Low Voltage (IV)
11. Type of tap changer
12. Range of tapping
13. Positive sequence impedance on rated
MVA base, at rated current and frequency
and at HV-LV.
a)Principal Tap (Ohms, pu)
b)Lowest tap (Ohms, pu)
c)Highest tap (Ohms, pu)
14. Zero sequence impedance at principal tap

(Ohms, pu)
15. Leakage reactance for HV and LV (Ohms,
pu)
16. Capacitance to earth for HV and LV (pF,
pu)
17. Type of insulation & insulation level for
winding:
a) Type of insulation:
b) One minute power frequency
withstand test voltage (kV RMS)
c) Impulse withstand test voltage
(kVp):
18. Winding connection
19. Material
20. Type of cooling
21. Maximum Flux Density (Bm) in core & yoke
at normal voltage & frequency
22. Short circuit withstand capacity
23. Terminal details
a) 132 kV Termination
b) 33 kV Termination
24. Rail
a. Shorter Axis:
b. Longer Axis:
25. Ten delta of winding
26. Maximum Temperature

Rise for various types of cooling over an
ambient of 40 deg C
a) Temperature rise of top oil
b) Temperature rise of winding
27. Limit of hot spot temperature for which
the transformer is designed (Deg. C)
28. Overload Capacity
29. Noise Level at Rated Voltage & Frequency
Note: The arcing distance of the busing shall be increased by 15% at all the substations to account for
the high altitude as per IEC 60137-2003.
30. Transformer Oil Grade and reference of
standard
31. a) Guaranteed no load losses at rated
voltage, normal ratio and rated frequency
at 75 Degree Centigrade average winding
temperature. (kW)
b) State whether the losses are firm or
subject to tolerance. In a case it is subject
to tolerance indicate the ceiling for
tolerance. (%)
32. a) Guaranteed load losses at rated output,
rated frequency, corrected for 75 degree
centigrade winding temperature for the:
i)Principal Tap (kW)
ii)Lowest tap (kW)
iii)Highest tap (kW)

tolerance. (%)
33. a) Guaranteed cooler losses at rated
output, normal ratio, rated voltage, rated
frequency at ambient temperature of 40
degree centigrade. (kW)
tolerance. (%)
34. Withstand time for three phase short
circuit at terminals (sec)
35. Over Excitation withstand time
a)125% (sec)
b)140% (sec)
c)150% (sec)
36. Efficiency at Unity Power Factor (UPF) and

0.85 PF (lagging)
a)On 100% Load (%)
b)On 75% Load (%)

c)On 50% Load (%)
37. Regulation at full load at expressed as a

percentage of normal voltage, at
a)Unity power factor
b)0.85 power factor (Lagging)
38. Core data
a)Material for core laminations.
b)Thickness of laminations (mm)
c)Insulation between core lamination
d)Insulation of core bolts, washers, end

plates etc.
e)Number of limbs of the core.
f)Magnetizing inrush current (mA)
g)No-load current at normal ratio and

frequency for
(i) 85 Percent of rated voltage (Amp)
(ii) 100 Percent of rated voltage (Amp)
(iii) 105 Percent of rated voltage (Amp)
39. Core bolt insulation withstand voltage for

one minute (kV)
40. Data on windings
i)Maximum current density
a)HV winding (A/sq. mm)
b)LV winding (A/sq. mm)
ii)Conductor material
a)HV winding
b)LV winding
iii)Insulating material used for
a)HV winding/LV Winding
iv)Insulating material used between

a)HV winding
b)LV winding and core
vi)Whether HV winding interleaved

(Yes/No)
vii)Position of tapping on the winding
41. Partial discharge level (pC)
42. Noise level when energized at normal

voltage and frequency without load (dB)
43. Whether the offered transformer can be
transported to destination (Yes/No)
44. On-Load tap changing Gear
a) Make and type
b) Rated current (Amp)
c) Rated voltage (Volts)
d) Number of steps (Nos.)
e) Step voltage (Volts)
f) Whether control suitable for
i) Remote/local operation (Yes/No)
ii) Auto/manual operation (Yes/No)
iii) Parallel operation (Yes/No)
g) Rated voltage of drive motor (Volts)
h) Rated voltage of control devices

provided (Volts)
i) Particulars of protective devices
provided
j) Whether control panel complete with
OLTC control equipment for installation in
the control room included in the scope of
supply at no extra cost. (Yes/No)
k) Time taken to change one step (sec)
45. Bushings
a) Make and type

b) Rated current (Amp)
c) Lightning impulse withstand voltage

(kV peak)
d) Switching surge withstand voltage (kV
peak)
e) Power frequency withstand voltage
i) Wet for one minute (kV rms)
ii) Dry for one minute (kV rms)
f) Visible corona discharge voltage (kV

rms)
g) Partial discharge level (pC)
h) Creepage distance in air (mm)
i) Free space required above the

transformer tank top for removal of tank
(mm)
j) Whether terminal connector for all
bushings included in the scope of supply
(Yes/No)
k) Whether test tap provided or not
(Yes/No)
46. Conservator
a) Total volume (cu. m)
b) Volume between the highest and

lowest visible oil levels (cu. m)
c) Material of air cell
d) Continuous temperature withstand

capacity of air cell (Deg. C)
47. Tank
a) Material and thickness of plate for tank

construction
b) Tank cover conventional or Bell type
c) No. of Pressure relief devices provided
d) Operating pressure of relief device

(kN/sq. m)
48. Bushing Type Current Transformers
a) Voltage class (kV)
b) Number of cores
c) Ratio
d) Accuracy class
e) Burden
f) Accuracy limit factor
g) Maximum resistance of secondary

winding
h) Knee point voltage
i) Current rating of secondaries
49. Vacuum withstand capacity of
a) Main tank (mm Hg)
b) Radiators and accessories (mm Hg)
50. Pressure withstand capacity of
a) Main tank (kN/sq. m)
b) Radiators and accessories (kN/sq. m)
51. Transformer Oil
a) Quantity of oil (Before filling & Before

commissioning) (litres)
b) Moisture content (%)
c) Tan delta at 90 Degrees centigrade
d) Resistivity (Ohm-cm)
e) Breakdown strength (kV)
f) Interfacial tension at 20 Degree

centigrade (N/m)
g) Quantity supplied (litres)+10% Extra
h) Applicable standard
52. Temperature Indicators
a) OTI
i)Range
ii)Accuracy
b) WTI
i)Range
ii)Accuracy
c) RWTI
i)Range
ii)Accuracy
53. Minimum clearance
a) HV Terminal
i) In oil
Phase to ground (mm)
ii) In air
c) LV Terminal
i) In oil
ii) In air
54. Weights and Dimensions
i) Weights
a) Core (Kg)
b) Windings (Kg)
c) Tank (Kg)
d) Fittings (Kg)
e) Oil (Kg)
f) Total weights of complete

transformers with oil and fittings (Kg)
ii) Dimensions
a) Overall Height above track (mm)
b) Overall length (mm)
c) Overall breadth (mm)
d) Minimum bay width required for

installation of the transformer (mm)
iii)Weight of the heaviest package of the
transformer arranged for transportation
(Kg)
55. Lifting Jacks
a) Number of jacks included
b) Type and Make
c) Capacity (tones)
d) Pitch
e)Lift (m)
f)Height in close position (m)
56. Rail Track gauges
a) 2 Rails or 4 rails
b) Distance between adjacent rails on

shorter axis (mm)
c) Distance between adjacent rails on
longer axis (mm)
Sr.No. Description Guaranteed Particulars

57. FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
NIFPES
a. Maximum fire extinction period as commencement
b. Maximum period from system activation to complete
cooling
c. Fire detector heat sensing temperature
d. Heat sensing area
e. Pre stressed non return valve setting
f. Minimum capacity of Nitrogen cylinder (litre)
CHAPTER – 7
EARTHING SYSTEM
Sr. Description Units Guaranteed Particulars

no.
EARTHING MAT 132 kV 33 kV
1. General
a) Specification / Standards
followed
2. Earthing mat data
a) Area under which the mat (m x m)
will be laid (L x W)
b) Details of switchyard
earthing mat conductor
i) Size material and shape (mm)
ii) Allowance made for (%)
corrosion
c) Detail of risers
i) Size material and shape (Sq.mm)
corrosion
iii) Length of conductor (m)
iv) Weight (Kg)
d) Details of conductor for
connections to earthing
points of current carrying
parts
corrosion
iv) Weight (Kg)
e) Details of conductors for
connection to non-current
carrying parts
corrosion
iv) Weight (Kg)
3. Equipment earthing
electrode systems
a) Details of earthing system
for potential transformers
i) Number and material of (Nos.)
earthing electrodes
ii) Diameter and length of (mm, mm)
electrode
iii) Size and material of (mm)
conductors
b) Details of earthing system
for capacitor voltage
transformers
earthing electrodes
electrode
conductors
c) Details of earthing system
for lightning arrestors
earthing electrodes
electrode
conductors
4. Fault current for which the (kA)
earthing mat is designed
5. Duration of fault assumed (seconds)
for design
6. Duration of shock (seconds)
7. Resistivity of surface layer (Ohm-m)
8. Size of crushed rock and (mm)
thickness of layer
9. Estimated value of earthing (Ohms)
mat resistance
10. Estimated values of
a) Touch potential (Volts)
b) Step potential (Volts)
c) Ground potential rise (Volts)
d) Transferred potential (Volts)
11. Measures envisaged to be
taken to limit the various
potentials within safe limits,
if the estimated values are
found to exceed the safe
limits.
12. Size of weld for welded (mm)
joints
13. Number of diameter of (m)
bolts for bolted joints
14. Locations where bolted
joints shall be provided
15. Protection measures
against corrosion of
e) Welds
f) Earthing mat conductors
g) Bolted connections
h) Risers and other connectors
16. Drawings (Attach drawings
showing details of earthing
mat, arrangements for
connections to various
system, equipment fence
etc., details of welds, bolted
joints etc., and bill of
materials as per this
specification )
17. Tests
18. List of tests that the bidder
will carry out
CHAPTER – 7
LIGHTNING SYSTEM
A. DIRECT STROKE LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 132 kV 33 kV

1. General
a) Type of protection system
b) Applicable specification and standards
2. Lightning Masts
a) Number of lightning masts required for shielding
the entire switchyard and transformer yard (Nos.)
b) Height of lightning masts (m)
c) Does the total mast height consists of switchyard
structure and pipe fixed on the top of masts
(Yes/No)
d) If yes, give the breakup of heights
i) Switchyard structure (m)
ii) Pipe (m)
e) Diameter and material of pipe and weight / unit
length (mm,Kg)
f) Size of shield wire (mm)
3. Drawings (Please enclose calculations, drawing, bill
of materials etc., as stipulated in this specifications)
CHAPTER – 8
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Control Panels
1. Manufacturer’s name
2. Place of manufacture
3. Type designation & model
number
4. Degree of Protection
B. Distance Relays Phase and Earth
number
4. Phase switches (Yes/No)
5. Zone switched (Yes/No)
6. Number of zones
- Zone 1
- Zone 2
- Zone 3
Particulars
- Reverse looking element
(blocking signal initiation)
7. Sensitivity
i) Minimum operating current
- Earth fault (A)
- Phase fault (A)
ii) Minimum necessary voltage at
Zone 1 reach point
- Earth fault (V)
- Phase fault (V)
iii) Minimum Zone 1 ohmic
impedance to which relay can be
set
iv) Maximum Zone 1 ohmic
set and maintain accuracy
v) Minimum Zone 2 ohmic
set (ohms)
vi) Maximum Zone 2 ohmic
set and maintain accuracy (ohms)
vii) Maximum zone 3 ohmic reach
- Forward reach (ohms)
- Reserve reach (ohms)
8. Are forward and reverse reach
setting independent of each
other? (Yes/No)
9. Can resistance and reactance
reaches be set independent of
each other (Yes/No)
10. Directional sensitivity (V)

11. Back up zone range
- Zone 1 (sec)
- Zone 2 (sec)
12. Method used to clear close-in
faults
i) which occur when line is
already energized in service
ii) which exist upon line
energisation
13. Has distance protection been
previously used in the type of
scheme specified for this
contract? (Yes/No)
i) If yes, year of going into service
(Years)
Particulars
ii) Year of first going into service
iii) Approximate number of years
in service (Years)
(A complete reference list should
be submitted stating client,
system voltage and year of going
into service)
C. Directional/Non-Directional
Over-current and Earth Fault
Relays
number
4. Inverse time element
5. Range of current settings:
i) over-current (A)
ii) earth fault (A)
6. Range of operating times at
highest timing setting at ten
times current setting (sec)
7. Range of operating times at
highest timing setting at twice
current setting (sec)
8. High set instantaneous element
9. Range of settings:
- over-current (A)
10. Transient over-reach (%)
- at twice setting
- at ten times setting
11. Directional element (where
applicable)
i) 1 x rated current
ii) 10 x rated current
Particulars (Units)
12. Whether directional element
control the over-current
protection
13. Reset time after removal of ten
times CT rated current for:
i) phase element (100%) (ms)
ii) EF element (40%) (ms)
D. CB Failure Relays
number
4. Setting of current elements:
i) phase fault (A)
ii) earth fault (A)
5. Timer setting (sec)
6. Burden of relay at minimum
current setting at 10 times CT
secondary rated current during:
i) phase fault (VA)
ii) earth fault (VA)
E. Synchronizing Check Relay

number
4. Setting ranges
i) phase angles (deg)
ii) Voltage difference (V)
iii) Frequency (Hz)
5. Any time delays (specify function
and value)
F. Auto-reclosing Relays
number
Particulars (Units)
G. Restricted Earth Fault Relays

number
4. Operating principle, high
impedance
5. Minimum relay setting (A)
6. Sensitivity of scheme (allowing
for CT magnetizing current, etc.)
(A)
7. Maximum through fault current
at which protection is stable (A)
8. CT requirements
9. Operating time at twice relay
minimum setting (ms)
10. Operating time at ten times
relay minimum setting (ms)
CHAPTER – 9
NOT APPLICABLE
CHAPTER- 11
DIGITAL MULTIPLEX AND OPTICAL LINE TERMINATION SYSTEM (SDH)
Sr. No. Description Guaranteed Particulars

A. General
1. Manufacturer
3. Model
4. Type of multiplexer
5. Complying to ITU-T rec
6. Transmission Capacity (Mbits/s)
7. Access capacity on 64 kbit/s (channel)
8. Access capacity on 2 Mbit/s (channel)
9. Redundant central processor
10. PDH cross connect capacity
11. SDH cross connect capacity
12. Equipment used in substation environment
13. The equipment is KEMA type tested or by
equivalent independent international test center
Protection functionality
B.
1. Multiplex Section Protection MSP
2. Linear Trail Protection LTP
3. Sub Network Connection Protection SNCP
Teleprotection functionality:
C.
1. Integrated distance teleprotection functionality
2. Integrated optical teleprotection functionality
3. Addressing system for commands
4. Loop test for delay time
5. Switch-over less than 10ms
Description
1. Optical SDH aggregates (ITU-T G.957)
2. Based on SFP technology
3. Electrical SDH aggregates
4. Available USER INTERFACES
a) Voice interfaces for trunk lines:
i. 1 + 1 com path protection, available for
all
ii. Analogue, 4wire with E&M: Input level
Output level
(dBr)
iii. Analogue, 2wire with E&M: Input level
Output level (dBr)
iv. Digital, 2Mbit/s CAS or PRI
b) Voice interfaces for remote subscriber:
i. 2wire, subscriber side (dBr)
ii. Minimal number of subscriber
iii. 2wire, PABX side (dBr)
iv. Minimal number of PABX
5. Integrated teleprotection
a) Interface for Commands:
i. Number of independent commands
ii. Transmission time max. (ms)
iii. Signal voltage (Vpeak)
iv. 1 + 1 com path protection
6. b) Interface(s) for Differential Protection:
7. i. Electrical interface: G.703 (kbits/sec)
8. ii. Optical Interface (k bits/sec)
Description
1. Data: channels per module
i. 1 + 1 com path protection, available for
all
ii. V.24/V.28 (RS-232): up to 38.4kbit/s
iii. V.11/X.24 (RS-422): 64kbit/s
iv. V.35: 64kbit/s
v. G.703: 64kbit/s
vi. Ethernet: 10/100BaseT
vii. Ethernet: WAN capacity (Mbits/sec)
viii. Ethernet: Logical WAN ports
ix. Ethernet: GFP (acc. ITU-T G.7041)
x. Ethernet: VCAT (acc. ITU-T G.707)
xi. Ethernet: LCAS (acc. ITU-T G.7043)
xii. Ethernet: Routing protocols
xiii. Ethernet: WAN capacity
xiv. Integrated Ethernet Hub 10/100BaseT
2. Type/Name of configuration tool

i. For local / remote operation
ii. Data communication network (DCN)
iii. Integrated Management of
Teleprotection Commands
Description
1. Network Management System
2. Type/Name of configuration tool
i. For fault / configuration management
ii. Data communication network (DCN)
iii. Integrated Management of
Teleprotection Commands
3. Ambient Conditions:
i. Storage: ETS 300 019-1-1, class 1.2 (°C / %
hum)
ii. Transport: ETS 300 019-1-2, class 2.2 (°C /
% hum)
iii. Operation: ETS 300 019-1-3, class 3.1E
For operational applications (°C / % hum)
4. Power Supply
i. Operation (V, DC)
ii. Fully redundant power supply
iii. Dual power feeder
5. Emission of the equipment (substation
environment)
i. Test Name : Radiated radio frequency
interference
ii. Description : 30 MHz to 1 GHz
iii. Basic standard: EN 55022
iv. Test Name : Conducted radio frequency
interference AC/DC Power supply
v. Description : 150 kHz to 30 MHz
vi. Basic standard: EN 55022
6. Immunity of the equipment (substation
environment)
i. Test Name : ESD test
Description : Contact/air discharge
Basic standard: IEC 61000-4-2
ii. Test Name : Radiated electromagnetic
field
Description : 80 to 1000 MHz, 80%
AM, 1 kHz modulated
iii. Test Name : Radiated electromagnetic
field
Description : 1.0 to 2.5 GHz, 80% AM,
1 kHz modulated
iv. Test Name : Fast transient test
Description : AC/DC Power supply all
other ports:
v. Test Name : Surge test (1.2/50 ms)
Description :
AC/DC Power supply:
Common mode
Differential mode
DC Power supply 48 V:
Common mode
Differential mode
Signal terminals:
Common mode
Differential mode
Telecommunication ports:
Common mode
vi. Test Name : Conducted radio frequency
interference
Description : 0.15 to 80 MHz, 80% AM, 1 kHz
modulated
vii. Test Name : Power frequency magnetic field

Description : Continuous
Short (1 to 3 s)
viii. Test Name : Damped oscillatory waves
Description :
AC/DC Power supply:
Common mode
Differential mode
Signal terminals:
Common mode
Differential mode
Telecommunication ports:
Common mode
1 MHz, 400 Hz repetition rate, 2 s
burst duration
ix. Test Name : Conducted common mode
disturbance
Description : Frequency 50 Hz, continuous
mode
CHAPTER 12
AC/DC DISTRIBUTION BOARD

ACDB DCDB
I. GENERAL
1. Voltage (volts)
2. Frequency (Hz)
3. Combined variation in voltage &
frequency
4. Symmetrical short circuit withstand
current of switchgear cubicle
5. Degree of protection as per IS: 13947
a. Breaker / AC & DC distribution
cubicles.
b. Bus bar chamber.
6. Cubicle sheet metal thickness for front,
rear, sides and top. (mm)
7. Painting shade as per IS:5
a. External surface
b. Internal surface
8. Standard height, width & depth of
typical panel.
a. Switch fuse cubicle. (mm)
b. AC/DC Distribution Board (mm)
9. Width of cable alley (mm)
10. Earth bus bar size and material. (mm x
mm)
11. Approximate weight of AC/DC
Distribution Board. (Kg)
12. Is extension possible in future. (Yes/No)
13. Clearance in air
a. Between phases (mm)
b. Between phase and earth(mm)
14. Fault level (kA)
II. BUS BAR

1. Continuous
2. Short time ( 1 Sec)
3. Bare/Painted/Epoxy insulated/Sleeved
4. Minimum clearance
5. Phase to phase (mm)
6. Phase to earth (mm)
7. Continuous current rating at ambient
temperature (Deg. C)
8. Minimum Cross section and material
provided for
a. Horizontal bus bar (sq. mm)
b. Vertical bus bar (sq. mm)
9. Short time current rating for 1 sec.
(kArms)
10. Material of the support insulators.
11. Temperature rise over ambient
temperature for continuous current
rating (Deg. C)
12. Whether bus joints are silver faced (Yes
/ No)
13. Dynamic current withstand rating
(kApeak)
III. ONE MINUTE POWER FREQUENCY WITHSTAND

VOLTAGE
a. Power circuits
b. Control circuits
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER

IV. 1. Name of manufacturer and country
3. Rated voltage (kV)
4. Rated current at design ambient
temperature (Amps)
5. Continuous current at site ambient
temperature. (Amps)
6. Rated making current (kA)
7. Short time current rating (kA, sec)
8. Temperature rise of main contacts when
carrying continuous current (Deg. C)
above ambient temperature
9. Number of operations circuit breaker
can make without inspection
replacement of contacts or other parts
at 100% rated breaking current.
10. a) Number of auxiliary contacts provided
and their rating. (Amps)
b) Total operating time (ms)
c) Whether trip free or fixed trip type
11. Operating mechanism (for ACB only.)
a. Motor rating (V, A, Watts)
b. Time for fully charging the closing
spring (Sec)
c. Emergency manual charging facility
provided (Yes/ No)
d. Limits of voltage for satisfactory
operation of following devices, as
percentage of normal voltage.
i) Motor (%)
ii) Closing Coil (%)
12. Air break switches
a. Type, make
b. Rated current (Amps)
c. Applicable standard
d. Rated making and breaking capacity
(kA)
13. Fuses
a. Make
b. Type
c. Rupturing capacity (kA)
d. Peak cut-off current (kA)
e. Whether mounted on insulated
carrier (Yes/ No)
14. Rated operating Duty
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
V. 1. Manufacturer's Name
3. Ratio
4. Rated output
5. Accuracy class
6. Instrument Security Factor (ISF).
7. Insulation level (kV rms)
8. Nominal rated voltage (kV)
9. Short time thermal rating for 1 sec. (kA
rms)
10. Type
11. Secondary circuit
12. Voltage class and Frequency
13. Accuracy
i. Accuracy class metering CT
ii. Accuracy class protection CT
14. Short time current rating
15. one minute power frequency withstand
voltage
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
VI. 1. Manufacturer's Name
3. Type
4. Rated voltage
a. Primary
b. Secondary
5. Accuracy class and VA burden
a. Metering
b. Protection
6. Method of connection
a. Primary
b. Secondary
7. Rated voltage factor
8. Class of insulation
9. One minute power frequency withstand
voltage
10. Rated primary voltage (volts)
11. Rated Secondary voltage (volts)
12. Accuracy class
13. Insulation level (kV rms)
14. Rated Burden (VA)
15. Over voltage factor
RELAY
VII. 1. One minute power frequency
withstand voltage
2. Make
3. Type
4. Application
5. Operating principle
6. Coil burden (VA)
7. Setting range (%)
8. Number of contacts (Nos.)
9. Contact rating (V, A, AC/DC)
10. Contacts - (self reset or hand reset)

11. Operation indicator provided (Yes/No)
12. Time of operation (ms)

CUBICLE COLOUR FINISH
VIII. a. Interior
b. Exterior
ACCESSORIES
IX. a. Plug point with switch fuse.
b. Space heater with thermostat
d. Danger plate
CONTACTORS
X. 1. Make
2. Type and applicable standard
3. No. of poles (Nos.)
4. Rated voltage of main and auxiliary
contacts. (volts)
5. Limits of operation
a. Supply voltage variation (+/-%)
b. Supply frequency variation for
closing.
(+/-%)
c. Drop out voltage (volts)
6. Rated breaking capacity (kA)
7. Rated making capacity (kA)
8. Rated thermal current (kA)
9. Rated voltage of coils (volts)
XI. AUXILIARY CONTACTOR
1. Make
2. Type
3. Coil voltage (volts)
4. Coil burden (VA)
5. No. of contacts and their rating
(V, A, AC/DC)
CONTROL / SELECTOR SWITCH

XII.
1. Make
2. Type
3. Type of handle
4. Number of contacts (Nos.)
5. Rating of contacts (V, A, AC/DC)
6. No. of positions (Nos.)
7. Contact material and plating
PUSH BUTTONS
XIII.
1. Make
2. Contact type
3. Number of contacts ( NO+ NC)
4. Contact rating
SPACE HEATERS
XIV.
1. Make
2. Type
3. Rated Voltage
4. Thermostat setting range
5. Heater output
WIRING AND TERMINAL BLOCKS

XV. 1. Voltage grade of wires (Volts)
2. Minimum size of conductor for
a. Power wiring (sq. mm)
b. Control wiring (sq. mm)
3. Type of control terminal block on
a. Fixed portion and draw out portion
b. Switchgear and breaker
4. Make and type of terminal blocks
5. Current rating of terminal blocks (Amp)
6. Insulation of wires
7. Conductor material
INDICATING LAMPS
XVI. 1. Make
2. Type
3. Voltage (volts)
4. Series resistor value and rating(Ohms,
Amp)
INDICATING INSTRUMENTS
XVII. 1. Voltmeter
a. Make
b. Type
c. Accuracy class
d. Voltage coil rating (volts)
e. Voltage coil burden (VA)
f. Case size (mm x mm)
2. Ammeter
a. Make
b. Type
c. Accuracy class
d. Current coil rating (Amp)
e. Current coil burden (VA)
f. Case size (mm x mm)
ENCLOSURES
XVIII. 1. Whether all the drawings as indicated in
the specification enclosed. (Yes/No)
2. Whether characteristics of various types
of relays for MCCB enclosed. (Yes/No)
3. Whether calculations furnished in
support of adequacy of bus bar size (AC
bus/DC bus) for specified current rating.
(Yes/No)
Miniature circuit breaker
XIX. 1. Manufacturer's name and country of
manufacture.
2. Type
3. Rated voltage (volts)
5. Frequency (Hz)
6. Current rating (Amp)
a) Continuous at 50 Deg. C ambient
temperature (Amp)
b) 1 sec. (kA rms)
7. Breaking capacity
8. Terminal suitable for cable size (sq. mm)
9. Upto what fault current discrimination
between incomer fuse & MCB will be
obtained? (kA)
10. Standards to which Miniature Circuit
Breaker conforms
CHAPTER 13
DC BATTERY & BATTERY CHARGER
DC BATTERY:

For Station Battery For Communication
1. Manufacturer's Name and Country
3. Cell designation
4. Type
5. Ambient temperature
i. Max.
ii. Min.
iii. No. of cells
iv. Rated voltage
6. Capacity of the one hour discharge
rate to end voltage V/cell at 27° C
7. Float voltage
8. Optimum float voltage
9. Boost voltage
10. Ampere-hour efficiency
11. Watt-hour efficiency
12. Self-discharge
13. Life
14. Plates:
i. Type of positive plate
ii. Type of negative plate
iii.
Number of plates per cell
(Nos.)
15. a) Thickness, type and material of
separators (mm)
b)Type of vent plug
16. a) Type of container
b) Material of container
17. Open Circuit Voltage of each cell when
completely discharged at 27 Deg. C
i. At 10-hour discharge rate (Volts)
ii. At one-hour discharge rate (Volts)
18. a) Trickle charging voltage range
(Volts)
b) Trickle charging current (Amps)
19. Recommended Trickle charging voltage
per cell and maximum variation. (Volts,
%)
20. Voltage per cell at the end of trickle
charging. (Volts)
21. Boost charging voltage range (Volts)
22. Recommended boost charging rate at
starting and finishing
23. Voltage per cell at the end of boost
charging and time taken for boost
charging. (Volts, Hr)
24. Capacity of battery at
i. Ten hour discharge rate to
1.14 V per cell at 27 Deg. C
(AH)
ii. One hour discharge rate to
1.14 V per cell at 27 Deg. C
(AH)
25. Internal resistance of each cell.
i. Fully charged (Ohms)
ii. Fully discharged (Ohms)
26. Quantity and specific gravity of
electrolyte for cell required for first
filling at 27 Deg. C (Litres)
27. Specific gravity of electrolyte of fully
charged cell at 27 Deg. C
28. Maximum electrolyte temperature
that cell shall withstand continuously
without affecting the service life of
cell. (Deg. C)
29. Average life of cell in years. (Years)
30. Overall dimension of each cell (mm x
mm x mm)
31. Distance between the centres of cell
when erected. (mm)
32. Weight of cell complete with
electrolyte. (Kg)
33. Size and material of connectors with
method of connection cells. (mm)
34. Recommended period of storage
before first charging. (hr)
35. Size of cable recommended for
connections of battery-to-battery
charger, DC distribution board. (sq.
mm)
36. Insulator material for rack and cells.
37. Battery racks
i. Type of material
ii. Whether anti-acid coating
provided (Yes/No)
iii. Net weight (Kg)
38. Short circuit current at
battery terminals. (Amps)
39. Recommended maximum rating of
fuse for protection of battery. (Amps)
40. Time for which the battery can
withstand short circuit at terminals
(Sec)
41. Recommended interval at which
battery should be discharged at 10
hour discharge rate and boost charged.
42. AH efficiency (%)
43. WH efficiency (%)
44. Equalizer charging current and
frequency of equalizing charge
recommended (Amp, Hz)
45. During initial charging
i. Recommended starting rate of
charge
ii. Recommended finishing rate
of charge
iii. Voltage of cell at the end of
charge at finishing rate (volts)
46. Enclosures
i. Whether all the drawings and
technical literature of Battery
enclosed (Yes/No)
ii. Whether type test reports
enclosed (Yes/No)
BATTERY CHARGER

Float-cum-Boost Charger
1. Manufacturer's Name and Country.
2. Charger rated output current (Amp)
3. Charger rated output voltage (Volts)
4. Rectifier assembly
a. Type of semi conductor material.
b. Rated direct current (Amp)
c. Rated direct voltage (Volts)
d. Continuous rating (Amp)
e. Rated input voltage (Volts)
f. Type of connection of rectifier elements (Full
wave half/full controlled bridge)
g. Maximum temperature rise over ambient of 50
Deg. C outside (Deg. C)
h. Overload capacity. (%)
i. Applicable standard.
5. Type
6. A.C. Input
a. Supply
b. Frequency
c. Input voltage variation
d. Frequency variation
e. Combined voltage & frequency variation
f. System Earthing
7. D.C. Output
a. Continuous D.C. load
b. Output voltage range
c. For D.C. load variation from 0 to 100%
output Voltage stable within
d. Continuous Current settings
e. Ripple content
8. AC input /DC output
9. Load limiter current setting range for float charger

(Amp, %)
10. Automatic voltage regulator (Float/Boost charger).
a. Type
b. Percentage stabilization of the output DC
voltage. (%)
c. Voltage setting range. (Volts, %)
d. Response time. (ms)
11. Manual voltage regulator (Float/Boost charger).

a. Type
b. Voltage setting range.
12. a) Boost charging current setting range (Amp, %)

b) Boost charging voltage limit setting range. (Volts, %)
13. Rectifier transformer
a. Type
b. Rated kVA and % impedance (kVA, %)
c. Turns ratio
d. Class of insulation.
e. One minute power frequency withstand
voltage. (kV rms)
f. Over load capacity (%)
g. Applicable standard
h. Whether short circuit test has been conducted.
(Yes/No)
14. Instruments
a. Type
b. DC voltmeter range (Volts)
c. DC Ammeter range (Amp)
d. Accuracy class as per IS
e. Dial size (mm x mm)
15. Contactor
a. Type
b. Rated voltage (Volts)
c. Rated current (Amp)
d. No. of Power contacts
e. Number, type and rating of auxiliary
contacts (V, A, AC/DC)
f. Operating coil voltage (Volts)
g. Dropout voltage (Volts)
16. Thermal over load relay

a. Tripping current range (Amp)
b. Whether single phasing protection provided
(Yes/No)
c. Applicable standard
17. Air break switches.

a. Type
b. Rated voltage (Volts)
c. Rated current (Amp)
d. Type and material of contacts
e. Applicable Standards
f. Maximum through fault current withstand
(kA)
g. Rated making and breaking capacity (kA)
18. Fuses
a. Type
b. Rupturing capacity (kA)
19. Blocking diode

a. Continuous rating (Amp)
b. Peak inverse voltage (Volts)
20. Ripple content in DC output
21. Guaranteed efficiency at rated load (%)
22. Whether chargers provided with following features
a. Automatic voltage regulators (Yes/No)
b. Automatic current regulators (Yes/No)
c. Soft start feature (Yes/No)
d. Smoothing resistor/capacitor filter circuit
(Yes/No)
e. Selector switch for automatic and manual
mode of operation (Yes/No)
f. Load linking circuitry (Yes/No)
g. Necessary RC network for protection of rectifier
elements. (Yes/No)
23. Enclosure :
a. Whether all the drawings and technical
literature for chargers enclosed (Yes/No)
b. Whether type test reports enclosed.
(Yes/No)
CHAPTER – 14

A. POWER CABLE
1. Name of the manufacturer and country.
3. Cable type designation
4. Voltage rating (volts)
5. Conductor
a. Material of conductor and flexibility class as
per IS:8130
b. Size of conductor (sq. mm)
c. Is conductor stranded (Yes/No)
d. Stranded conductor
i) Number of strands in each core
ii) Size of strand (sq. mm)
iii) Maximum DC resistance at 20 deg C
(Ohms) / Km
6. Number of cores
7. Insulation
a. Insulation material and type designation
b. Minimum thickness of insulation (mm)
c. Tolerance on the measured value of thickness
(%)
d. Minimum volume resistivity at 27 deg. C, 70
deg. C and 90 deg. C (Ohm-cm)
8. Sheath
a. Material for inner sheath, type of sheathing
(extruded or wrapped) and type designation as
per IS:5831.
b. Material for outer sheath, type of sheathing
per IS:5831.
c. Thickness of inner sheath and tolerance on
measured value. (mm, %)
d. Thickness of outer sheath and tolerance on
measured values. (mm, %)
9. Armour
a. Material
b. Shape
c. Dimension (mm)
10. a) Overall diameter of cable (mm)
b) Tolerance on diameter (%)
11. a) Minimum tensile strength of insulation
(kg/sq. cm)
b) Minimum elongation at break. (%)
12. a) Minimum tensile strength of sheath.(kg/sq.
cm)
b) Minimum elongation at break (%)
13. a) Tensile strength of the armour (kg/sq. cm)
b) Elongation after break (%)
14. High voltage test and duration (PVC cables)
a. At room temperature (kV, mins.)
b. Under water (kV, mins.)
15. XLPE cable
a. High voltage test (kV, mins.)
b. Short circuit current rating (kA, Secs)
c. Short circuit current rating for armour (kA,
Secs)
16. a) Current carrying capacity in air and
corresponding assumptions/conditions of
installation (Amp)
b) Current carrying capacity under following
conditions:
i) Ambient temperature of 50 Deg. C (Amp)
ii) Cable laid in covered cable trenches (Amp)
iii) 3 to 4 cable trays / racks in trench . (Amp)
iv) 5 to 6 cables per tray and touching each
other. (Amp)
17. Insulation resistance at 27 Deg. C (Ohm/km)
18. Capacitive reactance per Km. (Ohm/km)
19. Inductive reactance per Km. (Ohm/km)
20. Minimum bending radius. (mm)

21. Short circuit current rating for 1 sec. for PVC
cable. (kA)
22. Conductor temperature rise during
a. Normal operation (Deg. C)
b. Short circuit (Deg. C)
23. Weight of cable per Km (Kg/km)
24. a) Standard length of cable per drum (m)
b) Tolerance on length of cable per drum (%)
25. Net weight of drum length of cable (approx.)
(Kg)
26. Method of core identification for
a. Cable upto five cores
b. Cable with more than five cores
27. Please indicate writing YES or NO whether the
following tests have been carried out.
i) Ageing test (Yes/No)
ii) Loss of mass test (Yes/No)
iii) Cold impact test (Yes/No)
iv) Heat shock test (Yes/No)
v)LV &Tertiary winding (Yes/No)
vi) Oxygen index test and temperature index
test as per ASTM D-2863. (Yes/No)
vii) Fire retardant test (Yes/No)
28. Whether technical literature enclosed (Yes/No)
29. Whether tables giving rating factors for
variation in standard conditions of installation
enclosed (Yes/No)
30. Whether relevant drawings enclosed (Yes/No)
B. CONTROL CABLE
1. Name of the manufacturer and country.
3. Cable type designation
4. Voltage rating (volts)
5. Conductor
a. Material of conductor and flexibility class as
per IS:8130
b. Size of conductor (sq. mm)
c. Is conductor stranded (Yes/No)
d. Stranded conductor
i) Number of strands in each core
ii) Size of strand (sq. mm)
iii) Maximum DC resistance at 20 deg C
(Ohms) / Km
6. Number of cores
7. Insulation
a. Insulation material and type designation
b. Minimum thickness of insulation (mm)
c. Tolerance on the measured value of thickness
(%)
d. Minimum volume resistivity at 27 deg. C, 70
deg. C and 90 deg. C (Ohm-cm)
8. Sheath
a. Material for inner sheath, type of sheathing
per IS:5831.
b. Material for outer sheath, type of sheathing
per IS:5831.
c. Thickness of inner sheath and tolerance on
measured value. (mm, %)
d. Thickness of outer sheath and tolerance on
measured values. (mm, %)
9. Armour
a. Material
b. Shape
c. Dimension (mm)
10. a) Overall diameter of cable (mm)
b) Tolerance on diameter (%)
11. a) Minimum tensile strength of insulation
(kg/sq. cm)
b) Minimum elongation at break. (%)
12. a) Minimum tensile strength of sheath.(kg/sq.
cm)
b) Minimum elongation at break (%)
13. a) Tensile strength of the armour (kg/sq. cm)
b) Elongation after break (%)
14. High voltage test and duration (PVC cables)
a. At room temperature (kV, mins.)
b. Under water (kV, mins.)
15. XLPE cable
a. High voltage test (kV, mins.)
b. Short circuit current rating (kA, Secs)
c. Short circuit current rating for armour (kA,
Secs)
16. a) Current carrying capacity in air and
corresponding assumptions/conditions of
installation (Amp)
b) Current carrying capacity under following
conditions:
i) Ambient temperature of 50 Deg. C (Amp)
ii) Cable laid in covered cable trenches (Amp)
iii) 3 to 4 cable trays / racks in trench . (Amp)
iv) 5 to 6 cables per tray and touching each
other. (Amp)
17. Insulation resistance at 27 Deg. C (Ohm/km)
18. Capacitive reactance per Km. (Ohm/km)
19. Inductive reactance per Km. (Ohm/km)
20. Minimum bending radius. (mm)

21. Short circuit current rating for 1 sec. for PVC
cable. (kA)
22. Conductor temperature rise during
a. Normal operation (Deg. C)
b. Short circuit (Deg. C)
23. Weight of cable per Km (Kg/km)
24. a) Standard length of cable per drum (m)
b) Tolerance on length of cable per drum (%)
25. Net weight of drum length of cable (Kg)
26. Method of core identification for
a. Cable upto five cores
b. Cable with more than five cores
27. Please indicate writing YES or NO whether the
following tests have been carried out.
i) Ageing test (Yes/No)
ii) Loss of mass test (Yes/No)
iii) Cold bend test (Yes/No)
iv) Heat shock test (Yes/No)
v) Thermal stability as per IEC-540 (Yes/No)
vi) Rodent and termite proof test (Yes/No)
28. Enclosures
a. Whether tables giving rating factors for
variation in standard conditions of installation
enclosed (Yes/No)
b. Whether relevant drawings enclosed (Yes/No)
CHAPTER 15
LIGHTING SYSTEM

A. General
1. Supply voltage (volts)
2. Frequency (Hz)
3. Variation of voltage
4. Variation of frequency
5. Combined voltage & frequency variation
6. Type of internal lighting wires
7. Conduit
8. Earthing wire
i. Material
ii. Size
iii. Light Points
iv. Power Points
9. Temperature rise
B. Lighting fixtures & Accessories

1. Manufacturer's name
a. Fixtures
b. Accessories
2. Country of manufacturer for
a. Fixtures
b. Accessories
3. Applicable standards for
a. Fixtures
b. Accessories
4. Manufacturer's type and catalogue no. for
5. Nominal working voltage (Volts)
6. Maximum permissible supply voltage
variation for satisfactory operation of
a. Fixtures
b. Accessories
7. Average life expectancy of
a. Ballast (hours) (If applicable)
b. Capacitors (hours) (If applicable)
c. Lamps (hours) (If applicable)
8. Lamp output at the design temperature
a. After 100 burning hours (Lumens)
b. After 1000 burning hours (Lumens)
9. Lamp output at the end of the expected life
period (Lumens)
10. Average light output of the fitting as a
percentage of lamp output.
a. Downwards (%)
b. Upwards (%)
11. Beam angle for flood lights in
a. Horizontal plane (Degrees)
b. Vertical plane (Degrees)
12. a) Cable/conduit entry size (mm)
b) Size and type of cable (sq. mm)
13. Earthing terminal
a. Material
b. Suitable for earthing conductor of size (mm x
mm)
14. Weights of fixtures (Kg)
15. Reference catalogue No.
C. Receptacles and Switches

1. Manufacturer's name and country of
manufacture.
2. Manufacturer's type designation.
3. Voltage grade (Volts)
4. Current rating at specified ambient
temperature of 50 Degrees C
5. Applicable standards
6. Whether descriptive pamphlet is enclosed?
(Yes/No)
D. Lighting control switches

manufacture.
3. Voltage (Volts)
4. Current rating at specified ambient
temperature of 50 Deg. C
(Yes/No)
E. Conduits & Accessories

F. Junction Boxes
2. Terminals
a. Make
b. Current rating (Amp)
c. Voltage rating (Volts)
d. Stud type (Yes/No)
e. Complete with insulated barriers (Yes/No)
(Yes/No)
G. Boxes
manufacture.
3. Material specification
4. Type of enclosure
5. Whether descriptive pamphlet is enclosed
(Yes/No)
Lighting Panels
H.
(a) General
manufacture.
2. Indoor/outdoor application
3. Design ambient air temperature (Deg. C)
4. Thickness of sheet steel (mm)
5. Degree of protection provided (as per IS:
13947 or equivalent)
6. Bill of material for various equipment giving
make, type rating etc. enclosed. (Yes/No)
7. Colour of finish paint
i. Outside
ii. Inside
8. Bus bars
i. Material
ii. Temperature rise at rated current over
specified ambient
iii. Continuous current rating at 50 deg. C
ambient temperature
iv. Whether suitable for one second current
rating of 20 kA (AC) or 5 kA (DC) as applicable
(Yes/No)
v. Cross section
vi. Application standard
9. Control wiring
i. Material of conductor
ii. Size of conductor/dia of wire (mm)
10. Conductor – (Solid / Stranded.)
11. Terminal blocks
i. Make
ii. Current Rating
(a) Power terminal (Amps)
(b) Other terminal (Amps)
(b) Air Break Switches
manufacture.
2. Manufacturer's type description
4. Rated voltage & frequency (Volts, Hz)
5. Rated current (Amps)
6. Rated breaking current (Amps)
7. Maximum through fault current withstand,
derating factor for use under site ambient
conditions (Amps)
8. Temperature rise of contacts when carrying
continuous rated current under site
conditions. (Deg. C)
(c) Fuses
manufacture.
2. Manufacturer's type description
4. Rated voltage (Volts)
5. Rated current (Amp)
6. Whether fuse is mounted in an insulated
carrier (Yes/No)
7. Whether fuse carrier has an aperture for fuse
failure indication. (Yes/No)
8. Category of duty (IS:2208)
9. Rupturing capacities (Prospective current)
(kA)
10. Maximum let through current for 1 sec. (kA)
11. Whether time/current characteristics are
enclosed? (Yes/No)
(d) Miniature circuit breaker
manufacture.
2. Type
5. Frequency (Hz)
a) Continuous at 50 Deg. C ambient
temperature (Amp)
b) 1 sec. (kA rms)
7. Breaking capacity
8. Total interrupting time (Cycle)
9. Type of overload (terminal/magnetic)
10. Terminal suitable for cable size (sq. mm)
11. Upto what fault current discrimination
between incomer fuse & MCB will be
obtained? (kA)
12. Standards to which Miniature Circuit Breaker
conforms
(e) Contactors (For each type DC/AC)
manufacture.
2. Rated voltage & permissible variation
(Volts,%)
3. Rated burden (VA)
4. Rated current (thermal) of main contacts
(Amp)
5. No. & type of Aux. Contacts (if any)
6. Rated voltage of coil (Volts)
7. Pick up voltage (Volts)
8. Rated duty class
9. Drop off voltage (Volts)
(f) Emergency portable lighting fixture
1. Manufacturer's name
2. Country of manufacture
4. Manufacturer's type & catalogue no.
5. Nominal working voltage (Volts)
6. Rated duration for providing useful luminous
output (hours)
7. Lamp wattage (Watts)
8. Battery capacity (AH)
9. Battery voltage (Volts)
10. Bulb voltage (Volts)
11. Whether rectifier circuits are solid state
(Yes/No)
12. Type of charging device used
13. Time interval required for charging (hours)
14. Whether tropicalised (Yes/No)
15. Weight of unit without batteries (Kg)
16. Weight of battery (Kg)
17. Make of battery
18. Expected life of fixture (hours)
19. Whether descriptive pamphlets are enclosed?
(Yes/No)
(g) Street Lighting Poles
manufacture.
3. Whether sketch and descriptive pamphlet is
enclosed? (Yes/No)
(h) Lighting Wires
manufacture.
2. Standard applicable
4. Continuous current rating when laid in
conduit in ambient condition (Amp)
5. Conductor
i. Material
ii. Nominal cross sectional area (sq. mm)
iii. Number & diameter of wires (Nos. / mm)
6. Insulation
i. Composition of insulation
ii. Thickness of insulation (mm)
iii. Tolerance on thickness of insulation (%)
iv. Specific insulation resistance at 60ºC
7. Colour scheme for identification of wires
(Yes/No)
(i) Ladders
manufacture.
2. Manufacturer's type designation
4. Whether drawing and descriptive pamphlet is
enclosed. (Yes/No)
(j) Painting
1. Paints (for each type)
i. Manufacturer's name and country of
manufacture.
ii. Manufacturer's type designation/brand name
iii. Shade.
2. Number of coats provided for
i. Lighting poles & other fabricated steel
structures (Nos.)
ii. Junction boxes (Nos.)
CHAPTER 16:
CIVIL WORKS
NOT APPLICABLE
CHAPTER-17
SUBSTATION GALVANIZED STEEL STRUCTURES
Sl. No. Description Unit Specific Requirements Guaranteed Technical Particulars

132 kV 33 kV
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
1. Substation Steel
Structures
Guaranteed Weight of
Steel Structures
designed, fabricated,
galvanized etc complete
as per technical
specifications
1.1 Gantry Towers and Conforming to
Lightning/Lighting Mast Technical
(For Each Type of Specifications
Structure)
1.1.1 Gantry Tower Type- A MT
(Beam only on one Side
of tower)
1.1.2 Gantry Tower Type- B MT
(Beam on two Side of
tower)
1.2 Lightning/Lighting Masts MT Conforming to
(For Each) Technical
Specifications
1.3 Gantry Beams(For Each) MT -do-
1.4 Circuit Breaker (For Each) MT -do-
1.5 Three pole isolator
1.5.1 Isolator without Earth MT
Switch(For Each)
1.5.2 Isolator with Earth MT
Switch(For Each)
1.5.3 Isolator with Double MT
Earth Switch(For Each)
1.6 Single Pole Isolator Conforming to
Technical
Specifications
1.6.1 Single Pole Isolator with MT
Earth switch (For Each)
1.6.2 Single Pole Isolator MT
without earth switch (For
Each)
132 kV 33 kV
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
1.7 Current Transformer (For MT Conforming to
Each) Technical
Specifications
1.8 CVT/Potential MT -do-
Transformer (For Each)
1.9 BPI/PI (For Each) MT -do-
1.10 Lightening/Surge Arrestor MT -do-
(For Each)
1.11 Neutral Current MT -do-
Transformer (For Each)
2.0 Maximum Stress
employed in design
2.1 Tension in net sectional N/mm2 As per IS:802(Part-
area I/Sec-2)
2.2 Compression on gross N/mm2 -do-
sectional area at
maximum slenderness
ratio
2.3 Shearing stress on steel N/mm2 -Do-
bolts
2.4 Bearing stress on steel N/mm2 -Do-
bolts
3.0 Maximum Slenderness
Ratio
3.1 Main leg members of As per IS:802(Part-
columns, Masts, Beams, I/Sec-2)
Equipment Supporting
Structures
3.2 Lattice members having -do-
calculated stress
3.3 Redundant members -do-
having nominal stress
3.4 Members under tensions -do-
only
3.5 Strut formula used -do-
3.6 Standards according to
which properties of
sections have been
adopted
4.0 Structural Steel
132 kV 33 kV
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
4.1 Grade of Structural Steel As per IS:2062
proposed to be used for
Steel Sections & Plates
4.2 Standard/Code of -do-
Practice to which quality
of steel for the sections
and plates would
conform and technical
properties of the type of
steel offered.
5.0 Galvanizing of Steel
Structures
5.1 Standard/Code of As per IS:4579
Practice to which
galvanizing shall conform
to
5.2 Zinc Coating on gm/m2 As per Technical
Galvanized Structural Specification
Members
5.3 Zinc Coating on gm/m2 -do-
Galvanized Bolts, Nuts &
Washers
5.4 Quality/Purity of zinc (%) As per Technical
used for galvanizing Specification
6.0 Fabrication of Structures
6.1 Minimum sheared edge mm As per Technical
distance for 16 mm Specification
Diameter bolts
6.2 Minimum rolled edge mm As per Technical
distance for 16 mm Specification
diameter bolts
6.3 Sizes of bolts proposed to mm 16 mm (Only one size)
be used
6.4 Hole Size for bolt mm Not more than 1.5
mm bigger than bolt
diameter
6.5 Bolt gauge distances in As per Technical
flanges of angles Specification
6.7 Minimum Size of mm Not less than 20 mm

Foundation bolts
6.8 Minimum nos. of nos. Not less than two nos.
foundation bolts per leg per leg.
132 kV 33 kV
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
of structure
6.9 Minimum thickness of mm Not less than 12 mm

Base Plate
6.10 Minimum thickness of mm As per technical
Gusset Plate specifications but not
less than 6mm
6.11 Standard/ Code of As per IS:12427 and
Practice to which bolts Property Class 5.6
and nuts would conform
to and property class
6.12 Name of manufacturer of Reputed
bolts and nuts Manufacturer who
has supplied bolts and
nuts atleast in three
Substation/
Transmission Line
Projects in last three
years
6.13 Minimum Size of Leg Not smaller than angle
Members of Columns, of size 65x65x5 mm
Masts, Beams,
Equipment Supporting
Structures
6.14 Minimum Size of Bracing Not smaller than angle
Members size 45 x 45 x 4 mm
6.15 Type of connection of Through Base Plate
Gantry Towers and and
Lightening/Lighting Masts Anchor/Foundation
with foundation Bolts
6.17 Type of connection of Through Base Plate
equipment supporting and
structure with foundation Anchor/Foundation
Bolts
6.18 Arrangement for fixing Through Templates
Anchor bolts in
foundations during
construction for ensuring
correct position,
alignment and inclination
Notes:-
1. ‘N.A.' may be written against the item which is not applicable.

2. The price for Galvanized Steel Structures in Price Schedule shall be quoted based on
guaranteed weight for each type of structure in the above GTP and unit rate per
metric ton for galvanized steel structures.
3. The unit rate per metric ton for galvanized steel structures shall be quoted in related
Price Schedule separately.
4. The payment for galvanized steel structures shall be made based on guaranteed
weight or actual weight as per approved fabrication drawings, whichever is minimum,
and unit rate per metric ton for galvanized steel structures.
5. The quantity in Price Schedule has been given in numbers for each type of structure
for the convenience of evaluation of bids but payment for galvanized steel structures
shall be made as per Note No.4 above. This may be noted by all Bidders.
CHAPTER – 16
Sr.no. Description Guaranteed Particulars

A. ALUMINIUM TUBE FOR BUS BAR 132 kV bus 33 kV bus bar
bar
1. Material
2. Diameter (mm)
3. Maximum Span (mm)
4. Type
5. Overall Diameter (mm)
6. Cross Sectional Area (sq.mm)
7. Stranding (nos./mm)
8. Mass (Kg/km)
9. Ultimate Strength (Kg)
10. Rated DC resistance at 20oC (Ω/km)
B. POWER CONNECTORS & CLAMPS

1. For connecting ACSR Moose conductor
2. For connecting equipment terminals made of
copper
3. For connecting shield wire
4. Bolts, nuts & plain washers
5. Spring washers for item à’ to `c’
C. SUSPENSION, TENSION INSULATORS AND 132 kV bus 33 kV bus bar

HARDWARES bar
1. Type
2. Size of Disc (sq.mm)
3. Rated Voltage (kV)
4. No. of Disc. Unit per string
a. Suspension (S/S)
b. Tension (S/T)
5. Minimum failing load
a. Suspension (kN)
b. Tension (kN)
6. Creepage Distance of insulator (mm)
7. Power Frequency (wet) withstand voltage (kv)
8. Power Frequency (puncture) withstand voltage of
single disk (kv)
9. Impulse voltage withstand voltage of the disk (kv)
D. BUS POST INSULATORS 132kV 33kV

1. Nominal system voltage (kV)
2. Highest system voltage (kV)
3. Total creepage distance minimum
(mm)
4. Cantilever strength (KN)
Upright/horizontal
5. Tensile strength (KN)
6. Compression strength (KN)
7. Impulse withstand voltage (kV)
8. Power Frequency Dry flashover voltage
(kV)
E. EARTHWIRE
1. Material
2. Size (mm)
3. Ultimate Tensile Strength ( Kg)
4. Overall diameter (mm)
5. Modulus of Elasticity (MPA)
6. Co-efficient of linear expansion (degree C)
7. Weight (kg/km)
8. Cross sectional Area (sq.mm)
F. MARSHALLING KIOSKS
1. Type
2. No. of terminals
3. Thickness of sheet steel (mm)
4. Conductor for internal wiring and size (sq. mm)
5. Incoming supplies (V, A, sq. mm)
6. Outgoing supplies (V, A, sq. mm)
7. Terminal blocks
9. Painting
10. Other provision
G. CABLE TRAYS, TRAY COVERS & ACCESSORIES

1. Manufacturer's Name & Address
4. Thickness of sheet steel for cable trays and
fittings like elbows tees, crosses etc.
(mm)
5. Maximum permissible loading for 2.5 m long tray
simply supported at the ends (Kg or kN)
6. Corresponding defection at centre for the loading
(mm, mm)
7. Whether hot dip galvanized (Yes/No)
8. Weight of zinc coating & minimum thickness of
zinc deposit at any spot (gm/sq. m)
H. JUNCTION BOXES
4. Type of enclosure with degree of protection
5. Thickness of GI sheet (mm)
6. Terminal
a) Make
b) Current rating (Amp)
c) Voltage rating (Volts)
d) Stud type
e) Complete with insulated barriers
(Yes/No
)
f) Whether suitable for 2 Nos. 2.5 mm copper
conductor (Yes/No)
g) Whether descriptive pamphlet is enclosed
(Yes/No)
I. COMPRESSION TYPE CABLE GLAND

3. Material
4. Whether passivated or not
(Yes/No
)
J. CABLE LUGS
5. Tinned
(Yes/No
)
6. Solder less crimping type
(Yes/No
)
K. STRAIGHT THROUGH JOINTS

2. heat shrinkable type taped type/promoulded
type
3. Whether bill of materials of the kit furnished
(Yes/No)
4. Whether straight through joint kit is complete
with all accessories
(Yes/No)
L. CABLE CLAMPS
2. Material specification, size and type of clamps /
cords
a) For single core cables (mm)
b) For multi core cables (mm)
c) For cable in trefoil formation (mm)
M. FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT

I. SAND / WATER BUCKETS
1. Manufacturer
3. Capacity (cu.m)
4. Number provided
5. Provided with hanging arrangement (Yes/No)
6. Whether approved by TAC?
II. DRY POWDER TYPE EXTINGUISHER

1. Manufacturer
2. Principle of operation
3. Capacity (cu.m)
4. Type of extinguisher (Low/High pressure)
5. Material of construction
a) Body
b) Inner shell
c) Neck ring
d) Cap
e) Plunger
f) Cartridge holder and sealing device
g) Piercer
h) Spring
i) Syphon tube
j) Nozzle and discharge fittings
k) Cartridge
l) Hose
6. Range of throw of jet (m)
7. Whether dry powder charge conforms to IS 4308
(Yes/No)
8. Max. period of discharging 95% of chemical (Sec)
9. Test pressure for extinguisher body (kg/sq. cm)
10. Whether handle provided (Yes/No)
11. Whether seal provided to indicate that extinguisher
has not been used (Yes/No)
12. Whether anti-corrosive treatment provided?
(Yes/No)
13. Whether First charge of chemical supplied?
(Yes/No)
14. List of accessories provided (Yes/No)
15. Painting
16. Whether extinguisher is capable of discharging not
less than 85% by mass of the actual rated capacity of
dry powder at an angle of 45 degree from horizontal
(Yes/No)
17. List of Test certificate provided (Yes/No)
19. Whether approved by TAC? (Yes/No)
20. Whether each extinguisher has the marking as per IS
2171 (Yes/No)
21. Whether approved by the chief inspector of
explosives Govt, of India (Yes/No)
22. Whether illustrative leaflets attached (Yes/No)
III. PORTABLE CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHER

1. Manufacturer
2. Capacity
(cu.m)
3. Number provided (Nos.)
4. Material of construction:
a) Brass tube
b) Siphon or discharge tube
c) Wheel of operating head
d) Body
e) Discharge valve or operating head
f) Hose
g) Discharge horn
h) Carrying handle
5. Type of valve provided
7. Provided with handling arrangement (Yes/No)
8. Whether seal to indicate that extinguisher has not
been used provided? (Yes/No)
9. Whether safety release provided? (Yes/No)
10. Whether supplied with first charge of extinguisher
agent? (Yes/No)
11. Whether each extinguisher has the marking as per IS
2878 (Yes/No)
12. Whether approved by TAC? (Yes/No)
13. Whether approved by the chief inspector of
explosive Govt. of India
(Yes/No)
14. Whether illustrative leaflets attached
(Yes/No
)
15. List of Test certificate provided (Yes/No)
16. Standard to which CO2 extinguisher conforms
(Yes/No)
N. AIR CONDITIONINIG SYSTEM
Sr.No. Description Unit Guaranteed Particulars

SPLIT TYPE ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS
1. General
a. Make
b. Model and Number
c. Overall dimensions (L x W x H) (mm x
mm x
mm)
d. Weight (Kg)
e. Material and thickness of casing (mm)
f. Cooling capacity at given ambient (TR)
conditions
g. Power consumption (kW)
h. Power supply feeder capacity (kW)
i. Initial fill of refrigerant (Kg)
2. Compressor
a. Model
b. No. of compressor (Nos.)
c. Type of compressor
d. Capacity of each compressor (TR)
e. Compressor motor rating (kW)
3. Condenser
a. Face area (m2)
b. Air quantity (m3/hr)
c. Fan type
d. Fan diameter (mm)
e. Fan motor rating (kW)
f. No. of rows of coil (Nos.)
g. No. of tubes (Nos.)
4. Evaporator
a. Air quantity (m3/hr)
b. Fan type
c. Fan width (mm)
d. Fan diameter (mm)
e. Fan speed (RPM)
f. No. of rows of coil (Nos.)
g. No. of tubes (Nos.)
h. Face area (m2)
i. Fan Motor rating (kW)
5. Filter
a. Type
b. Face area (m2)
c. Thickness (mm)
d. Width (mm)
e. Height (mm)
CHAPTER 19
ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
NOT APPLICABLE
CHAPTER 20
400 KVA STATION TRANSFORMER
3. Type designation & model number
4. Rated KVA of the Transformer
5. Type of installation
6. Frequency
7. Cooling medium
8. Rated Voltage
High voltage side
Low voltage side
9. Highest Continuous System Voltage :
High voltage (HV)
Low Voltage (LV)
10. Method of system earthing:
High voltage (HV)
Low Voltage (IV)
11. Range of tapping
12. Impedance at rated MVA Base on Principal

tap
13. Type of insulation & insulation level for 33 kV 0.4 kV
winding:
a. Type of insulation:
b. One minute power frequency withstand
test voltage (kV RMS)
c. Lightening Impulse withstand test voltage
(kVp):
14. Winding connection
15. Material of winding
16. Current density (A/sq.mm)
17. Vector group:

18. Type of cooling
19. Maximum Flux Density (Bm) in core & yoke

at normal voltage & frequency
20. Short circuit withstand capacity
21. Max. Temperature Rise for various types of

cooling over an ambient of 40 deg C
a) Temperature rise of top oil (Measured
by Thermometer)
b) Temperature rise of winding
Note: The allowable temp rise during testing shall be reduced by 10K for every 250m above
1000m as per IS 2026 part II.
22. Noise Level at Rated Voltage & Frequency
23. Standard to which Transformer Oil confirm
24. Vector group notation
25. Cooling
26. No load loss at rated voltage (kW)
27. No load loss at 110% rated voltage (kW)
28. Load loss at rated voltage and power (kW)
29. Net weight (kg)
30. Particulars
31. Weight of oil (kg)
32. Total weight (kg)
33. Overall dimensions (mm)
34. Transport dimensions (mm)
35. Noise level (dB(A))
36. Off-load Tap Changer Manufacturer’s name
37. Type designation & model number for Off-

load TC
38. Rated current for Off-load TC (A)
39. Off-load TC step
40. Number of tap steps

CHAPTER – 21

A. GENERAL
1. Bidder’s Name and Address
2. Manufactures Name, type, model
B. ALTERNATOR
1. Type
3. Rated kW capacity (kW)
4. Rated kVA capacity (kVA)
6. Rated terminal voltage (Volts)
7. Rated power factor
8. Rated stator current (Amp)
9. Rated speed (RPM)
11. Excitation current and voltage at rated power output and

power factor (Amp, Volts)
12. Alternator net continuous output at site conditions, after
13. Power factor
14. Overload capacity for one (1) hour in twelve consecutive
hours of operation
15. Rated Frequency (Hz)
16. Number of phases
17. Winding connections
18. Design max ambient temperature
a. Armature winding
b. Field winding
c. Connections
d. Core connections
e. Type of enclosure
20. Permissible voltage variation for satisfactory operation at
rated KVA
21. Permissible frequency variation
22. Permissible combined voltage and frequency variation
(Absolute sum)
23. Method of Neutral grounding
24. Efficiency at rated power factor at
a. Full load (%)
b. 3/4 load (%)
c. 1/2 load (%)
25. Efficiencies and power factor at the following values of
full load
a. 110% (%, pf)
b. 100% (%, pf)
c. 75% (%, pf)
d. 50% (%, pf)
e. 25% (%, pf)
26. Inherent voltage regulation (%)
27. Are damper windings fitted (Yes/No)
28. Percentage impedance (Ohm,%)
29. Generator performance
Full load losses (kW)
30. Exciter
a. Type of excitation system
b. Continuous capacity
c. Short time capacity
d. Continuous voltage (Volts)
e. Short time voltage (Volts)
f. Applicable standard
31. Automatic voltage Regulator
a. Manufacturer’s name & address
b. Type
c. Time constant
d. Sensitivity from no load to full load (%)
e. Setting provided
f. Characteristic curve for AVR furnished (Yes/No)
g. Applicable standard
h. Class of insulation
i. Applicable standards
32. Method of lubrication
33. Method of cooling
34. Maximum temperature rise of stator core over ambient
temperature (Deg. C)
35. Electrical auxiliary loads connected to generator terminals
with rating (kW)
36. Alternator parameters
C. ENGINE
1. Rating (kVA)
2. Revolutions per minute (RPM)
3. Number and arrangement of cylinders, cylinder box and
stroke (mm)
4. Method of starting (Sec)
5. Time required for starting from cold conditions
6. Auxiliary power consumption (kW)
7. i. Type of Governor
ii. Relevant standard
iii. Confirm portions of mechanical over speed
tripping at 110%
8. Guaranteed limits of governing
a. Permanent variation
i) Full load thrown off
ii) Full load put on
b. Temporary variation
i) Full load thrown off
ii) Full load put on
c. Fuel injection
i) at full load
ii) at no load
d. Fly wheel details
i) Diameter (mm)
ii) Width of rim (mm)
iii) Weight (Kg)
iv) Thickness of rim (mm)
9. Specification of fuel oil
10. Specification of lube oil
11. Guaranteed fuel consumption
a. At full load (ml/kWh)
b. At 3/4 load (ml/kWh)
c. At 1/2 load (ml/kWh)
d. At 1/4 load (ml/kWh)
e. Specific fuel consumption (ml/kWh)
f. Compression ratio
g. Compression pressure (kg/sq. mm)
h. Maximum cylinder pressure (kg/sq. mm)
12. Lubricating oil consumption (ml/kWh)
13. Capacity of fuel tank (litres)
14. Mechanical efficiency (%)
15. Thermal efficiency (%)
16. Safety protection provided (Yes/No)
17. Method of aspiration
18. Method of cooling of engine and lubrication oil
19. Amount of water required for cooling system (litres)
20. Total weight (Kg)
21. Space requirement including clearance (m x m x m)
22. Air-Filter-Cum-Silencer
a. Rated capacity
b. Clear area (mm)
c. Maximum particle size removed (mm)
23. i. Type of flexible coupling provided & length (m)
ii. Shaft sealing arrangement
24. Pressure Gauges
a. Type
b. Manufacturer’s name
c. Least count (kg/sq. mm)
d. Range (kg/sq. mm)
e. Accuracy (%)
f. Location
g. Dial size (mm x mm)
h. Number supplied (Nos.)
25. Level indicator
a. Type
c. Range
d. Location
e. Number supplied (Nos.)
26. Tachometer
a. Type
c. Reduction ratio
d. Range
e. Accuracy (%)
27. Any hand barring gear provided (Yes/No)
28. Permissible voltage range (Volts, %)
D. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
1. Type
2. Specification & standards
3. Number of phases
4. Secondary CT
5. Rated Burden
6. Accuracy Class
7. Rated continuous thermal
Current at specified ambient temperature
8. Rated short time thermal current
9. Rated dynamic current
11. One (1) minute power frequency withstand voltage
i) Between all terminals connected together and all
parts to be earthed
ii) Between contacts terminal with contacts closed and
all remaining terminals connected together
E. RELAYS
1. Make
2. Type
3. Coil rating
4. Setting range
5. Burden
6. Reset ratio
7. Characteristic of time vs current enclosed
8. Descriptive pamphlet enclosed
10. Specifications and standards
11. Current coil rated current
12. Potential coil rated voltage
13. Operating time class
14. Control supply
16. One (I) minute power frequency tests voltage
i) Between all terminals connected together and all parts
to be earthed
ii) Between contacts terminal with contacts closed and all
remaining terminals connected together
iii) Between circuits to be connected in use
iv) Between contacts in open position
F. INDICATING INSTRUMENTS
1. Type
2. Specifications and standards
3. Accuracy
4. Size
5. Finish
6. 1 (One) minute power frequency test voltage
G. STORAGE TANK
1. Type and shape

2. Capacity (litres)
3. Number supplied (Nos.)
4. Material of construction
5. Overall dimensions (mm x mm x mm)
6. Overall internal dimensions (mm x mm x mm)
7. Plate thickness (mm)
8. Design pressure and temperature (kg/sq. mm, Deg. C)
9. Type of welding and joints
10. Weight of completely fabricated tank including all
supports and fittings (Kg)
11. Whether hand pump and accessories supplied. (Yes/No)
H. ENGINE ALTERNATOR SET
12. Starting time (Sec)

13. Tertiary winding (Sec)
14. No. of starting impulses (Sec)
15. Time for picking up the full load (Sec)
I. CONTROL PANEL / BOARD
1. Manufacturer’s name and address

2. Sheet steel thickness (mm)
3. Method of vermin proofing and making dust proof
4. Outline dimensions (LxWxH) (mm x mm x mm)
5. Weight (Kg)
6. Type of mounting
7. Cable termination details
8. Door with locking arrangement provided (Yes/No)
9. Colour shade as per IS:5
11. Make, type, technical specification and catalogues for
each type of component to be mounted in control panel
enclosed (Yes/No)
12. Current Transformers
a. Type and make
b. Rated transformation ratio
c. Rated output (VA)
d. Class of accuracy
e. Accuracy Limit Factor
f. Applicable standard
g. Instrument Security Factor
h. Short time thermal current rating (Amp, Sec)
i. Rated continuous thermal current (Amp)
13. Wiring
a. Voltage grade (Volts)
b. Insulation
c. Conductor material
d. Size of conductor (sq. mm)
e. No. of conductors (Nos.)
f. Maximum current rating (Amp)
g. Colour code used
h. Type of terminals
i. Size of terminals (sq. mm)
j. Applicable standards
14. Indicating Instruments
a. Make and type
b. Size (mm x mm)
c. Scale size (Degrees)
d. Accuracy class
e. VA burden
i) Current coil (VA)
ii) Voltage coil (VA)
f. Relevant catalogue enclosed (Yes/No)
g. Angle of deflection (Degrees)
h. Scale length (mm)
i. Current coil rating (Amp)
j. Voltage coil rating (Volts)
CHAPTER – 22
CCTV SYSTEM
NOT APPLICABLE
CHAPTER- 23
DIGITAL TELEPHONE EXHANGE (PBX)

1. Manufacturer
2. Type
4. System specification
a) Transmission procedure
b) Optical code
c) Multiplex rate
d) Optical signal communication role
e) Channel sampling rate
5. Number of channel, voice or data.
a) Frequency band width
b) Audio frequency terminator
c) Signaling interface
d) Impedance in ohm
e) Balanced return loss in dB
6. Digital interface
a) Bit rate (synchronous operation)
b) Encoding
b) Pulse shape
c) Impedance
d) Return loss in dB
7. Digital signal nominal bit rate kb/s
8. Application code
9. Operating wavelength range nm
a) Transmitter at reference point S
b) Source type
10. Spectral characteristics
11. Maximum RMS width (s) (nm)
12. Maximum -20 dB width (nm)
13. Minimum side mode suppression ratio
14. Mean launched power
15. Minimum extraction ratio dB
16. Front access Shall be provided for both electrical & optical
interfaces.
17. For optimum performance each element in SDH network
Shall be timed from a single primary reference clock
source and this primary reference clock satisfy the ITU-T
Rec G.811
18. The synchronization interface shall be specified in ITU-T
Rec G.703 #10
Package-KC3
Section-VI
DRAWINGS
LIST OF DRAWINGS-TRANSMISSION LINE
SL NO DRAWING NAME DRAWING NUMBER

TRANSMISSION LINE DRAWINGS
1) 160 kN DISC INSULATOR UNIT BALL AND WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/01
SOCKET ANT1FOG TYPE
2) 210 kN DISC INSULATOR UNIT BALL AND WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/02
SOCKET ANT1FOG TYPE
3) MIDSPAN COMPRESSION JOINT FOR ACSR WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/03
MOOSE
4) MIDSPAN COMPRESSION JOINT FOR WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/04
G. I. STEEL EARTHWIRE
5) SUSPENSION/TENSION ASSEMBLY FOR WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/05
G.I. STEEL EARTH WIRE
6) STOCK BRIDGE DAMPER FOR ACSR MOOSE WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/06

CONDUCTOR
7) STOCK BRIDGE DAMPER FOR GALVANISED WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/07

STEEL EARTH WIRE (7/3.66mm)
8) PERFORMED ARMOUR RODS WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/08

9) SPACER FOR 220kV DOUBLE CIRCUIT WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/09
TRANSMISSION LINE ACSR MDOSE
10) 220kV OOUBLE CIRCUIT TRANSMISSION LINE WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/10
ANTICLIMBING DEVICE
11) ANTI-THEFT BOLTS & NUTS WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/11
12) PHASE PLATE WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/12
14) TYPICAL SKETCH OF PIPE TYPE EARTHING and WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/14
COUNTER POISE TYPE EARTHING
15) TYPICAL SKETCH OF PIPE TYPE EARTHING and WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/14A
COUNTER POISE TYPE EARTHING
16) DANGER PLATE WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/15
17) 220kv DOUBLE TENSION H/WARE FITTING WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/16

SUITABLE FOR TWIN ACSR MOOSE
CONDUCTOR
18) FLATS FOR EARTHINGS WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/17
19) NUMBER PLATE WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/18
20) PACK WASHER ROUND (FOR 16lll BOLT) WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/19
22) 220kv SINGLE SUSPENSION "PILOT" H/WARE WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/21
FITTING SUITABLE FOR TWIN ACSR MOOSE
CONDUCTOR
23) STEP BOLT WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/22
24) 220 kv DOUBLE TENSION H/WARE FITTING WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/23
SUITABLE FOR TWIN ACSR MOOSE
CONOUCTOR
25) TENTATIVE SHAPE OF TOWER FOOTINGS WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/T/24
LIST OF DRAWINGS-SUBSTATION
SL NO DRAWING NAME DRAWING NUMBER
SUBSTATION DRAWINGS
26) PROPOSED SCHEME OF TRANSMISSION AND WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/01
SUBSTATION NETWORK
27) SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 220/132/33 kV WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/02
DHUNGE SANGU SUBSTATION
28) ELECTRICAL LAYOUT PLAN FOR 132/33 kV WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/03
29) SECTIONAL LAYOUT 132/33 kV OF DHUNGE WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/04
SANGU SUBSTATION
30) PLOT PLAN FOR 220/132/33 kV DHUNGE WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/05
SANGU SUBSTATION
31) TYPICAL DETAIL OF SITE DEVELOPMENT WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/06
WORKS SECTION A-A
WORKS DETAIL X,Y & Z
WORKS SECTION B-B
WORKS SECTION C-C
35) TYPICAL DETAIL OF BOUNDARY WALL/FENCE WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/07
OF SUB-STATION
36) TYPICAL DETAIL OF ROAD CUM RAIL TRACK WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/09
37) TYPICAL DETAIL OF ROAD SECTION WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/08
38) TYPICAL SECTION OF STONE MASONARY WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/10
DRAIN
39) FOUNDATION DETAIL OF 5MVA,132/33 kV WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/11
TRANSFORMER FIRE PROCTION WALL & OIL
COLLECTING PIT
COLLECTING PIT
SECTION A-A
COLLECTING PIT FIRE PROTECTION WALL

COLLECTING PIT CENTRAL OIL COLLECTING PIT
43) TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAIL FOR 132 & 33 WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/12
kV GANTRY FOUNDATION
44) TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAIL OF 145 kV WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/13
CIRCUIT BREAKER
45) TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAIL OF 145 kV (3 WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/14
POLE)ISOLATOR
(SINGLE POLE)ISOLATOR
47) TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAIL OF 145 & 36 kV WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/16
(CT,CVT,PI & LA)
CIRCUIT BREAKER
49) TYPICAL FOUNDATION DETAIL OF 36 kV (3 WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/18
POLE)ISOLATOR
(SINGLE POLE)ISOLATOR
51) TYPICAL SECTION OF STONE MASONARY WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/20
DRAIN BREAST/TOE WALL AND RCC
RETAINING WALL
52) PLAN AND SECTION OF UNDERGROUND WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/21
WATER TANK
53) TYPICAL DETAIL OF CABLE TRENCHES WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/22
54) CONTROL ROOM CUM BUILDING WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/23
ADMINISTRATIVE LAYOUT & SECTIONS
55) TYPICAL PLAN & SECTION DETAILS OF DG SET WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/24
ROOM BUILDING
56) TYPICAL PLAN & DETAIL OF STORE ROOM WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/25
GROUND FLOOR PLAN
57) TYPICAL PLAN & DETAIL OF STORE ROOM WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/25
ELEVATIONS
58) TYPICAL PLAN & DETAIL OF STAFF QUARTER WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/26
GROUND FLOOR PLAN
FIRST FLOOR PLAN
SECOND FLOOR PLAN
SECTION A-A
FRONT ELEVATION
SIDE ELEVATION
64) TYPICAL PLAN & DETAIL GUARD WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/27
65) TYPICAL PLAN & DETAIL CAR PARKING SHED WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/28
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PROPOSED SCHEME OF TRANSMISSION AND SUBSTATION NETWORK FOR 220kV KOSHI CORRIDOR
TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT IN NEPAL
A A
SCOPE OF WORK UNDER PACKAGE KC-3
FUTURE SCOPE
PRESENT SCOPE
UNDER PACKAGE
KC-3
B FOR NEA B
FEEDER-1
FEEDER-2
MAIWA (14 MW)
FOR NEA PURPOSE

TAMOR MEWA (101 MW)
LOWER APSUWA KHOLA (13.6 MW)
SABHA KHOLA-A (8.3 MW)

SABHA KHOLA (25MW)
MEWA KHOLA (50 MW)
LOWER TAMOR (49.5 MW)
MIDDLE TAMOR (57 MW)
APSUWA KHOLA (8.4 MW)

UPPER IRKHUWA (15 MW)
LOWER IRKHUWA (7.0 MW)
LOWER CHIRKHUWA (4.06 MW)

UPPER CHIRKHUWA (5.0 MW)
LANKHUWA KHOLA (5.0 MW)
KASUWA KHOLA (9.2 MW)
SANKHUWA KHOLA-1 (30 MW)
SANKHUWA KHOLA (25 MW)
SABHA KHOLA-B (15.1 MW)
PURPOSE
STATION
STATION
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
400KVA 33/0.4kV
400KVA 33/0.4kV
33kV
33kV
UPPER TAMOR (415 MW)

132kV S/C
132kV D/C
132kV S/C
132kV S/C
POWER
POWER
15 MVA
15 MVA
132kV S/C
132kV S/C
132kV S/C
132kV S/C
(5MVA 4 NOS.
(5MVA 3 NOS.
132kV S/C
132kV S/C
1-PH 132/33kV
1-PH 132/33kV
25/30MVA
25/30MVA
TRANSFORMERS)
TRANSFORMERS)
132kV
132kV
C C
220kV D/C
220kV D/C LOWER ARUN

220kV D/C UPPER ARUN (335 MW)
100 MVA,
100 MVA,
100 MVA,
AUTO
AUTO
POWER
POWER
100 MVA,
100 MVA,
220/132kV,
220/132kV,
TRANSFORMERS)
TRANSFORMERS)
TRANSFORMERS)
220/132kV, AUTO
220/132kV, AUTO
220/132kV, AUTO
(33.33MVA, 4 NOS.
(33.33MVA, 3 NOS.
(33.33MVA, 3 NOS.
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
220kV
TRANSFORMERS)
TRANSFORMERS)
(33.33MVA, 3 NOS.
(33.33MVA, 4 NOS.
220kV
TUMLINGTAR SUBSTATION DHUNGE SANGU SUBSTATION
33kV
D D
220kV
SE
D/
C T
FOR NEA
PURPOSE
P
3 km MOO
OW ER P
3
I
400KVA 33/0.4kV
IT
SE, WIN
ER HAS
STATION
W E
HA H T
TRANSFORMER
T H , 32
E
IN
FOR NEA
R
TAMOR STORAGE (252 MW)
TAMOR KHOLA HEP (20 MW)

TAMOR CHUHAN DANDA (20 MW)
LOWER KHORUNGA (7.5 MW)
UPPER KHORUNGA KHOLA HEP (6.8 MW)

KHORUNGA KHOLA SHEP (4.8 MW)
M
PE R W
TW km
OW
PURPOSE
OO
CT
SE
D/
STATION
TRANSFORMER
400KVA 33/0.4kV
25/30MVA 33kV
E E
33kV D/C MAYA KHOLA HEP (14.9 MW)
BANESHWAR
SUBSTATION
132kV S/C
132kV S/C
UPPER PILUWA HEP (9.6 MW)

220kV S/C
25/30 MVA
DOWN PILUWA HEP (9.5 MW)

132kV
UPPER PILUWA KHOLA -2 (4.72 MW) BASANTAPUR SUBSTATION
25/30MVA
UPPER HEWA (8.5 MW)
AUTO
AUTO
POWER
POWER
100 MVA,
100 MVA,
220/132kV,
220/132kV,
SUPER HEWA (5.0 MW)

TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMERS)
TRANSFORMERS)
F F
(33.33MVA, 4 NOS.
(33.33MVA, 3 NOS.
220kV
CLIENT
NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY (NEA)
CALCULATION FOR POWER TO BE TRANSFERRED FROM PROPOSED CALCULATION FOR POWER TO BE TRANSFERRED FROM PROPOSED
TRANSMISSION LINES UPTO 2025 TRANSMISSION LINES UPTO 2035 PROJECT
AVAILABLE POWER TO BE EXPECTED YEAR AVAILABLE POWER TO BE EXPECTED YEAR
NAME OF LOCAL POWER NAME OF LOCAL POWER
SL. No. POWER TRANSFEEDERED OF SL. No. POWER TRANSFEEDERED OF KOSHI CORRIDOR 220kV TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT
SUBSTATION REQUIREMENT SUBSTATION REQUIREMENT
GENERATION THROUGH COMMISSIONING GENERATION THROUGH COMMISSIONING
G (MW) (MW) G
(MW) LINE (MW) (MW) LINE (MW) CONSULTANT
DHUNGE SANGU DHUNGE SANGU
PER PHASE, 73.6 km

01 DHUNGE SANGU 132/33kV 121 4.25 TO BASANTAPUR 2018/19 TO 2025 01 DHUNGE SANGU 132/33kV 686.5 4.25 TO BASANTAPUR 2025 TO 2035 901, 9TH FLOOR, "KAILASH", 26 K.G. MARG,
116.75 682.25 NEW DELHI-110 001, INDIA
PH: +91-11-23326647,
D/C TOWER WITH QUAD MOOSE

BASANTAPUR BASANTAPUR Fax: +91-11-23324561
TO INARUWA TO INARUWA E-mail: ceelectrical@wapcosindia.com,
02 BASANTAPUR 220/132/33kV 19.1 4.25 2018/19 TO 2025 02 BASANTAPUR 220/132/33kV 311.1 4.25 2025 TO 2035 Website: www.wapcos.gov.in
14.85 306.85
TUMLINGTAR TO TUMLINGTAR TO TITLE
BANESHWAR TO BANESHWAR TO 220kV
03 TUMLINGTAR 132/33kV 505.6 4.25 2018/19 TO 2025 03 TUMLINGTAR 132/33kV 905.6 4.25 2025 TO 2035 PROPOSED SCHEME OF TRANSMISSION AND
BASANTAPUR BASANTAPUR
501.41 901.35 PROPOSED INARUWA 220/132/33kV SUBSTATION SUBSTATION NETWORK
H BANESHWAR TO BANESHWAR TO UNDER HETAUDA-DHALKEBAR-DUHABI H
DATE:
04 BANESWAR 132/33kV 52.22 4.25 BASANTAPUR 04 BANESWAR 132/33kV 52.22 4.25 BASANTAPUR 2025 TO 2035 400kV PROJECT PREPARED : PS CHECKED : MMK SCALE: NTS
2018/19 TO 2025 JULY, 2017
47.97 47.97
TOTAL DRAWN : MCK/KCY APPROVED : DVSNR DWG. No. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/01
TOTAL 697.92 17.00 680.98 1955.42 17.00 1938.42
THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF WAPCOS LIMITED AND IS SUBJECT TO THEIR RECALL.
IT SHALL NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THEIR PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION. SHEET NO. 01 OF 01
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A2 - 594X420
H
A
EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION RATING QTY.
220kV 220kV 220kV
132kV UPPER TAMOR BASANTAPUR SUBSTATION BASANTAPUR SUBSTATION
CIRCUIT BREAKER 152, 352, 552, 752 132kV, 1250A, 31.5kA, 1Sec. 04 (415MW)
FEEDER -1 DOUBLE CIRCUIT LINE FEEDER -2
ISOLATOR WITH MOTOR
189TB, 589TA, 589TB, 789TA, 132kV, 1250A, 31.5kA, 1Sec. 07
OPERATED WITH EARTH
789TB, B189, B289
1
1
SWITCH
ISOLATOR WITH MOTOR
OPERATED WITH 189TA 132kV, 1250A, 31.5kA, 1Sec. 01
DOUBLE EARTH SWITCH
ISOLATOR WITHOUT 189T, 289A, 289B, 389A, 389B,
EARTH SWITCH 489A, 489B, 589T, 689A, 689B, 132kV, 1250A, 31.5kA, 1Sec. 11
789T
SINGLE POLE ISOLATOR 132kV, 1250A, 31.5kA, 1Sec.

589TC, 789TC, 789TD 08
WITH EARTH SWITCH
SINGLE POLE ISOLATOR 589TC, 789TC 132kV, 1250A, 31.5kA, 1Sec. 05
INSTRUMENT 1CT, 3BCT1, 3BCT2 1200-600-300/1-1-1-1-1A 09

TRANSFORMER
5CT, 7CT 600-300/1-1-1-1-1A 06
220kV, 2500A, 40 kA,
132kV 110V 110V 110V 1Sec, MAIN BUS-I
1CVT 03
2
2
3 3 3 3
132kV 110V 110V 110V 06

B1CVT, B2CVT
3 3 3 3 220kV, 2500A, 40 kA,
LIGHTNING ARRESTORS 1LA, 5LA, 7LA, 7LA1 120kV,10kA 10 1Sec, MAIN BUS-II
EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION RATING QTY.

33kV
CIRCUIT BREAKER 852, 952, 1052, 05
33kV, 630A, 25kA, 3Sec.
1152, 1252
ISOLATOR WITH MOTOR 889TB, 989TB, 1089TA, 1089TB,

OPERATED WITH EARTH 1189TA, 1189TB, 1289TA, 1289TB 33kV, 630A, 25kA, 3Sec. 08
SWITCH
SINGLE POLE ISOLATOR
WITH EARTH SWITCH 889TA, 989TA, 989TC 33kV, 630A, 25kA, 3Sec. 08
3
3
889TA, 989TA, 889TC, 33kV, 630A, 25kA, 3Sec. 09
SINGLE POLE ISOLATOR
889TD, 989TD, 989TE
ISOLATOR WITHOUT B389 01
EARTH SWITCH 33kV, 630A, 25kA, 3Sec.
INSTRUMENT 8CT, 9CT, 10CT,

11CT, 12CT 600-300/1-1-1-1A 15
TRANSFORMER
220kV AUX. BUS
5NCT, 89CT, 7NCT, 9NCT 100-50/1-1A 04
33kV 110V 110V 110V 03
1BVT
3 3 3 3
8LA, 9LA, 9LA1, 10LA, 16
LIGHTNING ARRESTORS 30kV,10kA
11LA, 12LA
B Y R B Y R B Y R
100MVA, 100MVA, 100MVA, (33.33MVA,
(33.33MVA, HV HV HV HV HV HV (33.33MVA, HV HV HV (33.33MVA, HV 1 NOS.
TRANSFORMERS:- 3 NOS.
1- PH AUTO
3 NOS. 3 NOS.
1- PH AUTO
1- PH SPARE
AUTO
1- PH AUTO
TRANSFORMERS) TRANSFORMERS) TRANSFORMERS) TRANSFORMER)
EQUIPMENT DESIGNATION RATING QTY. 220/132kV 220/132kV 220/132kV 220/132kV
4
4
LV LV LV LV LV LV LV LV LV LV
POWER TRANSFORMER 5T1, 7T1 5MVA, 132/33kV ONAN 06+01
STATION TRANSFORMER 10T1 33/0.4kV, 400KVA 01
132kV AUX. BUS

5
5
1LA
1CVT
1CT
189TA
B1CVT 189T
152
189TB
132kV,1600A, B189
31.5kA, 1Sec BUS-I
489A 689A 289A 389A
6
6
3BCT1
352
3BCT2
132kV,1600A, 289B
489B 689B 389B
31.5kA, 1Sec BUS-II
B289
589TA 789TA
B2CVT
552 589T 752 789T
589TB 789TB
5CT 7CT
7
7
132kV FEEDER -1 FEEDER -2 132KV 132kV
132kV AUX. BUS MIDDLE TAMOR LOWER MEWA KHOLA
132kV
(57MW) TAMOR MEWA TAMOR (50MW)
(101 MW) (49.5MW)
589TC 789TC
789TD DOUBLE CIRCUIT LINE
5LA 7LA 7LA1
R Y B HV SIDE NEUTRAL BUSES R Y B
5NCT
889TD 989TE 7NCT
7T1 TO 889TD
5T1 HV HV HV 15MVA, HV HV HV HV BY CABLE
15MVA, CABLES FROM
HV & LV (5MVA, 3 NOS.
(5MVA, 3 NOS. NETURAL OF 1- PH (5MVA, 1 NOS. 1- PH
1- PH TRANS.) SPARE TRNS. TRANSFORMERS) SPARE TRANSFORMERS)
132/33kV TO 889TC
132/33kV LV BY CABLE 132/33kV
LV LV LV 889TC LV LV LV 989TD
8LA LV SIDE NEUTRAL BUSES 9LA 9LA1
8NCT 9NCT
889TA 989TA
889T 989T 989TC
8
33kV AUX. BUS
LEGENDS:-
S.NO. SYMBOL DESCRIPTION 8CT 9CT
1. CIRCUIT BREAKER 852 952
989TB
889TB
ISOLATOR WITH DOUBLE
2.
EARTH SWITCH 33kV, 1250A, 25kA,
3Sec BUS BAR
B389
ISOLATOR WITH ONE 1089TA 1189TA 1289TA
3. EARTH SWITCH
1052 1152 1252 1BVT
9
4. ISOLATOR WITHOUT
EARTH SWITCH 10CT 11CT 12CT FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY
CLIENT
5. CURRENT TRANSFORMER 1189TB 1289TB
1089TB NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY (NEA)
PROJECT
6. LIGHTING ARRESTER 10LA 11LA 12LA
10T1
KOSHI CORRIDOR 220kV TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT
400KVA 33/0.4kV
CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE STATION FEEDER 1 FOR NEA CONSULTANT
7. TRANSFORMER 901, 9TH FLOOR, "KAILASH", 26 K.G.
TRANSFORMER MARG, NEW DELHI-110 001, INDIA
PH: +91-11-23326647,
33kV Fax: +91-11-23324561
MAIWA E-mail: ceelectrical@wapcosindia.com,
(14MW) Website: www.wapcos.gov.in
8. VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
10
10
TITLE
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM OF
220/132/33kV DHUNGE SANGU SUBSTATION
DATE:
PREPARED : PS CHECKED : MMK SCALE: NTS
JULY, 2017
DRAWN : MCK/KCY APPROVED : DVSNR DWG. No. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/02
THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF WAPCOS LIMITED AND IS SUBJECT TO THEIR RECALL.
A0 - 1189X841
D
H
A
C
E
F
H
A
136000
220kV, D/C FROM

UPPER TAMOR (415MW)
126000
117000
9000 27000 9000 36000 27000 9000
220kV 220kV
TO BASANTAPUR TO BASANTAPUR
1
1
INCOMER - 1 INCOMER - 2 SUBSTATION SUBSTATION
R Y B CIRCUIT - 1 CIRCUIT - 2
R Y B R Y
18000
B
R Y B R Y B
36500
2
2
9500
4500
4500
43750
43750
6800
3
3
9000
9450
18000(TYP.)
18000
188750
36000
36500
36500
4
4
20000
220kV AUX. BUS

13500
30000
18000
38100
5
5
20600
(33.33MVA,
24600
100MVA, (33.33MVA, 100MVA, (33.33MVA, 100MVA, (33.33MVA,

3 NOS.1- PH 3 NOS.1- PH 3 NOS.1- PH 1 NOS. 1- PH SPARE
AUTO TRANSFORMERS) AUTO TRANSFORMERS) AUTO TRANSFORMERS) AUTO TRANSFORMER)
220/132kV 220/132kV 220/132kV 220/132kV
CL OF POWER TRNSFORMER
LEGEND:-
17900
LA LIGHTNING ARRESTOR
CB CIRCUIT BREAKER
CL OF GANTRY
13900
CT CURRENT TRANSFORMER
6
6
11000 12000 (TYP.)
CVT/VT CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER

15000
12000
132kV AUX. BUS PI POST INSULATOR
ISOL. ISOLATOR
CL OF GANTRY
GT GANTRY TOWER
3500
D
3000 2500
CL OF LA
CSS CABLE SUPPORT STRUCTURE
14500
CL OF CVT
3 3
DET DEAD END TOWER
4500
CL OF CT & INS. STRING

29500
CL OF ISOL.
3500
1 1 GS GANTRY STRUCTURE
CL OF CB
3500
CL OF GANTRY &
DOUBLE ISOL. A C SECTION 1-1
6000
7
7
SECTION 2-2
3000
132kV
CL OF BUS-I MAIN
4
2500 3000
BUS-I 4 SECTION 3-3

CL OF ISOL.
CL OF CVT
CL OF ISOL.
SECTION 4-4
5250
CL OF CT
21500
CL OF CB
5250
CL OF CT
CL OF ISOL.
2500
132kV NOTES:-
6000
CL OF BUS-II MAIN
BUS-II
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND ELEVATIONS ARE IN METERS
3 3 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
D 2. THIS DRAWING SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE FOLLOWING
C
9500
CL OF CT DRAWINGS.
8
(i) DWG NO. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/03- SINGLE LINE

CL OF GANTRY &
DOUBLE ISOL. DIAGRAM FOR 220/132/33kV SUBSTATION IN DHUNGE SANGU.
3000
29250
CL OF CB (ii) DWG NO.- WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/02- PLOT PLAN

2500 3000
220/132/33kV DHUNGE SANGU SUBSTATION.

134500
CL OF ISOL.
3. ALL DIMENSION & DETAILS ARE TENTATIVE AND PURELY FOR TENDER
CL OF PI
4 4 B PURPOSE ONLY.
4000
4. INTERNAL ROADS, ROAD-CUM-RAIL TRACK, SUBSTATION BOUNDARY &

CL OF 132kV AUX. BUS
TERRACE LEVELS OF VARIOUS FACILITIES OF SUB-STATION REFER
2500
CL OF ISOL. ELECTRICAL LAYOUT PLAN FOR 132/33kV DHUNGE SANGU SUBSTATION

3500
CL OF GANTRY
CL OF ISOL.
DRAWING NO - WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/02.
5. THE LAYOUT OF SUBSTATION SHALL BE DEVELOPED BY SUCCESSFUL
3500 2000 3000
CL OF LA BIDDER AFTER AWARD OF WORK.

CL OF 132kV NEUTRAL BUS 6. SUCCESSFUL BIDDER SHALL BE REQUIRED TO DEVELOP THE LAYOUT OF
3500
CL OF POWER
THE WHOLE SUBSTATION COVERING PRESENT SCOPE AS WELL AS
FUTURE SCOPE AS SHOWN IN NETWORK DIAGRAM-
3500
TRANSFORMER
WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/01
27750
2000 2500 2500
CLOF ROAD
9
9
2000
2000
CL OF 33kV NEUTRAL BUS

CL OF CSS
FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY
FUTURE SCOPE
1500
2000
CL OF LA B
CL OF ISOL. CLIENT
3000 2500 3000
CL OF GANTRY
CL OF ISOL.
2 2 NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY (NEA)
CL OF 33kV AUX. BUS
1000
PROJECT
CL OF GANTRY
CL OF ISOL.
KOSHI CORRIDOR 220kV TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT
17000
3 3
2000
1500
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF CT
CL OF BPI
CL OF VT
CL OF CB
E
2000
2000
CL OF ISOL. CONSULTANT
901, 9TH FLOOR, "KAILASH", 26 K.G.
CL OF 33kV BUS MARG, NEW DELHI-110 001, INDIA
1500 3000
20500
33kV BUS
2
PH: +91-11-23326647,
2500
CL OF ISOL. Fax: +91-11-23324561

CL OF ISOL. A 4000
E-mail: ceelectrical@wapcosindia.com,
CL OF CB CL OF CB
Website: www.wapcos.gov.in
1500
2000
14500
14500
CL OF CT CL OF CT
10
10
CLOF ISOL. CL OF ISOL. TITLE

4000 1500
CL OF LA 4 4 CL OF LA ELECTRICAL LAYOUT PLAN FOR 132/33kV

2000
CL OF STATION
& GANTRY
4 4 4 4 DHUNGE SANGU SUBSTATION
TRANSFORMER FUTURE DATE:
SCOPE PREPARED : PS CHECKED : MMK SCALE: NTS
33kV JULY, 2017
FEEDER 1 FOR NEA MAIWA
PURPOSE (14MW)
E THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF WAPCOS LIMITED AND IS SUBJECT TO THEIR RECALL.
SHEET NO. 01 OF 01
IT SHALL NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THEIR PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION.
A0 - 1189X841
D
H
A
C
E
F
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
SHIELD WIRE
SHIELD WIRE
A A
132kV BUS-I 132kV BUS-II
R Y B 132kV
R Y B AUX. BUS
33kV 33kV BUS
AUX. BUS R Y B
13000 (TYP.)
B B
8000
7500
5500
5000
5000
3800
3000 3000 2500 5250 5250 2500 3000 3000 5000 4500 3000 3000 2500 4000 2500 1750 1750 3000 2000 3500 6000 2500 2000 2000 1500 1500 1500 1500 2500 3000 1500 2000 2000 1500 1500
37000 16750 10250 17000 1000 16500
97500
C C
CL OF BUS-I
CL OF ISOL.
& OF ISOL.
CL OF CB
CL OF GANTRY
CL OF BUS-II
CL OF GANTRY
CL OF PI
CL OF ISOL.
CLL OF CT
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF PI
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF GANTRY
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF LA
CL OF NET. BUS
CL OF TRF.
CL OF ROAD
CL OF LA
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF GANTRY
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF BUS
CL OF GANTRY
CL OF CT
CL OF CB
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF BUS
CL OF CSS
CL OF NET. BUS
CL OF AUX. BUS
SECTION-A-A
(TRANSFORMER BAY)
132kV BUS-I 132kV BUS-II
D R Y B R Y B D
7500
5000
2500 1750 750 4750 2000 1500 4000 1500 2500 4500 2000 1500 4500 2500 3000 3000 2500 2500 2500 3000 2500 2500 3000 3000
14500 21000 27000
35500
E E
NOTES:-
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND ELEVATIONS
CL OF BUS-I
CL OF CT
CL OF CB
CL OF CT
CL OF BUS-II
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF TRF.
CL OF LA
CL OF ROAD
ARE IN METERS UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
CL OF BUS
CL OF BUS
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF GANTRY
CL OF PI
CL OF NET.BUS
CL OF LA
CL OF CSS
CL OF NET. BUS
SECTION-C-C
2. FOR NOTES REFER DWG NO:
SECTION-B-B WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/03- ELECTRICAL LAYOUT
(SPARE TRNSFORMER BAY) (BUS COUPLER BAY)
PLAN FOR 132/33kV DHUNGE SANGU SUBSTATION.
SHIELD WIRE 3. THE DIMENSIONS INDICATED ARE TENTATIVE & TO BE
DECIDED DURING DETAILED ENGINEERING BY
F CONTRACTOR. F
FROM BASANTAPUR ONLY FOR TENDER PURPOSE
CLIENT
132kV BUS-I 132kV BUS-II FOR NEA
R Y B R Y B PURPOSE PROJECT
33kV BUS
13000
B Y R KOSHI CORRIDOR 220kV TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT
13000
G G
CONSULTANT
8000
7500
5500
901, 9TH FLOOR, "KAILASH", 26 K.G. MARG,
NEW DELHI-110 001, INDIA
5000
3800
PH: +91-11-23326647,
Fax: +91-11-23324561
E-mail: ceelectrical@wapcosindia.com,
1500 1500 1500 2500 1500 2000 1500 Website: www.wapcos.gov.in
2500 3000 4500 3500 3500 4500 3000 3000 2500 5250 5250 2500 3000 3000 12000
17000 32000
TITLE
49000
SECTIONAL LAYOUT OF 132/33kV
& LA
H DATE: H
CL OF CB
L
CL OF BUS
CL OF CT
CL OF ISOL.
C OF GANTRY
CL OF ISOL.
PREPARED : PS CHECKED : MMK SCALE: NTS
JULY, 2017
CL OF CB
CL OF BUS-II
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF BUS-I
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF LA
CL OF CVT
CL OF CT
CL OF ISOL.
CL OF GANTRY
L
CL OF PI
C OF GANTRY
SECTION-E-E
SECTION-D-D DRAWN : MCK/KCY APPROVED : DVSNR DWG. No. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/04
(33 kV LINE BAY)
(132 kV LINE BAY) THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF WAPCOS LIMITED AND IS SUBJECT TO THEIR RECALL.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A2 - 594X420
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3027200 3027200
558500
557250
A A
3027150
3027100
B B
3027050
LEGENDS:
Stone Masonary Toe Wall
(Ht: Varies, Max.Ht 5.0m)
SUB STATION
A PLOT BOUNDARY
90
C C
00
WATER STREAM
IN
0
P
CO
3027000 36
50
M
FOOT TRAIL
27
00
0
ER
(41 D/
-1
A
ELECTRIC POLE
U 5M FR
R T 22
OR
PE W) OM
90
M 0kV,
00
0 HOUSE
75
43
IN
11
CO
70
00
M
36
ER
00
SHALLOTREE
0
-1
50
37
18
0
50
O
3026950 36
BAMBOO TREE
2
C IR
27
0
3.75M WIDE ROAD

T SUB CU
00
0
50
2 SA TIO
13
V UR
0 k NTP N
BA STA IT-1
D 5.0M WIDE ROAD D
0
60
90
20 TS-13
00
EXISTING EARTHEN ROAD
36
00
0
C
0
90
17
S IR
T
0 k TP
TO UBS CU
V UR
22 SAN ION
0
15
00
BA TA IT-2
18
18
00
00
0
3026900
0(T
YP
)
TS-4
TS-6
0
75
43
00
NOTES:-
75
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND ELEVATIONS, CONTOUR & GRID LINES ARE IN
METERS UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE .
2. THIS DRAWING SHALL BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS:-
18
00
0
3026850 · DWG NO. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC3/03- SINGLE LINE
E E
3.75M WIDE DIAGRAM FOR 220/132/33kV SUBSTATION IN DHUNGE SANGU
TS-2 · DWG NO. WAP/POWER/NEPAL/KOSHI/KC/04- ELECTRICAL LAYOUT PLAN FOR
ROAD
132/33kV DHUNGE SANGU SUBSTATION
40
01
3
3. ALL DIMENSION, LEVELS & LOCATION OF BUILDING ARE TENTATIVE & FOR TENDER
STREAM
WATER
PURPOSE ONLY.
Stone Masonary 4. THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER SHALL CARRYOUT TOPOGRAPHICAL SURVEY OF S/S SITE &
32
PREPARE TOPOGRAPHICAL MAP ON 1:1000 SCALE WITH 1.0m CONTOUR INTERVAL &
86
Breast Wall
9
03
(Height varies , FINALIZE THE SIZE & LEVELES OF TERRACES TO BE CREATED FOR LOCATING VARIOUS
49
Foot trail
3 FACILITIES OF S/S.
A .7
C Max Ht: 5.0m)
C E 5m 3. THE LAND FOR APPROACH ROAD FROM EXISTING EARTHEN ROAD TO S/S SITE IS YET TO BE
SS W
25
3026800
06
ACQUIRED. IN CASE LAND FOR SAID PURPOSE COULD NOT BE ACQUIRED, THE APPROACH
7
RO IDE
AD ROAD & COMPLETE LAYOUT OF S/S SHALL BE ACCOMMODATED WITHIN THE ACQUIRED
LAND.
9
95
C
18
76
4. 220kV S/S IS NOT IN THE SCOPE OF THIS BID. HOWEVER, SITE DEVELOPMENT WORK FOR
95
28
27
ULTIMATE STAGE OF S/S COVERING 220kV, 132kV & 33kV S/S IS IN THE SCOPE OF THIS BID.
2
F F
F
C
5
HE
S/ M
32
P
Stone Masonary Breast Wall
25
kV RO E
57
7
57
8
61
TA (57
RCC
64
(Height varies , Max Ht: 5.0m)
LI M I M M W
13 NE D DL OR )
Retaining Wall
3026750 (5.0 M High)
3.75M WIDE
ROAD
HE
C
P(
V O
1
S/ M
2 FR A
8
LI M 01
12
66
22
36
2
87
13 NE EW MW
31
)
15
F
C
68
EP
Existing Earthen Road
51
S/ M
(
kV RO R
TA 49.
k
9
LI LO M 5M
98
16
13 NE WE OR W)
S/
R
C
HE
FOR TENDER PURPOSE ONLY
V OM
P
2 F A
KH (50
3026700 5M WIDE
A
LI M O L M W
13 NE EW A )
ROAD CLIENT
7
71
34
G G
7
69
75
Existing
u 5M WIDE Earthen Road PROJECT
ang C
oS ROAD
yt KOSHI CORRIDOR 220kV TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT
Wa
Existing
Earthen Road CONSULTANT
3026650 901, 9TH FLOOR, "KAILASH", 26 K.G.
MARG, NEW DELHI-110 001, INDIA
PH: +91-11-23326647,
Fax: +91-11-23324561
B E-mail: ceelectrical@wapcosindia.com,
Way to Dovan Website: www.wapcos.gov.in
TITLE
Foot trail PLOT PLAN FOR 220/132/33kV
H DHUNGE SANGU SUBSTATION H
3026600
PREPARED : PS CHECKED : MMK DATE:
SCALE: NTS
JUNE, 2017
558500
558550
558600
558650
558700
558750
558800
558850
558950
559000
559050
559100
559150
559200
558900
3026550 THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF WAPCOS LIMITED AND IS SUBJECT TO THEIR RECALL.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 A1 - 841X594
Reference Coordinate for Dhungesangu Substation
Station Easting Northing Elevation Remarks

1 558995 3026886 1341
2 558914.67 3026772.435 1348.634
3 558801.1 3026838.513 1337.003

Nea Sub-Station Nepal

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nea Sub-Station Nepal

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NEPAL ELECTRICITY AUTHORITY

(An Undertaking of Government of Nepal)

KOSHI CORRIDOR 220 kV TRANSMISSION LINE PROJECT

Procurement of Plant Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and

Single-Stage, Two-Envelope Bidding Procedure

Section 6- Employer’s Requirement

Part II-Section 6: Employer’s Requirements

PART II-SECTION 6: EMPLOYER’S REQUIREMENTS

2. Section-II General Technical Requirement

3. Section-III Specific Technical Requirement

4. Section-IV Technical Specifications

Part II-Section 6 Contents Page 1 of 2

Chapter-3 Cadastral Survey, Check Survey, Soil Investigation,

Section IV-B Technical Specifications for Substations

Part II-Section 6 Contents Page 2 of 2

Chapter-19 Erection, Testing And Commissioning of Electrical

5. Section V Guaranteed Technical Particulars

Part II-Section 6 Contents Page 3 of 2

Part II-Section 6: Employer’s Requirements

Section-I General Information and Scope

GENERAL INFORMATION AND SCOPE

S.NO DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.

GENERAL INFORMATION AND SCOPE

(iv) 220/132/33 kV Sub-station at Tumlingtar.

(v) 220/33 kV Sub-station at Baneshwar.

(vi) 220/132/33 kV Sub-station at Dhungesangu.

(vii) 220/132/33 kV Sub-station at Basantapur.

(viii) 2 Nos. of 220 kV Line Bays at Inaruwa Substation.

Sl.No. Name of Substation Power from IPP's to be evacuated

1.1. SCOPE OF WORK

1.1.1 BASANTAPUR (TERHATHUM DISTRICT) - DHUNGE SANGU (TAPLEJUNG DISTRICT) 220 KV

A. Approximate Transmission line length from Basantapur- Dhunge Sangu is 35 km.

(i) Approximate Transmission line length from Basantapur – Dhunge Sangu is

requiring during different stage of the project implementation as per direction of

f) Check survey, Cadastral Survey and Tree Enumeration in the forest,

the rate/s quoted by the bidder

a) For transmission line with Bundle Conductor per phase:

appropriate tools / equipments / machinery to ensure that the stringing operation is

1.1.2 132/33 KV SUBSTATION IN DHUNGE SANGU

B. Geo-technical Investigation at the substation site for determining engineering properties

D. Supply of all electrical equipment including Power Transformers, Circuit Breakers,

F. Construction of Foundations for Gantry towers, Equipment supporting structures,

G. Construction of Control Room-cum-Administrative Building with provision for office

M. Erection of all Gantry and equipment&cable supporting structures etc.;

R. Design, Supply, Installation of Communication system consisting of optical line terminal

S. Supply and Installation of fire protection System.

W. Landscaping of whole substation area within boundary wall to give a pleasant

i. Bus bar Scheme: Double bus with bypass isolator.

iii. 1 No. of Bus Coupler Bay.

v. 7 Nos. (6 Nos. +1 No. Spare) of 5 MVA, 132/33kV Single phase Power

i. Bus bar scheme: Single Bus.

iii. 1No. of 33 kV Line Bay for NEA use.

iv. 1 Nos. of 33 kV outgoing feeders.

v. 1 No. of 33 kV Station transformer bay.

vi. 1No. 400 KVA, 33/0.4kV Three Phase Station Transformer.

C. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system and Substation

D. Communication system consisting of optical line terminal equipment (OLTE) of

E. Foundations for gantries, equipment supporting structures, transformers and

1.3. ACCESS AND GENERAL INFORMATION

1.3.1. DETAILS OF SUBSTATION SITE:

A. Location and Topography

1.3.2. DETAILS OF TRANSMISSION LINE:

A. Routes and Terrain